2009-2010 Honda Pilot Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
General Information
i How to Use This Manual

This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference
system.
Specifications
Maintenance
Each section includes:

1. A table of contents, or an exploded v i e w index showing:
Parts d i s a s s e m b l y s e q u e n c e .
Êngine Electrical
Bolt torques and thread sizes.

Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
Engine Mechanical
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
Engine Cooling
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, w e have provided safety
m e s s a g e s , and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. Y o u must use
your own good judgment.
Fuel and Emissions

" Transaxie
Y o u will find important safety information in a variety of forms

including:
*Steering
Safety Labels on the vehicle.

Safety M e s s a g e s preceded by a safety alert symbol fa and
one of three signal w o r d s , D A N G E R , W A R N I N G , or C A U T I O N .
T h e s e signal w o r d s m e a n :
.
Y o u W I L L be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
^WARNING I
Y o u C A N be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
i
A CAUTION I
Y o u C A N be H U R T if you don't follow

instructions.
ADANGER I
Instructions
Suspension! Including
TPMS)
' BrakesOnciuding VSA
how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. W e reserve
the right to make c h a n g e s at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
s y s t e m , or transmitted, in any form by any m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. T h i s includes text,
figures, and tables.
A s you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOTICE | s y m b o l . The purpose of this m e s s a g e is to
help prevent d a m a g e to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition 04/2009
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
*Heoiiny, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
*Bociy blectrical
"Audio., Navigation,, and
T?-!err id tics
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

Service Publication Office
t e s t r a i n t s
As sections with * include S R S components;

special precautions are required when servicing.
>;
marked sections are not included in this
l l l l l l l l manual, see Volume 2.
2009-10 Pilot Vol.1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

The Pilot SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof,
and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and side curtain airbags.
Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially w h e n the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
General Information
General Information
C h a s s i s and Paint Codes
'09 Model
'10 Model
Identification Number Locations
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Lift and Support Points
Towing
Parts Marking
Precautions for Variable Torque Management 4WD
(VTM-4) S y s t e m
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-11
1-11
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - '09 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
5 F N Y F 4 8 2 * 9 B 000001
J35Z4
rrrrrrri
a
b c def g h
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

5FN: Honda Manufacturing of Alabama, L L C
Honda multipurpose passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
YF3: Pilot(2WD)/J35Z4
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
2:LX
4: E X
5: E X - L
6: E X - L with Rear Entertainment System
8: TOURING
9: TOURING with Rear Entertainment System
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
9: '09
g. Factory Code
B: Lincoln Factory in Alabama
h. Serial Number
000001-: U S A models

and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification
and Paint Code Label.
and Canadian Motor Vehicle
PAINT CODE
a
a. Engine Type
J35Z4: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Variable Cylinder
Management Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
PN4A
- 6000001
a
a.
b.
Transmission Type
PN3A: 5-speed Automatic(4WD)
Serial Number
Paint Code
500001 - : Canada models
1-2
- 1000001
INTERIOR COLOR CODE
Code
Color
B-552P
NH-578
NH-689M
NH-705M
NH-707
NH-741M
R-529P
YR-573M
Bali Blue Pearl

Taffeta White
Billet Silver Metallic
Nimbus Gray Metallic
Formal Black II
Sterling Gray Metallic
Dark Cherry Pearl
Mocha Metallic
USA
models
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Canada
models
O
o
o
o
o
Chassis and Paint Codes - '10 Model

Engine Number
5 F N Y F 4 H 2 * A B 000001
J35Z4
rrrrrrri
a
c de f g h
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

5FN: Honda Manufacturing of Alabama, LLC
Honda multipurpose passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
H: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
2: LX
4: EX
5: EX-L
6: EX-L with Rear Entertainment System
8: TOURING
9: TOURING with Rear Entertainment System
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
A: '10
g. Factory Code
B: Lincoln Factory in Alabama
h. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : USA models
500001 : Canada models
-2000001
a. Engine Type
J35Z4: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Variable Cylinder
Management Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
PN4A
- 7000001
a
a.
b.
b
Transmission Type
Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-552P
NH-578
NH-700M
NH-731P
NH-737M
R-529P
YR-573M
Color
Bali Blue Pearl
Taffeta White
Alabaster Silver
Metallic
Crystal Black Pearl
Polished Metal
Metallic
Dark Cherry Pearl
Mocha Metallic
USA
models
Canada
models
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
and Canadian Motor Vehicle

PAINT CODE
INTERIOR COLOR CODE
1-3
General Information
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Transmission Number
Engine Number
1-4
Engine Number
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Front Passenger's Compartment:
(cont'd)
1-5
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
Doorjamb Area:
09 Model
SR<3 WARNING
WARNlNij
l/M TESTING
INFORMATION
(
SERVICE INFORMATION
and ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION
Located on driver's and
passenger's doorjamb
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
RADIATOR CAP
DANGER
BATTERY
DANGER
10 Model
S E R V I C E INFORMATION
and ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
1-6
RADIATOR C A P
DANGER
l/M TESTING
INFORMATION
(4WD)
BATTERY
DANGER
TIRE INFORMATION
Under-hood Emission Control Label

Test Group and Evaporative Family
Emission Group Identification
Test Group:
Example:
A HNX T 03.7
09 Model
W19
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
a b
C O N F O R M S T O R E G U L A T I O N S : 2009MY
U.S.
EPA: TZ85LOT2
0 8 0 : CA OBO II
FUEL: GASOLINE
ARB: LEV II ULEV LDT2
OBO: CA OBO II
FUEL: GASOLINE
2WU-TWC, TWC. 2 A / F S E N S O R , 2 H 0 2 S . E GR, SFI
HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
(EE)
RNO-aoo
10 Model
9HNXT03.7H29
9HNXR01671EA
3.51
c d
a. Model Year
9: '09
A: '10
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
T: LDT
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
H29: '09
W19: '10
Evaporative Family:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
(5~K)
N-A10
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS : 2010MY

US Itk Un LOTJ OtO: CA OIO ll
FUEL: GASOLINE
Ml LEV N ULEV LBTJ OID CA 080 II
FUEL. SASOUNE
2WU-TWC. TWC. 2A/F SENSOR. 2H02S. EGR. SFI
A HNX R 0167
1EA
INFORMATION
U5ADE0 im T1ST1NQ OF THIS VEHtCU MUST BE CONDUCTED ON A FOUR-WHEEL OHfVE SPECS
09 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2009MY
a b
c d
a. Model Year
9: '09
A: '10
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
10 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2010MY
1-7
General Information
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components
such as the suspension or the fuel tank f r o m the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed f r o m
the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change,
causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
Vehicle Lift
1. Position the lift blocks (A), under the vehicle's front
support points (B) and rear support points (C).
Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift
lever in P.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket
(A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking
bracket on the jack lift platform (C) and jack up the
vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it.
A
2. Raise the lift a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle gently

to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the vehicle
support points for solid contact w i t h the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points as for a vehicle lift. Always use safety
stands w h e n working on or under any vehicle that is
supported only by a jack.
1-8
4. Position the safety stands under the support points

and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
D
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be t o w e d , call a professional
towing service. Never t o w the vehicle behind another
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Rear:
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment The operator loads the
vehicle on the back of a flat-bed t o w truck. This is the
best way of transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate the flat-bed t o w truck equipment, the
vehicle is equipped with a detachable front t o w i n g hook
(A), front tie d o w n hook slots (B), a rear towing hook (C),
and rear tie d o w n hook slots (D).
The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the
vehicle onto the flat-bed t o w truck, and the tie d o w n
hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the
flat-bed t o w truck.
Front:
(cont'd)
1-9
General Information
Towing (cont'd)
Front Towing Hook Installation
The detachable front towing hook is for t o w i n g very
short disttances, such as freeing the car. The hook
attaches to the anchor under the front bumper.
Wheel Lift Equipment The t o w truck uses t w o pivoting

arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lifts them
off the ground. The other t w o wheels remain on the
ground. Never tow the vehicle with wheel lift
equipment.
INOT1CE1
To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the t o w i n g hook
for straight flat ground t o w i n g only. Do not t o w on an
angle.
Do not use the detachable t o w hook as a tie d o w n for
the vehicle on the flat-bed t o w truck. Use the tie d o w n
hook slots provided.
1. Remove the cover (A) f r o m the splash shield.
Sling-type Equipment The t o w truck uses metal cables

w i t h hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of
the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that end of
the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and
body can be seriously damaged if this method of t o w i n g
is attempted. This method of towing the vehicle is
unacceptable.
The only recommended way of t o w i n g the vehicle is on
a flat-bed t o w truck.
Towing the 4WD Pilot with only t w o wheels on the
ground will damage part of the VTM-4 system.
The 2WD Pilot may also be towed with the front wheels
off the ground, or with all four wheels on the ground.
If the 2WD Pilot cannot be transported by a flat-bed t o w
truck, it should be towed with the front wheels off the
ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be t o w e d
w i t h the front wheels on the ground, or if the vehicle is
t o w e d w i t h all four wheels on the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
2. Remove the detachable t o w i n g hook f r o m the tool kit

in the cargo floor box.
3. Screw the detachable t o w i n g hook (B), and tighten it
securely by hand.
. Shift to D, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to t o w the vehicle no father than 50 miles (80
km), and keep the vehicle speed below 35mph (55 km/h).
I NOTICE I
Improper t o w i n g preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine,
the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed t o w
truck.
Trying to lift or t o w the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
1-10
Parts Marking
Precautions for Variable Torque

Management 4WD (VTM-4) System
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are

marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These
labels should not be removed. The original engine or
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the
replacement engine or transmission.
This vehicle is equipped with the Variable Torque

Management 4WD (VTM-4) system. The VTM-4
system distributes driving torque between the front and
rear wheels w h e n accelerating and when wheel spin
occurs.
The VTM-4 system does not have a manual switch to
disable the 4WD system. Whenever service work
requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the
engine, always lift and support the vehicle so all four
wheels are off the ground.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels

during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the
part.
1-11
spec
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
2-2
Design Specifications
2-18
Body Specifications
2-21

Engine Electrical
Item
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Ignition timing
Drive belt
Alternator
Starter
Measurement
Rated voltage
Firing order
Type
Gap
At idle Check the red mark
Tension
Coil (rotor) resistance
Slip ring O.D.
Brush length
Brush spring tension
Output
Commutator mica depth
Commutator runout
Commutator O.D.
Brush length
Brush spring tension
Qualification
In N o r P
At 68 F (20 C)
Standard or New
12V
1-4-2-5-3-6
ILZKR7B-11
1.0-1.1 m m (0.039-0.043 in)
10 2 B T D C
Auto tensioner
2.5 kO
14.4 m m (0.57 in)
10.5 m m (0.41 in)
3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.73 Ibf)
1.8 kW
0.50-0.90 m m (0.020-0.035 in)
0.02 m m (0.001 in) max.
28.9-29.0 m m (1.138-1.142 in)
15.0-16.0 m m (0.59-0.63 in)
22.3-27.3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5 . 0 0 6.13 Ibf)
Service Limit
14.0 m m (0.55 in)

1.5 m m (0.06 in)
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

0.05 m m (0.002 in)
28.0 mm (1.10 in)
9.0 m m (0.35 in)
Engine Assembly
Item
Compression
Measurement
Pressure (Check the engine with the
starter cranking)
Qualification
Minimum
Maximum
variation
Standard or New
930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm ,135 psi)
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi)
2
Service Limit
Cylinder Head
Item
Head
Camshaft
Valve
Measurement
Warpage
Height
End play
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance
Total runout
Cam lobe height
Clearance (cold)
Stem O.D.
Stem-to-guide clearance subtract the
O.D. of the valve stem
Valve seat
Width
Stem installed height
Valve spring
2-2
Free length
Standard or New
Qualification
Intake (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Intake (Front,
No.5,6
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (Front,
No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
120.95-121.05 m m (4.762-4.766 in)

0.05-0.20 m m (0.002-0.008 in)
0.050-0.089 m m (0.0020-0.0035 in)
0.03 m m (0.001 in) max.
35.162 m m (1.3843 in)
Service Limit
0.05 m m (0.002 in)
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

0.15 mm (0.006 in)
0.04 mm (0.002 in)
35.155 m m (1.3841 in)
36.537 m m (1.4385 in)
36.512 m m (1.4375 in)
0.20-0.24 m m (0.008-0.009 in)

0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)
5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in)
5.450-5.460 m m (0.2146-0.2150 in)
0.020-0.045 m m (0.0008-0.0018 in)
0.055-0.080 m m (0.0022-0.0031 in)
1.25-1.55 m m (0.049-0.061 in)
1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in)
46.75-47.55 mm (1 841-1.872 in)
46.68-47.48 m m (1 838-1.869 in)
51.48 mm (2.027 in)
51.05 m m (2.010 in)
5.455 mm (0.2148 in)

5.420 mm (0.2134 in)
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
0.11 mm (0.004 in)
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
47.80 mm (1.882 in)
47.73 m m (1.879 in)
specs
Cylinder Head (cont'd)
item
Valve guide
Measurement
I.D.
Installed height
Rocker arm
Arm-to-shaft clearance
Qualification
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Intake (No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)
Standard or New
5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in)
5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in)
21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in)
20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in)
0.015-0.046 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in)
Service Limit
5.55 mm (0.219 in)
5.55 mm (0.219 in)
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)
0.018-0.056 mm (0.0007-0.0022 in)
0.056 mm (0.0022 in)
0.015-0.046 m m (0.0006-0.0018 in)
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)
0.018-0.047 mm (0.0007-0.0019 in)
0.047 mm (0.0019 in)
Qualification
Standard or New
0.07 mm (0.003 in) max.
89.000-89.015 mm (3.5039-3.5045
in)
Service Limit
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
89.065 mm (3.5065
in)
0.05 mm (0.002 in)
0.25 mm (0.010 in)
88.965 mm (3.5026
in)
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
1.27 mm (0.050 in)
1.25 mm (0.049 in)
2.85 mm (0.112 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in)
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
0.60 mm (0.024 in)
0.70 mm (0.028 in)
0.80 mm (0.031 in)
21.954 mm (0.8643
in)
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Engine Block
Item
Block
Piston
Piston ring
Measurement
Warpage of deck
Bore diameter
Bore taper
Reboring limit
Skirt O.D. at 16.0 m m (0.63 in) from
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder
Ring groove width
Ring-to-groove clearance
Ring end gap
Piston pin
O.D.
Pin-to-piston clearance
Connecting rod
Crankshaft
Pin-to-rod clearance
Small-end bore diameter
Large-end bore diameter
End play installed on crankshaft
Main journal diameter
Rod journal diameter
Crankshaft
bearing
Rod/main journal taper

Rod/main journal out-of-round
End play
Runout
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance
Rod bearing clearance
Top
Second
Oil
Top
Second
Top
Second
Oil
88.975-88.985 mm (3.5029-3.5033
in)
0.015-0.040 mm (0.0006-0.0016 in)
1.240-1.250 mm (0.0488-0.0492 in)
1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in)
2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in)
0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in)
0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in)
0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in)
0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in)
0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in)
21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648
in)
-0.0050-0.0010 mm (-0.000200.00004 in)
0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in)
21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652
in)
58.0 mm (2.28 in)
0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in)
71.976-72.000 mm (2.8337-2.8346
in)
54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654
in)
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.
0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in)
0.025 mm (0.0010 in) max.
0.019-0.045 mm (0.0007-0.0018 in)
0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in)
0.019 mm (0.0007 in)
0.45 mm (0.018 in)
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)

0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.45 mm (0.018 in)
0.03 mm (0.001 in)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
2-3

Engine Lubrication
Item
Engine oil
Oil pump
Measurement
Capacity
Inner-to-outer rotor clearance

Pump housing-to-outer rotor
clearance
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial
clearance
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil
temperature at 176 F (80 C)
Qualification
Engine overhaul
Oil change
including filter
Oil change
without filter
Standard or New
5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
0.04-0.14 m m (0.002-0.006 in)

0.10-0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 in)
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)
0.02-0.07 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in)
0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Service Limit
At idle
At 3,000 rpm
69 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10.0 psi)

490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,71 psi)
Qualification
Engine overhaul
Coolant change
Standard or New
Service Limit
9.4 L (2.48 US gal)
7.5 L (1.98 US gal)
Honda Long Life A ntif reeze/Coo I a nt Type 2
0.75 L (0.198 US gal)
Cooling System
Item
Radiator
Coolant
reservoir
Radiator cap
Thermostat
Measurement
Coolant capacities (including engine,
heater, hoses, and reservoir)
Coolant type
Coolant capacity
Opening pressure
Opening temperature
Begins to open
Fully open
Valve lift at fully open
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa (0.95-1.25 k g f / c m , 1 4 18 psi)

169-176 F ( 7 6 - 8 0 C)
194F(90 C)
Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in)
Fuel and Emissions

Item
Fuel pressure
regulator
Fuel tank
Engine idle
Measurement
Pressure with fuel pressure gauge
connected
Capacity
Idle speed without load
Idle speed with high electric load
(A/C on, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan motor on high, rear
window defogger on, and headlights
on high beam)
Qualification
Standard or New
3 9 0 - 4 4 0 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm , 5 7 - 6 4
psi)
79.5 L (21.00 US gal)
700 50 rpm
700 50 rpm
2
A/Tin N or P
A/Tin N or P
Service Limit
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential

Item
Automatic
transmission
fluid
ATF pressure
Measurement
Capacity : Use genuine Honda ATF-Z1
1st clutch pressure
At 2,000 rpm in N
or P
At 2,000 rpm in 1
1st-hold clutch pressure
At 2,000 rpm in 1
2nd clutch pressure
At 2,000 rpm in 2
3rd clutch pressure
At 2,000 rpm in
3rd gear in D
At 2,000 rpm in
4th gear in D
At 2,000 rpm in
5th gear in D
Line pressure
4th clutch pressure

5th clutch pressure
Torque
converter
2-4
Qualification
Fluid change
Overhaul
Stall speed
Check with vehicle on level ground
Service limit
Service Limit
Standard or New
3.4 L (3.6 US qt)
8.1 L (8.6 US qt)
950-1,010 kPa (9.7-10.3 kgf/cm ,140

- 1 4 6 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
6 8 0 - 7 6 0 kPa (6.9-7.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 0 110 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
1,850 rpm
1,700-2,000 rpm
2
900 kPa (9.2

131 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
630 kPa (6.4
91 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
2
kgf/cm ,
specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Clutch
Measurement
Clearance between clutch end-plate
and top disc
Clutch return spring free length
Clutch disc thickness

Clutch plate thickness
1st clutch end plate thickness
1st-hold clutch plate B thickness

2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch end plate
thickness
Mainshaft
Qualification
1st
1st-hold
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
68.3 mm (2.69 in)

48.3 mm (1.90 in)
52.0 mm (2.05 in)
37.4 mm (1.47 in)
47.9 mm (1.89 in)
1.94 mm (0.076 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
1.8 mm (0.071 in)
1.8 mm (0.071 in)
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
3.2 mm (0.126 in)
3.3 mm (0.130 in)
3.4 mm (0.134 in)
3.5 mm (0.138 in)
3.6 mm (0.142 in)
3.7 mm (0.146 in)
3.8 mm (0.150 in)
3.9 mm (0.154 in)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
2.1 mm (0.083 in)
2.2 mm (0.087 in)
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
2.5 mm (0.098 in)
2.6 mm (0.102 in)
2.7 mm (0.106 in)
2.8 mm (0.110 in)
2.9 mm (0.114 in)
22.984-23.000 m m (0.9049-0.9055
in)
39.981-39.991 m m (1.5741-1.5744
in)
46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116
in)
0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in)
48.7-48.8 m m (1.917-1.921 in)
4.5-4.7 mm (0.18-0.19 in)
1st
1st-hold
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Markl
Mark 2
Mark 3
Mark 4
Mark 5
Mark 6
Mark 7
Mark 8
Mark 9
Markl
Mark 2
Mark 3
Mark 4
Mark 5
Mark 6
Mark 7
Mark 8
Mark 9
Diameter at startor shaft needle

bearing contact area
5th gear collar diameter at needle
5th gear I.D.
End play of gears
5th gear collar length
5th gear collar flange thickness
Sealing ring thickness
Width of sealing ring groove
5th gear
Standard or New
1.90-1.96 mm (0.075-0.077 in)

2.025-2.060 m m (0.080-0.081 in)
Service Limit
1.151.35 mm
(0.045-0.053 in)
0.6-1.0 mm (0.0240.039 in)
1.051.25 mm
(0.041-0.049 in)
0.8-1.0 mm ( 0 . 0 3 1 0.039 in)
0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in)
0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in)
66.3 mm (2.61 in)
46.3 mm (1.82 in)
50.0 mm (1.97 in)
35.4 mm (1.39 in)
45.9 mm (1.81 in)
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
1.85 mm (0.073 in)
2.08 mm (0.082 in)
2-5

Item
Countershaft
Measurement
Diameter at bearing contact area
Diameter of 2nd gear at needle bearing

contact area
I.D. of gear
Qualification
Torque
converter
housing
5th gear
Standard or New
40.505-40.515 m m (1.5947-1.5951
in)
Service Limit
When worn or
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
2nd gear
5th gear
Idler gear
Reverse gear
A
34.975-34.991 m m (1.3770-1.3776
in)
61.975-61.991 m m (2.4400-2.4406
in)
41.000-41.016 m m (1.6142-1.6148
in)
70.000-70.019 m m (2.7559-2.7566
in)
46.000-46.016 m m (1.8110-1.8116
in)
0.005-0.040 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
0.12-0.27 m m (0.0047-0.0106 in)
0.005-0.040 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
0.10-0.25 m m (0.0039-0.0098 in)
1.91 m m (0.0752 in)
1.93 m m (0.0760 in)
1.95 m m (0.0768 in)
1.97 m m (0.0776 in)
1.99 m m (0.0783 in)
2.01 m m (0.0791 in)
2.03 m m (0.0799 in)
2.05 m m (0.0807 in)
2.07 m m (0.0815 in)
2.09 m m (0.0823 in)
2.11 m m (0.0831 in)
2.13 m m (0.0839 in)
2.15 m m (0.0846 in)
2.17 m m (0.0854 in)
2.19 m m (0.0862 in)
5th gear
Idler gear
Reverse gear
End play of gears
50.8 m m washer thickness
2-6
or
or
or
or
or
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
specs
Item
Countershaft
(cont'd)
Measurement
50.8 mm washer thickness
61 mm washer thickness
Qualification
Standard or New
2.21 mm (0.0870 in)
2.23 mm (0.0878 in)
2.25 mm (0.0886 in)
2.27 mm (0.0894 in)
2.29 mm (0.0902 in)
2.31 mm (0.0909 in)
2.33 mm (0.0917 in)
2.35 mm (0.0925 in)
2.37 mm (0.0933 in)
2.39 mm (0.0941 in)
2.41 mm (0.0949 in)
AA
2.43 mm (0.0957 in)
AB
2.45 mm (0.0965 in)
1.525 mm (0.0600 in)
1.505 mm (0.0593 in)
1.485 mm (0.0585 in)
1.465 mm (0.0577 in)
1.445 mm (0.0569 in)
1.425 mm (0.0561 in)
1.405 mm (0.0553 in)
Thrust washer thickness
3.00 mm (0.118 in)
Reverse selector hub O.D.
55.885-55.900 mm (2.200-2.201 in)
Reverse gear collar O.D.
39.979-40.000
in)
1.99-2.02 mm
7.49-7.52 mm
38.981-38.991
in)
43.986-43.999
in)
32.002-32.015
in)
Cotter thickness
Secondary shaft
4th gear
2nd gear
Diameter of 1st gear collar at needle

2nd gear
I.D. of gear
Torque
converter
housing
Torque
converter
housing (shaft
end side)
1st gear
End play of gears
m m (1.5740-1.5748
(0.078-0.080 in)
(0.295-0.296 in)
mm (1.5347-1.5351
m m (1.7317-1.7322
mm (1.2599-1.2604
Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257-1.1263
in)
When worn or
damaged
2nd gear
44.000-44.013 m m (1.7323-1.7328
in)
50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in)
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
1st gear
2nd gear
0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in)

0.060-0.488 mm (0.0024-0.0192 in)
2-7

Item
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Measurement
52 mm thrust washer thickness
65 mm thrust shim thickness
2-8
Standard or New
2.705 mm (0.107 in)
2.680 mm (0.106 in)
2.655 mm (0.105 in)
2.630 mm (0.104 in)
2.605 mm (0.103 in)
2.580 mm (0.102 in)
2.555 mm (0.101 in)
2.530 mm (0.100 in)
2.505 mm (0.099 in)
2.480 m m (0.098 in)
2.455 mm (0.097 in)
2.430 mm (0.096 in)
2.405 mm (0.095 in)
OA
0.80 mm (0.031 in)
0.84 mm (0.033 in)
0.88 m m (0.035 in)
0.92 mm (0.036 in)
0.96 mm (0.038 in)
1.00 mm (0.039 in)
1.04 mm (0.041 in)
1.08 mm (0.043 in)
1.12 mm (0.044 in)
1.16 mm (0.046 in)
1.20 mm (0.047 in)
1.24 mm (0.049 in)
1.28 m m (0.050 in)
1.32 m m (0.052 in)
Qualification
Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
specs
Item
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)
Measurement
65 mm thrust shim thickness
1st gear collar length

Clutch feed pipe bushing I.D.
ATF feed pipe O.D.
Standard or New
1.36 mm (0.054 in)
1.40 mm (0.055 in)
1.44 mm (0.057 in)
1.48 mm (0.058 in)
1.52 mm (0.060 in)
1.56 mm (0.061 in)
1.60 mm (0.063 in)
1.64 mm (0.065 in)
1.68 mm (0.066 in)
1.72 mm (0.068 in)
1.76 mm (0.069 in)
1.80 mm (0.071 in)
1.84 mm (0.072 in)
AA
1.88 mm (0.074 in)
AB
1.92 mm (0.076 in)
AC
1.96 mm (0.077 in)
AD
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
AE
2.04 mm (0.080 in)
AF
2.08 mm (0.082 in)
AG
2.12 mm (0.083 in)
AH
2.16 mm (0.085 in)
Al
2.20 mm (0.087 in)
AJ
2.24 mm (0.088 in)
AK
2.28 mm (0.090 in)
AL
2.32 m m (0.091 in)
AM
0.76 mm (0.030 in)
Qualification
1st
1st-hold
1st
1st-hold
63.3-63.4 m m (2.4921 -2.4961 in)

1.91-1.97 m m (0.075-0.078 in)
2.025-2.060 m m (0.080-0.081 in)
11.518-11.530 m m (0.4535-0.4539
in)
6.018-6.030 m m (0.2369-0.2374 in)
11.47-11.48 m m (0.4516-0.4520 in)
5.97-5.98 m m (0.2350-0.2354 in)
Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
1.86 mm (0.073 in)

2.08 mm (0.082 in)
11.545 mm (0.4545
in)
6.045 mm (0.2380 in)
11.45 mm (0.4508 in)
5.95 m m (0.2343 in)
2-9

Item
Intermediary
shaft
Measurement
I.D. of 3rd gear
End play of gears
26.5 mm washer thickness
53 mm splined washer thickness
Cotter thickness
2-10
Qualification
Standard or New
36.00-36.016 m m (1.4173-1.4179 in)
3rd gear
A
0.005-0.045 m m (0.0002-0.0018 in)

1.05 mm (0.041 in)
1.13 m m (0.044 in)
1.21 m m (0.048 in)
1.29 m m (0.051 in)
1.37 m m (0.054 in)
1.45 m m (0.057 in)
1.53 m m (0.060 in)
1.61 m m (0.063 in)
1.69 m m (0.067 in)
1.77 m m (0.070 in)
1.85 m m (0.073 in)
1.93 m m (0.076 in)
2.01 m m (0.079 in)
2.09 m m (0.082 in)
0.97 m m (0.038 in)
3.995 m m (0.1573 in)
4.015 m m (0.1581 in)
4.035 m m (0.1589 in)
4.055 m m (0.1596 in)
4.075 mm (0.1604 in)
4.095 m m (0.1612 in)
4.115 m m (0.1620 in)
4.135 m m (0.1628 in)
4.155 m m (0.1636 in)
4.175 m m (0.1644 in)
4.195 m m (0.1652 in)
4.215 m m (0.1659 in)
4.235 m m (0.1667 in)
4.255 m m (0.1675 in)

2.99-3.02 m m (0.1177-0.1189 in)
1.89-1.95 m m (0.0744-0.0768 in)
2.025-2.060 m m (0.0797 -0.0811 in)
Service Limit
When worn or
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
1.84 m m (0.0724 in)

2.08 mm (0.082 in)
specs
item
Reverse idler
gear
Measurement
Gear shaft O.D.
Qualification
I.D.
I.D. of transmission housing of gear
shaft contact area
Thrust washer thickness
ATF pump
ATF pump thrust clearance

Clearance between ATF pump gear
and body
Transmission
housing
Holder side
Drive gear
Driven gear
ATF pump driven gear I.D.

ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D.
Stator shaft
Reverse shift
fork
Park gear and
pawl
Regulator valve
body
Needle bearing contact area I.D.
Sealing ring contact area I.D.

Fork finger thickness
Shift fork shaft bore I.D.
Sealing ring contact I.D.
ATF guide collar
18.007-18.020 m m (0.7089-0.7094
in)
14.006-14.024 mm (0.5514-0.5521
in)
0.97-1.05 m m (0.038-0.041 in)
0.97-1.05 m m (0.038-0.041 in)
0.03-0.06 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in)
0.210-0.265 m m (0.0083-0.0104 in)
0.070-0.125 m m (0.0028-0.0049 in)
14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525
in)
13.980-13.990 m m (0.5504-0.5508
in)
27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in)
31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in)
31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in)
5.90-6.00 m m (0.232-0.236 in)
Service Limit
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
0.07 mm (0.003 in)
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
31.05 mm (1.222 in)

5.4 m m (0.21 in)
When worn or damaged
Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore I.D.
Main valve body
Torque
converter side
ATF pump side
Standard or New
13.99-14.00 m m (0.5508-0.5512 in)
Intermediary shaft sealing ring contact

I.D.
Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 1.
D.
14.000-14.010
in)
37.000-37.039
in)
31.000-31.025
in)
35.000-35.025
in)
29.000-29.021
in)
m m (0.5512-0.5516
m m (1.4567-1.4582
mm (1.2205-1.2215
37.045 m m (1.4585
in)
31.05 m m (1.222 in)
m m (1.3780-1.3789
35.05 m m (1.3799 in)
mm (1.1417-1.1426
29.05 m m (1.1437 in)
2-11

Item
Main valve body
spring
Measurement
Shift valve A spring
Shift valve B spring
Shift valve E spring
Relief valve spring
Torque converter check valve spring
Modulator valve spring
CPC valve A spring
Servo control valve spring
Lubrication control valve spring
Lock-up timing valve spring
Lock-up shift valve spring
2-12
Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Standard or New
0.9 mm (0.035 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
50.5 m m (1.988 in)
23.3
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
49.1 mm (1.933 in)
21.7
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
42.4 m m (1.669 in)
17.6
1.0 m m (0.039 in)
9.6 m m (0.378 in)
28.1 m m (1.106 in)
7.7
1.1 m m (0.043 in)
8.6 m m (0.339 in)
35.0 mm (1.378 in)
12.6
1.6 m m (0.063 in)
10.4 mm (0.409 in)
33.5 mm (1.319 in)
9.8
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.1 mm (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.9 m m (0.035 in)
9.6 m m (0.378 in)
30.2 m m (1.189 in)
8.4
0.9 m m (0.035 in)
8.7 m m (0.343 in)
25.0 mm (0.984 in)
7.2
0.6 m m (0.024 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
30.9 mm (1.217 in)
11.1
1.0 m m (0.039 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
35.5 mm (1.398 in)
18.2
Service Limit
specs
Item
Secondary valve
body spring
Measurement
CPC valve B spring
CPC valve C spring
Shift valve C spring
Shift valve D spring
Reverse CPC valve spring
Reverse control valve spring
Regulator valve
body spring
3rd accumulator spring
Cooler check valve spring
Regulator valve spring A
Regulator valve spring B
Stator reaction spring
Lock-up control valve spring (Type A)
Lock-up control valve spring (Type B)
Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Standard or New
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.8 mm (0.031 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
49.1 mm (1.933 in)
21.7
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
42.4 mm (1.669 in)
17.6
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
24.4 m m (0.961 in)
14.6
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
49.1 m m (1.933 in)
21.7
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
19.6 m m (0.772 in)
41.4 mm (1.630 in)
5.5
0.9 mm (0.035 in)
6.7 mm (0.264 in)
31.5 mm (1.240 in)
14.2
1.85 mm (0.073 in)
14.7 mm (0.579 in)
86.9 m m (3.421 in)
16.2
1.4 mm (0.055 in)
8.8 m m (0.346 in)
44.0 m m (1.732 in)
12.0
5.5 m m (0.217 in)
37.4 mm (1.472 in)
30.3 m m (1.193 in)
2.1
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
42.9 mm (1.689 in)
14.2
0.8 mm (0.031 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
44.3 mm (1.744 in)
25.5
Service Limit
2-13

Item
Accumulator
body spring
Measurement
1st accumulator spring A
1st accumulator spring B
1st-hold accumulator spring
2nd accumulator spring
4th accumulator spring
5th accumulator spring A
5th accumulator spring B
A/T differential
carrier
Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Pinion shaft contact area I.D.

Driveshaft contact area I.D.
Clearance between carrier and pinion
shaft
Clearance between carrier and
driveshaft
Clearance between carrier and
intermediate shaft
Carrier bearing starting torque
(preload)
For new bearing

For used bearing
A/T differential
pinion gear
Backlash
I.D.
Clearance between pinion gear and
pinion shaft
2-14
2WD
4WD
Service Limit
Standard or New
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
60.8 mm (2.394 in)
9.5
2.5 mm (0.098 in)
12.8 mm (0.504 in)
46.0 mm (1.811 in)
9.5
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
13.1 mm (0.516 in)
42.9 mm (1.689 in)
9.8
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
53.4 mm (2.102 in)
7.5
3.3 mm (0.130 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
39.1 mm (1.539 in)
5.8
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
65.5 mm (2.579 in)
12.0
2.6 mm (0.102 in)
13.2 mm (0.520 in)
50.5 mm (1.988 in)
10.1
18.000-18.025 mm (0.7087-0.7096
in)
30.025-30.055 m m (1.182-1.183 in)
0.013-0.054 m m (0.0005-0.0021 in)
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
0.045-0.096 m m (0.002-0.004 in)
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
0.080-0.126 m m (0.003-0.005 in)
3.9-5.1 N m ( 4 0 - 5 2 k g f c m , 3 5 - 4 5
Ibf-in)
3.6-4.8 N m ( 3 7 - 4 9 k g f c m , 3 2 - 4 3
Ibf-in)
1.4-2.0 mm (0.055-0.079 in)
0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in)
18.042-18.066 mm (0.7103-0.7113
in)
0.055-0.095 m m (0.0022-0.0037 in)
Adjust
Adjust
0.12 m m (0.005 in)
specs
Item
Transfer output
shaft
Measurement
End play
28.5 m m thrust washer thickness
Qualification
Transmission
housing
Torque
converter
housing side
Standard or New
21.977-21.990 m m (0.8652- 0.8657
in)
40.002-40.018 m m (1.5749- 1.5755
in)
0 - 0 . 3 9 m m (0.0-0.015 in)
1.82 m m (0.0717 in)
1.84 m m (0.0724 in)
1.86 m m (0.0732 in)
1.88 m m (0.0740 in)
1.90 m m (0.0748 in)
1.92 m m (0.0756 in)
1.94 m m (0.0764 in)
1.96 m m (0.0772 in)
1.98 mm (0.0780 in)
2.00 m m (0.0787 in)
2.02 m m (0.0795 in)
2.04 m m (0.0803 in)
2.06 m m (0.0811 in)
2.08 mm (0.0819 in)
2.10 m m (0.0827 in)
2.12 mm (0.0835 in)
2.14 mm (0.0843 in)
2.16 m m (0.0850 in)
2.18 m m (0.0858 in)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in)
2.22 m m (0.0874 in)
2.24 m m (0.0882 in)
2.26 m m (0.0890 in)
2.28 mm (0.0898 in)
2.30 m m (0.0906 in)
2.32 m m (0.0913 in)
AA
2.34 m m (0.0921 in)
Service Limit
21.92 m m (0.8630 in)
39.95 m m (1.5728 in)
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
2-15

Item
Transfer
assembly
Measurement
Diameter of transfer hypoid drive
gear/shaft assembly at tapered roller
Diameter of transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller bearing
contact area
Transfer
assembly fluid
Transfer gear backlash

Tapered roller bearing total starting
torque (preload)
Capacity : Hypoid gear oil SAE 90
viscosity, API classified GL 4 or GL 5
only
Qualification
Transfer cover
side
Transfer gear
side
Transfer gear
side
Companion
flange side
Fluid change
Overhaul
Standard or New
50.002-50.018 m m (1.9686-1.9692
in)
24.987-25.000 m m (0.9837-0.9843
in)
40.002-40.018 m m (1.5749-1.5755
in)
31.975-31.988 m m (1.2589-1.2594
in)
0.06-0.17 m m (0.002-0.007 in)
3.20-4.16 N m (32.6-42.4 k g f c m ,
28.3-36.8 Ibf-in)
0.43 L (0.45 US qt)
0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
Service Limit
49.95 m m (1.9665 in)
24.93 mm (0.9815 in)
39.95 m m (1.5728 in)
31.92 mm (1.2567 in)
Adjust
Adjust
Rear Differential
Item
Rear differential
fluid
Measurement
Capacity
Qualification
Fluid change
Overhaul
Recommended fluid
Standard or New
2.64 L (2.79 US qt)
2.85 L (3.01 US qt)
Honda VTM-4 Differential fluid
Standard or New
0 - 1 0 mm (0.00.4 in)
29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 ibf)
Service Limit
Steering
Item
Steering wheel
Gearbox
Pump
Power steering
fluid
Measurement
Rotational play measured at outside
edge with engine running
Initial turning load measured at
outside edge with engine running
Angle of rack guide screw loosened
from locked position
Output pressure with shut-off valve
closed
Capacity
Qualification
Service Limit
15 5
2
Fluid change
System overhaul
Recommended fluid
8,924-9,414 kPa ( 9 1 - 9 6 kgf/cm ,

1,294-1,365 psi)
0.36 L (0.38 US qt)
1.0 L (1.1 US qt)
Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid
Suspension
Item
Wheel alignment
Measurement
Camber
Caster
Total toe-in
Front wheel turning angle
Wheel
Aluminum wheel runout

Steel wheel runout
Wheel bearing
2-16
End play
Qualification
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
Inward
Outward
(reference)
Axial
Radial
Axial
Radial
Front
Rear
Standard or New
- 0 3 0 ' 45'
- 0 3 0 ' 45'
4 11 ' 3 5 '
0 2 m m (0.0 0.1 in)
2 2 m m (0.1 0.1 in)
38 1 2 ' 2
31 4 4 '
0 - 0 . 3 m m (0.00.01 in)
0 - 0 . 3 m m (0.0-0.01 in)
0 - 1 . 0 m m (0.0-0.04 in)
0 - 1 . 0 m m (0.0-0.04 in)
0 - 0 . 0 5 mm (0.0-0.002 in)
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.0-0.002 in)
Service Limit
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.08
(0.06
(0.08
(0.06
in)
in)
in)
in)
specs
Brakes
Item
Parking brake
Brake disc
Measurement
Distance traveled when pedal pressed
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force
Drum I.D.
Shoe lining thickness
Pedal height (carpet moved aside)
Free play
Thickness
Brake pad
Runout
Parallelism
Thickness
Brake pedal
Qualification
Standard or New
Service Limit
8 to 10
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
210.0-210.1 m m (8.27-8.27 in)

3.9 mm (0.15 in)
171 m m (6.7 in)
1 - 5 mm (0.0-0.2 in)
27.9-28.1 m m (1.10-1.11 in)
10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in)
10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in)

9.6-10.2 mm (0.38-0.40 in)
211.0 m m (8.31 in)

1.0 m m (0.04 in)
26.0 m m (1.02 in)

9.0 m m (0.35 in)
0.04 m m (0.002 in)
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
1.6 m m (0.06 in)
1.6 mm (0.06 in)
Air Conditioning
Item
Refrigerant
Refrigerant oil
Compressor
Measurement
Type
Capacity of system
Type
Capacity of components
Field coil resistance

Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance
Qualification
Condenser
(Including
receiver/dryer)
Evaporator
(Front)
Evaporator
(Rear)
Each line and
hose
Receiver/Dryer
Compressor
At 68 F (20 C)
Standard or New
HFC-134a (R-134a)
600-650 g (21.2-22.9 oz)
DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH)
5 0 m L ( 1 2/3fl-oz)
Service Limit
4 0 m L ( 1 1/3 fl-oz)
30 mL (1 fl-oz)
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
125 mL (4 2/9 fl-oz)
3.94.3 Q
0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in)
2A1
Item
DIMENSIONS
Measurement
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheelbase
Track
WEIGHT
Seating capacity
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR)
ENGINE
Type
Qualification
LX (USA model)
Except LX (USA model)
Front
Rear
4WD
2WD
Cylinder arrangement
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Valve train
Lubrication system
Fuel required
STARTER
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Final reduction
2-18
Type
Normal output
Nominal voltage
Hour rating
Direction of rotation
Type
Primary reduction
Gear ratio
Specification
4,850 m m (190.9 in)
1,995 m m (78.5 in)
1,802 m m (71.0 in)
1,846 mm (72.7 in)
2,775 m m (109.2 in)
1,720 m m (67.7 in)
1,715 m m (67.5 in)
Eight (8)
2,765 kg (6,096 lbs)
2,700 kg (5,952 lbs)
Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC VCM V6 gasoline
engine
60 V6-cylinder, transverse
89.0 x 93.0 m m (3.50 x 3.66 in)
3,471 c m (211.7 cu in)
10.5
Belt drive, SOHC i-VTEC VCM 4 valves per cylinder
Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Regular UNLEADED gasoline with 87 Pump Octane
Number or higher
Gear reduction
1.6 kW
12V
30 seconds
Counterclockwise as viewed from drive end
Electronically-controlled automatic, five-speed forward,
one reverse, three-element torque converter with lock up
clutch
Direct 1:1
2.697
1.606
1.071
0.765
0.612
1.888
Single helical gear
4.312
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Reverse
Type
Gear ratio
specs
Item
STEERING
SUSPENSION
Measurement
Type
Overall ratio
Turns, lock-to-lock
Steering wheel diameter
Type
Shock absorber
TIRES
Size
WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
Camber
Caster
Total Toe-in
Front wheel turning angle
BRAKES
Type of service brake

Type of parking brake
Pad friction surface area
(swept area)
AIR
CONDITIONING
Parking brake shoe

friction surface area
Compressor
Condenser
Evaporator
Blower
Qualification
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front and rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
Inward
Outward (reference)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Type
Capacity
Maximum speed
Lubricant capacity
Lubricant type
Type
Type
Type
Motor type
Maximum capacity (Front)

Maximum capacity (Rear)
Refrigerant
Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc

Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Foot type, mechanical actuating, rear wheels
63.5 c m (9.84 sq in) x 2
32.0 c m (4.92 sq in) x 2
60.2 c m (9.33 sq i n ) x 2
2
Speed control (Auto A/C)

Speed control (Manual A/C)
Temperature control
Compressor clutch
Specification
Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
19.0
3.69
386 mm (15.2 in)
McPherson Strut
Multilink with trailing arm
Twin tube gas
Twin tube gas
P245/65R17 105T
T165/80D17 104M
-030'
-030'
4 11 '
0 mm (0 in)
2 mm (0.08 in)
38 12'
31 o 44 -
Type
Electrical power consumption at
68 F (20 C)
Type
Quantity (Dual)
Swash plate
210 mL/rev (12.8 cu in/rev)
7,600 rpm
215 mL (13.1 cu in)
DENSO ND-OIL8
Corugate fin
Corugate fin
Sirocco fan
Front:228W/12V
Rear:215W/12V
Infinitely variable
Front: 7-speed
Rear: 3-speed
490 c m (17.300 cu ft)/h
310 c m (11.300 cu ft)/h
Air-mix type
Dry, single, plate, Poly-V belt drive
35 W maximum at 12 V
3
HFC-134a (R-134a)
6 0 0 - 6 5 0 g (21.2-22.9 oz)
2-19
Item
ELECTRICAL
RATINGS
Measurement
Battery
Fuses
Light bulbs
Washer reservoir
2-20
Qualification
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Under-dash fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder
Rear fuse/relay box
Headlight high beam
Headlight low beam
Daytime running lights
Front turn signal lights/parking
lights
Front side turn signal lights
(TOURING model)
Front side marker lights
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal lights/taillights
Brake lights/taillights
Rear side marker lights
High mount brake light
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Cargo area light
Console box light
Front map light
Rear map light
Ambient light
Vanity mirror lights
Glove box light
Door courtesy lights
Gauge lights
Indicator lights
Capacity (USA models)
Capacity (Canada models)
Specification
12 V - 7 2 Ah/20HR (12 V - 6 0 Ah/5HR)
120 A, 80 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A
7.5 A
20 A, 7.5 A
12 V - 6 0 W
12V-55W
12V-60W
12V-28/8W
LED
12V-5W
12 V - 5 5 W
12V-21/5W
12V-21/5W
12 V - 5 W
1 2 V - 5 W X5
12V-18W
12V-5W
12V-8W
12 V - 1 . 4 W
12V-8W
12V-5W
LED
12V-1.1 W
14V-1.4W
12 V - 2 C P
LED
LED
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
6.5 L (6.9 US qt)
specs
Body Specifications
* 1 : L X ( U S A model)
*2: Except LX (USA model)
2-21
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display)
General Information (Multi-information Display)
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance Sub Items
3-4
3-8
3-12
3-13
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
Item
Lubrication Points
Lubricant
Engine
Honda Motor Oil:

American Honda P/N 08798-9023 (5W-20),
Honda Canada P/N CA66806 (5W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container. Make sure it says
"For Gasoline Engines/' S A E viscosity: See chart.
Automatic transmission
Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):

American Honda P/N 08200-9001,
Honda Canada P/N CA66689
Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift
quality.
Transfer assembly (4WD)
Hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5

Use a S A E 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or GL5 only.
3-2
Viscosity
S A E 90: above 0F (-18C)
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid:
Honda Canada P/N 08200-9003C
Rear differential (4WD)
E
F
Brake system (including V S A lines)

Caliper piston seals
Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008

Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
G
H
1
J
K
Brake booster clevis pin

Battery terminals
Fuel fill door
Hood hinges and hood latch
Tailgate hinges
Multipurpose grease
Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and caliper pin

boots
Honda Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
Power steering system
Honda Power Steering Fluid:

Honda Canada P/N 08206-9002C
Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear
and poor steering in cold weather.
Air conditioning compressor
Compressor oil: DENSO ND-OIL8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 AH) for refrigerant

HFC-134a (R-134a)
Cooling system
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2: P/N OL999-9001
3-3
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display)
Maintenance Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the information display (LX, EX, and EX-L models). Based on engine
and automatic transmission operating conditions, the Pilot's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along w i t h the code(s) for
other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR
3-4
Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a
percentage on the information display. To see the
current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), then push and release the SELECT/RESET knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life displays.
3. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining

engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the message "SERVICE"
(A) is displayed along with engine oil life and the
same maintenance item code(s).
OUTSIDE
SERVICE
A
IE3
OUTSIDE
iu
OILLIFE%
IUU
OILLIFE%
O H
2. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining

engine oil life is 15 % to 6 %, the remaining engine oil
life (A) and other scheduled maintenance item(s)
needing service are displayed.
The maintenance minder indicator (B) also comes on
w h e n the engine oil life is 15 % or less.
To cancel the display and the indicator, press the
SELECT/RESET knob.
Complete list of maintenance main items (C) (see
page 3-12).
Complete list of maintenance sub items (D) (see
page 3-13).
4. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and remaining

engine oil life is 0 %, the engine oil life indicator (A)
blinks.
Pressing the SELECT/RESET knob cancels the display,
but the maintenance minder indicator stays on.
OUTSIDE
SERVICE
A
IE3
OILLIFE%
n
u
iD D U C C
I t^JU
II
OILUFE%
=< IS
(cont'd)
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display) (cont'd)
5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the engine
oil life indicator shows a negative mileage, for
example " - 1 0 " on the display. If the negative milage is
between 0 and -9, the indicator is displayed for only a
few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON
(II). The negative mileage remains displayed after the
vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA models)
or 10 km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil life is
reached, and the display cannot be canceled. This
means the indicated maintenance item(s) should
have been done more than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.
OUTSIDE
-irTfc
SERVICE
A
IE3
NOTE:
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the proper
maintenance t i m i n g . This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
The engine oil life and the maintenance item(s) can be
independently reset with the HQS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Push the SELECT/RESET knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life indicator is displayed.
in
IU
Resetting the Maintenance Information

Display
mi
3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET knob for about 10

seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item code(s) will be blink, then release
the knob.
NOTE: If you are resetting the display w h e n the
engine oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
4. Press the SELECT/RESET knob for another 5 seconds.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the
engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 " .
Zi Zu~if~i
C
ZlUU
OILLIFE%
inn
I U U
3-6
iu
Resetting Individual Maintenance Items

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it doesn't
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
4. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
HDS.
5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES with the HDS.
6. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with
the HDS.
7. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER with the
HDS.
8. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to
reset.
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Multi-information Display)
Multi-information Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the multi-information display (TOURING model). Based on engine
and automatic transmission operating conditions, the Pilot's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along with the code(s) for
other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
3-8
Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a
percentage in the multi-information display.
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch
to ON (II), then push and release the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.
. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining

engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the maintenance system
message "SERVICE DUE NOW" is displayed along with
the same maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance
system message display is canceled, a "SERVICE"
message appears.
INSTANT FUEL MPG

0
20
imiiiii"
OIL LIFE
SERVICE
DUE NOW
A123
90%
2. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining

engine oil life is 15 % to 6 %, the remaining engine oil life
and other scheduled maintenance item(s) needing
service are displayed. The maintenance system
message "SERVICE DUE SOON" (A) also comes on. To
cancel the message, press the INFO button. The display
continues to show the remaining engine oil life (B) and
the message indicator (C) until it is reset.
Complete list of maintenance main items (D) (see page
3-12).
Complete list of maintenance sub items (E) (see page
3-13).
SERVICE
DUE S 0 0 N
A123456
Â*
4. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining

engine oil life is 0 %, the maintenance system message
"SERVICE PAST DUE" is displayed along with the same
maintenance item code(s).
SERVICE
PAST DUE
A123
INSTANT FUEL MPG

0
20
40
imiiiii
SERVICE
A123456
D
OIL LIFE
15%
(cont'd)
3-9
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Multi-information Display) (cont'd)
5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the
"SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative
mileage, for example " - 1 0 , " on the display. If the
negative mileage is between 0 and -9, the message is
displayed for only a few seconds w h e n the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II). The negative mileage (A)
remains displayed after the vehicle is driven more
than 10 miles (for USA models) or 10 km (for Canada
models) after 0 % oil life is reached, and the display
cannot be canceled. This means the indicated
maintenance item(s) should have been done more
than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.
Resetting the Maintenance Information

Display
NOTE:
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the proper
maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
The engine oil life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently only with the HDS.
10miles >
SERVICE
PAST DUE
A123
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the INFO

button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about 10
seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
NOTE:
If you are resetting the display when the engine oil
life is more than 15 %, make sure any maintenance
item(s) requiring service are done before resetting
the display.
To cancel the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode, press the
INFO button repeatedly until the "CANCEL"
indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
OIL LIFE RESET

CANCEL
SERVICE
A123
3-10
OIL LIFE
5%
5. Press INFO button to select "RESET", then press the

SEL/RESET button.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the
engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 " .
Resetting individual Maintenance Items

INSTANT FUEL MPG

0
20
40

and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it doesn't
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
4. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
HDS.
OIL LIFE
100%
5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE with the HDS.

6. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with
the HDS.
7. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER with the
HDS.
8. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to
reset.
3-11
Maintenance Minder
If the message "SERVICE" or "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every
year.
NOTE:
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of the maintenance messages in the information/multi-information display.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Symbol
A
Replace engine oil (see page 8-10)
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
B
Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11)
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)
Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7)
Check the number of clicks 8 to 10 when the parking brake pedal is pressed with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-6)
Check steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)
Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-41)
Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
Engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-207)
Transfer fluid (see page 14-211)
Rear differential fluid (see page 15-42)
Power steering fluid (see page 17-27)
Brake fluid (see page 19-9)
Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-8)
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and mufflers for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-344), and connections* (see page 11-346)
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void the customer's
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval, to ensure long-term
reliability.
3-12

Number
1
2
5
6

Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-373)
If the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-81)
If the vehicle is driven primarily in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-30)
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the auto-tensioner; no adjustment is needed.
Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-209) and transfer fluid (see page 14-211)
Automatic transmission fluid capacity: 3.4L (3.6 US qt)
Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt), use hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5.
Replace spark plugs (see page 4-22)
Use ILZKR7B-1KNGK)
Replace timing belt (see page 6-22) and Inspect water pump (see page 10-5)
If the vehicle is regularly driven in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), or in very low temperatures
(under -20 F, -29 C), replace every 60,000 miles (USA)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-10)
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)
Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Capacity (including the reservoir): 7.5 L (1.98 US gal), use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid (see page 15-42)
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress
to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If the
vehicle is regularly driven in these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Capacity: 2.64 L (2.79 US qt), use Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid.
3-13
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)

Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
frontal or side collision, all SRS service w o r k should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
especially when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
steering column, center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
4-2
Starting System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4-3
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index
....4-5
Circuit Diagram
4-6
Starter S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-7
Starter Solenoid Test
...4-9
Starter Performance Test
4-10
Starter Removal and
Installation
4-11
Starter Overhaul
4-12
Ignition System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4 - 1 8
Circuit Diagram
4-19
Ignition Timing Inspection
4-20
Ignition Coil
Removal/Installation
4-21
Spark Plug Inspection
4-22
Charging System
Component Location I n d e x . . . .
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
Circuit Diagram
Charging S y s t e m Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator and Regulator
Alternator Control Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-28
4-29
Drive Belt Inspection

4-30
Drive Belt Replacement
4-31
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Inspection
.4-31
Replacement
4-32
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Air
Bleeding
4-33
Alternator Removal and
Installation
....4-33
Alternator Overhaul
4-36
Cruise Control
Component Location Index....4-41
Index
4-42
Circuit Diagram
4-43
Cruise Control Input Test
4-44
* Cruise Control Combination
Switch T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 4-46
Active Control Engine

Mount (ACM) System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4 - 4 7
General Troubleshooting
Information
4-48
DTCTroubleshooting I n d e x . . . 4-50
System Description
4-51
Circuit Diagram
4-52
DTC Troubleshooting
4-53
Symptom Troubleshooting ....4-76
Engine Mount Control Unit
Replacement
4-77
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref.No.
4-2
Tool Number
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
07SAZ-001000A
Description
Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 m m
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L
Backprobe Set
Qty
1
1
2
Starting System
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
^
.
Touring mode!
Except Touring models
(cont'd)
4-3
Starting System
Component Location Index (cont'd)
BATTERY
Test, page 22-93
STARTER
Starting System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-7
Solenoid Test, page 4-9
Performance T e s t page 4-10
Removal and Installation, page 4-11
Overhaul, page 4-12
4-4
Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom
Engine does not start
(does not crank)
Engine cranks, but does

not start
Engine is hard to start
Engine cranks slowly
Multi-information
display warning CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM (with
multi-information
display)
Starter system indicator
stay on (without
multi-information
display)
Diagnostic procedure
1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-93).
3. Check the PGM-FI main relays (see page 22-96).
4. Check the starter (see page 4-7).
5. Check the starter cut relay 1 and the starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
6. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-263).
7. Check the ignition switch or wire (see page 22-103).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page
22-451).
3. Check the fuel pressure, (see page 11-343)
4. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-344).
5. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11 -356).
6. Check the throttle body (see page 11 -371).
7. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-7).
8. Check for a damaged or broken timing belt.
9. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset in the
PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to cancel the ALL
INJECTORS STOP with the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-344).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-356).
1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-93).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-12).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Also check for

Poor ground at G101
Weak or fouled spark

plugs
Weak or fouled spark

plugs
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
4-5
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. 1 (120 A)
No. 2 (50 A)
HI
G20
BLU
WHT
h
/
1
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE HOLDER
/ T \
BAT
IGNITION
SWITCH
J HOT in
START (I
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed: P or N)
4-6
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter Tester OTC3131
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
Air temperature must be between 5 9 - 1 0 0 F ( 1 5 - 3 8
C) during this procedure.
After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will
continue to stop the fuel injectors f r o m functioning.
The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page
20-210).
2. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown.
NOTE: The probe is not used for battery testing.
7. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI

INSPECTION menu with the HDS.
8. Set the parking brake, then w i t h the shift lever in N or
P, turn the ignition switch to START (III) to crank the
engine.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
Y E S - T h e starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Check the electrical connections at the battery, the
negative battery cable to the body, the engine ground
cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion.
Then try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the
problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
NO-Based on the following s y m p t o m s , take the
appropriate a c t i o n : B
OTC3131
If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go to

step 11.
If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, g o t o step 13.
If the starter does not disengage f r o m the torque
converter ring gear w h e n you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
and check for the following:
- Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
3. Do the BATTERY TEST.

Does the display indicates GOOD or GOOD, LOW
CHARGE?
Y E S - T h e battery is OK. Charge the battery if
necessary, then go to step 4.
NO-lf the display indicate BAD BATTERY, replace the
battery, then retest. If the display indicate CHARGE &
RETEST, charge the battery, then retest.
and the PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -226).
(cont'd)
4-7
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Make sure the shift lever is in N or P, then disconnect
the connector (A) f r o m the starter S terminal. Connect
a jumper wire f r o m the battery positive terminal to the
S terminal.
12. Check the following items in the order listed until you
find the problem in the circuit:H
NOTE: After the problem in the circuit is found and
repaired, go to step 15.
A blown STS (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary underdash
fuse holder located below the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
A blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Check for an open or short in the WHT wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
Check for an open or short in the GRN wire and
PCM.
Check for an open or short in the BRN wire and
starter cut relay 2.
Does the starter crank the engine?

Y E S - G o to step 12.
NO-Remove the starter (see page 4-11), and repair
(see page 4-12) or replace it as necessary.H
Check for an open or short in the WHT wire, BLK/

WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut
relay 2 and the starter.
Check for an open or short in the YEL wire, LT BLU
wire, and connectors between the ignition switch
and the PCM.
Check for an open or short in the LT GRN wire and
connectors between the PCM, the starter cut relay
1, and the starter cut relay 2.
Check for an open or short in the BLU/ WHT wire
and connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and
the starter cut relay 2.
Check for an open or short in the BLU wire, BLU/
WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut
relay 1 and the transmission range switch.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the transmission range switch and body ground
(G101).
Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-103).
Check for a faulty transmission range switch (see
page 14-263).
Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1 and the starter
cut relay 2 (see page 22-96).
4-8
ENGINE
Starter Solenoid Test

13. Do the STARTING TEST with the alternator, regulator,
battery & starter tester.
NOTE: The probe is used for starter testing.

20-210).
2. Do the battery removel procedure (see page 22-95).
3. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).
4. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the
positive starter cable (B), the motor wire (C), and the
S terminal connector (D) f r o m the starter.
OTC3131
Does the display indicate cranking voltage greater than

or equal to 8.0 V and is the cur rent draw less than or
equal to 375 A ?
NO-Replace the starter (see page 4-11), or remove
and disassemble it (see page 4-12), and check for
these p r o b l e m s : ^
Drag in the starter armature
Shorted armature w i n d i n g
Excessive drag in the engine
Open circuit in the starter armature commutator
segments
Excessively w o r n starter brushes
Open circuit in the starter brushes
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
Faulty overrunning clutch
14. Remove the starter (see page 4-11), and inspect its
drive gear and the torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
11 N m
(1.1 k g f m , 8.1 Ibf ft)
5. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the

S terminal and the armature housing ( g r o u n d ) . There
should be continuity.
If there is continuity, go to step 6.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
6. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the
S terminal and the M terminal. There should be
continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
7. Install the wire and the connector in the reverse order
of removal.
8. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).
9. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
10. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).
15. Select PCM reset in the PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to

cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP with the HDS.
4-9
Starting System
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the motor wire f r o m the M terminal.
2. Make the connections for this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge as
used on the vehicle).
5. Disconnect the battery f r o m the starter body as

shown. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is
working properly.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the

battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.

7. Reconnect the motor wire to the M terminal.
3. Connect the battery as s h o w n . Make sure you
disconnect the starter motor wire f r o m the
M terminal. If the starter pinion moves out, it is
working properly.
8. Connect the starter to the battery as s h o w n , and

confirm that the motor runs.
4. Disconnect the battery f r o m the M terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid
is working properly.
BATTERY
BODY
(GROUND)
9. If the electric current meets the specification when the

battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working
properly.
Specification
Electric Current:
4-10
90 A or less
Starter Removal and Installation

Removal
Installation

20-210).
1. Install the starter using a new gasket, then install the

lower radiator hose bracket (A) and the dipstick (B).
2. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2kgfm,8.7lbfft)
4. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the

positive starter cable (B) and the S terminal connector
(C) f r o m the starter.
A
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibf ft)
2. Connect the positive starter cable (C) and the

S terminal connector (D) to the starter, then install the
harness clamp (E). Make sure the crimped side of the
ring terminal faces away f r o m the starter w h e n you
connect it.
5. Remove the lower radiator hose bracket (D) and the
dipstick (E).

6. Remove the t w o bolts holding the starter, then

remove the starter.

6. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
properly.
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
2Nm
(0.2 k g f m
11bf ft)
6Nm
(0.6 kgf m
4 Ibf ft)
ARMATURE HOUSING
END C O V E R
8 x 1.25 mm
9Nm
(0.9 k g f m ,
7 Ibf-ft)
STARTER SOLENOID
Apply m o l y b d e n u m
disulfide.
SOLENOID LEVER
IDLER GEAR
greaseKI
Apply m o l y b d e n u m disulfide.
4-12
Brush Holder Removal
Armature Inspection and Test
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-11).
5. Disassemble the starter as s h o w n at the beginning of

this procedure in the Exploded View.
2. Disconnect the motor wire f r o m the M terminal (see

page 4-9), and remove the end cover.
3. Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about halfway
out of its holder. Release the spring to hold it in place.
6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage f r o m contact

with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or
damage, replace the armature.
4. Remove the brush holder assembly (A).
7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is

dirty or burnt, resurface it w i t h an emery cloth or a
lathe to the specifications in step 8, or recondition
with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
(cont'd)
4-13
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
8. Check the commutator diameter with an electronic
digital caliper or dial type caliper. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
10. Use a digital caliper or dial caliper to check the mica

depth (A). If the mica depth is below the service limit,
replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 2 8 . 9 - 2 9 . 0 mm (1.138-1.142 in)
Service Limit:
28.0 mm (1.10 in)
Commutator Mica Depth

Standard (New): 0.50-0.90 mm (0.020-0.035 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)
\\U//
11. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the
segments of the commutator. If there is an open
circuit between any segments, replace the armature.
9. Measure the commutator (A) runout.

If the commutator runout is within the service limit,
check the commutator for carbon dust or brass
chips between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in) max.
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in)
4-14
12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold

a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade
is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is
turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the
armature.
Overrunning Clutch Inspection

14. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
13. Use an o h m m e t e r t o check for continuity between the

c o m m u t a t o r (A) and the armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and the armature shaft (C).
If there is continuity, replace the armature.
15. Hold the overrunning clutch (A), and turn the drive
gear (B) in the direction shown to make sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the drive gear locks in the
opposite direction. If it does not lock, replace the
overrunning clutch assembly.
16. If the starter drive gear is w o r n or damaged, replace

the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not
available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear.
Replace it if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
(cont'd)
4-15
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection
17. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Service Limit:
9.0 mm (0.35 in)
Brush Spring Inspection

19. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the
spring tension at the m o m e n t the spring lifts off the
brush. If it is not within the standard, replace the
brush holder assembly.
Spring Tension
Standard (New): 2 2 . 3 - 2 7 . 3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00
- 6 . 1 3 Ibf)
Starter Brush Holder Test

18. Check for continuity between the ( + ) brushes (A) and
the ( ) brushes (B). If there is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
Planetary Gear Inspection

20. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal ring gear
(B). Replace them if they are w o r n or damaged.
4-16
Starter Reassembly
2 1 . Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about halfway
out of its holder. Release the spring to hold it in place.
ENGINE
23. Install the brush holder assembly. Next pry back each
brush spring again, and push each brush d o w n until it
seats against the commutator, then release the spring
against the end of the brush.
NOTE: To seat the new brushes. Slip a strip of #500 or

#600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn the
armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be
sanded to the same contour as the commutator.
24. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.
22. Install the armature housing (A) and the armature (B)
by aligning the slotted point (C) to the projection (D).
25. Install the starter (see page 4-11).
4-17
Ignition System
IGNITION COIL RELAY
Test, page 22-96
4-18
ENGINE
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
4-19
Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
page 11-226).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing w i t h
this test.
9. A i m the light toward the pointer (A) on the t i m i n g belt

cover and the mark (B) on the crankshaft pulley. Check
the ignition t i m i n g under a no load condition
(headlights, blower fan, rear w i n d o w defogger, and
air conditioner are turned off).
NOTE: The other pointer (C) is not used.
Ignition Timing:
10 2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in N or P
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m

w i t h no load (in N or P) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed (see page 11-325).

7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Connect the timing light to theNo.1 ignition coil
harness.
10. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the specification,

check the cam t i m i n g . If the cam timing is OK, update
the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see
page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ignition system works
properly, and the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the t i m i n g light.
4-20
ENGINE
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation

1. Remove the engine cover.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then

remove the ignition coils (B).
FRONT
0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibf ft)
REAR
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of

removal.
4-21
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs, then inspect the electrodes
and the ceramic insulator.
Burned or w o r n electrodes may be caused by these
conditions:
- Advanced ignition t i m i n g
3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the

center electrode (A) is rounded, or if the spark plug
gap (B) is out of specification. Use only the spark
plugs listed.
NOTE: Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs.
- Loose spark plug
Spark Plug
NGK:
- Plug heat range too hot

- Insufficient cooling
Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:
ILZKR7B-11
Electrode Gap
- Retarded ignition t i m i n g
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed
electrodes
Damaged
gasket
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator
Cracked
insulator
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,

clean the electrode w i t h a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
4-22
4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize c o m p o u n d to the

plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder
head, finger-tight. Torque t h e m to 18 N m (1.8 k g f m ,
13 Ibf-ft).
Charging System
DRIVE BELT
Inspection, page 4-30
Replacement page 4-31
4-23
Charging System
Symptom
Charging system indicator
does not come on with the
ignition switch in ON (II)
Charging system indicator
stays on
Battery discharged
Battery overcharged
4-24
Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 4-26).
1. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-30).

2. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-31).
4. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page
4-26).
1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit (see page 4-28).
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-30).
3. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw w i t h the
ignition switch in LOCK (0), and the key removed. The multiplex
control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn off (sleep mode) for
some models.
4. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
5. Test the battery (see page 22-93).
6. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-31).
2. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit (see page 4-28).
Also check
for
ENGINE
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-OASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

No. 1 (120 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
D1
G20
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
) No. 10
(7.5 A)
) No. 3
(10 A)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

YEL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
i
i
WHT
I
I
I
I
'
RED
I
I
I
I
A48
-Q
A49
XL
G202
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
4-25
Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Check for stored DTCs in the PGM-FI before
troubleshooting the charging system indicator.
13.
Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal

C42 and body ground.
PCM
C O N N E C T O R C (49P)
Does the charging system indicator come on?

n
N O - G o t o step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm
for 1 minute.
2 3 |4|e h
8 9 10
11 1 2
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21 I
22 24
25
26 27 28 1
30 32 33 34
37 38 39
4 0 41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 1 / | 4 6 1 4 7 4 8 4 9
1|
Does the charging system indicator go off?
>< ><
JLALTL
X5)(WHT/BLU)
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to

the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting
(see page 4 - 2 8 ) .
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between

alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal C42.H
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function

procedure (see page 22-334).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-359).B
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function

Does the charging system indicator flash?
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), or repair

the alternator (see page 4 - 3 6 ) .

22-359).
NO-Go to step 7.
10.
Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

page 11-226).
11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
f r o m damage.
12.
14.
Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
4-26

16.
Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 to

body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

r
u
f1
25. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal

C42 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
L (WHT/BLU)
ENGINE
4J
r
_| 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 ^
16 17 18 19
11 12
26
22
25
24
30
32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
JUMPER
WIRE
>< ><
9|10|
20 21 i
27 28
38 39 1
48|49|
ALTL (WHT/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals

Does the charging system indicator come on?

20. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3).
and the PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
23. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
2)
4J

NO-Disconnect the jumper wire, then go to step 19.
u
(1
(WHT/BLU)
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
known-good PCM (see page 11-226), then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away w i t h a
known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).!
NO-Repair open in the wire between alternator 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
C42.B

from damage.
24. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
4-27
Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter Tester OTC3131
Program 888-424-6857
4. Do the CHARGING SYSTEM TEST.

Does the dispaly indicate voltage within 13.5-15.1 V and
amperage 87.5 A or more ?
YES-Go to step 5.
1. Make sure the battery connections are good, and that

the battery is sufficiently charged and in good
condition (see page 22-93).
2. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown.
IMO-lf the voltage is less than 13.5 V, go to alternator

control circuit troubleshooting. If the voltage is over
15.1 V and amperage is less than 87.5 A, replace the
alternator (see page 4-33) or repair the alternator (see
page 4-36).B
5. Check the diode condition on the display.
Dose the display indicate
GOOD?
YES-The diode is OK. Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e d

OTC3131
NO-lf the display indicate BAD, replace the alternator

(see page 4-33) or repair the alternator (see page
4-36), then retest.H
NOTE: If the display indicates N/A, the diode pattern
could not be diagnosed. Repeat the test agein. If N/A
appears repeatedly, replace the alternator.

w i t h no load (in N or P), until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4-28
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting



page 11-226).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with
this test.
/ /
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector

terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the battery.
e
BATTERY
C (WHT/GRN)
u
f1
4j
>> ><
9 10
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
/fÂLTC
(WHT/GRN)

6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high
beam.
3 | 4 | e I B | 7 | 8
16 17 18 19
11 12
24
26
25
22
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
30
40 41 42 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
1| 2
alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM
connector terminal C43.H
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).H
switch to LOCK (0).
f r o m damage.
Is there less than 1 V?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Go to step 8.
switch to LOCK (0).
f r o m damage.
(cont'd)
4-29
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Drive Belt Inspection
13. Check for loose terminals and connections, then

check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
C43 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2.
1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is

cracked or damaged, replace it.

1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110 j
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28
30
3 2 3 3 34
37 38 39 1
40141 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 / | 46147 4 8 | 4 9 |
>< ><
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
C (WHT/GRN)
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair open in the wire between alternator 4P
C43.B
4-30
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) fluid reservor.

3. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator pointer (A) on
the A/C compressor bracket is not beyond the edge of
the indicator (B) on the auto-tensioner. If the pointer is
beyond the indicator, replace the drive belt (see page
4-31).
Drive Belt Replacement

Inspection
1. Set a socket wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner,

and slowly turn the wrench in the direction of the
rotation arrow, then remove the drive belt.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the

A/C switch is OFF. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0).
NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you

must turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) fluid reservor.

3. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator
pointer (A). Start the engine, then check the position
again w i t h the engine idling. If the position of the
indicator moves or fluctuates a lot, do the
auto-tensioner air bleeding (see page 4-33), and
recheck. If the position is still fluctuates, replace the
auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
(cont'd)
4-31
Charging System
Drive Beit Auto-tensioner
Inspection (cont'd)

Replacement
5. Set a socket wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner,

and slowly turn the wrench in the direction of the
rotation arrow.
NOTE:
This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must
turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.
2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).

3. Remove the auto-tensioner.
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N m (7.5 kgf m, 54 Ibfft)
Check the belt for cracks or damage (see page 4-30).

Check for oil leakage f r o m the damper rubber
bellows.
If the tensioner does not move smoothly, or you
hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner
(see page 4-32).
4. Remove the any oil and clean the bolt (A) and the
washer (B). Using new engine oil, lubricate the areas
shown.
: Clean and add new engine oil

A
5. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of

removal.
6. Do the auto-tensioner air bleeding (see page 4-33).
4-32
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Air

Bleeding
Alternator Removal and Installation
Removal
2. Attach a socket wrench to the drive belt

auto-tensioner f r o m above the engine. Slowly, (at
least 3 seconds) compress the auto-tensioner, in the
direction s h o w n , the full length of its stroke, then
slowly (at least 3 seconds) move the auto-tensioner
the opposite direction the full length of its stroke.
Repeat this operation three times.

20-210).
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-94).
3. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).
4. Remove the coolant reservoir (A) and the power
steering (P/S) fluid reservoir (B), then remove the
holder bracket (C).
A
3. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).

6. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and the
positive alternator cable (B) f r o m the alternator.
7. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (C)

f r o m the A/C compressor.
8. Remove the bolt (D) securing the harness holder.
(cont'd)
4-33
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
9. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and the alternator
bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the alternator.
Installation
1. Install the alternator, then tighten the mounting bolt
(A) and the alternator bracket mounting bolt (B).
10x1.25 mm
45 N m
(4.6 kgf m, 33 Ibf ft)
2. Install the bolt (A) securing the harness holder.
3. Connect the A/C compressor clutch connector (B) to

the A/C compressor.
4. Connect the alternator connector (C) and the positive
alternator cable (D) to the alternator. Make sure the
crimped it side of the ring terminal faces away f r o m
the alternator w h e n you connect it.
4-34
6. Install the holder bracket (A), then install the coolant

reservoir (B) and the power steering (P/S) fluid
reservoir (C).
6 x 1.0 mm
7. Install the engine cover (see page 4-21).

8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
page 22-94).
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
FRONT BEARING RETAINER
END COVER
4-36

. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver A t t a c h m e n t 42 x 47 m m 07746-0010300
5. Remove the end cover (A) and the terminal insulator

(B).
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during this

procedure.
Alternator Disassembly
1. Test the alternator and regulator (see page 4-28)

before you remove t h e m .
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-33).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the
pulley locknut w i t h a 10 m m wrench (A) and a 22 m m
wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench.
A
6. Remove the brush holder assembly (A).
(cont'd)
4-37
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove the four through bolts, then remove the rear
housing assembly (A) and the washer (B).
10. Remove the front bearing retainer.
11. Drive out the front bearing w i t h a brass drift and a

hammer.
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to
step 13. Remove the rotor f r o m the drive-end
housing.
9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the

bearing journal surface in the drive-end housing for
seizure marks.
If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor assembly.
If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
4-38
12. Install a new front bearing in the drive-end housing

with a hammer, the driver handle, 15 x 135L, and the
bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 m m .
ENGINE
Rotor Slip Ring Test

14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
07749-0010000
07746-0010300
Alternator Brush Inspection

13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) w i t h a vernier
caliper (B).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder assembly.
If the brush length is OK, go to step 14.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in)
Service Limit:
1.5 mm (0.06 in)
15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, and go to step 16.
If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the
drive-end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N-m
(11.2 k g f - m , 8 1 . 0 l b f f t ) .
17. Remove any grease or any oil f r o m the slip rings.
18. Put the rear housing assembly and the drive-end
housing/rotor assembly together, tighten the four
through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B)
(about 1.6 m m (0.06 in) diameter) to hold them there.
(cont'd)
4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
20. Install the brush holder assembly, and pull out the pin
or drill bit.
2 1 . Install the end cover.

22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by
hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and
w i t h o u t noise.
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-34) and the drive belt
(see page 4-31).
4-40
Cruise Control
4-41
Cruise Control
Symptom
Cruise control cannot be set
Cruise control can be set, but the

cruise main indicator does not
come on
Cruise control can be set, but the

cruise control indicator does not
come on
Vehicle does not accelerate

accordingly w h e n the
resume/accel button is pressed
Set speed does not cancel when

the brake pedal is pressed

the cruise control main button is
pressed

the cancel button is pressed
Set speed does not resume w h e n

the resume/accel button is
pressed (with the cruise control
main switch turned o n , and set
speed temporarily canceled by
pressing the brake pedal)
With the ignition switch in ON (II),

and the lighting switch turned o n ,
the cruise control combination
switch illumination does not
come on
4-42
2. Check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-334).
Test the cruise contol main switch signal input.
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-334).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
(see page 4-46).
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-239).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
(see page 4-46).
Test the cancel switch signal input.
(see page 4-46).
2. Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment (see page 19-6).
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
(see page 4-46).
Check the cruise control combination switch (see
page 4-46).
Also check for

Poor ground G401
Faulty gauge control

module
Faulty gauge control

module
Open circuit, loose or

disconnected terminals:
WHT, GRY
Short to power on the

BRN wire
Faulty brake pedal
position switch
Short to ground power
on the ORN wire

disconnected terminals:
PUR, RED or WHT, GRY
wire
disconnected
terminals: WHT, GRY
Faulty brake pedal
position switch
ENGINE
Circuit Diagram
No. 14(7.5 A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT
CPU
CANH
CANL
DRIVER
DIMMING CIRCUIT
@-AAAi
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
(KJHAA
CRUISE INDICATOR
|C2
|C3
|B18
|B17
RED/
BLK
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
|B26
RED/
BLU
GRN
4S&
THROTTLE BODY
4-43
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test
NOTE: Always make sure that you have the latest Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) software.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does not
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -226).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs (see page 11 -3).
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs, flex
the circuit wires, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested
Brake pedal
position switch
signal
Test condition
Brake pedal pressed,
then released
Transmission
range switch
signal
Shift lever in D and D3
Cruise control
main switch
signal
Cruise control main

button pressed and
released
Set switch
signal
Set/decel button
pressed and released
4-44
Parameter: Desired result

CRUISE BRAKE SW
should indicate OFF
w h e n the brake pedal is
pressed and ON w h e n
the brake pedal is
released.
Possible cause if result is not obtained

Faulty brake pedal position switch
Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
A n open in the wire between the PCM and
the brake pedal position switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
SHIFT/CLUTCH SW
Faulty transmission range switch
should indicate ON in P, A n open in the wire between the PCM and
R, N, 2, and 1 and OFF in
the transmission range switch
D and D3.
PCM and the transmission range switch
Poor ground G101
Faulty cruise control combination switch
CRUISE MASTER
( M A I N ) S W should
A n open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON w h e n the
control module and the cruise control
cruise control main
combination switch
button is pressed and
OFF when the cruise
gauge control module and the cruise
control main button is
control combination switch
released.
A n open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and the
ground
CRUISE SET SW should Faulty cruise control combination switch
indicate ON w h e n the
set/decel button is
pressed and OFF w h e n
combination switch
the set/decel button is
released.
Signal to be tested
Resume switch
signal
Test condition
Resume/accel button
pressed and released
Cancel switch
signal
Cancel button pressed

and released
Cruise control
indicator signal
Start the engine, press

the cruise control
main button switch to
turn it o n , and drive
the vehicle above
25 mph (40 km/h) with
the cruise control set
and cancel the cruise
control
Parameter: Desired result

CRUISE RESUME SW
should indicate ON
when the resume/accel
button is pressed and
OFF when the
resume/accel button is
released.
CRUISE CANCEL SW
should indicate ON
w h e n the cancel button
is pressed and OFF
w h e n the cancel button
is released.
CRUISE INDICATOR
should indicate ON
w h e n the cruise control
is set and OFF w h e n the
cruise control is
canceled.

combination switch
An open in the wire between the gauge
combination switch
Faulty gauge control module
combination switch
4-45
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
There are SRS components located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS
before doing repair or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-170).
2. Disconnect the cable reel sub harness 20P connector.
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table.
If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
cruise control combination switch failure occurred
on the cruise control input test (see page 4-44),
check and repair the wire harness on the switch
circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the cruise control combination switch.
\y
Terminal
Position
\^
10
11 12
r\
r\
Cruise control
main (ON)
Cruise control
main (OFF)
Set/decel
(PRESSED)
r\
Resume/accel
(PRESSED)
r\
Cancel
(PRESSED)
Light (ON)
4-46
r\
\J
\J
o
o
r\
vj
1%
-M-
r\
\J
Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System

4-47

General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures
The term intermittent failure means a system may have
had a failure, but it checks OK now. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at all connectors related
to the circuit that you are troubleshooting.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic

System)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Opens and Shorts

Open and short are c o m m o n electrical terms. A n open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something
works, but not the way it's supposed to.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the PCM. If it does not communicate the DLC
circuit.
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot
data, and download any data f o u n d . Then refer to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions w h e n
the first malfunction was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, and current data, about the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) system.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came with the HDS.
4-48
HDS Clear Command

The PCM stores DTCs about the ACM system even if
there is no electrical power such as w h e n the battery
negative terminal or No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A) fuse are
disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should
be cleared by using the CLEAR COMMAND of the HDS, if
parts are replaced.
The HDS has t w o kinds of clear commands to meet this
purpose. They are DTC clear, and ACM reset. DTC clear
c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be
done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during
troubleshooting.
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the Engine

Mount Control Unit
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003*
Program 888-424-6857
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch codes (B), and connect the codes to a digital
multimeter (C).
The PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC codes,

freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all
specific data about the ACM system.
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
the HDS f r o m the DLC.
ACM Reset
1. Reset the A C M w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
30 seconds.
2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured

tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into
the connector f r o m the wire side until it touches the
end of the wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or
the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector,
and probe the terminals (B) f r o m the terminal side. Do
not force the probe into the connector.
NOTICE
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures
can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.

A
4-49

DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC
P0A14
Detection Item
Front Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction
P0A15
Front Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current
P0AB6
Rear Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction
P0AB7
Rear Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current
P15AB
Engine Mount Control Unit Power Source Circuit Low Voltage
P15AE
Cylinder Pause Signal 1 Malfunction
P15B0
CKP Sensor Signal Malfunction
P15BD
Cylinder Pause Signal 2 Malfunction
P15BE
CMP Sensor Signal Malfunction
P15BF
CMP Sensor Signal Intermittent Interruption
P15C0
CKP Sensor Signal Intermittent Interruption
P16C4
Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck OFF
P16C5
Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck ON
P16C6
Engine Mount Actuator High Voltage During Function Test
U0029
F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
U0100
F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Mount Control Uint-Powertrain Control

Module (PCM))
4-50
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-58)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-59)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-61)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-64)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-67)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-67)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-61)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-70)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-73)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-74)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-75)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-75)
System Description
Overview
The active control engine mount (ACM) system reduces the amount of engine vibration (that creates engine noise)
which is transmitted to the passenger's compartment.
The ACM system consists of the engine mount actuators, the engine mount control unit, and the powertrain control
module (PCM).
The PCM sends the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor information and camshaft position (CMP) sensor information to the
engine mount control unit. The engine mount control unit uses this information to predict the amount of vibration
created by the engine.
The ACM system then uses the engine mount actuators to generate a canceling vibration that operates like the active
noise control (ANC) and reduces the amount of noise and vibration in the passenger's compartment.
The ACM creates a canceling

noise and vibration.
The engine vibrates.
-A
Some of the engine noise and vibration

is canceled and does not transfer to
the passenger's compartment.
4-51

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
t$A I IfcHY
No. 1(120 A)
No. 2 (50 A)
G20
crxx>
-O~\JD
2f
D1
WHT
3AT
0-4
+0
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
ACTIVE CONTROL
) No. 10
ENGINE MOUNT
(ACM) CONTROL
(7.5 A)
5
BOX
CKP
CMP
RED
WHT
CANL
CANH
IGSOL
SOLRLY
IG1
REAR ENGINE
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
SOLFP
SOLRP
SOLFM
SOLRM
SCPC
SCPA
LG
PG
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT
LTBLU
PUR-
DLrv
4-52
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
RELAY
ENGINE
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0A14: Front Engine Mount Actuator
Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0AB6: Rear Engine Mount Actuator
Circuit Malfunction
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and the

appropriate engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal (see table).
DTC
ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL
P0AB6
Rear side
No. 1
Rear side
No.2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No.2
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
rear engine m o u n t actuator.
When testing the engine mount actuator, be sure to
use a VOM capable of reading 0.01 ohms change of
resistance.
Be sure to zero the meter before checking the engine
mount actuator.
If the vehicle has been driven, allow the engine mount
actuator to cool d o w n for about 2 hours before testing.
P0AB6
P0A14
P0A14
WIRE
COLOR
No. 8
WHT
No. 16
RED
No.2
BLU
GRN
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

SOLRP
(WHT)*
SOLFP (BLU)
1
10
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9
ETlSOLRM
8
3 4 5 6 7
15 16
11 12/_U
(GRN)*
S O L F M (RED)
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0A14 and/ or P0AB6*
indicated?
Is there battery
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator.B
6. Disconnect the front engine mount actuator (rear
engine mount actuator)* 2P connector.
voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between the

actuator, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 10.
7. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P

connector.
(cont'd)
4-53

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Check for continuity to body ground between engine
mount control unit 16P connector terminals No. 2 (No.
8)* and No. 16 (No. 9)*.
OSOLRM
(GRN)*
4
10
11 12
14 15
16
S O L F M (RED)
engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 16 (No. 8 and No. 9 ) * , then go to step 14.
N O - G o t o s t e p 12.
12. At the engine mount actuator side, measure the
resistance between front engine mount actuator (rear
engine mount actuator)* 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: Zero-out the meter before testing to adjust the
meter to the test leads.
ENGINE MOUNT ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there about 0.48-0.54 O at 68 F (20 C)?

YES-Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator. If it is OK, replace the engine mount control
unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 14.
NO-Replace the front engine mount (see page 5-22),
or rear engine mount (see page 5-24), then go to step
14.
4-54
14. Reconnect all connectors.

16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
SOLRP
(WHT)*
SOLFP (BLU)

Is DTC POM4 and/ or P0AB6*
indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
DTC P0A15: Front Engine Mount Actuator

Control Circuit Low Current
DTC P0AB7: Rear Engine Mount Actuator
Control Circuit Low Current
ENGINE
7. At the engine m o u n t actuator side, measure the

resistance between front engine m o u n t actuator (rear
engine m o u n t actuator)* 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: Zero-out the meter before testing to adjust the
meter to the test leads.
NOTE:
Information marked w i t h an asterisk O applies to the

rear engine m o u n t actuator.
When testing the engine mount actuator, be sure to
use a V O M capable of reading 0.01 ohms change of
resistance.
Be sure to zero the meter before checking the engine
m o u n t actuator.
If the vehicle has been driven, allow the engine m o u n t
actuator to cool d o w n for about 2 hours before testing.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC POA15 and/ or P0AB7"
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
engine m o u n t control unit and the engine mount
actuator, the engine m o u n t control unit and body
ground (G202J.B
Is there about 0.48-0.54 Q at 68 F (20 C)?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the front engine m o u n t (see page 5-22),
or rear engine m o u n t (see page 5-24), and then go to
step 13.
connector.
9. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
PG (BLK)
It

10
6. Disconnect the front engine m o u n t actuator (rear

engine m o u n t actuator)* 2P connector.
11 12
14 15
16
T
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine m o u n t
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground (G202), then go to step 13.
(cont'd)
4-55

10. Check for continuity between the appropriate engine
mount control unit 16P connector terminal and body
ground (see table).
ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL
DTC
Rear side
No.1
Rear side
No.2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No.2
P0AB7
P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15
ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9
WIRE
COLOR
No. 8
WHT
No. 16
RED
No.2
BLU
GRN
11. Connect appropriate front engine mount actuator

(rear engine mount actuator)* 2P connector terminal
to body ground with a j u m p e r wire (see table).
DTC
P0AB7
P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR TERMINAL
Rear side No. 1
Rear side No. 2
Front side No. 1
Front side No. 2
J U M P E R WIRE
JUMPER WIRE

SOLRP
(WHT)*
SOLFP (BLU)
5
10
11 12
6
14 15
FISOLRM
(GRN)*
8
16
S O L F M (RED)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
NO-Go to step 11.
4-56
WIRE
COLOR
GRN
WHT
PNK
BLU
ENGINE
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate engine

mount control unit 16P connector terminal and body
ground (see table).
ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL
DTC
P0AB7
Rear side
No. 1
Rear side
No. 2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No. 2
P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15
ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9
WIRE
COLOR
No. 8
WHT
No. 16
RED
No. 2
BLU

Is DTC P0A15 and/ or P0AB7*
indicated?
GRN
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

SOLRP
SOLFP (BLU)
(WHT)*
1
5
10
11 12
6 7
14 15
ETlSOLRM
(GRN)*
8
16
SOLFM (RED)
actuator. If it is OK, replace the engine mount control
unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the engine
mount control unit and the engine mount actuator,
then go to step 13.
4-57

DTC P15AB: Engine Mount Control Unit Power
Source Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
11. Measure the voltage between engine mount control

IG1 (YEL)
1
10

Is DTC P16C5
8
11 12
14 15
16
indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for the DTC P16C5.

NO-Go to step 3.
Is DTC P15AB
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
engine mount control unit and body ground (G202).H
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 10 IG
METER (7.5 A) fuse and engine mount control unit 16P
connector terminal No. 5, then go to step 14.
unit16P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
7. Inspect the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box.
1
Is the fuse OK?
NO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the

No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse and engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal (No. 5 or No. 11).
Also replace the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go
to step 14.
8. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit 16P connector.
and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 14.
connector.
4-58
10
YES-Go to step 8.
Are the connections
LG (BLK)
8
4 5 6 7
11 1 2 / 14 15 16
YES-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 3 and body

Is DTC P15AB
indicated?

the engine mount control unit and body ground
(G202), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m still does not go
away, replace the engine mount control unit (see
page 4-77).
DTC P15AE: Cylinder Pause Signal 1

Malfunction
3. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P15AE
indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
engine mount control unit and the PCM.H
connector.
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLIINDER
ACTIVATION TEST w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
4-59

unit 16P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground
during 3 cylinder pause mode.
14. Connect engine mount control unit 16P connector

terminal No. 6 to body ground with a jumper wire.
SCPA (PUR)
SCPA (PUR)
8
10
11 12
10
11 12
14 15
16
16
14 15
JUMPER WIRE

Wire side o1f female terminals
Is there battery

A14 and body ground.
voltage?

the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
replace the engine mount control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 10.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

C S S A M A (PUR)
.|1|2
11
1
22
9 110
4 | 6 | 6 | 7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
/ >< ><
/
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
|40|41 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 l /
48 49
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P)

SCPA (PUR)

go to step 2 1 .
10
11 12
14 15
16
engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal No.
6 and PCM connector terminal A14, then go to step 16.
4-60

control unit 16P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM
connector terminal A14, then go to step 16.
DTC P15B0: CKP Sensor Signal Malfunction
DTC P15C0: CKP Sensor Signal Intermittent

Interruption

ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.
Is DTC P1 SAE indicated?
the engine mount control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see step 2 on page 11-3).
Is DTC P15AE
indicated?

the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated (see page 11-249), substitute a
known-good PCM (see step 2 on page 11-3), and
retest. If the PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m
indicated goes away, replace the original PCM (see
page 11-250J.B
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NOTE:
If PGM-FI system's DTC P0335 and/or P0339 is stored
at the same time as DTC P15B0 and/or P15C0,
troubleshoot P0335 and/or P0339 first, then recheck
for P15B0 and/or P15C0.
Is DTC P15B0 and/ or P15C0
indicated?
engine mount control unit 16P connector and PCM
connector A (49P).
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
step 26.
7. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector (see page
11-247).
(cont'd)
4-61

2
10
I
1
8 c
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 12 / / 14 15

n
2
3 4
10
CKP (GRN)
n
5
11 12
6 7
14 15
9
16
CKP (GRN)
Is there about 5 V?
Is there about 0 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
YES-Replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page

NO-Go to step 20.

11. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 14.

15. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the CKP sensor 3P
connector.
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
CKP (BUL)
J U M P E R WIRE
4-62
F1
J
19. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

terminal A34 and body g r o u n d .
ENGINE
23. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

25. Check for continuity between engine m o u n t control
j]8 9 | 1 0 |
J 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28 i
i
29 30 31 32|33 34 35 36 37 38 39
[40 41
48149
/ >^ ><
/
4
CKPOUT (GRN)
Is there about 5 V?
2
10
I
3 4 5
11 12
I
8 c
7
16
14 15
CKP (GRN)
Y E S - G o to step 3 1 .

engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminal No.
15 and PCM connector terminal A34, then go to step
26.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
21. Disconnect the engine m o u n t control unit 16P

connector.

n
1
3 4
10
n
5 6
11 12
7
14 15
9
16
CKP (GRN)
indicated?

the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
(cont'd)
4-63

3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.
(see page 11-7).
indicated?

the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If the
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and retest. If the
PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m indicated
goes away, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
DTC P15BD: Cylinder Pause Signal 2

Malfunction
Is DTC P15BD
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connector.
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 4 CYLIINDER
4-64

unit 16P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground
during 2 cylinder pause mode.
ENGINE


S C P C (LT BLU)
S C P C (LT BLU)
1
1
10
11 12
14 15
10
11 12
16
14 15
16

Is there battery
voltage?

the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 14.
14. Connect engine mount control unit 16P connector


S C P C (LT BLU)
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P)

1
10
11 12
14 15
16
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
4-65

I
1 C S S A M C (LT BLU)
E-il
J l | 2
11
.i .i YQ.
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
3|4|
/ >< ><
1 22
24
25
I
*=
41
/ l / l 441/|
4 6 L / 48149
g o t o step21.
Is DTC P15BD
indicated?

step 1.
4-66
(see page 11-7).
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 0

Is DTC P15BD
indicated?

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and retest. If the
PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m indicated
goes away, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).B
DTC P15BE: CMP Sensor Signal Malfunction

DTC P15BF: CMP Sensor Signal Intermittent
Interruption
NOTE:
If PGM-FI system's DTC P0365 and/or P0369 is stored
at the same t i m e as DTC P15BE and/or P15BF,
troubleshoot P0365 and/or P0369 first, then recheck
for P15BE and/or P15BF.
ENGINE

CMP (RED)
ft
6
10
11112|/114|15
16

Is there about 5 V?

Is DTC P15BE and/ or P15BF
Indicated?
NO-Go to step 20.
11. Connect CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground with a jumper wire.
engine mount control unit and the PCM.B
CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

engine mount control unit 16P connector and PCM
connector A (49P).
Are the connections
CMP (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
and terminals OK?
step 26.
7. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector (see page

11-246).
(cont'd)
4-67


terminal A35 and body ground.
CMP (RED)
ft
10
11 12
J1I2
14 15
11
16
1
22
3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7
f8
/
/ >< ><
1101
13 14 15 16
19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
40 41
AA\^\/
A
CMPOUT(RED)
46
48 49
Is there about 0 V?

Is there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Gotostep31.

15. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the CMP sensor 3P
connector.

2 1 . Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
CMP (RED)
4
10
5 6 7
14 15
11 12
16
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-68
ENGINE
(see page 11-7).

unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground,


CMP (RED)
Jt
3 4
10
11 12
14 15
16
indicated?

PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), and retest. If the PCM was substituted and
the s y m p t o m indicated goes away, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250)Ji

NO-Go to step 3 1 .
indicated?

the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
4-69

DTC P16C4: Engine Mount Actuator Control
Power Circuit Stuck OFF
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
Is DTC P16C4
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
engine mount control unit and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay.H
5. Inspect the No. 12 A C M (10 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
N O - G o to step 6.
6. Remove the active control engine m o u n t (ACM)
control relay (A) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box.

connector.
4-70

1
10
I
5 6
11
1 2
//
8 9
7
14 15 16
IGSOL(YEL)
S4>
Is the continuity?
10 and the active control engine mount (ACM) control
relay. Also replace the No. 12 A C M (10 A) fuse, then
go to step 20.
IMO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay and
the No. 12 ACM (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 12
A C M (10 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 20.
9. Remove the active control engine m o u n t (ACM)
10. Check the active control engine mount (ACM) control

relay (see page 22-96).
Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control relay
OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the active control engine mount (ACM)
control relay, then go to step 20.
11. Measure the voltage between active control engine
mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal No. 1
and body ground.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T
ENGINE
12. Disconnect the engine m o u n t control unit 16P

connector.
13. Check for continuity between active control engine
and engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal
No. 10.
IG S O L (YEL)
5
Terminal side of
female terminals

16P CONNECTOR
2
10
+ B
i
i
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 1 2 / 1 4 15
IG S O L (YEL)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the active
control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the
No. 12 ACM (10 A) fuse, Also replace the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 14.

control unit 16P connector terminal No. 10 and the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay, then
go to step 20.
15. Measure the voltage between active control engine
and body ground.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
4-71

17. Inspect the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse in the

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the active

control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the No.
10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
NO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
active control engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay and
the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse. Also replace the No.
10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
unit 16P connector terminal No. 11 and active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal
No. 3.
S O L R L Y (BRN)
Terminal side of
female terminals
16P CONNECTOR
2
10
I
I
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
16
14 15
11 12
S O L R L Y (BRN)
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine m o u n t
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 11 and the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay, then
go to step 20.
4-72
Is DTC P16C4
indicated?

the engine mount control unit and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay, then go to step 1.
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
ENGINE
DTC P16C5: Engine Mount Actuator Control

Power Circuit Stuck ON



10
2. Check the ACM UNIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE and ACM

RELAY CONTROL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
11 12
14 15
16
IGSOL (YEL)
Does the ACM UNIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE indicate battery

voltage when the ACM RELAY CONTROL indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
engine m o u n t control unit and the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) control r e l a y . !
4. Remove the active control engine mount (ACM)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between

relay, then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Check for continuity between engine m o u n t control
2
10
8 c)
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 12
14 15
S O L R L Y (BRN)
5. Check the active control engine mount (ACM) control

relay (see page 22-96).
YES-Go to step 6.

relay, then go to step 11.
NO-Replace the active control engine mount (ACM)

control relay, then go to step 11.
NO-Replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page

Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control relay

OK?

connector.
(cont'd)
4-73

Is DTC P16C5
indicated?

the engine mount control unit and the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay, then go to step 1.
DTC P16C6: Engine Mount Actuator High

Voltage During Function Test
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

engine mount control unit, the engine mount
actuator, and body ground (G202).B
4-74
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)

DTC U0100: F-CAN Malfunction (Engine
Mount Control Unit-PCM)
ENGINE
8. Measure the resistance between engine mount

control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12* and
No. 14.
NOTE:
CANL line.
8 c)
5 6 7
11 1 2 ^ 1 415 16
3 4
10
CANL (RED)*
CANH (WHT)
1. Check the MIL on the gauge (see page 11 -3).

Is the MIL on?
Y E S - G o to the PGM-FI system's general

troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ) .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Repair short in the wire between engine mount

control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12* and
No. 14, then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.

Is DTC U0029 and/ or U0100
indicated?

unit 16P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 12)* and body
ground.

7. Disconnect these connectors:
Engine mount control unit 16P.
Gauge control module 32P.
VSA modulator-control unit 36P.
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
5P.
SRSunitA(39P).

engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal
No. 14 (No. 12)* and body ground, then go to step 11.
VTM-4 control unit A (22P) (with VTM-4).
NO-Go to step 10.
TPMS control unit 20P.

PCM connector A (49P).
(cont'd)
4-75

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals A48 (A49)* and engine mount control unit
16P connector terminals No. 14 (No. 12)* individually.
Harsh engine vibrations felt in the passenger's
compartment
2. Check for PGM-FI system DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs are
3T4]
6 | 7
8 9 10
11
13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
37 38
29 30 31 3233 34
I K
40141 y \ / \ 44 \ / \ 46 j ^ j 48149
CANH (WHT)
CANL (RED)
10
11 12
14 15
CANL (RED)
YES-Go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

NO-Go to step 3.
3. Select the ACM in the PGM-FI system, and check for
ACM system's DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs are
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
[hn 8
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
indicated?
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

9
16
NO-Go to step 4.
CANH (WHT)
5. Open the engine hood.

6. Select the ACM TEST in the A C M INSPECTION menu

with the HDS.
7. Do the Fr. ACM SOL OFF w i t h the HDS.
replace the engine mount control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 11.
Does the engine vibration change when you turn the Fr.
ACM SOL OFF?
YES-Turn the Fr. A C M SOL to O N , then go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 8.

control unit 16P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 12)*
and the PCM connector terminal A48 (A49)*, then go
to step 11.
8. Exit the ACM TEST, and select the Fr. ACM SOL.V
ACTIVATION in the ACM INSPECTION menu with the
HDS.
9. Check the front engine mount w i t h your hand.

Does the mount vibrate?
YES-Check the mount for damage. If needed, replace

the front engine mount (see page 5-22). If the mount is
OK, go to step 1 and recheck.

Is DTC U0029 and/ or U0100
indicated?

step 1.
IMO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
4-76
NO-Replace the front engine mount (see page

5-22).
Engine Mount Control Unit

Replacement
10. Do the Rr. ACM SOL OFF with the HDS.
Does the engine vibration change when you turn the Rr.
ACM SOL OFF?

2. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see
page 20-125), and the right kick panel (see page
20-79).
Y E S - T h e ACM system is OK at this time. Check for

other engine mount and other engine problems
caused vibration.

connector (A).
NO-Go to step 11.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
11. Exit the ACM TEST, and select the Rr. ACM SOL.V
ACTIVATION in the A C M INSPECTION menu with the
HDS.
12. Check the rear engine mount with your hand.
Does the mount vibrate?
Y E S - C h e c k the mount for damage. If needed, replace
the rear engine mount (see page 5-24). If the mount is
OK, go to step 1 and recheck.
NO-Replace the rear engine m o u n t (see page 5 - 2 4 ) .
4. Remove the engine mount control unit (B).

5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
4-77
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine maintenance is required)

frontal or side collision, ail SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
steering c o l u m n , center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
5-1
Cylinder Head
6-1
Engine Block
7-1
Engine Lubrication
8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
9-1
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
* Engine Removal
* Engine Installation
Engine Mount Replacement
Front Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Rear Engine Mount Removal and Installation
5-2
5-3
5-11
5-21
5-22
5-24
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Description
Subframe Alignment Pin
Tool Number
070AG-SJAA10S
5-2
Qty
1
Engine Removal
. 2008 V6 Attachment A r m SIL02C000033*
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256
Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019
Front Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016
7. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the

intake air duct (B).
These special tools are available through the Honda

Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
There are SRS components located in this area. Review
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS
before doing repair or service.
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the w i r i n g and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
1. Remove the hood support rod, then use it as shown to
prop the hood in the wide-open position.
8. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).

9. Remove the harness clamps (A), and the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box (B), then remove the
battery base (C).
2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-340).

3. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-28).
4. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).

(cont'd)
5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect the
positive starter cable (B).
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then

disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-348).
11. Disconnect the starter subharness connector.
14. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and

the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B).
12. Remove the shift cable (see page 14-254). Do not bend
the shift cable excessively.
15. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-7).

16. Remove the steering joint cover (see step 8 on page
17-10).
17. Remove the steering joint f r o m the steering gearbox
pinion shaft (see step 11 on page 17-10).
5-4

positive alternator cable (B) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

t w o PCM connectors (B) and the engine wire harness
connector (C).
23. Remove the P/S hose bracket (C) f r o m the rear

cylinder head cover.
(cont'd)
Engine Assembly
24. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap.
33. Separate the tie-rod end bail joints f r o m the knuckles

25. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
34. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all

precision-finished surfaces w i t h new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
26. Remove the front wheels.

28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
29. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see
page 14-209).
35.4WD model: Remove the transfer assembly (see page

14-213).
36. Disconnect the P/S hose (A) and the ATF cooler hoses
(B), then plug the lines and the hoses.
30. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).

3 1 . Remove the front subframe stiffener.
37. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
32. Remove exhaust pipe A.
38. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

39. Remove the radiator (see page 10-13).
5-6
40. Disconnect the heater hoses (A).
42. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) f r o m the rear

cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to 2008 V6
attach the attachment arm (SIL02C000033).
4 1 . Remove the connector bracket (A) f r o m the front

cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach the
engine hanger balance bar front arm.
43. Remove the cowl top side cover (A) f r o m both sides.
A
AAR-T1256
44. With the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) on its

side, insert the hanger beam (B) through the opening,
then rotate it over the damper (C).
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
45. Lift and support the engine w i t h the engine support
hanger (AAR-T1256) and the engine hanger balance
bar (VSB02C000019). Attach the front arm (A) to the
front cylinder head w i t h a spacers (B) and the bolt (10
x 1.25 m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) (D) to the rear cylinder head w i t h a
bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then attach the rear arm (F) to
the 2008 V6 attachment a r m .

49. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A),
then remove the A/C compressor (B) w i t h o u t
disconnecting the A/C hoses. Do not bend the A/C
hoses excessively.
50. Remove the lower transmission m o u n t bolts (A) and

the ground cable (B).
A _
46. Tighten the w i n g nut (G) by hand to lift and support

the engine/transmission.
47. Disconnect the front engine m o u n t actuator
connector (A) and the harness clamps (B). Remove
the front engine mount stop (C), then remove the front
engine m o u n t bolt (D).
5-8
51. Remove the rear engine mount bolts (A) and

disconnect the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector
(B).
54. Remove the six 12 x 1.25 m m bolts (A), (B) securing

the subframe stiffeners (C), the four subframe
mounting bolts (D), and the stiffeners, then lower the
front subframe (E).
52. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to

the subframe by hanging the belt (A) over the front of
the subframe (B), then secure the belt with its stop (C).

56. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the engine hook (B) and the
transmission hook (C), then lift the engine/
transmission until it is securely supported by the
chain hoist, and remove the engine support hanger
and the engine hanger balance bar.
53. Raise the jack and line up the slots on the front
subframe adapter arms with the bolt holes on the jack
base, then securely attach t h e m with four bolts.
B
(cont'd)
5-9
Engine Assembly
57. Remove the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket.
58. Check that the engine/transmission is completely free

of the vacuum hoses, the fuel hoses, the coolant
hoses, and electrical w i r i n g .
59. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about 150 m m
(6 in). Check once again that all the hoses and the
electrical w i r i n g are disconnected and free f r o m the
engine/transmission, then lower it all the w a y and
support it.
60. Disconnect the chain hoist f r o m the
engine/transmission.
61. Raise the vehicle, and remove the
engine/transmission f r o m under the vehicle.
5-10
Engine installation
S p e c i a l T o o l s Required
. 2008 V6 Attachment Arm SIL02C000033*

Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019*
Front Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016*
Subframe Alignment Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
O : These special tools are available through Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
There are SRS components located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and precautions and
procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS before doing repair or service.
1. Install the engine mount brackets and the accessory brackets, then tighten their bolts to the specified torque.
P / S PUMP BRACKET
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 m m
88 N m
(9.0 k g f m , 65 Ibfft)
Replace.
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
Replace.
A / C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine/transmission under the vehicle.
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully lower
the vehicle until the engine/transmission are properly
positioned in the engine compartment. Make sure the
vehicle is not resting on any part of the
engine/transmission. Support the
engine/transmission w i t h a chain hoist (A) and
carefully raise the engine/transmission into place.
3. Remove the cowl top side lid (A) f r o m both sides.

AAR-T1256
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in

the sequence given in the following steps. Failure to
f o l l o w this sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce engine mount life.

5-12
5, Lift and support the engine with the engine support

front cylinder head with several spacers (B) and the
bolt (10 x 1.25 m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment
arm (SIL02C000033) (D) to the rear cylinder head w i t h
a bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then attach the rear arm (F) to
the 2008 V6 attachment arm.
9. Using the subframe adapter (VSB20C000016) and a

jack, raise the front subframe up t o the body.
10. Loosely tighten the left rear subframe mounting bolt
(A); insert the 15.7 m m side of the subframe
alignment pin (070AG-SJAA1 OS) through the
positioning hole (B) on the rear stiffened through the
positioning hole (C) on the subframe, and into the
positioning hole (D) on the body, then tighten the left
rear subframe mounting bolt.
117 N m (11.9 k g f m ,
86 Ibfft)
Replace.
76 Ibfft)
Replace.
11. Loosely tighten the right rear subframe mounting bolt

with the same procedure as the left rear using the
subframe alignment p i n .
12. Loosely tighten the right and left front subframe

mounting bolts (A) and stiffener mounting bolts (B).
7. Install the new m o u n t i n g bolts into the upper half of

the side engine m o u n t bracket. Tighten the bolts to
the specified torque.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
B
12x1.25 m m
A
14x1.5 mm
Replace.
8. Remove the chain h o i s t then raise the vehicle on the

lift.
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
13. Tighten the rear-driver's side subframe mounting bolt
(A) to the specified torque.
B
14x1.5 mm
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
(11.9 k g f m , 86 Ibfft)
1 4 x 1 . 5 mm Replace.
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
14. Tighten the rear-passenger's side subframe mounting

bolt (B) to the specified torque.
15. Tighten the front subframe mounting bolts (C) to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Check all of the front subframe mounting bolts,
and retighten if necessary.
16. Tighten the front and rear stiffener mounting bolts (D)
to the specified torque.
NOTE: Before tightening the stiffener mounting bolts,
check that the positioning holes and slot are aligned
using the subframe alignment pin.
17. Remove the jack and the subframe adapter.
19. Remove the engine support hanger, the engine
hanger balance bar, and the 2008 V6 attachment a r m ,
then install the cowl top side lids on both sides.
5-14
2 1 . Tighten the rear engine m o u n t bolts (A), and connect

the rear engine mount actuator connector (B).
42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
22. Tighten the lower transmission mount bolts (A) and

the ground cable (B).
23. Install the A/C compressor (A), then connect the A/C
compressor clutch connector (B).
26. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket, then retighten t h e m to the
specified torque.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

25. Tighten the front engine mount bolt (A), then install
the front engine mount stop (B). Connect the front
engine m o u n t actuator connector (C) and the harness
clamps (D).
27. Install the radiator (see page 10-13).

29. Connect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
30. Install the power steering (P/S) hose (A) and the ATF
cooler hoses (B).
35. Install the front subframe stiffener using new bolts.
NOTE: Check the installation location of the ATF

cooler hose clamps (see page 14-245).
Replace.
36. Install the splash shield (see page 20-225).

37. Install the front wheels.
3 1 . 4WD model: Install the transfer assembly (see page
14-215).
32. Wipe the driveshaft clean. Install a new set ring on the
end of each driveshaft, then install the driveshafts
(see page 16-18). Make sure each ring clicks into place
in the differential and the intermediate shaft.

39. Install the connector bracket (A) to the front cylinder
head.
33. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints to the knuckles (see
step 3 on page 18-16).
34. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets (B) and new
self-locking nuts (C). Tighten the nuts to the specified
torque.
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N m (5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
5-16
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
40. Install the harness clamp bracket (A) to the rear

cylinder head.
42. Install the P/S p u m p outlet hose (A) using a new

O-ring (B), and install the P/S p u m p inlet hose (C).
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
41. Connect the heater hoses (A).
43. Install the P/S hose bracket (D) to the rear cylinder
head cover.
45. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A) and the engine wire harness connector
(B), then install the harness clamps (C).
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembly
46. Install the PCM cover (A).
5 1 . Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the

evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B).
48. Install the steering joint to the steering gearbox pinion

shaft (see step 4 on page 17-12).
53. Install the shift cable (see page 14-254).
49. Install the steering joint cover (see step 6 on page

17-13).
50. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9).
5-18
54. Connect the starter subharness connector.
56. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
clamps (B) and the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
box (C).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
55. Connect the positive starter cable (A), then install the
harness clamps (B).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 7.0 Ibfft)
57. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).

58. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the
breather pipe (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw of the hose band
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) w i t h the mark
(E) painted on the hose band. If y o u tighten the screw
over the mark, replace the hose band.
59. Install the engine cover (see page 4-21).

6 1 . Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
(cont'd)
5-19
Engine Assembly
62. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leaks at any point in the fuel line.
63. Refill the engine w i t h recommended engine oil (see
page 8-10).
64. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF (see page 14-209).
65. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the
A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission
range switch.
66. Refill the reservoir w i t h power steering fluid (see page
17-28).
67. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see step 11 on
page 10-7).
68. Do the power steering system bleeding procedure
69. Do the cooling system bleeding procedure (see step
13 on page 10-8).
70. Check for fluid leaks.
7 1 . Do the PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
72. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
73. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
74. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-325).
75. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
76. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
5-20
Engine Mount Replacement

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m ,
40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m ,
28 Ibfft)
Replace.
12x1.25 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 m m
42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
FRONT ENGINE MOUNT
LOWER TRANSMISSION
MOUNT
5-21
Engine Assembly
Front Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the radiator (see page 10-13).
2. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block
under the engine/transmission.
connector (A).
4. Remove the front engine m o u n t stop (B), then remove

the front engine mount bolt (C).
5-22
5. Remove the front engine m o u n t (A).
Installation
3. Tighten the front engine m o u n t bolt (A), then install

the front engine m o u n t stop (B).
1. Install the front engine m o u n t (A).
2. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.
4. Connect the front engine m o u n t actuator connector

(C).
5. Install the radiator (see page 10-13).
5-23
Engine Assembly
Rear Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic
converter (rear WU-TWC) (see page 11-379).
2. Remove the heat shield.
5. Remove the rear engine mount stop (B), then remove

the rear engine mount bolt (C).
5-24
6. Remove the rear engine m o u n t (A).
Replace.
2. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.

3. Tighten the rear engine m o u n t bolt (A), then install the
rear engine m o u n t stop (B).
4. Connect the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector

(C).
5-25
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Engine Compression Inspection
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arm Test
Valve Clearance Adjustment
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Timing Belt Inspection
Timing Belt Removal
Timing Belt Installation
Timing Belt Replacement
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
Cylinder Head Removal
Camshaft Replacement
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
Camshaft Inspection
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Valve Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection
Valve Guide Replacement
Valve Seat Reconditioning
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal,
and Pulley Installation
Cylinder Head Installation
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car
Sealing Bolt Installation
Front Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Replacement
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Replacement
6-2
6-3
6-7
6-8
6-10
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-18
6-22
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-30
6-34
6-37
6-39
6-39
6-41
6-43
6-44
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-49
6-51
6-53
6-54
6-57
6-61
6-61
6-62
6-62
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
070AJ-001A101
07742-0010100
07757-PJ1010A
07AAJ-PNAA101
07AAJ-R70A200
07GAF-SD40330
07HAH-PJ7A100
07JAA-001020A
07JAB-001020B
07MAB-PY3010A
07PAD-0010000
Description
VCM Air Adapter
Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 m m
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
Air Pressure Regulator
VTEC Air Stop Tool B
Ball Joint Remover/Installer
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m
Socket, 19 m m
Handle, 6-25-660L
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset
Stem Seal Driver
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RUBBER S E A L S
FRONT UPPER COVER

SIDE ENGINE MOUNT
BRACKET
REAR UPPER COVER
PULLEY BOLT
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal, page 6-14
Installation, page 6-14
REAR CAMSHAFT
PULLEY
TIMING BELT A D J U S T E R
TIMING BELT
DRIVE PULLEY
AUTO-TENSIONER
IDLER PULLEY BOLT
TIMING BELT
Removal, page 6-16
FRONT CAMSHAFT
PULLEY
TIMING BELT STOPPER
TIMING BELT
GUIDE PLATE
Installation, step 10 on page 6-20
(cont'd)
6-3
Cylinder Head
HEAD COVER G A S K E T
REAR CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Removal, page 6-29
CYLINDER HEAD B O L T S
FRONT CYLINDER
HEAD COVER
Removal, page 6-28
COOLANT
SEPARATOR
HEAD COVER
GASKET
DOWEL PINS
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD

Removal, page 6-34
O-RING
CYLINDER HEAD G A S K E T
OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE
COOLANT SEPARATOR
DOWEL PINS
FRONT
VALVE COTTERS
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING
SPRING RETAINER
ROCKER ARM A S S E M B L Y
Variable Cylinder Management
Rocker A r m T e s t , page 6-8
Rocker A r m Assembly Removal, page 6-39
Rocker A r m and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-41
Rocker A r m and Shaft Inspection, page 6-43
O-RING
CAMSHAFT
T H R U S T COVER
V A L V E SPRING S E A T
INJECTOR B A S E
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

Removal, page 6-47
E X H A U S T V A L V E GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-49
GASKET
Replace.
CAMSHAFT
SEALING BOLT
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-34
CAMSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation - In Car, page 6-61
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-47
INTAKE V A L V E
Removal, page 6-47
(cont'd)
6-5
Cylinder Head
REAR
ROCKER ARM A S S E M B L Y
Rocker Arm T e s t , page 6-8
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal, page 6-40
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection, page 6-43
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE.
XgS
SEAL
\ ^
Removal, page 6-47
VALVE COTTERS
SPRING RETAINER
^ri|P
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING
E X H A U S T V A L V E GUIDE
CAMSHAFT
V A L V E SPRING S E A T
CYLINDER HEAD ^
Removal, page 6-34
CAMSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation - In Car, page 6-61
WASHER
SEALING B O L T S
installation, page 6-61
INTAKE V A L V E
Removal, page 6-47
6-6
INJECTOR B A S E
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-47
Engine Compression Inspection

NOTE: After the inspection, you must reset the
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM
will continue to stop the fuel injectors f r o m operating.
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature
(cooling fan comes on).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .
13. If the compression is not within specifications, check

the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
Incorrect valve clearance
Confirmation of cam t i m i n g
Damaged or w o r n cam lobes
Damaged or w o r n valves and seats

Damaged cylinder head gaskets
Damaged or w o r n piston and cylinder bore

and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu w i t h the HDS.
8. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
Damaged or w o r n piston rings
14. Remove the compression gauge f r o m the spark plug

hole.
15. Install the six spark plugs.
16. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
17. Select PCM reset (see page 11-3) in the PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP
with the HDS.
9. Remove the six spark plugs.

10. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole.
11. Step on the accelerator pedal to open the throttle

fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor, and
measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
2
930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm ,135 psi)

12. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.
Maximum Variation:
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi)
2
6-7
Cylinder Head
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arm Test
VCM Air Adapter 070AJ-001A101
. VTEC Air Stop Tool B 07AAJ-R70A200
Air Pressure Regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn
the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove the six spark plugs.
3. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-28).
4. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Make sure that
the intake primary rocker arm (A) and the intake
secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected
by the pistons and that the intake primary rocker arm
and the intake secondary rocker arm should move
together.
5. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Make sure that

the exhaust primary rocker arm (A) and the exhaust
secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected
by the pistons and that the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm should
move together.
If the exhaust primary rocker arm moves
independently, remove the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker
arms move smoothly. If any exhaust rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and the
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then retest.
If the exhaust primary rocker arm and the exhaust
secondary rocker arm move together, go to step 6.
If the intake secondary rocker arm moves

independently, remove the intake primary rocker
arm and the intake secondary rocker arm as an
arms move smoothly. If any intake rocker arm
If the intake primary rocker arm and the intake
secondary rocker arm move together, go to step 5.
6. If necessary steps 4 and 5 for No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and

No. 4 cylinders. When the rocker arms pass the test,
go to step 7.
7. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 689 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm
, 100 psi).
8. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-10).
6-8
9. Remove the sealing b o l t then install the VCM air

adapter (A) to the inspection hole and install the VTEC
air stop tool B (B), then connect the air pressure
regulator (C) as s h o w n .
11. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the

crankshaft pulley clockwise. The intake secondary
rocker arm (A) should move independently of the
intake primary rocker arm (B).
If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move
independently, remove the intake primary rocker
arm and the intake secondary rocker arm as an
arms move smoothly. If any intake rocker arm
FRONT
If the intake secondary rocker arm moves

independently, go to step 12.
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
5 5 0 - 6 9 0 kPa ( 5 . 6 - 7 . 0 k g f / c m , 8 0 - 1 0 0 psi)
2
(cont'd)
6-9
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
12. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the
crankshaft pulley clockwise. The exhaust primary
rocker arm (A) should move independently of the
exhaust secondary rocker arm (B).
If the exhaust primary rocker arm does not move
independently, remove the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm as an
arms move smoothly. If any exhaust rocker arm
If the exhaust primary rocker arm moves
independently, go to step 13.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No.
4 cylinders. When the rocker arms pass the test, go to
step 14.
14. Remove the air pressure regulator, the VCM air
adapter, and the VTEC air stop tool B.
15. Tighten the sealing bolt to 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft).
16. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-30).
17. Install the six spark plugs.
6-10
Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to
the data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. Adjust the valve
clearance only w h e n the engine coolant temperature is
less than 100 F (38 C).
1. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-28).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align
the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1
piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
3. Select the correct feeler gauge for the valve clearance

you are going to check.
Valve Clearance
Intake:
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 mm (0.008-0.009 in)
Exhaust: 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting

screw and the end of the valve stem on the No. 1
cylinder and slide it back and f o r t h ; you should feel a
slight amount of drag.
INTAKE
REAR
EXHAUST
No. 1
No. 2
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 3
INTAKE
FRONT
INTAKE
No. 4
No. 5
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 6
EXHAUST
(cont'd)
6-11
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. If you feel too much or t o o little drag, loosen the
locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the drag on
the feeler gauge is correct.
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)

on the front upper cover w i t h the No. 4 piston TDC
mark (B) o n the front camshaft pulley.
INTAKE
8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance o n

No. 4 cylinder.
mark (B) o n the front camshaft pulley.
6. While holding the adjusting screw w i t h the screw

driver, tighten the locknut, then recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
Specified Torque
No. 1, No. 2,No. 3 , and No. 4 cylinders:
20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
No. 5 and No. 6 cylinders:
14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
6-12
10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance o n

the No. 2 cylinder.

mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC
12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on

No. 5 cylinder.

the No. 6 cylinder.


No. 3 cylinder.
6-13
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
. Handle, 6-25-660L 07JAB-001020B
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A or equivalent
Removal
2. Remove the right front wheel.
5. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and the
holder attachment (B).
A
07JAB-001020B
07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)
6. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket (C)

and a breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.
6-14
Installation
1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys (A), the
crankshaft (B), the bolt (C), and the washer (D).
Lubricate w i t h new engine oil as s h o w n .
X: Remove any oil
O: Clean
# : Lubricate with new engine oil
Timing Belt Inspection

2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt. Do
not use an impact wrench.
1. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).

2. Remove the front upper cover.
-1. Hold the pulley w i t h the holder handle (A) and the
holder attachment (B). Tighten the bolt to 64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft) w i t h a torque wrench and a
19 m m socket (C).
-2. Mark the bolt head (D) and the crankshaft pulley (E)
as s h o w n , then tighten the bolt an additional 60
(The mark on the bolt head lines up with the mark
on the crankshaft pulley).
0
A
07JAB-001020B
07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)
3. Inspect the t i m i n g belt for cracks and oil or coolant

contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked, or is
contaminated w i t h oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil or
solvent that gets on the belt.
NOTE: If there is any leakage, repair t h e m before
replacing the belt.

5. Install the right front wheel.
6-15
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal
1. Turn the crankshaft so the white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
3. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right

front wheel.
5. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
6. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block
under the oil pan.
7. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the upper
half of the side engine m o u n t bracket (B).
2. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC)

mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the pointer
(B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
pulley mark.
8. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).

9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).
6-16
10. Remove the lower cover.
12. Thread the battery clamp bolt as s h o w n to hold the

timing belt adjuster in its current position. Tighten it
by hand, do not use a wrench.
11. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts f r o m the

battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
13. Remove the t i m i n g belt guide plate (A).
(cont'd)
6-17
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
14. Remove the lower half of the side engine m o u n t
bracket.
Timing Belt Installation

NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a used
t i m i n g belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the
t i m i n g belt replacement procedure (see page 6-22).
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, the t i m i n g belt guide
plate, and the upper and lower covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to top dead center
(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the
timing belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.
15. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and the idler pulley
(B), then remove the t i m i n g belt. Discard the idler
pulley bolt.
6-18
3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC

marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers
(B) on the back covers.
FRONT
6. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counterclockwise sequence

starting w i t h the drive pulley. Take care not to
damage the t i m i n g belt during installation.
-1.
-2.
-3.
-4.
-5.
-6.
Drive pulley (A)

Idler pulley (B)
Front camshaft pulley (C)
Water p u m p pulley (D)
Rear camshaft pulley (E)
Adjusting pulley (F)
D
7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
4. Loosely install the idler pulley w i t h a new idler pulley

bolt so the pulley can move but does not come off.
5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t i m i n g belt
cannot be installed, do the t i m i n g belt replacement
(cont'd)
6-19
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.
10. Install the t i m i n g belt guide plate as s how n .
9. Install the lower half of the side engine mount bracket.
11. Install the lower cover.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Replace.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
6-20
12. Install the front upper cover (A) and the rear upper
cover (B).
16. Check the camshaft pulley marks.

pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step
17.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove
the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16) and repeat steps 2
through 16.
FRONT
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).

14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about six turns clockwise
so the t i m i n g belt positions itself on the pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines
up w i t h the pointer (B).
REAR
(cont'd)
6-21
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount bracket
(A), and tighten the new mounting bolts (B), then
tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (C).
Timing Belt Replacement

NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of a
new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer to
the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-18).
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-16).
2. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, t i m i n g belt guide plate,
and the upper and lower covers.
timing belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
18. Install the ground cable (D).

19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
2 1 . Install the right front wheel.
6-22

marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers

6. Remove the auto-tensioner.
FRONT
7. Align the holes on the rod and the housing of the

auto-tensioner.
8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the

auto-tensioner. Insert a 2.0 m m (0.08 in) pin through
the housing and the rod.
NOTE: The compression pressure should not exceed
9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 Ibf).
(cont'd)
6-23
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the auto-tensioner.
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place.
12. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counterclockwise sequence

starting with the drive pulley.
-1.
-2.
-3.
-4.
-5.
-6.
Drive pulley (A)

Idler pulley (B)
Front camshaft pulley (C)
Water p u m p pulley (D)
Rear camshaft pulley (E)
Adjusting pulley (F)
D
10. Thread in the battery clamp bolt as shown to hold the

timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not use a
wrench.
13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler pulley
bolt so the pulley can move but does not come off.
6-24
14. Remove the pin f r o m the auto-tensioner.
17. Install the t i m i n g belt guide plate as s h o w n .
18. Install the lower cover.
16. Install the lower half of the side engine mount bracket.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and the rear upper
cover (B).
23. Check the camshaft pulley marks.

pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step
24.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove
the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16) and repeat steps 3
through 22.
FRONT
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).

2 1 . Rotate the crankshaft pulley about six turns clockwise
so the t i m i n g belt positions itself on the pulleys.
22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines
up w i t h the pointer (B).
REAR
6-26
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement

24. Install the upper half of the side engine mount bracket
(A), and tighten the new mounting bolts (B), then
tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (C).
1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).

3. Remove the auto-tensioner (see step 6 on page 6-23).
4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the t i m i n g belt
adjuster (B) and the collar (C).
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
25. Install the ground cable (D).

26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
5. Install the t i m i n g belt adjuster in the reverse order of

removal.
6. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).
28. Install the right front wheel.

6-27
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Drive Pulley
Replacement
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
Front
2. Remove the timing belt stopper (A), then remove the

t i m i n g belt drive pulley (B) and the key (C).
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).

2. Remove the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) f r o m
the front cylinder head.
3. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor 1 connector (A), the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector (B), the front secondary heated
oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S) connector (C),
the front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D),
the rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector (E), the front rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (F) the harness clamp (G) securing the
harness holder, and remove the dipstick (H).
3. Inspect the t i m i n g belt drive pulley and the key for

damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the
t i m i n g belt drive pulley and the key.
4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley and the key,
then install the timing belt stopper.
6-28
Rear
2. Remove the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) f r o m
the rear cylinder head.
4. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
hose bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34) w i t h its hoses
connected.
9. Disconnect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch

connector (A), the rocker arm oil control solenoid B
(BANK 1) connector (B), the rocker arm oil control
solenoid A (BANK 1) connector (C), the rear air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 connector (D), the rear secondary
heated oxygen sensor 2 (secondary H02S) connector
(E), and the harness clamps (F), then remove the
harness holder (G).
5. Remove the harness holder mounting bolts (A) and

the engine ground cable bolt (B).
10. Remove the rear cylinder head cover.
E ~
B/
6. Disconnect the three injector connectors (C) and the

t w o harness clips (D).
7. Remove the engine ground cable (E) and disconnect
the breather hose (F).
8. Remove the harness (G) f r o m the upper cover.
6-29
Cylinder Head
Front
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal is
damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the
cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover
gasket is seated securely.
A
4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the rocker

shaft holder and the cylinder head.
5. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
towel.
6-30
6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker shaft
holder mating surface (A). Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
7. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the front cylinder head cover (B).
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the cylinder head cover.
11. Connect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)

sensor 1 connector (A), the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector (B), the front secondary heated
oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S) connector (C),
the front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D),
the rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector (E), the front rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (F) and the harness clamp (G) securing the
harness holder, and install the dipstick (H).
12. Install the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) to the
front cylinder head.
8. Inspect the spark plug seals for damage.
13. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
9. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
10. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step
torque all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9
Ibfft).
(cont'd)
6-31
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation (cont'd)
Rear
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal is
damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the
cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover
gasket is seated securely.

5. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
towel.
6-32
6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

holder mating surface (A). Install the component
NOTE:
7. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the rear cylinder head cover (B).
NOTE:
w i t h oil.
installing the cylinder head cover.
11. Connect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch

connector (A), the rocker arm oil control solenoid B
(BANK1) connector (B), the rocker arm oil control
solenoid A (BANK 1) connector (C), the rear air fuel
ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D), the rear secondary
heated oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S)
connector (E), and the harness clamps (F), then install
the harness holder (G).
A
8. Inspect the spark plug seals for damage.

9. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
10. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step
tighten all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9
Ibfft).
(cont'd)
6-33
Cylinder Head
(cont'd)
12. Tighten the harness holder mounting bolt (A).
Cylinder Head Removal

NOTE:
surfaces.
-C
To avoid damaging the w i r i n g and terminals, unplug

connector portion.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.9 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.9 Ibfft)
13. Install the engine ground cable (B) and connect the
breather hose (C), then install the harness (D) to the
upper cover.
14. Reconnect the three injector connectors (E) and the
t w o harness clips (F).
15. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
hose bracket (see step 26 on page 6-60).
Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the

data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. To avoid
damaging the cylinder head, wait until the engine
coolant temperature drops below 100 F (38 C) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
20-210).
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
6. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p (A) and the
bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket (C).

17. Install the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) to the
rear cylinder head.
7. Remove the alternator (see page 4-33).

10. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
6-34
11. Disconnect the following engine wire harness

connectors and wire harness clamps f r o m the
cylinder head:
14. Remove the connector bracket (A) from the front

cylinder head.
Six injector connectors

Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
Front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Rear air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1 (connector
Front secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2 )
(secondary H02S) connector
Rear secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2 )
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 1)
connector
connector

cylinder head.
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (BANK 1)

connector
Knock sensor connector
12. Remove the front w a r m up three w a y catalytic
converter (front WU-TWC) (see page 11-379) and the
rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter (rear
WU-TWC) (see page 11-380).
16. Remove the injector bases (see page 9-6).

17. Remove the water passage (see page 10-11).
(cont'd)
6-35
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
18. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and the back covers
(B).
FRONT
20. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage,

loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat
the sequence until all the bolts are loosened.
FRONT
REAR
19. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28).
2 1 . Remove the cylinder head.
6-36
Camshaft Replacement
Front
11. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the

camshaft (B).

20-210).
5. Disconnect the radiator hoses (A).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft)
12. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil to
the journals and cam lobes.
13. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft
pulley mounting bolt, then install the front camshaft
pulley (see step 13 on page 6-55).
6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve

(see page 11-394).
7. Remove the EGR valve stud bolts (A).
14. Install the rocker arm assembly (see step 11 on page

6-54), then tighten the mounting bolts.
15. Install the timing belt (see page 6-18).
16. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-10).
17. Install the EGR valve stud bolts.
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
18. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-394).

19. Connect the radiator hoses.
23. Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6)
and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the
heater valve open.
pattern lean procedure (see page 11-5).

9. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39).
10. Remove the front camshaft pulley (see page 6-36).
(cont'd)
6-37
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the rear
camshaft (B).

3. Remove the intake air duct (see step 7 on page 5-3).
11. Install the rear camshaft in the reverse order of

removal. Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new
engine oil to the journals and the cam lobes.
pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 13 on page 6-56).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly (see step 11 on page
6-54), then tighten the mounting bolts.
16. Install the heater hoses and the purge joint bracket.
17. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-350), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover.
18. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).
19. Install the intake air duct (see step 58 on page 5-19).
20. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
leakage at any point in the fuel line.
2 1 . Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6),
and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the
heater valve open.
9. Remove the rear camshaft pulley (see page 6-36).
6-38
22. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure

(see page 11-5).
Cylinder Head Inspection for

Warpage
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34).
Front
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-44).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along

the edges, and three ways across the center.
2. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).

A
If warpage is less than 0.05 m m (0.002 in), cylinder

head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 m m (0.002 in) and 0.2
m m (0.008 in), resurface the cylinder head.
M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in) based
on a height of 121 m m (4.76 in).
Cylinder Head Height
Standard (New):
120.95-121.05 m m
( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4 . 7 6 6 in)
3. Remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts, the

rocker shaft holder mounting bolts, and the rocker
arm assembly.
- 1 . Loosen the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts in sequence
t w o turns at a t i m e , to prevent damaging the valves
or the rocker arm assembly.
-2. When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not
remove the rocker shaft bridge m o u n t i n g bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts. The bolts
will keep the rocker arms on the shafts.
(cont'd)
6-39
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal (cont'd)
Rear
2. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws (A).
A
3. Remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts, the

rocker shaft holder mounting bolts, and the rocker
arm assembly.
- 1 . Loosen the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts in sequence
t w o turns at a time, to prevent damaging the valves
or the rocker arm assembly.
-2. W h e n removing the rocker arm assembly, do not
remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts. The bolts
will keep the rocker arms on the shafts.
6-40
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly

Front
NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-43).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the
rocker arms, the rocker shaft bridge, and the rocker shaft holder on the shaft.
If the rocker shaft cannot be removed or installed by hand, remove or install the rocker shaft by heating the rocker
shaft bridge.
Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker arms
have been installed.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply new engine oil to all contact points and
bearing surfaces.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware f r o m the new rocker arm assembly.
Never remove any of the circlips that retain the lost motion assemblies in the rocker shaft bridge. The circlips are not
available separately, and are factory installed in the rocker shaft bridge. To remove the lost motion assemblies, first
remove the rocker shafts and the rocker arms.
(cont'd)
6-41
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
Rear
NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-43).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the
rocker arms, the rocker shaft bridge, and the rocker shaft holder on the shaft.
If the rocker shaft cannot be removed or installed by hand, remove or install the rocker shaft by heating the rocker
shaft bridge.
Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker arms
have been installed.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply new engine oil to all contact points and
bearing surfaces.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware f r o m the new rocker arm assembly.
Never remove any of the circlips that retain the lost motion assemblies in the rocker shaft bridge. The circlips are not
available separately, and are factory installed in the rocker shaft bridge. To remove the lost motion assemblies, first
remove the rocker shafts and the rocker arms.
6-42

2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-41).
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and

check it for an out-of-round condition.
IMo.1, IMo.2, No.3, and No.4 CYLINDERS
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.0150.046 mm
(0.0006-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)
No.5, and No.6 CYLINDERS
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.0180.056 mm
(0.0007-0.0022 in)
Service Limit:
0.056 mm (0.0022 in)
No.1, No.2, No.3 and No.4 CYLINDERS
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
0.0150.046 mm
(0.0006-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
No.5 and No.6 CYLINDERS

Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
0.018-0.047 mm
(0.0007-0.0019 in)
Service Limit:
0.047 mm (0.0019 in)
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance

is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all
over-tolerance rocker arms. If any variable cylinder
management rocker arm needs replacement, replace
all rocker arms in that set (primary and secondary).
(cont'd)
6-43
Cylinder Head
(cont'd)
Camshaft Inspection
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arms
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Slide t h e m into the

rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly, replace
the rocker a r m set.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil t o the rocker arm pistons
w h e n reassembling.
3. Front: Put the rocker shaft bridge and the rocker shaft
holder on the front cylinder head, then tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
When removing the rocker arm pistons f r o m the

intake primary rocker a r m (B) and the exhaust
primary rocker arms (C), carefully apply air
pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm.
INTAKE
4. Rear: Put the rocker shaft bridge and the rocker shaft
holder on the rear cylinder head, then tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
EXHAUST
5. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the

cylinder head.
8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-41).

9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-54).
6-44
6. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the

camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and read
the end play. If the end play is beyond the service
limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft.
9. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
Camshaft End Play

Standard (New):
0.050.20 mm
(0.002-0.008 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)
10. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
7. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out

the camshaft (B).
8. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps.

Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored,
or excessively w o r n .
(cont'd)
6-45
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
11. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces In the cylinder
head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft
bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round
condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within the
service limit, go t o step 13.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 12.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance
Standard (New):
0.0500.089 mm
(0.0020-0.0035 in)
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in)
6-46
12. Check the total runout w i t h the camshaft supported

on V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil clearance.
If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace
the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout
Standard (New):
0.03 mm (0.001 in) max.
Service Limit:
0.04 mm (0.002 in)
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal

Removal
13. Measure the cam lobe height.
NOTE:
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A
When measuring the No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4

cylinders intake cam lobe height of the camshaft,
measure the secondary cam lobes.
Identify the valves and the valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
When measuring the No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4

cylinders exhaust cam lobe height of the camshaft,
measure the primary cam lobes.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New)

No.1, No.2, No.3, and No.4 CYLINDERS:
Intake:
35.162 mm (1.3843 in)
Exhaust:
36.537 mm (1.4385 in)

3. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and a plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen the
valve cotters.
No.5, and No.6 CYLINDERS:

Intake:
35.155 mm (1.3841 in)
Exhaust:
36.512 mm (1.4375 in)
No. 1, No. 2, and No.3 CYLINDERS
EXHAUST
PRIMARY
T/B
INTAKE
SECONDARY
EXHAUST
PRIMARY
4"
EXHAUSTSECONDARY /
EXHAUSTSECONDARY
{for C Y L I N D E R
/
(for C Y L I N D E R
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)
/
INTAKE P R I M A R Y
(for C Y U N D E R
No. 4 CYLINDER
EXHAUST
PRIMARY
T/B
INTAKE
SECONDARY
EXHAUST
PRIMARY
4. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and

the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring
and remove the valve cotters.
07757-PJ1010A
4"
EXHAUST SECONDARY /
EXHAUST SECONDARY
/
/
INTAKE P R I M A R Y
(for C Y U N D E R
No. 5 and No. 6 CYLINDERS

INTAKE
5. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve

spring compressor attachment, then remove the
spring retainer, the valve spring, and the valve.
EXHAUST
EXHAUST
(cont'd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal
Removal (cont'd)
Valve Inspection
6. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-47).

2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 35.90-36.10 mm
(1.413-1.421 in)
B Standard (New): 116.55-117.15 mm
(4.589-4.612 in)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in)
C Service Limit:
5.455 mm (0.2148 in)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm
(1.177-1.185 in)
B Standard (New): 113.90-114.50 mm
(4.484-4.508 in)
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in)
C Service Limit:
5.420 mm (0.2134 in)
7. Remove the valve seal.
8. Remove the valve spring seat.
6-48
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection
Valve Guide Replacement
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-47).

Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 m m 07742-0010100
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7A100
2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a

micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or a ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0200.045 m m
(0.0008-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.08 m m (0.003 in)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide
Clearance
(0.0022-0.0031 in)
Service Limit:
0.11 m m (0.004 in)
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page

6-49).
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-impact
valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of
the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure
can be done using the valve guide driver, 5.5 m m and
a conventional hammer.
5.3 mm
(0.21 in)
4*
87 mm
(3.43 in)
_57 mm _
(2.24 in)
10.8 mm
(0.42 in)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill t h e m

in the freezer section of a refrigerator for at least an
hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300 F (150 C). Monitor the temperature with
a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter
than 300 F (150 C); excessive heat may loosen the
valve seats.
5. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and an

air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m (0.1 in)
towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off
some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold
the air hammer directly in line w i t h the valve guide to
prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or
a face shield.
(cont'd)
6-49
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out t o w a r d
the camshaft side of the head.
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of

the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide driver,
5.5 m m to drive the guide to the specified installed
height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to
do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake:
21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in)
Exhaust: 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in)
7. If a valve guide still w o n ' t move, drill it out with a 8

m m (0.3 in) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could
damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
10. Coat both the valve guide reamer, 5.5 m m and the
valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the valve guide reamer clockwise the full
length of the valve guide bore.
8. Remove the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a

time, as you need t h e m .
12. Continue to rotate the valve guide reamer clockwise

while removing it f r o m the bore.
6-50
Valve Seat Reconditioning

13. Thoroughly wash the guide w i t h detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-49).
Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without sticking.
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page

6-49). If the valve guides are w o r n , replace t h e m (see
page 6-49) before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
15. Inspect the valve seating. If necessary renew the valve

seat using a valve seat cutter (see page 6-51).
3. Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat w i t h the 30 cutter
and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat). Check
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.
.5 (intake seat)
60 (exhaust seat)
5. Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45 cutter to

remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width
Service Limit:
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
(cont'd)
6-51
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
seating. Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat
several times.
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and

measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve S t e m Installed Height
(1.841-1.872 in)
Service Limit:
47.80 m m (1.882 in)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height
(1.838-1.869 in)
Service Limit:
47.73 m m (1.879 in)
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the

blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must
make a second cut w i t h the 67.5 cutter (intake seat)
or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat) to move it d o w n ,
then one more cut with the 45 cutter to restore seat
width.
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 cutter to move it up,
then one more cut with the 45 cutter to restore seat
width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h the
45 cutter.
6-52
9. If the valve stem installed height is beyond the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the
service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat
in the head is too deep.
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation

. Stem Seal Driver 07PAD-0010000
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ101 OA
6. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and

the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring
and install the valve cotters.
1. Coat the valve stems w i t h new engine oil. Install the

valves in the valve guides.
07757-PJ1010A
2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly.

3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the 5.5 m m side
of the stem seal driver (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring (D)
and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring (F). They
are not interchangeable.
F
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve

spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem t w o or three
times w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A
5. Install the valve spring and the spring retainer. Place

the end of the valve spring w i t h the closely w o u n d
coils t o w a r d the cylinder head.
6-53
Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
Front
1. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws.
2. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
3. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
camshaft oil seal.
4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 . Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2. Install the oil seal about 0 . 5 - 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 in)
below the surface of the cylinder head.

holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
A p p l y liquid gasket
along the broken line.
10. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely

install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
NOTE:
5. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the journals
and the cam lobes.
r
6. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.

7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-41).
6-54

with oil.
installing the rocker arm assembly.
11. Tighten each bolt t w o turns at a time in the sequence
as shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the
valves.
Specified Torque
8 x 1 . 2 5 m m : 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
12. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket
(B).
Rear
1. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws.
camshaft oil seal.
4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 . Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2. Install the oil seal about 0.5-1.5 m m (0.02-0.06 in)

pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).
(9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibfft)
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
14. Set the camshaft pulleys to t o p dead center (TDC)

before bolting them onto the engine block (see step 6
on page 6-57).
5. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then

install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the journals
and the cam lobes.
6. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-42).
(cont'd)
6-55
Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
(cont'd)
holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the
gasket.
12. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket
(B).
NOTE:
If y o u apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
Apply liquid gasket
8x1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
13. Apply new engine oil t o the threads of the camshaft

pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
10. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely

install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
NOTE:
w i t h oil.
installing the rocker a r m assembly.
11. Tighten each bolt t w o turns at a time in the sequence
shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind o n the
valves.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
6-56
12x1.25 mm
90 N m
(9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibfft)
14. Set the camshaft pulleys t o TDC before bolting t h e m

onto the engine block (see step 6 on page 6-57).
Cylinder Head Installation

1. Clean the cylinder head and the engine block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A). Always
use new O-rings (B).

marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers
FRONT
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and the new cylinder head
gaskets (D).
REAR
4. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, the timing belt guide

plate, and the upper and lower covers.
t i m i n g belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.
7. Install the cylinder heads on the engine block.
(cont'd)
6-57
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point B.
50 mm (2.0 in)
45 mm (1.8 in)
11. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 29 N-m

(3.0 k g f m , 22 Ibfft) using a beam-type torque wrench.
When using a preset click-type torque wrench, be
sure to torque slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt
makes any noise while y o u are torquing it, loosen the
bolt and retighten it f r o m the first step.
Front
9. If either diameter is less than 10.6 m m (0.42 in),

replace the cylinder head bolt.
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the bolt
heads of ail cylinder head bolts.
Rear
6-58
12. After t o r q u i n g , tighten all cylinder head bolts in two

steps (90 per step) using the sequence shown in step
11. If you are using a new cylinder head bolt, tighten
18. Install the connector bracket (A) to the front cylinder

head.
cylinder head.
16. Install the water passage (see page 10-11).
17. Install the injector bases (see page 9-6).
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
6-59
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
20. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11 -350), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).
26. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p (A) and tighten

the bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket.
2 1 . Install the front w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter

(front WU-TWC) (see page 11-379) and the rear w a r m
up three w a y catalytic converter (rear WU-TWC) (see
page 11-380).
22. Connect the following engine wire harness

connectors, and install the wire harness clamps t o the
cylinder head:
30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.
Six injector connectors

Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
Front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Rear air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Front secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2)
Rear secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2)
connector
connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (BANK 1)
connector
Knock sensor connector
23. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
25. Install the alternator (see page 4-33).
6-60
29. install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).
3 1 . Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON

32. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see step 11 on
page 10-7), and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system
w i t h the heater valve open.
33. Check for fluid leaks.
34. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn
36. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-325).
37. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-20).
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In

Car
NOTE: W h e n installing the sealing bolt (A), always use a

new washer (B).
Ball Joint Remover/Installer 07GAF-SD40330

FRONT

camshaft oil seal.
3. Using the ball joint remover/installer (A), a washer (B),
and a 12 x 75 x 1.25mm bolt (C), press in a new
camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5-1.5 m m (0.02-0.06 in)
2 8 x 1 . 5 mm
78 N m
(8.0 k g f m , 58 Ibfft)
REAR
6-61
Cylinder Head
Front Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve
Replacement
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve

Replacement
1. Remove the front rocker arm assembly (see page

6-39).
1. Remove the rear rocker arm assembly (see page

6-40).
2. Remove the front rocker arm oil control valve (A).
2. Remove the rear rocker arm oil control valve (A).
3. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse

order of removal.
3. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse

order of removal.
6-62
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools
7-2
7-3
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection. 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
7-9
Oil Pan Removal
7-10
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
7-11
Crankshaft Inspection
7-14
Block and Piston Inspection
7-15
Cylinder Bore Honing
7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
7-17
Piston Ring Replacement
7-20
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
7-22
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
7-28
Oil Pan Installation
7-29
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In C a r . . . 7-31
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In
Car
7-31
7-32
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
07749-0010000
07OAD-RCAA100
07OAD-RCAA200
Description
Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m
Driver Attachment, 106 m m
Qty
1
1
1
I
<D
7-2
<D
(D
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)

S E N S O R COVER
O-RING
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-10
Installation, page
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) S E N S O R
OIL S C R E E N
DRIVE PLATE
O-RING
ENGINE BLOCK
END COVER
OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-14
O-RING
TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation - in car, page 7-31
O-RING
P U L L E Y END
CRANKSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation - in car, page 7-31
OIL FILTER B A S E /
OIL FILTER A S S E M B L Y
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E

S E N S O R COVER
(cont'd)
7-3
Engine Block
SEALING BOLT
7-4
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-17
PISTON RINGS
SNAP RINGS
PISTON
Removal, page 7-11
Measurement, page 7-15
CONNECTING ROD
End Play, page 7-6
Small End Measurement, page 7-18
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection, page 7-15
Warpage Inspection, page 7-15
Cylinder Bore Honing, page 7-17
Ridge Removal, step 10 on page 7-12
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
Oil Clearance, page 7-9
Selection, page 7-9
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD B O L T S
Inspection, step 16 on page 7-24
7-5
Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil p u m p (see page 8-15).
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 9 on page 7-12).
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and the
crankshaft (C).
Connecting Rod End Play

Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in)
4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service

limit, install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft
(see page 7-11).
7-6
5. Push the crankshaft firmly away f r o m the dial

indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play

Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in)
6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers

and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit,
replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11).
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the main bearing caps and the bearing
halves (see step 17 on page 7-13).
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a clean
shop towel.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the vehicle when you bolt
the main cap d o w n to check the clearance, the weight
of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten the
plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt
and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate
reading, support the crank w i t h a jack under the
counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time.
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of
the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
file, s h i m , or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust
clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed
above or below that one), and check clearance again,
if the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using
the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the
crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).
4. Reinstall the bearings and the caps, then tighten the

bearing cap bolts (see step 23 on page 7-25) to 74 N-m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft), and the bearing cap side bolts to
49 N-m (5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibfft) in the proper sequence.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the caps and the bearing halves, and
measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Standard (New): 0.019-0.045 mm
(0.0007-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
(cont'd)
7-7
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Main Bearing Selection
Larger block bore

Bearing Identification
Crankshaft Bore Code Location

Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the
Aorl
Color code is on the

edge of the bearing
engine block as a code for the size of each of the f o u r

m a i n j o u r n a l bores.
Borll
C o r III
D or llll
Smaller bearing (Thicker)
1orl
Red/
Pink
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
2 or II
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
3 or III
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/ Green
Green
4 or llll
Yellow
Yellow/ Green
Green
5 or Mill
Yellow/ Green
Green
6 or llllll
Green
Use t h e m , and the numbers stamped o n the crankshaft

(codes for main journal size), t o choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m w i t h a
w i r e brush or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent.
No. 4 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)
No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)
Smaller
main
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Green/
Brown
Green/
Brown
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
NOTE: When using bearing halves

of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
t
e t
p o
b o t t o m >
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
No. 4 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)
No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)
No. 3 J O U R N A L
No. 2 J O U R N A L
7-8
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement

Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing half

(see page 7-11).
Each connecting rod falls into one of four tolerance

ranges (from 0 to 0.024 m m (0.0009 in), in 0.006 m m
(0.0002 in) increments) depending on the size of its big
end bore.
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with

a clean shop towel.
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal.
4. Reinstall the bearing half and the cap, and tighten the
connecting rod bolts.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque:
20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 15 I b f f t ) + 9 0
5. Remove the rod cap and the bearing half and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil
Clearance

(0.0008-0.0017 in)
Service Limit:
0.050 m m (0.0020 in)
It's then stamped with a number or bar ( 1 , 2 , 3 , or 4/i, II,

III, or llll) indicating the range. You may find any
combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/I, II, III, or llll in any engine.
Normal Bore Size: 58.0 m m (2.28 in)
Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of each
connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use
t h e m , and the letters or bars stamped on the crank
(codes for rod journal size) to choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean t h e m only with solvent or
detergent.
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a
new, complete bearing with the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, s h i m , or scrape the
bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed
above or below that one), and check clearance again.
If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using
the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the
crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).
(cont'd)
7-9
Engine Block
Oil Pan Removal
Connecting Rod Bearing

Replacement (cont'd)
Larger big end bore
1. If the engine is already o u t of the vehicle, go t o step 6.
Bearing Identification
Color code is on the
edge of the bearing
1orl
2 or II
3 or III
4 or llll

3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
Smaller bearing (Thicker)

Yellow/
Green
Aorl
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Bor II
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/ Green
Green
C or III
Yellow
Yellow/ Green
Green
D or llll
Yellow/ Green
Green
E or lllll
Green
For HUH
Green/
Brown
4. Remove the front subframe stiffener (see step 31 on

page 5-6).
5. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 32 on page 5-6).
Smaller
rod
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Green/
Brown
Green/
Brown
Brown
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
Brown
B r o w n / Black
Black
6. Remove the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic

converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket.
NOTE: When using bearing halves

of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
the top or bottom.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars)
No. 4 J O U R N A L
No. 3 J O U R N A L
7. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover

(A) and the bolt (B), then disconnect the CKP sensor
connector (C).
No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)
No. 2 J O U R N A L
7-10
No. 6 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)
No. 5 J O U R N A L
Crankshaft and Piston Removal

8. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four
bolts (B) securing the transmission.
1. Remove the engine/transmission (see page 5-3).

2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-218).
3. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-230).
4. Remove the cylinder heads (see page 6-34).
5. Remove the t i m i n g belt drive pulley f r o m the
crankshaft (see page 6-28).
6. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).
7. Remove the engine block end cover.
8. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (A),

then remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (B).
11. Remove the oil pan.
(cont'd)
7-11
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd)
9. Remove the oil screen (A), the baffle plate (B), and the
oil p u m p (C).
11. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the

crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each
cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod assembly
by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to
damage the oil jets, the crank pin, or the cylinder with
the connecting rod.
CORRECT
10. If y o u can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around

the top of any cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer
(A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If
the ridge is not removed, it may damage the piston as
it's pushed out.
INCORRECT
12. Remove the bearing f r o m the cap. Keep all

caps/bearings in order.
13. Remove the upper bearing halves f r o m the
connecting rods, and set t h e m aside w i t h their
respective caps.
14. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,
reinstall the cap on the rod.
15. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each
piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
7-12
16. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and the bearing cap side
bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a t i m e ; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.
17. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and the bearing cap
side bolts (B), then remove the bearing caps (C).
18. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine block, being
careful not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse
plate.
19. Remove the CKP pulse plate f r o m the crankshaft (see

page 7-28).
20. Reinstall the main caps and the bearings on the
engine block in the proper order.
B,
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper
Straightness
1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block (see

page 7-11).
7. Place the V-blocks on a flat surface.
2. Remove the CKP pulse plate f r o m the crankshaft (see

page 7-28).
3. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe cleaners
or a suitable brush.
4. Check the keyway slot and the threaded holes for
damage.
5. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in t w o places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not be
more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round

Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
6. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and main

journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Taper

Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
7-14
8. Check the total runout w i t h the crankshaft supported

on V-blocks.
9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate
the crankshaft t w o complete revolutions. The
difference between measurements on each journal
must not be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout

Service Limit:
0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Block and Piston Inspection

1. Remove the pistons f r o m the engine block (see page
7-11).
2. Check the pistons for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston skirt diameter at a point 16.0 m m
(0.63 in) f r o m the bottom of the skirt.
4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at

three levels in each cylinder as s h o w n . If
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the
oversize bore service limit, replace the engine block. If
the engine block has to be rebored, refer to step 7
after reboring.
Piston Skirt Diameter

Standard (New).* 88.975-88.985 m m
(3.5029-3.5033 in)
Service Limit:
88.965 m m (3.5026 in)
Cylinder Bore Size
Oversize P'ston Skirt Diameter

0.25: 89.225-89.235 m m
(3.5128-3.5132 in)
Oversize
0.25: 89.250-89.265 m m
(3.5138-3.5144 in)
16.0 mm
(0.63 in)
Standard (New): 89.000-89.015 m m

(3.5039-3.5045 in)
Service Limit:
89.065 m m (3.5065 in)
Piston Skirt
Diameter
Reboring Limit: 0.25 m m (0.010 in)

Bore Taper
Limit:
(Difference b e t w e e n first and t h i r d

measurement) 0.05 m m (0.002 in)
6 mm (0.2 in)
_t
First Measurement
Second Measurement
Third Measurement
(cont'd)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
5. Hone any scored or scratched cylinder bores (see
page 7-17).
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Engine Block Warpage
Service Limit:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore

diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
and the cylinder bore for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0150.040 mm
(0.0006-0.0016 in)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod

Replacement
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 4 on page 7-15).

If the engine block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
cylinder bores must be honed.
Disassembly
2. Remove the oil jets (see page 8-13).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps
are lined up w i t h the cutouts in the piston pin bores
(B).
3. Hone the cylinder bores w i t h honing oil and a fine

(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree Crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
1. Remove the pistons (see page 7-11) f r o m the engine

block.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
Use only a rigid hone w i t h 400 grit or finer stone,

such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent.
Do not use stones that are w o r n or broken.
4. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder
bores with hot soapy water, then dry and oil them
immediately to prevent rusting.
3. Remove the
piston. Start
Remove the
flying or get
snap rings (A) f r o m both sides of each

at the cutout in the piston pin bore.
snap rings carefully so they do not go
lost. Wear eye protection.
NOTE: Never use solvent, it will only redistribute the

grit on the cylinder walls.
5. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder
bores after honing to the service limit, rebore the
engine block. Some light vertical scoring and
scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to
catch your fingernail and does not run the full length
of the bore.
6. Install the oil jets (see page 8-13).
(cont'd)
7-17
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
4. Separately heat each piston and connecting rod
assembly to about 158 F (70 C), then remove the
piston pin.
Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the
connecting rod w h e n they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
21.962-21.965 mm
(0.8646-0.8648 in)
21.954 mm (0.8643 in)
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
7-18
3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter

and the piston pin hole diameter on the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
S t a n d a r d ( N e w ) : -0.00500.0010 m m
S e r v i c e Limit:
(-0.00020-0.00004 in)
0.004 m m (0.0002 in)
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the
connecting rod, and the piston pin w i t h new engine
oil.
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 F (70 C).
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance

Standard (New):
0.0050.014 m m
(0.0002-0.0006 in)
Service Limit:
0.019 m m (0.0007 in)
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod
Piston Ring Replacement
4. Assemble the piston (A) and the connecting rod (B)

w i t h the embossed marks (C) on the same side. Install
the piston pin (D).
1. Remove the pistons (see page 7-11) from the engine

block.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the piston pin.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston

rings (B).
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly w i t h a

squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner w i t h
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File d o w n the blade,
if necessary. The top ring and second ring grooves are
1.2 m m (0.05 in) wide, and the oil ring groove is 2.8
m m (0.11 in) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean
the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper w i t h
the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
5. Install the remaining snap ring.

6. Reassemble the other pistons the same way.
7-20
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder

bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in) f r o m the bottom.
6. Install the rings as s h o w n . The top ring (A) has a 1D

mark and the second ring (B) has a 2X mark. The
manufacturing marks (C) must face upward.
1 5 - 2 0 mm
( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in)
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler

gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the
proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on page
7-15). If the bore is over the service limit, the engine
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Piston Ring Dimensions:
Top ring:
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
Second Ring:
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.200.35 mm
(0.008-0.014 in)
0.60 mm (0.024 in)
0.400.55 mm
(0.016-0.022 in)
0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Top Ring (Standard)

A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.6 mm (0.14 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
Oil Ring:
Standard (New):
0.200.70 mm
(0.008-0.028 in)
0.80 mm (0.031 in)
Service Limit:
(cont'd)
7-21
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the

ring-to-groove clearance:

. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Driver Attachment, 106 m m 07OAD-RCAA200
Top Ring Clearance

Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.0550.080 mm
(0.0022-0.0031 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Second Ring Clearance

Standard (New):
0.0300.055 mm
(0.0012-0.0022 in)
Service Limit:
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h

plastigage (see page 7-9).
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-7).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and the
connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main
bearings and the connecting rod bearings.
5. Install the CKP pulse plate to the crankshaft (see page
7-28).
6. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block, being
careful not to damage the jounals and the CKP pulse
plate.
8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do

not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as s h o w n :
OIL RING G A P
About 90
S E C O N D RING G A P
About 4 5
7. Apply new engine oil to the side w i t h the thrust

washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the
No. 3 journal.
OIL RING GAP
TOP RING GAP and

SPACER RING GAP
PISTON PIN
7-22
8. Install the bearings (A) and the bearing caps (B) with
the arrow (C) facing the t i m i n g belt end of the engine
block.
0
CM
O CO
10. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for the
cylinder you are installing the piston in.
11. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring
compressor, and the cylinder bore.
12. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting
rod assembly, and check that the bearing is securely
in place.
13. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the
arrow (A) facing the t i m i n g belt side of the engine
block.
<>
0=
14. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the

cylinder, and tap it in using the w o o d e n handle of a
hammer (A). Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring
compressor (B) to prevent the rings f r o m expanding
before entering the cylinder bore.
1 0 x 8 0 mm
1 0 x 6 0 mm
9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges,

then loosely install the bearing cap bolts (D) and the
bearing cap side bolts (E).
15. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check
the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before
pushing the piston into place.
cont'd)
7-23
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
16. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at
point A and point B.
19. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and the
cap, then install the bearing (B) and the cap (C).
35 mm (1.38 in)
17. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A

and point B.
Point APoint B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification:
20. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges.
Tighten the bolts (D) to 20 N-m (2.0 k g f m , 15 Ibfft).
2 1 . Mark the connecting rod (A) and the bolt head (B) as
shown.
00.1 mm (00.004 in)
18. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,

replace the connecting rod bolt.
22. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines
up w i t h the mark on the connecting rod (turn the bolt
90 ).
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if y o u
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 16 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angle. Repeat steps 10 to 22 for the
remaining cylinders.
7-24
23. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing
cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence
as shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to
ensure the bolts are properly torqued.
11 x 1.5 mm
74 N m
(7.5 kgfm, 54 Ibfft)
10x1.25 mm
49 N m
(5.0 kgfm, 36 Ibfft)
24. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the engine

block end cover mating surfaces, the bolts, and the
bolt holes.
25. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
surfaces.
26. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the crankshaft
and to the lip of the crankshaft oil seal.
27. Using the driver handle and the driver attachment,
106 m m , drive in the new crankshaft oil seal until the
driver attachment bottoms on the engine block end
cover.
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block
mating surface of the engine block end cover and to
the inside edge of the theaded bolt holes. Install the
gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed w i t h i n 4 minutes.
29. Install the dowel pins (A), a new O-ring (B), and the
engine block end cover (C) on the engine block.
NOTE:
with oil.
installing the engine block end cover.

30. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check
the seal for distortion.
3 1 . Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil p u m p (see
32. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil p u m p

mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
33. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
7-26

mating surface of the oil p u m p and to the inside edge
of the theaded bolt holes. Install the component
crankshaft oil seal, and apply new engine oil to the
n e w O - r i n g (A).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m
NOTE:
36. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil p u m p (C).
38. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen (E)
with a new O-ring (F).
NOTE:
w i t h oil.
installing the oil p u m p .
(cont'd)
7-27
Engine Block
(cont'd)
39. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (A), with a
new O-ring (B), then install the rocker arm oil pressure
sensor cover (C).
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement

1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block (see
page 7-11).
2. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A) f r o m the crankshaft.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the journals and the
CKP pulse plate.
40. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).

4 1 . Install the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (see page 6-28) to
the crankshaft.
42. Install the cylinder heads (see page 6-57).
43. Install the drive plate (see page 14-230).
44. Install the transmission (see page 14-230).
45. Install the engine/transmission (see page 5-11).
NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then continue
to run it for about 15 minutes.
7-28
3. Install the CKP pulse plate in the reverse order of

removal.
Oil Pan Installation

1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil pan
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
mating surface of the engine block and to the inside
edge of the theaded bolt holes. Install the component
NOTE:
5. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence, t o 12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft).
NOTE:
w i t h oil.
installing the oil pan.

6. Tighten the four bolts (A) securing the transmission,

then install the torque converter cover (B).
Apply liquid gasket

A
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
4. Install the oil pan on the engine block.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
7-29
Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
7. Connect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector (A) and the bolt (B), then install the CKP
sensor cover (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
9. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the f o l l o w i n g

steps.
10. Install exhaust pipe A (see step 34 on page 5-16) using
new gaskets and new self-locking nuts.
11. Install the front subframe stiffener (see step 35 o n
page 5-16).
12. Refill the engine w i t h the recommended engine oil
(see page 8-10).
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
8. Install the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter

(rear WU-TWC) bracket.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
7-30
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal

Installation - In Car
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil

Seal Installation - In Car

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 106 m m 07OAD-RCAA200
Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m 07OAD-RCAA100

1. Remove the t i m i n g belt, the t i m i n g belt stopper, and
the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (see page 6-28).
2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. A p p l y a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal.
5. Using the oil seal driver, 64 m m , drive in the new
crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the
oil p u m p . W h e n the seal is in place, clean any excess
grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal
lip is not distorted.
1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-218) and the

drive plate (see page 14-230).
2. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of new engine oil t o the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal.
5. Using the driver handle and the oil seal driver
attachment, drive in the new crankshaft oil seal until
the oil seal driver attachment bottoms against the
engine block end cover. Align the hole in the oil seal
driver attachment w i t h the pin on the crankshaft.
6. Install the t i m i n g belt drive pulley, the t i m i n g belt

stopper, and the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-28).
07OAD-RCAA200
6. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check

that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7. Install the drive plate (see page 14-230), and the
transmission (see page 14-230).
7-31
Engine Block
NOTE: W h e n installing the sealing bolts (A), always use
new washers (B).
A
28 x 1.0 m m
78 N-m
(8.0 k g f m , 58 Ibfft)
7-32
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
L o w Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S e n s o r Replacement
Oil Pressure Test
Engine Oil Replacement
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
Oil J e t Replacement
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
Oil Pump Overhaul
8-2
8-3
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-14
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref.No.
(D
(D
Tool Number
07406-0020201
07406-0070301
07AAA-PLCA100
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAJ-P07010A
07OAD-RCAA100
07ZAJ-S5AA200
Description
A/T Pressure Hose
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
Oil Filter Wrench
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Adapter
Pressure Gauge Adapter
Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m
Oil Pressure Hose
8-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
OIL PUMP
(cont'd)
8-3
Engine Lubrication
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R

Circuit Diagram, page 8-8
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9
OIL CONTROL
ORIFICES
O-RING
OIL FILTER
BASE/
OIL FILTER
ASSEMBLY
BAFFLE PLATE
OIL FILTER
FEED PIPE
OIL PUMP
Removal, page 8-15
8-4
OIL PAN

Symptom
Excessive engine oil
consumption
Low oil pressure indicator does

not come on w i t h the ignition
switch in ON (II)
Low oil pressure indicator stays

on
1. Verify the engine oil filler cap, the oil drain bolt,
and the oil filter are tight.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for w o r n valve guide(s) (see page 6-49)
or w o r n valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-47).
4. Check for damaged or w o r n piston ring(s) (see
page 7-20).
5. Check for damaged or w o r n engine internal
parts (cylinder w a l l , pistons, etc.) (see page
7-15).
Do the low oil pressure indicator does not come
on with the ignition switch in ON (II) procedure
(see page 8-6).
1. Check the engine oil level.

2. Do the low oil pressure indicator stays on
Also check for

Check the maintenance
records, w o r n out
engine oil will burn off
at a higher rate
Check the engine oil

level
A n open in the wire
between the
powertrain control
module (PCM) and
the rocker arm oil
pressure sensor
A wire shorted to
ground between the
PCM and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor
8-5
Engine Lubrication
. Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
. Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
. A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
A/T Pressure Hose 07406-0020201
Low oil pressure indicator does not come on

with the ignition switch in ON (II)
Low oil pressure indicator stays on

1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level normal?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Add engine oil to bring the oil level up to normal,
then recheck.
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (see

2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-334).
Is the gauge control module OK?
22-359).
3. Completely opens the throttle.
3. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page

8-9).
4. Install the oil pressure hose (A), the pressure gauge
adapter (B), the A/T low pressure gauge w/panel (C),
the A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m (D), the A/T pressure
adapter (E), the A/T pressure hose (F), and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor (G) to the pressure gauge
adapter as shown.
NOTE: Always use new O-rings.
4. Check the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR in the

DATA LIST with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
MAP S E N S O R - B A R O SENSOR = " A "
2
Is "A" 19.9 kPa (0.20 kgf/cm ,
2.89 psi) or less?
NO-Replace the powertrain control module (PCM)
(see page 11-250).B
5. Check the ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it the 19.0 kPa (0.19kgfl
cm , 2.76 psi) or less ?
Y E S - U p d a t e the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not

have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) . !
NO-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see
page 8 - 9 ) .
O-RING
5. W a r m up the engine.
8-6
07406-0020201
6. At the idling of an engine, check the oil pressure

gauge value.
69 kPa (0.7 kgf I cm , 10 psi) or less ?
2
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check the following i t e m s : !
Blocking of oil filter.
Blocking of oil screen.
Check the oil p u m p .
7. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
2
Is the 19.0 kPa (0.19 kgf/cm ,
2.76 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 8.
10. Disconnect the PCM connector C (49P).
Does the low oil pressure indicator go off?
YES-Update the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B
22-359).!
12. Check the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
BARO S E N S O R - M A P SENSOR="A"
Is "A" 19.9 kPa (0.20 kgf I cm , 2.89 psi) or less?
2
YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see

page 8-2)M
NO-Replace the PCM (see page 11-250).B
Engine Lubrication
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram

HAI ItnY
No. 1(120 A)
- < T \ J > -
No.2(50A)
-CTVJO
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
G20
01
IGNITION SWITCH
'BAT
IGI/
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
D2
No. 10
(7.5 A)
P10
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
WHT
I
I
RED
I
I
I
I
CANH
f-AAAr-*
- O -
H
POIL
VCC2
C12
BLU/YEL
YEL/BLU
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
8-8
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor

Replacement
Oil Pressure Test
1. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover.

Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Hose 07406-0020201
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine

running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
correct:
1. Remove the oil pressure sensor cover (see step 1 on
page 8-9).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page
8-9).
2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor

connector, then remove the rocker arm oil pressure
sensor.
3. Install the oil pressure hose (A), the pressure gauge

adapter (B), the A/T low pressure gauge w/panel (C),
the A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m (D), the A/T pressure
adapter (E), the A/T pressure hose (F), and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor (G) to the pressure gauge
adapter as shown.
NOTE: Always use new O-rings.
3. Install the rocker arm oil pressure sensor with a new

O-ring.
4. Connect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
connector.
5. Install the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover.
(cont'd)
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Test (cont'd)
Engine Oil Replacement
4. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge

registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before
continuing.
1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
A
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
Do not overtighten.
5. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature (fan

comes on at least twice). The pressure should be:
Engine Oil Temperature:
176 F (80 C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle:
69 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,
10.0 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm:
490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,
71 psi) min.
2
6. If oil pressure is not w i t h i n specifications, inspect

these items:
Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page 8-14).
Check the oil screen for clogging.
Inspect the oil p u m p (see page 8-16).
3. Reinstall the drain bolt w i t h a new washer (B).

4. Refill w i t h the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
At Oil Change:
4.0 L (4.2 U S qt)
At Oil Change including Filter:
4.3 L (4.5 U S qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
5.0 L (5.3 U S qt)
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
data link connector (DLC).
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
10. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTICAL w i t h the
HDS.
11. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
12. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
w i t h the HDS.
13. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER w i t h the
HDS.
8-10

14. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the
HDS.
NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time with
the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL
LIFE A N D ATF w i t h the HDS instead.

Oil Filter Wrench 07AAA-PLCA100
1. Remove the oil filter w i t h the oil filter wrench.
2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
3. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the oil filter base, then
apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber
seal. Use only filters w i t h a built-in bypass system.
4. Install the oil filter by hand.

5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise w i t h the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3 / 4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening Torque: 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
07AAA-PLCA100
(cont'd)
8-11
Engine Lubrication
(cont'd)
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or to ) are

printed around the outside of the filter, you can use
the following procedure to tighten the filter.
1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-11).

2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against

the oil filter base, and note which number or mark is
at the bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks f r o m the one you noted. For
example, if mark is at the bottom when the seal is
lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark
comes around to the bottom.
Mark w h e n rubber seal

is seated.
Number or
Mark when
rubber seal is
seated
Number or
Mark after
tightening
1
or
Mark after tightening,
2
or
4
or

3
or
4
or
3
or
2
or
7. After installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
8-12
1
or
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 N-m (5.0 k g f m ,

36 Ibfft), then remove the nuts f r o m the oil filter feed
pipe.
Oil Jet Replacement
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see

page 7-11).
1. Remove the oil jet bolt (see page 8-13).
2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove the oil jet (B).
A
16 N-m
(1.6 k g f m , 12 Ibfft)
A p p l y new engine oil.
2. Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows.

Make sure that a 0.6 m m (0.02 in) diameter drill will
go through the oil intake (0.7 m m (0.03 in)
diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves
smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 m m (0.16
in).
Check the oil jet bolt operation w i t h an air nozzle. It
should take at least 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi) to
unseat the check ball.
0.7 m m
(0.03 in)
3. Carefully install the new oil jet and tighten the oil jet
bolt.
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-22).
8-13
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
6 x 1.0 m m
6.0 N m
(0.6 k g f m , 4.0 Ibfft)
SEALING BOLT
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
8-14

Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m 07OAD-RCAA100
Program 888-424-6857
6. Install the engine support hanger to the vehicle, and

attach the hook (A) to the engine hanger (B). Tighten
the w i n g nut (C) by hand, to lift and support the
engine/transmission.
Removal
1. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
3. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and the P/S
line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34).

8. Remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (see step
8 on page 7-11).
9. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).
10. Remove the oil screen (A).

11. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the oil

p u m p assembly (B).
(cont'd)
8-15
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection
1. Remove the screws f r o m the p u m p housing, then
separate the p u m p housing and the pump cover.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the service
limit, replace the oil p u m p assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.040.14 mm (0.002
- 0 . 0 0 6 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)
4. Check the p u m p housing-to-outer rotor radial

clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the p u m p
housing (B). If the p u m p housing-to-outer rotor radial
clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil
p u m p assembly.
Pump housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.10-0.19 mm (0.004
- 0 . 0 0 7 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)
5. Inspect both rotors and the p u m p housing for scoring

or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.
3. Check the p u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance

between the rotors (A) and the p u m p housing (B). If
the p u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil p u m p assembly.
Pump housing-to-Rotor Axial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001
- 0 . 0 0 3 in)
Service Limit:
0.12 mm (0.005 in)
8-16
6. Apply liquid thread lock to the p u m p housing screws,

then install the oil p u m p cover.
7. Check that the oil p u m p turns freely.
Installation
1. Remove the old oil seal f r o m the oil pump.

crankshaft oil seal, and apply new engine oil to the
new O-ring (A).
2. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

3. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the oil seal driver,
64 m m bottoms on the pump.
4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil p u m p

5. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
mating surface of the oil p u m p and to the inside edge
of the threaded bolt holes. Install the component
NOTE:
8. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
10. Install the oil screen (D) with a new O-ring (E).
11. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).

12. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly with a new
O-ring (see step 39 on page 7-28).

13. Install the timing belt (see page 6-18).

14. Remove the engine support hanger f r o m the vehicle.
15. Install the both sides cowl top side lid on the cowl
cover.
16. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S line
bracket (see step 26 on page 6-60).
18. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
19. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling
the engine with oil.
8-17
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Injector Base Removal and Installation
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
9-2
9-6
9-8

intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
UPPER COVER
Replace if it is cracked or if the
mating surface is damaged.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
EXHAUSTGAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) PIPE
6 x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE V A L V E
THROTTLE
BODY
6 x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
9-2
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
Removal
2. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the

intake air duct (B).
3. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
hose (A), the brake booster vacuum hose (B), and the
intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator connector (C).
4. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A), the EVAP canister purge valve connector (B),
the throttle actuator connector (C), and the manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector (D).
5. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (E).
(cont'd)
9-3

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and the nuts
sequentially in three steps, then remove the upper
cover.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and the
nuts sequentially in three steps. Always use a new
intake manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and the

nuts sequentially in three steps, then remove the
intake manifold.
\ :?\ r~?\ n/
9-4
2. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and the nuts
sequentially in three steps. Always use a new intake
manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0mm: 1 2 N m (1.2kgfm,8.9Ibfft)
3. Connect the water bypass hoses (A).
6. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the

breather pipe (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw of the hose band
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) w i t h the mark
(E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten the screw
over the mark, replace the hose band.
4. Connect the MAP sensor connector (B), the throttle

actuator connector (C), the EVAP canister purge valve
connector (D), and the EVAP canister hoses (E).
5. Connect the IMT actuator connector (A), the brake
booster vacuum hose (B), and the PCV hose (C).
7. Install the engine cover.
8. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

9. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and
connectors are installed correctly.
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h heater valve open
(see page 10-6).
9-5

Injector Base Removal and Installation
Removal
Installation
1. Install the front injector base (A) and the rear injector
base (B) w i t h new gaskets (C), and tighten the injector
base mounting bolts/nuts (D) in a crisscross pattern in
three steps, beginning w i t h the inner nuts.

3. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34).
NOTE: The front injector base gasket is different f r o m

the rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket types.
5. Remove the injectors (see page 11-240).

6. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt (A), then
disconnect the knock sensor connector (B).
7. Remove the injector base mounting bolts/nuts (A),

then remove the front injector base (B) and the rear
injector base (C).
9-6
2. Connect the knock sensor connector (A), then install

the harness holder mounting bolt (B).
3. Install the injectors (see page 11-240).

5. Install the P/S p u m p and the P/S hose bracket (see
7. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
HEAT SHIELD
HEAT SHIELDS
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
T H R E E WAY
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)
E X H A U S T PIPE A
T W C TIGHTENING S E Q U E N C E
Tighten the nuts in steps.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
9-8
SELF-LOCKING N U T S
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test
Radiator Test
Fan Motor Test
Thermostat Test
Water Pump Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
Coolant Check
Coolant Replacement
Thermostat Replacement
Water Passage Replacement
Radiator and Fan Replacement
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-10
10-11
10-13
Fan Controls
10-16
10-17
Circuit Diagram
10-18
Radiator Fan High S p e e d Circuit Troubleshooting. ...10-19
Cooling System
10-2
Radiator Cap Test
Radiator Test

the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal w i t h
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially
available pressure tester (B).

the radiator cap, and fill the radiator w i t h engine
coolant to the base of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to
the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93123 kPa
( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2
2. Apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kgf/cm ,

1 4 - 1 8 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.
10-3
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test
Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator fan

motor (A) and the A/C condenser fan motor (B).
Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10) if it is stuck in

the open position at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermostat and the thermometer (B)
touch the bottom of the hot container.
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it (see page 10-13).
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature w i t h a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is
fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height:
Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in)
Starts Opening: 1 6 9 - 1 7 6 F ( 7 6 - 8 0 C )
Fully Open:
194F(90C)
10-4
Water Pump Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
2. Turn the water p u m p pulley counterclockwise, and

check that it turns freely. If it does not turn freely,
replace the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
NOTE: W h e n y o u check the water p u m p , you may see

a small amount of " w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed holes
(A). This is normal.
3. Remove the t i m i n g belt adjuster (see page 6-27).

4. Remove the five bolts securing the water p u m p (A),
then remove the water p u m p .
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
A
5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating

surface of the engine block.
6. Install the water p u m p w i t h a new O-ring (B).
8. Install the t i m i n g belt adjuster (see page 6-27).
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).
10-5
Cooling System
Coolant Check
Coolant Replacement
1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

the radiator cap.
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and the

MIN mark(B).
2. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the

touch.
3. Open the splash shield cover (A).
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between
the MIN and M A X marks, then inspect the cooling
system for leaks.
10-6
4. Loosen the drain plug (B) and drain the coolant.

5. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (see
6. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at

the rear of the engine block, then loosen the drain
bolt.
12. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into

the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not
add water.
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant
reservoir capacity of 0.75 L (0.198 U S gal)):
At Coolant Change:
7.5 L (1.98 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul:
9.4 L (2.48 US gal)
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
7. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain

bolt. Remove the rubber hose, then install the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor cover (see step 39 on page
7-28).
8. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
9. Close the splash shield cover.
10. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
11. Fill the coolant reservoir to the M A X mark (A) with
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N
OL999-9001).
(cont'd)
10-7
Cooling System
Coolant Replacement (cont'd)
until it w a r m s up (the radiator fan comes on at least
twice). Make sure the thermostat is open.
14. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if
needed.
15. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the
engine.
25. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit t o

m a x i m u m heat, and select high speed heat mode on
the rear control panel. Measure the temperature of
the air f r o m the rear floor vent for 3 minutes. Make
sure the temperature is above the standard line of the
graph as s h o w n . If the temperature is below the
standard line, repeat steps 19 through 22 several
more times. Then loosely install the radiator cap and
recheck.
AIR FLOW
T E M P E R A T U R E F(C)
16. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
176 (80)

m a x i m u m heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
engine.
140 (60)
engine.
2 1 . Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
engine.
23. Repeat steps 19 through 22 until the coolant level
does not change in the radiator, then install the
radiator cap loosely.
speed at 2,500 rpm for 1 minute.
10-8
158 (70)
122 (50)
i\
i IAII
104 (40)
86 (30)
68 (20)
50 (10)
0
59
(15)
63
(17)
66
(19)
70
(21)
73
(23)
77
(25)
81
(27)
84
(29)
INTERIOR
T E M P E R A T U R E S (C)
26. With the engine idling, make sure you do not hear the
sound of water flowing near the rear heater unit. If
you hear water f l o w i n g , repeat steps 19 through 22
several more times.
27. Install the radiator cap securely.
28. Fill the coolant reservoir w i t h Honda Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 up to the M A X mark on the
coolant reservoir, then add an extra 0.4 L (0.11 US gal)
of coolant.
29. If the maintenance minder required engine coolant

replacement, reset the maintenance minder (see page
3-12). If the maintenance minder did not require
engine coolant replacement go to step 30.
30. Turn the ignition switch to LOOK (0).
3 1 . Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
page 11-226).
34. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the
HDS.
35. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
36. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
w i t h the HDS.
37. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the
HDS.
38. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET w i t h the
HDS.
40. Inspect for engine coolant leaks.
10-9
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
2. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page 20-210).
5. Remove the thermostat cover, then remove the thermostat.
6. Install the new thermostat (with the pin up) w i t h a new rubber seal, then install the thermostat cover.
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve open (see page
10-6).
10-10
Water Passage Replacement

20-210).
7. Disconnect the water bypass hoses (A) and the heater

hose (B).

5. Remove the intake air duct (see step 7 on page 5-3).
6. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower
radiator hose (B), the engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor 1 connector (C), and the exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) valve connector (D).
8. Remove the EGR pipe (see page 11-394).
(cont'd)
10-11
Cooling System
Water Passage Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the water passage and the related parts.
EXHAUST G A S
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) V A L V E
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT)
SENSOR 1
GASKETS
Replace.
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

O-RING
Replace.
^ 8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
WATER P A S S A G E
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
O-RING
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
10. Install the water passage and the related parts.

11. Install the Intake air duct (see step 58 on page 5-19).
15. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system with the heater valve open (see page
10-6).
10-12
Radiator and Fan Replacement

NOTE:
surfaces.
6. Unclamp the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

cooler hose clamps (A) and loosen the A/C condenser
fan shroud mounting bolts (B).
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug

connector portion.
Also, be sure that they do not contact any other wiring
or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.
1. Remove the front grille (see page 20-210).
5. Remove the harness clamp (A) f r o m the radiator fan
shroud.
7 N-m
(0.7 k g f m , 5 Ibfft)

8. Disconnect the radiator fan motor connector (A) and
the radiator upper hose (B), then remove the harness
clamps (C).
(cont'd)
10-13
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan motor connector
(A) and the coolant reservoir hose (B), then remove
the harness clamps (C).
11. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly (A),

then remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (B).
NOTE: Move the radiator fan shroud assembly toward
the A/C compressor side of the vehicle to allow for
enough space to lift it up and away f r o m the A/C
condenser fan shroud assembly.
10. Remove the bulkhead bracket mounting bolt/nut (A)

and the upper brackets/cushions (B), then disconnect
the coolant reservoir hose (C).
12. Disassemble the fan shrouds.

4Nm
(0.4 k g f m ,
^3 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
10-14
A
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
17. Remove the related parts f r o m the radiator.
14. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)

sensor 2 connector (A), the ATF cooler hoses (B), the
lower radiator hose (C) and remove the ATF cooler
hose brackets (D).
18. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the upper and lower mounting cushions
are set securely.
19. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air
f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve open
(see page 10-6).
6 x 1.0 mm
7 N m (0.7 k g f m ,
5 Ibfft)


16. Pull up the radiator assembly (A), then remove the
lower mounting cushions (B).
10-15
Fan Controls
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
Replacement page 11 -243
10-16
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2

Symptom
Engine overheats
The radiator fan does not run at

high speed.
Both the radiator fan and the A/C
condenser fan do not run at low
speed.
The A/C condenser fan does not
run at high speed.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6).
2. Check for engine coolant leaks (from gaskets,
hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the
radiator and A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan
shroud.
6. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
relays (see page 22-96).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
10. Check for clogged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
11. Check for a clogged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
(see page 10-19).
Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-65).
A/C condenser fan high speed circuit
troubleshooting (see page 21-69).
Also check for

Proper radiator and
condenser fan
control and operation
Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors
Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors
Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors
and
all
and
all
and
all
10-17
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

B A I IfcnY
No. 1(120 A)
No. 2 (50 A)
-CTXJO
G20
cr\_>-
D1
PGM-FI
SUB RELAY
No. 11 (15 A)
crvo
PCM A3
(STRLY)
No. 15(7.5 A)
No. 7 (30 A)
A/C CONDENSER
F A N DIODE
RADIATOR
FAN DIODE
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
A/C
CONDENSER
FAN R E L A Y
RADIATOR
FAN R E L A Y
UNDERDASH
FUSE/
RELAY
BOX
BLK
PUR
GRY
BLU
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
A/C
/ FAN MOTOR
CONDENSER
F
BLK
G202
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R 1
10-18
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R 2
STARTER
CUT RELAY
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 7 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
Are the fuse(s)
OK?
4. Connect fan control relay 5P socket terminals No. 1

and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,
locate and repair the short in the circuit between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan motor,
and the under-dash fuse/relay box and the under
hood fuse/relay b o x . B
2. Remove the radiator fan relay and the fan control
relay f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test
them (see page 22-96).
JUMPER WIRE
Are the relays OK?

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay and/or fan control
relay.!
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
5. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals No. 1

and No. 2 with a j u m p e r wire.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T
JUMPER WIRE
2
4
Does the radiator fan run at high

Is there battery
voltage?
speed?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.I
(cont'd)
10-19
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Remove the jumper wires, then check for continuity
between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2
and body ground.
8. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P

socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 2.
1
2
1
2
5 4 3
4 3
I
ii
1 2
BLU

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between fan control relay
5P socket terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d . H
7. Test the radiator fan motor (see page 10-4).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page 10-13).
10-20
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.M
9. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P

socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P

11. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P

1
1
2
5
GRY
<|
_L
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 12.
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
motor, the under-hood fuse/relay box and body
ground (G202).B
5P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 1.M
NO-Repair oren in the wire between the under dash

fuse/relay box and the under hood fuse/relay b o x . B
data link connector (DLC).
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
switch to LOCK (0).
f r o m damage.
(cont'd)
10-21
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal A5.
1
2
5
PUR
i r Hi
3
11 /
22
I4 I >II7
|S
9 110
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
>< ><
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
40 41
/ \ 44
48I 49

YES-Update the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m
goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250).B
5P socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
A5.B
10-22
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel Supply System
Fuel and Emissions Systems

Special Tools
General Troubleshooting Information.
System Description
How to Set Readiness Codes
11-2
11-3
11-9
11-16
11-18
11-78
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
Injector Replacement
MAP Sensor Replacement
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement.
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
A/F Sensor Replacement
Secondary H02S Replacement
....
CMP Sensor Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement
Knock Sensor Replacement
ELD Replacement
PCM Update
PCM Replacement
11-81
11-83
11-215
11-225
11-226
11-240
11-242
11-242
11-243
11-243
11-244
11-245
11-246
11-247
11-247
11-248
11-249
11-250
Electronic Throttle Control System

DTC Troubleshooting
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
Accelerator Pedal Module
11-252
11-253
11-289
11-289

(VCM) System
DTC Troubleshooting
Front Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
11-290
11-291
11-314
11-315
11-327
11-329
11-335
11-340
11-343
11-343
11-344
11-346
11-348
11-350
11-353
11-355
11-356
11-356
11-357
11-358
11-359
11-360
Intake Air System

C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
T h r o t t l e B o d y Test
T h r o t t l e B o d y Cleaning
A i r Cleaner Removal/Installation
A i r Cleaner E l e m e n t
Inspection/Replacement
Intake A i r Resonator
I M T A c t u a t o r Replacement
T h r o t t l e B o d y Removal/Installation
11-361
11-362
11-371
11-372
11-372
11-373
11-373
11-374
11-375
Catalytic Converter System

11-376
11-377
W a r m U p T W C Removal/Installation . . . 11-379
U n d e r - f l o o r T W C Removal/Installation . 1 1 - 3 8 1
EGR System
Idle Control System

DTC Troubleshooting
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting....
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
PSP Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal
Idle Speed Inspection
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
Fuel P u m p Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Tank D r a i n i n g
Fuel Line Inspection
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Precautions
Removal
Installation
Fuel Tank U n i t R e m o v a l a n d
Installation
Fuel Pressure Regulator R e p l a c e m e n t .
Fuel Filter Replacement
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge S e n d i n g U n i t
Replacement
Fuel Tank R e p l a c e m e n t
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
Fuel Gauge S e n d i n g Unit Test
L o w Fuel Indicator Test
11-316
11-317
11-320
11-321
11-322
11-324
11-325
11-326
EGR Valve R e p l a c e m e n t
EGR Pipe R e p l a c e m e n t
11-382
11-383
11-394
11-394
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection
PCV Valve Replacement
11-395
11-396
11-397
11-397
EVAP System
11-398
11-399
Fuel Cap Warning M e s s a g e S y s t e m

Troubleshooting
E V A P Canister Replacement
FTP S e n s o r Replacement
E V A P Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
E V A P Canister Purge Valve
Replacement.......
11-426
11-428
11-429
11-430
11-430

Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
07406-004000B
07406-0070301
07AAA-S0XA100
07AAJ-S6MA150
07JAZ-001000B
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ-S5AA200
11-2
Description
Fuel Pressure Gauge
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
Fuel Sender Wrench
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 04 In.Hg,
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Adapter
Pressure Gauge Adapter
Oil Pressure Hose
Oty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

The term intermittent failure means a system may have
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out, the
original problem may have been intermittent.
2. If the MIL stays o n , connect the HDS to the data link

connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of
the dashboard.
Service Information
Periodically, new PCM software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check online
for the latest software or service information related to
the DTCs or s y m p t o m s you are troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts

Open and short are c o m m o n electrical terms. A n open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple terms, this usually means something
w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics (such as
PCMs) this can sometimes mean something works, but
not the w a y it's supposed to.

System)
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for 1520
seconds (see page 11-78).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM and
all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the DLC
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot
data, and download any data found. Then refer to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel t r i m
malfunction that activated the MIL was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, current data, and other powertrain
control module (PCM) data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came w i t h the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are f o u n d , go to MIL troubleshooting (see
page 11-225).
(cont'd)
11-3

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
If the MIL did not stay on
DTC Clear
If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability

problem, do the s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is

stopped.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires y o u to reset the

PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only result
in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced PCM.

30 seconds.
HDS Clear Command
PCM Reset
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the

system even if there is no electrical power such as w h e n
the battery negative terminal or No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse
are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts
should be cleared by using the CLEAR COMMAND of the
HDS, if parts are replaced.
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is

stopped.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this

purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP
pattern clear. DTC clear c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC
codes, freeze data, the on-board snapshot, and
readiness codes. This must be done w i t h the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTCs, freeze
data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all
specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If
the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared, you must
do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern
clear c o m m a n d erases only CKP pattern data. This
c o m m a n d is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command

If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,
be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP
pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, you then need to do these procedures, in
this order: PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326);
CKP pattern learn procedure; test-drive to set readiness
codes to complete (see page 11-78).
11-4

30 seconds.
CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn
Learn Procedure (without the HDS)
Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)

without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on.

2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with

the throttle fully closed) f r o m an engine speed of
2,500 rpm d o w n to 1,000 rpm with the transmission in
2.
3. Repeat step 2 several times.
30 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
A

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and

4. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If
you replace the PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code. For the engine to start, you must
rewrite the immobilizer code w i t h the HDS.
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU

w i t h the HDS.
5. Select CRANK (CKP) PATTERN CLEAR, and clear the
CKP pattern.
6. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
(cont'd)
11-5

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Connectors
4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the PCM

connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the
terminal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP

system for up to 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0). J u m p i n g the SCS line
after turning the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)
cancels this function. Disconnecting the PCM during this
function, without j u m p i n g the SCS line first, can damage
the PCM.
2. Remove the cover (D).
5. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to a

commercially available digital multimeter (B), and
connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a
commercially available banana jack (Pomona
Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
3. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.

NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
( A = D , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for
identification.
6. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal

test port f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the tips
into the terminals.
I NOTICE I
For accurate results, always use the pin probe
(male).
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do
not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or
other substitutes. Damaged terminals cause a poor
connection and an incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures
can cause poor or intermittent electrical
connections.
11-6
Substituting the PCM

Special T o o l s Required
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester
Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation
w i t h the latest HDS software version
HDS pocket tester
GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version
Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
NOTE:
Use this procedure w h e n you have to substitute a
known-good PCM during the troubleshooting
procedure.
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest HDS
software version.

all other vehicle systems. If it d o e s n ' t go to the DLC
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226). If you are
returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step
4 and 5, then clean the throttle body (see page 11 -372)
after substituting the PCM.
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
(cont'd)
11-7

OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each
DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to
see if the repair was successfully completed. The results
of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
finished.
FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of the
enable conditions for the DTC.

(A=n, B = ^ , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for
identification.
10. Remove the bolts (E) and the PCM (F).
11. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
13. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
14. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
15. Enter the immobilizer PCM code that you got f r o m the
iN, and use the PCM replacement procedure in the
IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows you to start the
engine.
17. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the
throttle body (see page 11-372).
(see page 11-249).
20. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure.
11-8

MIL
Note
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem
ON
P0102 (50)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P0103(50)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
P0107 (3)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P0108 (3)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
ON
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-88)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-90)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-92)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-93)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-97)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-98)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-100)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-253)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-255)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-102)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-108)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-108)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0101 (50)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
Detection Item
P0111 (10)
P0112 (10)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

Problem
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P0113(10)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
ON
P0117(6)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/

Performance Problem
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
P0118(6)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
ON
P0122 (7)
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P0123 (7)
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage
ON
P0125 (86)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow

Response
Cooling System Malfunction
ON
P0116(86)
P0128 (87)
P0133(157)
P0134(151)
P0135(151)
P0137(161)
P0138(161)
P0139(161)
P0141 (163)
P0153(158)
P0154(152)
P0155(152)
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)

Malfunction/Slow Response
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater System
Malfunction
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
Malfunction/Slow Response
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater System
Malfunction
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MILto come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
(cont'd)
11-9

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
(MIL indication")
P0157(162)
P0158(162)
P0159 062)
P0161 (164)
P0171 (153)
P0172(153)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
O
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
Detection Item
Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Lean
MIL
Note
H02S (Bank 2,
ON
H02S (Bank 2,
ON
H02S (Bank 2,
ON
H02S (Bank 2,
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-257)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-259)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-124)
ON
Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Rich
ON
Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean
ON
Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich
ON
P0222 (07)
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P0223(07)
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage
ON
Random Misfire Detected
ON
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction
ON
P0335(4)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal
ON
P0339 (4)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
ON
P0174 054)
P0175(154)
P0300 (77)
and any
combination of
the following:
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
P0325 (23)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-133)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-138)
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
11-10
MIL
NOTE
No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction
ON
P0352 (72)
ON
P0353 (73)
ON
P0354 (74)
ON
P0355 (75)
ON
P0356 (76)
ON
P0365 (8)
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit No Signal
ON
P0369 (8)
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-143)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-146)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-383)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-384)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-385)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-388)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-377)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-377)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-399)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-403)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-404)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-407)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-410)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-410)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-414)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-329)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-329)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-332)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0351 (71)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
Detection Item
P0400 (80)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Leak Detected
ON
P0401 (80)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow
ON
P0404 0 2 )
ON
P0406 0 2 )
P0420 065)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit Range/Performance

Problem
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
P0430(166)
Front Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
ON
P0443 (92)
ON
P0451 (91)
P0452 (91)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit

Malfunction
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P0453 (91)
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
P0455 (90)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected
ON
P0456(90)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected
ON
OFF
P0462
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap

Loose or Missing
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit
Range/Performance Problem
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
P0463
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
OFF
P0457
P0461
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
(cont'd)
11-11

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0496(92)
MIL
NOTE
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow Detected
ON
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Flow Detected
ON
P0498 017)
ON
P0499 017)
P0506 0 4 )
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low

Voltage
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High
Voltage
Idle Control System RPM Lower than Excepted
P0507(14)
Idle Control System RPM Higher than Excepted
ON
P050A067)
Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem
ON
P050B067)
Cold Start Ignition Timing Control System Performance Problem
ON
P0522 (22)
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P0523(22)
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
Charging System Low Voltage
OFF
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit

Unexpected Voltage
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Programming Error
OFF
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module

Malfunction
Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit Malfunction
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-415)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-416)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-419)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-422)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-317)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-318)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-147)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-149)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-291)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-293)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-152)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-156)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-159)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-159)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-160)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-362)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-367)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-161)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-162)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-163)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-164)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
O
P0497(90)
P0562
P0563
P0602 096)
P060A(131)
P0615*
P062F031)
P0630(139)
Detection Item
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module Keep

Alive Memory (KAM) Error
VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch
ON
ON
ON
P0685(135)
P1077 (106)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal

Circuit Malfunction
Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in High RPM Position
P1078 (106)
Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in Low RPM Position
ON
P1109 0 3 )
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High
ON
P1116(86)
ON
P1128 (5)
P1129(5)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than
Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected
ON
ON
ON
* 1 : The starter system warning message or starter system indicator may come on.
11-12
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P1172 (157)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
Detection Item
MIL
NOTE
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-166)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-166)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-167)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-168)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-423)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-426)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-170)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-261)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-263)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-267)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-268)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-171)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-174)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-176)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-178)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-269)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-272)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-275)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-278)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-279)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-282)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-284)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-285)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-287)
P1174 (158)
PI 297
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of
Range High
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of
Range High
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage
PI 298
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage
OFF
P1454 (91)
ON
P145C (90)
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

Problem
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction
ON
P1549
Charging System High Voltage
OFF
P1658 (40)
ON
ON
P1683(40)
Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON

Malfunction
Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF
Malfunction
Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem
P1684(40)
Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem
ON
P16BB
Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage
OFF
Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage
OFF
Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction
OFF
Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction
OFF
Starter Cut Relay STRLY Circuit Malfunction
OFF
P2101(40)
Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction
ON
P2118(40)
Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem
ON
P2122 (37)
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)

Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation
ON
P1659 (40)
P16BC
P16BD*
P16BE*
P16BF*
P2123(37)
P2127 (37)
P2128 (37)
P2135 (7)
P2138 (37)
P2176 (40)
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position (TP)

Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
* 1 : The starter system warning message or starter system indicator may come on.
(cont'd)
11-13

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P2183 092)
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
Detection Item
MIL
NOTE
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-181)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-182)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-184)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-186)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-186)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-188)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-189)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-189)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-190)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-192)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-190)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-192)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-195)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-197)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-195)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-197)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-200)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-202)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-200)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-202)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-396)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-389)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-423)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)
P2184 0 92)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage
P2185 092)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage
ON
P2195 055)
ON
P2197 056)
P2227(13)
P2228(13)
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Signal Stuck
Lean
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Signal Stuck
Lean
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P2229(13)
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ON
P2237(155)
ON
P2238(155)
P2240(156)
P2241 (156)
P2243(155)
P2245 055)
P2247(156)
P2249(156)
P2251 (155)
P2252 055)
P2254(156)
P2255(156)
P2279(109)
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
High Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
Low Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
High Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
Low Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low
Voltage
Intake Air System Leak
P2413(12)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction
ON
P2422 017)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck

Closed Malfunction
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Off Internal Timer
Malfunction
ON
P2610(132)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
11-14
MIL
NOTE
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P2649 (21)
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage
ON
P2653 (38)
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P2654 (38)
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage
ON
P2658 030)
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 2) Circuit Low Voltage
ON
P2659(130)
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 2) Circuit High Voltage
ON
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit

Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit
Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck Off Bank 1
ON
ON
Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck Off Bank 2
ON
F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)))
ON
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-VTM-4

Control Unit)
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - VSA
Modulator-Control Unit)
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge
Control Module)
PGM-FI System and A/T System Program Version Mismatch
OFF
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-296)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-298)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-300)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-302)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-304)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-306)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-308)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-311)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-206)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-207)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-209)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-211)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-213)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-213)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P2648 (21)
P2A00(157)
P2A03(158)
P3400(114)
P3497(114)
U0029(126)
U0114*
U0122
1)0155(126)
110300(131)
U1101
Two Drive Cycle

Detection
O
O
,.*2
O*
*2
Detection Item
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Active

Control Engine Mount(ACM))
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
*2: One drive cycle detection in ail cylinder activation modes.
*3: Two drive cycle detection when in cylinder pause driving mode.
*4: With VTM-4
11-15

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no DTC,
do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom
Engine will not start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
2. Test the starter (see page 4-10).
4. Troubleshoot the fuel p u m p circuit (see page 11-335).

(MIL comes on and stays o n ,
no DTCs set)
MIL comes on and stays o n ,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls
immediately
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine is hard to start
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
Cold fast idle too low

Cold fast idle too high
Idle speed fluctuates
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed

is below specification
w i t h o u t load
is above specification
without load
drops w h e n steering wheel
is turned
11-16
Also check for

Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Broken t i m i n g belt
Fuel contamination
No power to PCM
No ground to PCM
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-225).
Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-449).
Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-449).

3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-372).
3. Clean the throttle body, (see page 11-372)
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -325).
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page 11 -371).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check, (see page 11-371)
4. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11 -320).
1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit (see page
11-321).
2. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-371).
Incorrect valve
adjustment
Incorrect valve t i m i n g
or clearance
adjustment
Intake air leaks
Incorrect valve
adjustment
1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit (see page

11-321).
2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-289).
Intake air leaks

2. Troubleshoot the PSP switch signal circuit (see page
11-322).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11 -371).
Power steering system

problems
Symptom
Low power
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -343).
Engine stalls

3. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -325).
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
circuit (see page 11-324).
1. Check the fuel tank vapor control valve hose between
the EVAP canister and fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between the
fuel filler pipe and the fuel tank.
3. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions.
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-357).
1. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions.
2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-357).
Difficult to refuel
Fuel overflows during

refueling
(No DTCs set)
Fuel cap warning message
stays on
HDS does not communicate
w i t h the PCM or the vehicle
Engine will not crank
Also check for

Low compression
Incorrect camshaft
timing
Incorrect engine oil
level
Exhaust restriction
Intake air leaks
Faulty harness and
sensor connections
Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle
Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle
Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system (see

page 11-426).
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit, (see page 11-226)
1. Test the battery, (see page 22-93)

2. Check the starting system (see page 4-5).
Correct HDS soft

ware
Shorted reference
voltage
Shorted reference
voltage
11-17

System Description
Fuel and Emissions Systems Diagram
CD FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (BANK 2, SENSOR 1)

REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (BANK 1, SENSOR 1)
FRONT SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
REAR SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
MANIFOLD A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) S E N S O R 1
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) S E N S O R /
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) S E N S O R
KNOCK SENSOR
THROTTLE BODY
<& INJECTOR
FUEL P R E S S U R E REGULATOR
FUEL FILTER
@ FUEL PUMP
FUEL TANK
11-18
D AIR CLEANER
> INTAKE AIR RESONATOR
5 EXHAUST G A S RECIRCULATION (EGR) V A L V E and
POSITION S E N S O R
D POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) V A L V E
D FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 2)
>i REAR WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 1)
) UNDER-FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE V A L V E
D EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
P EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE
F U E L TANK P R E S S U R E (FTP) SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL V A L V E
) INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (IMT) V A L V E
11-19

System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control Systems
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
The PCM detects the failure of a signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit and stores a Pending DTC or a
Confirmed DTC. Depending on the failure, a Confirmed DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle. When a
Confirmed DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to the gauge via F-CAN.
One Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the PCM stores a Confirmed
DTC and turns on the MIL immediately.
Two Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Pending DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second drive cycle, the
PCM stores a Confirmed DTC and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitute a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a Confirmed DTC
to be stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds to
check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all readiness codes
are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0), the PCM stays on (up to 30 minutes). If the PCM connector is
disconnected during this t i m e , the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery or j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS after the ignition switch is turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0).
11-20
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( ) (49P)
Terminal
number
Wire color
WHT
PNK
LT GRN
WHT
Terminal name
Description
Signal
(POWER
SOURCE FOR
SOLENOID VALVES)
SLS (SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID)
Power source for

solenoid valve
With ignition switch ON (II): battery

voltage
Drives shift lock

solenoid
STRLY (STARTER
RELAY)
FANL (RADIATOR
FAN CONTROL)
Drives starter cut relay
With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake

pedal pressed, and accelerator released:
about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
Drives A/C condenser

fan relay
PUR
FANH (RADIATOR
FAN CONTROL)
Drives radiator fan

relay
GRN
MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN

RELAY 1)
Drives PGM-FI main

relay 1
BRN
BKSWNC (BRAKE
PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH)
Detects brake pedal

position switch signal
LT BLU
YEL
BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL

POSITION SWITCH)
V G - (MASS AIR
FLOW
(MAF) SENSOR SIDE)
Detect brake pedal

position switch signal
Ground for MAF
sensor signal
VBS0L2
With condenser fan running: about 0 V

With condenser fan stopped: battery
voltage
With radiator fan running: about 0 V
With radiator fan stopped or running at
low speed: battery voltage
With ignition switch in LOCK (0): battery
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake
pedal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake
pedal pressed: about 0 V
With brake pedal released: about 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
(cont'd)
11-21

1
2
VB
S0L2
SLS
11
I MO
FPR
22
VSV
29
ETCS
RLY
40
SUB
RLY
30
VSS
OUT
41
10
6
7
8
9
4
3
5
BKSW
NC
BKSW V G ELD
STRLY FANL FANH MRLY
21
14
19
20
17
18
15
13
CSS CSS
ACC AMA AMC ATF>P D3SW APSA APSB VG+ EC)T2
24
25
26
27
28
VCC3
31
STS
SCS
LG3
32
VCC4
SG3
37
34
36
35
33
CKP CMP
NEP OUT OUT VCC7 SG7
44
46
S-NET
W EN
5V
SG4 STRLD
39
38
PSP
SW
FTP
48
419
CANH CA NL
Terminal
number
10
Wire color
11
GRN
13
YEL
14
PUR
15
ORN
LT BLU
16
PNK
17
BLU
18
PUR
11-22
Terminal name
Description
ELD (ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR
(ELD))
IMOFPR
(IMMOBILIZER FUEL
PUMP RELAY)
ACC (A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY)
CSSAMA (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID A
SIGNAL)
Drives A/C
compressor clutch
relay
Outputs rocker arm oil
control solenoid B
(Bank 1) drive signal
CSSAMC (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID C
SIGNAL)
Outputs rocker arm oil

control solenoid A
(Bank 2) drive signal
ATPP
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P
POSITION)
D3SW (D3 SWITCH)
Detects transmission
range switch P
position signal input
APSA
(ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR A)
Detects ELD signal
Drives PGM-FI main

relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
Detects D3 switch
signal
Detects APP sensor A
signal
Signal
With ignition switch ON (II):
about 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on electrical load)
About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning
ignition switch ON (II), then battery
voltage
With compressor ON: about 0 V
With compressor OFF: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank
ON: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank
OFF: about 0 V
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
ON: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
OFF: about 0 V
In P: about 0 V
In any position other than P:
battery voltage
D3 switch released: battery voltage
D3 switch pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
accelerator pedal pressed: about 4.7 V
accelerator pedal released: about 1.0 V
1)
1)
2)
2)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A () (49P)
Terminal
number
19
Wire color
Terminal name
Description
GRY
APSB (ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR B)
Detects APP sensor B

signal
20
LT BLU
Detects MAF sensor

signal
21
PUR
22
LT GRN
24
RED
25
ORN
26
WHT
27
BRN
28
GRN
V G + (MASS AIR
FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
+ SIDE)
ECT2 (ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2)
VSV (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE)
VCC3 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
VCC4 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG3 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG4 (SENSOR
GROUND)
STRLD
29
RED
ETCSRLY
(ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY)
Detects ECT sensor 2

signal
Drives EVAP canister

vent shut valve
Signal
accelerator pedal pressed: about 2.3 V
accelerator pedal released: about 0.5 V
At idle: 1 . 1 - 1 . 6 V
(between VG + t e r m i n a l and
VGterminal)
about 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant
temperature)
battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground
Sensor ground
Less than 0.2 V at all times
Detects starter cut

relay 2
Drives electronic
throttle control system
(ETCS) control relay
With starter ON: battery voltage
(cont'd)
11-23

Terminal
number
30
Wire color
31
LT BLU
32
Terminal name
Description
Signal
VSSOUT (VEHICLE
SPEED SIGNAL
OUTPUT)
STS (STARTER
SWITCH SIGNAL)
Sends vehicle speed

signal
Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
Detects starter switch

signal
BRN
SCS (SERVICE CHECK

SIGNAL)
Detects service check

signal
33
YEL
34
GRN
Outputs engine speed

pulse
Sends CKP signal to
engine mount control
unit
35
RED
36
LT BLU
37
BLK
38
BLU
NEP (ENGINE SPEED

PULSE)
CKPOUT
(CRANKSHAFT
POSITION (CKP)
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
CMPOUT (CAMSHAFT
POSITION (CMP)
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
VCC7 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG7 (SENSOR
GROUND)
PSPSW (POWER
STEERING PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
With ignition switch in START (III)

position: battery voltage
With ignition switch in any position other
than START (III): about 0 V
With service check signal shorted w i t h
the HDS: about 0 V
With service check signal opened: about
5.0 V
With engine running: pulses
11-24
BLU
Sends CMP signal to

engine m o u n t control
unit
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground
Detects PSP switch

signal
At idle w i t h steering wheel in straight

ahead position: about 0 V
At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
battery voltage

1
2
VB
S0L2
SLS
11
I MO
FPR
22
VSV
29
ETCS
RLY
40
SUB
RLY
/
/
30
VSS
OUT
41
7
9
3
4
5
6
8
10
BKSW
BKSW V G STRLY FANL FANH MRLY
NC
ELD
17
14
ie
20
21
18
19
15
13
C S S CSS
ACC AMA AMC ATF P D3SW APSA APSB VG+ ECT2
24
25
26
27
28
5
VCC3
31
STS
SCS
32
LG3
VCC4
SG3
37
34
36
35
CKP CMP
NEP OUT OUT VCC7 SG7
44
46
S-NET
5V
W EN
33
SG4 STRLD
39
38
PSP
SW FTP
48
i
CANH CA NL
Terminal
number
39
Wire color
Terminal name
LT GRN
40
PNK
41
BRN
FTP (FUEL TANK

PRESSURE (FTP)
SENSOR)
SUBRLY (PGM-FI
SUBRELAY)
LG3 (LOGIC GROUND)
44
GRY
46
LT BLU
48
WHT
49
RED
WEN (WRITE ENABLE

SIGNAL)
S-NET5V (SERIAL
COMMUNICATION
FOR IMMOBILIZER)
CANH (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL HIGH)
CANL (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL LOW)
Description
Signal
Detects FTP sensor

signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill

cap removed: about 2.5 V
Drives PGM-FI
subrelay
Ground circuit for
PCM
Detects write enable
signal
Sends serial
communication signal
Sends and receives

Sends and receives

With ignition switch ON: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
With key removed f r o m ignition switch:
about 5.0 V
(cont'd)
11-25

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)
Terminal
number
1
Wire color
BLK/YEL
YEL/BLK
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BRN
BLK/RED
YEL
BLU
RED
WHT/BLU
BRN/WHT
11-26
BLK
Terminal name
PG2 (POWER GROUND)
VBSOL(POWER SOURCE
FOR SOLENOID VALVES)
IGP (POWER SOURCE)
INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR)
LSB (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B)
Description
Ground circuit for
PCM
Power source for
solenoid valves
Power source for PCM
circuit
Drives No. 1 injector
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve B
Signal
W i t h ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
battery voltage
At idle: duty controlled
battery voltage

current controlled
1
PG2
2
VB
SOL
IGP
INJ1
INJ5
INJ4
INJ3
EL
10
!NJ2
INJ6
LSB
Terminal
number
11
Wire color
12
BRN/WHT
13
BLU
14
RED/BLU
15
RED
VCENTB1 (VIRTUAL
GROUND BANK 1)
16
WHT
17
RED/BLK
18
BLU
19
WHT/BLK
SH02SB2 (FRONT
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(FRONT SECONDARY
H02S) BANK 2,
SENSOR 2)
TPSA (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP)
SENSOR A)
VCC5 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
IMTM (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) VALVE
MONITOR)
BLK/RED
Terminal name
IGPLS5 (No. 5
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
IGPLS6 (No. 6
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
VSB1 (VS
C E L L + B A N K 1)
VSB2 (VS
C E L L + B A N K 2)
Description
Drives No. 5 ignition coil
Signal
Drives No. 6 ignition coil
Detects rear A/F sensor

(Bank 1, sensor 1)VS
CELL signal
Detects front A/F sensor
(Bank 2, sensor 1)VS
CELL signal
Reference voltage for
rear A/F sensor
(Bank 1,sensor 1)
Detects front secondary
H02S (Bank 2, sensor 2)
signal
With w a r m e d up engine running: about

3.4-4.8 V
3.4-4.8 V
With w a r m e d up engine at idle: about
3.4-4.8 V
With throttle fully opened f r o m idle and
w a r m e d up engine: about 0.6 V
With throttle quickly closed:
below 0.4 V
Detects TP sensor A
signal
With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V

With throttle fully closed: about 0.9 V
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Detects IMT valve
position

W i t h ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
W i t h engine speed above 4,300 r p m :
about 0 V
(cont'd)
11-27

XL
PG2
11
IG
PLS5
"22"
IG
PLS3
29
IG
PLS1
40
10
7
6
3
9
4
5
2
VB
INJ4 INJ3
INJ6
LSB
INJ2
SOL
IGP
INJ1
INJ5
17
16
20
21
12
14
19
13
15
18
VCM
VCE SH02
IG
PLS6 VSB1 VSB2 NTB1 SB2 TPSA VCC5 IMTM SWC LSC
"~2T~ 24
26
28
25
IG VCEN
SH02
PLS4 TB2
SB1
esse
TPSB
34
35 I 36
3T 38
39
30
32
33
31
IG
NC CSSA
PLS2 IPB1 IPB2 SG5 SG1 MAP VCC1 NM
42
45
PG1
LG2 | IG1
CKP [ CMP
CSSB
LJ
Terminal
number
20
Wire color
Terminal name
BLU/WHT
21
GRN/RED
22
WHT/BLU
23
BRN
24
RED/WHT
VCMSWC (ROCKER
A R M OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH C)
LSC (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
IGPLS3 (No. 3
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
IGPLS4 (No. 4
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
VCENTB2 (VIRTUAL
GROUND BANK 2)
25
GRN
11-28
SH02SB1 (REAR
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(REAR SECONDARY
H02S) BANK 1,
SENSOR 2)
Description
Detects front rocker
arm oil pressure
switch signal
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve C
Drives No. 3 ignition
coil
Signal
With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:
battery voltage
current controlled

coil
Reference voltage
supply for front A/F
sensor
(Bank 2, sensor 1)
Detects rear
secondary H02S
(Bank 1,sensor 2)
signal
With w a r m e d up engine at idle: about

3.4-4.8 V
With throttle fully opened f r o m idle and

w a r m e d up engine: about 0.6 V
With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
Terminal
number
26
Wire
color
RED/BLU
28
GRN/WHT
29
YEL7GRN
30
BLU/RED
31
GRN
IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION

COIL PULSE)
IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
IPB1 (IP C E L L + B A N K 1)
32
GRN/RED
IPB2 (IP C E L L + B A N K 2 )
33
GRN
34
GRN/WHT
35
GRN/RED
36
YEL/RED
37
RED
SG5 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG1 (SENSOR
GROUND)
MAP (MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR)
VCC1 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
N M (INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED
SENSOR)
Terminal name
TPSB (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP) SENSOR
B)
CSSC (CYLINDER STOP
SOLENOID C)
Description
Signal
Detects TP sensor B
signal
With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V

With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V
Drives rocker arm oil

control solenoid
A (Bank 2)
coil
coil
Detects rear A/F
sensor (Bank 1,
sensor 1) p u m p cell
Detects front A/F
sensor (Bank 2,
sensor 1) p u m p cell
Sensor ground

about 0 V
With engine running: about 2.05.6 V
Sensor ground
Detects MAP sensor

signal

At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine
speed)
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed
sensor signal

about 0 V or about 5.0 V
With engine idling in N: about 2.5 V
(cont'd)
11-29

PG2
11
IG
PLS5
22
IG
PU33
29
IG
PLS1
40
2
VB
SOL
12
IG
PLS6
23
IG
PUS4
30
IG
PLS2
41
PG1
LG2
10
INJ6
INJ1
INJ2
LSB
INJ5
INJ4 INJ3
14
17
20
21
15
18
19
ie>
VCM
VCE SHC)2
VSB1 VSB2 NTB1 SB 2 TPSA VCC5 IMTM SWC LSC
24
25
26
28
VCEN
SH02
TB2
SB1
esse
TPSB
37
39
32
34
35
36
38
33
31
IGP
13
IPB1 IPB2 SG5

42
IG1
SG1
MAP VCC1
45
46
CKP
NM
CMP
NC
CSSA
A9
c s SB
Terminal
number
38
Wire color
39
GRN/YEL
40
BLK
41
BRN/YEL
42
BLK/YEL
45
BLU
46
GRN
49
GRN/RED
11-30
BLU
Terminal name
NC (OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR)
CSSA (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID A)
PG1 (POWER
GROUND)
LG2 (LOGIC GROUND)
IG1 (IGNITION
SIGNAL)
CKP (CRANKSHAFT
POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR)
CMP (CAMSHAFT
POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR)
CSSB (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID B)
Description
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
sensor signal
control solenoid
B(Bank1)
Ground circuit for
PCM
Ground circuit for
PCM
Detects ignition signal
Detects CKP sensor
signal
Signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and front
wheels turned by hand: pulses
about 0 V
battery voltage
Detects CMP sensor

signal

control solenoid
A ( B a n k 1)

about 0 V
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)
Terminal
number
1
Wire color
Terminal name
BLK
BLU
GRN
YEL/GRN
BLK/WHT
PGM ETCS (POWER

GROUND ETCS)
ETCSM + (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR + SIDE)
ETCSM (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR - SIDE)
IG1ETCS (IGNITION
SIGNAL ETCS)
S02SHTCB1 (REAR
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(REAR SECONDARY
H02S)(BANK1
SENSOR 2) HEATER
CONTROL)
AFSHTCB1 (REAR AIR
FUEL RATIO (REAR
A/F) SENSOR ( BANK
1, SENSOR 1) HEATER
CONTROL)
Description
Signal
Ground circuit for PCM
Drives throttle actuator
Ground for throttle

actuator
Drives rear secondary

heater

battery voltage
battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled
BLK/WHT
Drives rear A/F sensor

(Bank 1,sensor 1)heater

battery voltage
0 V or duty controlled
(cont'd)
11-31

Signal
Terminal
number
7
Wire color
Terminal name
Description
GRN/RED
Drives front secondary

heater

battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled
GRN/WHT
Drives front A/F sensor

(Bank 2, sensor 1) heater

battery voltage
0V or duty controlled
GRN/RED
S02SHTCB2 (FRONT
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
HEATER CONTROL)
AFSHTCB2 (FRONT
AIR FUEL RATIO
(FRONT A/F) SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
HEATER CONTROL)
SHD (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE D)
Drives shift solenoid

valve D
10
BLU/RED
With engine running in N, and in D and

2 during no lock-up condition: about 0 V
With engine running in P and R, and in
D during lock-up condition:
battery voltage
With EGR operating: duty controlled
With EGR not operating: about 0V
11
YEL/BLU
12
YEL/BLU
15
GRN/RED
16
GRN/YEL
11-32
EGR (EXHAUST GAS

RECIRCULATION
(EGR) VALVE)
VCC6 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
VCC2 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG6 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG2 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Drives EGR valve
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground
Sensor ground
Less than 0.2 V at ail times
Terminal
number
17
Wire color
Terminal name
YEL/GRN
18
BLU/YEL
19
RED/WHT
20
BLU/YEL
ATPD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D
POSITION)
ATPFWD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH FWD
POSITION)
ATPRVS
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RVS
POSITION)
SHA (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE A)
21
RED
22
BLU/YEL
24
RED/YEL
25
WHT
LSA (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A)
POIL (ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE SENSOR)
IAT (INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR)
ATPR
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R
POSITION)
Description
Signal
range switch D
In D: about OV
In any position other than D:
battery voltage
range switch FWD
position signal
In D, 2 and 1: about 0V
In any position other than D, 2 and 1:
battery voltage
range switch RVS
In P, R and N: about OV
In any position other than P, R and N:
battery voltage

valve A
With engine running in R, D (in 2nd and

3rd gears), and 2: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 1st, 4th
and 5th gears), and 1: about 0 V
current controlled
Drives A/T clutch

pressure control
solenoid valve A
Detects rocker arm oil
pressure sensor signal
Detects IAT sensor
signal
range switch R

(depending on engine oil pressure)
about 0.1 4.8 V (depending on intake air
temperature)
In R: about OV
In any position other than R:
battery voltage
(cont'd)
11-33

Terminal
number
26
Wire color
Terminal name
RED/BLK
27
BLU/BLK
28
GRN/WHT
ATPN
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH N
POSITION)
OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHB (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE B)
30
BLU/YEL
32
RED/WHT
33
BLU/YEL
11-34
VCMSWB (ROCKER
ARM OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH B)
ECT1 (ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECT)
SENSOR 1)
TATF (ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR)
Description
Signal
range switch N
In N: about 0 V
In any position other than N:
battery voltage
Detects 2nd clutch

transmission fluid
pressure switch signal

Without 2nd clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st,
2nd and 5th gears), 2, and 1: battery
voltage
With engine running in D (in 3rd and 4th
gears): about 0 V
battery voltage

valve B
Detects rear rocker

arm oil pressure
switch signal
Detects ECT sensor 1
signal
Detects ATF
temperature senser
signal

about 0.1 4.8 V (depending on engine
coolant temperature)

about 0.24.0 V (about 1.8 V a t operating
temperature, depending on ATF
temperature)
Terminal
number
34
Wire color
Terminal name
Description
WHT/BLK
Detects EGR valve

position sensor signal

(depending on EGR valve lift)
35
BRN
range switch 1
In 1: about OV
In any position other than 1 :
battery voltage
37
BLU/YEL
Detects 4th clutch

transmission fluid
38
BLU/WHT
39
GRN
EGRP (EXHAUST GAS

RECIRCULATION
(EGR) VALVE
POSITION SENSOR)
ATP1
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 1
POSITION)
OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHC (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE C)
40
RED/YEL
41
BRN/YEL

Without 4th clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
Without 3rd clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
With engine running in D (in 1st, 3rd and
5th gears), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 2nd
and 4th gears), D3 (in 2nd gear),and 2:
about 0 V
With engine running, engine coolant
below 140 F (60C): battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant
above 140 F (60C): duty controlled
PCS (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE)
LG1 (LOGIC GROUND)
Detects 3rd clutch

transmission fluid
valve C
Drives EVAP canister

purge valve
Ground circuit for

PCM
Signal
(cont'd)
11-35

Terminal
number
42
Wire color
Terminal name
WHT/BLU
43
WHT/GRN
44
WHT/RED
46
BLU
47
RED/BLU
ALTL (ALTERNATOR L
SIGNAL)
ALTC (ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
ALTF (ALTERNATOR
FR SIGNAL)
ATP2
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 2
POSITION)
KS (KNOCK SENSOR)
48
WHT/BLU
49
WHT/RED
11-36
I M T + (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR +
SIDE)
I M T - (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR SIDE)
Description
Signal
Detects alternator L
signal
Sends alternator
control signal
Detects alternator FR
signal
range switch 2
With ignition switch ON (II): about OV

With engine running: battery voltage
W i t h w a r m e d up engine running: about
7.5 V (depending on electrical load)
With engine running: about 05.0 V
(depending on electrical load)
In 2: about 0 V
In any position other than 2:
battery voltage
Detects knock sensor

signal
Drives IMT actuator
With engine knocking: pulses
Drives IMT actuator

battery voltage

battery voltage
PCM Electrical Connections

IGNITION COIL
RELAY
FUEL PUMP
To
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
CD STOP/HORN (20 A)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
(2) No. 1 MAIN FUSE (120 A)
No. 12 ACM (10 A)
No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A)
No. 23 BACK UP (10 A)
No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE
ACUTUATOR CONTROL)
(15A)
(7) No. 150IL LEVEL (7.5 A)
(J) No. 11 SUB (15 A)
J) No. 18IGCOIL05A)
i l No. 19 MAIN (15 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A)
No. 3 ACG (10 A)
# N o . 10 METER (7.5 A)
No. 22 VB SOL (7.5 A)
No. 36 HAC (10 A)
@ No. 23 ST CUT RLY (7.5 A)
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
(ETCS) CONTROL
RELAY
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
@STS (7.5 A)
(cont'd)
11-37

MAP SENSOR
No. 1 INJECTOR
VCC1 B36
B4 INJ1
MAP B35
SG1 B34
No. 2 INJECTOR
B8 INJ2
No. 3 INJECTOR
E2
B7 INJ3
MAF SENSOR
No. 4 INJECTOR
B6 INJ4
VG + A20
VG-A9
No. 5 INJECTOR
IAT C24
<> B5 INJ5
SG2C16
IAT SENSOR
No. 6 INJECTOR
ECT SENS0R1
B9 INJ6
ECT1 C32
CMP SENSOR
KNOCK SENSOR
KS C47
P
VCC2C12
EGR VALVE
POSITION SENSOR
1
5
EGRP C34
B45 CKP
EGRC10
EGR VALVE
VCC6C11
IMTMB19
IMT+C48
IMT-C49
IMT
ACTUATOR
l l l l
U
11-38
LU
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
ALTERNATOR
LU
TO H - 9 ? > > r
SPARK
PLUG
ICM
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
To ^ - ( - - { W ^ f
SPARK
PLUG
FRONT SECONDARY H02S

(BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
5:
ICM
No. 2 IGNITION COIL

To
SPARK
3:
No. 3 IGNITION COIL

To < n n r ^ j
SPARK
PLUG
ICM
No. 4 IGNITION COIL

T O <nnr^wSPARK
PLUG
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
To
<nnr^f
SPARK
PLUG
ICM
No. 6 IGNITION COIL
(cont'd)
11-39

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B
(BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR
B39 CSSA
POIL C22
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A
(BANK 1)
B49 CSSB
REAR
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
C30VCMSWB
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A
(BANK 2)
ECT SENSOR 2
ECT2 A21
B28 CSSC
FRONT
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
SG7 A37
A.
B20VCMSWC
FTP SENSOR
VCC7 A36
STARTER CUT
RELAY 1 (STR)
FTP A39
A3 STRLY
11-40
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
BKSWA8
BKSWNC A7
L_
A48 CANH
O A49 CANL
VSSOUTA30
_ ^ To AUDIO,
^ NAVIGATION UNIT
AA
To IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
S-NET5V A46 6
NEP A33 <>
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
A44WEN
LG3 A41 <>
A32 SCS
PSPSW A38 <>
TP SENSOR
Bth-1
AQ
To AUDIO UNIT,
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT *1
To IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
PSP SWITCH
9B18VCC5
B17TPSA
VCC3 A24
B26 TPSB
APSAA18
<?B33 SG5
? C 2 ETCSM +
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
C3 ETCSM-
SG3 A26
VCC4 A25
APSB A 1 9 ?
SG4A27?
APP SENSOR A/B
THROTTLE
BODY
*1: With V T M - 4
(cont'd)
11-41

TATF C33 <>

A16ATPP
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C25ATPR
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
C17ATPD
SHB C28 ?
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
SHC C39
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
C19ATPRVS
C18ATPFWD
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
rff
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
LSAC21 <>
LSBB10
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
C38 0P3SW
LSC B21
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C
C27 0P2SW
NM B37 <>
SG6C15 <>
D3 SWITCH
A17D3SW
A2 SLS
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
NC B38
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
11-42
SHD C9
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
To
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
A34 CKPOUT
CKP 15 6
CSSAMAA14
To AUDIO UNIT
CSSAMC A15
CMP 7
A35 CMPOUT
F
SCPA 6
SCPC 4 <>
IG1 5 <>
IGSOL 10 <>
SOLRLY 11 t>
CANL12
SOLRM 9
SOLRP8
REAR ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
SOLFM 16 6
SOLFP2 ?
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
PG 1
LG3
PCM A ( ) (49P)
J 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 / I / ! 44 | / l 4 6 | / 48|49|
/
/
>< ><
PCM B (A) (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
J1|2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
26
28
25
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 42 l / l / l 45146 | X / \ 49
>< ><
PCM C (O) (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
Jl|2
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 i
& l
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
30
3233 34 35L> 37 38 39
|40|41 421431441/| 46147 48|49|
-*i
><
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont'd)
11-43

PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM
YEL/RED
VCC1
B35
MAP
B34
SG1
- GRN/RED
_r
- GRN/WHT
i
C32
ECT1
- RED/WHT -
YEL/RED
:*!
f"B'"
c
- RED/WHT - ^ l ^ f c f e ~
-GRN/YEL
=-| |
I
ECT SENSOR 1
T.
C19
7 ~
VCC2
YEL/BLU
-YEL/BLU
YEL/BLU
15
C113
p YEL/BLU
Z~i
EGRP
n
WHT/BLK
00
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
-YEL/BLU
-WHT/BLK
-GRN/YEL
-BLU/RED
- BLK
12V
-2EGR
BLU/RED
\
I"
\
EGR VALVE
. GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
C16
SG2
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
I - GRN/YEL
0000U0
11-44
C114
C152
C20
SHA
BLU/YEL
<1RP
-YEL
S H IIFT
FT SOLENOID
VALVE
LVE A
C28
SHB
GRN/WHT SHIFT SOLENOID

VALVE B
C39
SHC
- GRN -
W>
- GRN -
S H IIFT
FT SOLENOID
V A LLVVEE CC
C9
SHD
-HHP
-ORN-
GRN/RED
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
C21
LSA
RED
B10
LSB
-RED
-BLK
A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
- BRN/WHT-BLK
A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
B21
LSC
GRN/RED
- GRN/RED2
-BLK
A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
[N]
C27
OP2SW
BLU/BLK
- BLU/BLK
-HE
2 N D C L U T C H T R A N S MVI ISI SSISOINO NJl

F L U I D P R E S S U R E S W'ITCH
ITCH
C37
OP4SW
BLU/YEL
- BLU/YEL
-HE
4TH C L U T C H T R A N S M/IIS
I SSSI IOONN
F L U I D P R E S S U R E S W ITCH
ITCH
C38
OP3SW
BLU/WHT
- BLU/WHT
- H E Zt-i
3 R D C L U T C H T R A N S MÎ ISI SSISOINO NJI

F L U I D P R E S S U R E S WI ITTCCHH
C33
TATF
BLU/YEL
- BLU/YEL
- GRN/YEL
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(cont'd)
11-45

- YEL/BLK
H5T
B4
INJ1
-BRN
No. 1 INJECTOR
1
- YEL/BLK
B8
r-
RED-
ri
RED
No. 2 INJECTOR
YEL/BLK
H T
INJ3
BLU
-BLU
No. 3 INJECTOR
1
- YEL/BLK
B6
Ha
YEL
r-i
YEL
No. 4 INJECTOR
- YEL/BLK
BLK/RED
INJ5
No. 5 INJECTOR
- YEL/BLK
B9
- WHT/BLU -
WHT/BLU
No. 6 INJECTOR
-YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK -
cm
-YEL/BLK B3
IGP
-YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
-YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
-YEL/BLU
B37
RED
itKFf
GRN/RED INPUT SHAFT(MAINSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR
B38
NC
~JC15
J " " JSG6~
11-46
RED-
-BLU
-YEL/RED
BLU
GRN/YEL OUTPUT SHAFT(COUNTERSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR
BLK/WHT
B29
YEL/GRN
IGPLS1
To
SPARK
PLUG
YEL/GRN
BLK
if
B30
BLU/RED
IGPLS2
"No. 1 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT
To
SPARK
PLUG
BLU/RED BLK
if
B22
WHT/BLU
IGPLS3
" No. 2 IGNITION COIL

BLK/WHT
To
SPARK
PLUG
WHT/BLU ^ I C M ^
BLK
if
B23
BRN
IGPLS4
No. 3 IGNITION COIL

BLK/WHT -
To
SPARK
PLUG
BRN
BLK
rf~
"No. 4 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT
To
SPARK
PLUG
BLK/RED
IGPLS5
BLK
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT B12
BRN/WHT IGPLS6
BRN/WHT -
BLK
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
C47
KS
: RED/BLU T-^Z
To
SPARK
PLUG
" No. 6 IGNITION COIL
if
if
,cm
18
19_
20
21
22
23
24
C102
RED/BLU
KNOCK SENSOR
(cont'd)
11-47

B40
PG1
[ x ] [w] [V]
[D]
[N]
[M]
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK BLK
BLK
BLK
I
PG2
fT]
- BLK - BLK -
- BLK -
" BLK -
- BLK - BLK - BLK-
LG2
- BLK -
BRN/YEL n
C112
- BLK BLK- BLK -
BLKPGM ETCS
- BLK- BLK -
BRN/
YEL
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
C41
LG1
-BRN/YEL
BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL 12.
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
C112
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
BRN/ BRN/ BRN/
YEL YEL YEL
BRN/ BRN/
YEL YEL
l4
[p L|]
BLKBLK
BLK BLK
BLKBLKBLKBLK BLK BLKBRN/ BRN/

BLK YEL YEL
G101
11-48
BLK
AH
Al
C113
AF
- YEL/BLK
B46
CMP
GRN
-GRN
BRN/YEL
CMP SENSOR
- YEL/BLK
B45
CKP
-BLU
BLU
BRN/YEL
CKP SENSOR
A20
VG +
IAT SENSOR
LT BLU
GRN/YEL
C102
RED/YEL
RED/GRN
VG-
YEL
BLK/RED
YEL/BLK
MAF SENSOR
C24
- RED/YEL
(cont'd)
11-49

A24
VCC3
A18
APSA
A26
SG3
A25
VCC4
A19
APSB
A27
SG4
- RED -
-RED
-PUR -
-PUR
-WHT
WHT
-ORN
ORN
-GRY -
GRY
-BRN
BRN
1
3
2
JL
A
4
6
5
JL
B
T
APP SENSOR A/B
B18
VCC5
B17
TPSA
B26
TPSB
B33
SG5
C2
ETCSM +
C3
ETCSM-
TP SENSOR
-BLU -
BLU
RED/BLK -
RED/BLK
RED/BLU -
RED/BLU
GRN
GRN
BLU
BLU
GRN
GRN
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
THROTTLE BODY
YEL/BLU -
VCC6
WHT/BLK GRN/YEL IMT+

C49
IMT-
WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU -
WHT/RED
WHT/RED -
1
IMT ACTUATOR
B19
11-50
WHT/BLK
LD
- YEL/BLU -
C22
POIL
BLU/YEL
- BLU/YEL - GRN/YEL ROCKER ARM

OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR
C30
BLU/YEL
VCMSWB
BLU/YEL
REAR ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
B39
CSSA
GRN/YEL
- GRN/YEL
BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
B (BANK 1)
0
B49
CSSB
GRN/RED
GRN/RED- BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
A (BANK 1)
AA
GRN/WHT
BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
A (BANK 2)
VCMSWC
BLU/WHT
FRONT ROCKER ARM OIL

PRESSURE SWITCH
(cont'd)
11-51

AB
JZL
C102
A16
BLU/WHT - PNK -
-PNK-
- BLU/BLK WHT
ATPR
ATPN
C17
WHT -
-RED/BLK -YEL/GRN -BLU
RED/BLK -
BRN
- RED/WHT -
YEL/GRN -
-BLU/YEL -
C46
ATP2
-BLU
C35
ATP1
BRN
-BLK
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH
BLU
C19
RED/WHT ATPRVS
C18
BLU/YEL
ATPFWD
C305
D3SW
BLU
BLU
BLK
D3 SWITCH
G403
A30
r BLU
YEL
A46
11-52
To AUDIO,
NAVIGATION UNIT
To VTM-4
CONTROL UNIT *1
NEP
YEL
* 1 : With V T M - 4
r LT BLU
To AUDIO UNIT
To MICU,
- IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
C301
ECT2
PUR
ECT SENSOR 2
A37
SG7
BLK
A36
VCC7
LT BLU
FTP
A22
VSV
LT GRN
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
LT GRN
-O
LT BLU
LT GRN
BKSWNC
AL
AM
pedal pressed: closed

pedal released: open
pedal pressed: open
pedal released: released
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
AN
PSPSW
Brake
Brake
Brake
Brake
BLU
- BLK
PSP SWITCH
G202
To IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
LG3
C305
SLS
PNK
PNK
YEL
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
(cont'd)
11-53

AC
B13
BLU -
VSB~1"
RED -
B15
RED
VCENTB1
GRN- BLK/WHT -
B31
IPB1
GRN -
- WHT/BLK -
mI
REAR A/F SENSOR
(BANK 1, SENSOR 1)
B14
"RED/BLU :
' RED/BLU
VSB2
RED/WHT -
B24
VCENTB2
-GRN/RED
GRN/WHT
B32
IPB2
GRN/RED -
WHT/BLK -
VWI
FRONT A/F SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
WHT/BLK
C6
AFSHTCB1
BLK/WHT -
- WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
C8
AFSHTCB2
WHT/BLK
C102
111
PNK
AQ
11-54
AR
AS
cm
@ 0 LH H
B25
:GRN
SH02SB1
B16
SH02SB2
C5
S02SHTCB1
C7
S02SHTCB2
: WHT
4
REAR SECONDARY H 0 2 S
( B A N K 1, S E N S O R 2)
BLK/WHT
GRN/RED
FRONT SECONDARY H02S

( B A N K 2, S E N S O R 2)
ALTL
C44
ALTF
C43
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
ALTERNATOR
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
PCS
BLK/YEL
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
B2
VBSOL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
C102
LT GRN
C113
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
(cont'd)
11-55

UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX
AQ
PNK
YEL/BLK
3
1 C102
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
ETCSRLY
IT
IT
A4
FANL
A6
MRLY
F6
ORN
WHT
F7
A5
FANH
GRN
F9
A40
SUBRLY
PNK
F16
PUR
A13
ACC
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
F14
PNK
F18
YEL
F20
YEL
F15
F8
BRN
F5
RED
A/C
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
IGNITION
COIL
RELAY
AU AV
C102
IG1ETCS
-c~o-
YEL/GRN
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY 1
-PNK
- WHT-
PGM-FI
SUBRELAY
ORN
J ELD
BLU
YEL
YEL
UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX:
(DNo.21 DBW (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A)
d)No. 12 ACM (10 A)
d)No. 18 IG COIL (15 A)
@No. 19 MAIN (15 A)
N o . 11 S U B (15 A)
N o . 15 OIL L E V E L (7.5 A)
N o . 2 IG MAIN (50 A)
d)No. 23 BACK UP (10 A)
()No. 1 MAIN F U S E (120 A)
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX:
Mo. 11 S T O P / H O R N (20 A)
11-56
PNK
ORN
m
D7
D1_
A/C COMPRESSOR
LT GRN
-ORN
-BLK
BLU YEL YEL PNK ORN ^
MJBT
rLE^vHr
.A.
AW AX
^ 3 CLUTCH RELAY
L-L_
D4
D6
AY
AZ
BA
BB
G202
BATTERY ^
BRN-
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
-,2
FUELPUMP
]7-
C307
T U
YEL
AJ
~h
AIM
dp
A'
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY B O X
AX
TTTT^^"^
BLK ^
'
LTGRN
-c~o
"IT
3*.
IT
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
(FUELPUMP)
LT GRN
JSTRLY
M22 L i
ii 1
LoT5-
-LJ
i ^ W -
C4
LT GRN
GRN
STARTER CUT
RELAY 1 (STR)
WHT-
BRN
C304
LT GRN
l-^J
BLU/WHT -
D l l l r t A / U T
H - P N K ^ L
20
P7jBLU/WHT H
STARTER
CUT RELAY 2
WHT"- 4 _
A28
"STRTD"
GRN
A31
_srT"
Q15
YEL
l t b l u
LT BLU
Q9
MICU
Q8
Q7
Q5
L T
BLU
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
>
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
LTBLU
UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX:
No. 3ACG(10A)
N o . 22 VB S O L 2 (7.5A)
@ N o . 2 F U E L PUMP (15 A)
@ N o . 10 METER (7.5 A)
@ N o . 36 HAC (10 A)
N o . 23 S T C U T RLY 1 (7.5 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH F U S E HOLDER:
S T S (7.5 A)
[BH
(cont'd)
11-57

H N S
TTT_
YEL
IG1
YEL
IGSOL
11
SOLRLY
14
WHTCANH
12
RED
CANL
6
PUR
SCPA
4
LT BLU <
SCPC
15
GRN
CKP
7
RED
CMP
8
WHTSOLRP
9
GRN
SOLRM
2
BLU
SOLFP
16
RED
SOLFM
1
BLK
BRN
Bj]
h1
CSSAMA
[BK|
PUR -
A15
LTBLUCSSAMC
A34
GRN
CKPOUT
A35
RED
CMPOUT
BLK
ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
LG
G202
REAR
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR
C302
RED-
PNK-
BLU-
BLU-
FRONT
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR
PUR-To AUDIO UNIT

LT BLU
11-58
M: With VTM
C402
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
11-59

PGM-FI System
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The p r o g r a m m e d fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a

sequential multiport fuel injection system.
The CMP sensor input is used by the PCM to determine

ignition t i m i n g at start up (cranking) and w h e n crank
angle is abnormal.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the PCM receives a demand for cooling f r o m the
A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor
The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the WU-TWC, and it
sends signals to the PCM which varies the duration of
fuel injection accordingly.
MAGNET
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the PCM to determine ignition t i m i n g , timing for the fuel
injection of each cylinder, and engine misfire detection.
ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT
,XETL
MAGNET
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel
injection discharge.
TERMINAL
O-RING
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2

ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
engine coolant temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
O-RING
11-60
Ignition Timing Control
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition timing

at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressures. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine
coolant temperature.
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure

into electrical signals to the PCM.
Injector Timing and Duration

The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by signals
sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final discharge
duration.
By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the PCM detect long
t e r m malfunctions in the fuel system and sets
(diagnostic trouble codes) if needed.
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to
minimize knock.
TERMINAL
PIEZO
ELEMENT
O-RING
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature

(IAT) Sensor
The mass a i r f l o w (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor contains a hot wire, a cold f i l m and a
thermistor. The sensor is in the intake air passage. The
resistance of the hot wire, cold f i l m , and the thermistor
change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The
control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to
keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is
converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to
the PCM.
DIAPHRAGM
GASKET
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been
reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to
complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the
vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished.
HOTWIRE
IAT S E N S O R
(THERMISTOR)
f] 6
COLD FILM
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn

the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
The MIL will come on for 15 20 seconds. If it then goes
off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five
times, one or more readiness codes are not set to
complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-78).
(cont'd)
11-61

Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
This sensor detects countershaft speed.
TERMINAL
MAGNET
O-RING
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)

The secondary H 0 2 S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the w a r m up three way
catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the
PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal
heater. The PCM compares the H02S output w i t h the A/F
sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The
secondary H02S is on the WU-TWC.
ZIRCONIA
SENSOR
HEATER
TERMINALS
11-62
Starter Control System Diagram

The starter control system controls the starter motor.
When the ignition switch is turned to START (III), the PCM applies current to starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut
relay 2, then battery voltage is applied to the starter motor to run it.
Once the ignition switch is released, the PCM keeps the starter motor running until the engine starts. If the PCM
detects that the engine starts, the PCM stops appling current to the relays, and the starter motor stops.
If you turn the ignition switch t o START (III) position while the engine is running, the starter motor does not operate.
In the following cases, the PCM stops the starter motor;
- After the starter motor operates for 10 seconds (to prevent the starter motor f r o m overheating).
- If the engine rpm is too high during starter motor operation.
If there is a problem with the starter control system, a message appears on the gauge display. When the warning
message is turned o n , the vehicle can only be started by turning and holding the ignition switch in the start position
until the engine.
IG MAIN
(50 A) F U S E
O ^ O
STRLY
(CONTROL)
-<j From BATTERY
STS
(7.5 A) F U S E
From IGNITION SWITCH
(START (III) SIGNAL)
STARTER
CUT RELAY 1
(STR)
STRLD
_/s
(SIGNAL) ^
ST CUT
RELAY 1
(7.5 A) F U S E
STARTER
C U T RELAY 2
STARTER(
MOTOR
M
v
/ T 5 N TRANSMISSION
I J ) RANGE SWITCH
V O y (Closed: P or N)
77T
CHECK
STARTER
SYSTEM STARTER
SYSTEM
Multi-information
display model
Odometor/
outside temperature
display model
11-63

Throttle Body
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic

throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The

lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant f r o m the cylinder head to prevent icing of the
throttle plate.
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the PCM controls

the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed
according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending on
the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to
maintain the set speed w h e n cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control
actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the PCM whitch then controls
the throttle position.
11-64
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram

The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
11-65

Variable Cylinder Management (VCM) System
The VCM system activates the cylinders based o n the driving condition. The system has three modes: 6 cylinder mode
(all cylinder operation), 4 cylinder mode (pauses the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinders), and 3 cylinder mode (pauses the rear
bank of cylinders No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3). Cylinders No. 5 and No. 6 are not controlled by the VCM system and operate in
all modes. On paused cylinders, the intake and exhaust valves are kept closed. Since the valves are closed, the frictional
losses f r o m the valve spring compression and pumping are reduced because no air is compressed in the cylinder. This
reduces engine drag.
S3*
VEHICLE
SPEED
IDLING
ACCELERATION
CRUISE
DECELERATION
CRUISE
11-66
| IDLING
ACCELERATION
CRUISE;
ACCELERATION
CRUISE
k
FUEL
CUT
6 CYLINDER DRIVE
DECELERATION
3 CYLINDER DRIVE
FUEL
CUT
6 CYLINDER
DRIVE
3
CYLINDER 4 CYLINDER DRIVE
DRIVE
VCM System-Operation
During 6 Cylinder M o d e
With rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1), B (Bank 1), and A (Bank 2) OFF, the rocker arm oil control valves direct oil
pressure. Oil pressure enters the secondary rocker arm f r o m the oil passage in the rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC
switching piston, sliding it into the primary rocker arm and locking primary rocker arms and secondary rocker arms
together. The rocker arms are lifted by the camshaft, and all cylinders are active.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A
SECONDARY
ROQKER ARM B
PRIMARY
REAR ROCKER ARM

OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E
REAR BANK
(BANK 1)
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)
From
OIL PUMP
ROCKER ARM
OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R
FRONT BANK
(BANK 2)
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK
ROCKER
SHAFT
FRONT ROCKER ARM

FRONT ROCKER ARM
(cont'd)
11-67

During 4 Cylinder Mode
When rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1) and A (Bank 2) are turned on by the PCM, the front and rear rocker arm
oil control valves switch the oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinder's primary rocker arm f r o m
the oil passage in the rocker shaft, causing the VTEC switching piston to slide into the secondary rocker arm and against
the return spring. This disengages the primary rocker arm f r o m the secondary rocker arm to stop valve activation. The
No. 3 and No. 4 cylinder's rocker arms do not move, and the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinders are paused. In the No. 1 and No. 2
cylinders, oil pressure f r o m the rear rocker arm oil control valve locks the primary rocker arms and secondary rocker
arms together. The rocker arms are moved by the camshaft, and t w o cylinders (No. 1 and No. 2) are active to operate
with cylinders No. 5 and No. 6 to create the four cylinder mode.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM B
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM B >
RETURN SPRING
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
REAR BANK
(BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM
FRONT BANK
(BANK 2)
ROCKER
SHAFT
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 2)
FRONT ROCKER ARM

FRONT ROCKER ARM
11-68
RETURN SPRING
During 3 Cylinder M o d e
W h e n rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1) is turned on by the PCM, the rear rocker arm oil control valve switches
the oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the rear bank cylinder's primary rocker arms f r o m the oil passage in the rocker
shaft, causing the VTEC switching piston to slide into the secondary rocker arms and against the return spring. This
disengages the primary rocker arms f r o m the secondary rocker arms to stop valve activation. The rear bank cylinder's
(No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3) rocker arms do not move, and rear bank cylinders are paused. At the front bank, oil pressure
f r o m the front rocker arm oil control valve locks the No. 4 cylinder's primary and secondary rocker arms together. The
No. 4 cylinder's rocker arms are moved by the camshaft, and the No. 4 cylinder is active to operate w i t h cylinders No. 5
and No. 6 to create the three cylinder mode.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM B
'PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM B
RETURN SPRING
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
REAR BANK
(BANK 1)
t
1 I
From \ To
OIL
\ FRONT
PUMP \ B A N K
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM
From
OIL PUMP
FRONTBANK
(BANK 2)
ROCKER
SHAFT
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 2)
FRONT ROCKER ARM

WW
FRONT ROCKER ARM

11-69

Idle Control System
Fuel Supply System
W h e n the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is o n , the

transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging,
the PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to
maintain the correct idle speed.
Fuel Cutoff Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch

The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM w h e n
the brake pedal is pressed.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the PCM w h e n the power
steering load is high.
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,

current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 850 r p m . Fuel cutoff
control also occurs w h e n the engine speed exceeds
6,400 r p m , regardless of the position of the throttle
valve, to protect the engine f r o m over-revving. W h e n the
vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine
speeds over 5,000 r p m . On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs
at a lower engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the PCM
grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds
current to the fuel p u m p for 2 seconds to pressurize the
fuel system. With the engine starts, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and feeds current to
the fuel p u m p . When the engine is not running and the
ignition is turned to ON (II), the PCM cuts ground to
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which cuts current to
the fuel p u m p .
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II), to supply battery voltage to
the PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel p u m p for
2 seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II),
and w h e n the engine is cranking or running.
11-70
Intake Air System

Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Value
Engine power is adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve. When the valve is closed, there
is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve is open, there is high torque at high engine speed.
The intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator contains a sensor that detects the IMT valve position and sends it to the PCM.
IMT V A L V E
11-71

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC)

and Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
(Under-floorTWC)
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of

the system.
The WU-TWC/Under-floor TWC converts hydrocarbons

( H Q , carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C0 ),
nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.
2
WU-TWC
WARM UP THREE WAY

C A T A L Y S T FRONT
(BANK 2)
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
UNDER-FLOOR TWC
HOUSING
FRONT O F
VEHICLE
11-72
UNDER-FLOOR
T H R E E WAY
CATALYST
EGR Valve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram

The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas t h r o u g h the EGR pipe and the
intake manifold, and into the combustion chambers. Routing the exhaust gas through the EGR pipe helps to prevent
carbon deposits f r o m f o r m i n g in the intake manifold and the throttle body. The PCM m e m o r y includes the ideal EGR
valve position for varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares it
w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent f r o m other sensors). If there is any difference between the t w o , the
PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
EGR V A L V E
POSITION
SENSOR
VARIOUS
SENSORS
EGR PIPE
FRONT W U - T W C
11-73

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses f r o m escaping

into the atmosphere by venting t h e m into the intake
manifold.
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of

the system.
PCV V A L V E
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor f r o m
the fuel tank until it can be purged f r o m the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 140F
(60C) the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
OUT
t
MOVING
CORE
11-74
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into

an electrical input to the PCM.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP

canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
of the EVAP canister.
S E N S O R UNIT
/
TERMINAL
VALVE
O-RING
O-RING
(cont'd)
11-75

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping into the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever the engine coolant temperature is
above 140 F (60 C).
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens f r o m pressure in the fuel tank and feeds the fuel vapor to the
EVAP canister.
FTP S E N S O R
11-76
Fuel Cap Warning Message
Odometer/outside temperature display model
The PCM will detects a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an

evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a w a r n i n g message in the gauge display.
The first t i m e a leak is detected, a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
(multi-information display model) (CHECK FUEL CAP
(odometer/outside temperature display model))
message appears on the gauge display (A). To scroll to
another message, press the select/reset button. The
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP/CHECK FUEL CAP message
appears each time y o u restart the engine until the
system turns the message off. Turn the engine off, then
replace or tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least
once.
S h o w s CHECK F U E L CAP
in the gauge display.
Multi-information display model
To make message go off (with the HDS)

Procedure
S h o w s TIGHTEN F U E L CAP
in the gauge display.
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.

2. Clear the Pending DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing an EVAP FUNCTION
TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
To make the message go off (without the

HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0).
3. Repeat step 2 t w o more times.
11-77

How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication
(In relation to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been
reset, these readiness codes are reset to incomplete. In
some states, part of the emissions testing is to make
sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are
not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emission
test, or the test cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
The MIL will come on for 1520 seconds. If it then goes
off, the readiness codes are set to complete. If it flashes
five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to
complete. To set readiness codes f r o m incomplete to
complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the
OBD status in the DTC MENU w i t h the HDS (see page
11-8). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing.
Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness

Code
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK(0)
during the procedure.
All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is
disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset w i t h the HDS.
Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
traffic may increase the drive t i m e needed to switch
the readiness code f r o m incomplete to complete.
The readiness code will not switch to complete until all
the enable criteria are met.
If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
MIL to come o n , the readiness code cannot be set to
complete until you correct the fault.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 F (70 C) or more.
IAT SENSOR at 20 F ( - 7 C) or more.
Vehicle speed above 25 m p h (40 km/h).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector
(DLC), and bring up the READINESS CODEs screen for
Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
w i t h short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check
for a Pending DTC w i t h the HDS. If there is no DTC,
one or more of the enable criteria were probably not
met; repeat the procedure.
11-78
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System

Monitor and Readiness Code
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and

Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery

is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset with the HDS.
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)

during the procedure.
Enable Criteria
Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
Engine at idle.
ECT SENSOR 1 and SENSOR 2 between 176 F (80 C)
and 212 F (100 C).
MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
NOTE:

Enable Criteria
Procedure
Vehicle speed 0 m p h (0 km/h).

IAT SENSOR between 32 F (0 C) and 212 F (100 C).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the EVAP
TEST MENU.
If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, one or
more of the enable criteria were probably not met;
repeat the procedure.

2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive,
decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
step.
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the DATA
LIST MENU. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the ALL DATA
LIST with the HDS. If ECT SENCOR 1 is less than 140
F (60 C), run the engine until it is more than 140 F
(60 C), then repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
11-79

How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor
Readiness Code
EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery

is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset w i t h the HDS.

or during the procedure.
Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check
for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the
procedure.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code

This readiness code is always set to available because
misfiring is continuously monitored.
Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds
at its current value, if the throttle position changes
more than a predetermined value, or if driving
conditions fall outside the range of any related enable
criteria.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code

the fuel system is continuously monitored during
closed loop operation.
Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP
control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active.
Monitoring also pauses w h e n any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes w h e n
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-80
NOTE:

Enable Criteria
Procedure
3. Drive at a steady speed w i t h the transmission in D, at
5062 m p h (80100 km/h) or above for more than 10
seconds.
4. With the transmission in D, decelerate f r o m 62 mph
(100 km/h) or above by completely releasing the
throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped
during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the
procedure again.
5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
If it is passed, readiness is complete.
If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
PGM-FI System
, PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y
(RELAY S O C K E T E)
1
ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR
(ELD)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-249
Substitution, page 11-7
KNOCKSENSOR
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) S E N S O R
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) S E N S O R

MANIFOLD A B S O L U T E PRESSURE(MAP)
SENSOR
M A S S AIR FLOW (MAF) S E N S O R /
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R 2
ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R 1
(cont'd)
11-81
PGM-FI System
S E N S O R (BANK 2, S E N S O R 1)
11-82
S E N S O R (SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, S E N S O R 2)
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0101.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these parts:
PCV hose
Intake air duct
Air cleaner
Purge (PCS) line
Brake booster
Brake booster hose
Are the parts OK?
NO-Repair or replace the damaged part(s), then go to
step 15.
2. Check for a loose or damaged air cleaner air duct.
Is it OK?
NO-Reconnect or replace the air cleaner air duct, then
go to step 15.
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element.
Is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V?

NO-Go to step 13.
8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm
3,000 r p m .
9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the reading
change?
NO-Go to step 13.
10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P
or N) until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is it dirty?
Does the screen indicate
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page

11 -373), then go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
FAILED?
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 11 and recheck.
(cont'd)
11-83
PGM-FI System
DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
14. Replace the MAF sensor/I AT sensor (see page

11-242).

and any on-board snapshot, and review the general

16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.

2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less
indicated?
ENGINE SPEED
VSS

MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . H
MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
Is DTC P0101

4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
indicated?

the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

6. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
NO-Go to step 20.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
IGP (YEL/BLK)
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI main
relay 1 and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 19.
11-84
8. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT

sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
12. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor

5P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal A20.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
Wire side of female terminals I V G + (RED/GRN)
V G + (RED/GRN)
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) V G + (LT BLU)
3 4 5 6 7
a 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
25 ^ 2 6 27 28
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
29 30
1 ^
40141^X144 j/] 46 jj/j 481491

Is there 190-210
kD?
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A20)

and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 20.

A20 and body g r o u n d .
13. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see

page 11-242).

V G + (LT BLU)
I 2133 |144 15| 516| 617| 718j 198 203 21110 [

/ 24 25
22
26 27 28
29 /
30 31 >< 34 X
37 38 39
J1
11

without load (in P or N).
|40|41 / l /32133
| 4 4 t / 35136
| 4 6 l / 48|49|
Is DTC P0102
indicated?
YES-Reinstall the original MAF sensor / IAT sensor,

then go to step 26.
NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see

page 11 -242), then go to step 19.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A20)
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
11-85
PGM-FI System
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage


Is DTC P0102
indicated?
Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at

step 1.

2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 202 gm/s, or 4.89 V or more
indicated?
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . B
(see page 11-7).

5P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal A9.
Is DTC P0102
indicated?

the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
N O - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
1 2 3 4 5
V G - (BLK/RED)

IE
V G - (YEL)
3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 |8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
24
22
26 27 28
29 30
3233 34 35|36 37 38 39
1401411^X1^441X146^48149
1 ^
11-86
8. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).
9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector

terminals No. 3 and No. 4 with a j u m p e r wire.
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0103
1 2
V G + (RED/GRN)
indicated?
5
V G - (BLK/RED)
J U M P E R WIRE

go to step 1.

Is DTC P0103
indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 13.
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
Is DTC P0103
indicated?

step 1.
11-87
PGM-FI System
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage


10. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

B36 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
MAP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less

Indicated?
1 2
VCC1 (YEL/RED)

MAP sensor and the PCM.H
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 In.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less
indicated?
7. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
MAP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
M2H
NO-Go to step 8.
11-88
11 12
22 23
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13
16 71 19 20 21
24
25
26
28
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
42|XIXl45|4(J^
1 5
>< >< /
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B36)

and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 7.
I|1|2
Is there about 5 V?
PCM CONNECTOR B ( 4 9 P )
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).
15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P

connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

2 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

Is DTC P0107
MAP (GRN/RED)
indicated?

the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (B35)
NO-Go to step 23.

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0107
indicated?

the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
11-89
PGM-FI System
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage

and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAP sensor 3P

connector.

HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 Vor
more indicated?

11. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
YES-Go to step 3.
MAP sensor and the P C M . H
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
SG1 (GRN/WHT)

4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2

and No. 3 w i t h a jumper wire.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Go to step 12.
MAP (GRN/RED)
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE

7. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
11-90
15. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


SG1 (GRN/WHT)
3
MAP (GRN/RED)
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
Ji|
11 12
I" I / I
1 3 14 1 5 1 6
22 23 24
17 18
>< >< /
25
10
1 9 2 0 21
26
J 1 | 2
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 | 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
41
42
\/\A
\5\46\X
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
22 23 24
1101
25
>< /
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4
MAP (GRN/RED)
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
11 12 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 18 1 9 2 0 21
YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.


(cont'd)
11-91
PGM-FI System
2 1 . Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).
Is DTC P0108
indicated?

DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit

MAF sensor/IAT sensor and ECT sensor 1 and 2.
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
step 15.
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
3. A l l o w the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to cool to the
ambient temperature.
(see page 11-7).
4. Note the ambient temperature.
Is DTC P0108
indicated?

the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o
step 1.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P

connector, but do not install it.
7. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR in the

DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR to the ambient
temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from the ambient temperature?
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor f r o m the 5P
connector.
10. Using a heat g u n , blow hot air on the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a f e w seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install it.
12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the IAT SENSOR
change 58 F (32 C) or more?
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.

MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . B
NO-Go to step 13.
11-92
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

11-242).


2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

Is DTC P0111
indicated?

step 1.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-93
PGM-FI System

(see page 11-7).
|l|2|t|4J5|
IAT (RED/YEL)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the MAF
sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM (C24), then go to step
13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11-242).
Is DTC P0112
Indicated?

step 1.
11-94
Is DTC P0112
indicated?

go to step 1.
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage


HDS.

HDS.
Is about -40
indicated?
F(40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
Is about 40 F (40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.
YES-Go to step 3.

11. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor

5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector

terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
1 2
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
IAT (RED/YEL)
IAT (RED/YEL)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
11-95
PGM-FI System

C16 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 1.

C24 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 2.
1 2 3 4 5
IAT (RED/YEL)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
I Wire side of female terminals
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
IAT (RED/YEL)
ll
ll
.1 1 I 23 I 4 | 51
6 | 7 | 39 | 1 0 |
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 |
24
25
26 27 28
22
1
30
3233 34 3 5 L > 37 38 39 1
|40|41
4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 l / | 4 6 | 4 7 48|49|
U
J
/
/ /
~ c
/
1|
| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | S 9|10|
J1|2
1
15
11 12 /
16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
1
32|33 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
30
|40|41 421431441^| 46147 48|49|
/I
><
YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (C16)

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C24)

11-96

2 1 . Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit


2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0113
indicated?

step 1.

indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA
LIST w i t h the HDS.

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0113
Does ECT SENSOR
1 change 18 F (10 C) or more?

Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and the P C M . B
indicated?
NO-Go to step 1 1 .

page 11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.

8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Did ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 F (10 C) or more from
the value in step 6?
sensor 1 and the P C M . H
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-97
PGM-FI System
11. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243).


L T u r n the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is DTC P0116
indicated?

ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1.

indicated?
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
indicated?
NO-Go to step 11.
11-98
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P

ECT S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR

(see page 11-7).
2
ECT1 (RED/WHT)
Is DTC P0117
indicated?

ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor 1
and the PCM (C32), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
Is DTC P0117
indicated?

11-99
PGM-FI System
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage


Is about 40 F (40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
Is about -40
Indicated?
F(-40
C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

9. Remove the j u m p e r wire.
YES-Go to step 3.
11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P

connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .

E C T S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1

1
ECT1 (RED/WHT)
E C T S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR

ECT1 (RED/WHT)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
11-100
NO-Go to step 16.

C16 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 2.

C32 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 1.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
1
Wire side of female terminals J S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
I ECT1 (RED/WHT)
ECT1 (RED/WHT)
YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.

and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.

(cont'd)
11-101
PGM-FI System
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). .
2 1 . Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -243).
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow

Response
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or more.

Is DTC P0118
indicated?

Is about 0F(-18
C) or less
indicated?

ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
4. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.
(see page 11-7).
5. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1

reads about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR
2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?

YES-Go to step 6.
Is DTC P0118
indicated?


sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . B
6. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
Is the thermostat OK?
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go to step 7.
NO-Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10), then go
to step 7.
11-102

10. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.
11. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
reads about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR
2 also show about 158 F (70 C)?
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction

L T u r n the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.
NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e .
3. Make sure the blower switch is off.

4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is it OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 5.
5. Check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator fan keep
running?
YES-Check the radiator fan high speed circuit (see

page 10-19) and the radiator fan relay (see page
22-96). If the circuit and the relay are OK, go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
104F (40 C) or less.
7. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle.
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up 68 F
(20 C) or more f r o m the recorded temperature.
11. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
Did the temperature rise 46 F (8 C) or more?
YES-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go to
step 12.
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H
(cont'd)
11-103
PGM-FI System
between 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 m p h
(24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Is DTC P0128
(see page 11-7).
between 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
2 1 . Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 m p h
(24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Indicated?
Y E S - C h e c k the cooling system, then go to step 19.

Is DTC P0128
indicated?
NO-Go to step 18.

PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check the cooling
system, then go to step 19. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 14.

ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM
page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
go to step 20. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 20.
11-104
DTC P0133: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response
DTC P0153: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response
NOTE:

7. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -244).
Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and

any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
If DTC P0139 and/or P0159* is stored at the same time
as DTC P0133 and/or P0153\ troubleshoot DTC P0139
and/or P0159* f i r s t then recheck for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153*.
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the

front bank (Bank 2).
Transmission in D
Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for

5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 33 m p h
(52 km/h) or more

158 F(70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,2502,350rpm
Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 33 m p h
(52 km/h) or more
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.
Engine speed between 1,2502,350rpm

Is DTC P0133 andlor P0153
indicated?

A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
N O - l f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 11.
11-105
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction


Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
NOTE:
9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P

B13(B14r.

as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154*.
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR
VSB1 (BLU)

3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)

for at least 1 minute.
V S B 2 (RED/BLU)*


1 2
4 5 6
VSB1
(BLU)
I j I I
4 5 6 7 89
12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20
25
26
22 23
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38
40141
hol
21
28
39
VSB2
(RED/BLU)*

Is DTC P0134 and/or
P01541ndicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM.I
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B13 (B14)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11-106
12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


(see page 11-7).
VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
Is there about 0.2 V or less?
Is DTC P0134 and/or
P01541ndicated?

A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 20.

13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).
YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154'
indicated?

PCM, then go to step 1.
PASSED?

1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes o n .
NO-Go to step 19.

P0154* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
11-107
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
7. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box.

NOTE:
Is DTC P0135 and/or
P01551ndicated?
8. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (see page 22-96).

Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 9.

sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM.I
NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 26.

6. Check the No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
Is the fuse OK?

YES-Go to step 7.
I
NO-Go to step 20.
1 2
4 5 6
Is there 2.54.0 Q at room

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 25.
11-108
temperature?
11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between each

terminal of at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector
and body ground.

C6 (C8)* and body ground.
12 3 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 7 | 8
11 12
/ I 1 5 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22
30
32|33 34 3 5 / 37
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
_ h
><
9|10|
1
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*
AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)
Is there continuity to ground at any of the terminals?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 12.
12. At the sensor side, check for continuity between A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 1 and
each of the other terminals in the connector
individually.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(C6 (C8)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.
C6 (C8)\
AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)
AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*

AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8
13 14 15 16 17|18 19
25
24
26
37
29 30
3233 34
40141
44 \ / \ 46 y \
AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*
9|101
20 21
27 28
38jZL
lJ
481491
YES-Go to step 25.

YES-Go to step 17.
(C6 (C8)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.
(cont'd)
11-109
PGM-FI System
connector terminal No. 1 and PGM-FI subrelay 4P

19. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
A40.
+ B (WHT/BLK)
PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
mi
SUBRLY
3EF
+B
PGM CONNECTOR A (49P)
1
,
~ "
J 1 | 2 j 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 I 9 J10|
|11I/13|14|15|16|17|18|19 20|21| '
22
24
25
26 27 28
29 30j 31J32133j34135136137I38 39
401
44 L / 1 4 6 ^ 48149
YES-Go to step 18.

S U B R L Y (PNK)
NO-Repair open in the wire between A/F sensor

(Sensor 1) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
26.
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and the PCM (A40), then go to step 26.
11-110

fuse/relay box.


Is DTC P0135 and/or P0155*
indicated?

NO-Go to step 3 1 .
2 1 . Disconnect the front and rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P

connectors.
22. Disconnect the front and rear secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connectors.
23. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.

PASSED?

1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes o n .
+ B (WHT/BLK)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.
NO-Checkthe under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace

it if needed (see page 22-89). Also replace the No. 11
SUB (15 A) fuse, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-111
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0135 and/or P0155
indicated?

NO-Go to step 36.
PASSED?

the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting.H
1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the PCM was
keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,

Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
4. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . B
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
NO-Go to step 13.
11-112
12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S

{Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)

until the radiator fan comes on.
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm
Drive 1 minute or more

2 1 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0137 and/or
W i r e side of female terminals
P01571ndicated?

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 22.
Is there
continuity?

(B25 (B16)1 and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 15.
14. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).

PASSED?

Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 ,
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF

(cont'd)
11-113
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 r p m

P01571ndicated?

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM
NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and

Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 28.


Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P0137 and/or

Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
PASSED?

the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . H
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
11-114
9. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 10.

B25 (B16)* and body ground.
NO-Go to step 19.

11. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector

S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*
1 2
11 12
22 23
29 30
40 41
n
3 4 I 5I6 I7 I 8
13 14|15 16 17|18 19
24
25
26
31 32 33 3< 35|36 37
42
*5|46|/
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*
1 2
3 4
J U M P E R WIRE
><
A/\
9 10
20 21 i
28
38 39
/|49|
>^ /
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
YES-Go to step 29.

14. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 15.
and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step 2 1 .

(B25 (B16)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 2 1 .
11-245).
(cont'd)
11-115
PGM-FI System
25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P or N)
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
indicated?

(see page 11-7).
3 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
158F(70C)
Transmission in D

step 1.

Is DTC P0138 and/or
NO-Go to step 28.

PASSED?

P01581ndicated?

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM
page 11 -7), then go to step 3 1 . If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 34.
PASSED?

(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
go to step 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, g o t o s t e p 3 1 .
11-116

Sensor 2) Slow Response
Sensor 2) Slow Response

11-245).
NOTE:

until the radiator fan comes o n .

158F (70 C)
Transmission in D
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000rpm

Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88

120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds.

158 F(70 C)
Transmission in D
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 m p h (88
120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with the
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the screen indicates
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.

indicated?

step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
PASSED?

11-117
PGM-FI System

fuse/relay box.

NOTE:
Is DTC P0141 and/or P016V
indicated?
8. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (see page 22-96).

Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 9.

secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and
the P C M . I
NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 25.

6. Check the No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 19.
11-118
9. Disconnect the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between

H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4.

C5 (C7)* and body g r o u n d .
1 2
3 4
i
i
4 | e
<?
9 | -101
6 | 19
7 20821
16 17|18
24
22
25
26 27 28
30
3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38 39 1
48|49|
|40|41
3
11 12
& l
/ ><
42143144 Lxî 46147
Is there 5.4 7.3 O at room
temperature?
YES-Go to step 1 1 .
S02SHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)
S02SHTCB2
(GRN/RED)*
NO-Go to step 24.

11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between body
ground and secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually.
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM

(C5 (C7)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
step 25.
NO-Go to step 15.
1 2
3 4
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
11-119
PGM-FI System
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal C5 (C7)\
(BLK/WHT)
16. Check for continuity between secondary H 0 2 S

(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and PGM-FI
subrelay 4P connector terminal No. 2.
(GRN/RED)*
Wire side of female terminals I + B (WHT/BLK)

S02SHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)
s
J1|2 s U l e |6|7
11 12
/ h 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22
1
30
32|33 34 3 5 L / 37
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
><
/
/ / ><
9 i 101
1
20 21
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|
S02SHTCB2
(GRN/RED)*
+B

YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C5
(C7)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
25.
11-120
NO-Repair open in the wire between secondary H02S

(Sensor 2) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
25.

18. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
A40.
SUBRLY
3~fXT4
20. Disconnect the front and rear secondary H02S

(Sensor 2) 4P connectors.
2 1 . Disconnect the front and rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connectors.
connector.
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
PGM CONNECTOR A (49P)

ll
1
ll
+B(WHT/BLK)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24><25
27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40
44
48 49
S U B R L Y (PNK)
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PGM-FI
subrelay and the PCM (A40), then go to step 25.
fuse/relay box.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
step 25.
N O - Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
replace it if needed (see page 22-89). Also replace the
No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse, then go t o step 25.
(cont'd)
11-121
PGM-FI System
11-245).

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0141 and/or
POWVindicated?

the PCM, then go to step 1.

the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 35.
indicated?

P 0 1 6 r in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

(Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then
11-122

P016V in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

(Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0171:Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System

Too Lean

DTC P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System

Too Rich
3. Check for these conditions:

176F(80 C)
DTC P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System

Too Lean
DTC P0175: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System
Too Rich
NOTE:
Transmission in P or N
All electrical loads off
4. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 r p m . Once
the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal
steady for more than 10 seconds.
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and

Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 2,500
rpm?
Poor fuel quality can cause DTC P0171.
YES-Repeat step 4.
If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the

same t i m e as DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175,
troubleshoot those DTCs f i r s t then recheck for P0171,
P0172, P0174, and/or P0175.
NO-Go to step 5.
P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor

P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
P0133, P0153, P1172, P1174, P2195, P2197, P2237,
P2238, P2240, P2241, P2243,P2245, P2247, P2249,
P2251, P2252, P2254, P2255, P2A00, P2A03: A/F sensor
(Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135, P0154, P0155: A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
heater
5. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check

the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there about 9.513.3
gm/s?
YES-Check the engine valve clearances, and adjust

them if needed (see page 6-10). If the valve clearances
are OK, replace the injectors (see page 11-240), then
go to step 6.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go t o step 6.
P0137, P0138, P0139, P0157, P0158,P0159: Secondary

H02S(Sensor2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
P0443: EVAP canister purge valve
P2279: Intake air leakage
1. Check the fuel pressure, (see page 11 -343)
Is the fuel pressure
OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Check these items:
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure
regulator (see page 11-355), then go to step 2.
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel p u m p , the
fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the fuel
line for restrictions, then go to step 6.
(cont'd)
11-123
PGM-FI System
DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any

Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected


176 F (80 C)
Transmission in D


120 km/h) for 15 minutes.
NOTE: DTC P0171, P1072, P0174 and/or P0175 may

take up t o 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the
HDS, monitor the long term fuel t r i m (LT FUEL TRIM).
If the LT FUEL TRIM stays within 0 . 8 2 - 1 . 2 3 , there is
no problem at this time.

NOTE:
Indicated?
If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of

increased emissions during t w o consecutive driving
cycles, the MIL will come o n , and DTC P0300 (and
some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be
stored.

Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go t o the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !
If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the

catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of
P0301 through P0306) will be stored. W h e n the misfire
stops, the MIL will stay o n .

Is DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175
YES-Go to step 1.
Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of t h e m

were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s)
(Because parts can sometimes fail w i t h o u t setting
DTCs, y o u should also do a physical inspection of the
systems listed below):
P0101, P0102, P0103: M A F sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: CKP sensor
P0365, P0369: CMP sensor
P0400, P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P2648, P2649, P2653, P2654, P2658, P2659,P3400,
P3497: VCM system
11-124

3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P o r N).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3

MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i t h the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?
YES-Go to step 9.
FAILED?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time.B
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the
HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

10. Check the fuel quality.
Is the fuel quality OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Drain the tank, fill it w i t h a known-good fuel, then
go to step 19.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-22). If the spark
plugs are fouled or w o r n , replace t h e m .
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
ENGINE SPEED

VSS
REL TP SENSOR
ENGINE SPEED
CLV (calculated load value)
VSS
ECT SENSOR 1
REL TP SENSOR
APPSENSOR

ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 9.
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.

HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
11-125
PGM-FI System
Is the fuel pressure

OK?
2 1 . Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11 -5).
NO-
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure

regulator (see page 11-355), then go to step 15.
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel p u m p , the
fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the fuel
line for restrictions, then go to step 19.
23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).

ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
16. Check for these conditions:
APP SENSOR

176 F (80 C)
Transmission in P or N
All electrical loads off
17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the
HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 r p m . Once
the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal
steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 2,500
rpm?
YES-Repeat step 17.
NO-Go to step 18.
18. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
gm/s?
11-126

ECT SENSOR 1

Is DTC P0300 and any combination of DTC P0301,
P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 indicated?
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go
to the DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306 troubleshooting (see page 11-127).
NO-Go to step 26.
the HDS.
PASSED?

connection or loose terminals at the ignitions coils,
the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the

ENGINE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
VSS
GEAR POSITION


3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load for
2 minutes (in P or N).
the HDS.
indicate
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 9.
result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
HDS.

the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 9.
Does the screen
ECT SENSOR 1

HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
YES-Go to step 9.
Check the fuel and ignition system circuit connectors
for loose wires or poor c o n n e c t i o n s - ^
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
11-127
PGM-FI System

10. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem cylinder
w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
15. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder

w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.

ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION

ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION
ECTSENSOR 1
ECT SENSOR 1
HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-lntermittent failure due to poor contact at an

ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time). Make
sure that the ignition coil connectors are secure.H
NO-lntermittent failure due to spark plug fouling (no

misfire at this t i m e ) . !
13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.

Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the ignition
coil was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coils (see page 4-21),
then go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 14.

Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark
plug was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug (see page 4-21),
then go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 19.
2 1 . Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11-128

appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9
28. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector

terminal No. 1 and body ground.
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)

INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
1 2
11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
1
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 1 ^ A *
>< >< /
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the injector and
PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 43.
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)
INJ3 (BLU)
. h i 2 3 | 4 | I 3 | 7 | 8 9 1101
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
23 24
26
22
25
28
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 [ ^ K | 4 5 | 4 6 [ X A"\
>< >< /
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Go to step 25.
26. Disconnect the injector 2P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder.
(cont'd)
11-129
PGM-FI System
30. Check for continuity between body ground and the
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
DTC
PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
3 1 . Check for continuity between appropriate injector 2p

connector terminal No. 2 and the PCM connector
terminal of the problem cylinder (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU

INJ2 (RED)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)
INJ1 (BRN)
J 1
INJ
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
110

INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)
11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
1
22 23 24
>< >< /
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 1 / 1 / 1 4 5 1 4 6 ^
/ | 4 9
Jl|2
5 | 6 | T T8
hoi
11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)
-I
>< >^ /
25
26
28
>< >< /
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
INJ3 (BLU)
3 | 4 |
5 | 7 | 8
9 1101
. | 1 | 2
11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
22 23 24
22 23 24
149|
|40|41 4 2 | ^ | / | 4 5 | 4 6 J ^
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 1 / | / |
451461/
INJ

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)
| INJ3 (BLU)
Ll 1
1
-I I I i 101
23 | 4 |
89
11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM and

the injector, then go to step 43.
22 23 24
>< >< /
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41
42|/V145|46^
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
the injector and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step
32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the
injector, then go to step 43.
11-130
32. At the injector side, measure the resistance between

injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
33. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder w i t h

the one f r o m another cylinder. Also check the injector
fuel inlet screen for debris, and clean it if needed.
34. Reconnect all connectors, and reinstall the intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
INJ
36. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.

for 2 minutes.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
Is there 10-13
Q?
YES-Go to step 33.

NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-240), then go to
step 43.

GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
HDS.
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
YES-Go to step 40.

NO-lntermittent failure due to poor contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the injector.H
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the injector
was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-240),
then go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 4 1 .
4 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
42. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-7).
Did the engine pass both
tests?
NO-Repair the engine, then go t o step 43.
(cont'd)
11-131
PGM-FI System
(see page 11 -249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
45. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11-5).


ENGINE SPEED
VSS
ENGINE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
VSS

GEAR POSITION
REL TP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306
indicated?
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306

indicated?
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM. If the
page 11 -7), then go t o step 53. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 55.
the HDS.

the HDS.

connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
11-132
PASSED?
PASSED?
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
a result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction



J 111| 122
I I
4 |
8
6 7
16 17 18 19
24
26
22
25
30
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
40 41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 47
3
>< ><
9 |10|
1
20 21
27 28
1
38 39
48 48
K S (RED/BLU)
4. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for

at least 10 seconds.
Is DTC P0325
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.

knock sensor and the P C M . B
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C47)

and the knock sensor subharness, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 11.

8. Disconnect the knock sensor subharness 1P
connector.
(cont'd)
11-133
PGM-FI System
11. Connect the knock sensor subharness 1P connector
terminal to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
KNOCK S E N S O R S U B H A R N E S S 1P CONNECTOR
13. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the knock sensor

subharness.
14. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2), and the
injector base (see page 9-6).
15. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
16. Check for continuity between the knock sensor
subharness 1P connector terminal and body g r o u n d .
K S (RED/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
KNOCK S E N S O R S U B H A R N E S S 1P CONNECTOR
K S (RED/BLU)

C47 and body g r o u n d .
J i11| 122
e |6|7| 8
16 17 18 19
26
22
24
25
30
32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 42 |43|44|/|46|47
3
/
>< X
/
A*
9 hoi
20 21 i
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|
K S (RED/BLU)
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the knock sensor subharness,
then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Check f o r an open in the knock sensor subharness.
Is the harness OK?
and the knock sensor subharness, then go t o step 20.
11-134
NO-Repair open in the knock sensor subharness,
then go to step 19.
18. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-247).

19. Install the injector base (see page 9-6), and the intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P0325
indicated?

the knock sensor and the PCM, then go to step 27.

the knock sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11 -7), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .

Is DTC P0325
indicated?
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
11-135
PGM-FI System
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal
9. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P


CKP (BLU)

Is DTC P0335
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

CKP sensor and the PCM.H
Is there about 5 V?

6. Disconnect CKP sensor 3P connector.
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 11.
1
L G (BRN/YEL) |
| IGP (YEL/BLK)
IGP (YEL/BLK)

Is there battery
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.
voltage?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor
and G101, then go to step 19.
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
11-136

B45 and body g r o u n d .

PCM CONNECTOR B ( 4 9 P )
B E
3 | 4 |5 |6 |7 |8 9
.|1 11 2
12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20
25
26
22 23 24
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38
|40|41 4 2 | X I X | 4 5 | 4 6 | X
>< >< /
ho
21
28
39
1 I 2 1*3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7*1 8 I 9 1101j

11|l2|l3jl4|l5)l6|iy|l8[l9|20l2l| '
28
2 5 ^ 2 6
22 23 24
29 30 31132|33|34|35|36|37 38 39
40141 J42 \ / \ / \ 45146 \jA/\ 49
CKP (BLU)
CKP (BLU)
32
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM (B45)

and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 15.

15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (B45)

and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247).
CKP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

2 1 . Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
1
CKP (BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
22. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11-5).

Is DTC P0335
indicated?

the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
(cont'd)
11-137
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0335
indicated?

the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Circuit Intermittent

Interruption
4. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
6. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
CKP sensor and the P C M . B
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CKP sensor
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections
and terminals OK ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Ripair the connections or the terminals, then go
to step 11.
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10), and check for
damage to the CKP sensor pulser plate.
Is the pulser plate
damaged?
YES-Replace the CKP sensor pulser plate, then go to

step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
11-138

10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247).
13. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure, (see page 11-5)
Is DTC P0339
indicated?
DTC P0351: No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit

Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction

the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

Malfunction


Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, and/or
P0356 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
ignition coil(s) and the P C M . B
6. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem cylinder
with one f r o m another cylinder.
Is an ignition coil DTC indicated at the
cylinder?
exchanged
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page 4-21),

then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-139
PGM-FI System
10. Check the No. 18 IG COIL (15 A) fuse in the
13. Remove the ignition coil relay (B) f r o m the

Is the fuse OK?

NO-Go to step 13.
11. Remove the ignition coil relay (B) f r o m the
14. Disconnect all ignition coil 3P connectors.

15. Check for continuity between No. 1 ignition coil 3P
No. 11GNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
12. Test the ignition coil relay (see page 22-96).
+ B (BLK/WHT)
Is the relay OK?

NO-Replace the ignition coil relay, then go to step 26.
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the ignition
coils and the ignition coil relay. Also replace the No.
18 IG COIL (15 A) fuse, then go to step 26.
NO-Checkthe under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace
it if needed (see page 22-89), then go to step 26.
11-140
16. Reinstall the ignition coil relay.
17. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f r o m the

problem cylinder.
21. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P

connector terminal No. 2 of the problem cylinder and
body ground (see table).

19. Measure the voltage between ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3 of the problem cylinder and
body ground (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
1
No. 11GNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
+ B (BLK/WHT)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the ignition coil

and G101, then go t o step 26.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition coil
and the ignition coil relay, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-141
PGM-FI System
25. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition coil
3P connector terminal No. 1 and the PCM connector
terminal of the problem cylinder (see table).

PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
PCM
TERMINAL
B29
B30
B22
B23
B11
B12
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356
1
I G P L S T l Wire side of female terminals
IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)
4 5 6 7
m
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ill
25
>
<
2
6
/
2
8
24
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
42

IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
IGPLS3
(WHT/BLU)
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
12
22 23
29 30
41
PCM
TERMINAL
B29
B30
B22
B23
B11
B12
DTC
IGPLS3
(WHT/BLU)
T5J
3 |4 |5
12 13 14[15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30
32 33 34 3 5 | 3 6 37 38 39
4C 41142 I X I X l 45146 I ^ X I X I 491
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
IGPLS6 (BRN/WHT)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17J18, 19 20 21
26
28
23 24
25
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
40 4 l 4 2 | X I X l 4 5 | 4 6 p l 7 T 4 9
IGPLS4
(BRN)
IGPLS
PCM
CONNECTOR B (49P)
IGPLS6 (BRN/WHT)
IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)
IGPLS4
(BRN)
3 | 4 5 6 7
9 10
12 13 14115 16 17|18 19 20 21
25
26
28
23 24
32 33 34 35|36 37 38 39
29 30
4014 j 4 2 | / l X l 4 5 l 4 6 j ^ l ^ 4 9
IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM and
the ignition coil, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 25.

ignition coil, then go to step 26.
11-142
DTC P0365: CMP Sensor Circuit No Signal



3 1 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355,
P0356 indicated?
and/or

the ignition coil(s) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Is DTC P0365
indicated?

indicated DTC s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

CMP sensor and the P C M . B
YES-Go to step 5.
(see page 11-7).
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.

Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, and/or
P0356 indicated?
the ignition coil(s) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.

8. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
IGP (YEL/BLK)
Wire side of femal terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP sensor
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-143
PGM-FI System


B46 and body ground.
CMP (GRN)
3 |4 |5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1 2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
22 23 24
25
26
I
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
9 10|
20 21
28
38 39
/ \ 49
>< >< /
CMP (GRN)
1$ there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 11.

1
L G (BRN/YEL) J
[ IGP (YEL/BLK)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP sensor
and G101,then go to step 18.
11-144
YES-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B46)
and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P

B46.

17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-246).

CMP (GRN)
Is DTC P0365

J "I
l 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
22 23 24
>< >< /
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 | / l / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
indicated?

the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
9 |10|
11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
1
48
CMP (GRN)

YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (B46)
and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0365
indicated?

the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7) then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, Troubleshooting is
11-145
PGM-FI System
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
8. Check for damage to the front camshaft pulley (CMP

sensor pulser plate) (see page 6-54).
Is the pulser plate
damaged?
YES-Replace the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor

pulser plate), then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11 -246).
4. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

Are 0 counts
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
ENGINE SPEED
6. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
CMP sensor and the P C M . H
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CMP sensor
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections
and terminals OK ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go
to step 11.
11-146
indicated?

the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
VSS
Are 0 counts
Is DTC P0369

DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control System

Performance Problem
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs other than P050A
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or a blockage at the intake
air duct.
Is it OK?
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air d u c t then go to
step 19.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
11 -372), then g o t o step 19.
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the
debris (see page 11-373), then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is

122 F (50 C) or less.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR
normal?
CONTROL
VALVE
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375), then
go to step 19.
12. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m for 30
seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
gmls?
(cont'd)
11-147
PGM-FI System
14. A l l o w the engine to cool to the ambient temperature.
122F(50 C) or less.
17. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR in the

18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-372), then go to step 19. If there is
damage to the throttle bore, replace the throttle body
(see page 11-375), then go to step 19.
Is DTC P050A
indicated?

the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-148
DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing Control

System Performance Problem

P050B

3. Check for poor connections or a blockage at the intake
air duct.
is it OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Correct the p r o b l e m , then reconnect the intake air
duct, then go to step 24.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the
debris (see page 11 -373), then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 6.

9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs other than

indicated?

122F(50C)orless.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 10.

connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor
1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes o n . If the
screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 6.
10. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-20).
Is the ignition timing OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-247) and the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page
7-28).
Is the CKP sensor or the CKP sensor pulser
damaged?
plate
YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247) and/or

the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page 7-28), then go
to step 24.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR
normal?
CONTROL
VALVE
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375), then
go to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-149
PGM-FI System
14. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 30
seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
gm/s?
16. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
17. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243).
18. A l l o w the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
20. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P
connectors, but do not install t h e m .
23. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 F (3 C) from the
ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go t o step
24.
NO-Check and repair any problems w i t h the
following items. Repair or replace t h e m if needed,
then go to step 24. If all of the items are OK, go to step
31.
Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
VCM system
Engine oil
A/C system
Power steering
11-150

122 F (50 C) or less.
Is DTC P050B
indicated?

the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go t o step 30.
PASSED?

throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor
1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
3 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software

(see page 11-7).
122F(50 C) or less.
Is DTC P050B
indicated?

the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11 -7), then go to step 33. If the PCM was
DTC P0562: Charging System Low Voltage

NOTE:
If any high current load accessories are installed, this
DTC can be set.
If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
4. Check under these conditions:
A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
NO-Go to step 36.

MENU with the HDS.
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed

Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
PASSED?

throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
idling until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 33.
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for 1

minute.
Is DTC P0562
indicated?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go t o

step 7.
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
check the battery performance (see page 22-93).H
(cont'd)
11-151
PGM-FI System
A/Con
DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit

Unexpected Voltage
4. Wait 10 seconds.

minute.
Is DTC P0562
Indicated?

the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1.

Is DTC P0563
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
PGM-FI main relay 1 and the P C M . B
11-152

MRLY (GRN)
MRLY (GRN)
J 1l
2
11
22
29 30
4 0
1 41
8
3 I4 I e
6 | 7 | 9 1101
13 14J15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
/ | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 l / 48 49
A
A >< ><
Is there battery

voltage?
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
1| 2
11
22 /
29 30
40 41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
>< ><
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (A6)
and PGM-FI main relay 1,then g o t o step 19.
NO-Go to step 18.
terminal B3 and body g r o u n d .
IGP (YEL/BLK)
. | 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1
28
23 24
26
22
25
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
49
>< >< /
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-153
PGM-FI System
fuse/relay box.
18. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-96).

Is the relay OK?
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.
19. Reconnect ail connectors.
2 1 . Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Wait 10 seconds.


terminal B3 and body ground.
Is DTC P0563
indicated?

PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM, then go t o step 1.
IGP (YEL/BLK)
ll ll
. h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1
28
25
26
23 24
22
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
/
|
4
9
|
|40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 \ /
>< ><

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0563
Is there battery
voltage?

PCM (B3) and PGM-FI main relay 1,then g o t o step 19.
NO-Go to step 18.
indicated?

PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was
step 1.
11-154
NOTE:
DTC P060A: PCM Internal Control Module

Malfunction

NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data

This DTC is indicated w h e n a PCM update is not

completed.
DTC P0602: PCM Programming Error

while updating the PCM. If y o u turn the ignition switch
to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) before completion, the PCM
can be damaged.

Is DTC P060A
indicated?
1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11-249).
YES-Go to step 4.

time.B
Is DTC P0602
Indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B

NO-The update is c o m p l e t e . !

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P060A
indicated?
YES-lf the PCM w a s updated, substitute a

PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO-lf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
11-155
PGM-FI System
DTC P0615: Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit
Malfunction
7. Try to start the engine.

Does the engine start?
YES-Go t o step 8.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (III) for 1 second or

more.
Is DTC P0615
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM.B
6. Check the No. 23 ST CUT RLY 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse, then go to step 20.
11-156

11. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the
12. Connect starter cut relay 1 (STR) 4P connector

terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

STRLD
J U M P E R WIRE

17. Connect starter cut relay 1 (STR) 4P connector

IIII
4 | 5 I 6 | 7
14 15 16
[8
19 20 21
STRLD
(GRN)
26 27 28
22
M ^ 2 5 ^
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
40
44
48
49
STARTER C U T RELAY 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR
I
m
4
2
STRLY X
_3_
J U M P E R WIRE
YES-Go to step 25.
and starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-157
PGM-FI System
A3 and body ground.

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).
IJ 1 | 2
ll

i!
3 4 |5 |e |7 | a
13 1415 16 1718 19
26
22
24
25
1
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37
4 4
4 6
|40|41
11
/
/
><
AÎ
5)
KI
9|10|
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
STRLY
(LT GRN)
Is DTC P0615
indicated?

starter cut relay 1 (STR) and the PCM, then go to step
1.
(see page 11-7).
YES-Go to step 19.

and starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step 20.
19. Check for continuity between starter cut relay 1 (STR)
GND
4
1
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between starter cut relay
1 (STR) and G101, then go to step 20.
11-158
Is DTC P0615
indicated?

starter cut relay 1 (STR) and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
DTC P062F: PCM Interna! Control Module

Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
indicated?
time.B
(see page 11-7).
5..Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P062F
indicated?
Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, substitute a

PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or

Mismatch
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data and
This DTC is stored only w h e n the PCM does not have
the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS to
input the missing VIN information.
2. Check the VIN w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's
VIN?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen show
COMPLETE?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P062F
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC P062F troubleshooting (see page

11-159).
NO-Go to step 9.
Is DTC P0630
indicated?
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
(cont'd)
11-159
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0630
Indicated?
YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a

DTC P0685: PCM Power Control

Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
If the problem doesn't return after y o u clear the DTC,
or it this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing
the PCM.
Is DTC P0685
indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
time.H
11-160

(see page 11-7).
DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range

High

Is DTC P0685
indicated?

Is DTC P1109
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P1109
indicated?

11-161
PGM-FI System
NOTE:
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243).

If DTC P0111 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P1116.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same time?
9. A l l o w ECT sensor 1 to cool to the ambient

temperature.
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do not
install it on the engine.
LIST with the HDS.
temperature.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go
to step 27.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.

Is about 118 F (48 C) or less
indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -243), then go

to step 27.
indicated?

to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
indicated?

to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.
11-162

21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -243).
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P
connectors, but do not install t h e m .
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 F (3 C)
from the ambient temperature?
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature. Refill the cooling
system (see step 11 on page 10-7) then go to step 27.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -243). Check for poor
sensor 2, and the P C M . B
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than

Expected
NOTE:
Before starting this troubleshooting, check for poor
connections or a blockage at the intake air duct.
HDS.
Is less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg) or 1.61 V
held for more than 5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Vehicle speed accelerating f r o m 1531 m p h (24

50 km/h) under half throttle

is DTC P1116
indicated?

ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 4 and recheck.
(cont'd)
11-163
PGM-FI System
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-242).
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than

Expected
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCV valve

PCV hose
Throttle body
EVAP canister purge valve

158 F (70 C)
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Transmission in D
Brake booster
Are there any vacuum
Vehicle speed accelerating f r o m 1531 mph (24

50 km/h) under half throttle
leaks?
YES-Repair or replace the part(s) w i t h vacuum leaks,

then go to step 9.

NO-Go to step 2.
Is DTC P1128
indicated?

NO-Go to step 15.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
11-164

HDS.
Is there more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 277 mmHg) or
1.14 V held for more than 5 seconds?
NO-Go to step 4.

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 5 and recheck.
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Is DTC P1129
indicated?

NO-Go to step 15.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

11-165
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High


Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High
NOTE:




4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P1174*in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
recheck.
11-166
indicated?
NO-Go to step 12.

PASSED?

1) and the PCM, then go t o step 1. If the screen
DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage



2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is 72 A or more
indicated?
ELD (ORN)
r
n
n
ll
ll
n
n
3
8
. 6 7
13 1415 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3536 37
401 41 / | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | /
J 1| 2
11
><
9
20
27
38
|10|
21 i
28
39
48|49|

ELD and the P C M . B
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.

Is 72 A or more
indicated?

and the ELD, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11 -248).

(cont'd)
11-167
PGM-FI System
DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage
18. Turn on the headlights.


Is DTC P1297
indicated?

the ELD and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
(see page 11-7).

Is 0.2 A or less
indicated?
ELD and the P C M . B
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.

23. Turn on the headlights.
Is DTC P1297
6. Measure the voltage between ELD 3P connector

terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
indicated?
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
CM

the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
IG1 (LT GRN)

2)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 3 ACG
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ELD, then go to step 13.
11-168

A10 and ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3.
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-248).

ELD 3P CONNECTOR

1
Wire side of female terminals I ELD (ORN)
Is DTC P1298
indicated?
(ft
ELD (ORN)
J 1 I 2133 | 4 | 5 | 617| 718T 8 9 21|1(A
/
/ >< X
/
11
14 15 16
19 20
24
25
26 27 28
22
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35|36 37 38 39
48|49|
|40|41

the ELD and the PCM, then go to step 17.
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P1298
YES-Go to step 11.

and the ELD, then go to step 13.
11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
1 2
indicated?

the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
3
GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the ELD and
G202, then go to step 13.
11-169
PGM-FI System
DTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage
NOTE:

If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to the
vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
A/C switch off
Headlights off
Rear w i n d o w defogger off
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1
minute.
Is DTC P1549
Indicated?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go to

step 7.
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B
11-170
A/C switch off

Headlights off
Rear w i n d o w defogger off
minute.
Is DTC P1549
Indicated?

then go to step 1.
DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low

Voltage

A/Con


A/Con

minute.

5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1
minute.
Is DTC P16BB
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
Is DTC P16BB
indicated?

then go to step 1.

alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
check the battery performance (see page 2 2 - 9 3 ) .
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box
( + Bline).
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 9.
8. Check for an open in the wire between the alternator
and under-hood fuse/relay box at the engine harness.
Is the harness
OK?

step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the alternator
and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.
11-171
PGM-FI System
DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal
Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage

IG1 (BLK/YEL)

alternator 4P connector.
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
step 18.

A/Con
Rear w i n d o w defogger o n
6. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for
1 minute.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the alternator
(IG1 line) and the No. 3 ACG (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 17.

Is DTC P16BC
ALTF (WHT/RED)
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
alternator.B

Is there about 5 V?
step 17.
11-172
16. Check for continuity between alternator 4P connector

terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal C44.


A T L F (WHT/BLU)

A/Con
ATLF (WHT/RED)
terminal side of female terminals

24. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for
1 minute.
Is DTC P16BC
indicated?
YES-Go to step 26.

and the alternator, then go to step 18.

the alternator and the PCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
11-173
PGM-FI System
DTC P16BD: Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction
(see page 11-7).

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
A/Con
3. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST

w i t h the HDS.
Is 2.2 V or less
YES-Go to step 4.
30. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for

1 minute.
Is DTC P16BC
indicated?

the alternator and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
indicated?

PCM.B
YES-Replace starter cut relay 2, then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 5.

11-174


w i t h the HDS.
Is 2.2 V or less
indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step
14.
7. Remove starter cut relay 2 (A) f r o m the relay holder.
12. Check for continuity between starter cut relay 1 (STR)

4P connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
_3_
I
STRLD
I J U M P E R WIRE
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between starter cut relay
1 (STR) and the body g r o u n d , then go t o step 13.
A
NO-Go to step 18.

w i t h the HDS.
Is 2.2 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 2, then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
11-175
PGM-FI System
DTC P16BE: Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction


Is DTC P16BD
indicated?

indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
(see page 11-7).

3. Check for STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Is 3.2 V or more
indicated?
PCM.B

Is DTC P16BD
indicated?

DTCs troubleshooting-^

with the HDS.
Is 3.2 V or more
indicated?
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step
7.
11-176
6. Measure the voltage between starter cut relay 1 (STR)

S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P16BE
STRLD
Is there 3.2V or more?

YES-Repair short to power in the wire between starter
cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the PCM, then
go to step 7.
indicated?

Is DTC P16BE
indicated?

11-177
PGM-FI System
DTC P16BF: Starter Cut Relay STRLY Circuit
Malfunction


3. Check the STARTER CUT CONTROL RETURN in the
Is OFF
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 4.
NO-Go to step 13.
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III) for 5 seconds or
more.
5. Check the STARTER CUT CONTROL RETURN in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS during ignition switch in
START (III).
Is OFF
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 6.
PCM.B
11-178
8. Remove starter cut relay 2 (B) f r o m the relay holder.

9. Test starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
Are the relays OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
relay 2, then go to step 2 1 .


A3 and body ground.

S T R L Y (LT GRN)
i
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | no |
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
48|49|
/
/ >< ><
14014-1 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | /
and starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut relay 2, then
go to step 2 1 .
15. Remove starter cut relay 2 (B) f r o m the relay holder.

16. Test starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
Are the relays OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
(cont'd)
11-179
PGM-FI System
20. Measure the the voltage between PCM connector


S T R L Y (LT GRN)
II
II
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
13|14115|16|17|18|19 20 21
26 27 28
22
M3I
29 30 31|32|33l34l35|36|37 38 39
40141 y\A
441/] 4 6 ^ 48149
Is there 1.0 V or more?

PCM (A3) and starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
NO-Go to step 26.

Is DTC P16BF
Indicated?

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P16BF
indicated?

11-180

NOTE:
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

9. A l l o w ECT sensor 2 to cool to the ambient

temperature.
If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183,

P2183.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections
and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
step 27.

11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not
install it.
LIST with the HDS.
temperature.
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or more from the
ambient temperature?
to step 27.

Reinstall ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Go to step 4.

indicated?
Is about 118F (48 C) or less

to step 27.
indicated?

to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
indicated?

to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
11-181
PGM-FI System
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage

2 1 . Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

24. Connect ECT sensors 1 and 2 to their 2P connectors,

but do not install t h e m .

indicated?


Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 F (3 C)
from the ambient temperature?
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature. Refill the cooling
system (see step 11 on page 10-7), then go to step 27.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243). Check for poor
sensor 2, and the P C M . H
Is DTC P2183
indicated?

ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
11-182

indicated?
NO-Go to step 11.
10, Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P

ECT S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

(see page 11-7).
2
ECT2(BLU)
Is DTC P2184
indicated?

YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor 2
and the PCM (A21),then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
Is DTC P2184
indicated?

11-183
PGM-FI System
DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage

9. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ECT sensor 2 2P

connector.

Is about 40 F(40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicated?

11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
ETC S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
ECT2(BLU)

5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
E C T S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
ECT2 (BLU)
S G 7 (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE

Is about -40
indicated?
F (-40
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
11-184
C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

A37 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 2.

A21 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1.
2
S G 7 (GRN)
ECT2 (BLU) JL
Wire side of
(Q)

li
JL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
48 49
40 41
046
1
ISMS
female terminals
ECT2 (PUR)
il
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17|18 19 20 21
27 28
22
24
25
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
29 30
40141 y\A
4 4 I X I 4 6 y\
48149
S G 7 (BLK)
YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.


(cont'd)
11-185
PGM-FI System
2 1 . Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean

Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
NOTE:


Is DTC P2185
indicated?

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2185
indicated?


If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel, and clear the DTC
w i t h the HDS.
If DTCP2101,P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138 or
P2127 and P2138 are stored at the same time as DTC
P2195 (P2197)*, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
recheck for DTC P2195 <P2197)\
1. Check for dirt or debris in the MAF sensor/IAT sensor.
Is it dirty?
YES-Remove the debris. If needed, replace the MAF
sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-242).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the installation of A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected
pipe?
from the exhaust
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
indicated?

sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any other Pending
11-186

8. Reinstall A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

indicated?

NO-Go to step 13.
indicated?

A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 17.


(see page 11-7).
PASSED?

indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

PASSED?

the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), g o t o step 15.lf the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
comes on.
11-187
PGM-FI System
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored at
the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those DTCs
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (H), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about 2.9 V
at sea level indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.
Transmission in D
Throttle position between 14 deg and 29 deg for at
least 3 seconds
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and recheck.
7. Check the intake air system for clogging or
restrictions (foreign material, dirty air cleaner
element, etc).
restricted?
YES-Remove the clog or restriction, then go to step 9.

NO-Go to step 8.
11-188

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Throttle position between 14 deg and 29 deg for at
least 3 seconds
Is DTC P2227
indicated?
NO-Go to step 12.


158F(70 C)
Is the intake air system clogged or


the PCM . If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 9. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 3.

(see page 11-7).
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM
page 11 -7), then go to step 9. If the PCM was
substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage



HDS.

HDS.
Is about 43 kPa (12.7 in.Hg, 323 mmHg), or 1.31 V or less

indicated?

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 3.

time.l

time.B

(see page 11-7).

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2228
indicated?
Is DTC P2229
indicated?




11-189
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage

Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage
7. Disconnect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
NOTE:

connectorterminal No. 5 and PCM connectorterminal
B31 (B32)\


IPB1 (GRN)
Is DTC P2237 and/or
P22401ndicated?
2
5
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.
1
4
3 j 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
11 12 13 14 15 16 17|18 19 20 21
22 23 24
28
25
29 30
3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 42 ^1X1451461^7149
YES-Go to step 5.
IPB1 (GRN)
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .

sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . H
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*
YES-Go to step 10.
14.
11-190
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.


Is DTC P2237 and/or
1 2
4 5 6
IPB1 (GRN)
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*
X
Is there about 0.2 Vor

YES-Go to step 20.
less?
P22401ndicated?

NO-Go to step 19.
PASSED?

comes on.
(cont'd)
11-191
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2237 and/or
P22401ndicated?

11-7), then go t o step 23. If the PCM w a s substituted,
go to step 1.
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is

1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, substitute a
If the PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen
comes o n .
11-192

Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Is DTC P2238 and/or
P224Vindicated?
sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . B


B31 (B32) and body g r o u n d .


Tf=r
1
10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
28
25
26
29 30 31|32|33|34|35|36 37 38 39
40 41 4|2lJ^Xl45"[46
49
IPB1 (GRN)
(B31 (B32) ) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.
#
IPB1 (GRN)
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

YES-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-193
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).

indicated?

NO-Go to step 19.

indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
PASSED?

comes on.

P224V in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

comes on.
11-194

Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage


Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:

B15(B24r.

VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*
VCENTB1 (RED)

Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T
1 2
4 5 6
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
14|15 16 17|18 19 20 21
12
26
28
22 23 24
29 30 31 32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 41
VCENTB1
(RED)
1 ^
YES-Go t o step 10.
14.
(cont'd)
11-195
PGM-FI System


6P connectorterminal No. 6 and body ground.

Indicated?

NO-Go to step 19.
VCENTB1 (RED)
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)*

NO-Go to step 13.
11-196

PASSED?

comes on.

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
PASSED?


Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
indicated?
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H

comes on.
(cont'd)
11-197
PGM-FI System


B15 (B24)* and body ground.

6P connectorterminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .

VCENTB1 (RED)
H i 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 9 110
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 K M
26
28
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40141 2 | X M 4 5 | 4 6 | / T 7 T 4 9 '
r
^
Q)
VCENTB1 (RED)
V C E N T B 2 (RED/WHT)*
VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*

14.
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-198
(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P2245 and/or
P2249'indicated?


indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
PASSED?

comes on.

PASSED?

If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the Screen
comes on.
11-199
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage


Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:

B13(B14r.

A / F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154*.
VSB1 (BLU)

1
4 5 6
V S B 2 (RED/BLU)*

VSB2
(RED/BLU)*
VSB1 (BLU)

IS

Is DTC P2251 andlor P2254
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B
is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.
14.
11-200
MS|?I, (
12 13 14|15 16 ,17|18 19 20 21
26 28
22 23 24 3 ^ 2 5
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 [41 4 2 | y 1 X | 4 5 | 4 6 | ^ X | 4 9 |


6P connector t e r m i n a l No. 4 and b o d y g r o u n d .
15. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

18. Check for Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w i t h the HDS.
A / F S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2
4 5 6
VSB1(BLU)
^ VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there about 0.2 V or

less?
Indicated?
YES-Check for p o o r connections or loose terminals at

A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, t h e n go to step 1.
19. M o n i t o r the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
P2254* in the DTCs M E N U w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen Indicate
PASSED?

Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w e r e indicated in step 18,
1) and the PCM, t h e n go to step 1. If the screen
comes o n .
(cont'd)
11-201
PGM-FI System
20. T u r n the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
(see page 11-249), or substitute a k n o w n - g o o d PCM
(see page 11-7).
If DTC P2251 and/or
P22541ndicated?

A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s
updated, substitute a k n o w n - g o o d PCM (see page
11-7), then go t o step 23. If the PCM w a s substituted,
g o to step 1.
25. M o n i t o r the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
P2254* in the DTCs M E N U w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the PCM was u p d a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is

c o m p l e t e . If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w e r e indicated in step 24, g o t o
connections or loose t e r m i n a l s at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, substitute a
k n o w n - g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM w a s substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen
comes o n .
11-202

Sensor 1) V S Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 1) V S Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n (see page 11-3).
Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies t o t h e
f r o n t bank (Bank 2).
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan c o m e s
indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .

B13(B14)*and body ground.


VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2(RED/BLU)*
4
10
1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 17 18 1 9 2 0
22 23 24
40141
25
26
28
3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
29 30
| 4 2 4 5 1 4 6
I^XLXI 4 9
VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*

Is there
continuity?

14.
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-203
PGM-FI System
(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P2252 and/or
P2255'indicated?


Is DTC P2252 and/or
P2255'indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
PASSED?

comes on.

PASSED?

comes on.
11-204
DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Timer

Malfunction
DTC P2A00: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data

and any on-board snapshot and review the general
DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,

Sensor 1) Range/Performance Problem

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot and review the general
Is DTC P2610 indicated?

YES-Go to step 4.

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.

(see page 11-7).

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Vehicle speed between 2555 mph (4088 km/h)
for 5 minutes
throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or
P2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
N O - l f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
recheck.
(cont'd)
11-205
PGM-FI System
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF

(PCM))

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Is DTC U0029 indicated?
Vehicle speed between 2555 mph (4088 km/h)

for 5 minutes
throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds
Is DTC P2A00 and/or P2A03* indicated?
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00
and/orP2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

go to the indicated DTC s troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
(Sensorl) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
11-206
YES-Go to step 4.
time.B
(see page 11-7).
DTCs troubleshooting.
DTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VTM-4

Control Unit)
NOTE:

A48 (A49)* and VTM-4 control unit connector terminal
A11 (A22K individually.
*: CANL line

If DTC U0029 is stored at the same time as DTC U0114,
troubleshoot DTC U0029 first, then recheck for DTC
U0114.
Is DTC U0114
Indicated?

VTM-4 control unit and the P C M . B
4. Check for DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 10.
8. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P).
6 7 8 9 10
3 MS
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
11
26 27 28
24
25
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|4<
j 40 J41
I C A N L (RED)
CANH (WHT)
2
/ >< ><
/
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A ( 2 2 P )
n
YES-Go to step 4.
Is VTM-4 system DTC 41
C A N H ( W H T )
// /
m
m
8
10 11
4
1
6
22
20
18
12 13 14 15 16
u
u
CANL (RED)
YES-Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44), then go to step 19 and recheck. If
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44), then go to step
19.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
control unit (A11 (A22)*) and the PCM (A48 (A49)*),
then g o t o step 19.
10. Check for a poor connection at VTM-4 control unit
connectors A (22P) and B (12P).
Are the connections
OK?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 19.
(cont'd)
11-207
PGM-FI System
14. Measure the voltage between VTM-4 control unit
connector terminal A1 and body ground.
17. Check for continuity between VTM-4 control unit

connector terminals A10, B5, B12, and body ground
individually.
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

IG1 (GRN)
JO. n
1
4
6
8
10 11
22
18
20
12 13 14 15 16
/ /
GND (BLK)
?/
-XL
11 n
4
8
6
1
10 11
22
12 13 14 15 16
18
20

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Check the No. 1 IG1 VTM-4 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the No. 1 IG1 VTM-4 (7.5 A)
fuse and the VTM-4 control unit, then go to step 18.
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
GND (BLK)
n
16. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector B (12P).
2 3 4 5 A
11 12
///
GND (BLK)
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44), then go to step
19.
control unit and body ground (G504), then go to
step 19.
11-208

DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA


23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the DTCs

MENU with the HDS.

the VTM-4 control unit and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting-^
Are DTC U0029 and U0122 indicated at the same time?

YES-Go to troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see page
11-206).
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 5.
VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM.H
5. Check for communication to the VSA system with the
HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA
modulator-control unit?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to VSA system symptom troubleshooting for
the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator, and the
VSA indicator (see page 19-140).
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector.
(cont'd)
11-209
PGM-FI System
A48 and VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector
terminal No. 14.

terminal No. 1.
Jl|2
11
22
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
48|49|
/
/ >< ><
CANH (WHT)
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

|1|/|3|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11|
12
13
35
36
I CANL (RED)
Il/|3l4l/l6|/|8l9ll0ll1
12 13
H14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21[/|23|/|
CANH
(WHT)
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
CANL
(RED)
I25l26l27l/|/l30l/l/|/l34l
35
36
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does

not have the latest software (see page 19-146), or
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
DTC U0122 is not indicated after substitution, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page

and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to
step 12.

and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to
step 12.
11-210

DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge

Control Module)


the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

indicated DTCs troubleshooting.

YES-Go to step 4.
gauge control module and the PCM.B
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-359).
8. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
11-211
PGM-FI System
A48 and gauge control module 32P connector
terminal No. 30.

terminal No. 29.
J 1|11 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
1
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
|40|41 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
3
8 9|10|
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 35L>37 38
40 41
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
/ >^
/
Jl|2
11
/ >< ><
I CANH (WHT)
CANL (RED)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR

,
1|2[/L/|5|6 /|8|9|10 11|12|13|14|/|16|

|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/132

1121/^1/1516 / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1 l | l 2 | l 3 h 4 | / | l 6 |
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/127|28|29|30|/132
CANL (RED)
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control module

DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 22-359), then go to step 12.

and the gauge control module, then go to step 12.

and the gauge control module, then go to step 12.
the gauge control module and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting^
11-212
DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and A/T System

Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
while updating the PCM. If you do, the PCM will be
damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure for the PGM-FI and A/T
systems (see page 11-249).
Is DTC U0300
indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B

indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B
DTC U1101: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ACM)

lsDTCU1101indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Check for ACM system DTCs in the DTCs MENU with
the HDS.
Is DTC P15AB
indicated?
YES-Go to the ACM system's DTC P15AB

NO-Go to step 5.
connector.
(cont'd)
11-213
PGM-FI System
A48 and engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal No. 14.

terminal No. 12.
* liol
rn~2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
11
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21 i
24
25
26 27 28
i
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
48|49|
|40|41
/|44
\/\&Y
/
/ / >< ><
. | 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28 i
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
| X | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | X 48|49|
40 41
/ / >< ><
/
CANH (WHT)

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
i
2
1 0
11
5
1
1 5
CANL (RED)
1 6
2
1 0
11
5
1
7
1 4
1 5
1 6
CANL (RED)
CANH (WHT)
r
4
YES-Substitute a known-good engine mount control

unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 11 and recheck. If
DTC U1101 is not indicated after substitution, replace
the original engine mount control unit (see page

and the engine mount control unit, then go to step 11.

and the engine mount control unit, then go to step 11.
lsDTCU1101indicated?
step 1.
11-214
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting

Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-359).
VSA modulator-control unit 36P (see page 19-147).
4. Measure the resistance between PCM connector

terminals A48 and A49.
Engine mount control unit 16P (see page 4-77).
1 2
11
22
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 |5 |6 |7 | 8
13 14 15 16 1718 19
24
25
26
31 3233 34 35 36 37
/ >< ><
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P

(see page 19-144).
SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-188).
VTM-4 control unit A (22P) (with VTM-4) (see page
15-44).
9 |10|
20 21 i
27 28 i
i
38 39
48|49|
TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-101).


ll
ll
8
3
, 6 7
11
13 14 15 16 1718 19
24
25
22
26
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37
40 41
|/|44|/l46[/
1| 2
Is there about 8 5 - 1 0 3 Q (with VTM-4), or

(without VTM-4)?
88-107Q
A
/
YES-Go to step 36.
>< ><
9 10
20 21
27 28
38 39
48 49
CANH (WHT)
IT) |
1
1
1CANL
j (RED)
0A
HQH
NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM connector
terminals A48 and A49.H
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
11-215
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal No. 30.

terminal No. 14.
3 | 7 | 8 9 10
1 2 3
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
|40|41
/ >< >
/
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
i
24
25
26 27 28
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38
48|49|
40 41
.|1|2
11
/
/ / >< ><
/ V\"V\*V /CANH (WHT)
I CANH (WHT)

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
1
i | 2 | A l 5 | e / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1l|l2|l3h4|/il6|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/127|28|29|30|/|32
10
CANH (WHT)
h-r
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
11 1 2 / 14 15 16
CANH (WHT)
1$ there continuity?
fe there continuity?
YES-Go to step 8.
YES-

and the gauge control m o d u l e . !
With VTM-4: Go to step 10.

terminal No. 14.
ll ll
1 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
11
13 1415 16
19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
l/|44|/|46(/
// >< ><
48149
CANH (WHT)

H I / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12
H14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
CANH
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
(WHT)
35
13
36
YES-Go to step 9.
and the VSA modulator-control u n i t . l
11-216
Without VTM-4: Go to step 11.

and the engine mount control u n i t . l

A48 and VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P)
terminal No. 11.

terminal No. 29.

n
6 7
1| 2 3 k , h
11
13 14 15 16 17 18
24
25
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 L /
40 41
/ ><
/
8 9 10
19 20 21 i
26 27 28
37 38
48|49|
l / l 441/461/
1 | 2
hie
|6|7|
ho
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
7 24
25
26 27 28
/ / >< ><
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38
40 41
48|49|
CANH (WHT)
l/l
441/| 461/
CANL (RED)
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A (22P) CANH (WHT) (J I)
n
n
rh
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
n
// /
11
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR

I
/ | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1lh2|l3h4| / / i 16|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
1|2|/T/|5|6
CANL (RED)
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 12.

and the VTM-4 control u n i t . B

and the gauge control m o d u l e . B
12. Check for continuity between between PCM
connector terminal A49 and VSA modulator-control
u n i t 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.
| 7 | 8 9 10
I 111| 72 133 |144 |15 16I 317|18
19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28 1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
48 149 J
40 41
44 |XI 46 | X
>< ><
/ l/l
I CANL (RED)

H1|/|3|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11|
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
CANL
(RED)
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
12
13
35
36
YES-Go to step 13.
and the VSA modulator-control unit.B
(cont'd)
11-217
PGM-FI System
terminal No. 12.
14. Check for continuity between between PCM

connector terminal A49 and VTM-4 control unit
connector A (22P) terminal No. 22.
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8
13 1415 16 17 18 19
24
26
25
1
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 M 37
|40|41
J 1
11
/ / ><
/ V\V\*V
9 10
20 21
27 28
38
48|49|
1
1
1
. h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
11
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
1
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35L> 37 38
48|49|
|40|41
/ A ><
CANL (RED)
CANL (RED)

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
2
10
f
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
14 15 16
11 12
CANL (RED)
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A (22P)
n
// / / /
/ / /
1
6
4
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
u
u
CANL (RED)
YES-
YES-Go to step 15.
With VTM-4: Go to step 14.

and the VTM-4 control u n i t . B

and the engine mount control u n i t . B
11-218
15. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
17. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.

18. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P

connector.

lr=T
. | 1 | 2 3 l 4 j 5 [ 6 I 7 I 89|10|
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28 i
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
A
A
>< ><
CANH (WHT) J
[CANL (RED)
J i| 2
3hie , 6 7
8 9 10
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
26 27 28 i
25
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39 i
| / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 l / 48|49|
|40|41
A
A
>< ><
CANH (WHT) J
[CANL (RED)
Is there about 2.34-2.86
kQ?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control module
(see page 22-359), then reconnect PCM connector A. If
the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original
gauge control module (see page 22-359).B

Q (without VTM-4)?
kQ (with VTM-4), or
108-132
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-147), then reconnect PCM connector
A. If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original
VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-147).B
(cont'd)
11-219
PGM-FI System
connector.

connector.
21. Reconnect the engine mount control unit 16P

connector.
24. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor 5P connector.


3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 s hot
11
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
i
37
29 30 31 3233 34 3536
38 39
|40|41
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10|
1 2
11
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
[40141
481491
JlU
/
/ >< ><
/
CANH (WHT) J
kQ?
>< ><
AAV\*V
CANH (WHT) J
[CANL (RED)
[CANL (RED)
te there about 2.34 -2.86
kQ?
YES-Go to step 23.
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Substitute a known-good engine mount control

unit (see page 4-77), then reconnect PCM connector A.
If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original
engine mount control unit (see page 4-77).B
NO-Substitute a known-good yaw

rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page
19-144), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the HDS
identifies the vehicle, replace the original yaw
19-144).
11-220
26. Disconnect the yaw-rate lateral/longitudinal

27. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
29. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).

30. Reconnect the VTM-4 control unit A (22P) connector.
3 1 . Measure the resistance between PCM connector

lf=T
i | 2 3 | 4 | e | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
48|49|
40 41
/ >< ><
441/| 461/
/ l/lCANH
(WHT)J
2 3
13
24
22
1
29 30 31
|40|41 / l
. 1
11
|4 | 5 |6 | 7 |8 9
14 15 16 17)18 19 20
25
26 27
3233 34 35 36 37 38
/
/ ><
/ l
441/|
10
21 i
28
39
4 6 | / 48|49|
CANH (WHT) j
I CANL (RED)
[CANL (RED)

Is there about 108-132

kD?
YES With VTM-4: Go to step 29.

O?
YES-Go to step 33.

NO-Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit (see
page 15-44), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the
HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original VTM-4
control unit (see page 15-44).B
NO-Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page

24-188), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the HDS
identifies the vehicle, replace the original SRS unit
(see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
(cont'd)
11-221
PGM-FI System

Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-359).
33. With VTM-4: Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit A

(22P) connector.
VSA modulator-control unit 36P (see page 19-147).
34. Reconnect the TPMS control unit connector.
Engine mount control unit 16P (see page 4-77).

Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P

(see page 19-144).
SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-188).
J1|2
11
22
1
29 30
40 41
VTM-4 control unit A (22P) (with VTM-4) (see page

15-44).
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
X | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
// >< ><
CANH (WHT) J
TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-101).

[CANL (RED)
kCI?

HDS identifies the vehicle with a known-good PCM,
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see
page 18-101), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the
HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original TPMS
control unit (see page 1 8 - 1 0 1 ) .
1 2 ,i j 5 | 6 f 7 |
13 .14|15 16 .17|18
11
24
25
22
29 30 31 3233 34 35|36
3
8
19 20 21
26 27 28
37 38 39
40141 jj/VI 44 \y] 46 I^XI 48149

CANH (WHT)
and the gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, the engine mount control
unit, the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor, the SRS unit, the VTM-4 control unit, the
TPMS control unit, or the DLC.B
NO-Go to step 38.
11-222


40. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
42. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.
1 2
11
22
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
i
24
25
26 27 28
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
48|49|
>< ><
CANL (RED)
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?

YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-359).
NO-Go to step 43.
and the gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, the engine mount control
unit, the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor, the SRS unit, the VTM-4 control unit, the
TPMS control unit, or the DLC.B
NO-Go to step 39.

connector.
YES-Replace the VSA control unit (see page
19-147J.B
NO-Go to step 47.
connector.
connector.
4-77).B
NO-Go to step 51.
(cont'd)
11-223
PGM-FI System
F - C A N
C i r c u i tT r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
( c o n t ' d )
52. Reconnect the engine mount control unit 16P

connector.
64. Without VTM-4: Reconnect SRS unit connector A

(39P).
53. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

65. With VTM-4: Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit A

(22P) connector.
66. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.

YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (see page 19-144).
NO-Go to step 55.
56. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-188).!
NO With VTM-4: Go to step 59.
60. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
61. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit A (22P) connector.

YES-Replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page
15-44).!
NO-Go to step 63.
11-224

YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-101).!
HDS identifies the vehicle with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).!
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-334).

Does the MIL indicator flash?

YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 22-359), then recheck. If the
gauge control module, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
IEzziE
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
1
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28 1
22
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41
/ I 441/| 46 \ / 48|49|
/ >< ><
S C S (BRN)

4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A32),

the VTM-4 control unit (with VTM-4), and the DLC.B

6. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P), then disconnect
the HDS.

11-225
PGM-FI System
D L C C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
NOTE: If you suspect the HDS or HDS DLC cable may be
the source of the communication problem, verify that
they are working properly by connecting them to a
known-good, like vehicle and system, and checking for
communication problem.

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the SRS
indicator.
Does the SRS indicator come on and go off?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to SRS symptom troubleshooting for an SRS

indicator that comes on with no stored DTCs (see
page 24-164).!

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 23.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI
system with the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting-^
NO If the HDS does not communicate with the BODY
ELECTRICAL system, go to step 15.
If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS
system, go to step 5.
If the HDS does not communicate with the VSA
If the HDS does not communicate with the VTM-4

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the VSA
indicator.
Does the VSA indicator come on and go off?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to the VSA system symptom troubleshooting
for an ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA
indicator that do not go off (see page 19-140).B
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
VTM-4 indicator.
Does the VTM-4 indicator come on and go off?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to the VTM-4 system symptom
troubleshooting for the VTM-4 indicator that does not
go off with no stored DTCs in any system: VTM-4,
VSA, or PGM-FI (see page 15-35).B
If the HDS does not communicate with the TPMS

If the HDS does not communicate with the IMMOBI

(immobilizer) system, go to step 13.

TPMS indicator.
Does the TPMS indicator come on and go off?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to the TPMS symptom troubleshooting for
TPMS indicator that does not go off with no stored
DTCs (see page 18-100).B
11-226

immobilizer indicator.
Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or continue to
flash?
YES-Go to the immobilizer system symptom
troubleshooting for an immobilizer indicator that
does not go off (see page 22-455).B
NO-Go to step 17.
20. Continue to check for continuity between DLC

terminal No. 7 and body ground while disconnecting
these connectors, one at a time:
SRS unit connector A (39P)
VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector
VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P) (with VTM-4)
TPMS control unit 20P connector.
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
Audio unit A (24P) connector
Under-dash fuse/relay box Q (16P) connector

22-334).
Does continuity go away when one of the above parts is

disconnected?
16. Check the gauge display.
YES-Replace the part that caused continuity go away

when it was disconnected.!
Is Error 2 or B-CAN
ERROR indicated?
YES-Check for B-CAN system DTCs.B (see page

22-108)
NO-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the DLC (K-line)

and the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS unit, the
TPMS control unit, the VTM-4 control unit, the
immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, or the
under-dash fuse/relay box.B
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then do the

battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page
22-94), and wait at least 3 minutes before starting
work..
18. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
19. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and
body ground.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
11-227
PGM-FI System
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
21. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
23. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS (see
page 22-108).
/s DTC U0029 and/or U0100 indicated?
YES-Go to step 34.
K-LINE (LT BLU)
y
\9
//
/ / /
4 5 6 7
14
16/
12
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 24.

26. Measure the voltage between DLC terminal No. 16
and body ground.

following connector terminals, with all listed control
units disconnected.
Connector
SRSunitA(39P)
VSA modulator-control
unit 36P
VTM-4 control unit A (22P)
(with VTM-4)
TPMS control unit (20P)
Immobilizer-keyless
control unit 7P
Audio unitA(24P)
Under-dash fuse/relay
boxQ(16P)
Terminal
No. 18 (LT BLU)
No. 3 (LT BLU)
No. 18 (LT BLU)

No. 7 (LT BLU)
No. 5 (LT BLU)
No. 3 (LT BLU)
No. 7 (LT BLU)
fe there continuity between DLC terminal and each of the

terminals in the chart?
YES-Replace the part that does not communicate
with the HDS.B
NO-Repair open in the wire between the DLC (K-line)
and the appropriate connector.B
11-228
+B(WHT)
fe there battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 16 and the No. 23 BACK UP (10A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.B
27. Measure the voltage between DLC terminals No. 4

and No. 16.

A48 and DLC terminal NO.6.
GND (BLK)
3 |4 | 5 |6 | 7 |8
J 1 | 2
9|10|
13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28 i
1
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 M 37 38
40 41
48|49|
11
/ / ><
>r<J
AAV\*V
CANH (WHT)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLCf

CANH (WHT) f
12
Is there battery voltage?
14
16
YES-Go to step 28.

NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 4 and body ground (G403) (see page 22-20).
YES-Go to step 33.
and DLC terminal No. 6.B
A49 and DLC terminal No. 14.

.1 1 I 23
11
1
//
| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
i
24
25
26 27 28
><C
29 30 31 3233 34 35L> 37 38
|40|41
/ \ 4 4 1 / | 46 \ / 48|49|
CANL (RED)

1 /
//
\ // / /
9
5 6 7
12
14
L_
16/
CANL (RED)
and DLC terminal No. 14.B
(cont'd)
11-229
PGM-FI System
38. Remove the blown No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse from the
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?

YES-Go to the F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (see
page
11-215)11
39. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
NO-Go to step 35.

35. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)
36. Check the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
te the fuse OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 IG
MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is
OK, go to step 37.
NO- Repair short in the wire between the No. 2 IG
MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. Also replace
the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse.B
37. Inspect the No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 38.
40. Check for continuity between body ground and

PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3 individually.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR

+B
+B
YES-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see
page 22-89). Also replace the No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse.
NO-Go to step 41.
11-230
41. While disconnecting each of the parts or connectors

below, one at a time, check for continuity between
PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
PCM connector B (49P)
Each injector 2P connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector
MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) relay
42. Disconnect these parts or connectors:

PCM connector B (49P)
Injectors
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
MAF sensor/IAT sensor
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) relay
43. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P
connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground.
IGP
IGP
Does continuity go away when one of the above parts or

parts is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that made the short to body
ground go away when disconnected. Reconnect all
connectors, then update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11 -250). Also
replace the No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse.B
NO-Go to step 42.
YES-Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 1 and each part. Also replace the No. 19 MAIN
(15 A) fuse.B
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the
No. 19 MAIN (15A) fuse.B
44. Inspect the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 56.
NO-Go to step 45.
45. Remove the blown No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse from
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
(cont'd)
11-231
PGM-FI System
46. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10|
11 12 13 1415 16 71 19 20 21 i
22 23 24
26
28
25
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
/|49|
|40|41
Jl|2
15
X
42|/V|45|46|X
IG1 (BLK/YEL)
47. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (see page

22-96).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 48.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the No. 2 FUEL
PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (B42), between the No.
2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) or between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15
A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit. Also replace
the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
f
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also

replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse.B
48. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP)4Pconnectorterminal No. 1 and body
ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)
4P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and

update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
52. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-163).
53. Pull the carpet back out of the way, then remove the
access panel from the floor (see page 11-353).
3
IG1
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Go to step 52.
11-232
54. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
55. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P


FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR

MRLY (GRN)
F U E L PUMP (YEL)
J 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 3|7|
11
13 14 15 16 1718
24
22
25
i
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6
|40|41 / | / | 4 4 1 / | 46
/
/
><
8
9 h o |
19 20 21 i
26 27 28
37 38 39
\ / 48|49|

Is there battery
YES-Repair short in the wire between the fuel tank

unit and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also
replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) f u s e . B
YES-Go to step 65.
NO-Check the fuel p u m p , and replace it if needed (see

page 11-356). Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15
A) f u s e . B
voltage?
NO-Go to step 6 1 .
fuse/relay box.

57. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P) and B (49P).
terminal B42 and body g r o u n d .
J 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 hol
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
/|49|
>< /
140141 4 2 | / f / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
IG1 (BLK/YEL)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 60.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 FUEL
PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (B42).B
(cont'd)
11-233
PGM-FI System
63. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P
IGP
USE

A6.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
4
MRLY
1
ideof
Terminal side
female terminals
minals
MRLY (GRN)
T=ir
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
1 2
11
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
25
26 27 28
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 / l / l 4 4 l / | 4 6 ^ 48149
/ >< ><
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 64.

NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-89).
YES-Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-96). If the
relay is OK, update the PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).H
and PGM-FI main relay 1 .
11-234

fuse/relay box.

B3.
IGP
IGP (YEL/BLK)
3 | 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
26
28
22 23
3233 34 35|36 37 38 39
29 30
40 41 4 2 1 / 1 / 1 4 5 1 4 6 1 ^ / 1 4 9
67. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P

YES-Go to step 69.

and PGM-FI main relay 1 . 1
+ B
69. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-96).

Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK?
YES-Go to step 70.
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1.B
Is there battery
70. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P), B (49P), and C

(49P).
voltage?
YES-Go to step 68.

22-89).
(cont'd)
11-235
PGM-FI System
7 1 . Check for continuity between body ground and PCM
connector terminals A 4 1 , B 1 , B40, B 4 1 C 1 , and C41
individually.
f

PCM C O N N E C T O R S
A(49P)
. h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 ho!
11
13 14|15 16 17(18 19 20 21
26 27 28
24
25
22
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|
//
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9 110
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25 ^ 2 6
28
29 30 31132|33|34|35|36|37 38 39
491
40 41 4 2 l X M 4 5 | 4 ] 3
0 2
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
LG3 (BRN)

B (49P)
PG2 (BLK)
J 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |8 9|10|
11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21
25
26
28
22 23 24
I
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 1 /
>< >< /
A"\
PG1
(BLK)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 73.

73. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal B36 and body g r o u n d , while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
MAP sensor 3P connector
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P
connector
C (49P)
P G M E T C S (BLK)
1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
22
25
1
1
30
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
40 41 42143144
46147 48|49|
/
/
><
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 72.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the PCM (A41,
B 1 , B40, B41, C1, C41) and body ground (G101).B
11-236

disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that caused an open w h e n it
was d i s c o n n e c t e d . !
N O - Repair short in the wire between the PCM (B36)
and the MAP sensor, or the output shaft
(countershaft) speed s e n s o r . H


PCM CONNECTOR C(49P)

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
n
I 1 | 23 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
"\
1101
9 21 i
11 12
16 17 18 19 20
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
30
3233 34 3 5 / 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7 48|49|
><
1 j 2 j 3 j 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 j 8 I 9 |10|
13 14115 16 17118 19 20 21
2 4 ^ 25 ^ 2 6 27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 0 1 4 1 ^ 1 / 4 4 1 / 4 6 ] ^ 48 49
VCC3 (RED)

YES-Go to step 75.
YES-Go to step 77.
NO-Go to step 76.
NO-Go to step 78.

connector terminal C12 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
EGR valve 5P connector
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector
Rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P connector
disconnected?

connectorterminal A24 and body ground, while
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
and the APP sensor.B
NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-289).B
YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it

was disconnected.!
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C12)
and the EGR valve, the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, or the rocker arm oil pressure sensor.B
(cont'd)
11-237
PGM-FI System
1 1 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
11 13 1415 ie 1718 19 20 21
26 27 28 i
24
2
22
i
29 30 31 3233
35 36 37 38 39
48|49|
|40|41 / I / I 4 4 ,
/
/ >< ><
VCC4(ORN)

B18and body ground.

VCC5 (BLU)
II
ll
J 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 MoI
11 12 13 1415 16 1718M9 20 21 i
26 28
22
23 24
25
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35 3>37 38 39 i
|40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 1 / / | 4 9 |
>

YES-Go to step 79.
YES-Go to step 81.
NO-Go to step 80.
NO-Go to step 82.

connector terminal A25 and body ground, while
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.

connectorterminal B18and body ground, while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector.
YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A25)

and the APP sensor.B

and the throttle body.B
NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page

11-289).!
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375).B
11-238


VCC6
(YEL/BLU)
VCC7(LTBLU)

/s f/?ere continuity?
YES-Go to step 83.
YES-Go to step 85.
NO-Go to step 84.

PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).!

connectorterminal C11 and body ground, while
disconnecting the IMT actuator 5P connector.
and the IMT a c t u a t o r . !
NO-Replace the IMT actuator (see page 11-374).!

connector terminal A36 and body ground, while
disconnecting the FTP sensor 3P connector.
and the FTP s e n s o r . !
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-429).!
11-239
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
3. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A) (see page 11-348).
4. Remove the fuel joint hose mounting bolt (B).

5. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the injectors.
6. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (D) from the fuel rails (E).
7. Remove the fuel rail and the injectors from the injector base.
8. Remove the injector clips (F) from the fuel rail.
9. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-240
10. Coat the new O-rings (black) (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rails (C).
11. Install the injector clips (D).

12. Coat the new injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil.
13. Install the fuel rails and injectors in the injector base (F).
14. Install the fuel rail mounting bolts, and connect the connectors on the injectors.
15. Install the fuel joint hose mounting bolt.
16. Connect the quick-connect fitting (see page 11-350).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel
rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leaks.
18. Install the intake manifold with a new gasket (see page 9-2).
11-241
PGM-FI System
MAP Sensor Replacement
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor

Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT senor 5P connector
2. Remove the screw (B).

3. Remove the MAP sensor (C).
2. Remove the screws (B).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a
new O-ring (D).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT senor (C).

new O-ring (D).
11-242
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector (A).
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector (A).
B
12 N-m
(1.2 kgfm,
8.7 Ibfft)
>\
B
12 N m
(1.2 kgfm,
8.7 Ibfft)
4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B).

new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine
coolant (see page 10-6).
4. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B).
new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine
coolant (see page 10-6).
11-243
PGM-FI System
A/F Sensor Replacement
02 Sensor Socket Wrench Snap-on SWR2 or 0 2 Sensor
Wrench Snap-on YA8875, commercially available
Front Bank (Bank2)
Rear Bank (Bankl)

1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor 6P connector (A), then
remove the A/F sensor (B).
1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor 6P connector (A), then

remove the A/F sensor (B).
44 N m
(4.5 kgfm,
33 Ibfft)

44 N m
(4.5 kgfm,
33 Ibfft)
11-244
Secondary H02S Replacement

Rear Bank(Bank 1)
0 2 Sensor Socket Wrench Snap-on SWR2 or 0 2 Sensor

Wrench Snap-on YA8875, commercially available
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
Front Bank(Bank2)
2. Disconnect the rear secondary H02S 4P connector

(A), and remove the harness clamps (B).
1. Disconnect the front secondary H02S 4P connector

(A), and remove the harness clamps (B).

3. Remove the harness clamp (A), then remove the front
secondary H 0 2 S (B).
33 Ibfft)
3. Remove the rear secondary H02S (C).

11-245
PGM-FI System
CMP Sensor Replacement
4. Remove the CMP sensor (A) f r o m the back cover.
2. Remove the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor pulse

plate) (A).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Install

the timing belt (see page 6-18).
(see page 11-5).
x
9 2 N m (9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then

remove the back cover (C).
11-246
CKP Sensor Replacement
Knock Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the vehicle is level, because engine

oil will drip out when you remove the sensor.
2. Remove the injector base (see page 9-6).

3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A).
2. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A).
4. Remove the knock sensor (B).

3. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (B).
4. Remove the CKP sensor (C).

new O-ring (D).
(see page 11-5).
7. Check the engine oil level, and add more oil if needed.
11-247
PGM-FI System
ELD Replacement
1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-89).
2. Remove the screws (A), and the fuse (B).
4. Turn the housing over again. Using two flat-tip

screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the
fuse/relay box base (B) from the fuse/relay box
housing (C).
NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or
damaged.
3. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A).

-A
5. Remove the ELD (A).
11-248
PCM Update
Honda interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation
HDS pocket tester
GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS
software version
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the

engine.
A n y one of the above updating tools can be used.

NOTE:
software version.
Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged, and connect a jumper
battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system
voltage.
Never turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)
during the update. If there is a problem with the
update, leave the ignition switch ON (II).
To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C,
power w i n d o w s , moonroof (if equipped), door locks,
etc.) during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
You cannot update a PCM with a program it already
has. It will only accept a new program.
High temperature in the engine compartment might
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine was running before the update, open the
hood, and cool the engine compartment.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was
flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in
ON (II) when you disconnect the HIM from the data link
connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage.

circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226). If y o u are
returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps
4 and 5, and clean the throttle body (see page 11-372)
after updating the PCM.
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h HDS.
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the
update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
update the PCM.
(cont'd)
11-249
PGM-FI System
PCM Update (cont'd)
PCM Replacement
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the

HDS/HIM/GNA600 f r o m the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that y o u were doing. If the software in the
PCM is not the latest, f o l l o w the instructions on the
screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or
the A/T system, make sure you update both.

HDS pocket tester
. GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool

the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If y o u run
in to a problem during the update procedure
(programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes
over 100 %, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS
tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the
chance of damaging the PCM.
Leave the ignition switch is in ON (II).

NOTE: Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest
HDS software version.
1. Connect HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
Connect a j u m p e r battery (do not connect a battery

charger).
Shut d o w n the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
Reboot the HDS.
Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update
procedure again.
throttle body (see page 11-372).

3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM and
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226). If y o u are
returning f r o m the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip
steps 5 through 9,18 t h r o u g h 23, and 26 through 28,
and do this after replacing the PCM:
Replace the engine oil (see page 8-10) and the
engine oil filter (see page 8-11).
Replace the ATF (see page 14-209).
Clean the throttle body (see page 11-372).
4. Select the PGM-FI system w i t h the HDS.
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
continue w i t h this procedure.
11-250
7. Select the REPLACE PCM M E N U , then select READ

DATA, and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE:
Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
data f r o m the original PCM so you can later
download (WRITES) it into the new PCM.
If the READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue w i t h
this procedure.
15. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal.

17. Manually input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch
may be stored because the VIN has not been
programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue
this procedure.
8. Select the A/T system with the HDS.
18. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7, go to

step 2 1 . Otherwise, go to step 19.
9. Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then select

READ DATA, and follow the screen prompts.
19. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
NOTE:
Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data
f r o m the original PCM so you can later download
(WRITES) it into the new PCM.
If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue w i t h this
procedure.
12. Remove the cover(D).
20. Select the REPLACE PCM MENU, then select WRITE

DATA, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue
with this procedure.
21. If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 9, go to step
24. Otherwise go to step 22.
22. Select the A/T SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
23. Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then select
WRITE DATA, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue
with this procedure.
24. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
25. Enter the immobilizer PCM code that y o u got f r o m the
iN, and use the PCM replacement procedure in the
IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows you to start the
engine.
throttle body (see page 11-372), then go to step 27.
27. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE DATA
failed in step 20, replace the engine oil (see page 8-10)
and engine oil filter (see page 8-11), then go to step
28.
28. If the READ DATA failed in step 9 or the WRITE DATA
failed in step 23, replace the ATF (see page 14-209),
then go to step 29.

identification.
29. Select the PGM-FI system, and reset the PCM with the
HDS.
(seepage 11-249).
14. Remove the bolts (E), and remove the PCM (F).
11-251

11-252
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage
9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P

THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4
5 6
TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 4.
throttle body and the PCM.B

YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.


1 2 3 4
5 6
VCC5 (BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-253

17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375).

B18 and throttle body 6P connectorterminal No. 2.

CO
1 2
4 5 6
VCC5 (BLU) I Wire side of female terminals
VCC5 (BLU)
|J 1 I 23 I 4 J
5 | 6 | 7 8 9 hot
11 12 13 1415 16 71 19 20 21
28
25
26
22 23 24
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
15
>< /
/ M

the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1.
(see page 11-7).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle body
and the PCM (B18), then go to step 18.

the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was
step 1.
11-254
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

B17 and throttle body 6P connectorterminal No. 1.

3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

YES-Go to step 4.
TPSA (RED/BLK) IWire side of female terminals


YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5.
TPSA (RED/BLK)
9 110
3 |4j5 j 6
12 13 14|15 16 1718 19 20 21
28
25 ^ 2 6
22 23 24
29 30 31 32[33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 [ 42lXIXl45|46| t 7l7l49
HI

YES-Go to step 25.


TPSA (RED/BLK)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18,
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-255


B33 and throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 4.

1 2 3 4 5 6
SG5 (GRN)
PCM CONNECTOR B(49P)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
26
28
25
22 23 24 x
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
145|46L/ / | 4 9 |
Jl|2
>< /
SG5 (GRN)

(see page 11-7).
YES-Go to step 25.
11-256

stepl.
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage

and any on-board snapshot and review the general


1 2 3 4 5 6
TPSB (RED/BLU)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.
body and the PCM (B26), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.

4 5
CO
CO
VCC5 (BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-257



fe DTC P0222 indicated?

5
VCC5 (BLU) 1 Wire side of female terminals
VCC5(BLU)
3 | 4 |5 |6 | 7
11 12 13 1415 16 1718
25
22 23 24
1
29 30 31 3233 34 3536
|40|41
Jl|2
8 9|10|
19 20 21
28
26
i
37 38 39
/|49|
>< >< /

indicated DTCs troubleshooting^
I/I/IIK
(see page 11-7).
YES-Go to step 23.

the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
go to step 1.
11-258
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage



3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

TPSB (RED/BLU) I Wire side of female terminals

throttle body and the PCM.H
J 1 2
11 12
22 23
1
29 30
|40|41
T P S B (RED/BLU)
9 1101
3 |4 I5 |6 |T
13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21 i
24
25
26
28
i
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
42|/l/|45|46|/
>< ><
A\
NO-Go to step 5.



1 2 3 4 5 6
T P S B (RED/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-259



1 2 3
5 6
S G 5 (GRN)

3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 |8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
26
25
22 23 24
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37
^|45|46|/
|40|41
Lhl2
9|10|
20 21
28
i
38 39
/ 4 9
>< >< /
S G 5 (GRN)

indicated DTC'stroubleshooting.H
(see page 11-7).

step 1.
11-260
DTC P1658: ETCS Control Relay ON

Malfunction
5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-96).

Is the ETCS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to step
13.

HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
ETCS control relay and the P C M . H

PCM CONNECTOR A ( 4 9 P )
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) f r o m the
3j 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
11|X13|14|15|16|17118|19
24
25
26
31 32|33|34|35|36|37
9
20
27
38
110|
21
28
39
441X146^481491
E T C S R L Y (RED)
and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-261
Electronic Throttle Control S y s t e m


terminal C4 and body ground.

IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)
iiii
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8
11 12
16
19
24
25
26
22i
1
3233 34 3 5 L > 37
30
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
.|1|2
><
z z n
9 1101
20 21 i
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|
Is DTC P1658
indicated?

the ETCS control relay and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Is there battery
voltage?

PCM (C4) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step
12.
NO-Go to step 18.

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P1658
indicated?

the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If the PCM was
step 1.
11-262
DTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF

Malfunction
7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-96).

Is the ETCS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to step
23.

Is DTC P1659
9. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay 4P

indicated?
E T C S CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.
ETCS control relay and the P C M . B

5. Check the No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
6. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) from the
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 10.

(cont'd)
11-263

10. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay 4P
14. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P

C4.
+B
IG1ETCS
Ml
IG1ETCS
(YEL/GRN)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 11.

11-264
YES-Go to step 15.

16. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
A29.
17. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) f r o m the

E T C S CONTROL R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
ETCSRLY
3
10
1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0
2 4 > < 2 5 > ^ 2 6
22
29 30
44
4C
27 28
32|33 34 35 36 37 38 39
48
49
E T C S R L Y (RED)

C4 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 28.

IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (A29)

11 12
1
24
22
1101
]8 9
16 17 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
. | 1 | 2
25
><
32 3 3 34 3 5 /
30
|40|41
42
26 27 28
37 38 39
1431441/| 46147
48|49|
N O - G o to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-265

2 1 . Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
E T C S CONTROL R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
+B

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P1659
indicated?

the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If the PCM was
step 1.
page 22-89), then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 28.
Is DTC P1659
indicated?

the ETCS control relay and the PCM, then go to step 1.
11-266

DTC P1683: Throttle Valve Default Position

Spring Performance Problem
9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown.
^CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will
seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.
10. Release the throttle valve.

Does the throttle valve return?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10

seconds.
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-372), then

go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1683 is indicated,
go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 11.

Is DTC P1683
indicated?
11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11 -375).

YES-Go to step 7.

throttle body and the P C M . B

seconds.

8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body
(see page 11-375).

Is DTC P1683
indicated?

11-267

DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring
Performance Problem
9. Push the throttle valve open as shown.
^CAUTION
activated.
seconds.
Is DTC P1684
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
throttle body and the P C M . H
10. Release the throttle valve.

Does the throttle valve return?
go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11 -375).
seconds.

(see page 11-375).

Is DTC P1684
indicated?

11-268
DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction
^CAUTION
body w h e n y o u turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
activated.

HDS.
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the throttle valve operate
smoothly?

go to step 22.

HDS.
Is DTC P2101
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.


3 4
ENGINE SPEED
1 2
VSS
S G 5 (GRN)
APPSENSOR A


lsDTCP2101indicated?
5 6
J 1
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1101
11 12 1 3 14 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
YES-Go to step 7.
throttle body and the PCM, then clean the throttle
body (see page 1 1 - 3 7 2 ) .
(see page 11-375).
22 23 24
>< ><
25
26
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41
42/1'
28
/|45|46|X
S G 5 (GRN)
YES-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-269

19. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5

terminals C2 and C3.
ETCSM
(GRN)
ETCSM +
(BLU)
E T C S M (GRN)
E T C S M + (BLU)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12
15 16 17 18 19
22
24
25
26
30
32 33 34 3 5 1 / 37
40 41 42 43l44[X|46J47
1
J U M P E R WIRE
9 10
20 21
27 28
38|39
48149

NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 24.
2 1 . At the throttle body side, measure the resistance
between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 with the throttle fully closed.
/N
1 2
3 4
ETCSM-
6
ETCSM+
Is there about 1.0 kQ or more?

YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 30.
11-270
22. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).


ENGINE SPEED
VSS
APP SENSOR A


the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the throttle
body (see page 11-372), and go to step 1.
(see page 11-7).
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
APP SENSOR A

step 1.
11-271

D T C
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( c o n t ' d )
DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current



3. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
1 2 3 4 5 6
SG5 (GRN)

YES-Go to step 5.
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 I 9 |10|
11 1213 1411516171181920 21
22 23 2 1 ^ 2 5 ^ 2 6
28
29 3031132|33|34|35|36|37 38 39
491
i40|4l|42lAKl 45
SG5 (GRN)
YES-Go to step 10.
11-272

13. At the throttle body side, measure the resistance

between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 with the throttle fully closed.
_ _ / N
1 2 3 4 5 6
ETCSM
(GRN)J
1 2 3 4
5 6
ETCSM-
[ ETCSM+ (BLU)
ETCSM+

Is there about 1.0 O or less?
YES-Repair short in the wires between throttle body
6P connector terminals No. 5 (ETCS line) and No. 6
(ETCS+ line), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 12.
throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6
individually.
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Go to step 17.
1 2 3 4 5 6
E T C S M - (GRN)
1 2
ETCSM+ (BLU)
4 5 6
E T C S M - (GRN) I
I ETCSM + (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
(t)(t)
body 6P connector and body ground, then go to step
18.
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-273


ETCSM (GRN)
ETCSM+
(BLU)
ri
J l l 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 98 |10|1
11 12 / I 1 6 16
19 20 21
25
26 27 28
22 24
1
1
30 32|33 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
48|49|
|40|41 42143144
46147
><


YES-Go to step 16.

16. At the throttle body side, check for continuity between
body ground and throttle body 6P connector

(see page 11-7).
/S
1 2 3 4 5 6
ETCSM (GRNjI
I E T C S M + (BLU)
@(8)
/s there continuity?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 26.
11-274

go to step 1.
DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)

Circuit Low Voltage

10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P


2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
y\
1 2 3 4 5 6
YES-Go to step 3.
APSA (PUR)

APP sensor and the PCM.B
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
and the APP sensor, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 11.
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3 (RED)
SG3 (WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
11-275

11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 to

14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3 with a jumper wire.

1 2 3 4 5 6
APSA (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
VCC3(RED)
APSA (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE



APSA (PUR)
1 2
j 4 |5 |6 |
YES-Go to step 29.

7||8
10
13 14J15 16 17J18 19 2 0
25
22
30
40141
KM
27 28
3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
44 \/\ 46^/1481491
YES-Go to step 13.
11-276
NO-Go to step 22.
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page

11-289).



1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3 (RED)
JUMPER WIRE

the APP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated DTC'stroubleshooting.H


li

(see page 11-7).
il
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 21
26 27 28
25
24
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3738 39
140 41 1/1441X1461^48149
VCC3 (RED)

the APP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
YES-Go to step 29.
11-277

DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
Circuit High Voltage


SG3 (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
fe there about 4.9 V or more?

YES-Go to step 3.


3 4 | 5 | 6 I 718
13 14|15 16 17|18 1920
24
26 27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 38 39
401411^1X1441/146^ 48 49
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3(RED)|
SG3 (WHT)
[SG3(WHT)
OP
YES-Go to step 19.
1$ there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
11-278


11-289).
DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)

Circuit Low Voltage
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 11-7).


1 2
3 4
VCC4(ORN)J
[ SG4 (BRN)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
11-279

D T C


10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P

APSB (GRY)
JUMPER WIRE
APSB (GRY)


APSB (GRY)
9 10
3I J l l
31
111/ 13|l4|i5|l6[l7|l8|l9 20 21
KM KM 2738 2839
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
4
NO-Go to step 11.
40 41Y\/\^\/\^Y\^
YES-Go to step 13.
11-280

14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 4 and
No. 6 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
CO
1 2
6
VCC4 (ORN)
5 6
V C C 4 (ORN)
J U M P E R WIRE
APSB (GRY)
J U M P E R WIRE
2 1 . Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal

16. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

YES-Go to step 29.
HE
J1|2
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8
11
13 14 15 1 17 18 19
26
24 X
2
22
29 30 31 3233 34 35|36 37
|40|41 / l / l 44 ,
><
9|10|
20 21
i
27 28
38 39
48|49|
VCC4 (ORN)
YES-Go to step 30.
and APP sensor, then go to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-281

11-289).
Is DTC P2127
Indicated?

DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)

2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .
APP sensor and the P C M . H


(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P2127
1 2
indicated?

the APP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
6
S G 4 (BRN)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
11-282
3 4
VCC4(ORN)

11-289).



CM
CO
5 6
Is DTC P2128
S G 4 (BRN)
JUMPER WIRE
indicated?


(see page 11-7).
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
26 27 28
29 30
3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41
8 49
44
MSIS
S G 4 (BRN)
Is DTC P2128
indicated?

YES-Go to step 19.
11-283

DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage
Correlation
ACAUTION
body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, you will
activated.

terminals B17 and B26.
T P S A (RED/BLK)
T P S B (RED/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 * 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31|32|33|34|35|36 37 38 39
40 41 42lXlXl45l46
49

3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.

NO-Go to step 22.
Is DTC P2135
Indicated?
throttle body and the PCM.H

terminals B17 and B26.

(see page 11-375).
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while you
clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to the fully closed
position?
TPSA (RED/BLK)
TPSB (RED/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
22 23 24
25
28
26
29 30 31 32 33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 41 42 | / I ^ | 4 5 | 4 6 j / | X T 4 9
NO-Go to step 9.
connector terminals B17 (TPSA line) and B26 (TPSB
line), then go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 15.
11-284

DTC P2138: APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E)

Incorrect Voltage Correlation

2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
Is DTC P2135
indicated?

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2135
indicated?

11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.

Is DTC P2138
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
APP sensor and the P C M . H
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
Are they the same
voltage?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)
11-285

[HpAPSA (PUR) | lAPSB(GRY)

3 4 5 6 7
9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
24
25
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 4 0 1 4 1 1 ^ 1 / 1 4 4 1 X 1 4 6 1 / 48 49

11-289).

Is DTC P2138
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 22.
C=l
APSA (PUR)
APSB (GRY)
TJX
3 I4l5|6|7
STjoT
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
22
24
29 30 31|32|33|34|35|36|37 38 39
4 0 | 4 l | ^ M 4 4 | X | 4 6 j | x l 48 49
YES-Repair short in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A18 (APSA line) and A19 (APS3
line), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-286
indicated?

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P2138
indicated?

DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System

Idle Position Not Learned
^CAUTION
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, you will
activated.
10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while doing

the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.
Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed
position?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.
Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
NOTE:

go to step 2 1 .
NO-Go to step 18.

P2176.


10 seconds.
Is DTC P2176
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
throttle body and the PCM, then clean the throttle
body (see page 1 1 - 3 7 2 ) .
1 2
3 4
E T C S M - (GRN)
6
I
JUMPER WIRE

(see page 11-375).
(cont'd)
11-287


(see page 11-7).
E T C S M + (BLU)
E T C S M - (GRN)
11 12
16 17|18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
22
25
30
32|33 34 3 5 t / 37 38 39
40 41 42143144 |Xl 46147 48 49
>< ><
Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 27.

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
10 seconds.
Is DTC P2176
indicated?

the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the throttle
body (see page 11-372), and go to step 1.
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
11-288
30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 10

seconds.
Is DTC P2176
indicated?

go to step 1.
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
Accelerator Pedal Module

NOTE:
1. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (A).
This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully

closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures.
Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated,
troubleshoot t h e m first, then do this procedure.
Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If y o u find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-289).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B).

NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately. Do
not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it
doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
page 11-226).
4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then
check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %, update the PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then
check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11 -289), then go to step 1.
11-289

REAR ROCKER ARM OIL

P R E S S U R E SWITCH
Removal/Installation, page 11-315
ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SENSOR
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID B
(BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID A
(BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL V A L V E
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-249
FRONT ROCKER ARM
11-290
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID A
(BANK 2)
FRONT ROCKER ARM
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0522: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor
Circuit Low Voltage

11. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil pressure
sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .

2. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in
the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
ROCKER A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1
YES-Go to step 3.
POIL (BLU/YEL)

rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the P C M . H
4. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
connector.


and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, then go to
step 18.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
7. Measure the voltage between rocker arm oil pressure
sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
ROCKER A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-291

17. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page
8-9).

C12 and rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 1.
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU) I Wire side of female terminals
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8
11 1 2 / 1
16 17 18 19
25
26
2 2 / '24
1
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 42143144 |/T 46147
><
9|10|
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
step 18.
11-292
indicated?

the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
.Ml:
/z o/\
Is DTC P0522
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0522

indicated?

the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 28.
DTC P0523: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor

PASSED?

pressure sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was

YES-Go to step 3.
rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the P C M . B
4. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
connector.
5. Connect rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P connector
POIL (BLU/YEL)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

Is there about 4.79 V or more ?
YES-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
11-293

8. Remove the jumper wire.
9. Measure the voltage between rocker arm oil pressure


terminal No. 3.
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
JJLL
I S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 26.
step 20.
11-294
19. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page
8-9).

terminal No. 2.

POIL (BLU/YEL)
Is DTC P0523
indicated?

the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
Does the screen indicated
POIL (BLU/YEL)
YES-Go to step 26.
step 20.
PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
pressure sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
(cont'd)
11-295

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0523

indicated?

the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the PCM. If the
3. Select the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h

the HDS, and do the Solenoid Valve ACTIVATION of
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOL A (B1).
Is DTC P2648
NO-Go to step 30.

DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid

A (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage
PASSED?

pressure sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
indicated?
rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1) and the
PCM.B
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid A
(Bank 1) 2P connector.
7. Measure the resistance between rocker arm oil
control solenoid A (Bank 1) 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID A
(BANK 1) 2P CONNECTOR
' @ '

NO-Go to step 1 1 .
11-296
temperature?
11. Replace the rear rocker arm oil control valve (see
page 6-62).



1 2
11 12
22 23
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21
24
25
26
28
i
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
4 2 4 5 1 4 6 1 / / 4 9
>< ><
CSSB
J L (GRN/RED)

ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOL A (B1).
Is DTC P2648
Indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.

and rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1), then
g o t o step 12.
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid A
(Bank 1), then go to step 19.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1 and
recheck. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-297

(see page 11-7).
2 1 . Select the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
Is DTC P2648
indicated?

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 2 1 .
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil
control solenoid A (Bank 1) and the PCM. If the PCM
page 11-7), then go to step 2 1 . If the PCM was
COMPLETED, go to step 2 1 .

A (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P2649
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
PCM.B
No. 1 and No. 2.

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 12.
11-298
temperature?
8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control

solenoid A (Bank 1) 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.

B49 and rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1) 2P
connectorterminal No. 1.

FOG
GND (BLK)
^
C S S B (GRN/RED)
.1
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
1
23
11 12 13 14 15 16
19 20 21
22 23 24
><
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 35J36 3 7 3 8 3 9
J40J41
4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
49
C S S B (GRN/RED)
Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between rocker arm oil
control solenoid A (Bank 1) terminal No. 2 and G101,
then go to step 13.
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
1),then g o t o step 19.
g o t o step 13.
page 6-62).
Is DTC P2649
indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-299

MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

recheck. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(see page 11-7).

B (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage
3. Select the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOL B (B1).
Is DTC P2653
indicated?
2 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle.
YES-Go to step 5.

rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1) and the
Is DTC P2649
indicated?

NO-Go to step 23.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?
PCM.B
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid B
control solenoid B (Bank 1) 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID B
(BANK 1)2P CONNECTOR

the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes o n .
Is there 13.916.9 Q at room temperature?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
11-300
page 6-62).



. 1 2
11 12
22 23
1
29 30
|40|41
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 1415 16 17|18 19 20 21
25
26
24
28
i
31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
9j
>< ><
42451461/
A'-
CSSA
(GRN/YEL)
16. Select the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOL B (B1).

NO-Go to step 18.
and rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1), then go
to step 12.
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid B
Does the screen indicate PASSED?

N O - l f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1 and
to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-301

(see page 11-7).
the HDS, and do the Solenoid Valve ACTIVATION w i t h
ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOL B (B1).
Is DTC P2653
indicated?

PASSED?

control solenoid B (Bank 1) and the PCM. If the PCM
page 11-7), then g o t o step 2 1 . If the PCM was

B (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P2654
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
PCM.B
6. Disconnect rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1)
2P connector.
control solenoid B (Bank 1) 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 12.
11-302
temperature?

solenoid B (Bank 1) 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID B

B39 and rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1) 2P

C S S A (GRN/YEL)
GND (BLK)

"Tr=nr
11 1 2 1 3 14|15 16 1 7 1 8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31 32|33 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
C S S A (GRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 9.
control solenoid B (Bank 1) terminal No. 2 and G101,
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank
1), then g o t o step 19.
and rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1), then go
to step 13.
page 6-62).

NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-303


(see page 11-7).

A (Bank 2) Circuit Low Voltage

PCM.fl

NO-Go to step 23.

No. 1 and No. 2.

control solenoid B (Bank 1) and the PCM. If the PCM
Is there 13.916.9 D at room temperature?

NO-Go to step 11.
11-304
11. Replace the front rocker arm oil control valve (see
page 6-62).


3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 | 8
2
9 1101
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
25
22 23 24
26
28
1
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 3 9
|40|41
.1
>< >< Y
4 2 4 5 1 4 6
| /A
esse
^ (GRN/WHT)

Is DTC P2658
indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (B28)
go to step 12.
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid A
PASSED?

to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-305

(see page 11-7).
ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOL A (B2).
Is DTC P2658
indicated?

rocker a r m oil control solenoid A (Bank 2) and the
NO-Go to step 23.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?


A (Bank 2) Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC P2659
indicated?
PCM.B
No. 1 and No. 2.

NO-Go to step 12.
11-306
temperature?

solenoid A (Bank 2) 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.

B28 and rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 2) 2P

C S S C (GRN/WHT)
GND (BLK)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
11 12 13 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 3 1 32I33 3 4 35(36 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 | / | / ! 4 5 | 4 6 L / / | 4 9 |
C S S C (GRN/WHT)
YES-Go t o step 9.
control solenoid A (Bank 2) terminal No. 2 and G101,
then go t o step 13.
the PCM and rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
2),then g o t o step 19.
g o t o step 13.
12. Replace the front rocker arm oil control valve (see
page 6-62).
Is DTC P2659
indicated?

PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-307

PASSED?

(see page 11-7).
DTC P3400: VPS Stuck Off Bank 1

. Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
. A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Check the engine oil level and quality.
Is it OK?
2 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil level to the proper level, or

replace the engine oil if needed, then go to step 3 1 .
Is DTC P2659
indicated?


4. Select the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION M E N U , and
do the VPS TEST w i t h the HDS.
Are VCMB1-0 and VCMB2-0
indicated?
NO-Go to step 23.

PASSED?

11-308
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .

rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1), rocker arm
oil control solenoid B (Bank 1), the rear rocker arm oil
pressure switch, and the P C M . H
NO-lf the result is
VCM B1-1: Go to step 5.
VCMB1-3: Go to step 13.
VCMB1-2, VCMB1-4: Check the oil passage for the
rear bank cylinder pause system. If it is OK, replace
the rear rocker arm oil control valve (see page 6-62),
then go to step 30.
VCMB2-1,2-2,2-3,2-4: The front bank cylinder
pause system is faulty. Go to the troubleshooting
for P3497 (see page 11-311).

6. Disconnect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch 1P
connector.
8. Check ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH B in the
Is SWITCH ON
indicated?

14. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
with the HDS during the 3 CYLINDER ACTIVATION
(TEST STATUS 3 and 6) and the 4 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION (TEST STATUS 5 and 7).
2
Is there about 217.0 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm , 31.5 psi) or more?

YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check these parts:
NO-Replace the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch


E
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8
2
11 12
16 17 18 19
22
24
25
26
32|33 34 35L/ 37
V 30
|40|4!
.hi
421431441/] 46147
9 |10|
20 21 1
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
oil
oil
oil
oil
filter
screen
pump
passage
If needed, clean or replace the parts, then go to step

31.
connector.
17. Connect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch 1P
connector terminal to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r
wire.
REAR ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E
SWITCH 1P CONNECTOR
V C M S W B (BLU/YEL)
1
VCMSWB (BLU/YEL)
J U M P E R WIRE
and the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go to
step 30.
pressure switch, and the PCM, then go to step 36.

19. Check ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH B in the
Is SWITCH ON
indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-309

20. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . Remove the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch (see

page 11-315).
22. Attach the special tools to the rear rocker arm oil
control valve as s h o w n , then attach the rear rocker
arm oil pressure switch (A) to the pressure gauge
attachment (B).
07406-0070301
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
A
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)

NOTE: Do not remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the rear
rocker arm oil pressure switch.
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ-S5AA200
rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1), rocker a r m
pressure switch, and the PCM. If the connections and
terminals are OK, go to step 36.
23. Reconnect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch
1P connector.
25. Check the oil pressure during the 3 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION (TEST STATUS 3 and 6) and the 4
CYLINDER ACTIVATION (TEST STATUS 5 and 7).
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 56.4 kPa (0.58
kgf/cm , 8.2 psi)?
2
YES-Replace the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch

NO-Check the rear cylinder pause system oil
passage. If it is OK, replace the rear rocker arm oil
control valve (see page 6-62), then go to step 30.
11-310
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the rear rocker

arm oil pressure switch and the PCM (C30), then go to
step 30.
DTC P3497: VPS Stuck Off Bank 2

Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A

indicated?
YES-Go to step 35.

pressure switch, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated?
YES-lf any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

indicated, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.

(see page 11-7).
indicated?
YES-Go to step 39.

NO-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
1. Check the engine oil level and quality.

Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil level to the proper level, or
replace the engine oil if needed, then go to step 3 1 .
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.H

indicated?
indicated?

rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 2), the front
rocker arm oil pressure switch, and the PCM.H
NO-lf the result is
VCMB2-2, VCMB2-4: Check the oil passage for the
front bank cylinder pause system. If it is OK, replace
the front rocker arm oil control valve (see page
6-62),then go to step 30.
VCMB1-1,1-2,1-3,1-4: The rear bank cylinder pause
system is faulty. Go to the troubleshooting for
P3400 (see page 11-308).
YES-lf any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!
original PCM (see page 11 - 2 5 0 ) .
(cont'd)
11-311

6. Disconnect the front rocker arm oil pressure switch 1P
connector.
8. Check ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH C in the

14. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
w i t h the HDS during the 3 CYLINDER ACTIVATION
(TEST STATUS 3 and 6) and the 4 CYLINDER
2
Is there about 217.0 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm , 31.5 psi) or more?
Is SWITCH ON indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check these parts:
NO-Replace the front rocker arm oil pressure switch

Engine oil filter
Engine oil screen

Engine oil p u m p
Engine oil passage

If needed, clean or replace the parts, then go to step

31.
connector.
17. Connect the front rocker arm oil pressure switch 1P

connectorterminal to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r
wire.
V C M S W C (BLU/WHT)
J111 12I 2133 |144 15| 516| 6 | 7
8 < hoi
19 20 21
25
26
28
22 23 24
1
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
71
1 5
>< ><
FRONT ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E

SWITCH 1P CONNECTOR
A*\
1
V C M S W B (BLU/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
and the front rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go
to step 30.
rocker arm oil pressure switch, and the PCM, then go
to step 36.
Wire side of female terminal

19. Check ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH C in the
Is SWITCH ON
indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 26.
11-312
2 1 . Remove the front rocker arm oil pressure switch (see

page 11-314).
22. Attach the special tools t o the front rocker arm oil
control valve as s h o w n , then attach the front rocker
arm oil pressure switch (A) in the pressure gauge
attachment (B).
07406-0070301

NOTE: Do not remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the front
rocker arm oil pressure switch.
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120

A
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m
16 Ibfft)
V C M S W C (BLU/WHT)
1
4 | 5
6 | 7
310
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
22 23 24 >
<
25
26
28
2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
40141J42 L X I X I 4 5 1 4 6 ^ x 1 4 9
7NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ-S5AA200
rocker arm oil pressure switch, and the PCM. If the
connections and terminals OK, go t o step 36.
23. Reconnect the front rocker arm oil pressure switch 1P

connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the front rocker

arm oil pressure switch and the PCM (B20), then go t o
step 30.

25. Check the oil pressure during the 4 CYLINDER
Does the oil pressure
kgf/cm , 8.2 psi)?
increase to at least 56.4 kPa (0.58
YES-Replace the front rocker arm oil pressure switch

(see page 11 -314), then go t o step 30.
NO-Check the front cylinder pause system oil
passage. If it is OK, replace the front rocker arm oil
control valve (see page 6-62), then go t o step 30.
(cont'd)
11-313

Front Rocker Arm Oil Pressure

Switch Removal/Installation

connector (A).

indicated?
rocker arm oil pressure switch, and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
indicated?
Y E S - l f any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

troubleshooting.B
NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . B
3. Remove the front rocker arm oil pressure switch (B).

(see page 11-7).
indicated?
NO-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
indicated?
Y E S - l f any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

troubleshooting.B
11-314
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h a

new O-ring (C).
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Removal/Installation

connector (A).
2. Remove the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch (B).

new O-ring (C).
11-315
Idle Control System

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-324
11-316
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower
Than Expected
on, then let it idle 20 seconds or more.
4. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with the
HDS:
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 F (70 C)
- IAT SENSOR above 32 F (0 C)
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
FSS is CLOSED
MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 15. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
6. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body (see
page 11-375).
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore.

on, then let it idle 20 seconds or more.
12. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with the
HDS:
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 F (70 C)
IAT SENSOR above 32 F (0 C)
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
FSS is CLOSED
Is DTC P0506
indicated?

NO-Go to step 14.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C
system and/or the power steering system, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, g o t o step 12.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore?

YES-lf there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body
(see page 11 -372). Also check for damage to the air
cleaner element (see page 11 -373), then go to step 9. If
there is damage in the throttle bore, go to step 8.
NO-Check the A/C system or the power steering
system, then go to step 17.
(cont'd)
11-317
Idle Control System

15. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body (see
page 11-375).
DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher

Than Expected
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore.

Is there dirt, carbon, or damage In the throttle bore?

Y E S - l f there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-372). Also check for damage to the air
cleaner element (see page 11-373), then go to step 9. If
there is damage in the throttle bore, go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Recheck w i t h different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, the blower motor, the rear w i n d o w
defogger and/or the A/C, change the gear position,
etc.).
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

time.H
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C
system and/or the power steering system, then go to
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the
screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 12.

FAILED?
CONDITION, recheck w i t h different load conditions
(electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go to step 3.
PCV valve
PCV hose
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Brake booster
Are there any leaks?
YES-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go to
step 6.
NO-Go to step 6.
11-318

on, then let it idle .
Is DTC P0507
Indicated?

NO-Go to step 11.
PASSED?

N O - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the
screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, recheck w i t h
different load conditions (turn on the headlights, the
blower motor, or the A/C; change the gear position,
etc.), then go to step 9.
Idle Control System

A / C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
13. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A13 to
body ground w i t h a jumper wire several times.

2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
A C C (YEL)
3 4 5
7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
25
26 27 28
24
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3738 39
1 2
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the A/C system (see page 21-9).
40141 j j / V I 44 [ X I 46J^X[ 48149
5. Check the A/C system operation.

JUMPER WIRE
Does the A/C system
operate?
YES-The air conditioning system circuit is O K . B
NO-Go to step 6.
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor

8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor
YES-Do the A/C system test (see page 21-9).
NO-Go to step 9.
11-320
clutch?

clutch?
the A/C compressor clutch relay and the PCM. If the
connections and the terminals are OK, check the A/C
compressor clutch relay (see page 22-96). If needed,
repair open in the wire between the PCM (A13), the
A/C compressor clutch relay, and other parts A/C
syatem.
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
3. Check for the indicated percentage varies w h e n the
headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage
8. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM

connectorterminal C44.
vary?
Y E S - T h e alternator signal circuit is
OKM
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch OFF and the ignition switch
to LOCK (0).
and the a l t e r n a t o r . !
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .
11-321
Idle Control S y s t e m
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P

PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
P S P S W (BLU)

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14.
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position.
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?

YES-The PSP switch signal circuit is
OKM
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?

YES-Replace the PSP switch (see page 17-29).H
NO-Go to step 10.
and the PSP switch.B
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .
15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.


P S P S W (BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
GND (BLK)
11-322
HDS.
Does it change to ON?
23. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P

YES-Replace the PSP switch (see page 17-29).B

NO-Go to step 18.
1_J
GND (BLK)

19. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the PSP switch 2P
connector.

A38 and PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1.
P S P S W (BLU)

1
2 3
4 5 6 7 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
26
22
21X25
37
29 30 31 3233 34
44
40

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch
and G202.B
9 10
20
27 28
38 39
^8 49
P S P S W (BLU)
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch
and the PCM (A38).B
11-323
Idle Control System

Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector

terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
BKSW (LT BLU)
1
NO-lnspect the brake pedal position switch (see page
19-6).B
JUMPER WIRE
3. Press the brake pedal while check the BRAKE SWITCH

in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON?
YES-The brake pedal position switch signal circuit

(BKSW line) is OK.B
NO-Go to step 4.

A8 and body ground.

6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.
A8 and body ground.
B K S W (LT BLU)
Jl|2
11
22
29 30
|40|41
/
/
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
31 3233 34 35 36 37
X|/|44|/|46
>< ><
9 1101
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|

BKSW (LT BLU)
3|4|5|6|7|
J1|2
11
13 14 15 16 1718
24
25
22
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36
|40|41
8
19
26
37
I / >< ><
/v\\/\*v
9|10|
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
and the brake pedal position switch. Also, replace the
No. 11 STOP/HORN (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box.B
NO-Go to step 9.
11-324
YES-Repair open or short in the wire between the
brake pedal position switch and the No. 11
STOP/HORN(20 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box. If the circuit is OK, replace the brake
pedal position switch (see page 19-6).B
and the brake pedal position switch.B
Idle Speed Inspection

NOTE:
Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
- The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been
reported o n , and there are no DTCs.
- Ignition t i m i n g
- Spark plugs
- A i r cleaner

5. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and A/C off.
Idle speed should be:
700 50 rpm (in P or N)
- PCV system
A p p l y the parking brake, and make sure the headlights
are off.
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (see step 1 on page 11-430).
6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute w i t h high electric load

(A/C switch o n , the temperature set to max cool, the
blower fan on high, and the headlights on high beam).
Idle speed should be:
700 50 rpm (in P or N)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do
the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326). If the
idle speed is still not within specification, go to the
s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector.

page 11-226).
11-325
Idle Control System

PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can
learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever y o u do any of
these actions:
Replace the PCM.
Reset the PCM.
Update the PCM.
Replace or clean the throttle body.
Disassemble the engine or transmission.
NOTE: Clearing DTCs w i t h the HDS does not require y o u
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (the A/C, the audio, the
lights, etc.) are off.
o n , or until the engine coolant temperature reaches
194F (90C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the
throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes o n , do not include its
running time in the 5 minutes.
11-326
Fuel Supply System

FUELTANK
Draining, page 11-343
FUEL TANK UNIT

FUEL PUMP
FUEL G A U G E SENDING UNIT
T e s t page 11-359
FUEL P R E S S U R E REGULATOR
FUEL FILTER
F U E L FEED LINE
F U E L RAIL
FUEL FILL
CAP
FUEL FILL PIPE

FUEL LINE/
QUICK CONNECT FITTING
Precautions, page 11-346
Removal, page 11-348
FUEL LINE/
QUICK CONNECT FITTING
Precautions, page 11-346
Removal, page 11-348
FUEL VAPOR LINE
(cont'd)
11-327
Fuel Supply System

PGM-FI

11-328
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Range/ Performance
Problem
NOTE:
Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
w i t h o u t refueling to complete this diagnosis, this DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-359).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
the fuel gauge sending unit and the gauge control
module.

Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
Is DTC P0462
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit.B
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page

11 -356), then go to step 2.

6. Pull the carpet back out of the w a y , then remove the
access panel f r o m the floor (see page 11-353).


9. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs Troubleshooting.

Is DTC P0463
indicated?
NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . !
YES-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-329
Fuel Supply System

11. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
F U E L TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR

SIGNAL (LT BLU)
SIGNAL (LT BLU)
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Go to step 12.
14. Disconnect gauge control module 32P connector.
11-330
YES-Repair short in the wire between the gauge
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 24.
17. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-353).
18. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
2 1 . Set the float (A) to the E position.

Is DTC P0462
indicated?

module, then go to step 1.
3 1 . Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
E
19.1 mm
(0.8 in)
(see page 11-7).
22. Check the fuel gauge.

Does the fuel gauge move to the empty
position?
YES-Go to step 30.
Is DTC P0462


module. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
indicated?

11-331
Fuel Supply System

Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
11. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 3 t o

1 2
3 4

GND (LT GRN)
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the DTCs

Is DTC P0463
J U M P E R WIRE
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 4.
gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit.l


5. Remove the second r o w seat (see page 20-163).
14. Check for continuity between gauge control module

6. Pull the carpet back out of the way, then remove the
l | 2 | / i > | 5 | 6 A 8 I 9 |1011|12|13|14|/116|
17 18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27 28|29|30|/l32
GND (LT GRN)

SIGNAL (LT BLU)
1 2
3 4
GND (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge sending
unit, then go to step 27.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 17.

11-332
15. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connectorterminal No. 1 to


18. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -353).
19. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-359).
SIGNAL (LT BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 20.

2 1 . Reconnect gauge control module 32P connector.

24. Set the float (A) to the F position.

9 |101 l | l 2 | l 3 h 4 | / T l 6 |
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/ 32
/
1|2|A I5|6 / \ 8
SIGNAL (LT BLU)
F
214.2 mm
(8.4 in)
25. Check the fuel gauge.

control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 27.
Does the gauge move to the full position?

YES-Go to step 33.
(cont'd)
11-333
Fuel Supply System

Is DTC P0463
indicated?

the gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit, then go to step 1.
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0463
indicated?

module. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
DTCs troubleshooting.B
11-334
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting

If y o u suspect a problem w i t h the fuel p u m p , check that
the fuel p u m p actually runs; w h e n it is o n , y o u will hear
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port w i t h the fuel
fill cap removed. The fuel p u m p should run for
2 seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (ll). If
the fuel p u m p does not make noise, check as follows:
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) f r o m

6. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector D
(8P).
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector G
(21P).
8. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (21P)
terminal No. 4 t o body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR G (21P)
IGP (ORN)
6
JZ0
13Ml5
J U M P E R WIRE

4. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
9. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/ relay

box connector D (8P) terminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR D (8P)

4P CONNECTOR
IGP
Ii
6 7
IGP (ORN)
^ 2
3
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Replace PGM-FI main relay *\M

NO Repair open in the wire between the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
If the wire is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay
box (see page 2 2 - 8 9 ) .
(cont'd)
11-335
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) 4 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body
ground.
4P CONNECTOR

15. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM
connector terminal A 1 1 .

IMOFPR (GRN)
3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
22
25
24
26
32 33 34 35|36 37
29 30
44
40 41

Is there battery
9 1101
20 21
27 28
38 39
48 49
voltage?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-
YES-Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step 16.
Check the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between PGM-FI main

relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the PCM (A11 ) .
16. Connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body ground
w i t h a jumper wire.

12. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P
connectorterminal No. 3 to body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
PGM-FI MAIN R E L A Y 2 (FUEL PUMP)
4P CONNECTOR
4
IMOFPR
El
3

MRLY (GRN)
3|4|5| 5|7|8
Jl|2
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
24
22
25
26
1
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37
|40|41 / | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | /
/
/
>< ><
i
i
9 hoi
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
J U M P E R WIRE

J U M P E R WIRE
11-336

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the

voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector
F (34P) terminal No. 10 and body ground within 2
seconds.
IMOFPR (GRN)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 .1718
20
24
25
22
26 27 28
29 30
3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
48 49
44
401
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
CS3
Is there battery
IMOFPR (GRN)
1
20
22 23
5|6
24
A*
25
9 10 1 1
27 28
7?
29
' 1 4 | 1 5 16|17
. 30
31
II
18
132
19
33 34
voltage?
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).I
Is there battery
voltage?

NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
11-337
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector
F (34P) terminal No. 10 and body ground after 2
seconds.

voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground w i t h i n 2 seconds.
F U E L PUMP (YEL)
IMOFPR (GRN)
1
20
22 23
5|6
24
A*
25
7V
9 1 0 11
7 28 29
4*
14|15 16|l7
30
31
II
18 19
132 33
34

Is there battery
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 23.

NO-lf needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
25. Pull the carpet back out of the w a y , then remove the
11-338
voltage?
28. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) f r o m
29. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper
wire.
4P CONNECTOR

1 2
3 4
GND (BLK)
F U E L PUMP
IG1
J U M P E R WIRE
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground within 2 seconds.
YES-Replace the fuel p u m p (see page 11-356).H

NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel tank unit
4P connector and G503.B

FUEL PUMP (YEL)
1 2
3 4
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).H

NO-Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the fuel tank unit 4P
connector.H
11-339
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve
pressure f r o m the system by disabling the fuel p u m p ,
and disconnecting the fuel line/quick connect fitting in
the engine compartment.
10. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
With the HDS

11. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean
it if needed.
12. Place a rag or a shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A).

page 11-226).
5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the
fuel tank.
7. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel
Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it
stalls.
NOTE:
Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or
the PCM will continue to operate the fuel p u m p .
Pending or Confirmed DTC may be set during this
procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear t h e m as
needed (see page 11-4).
page 22-94).
11-340
13. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the retainer
tabs (C) with the other hand to release them f r o m the
locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
Without the HDS

1. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)(A) f r o m
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed d o w n , and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
Do not remove the retainer f r o m the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a new
one.
2. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.

NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore t h e m .
4. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the
fuel tank.
14. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it
for dirt or damage (see step 1 on page 11-350).

page 22-94).

page 22-94).
(cont'd)
11-341
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
6. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
9. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the retainer
tabs (C) w i t h the other hand to release t h e m f r o m the
locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
one.
7. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean

it if needed.
8. Place a rag or a shop t o w e l over the quick-connect
fitting (A).
10. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it

for dirt or damage (see step 1 on page 11-350).
page 22-94).
11-342
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Tank Draining

. Fuel Pressure Gauge 07406-004000B
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 07AAJ-S6MA150
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -353).
2. Using a hand p u m p , a hose, and a container suitable

for fuel, draw the fuel f r o m the fuel tank.
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-354).
2. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel

pressure gauge.

If the engine starts, go to step 5.
If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel p u m p is running: Listen to the
fuel filler port w i t h the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel
p u m p should run for 2 seconds w h e n the ignition
switch is first turned to ON (II).
If the p u m p runs, go to step 5.
If the p u m p does not run, do the fuel pump circuit
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be
3 9 0 - 4 4 0 kPa ( 4 . 0 - 4 . 5 kgf/cm , 5 7 - 6 4 psi).
If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
2
If the pressure is out of specification, replace the

fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-355) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-356), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
11-343
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connections are secure

and the quick-connect fitting covers are
firmly locked in place.
11-344
Check all clamps, and make sure they are properly positioned and tightened.
11-345
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
and 1), connect the fuel feed hose (J) to the fuel feed hose
(K), the fuel feed hose t o the fuel feed line (L), the fuel
feed hose (M) to the fuel tank unit (N), the fuel tank vapor
recirculation tube (O) to the vent return pipe (P), the vent
return pipe to the vent return tube (Q), the vent return
tube to the breather pipe (R), the EVAP canister (S) to the
purge tube (T), the fuel purge tube to the fuel purge line
(U), the fuel tank vapor control valve hose (V) and the
fuel tank vapor/liquid separation valve tube (W). When
removing or installing the fuel feed hose, the fuel tank
unit, the fuel tank, or the fuel tank vapor recirculation
tube, or w h e n disconnecting or connecting the
quick-connect fittings, pay attention t o the f o l l o w i n g :
The fuel feed hoses, the fuel line, and the
quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful
not to damage t h e m during welding or other
heat-generating procedures.
The fuel feed hoses, the fuel line, and the
quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch
t h e m w i t h a shop towel that was used for w i p i n g
battery electrolyte. Replace t h e m if they came in
contact w i t h electrolyte or something similar.
W h e n connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, the fuel line, and the quick-connect fittings, be
careful not to bend or twist t h e m excessively. Replace
t h e m if they are damaged.
11-346
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be

reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed f r o m the line.
Replace the retainer w h e n :
replacing the fuel rail.
replacing the fuel feed line.
replacing the fuel p u m p .
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the gauge sending unit.
replacing the EVAP purge line.
replacing the EVAP canister.
replacing the fuel fill pipe.
replacing the fuel tank.
it has been removed f r o m the fuel line.
it is damaged.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same size
retainer w h e n the replacing the retainer.
Location
Manufacturer
Tokai DTR
Tokai DTR
Sanoh
Retainer
color
Blue
green
Blue
green
White
Tokai DTR
Orange
Tokai DTR
Orange
Tokai
Natural
Tokai
Blue
Tokai
Natural
Toyoda Gosei
North America
White
Line
diameter
8.0 m m
(0.31 in)
8.0 m m
(0.31 in)
9.5 m m
(0.37 in)
12 m m
(0.47 in)
9.5 m m
(0.37 in)
12 m m
(0.47 in)
9.5 m m
(0.37 in)
12 m m
(0.47 in)
8.0 m m
(0.31 in)
11-347
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
read the Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
(see page 11-346).
1. If equipped, remove the quick-connect fitting cover
f r o m the fuel line. Raise the cover (A) f r o m the fuel line
(B), and remove it as shown.

3. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt, and
clean t h e m if needed.
11-348
4. Place a rag or a shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting. Hold the connector (A) w i t h one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) w i t h the other hand to
release them f r o m the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
one.
5. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage.
If it is dirty, clean the connector, and dry it with the
compressed air.
If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter or the
fuel feed line.
(cont'd)
11-349
Fuel Supply System

Removal (cont'd)

Installation
6. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,

cover the disconnected connector and line ends w i t h
plastic bags (A).
NOTE: Before y o u w o r k on the fuel lines and fittings,

read the Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
(see page 11-346).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been

removed f r o m the line.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
Replace the retainer w h e n :

it has been removed f r o m the fuel line.
it is damaged.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the
retainer is damaged, or after:
removing the retainer f r o m the fuel line.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same

size retainer w h e n the replacing the retainer (see page
11-346).
11-350
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect

fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer (B) f r o m
the mating line.
(cont'd)
11-351
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
4. Align the quick-connect fittings w i t h the line (A), and
align the retainer locking tabs (B) w i t h the connector
grooves (C). Then press the quick-connect fittings
onto the line until both retainer tabs lock w i t h a
clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of
new engine oil on the line end.
5. When y o u are reconnect the connector with the old

retainer, make sure the connection is secure and the
tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check visually
and also by pulling the connector (B). When you are
replacing the fuel line w i t h a new one, make sure you
remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you confirm
the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the
fuel line connection is secure. If the connection is not
secure, the ring pull could break w h e n you try to
remove it.
Connection with new retainer
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line

Sanoh-made
Connection to new fuel line

Sanoh-made
Tokai-made
Reconnection to existing retainer
11-352
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn

the ignition switch to ON (II) (but do not operate the
starter motor). The fuel p u m p will run for about 2
seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this t w o
or three times, then checking for leaks.
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and

Installation
7. If equipped, install the quick-connect fitting cover. Set
the groove of the cover (A) on the fuel line (B) as
s h o w n , then install it. Make sure the cover is f i r m l y
locked in place.

Fuel Sender Wrench
07AAA-S0XA100
Removal
3. Pull the carpet (A) back out of way.
A
4. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the floor.

f
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).

6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) f r o m the fuel
tank unit.
(cont'd)
11-353
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Using the special t o o l , loosen the locknut (A).
Installation
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the fuel
tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit partially into
the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
Do not coat the base gasket w i t h oil.
2. Transfer the base gasket (A) f r o m the fuel tank unit to

the fuel tank.
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and the fuel tank
unit, then insert the fuel tank unit until it rest on t o p of
the base gasket.
NOTE: To prevent a fuel leak, check the base gasket,
visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
11-354
Fuel Pressure Regulator

Replacement
4. Using the special t o o l , tighten a new locknut (A) w i t h a
new locknut plate (B) to the specified torque.

2. Remove the cover (A).
NOTE:
Before tightening, make sure the marks (C) on the
fuel tank and the locknut.
After tightening, make sure the marks are still
aligned.
After installation, check the base gasket, visually or
by hand, to be sure it is not pinched.
3. Remove the bracket (A).
07AAA-S0XA100

6. Reconnect the quick-connect fitting to the fuel tank
unit.
7. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) (but do not operate the
starter motor). The fuel p u m p will run for about 2
seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this t w o
or three times, then check for fuel leaks.
8. Install the access panel on the floor.
9. Install the second r o w seat (see page 20-163).
4. Remove the clip (B).

5. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h
new O-rings (D). When installing the fuel tank unit,
align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank (see page
11-354).
NOTE:
Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use
any other oils or fluids.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the pressure
regulator replacement kit.
11-355
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Filter Replacement
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending

Unit Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel

pressure drops below the specified value (see page
11-343), after making sure that the fuel p u m p and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.

2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A)
f r o m the fuel tank unit (B).

2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:

When connecting the w i r e harness, make sure the
connection is secure and the connector (C) is firmly
locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make
sure the connection is secure. Be careful not to
bend or twist it excessively.
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:
When connecting the wire harness, make sure the
connection is secure and the connectors (B) are
f i r m l y locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not
to bend or twist it excessively.
new O-rings (D). When installing the fuel tank unit,
align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank (see page
11-354).
NOTE:
Coat the O-rings w i t h clean engine oil; do not use
any other type oils or fluids.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the fuel filter
replacement kit.
11-356
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. When

installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit
and the fuel tank (see page 11-354).
Fuel Tank Replacement

1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-343), then reinstall the fuel tank unit without connecting the fuel tank u n i t 4 P
connector and the fuel tank unit quick-connect fitting.
3. Remove the exhaust pipe (see page 9-8).
4. With VTM-4: Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-44).
5. Remove the EVAP canister cover (see step 2 on page 11-428).
6. Remove the fuel tank protector (A).
7. Disconnect the quick-connector fittings (B) and the hoses (C). Slide back the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull
to avoid damaging them.
8. Place a jack or other support under the fuel tank (D), then remove the strap bolts (E) and the straps (F).
9. Remove the fuel tank.
(cont'd)
11-357
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Tank Replacement (cont'd)
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation

1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-343).
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Remove the left rear wheel.
5. Remove the left rear inner fender (see page 20-227).
6. Disconnect the quick-connector fitting (A) and the fuel
fill tube (B) f r o m the fuel fill pipe (C). Slide back the
clamp, then twist the hose as y o u pull to avoid
damaging t h e m .
NOTE:
New fuel tanks have ring pull (A) at the fuel vapor
hose connector (B). W h e n y o u connect the hose
and confirm that the connection is secure, remove
the ring pull by pulling it d o w n .
Before connecting the fuel fill pipe and the
quick-connect fittings, check for dirt, and clean it if
needed, taking care not to damage the fuel fill pipe
and other parts.
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
7. Remove the fuel fill pipe (B).

11-358
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test

NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-338).
1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box before testing.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs (see page
22-334).
If no problem is f o u n d , go to step 3.
If DTC B1175 (see page 22-343) or B1176 (see page
22-344) is indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 w i t h the ignition
switch turned to ON (II). There should be battery
voltage.
If the voltage is OK, go to step 9.
If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- a short in the LT BLU wire to ground.
- an open in the LT BLU or LT GRN wire.

LT BLU *

5. Pull the carpet back out of the way.
LTGRN
1 2
3
6. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the floor.

f

B
10. Remove the fuel tank unit f r o m the fuel tank (see page
11-353).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
(cont'd)
11-359
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
(cont'd)
11. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 w i t h the float at E
(EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF
FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If y o u do not get the following readings, replace the
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-356).
1/2
LOW
E
F
214.2 m m 149.4 m m 50.8 m m 19.1 m m
(5.9 in)
(2.0 in)
(8.4 in)
(0.8 in)
Resistance
19 to 21 203.3 to 516.4 to 772 to 788
213.3
629
(0)
Float
Position
Terminal side of
male terminals
12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

13. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates F
w i t h the float at F.
If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate F,
replace the gauge control module.
If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom
of the gauge dial w h e n the ignition switch is in ACC
(I) and LOCK (0), regardless of the fuel level.
Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the
under -hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may
take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate
the correct fuel level.
11-360
Low Fuel Indicator Test

22-334).
If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the
gauge control module (see page 22-359).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-359).
Intake Air System

INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING

(IMT) ACTUATOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-249
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-371
Cleaning, page 11-372
AIR CLEANER
Element Inspection/
INTAKE AIR RESONATOR

11-361
Intake Air System

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1077: IMT Valve Stuck in High RPM
Position

11. Check for continuity between IMT actuator 5P
C11.

3. Do the IMT TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR

VCC6 (YEL/BLU)
Is the result OK?
\M7

IMT actuator and the P C M . H
VCC6 (YEL/BLU)
5. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.
7. Measure the voltage between IMT actuator 5P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
CONNECTOR C (49P)
23 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | 1 0 |
,l 1111PCM
12
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
30
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7 48|49|
22
24
/ / >< ><
VCC6 (YEL/BLU)
\E7
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S - G o to step 12,
NO-Go to step 8.
11-362
and the IMT actuator, then go to step 30.
12. Measure the voltage between IMT actuator 5P


connectorterminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
B19.

IMTM (WHT/BLK)
IMTM (WHT/BLK)
V /

.|1|2
11 12
22 23
29 30
|40|41
1
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 17.
IMTM (WHT/BLK)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26
28
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
42|/|/|45|46l/
>< ><
A*\
YES-Go to step 36.

(cont'd)
11-363
Intake Air System



C16.
J 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 98 1101
16 1718 19 20 21
11 12
25
26 27 28
22
24
30
3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38 39
1
|40|41 42|43|44|/|46|47 48|49|
/
/ ><
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
1
5)
><
IMT+
(WHT/BLU)

S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
TTT?
3j4|5
16 17|18 19
26
24
25
22
37
30
34
40141 42143144 | X I 46147
12
zimi
9 j 10
20 21
27 28
38 39
481491

and the IMT actuator, then go t o step 30.
NO-Go to step 22.
|6|7| 8
3
11 12
/ N 16 17 18 19
25
26
24
22
30
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 42 |43|44|/|46|47
,1 1 | 2
1
/
/ ><
9|10|
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
IMT
(WHT/RED)
NO-Go to step 23.
11-364

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 5 and PCM connectorterminal
C48.

connectorterminal No. 4 a n d PCM connectorterminal
C49.
1 2 3
1 2 3
' I M T + (WHT/BLU)

J 1 | 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
9|10|
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
/
26 27 28
i 2 2 3 0 2 4 3 2 3 3 23 45 3><
5 ^ 37 38 39
/
|40|41
48 49

(H)

J1|2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1101
421431441/] 46147
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
/
25
26 27 28
1 2 2 /3 0 2 4 3><
2 3 3 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
/
/
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7 4 8 | 4 <
I M T + (WHT/BLU)
I M T - (WHT/RED)
11 1 2
Is there
5 /
continuity?
11 1 2
YES-Go to step 24.
YES-Go to step 25.


(cont'd)
11-365
Intake Air System

25. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-374).
26. Move the IMT valve by hand.
(see page 11-7).
Does it move
smoothly?
YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
4-21), and repair the stuck valve. If needed, replace the
intake manifold (see page 9-2), then go to step 30.
27. Substitute a known-good IMT actuator (see page
11-374).
HDS.
YES-Replace the original IMT actuator, then go to

step 30.

indicated?

the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 35.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the IMT actuator
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
11-366
Is DTC P1077
indicated?

the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 40.
Is the result OK?
Is DTC P1077

PASSED?

comes on.
DTC P1078: IMT Valve Stuck in Low RPM

Position



HDS.
IMTM (WHT/BLK)
Is the result OK?
1 I 2 3|4|5|6|7|l.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
26
22 23 24
25
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3536 37
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
.1

IMT actuator and the PCM.
>< ><
9|10|
20 21
28
38 39
/|49|
5. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.

Is there
7. Check the IMT VALVE SW in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.

Is CLOSE
indicated?
continuity?
YES-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)
11-367
Intake Air System


C48.

2 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 | 8
11 12
16 71 19
24
25
22
26
37
30
3 2 3 3 34
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
1 5
9 hoi
20 21
27 28
38 39 1
48|49|
IMT+
(WHT/BLU)
IUZIP
5 /
IMT+
(WHT/BLU)
L
l< I I
8 9 10
J 1| 2 3 4 5 3
7
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
22
24
1
32 33 34 351/ 37 38 39
30
40 41 42 |43|44|/|46| 47 4 8 | 4 9 |
/
/ ><
/ /
><
I M T + (WHT/BLU)
===
1 T.
. h i 2 3 |4 |5 |6 | 7 | 8
11 12
/ I 1 5 16 17 18 19
24
22
25
26
30
32|33 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
9 10
YES-Go to step 18.

and the IMT actuator, then g o t o step 24.
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|1
IMT
(WHT/RED)
11-368
>


C49.
2 1 . Substitute a known-good IMT actuator (see page

11-374).
1
\ 4
/ (WHT/RED)


HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Replace the original IMT actuator, then go to
step 24.
NO-Go to step 32.

29. Hold the engine speed at 4,300 rpm for 3 seconds or

more, then let it idle.

Is DTC P1078
indicated?
19. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-374).

the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go to step 1.
20. Move the IMT valve by hand.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
Does it move
smoothly?
NO-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
4-21), and repair the stuck valve. If needed, replace the
intake manifold (see page 9-2), then go to step 24.
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1078 in the DTCs

PASSED?

(cont'd)
11-369
Intake Air System

32. Reconnect alf connectors.
(see page 11-7).
35. Hold the engine speed at 4,300 r p m for 3 seconds or
more, then let it idle.
Is DTC P1078
Indicated?

the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicated FAILED, check for poor
11-370
Throttle Body Test

Carbon Accumulation Check
Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been

reported o n , check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been

reported o n , check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).


3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If it

does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
page 11-226).

page 11-226).


5. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-372).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it is
not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-372).
11-371
Intake Air System

Throttle Body Cleaning
ACAUTION
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation

1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A).

body w h e n y o u turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, y o u will
activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air cleaner
is damaged, replace it (see page 11-372).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-375).
3. Clean off the carbon f r o m the throttle valve and inside
the throttle body w i t h a paper towel soaked in throttle
plate cleaner.
NOTE:
Always remove the throttle body to clean it.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
To avoid removing the m o l y b d e n u m coating, do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A).
Do not spray throttle plate cleaner directly on the
throttle body.
Use Honda genuine throttle plate cleaner.
2. Remove the harness clamps (B) and the bolts (C).

3. Loosen the band (D), then remove the air cleaner (E).
NOTE: W h e n tightening the screw of the hose band
(F), align the edge of the hose band (G) between the
marks (H) painted on the hose band.
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-375).

11-372
Air Cleaner Element

Inspection/Replacement
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A).
Intake Air Resonator

2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11 -372).
3. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-195).
4. Remove the seal (A).
^ A
B
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) f r o m the air

cleaner housing (C).
NOTE: Be careful w h e n removing the element, and do
not turn it upside d o w n . Debris f r o m the element may
fall into the MAF sensor/IAT sensor.
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging.
If it is damaged or clogged, replace it.
NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air
cleaner element.
4. Clean and remove any debris f r o m inside the air
cleaner housing.
5. Remove the bolts (B), then remove the intake air

resonator (C) f r o m the engine compartment.

If you did not replace the air cleaner element, this
procedure is complete.
If the maintenance minder required air cleaner
element replacement, reset the maintenance
minder (see page 3-8).
If the idle speed fluctuates, do the idle speed
inspection procedure, (see page 11-325)
11-373
Intake Air System

IMT Actuator Replacement
2. Disconnect the IMT actuator connector (A).
3. Remove the bolts (B) and the IMT actuator (C).

new O-ring (D).
11-374
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
ik C A U T I O N
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body w h e n y o u turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If y o u are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If y o u are removing the throttle body start at step
4.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS (TAC) TEST.
5. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
6. Remove the intake air duct (B).

7. Disconnect the throttle body connector (C).
8. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D).
9. Remove the throttle body (E).
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h a new gasket (F), then refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see
page 10-6).
NOTE: W h e n tightening the screw of the hose band (G), align the edge of the hose band (H) w i t h the mark (I) painted
on the hose band.
11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -326).
11-375

Substitution, page 11 -7
11-376
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC)

(BANK 2)
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Rear Bank Catalyst System
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
DTC P0430: Front Bank Catalyst System
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
6. Continue test driving until a result comes o n .

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 8.
NOTE:
If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0420 and/or P0430*, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0420 and/or
P0430*.
P0137, P0138, P0157, P0158: Secondary H02S
(Sensor 2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
Poor quality fuel can cause these DTCs.

9. Replace the WU-TWC:
For DTC P0420, replace the rear WU-TWC (Bank 1)
(see page 11-379).
For DTC P0430, replace the front WU-TWC (Bank 2)
(see page 11-380).


13. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, continually changing

the vehicle speed.
14. Check the CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 (B2)* in the


158F(70 C)
Is the condition OK?
Transmission in D
YES-Go to step 15.
Vehicle speed between 4575 m p h (72 120 km/h)

for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise control set
Vehicle speed between 5575 m p h (88120 km/h)
for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed). Repeat this three or more times
Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 m p h (88 km/h) for 5
minutes or more w i t h cruise control set
NO-Go to step 13 and recheck.

EXECUTING?

158F(70 C)
Transmission in D
Vehicle speed between 5575 m p h (88120 km/h)
for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed). Repeat this three or more times
Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 m p h (88 km/h) for
5 minutes or more with cruise control set
YES-Go to step 6.
16. Continue test driving until a result comes o n .
NO-lf the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to

step 4 and recheck. If the screen indicates PASSED,
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the
screen indicates FAILED, go to step 8 and recheck.

indicated?
YES-Check the fuel quality, then go to step 1.

NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-377

PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check the fuel
quality, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes o n . If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step
15.
11-378
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation

FRONT (Bank 2)
2. Remove the No. 2 ignition coil and the ignition coil heat insulator.
3. Remove front A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244) and front secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-245).
4. Remove the exhaust pipe A mounting nuts (front WU-TWC side) (see page 9-8).
5. Remove the EGR pipe (see page 11-394).
6. Remove the A/C condenser fan assembly (see page 10-13).
NOTE: Place an appropriate size piece of cardboard in front of the radiator. The cardboard protects the radiator from
damage when removing the warm up TWC.
7. Remove the front WU-TWC bracket, and carefully remove the front WU-TWC.
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
8. Carefully install the front WU-TWC with a new gasket and new self-locking nuts. Tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in
two or three steps.
(cont'd)
11-379

Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation (cont'd)
REAR (Bankl)
1. Remove rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244) and rear secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-245).
2. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-8), then remove the rear WU-TWC bracket.
3. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-20).
4. Carefully remove the rear WU-TWC.
5. Carefully install the rear WU-TWC with a new gasket and new self-locking nuts. Tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in
two or three steps.
11-380
Under-floor TWC Removal/Installation

2. Remove the exhaust pipe hangers (A).
3. Remove the under-floor TWC (B).

4. Remove the converter covers (C).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with
new gaskets (D) and new self-locking nuts (E).
11-381
EGR System
11-382
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0400: EGR System Leak Detected

6. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-394).
1. Check for a loose or damaged EGR pipe.

Is the EGR pipe OK?
NO-Reconnect or repair the EGR pipe (see page
3. Test drive under these conditions:
158F(70 C)
Transmission in D

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Vehicle speed at 25 m p h (40 km/h) for 5 minutes or
more
Maintain the vehicle speed at 32 m p h (50 km/h) and
engine speed between 1,450 3,000 r p m for 1
minute or more w i t h cruise control set
Is DTC P0400
Vehicle speed at 25 m p h (40 km/h) for 5 minutes or

more
Maintain the vehicle speed at 32 mph (50 km/h) and
engine speed between 1,450 3,000 rpm for 1
minute or more w i t h cruise control set
FAILED?
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
exhaust gas leakage between the EGR pipe and the
EGR valve. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 3 and recheck.
indicated?
YES-Check for leakage between the EGR pipe and the

EGR valve, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 12.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for leakage
between the EGR pipe and the EGR valve, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 10.
11-383
EGR System
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow



11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -326).

158F(70 C)
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the

HDS.

120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
Transmission in D
During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully

closed) for 5 seconds
Is the result OK?


NO-Go to step 7.
Is DTC P0401
indicated?

158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D

the EGR valve and the PCM. If the connections are OK,
go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 14.

FAILED?
YES-Clean the intake manifold EGR port (see page

11-394) and EGR pipe (see page 11-394) w i t h throttle
plate cleaner. Also, clean the passage inside the E G R
valve w i t h throttle plate cleaner, then go to step 9.
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and
the PCM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 5 and recheck.
11-384
PASSED?

the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 12.
(see page 11-7).
158 F (70 C)
DTC P0404: EGR Valve Circuit

Transmission in D




Is DTC P0401
indicated?

the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
g o t o step 16. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1.
Is the result OK?

Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve with
throttle plate c l e a n e r .
NO-Go to step 5.
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the

HDS.
PASSED?

known-good PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 16.

6. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
7. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 2 and
No.3.
EGR V A L V E 5P CONNECTOR
w
3
1 2
SG2
EGRP
1
Is there 100 kO or more?

YES-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
11-385
EGR System
8. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
No. 4.

EGRP
VCC2
4SH
Is there 100 kQ or more?
YES-Go to step 25.

and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 5P connector
NO-Go to step 13.

C10and EGR valve 5P connectorterminal No. 1.
1 2 3 4 5
PG (BLK)
EGR (BLU/RED)
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) EGR (BLU/RED)

ll
1|
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 9 110
JJj.
YES-Go to step 10.
16 1 7 | 1 8 1 9 2 0
12
25
26 27 28
30 / J 3 2 | 3 3 34
37 38 39
22
24
| 4 0 | 4 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 / 1 4 6 1 4 7 481491
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve

YES-Go to step 14.

11-386
14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-394).
15. Clean any carbon build-up inside the EGR valve w i t h

throttle plate cleaner.
(see page 11-7).

17. Reconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
18. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).

HDS.

HDS.
Is the result OK?

YES-Go to step 32.


3 1 . Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.

the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
connections and terminals are OK, go to step 33.
11-387
EGR System
DTC P0406: EGR Valve Position Sensor Circuit
High Voltage

C16 and EGR valve 5P connectorterminal No. 3.

1 2
S G 2 (GRN/YEL) J W i r e side of female terminals

@
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

Is 4.88 V or more
3 4
Indicated?
YES-Go t o step 3.
EGR valve and the P C M . H

6. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
YES-Go to step 18.
and the PCM (C16), then go t o step 13.
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)


Is DTC P0406
indicated?
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
11-388

the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P2413: EGR System Malfunction
(see page 11-7).


Is DTC P0406
Indicated?


HDS.
Is the result OK?
EGR valve and the P C M . B
NO-Go to step 5.
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-389
EGR System
D T C
11. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector


1 2
3 4
5
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 98 10
1 2
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
22
1
1
30
3 2 3 3 34 3 5 L > 37 38 39
|40|41 42|43|4<1 l/l 4614748|49|
l_L_^J
EGRP (WHT/BLK)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 12.


and the EGR valve, then go t o step 42.

C12 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal No. 4.
NO-Go to step 20.
1 2 3 4 5
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES-Go to step 49.
and the PCM (C12), then go to step 42.
11-390


23. A t the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
No. 3.

1 2
SG2
EGRP
EGRP (WHT/BLK)
YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Go to step 24.

24. A t the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
No. 4.
^>
1 2
EGRP
5
VCC2

(cont'd)
11-391
EGR System
C10 anp! body g r o u n d .
27. Check for continuity between EGR valve 5P connector

E G R V A L V E 5P CONNECTOR

EGR (BLU/RED)
J 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |1('I
/
/ ><
/ /
PG (BLK)
19 20 21
11 12
16
26 27 28
22
24
25
1
30
3233 34 35\y 37 38 39
|40|41 42143144
46147 48|49|
><

YES-Go to step 28.


28. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).

29. A t the EGR valve side, connect the battery positive

terminal to EGR valve 5P connectorterminal No. 1
w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
EGR (BLU/RED)
/N
1 2
E G R (BLU/RED)
EGR
PG
4 |5|6 |7|8
12
15|16|17|18J19 20 21
26 27 28
22
24
25
32|33|34[35|X|37 38 39
30
40|41 42143144 | X | 46 j 47 48149
BATTERY
30. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 5P connector
terminal No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
YES-Go to step 27.
Does the engine stall?

YES-Go to step 48.
11-392
32. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-394).
33. Clean any carbon build-up inside the EGR valve w i t h

throttle plate cleaner.
(see page 11-7).

HDS.

HDS.
Is DTC P2413
indicated?

go to step 5 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is the result OK?

YES-Go to step 47.

DTCs troubleshooting.B
4 1 . Replace the EGR valve (see page 11 -394).

HDS.
Is DTC P2413
indicated?

the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated D T C s troubleshooting.B
11-393
EGR System
EGR Valve Replacement
EGR Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the EGR pipe m o u n t i n g bolts (A).
2. Disconnect the EGR 5P valve connector (A).

22 N m

4. Remove the EGR pipe mounting nuts (A) and the EGR
pipe (B).
3. Remove the EGR valve (B).

new gasket (C).

new gaskets (C).
11-394
PCV System
11-395
PCV System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake A i r System Leak
NOTE:
If DTC P0443 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P2279,

P2279.
PCV valve

Is DTC P2279
indicated?
YES-Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the

PCV hose, the purge (PCS) line, the throttle body, the
intake manifold, the brake booster, and the brake
booster hose, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 7.
PCV hose

MENU with the HDS.
Purge (PCS) line

Throttle body
Intake manifold

Brake booster
Brake booster hose
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair or replace any damaged part(s), then go to
step 4.
o n , then let it idle 1 minute.
FAILED?
YES-Check the camshaft t i m i n g (see page 6-18), then

go to step 4.
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION
, go to step 2 and recheck.
11-396
PASSED?
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the

screen indicates EXECUTIHG or OUT OF CONDITION,
PCV Valve Inspection
PCV Valve Replacement
2. Check the PCV valve (A), the hoses (B), and the
connections for leaks or restrictions.
2. Remove the bolt (A).
3. Remove the PCV valve (B).

3. At idle, listen to the PCV valve (A) w i t h a stethoscope
as y o u lightly pinch the PCV hose (B) with your fingers
or pliers several times. Each t i m e the hose is pinched,
the valve should click.
If there is no clicking s o u n d , check the PCV valve
g r o m m e t for cracks or damage. If the g r o m m e t is OK,
replace the PCV valve (see page 11-397) and recheck.
NOTE: Do not to spill oil on the hot exhaust manifold.

NOTE:
When installing a new PCV valve, make sure the
O-rings (C) are in place.
W h e n installing a used PCV valve, use new O-rings.
11-397
EVAP System
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

CANISTER V E N T S H U T V A L V E
11-398
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
Replacement, page 11 -428
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve Circuit
Malfunction

Is there
vacuum?
YES-Go to step 8.
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A

or equivalent, commercially available
NO-Go to step 14.


9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P

connector.
10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground.

EVAP CANISTER P U R G E V A L V E 2P CONNECTOR

Is DTC P0443
P C S (RED/YEL)
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
EVAP canister purge valve and the P C M . B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and allow the

engine to cool to below 140 F (60 C).
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the purge joint
(B) in the engine compartment, and connect a vacuum
pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to the hose.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
11-399
EVAP System
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P

connector.
17. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

P C S (RED/YEL)
IG1 (BLK/YEL)

YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to
step 24.
NO-Go to step 30.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the No. 3 ACG (10 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 24.
11-400

C40 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
terminal No. 1.
22. At the valve side, measure the resistance between

EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals No.
1 and No. 2.
E V A P CANISTER P U R G E V A L V E 2P CONNECTOR
1
I P C S (RED/YEL)
12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
1
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
30
32|33 34 35C> 37 38 39
|40|41 421431441/146147 4 8 | 4 9 |
.h
//
><
P C S (RED/YEL)
Is there about 2326 Q at room

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 22.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to
step 24.
temperature?
YES-Go to step 30.

23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-430).
26. Reset the PCM w i t h the H D S .
(cont'd)
11-401
EVAP System
Is DTC P0443
Is DTC P0443
indicated?

the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 29.
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF CONDITION,
(see page 11-7).
11-402
indicated?

the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 34.
PASSED?

purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes o n .
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit

10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.

NOTE:
Is DTC P0451


the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

P0451.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 5.
indicated?
NO-Go to step 12.

MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and

the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-429).
11-403
EVAP System
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and any

on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.


13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 0.3 V

or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 14.

HDS.
Is about7.3 kPa (-2.16
or less indicated?
14. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P

In.Hg, -55 mmHg), or 0.3 V

FTP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 7.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
VCC7(LTBLU)

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 10.

11-404
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 15.
2 1 . J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to

23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P

connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
FTP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
FTP (LT GRN)
V C C 7 (LT BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE

PCM CONNECTOR A ( 4 9 P )
and the FTP sensor, then go t o step 26.
_| 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | 1 0 |
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
25
26 27 28 i
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 / I / I 4 4 I / I 4 * ! / 48|49|
/
/
>< ><
V C C 7 (LT BLU)
YES-Go t o step 32.
and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-405
EVAP System
25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-429).
(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P0452
indicated?

34. Start the engine and let it idle.

Is DTC P0452
indicated?

the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.

11-406
PASSED?
PASSED?
comes o n .
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage

12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and


FTP (LT GRN)
S G 7 (BLK)

J U M P E R WIRE
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 Vor more

indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
HDS.
Isabout7.3kPa(2.16in.Hg,
indicated?

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 10.

failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for poor
55mmHg),
or4.7
Vormore
YES-Go to step 15.

15. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P
V C C 7 (LT BLU)
S G 7 (BLK)
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Is there about 5 V?
(cont'd)
11-407
EVAP System

body g r o u n d w i t h a jumper wire.

1
S G 7 (BLK)
FTP (LT GRN)
J U M P E R WIRE
J U M P E R WIRE

Ii

il
FIT
3 4 5 6 7
9 110
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28
22
2 4 ^ 25
29 30 31 32J33 34 35|36 37 38|39
48149
l40|41pl/144|/|46
J I2
1
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13 14 15 16
19 20 21
/ 24
1 3 26
25
27 28
/ 31 ><
><
3233 34 3536 37 38 39
11
22
1
29 30
|40|41
71
X | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | X 48|19|
S G 7 (BLK)
FTP (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 34.
YES-Go to step 34.


11-408
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11 -429).
(see page 11-7).

Is DTC P0453
indicated?


Is DTC P0453
indicated?

the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33.

PASSED?

PASSED?

the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
comes on.
11-409
EVAP System
DTC P0455: EVAP System Large Leak
Detected
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak

Detected
INOTICEI
The fuel system is designed to allow specified m a x i m u m
vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not deviate f r o m
the vacuum and pressure tests as indicated in these
procedures. Excessive pressure/ vacuum w o u l d damage
the EVAP components or cause eventual fuel tank
failure.

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 030 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
NOTE:
Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that creates greater
pressure/vacuum. The o p t i m u m condition for testing
is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible, to assist
in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel t o the tank
(as long as it will not fill the tank), just before starting
these procedures.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN TO
CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then it
clicks.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go t o step 29.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill
pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught under the
cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe (see
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Is the result OK?
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or the
EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the P C M . H
NO-Go to step 6.
11-410

7. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel
tank vapor recirculation tube.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) (A) f r o m

the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge,
030 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as s h o w n .
Is the tube OK?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube, then
go to step 29.
If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page 11 -357),
then go to step 29.
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A)
and fresh air hose (B) f r o m the EVAP canister (C), and
plug the EVAP canister port (D).

11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads 1.90 V
( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the specified vacuum.
If you exceed the vacuum, the FTP sensor can be
damaged.
13. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
14. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
1 minute w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.Hg,
2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-411
EVAP System
15. Reconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) to the EVAP
canister purge valve.
16. Disconnect the vacuum hose (EVAP canister side) (A)
f r o m the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, to
the vacuum hose as s h o w n .
19. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge

line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP canister
purge valve, or a leaking EVAP canister.
Is the line and EVAP canister OK?
YES-Replace these parts, then go to step 28:
FTP sensor O-ring
EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
EVAP canister
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge line,
then go to step 28.
20. Reconnect the fresh air hose (A) to the EVAP canister
(B).
17. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads 1.90 V
( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).
If y o u exceed the vacuum, the FTP sensor can be
damaged.
I minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (OA in.Hg,
2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
I I -430), then go to step 28.
11-412
2 1 . Reconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) to the EVAP

canister purge valve.
26. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h

the HDS.
22. Disconnect the vacuum hose (EVAP canister side) (A)

f r o m the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, to
the vacuum hose as shown.
27. Check these parts for looseness or damage:

Fuel fill pipe
Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK?
YES-Check the fuel tank unit base gasket (see page
11 -353), and check the fuel tank, then go to step 28.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go to
step 28.
28. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . B
23. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h

the HDS.
24. Apply vacuum to the EVAP canoster until the FTP
reads 1.90 V ( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).

the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the
EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

If you execeed the v a c u u m , the FTP sensor can be
damaged.
1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V(0.1 in.Hg,
2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see
11-413
EVAP System
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel
Fill Cap Loose or Missing


MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?

CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's t i g h t then it
clicks.
tightened?

FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM.B
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve f r o m the

EVAP canister (see page 11-430).
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
A
cap?
NO-Go to step 3.
Does the valve
operate?
YES-Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent

tube, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 12.
11-414

13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see page
11-430).
Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . H
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve.
DTC P0496: EVAP System High Purge Flow

Detected
Is the result OK?
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP
canister vent shut valve, and the P C M . H
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page

11-430).


Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e .


Is the result OK?

YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e d
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the
to step 1.
11-415
EVAP System
DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow
Detected
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 - 4 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
3. Select EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Is the result OK?
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, and the
PCM.B
5. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
the EVAP canister purge line between the throttle
body and the EVAP canister.
1$ the line OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge line,
then go to step 24.
11-416
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the EVAP

canister purge valve (B).
7. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) f r o m the purge line

(at the EVAP canister side), then connect a T-fitting (B)
f r o m the vacuum gauge, and connect the v a c u u m
pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to the hose as s h o w n .
11. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h

the HDS.
12. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the EVAP
canister purge valve (B). Connect a T-fitting (C) f r o m
the vacuum gauge, and connect the vacuum
pump/gauge, and the EVAP canister purge valve as
shown.

9. A p p l y about 2 kPa (0.6 in. Hg, 15 m m H g ) of v a c u u m to
the hose.
the HDS.
Does the vacuum release
YES-Go to step 15.
immedintely?
13. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 m m H g ) of vacuum to

the purge hose.
the HDS.
immediately?
YES-Check for a blockage in the vacuum hose

between the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
canister, then go to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-417
EVAP System
15. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge to the vacuum
hose (A) as s h o w n .
19. Connect a T-fitting (A) f r o m the vacuum pump/gauge,

and the v a c u u m p u m p t o the FTP sensor (B) as
shown.

Is there
vacuum?
YES-Go t o step 17.

NO-Check for blockage in the v a c u u m hose between
the EVAP canister purge valve and the intake
manifold, then go to step 24.
18. Remove the FTP sensor w i t h its connector connected
(see page 11-429).

2 1 . Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
22. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 m m H g ) of
vacuum to the hose.
HDS.
Does the value
change?
YES-Check for debris or a blockage at the EVAP

canister port, then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-429), then
go t o step 24.
11-418

DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

Circuit Low Voltage
Is the result OK?

Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is c o m p l e t e . B
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, and
Is DTC P0498
indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
the HDS.
Is DTC P0498
indicated?
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the P C M . B
(cont'd)
11-419
EVAP System
connector.
11. At the valve side, measure the resistance between

EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.
EVAP CANISTER V E N T S H U T V A L V E 2P CONNECTOR
9. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister vent shut

valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
E V A P CANISTER V E N T S H U T V A L V E 2P CONNECTOR
IG1 (PNK)
Is there about 2530 Q at room
temperature?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 17.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 10.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the EVAP

canister vent shut valve and the PGM-FI subrelay,
then go to step 18.

3
11
13
24
22
29 30 31
4C 41 / l
J1|2
1
| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
26 27 28 i
25
3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
/ l 4 4 1 / | 4 6 1 / 48|49|
/ X
><
VSV(LTGRN)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go to
step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
11-420
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector

terminal No. 1 to body g r o u n d w i t h a jumper wire.
17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see page
11-430).
EVAP CANISTER V E N T S H U T V A L V E 2P CONNECTOR

V S V (LT GRN)
J U M P E R WIRE

the HDS.
Is DTC P0498
indicated?

the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.


.
1|2
11
22
1
2 3 30
|4C 41
3 |4 |5 |6 | 7
9|10|
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/ 24
/ 31
>< 3425 35><36 3726 3827 3928
3233
i
i
48|49|
V S V (LT GRN)
PASSED?

vent shut valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22.
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go to
step 18.
(cont'd)
11-421
EVAP System
(see page 11-7).
27. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is DTC P0498
indicated?

the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 29.
MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
27.

the HDS.
Is DTC P0499
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the P C M . B
(see page 11-7).
the HDS.
Is DTC P0499
indicated?

the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
11-422

MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?

or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
g o t o step 6. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Circuit

Stuck Closed Malfunction
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
HDS.
Is it between 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (0.2 and 0.2 in.Hg,
5 and 5 mmHg), or2.4 and2.6 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 18.
without load (in P on N) until the radiator fan comes
MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 11.

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, the
EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM. Also
check for a blockage in the vent hoses and the drain
joint. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes o n .
(cont'd)
11-423
EVAP System
18. Disconnect the air tube (A) f r o m the FTP sensor (B).

13. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve f r o m the
EVAP canister (see page 11-430).
14. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
the HDS.
17. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
A

HDS.
Is it between - 0 . 6 7 and 0.67 kPa (-0.2
- 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
and 0.2 in.Hg,
YES-Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air tube

or the vent, then go to step 24.
Does the valve
operate?
YES-Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister, the

vent hoses, and the drain joint, then install the EVAP
canister vent shut valve, and go to step 24.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see
11-424
2 1 . Remove the FTP sensor (A) f r o m the EVAP canister

w i t h its connector connected (see page 11-429).


indicated?

NO-Go to step 28.
P2422 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?


HDS.
Is it between -0.67 and 0.67 kPa (-0.2
-5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, the
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
and 0.2 in.Hg,
YES-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP canister

and the FTP sensor port, then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-429), then
go to step 24.
11-425
EVAP System
Fuel Cap Warning Message System

Troubleshooting
DTC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow

Malfunction

Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 04 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
NOTE:
If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
troubleshooting for DTC P0496 and P0497 using the
freeze data for P145C.
If DTC P0497 and P145C are stored at the same t i m e ,
check for a poor connection, a blockage, or damage at
the EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the EVAP canister, or a stuck
closed EVAP canister purge valve.
If any of DTCs listed below are indicated at the same
t i m e as DTC P145C, troubleshoot those DTCs first,
then recheck for P145C.
P0496, P0497: EVAP system purge f l o w
Do this procedure if the fuel fill cap warning message

comes on frequenty, or if the message does not go off
after fuel fill is cap tightened and the vehicle is driven
several days.
CLICK). It should turn 1/4 after it's tight, then it clicks.
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 12.
cap?
11-426
3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.

o n , then let it idle for 1 minute.
6. Test-drive at 45 m p h (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel fill cap warning message
come on?
YES-Go to step 7.
time.B
8. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) f r o m the EVAP
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
the connect a T-fitting (C) f r o m the vacuum gauge,
and connect the v a c u u m pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to
the EVAP canister purge valve as shown.
10. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 m m H g ) of vacuum to

the hose.
11. Select the EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
immediately?
YES-Check for a blockage in the vacuum hose/line

between the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
canister, then go t o step 12.
11-430), then g o t o step 12.
16. Test-drive at 45 m p h (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel fill cap warning message
come on?

NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . H
11-427
EVAP System
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle o n a lift.
2. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A).
3. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A) (see page

11-346), the hoses (B), the EVAP canister vent shut
valve connector (C), and the FTP sensor connector (D),
then remove the harness clamps.
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
E
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Remove the bolts (E).

5. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (F).
11-428
FTP Sensor Replacement

6. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) and the
FTP sensor (B) f r o m the canister (C).

2. Remove the EVAP canister cover (see step 2 on page
11-428).
C
7. Reassemble the EVAP canister vent shut valve and

the FTP sensor onto the EVAP canister with new
O-rings (D) and a new retainer (E).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings w i t h oil.
3. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A).

4. Disconnect the hose (B), and remove the FTP sensor
(C).

new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring w i t h oil.
11-429
EVAP System
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A) and the EVAP canister purge

valve 2P connector (B).
2. Remove the EVAP canister cover (see step 2 on page

11-428).
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve
connector (A).
4. Remove the cap (B).
2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve and the

bracket (C).
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (A) f r o m the
bracket (B).
5. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (C).

new O-rings (D) and a new cap.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings w i t h oil.
3.5 N-m
(0.35 k g f m ,
2.5 Ibfft)
11-430
Transaxle
Automatic Transmission
14-1
Rear Differential
15-1
Driveline/Axle
16-1
<2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is

required)
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead t o personal
Transaxle
Special T o o l s
14-2
General T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n . 1 4 - 5
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
14-10
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
14-14
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n Index
14-31
System Description
14-32
14-86
Road Test
14-177
Stall S p e e d Test
14-179
Pressure Test
14-180
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e Test,
R e p l a c e m e n t , a n d Shift S o l e n o i d
W i r e Harness R e p l a c e m e n t
14-184
A / T Clutch Pressure C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d
V a l v e A Test
14-188
V a l v e B Test
14-191
Valve A and B Replacement
14-194
V a l v e C Test
14-196
Valve C Replacement
14-199
I n p u t Shaft ( M a i n s h a f t ) S p e e d S e n s o r
Replacement
14-201
O u t p u t Shaft (Countershaft) S p e e d
Sensor Replacement
14-202
2 n d C l u t c h T r a n s m i s s i o n Fluid
Pressure S w i t c h R e p l a c e m e n t
14-203
3 r d C l u t c h T r a n s m i s s i o n Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement
14-204
4 t h Clutch T r a n s m i s s i o n Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement
14-205
ATF Temperature Sensor
Replacement
14-206
A T F Level Check
14-207
ATF Replacement
14-209
T r a n s f e r A s s e m b l y Fluid R e p l a c e m e n t . 14-211
T r a n s f e r A s s e m b l y Inspection
14-212
Transfer Assembly Removal
14-213
T r a n s f e r A s s e m b l y Installation
14-215
T r a n s f e r Breather Hose R e p l a c e m e n t . . 14-217
Transmission Removal
14-218
Drive Plate R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n . . . 14-230
T r a n s m i s s i o n Installation
14-230
A T F Cooler C l e a n i n g
14-242
A T F Cooler Hose R e p l a c e m e n t
14-245
A T F Cooler R e p l a c e m e n t
14-246
S h i f t Lever R e m o v a l
14-247
S h i f t Lever Installation
14-248
Shift Lever D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y . . 14-249
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket
Assembly Replacement
14-250
S h i f t Lever K n o b R e p l a c e m e n t
14-253
Shift Cable R e p l a c e m e n t
14-254
Shift Cable A d j u s t m e n t
14-257
A/T Gear Position Indicator

Circuit D i a g r a m
T r a n s m i s s i o n Range S w i t c h Test
T r a n s m i s s i o n Range S w i t c h
Replacement
A / T Gear Position Indicator Panel L i g h t
Harness R e p l a c e m e n t
A / T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Replacement
D3 S w i t c h Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
D3 S w i t c h Test
14-261
14-262
14-263
14-264
14-266
14-268
14-271
14-273
A/T Interlock System

Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
Shift Lock S o l e n o i d Test
Shift Lock S o l e n o i d R e p l a c e m e n t
Shift Lock S t o p / S h i f t Lock S t o p C u s h i o n
Replacement
Park Pin S w i t c h R e p l a c e m e n t
14-274
14-275
14-276
14-279
14-279
14-282
14-284
Transmission Disassembly
14-287
Transmission Housing
Reverse Idler Gear
Reverse Idler Gear
Disassembly/Inspection/
Reassembly
S e c o n d a r y Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
Removal
S e c o n d a r y Shaft A T F Feed Pipe Cap
Installation
S e c o n d a r y Shaft A T F Feed Pipe Cap,
Feed Pipe R e p l a c e m e n t
A T F Filter
Removal/lnspection/lnstallation
M a i n s h a f t Bearing R e m o v a l
M a i n s h a f t Bearing Installation
I n t e r m e d i a r y Shaft B e a r i n g
Replacement
Park Lever Shaft B e a r i n g R e p l a c e m e n t .
Selector C o n t r o l Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Selector C o n t r o l Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement
14-293
14-293
14-294
14-294
14-295
14-295
14-296
14-296
14-297
14-297
14-298
14-298
Valve Body
V a l v e B o d y Repair
V a l v e B o d y V a l v e Installation
Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly
ATF Pump Inspection
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly
14-299
14-300
14-301
14-302
14-303
Regulator Valve Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,

Inspection, and R e a s s e m b l y
Accumulator Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,
....
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and
Installation
14-304
14-305
14-306
Torque Converter Housing

Mainshaft Bearing and Oil S e a l
Replacement
Countershaft Bearing R e p l a c e m e n t . . . .
S e c o n d a r y Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Intermediary Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Park Lever Shaft Bearing R e p l a c e m e n t .
14-307
14-308
14-309
14-311
14-312
Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft D i s a s s e m b l y , Inspection,
and R e a s s e m b l y
Mainshaft 4 t h G e a r Replacement
Countershaft D i s a s s e m b l y
Countershaft Idler G e a r and 4 t h G e a r
Axial Clearance Inspection
Countershaft R e a s s e m b l y
S e c o n d a r y Shaft D i s a s s e m b l y
S e c o n d a r y Shaft 1 st G e a r Axial
Clearance Inspection
1st G e a r O n e - w a y Clutch Inspection . . .
1st Clutch Hub Replacement
S e c o n d a r y Shaft R e a s s e m b l y
S e c o n d a r y Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment
..
Intermediary Shaft D i s a s s e m b l y ,
Intermediary Shaft 4 t h G e a r R e m o v a l . .
intermediary Shaft 4 t h G e a r
Installation
Intermediary Shaft 3 r d G e a r Axial
Clearance Inspection
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment
Clutch D i s a s s e m b l y
Clutch Inspection
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference
Inspection
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Clutch R e a s s e m b l y
14-313
14-314
14-315
14-317
14-319
14-321
14-324
14-326
14-326
14-327
14-330
14-332
14-333
14-333
14-334
14-336
14-337
14-341
14-342
14-343
14-347
Transmission Reassembly
14-352
A/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
Differential Carrier, Final Driven G e a r ,
and Transfer Drive G e a r
Replacement
Carrier Bearing Replacement
14-364
14-366
14-367
14-368
Oil S e a l Replacement
14-369
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement
14-370
Carrier Bearing Preload I n s p e c t i o n . . . . 14-372
Transfer Output Shaft

Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Oil S e a l Replacement
T r a n s m i s s i o n Housing Bearing
Replacement
Transfer Output Shaft Installation
Height Inspection/Adjustment
14-375
14-376
14-376
14-377
14-378
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
Disassembly
Transfer Hypoid Drive G e a r Bearing
Replacement
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear)
Bearing Removal/Installation
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller
Bearing Outer Race R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing
Outer Race Removal/Installation
Transfer Cover Oil S e a l R e p l a c e m e n t . .
Reassembly
14-379
14-380
14-382
14-383
14-384
14-385
14-386
14-387
Special Tools
Description
Tool Number
Ref.No.
S u b f r a m e Alignment Pin
Oty
1
070AJ-0020101
Preload Inspection Tool
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
A / T Oil Pressure G a u g e S e t
07736-A01000B
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 m m
07746-0010200
Attachment, 37 x 40 m m
07746-0010300
Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 m m
07746-0010400
07746-0010500
07746-0010600
07746-001A800
07746-0030100
Driver Handle, 40 m m I.D.
07746-0030300
Driver Handle, 30 m m I.D.
07749-0010000
07936-16601 OA
Bearing R e m o v e r Shaft S e t , 12 m m
07936-3710100
R e m o v e r Handle
07936-371020A
Slide H a m m e r
07936-3710600
Bearing R e m o v e r Shaft
07936-8890300
Bearing R e m o v e r Shaft S e t , 30 m m
07936-GE0A000
Bearing R e m o v e r , 10 m m
07947-6340500
Driver Attachment, 43.5 m m
07GAB-PF50101
Mainshaft Holder
070AG-SJAA10S
07GAD-PG40100
Oil S e a l Driver Attachment
07GAD-SD40101
07HAD-SG00100
Attachment, 83 m m
07JAD-PH80101
Oil S e a l Driver Attachment
07JAD-SH30100
Attachment, 65 m m
07LAD-PW50601
07LAE-PX40000
Clutch S p r i n g C o m p r e s s o r S e t
07MAD-PR90100
07MAF-SP0011A
T a p e r e d Bearing R a c e Installer A
07MAF-SP0013A
Installer Shaft
07MAJ-PY4011A
A / T P r e s s u r e H o s e , 2,210 m m
07MAJ-PY40120
A / T P r e s s u r e Adapter
07NAD-PX40100
1
1
07XAA-002010A
W r e n c h , 40 x 42 m m
07XAB-001A101
Flange Holder
07ZAE-PRP0100
Clutch C o m p r e s s o r Attachment
Must be u s e d with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide h a m m e r .
14-2
(D
(cont'd)
14-3
14-4

How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
W h e n the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (B) will usually
blink.
B
If the D indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

has been reported o n , or if a driveability problem is
suspected, f o l l o w this procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the HDC
communicates w i t h the PCM. If it does not, go t o the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226).
3. Select A/T system, and observe the DTC in the DTCs
MENU on the HDS screen.
4. Record the freeze data and on-board snapshots for all
fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
5. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel
and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
6. Clear the DTC and the data.
W h e n the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected

to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard, it will indicate the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) w h e n the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same

conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and
then recheck for the DTC. If the A/T DTC returns, go to
the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. If the DTC does
not return, there was an intermittent problem within
the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the
circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some s y m p t o m s will not set DTCs or cause the D
indicator to blink. If the MIL was reported ON or the D
indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the vehicle
has an abnormal s y m p t o m , and there are no DTCs
stored, do the s y m p t o m troubleshooting. Check the list
of probable cause(s) for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence
listed, until y o u find the problem.
(cont'd)
14-5
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode
(retrieving the flash codes)
NOTE: The preferred method is t o use the HDS to
retrieve the DTCs.
W h e n the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control
module (B) will usually blink.
B
If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same t i m e ,

or if a driveability problem is suspected, f o l l o w this
procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
page 11 -226). Select SCS mode, then observe the D
indicator in the gauge control module. Codes 1
through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks.
Code 10 and above are indicated by a series of long
and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short
blinks. A d d the long and short blinks together to
determine the code.
Example: DTC P0705(5)
Short blinks (five)
^
ON
OFF
W h e n the D indicator has been reported o n , connect the

HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select SCS
m o d e , then the D indicator w i l l indicate (blink) the DTC.
Example: DTC P0717(15)

Long blink (one) Short blinks (five)
~*
ON
OFF
10
15
4. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.

5. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel
and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
6. Clear the DTC and the data.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same
conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and
then recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to
the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent
problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and
terminals in the circuit are tight.
14-6
00
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Connectors
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for about 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0). J u m p i n g the SCS line after turning
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function.
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, w i t h o u t
j u m p i n g the SCS line first, can damage the PCM.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to a

commercially available digital multimeter (B), and
connect the other side of the patch cord terminals (C)
to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona
Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).

6. Gently insert the pin probe (male) into the terminal

test port f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the tips
into the terminals.
INOTICEI
For accurate results, always use the pin probe
(male).
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do
not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or
other substitutes as they can damage the terminals.
Damaged terminals cause a poor connection, and
an incorrect measurement.
identification.
Do not puncture the insulation o n a wire. Punctures

can cause poor or intermittent electrical
connections.
4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the PCM

connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the
terminal y o u need to check.
(cont'd)
14-7
Clear A/T DTCs Procedures
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard.

NOTE: Reset the PCM/TCM w i t h the HDS while the
engine is stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
5. Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, and
w a r m it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).

3. Make sure the HDS communications w i t h the PCM. If
it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
page 11-226).
4. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each
DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to
see if a repair was successfully completed. The results of
diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: The on-board diagnosis has successfully
completed.
FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has completed but
failed.
NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
14-8
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the

vehicle for several minutes at speeds over
31 m p h (50 km/h) or under the same conditions as
those indicated by the freeze data.
How to Update the PCM

Refer to How to Update the PCM. (see page 11-249)
PCM/TCM Reset
NOTE: To reset the PCM/TCM, initialize only the
automatic transmission m e m o r y stored in the PCM or
the TCM.
1. Sleet the A/T system w i t h the HDS.
2. Reset the PCM/TCM w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for 30
records.
Substitute the PCM

Refer to Substituting the PCM (see page 11-7).
Failure Reproduction Technique

Make sure to f o l l o w these points while the vehicle is
raised on a lift for the test-drive.
Disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF button.
VSA DTCs may come on w h e n test-driving on a lift. If
the VSA DTC(s) come o n , clear the DTC(s) w i t h the
HDS.
Self-diagnosis
If the PCM detects the failure of a signal f r o m a sensor, a
switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit, it
stores Pending or Confirmed DTCs. Depending on the
failure, a Confirmed DTC is stored in either the first or the
second drive cycle. W h e n a DTC is stored, the PCM
blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to the gauge control
module via F-CAN.
One Drive Cycle Detection M e t h o d
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a
sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another
control unit, the PCM stores a Confirmed DTC for the
failure and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the
MIL immediately.
T w o Drive Cycle Detection M e t h o d
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a
sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another
control unit, in the first drive cycle, the PCM stores a
Pending DTC. The D indicator and the MIL do not turns
on at this time. If the failure continues in the second
drive cycle, the PCM stores a Confirmed DTC and
blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor,
a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit,
the PCM ignores that signal and substitutes a
pre-programmed value for that signal to allow the
automatic transmission to continue operating. This
causes a DTC to be stored and the D indicator blink
and/or the MIL to come on. The transmission may not
shift normally during fail-safe operation. Do not run the
test driving diagnosis w h e n the MIL is ON, or the D
indicator is blinking.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5).
T w o Drive
Cycle
Detection
(1
DTC*
D
Indicator
MIL
P0706 (6)*
(2)
Blinks
OFF
ON
Blinks
OFF
Blinks
OFF
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Internal Control Module Keep Alive
M e m o r y (KAM) Error
Short in Transmission Range Switch
Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
Open in Transmission Range Switch
Circuit
Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
Blinks
OFF
Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit

Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed
Sensor Circuit
Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed
Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor
Intermittent Failure
Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Circuit
Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Intermittent Failure
Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit
Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit
Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit
Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit
Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit
Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit Stuck OFF
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A Stuck OFF
Valve A Stuck ON
Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
P0711 (28)*
(2)
P0712 (28)*
(2)
P0713(28P
2)
P0716(15)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
P0717(15)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
Blinks
ON
2)
Blinks
ON
(2)
Blinks
ON
P0723 (9)*<
Blinks
ON
P0731 (64)
Blinks
OFF
P0732 (64)
o
o
o
o
o
Blinks
OFF
Blinks
OFF
Blinks
OFF
Blinks
OFF
ON
OFF
P0746 (76)
Blinks
ON
P0747 (76)
Blinks
ON
P0751 (70)
Blinks
ON
P0718(15)*<
P0721 (9)*<
P0722 (9)*
2)
P0733 (64)
P0734 (64)
P0735 (64)
P0741 (40)
2)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-86)
Co
3
P0705 (5)* >
Page
OFF
or
ON*< >
ON
Blinks
P062F (0)
(2
Detection Item
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-91)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-93)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-94)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-100)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-109)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-113)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-115)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-116)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-116)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-117)
NOTE:
*(1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates w h e n the data link connector (DLC) is
connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
*(2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
*(3): The MIL comes on w h e n the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous w i t h the A/T DTC.
14-10
DTC
#(1)
P0752 (70)
P0756 (71)
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indicator
O
o
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
MIL
Co
Detection Item
P0757 (71)
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
P0761 (72)
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
P0762 (72)
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
P0766 (73)
o
o
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF
Blinks
ON
Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON

Valve B Stuck OFF
Valve B Stuck ON
Valve C Stuck OFF
Valve C Stuck ON
Open in Transmission Range Switch
ATPR Switch Circuit
Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch
Stuck ON
Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Stuck OFF
Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Stuck ON
Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Stuck OFF
Short in 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
Stuck ON
P0767 (73)
P0776 (77)
Blinks
ON
P0777 (77)
Blinks
ON
P0796 (78)
Blinks
ON
P0797 (78)
Blinks
ON
Blinks
ON
P0812 (65r
(2)
P0842 (25)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
P0843 (25)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
P0847 (26)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
Blinks
ON
Blinks
OFF
(2
P0848 <26)* >
P0872 (27)*
(2)
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-121)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-121)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-124)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-126)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-131)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-133)
NOTE:
transmission.
(cont'd)
14-11
D
* ( 1 )
MIL
Two Drive
Cycle
Detection
D
Indicator
Blinks
OFF
Detection Item
P0967 (23)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
P0970 (29)*
(2)
Blinks
ON
(2
Blinks
ON
(2)
Blinks
ON
Open in 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid

Pressure Switch Circuit or 4th Clutch
Stuck OFF
Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve A Circuit
Solenoid Valve A
Solenoid Valve B Circuit
Solenoid Valve B
Solenoid Valve C Circuit
Solenoid Valve C
Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
2)
Blinks
ON
Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
2)
Blinks
ON
Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
Blinks
ON
Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
(2
P0873 (27)* >
P0962(16P
2)
Blinks
ON
P0963(16r<
2)
Blinks
ON
Blinks
ON
{2
P0966 (23)* >
P0971 (29)* >

P0973 (7)*
P0974 (7)*<
P0976 (8)*<
2)
P0977 (8)*<
(2)
Blinks
ON
Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
2)
Blinks
ON
Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
2>
Blinks
ON
Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
Blinks
ON
Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
OFF
ON
Blinks
ON
P1743 (45)
Blinks
OFF
PCM A/T Control System Incomplete

Update
Open in Transmission Range Switch ATP
RVS Switch Circuit
Problem in Shift Control System; Shift
Valve E Stuck OFF
P1744 (45)
Blinks
OFF
P1745 (45)
Blinks
OFF
P1780 (49)
Blinks
ON
P0979 (22)*
P0980 (22)*<
P0982 (60)*<
P0983 (60)*
(2>
P16C0 (99)*
P1717(62)*
(2)
(2)
Problem in Shift Control System; Shift

Valve E Stuck ON
Problem in Shift Control System; Servo
Control Valve Stuck OFF or Servo Valve
Stuck OFF
Problem in Shift Control System
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-134)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-141)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-144)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-146)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-149)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-154)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-156)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-158)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-160)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-163)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-165)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-167)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-169)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-170)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-173)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-173)
NOTE:
*(1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is
transmission.
*(3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous w i t h the A/T DTC.
14-12
DTC
#(1)
T w o Drive
Cycle
Detection
U0029(107)
U0122 (107)
U0155O07)
D
Indicator
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
MIL
Detection Item
Page
Co
OFF
or
ON*<
OFF
OFF
or
ON*<
F-CAN Malfunction (F-CAN BUS-OFF

(PCM))
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-174)
F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA

F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge Control
Module)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-175)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 14-176)
3)
3)
NOTE:
transmission.
14-13
Symptom
W h e n y o u t u r n the
ignition switch to ON
(II), the D indicator
comes on and stays on
in all shift lever
positions, or it never
comes on at all
A/T gear position
indicator does not
come on while the shift
lever is in that position
Transmission still
shifts into 4th or 5th
gear in D even though
the D3 switch is
pushed
W h e n you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(II), the D3 indicator
in all shift lever
positions, or it never
comes on at all
D3 indicator does not
come on in D3 driving
mode
Shift indicator does

not w o r k
14-14
Probable Cause(s)
F-CAN communication line
error
Gauge control module defective
PCM defective
Notes
Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC (see
page 22-345).
Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in
the gauge control module by using the gauge
control module self-diagnostic function (see page
22-334).

error
PCM defective
Transmission range switch
defective
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connnection between the shift
cable and transmission or body
is w o r n
D3 switch defective
D3 switch circuit defective
defective

page 22-345).
the gauge control module by using gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334).
Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-263).
Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
selector control shaft.

error
PCM defective
D3 switch defective
error
PCM defective
D3 switch defective
error
PCM defective
defective
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connnection between the shift
is w o r n
Check the D3 switch circuit (see page 14-271).

Check the D3 switch (see page 14-273).
14-263).
page 22-345).
page 22-345).
page 22-345).
inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-263).
selector control shaft.
Symptom
Shift lever cannot be
m o v e d f r o m P while
pressing on the brake
pedal
Ignition switch cannot

be moved f r o m
ACCESSORY (1) to
LOCK (0) (key is
pushed in, the shift
lever in P)
When you turn the
ignition switch ON (II),
the A/T TEMP indicator
or never comes on at
all
HDS does not
communicate with the
PCM
Probable Cause(s)
Accelerator pedal position
sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position
sensor defective
Brake pedal position switch
circuit
defective
Shift lock solenoid defective
Shift lock solenoid control
circuit
Shift lock mechanism defective
Throttle body defective
Transmission range switch ATP
P switch stuck OFF
P switch line opened
Interlock control system circuit
Key interlock solenoid stuck ON
Park pin switch stuck ON
P line opened
Notes
Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit, (see page
14-276)
Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-279).
14-263).
Inspect the APP sensor signal (see page 11-289).
Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit, (see

page 22-101)
14-263).

error
PCM defective

page 22-345).
Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
module by using gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334).
DLC circuit
(cont'd)
14-15
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Engine runs, but
vehicle does not move
in any gear
Vehicle moves in R,
but not in D, 2, or 1
14-16
Probable Cause(s)
1. Low ATF level
2. Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
3. Connection between the shift
is w o r n
4. ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring
worn
6. ATF strainer clogged
7. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
8. Mainshaft w o r n or damaged
9. Countershaft w o r n or damaged
10. Final gears w o r n or damaged
11. Park mechanism defective
12. Selector control shaft w o r n or
damaged
13. Drive plate defective
14. Torque converter defective
15. Transmission-to-engine
assembly error
16. Axle disengaged
1.1st accumulator defective

2. Idler gears w o r n or damaged
3.1st clutch defective
4.5th clutch defective
Notes
Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler lines
for leakage and loose connections. If necessary,
clean the ATF cooler lines.
transmission control shaft.
Check the stall speed (see page 14-179).
Check the line pressure (see page 14-180).
Improper alignment of the ATF p u m p and torque
converter housing may cause ATF p u m p seizure.
The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
noise or a high pitched squeak.
Check the regulator valve in the regulator valve
body for free movement, and check the valve
springs for wear and damage.
Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it, and clean the
separator plate orifice.
Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the
differential pinion gears are w o r n , replace the
differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
cooler and lines.
Replace the torque converter.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF p u m p w h e n you torque
d o w n the main valve body. This will cause ATF
p u m p seizure. Use the proper tools.
Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Inspect the countershaft and secondary shaft for
wear and damage.
Inspect the park mechanism at the park lever link,
park gear, and 2nd gears.
Check the drive plate for wear and damage, replace
the drive plate if it is w o r n or damaged.
Check for a misinstalled transmission.
Check the 1st and 5th clutch pressure (see page
14-180).
Inspect the mainshaft, the countershaft, the
secondary shaft, the intermediary shaft, and the
idler gears for wear and damage.
Inspect the 1st clutch for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between
the clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and
plates for wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n
or damaged, replace them as a set. If the wave-plate
height is out of the tolerance, replace the
wave-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance w i t h
the clutch end-plate.
Check the 1st accumulator piston, the O-ring, and
the spring in the accumulator body for wear and
damage.
Symptom
Vehicle moves in 2 and
R, but not in D or 1
Probable Cause(s)
1st gear one-way clutch
defective
1st gears w o r n or damaged
1st clutch defective
Notes
Check the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Inspect the mainshaft, the countershaft, the 1st
gears, and the one-way clutch for wear and
damage.
valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
and the retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect
the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the
top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage,
and inspect the clutch wave-plate height. If the discs
and plates are w o r n or damaged, replace them as a
set. If the wave-plate height is out of the tolerance,
replace the wave-plate. If they are OK, adjust the
clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
Vehicle moves in D, 2,
and R, but not in 1
1 st-hold clutch defective
Check the 1 st-hold clutch pressure (see page

14-180).
Inspect the 1 st-hold clutch for wear and damage.
clutch plate B and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
or damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the wave-plate
wave-plate.
and R, but not in 2
1.2nd accumulator defective

2.2nd clutch defective
Check the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-180).

Inspect the 2nd clutch for wear and damage.
wave-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with
Check the 2nd accumulator piston, the O-ring, and
spring in the accumulator body for wear and
damage.
(cont'd)
14-17
Symptom
and 1,but not in R (or
moves forward in R)
Probable Cause(s)
1. Shift fork shaft stuck
2.5th accumulator defective
4. Reverse gears w o r n or
damaged
5. Reverse idler gear shaft/holder
w o r n or damaged
6. Reverse selector or reverse
selector hub w o r n or damaged
Poor acceleration;
flares w h e n starting off
in D and R
1. Low ATF level

adjustment
4. Regulator valve stuck or spring
worn
5. Stator shaft w o r n or damaged
7. Torque converter one-way
clutch defective
8. Torque converter check valve
defective
9. Shift valve E defective
14-18
Notes
Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
shaft.
Check the shift fork shaft detent for wear and
damage.
Check for a stuck servo valve in the regulator valve
body, and check the O-ring for wear and damage.
Check the stall speed in R (see page 14-179).
Check the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Inspect the 5th clutch for wear and damage.
Check the 5th accumulator piston, the O-ring, and
damage.
Inspect the reverse idler gear shaft/holder for wear
and damage.
Inspect the reverse selector teeth chamfers, and
inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 5th gear and the reverse gear. Replace
the reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
w o r n or damaged. If the transmission makes
clicking, grinding, or whirring noises, also replace
the mainshaft 5th gear, the reverse idler gear, and
the countershaft 5th gear.
Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler line
selector control lever.
converter housing may cause the ATF p u m p
seizure. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related
ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
Check the regulator valve in the regulator valve
Check the stator shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged, find the damaged components that caused
the debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
Check the torque converter check valve in the main
valve body for free movement, and check the valve
spring for wear and damage.
Check the shift valve E in the main valve body for
free movement, and check the valve spring for wear
and damage.
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
in D and R; stall speed
high in D and 2, and 1
Probable Cause(s)
Notes
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are worn
Check the 1st accumulator piston, the O-ring, and
damage.
Poor acceleration;
high in 1
1st-hold clutch defective
Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure (see page

14-180).
Inspect the 1 st-hold clutch for wear and damage.
clutch plate B and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
wave-plate.
Poor acceleration;
high in 2
2nd accumulator defective

2nd clutch defective

the clutch end-plate and the t o p disc. If the clearance
damage.
(cont'd)
14-19
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
high in R
Probable Cause(s)
adjustment
3. 5th clutch defective
Poor acceleration;
low
Engine idle vibration
1. Engine output low

2. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
14-20
1. Low ATF level

2. Engine output low
defective
Notes
Check the 5th accumulator piston, the O-ring, and
damage.
Check the engine control system.
Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler line
Check the engine control system.
seizure. The s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-related
Symptom
Vehicle moves in N
Probable Cause(s)
1. Excessive ATF
2. ATF temperature sensor
defective
plate orifice
4. Relief valve defective
5. Reverse control valve defective
6. Lubrication control valve
defective
7.1st-hold clutch defective
9. 2nd clutch defective
10.3rd clutch defective
13. Clutch end-plate clearance
incorrect
14. Needle bearing seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
15. Thrust washer seized, w o r n or
damaged
Notes
Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if it is
over-filled.
Check the ATF temperature sensor O-ring for wear
and damage.
Check all clutch pressures (see page 14-180).
Check the relief valve and lubrication control valve
in the main valve body for free movement, and
check the valve springs for wear and damage.
Check the reverse control valve in the secondary
Inspect all clutches for wear and damage.
Check the needle bearings and thrust washers on all
shafts for seizure, wear, and damage.
(cont'd)
14-21
Symptom
Late shift after shifting
f r o m N to D, or
excessive shock w h e n
shifting
14-22
Probable Cause(s)
1. Shift solenoid valve A defective
2. Shift solenoid valve B defective
3. Shift solenoid valve C defective
4. A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
adjustment
6. Connection between shift cable
and transmission or shift lever
is w o r n
defective
8. CPC v a l v e C s t u c k
plate orifice
11. Shift valve A defective
12. Shift valve D defective
13. Servo control valve defective
16.1st check ball stuck
18. Clearance between clutch
end-plate and top disc incorrect
Notes
Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
Inspect the shift solenoid valve function with the
HDS (see page 14-184).
Check for a seized shift solenoid valve, and inspect
the O-rings.
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve with the HDS (see page 14-188).
valve body gasket, the ATF feed pipes, and the
O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the ATF temperature sensor O-ring for wear
and damage.
Check CPC valve C in the secondary valve body for
and damage.
Check shift valve A in the main valve body for free
movement, and check the valve spring for wear and
damage.
Check shift valve D in the secondary valve body for
and damage.
Inspect the 1 st clutch for wear and damage.
the clutch end-plate and the t o p disc. If the clearance
Check the 1st and 2nd accumulator pistons, the
O-rings, and the springs in the accumulator body for
wear and damage.
Check for a stuck 1st check ball in the secondary
valve body.
Symptom
Late shift after shifting
f r o m N to R, or
excessive shock w h e n
shifting
Probable Cause(s)
adjustment
is w o r n
defective
5. Reverse CPC valve defective
plate orifice
Notes
connections.
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and the O-rings
for wear and damage.
Inspect the ATF temperature sensor and O-ring for
wear and damage.
Transmission does not

shift
1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor defective
2. Output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor defective
Excessive shock or
flares on all upshifts
and downshifts

sensor defective
defective
plate orifice

connections.
Check the speed sensor installation.
Inspect the input or output shaft speed sensor
O-ring for wear and damage.
connections (see page 14-184).
Inspect the ATF temperature sensor O-ring for wear
and damage.
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
(cont'd)
14-23
Symptom
Excessive shock or
flares on 1 -2 upshift or
2-1 downshift
14-24
Probable Cause(s)
1. Shift solenoid valve A defective
2. Shift solenoid valve B defective
3. Shift solenoid valve C defective
solenoid valve A defective
solenoid valve B defective
7.2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch defective
8. CPC valve A defective
9. CPC valve B defective
10. CPC valve C defective
11. Shift valve C defective
12. Shift valve D defective
plate orifice
15.2nd clutch defective
Notes
connections.
Inspect the shift solenoid valve function w i t h the
the O-rings.
Check for a clogged orifice in the transmission fluid
pressure switch connector. If the orifice is clogged,
remove it, and clean the connector.
Check CPC valve A in the main valve body for free
movement, and check the valve spring for wear and
damage.
Check CPC valves B and C in the secondary valve
Check shift valves C and D in the secondary valve
the spring in the accumulator body for wear and
damage.
Symptom
Excessive shock or
flares on 2-3 upshift or
3-2 downshift
Probable Cause(s)
1. Shift solenoid valve D defective
5.3rd clutch transmission fluid
8. CPC valve A defective
9. CPC valve B defective
10. Lock-up shift valve defective
plate orifice
13.3rd accumulator defective
14. 2nd check ball stuck
15. 2nd clutch defective
16. 3rd clutch defective
17. Clearance between the clutch
end-plate and the top disc
incorrect
Notes
connections.
the O-rings.
valve w i t h the HDS (see page 14-188).
shaft.
damage.
Check the servo control valve, CPC valve A, and
lock-up shift valve in the main valve body for free
movement, and check the valve springs for wear
and damage.
Check CPC valve B in the secondary valve body for
and damage.
Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures (see page
14-180).
Inspect the 2nd and 3rd clutches for wear and
damage.
Check the 2nd and 3rd accumulator pistons, the
wear and damage.
Check for a stuck 2nd check ball in the secondary
valve body.
(cont'd)
14-25
Symptom
Excessive shock or
4-3 downshift
14-26
Probable Cause(s)
4.4th clutch transmission fluid
plate orifice
8.3rd accumulator defective
10.3rd clutch defective
12. Clearance between the clutch
end-plate and the top disc
incorrect
Notes
connections.
shaft.
damage.
Check the servo control valve in the main valve
body for free movement, and check the valve spring
Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures (see page
14-180).
Inspect the 3rd and 4th clutches for wear and
damage.
Check the 3rd and 4th accumulator pistons, the
wear and damage.
Symptom
Excessive shock or
5-4 downshift
Probable Cause(s)
plate orifice
6. 5th accumulator defective
9. Clearance between clutch
end-plate and top disc incorrect
Notes
connections.
Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures (see page
14-180).
Inspect the 4th and 5th clutches for wear and

damage.
Check the 4th and 5th accumulator pistons, the
wear and damage.
(cont'd)
14-27
Symptom
Noise f r o m
transmission in all
shift lever positions
Probable Cause(s)
3. Mainshaft, countershaft,
secondary shaft, and
intermediary shaft bearings
w o r n or damaged
4. Idler gears w o r n or damaged
5. Thrust washer seized, w o r n , or
damaged
Vehicle does not

accelerate above 31
mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in ail shift
lever positions
Torque converter one-way clutch

defective
14-28
1. Drive plate defective or

transmission misassembled
2. Torque converter defective
Notes
converter housing may cause the ATF pump
cooler and lines.
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
d o w n the main valve body. This will cause the ATF
install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If y o u push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
wear and damage.
Inspect the mainshaft, the countershaft, the
secondary shaft,the intermediary shaft, and the
idler gears for wear and damage.
Check the thrust washers on all shafts for seizure,
wear, and damage.
Check for a misassembled transmission, and check
the drive plate for wear and damage. Replace the
drive plate if it is w o r n or damaged.
cooler and lines.
may also damage the ATF p u m p w h e n y o u torque
d o w n the main valve body. This will cause the ATF
Symptom
Shift lever does not
operate smoothly
Probable Cause(s)
1. Transmission range switch
defective or out of adjustment
2. Shift cable broken, binding, or
out of adjustment
is w o r n
4. Manual valve defective
5. Selector control shaft w o r n or
damaged
Transmission does not

shift into P
1. Shift cable broken, binding, or

out of adjustment
is w o r n
3. Park mechanism defective
4. Secondary shaft 2nd gear w o r n
or damaged
defective
5. Lock-up control valve defective
6. Lock-up timing valve defective
Torque converter
clutch does not
disengage
Torque converter
clutch does not
operate smoothly

defective
defective
7. Lock-up t i m i n g valve defective
Notes
connections.
Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
transmission range switch fails the inspection,
replace the switch. If the inspection is OK, check for
proper transmission range switch installation, and
adjust the shift cable.
Check the manual valve in the main valve body for
wear and damage, and check the manual lever
guide pin for wear and damage.
wear and damage.

connections.
the O-rings.
inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and the O-rings
Check the lock-up shift valve and lock-up t i m i n g
valve in the main valve body for free movement,
and check the valve springs for wear and damage.
Check the lock-up control valve in the regulator
connections.
the O-rings.
Check the torque converter check valve, lock-up
shift valve, and lock-up t i m i n g valve in the main
(cont'd)
14-29
Symptom
Torque converter
clutch does not
engage
Probable Cause(s)
sensor defective
adjustment
cable and the transmission or
shift lever is w o r n
plate orifice
defective
defective
12. Lock-up t i m i n g valve defective
A/T gear position

indicator does not
indicate shift lever
positions
1. Transmission range switch

defective or out of adjustment
adjustment
cable and the transmission or
shift lever is w o r n
Speedometer and
odometer do not w o r k
Output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor defective
Engine does not rev to

high r p m , and the
transmission upshifts
at low r p m (engine at
normal operating
temperature)
VTEC rocker arms defective
14-30
Notes
connections.
the O-rings.
Inspect the sensor and O-ring for wear and damage.
Check the torque converter check valve and lock-up
shift valve in the main valve body for free
movement, and check the valve springs for wear
and damage.
valve body for free m o v e m e n t , and check the valve
connections.
Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
transmission range switch fails the inspection,
replace the switch. If the inspection is OK, check for
proper transmission range switch installation, and
connections.
Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
Check the engine rocker arms.
<2
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
D3 SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE H A R N E S S CONNECTOR

PARK PIN SWITCH
A / T CLUTCH P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID V A L V E C
Test, page 14-196
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
A / T CLUTCH
P R E S S U R E CONTROL
SOLENOID V A L V E A
Test, page 14-188
A / T CLUTCH
P R E S S U R E CONTROL
SOLENOID V A L V E B
Test, page 14-191
2ND C L U T C H
TRANSMISSION FLUID
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E C (Behind
shift solenoid
valve cover)
Test and
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E A (Behind
shift solenoid
valve cover)
Test and
Replacement, page 14-18*
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR
3RD C L U T C H TRANSMISSION
FLUID P R E S S U R E SWITCH
ATF T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
Test/Replacement, page 14-206
SHIFT SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION
V A L V E B (Behind shift
RANGE SWITCH
solenoid
valve cover)
Test, page 14-263
Replacement, page 14-264 ~ [
d
*
e s t a n
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E D (Behind shift
solenoid valve cover)
Test and
14-31
System Description
General Description
The automatic transmission is a transversally mounted four-shaft design, implemeting an electronically controlled
hydraulic circuit that provides five f o r w a r d speeds and one in reverse. Engine power is transmitted t h r o u g h the torque
converter, a combination of shafts w h i c h hold gears and clutches and a differential that transmits power to the driving
wheels. VTM-4 equipped models also have a transfer assembly which transmits power to the VTM-4 differential.
Shafts, Gears, and Clutches
Four parallel shafts hold gears and clutches. The gears on the input shaft (mainshaft), secondary shaft and intermediary
shaft are in constant mesh w i t h those on the output shaft (countershaft).When specific gears are engaged by the
clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, to the secondary shaft, the intermediary shaft, and/or the
countershaft, then t o the final drive gear of the differential to provide drive.
Shift Control Mechanism
To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, C and D, and automatic transmission (A/T) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A, B, and C. The shift solenoid valves change the positions of the shift valves in the valve body
w h i c h open and close ports send hydraulic pressure to the appropriate clutch. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A , B, and C change the position of CPC valves A and B, and the reverse CPC valve, t o control hydraulic pressure
going to the clutches, w h i c h allows smooth shifts between gears.
Electronic Control
Shifting and lock-up is achieved by a system of solenoid valves driven by the PCM to control ATF f l o w through various
valves in the valve bodies to select the appropriate gears for all driving conditions.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the accumulator
body. They are mounted to the torque converter housing. Fluid f r o m the regulator valve passes through the manual
valve to the various control valves. All the clutches receive fluid f r o m the internal hydraulic circuit.
Torque Converter
The torque converter is a fluid coupling, which allows the engine to spin independently of the transmission yet connects
t h e m together as needed. It is an assembly that consists of an impeller (pump), turbine, stator and lock-up clutch, w h i c h
uses automatic transmission fluid (ATF) to transmit engine power to the input shaft (mainshaft), and acts as a flywheel
to help the engine run smoothly. During certain conditions the lock-up clutch is engaged by the PCM to mechanically
connect the engine's crankshaft w i t h the input shaft (mainshaft) w h i c h improves fuel economy. A r o u n d the outside of
the torque converter housing is a ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter ring gear, used by the starter to start the
engine.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism causes the input shaft (mainshaft) to rotate at the same speed as the engine crankshaft.
Pressurized ATF is drained f r o m between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston t h r o u g h a
fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter housing. Together w i t h
the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the t i m i n g and degree of lock-up. The lock-up mechanism operates in D (2nd,
3rd, 4th, and 5th gears) and D3 driving mode (2nd and 3rd gears).
14-32
Gear Selection
The shift lever has six positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear, and 1st through 3rd
gear w i t h D3 driving mode, 2: 2nd gear, and 1:1 st gear.
Position
P: PARK
R: REVERSE
N: NEUTRAL
D: DRIVE
(1st through 5th)
D: DRIVE (D3 switch)

w i t h D3 driving mode
(1st through 3rd)
2: SECOND
1: FIRST
Description
Front wheels locked; the park pawl engaged w i t h the park gear on the secondary
shaft. All clutches are released.
Reverse; the reverse selector engaged w i t h the countershaft reverse gear and
the 5th clutch engaged.
All clutches are released.
General driving; starts off in 1st gear, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then
5th gear, depending on the vehicle speed and the throttle position. Downshifts
through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st gears on deceleration to stop. The lock-up
mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and
down-hill driving; starts off in 1st gear, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd gear,
depending on vehicle speed and the throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st gear on deceleration to stop. The lock-up
mechanism operates in 2nd and 3rd gears.
Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery
surfaces; stays in 2nd gear, does not shift up and d o w n .
Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear, does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in P and N because of a neutral-safety switch.

Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the gauge control module shows which shift lever position has been selected.
Transfer Assembly ( 4 W D )
The transfer assembly consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer output shaft in the transmission,
the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft assembly, the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the companion flange. The
transfer assembly is on the rear side of the transmission, beside the differential. The transfer drive gear on the
differential drives the transfer output shaft in the transmission. The transfer output shaft in the transmission is
connected to the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft assembly by splines. Power is transmitted f r o m the transfer drive gear
on the differential to the rear differential via the transfer assembly and the propeller shaft.
14-33
Clutches and Gears
The five-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. W h e n hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch d r u m , the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and the steel plates together, locking t h e m so they do not slip. Power is then transmitted t h r o u g h the engaged
clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, w h e n the hydraulic pressure is bled f r o m the clutch pack, the piston
releases the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear t o spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the left end of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe w i t h i n the secondary shaft.
1 st-hold Clutch
The 1 st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1 st-hold in 1. The 1 st-hold clutch is located in the 1st clutch d r u m , and is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the right end of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure t h r o u g h the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the intermediary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the intermediary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit connected
to the internal hydraulic circuit.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by
a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1 st-hold clutch hub, w i t h the 1 st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1 st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1 st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way clutch
locks w h e n power is transmitted f r o m the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch and gears
remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in D or 2.
However, the one-way clutch disengages w h e n the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in D, or 2. This is
because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft causes the one-way clutch t o free-wheel w i t h
the 1st clutch still engaged.
14-34
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD transmission does not have the transfer mechanism.
Transmission C u t a w a y V i e w
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
R E V E R S E IDLER
G E A R SHAFT
5TH CLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT 4TH GEAR
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT 3RD G E A R
3RD CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
5TH G E A R
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
RING G E A R
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
T O R Q U E CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT 4TH G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT 3RD G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST G E A R
C O U N T E R S H A F T 2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER G E A R
REVERSE
S E L E C T O R HUB
DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE G E A R
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH G E A R
S E C O N D A R Y SHAFT
2ND CLUTCH
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
PARK G E A R
1ST CLUTCH
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE G E A R /
.SHAFT A S S E M B L Y
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T 1ST G E A R
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
S E C O N D A R Y SHAFT IDLER GEAR

S E C O N D A R Y SHAFT 2ND GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL A S S E M B L Y
TRANSFER
O U T P U T SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
T R A N S F E R OUTPUT SHAFT
COMPANION
FLANGE
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
(cont'd)
14-35
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
4th gear is engages/disengages w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
5th gear is engages/disengages w i t h the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
3rd gear is splined w i t h the mainshaft and rotates w i t h the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
Final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
1st gear, 2nd gear, and 4th gear are splined w i t h the countershaft, and rotate w i t h the countershaft.
5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f r o m the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse gear
with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse gear
engage with the countershaft.
Idler gear is located over the 2nd gear, and rotates freely f r o m the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
1st gear is engaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch and the one-way clutch w h e n accelerating, and 1st gear
is disengaged f r o m the 1st clutch at the one-way clutch w h e n decelerating. 1st gear is engaged w i t h the secondary
shaft by the 1st-hold clutch w h e n decelerating for engine braking.
2nd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
Idler gear is splined w i t h the secondary shaft, and rotates w i t h the secondary shaft.
Park gear is integral w i t h the 2nd gear.
Gears on the intermediary shaft:
3rd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the intermediary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
4th gear is splined w i t h the intermediary shaft.
14-36
00
Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted t o the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted f r o m the mainshaft drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the intermediary shaft 3rd gear, but
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. In this position, the
position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted f r o m D or R:
W h e n shifted f r o m D, the reverse selector engages w i t h the countershaft 5th gear and the reverse selector hub, and
the 5th gear engages w i t h the countershaft.
When shifted f r o m R, the reverse selector engages w i t h the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse selector hub,
and the reverse gear engages w i t h the countershaft.
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD G E A R
MAINSHAFT 3RD G E A R
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
(cont'd)
14-37
In 1st gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
With 4WD: Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive
gear.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and front differential.
With 4WD: As the final driven gear turns the front differential, power is transmitted through the transfer drive gear to
the transfer output shaft that drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST G E A R
r-^
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST CLUTCH
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
1ST GEAR
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT
14-38
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE G E A R / S H A F T
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
3
In 2 n d g e a r
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
gear.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the front differential.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power f r o m 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
S E C O N D A R Y SHAFT IDLER GEAR
SECOP
2ND G
TRANSFER HYPOID
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
14-39
In 3rd gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the intermediary shaft 3rd gear w i t h the
intermediary shaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the intermediary shaft 4th gear via the intermediary shaft 3rd gear and the 3rd clutch.
The intermediary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft via the mainshaft 4th gear.
gear.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD G E A R
3RD CLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
FINAL DRIVE G E A R
TRANSFER DRIVE G E A R
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
TRANSFER HYPOID
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-40
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
<S0
In 4 t h gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied t o the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear w i t h the mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
gear.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power f r o m 1 st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH G E A R
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
14-41
In 5th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever in D.
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear w i t h the mainshaft.
The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
W i t h 4WD: Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive
gear.
W i t h 4WD: As the final driven gear turns the front differential, power is transmitted through the transfer drive gear to
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR
5TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARYSHAFT
R E V E R S E SELECTOR
HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-42
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
Acceleration in 1 Position
In 1, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1 st-hold clutch. The power f l o w w h e n accelerating is as
follows:
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1 st-hold clutch, and the 1 st-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear
w i t h the secondary shaft.
gear.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINSHAFT

COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
1 ST-HOLD CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
T R A N S F E R DRIVE GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
14-43
Deceleration in 1 Position
The power f l o w in 1 w h e n decelerating is as follows:
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch.
Rolling resistance f r o m the road surface goes through the front wheels to the final driven gear, then to the
countershaft idler gear.
The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
The force conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft idler gear. As a
result, engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR
MAINSHAFT
C O U N T E R S H A F T IDLER G E A R
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
1ST G E A R
14-44
<3
R Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in R.
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
The rotation direction of the countershaft is changed by the reverse idler gear.
gear.
R E V E R S E IDLER GEAR
5TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
R E V E R S E GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE
S E L E C T O R HUB
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
R E V E R S E GEAR
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
TRANSFER HYPOID
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-45
Electronic Control System
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Functional Diagram
The PCM receives input signals f r o m the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs signals
for the engine control system and A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift control, clutch pressure
control, and lock-up control. The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
On and Off in a specific sequence to control gear selection and torque converter clutch lock-up.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor Signal
PGM-FI Control System
Throttle Position Sensor

Signal (ETCS)
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
VTM-4 Control Unit
Signal
VSA Modulator-control
Unit Signal
A/T Control System
Shift Control
* Grade Logic Control
* Shift-Hold Control
* Cruise Control
Downshift Request
Lock-up Control
A/T Gear Position

Indicator
Indicator Control
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
14-46
D Indicator
D3 Indicator
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid

Pressure Switch Signal
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid

Automatic
Five-speed
and
Reverse
A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve B
A/T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve C
D3 Switch Signal
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid

Shift Solenoid Valve C
A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve A
Clutch Pressure
Control
Output Shaft (Countershaft)

Speed Sensor Signal
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Shift Solenoid Valve D
Transmission
Range Switch
Signal
Input Shaft (Mainshaft)

Speed Sensor Signal
Shift Solenoid Valve A
Shift Lock Control
Shift Lock Solenoid
Self-diagnosis/
Fail-safe Function
Vehicle Speed Signal
Communication and
Output Function
Data Link Connector
Lock-up
ON/OFF
Lock-up
Condition
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f r o m sensors and switches, and it
actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D to control gear selection.
There are t w o types of shift solenoid valves:
Shift solenoid valves A and D are normally closed (ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN); The normally closed shift solenoid valve
port opens to allow ATF to pass though w h e n the PCM turns it O N , and the port closes, blocking fluid f l o w when
turned OFF.
Shift solenoid valves B and C are normally opened (ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN); The normally closed shift solenoid valve
port closed, blocking ATF f r o m passing though w h e n the PCM turns it O N , and the port opens, allowing fluid f l o w
w h e n turned OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D for each gear are in the following table.
Position
D
2
1
N
R
Gear position
Shifting f r o m N
Stays in 1st
Shifting gears between
Stays in 2nd
Stays in 3rd
Stays in 4th
Stays in 5th
2nd
1st
Neutral
Shifting f r o m P and N
Stays in reverse
Reverse inhibit control
Park
1st and 2nd

2nd and 3rd
3rd and 4th
4th and 5th
Shift solenoid valves

A
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
C
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
(cont'd)
14-47
Shift Control - Grade Logic Control
The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in D. The PCM compares actual driving conditions
w i t h memorized driving conditions, based on the input f r o m the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant
temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever position
signal, to improve shifting control while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
Engine RPM Control
Transmission Range
Switch Signal
Shift Position
Control
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor
Signal
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
Fail-safe Control
Actual
Driving
Shift Position
Read of ATF
Temperature
Master Target of
Shifting Position
Grade Logic Control

Calculation of
Gradient
Correction for Engine

Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal Data
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
VSA Modulatorcontrol Unit Signal
14-48
Correction for Cruise

Control Signal Data
by Downshift
Request Signal
Comparison
with
Signals
Shift Solenoid Valve A

Shift Solenoid Valve B
Shift Solenoid Valve C
Shift Solenoid Valve D
3
Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in D, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd gear,
3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the transmission f r o m frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and
4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smoothly, and have more power w h e n needed.
NOTE: Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and
5th gears, enable the PCM to automatically select the most suitable gear based on the steepness of the grade.
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
100%
FLAT ROAD MODE
a
0
GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
50
MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE

S T E E P ASCENDING MODE
HEAVY S T E E P ASCENDING MODE
Vehicle speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

W h e n the PCM determines that the vehicle is going d o w n a hill in D, the upshift speed f r o m 4th to 5th gear, 3rd to 4th
gear, and f r o m 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes higher than the set speed for flat road driving to extend
the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking f r o m the deceleration
lock-up, achieves smooth driving w h e n the vehicle is descending. There are three descending modes with different 4th
gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle
is in 5th or 4th gear, and the vehicle is decelerating w h e n you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission
will downshift to a lower gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to a higher gear.
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
S T E E P DESCENDING MODE
Vehicle speed
(cont'd)
14-49
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating f r o m
speeds above 25 m p h (40 km/h), the PCM anticipates upcoming acceleration, and shifts the transmission f r o m 4th to 3rd
earlier than normal.
14-50
Shift Control - D Position D 3 Driving Mode Control

The automatic transmission is provided with the D3 driving mode in D. D has t w o modes; general driving mode (shifts
gears automatically 1st through 5th), and the D3 driving mode (shifts gears automatically 1st through 3rd). The
transmission mode switches by pressing the D3 button on the shift lever knob in D.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
D3 SWITCH
In D3 driving mode, the D3 indicator next to the D indicator in the gauge control module comes on. The D3 driving mode
is canceled by pressing the D3 button, and the D3 indicator goes off. Also, the D3 driving mode is canceled w h e n the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). When the shift lever is moved out of D in the D3 driving mode, the D3 indicator
goes off, but the transmission returns into D3 driving mode w h e n returning the shift lever into D, and the D3 indicator
comes on.
D3 INDICATOR
(cont'd)
14-51
Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between lower and higher gears, the clutch pressure regulated by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and
C engages and disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals f r o m the various sensors and switches, then processes data, and outputs current to A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
PCM
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor
Signal
Actual
Driving
Shift
Position
Decision of
Shifting Mode
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Master Target of
Controlling Current
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
Correction of Data
Engine RPM Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
14-52
Correction of
Engine Torque
Signal Data
Correction of
Hydraulic Pressure
Application
Timing
Correction of
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal Data
Correction of ATF
Temperature
Sensor Data
Current
Feedback
A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid
Valves A, B, and C
Lock-up Control
Shift solenoid valve D controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF. When
the PCM actuates shift solenoid valve D and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C ON, the condition of lock-up
starts. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C applies and regulates hydraulic pressure to the lock-up control valve
to control the a m o u n t of lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in D (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in the D3 driving mode (2nd and 3rd).
PCM
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature Control
Shifting Position
Control
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Gradient Control
by Magnitude
Transmission Range
Switch Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Fail-safe Control
Actual
Driving
Shift
Position
Master Target
of Controlling
Current
Lock-up Control
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Driving
Shift
Position
Information
Lock-up ON/OFF
Control
Shift Solenoid
Valve D
Lock-up Condition
Control
Current
Feedback
A/T Clutch
Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve C
Engine RPM Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
yi
Correction of
ATF
Temperature
Sensor Data
Lock-up Condition
Learning Control
(cont'd)
14-53
PCMA/T Control System Electrical Connections
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
PCM
-CTXJ>
LSA
C21
TRP
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
OHP
LSB
LSC
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
SHA
&BKSW
-CrÔ
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
B21
C20
SHB
C28
BRAKE LIGHTS OSCS
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
SHC
C39
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
W
/
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
r
W^
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
-^WP
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D

SHDO^
nj^
VCC1
NC
B38
SG2
C16
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
OATPP
C25< >ATPR
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
< )ATPN
C17< )ATPD
VCC2
C12
MN
B37
SG6
C15
0P2SW
C27
< >ATP2
C35< )ATP1
< >ATPFWD
C19
<)ATPRVS
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
D3 SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

"o
0P3SW <> C38

4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
0P4SW
C37
777"
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
12
11
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 |10|
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22
24
/
/
25
26 27 28
29 30 3132 3334 3536 37 38 39

|40|41
/|44|/|46
A(49P) (White)
14-54
77T
48|49|
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|
11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4
|40|41|42|/V1 5|46
B(49P) A (Gray)
1401411421431441/] 46147148 [ 491

C(49P) O (Green)
P C M A / T Control System Inputs and Outputs at PCM Connector A (49P)
11
22
/
/ X
// /
(White)
9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
to
41
44
46
48 49
Terminal
number
A1
Wire color
A2
PNK
A6
GRN
A8
LT BLU
A16
PNK
A17
BLU
A32
BRN
SCS (SERVICE CHECK

SIGNAL)
Detects D3 switch
signal
Detects service
check signal
A48
WHT
A49
RED
CANH (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL HIGH)
CANL (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL LOW)
Sends and receives

communication
signal
Sends and receive
communication
signal
WHT
Terminal name
Description
Signal
VBSOL2 (POWER
SOURCE FOR
SOLENOID VALVES)
SLS (SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID)
MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1)
Power source for

solenoid valves
With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
Drives shift lock

solenoid
Drives PGM-FI main
relay 1
BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL

POSITION SWITCH)
Detects brake pedal

position switch
signal
range switch P
position signal
W i t h ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake pedal

pressed, and accelerator released: about 0 V
W i t h ignition switch in LOCK (0): battery
voltage
W i t h brake pedal released: about 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
ATPP
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P
POSITION)
D3SW (D3 SWITCH)
In P: about 0 V
In any position other than P: battery voltage
D3 switch released: battery voltage

D3 switch pressed: about 0 V
W i t h service check signal shorted w i t h the
HDS: about 0 V
W i t h service check signal opened: about
5.0 V
W i t h ignition switch ON (II): pulses
W i t h ignition switch ON (II): pulses
(cont'd)
14-55
PCMA/T Control System Inputs and Outputs at PCM Connector B (49P) A (Gray)
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
X X /
25
26
28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42
//
45 46
//
49
Terminal
number
B1
Wire color
Terminal name
Description
BLK
B2
BLK/YEL
Power source for

solenoid valves

voltage
B3
YEL/BLK
PG2 (POWER
GROUND)
VBSOL (POWER
SOURCE FOR
SOLENOID VALVES)
IGP (POWER SOURCE)
B10
BRN/WHT

voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): current
controlled
B21
GRN/RED
B36
YEL/RED
B37
RED
B38
BLU
B40
BLK
Power source for PCM

circuit
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve B
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve C
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed
sensor signal
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
sensor signal
B41
B42
BRN/YEL
BLK/YEL


voltage
14-56
LSB (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B)
LSC (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
VCC1 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
N M (INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED
SENSOR)
NC (OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR)
PG1 (POWER
GROUND)
LG2 (LOGIC GROUND)
IG1 (IGNITION
SIGNAL)
Signal

controlled
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or
about 5.0 V
With engine idling in N: about 2.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II), and front
wheels turned by hand: pulses
<3
PCMA/T Control System Inputs and Outputs at PCM Connector C (49P) O (Green)
11 12
30
9 10
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
X X
25
32 33 34 35
40 41 42 43 44
26 27 28
37 38 39
46 47 48 49
Terminal
number
C9
Wire color
GRN/RED
SHD (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE D)

valve D
C12
YEL/BLU
C15
GRN/RED
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground
C16
GRN/YEL
C17
YEL/GRN
C18
BLU/YEL
C19
RED/WHT
C20
BLU/YEL
VCC2 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG6 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG2 (SENSOR
GROUND)
ATPD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D
POSITION)
ATPFWD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH FWD
POSITION)
ATPRVS
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RVS
POSITION)
SHA (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE A)
C21
RED
C25
WHT
C26
RED/BLK
Terminal name
LSA (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A)
ATPR
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R
POSITION)
ATPN
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH N
POSITION)
Description
Signal
With engine running in N, and in D and 2
during no lock-up condition: about 0 V
With engine running in P and R, and in D
during lock-up condition: battery voltage
Sensor ground
range switch D
In D: about 0 V
In any position other than D: battery
voltage
range switch FWD
position signal
In D 2 a n d 1: about 0 V
In any position other than D, 2 and 1:
battery voltage
range switch RVS
position signal
In P, R, and N: about OV
In any position other than P, R, and N:
battery voltage

valve A
With engine running in R D (in 2nd and

3rd gears), and 2: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 1st, 4th,
and 5th gears), and 1: about 0 V
controlled
Drives A/T clutch

pressure control
solenoid valve A
range switch R
range switch N
In R: about 0 V
In any position other than R: battery
voltage
In N: about 0 V
In any position other than N: battery
voltage
(cont'd)
14-57
PCMA/T Control System Inputs and Outputs at PCM Connector C (49P) O (Green)
11 12
22
/
X
/
9 10
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
30
25
32 33 34 35
40 41 42 43 44
26 27 28
37 38 39
46 47 48 49
Terminal
number
C27
Wire color
Terminal name
Description
Signal
BLU/BLK
Detects 2nd clutch

transmission fluid
C28
GRN/WHT
OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH

TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHB (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE B)
C33
BLU/YEL
C35
BRN
Detects ATF
temperature sensor
signal
range switch 1
C37
BLU/YEL
Detects 4th clutch

transmission fluid

Without 4th clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
C38
BLU/WHT
Detects 3rd clutch

transmission fluid

Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
C39
GRN
TATF (ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR)
ATP1
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 1
POSITION)
OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHC (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE C)

Without 2nd clutch pressure: about
5.0 V
With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st,
2nd and 5th gears), 2, and 1: battery
voltage
With engine running in D (in 3rd and 4th
gears): about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 . 2 - 4 . 0
V (about 1.8 V operating temperature,
depending on ATF temperature)
In 1: about 0 V
In any position other than 1: battery
voltage

valve C
C41
C46
BRN/YEL
BLU
With engine running in D (in 1st, 3rd, and

5th gears), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 2nd
and 4th gears), D3 (in 2nd gear), and 2:
about 0 V
In 2: about 0 V
In any position other than 2: battery
voltage
14-58
LG1 (LOGIC GROUND)

ATP2
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 2
POSITION)

valve B

range switch 2 signal
input
<sS>
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the accumulator
body. The ATF p u m p is driven by splines on the end of the torque converter w h i c h is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing
pressure to each of the clutches. Shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are mounted on the accumulator body. A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-59
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valve A , B,
and E, CPC valve A , the servo control valve, the relief valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up t i m i n g valve, the
lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The primary function of the main valve
body is t o switch fluid pressure on and off t o control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
LOCK-UP SHIFT V A L V E
TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
RELIEF V A L V E
MANUALVALVE
SHIFT V A L V E E
SHIFT V A L V E A
SHIFT V A L V E B
LOCK-UP TIMING V A L V E
LUBRICATION
CONTROL V A L V E
MODULATOR V A L V E
LUBRICATION
CHECK V A L V E
SERVO
CONTROL V A L V E
CPC VALVE A
MAIN V A L V E BODY
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
cooler check valve, the lock-up control valve, the servo valve/shift fork shaft, and the 3rd accumulator.
C O O L E R CHECK V A L V E
LOCK-UP CONTROL V A L V E
REGULATOR VALVE
R E G U L A T O R V A L V E BODY
S E R V O V A L V E / S H I F T FORK S H A F T
14-60
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Regulator Valve
T h e regulator v a l v e m a i n t a i n s c o n s t a n t h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e f r o m the A T F p u m p to the h y d r a u l i c control s y s t e m , w h i l e
a l s o p r o v i d i n g fluid to t h e lubrication s y s t e m a n d t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r . Fluid f r o m t h e A T F p u m p f l o w s t h r o u g h B a n d B'.
Fluid e n t e r i n g f r o m B f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e v a l v e orifice to the A cavity. T h i s p r e s s u r e of the A c a v i t y p u s h e s the regulator
v a l v e to the s p r i n g s i d e , a n d t h i s m o v e m e n t of the regulator v a l v e u n c o v e r s the fluid port to the t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r a n d t h e
relief v a l v e . T h e fluid f l o w s out to the t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r a n d the relief v a l v e , a n d the regulator v a l v e r e t u r n s u n d e r s p r i n g
f o r c e . A c c o r d i n g to the level of t h e h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e t h r o u g h B, the position of the regulator v a l v e c h a n g e s , a n d the
a m o u n t of fluid f r o m B' t h r o u g h t h e t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r c h a n g e s . T h i s o p e r a t i o n is c o n t i n u e d , m a i n t a i n i n g t h e line
pressure.
From A T F PUMP
To T O R Q U E CONVERTER
VALVE
ORIFICE
To LUBRICATION
V A L V E SPRING
REGULATOR VALVE
I n c r e a s e s in h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e a c c o r d i n g to t o r q u e a r e r e g u l a t e d by the regulator v a l v e u s i n g stator t o r q u e r e a c t i o n .
T h e stator shaft is s p l i n e d to the stator in the t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r , a n d the stator shaft a r m e n d c o n t a c t s the regulator s p r i n g
c a p . W h e n the v e h i c l e is a c c e l e r a t i n g or c l i m b i n g (torque c o n v e r t e r r a n g e ) , stator t o r q u e reaction a c t s o n the stator
s h a f t , a n d t h e stator s h a f t a r m e n d p u s h e s the regulator s p r i n g c a p in the direction of the a r r o w in proportion to t h e
r e a c t i o n . T h e stator reaction s p r i n g c o m p r e s s e s , a n d t h e regulator v a l v e m o v e s to i n c r e a s e the line p r e s s u r e w h i c h is
r e g u l a t e d by the regulator v a l v e . T h e line p r e s s u r e r e a c h e s its m a x i m u m w h e n the stator t o r q u e reaction r e a c h e s its
maximum.
(cont'd)
14-61
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body is on the main valve body. The secondary valve body contain shift valve C and D, CPC valve B
and C, the reverse control valve, and the reverse CPC valve.
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the secondary valve body, and contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators,
and shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D. The 3rd accumulator is in the regulator valve body.
14-62
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF p u m p starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn t h r o u g h the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing f r o m the ATF p u m p becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f r o m the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and lock-up control valve, and it is discharged f r o m the torque converter. The torque
converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure f r o m rising.
The PCM switches shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure to the
shift valves. A p p l y i n g shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and switches the
port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C. The A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and applies the pressure to CPC valves A and B, and
reverse CPC valve.
W h e n shifting between gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one of
the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of CPC pressure and
line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and CPC pressure is released. Engaging the clutch w i t h line
pressure mode happens w h e n shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the port for use in the hydraulic circuit:
Port
No.
1
2
3
3'
3"
3A
3B
4
4'
4"
4A
4B
4C
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
5G
5H
5J
5K
5L
5M
5N
6
SA
SB
Hydraulic Pressure
Line
Line
Line
Line
Reverse CPC or Line
Line
Reverse CPC
Line
Line
Line
CPC A
CPCB
CPCC
CPC A
CPC A or Line
CPC B or Line
CPCB
CPCC
CPCC
CPCC
CPC B or Line
CPC B or Line
CPC A or Line
CPC A or Line
Line
CPCC
Modulator
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Port
No.
SC
SC
SD
10
15
20
30
40
50
51
56
57
5R
58
90
90'
91
9V
92
93
94
95
95'
96
99
X
HX
AX
Hydraulic Pressure
Shift solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve D
1st clutch
1st-hold clutch
2nd clutch
3rd clutch
4th clutch
5th clutch
5th clutch
A/T clutch pressure control
AyT clutch pressure control
Torque converter
Torque converter
Torque converter
Torque converter
Torque converter
ATF cooler
Torque converter
Lubrication
Lubrication
Torque converter
Suction
Drain
High position drain
Air drain
solenoid
solenoid
solenoid
solenoid
valve
valve
valve
valve
A
B
B
C
(cont'd)
14-63
N Position
Line pressure (1) reguiated by the regulator valve flows t o the shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and closes shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA); shift valve A stays on the left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and closes shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB); shift valves B and E stay on
the left side.
Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC); shift valves C and D m o v e t o the
right side.
Shift solenoid valve D is OFF, and closes shift solenoid valve D pressure port (SD).
Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) f l o w s
to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The manual valve covers the port leading pressure to the clutches,
and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-64
D Position: 1st gear shifting from the N Position

W h e n shifting to D f r o m N, the condition of the shift solenoid valves remains the same as in N. The manual valve is
m o v e d to the D position, and uncovers the line pressure port (4) leading to CPC valves A and C. The PCM actuates the
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and C, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) flows to
the CPC valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) flows to the CPC valve C. CPC valves A
and C regulate line pressure (4), line pressure (4) becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at CPC valve C, and becomes CPC A
pressure at CPC valve A. CPC C pressure (4C) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve D, and 1st clutch pressure
flows to the 1 st clutch. CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B via shift valves A and C.
The 1st clutch and 2nd clutch engage gently by the CPC pressure.
(cont'd)
14-65
D Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid valve C covers shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC) to
shift valve C and shift valve D via shift valve E. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve B remains
ON. Shift valves C and D are moved to the left side, shift valve D switches the line pressure port (4) and CPC C pressure
port (4C) leading to the 1 st clutch, and shift valve C switches the CPC A pressure port (5A) releasing 2 n d clutch pressure.
Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve D, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged
securely by the line pressure.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-66
D Position: Shifting b e t w e e n 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A O N , and shift solenoid
valve A uncovers shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA) to shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves B and C remain ON.
Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the CPC A pressure port (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch. The PCM
actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is
applied to CPC valve A. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A). CPC
A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B. The
2nd clutch is engaged by the CPC pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the
one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-67
D Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valve C uncovers shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC)
to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the line
pressure port (4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch. CPC A pressure (5B) (5K) changes to line pressure
(5B) (5K) and 2nd clutch pressure (20) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is engaged by the line
pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-68
D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C O N , and shift solenoid
valve C covers shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift
valve C is moved to the left side to switch the line pressure port (4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch.
Shift valve C also uncovers the CPC B pressure port (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A,
and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line
pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B pressure (4B). CPC B pressure flows to shift valve A via shift valves
C and B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is changed to CPC pressure
m o d e , and the 3rd clutch is engaged by the CPC pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted
because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-69
D Position: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF, and shift solenoid valve B uncovers shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB)
to shift valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and C remain ON. Shift valve B is moved to the right side to switch the line
pressure port (5C), CPC B pressure port (5J) leading to the 3rd clutch, and 2nd clutch pressure port (20) releasing 2nd
clutch pressure. CPC B pressure (5J) changes to line pressure (5J) and 3rd clutch pressure (30) is changed to line
pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged by the line pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is
transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-70
D Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid
valve C uncovers shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and shift
solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the line pressure port (4) and CPC B
pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the CPC A pressure port (4A) leading to the 4th clutch.
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (57) is applied to
CPC valve B. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure
(4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd clutch
pressure (30) is changed to CPC pressure, and the 4th clutch is engaged by the CPC pressure. The 1st clutch is also
engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-71
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and shift solenoid valve A covers shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA) to
shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves B and C remain OFF. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch the pressure port
(5B), CPC A pressure ports (5A) (5L) leading to the 4th clutch, and 3rd clutch pressure port (30) releasing 3rd clutch
pressure. CPC A pressure (5L) changes to line pressure (5L) and 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to line pressure, and
the 4th clutch is engaged by the line pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the
one-way clutch.
14-72
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid
valve C covers shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Shift
valve C is moved to the left side to switch the line pressure port (4) and CPC A pressure port (4A) leading to the 4th
clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the CPC B pressure port (4B) leading to the 5th clutch. The PCM actuates A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the
CPC valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve B
regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B pressure (4B). CPC B pressure (4B) flows to shift valve
A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (51) at shift valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed
to CPC pressure, and the 5th clutch is engaged by the CPC pressure. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is
transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-73
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B ON, and shift solenoid valve B covers shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB) to
shift valve B. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve C remains ON. Shift valve B is moved to the
left side to switch the line pressure port (5H), CPC B pressure port (5D) leading to the 5th clutch, and 4th clutch pressure
port (40) releasing 4th clutch pressure. CPC B pressure (5H) changes to line pressure (5H) and 5th clutch pressure (51)
(50) is changed to line pressure, and the 5th clutch is engaged by the line pressure. The 1 st clutch is also engaged, but no
power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-74
2 Position
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM switches the shift solenoid
Shift solenoid valve A is ON, and opens shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA); shift valve A moves to the right side,
and shift valve D remains to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and closes shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB); shift valve B and shift valve E
remain on the left side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and opens shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC); shift valve C moves to the
right side, and shift valve D remains on the left side.
Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B, via shift valves C and A, and
flows to the 2nd clutch. The 2nd clutch is engaged. Line pressure (4) from the manual valve also becomes 1st clutch
pressure, and flows to the 1 st clutch. The 1 st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way
clutch.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
I ACCUMULATOR
, SHIFT SOLENOID
SOLENOID
VALVE C
SOLENOID
VALVEA
HXQQQQ
HX
VALVEB'
AX
(cont'd)
14-75
1 Position
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM switches the shift solenoid
Shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and closes shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA); shift valve A remains on the left
side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and closes shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB); shift valve B and shift valve E
Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and closes shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC); shift valve C and shift valve D
Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve D, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged.
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure (58) is applied to CPC valve C via the lock-up shift valve. CPC valve C regulates line pressure (4), and line
pressure (4) becomes CPC C pressure (4C). CPC C pressure (4C) flows to shift valve B via shift valves D, E, and C, and
becomes 1 st-hold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve B. 1 st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1 st-hold clutch, and
the 1 st-hold clutch is engaged.
14-76
R P o s i t i o n : S h i f t i n g to R f r o m P or N
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of
the shift valves are as follows:
side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and closes shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB); shift valve B and shift valve E
Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC); shift valve C and shift valve D move
to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve D is turned O N , and opens shift solenoid valve D pressure port (SD); reverse control valve moves
to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the R position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) also flows to the reverse CPC valve,
and becomes reverse CPC pressure (3B) (3"). Reverse CPC pressure (3") becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at the manual
valve, and 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch is engaged by the reverse CPC pressure.
(cont'd)
14-77
R Position: Driving in reverse gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A O N , and shift solenoid
valve A uncovers shift solenoid valve A pressure port (SA) to shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to
switch the line pressure port (3') and reverse CPC pressure (3B) leading to the 5th clutch. Line pressure (3) flows to the
manual valve via the servo valve and shift valve A, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at the manual valve. The 5th
clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged by the line pressure.
Reverse Inhibitor Control
W h e n R is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at a speed over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM commands shift
solenoid valve D to remain OFF so that shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) is not applied to the reverse control valve.
Line pressure (3) stops at the reverse control valve, and is not applied to the servo valve. No power is transmitted to the
reverse direction.
14-78
P Position
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of
the shift valves are as follows:
side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and closes shift solenoid valve B pressure port (SB); shift valve B and shift valve E
Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens shift solenoid valve C pressure port (SC); shift valve C and shift valve D move
to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve D is turned ON, and opens shift solenoid valve D pressure port (SD); reverse control valve moves
to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the P position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the
reverse CPC valve and shift valve A, and stops at the manual valve. Hydraulic pressure is not applied the clutches.
14-79
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in the D3 driving mode
(2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the
torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at
the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and amount
of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D pressure
switches the lock-up shift valve on. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, the lock-up control valve, and
lock-up t i m i n g valve control the degree of lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and fluid
entering f r o m the chamber between the p u m p and the stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch piston
against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover; torque
converter clutch lock-up ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same as the engine.
1 Power flow
CLUTCH PISTON
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
Drive plate
i
Torque converter cover
i
COVER
To ATF cooler
INLET t O U T L E T
Torque converter clutch piston

Damper spring
Turbine
MAINSHAFT
Mainshaft
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered f r o m the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out f r o m the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
p u m p and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away f r o m the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; the torque converter clutch lock-up OFF.
TURBINE
I Power flow
The power flows by w a y of:
STATOR
Engine
Drive plate
i
Torque converter cover
i
Pump
COVER
Turbine
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
14-80
PUMP
No Lock-up
The PCM commands shift solenoid valve D to remain OFF, and shift solenoid valve D covers shift solenoid valve D
pressure port (SD) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side, and uncovers torque converter
pressure port (92) leading to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) f r o m regulator valve
becomes torque converter pressure (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side of the torque converter to
disengage the torque converter clutch. The torque converter clutch is OFF.
(cont'd)
14-81
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D O N , and shift solenoid
valve D uncovers shift solenoid valve D pressure port (SD) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve moves to the
left side to uncover torque converter pressure port (91) leading to the right side of the torque converter to engage the
torque converter clutch. The PCM also actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-up t i m i n g valve. When A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is low, torque converter pressure (91) f r o m the lock-up timing valve is
low. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58)
increases, and the lock-up t i m i n g valve is moved to the left side to uncover torque converter pressure port leading to
high. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the right side of the torque
converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
14-82
Full L o c k - u p
When the vehicle speed increases, the PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58). A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is applied to
the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve are m o v e d to
the left side. Torque converter pressure (94) f r o m the left side of the torque converter releases at the lock-up control
valve, and lock-up t i m i n g valve uncovers torque converter pressure port (91) leading to the right side of the torque
converter. Torque converter back pressure is released fully, and torque converter clutch is engaged fully.
14-83
S y s t e m
D e s c r i p t i o n ( c o n t ' d )
Circuit Diagram - PCM A / T Control System

BATTERY
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

h|2
11
22
//
3 4|5|6|7
8 9 |10|
8 9 |10|
h|2
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8| 9|10|
/m
11 12
24
/ 28
29 30 31 32 3334 35B6 37 38 39
/ 24 25 26 27 28
/ 30 / 32 3334 351/ 37 38 39
25
26 27 28
/ /|44|/|46 /
A(49P) (White)
14-84
3 4|5|6|7
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
[40(41
|1|2
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
48|49|
22 23 24
25
|40|41 42 / | / | 4 5 | 4 6
26
/ /M
B(49P)A (Gray)
22
16 1718 19 20 21
|40|41 42 43|44|/|46 47 48|49|

C(49P) o (Green)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE(PCM)
To 12 V
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(DLC)
A32, SCS
C21
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
LSA
2
-BLK
LSB
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
B10
- BRN/WHT -
To5V
-o-YEL/RED-
B36 VCC1
BLU
B38
NC
C16
SG2
-GRN/YEL -
-GRN/YEL-
- BLK-
H^LSC
0P2SW
J=
PNKBRN-
- BLU/YEL-
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C
- GRN/RED-
GRN/YEL
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

G101
C27
- BLU/BLK-
C33 TATF
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
0P3SW
C38
- BLU/WHT4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

0P4SW
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
- YEL/BLU -
C12 VCC2
RED
B37
- GRN/RED-
C15
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

-YEL
SG6
UP-
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
B40
PG1
B1
PG2
C41
LG1
B41
-BRN/YEL-
-BLU/YEL-
SHA
SHB
-BRN/YEL-
C37
C28
- GRN/WHT -
RED
'7RT
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

SHC
-GRN -
W-
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
IT'
ORN
G101

3 4 | 5 | 6 [ 7 8 | 9 |10|
h | 2
/ 13 1415 2516 1718 2619 2720 2821

22 24
11
/ >^
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
/|44|/|46
A(49P) H (White)
48|49|
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|
11 12 13 1415 16
19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35f36 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6
//M
B(49P)A (Gray)
|1|2
11 12
3 4 | 5 | 6 | T 8 9|10|
/24 M 1625 1718 2619 2027 2821
/ ><33 34 35L> 37 38 39
/ 30 / 3243|44|/J46
22
|40|41 42
47 48|49|
C(49P)0 (Green)
14-85
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P062F: Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory
(KAM) Error
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5).
3. Check whether DTC P062F is indicated in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu w i t h the
HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicated in the PGM-FI
system?
Y E S - G o to the DTC P062F troubleshooting in the

PGM-FI s y s t e m . B
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicated in the A/T
SYSTEM?
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were
troubleshooting.
(see page 11-7).
6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes.
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicated in the A/T
SYSTEM?

NO-Go to step 8.
14-86
8. Monitor the OBD status for P062F in the DTCs MENU

w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate
PASSED?

or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM
substituted, go to step 2. If the HDS indicates NOT
3
DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
NOTE:
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
3. With the brake pedal pressed, m o v e the shift lever
t h r o u g h all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position, and monitor the OBD status for P0705
in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED?

YES-Go to step 4.
N O - l f the HDS indicates PASSED, Intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check for an intermittent
short in the wire between the transmission range
switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.
7. Check the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, ATP2, A T P 1 ,

ATPFWD, and ATPRVS inputs w i t h the HDS in the A/T
Data List.
Are there any ON-inputs?

YES-Repair short in the ON-input circuit:
ATPP circuit: between PCM connectorterminal A16
and transmission range switch connectorterminal
No. 7.
ATPR circuit: between PCM connectorterminal C25
No. 8.
ATPN circuit: between PCM connectorterminal C26
No. 3.
ATPD circuit: between PCM connectorterminal C17
No. 9.
ATP2 circuit: between PCM connectorterminal C46
No.4.
ATP1 circuit: between PCM connectorterminal C35
No. 10.
ATPFWD circuit: between PCM connectorterminal
C18 and transmission range switch connector
terminal No. 5.
ATPRVS circuit: between PCM connectorterminal
C19 and transmission range switch connector
terminal No. 2.
Go to step 15 after repairing the circuit.
9. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-263).
Is the transmission range switch OK?

YES-Connect the transmission range switch
connector, then go to step 10.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch (see page
(cont'd)
14-87
(see page 11-7).
12. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
Is DTC P0705
indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections and loose terminals

at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs MENU
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the transmission
range switch and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
17. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
18. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Menu w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0705
indicated?
YES-Replace the transmission range switch (see

NO-Go to step 19.
14-88
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs

were indicated on step 18, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
range switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to the step 16.
0
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit
NOTE:
7. Connect the transmission range switch connector

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and verify the
ATPFWD input in the A/T Data List.
TRANSMISSION R A N G E SWITCH CONNECTOR

ATPFWD (BLU/YEL) I

transmission.
1 2
9 10
5
J
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely

supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
3. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA
OFF button, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever to D,
until the vehicle speed reaches 25 m p h (40 km/h), then
slow d o w n , and stop the wheels.
4. Verify the ATPFWD input w i t h the HDS in the A/T Data
List while the shift lever is in D, 2, and 1.
Is ATPFWD
ON in all D, 2, and 1 ?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time.B
NO-Go to step 5.
J U M P E R WIRE
Is ATPFWD
ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM connector
terminal C18 and the transmission range switch, then
go to step 15.
9. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connectorterminal No. 6 and body ground.

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 2
9 10
! GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the transmission
range switch and ground (G101), or repair poor
(cont'd)
14-89
10. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-263).
Is the transmission range switch OK?
YES-Connectthe transmission range switch

Is DTC P0706
indicated?
11. Update PCM if it does not have the latest software

(see page 11-7).

at the transmission range switch and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.

Is DTC P0706
indicated?

at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
14-90
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature

Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
transmission.
1. Check the ATF temperature w i t h the HDS in the A/T
Data List.
Does the ATF temperature indicate 4F (20C) or
below?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 4.
(the radiator fan comes on).
3. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS in the A/T
Data List.
Does the ATF temperature remain 4F (20C) or
below?
YES-Replace the ATF temperature sensor (see page
NO-Check for poor connections and loose terminals
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the
connection is OK, go to step 7.
4. Check the ATF temperature w i t h the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature exceed
230F (110C)?
YES-Go to step 5.

(the radiator fan comes on), then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0), and leave it off until the engine
coolant cools to the outside air temperature (the ECT
SENSOR reads the same as the outside air
temperature).
6. Check the ATF temperature w i t h the HDS in the A/T
Data List.
Does the ATF temperature remain 230F (110C) or
higher?
(see page 11-7).
seconds, then start the engine. W a r m the engine up to
normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on).
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and leave it off
until the engine coolant cools to the outside air
temperature (the ECT SENSOR reads the same as the
outside air temperature).
comes on). Start off in D, accelerate w i t h the throttle
opened at least 4 degrees, and run the vehicle at
speeds above 19 m p h (30 km/h) for at least 5 minutes.
Or test-drive the vehicle for at least 20 seconds while
the ATF temperature reads - 4 F to 230F ( - 2 0 C to
110C) by monitoring with the HDS. Slow d o w n , and
stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0711
indicated?

NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
14-91
with the H D S .
PASSED?

were indicated in step 12, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!
IMO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
intermittent short to body ground in the wire between
the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 8.
seconds, then start the engine.Warm the engine up to
comes on).
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and leave it off
until the engine coolant cools to the outside air
temperature (the ECT SENSOR reads the same as the
outside air temperature).
comes on). Start off in D, accelerate w i t h the throttle
opened at least 4 degrees, and run the vehicle at
speeds above 19 m p h (30 km/h) for at least 5 minutes.
Or test-drive the vehicle for at least 20 seconds while
the ATF temperature reads - 4 F to 230F ( - 2 0 C to
110C) by monitoring w i t h the HDS. Slow d o w n , and
stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0711
indicated?

at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
14-92
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor

Circuit
NOTE:
9. Check for continuity between ATF temperature sensor

connectorterminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
A T F T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R CONNECTOR

transmission.
T A T F (BLU/YEL)
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage w i t h the

HDS in the A/T Data List.
Is the ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 Vor
less?
YES-Go to step 2.
Check for an intermittent short to ground in the w i r e
between the ATF temperature sensor and the P C M . H
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between PCM connector

terminal C33 and ATF temperature sensor connector
terminal No. 2, then go to step 15.
3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
NO-Go to step 10.

HDS.
(see page 11-7).
Is the ATF Temp Sensor (V) 0.07 Vor
less?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor (see page
12. With the shift lever in P, turn the ignition switch t o ON

(II), and wait for at least 20 seconds. Then start the
engine, and wait for at least 10 seconds.
Is DTC P0712

indicated?
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
14-93
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
N O - l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 12.
17. With the shift lever in P, turn the ignition switch to ON
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs.
Is DTC P0712
indicated?

to step 1.
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor

Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
HDS in the A/T data list.
Does the ATF Temp Sensor (v) exceed
4.93 V?
YES-Go to step 2.
ATF temperature sensor and the P C M . !
3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
4. Connnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
terminal No. 2 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the ATF
temperature sensor voltage w i t h the HDS in the A/T
Data List.
ATF T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R CONNECTOR
19. Monitor the OBD status for P0712 in the DTCs Menu
w i t h the HDS.
T A T F (BLU/YEL)
PASSED?
J U M P E R WIRE

troubleshooting.!
N O - l f the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the
Is the ATF Temp sensor (V) drop to 0.07 V or below?

YES-Go to step 5.
14-94
5. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector


C33 and ATF temperature sensor connector terminal
No. 2.
A T F T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R CONNECTOR
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
CONNECTOR
1
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
T A T F (BLU/YEL)
TATF
(BLU/YEL)
J U M P E R WIRE
TATF
(BLU/YEL)

Does the ATF Temp sensor (V) remain 0.07 V or below?
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between PCM connector
terminal C16 and the ATF temperature sensor
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals
connections are OK, go to step 11.
terminal C33 and the ATF temperature sensor, then
go to step 16.
11. Connect all connectors.
(see page 11-7).
13. With the shift lever in P, turn the ignition switch to ON
Is DTC P0713
indicated?

(cont'd)
14-95
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o
step 13.
16. Connect PCM connector C (49P).
17. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
19. W i t h the shift lever in P, turn the ignition switch to ON
is DTC P0713
indicated?

to step 1.
NO-Go to step 2 f t
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
14-96
DTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft)

Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
NOTE:
# Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
transmission.
2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
installation (see page 14-201). If the sensor w a s
installed improperly, correct the problem, then go to
step 42.
OFF button, run the vehicle in either 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or
5th gear (not 1st) in D at speeds above 12 m p h (20
km/h) for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the
wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 or P0717 in the
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
2 1 . Monitor the OBD status for P0713 in the DTCs MENU

w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft)

Speed Sensor Circuit
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,

the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for loose or poor
connections at the PCM and input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT
8. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
<3
terminals B41 and body g r o u n d , and between C41
and body g r o u n d .
C (49P)
4 | 5 | 6 | 78
9|10|
I1I2
11 12
/ 28
>^
32 B3 34 35B6 37 38 39
22
25
/1/|45|46
26
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
3 4|5|6|7
14f!5 16 17118 19 20 21
30
/24 M
/

C12 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
B(49P)
8 9|10|
16 1718 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
INPUT S H A F T
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
32 B3 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
|40|41 42 43|44L/|46 47 48|49j
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)

Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM connector

terminals B41, C41 and ground (G101), or repair poor
YES-Go to step 35.
10. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).

11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body
ground.
Wire side of
female terminals

terminal C12 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 40.
INPUT S H A F T (MAINSHAFT)
S P E E D S E N S O R CONNECTOR
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
14-97
2 1 . Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.

speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.


NM (RED)
S G 6 (GRN/RED)
NM (RED)

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the w i r e between

PCM connectorterminal B37 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to step
40.
NO-Go to step 27.

NO-Go to step 22.

INPUT S H A F T
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
SG6
(GRN/RED)
SG6
(GRN/RED)
| 1 | 2 3 4 |! | 6 | 7 8 9|10|
15 16 1718 19 20 21
11 12
/ /I 25 26 27 28
/30 24 ^<
33 34 35L> 37 38 39
/ 42/ 3243|44|/|46
J40J41
47 48|49|
22
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals

B37 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
| 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9|10|
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22 23 24
>^ 25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 p 34 35 B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6
/ /I 1
49
2 3
NM (RED)
NM (RED)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 35.
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal C15, then go to step 40.

terminal B37 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
3 1 . Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

connector.
14-98
<2
wheels.
FAILED?
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

(see page 14-201), then go to step 4 1 .
NO-Go to step 38.
(see page 11-7).
wheels.
Is DTC P0716 or P0717
indicated?


4 1 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
wheels.
indicated?

at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
NO-Go to step 44.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 42.
NO-Go to step 39.

PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, to
step 37.
14-99
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed
Sensor Intermittent Failure
NOTE:

12. Check f o r continuity between PCM connector

transmission.
B(49P)
I U
3 4|5|6|7
11 12 13
2. Test-drive the vehicle w i t h the shift lever in D, and let

the transmission shift t h r o u g h all five gears at speeds
above 12 m p h (20 km/h).
C (49P)
22 23 24
IT?
9 |10|
16
19 20 21
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 52(33 34 35(36 37 38 39
I
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
|40|41 42 /1/145I46
| i |
3 4|5|6|7
11 12
22
/24
/ /
30
9|10|
16 1718 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
32B3 34 35|/ 37 38 39
IE3EDC3CE]E3l5kE3[EIEE3l
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
3. Monitor the OBD status f o r P0718 in the DTCs MENU

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
the system is OK at this time. Check f o r poor
connections or loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the HDS
connector, and inspect the connector and connector
terminals t o be sure they are making good contact.
Are the input shaft (mainshaft speed sensor)
terminals OK?
connector
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to step 6.
6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, troubleshooting is
complete. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 7.
14-100
terminals B41, C41 and g r o u n d (G101), or repair poor
ground (G101),then g o t o step36.
connector.
G0
speed sensor c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body
ground.

speed sensor connectorterminal No. 2 and body
ground.

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
NM (RED)
Is there about 5 V?
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

NO-Go to step 28.

20. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
NM (RED)
NO-Go to step 24.

B37 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
h|2
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 J 9 |10|
11 12 13
16 17|1819 20 21
22 23 24
>^ 25
/ 28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35|36 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6 >
NM (RED)
NM (RED)
YES-Repair short to body g r o u n d in the w i r e between
PCM connector terminal B37 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to step
36.
NO-Go to step 2 1 .
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
terminal B37 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
2 1 . Connect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)
14-101
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)
| 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9|10|
11 12
16 1718 19 20 21
/24 A*
22
30
25
/ 32 33 34 3 5 ^
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
26 27 28
37 38 39
|40|41 42 43|44|/|46 47 48|49|
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
go to step 33.

terminal C12 and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed


(see page 11-7).
the transmission shift through all five gears at speeds
Is DTC P0718
Indicated?

Is DTC P0718
indicated?

at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
NO-Go to step 40.
with the HDS.
PASSED?


troubleshooting.!
NO-Go to step 35.

(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 38.
14-102
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft

(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit

DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft

(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No
Signal Input)
B (49P)
NOTE:
h|2

transmission.
C (49P)
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 78
9|10|
11 12 13 14H5 16 17(18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35 B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / | / 1 4 5 | 4 6
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
I1I2
3 4|5|6|7
11 12
22
9|10|
/24 y]i5 2516 1718 1926 2720 2821

>s
/ 30 32 b 34 35I? 37 38 39
Mil 42 43|44L/|46 47 48|49|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)

2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-202). Ifthe sensor is
installed improperly, correct p r o b l e m , then go t o
step 42.
5th gear (not 1st) in D w i t h the engine speed at 2,000
rpm or higher, for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
FAILED?
YES-Go t o step 6.
the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the PCM and output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connectors. I f t h e HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 4.
YES-Go t o step 10.
ground (G101), then go t o step 40.
11. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
13. Measure the voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connectorterminal No. 1

VCC1 (YEL/RED)

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
14-103
21. Check for continuity between output shaft

B36 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
O U T P U T S H A F T (COUNTERSHAFT)
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
NC (BLU)
11 | 2 I 3J4 15 | 6 | 7 | 8 J9 |10
|11|12|13 14]l5jl6|l7|l8 l i p o p i
23p4><^25 ^ ^ 2 6
-
728
29 3 ^ 3 2 p 34 35p6 37 38 39
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
|40|4l|42|/^45|4b[/i/|
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 35.
terminal B36 and the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor, then go to step 40.

PCM connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go t o
step 40.
C16 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
|1|2
3 4|5|6|7
9|10|
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
22 23 24
>5
A/
]45|46
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32133 54 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 42
/ /49
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connectorterminal C16, then go to step 40.
14-104

(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
O U T P U T S H A F T (COUNTERSHAFT)
OFF button, run the vehicle in either 2 n d , 3rd, 4th, or
r p m or higher, for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS
NC (BLU)
FAILED?
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-202), then go t o step 40.
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)
NO-Go to step 36.

(see page 11-7).
Is there about 5 V?
OFF button, run the vehicle in either 2 n d , 3rd, 4th, or
r p m or higher, for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
NO-Go to step 27.

|1|2
3 4 |5 |6 | 7 8
11 12 13 14H5 16
22 23 24
9 Ho I
19 2 0 21
25
X 26, ^28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35 B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42L/L/|45|46
OUTPUT S H A F T
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 39.

PASSED?
3
NC(BLU)
NC (BLU)
Terminal side of
female terminals

PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1.

1
indicated?
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go t o step 35.
speed sensor, then go t o step 40.

were indicated o n step 38, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check f o r poor
connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM w a s substituted,
go t o step 37.
3 1 . Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor

connector.
(cont'd)
14-105
40. Reconnect alf connectors.
rpm or higher, for at least 10 seconds. S l o w d o w n and
stop the wheels.
Indicated?

at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
NO-Go to step 44.
DTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft)

Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure
NOTE:
transmission.
the transmission shift through all five gears under the
same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data.
3. Monitor the OBD status for P0723 in the DTCs M E N U
w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS Indicate
Does the HDS Indicate
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 42.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 4.
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the HDS
sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making g o o d
contact.
Are the output shaft (countershaft) speed
connector terminals OK?
sensor
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to step 6.
6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connector.
the transmission shift through all five gears w i t h the
engine speed at 2,000 r p m or higher, for several
minutes.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, troubleshooting is
complete. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 7.
14-106


and body ground.

VCC1 (YEL/RED)
B (49P)
C(49P)
hoi
l 2 3 4 |5 |6 | 7 8 9
11 12 13 14H5 16 17H8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
29 30 31 52 f33 34 35
|40|41 42
26
/ 28
be37 38 39
/1/]45|46
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
|1|2
3 4
11 12
22
/30
/24
IS|6
| 78
9|10|
16 1718 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
37 38 39
34
/ 42/ 32B3
J40J41
4 3 J 4 4 J / I 4 6 47 48]49|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go t o step 17.
NO-Go t o step 27.
YES-Go t o step 13.

ground (G101), then g o t o step36.
20. Check for continuity between output shaft

and body ground.

sensor connector.
OUTPUT S H A F T (COUNTERSHAFT)

NC (BLU)
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire between
PCM connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go t o
step 36.
N O - G o t o step 2 1 .
2 1 . Connect PCM connector B (49P).
(cont'd)
14-107

OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR

| l | 2 |, 3J4 15 \6 | 7 18 |9"|l0[
14|15|16|17|1819|20|21
2 3 B 4 ^ ^ 25^X^26
NC (BLU)
29 30|31|32|33|34|35|36 37 38 39
2 3
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
40I41I42I/VI45
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
\
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-202), then go t o step 36.
NO-Go to step 24.


EK38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
| 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 hol
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0723
1 2 3
^28
29 30 31 32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6

speed sensor, then go t o step 36.
NC(BLU)
/|49|
NC (BLU)
indicated?

known-good PCM (see page 11-7),then recheck. I f t h e
NO-Go to step 35.
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go t o step 3 1 .
speed sensor, then go to step 36.
14-108
Wire side of
female terminals
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
go to step 33.
the transmission shift through all five gears at speeds
Is DTC P0723

2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the proper
level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-209) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
material?
clutch
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 1 1 .

NO-Replace the ATF (see step 6 on page 14-209), then
go to step 4.
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the line pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
indicated?

at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
NO-Go to step 40.
NO-Repair the ATF p u m p and the regulator valve, or

replace the transmission, then go to step 1 1 .
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the 1st clutch pressure
w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st

Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves B and C are stuck. Repair these
valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 1 1 .

(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 38.
(cont'd)
14-109
7. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in D, at speeds over

7 m p h (12 km/h), and for at least 12 seconds. If the
vehicle does not accelerate f r o m a stop in 1st gear:
W i t h the brake pedal pressed, press the accelerator
pedal for 5 seconds at about 3 % opened-throttle, then
release the accelerator until the engine speed comes
d o w n below 1,000 r p m . Release the brake pedal, and
test-drive the vehicle 1st gear for at least 1 second,
then press the accelerator pedal so that the
transmission upshifts to 2nd gear, then 3rd gear. Slow
d o w n and stop the wheels.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in D, at speeds over 7

m p h (12 km/h), and for at least 12 seconds. If the
vehicle does not accelerate f r o m a stop in 1st gear:
With the brake pedal pressed, press the accelerator
pedal for 5 seconds at about 3 % opened-throttle, then
release the accelerator until the engine speed comes
d o w n below 1,000 r p m . Release the brake pedal, and
test-drive the vehicle 1st gear for at least 1 second,
transmission upshifts to 2nd gear, then 3rd gear. Slow
d o w n and stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0731
Is DTC P0731
indicated?
YES-Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the

transmission, then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

If any other DTCs were indicated in step 8, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !
(mainshaft) speed sensor, the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, and the PCM, then
recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 7.
14-110
indicated?

at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
(countershaft) speed sensor, and the PCM, then go to
step 11.
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd

material?
clutch
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11.

go to step 4.
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair these
valves and the related hydraulic circuit, or replace the
7. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D at speeds
above 7 m p h (12 km/h) for at least 12 seconds.

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

step 7.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D at speeds
above 7 m p h (12 km/h) for at least 12 seconds.
Is DTC P0732
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
step 4. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o
step 11.

Is DTC P0732
indicated?
YES-Repair the 2nd clutch, or replace the

NO-Go to step 9.
14-111
DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd
material?
clutch

go to step 4.
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
MO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair these
7. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D at speeds above
7 m p h (12 km/h) for at least 12 seconds.
Is DTC P0733
indicated?
YES-Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the

NIO-Go to step 9.
14-112

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

recheck. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 7.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D at speeds above
Is DTC P0733
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.B
step 4. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 11.
DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th

material?
clutch

go to step 4.
within the sen/ice
limits?

w i t h the HDS
PASSED?

step 7.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D at speeds above
7 mph (12 km/h) for at least 12 seconds.
Is DTC P0734
indicated?

go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the 4th clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair these
7 mph (12 km/h) for at least 12 seconds.
NO-Go to step 13.

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
step 1 1 .

Is DTC P0734
indicated?
YES-Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the

NO-Go to step 9.
14-113
DTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
material?
clutch

go to step 4.
Is the line pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
replace the transmission, then go to step 1 1 .
Is.the 5th clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
MO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair these
valves and the related hydraulic circuit, replace the
transmission, then go to step 1 1 .
Is DTC P0735
indicated?
YES-Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the

NO-Go to step 9.
14-114

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

recheck. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 7.
Is DTC P0735
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.B
step 4. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 1 1 .
DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch

Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF
8. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road w i t h a steady

throttle at 60 m p h (96 km/h) for at least 22 seconds, or
test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
w i t h the HDS.


YES-Repair the torque converter clutch hydraulic

c i r c u i t lock-up shift valve, or lock-up control valve, or
replace the torque converter, then go to step 1 1 .

material?
clutch

go to step 4.
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that the shift solenoid valve D
operates w i t h the HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?

the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
(see page 14-196).
Does A/T clutch pressure
properly?
control solenoid valve C work
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related to the

lock-up shift valve, lock-up control valve, and lock-up
t i m i n g valve, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
NO-Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C (see page 14-199), then g o t o step 11.
YES-Go t o step 6.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-184),
then go to step 12.
6. Run the engine until the engine coolant temperature
reaches 176 F (80 C).
7. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the
HDS.
FAILED?
NORMAL?
YES-Go t o step 8.
12. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road w i t h a steady

throttle at 60 mph (96 km/h) for at least 22 seconds, or
test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
with the HDS.
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . !
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, recheck previous
repair work, then return t o step 4. If the HDS indicates
NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS by

the test result, but if the HDS has not determined the
cause of the failure, g o t o step 10. If any p a r t i s
replaced, go to step 1 1 .
14-115
9. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
(see page 14-188).
DTC P0746: A/T Clutch Pressure Control

Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF

properly?

Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-209) t h r o u g h a
material?
clutch

go to step 4.
5. Test-drive the vehicle w i t h the shift lever in D for at
least 20 seconds, and let the transmission shift
through all five gears.
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A w i t h the
HDS.
NORMAL?

time.B
MO-Followthe instructions indicated on the HDS by
the test result, but i f t h e HDS has not determined the
cause of the failure, go to step 9. If any part is
14-116
control solenoid valve A work
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related w i t h shift

valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve A (see page 14-194), then go to step 11.
t h r o u g h all five gears.
PASSED?
repair work, then go to step 7. Ifthe HDS indicates
DTC P0751: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF

DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON

FAILED?

YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the transmission,



the system is OK at this time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT

material?
clutch

go to step 4.

PASSED?


repair work, then go to step 7. Ifthe HDS indicates

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that shift solenoid valve A
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the shift solenoid valve A (see page
14-117
DTC P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON

FAILED?

YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the transmission,

then go to step 12.



material?
clutch

go to step 4.

PASSED?


repair work, then go to step 7. If the HDS indicates

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that shift solenoid valve B
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-184),
then go to step 12.
14-118
DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF

DTC P0762: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON

FAILED?

YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the transmission,

then go to step 12.



material?
clutch

go to step 4.

DTCs MENU with the HDS.
PASSED?



FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Select Shift Solenoid Valve C in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that shift solenoid valve C
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-184),
then go to step 12.
14-119
DTC P0766: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF
DTC P0767: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record ail freeze data

FAILED?

YES-Repair shift valve D, or replace the transmission,

then go to step 12.



material?
clutch

MO-Replace the ATF (see step 6 on page 14-209), then
g o t o step4.

PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e d


repair work, then go to step 7. I f t h e HDS indicates

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
Test M e n u , and check that shift solenoid valve D
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-184),
then go to step 12.
14-120
9. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

(see page 14-191).

Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
Does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B work

properly?

Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
material?
clutch

go to step 4.

valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve B (see page 14-194), then go to step 11.
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.B

FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
NORMAL?

time.B
the test result, but i f t h e HDS has not determined the
14-121
(see page 14-196).

Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
material?
clutch

properly?
control solenoid valve C work

valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve C (see page 14-199), then go to step 11.
the transmission shift t h r o u g h all five gears.
w i t h the HDS.

go to step 4.

5. Start the engine.With the brake pedal pressed, shift to
D, and w a i t for at least 3 seconds, then shift to R. Drive
the vehicle for at least 3 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C w i t h the
HDS.
NORMAL?

N O - F o l l o w t h e instructions indicated on the HDS by
the test result but if the HDS has not determined the
14-122
PASSED?


(see page 14-196).

Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
material?
clutch

go to step 4.
Does AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C work

properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve C (see page 14-199),then g o t o step 11.
11. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D for at
12. Monitor the OBD status for or P0797 in the DTCs
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting i s c o m p l e t e . B

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
HDS.
NORMAL?

the test result, but if the HDS has not determined the
14-123
Switch ATPR Switch Circuit
NOTE:
7. Measure the voltage between transmission range

switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 8.

transmission.
1 2
9 10
6
GND (BLK)
ATPR (WHT)
2. Shift to R, and check the A/T R Switch signal w i t h the

Is the A/T R Switch ON?

time.B
Is there around battery
NO-Go to step 3.

go to step 14.
voltage?
YES-Go to step 8.

switch connectorterminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .

switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 8 while the
shift lever is in R, and w h e n the shift lever is shifted t o
any position other than R.

1 2
9 10
5
1 2
9 10
GND (BLK)
GND
ATPR

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connectorterminal No. 6 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 14.
14-124
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in R, and no

continuity when the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than R?
YES-Go to step 9.
9. Connect the transmission range switch connector.

(see page 11-7).
11. Test-drive the vehicle in R at speeds below 3 m p h
(5 km/h) for at least 2 seconds, then increase the
speed and test-drive at speeds over 3 m p h (5 km/h) for
at least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0812
indicated?
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
range switch and the PCM, then go t o step 1. I f t h e

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. I f t h e
NO-Go to step 13.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

complete. I f t h e PCM was substituted, replace the
troubleshooting.!
range switch and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 1 1 .
16. Test-drive the vehicle in R at speeds below 3 m p h
(5 km/h) for at least 2 seconds, then increase the
speed and test-drive at speeds over 3 m p h (5 km/h) for
at least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0812
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
14-125
DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck ON

NOTE:

f,
\i
r\
| 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 |10|
11 12
16 1718 19 20 21
27 28
/30 /24 32 33 3425 3 5 ^ 2637 <8
39
/
/
|40|41 42 431441/| 46 47 4 9

transmission.
22
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
2. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal w i t h the HDS in

the A/T Data List w h e n not in 2nd gear.
Is the 2nd Pressure
Switch
OFF?
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Repair short t o body ground in the w i r e between

PCM connector terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go t o step 19.
3. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal operating

temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
4. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D for at least
2 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go t o step 6.
the system is OK at this t i m e . Check the OP2SW wire
for an intermittent short t o ground in the wire
between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector.
9. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal w i t h the HDS in
the A/T Data List.
Is the 2nd Pressure
Switch
OFF?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (see page 14-203), then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 10.
14-126
NO-Go to step 14.

(see page 11-7).
16. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D for at least
2 seconds, then press the accelerator pedal so that the
transmission upshifts to 3rd gear, then 4th gear. Drive
for at least 2 seconds in each gear.
Is DTC P0842
indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.
18. M o n i t o r the OBD status for P0842 in the DTCs MENU

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
transmission f l u i d pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe
page 11-7), then recheck. I f t h e PCM was substituted,
go to step 16.
2 1 . Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D for at least
22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS
Is DTC P0842
indicated?

at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then
go to step 1. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 2 1 .
DTC P0843: Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission

Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck
OFF
3. Shift to 2 while pressing the brake pedal, and verify
w i t h the HDS in the A/T Data List that the SHIFT
C O M M A N D indicates 2nd.
4. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in
the A/T Data List.
Is the 2nd Pressure
Switch ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in D for at least
2 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 8.
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe
7. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-180).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair shift valves A, B, and C, and related
hydraulic circuit, or replace the transmission, then go
to step 23.
switch connector.
(cont'd)
14-127
11. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector
terminal and body g r o u n d .
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID

P R E S S U R E SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)

(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0843
indicated?

NO-Go to step 20.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-203), then go to step 2 1 .
NO-Go to step 12.
C27 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connectorterminal.
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the
go to step 18.
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals

Is DTC P0843
indicated?
YES-Go to step 16.
terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch, then go to step 2 1 .
14-128

at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
NO-Go to step 25.
with the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
go to step 23.
DTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission

Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in
the A/T Data List when not in 3rd gear.
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating
4. Test-drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D for at least
2 seconds.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
the system is OK at this time. Check the OP3SW wire
for an intermittent short to ground in the wire
between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
7. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector.
9. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in
the A/T Data List.
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OFF?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
14-129
|1|2
22
=r\
16 1718 19 20 21
24
30
|1
i i
4 | 5 3 7 8 9|10|
11 12
25
with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
troubleshooting.!
26 27 28
/ 32 33 34 35L> 37 38 39
|40|41 42 43|44|/|46 47 48|49|
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)

connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
go to step 16.
te there continuity?
PCM connector terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 14.
(see page 11-7).
16. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D for at least
transmission upshifts to 4th gear, and drive for at
least 2 seconds.

least 2 seconds.
at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
NO-Go to step 23.
with the HDS.


troubleshooting.!
NO-Go to step 18.

go to step 21.
14-130
DTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission

Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
OFF
11. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch

3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID


OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
2. Start the engine, and w a r m it up t o normal operating

3. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D, and verify w i t h
the HDS in the A/T Data List that the SHIFT
C O M M A N D indicates 3rd.
4. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch signal w i t h the HDS in
the A/T Data List.
Is the 3rd Pressure
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Switch ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in D for at least

2 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?

C38 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connectorterminal.
YES-Go to step 8.
connections or loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
| 1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9ho|
11 12
16 1718 19 20 21
22 24
25
26 27 28
/
^<
/ 32 3334 35b> 4737 38 39
|40|41 42
30
7. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-180).

Is the 3rd clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
43|44L/|46
4 9
H l
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP3SW
(BLU/WHT)
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair shift valves A, B, and C, and related
to step 22.
switch connector.
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 16.
terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch, then go t o step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
14-131
(see page 11-7).
least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0848
indicated?

NO-Go t o step 20.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
troubleshooting.!
go to step 18.
^
least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0848
indicated?
Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections and loose terminals

at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
NO-Go t o step 25.
14-132
25. Monitor the OBD status for P0848 in the DTCs M E N U

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other DTCs

troubleshooting.!
go t o step 1. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 23.
DTC P0872: Short in 4th Clutch Transmission

Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit or 4th Clutch

NOTE:

h | 2 3 4 | 5 [ 6 | 7 I1 9|10|
16 17|1819 2021
11 12
/ 25 6 2728
/30 24 M
>^ 351/3 7 38 39
/ / 32 3334 >#
|40|41 42
7 48|49|

transmission.
22
43|44|/|46 i
OP4SW ( B L U / Y E L )

2. Check the 4th Pressure Switch signal w i t h the HDS in
the A/T Data List w h e n not in 4th gear.
Is the 4th Pressure
Switch
OFF?
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Repair short t o body ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminal C37 and the 4th clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go t o step 19.

2 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go t o step 6.
the system is OK at this time. Check the OP4SW wire
for an intermittent short t o ground in the wire
between the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch and the PCM. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go t o step 4.
7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector.
NO-Go to step 14.

(see page 11-7).
16. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D for at least 2 seconds,
transmission upshifts t o 5th gear, and drive for at
least 2 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0872
indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.

the A/T Data List.
Is the 4th Pressure
Switch
OFF?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid

NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
14-133
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
g o t o step 16.
2 1 . Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D for at least 2 seconds,
least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0872
indicated?

at the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
and the PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete, if any other DTCs

troubleshooting.!
g o t o step 2 1 .
DTC P0873: Open in 4th Clutch Transmission

Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
OFF
3. Test-drive the vehicle in 4th gear in D, and verify w i t h
the HDS in the A/T Data List that the SHIFT
C O M M A N D indicates 4th.
the A/T Data List.
Is the 4th Pressure
Switch
ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
2 seconds.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 8.
connections or loose terminals at the 4th clutch
Is the 4th clutch pressure
within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair shift valves A, B, C, and D, and related
to step 22.
switch connector.
14-134
11. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch

4TH C L U T C H TRANSMISSION FLUID

OP4SW (BLU/YEL)

(see page 11-7).
least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0873
indicated?

NO-Go to step 20.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
C37 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector terminal.
7J7
4 I 5[6|7 8
16|17|1819
43|44l/l46
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
go t o step 18.
48|49|

OP4SW
(BLU/YEL)
OP4SW (BLU/YEL)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there

28
32|33|34|35|/]37 38
40141
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of
female terminals

transmission upshifts t o 5th gear, and drive for at
least 2 seconds.
Is DTC P0873
indicated?
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 16.
terminal C37 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch, then go to step 2 1 .
Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections and loose terminals

at the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
14-135
w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0962: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
NOTE:

were indicated o n step 24, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!


connections and loose terminals at t h e 4th clutch
go t o step 23.

transmission.
1. Clear t h e DTC w i t h t h e HDS.
2. Start the engine, and w a i t for at least 1 second.

NO-Go t o step 4.
Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A w i t h the
HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?

NO-Go to step 7.
5. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Control
m e n u , select A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A at 1.0 A.
w i t h the HDS.

the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for poor
connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. I f t h e
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 4.
8. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
14-136
9. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.

C21 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
A / T CLUTCH P R E S S U R E CONTROL
SOLENOID V A L V E A CONNECTOR
CONTROL SOLENOID
V A L V E A CONNECTOR
L S A (RED)
I
>
Is there
3-10Q?
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Check for open or short in the wire between PCM

connectorterminal C21 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A, if the wiring is OK, go to
step 25.
10. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.

control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 25.

PCM connectorterminal C21 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A, then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
14-137
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n
terminals B2 and B41 or C41.
V B S O L (BLK/YEL)
C (49P)
BJ49P)
I1I2
3 4 |5 |6 | 7 8
9|10|
11 1213 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
/ 28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35 f36 37 38 39
22 2 324
26
25
|40(41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6
22. Start the engine, and wait f o r at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0962
32|33 34 3 5 | / 3 7 38
421431441/146"
48149
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)

(see page 11-7).
23. Check f o r Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
4|S|8|7
7p5[l6
16 17 18
22 724
6b-
indicated?

PCM was substituted, g o to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
Is there battery
24. Monitor the OBD status f o r P0962 in t h e DTCs MENU

w i t h t h e HDS.
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 20.

and body ground.
C (49P)
B (49P)
|2
3 4|5|6|7
9I10I
11 12 13 14M5 16 17M8 19 20 21
22 23 24
X
/I/I45I46
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35J36 37 38 39
|40|41 42
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
3 4|5|6|7
|,|2
11 12
/24
8 9|10|
16 1718 19 20 21
22
/30 32B3 2534 2637 2738 2839
/
/
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / J 4 6 47 48|49|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
PASSED?

complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace t h e
were indicated o n step 23, g o t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the
go t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go t o step 22.
27. Start the engine, and wait f o r at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0962
Y E S - C h e c k f o r a b l o w n No.3 (10 A) fuse in the
open in the wire between PCM connectorterminal B2
and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 25.
terminals B41, C41, and g r o u n d (G101), or repair poor
ground (G101), then g o t o step 25.
14-138
indicated?
YES-Check f o r poor connections and loose terminals

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and
the PCM, then g o t o step 1.
NO-Go t o step 29.
<3
with the HDS.
PASSED?

Control Solenoid Valve A
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM, then
goto step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 27.

transmission.
2. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
menu, select A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A at 0.2 A.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7.
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. Ifthe
valve A connector.
(cont'd)
14-139
D T C

control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
11. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A connector.
(see page 11-7).
II

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. Ifthe
NO-Go to step 15.
Is there 3-10 Q?
YES-Go to step 10.
control solenoid valve A connectorterminal No. 2 and
body ground.

SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
with the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. Ifthe
page 11-7), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted,
go to step 13.
valve A connector.
YES-Go to step 11.

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and

pressure control solenoid valve A and ground (G101),
14-140
NO-Go to step 20.
with the HDS.
troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM, then
g o t o step 18.

Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
Valve Bat 1.0 A.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7.
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. Ifthe
valve B connector.
(cont'd)
14-141
control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.

B10 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
A / T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B CONNECTOR
LSB (BRN/WHT)
1
2
h|2
3 4|5|6|7
11 12 13
22 23 24
Hi
9 ll
16
19 20 21
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32133 34 35136 37 38 39
|40|41 42
/M45
46
LSB
(BRN/WHT)
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there 3-10 Q?
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 14.


connectorterminal B10 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B, if the wiring is OK, go to
step 25.

control solenoid valve B connectorterminal No. 2 and
body ground.


body ground.
GND (BLK)
LSB (BRN/WHT)
YES-Go to step 11.
pressure control solenoid valve B and ground (G101),
PCM connectorterminal B10 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B, then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 15.
14-142
<3

2 1 . Update he PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-7).
V B S O L (BLK/YEL)
B (49P)
C (49P)
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|
11 12 13 14M5 16 17M8 19 20 21
h|2
22 23 24
>^ 25 X
26
Is DTC P0966
/ 28
29 30 31 32 p3 34 3506 37 38 39
|40|41 42 /M45I46
indicated?

/ H
! LG2 (BRN/YEL)
NO-Go to step 24.

Is there battery
with the HDS.
voltage?
YES-Go to step 20.

B(49P)
|l|2
C (49P)
4 | 5 | 6 | 7
11 12 13 1 4 h 5 16
22 23 24
25
9|10|
19 20 21
>^ /
26
28
PASSED?

troubleshooting.B
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. I f t h e
page 11-7), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted,
go to step 22.
29 30 31 32 B 3 34 3 5 B 6 37 38 39
| 4 0 | 4 1 42
/l/|45l46
LG2 (BRN/YEL)

Is DTC P0966
YES-Check for a blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
indicated?

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and
NO-Go to step 29.

ground (G101),then g o t o step 25.
(cont'd)
14-143
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

Control Solenoid Valve B
NOTE:

troubleshooting.B


pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM, then
go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 27.

transmission.
Is DTC P0967
indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B w i t h the
HDS.
NORMAL?
NO-Go to step 7.
Valve B at 0.2 A.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. I f t h e
valve B connector.
14-144

control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.


valve B connector.
(see page 11-7).

(

NO-Go to step 15.
Is there 3-10
Q?
YES-Go to step 10.

the body ground.

with the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the
page 11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 13.
valve B connector.
YES-Go to step 11.

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and
NO-Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve B and ground (G101),
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
14-145
with the HDS.
PASSED?

Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM, then
go to step 18.

transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
Valve Cat 1.0 A.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. Ifthe
valve C connector.
14-146

control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.

B21 and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID V A L V E C CONNECTOR
CONTROL SOLENOID
V A L V E C CONNECTOR
L S C (GRN/RED)
|1|2
3 4|5|6|7
I io|
11 12 13 1415 16 17H8 19 20 2 1
22 23 24
25
26
A8
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 J36 37 38 39
|40|41|42
Is there 3-10
a?
LSC
(GRN/RED)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go t o step 10.
YES-Go t o step 14.


connectorterminal B21 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C, i f t h e w i r i n g is OK, go to
step 25.

control solenoid valve C connectorterminal No. 2 and
body ground.

body ground.
GND (BLK)
L S C (GRN/RED)
YES-Go to step 11.
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground (G101),
PCM connectorterminal B21 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C, then go to step 25.
15. Disconnect PCM connectors C (49P).
16. Turn the ignition to switch to ON (II).
(cont'd)
14-147
V B S O L (BLK/YEL)
B (49P)
|1|2
3 4|5|6|7
22 2 3 24
>^ 25
26
/ 28
|40|41 42 / M 4 5 | 4 6
/l/M
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
30

(see page 11-7).
HE
8 |9 |10[
11 1213 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
29 30 31 32 33 34 35f36 37 38 39
C (49P)
Is DTC P0970
40141
32
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
47|48|49|
indicated?

NO-Go to step 24.
Is there battery
w i t h the HDS.
voltage?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go t o step 18.
and body ground.
C (49P)
B (49P)
|l|
3 4|5|6|7
8 9 J10|
11 12 13
16 17H8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 p 34 35B6 37 38 39
|40J41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
PASSED?

original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 23, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. Ifthe
go t o step 1. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 22.
Is DTC P0970
YES-Check for a blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
14-148
indicated?

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and
the PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO-Go to step 29.
3
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

Control Solenoid Valve C
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM, then
go to step 27.

transmission.
Is DTC P0971
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
HDS.
NORMAL?
YES-Go to step 5.
Valve C at 0.2 A.
with the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
valve C connector.
(cont'd)
14-149
control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.

valve C connector.
(see page 11-7).
13. Start the engine, and w a i t for at least 1 second.

Is DTC P0971
>
indicated?

NO-Go to step 15.
Is there 3-10
O?
YES-Go to step 10.

body g r o u n d .
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
go to step 13.
valve C connector.
Is DTC P0971

at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and

pressure control solenoid valve C and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then g o t o step 16.
14-150
indicated?
NO-Go to step 20.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A

Circuit
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM, then
go to step 18.

transmission.
2. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to
R, and wait for at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0973
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve A w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Start the engine.With the brake pedal pressed, shift to
R, and wait for at least 1 second.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
the system is OK at this t i m e . Check the SHA wire for
an intermittent short to ground in the wire between
shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. if the HDS
(cont'd)
14-151

terminals A1 and C41.
SHA ( B L U / Y E L )
C (49P)
V B S O L 2 (WHT)
3 4|5|6|7
|l|2
V A'
11 1
'24
9I10I
C (49P)
A (49P)
16 1718 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
/ '/ 32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37
38
39
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 L / | 4 6 47 48|49|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
|2
3 4|5|6|7
3 4 j5 j S | 7
9ho|
/ 24 25 26 27 28
/
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
11
13
19 20 21
16
22
40|41
/|44|/|46
48|49|
16|17|18
32|33|
|40|41 421431441/146
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
Is there less than 12 O?

Is there battery
voltage?
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid w i r e harness connector.
YES-Go t o step 19.

C (49P)
|l|2
3 4 |5 I6 | 7 8
12
22
M/
30
/ Al
24
/ 32

9|10|
16 1718 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
p 34
37 3 8 39
41 42 4 3 | 4 4 L / | 4 6 47 48J49j
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
B (49P)
3 4|5|6|7
11 12 13 14H5 16
8 9|10|
19 20 21
/ 28
29 30 31 32B3 34 35B6 37 38 39
22 23 24
C (49P)
25
|40|41 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6
26
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
h | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9|10|
11 12
16 1718 19 20 21
/24 At 25 26 27 28
/
32B3 34 35L/ 37 38 39
/ 30 / ><
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 L / | 4 6 47 48|49|
22
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Repair short t o body ground in the wire between
PCM connector terminal C20 and the shift solenoid
w i r e harness connector, then g o t o step 24.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-184).
YES-Go t o step 14.
YES-Check for a b l o w n No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the

open in the w i r e between PCM c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l A1
and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then g o t o step 24.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift

solenoid wire harness (see page 14-184), then go t o
step 24.

g r o u n d (G101), then g o t o step 24.
Is shift solenoid valve A OK?
14-152
<3
(see page 11-7).
2 1 . Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second.
W i t h the brake pedal pressed, shift to R, and wait for
at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0973
indicated?
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS

NO-Go to step 23.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the
26. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second.
at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0973
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.
14-153
DTC P0974: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A
Circuit

terminals C20 and B41 or C41.
NOTE:
transmission.
SHA (BLU/YEL)
B (49P)
|1|2
C (49P)
3 4|5|6|7
22 23 24
TJjQeTi
9|10|
11 12 13 1415 16
25
26
9 |10|
17[18 19
19 20 21
28
29 30 31 32J33 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / l / | 4 | 4 6
5
48|49|
40141
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)

Is DTC P0974
Indicated?
Is there 12-25 Q?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go t o step 15.
NO-Go t o step 4.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve A w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness connector.

12. Check f o r continuity between PCM connectorterminal
C20 and shift solenoid w i r e harness connector
terminal No. 3.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go t o step 7.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE

H A R N E S S CONNECTOR
5. Start the engine in P, and wait f o r at least 1 second.

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
i
1
h | 2
3 4|5|6|7
11 12
22
YES-Go t o step 7.
/I
X
/
24
30
15 16 1718 19
9I10I I
20 21
25
26 27 28
32 33 34
37 38 39
SHA
(BLU/YEL)
10
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 47 481491

connections or loose terminals at shift solenoid valve
A and the PCM. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go t o step 13.

terminal C20 and the shift solenoid wire harness
connector, then g o to step 20.
13. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness (see page

14-184).
14-154
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid wire

harness connector terminal No. 3 and the shift
solenoid valve A connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
1 2
3 4
SHA (YEL)
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E A CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-184),
then go to step 20.
NO-Replace the shift solenoid wire harness (see page
(see page 11-7).
at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0974
indicated?

NO-Go to step 19.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

were indicated on step 18, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.
valve A and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
With the brake pedal pressed, shift to R, and wait for
at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0974
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.B
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. I f t h e HDS
14-155
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B
Circuit

NOTE:

(49P)

transmission.
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
SHB (GRN/WHT)

Is DTC P0976
indicated?
Is there less than 12 D?
NO-Go t o step 4.
NO-Go to step 18.

Test M e n u , and the test shift solenoid valve B w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?

NO-Go to step 7.
(49P)

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
the system is OK at this t i m e . Check the SHB w i r e for
an intermittent short to g r o u n d in the wire between
shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
S H B (GRN/WHT)
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire between
w i r e harness connector, then go t o step 23.
NO-Go t o step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-184).
Is shift solenoid valve B OK?
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B or the shift
solenoid w i r e harness (see page 14-184), then go t o
step 23.
14-156

IGP (BLK/YEL)
B(49P)
C (49P)
| 1 |2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|
11 12 13 14H5 16 17fl8 19 20 21
22 23 24
>^
25
26
(see page 11-7).
20. Start the engine in P, wait for at least 1 second, then
test-drive the vehicle in D. Drive the vehicle in 3rd or
4th gear for at least 1 second.
28
29 30 31 32 B3 34 35 B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42
Is DTC P0976
i LG2 (BRN/YEL)
indicated?

Is there battery
voltage?
w i t h the HDS.
YES-Go to step 18.


B(49P)
C(49P)
4|5|6|7
9|10|
14H5 16 17(18 19 20 21
25
26
/ 28
32 B3 34 35B6 37 38 39
/l/|45|46
NO-Go to step 22.
y]49
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
PASSED?

were indicated on step 2 1 , go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
valve B and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
Is there
continuity?
YES-Check for a b l o w n No. 19 (15 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, check the
PGM-FI main relay and repair open in the w i r e
between PCM connector terminal B3 and the
under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 23.

Is DTC P0976
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.

(cont'd)
14-157
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B

Circuit
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


valve B and the PCM, then go t o step 1. If the HDS

transmission.
2. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd or 4th gear in D for at
least 1 second.
Is DTC P0977
indicated?
NO-Go t o step 4.
Test M e n u , and the test shift solenoid valve B w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?
NO-Go t o step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd or 4th gear in D for at
least 1 second.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
B and the PCM. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT
14-158


harness connectorterminal No. 4 and the shift
solenoid valve B c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l .
B(49P)
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE

C (49P)
1 2
3 4
SHB (RED)
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E B CONNECTOR
SHB (GRN/WHT)
Is there 12-25
Terminal side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
O?
YES-Go t o step 15.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-184),

then go to step 20.
C28 and shift solenoid w i r e harness connector
terminal No. 4.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE


(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0977
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there
Wire side of
female terminals
continuity?
indicated?

YES-Go t o step 13.

13. Remove the shift solenoid w i r e harness (see page
14-184).
(cont'd)
14-159
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTC P0977
indicated?
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Start the engine, and run the vehicle in 1 st gear in D
for at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0979
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 7.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve C w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound

at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
24. M o n i t o r the OBD status for P0977 in the DTCs MENU
w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C

Circuit
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
heard?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Start the engine, and run the vehicle in 1 st gear in D
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
N O - l f the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check the SHC w i r e for
an intermittent short to g r o u n d between shift
solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
14-160
0

terminals B3 and C41.
IGP (BLK/YEL)
C (49P)
C (49P)
B (49P)
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
8 | 9
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
|1|2
1101
22 23 24
26
25
//
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
SHC (GRN)
ghol
4 | 5 | 6 j T 8
|,|2
/
//
///
11 12
24
A*
16 1718 19 20 21
26 27 28
25
32 33 34
A?
37 38 39
J40J4T 42 43|44J45|46 47 48|49|
|40|41 4 2 | / ! 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
Is there less than 12 Q?
Is there battery
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go t o step 16.
voltage?


and body the g r o u n d .
C(49P)
B (49P)
h|2
C (49P)
4 |5 |6 | 7 8
ghol
11 12 13 14(15 16 17H8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
/ 28
29 30 31 32 B 3 34 35B6 37 38 39
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
SHC (GRN)
|40Ul 42 / l / | 4 5 | 4 6
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
|1|2
4 | 5 | 6 | 7
9|10|
25
26 27 28
22
/30 M
32 B 3 34 35L> 37 38 39
/
/
|40|41 42 4 3 1 4 4 1 / | 46 47 4 8 | 4 9 |
11 12
/24
16 1718 19 20 21
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
Is there
continuity?
YES-Repair short to body g r o u n d in the wire between

w i r e harness connector, then go to step 23.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-184).
Is shift solenoid valve C OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift
step 23.
Is there
continuity?
YES-Check for a b l o w n No. 19 (15 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, check the
PGM-FI main relay and repair open in the wire
between PCM connectorterminal B3 and the
g r o u n d (G101), then go to step 23.

(cont'd)
14-161
(see page 11-7).
test-drive the vehicle in D. Drive the vehicle in 1st gear
Is DTC P0979
Indicated?

NO-Go to step 22.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

were indicated on step 2 1 , go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
valve C and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
25. Start the engine in P, w a i t for at least 1 second, then
test-drive the vehicle in D. Drive the vehicle in 1 st gear
Is DTC P0979
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
14-162
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C

Circuit

NOTE:
transmission.
B (49P)
C (49P)
4 | 5 | 6 | 7
7W
141516 171819
Is DTC P0980
Indicated?
LG2
(BRN/YEL)
9 |10
17J18
40141
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
32
SHC
(GRN)
@H
Is there 12-25
YES-Go to step 7.
4| 5 j 6 | 7
35|36 37 38|
J Z 0 45|46[/T/"I*8

o n
CI?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve C w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?

C39 and shift solenoid wire harness connector
terminal No. 2.
YES-Go to step 5.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE


w i t h the HDS.
1 2
YES-Go to step 7.
C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
4/I
S H C (GRN)
FAILED?
S H C (GRN)
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.

13. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness (see page

14-184).
(cont'd)
14-163
harness connectorterminal No. 2 and the shift
solenoid valve C connectorterminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E C CONNECTOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
WIRE H A R N E S S
CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
S H C (GRN)
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-184),
then go to step 20.
NO-Replace the shift solenoid w i r e harness (see page
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0980
Indicated?

NO-Go to step 19.
14-164
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve C and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
2 1 . Start the engine in P, wait for at least 1 second, then
Is DTC P0980
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 2 1 .
DTC P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D

Circuit

NOTE:
transmission.
SHD (GRN/RED)
|
C (49P)
|l|2
4|5|6|7
11 1
/ 3
9 hoi
16
19 20 21
'24
25
26 27 28
32 p 34
373 8 39
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 L / | 4 6 47 48|49|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)

i

Is DTC P0982
Indicated?
Is there less than 12 Q?
YES-Go to step 7.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve D w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?
YES-Go t o step 5.
SHD (GRN/RED)
5. Start the engine in P, a n d wait for at least 1 second.
C (49P)
3
h | 2

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
11 12

9|10|
/30 32 p 34 37 38 39
/
/
|40| 41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 47 48|49|
22
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
N O - l f the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check the SHD w i r e for
an intermittent short to g r o u n d in the wire between
shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS
4|5|6|7
/24 At 1625 1718 1926 2207 2821
iW
w i r e harness connector, then g o t o step 24.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-184).
Is shift solenoid valve D OK?
YES-Go t o step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D or the shift
step 24.
(cont'd)
14-165

terminals A1 and C41.
(see page 11-7).
2 1 . Start the engine in P, and w a i t for at least 1 second.

With the brake pedal pressed, shift t o N, and wait for
at least 1 second.
V B S O L 2 (WHT)
C (49P)
A (49P)
Ih
11
22
//

9I10I
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
3
4|5|6|7
24
25
Is DTC P0982

PCM w a s substituted, g o t o step 1.
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
indicated?
26 27 28
/|44|^46
48J49|
/ LG1 (BRN/YEL)
NO-Go t o step 23.

w i t h the HDS.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 19.

C (49P)
B (49P)
3 4|5|6|7
9 hoi
11 12 13 14M5 16 17H8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
>^ /
29 30 31 32 33 34 35B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / | / | 4 5 | 4 6
J49I
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
3 4|5|6|7
h | 2
9|10|
/24 25 26 27 28
22
35M
30
/ 32B3 34 37 38 39
N 4 1 42 4 3 | 4 4 | y | 4 6 47 48|49|
11 12
PASSED?
YES-lf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is

were indicated on step 22, g o to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.!
valve D and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated,
recheck. If the PCM w a s substituted, go to step 1. If the
16 1718 19 20 21
LG1 (BRN/YEL)

With the brake pedal pressed, shift t o N, and wait for
at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0982
indicated?
Is there
continuity?
YES-Check for a b l o w n No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the

open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A1
and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go t o step 24.
g r o u n d (G101), then g o t o step 24.
14-166
YES-Check f o r poor connections and loose terminals

at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go t o
step 1.
NO-Go t o step 28.
28. M o n i t o r the OBD status for P0982 in the DTCs M E N U

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
DTC P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D

Circuit
NOTE:

troubleshooting.!


valve D and the PCM, then go t o step 1. I f t h e HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 26.

transmission.
2. Start the engine in P. W i t h the brake pedal pressed,
shift to N, and w a i t for at least 1 second.
Is DTC P0983
indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
Test M e n u , and test the shift solenoid valve D w i t h the
HDS.
Is a clicking sound
heard?
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Start the engine in P. W i t h the brake pedal pressed,
shift to N, and wait for at least 1 second.
w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
D and the PCM. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go t o step 4.
(cont'd)
14-167
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid w i r e
harness c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and the shift
solenoid valve D c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l .

SHD (GRN/RED)
C (49P)
B(49P)
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE

9I10I
3 4|5|6 | 7 8
h|2
SHIFT SOLENOID
V A L V E D CONNECTOR
11 1 213 1415 16 17H8 19 20 21

22 2 3 24
^< 25
26
/ 28
29 3 3 31 32 B3 34 35 B6 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / I / | 4 5 | 4 6
1 2
SHD (ORN)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Is there 12-25
Wire side of
female terminals
O?
Is there
YES-Go t o step 15.

C9 and shift solenoid wire harness connector terminal
No. 1.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE

3 4|5|6|7
22
/30
/24 A*
8 9 |10|
26 27 28
/ / 32J33 34
37 38 39
I2j
Terminal side of
female terminals

(see page 11-7).

3|4
\ /
Is DTC P0983
|40|41 42 431441/| 46 47 481491
Wire side of
female terminals
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 13.

13. Remove the shift solenoid w i r e harness (see page
14-184).
14-168
continuity?
SHD (GRN/RED)
16 1718 19 20 21
25
Is there
Terminal side of
female terminals

W i t h the brake pedal pressed, shift to N, and wait for
at least 1 second.
SHD (GRN/RED)
11 12
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-184),

then go to step 20.
h | 2
3 4
indicated?

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
valve D and the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated,
W i t h the brake pedal pressed, shift to N, and wait for
at least 1 second.
DTC P16C0: PCM A/T Control System

Incomplete Updated
NOTE:
This code is indicated w h e n PCM updating is
incomplete.
Do not turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) while updating the PCM. If y o u turn
the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
1. Update the PCM (see page 11-249).
Is DTC P16C0
indicated?
YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-250).B

NO-PCM updating is c o m p l e t e .

Is DTC P0983
indicated?

at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to step
1.
w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.B
valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
14-169
Switch ATPRVS Switch Circuit
NOTE:


transmission.
1 2
9 10
GND (BLK)

2. Shift to R, and verify the A/T R Switch signal w i t h the
Is the A/T R Switch ON?

YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Check for proper transmission range switch

installation (see page 14-263), adjust the shift cable
(see page 14-257), then r e c h e c k . l i
YES-Go to step 7.
3. Check the Reverse Switch (ATPRVS) signal w i t h the

HDS.
Is the Reverse
Switch (ATPRVS)
ON?

time.B
NO-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between transmission

range switch c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 6 and ground
(G101), or repair poor g r o u n d (G101), then go to step
15.

A T P R V S (RED/WHT)
v)
1 2
6 7
9 10
GND (BLK)
Is there around battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
go to step 15.
14-170
<9
9. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6
terminals at the transmission range switch, w h e n the
shift lever is in P, R, and N, and no continuity when the
shift lever is in D, 2, and 1.
ATPRVS
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
GND
Is there continuity when the shift lever is in P, R, and N,

and no continuity when the shift lever is in D, 2 and 1 ?
YES-Go to step 10.
(see page 11-7).
12. Start the engine in P. With the brake pedal pressed,
shift to R, and wait for at least 2 seconds in R, then
shift to N.
Is DTC P1717
indicated?

NO-Go to step 14.
with the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
17. Start the engine in P. With the brake pedal pressed,
shift to R, and wait for at least 2 seconds in R, then
shift to N.
Is DTC P1717
indicated?

go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
with the HDS.
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
14-171
DTC P1743: Problem in Shift Control System;
Shift Valve E Stuck OFF

Shift Valve E Stuck ON









material?
clutch

material?
clutch

go to step 4.

go to step 4.

the transmission shift through all five gears.


w i t h the HDS.

w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
FAILED?
YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body (see

page 14-301), replace the main valve body, or replace
the transmission, then go t o step 8.
YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body (see

page 14-301), replace the main valve body, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 8.


8. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let

8. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and let


w i t h the HDS.

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . B


14-172

Servo Control Valve Stuck OFF or Servo Valve
Stuck OFF
material?
clutch

go to step 4.
DTC P1780: Problem in Shift Control System

NOTE: DTC P1780 means there is one or more A/T
DTCs about the shift control system.
Are there other
DTCs?
YES-Troubleshoot the problem indicated by the

DTC!
NO-Go to step 4.
(see page 11-7).



w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
YES-Repair the servo control valve in the main valve

body (see page 14-301), servo valve in the regulator
valve body (see page 14-304), or replace the main
valve body, regulator valve body, or replace the
Is DTC P1780
indicated?

NO-Go to step 1.
w i t h the HDS.

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
PASSED?

troubleshooting.!
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
go to step 5.

14-173
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (F-CAN
BUS-OFF (PCM))
Is DTC U0029 indicated in the PGM-FI
SYSTEM?
YES-Go to the DTC U0029 troubleshooting in the

PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page
11-206)11
NO-Go to step 4.
Is DTC U0029 indicated in the A/T
SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 5.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs or DTCs were
troubleshooting.B
(see page 11-7).
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for at least
2 minutes.
Is DTC U0029 indicated in the AIT
SYSTEM?

the PCM. I f t h e PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 1. If
NO-Go to step 8.
14-174
8. Monitor the OBD status for U0029 in the DTCs MENU

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

or Confirmed DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7,
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.B
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. I f t h e PCM
page 11 -7), then go t o step 6. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. I f t h e HDS indicates NOT
0
DTC U0122: Lost Communication with VSA
Modulator-Control Unit
SYSTEM?

PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page 11-209J.B

w i t h the HDS.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?

or Confirmed DTCs or DTCs were indicated on step 7,
connections or loose terminals between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
11-7), then go to step 6. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 6.
NO-Go to step 4.
SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 5.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were
troubleshooting.B
(see page 11-7).
SYSTEM?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals

between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 8.
14-175
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge
Control Module)
SYSTEM?

PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page 1 1 - 2 1 1 ) . !
NO-Go to step 4.
SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 5.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs or DTCs were
troubleshooting.!
(see page 11-7).
SYSTEM?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals

between the gauge control module and the PCM. If
the PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 6. I f t h e PCM was
NO-Go to step 8.
14-176

w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?

complete. I f t h e PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs
were indicated in step 7, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!
connections or loose terminals between the gauge
control module and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
go to step 6. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
Road Test
7. Find a suitable level road. W h e n y o u are ready to

begin the test, press OK on the HDS.
2. A p p l y the parking brake, and block all four wheels.

Start the engine, then the shift lever shift to D while
pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal,
and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
8. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the APP

Sensor A reads 1.22 V. Maintain a steady throttle until
the transmission shifts to 5th gear, then slow the
vehicle and come to a stop.
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions.
9. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded or

increase the recording t i m e setting as necessary, and
repeat step 8.

10. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.53 V. Test-drive the

vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS, accelerate
quickly until the APP Sensor A reads 2.53 V. Maintain
a steady throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th
gear (or a reasonable speed), then slow the vehicle
and come to a stop.
11. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded or
increase the recording t i m e setting as necessary, and
repeat step 10.
12. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to the
floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the transmission
shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop, and save the
snapshot.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and go to the A/T

Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the
PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit
6. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
(refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if
needed):
Select High Speed icon.
Select these parameters:
- Vehicle Speed
- Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed (rpm)
- Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
- Engine Speed
- Relative TP Sensor
- A P P Sensor A (V)
- ATF T e m p Sensor (V)
- Battery Voltage
- Shift Control
- Brake Switch
Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
above 1.22 V.
Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
Set the trigger point to 30 seconds.
(cont'd)
14-177
Road Test (cont'd)
13. Review each snapshot individually, and compare the
Shift C o m m a n d , the APP Sensor A voltage, and the
Vehicle Speed to the f o l l o w i n g table.
Upshift: D Position
APP sensor A voltage: 1.22 V
8 - 1 2 m p h ( 1 4 - 1 8 km/h)
1st2nd
1 7 - 2 1 m p h ( 2 8 - 3 4 km/h)
2nd3rd
3rd4th
2 7 - 3 3 m p h ( 4 4 - 5 2 km/h)
4th5th
4 2 - 5 0 m p h ( 6 9 - 7 9 km/h)
Lock-up ON
3 6 - 4 2 m p h ( 5 9 - 6 7 km/h)
1st2nd
2 4 - 2 8 m p h ( 3 9 - 4 5 km/h)
2nd3rd
4 4 - 5 2 m p h ( 7 2 - 8 2 km/h)
3rd4th
6 5 - 7 3 m p h ( 1 0 5 - 1 1 7 km/h)
4th5th
8 8 - 9 8 m p h ( 1 4 2 - 1 5 6 km/h)
Lock-up ON
9 3 - 1 0 3 m p h ( 1 5 0 - 1 6 4 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
1st2nd
3 8 - 4 6 m p h ( 6 2 - 7 2 km/h)
2nd3rd
6 5 - 7 3 m p h ( 1 0 5 - 1 1 7 km/h)
3rd4th
1 0 1 - 1 1 1 m p h ( 1 6 1 - 1 7 7 km/h)
Lock-up ON
1 3 3 - 1 4 5 m p h ( 2 1 3 - 2 3 1 km/h)
Downshift: D Position
Lock-up OFF 3 5 - 4 1 m p h ( 5 7 - 6 5 km/h)
5th4th
3 5 - 4 1 m p h ( 5 5 - 6 5 km/h)
4th3rd
1 8 - 2 2 m p h ( 2 9 - 3 5 km/h)
3rd1st
6 - 1 0 m p h ( 1 0 - 1 6 km/h)
Lock-up OFF | 7 5 - 8 3 m p h ( 1 1 9 - 1 3 3 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
Lock-up OFF 1 2 0 - 1 3 2 m p h ( 1 9 3 - 2 1 1 km/h)
1 1 7 - 1 2 9 m p h ( 1 8 8 - 2 0 4 km/h)
5th4th
4th3rd
8 6 - 9 6 m p h ( 1 3 8 - 1 5 2 km/h)
5 6 - 6 4 m p h ( 9 0 - 1 0 2 km/h)
3rd2nd
2nd1st
3 0 - 3 6 m p h ( 4 7 - 5 7 km/h)
14-178
14. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear w i t h the shift lever
in D, then shift in 2. The vehicle should immediately
begin to slow d o w n f r o m the engine braking, then
slow to a stop.
15. Shift to R. Then, f r o m a full stop, accelerate to full
throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage.
16. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16-degrees), apply
the brake, and shift into P. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle w h e n
stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on the grade
of the incline, the vehicle could roll backwards i f t h e
brake is released.
Stall Speed Test

1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper
level (see page 14-207).
2. A p p l y the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
9. If any of the stall speeds are o u t of the service limit,

refer to the possible problems and probable causes
are listed in the table.
Problem
Stall speed r p m high
in D, 2,1 and R

in 1
in 2
in R
Stall speed r p m l o w
in D, 2,1 and R
Probable causes
ATF p u m p output low
Clogged ATF strainer
Regulator valve stuck
Slipping clutch
Slippage of 1st clutch
or 1st gear one-way
clutch
Slippage of 2nd clutch
Slippage of 5th clutch
Engine output l o w
Engine throttle valve
closed
Torque converter
one-way clutch
slipping

Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the
5. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
7. Shift to D while pressing the brake pedal firmly, then
press the accelerator pedal for 6 to 8 seconds, and
note the engine speed. Do not move the shift lever or
remove your foot off the brake pedal, while raising the
engine speed.
8. A l l o w 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test w i t h
the shift lever in R.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a
time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
Stall speed test result should be the same in D, 2 , 1
and R.
Do not test stall speed w i t h the A/T oil pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:
Specification: 1,850 rpm
Service Limit: 1,700-2,000 rpm
14-179
Pressure Test
. A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
. A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set 07406-0020400 or
07406-0020401
4. Remove the damper f r o m the front subframe.
NOTE:
Disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF button.
VSA DTC(s) may come on during the test-drive. Ifthe
VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the DTC (s) with the HDS.
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper
level (see page 14-207).
2.4WD: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow all four wheels to
rotate freely.
2WD: Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the
vehicle, make sure it is securely supported, and allow
the front wheels to rotate freely, raise the vehicle on a
lift.
3. Remove the splash shield (A).

Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates with the
14-180
<aG>
7. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the line
pressure inspection port (A). Do not allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the port while
connecting the A/T oil pressure gauge.
12. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch
pressure inspection port (B) and the 1 st-hold clutch
pressure inspection port (C).

9. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure
inspection port in P or N while holding the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm w i t h the shift lever in P or N.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if
measurements are made in the shift lever positions
other than P o r N.
Pressure
Line (A)
Fluid Pressure
Standard
9 5 0 - 1 , 0 1 0 kPa
(9.7-10.3
kgf/cm , 140
146 psi)
Service Limit
900 kPa (9.2
kgf/cm ,131 psi)
2
10. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil pressure
gauge f r o m the line pressure inspection port.
11. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure inspection
port with a new sealing washer, and tighten the bolt to
18 N-m (1.8 k g f m , 13 Ibfft). Do not reuse the old
sealing washer.
(cont'd)
14-181
Pressure Test (cont'd)
13. Remove the intake air duct and the air cleaner
assembly, and connect the oil pressure gauge to the
2nd clutch pressure inspection port (D). Then
t e m p o r a r i l y install the air cleaner assembly and
intake air duct.
20. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch
pressure inspection port (E) and the 5th clutch
pressure inspection port (G).
21. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch
pressure inspection port (F).
14. Start the engine, and shift into 1.

15. Measure the 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch
pressure inspection port and 1st-hold clutch pressure
at the 1st-hold clutch pressure inspection port while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 r p m .
16. Shift to 2, and measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the
2nd clutch pressure inspection port while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
Pressure
1st clutch
(B)
2nd clutch
(D)
1st-hold
clutch (C)
Fluid Pressure
Standard
9 4 0 - 1 , 0 2 0 kPa
(9.6-10.4
kgf/cm ,140148 psi)
6 8 0 - 7 6 0 kPa
(6.9-7.7
kgf/cm ,100110 psi)
2
Service Limit
890 kPa (9.1
kgf/cm ,130
psi)
2
630 kPa (6.4

kgf/cm ,91 psi)
2
22. Start the engine, and shift into D, and select D3 driving
mode by pressing the D3 button.
17. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner assembly,
then disconnect the A/T oil pressure gauge from the
2nd clutch pressure inspection port.
23. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch

pressure inspection port while holding the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm.
18. Disconnect the A/T oil pressure gauge from the 1st
clutch pressure and 1st-hold clutch pressure
inspection ports.
24. Release D3 driving mode by pressing the D3 button,

and measure the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch
speed at 2,000 r p m .
19. Install the sealing bolts in the 1st clutch pressure,

1st-hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch pressure
inspection ports with new sealing washers, and
tighten the sealing bolts to 18 N m (1.8 k g f m , 13 Ibfft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
14-182
3
25. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch
speed at 2,000 rpm.
Pressure
3rd clutch
(E)
4th clutch
(F)
5th clutch
(G)
Fluid Pressure
Standard
9 4 0 - 1 , 0 2 0 kPa
(9.6-10.4
kgf/cm ,140
148 psi)
2
Service Limit
890 kPa (9.1
kgf/cm ,130
psi)
27. Shift into R, then release the brake pedal. Raise the
engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and measure the 5th
clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection
port.
5th clutch
(G) in R
Fluid Pressure
Standard
9 4 0 - 1 , 0 2 0 kPa
(9.6-10.4
kgf/cm ,140
148 psi)
2
Problem
No or low line
pressure
26. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the brake
pedal to stop the wheels f r o m rotating.
Pressure
30. If any of the pressures are out of the service limit, refer
to the problems and probable causes listed in the
table.
Service Limit
890 kPa (9.1
kgf/cm ,130
psi)
2
No or low 1st clutch

pressure
No or low 2nd clutch
pressure
No or low 3rd clutch
pressure
No or low 4th clutch
pressure
pressure
pressure in R
No or low 1 st-hold
clutch pressure
Probable causes
Torque converter
ATF p u m p
Regulator valve
Torque converter
check valve
Clogged ATF strainer
1st clutch
O-rings
2nd clutch
O-rings
3rd clutch
O-rings
4th clutch
O-rings
5th clutch
O-rings
Servo valve
5th clutch
O-rings
1 st-hold clutch
O-rings
3 1 . Install the damper on the front subframe.

28. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the A/T oil
pressure gauge f r o m the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressure inspection ports.
32. Install the splash shield.
29. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressure inspection ports w i t h new sealing washers,
and tighten the bolts to 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft). Do
not reuse the old sealing washers.
14-183
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement
9. Remove the spring clip (A) and control pin (B), then
separate the shift cable end (C) f r o m the control lever
(D).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the HDS

communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the
3. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A , B, C, and D in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu w i t h the HDS.
4. Check that shift solenoid valve A , B, C, and D operate
w i t h the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valve are OK.
10. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket (E).
If no clicking sound is heard, go t o step 5, and test

the solenoid valve.
11. Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end for a
proper fit and wear. I f t h e bushing is loose or w o r n ,
replace the shift cable (see page 14-254).

6. Remove the under-hood subfuse box f r o m its bracket,
and remove the bracket f r o m the battery base.
7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
8. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket.
14-184
12. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve

A connector (A), A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B connector (B), 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (C), the shift solenoid wire
harness connector (D), and the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (E).
14. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B, the ATF pipes (C), and the gasket (D).
D
Replace.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
15. Replace the gasket and the O-rings (E) w i t h new ones
w h e n installing the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
16. Remove the solenoid valve cover (A), the dowel pins
(B), and the gasket (C).
13. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (F), and
remove the harness cover f r o m its bracket (G).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
17. Replace the gasket w i t h a new one w h e n installing the

solenoid valve cover.
(cont'd)
14-185
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
18. Disconnect the connectors f r o m shift solenoid valve
A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C , and
shift solenoid valve D.
19. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve

between the connectorterminal and body g r o u n d .
Standard: 1 2 - 2 5 Q
If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 22 and
replace the shift solenoid valve.
If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, go to step 20
and check the solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
20. Connect a j u m p e r wire f r o m the negative battery
terminal to the body g r o u n d , and connect another
j u m p e r wire f r o m the positive battery terminal to each
solenoid valve terminal individually.
If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 21 and
replace the shift solenoid wire harness.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 22 and
replace the shift solenoid valve.
14-186
2 1 . Remove the shift solenoid w i r e harness connector

(A), and replace it. Install a new O-ring (B) on the shift
solenoid w i r e harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go to
step 28.
22. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts, then remove the shift

solenoid valves.
27. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the
mounting bracket contacts the accumulator body.
28. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
29. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, the dowel pins,
and a new gasket.
30. Install a new solenoid valve body gasket on the
solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes w i t h
their filter side into the transmission housing. Install
new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
3 1 . Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B.
32. Secure the shift solenoid w i r e harness cover w i t h the
bolt.
33. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
repair if necessary, then connect it securely.
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
23. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve)

(E) on each reused solenoid valves.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes w i t h a new
O-ring. If y o u install a new solenoid valve, use the
O-ring provided w i t h it.
34. A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole of the bushing

in the shift cable end. Attach the shift cable end to the
control lever, then insert the control pin into the
control lever hole t h r o u g h the shift cable end, and
secure the control pin w i t h the spring clip/washer.
35. Secure the shift cable bracket w i t h the nuts.
36. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
37. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
24. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by

NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the
connector w h e n installing the solenoid valve. Be sure
to hold the solenoid valve body.
38. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery

base, and install the subfuse box on its bracket.
25. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by

m o u n t i n g bracket contacts the accumulator body.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid valve
C is installed before installing shift solenoid valve A, it
may damage the hydraulic control system.
26. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve A.
14-187
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test

A connector.

communicates with the PCM. If it does n o t go to the
3. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid valve
A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS.
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A w i t h
the HDS.
If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.
Disconnect the HDS.
10. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3 1 0 O
If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions

on the HDS.
Ifthe resistance is out of standard, replace A/T

clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page
14-194).
I f t h e valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not
determine the cause, go to step 5.
Ifthe resistance is within the standard, go to step

11.

11. Connect a jumper wire f r o m the negative battery

terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal
No. 2, and connect another jumper wire f r o m the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
No. 1.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.
14-188
(D).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

B connector (A), 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (B), the shift solenoid wire
harness connector (C), and the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (D).
14. Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end f o r a
proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose or w o r n ,
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
16. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (E), and
remove the harness cover f r o m its bracket (F).
(cont'd)
14-189
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test (cont'd)
valves A and B, the ATF pipes (C), the gasket (D), and
the O-rings (E).
20. Disconnect one of the jumper wires, and check for

valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve
body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or i f t h e solenoid valve does not operate,
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B.
21. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the
solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
D
Replace.

the filter end in the transmission housing. Install new
O-rings over the ATF pipes.
23. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B.
A,B
24. Secure the harness cover w i t h the bolt.

25. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
18. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for

contamination.
terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another
jumper wire f r o m the positive battery terminal to
connectorterminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
26. Apply m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole in the bushing

control lever hole through the shift cable end, and
' O c A ^ O / - p x O
14-190
<3
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test

B connector.

communicates w i t h the PCM. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11 -226).
B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu w i t h the HDS.
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B w i t h
the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, f o l l o w the instructions
on the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not
10. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3 - 1 0
If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T

clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page
14-194).
If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, go to
step 1 1 .
terminal to the solenoid valve B connectorterminal
No. 2, and connect another j u m p e r wire f r o m the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
No. 1.
parts.
(cont'd)
14-191
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont'd)
(D).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

A connector (A), 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (B), the shift solenoid wire
harness connector (C), and the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (D).
proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose or w o r n ,
14-192
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
16. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (E), and
remove the harness cover f r o m its bracket (F).

the O-rings (E).
D
Replace.
20. Disconnect one of the j u m p e r wires, and check valve

m o v e m e n t at the fluid passage in the valve body
mounting surface. I f t h e valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B.
2 1 . Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the
solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
and B.
25. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or o i l , clean or
6 x 1.0 mm
1 2 N m ( 1 . 2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)

contamination.
B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another
j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the positive battery terminal to
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
26. A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease t o the hole of the bushing

3 1 . Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-94).
14-193
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement

valve B connector (B), 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (C), the shift solenoid wire
harness connector (D), and the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (E).

(D).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft)
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
9. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (F), and

remove the harness cover f r o m its bracket (G).

proper fit and wear. Ifthe bushing is loose or w o r n ,
14-194
3
the O-rings (E).

and B.
15. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean, then
connect it securely.
16. Apply m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole of the bushing
in the shift cable end. Attach the shift cable end t o the
D
Replace.

A, B
2 1 . Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-94).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
11. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the
passage.
14-195
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test

C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS.
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with
the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions
on the HDS.
Ifthe valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not
6. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its bracket,
and remove the bracket from the battery base.
14-196

C connector.
10. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3 - 1 0 0
If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page
14-199).
Ifthe resistance is within the standard, go to step
11.
terminal to solenoid valve C connectorterminal No. 2,
and connect another jumper wire from the positive
battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1.
parts.
3
12. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
(A).
13. Remove the ATF joint pipes (B), the O-rings (C), the
ATF pipe(D), and the gasket (E).
contamination.

C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another
j u m p e r wire f r o m the positive battery terminal to the
connectorterminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
16. Disconnect one of the j u m p e r wires and check valve

m o v e m e n t at the fluid passage in the valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
17. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage of
the solenoid valve body and the transmission
housing.
18. Install the 8 x 53 m m ATF joint pipe (A) w i t h the filter
end into its m o u n t i n g hole (B).
(cont'd)
14-197
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont'd)
19. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe
(B) between the top (C) of the pipe and the solenoid
valve body mounting surface (D). The height is about
7.0 mm (0.3 in) If the height is over 7.0 mm (0.3 in),
push the pipe until it bottoms in the accumulator
body.
23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
it securely.
20. Install a new gasket (A) on the transmission housing,

and install the 8 x 36 mm ATF joint pipe (B) with the
filter end into the transmission housing and
8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
14-198
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement


end into its mounting hole (B).

C connector (A).
10. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 m m ATF joint pipe

(B) between the t o p (C) of the pipe and the solenoid
valve body m o u n t i n g surface (D). The height is about
7.0 m m (0.3 in) If the height is over 7.0 m m (0.3 in),
push the pipe until it bottoms in the accumulator
body.
6. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C

(B).
7. Remove the ATF joint pipes (C), the O-rings (D), the
ATF pipe (E), and the gasket (F).
8. Clean the m o u n t i n g surface and the fluid passage of
the solenoid valve body and the transmission
housing.
(cont'd)
14-199
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement (cont'd)
11. Install a new gasket (A) o n the transmission housing,
and install the 8 x 36 m m ATF joint pipe (B) w i t h the
filter end into the transmission housing and the
8 x 25.2 m m ATF pipe (D).
12. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
13. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
it securely.
17. Install the under-hood subfuse box o n the battery
14-200
<aG>
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake,
block both rear wheels, and raise the front of the
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.

connector, and remove the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor (A).
Replace.
5. Install a new O-ring (B) on the a input shaft

(mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission
housing.
6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or o i l , and clean if
necessary, then connect it securely.
7. Install the damper on the front subframe.
14-201
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement

sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (A) and sensor washer
5. Install a new O-ring (C) on a new output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the sensor
washer.
6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and if clean
necessary, then connect the connector securely.
14-202
2 n d Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement

2. Remove the under-hood subfuse box f r o m its bracket
switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch (A).
A
20 N m
(2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
6. Install a new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch and a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the
switch.
7. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign
particles inside the connector.
8. Connect the connector securely.
14-203
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement

switch connector (A), and remove the 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch (B), and sealing
washer (C).
5. Install a new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch w i t h a new sealing washer, and tighten the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch.
6. Make sure there is no water, o i l , dust, or foreign

14-204
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement

switch connector, and remove the 4th clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch (A).
(2.0 k g f m ,
14 Ibfft)
B
Replace.
6. Install a new 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch and a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the
switch.
7. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign
14-205
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
5. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector

(A), then remove the connector f r o m the connector
bracket (B).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic

transmission fluid (ATF).
FReplace.
6. Remove the harness clamp (C) f r o m its bracket (D).

7. Remove the ATF temperature sensor (E).
8. Install a new O-ring (F) on a new ATF temperature
sensor, and install the ATF temperature sensor.
9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil. Connect the
connector securely, and install it on its bracket.
10. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
11. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF (see step 6 on page
14-209).
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N m
(5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibfft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B).
14-206
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground.
5. Remove the dipstick, and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (A) and the lower
mark(B).

(the radiator fan comes on), then turn the engine off.
Do not allow the engine to w a r m up longer than the
time it takes for the radiator fan to come on twice.
NOTE: Check the fluid level w i t h i n 6 0 - 9 0 seconds
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may be
indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or more.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) f r o m the
dipstick guide tube, and w i p e it w i t h a clean cloth.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid

leaks at the transmission, and the hose and the line
joints. If a problem is f o u n d , fix it before filling the
transmission.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven w h e n the ATF level is
below the lower mark, one or more of these
s y m p t o m s may occur:
Transmission damage.
Vehicle does not move in any gear.
Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares w h e n starting
off in D and R positions.
The engine vibrates at idle.
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube.
7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to

proper level (see step 4 on page 14-209).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven w h e n the ATF level is
above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep forward
while in N, or have shifting problems.
(cont'd)
14-207
ATF Level Check (cont'd)
8. If necessary fill the transmission w i t h the
recommended fluid t h r o u g h the filler hole (A) t o bring
the fluid level up to about m i d w a y between the upper
mark and lower mark of the dipstick w i t h the ATF. Do
not fill the fluid t o excess of t h e upper mark. A l w a y s
use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
9. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing washer
(C).
10. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide tube.
14-208
30
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on a level g r o u n d .
2. W a r m up the engine t o normal operating temperature
(the radiator fan comes on), and turn the engine off.
6. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid

through the filler hole (A). Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a
non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
3.4 L (3.6 U S qt) at change
8.1 L (8.6 U S qt) at overhaul
B
24 x 1.5 m m
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m ,
33 Ibfft)
4. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug (A), and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a ATF cooler cleaning is necessary, refer t o
ATF cooler cleaning (see page 14-242).
C
Replace.
7. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a n e w sealing washer

(C).
49 N m
(5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibfft)
8. Remove the dipstick (A).

|
Replace.
5. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a new sealing washer (B).
9. Make sure the fluid level is between the upper mark

(B) and lower mark (C) on the dipstick.
10. If the maintenance minder requires y o u t o replace the
ATF, reset the maintenance minder (see page 3-6). If
the maintenance minder did not require y o u to
replace the ATF, go t o step 11 and reset the ATF life
w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
14-209
ATF Replacement (cont'd)
13. Select BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h HDS.
14. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU w i t h the
HDS.
15. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER w i t h the
HDS.
16. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and reset
the ATF life w i t h the HDS.
14-210
3
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up t o normal operating
6. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer (B).
2. Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , and turn the engine

off.
3. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the transfer fluid
(hypoid gear oil).
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
5. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a n e w sealing washer (B).
7. Refill the transfer assembly w i t h the recommended

fluid (hypoid gear oil) t h r o u g h the filler hole (C) until
the fluid flows out. Use a SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gear
oil, API classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity:
S A E 90:
Above 0 F ( - 1 8 C)
Transfer Fluid (Hypoid Gear Oil) Capacity:

0.43 L (0.45 U S qt) at fluid change
8. Install the filler plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
14-211
Transfer Assembly Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is
supported securely.
10. Check for fluid leaks between the transfer companion

flange and the transfer oil seal.
2. Shift the shift lever to N.
11. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly f r o m the

transmission, and replace the transfer oil seal and
O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), i f t h e
oil seal and the O-ring replacement is required, y o u
will need to check and adjust the transfer gear tooth
contact, the transfer gear backlash, the tapered roller
bearing starting torque, and the total starting torque
(see page 14-387). Do not replace the oil seal w i t h the
transfer assembly on the transmission.
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller shaft

(B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
12. Install the propeller shaft onto the transfer companion

flange by aligning the reference mark. Make sure y o u
use new m o u n t i n g bolts.
4. Separate the propeller shaft f r o m the transfer

companion flange.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion
flange (B); position the dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
6. Measure the transfer gear backlash.

Standard: 0 . 0 6 - 0 . 1 7 m m (0.002-0.007 in)
7. I f t h e measurement is out of standard, remove the
transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-387).
8. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of the
transfer assembly and the transmission.
9. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly, remove
the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
14-212
3
Transfer Assembly Removal
supported securely.
6. Remove the exhaust pipe A.

Replace.

5. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
7. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather hose
bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose (B) f r o m
the breather pipe (C) on the transfer assembly.
(cont'd)
14-213
Transfer Assembly Removal (cont'd)
(B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
9. Separate the propeller shaft f r o m the transfer

companion flange.
10. Remove the transfer assembly f r o m the transmission.
14-214
Transfer Assembly Installation

1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly contacts
the transmission w i t h solvent, and dry w i t h
compressed air. Then apply transmission fluid to the
seal contact area.
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and
install the transfer assembly (B) on the transmission.
4. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on the

transfer assembly w i t h the bolt, and install the
breather hose (B) over the breather pipe (C) w i t h the
dot (D) facing out.
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Install the propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer

companion flange (B) by aligning the reference mark
(C). Make sure you use new m o u n t i n g bolts.
33 N-m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)

Replace.
C
(cont'd)
14-215
Transfer Assembly Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the front subframe stlffener w i t h new m o u n t i n g
bolts.
Replace.
7. Refill the transfer assembly w i t h transfer fluid (hypoid

gear oil), if necessary (see page 14-211).
8. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF (see step 6 o n page
14-209).
14-216
<3
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement
supported securely.
2. Remove the transfer breather (A) f r o m its bracket (B).
\ WW \
5. Disconnect the breather hose (A) f r o m the transfer

breather pipe (B), and remove the breather hose f r o m
the hose clamp (C).
3. Remove the breather hose clamp (A) f r o m the

harness clamp bracket (B).
A
6. Install the breather hose over the breather pipe w i t h

the dot (D) facing out, and install the hose on the hose
clamp at the dot (E).
7. Install the breather hose clamp on the hose clamp,
and install the hose clamp on the v a c u u m hose at the
mark.
8. Install the harness clamp on the engine harness.
9. Install the transfer breather on its bracket.
B
4. Remove the harness clamp (C) on the breather hose

f r o m the engine harness (D).
14-217
Transmission Removal
2008 V6 Attachment A r m SIL02C000033*
Front Subframe Adapter EQS02BMDXSBO*
Available t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment

Program 888-424-6857
NOTE:
surfaces.
Engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) must be used
w i t h the side engine m o u n t installed.
1. Secure the hood in the w i d e open position w i t h the
support rod.
2. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position, and lock
the steering wheel.
3. Drain the power steering system fluid f r o m the
reservoir (see page 17-28).
14. Remove the power steering p u m p outlet line (A) f r o m

the power steering p u m p , and remove the hose
clamp bolt (B).
5. Remove the engine cover, intake air duct, and air

cleaner housing.
8. Remove the front bulkhead cover.
9. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels.
10. Remove the splash shield.
14-218
13. Disconnect the steering joint (see page 17-39).
15. Disconnect the transmission breather hose (A) f r o m

the breather pipe (B) at the transmission housing.
18. Remove the dipstick, then remove the starter (A) and
the gasket (B).
16. Remove the starter cable (A) and S terminal

connector (B) f r o m the starter.
17. Remove the harness clamp (C) f r o m the clamp

bracket (D), and remove the clamp bracket.
2 1 . Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end for proper
fit and wear. I f t h e bushing is loose or w o r n , replace
the shift cable (see page 14-254).
(cont'd)
14-219
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
valve B connector (B), and 4th clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch connector (C), and remove the
harness cover mounting bolt (D), the shift solenoid
w i r e harness connector (E), and remove the harness
clamp (F).

C connector (A).
24. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (B).

25. Remove the harness clamp (C) f r o m its bracket (D),
and remove the bracket.
26. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector
(A).
14-220
27. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) f r o m the ATF cooler
lines (B). Turn the ends of the cooler hoses up to
prevent ATF f r o m f l o w i n g out, then plug the cooler
hoses and lines.

switch connector (A).
30. Remove the connector bracket f r o m the engine front

engine hanger balancer bar front a r m .

connector (A), the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (B), the ATF temperature sensor
connector (C), and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D).
(cont'd)
14-221
3 1 . Remove the harness clamp bracket f r o m the engine
rear cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach
the 2008 V6 attachment a r m .
34. Lift and support the engine w i t h the engine support

front cylinder head with some spacers (B) and the bolt
(10 x 1.25 m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) to the rear cylinder head and the bolt
(8 x 1.25 m m ) (D), then attach the the 2008 V6
attachment arm to the engine hanger balance bar.
NOTE:
Be careful w h e n w o r k i n g around the windshield.
Be careful not to damage the hood opener cable
w h e n installing the engine support hanger at the
front bulkhead.
AAR-T1256
33. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256). With

the engine support hanger beam (B) on its side, insert
the hanger beam through the opening, then rotate it
over the damper (C).
14-222
36. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
(cont'd)
14-223
38. Remove the lock pins (A) and the castle nuts (B), and
separate the lower arms (C) f r o m the knuckles (D) (see
4 2 . 4 W D : Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller

shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C), and
separate the propeller shaft f r o m the transfer
companion flange.
4 3 . 4 W D : Remove the transfer assembly f r o m the

transmission.
39. Insert a 6 m m Allen wrench (E) in the top of the ball

joint pin (F), and remove the nuts (G), then separate
the stabilizer link (H).
40. Remove the cotter pins (I) and the nuts (J), and
separate the tie-rod end ball joints (K) f r o m the
knuckles (see step 3 on page 18-16).
4 1 . 4 W D : Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather
hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose (B)
f r o m the breather pipe (C) on the transfer assembly.
14-224
44. Disconnect the engine m o u n t control system

connector.
45. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and remove

the drive plate bolts (B) (8) while rotating the
crankshaft pulley.
46. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
47. Loosen the hose clamp bolt, then disconnect the

power steering fluid hose f r o m the fluid line at the left
front of the subframe.
(cont'd)
14-225
48. Remove the transmission lower m o u n t bolt.
50. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable arms
(B) on the front subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXSB0)
to its center plate.
NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used w i t h a
commercially available transmission jack.
49. Remove the four rear m o u n t bracket bolts.
5 1 . Line up the slots in the arms w i t h the bolt holes on the

corner of the jack base, then attach the adapter
(EQS02BMDXSB0) to the jack base w i t h the bolts (A)
that came w i t h the jack. Tighten the bolts securely.
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
52. Raise the jack t o the vehicle height, then attach the
adapter to the front subframe using the subframe
stiffener m o u n t i n g bolts (B) and bolt holes.
14-226
53. Remove the six bolts securing the front stiffeners (A)
and the rear stiffeners (B), and the four bolts securing
the front subframe (C), and lower the front subframe.
55. Remove the transmission g r o u n d terminal (B).
56. Remove the driveshafts f r o m the differential and the

intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over the driveshaft ends. Secure the driveshafts to the
5 8
- R e v e the intermediate shaft (C). Coat all precision

machined surfaces w i t h clean engine oil, then put
plastic bags over the intermediate shaft ends.
(cont'd)
14-227
59. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A) and disconnect the
CKP sensor connector (B).
61. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
62. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) f r o m the front

m o u n t bracket (B), and remove the front m o u n t
bracket.
60. Remove the bolt securing the sensor harness clamp

bracket (C).
63. Remove the transmission housing m o u n t i n g bolt (C)

using a 22 m m deep socket.
64. Place a jack under the transmission.
14-228
00
65. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting
bolts.
70. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
66. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
7 1 . Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's damaged

(see page 14-230).
67. Lower the transmission by loosening the w i n g nut on

the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine just
enough for the transmission to clear its end f r o m the
side frame.
68. Slide the transmission away f r o m the engine to
remove it f r o m the vehicle.
69. Check once again that the transmission is free of
vacuum hoses, ATF and coolant hoses, and electrical
wiring.
14-229
Drive Plate Removal and
Installation
Transmission Installation
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page

14-218).

. Subframe Alignment Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
. Front Subframe Adapter EQS02BMDXSB0*
Program 888-424-6857
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and the washer (B) f r o m

the engine.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. If you did not clean the ATF cooler w h e n you removed
the transmission, and you are installing an
overhauled or remanufactured transmission, clean
the ATF cooler (see page 14-242).
2. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)
w i t h a new O-ring (C).
74 N m (7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine, and

tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in at least
t w o steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-230).
3. Install the 14 x 20 m m dowel pin (D) and the 10 x 20

m m dowel pin (E) in the torque converter housing.
4. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise it to
engine level.
14-230
5. Attach the transmission t o the engine, and install the

lower transmission housing m o u n t i n g bolts.
7. Install the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft)
6. Install the rear transmission housing mounting bolts.

12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft)
8. Install the transmission housing mounting bolt (A).

NOTE: Be careful not t o damage the crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor and the sensor harness.
/10 x 1.25 m m
38 N m (3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
Replace.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
12x1.25 mm
6 4 N m (6.5kgfm,47Ibfft)
9. Install the front m o u n t bracket (B) w i t h new mounting

bolts.
10. Secure the harness clamp bracket (C) w i t h the bolt.
(cont'd)
14-231
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
11. Connect the CKP sensor connector (A), and install the
CKP sensor cover (B) and the sensor harness clamp
bracket (C).
12. Install a n e w set ring (A) o n the interrmjdiate shaft (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
16 Ibfft)
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
13. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft attaches

to the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent, and d r y
w i t h compressed air. A p p l y ATF to the Intermediate
shaft splines (C), then install the intermediate shaft, be
sure not t o allow dust or other foreign particles t o
enter the transmission.
14. Install the exhaust manifold bracket (D) and the heat
shield (E).
14-232
15. Install a new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B).
2 1 . Support the front subframe (A) w i t h the front

subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXSB0) and a jack, and
lift it up t o the body.
A
Replace.
16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft attaches t o

the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent, and dry
w i t h compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft,
be sure not t o allow dust or other foreign particles to
enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle fully
o u t w a r d , and slide the driveshaft into the differential
until y o u feel its set ring fully engage the side gear.
EQS02BMDXSB0
22. Loosely install new subframe m o u n t i n g bolts: front

(A), rear (B), rear stiffeners (C) and mounting bolts (D),
and front stiffeners (E) and mounting bolts (F).
17. Apply the recommended grease to the right

driveshaft inboard-joint splines.
18. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate shaft
splines until y o u feel the driveshaft fully engage the
intermediate shaft set ring.
19. Install the transmission lower m o u n t (A).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N-m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
A
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m ,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
D
12 x 1.25 m m
117 N m
(11.9 k g f m ,
86 Ibfft)
B
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
20. Install the transmission ground cable (B).
(cont'd)
14-233
23. Loosely tighten the left front subframe mounting bolt
(A); insert the subframe alignment pin
(070AG-SJAA10S) through the positioning hole (B) on
the rear stiffener, t h r o u g h the positioning hole (C) on
the subframe, and into the positioning hole (D) o n the
body, then tighten the subframe mounting bolt.
3 1 . Loosely tighten the transmission lower m o u n t bolt.
32. Remove the jack and front subframe adapter.

33. Remove the engine hanger.
117 N m (11.9 k g f m ,
86.1 Ibfft)
Replace.
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
34. Install the t w o m o u n t bracket bolts (A) on the rear of

the bracket, and install the new bolts (B) o n the front.

in the same manner as in step 23.
mounting bolts.
26. Loosen the left rear m o u n t i n g bolt, then tighten the
bolt t o the specified torque while putting the guide pin
into the position hole.
27. Tighten the right rear m o u n t i n g bolt to the specified
torque while putting the guide pin into the position
hole.
28. Tighten the right and left front m o u n t i n g bolts to the
specified torque.
29. Check that the positioning holes and slots are aligned
using the frame positioning guide pin.
30. Tighten the rear and front stiffener mounting bolts t o
42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
^
R e
, D
, J
35. Tighten the transmission lower m o u n t bolt t o the

specified torque.
14-234
36. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A) w i t h

eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts t o half of the specified
torque, then do the final torque in a crisscross pattern.
After tightening the last bolt, check that the crankshaft
rotates freely.
39. Connect the power steering fluid hose (A) t o the line
(B), and secure the hose w i t h its hose clamp (C).
B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
40. Connect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
37. Install the torque converter cover (C).

38. Connect the engine m o u n t control system connector.
(cont'd)
14-235
4 1 . 4WD: Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and
install the transfer assembly (B) on the transmission.
43.4WD: Install the propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer

(C). Make sure y o u use new mounting bolts.
44. Install the ball joints on each lower arm (A) to each
knuckle (B) w i t h new castle nuts (C), and secure the
castle nuts w i t h the lock pins (D).
42.4WD: Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on
the transfer assembly w i t h the bolt, and install the
breather hose (B) over the breather pipe (C) w i t h the
dot (D) facing out.
6 x 1.0 mm
NOTE: Do not install the new lock pins (D) on to the

castle nut until the castle nut tightend to the specified
torque.
45. Install the nuts (E) on the ball joint pins (F) on each
stabilizer link (G). Insert a 6 m m Allen wrench (H) in
the t o p of the ball joint pins, and tighten the nuts t o the
specified torque.
46. Install the tie-rod end ball joints (I) to each knuckle
w i t h the nuts (J) and new cotter pins (K).
14-236
47. Install exhaust pipe A w i t h the n e w self-locking nuts,

and n e w gaskets (B).
49. Install a n e w front m o u n t bolt, and install t h e front

m o u n t stop (A) w i t h n e w nuts.
12x1.25 mm
74 N m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
Replace.
10x1.25 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10x1.25 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m ,
40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
B
Replace.
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
48. install the front subframe stiffener w i t h the n e w

m o u n t i n g bolts.
50. Remove the engine support hanger, engine hanger
balancer bar and the 2008 V6 attachment a r m .
5 1 . Install the connector bracket t o the front cylinder
head.
-10 x 1.25 m m
59 N m (6.0 k g f m , 44 Ibfft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
14-237
52. Install the harness clamp to the rear cylinder head,
and connect the breather hose over the breather pipe.
54. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

connector (A), the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (B), the ATF temperature sensor
connector (C), and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D). Do not allow water,
fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign particles to enter any
of the connectors.
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
53. Connect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch connector (A).
55. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses w i t h the clips (C) (see
page 14-245).
14-238
3
56. Connect the transmission range switch connector (A).
60. Install the harness cover (A) on its bracket (B), and
secure it w i t h the bolt.
57. Install the harness clamp bracket (A), and install the
harness clamp (B) on the bracket.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibf ft)
12x1.25 mm
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
6 1 . Connect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A

connector (C), A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B connector (D), 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (E), the shift solenoid wire
harness connector, and install the harness clamp (F).
58. Install the harness cover (C) o n its bracket, and secure
w i t h the bolts.
valve C connector (D).
(cont'd)
14-239
62. A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole in the bushing
(A) in the shift cable end (B).
66. Install the harness clamp bracket (A), and install the
harness clamp (B) on its bracket.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
63. Secure the shift cable bracket (C) w i t h the nuts.

64. Attach the shift cable end to the control lever (D), then
insert the control pin (E) into the control lever hole
t h r o u g h the shift cable e n d , and secure the control pin
w i t h the spring clip (F).
65. Install the starter (A) and a new gasket (B) (see page
4-11).
14-240
67. Install the starter cable (C) and the S terminal

connector (D).
68. Install the water hose (E) in its clamp (F).
69. Install the transmission breather hose (A) over the
breather pipe (B).
70. Install the power steering p u m p outlet line (A) w i t h a

new O-ring (B) to the p u m p , and secure the hose
clamp (C) w i t h the bolt.
78. Install the splash shield (A).
79. Install the bulkhead cover.

80. Install the cowl top side covers on the cowl cover.
8 1 . Install the front wheels.
7 1 . Connect the steering joint (see page 17-62).

72. Refill the power steering fluid reservoir w i t h fluid to
the upper level line.
73. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF (see step 6 on page
14-209).
82. Set the parking brake, start the engine at fast idle, and
turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times to bleed air f r o m the system. Recheck the fluid
level, and refill if necessary.
83. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift the
transmission through all gears three times. Check the
shift lever operation, the A/T gear position indicator
operation, and the shift cable adjustment.
74. Install the battery base bracket and the battery base.
75. Install the air cleaner housing, the intake air duct, and
the engine cover.
NOTE: Do not the road-test until step 87.
84. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page
18-5).
85. Start the engine w i t h the shift lever in P or N, and
w a r m it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).
86. Turn the engine off, and check the ATF level (see page
14-207).
87. Road-test the vehicle (see page 14-177).
14-241
ATF Cooler Cleaning
. ATF Cooler Cleaner GHTTTCF6H*
Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter GTHGNBP2*
* Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured
automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure t o
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission
failure.
2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded

electrical outlet.
INOTICEl
Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light
fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it.
Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension
cord or drop light; y o u could damage the unit.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1

delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of ail hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along w i t h gloves and
protective clothing. If y o u get ATF in your eyes or on
y o u r skin, rinse w i t h water immediately.
A WARNING
Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in
burns and other serious injuries.
Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow this procedure.
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid
level should be 4.5 inches f r o m the t o p of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. Use
only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives.
3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to O N ; the green indicator

above the toggle switch comes o n . Wait 1 hour for the
cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature.
(The cooler cleaner is ready to use w h e n the
temperature gauge reads 140F to 150F.)
NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle
switch comes o n , the fluid level in the tank is t o o l o w
for the tank heater to w o r k (see step 1 of this
procedure).
14-242
4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach t h e m

to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo bolts for
f l o w t h r o u g h the ATF cooler cleaner.
TO HOSE
TO BANJO BOLT
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to O N ; the green

indicator above the toggle switch comes o n . Let the
p u m p run for 5 minutes. While the p u m p is running,
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process.
Always open the valve slowly. A t the end of the
5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open.
NOTE: While the p u m p is running w i t h the air purge
valve open, it is normal to see vapor c o m i n g f r o m the
filler/breather tube vents.
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line
that normally goes to the external filter on the
transmission).
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line.
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 125 psi)
to the air purge valve.
INOTICEI
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way check valve
to keep ATF f r o m entering your shop's air system. Do
not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler
provided w i t h the cooler cleaner to your shop air line
if your coupler is not compatible.
(cont'd)
14-243
ATF Cooler Cleaning (cont'd)
9. W i t h the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle
switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off. Leave the
air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge
the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the
valve.
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses f r o m the ATF
cooler. N o w connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line.
11. N o w connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner
working properly:
Replace the t w o magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters
after every 20 hours of use, based on the hour meter,
or w h e n y o u notice a restriction in the ATF flow.
Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
Replace the ATF in the tank w h e n it looks dark or dirty.
12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to O N , and let the p u m p

run for 5 minutes. While the p u m p is running, open
and close the air purge valve periodically. Always
open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5-minute
cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open.
NOTE: While the p u m p is running w i t h the air purge
valve o p e n , it is normal to see vapor c o m i n g f r o m the
filler/breather tube vents.
13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle
switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve open for at
least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of
residual ATF, then close the valve.
14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses f r o m the ATF
cooler lines.
15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
16. Disconnect the shop air f r o m the air purge valve.
Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
17. Disconnect and stow the fittings f r o m the ATF cooler
inlet and outlet lines.
18. Unplug the cooler cleaner f r o m the 110 V outlet.
14-244
SPIN-ON FILTER
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement

Exploded View
NOTE: W h e n installing the hose clamps, make sure they do not interfere w i t h the surrounding parts.
1. Install the ATF cooler hoses over the ATF cooler lines w i t h the clips at the appropriate points in reference to the
f o l l o w i n g list. Align the paint mark (I) upward.
Point
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Distance from Hose End to Clip (H)

2 - 4 m m ( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in)
Hose End Contact Point

Bulge
6 - 8 m m ( 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 3 1 in)
Bulge
2. Secure the hose w i t h the clip (G), aligning the tab (J) u p w a r d .
3. Secure the ATF cooler hose w i t h the clamps (K) at the marking (L).
4. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF to the proper level (see page 14-207).
14-245
ATF Cooler Replacement
supported securely.
5. Remove the power steering fluid hose clamp (A) f r o m

the ATF cooler mounting bracket.
3. Remove the front bulkhead cover, and remove the

front bumper (see page 20-195).
U A
i.v
I I I I I I
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Remove the hose clamp (A), and remove the ATF

cooler inlet hose (B) and the outlet hose (C) f r o m the
hose clamps (D), then disconnect the hoses f r o m the
ATF cooler lines.
C
6. Remove the ATF cooler (B), and replace it. Install a

ATF cooler.
7. Install the power steering fluid hose clamp on the
bracket.
8. Slide the ATF cooler inlet hose over the ATF cooler
line until the hose end contacts w i t h the bulge, and
secure the hose w i t h the clip at 68 m m
(0.240.31 in) f r o m the hose end.
9. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose over the ATF cooler
line until the hose end contacts w i t h the bulge, and
secure the hose w i t h the clip at 24 m m (0.080.16
in) f r o m the hose end.
10. Secure the cooler hoses w i t h the hose clamps at the
marks on the hoses.
11. Install the hose clamp at the mark.
12. Install the front bumper (see page 20-195), and install
the front bulkhead cover.
14. Check the ATF level (see page 14-207).
14-246
Shift Lever Removal

1. Remove these items:
Left center console panel (see page 20-134)
Right center console panel (see page 20-134)
5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) counterclockwise

(B) until it stops, and push the retainer lock (C) into the
socket holder retainer to lock the retainer.
Center console box (see page 20-134)

2. Shift the shift lever to R.
3. Remove the nut (A) securing the shift cable end, and
remove the shift cable end.
6. Move the socket holder (A), then slide it to remove the

shift cable (B) f r o m the shift cable bracket (C).
4. Unlock the retainer (A).
7. Remove the right center console panel mounting

bolts and harness clip.
8. Remove the shift lever m o u n t i n g bolts.
(cont'd)
14-247
Shift Lever Removal (cont'd)
Shift Lever Installation
9. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) and

the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector (B).
1. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) and the

D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
panel light connector (B).
10. Remove the t w o m o u n t bracket bolts (C) f r o m the left

shift lever m o u n t i n g bracket.
2. Attach the shift lever to the right shift lever m o u n t i n g

bracket w i t h t w o bolts (C), and the left shift lever
m o u n t i n g bracket w i t h t w o bolts (D).
11. Remove the t w o m o u n t bracket bolts (D) f r o m the

right shift lever m o u n t i n g bracket.
12. Remove the shift lever f r o m the dashboard.
14-248
3. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust the
shift cable (see page 14-257).
3
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease o n the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if y o u
have silicone grease on y o u r hands or gloves.
SHIFT L E V E R KNOB
SCREW
5 x 0.8 m m
3 N m (0.3 k g f m , 2 Ibfft)
Replace.
A / T G E A R POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
A / T G E A R POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT B U L B
SELECT COVER
A / T G E A R POSITION INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT H A R N E S S /
PARK PIN SWITCH / D3 SWITCH
CONNECTOR H A R N E S S
E S C U T C H E O N BODY
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
CLAMP
SILICONE G R E A S E
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID PLUNGER
14-249
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement
NOTE:
Refer to the Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly
(see page 14-249) as needed during the f o l l o w i n g
procedures.
3. Remove the screws (A), and remove the shift lever

knob assembly (B).
Make sure not t o get any silicone grease on the

terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if y o u have silicone grease on your hands or
gloves.
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-247).
2. Disconnect the D3 switch connector (A), and remove
the connector clip (B) f r o m the m o u n t i n g bracket L.
4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket (A) f r o m the indicater panel (B), and remove
the indicater panel f r o m the shift lever bracket base.
14-250
5. Release the lock tabs (A) retaining the shift lock

solenoid t h r o u g h the left shift lever mounting bracket
using thin blade screwdrivers.
7. Release the lock tabs retaining the park pin harness,

using thin blade screwdrivers, and remove the A/T
gear position indicator panel light harness / park pin
switch / D3 switch connector harness, and the harness
clip.
6. Remove the shift lock solenoid (A), and remove the

connector clip (B), and remove the shift lock stop and
the stop cushion (C).
8. Replace the shift lever / shift cable bracket assembly,

and install the new A/T gear position indicator light
harness / t h e park pin switch / t h e D 3 switch connector
harness, and install the harness clip.
9. Route the A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness / park pin switch / D 3 switch connector
harness in the harness guide.
10. Install the shift lock stop and the stop cushion.
(cont'd)
14-251
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement (cont'd)
11. A p p l y silicone grease to the joint of the shift lock
solenoid plunger (A) and the shift lock stop over the
pin.
12. Install the shift lock solenoid (B), and install the
harness clip (C).
13. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel, and
install the A/T gear position indicator panel light
socket (A) in the indicator panel (B).
14. A p p l y silicone grease to the top of the shift lever rod

(A), and install the shift lever knob assenmbly (B).
15. Secure the shift lever knob assembly w i t h new screws

(C).
16. Install the D3 switch connector clip (A), and connect
the D3 switch connector (B).
17. Install the shift lever assembly (see page 14-248).
14-252
3
Shift Lever Knob Replacement
NOTE:
procedures.
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
especially if y o u have silicone grease on y o u r hands or
gloves.

knob (B) f r o m the shift lever.
1. Remove the left center console panel (see page

20-134).
3. Disconnect the D3 switch connector (A).
5. A p p l y silicone grease to the t o p of the shift lever rod

(A).
6. Install a new shift lever knob (B).

7. Secure the shift lever knob w i t h new screws (C).
(cont'd)
14-253
Shift Lever Knob Replacement
(cont'd)
Shift Cable Replacement
8. Connect the D3 switch connector (A).

3. Remove the nut (A) securing the shift cable end, and

9. Install the the left center panel (see page 20-134).
14-254
3
11. Remove the spring clip (A) and the control pin (B),
then separate the shift cable end (C) f r o m the control
lever (D).

supported securely.
14. Remove the heat shield under the shift cable
grommet.

housing.
10. Remove the battery base and the battery base
bracket.
(cont'd)
14-255
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
15. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket (A).
2 1 . A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease t o the hole in the bushing

(A) in the shift cable end (B).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
16. Remove the shift cable g r o m m e t , and pull out the shift
cable (C).
17. Insert a n e w shift cable t h r o u g h the g r o m m e t hole (D),
and install the g r o m m e t in its hole. Do not bend the
shift cable excessively.
18. Secure the shift cable bracket w i t h the nut.
19. Install the heat shield.
20. Make sure that the transmission is in R at the
transmission control lever.
22. Secure the shift cable bracket (C) w i t h the nuts.

23. Attach the shift cable end t o the control lever (D), then
insert the control pin (E) into the control lever hole
t h r o u g h the shift cable e n d , and secure the control pin
w i t h the spring clip (F).
24. Install the shift cable o n the shift lever, and adjust the
shift cable (see page 14-257).
26. Install the air cleaner housing and the intake air duct.
27. Install the under-hood subfuse box o n the battery
base, and install the subfuse box o n its bracket.
14-256
Shift Cable Adjustment



3. Remove the nut (A) securing the shift cable e n d , and

(cont'd)
14-257
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
7. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift
position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) t o
8. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), and check that the R

position indicator comes o n .
14-258
10. Place the shift lever in R, then insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in)
pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever,
and into the positioning hole on the bracket. Use only
a 6.0 m m (0.24 in) pin w i t h no burrs.
11. Check that the shift lever is secured in the R position.

00
14. Align the clearance (A) between the socket holder (B)
and the socket holder retainer (C) w i t h the opening (D)
in the shift cable bracket (E), then slide the holder into
the bracket.
NOTE:When the socket holder is installed in the shift
cable bracket, the retainer lock is unhinged and
releases the holder retainer lock, then the holder
retainer returns under spring force to secure the shift
cable.
15. Push the retainer lock (A) fully to lock the socket
holder retainer (B), and make sure that the retainer
lock fits into the hinged-joint (C). If the retainer lock
does not fit w i t h the edge of the hinged-joint, rotate
the holder retainer counterclockwise while pushing
the retainer lock until it locks.
16. Check that the shift cable end is properly installed on

the m o u n t i n g stud.
Improperly installed:
Cable end
positions
out of the
mounting stud.
Cable end rides

on the bottom
of the mounting
stud.
Properly
installed:
a n
17. If the cable end is out of position on the m o u n t i n g

stud, remove the shift cable f r o m the bracket, and
reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable
end on the m o u n t i n g stud while the shift cable is on
the bracket.
If the cable end rides on the bottom of the mounting
stud, rotate the stud and align the square fitting w i t h
the hole.
(cont'd)
14-259
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
18. Install and tighten the nut on the shift cable end.
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
19. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in) pin that was installed to
hold the shift lever.
20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and check that the A/T gear position
indicator follows the transmission range switch.
21. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift lock
works properly. Push the shift lock release, and check
that the shift lever releases, and also check that the
shift lever locks when it is shifted back to P.
22. Install these items:
14-260

A / T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

F-CAN Communication Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-215
M O D U L E (PCM)
Test, page 14-263

14-261
A / T Gear Position Indicator

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
A/T GEAR
H
POSITION
(A)
INDICATOR \SS
PANEL L I G H T ^ R E D / B L K - )
D3 S W I T C H
-GRN|

G101
P C M Harness Connector Terminal Locations
I1I2
11
22
/ 13
I I I
87 9 |10|
5
6
16 1718 19 20 21
25
24
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41
A(49P)
^44|/)46
(White)
48|49|
h|2
4 | 5 |6 | 7 8
9 |10|
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
/!/!! / /1
(Gray)
|40|41 42
B(49P) A
14-262
I1I2
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9|10|
/M
/ ^<
/ /
11 12
24
22
30
16
19 20 21
25
26 27' 28
32 33 34
>s
37 38 39
40 41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 47|43|49|
C(49P) o (Green)
Transmission Range Switch Test

housing.
bracket.
6. Check for continuity between terminals at the

transmission range switch connector. There should
be continuity between the terminals in the following
table for each switch position.
Transmission Range Switch Connector
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections

6
ATP
ST RVS
ATP ATP
2 FWD GND
OO
10
ATP
1
o ~ o
o o o
O O
o
O O
7. The transmission range switch test is finished if the
test results are OK. If there is no continuity between
any terminals, check that the transmission range
switch installation. If the switch installation is OK,
replace the switch (see page 14-264).
14-263

T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e
S w i t c h
R e p l a c e m e n t

9. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (A) on the control
lever (B), and remove the nut (C), the lock washer, the
spring washer (D), and the control lever.

housing.
bracket.
5. Remove the spring clip (A) and the control pin (B),
then separate the shift cable end (C) f r o m the control
lever (D).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
10. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (E) on the
transmission range switch (F), hold the selector
control shaft (G) w i t h a 6.0 m m w r e n c h , and loosen
the locknut (H).
11. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove
the transmission range switch (two bolts).
12. Set a new transmission range switch (A) to the N
position. The transmission range switch clicks in the
N position, and the control shaft slot (B) aligns w i t h
the N position line (C).
N
7. Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end for proper
fit and wear. If the bushing is loose or w o r n , replace
the shift cable (see page 14-254).
14-264
3
13. M o v e the control shaft f r o m the P position to the N
position by turning the control shaft w i t h a 6.0 m m
wrench.
15. Install a new lock washer (A) over the control shaft (B)
while aligning the tab (C) of the lock washer w i t h the N
positioning line (D) on the transmission range switch
(E). Then install the locknut (F).
14. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently over

the control shaft (B), and install the bolts loosely.
16. Push the locknut against the transmission housing to

seat the transmission range switch into the control
shaft, and tighten the locknut (A) to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft) while holding the control shaft (B) w i t h a
6.0 m m wrench (C), then bend the lock tabs (D) of the
lock washer against the locknut.
D
17. Tighten the bolts (E) securing the transmission range

switch to 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft).
(cont'd)
14-265

Transmission Range Switch
18. Install the control lever (A), the spring washer (B), a
new lock washer (C), and the locknut (D) on the
control shaft (E).
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel

Light Harness Replacement
NOTE:
The A/T gear position indicator panel light harness is
not available separately f r o m the park pin switch and
the D3 switch connector harness; replace the A/T gear
position indicator panel light h a r n e s s / t h e park pin
switch / the D3 switch connector harness, and the
connector as a set.
procedures.
the connector clip (B).
16 N m
(1.6 k g f m , 12 Ibfft)
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil. Clean if

needed, then connect the connector securely.
20. Apply m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole in the bushing
control lever hole through the shift cable end, and
secure the control pin w i t h the spring clip.
2 1 . Secure the shift cable bracket w i t h the nuts.
24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization w i t h the A/T gear
position indicator.
25. Check that the engine starts in P and N, and does not
start in any other shift lever position.
26. Check that the back-up lights come on w h e n the shift
lever is in R.
27. A l l o w all four wheels to rotate freely, then start the
engine, and check the shift lever operation.
14-266

socket (A) f r o m the indicator panel (B), and remove
the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb (C)
f r o m the socket.
5. Install a new A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness / park pin switch / D3 switch connector
harness (A).
6. Route the A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness in the harness guide.
7. Install the light bulb (B) in the A/T gear position
indicator panel light socket (C).
C
8. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket (A) in the indicator panel (B).

harness (A) by expanding its locks f r o m the harness
guide.
(cont'd)
14-267

Light Harness Replacement (cont'd)

Replacement
NOTE:
procedures.
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands or
gloves.
3. Disconnect the D3 switch connector (A).
14-268
3
knob (B) f r o m the shift lever.
6. Disassemble the indicator panel (C), the escutcheon

body (D), the select cover (E).
7. Install the new indicator panel, the escutcheon body,

the select cover, and assemble the A/T gear position
indicator panel.

socket (A) f r o m the indicator panel (B), and remove
the A/T gear position indicator panel.
8. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel (A), and

socket (B) in the indicator panel.
(cont'd)
14-269

A / T Gear Position Indicator Panel Replacement (cont'd)
(A), and install the shift lever knob (B).
13. Install these items:

10. Secure the shift lever knob w i t h new screws (C).

12. Connect the D3 switch connector (A).
14-270
D3 Switch Circuit Troubleshooting

3. Measure the voltage between A/T gear position
indicator panel light harness / park pin switch / D3
PARK PIN SWITCH /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR

A17 and A/T gear position indicator panel light
terminal No. 5.
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT
H A R N E S S / PARK PIN
SWITCH / D3 SWITCH
CONNECTOR
1 2
11
1 2
3 4
D3SW (BLU)
(V)
22
4|5|< 3 | 7 8
ho
13
16 17|l8 19 20 21
24
25
>^
26 27 28
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
40141
/}44|/|46
48149
D3SW (BLU)
D3SW (BLU)
1 2
3 4
GND (BLK)
Is there battery
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 9.
voltage?

terminal A17 and the A/T gear position indicator panel
light harness / park pin switch / D3 switch
connector.B
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 4.
4. Measure the voltage between A/T gear position
PARK PIN SWITCH /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR
D3SW (BLU)
3 4
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between A/T gear

position indicator panel light harness / park pin switch
/ D3 switch connectorterminal No. 6 and ground
(G403), and repair poor ground (G403).H
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
14-271

D3 Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between A/T gear position
PARK PIN SWITCH /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR

switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 w h i l e
pressing the D3 button several times.
PARK PIN S W I T C H /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR
D3SW (BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6
D3SW(GRN)
GND (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
terminal A17 and the A/T gear position indicator panel
light harness / park pin switch / D3 switch
connector.B
NO-Check for loose or poor connection at PCM
connectorterminal A17. I f t h e connection is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and
recheck. I f t h e s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a
11-250)11
14-272
Is there continuity every time the switch is pushed and no

continuity when released?
YES-Check for loose or poor connection at PCM
connector terminal A 1 7 : I f t h e connection is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and
recheck. I f t h e s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a
11-250).
NO-Replace a new shift lever knob (see page 14-253).
D3 Switch Test
2. Disconnect A/T gear position indicator panel light
harness / park pin switch / D3 switch connector.
5. Disconnect the D3 switch 2P connector f r o m the

connector holder, and disconnect it.
3. Press and release the D3 button several times, and

check the switch for continuity between A/T gear
/ D3 switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6. The
continuity should toggle between continuity and no
continuity between the terminals every time the D3
button is pressed and released.
4. D3 switch test is finished i f t h e test result is OK. I f t h e
D3 switch works incorrectly at A/T gear position
switch connector, test the D3 switch at the D3 switch
2P connector.
6. Press and release the D3 button several times, and

check the switch for continuity between D3 switch 2P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity and no continuity between terminals every
time the D3 button is pressed and released.
7. Replace the D3 switch i f t h e switch tests bad.
8. Replace the D3 switch connector harness, the A/T
gear position indicator panel light harness, and the
park pin switch (see page 14-266) as a set i f t h e switch
is OK. The D3 switch connector harness is not
available f r o m the A/T gear position indicator panel
light harness and park pin switch.
9. Connect the 2P connector.
14-273

DATA LINK
ACCELERATOR
CONNECTOR
PEDAL POSITION
(DLC)
(APP) S E N S O R
APP Sensor Signal
Inspaction, page 11-289
14-274
PARK PIN SWITCH

Key Interlock Lock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 22-101
T e s t page 22-103
STEERING LOCK A S S E M B L Y
K E Y INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock Lock System Circuit
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Shift Lock System Circuit
Test, page 14-279
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION S W I T C H
BAT/
IG1

P C M Harness Connector Terminal Locations
|1|2
11
22
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8
9 |10|
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
/ ^<
24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41
A(49P)
/|44|/|46
(White)
48|49(
|1
4 |5|6 | 7 8
9 |10|
11 12 13 1415 16 17H8 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 42 / 1 / | 4 5 | 4 6
B(49P) A (Gray)
4|5 | 6 | 7
I|1|2
/
/ X
/ /
11 12
30
9|10
25
26 27 28
32 33 34
37 38 39
24
22
16 1718 19 20 21
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / ] 4 6 47 48|49
C(49P) O (Green)
14-275

Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
driver's side of dashboard.
6. Check the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A

with the HDS in the A/T Data List. Do not press the
accelerator.
Is the APP sensor A reading 5 % or more, or the APP
sensor A voltage 1.16 V or higher?
YES-Check the APP sensor (see page 11-289).H
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).H
9. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector.

3. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that the shift lock solenoid
Does the shift lock solenoid work
11. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
properly?
1
YES-Go to step 4.
| 2
IIG1 (YEL)
NO-Go to step 7.
X)
4. Check the Brake Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T
Data List while pressing the brake pedal, and w h e n
the brake pedal is released.
Does the brake pedal position switch work
properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there battery
NO-Troubleshootthe brake pedal position switch

signal circuit (see page 11-324).
YES-Go to step 12.
5. Check the ATP Switch signal w i t h the HDS in the A/T

Data List. The shift lever must be in P.
Is the ATP Switch ON?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 20.
14-276
voltage?
NO-Check for a blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the shift lock solenoid
connector and the driver's underdash fuse/relay
box.l
12. Press the brake pedal w i t h the shift lever in P. Do not
press the accelerator.
13. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 while pressing
the brake pedal.

terminal to shift lock solenoid connectorterminal No.
2, and connect another j u m p e r wire f r o m the positive
battery terminal to connectorterminal No. 1, then
check that the shift lock solenoid operates.
NOTE: Do not connect the positive battery terminal to
the connector terminal No. 2 or you will damage the
diode inside the shift lock solenoid.
IG1 (YEL)
S L S (PNK)
RED
BLK

YES-Go to step 14.
14. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage

between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. The
shift lever must be in P.
Does the shift lock solenoid operate properly?

YES-Check the shift lock mechanism. Replace the
shift lock stop and stop cushion (see page 14-282), if
the shift lock stop is w o r n or s t u c k . B
NO-Replace the shift lock solenoid (see page
14-279J.H
IG1 (YEL)
S L S (PNK)


terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid connector.H
(cont'd)
14-277

Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
A2 and shift lock solenoid connectorterminal No. 2.
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
CONNECTOR

S L S (PNK)
1 2
9 10
6
S L S (PNK)
3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 hot
h i 2
11
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22
/ 24
25
GND (BLK)
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41
/ | 4 4 | / | 4 6 /l*8|49|
Terminal side of
female terminals
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is there battery

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. Ifthe
YES-Go to step 25.

terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid c o n n e c t o r . H
voltage?

terminal A16 and the transmission range s w i t c h .

2 1 . Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.
1 2
9 10
6
GND
ATPP
1 2
6 7
3
8
5
9 10
GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the transmission
range switch and ground (G101), or repair poor
ground ( G 1 0 D . B
14-278
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in P, and no

continuity when the shift lever is out of P?
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. I f t h e
NO-Replace a transmission range switch (see page
14-264).
3
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement

NOTE:
(see page 14-249) as needed during the following
procedures.
especially if y o u have silicone grease on your hands or
gloves.
the connector clip (B) f r o m the mounting bracket.

3. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
Test M e n u , and check that the shift lock solenoid
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved out of P w h e n
the Shift Lock Solenoid is ON. Move the shift lever
back to P, and check that it locks w i t h the Shift Lock
Solenoid is OFF.
5. Check that the shift lock releases w h e n the shift lock
release is pushed, and check that it locks w h e n the
shift lock release is released.
6. If the shift lock solenoid does not w o r k properly, go to
the shift lock system troubleshooting (see page
14-276).
(cont'd)
14-279

Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
knob (B) from the shift lever.
:'d)
solenoid through the left shift lever mounting bracket
6. Remove the shift lock solenoid (A).

socket (A) f r o m the indicator panel, and remove the
A/T gear position indicator panel (B).
7. A p p l y sillicone grease to the solenoid plunger (B), and

plunger spring (C) assembly, and the shift lock stop
(D).
8. Install a new shift lock solenoid.
14-280
3
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel, and
install the shift position indicator panel light socket (A)
in the indicator panel (B).

(A), and secure the shift lever knob (B) with new
screws (C).
11. Install the D3 switch connector clip, and connect the

D3 switch connector.
14-281

Shift Lock Stop/Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement
NOTE:
(see page 14-249) as needed during the following
procedures.

knob assembly (B) f r o m the shift lever.

especially if you have silicone grease on your hands or
gloves.
2. Disconnect the D3 switch conector (A) and remove
the connector clip (B).
f

socket (A) f r o m the indicator panel, and remove the
A/T gear position indicator panel (B).
14-282
0
solenoid through the left shift lever mounting bracket
8. A p p l y silicone grease to joint of the shift lock solenoid

plunger and the shift lock stop over the pin (A).
6. Remove the shift lock solenoid (A).
9. Install the shift lock solenoid (B), and install the

harness clip (C).
10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel (A), and
socket (B) in the indicator panel.
7. Replace the shift lock stop (B) and the shift lock stop
cushion (C).
(cont'd)
14-283

Shift Lock Stop/Shift Lock Stop
Cushion Replacement (cont'd)
11. Apply silicone grease to the t o p of the shift lever rod
(A), and secure the shift lever knob (B) w i t h new
screws (C).
Park Pin Switch Replacement

NOTE:
The A/T gear position indicator panel light harness is
not available separately f r o m the park pin switch and
the D3 switch connector harness; replace the A/T gear
position indicator panel light h a r n e s s / t h e park pin
switch / the D3 switch connector harness, and the
connector as a set.
procedures.
2. Disconnect the D3 switch conector (A), and remove
the harness connector clip (B).

14-284
<3
3. Remove the A / T gear position indicator panel light
socket ( A ) f r o m the indicator panel ( B ) , and remove
the A / T gear position indicator panel light bulb (C)
f r o m the socket.
5. Replace the A / T gear position indicator panel light

harness.
6. Install the light bulb in the A / T gear position indicator
panel light socket.
7. Install the A / T gear position indicator panel light
socket ( A ) in the indicator panel (B).
4. Remove the park pin switch (A) by expanding its locks

(B) f r o m the shift lever, and remove the A / T gear
/ D 3 switch connector harness (C).
(cont'd)
14-285

Park Pin Switch Replacement (cont'd)
14-286
Transmission Disassembly
Mainshaft Holder 07GAB-PF50101
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD is similar.
1. Remove the ATF dipstick (D) and the ATF dipstick guide tube (E).
2. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B (six bolts), the ATF feed pipes (F) (three), the O-rings
(three), and gasket.
3. Remove the solenoid valve cover (G) (seven bolts), the dowel pins (two), and the gasket.
4. Disconnect the solenoid valve connectors, then remove the solenoid w i r e harness connector (H).
5. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (four bolts), the ATF feed pipes (I) (three), the O-rings (two), and
the gasket.
6. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (J) on the control lever (K), and remove the nut, lock washer, spring washer, and
control lever.
(cont'd)
14-287
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
7. Pry up the lock tabs of the lock washer (L) on the
transmission range switch (M), hold the selector
control shaft (N) w i t h a 6.0 m m w r e n c h , and loosen
the locknut (O).
18. Cut the lock tab (A) of the mainshaft locknut (B) using
a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
8. Remove the locknut and the lock washer, then

remove the transmission range switch (two bolts).
9. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (P),
the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (Q), and
the sensor washer (R).
10. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector f r o m
the connector bracket (S) and the harness clamp f r o m
the clamp bracket on the ATF cooler line, then remove
the ATF temperature sensor (T).
11. Remove the connector bracket (S) and the 6.0 m m
bolt (U), the dowel pin (two), the o-ring then remove
the ATF cooler line banjo bolts (V), the ATF cooler
lines (W), and the sealing washers (X).
12. Remove the end cover (Y) (three bolts), the dowel pin
(two), the O-ring, the snap ring cap (Z) (two bolts), the
sealing plug (AA), and the washer (BB).
13. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (CC) and the sealing washer.
14. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (DD) and the sealing washer.
15. Remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (EE) and the sealing washer.
16. Remove the transmission ground terminal (FF).
17. Slip the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
20. Pry the lock washer (C), and remove it.
14-288
(cont'd)
14-289
22. Use snap ring pliers to expand the snap ring of the
countershaft bearing. Then lift the transmission
housing.
30. Remove the mainshaft ( 0 ) , the countershaft (P), the

shift fork (J), and the secondary shaft (Q) together,
and remove the needle bearing (R) f r o m the torque
converter housing.
23. Release the snap ring pliers, and remove the

transmission housing (E), the t w o dowel pins (F), and
the gasket.
24. Remove the ATF feed pipes (G) (four) f r o m the
accumulator body.
25. Remove the ATF feed pipes (H) (two) f r o m the torque
converter housing.
26. Remove the mainshaft holder f r o m the mainshaft.
27. Pry back the lock tab of the lock washer (I) on the shift
fork (J), then remove the bolt and the lock washer.
28. Unclip the detent spring f r o m the detent a r m .
3 1 . Remove the selector control shaft and the park lever

link(S).
32. Remove the baffle plate (T).
33. Remove the differential assembly (U).
34.4WD: Remove the transfer output shaft (V).
35. Remove the baffle plate (W).
36. Remove the intermediary shaft (X).
29. Remove the park pawl stop (K), the park pawl (L), the
pawl spring (M), and the pawl shaft (N).
14-290
(cont'd)
14-291
38. Remove the accumulator body (B) (11 bolts), the
dowel pins (two), the detent arm (C), the detent arm
shaft (D), and the accumlator separator plate (E).
39. Remove the ATF feed pipe (F) f r o m the main valve
body.
50. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
thoroughly w i t h compressed air, then check that it is
good condition and the inlet opening is not clogged.
4WD
40. Remove the secondary valve body (G) (one bolt), the
dowel pins (two), and the secondary separator plate
(H). Do not let the check balls (I) (two) fall out.
4 1 . Remove the regulator valve body (J) (seven bolts), the
stator shaft (K), the stator shaft stop (L), the dowel
pins (two), and the regulator separator plate (M).
42. Remove the main valve body (N) (8 m m : three bolts,
6 m m : seven bolts). Do not let the lubrication check
valve (O) fall out.
43. Remove the torque converter check valve (P) and the
valve spring (Q).
44. Remove the ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (R), then
remove the ATF p u m p driven gear (S) and ATF p u m p
drive gear (T).
45. Remove the dowel pins (two) and the main separator
plate (U).
46. Remove the ATF passage pipe (V).
47. Remove the ATF magnet (W), clean it, then reinstall.
48. Remove the O-ring (X) f r o m the ATF strainer, and
replace a new O-ring w h e n reassembling the
transmission.
49. Remove the O-ring (Y) f r o m the stator shaft, and
replace a new O-ring w h e n reassembling the
transmission.
51. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF t h r o u g h

the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
14-292
Reverse Idler Gear
Reverse Idler Gear

Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly
1. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly (A) f r o m the

transmission housing.
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the thrust

washer (B), the reverse idler gear (C), the needle
bearings (D), and the thrust washer (E) f r o m the
reverse idler gear shaft/holder (F).
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
26 N m
(2.7 k g f m , 20 Ibfft)
2. Install the reverse idler gear assembly w i t h the t w o

dowel pins (B) in the transmission housing.
2. Inspect the reverse idler gear and the gear shaft for
excessive wear and damage.
3. Inspect the needle bearings for galling and rough
movement.
4. Install the thrust washer and the needle bearings over
the gear shaft.
5. Install the reverse idler gear in the direction s h o w n .
6. Install the thrust washer, then install the snap ring to
secure the idler gear.
14-293
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
Removal
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap

Installation
1. Cover the tip of the 1 st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe w i t h

a shop rag.
1. Install new O-rings (A) on the ATF feed pipe cap (B)
and the 65 m m thrust shim (C).
2. To remove the ATF feed pipe cap, expand the 65 m m

thrust shim.
2. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission

housing. Do not pinch the O-rings.
3. Apply air pressure to the ATF feed pipe hole (A) of the
1 st-hold clutch pressure circuit, and remove the ATF
feed pipe cap f r o m the transmission housing.
14-294
30
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe
Cap, Feed Pipe Replacement
ATF Filter
Removal/lnspection/lnstallation
NOTE: The 1 st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe / ATF feed cap
is not available separately.
1. Remove the three 6.0 m m bolts securing the ATF filter

cover (A) and the ATF pipe (B).
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe cap f r o m the transmission

housing (see page 14-294).
2. Remove the snap ring (A) f r o m the ATF feed pipe cap
(B), then remove the ATF feed pipe guide (C), the
O-rings (D) (E), and the 1 st clutch ATF feed pipe (F).
F
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
E
6 x 1.0 mm
2. Remove the ATF pipe f r o m the ATF filter cover, and

remove the ATF filter (C) f r o m the cover.
3. Replace the 1 st clutch ATF feed pipe or 1 st-hold clutch
ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe cap assembly.
3. Clean the ATF filter, then check that it is in good

condition. Replace the ATF filter if it is clogged or
damaged.
4. Install a new O-ring (D) over the 1st clutch ATF feed
pipe, then install the feed pipe over the 1 st-hold clutch
ATF feed pipe (G) while aligning the feed pipe tabs (H)
with the guide in the cap.
4. Install the ATF filter w i t h a new O-ring (D) in the filter

cover, and install the ATF pipe in the cover, then
install them in the transmission housing.
5. Install a new O-ring (E) in the cap and the feed pipe
guide, then secure the guide w i t h the snap ring.
5. Secure the ATF filter cover w i t h the t w o bolts (E), then

secure the ATF pipe w i t h the bolt (F).
6. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission

housing, (see page 14-294)
14-295
Mainshaft Bearing Removal
Mainshaft Bearing Installation

. A t t a c h m e n t 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Attachment, 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing, expand the snap

ring with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing
out. Do not remove the snap ring unless it's necessary
to clean the groove in the transmission housing.
1. Install the bearing in the direction s h o w n .
07NDA-PX40100
2. Expand the snap ring w i t h the snap ring pliers, and

insert the bearing part-way into the trnsmission
housing.
3. Release the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing
d o w n into the transmission housing until the snap
ring snaps in place around it.
4. After installing the bearing, check that the snap ring
(A) is seated in the bearing and housing groove, and
that the snap ring end gap (B) is 07 m m (00.28 in)
14-296
Intermediary Shaft Bearing

Replacement
Park Lever Shaft Bearing

Replacement

. Bearing Remover Shaft 07936-3710600
Remover Handle 07936-3710100
A t t a c h m e n t 3 7 x 4 0 m m 07746-0010200
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Slide Hammer 07936-371020A

Bearing Remover, 10 m m 07936-GE0A000
A t t a c h m e n t 22 x 24 m m 07746-001A800
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing f r o m the

transmission housing using the bearing remover
shaft, the remover handle, and the slide hammer.
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing f r o m the

transmission housing using the bearing remover (10
m m ) , and the slide hammer.
07936-3710100
2. Install a new bearing until it bottoms in the

transmission housing using the driver handle and the
attachment (37 x 40 m m ) .
2. Install a new bearing until it bottoms in the

14-297
Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal

Replacement

. Bearing Remover, 10 m m 07936-GE0A000
Attachment, 22 x 24 m m 07746-001A800
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Attachment, 22 x 24 m m 07746-001A800
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal f r o m the transmission housing.
1. Remove the control shaft bearing f r o m the

transmission housing using the bearing remover (10
m m ) , and the slide nammer.
2. Install a new oil seal in the transmission housing

using the driver handle and the attachment (22 x 24
mm).
2. Install a new bearing in the transmission housing

mm).
14-298
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or
more of the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly
in their bores. Use this procedure to free the valves.
1. Soak a sheet of #600 abrasive paper in ATF for about
30 minutes.
6. Coat the valve w i t h ATF, then drop it into its bore. It

should drop to the bottom of the bore under its o w n
weight. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest. I f t h e
valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve

drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful not
to scratch the bore w i t h the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the
ATF-soaked #600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and dry it
w i t h compressed air.
4. Roll up half of the ATF-soaked #600 paper and insert it
in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist the paper
slightly, so that it unrolls and fits into the bore tightly,
then polish the bore by twisting the paper as y o u push
it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is a l u m i n u m and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the

valve body w i t h solvent. Dry all parts w i t h
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
5. Remove the #600 paper. Thoroughly wash the entire

valve body in solvent, then dry it with compressed air.
14-299
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence shown
for the main valve body (see page 14-301), the
secondary valve body (see page 14-303), the regulator
valve body (see page 14-304), and the accumulator
body (see page 14-305). Refer to the following valve
cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so the end
shown facing up will be facing the outside of the valve
body, then secure the valve cap with the valve cap
clip.
3. Install the valve (A) and the valve spring (B) in the
valve body. Push the valve spring in using a
screwdriver, then install the spring seat (C).
14-300
<3
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry t h e m with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to the valve body repair procedure (see page
14-299).
4. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during assembly.
5. Replace the filter w i t h a new one, and install it and the lubrication check valve in the direction shown.
LOCK-UP
C IFT
H
SERVO
CONTROL V A L V E
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Valve Springs
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Torque converter check valve spring

Lock-up shift valve spring
Shift valve E spring
Shift valve A spring
Shift valve B spring
Modulator valve spring
CPC valve A spring
Servo control valve spring
Lubrication control valve spring
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring
Relief valve spring
Standard (New)-Unit: m m (in)

Wire
1.1
1.0
0.7
0.9
0.8
1.6
0.7
0.9
0.9
0.6
1.0
Diameter
(0.043)
(0.039)
(0.028)
(0.035)
(0.031)
(0.063)
(0.028)
(0.035)
(0.035)
(0.024)
(0.039)
O.D.
8.6 (0.339)
6.6 (0.260)
6.6 (0.260)
6.6 (0.260)
6.6 (0.260)
10.4 (0.409)
6.1 (0.240)
9.6 (0.378)
8.7 (0.343)
6.6 (0.260)
9.6 (0.378)
Free Length
35.0(1.378)
35.5(1.398)
42.4(1.669)
50.5(1.988)
49.1 (1.933)
33.5(1.319)
17.8 (0.701)
30.2(1.189)
25.0 (0.984)
30.9(1.217)
28.1 (1.106)
No. of Coils
12.6
18.2
17.6
23.3
21.7
9.8
7.9
8.4
7.2
11.1
7.7
14-301
Valve Body
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF p u m p drive gear (A), the driven gear
(B), and the ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (C) in the
main valve body (D). Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF, and
install the ATF p u m p driven gear w i t h its grooved and
chamfered side facing up.
3. Remove the ATF p u m p driven gear shaft. Measure the

thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven gear
(A) and the main valve body (B) using a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)
Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in)
Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 in)
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF p u m p drive

gear (A) and the driven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear:
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in)
14-302
00
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air. Blow out ail passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check balls.
3. Inspect the secondary valve body for scoring and damage.
14-299).
CPC V A L V E C
SHIFT V A L V E D
B
R E V E R S E CPC V A L V E
SHIFT V A L V E C
D
CHECK BALL
REVERSE
CONTROL V A L V E
CPC V A L V E B
S E C O N D A R Y V A L V E BODY
V A L V E SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Springs
A
B
C
D
E
F
CPC valve C spring

Shift valve D spring
Reverse CPC valve spring
Shift valve C spring
CPC valve B spring
Reverse control valve spring
Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in)

Wire
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.8
Diameter
(0.028)
(0.028)
(0.031)
(0.031)
(0.028)
(0.031)
6.1
6.6
6.1
6.6
6.1
6.6
O.D.
(0.240)
(0.260)
(0.240)
(0.260)
(0.240)
(0.260)
Free Length
17.8 (0.701)
42.4(1.669)
24.4 (0.961)
49.1 (1.933)
17.8 (0.701)
49.1 (1.933)
No. of Coils
7.9
17.6
14.6
21.7
7.9
21.7
14-303
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them w i t h compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded. Once
the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
14-299).
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap w i t h the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into the valve body, and
tighten the stop bolt.
7. Install the servo valve w i t h a new O-ring, and 3rd accumulator piston w i t h a new O-ring.
ACCUMULATOR COVER
3RD ACCUMULATOR
PISTON
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
V A L V E SPRING CAP
B
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
O-RING
Replace
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
V A L V E CAP
V A L V E CAP CLIP
VALVE SLEEVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL V A L V E
AIR CHECK V A L V E S
2 0 N m (2.0kgfm, 14Ibfft)
REGULATOR V A L V E BODY
SEALING WASHER
Replace.
SERVO VALVE/
SHIFT FORK SHAFT
O-RING
Replace.
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
V A L V E SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Springs
Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in)
Wire Diameter
O.D.
A
3rd accumulator spring
3.1 (0.122)
19.6 (0.772)
B
Cooler check valve spring
0.9 (0.035)
6.7 (0.264)
Lock-up control valve spring (type A)
0.7 (0.028)
C
6.6 (0.260)
Lock-up control valve spring (type B)
0.8 (0.031)
6.6 (0.260)
D
Regulator valve spring B
1.4 (0.055)
8.8 (0.346)
Regulator valve spring A
E
1.85 (0.073)
14.7 (0.579)
F i Stator
spring
5.5
rstator reaction
reaction spring
|
s . s \(0.217)
u.zi/)
\ 37.4(1.472)
6/A\\A/I
NOTE: As for the lock-up control valve spring, either type A or type B is applied
14-304
Free Length
41.4(1.630)
31.5(1.240)
42.9(1.689)
44.3(1.744)
44.0(1.732)
86.9 (3.421)
30.3(1.193)
No. of Coils
5.5
14.2
14.2
25.5
12.0
16.2
2.1
3
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Inspect the accumulator body for scoring and damage.
4. Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones.
SNAP RING
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Standard: (New)-Unit m m (in)
Valve Springs
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
4th accumulator spring

2nd accumulator spring
1st accumulator spring A
1st accumulator spring B
5th accumulator spring A
5th accumulator spring B
1 st-hold accumulator spring
Wire Diameter
3.3 (0.130)
3.1 (0.122)
2.3 (0.091)
2.5 (0.098)
2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.0 (0.079)
O.D.
19.6 (0.772)
19.6 (0.772)
19.6 (0.772)
12.8 (0.504)
19.6 (0.722)
13.2 (0.520)
13.1 (0.516)
Free Length
39.1 (1.539)
53.4 (2.102)
60.8 (2.394)
46.0(1.811)
65.5 (2.579)
50.5(1.988)
42.9(1.689)
No. of Coils
5.8
7.5
9.5
9.5
12.0
10.1
9.8
14-305
Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to
remove and install the shift solenoid valve. Be sure to
hold the solenoid valve body.
1. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body.
2. Install new O-rings (E) on each shift solenoid valves.
NOTE: If y o u are installing a new shift solenoid valve,
it comes w i t h new O-rings already installed.
D
3. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the
4. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by
5. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
position the mounting bracket on t o p of the bracket of
shift solenoid valve A.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid valve
C is installed before installing shift solenoid valve A, it
may damage the hydraulic control system.
6. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
14-306

Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2 5 - 4 0 m m 07736-A01000B
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
3. Install a new oil seal flush to the torque converter

housing using the driver handle and the attachment
(72x75 mm).
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and the oil seal using

the 2540 m m adjustable bearing puller and a
commercially aviable 3/8" 16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install a new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in the

torque converter housing using the driver handle and
the attachment {62 x 68 m m ) .
14-307

Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 m m 07736-A01000B
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing f r o m the torque
converter housing using the 2540 m m adjustable
bearing puller and a commercially available 3/8"16
slide hammer (A).
07736-A01000B
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A) into the torque

converter housing, then install a new bearing (B) in
the direction shown.
14-308
3. Install the bearing (A) in the torque converter housing

m m ) ; install the bearing outer notch-cut (B) to a depth
(C) of 0 - 0 . 0 3 m m (00.001 in) below the torque
converter housing surface (D).
07749-0010000
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement

Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 30 m m 07936-8890300
Remover Handle 07936-3710100
Attachment, 37 x 40 m m 07746-0010200
A t t a c h m e n t 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
3. Remove the ATF guide collar f r o m the torque

converter housing.
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A) and
the bearing set plate (B).
4. Remove the 29 x 39 x 9.5 m m secondary shaft bearing

(A) f r o m the torque converter housing using the
bearing remover shaft set (30 m m ) , the remover
handle, and the slide hammer.
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing from the torque

converter housing using the 2540 m m adjustable
bearing puller and a commercially available 3/8"-16
slide hammer (A).
07736-A01000B
(cont'd)
14-309

Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the 29 x 39 x 9.5 m m bearing into the torque
converter housing using the driver handle and the
7. Install the bearing in the direction shown in the torque

07749-0010000
07749-0010000
07746-0010200
07746-0010500
6. Install new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar (B),

then install the guide collar in the torque converter
housing.
8. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the set plate
mounting surface, then install the set plate (A) by
aligning it with the bearing groove.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
9. Install a new lock washer (B) and the bolt, then bend
the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
14-310
intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement

Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
3. Drive the bearing into the torque converter housing

mm).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A), then install a new

bearing (B) in the torque converter housing.
14-311

Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement
Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 12 m m 07936-16601 OA

Attachment, 22 x 24 m m 07746-001A800
. Slide Hammer 07936-371020A
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing f r o m the torque
converter housing using the bearing remover shaft
set (12 m m ) and the slide hammer.
07936-166010A
2. Install a new bearing until it bottoms in the torque

07746-001A800
14-312
Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the thrust needle bearing (A), the mainshaft
5th gear (B), the needle bearing (C), the thrust needle
bearing (D), the mainshaft 5th gear collar (E), the
4th/5th clutch (F), and the O-rings (G) f r o m the
mainshaft (H).
2. Inspect the condition of the sealing rings (I). If the

sealing rings are w o r n , distorted, or damaged,
remove the set ring (J) and the needle bearing (K), and
replace the sealing rings w i t h new ones.
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle
bearing for wear and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Inspect the 4th gear for wear and damage, and inspect
the 4th gear bearing for wear and rough rotation.
6. Replace the mainshaft 4th gear (L) i f t h e 4th gear is
w o r n or damaged, or the bearing is w o r n or damaged.
7. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and
excessive wear.
8. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
9. Wrap the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent O-ring
damage, install new O-rings on the mainshaft, then
remove the tape.
10. Install the 4th/5th clutch.
11. Install the mainshaft 5th gear collar, the thrust needle
bearing, the needle bearing, the mainshaft 5th gear,
and the thrust needle bearing.
14-313
Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement
Driver Handle, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the mainshaft 4th gear (A) w i t h the press.
14-314
2. Slide a new mainshaft 4th gear (A) over the mainshaft

(B), then press it into place using the driver handle (40
m m I.D.) and a press.
3
Countershaft Disassembly
Exploded View
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
167 N m (17.0 k g f m , 123 Ibfft)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
N E E D L E BEARING
CONICAL
SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
R E V E R S E GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
BALL BEARING
R E V E R S E G E A R COLLAR
5TH G E A R
R E V E R S E S E L E C T O R HUB
THRUST WASHER,
35 x 47 x 3 mm
SNAP RING
N E E D L E BEARING
C O T T E R S , 42.2 mm
^ 3 ^ ^ ^
COTTER RETAINER
WASHER, 50.8 mm
Selective part
COLLAR, 50.8 mm
4TH G E A R
1ST GEAR
W A S H E R , 61 mm
Selective part
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
IDLER G E A R
N E E D L E BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
C O T T E R S , 40.5 mm
(cont'd)
14-315
Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
f o l l o w i n g procedure.
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the countershaft locknut (B)
using a chisel (C).
3. Place the countershaft 5th gear (A) on press bases (B),

and place a spacer (C) between the countershaft (D)
and the press to prevent damaging the countershaft.

countershaft.
2. Hold the countershaft securely using a wrench and a

vise, loosen the locknut, and remove it. The locknut
has left-hand threads.
4. Support the bottom of the countershaft w i t h one

hand, then press the countershaft out of the
press-fitted bearing (E) and the press-fitted reverse
selector hub. Some reverse selector hubs are not
press-fitted, remove the countershaft out of the
press-fitted bearing.
5. Remove the remaining parts f r o m the countershaft.
6. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough movement.
excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
8. Check the idler gear axial clearance and 4th gear axial
clearance (see page 14-317).
14-316
0
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install the 40.5 m m cotters (A), 2nd gear (B), the thrust
needle bearing (C), the needle bearing (D), the idler
gear (E), the thrust needle bearing (F), the 61 m m
washer (G), 1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), the selected 50.8
m m collar (J), the 50.8 m m washer (K), the 42.2 m m
cotters (L), the cotter retainer (M), and the snap ring
(N) on the countershaft (O). Install the 40.5 m m
cotters, the idler gear, 1st gear, and 4th gear in the
direction s h o w n .
3. Set the dial indicator (A) on the idler gear (B).
4. Measure the idler gear axial clearance in at least three

places while moving the idler gear. Use the average
as the actual clearance.
S t a n d a r d : 0 . 0 0 5 - 0 . 0 4 0 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
5. If the measurement is out of the standard, remove the

61 m m washer and measure its thickness.
2. Insert a feeler gauge blade (A) as thick as possible
between the 50.8 m m collar (B) and the 50.8 m m
washer (C).
6. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the

clearance.
W A S H E R , 61 m m
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Thickness
1.525
1.505
1.485
1.465
1.445
1.425
1.405
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.0600
(0.0593
(0.0585
(0.0577
(0.0569
(0.0561
(0.0553
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
(cont'd)
14-317
Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
7. Measure the clearance between the 50.8 m m collar
(A) and the 50.8 m m washer (B) w i t h a feeler gauge (C)
in at least three places. Use the average as the actual
clearance.
Standard: 0 . 0 0 5 - 0 . 0 4 0 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
A
8. Ifthe measurement is out of the standard, remove the

50.8 m m washer and measure its thickness.
14-318

clearance.
WASHER, 50.8 m m
Thickness
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
1.91
1.93
1.95
1.97
1.99
2.01
2.03
2.05
2.07
2.09
2.11
2.13
2.15
2.17
2.19
2.21
2.23
2.25
2.27
2.29
2.31
2.33
2.35
2.37
2.39
2.41
2.43
2.45
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.0752
(0.0760
(0.0768
(0.0776
(0.0783
(0.0791
(0.0799
(0.0807
(0.0815
(0.0823
(0.0831
(0.0839
(0.0846
(0.0854
(0.0862
(0.0870
(0.0878
(0.0886
(0.0894
(0.0902
(0.0909
(0.0917
(0.0925
(0.0933
(0.0941
(0.0949
(0.0957
(0.0965
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
Countershaft Reassembly
1. Install the 40.5 m m cotters (A), 2nd gear (B), the thrust
needle bearing (C), the needle bearing (D), the idler
gear (E), the thrust needle bearing (F), the selected 61
m m washer (G), 1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), the selected
50.8 m m collar (J), the 50.8 m m washer (K), the 42.2
m m cotters (L), the cotter retainer (M), and the snap
ring (N) on the countershaft (O). Install the 40.5 m m
cotters, the idler gear, 1st gear, and 4th gear in the
direction s h o w n .
3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the

countershaft (B), then press it into place using the
driver handle (40 m m I. D.) and the press.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not
press-fitted, and can be installed w i t h o u t using the
driver handle and a press.
07746-0030100
4. Install the reverse selector, the reverse gear collar, the

needle bearing, and the reverse gear over the reverse
selector hub.
2. Install the thrust washer (P), the needle bearing (Q)

and 5th gear (R).
(cont'd)
14-319
Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Install the ball bearing (A) over the countershaft, then
press it into place using the driver handle (40 m m I.D.)
and a press.
7. Hold the countershaft securely w i t h a wrench and a

vise, and tighten the locknut to 167 N-m (17.0 k g f m ,
123 Ibfft).
NOTE:
Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do not
use an impact wrench.
The locknut has left-hand threads.
6. Install the conical spring washer (A) in the direction

s h o w n , and install a new locknut (B).
_
14-320
^ B
8. Stake the locknut into the shaft to a depth (A) of

0.71.3 m m (0.030.05 in) using a 3.5 m m punch (B).
Secondary Shaft Disassembly

Exploded View
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
178 N m (18.2 k g f m , 132 Ibfft)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
SPLINED WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST G E A R COLLAR
1ST/1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
o
WW
2ND G E A R /
PARK G E A R
N E E D L E BEARINGS
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
~P,
\ SPLINED
I WASHER
O-RINGS
Replace.
WASHER, 52 m m
Selective part
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH HUB
1ST CLUTCH
HUB
2ND C L U T C H
1ST G E A R
SNAP RING, 32 mm
SEALING RINGS, 29 mm
(cont'd)
14-321
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Wrench, 40 x 42 m m 07XAA-002010A
following procedure.
4. Place the idler gear (A) on press bases (B), and place a
shaft protector (C) between the secondary shaft (D)
and the press to prevent damaging the secondary
shaft.
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the secondary shaft locknut (B)
using a chisel (C).
secondary shaft.
2. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (B), and put the

secondary shaft (C) on the V-block and vise.
5. Support the bottom of the secondary shaft w i t h one

hand, then press the secondary shaft out of the
press-fitted bearing (E). The secondary shaft out of
the press-fitted bearing.
6. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch, the 52 m m washer,
the thrust needle bearing, 1st gear assembly, the
needle bearings, the 1 st gear collar, the thrust needle
bearing, and the idler gear.
7. Remove the 32 m m snap ring, and remove the 2nd
clutch, the splined washer, the thrust needle bearing,
the needle bearing, the 2nd gear/park gear, and the
thrust needle bearing.
3. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 m m ) onto the 1st clutch

guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 m m ) w i t h the
vise to hold the secondary shaft. Loosen the locknut,
and remove it. Remove any burrs f r o m splines on the
shaft and the splined washer.
14-322
8, Inspect the bearings for galling and rough movement.

NOTE: The needle bearing (A) on the 1st gear collar
contains the only t w o no-roller cavities (B); this is
normal.

10. Check the 1 st gear axial clearance (see page 14-324),
the 1st gear one-way clutch (see page 14-326), and the
secondary shaft installation height (see page 14-330).
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
. Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100

Driver Handle, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300
1. Install the idler gear (A), the thrust needle bearing (B),
the 1st gear collar (C), the needle bearing (D), 1st gear
assembly (E), the thrust needle bearing (F), the
selected 52 mm washer (G), and the 1st/1st-hold
clutch (H) on the secondary shaft (I). Install the idler
gear and the selected 52 mm washer in the direction
shown. Do not install the O-rings during inspection.
2. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold clutch

guide (B) using the driver handle (40 mm I.D.), the
attachment (30 mm I.D.), and a press.
07746-0030100
07746-0030300
3. Install the splined washer with the marked side up

over the ball bearing in the same manner as installing
the ball bearing using the driver handle (40 mm I.D.),
the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
4. Install the old locknut and tighten it to 29 N-m
(3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibfft).
5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 1st clutch hub (B).
^ A
14-324
6. Measure the 1 st gear axial clearance in at least three

places while m o v i n g the 1st gear. Use the average as
the actual clearance.

washer, and measure its height difference.
Standard: 0 . 1 0 0 - 0 . 1 4 5 m m ( 0. 004- 0. 0 0 6 in)

clearance.
WASHER, 52 m m
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Thickness
2.705
2.680
2.655
2.630
2.605
2.580
2.555
2.530
2.505
2.480
2.455
2.430
2.405
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.107
(0.106
(0.105
(0.104
(0.103
(0.102
(0.101
(0.100
(0.099
(0.098
(0.097
(0.096
(0.095
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
14-325
Shafts and Clutches

1st G e a r O n e - w a y C l u t c h I n s p e c t i o n
1. Hold the 1st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1st gear
(B) In the direction s h o w n to be sure it turns freely.
Also make sure the 1st gear locks in the opposite
direction.
1st C l u t c h H u b R e p l a c

. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 43.5 m m 07947-6340500
Attachment, 78 x 90 m m 07GAD-SD40101
1. Remove the 1 st-hold clutch hub (A) f r o m 1st gear (B)
using the driver handle, the driver attachment (43.5
mm), and a press.
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way clutch,

replace the 1st clutch hub (C). The 1st gear one-way
clutch is not available separately f r o m the 1st clutch
hub.
3. Also check the 1 st gear and the 1 st-hold clutch hub for
wear and damage. If the 1st gear and the 1st-hold
clutch hub are w o r n or damaged, replace the
damaged part, refer to the 1st Clutch Hub
Replacement (see page 14-326).
2. Remove the 1st clutch hub (C) f r o m 1st gear.
14-326
Secondary Shaft Reassembly

3. Install a new 1st clutch hub (A) over 1st gear (B), and
install the 1st-hold clutch hub (C) in 1st gear.

. Driver Handle, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
Wrench, 40 x 42 m m 07XAA-002010A
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), the needle
bearings (B), the 2nd gear/park gear (C), the thrust
needle bearing (D), and the splined washer (E) in the
direction s h o w n on the secondary shaft (F).
2. Wrap the shaft splines w i t h tape, and install new

O-rings (G) in the 2nd clutch O-ring grooves, then
remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure to
install the O-rings after installing the splined washer.
3. Install the 2nd clutch (H) on the secondary shaft, and
secure the 2nd clutch w i t h the snap ring (I).
(cont'd)
14-327
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Install the idler gear (A) in the direction s h o w n , the
thrust needle bearing (B), the 1st gear collar (C), the
needle bearing (D), 1st gear assembly (E), the thrust
needle bearing (F), and the 52 m m washer (G) in the
direction shown on the secondary shaft (H).
7. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold clutch

guide (B) using the driver handle (40 m m I.D.), the
attachment (30 m m I.D.), and a press.
NOTE: The needle bearing contains the only t w o

no-roller cavities (I); this is normal.
8. Install a new splined washer (A) w i t h the marked side

(B) up over the ball bearing using the driver handle
(40 m m I.D.), the attachment (30 m m I.D.), and a press.

O-rings (J) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch O-ring grooves,
then remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure to
install the O-rings after installing the 1st gear collar
and the 52 m m washer.
6. Install the 1st/1st-hold clutch (K).
14-328
11. Attach the wrench ( 4 0 x 4 2 m m ) onto the top of the 1st

clutch guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 m m )
w i t h the vise to hold the secondary shaft. Tighten the
locknut to 178 N-m (18.2 k g f m , 132 Ibfft) using a
torque wrench (D).
NOTE:
Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do not
use an impact wrench.
The locknut has left-hand threads.
14-329
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
3. Measure the height (B) of the secondary shaft

installation between the surface (C) of the gasket and
the top of the ball bearing outer race (D), then note the
measurement.
14-330
4. Remove the 65 m m thrust shim (A) f r o m the

transmission housing, and measure its thickness.
6. Select the 65 m m thrust shim f r o m the following

table.
THRUST SHIM, 65 mm
5. Calculate the thickness of the 65 m m thrust shim

using the formula.
Formula:
65 mm Thrust Shim Thickness
= Secondary Shaft Installation Height Standard
Measurement
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Standard:
2 2 8 . 0 4 - 2 2 8 . 1 3 mm (8.9779-8.9815 in)
No.
OA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
w
X
Y
z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Al
AJ
AK
AL
AM
0.80
0.84
0.88
0.92
0.96
1.00
1.04
1.08
1.12
1.16
1.20
1.24
1.28
1.32
1.36
1.40
1.44
1.48
1.52
1.56
1.60
1.64
1.68
1.72
1.76
1.80
1.84
1.88
1.92
1.96
2.00
2.04
2.08
2.12
2.16
2.20
2.24
2.28
2.32
0.76
Thickness
m m (0.031
m m (0.033
m m (0.035
m m (0.036
m m (0.038
m m (0.039
m m (0.041
m m (0.043
m m (0.044
m m (0.046
m m (0.047
m m (0.049
m m (0.050
m m (0.052
m m (0.054
m m (0.055
m m (0.057
m m (0.058
m m (0.060
m m (0.061
m m (0.063
m m (0.065
m m (0.066
m m (0.068
m m (0.069
m m (0.071
m m (0.072
m m (0.074
m m (0.076
m m (0.077
m m (0.079
m m (0.080
m m (0.082
m m (0.083
m m (0.085
m m (0.087
m m (0.088
m m (0.090
m m (0.091
m m (0.030
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
7. Install the thrust shim in the transmission housing.
14-331
Shafts and Clutches

Intermediary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the 26.5 m m washer, the snap ring, the cotter
retainer, and the cotters f r o m the intermediary shaft.
COTTERS
19.8 mm
WASHER, 26.5 mm
Selective part
SNAP RING
COTTER RETAINER
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
4TH GEAR
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
T H R U S T NEEDLE
BEARING
SPLINED WASHER,
53 mm
Selective part
3RD CLUTCH
O-RINGS
Replace.
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
SEALING RINGS,
35 mm
14-332
2. Remove the intermediary shaft 4th gear using a press

(see page 14-333), and disassemble the intermediary
shaft and the gears.
3. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough movement.
5. Check the sealing rings for excessive wear and
damage.
6. Check the intermediary shaft 3rd gear axial clearance
(see page 14-334), and the intermediary shaft
installation height (see page 14-336).
7. Before installing the O-rings, w r a p the shaft splines
with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the shaft
and gears.
9. Install the press-fitted intermediary shaft 4th gear in
the direction shown using the driver handle (40 m m I.
D.) and a press (see page 14-333).
0
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Removal
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear

Installation
1. Place intermediary shaft 4th gear (A) on press bases

(B), and place a spacer (C) between the intermediary
shaft (D) and the press to prevent damaging the
intermediary shaft.

O-rings in the 3rd clutch O-ring grooves, then remove
the tape.
2. Install the 3rd clutch, the 53 m m splined washer, the
thrust needle bearing, the needle bearing, the 3rd
gear, and the thrust needle bearing on the
intermediary shaft.
3. Install 4th gear (A) using the driver handle (40 m m I.
D.) and a press.
07746-0030100
2. Support the bottom of the intermediary shaft w i t h one

hand, then press the intermediary shaft out of the
press-fitted intermediary shaft 4th gear, and the
intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted gear.
3. Remove the remaining parts f r o m the intermediary
shaft.
4. Install the 19.8 m m cotters, the cotter retainer, and the

snap ring.
5. Install the 26.5 m m washer on the t o p of the
intermediary shaft.
14-333
Shafts and Clutches

Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
2. Install the intermediary shaft 4th gear (H) using the

driver handle (40 m m I.D.) and a press.
1. Install the 3rd clutch (A), the selected 53 m m splined

washer (B), the thrust needle bearing (C), the needle
bearing (D), the intermediary shaft 3rd gear (E), and
the thrust needle bearing (F) on the intermediary shaft
(G). Do not install the O-rings during inspection.
3. Install the cotters (I), the cotter retainer (J), and the
snap ring (K).
4. Set the dial indicator (A) on intermediary shaft 3rd
gear (B).
14-334
<S0
5. Measure the intermediary shaft 3rd gear axial
clearance in at least three places while m o v i n g
intermediary shaft 3rd gear. Use the average as the
actual clearance.
6. If the clearance is out of the standard, remove the 53

m m splined washer, and measure its thickness.
7. Select and install a new 53 m m splined washer, then
recheck the clearance.
Standard: 0 . 0 0 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m (0.0002-0.0018 in)

SPLINED WASHER, 5 3 m m
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
3.995
4.015
4.035
4.055
4.075
4.095
4.115
4.135
4.155
4.175
4.195
4.215
4.235
4.255
Thickness
m m (0.1573
m m (0.1581
m m (0.1589
m m (0.1596
m m (0.1604
m m (0.1612
m m (0.1620
m m (0.1628
m m (0.1636
m m (0.1644
m m (0.1652
m m (0.1659
m m (0.1667
m m (0.1675
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
14-335
Shafts and Clutches

Intermediary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the intermediary shaft (A) in the torque
converter housing, and install the selected 26.5 m m
washer (B) on the intermediary shaft.
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height:
Standard:
137.285-137.385 mm (5.40491 - 5 . 4 0 8 8 5 in)
4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

26.5 m m washer, and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new 26.5 m m washer, then
recheck the installation height.
WASHER, 26.5 mm
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
Intermediary Shaft Cutaway View
2. Install a new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the intermediary shaft
installation between the surface (E) of the gasket and
the surface of the 26.5 m m washer (F).
14-336
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.29
1.37
1.45
1.53
1.61
1.69
1.77
1.85
1.93
2.01
2.09
0.97
Thickness
m m (0.041
m m (0.044
m m (0.048
m m (0.051
m m (0.054
m m (0.057
m m (0.060
m m (0.063
m m (0.067
m m (0.070
m m (0.073
m m (0.076
m m (0.079
m m (0.082
m m (0.038
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
Clutch Disassembly
Clutch Spring Compressor Set 07LAE-PX40000
1. Remove the snap ring (A) w i t h a screwdriver (B).
4. Remove the clutch end plate (A), the clutch discs (B)
(7), the clutch wave-plates (C) (3), the clutch flat-plates
(D) (4), and the disc spring (E) f r o m the 2nd clutch
d r u m (F).
2. Remove the 1st clutch end-plate (A), the 1st clutch

discs (B) (5), the 1 st clutch wave-plates (C) (5), the disc
spring (D), the 1 st-hold clutch plate B (E), the 1 st-hold
clutch discs (F) (3), the 1 st-hold clutch wave-plates (G)
(2), the 1 st-hold clutch fiat-plate (H), and the disc
spring (I) f r o m the 1st/1 st-hold clutch d r u m (J).
5. Make reference marks on the clutch wave-plates.

6. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs (B)
(D) (3), and the disc spring (E) f r o m the 3rd clutch
d r u m (F).

(cont'd)
14-337
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
(D) (3), and the disc spring (E) f r o m the 4th clutch
d r u m (F).

(D) (3), and the disc spring (E) f r o m the 5th clutch
d r u m (F).
14-338
12. Install the clutch spring compressor set.
07LAE-PX40000
13. Be sure the clutch spring compressor set (A) is

adjusted to have full contact w i t h the spring retainer
(B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
0
14. Check the placement of the clutch spring compressor
set. If either end of the clutch spring compressor set is
set over an area of the spring retainer which is
unsupported by the return spring, the spring retainer
may be damaged.

not set over the clutch return spring end (A), the
spring retainer may be damaged.
15. Set the clutch spring compressor set (A) on the spring
retainer (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so the clutch
spring compressor set works on the clutch return
spring (C).
17. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can be
removed.
(cont'd)
14-339
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
18. R e m o v e the s n a p ring with the s n a p ring pliers.
21. W r a p a s h o p rag a r o u n d t h e clutch d r u m (A), a n d

a p p l y air p r e s s u r e to the fluid p a s s a g e to r e m o v e t h e
clutch piston (B). P l a c e a finger tip on the other
p a s s a g e w h i l e a p p l y i n g air p r e s s u r e .
19. R e m o v e the clutch s p r i n g c o m p r e s s o r set.

20. R e m o v e the s n a p ring (A), t h e s p r i n g retainer (B), a n d
t h e return s p r i n g (C).
22. R e m o v e the 1st/1 s t - h o l d c l u t c h piston (A) f r o m the

clutch d r u m (B), a n d r e m o v e the O - r i n g s f r o m the 1st
clutch piston.
A
14-340
30
Clutch Inspection
23. Remove the 1 st-hold clutch piston (A) f r o m the 1st
clutch piston (B), and remove the O-rings f r o m the
1 st-hold clutch piston.
1. Inspect the clutch pistons and the clutch piston check

valves (A).
2. If the clutch piston check valves are loose or

damaged, replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
24. Remove the clutch piston (A), and remove the O-rings
f r o m the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pistons.
4. If the spring retainer is w o r n or damaged, replace it.

5. Inspect the clutch discs, the clutch plates, and the
clutch end-plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs:
Standard Thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in)
Clutch Flat-plates and Clutch Wave-plates Standard
Thickness:
1st Clutch:
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
1 st-hold Clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
2nd Clutch:
1.8 mm (0.071 in)
3rd Clutch:
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
4th Clutch:
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
5th Clutch:
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
If the clutch discs are w o r n or damaged, replace
them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced,
inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate
and the top disc (see page 14-343).
If any clutch wave-plate is w o r n , damaged, or
discolored, replace the damaged clutch wave-plate
with a new clutch wave-plate, and inspect the other
clutch wave-plates for a phase difference (see page
14-342). If the clutch wave-plate is replaced, inspect
the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the
top disc (see page 14-343).
If any clutch flat-plate is w o r n , damaged, or
discolored, replace as a set. If the clutch flat-plate
are replaced, inspect the clearance between the
clutch end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-343).
If the clutch end-plate is w o r n , damaged, or
discolored, inspect the clutch end-plate disc
clearance (see page 14-343), then replace the clutch
end-plate.
14-341
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate, and
set a dial indicator (B) on the clutch wave-plate.
5. Rotate the clutch wave-plate of the 1st, 1 st-hold, 2nd,

4th, and 5th clutches about 60-degrees, and the 3rd
clutch wave-plate about 54-degrees or 72-degrees.
The dial indicator should be at the bottom of a phase
difference (F and G), and zero the dial indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other t w o tops (H
and I) of the clutch wave-plate by following steps 3
thru 5.
7. If t w o of the three measurements are within the
standard, the clutch wave-plate is OK. If t w o of the
measurements are out of standard, replace the clutch
wave-plate.
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference of the clutch

wave-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the clutch
wave-plate.
3. Rotate the clutch wave-plate of the 1st, 1 st-hold, 2nd,
4th, and 5th clutches about 60-degrees while holding
the clutch wave-plate by its circumference, and rotate
the 3rd clutch wave-plate about 72-degrees or
54-degrees while holding the clutch wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at the top
(D) of a phase difference. Do not rotate the clutch
wave-plate while holding its surface, always rotate it
while holding its edges.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the
phase difference (E) of the clutch wave-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:
1st Clutch: 0 . 1 7 - 0 . 3 mm (0.007-0.012 in)
0 . 1 - 0 . 2 mm (0.004-0.008 in)
1 st-hold
Clutch:
2nd Clutch: 0.11-0.21 mm (0.004-0.008 in)
3rd Clutch: 0.1 - 0 . 2 mm (0.004-0.008 in)
4th Clutch: 0.1 - 0 . 2 mm (0.004-0.008 in)
5th Clutch: 0.12-0.22 mm (0.005-0.009 in)
14-342
Clutch Clearance Inspection

Clutch Compressor Attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100
1. Inspect the clutch piston, clutch discs, plates, and
end-plate for wear and damage (see page 14-341),
and inspect the clutch wave-plate phase difference
(see page 14-342), if necessary.
, Install the disc spring (A) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch

d r u m (B) in the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the
1 st-hold clutch flat-plate (C), alternately install the
clutch discs (D) (3) and the 1 st-hold clutch wave-plates
(E) (2), then install the 1 st-hold clutch plate B (F) w i t h
the flat side t o w a r d the t o p disc.
2. Install the 1 st-hold clutch piston in the 1st clutch

piston, and install the 1st/1 st-hold clutch piston (A) in
the 1st/1 st-hold clutch d r u m (B). Do not install the
O-rings on the clutch pistons during inspection.
(cont'd)
14-343
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
4. Measure the 1 st-hold clutch plate B-to-top disc
clearance w i t h a feeler gauge (A) while pressing the
1 st-hold clutch plate B d o w n . Take measurements in
at least three places, and use the average as the actual
clearance.
7. Install the clutch pistons in the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and the
5th clutch drums. Do not install the O-rings on the
clutch pistons during inspection.
1 st-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top Disc Clearance:

Service Limit: 0.61.0 mm (0.0240.039 in)
8. Install the disc spring (A) in the 2nd clutch d r u m (D) in

the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 2nd clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the clutch flat-plates (B)
(4) and the clutch discs (C) (4) in the 2nd clutch d r u m
(D), and alternately install the clutch wave-plates (E)
(3) and the clutch discs (C) (3). Install the clutch
end-plate (F) w i t h the flat side t o w a r d the top disc.
5. If the clearance is out of the standard, replace the
1 st-hold clutch plates and the discs as a set, and
recheck.
6. Install the disc spring (A) on the 1 st-hold clutch plate B
in the direction shown. Starting w i t h the 1st clutch
wave-plate, alternately install the clutch wave-plates
(B) (5) and the clutch discs (C) (5) in the 1st clutch
d r u m (D), then install the clutch end-plate (E) w i t h the
flat side toward the top disc.
14-344
9. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch d r u m (B) in

the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 3rd clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the clutch flat-plates (C)
(3) and the clutch discs (D) (3) in the 3rd clutch d r u m
(B), and alternately install the clutch wave-plates (E)
(2) and the clutch discs (D) (2). Install the clutch
10. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch d r u m (B) in
the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 4th clutch
(3) and the clutch discs (D) (3), and alternately install
the clutch wave-plates (E) (2) and the clutch discs (D)
(2). Install the clutch end-plate (F) w i t h the flat side
t o w a r d the top disc.
t o w a r d the t o p disc.
12. Install the snap ring w i t h a screwdriver to secure the

clutch end-plate.
(cont'd)
14-345
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
13. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).
17. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between the
clutch end-plate and the t o p disc (E). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the
average as the actual clearance.
Clearance between the Clutch End-plate and
the Top Disc
Service Limit:
1st Clutch: 1.15-1.35 mm (0.045-0.053 in)
2nd Clutch: 1.05-1.25 mm (0.041 - 0 . 0 4 9 in)
3rd Clutch: 0 . 8 - 1 . 0 mm (0.031 - 0 . 0 3 9 in)
4th Clutch: 0 . 7 5 - 0 . 9 5 mm (0.030-0.037 in)
5th Clutch: 0 . 7 5 - 0 . 9 5 mm (0.030-0.037 in)
18. If the clearance is out of the service limit, select a n e w
clutch end-plate f r o m the f o l l o w i n g table.
14. Zero the dial indicator w i t h the clutch end-plate lifted

up to the snap ring (C).
15. Release the clutch end-plate to lower the clutch
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor attachment
on the end-plate (A).
r ~ T
J
1ST CLUTCH END PLATES

07ZAE-PRP0100
16. Press the clutch compressor attachment d o w n w i t h

1 5 0 - 1 6 0 N ( 1 5 - 1 6 kgf, 3 3 - 3 5 Ibf) (B) using a force
gauge, and read the dial indicator (C).
14-346
Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Thickness
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.122
(0.126
(0.130
(0.134
(0.138
(0.142
(0.146
(0.150
(0.154
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
2ND CLUTCH END PLATES

Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Thickness
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.083
(0.087
(0.091
(0.094
(0.098
(0.102
(0.106
(0.110
(0.114
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
Clutch Reassembly
3 R D CLUTCH END PLATES

Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Clutch Spring Compressor Set 07LAE-PX40000
Thickness
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.083
(0.087
(0.091
(0.094
(0.098
(0.102
(0.106
(0.110
(0.114
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

m i n i m u m of 30 minutes.
2. Install new O-rings (A) on the 1 st-hold clutch piston
(B), and install the 1 st-hold clutch piston in the 1st
clutch piston (C).
4 T H and 5 T H CLUTCH END P L A T E S

Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Thickness
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.083
(0.087
(0.091
(0.094
(0.098
(0.102
(0.106
(0.110
(0.114
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
19. Install a new clutch end-plate, and recheck the

clearance. I f t h e thickest clutch end-plate is installed,
but the clearance is still over the service limit, replace
the clutch discs and plates.
3. Install new O-rings (A) on the 1st clutch piston (B), and
install the 1st/1 st-hold clutch piston in the 1st/1st-hold
clutch d r u m (C) while applying pressure, and rotating
to ensure proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
(cont'd)
14-347
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Install O-rings (A) on the 2 n d , 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
piston (B).
7. Install the clutch spring compressor set.
A
Replace.
5. Install the clutch pistons in the clutch drums (C) while

applying pressure and rotating to ensure proper
seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
6. Install the return spring (A) and the spring retainer (B),
and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer.
07LAE-PX40000
8. Be sure the clutch spring compressor set (A) is

adjusted to have full contact w i t h the spring retainer
(B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
- a t
14-348

set over an area of the spring retainer which is
unsupported by the return spring, the spring retainer
may be damaged.
10. Set the clutch spring compressor set (A) on the spring
retainer (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so that it
compresses the clutch return spring (C).

not set over the clutch return spring end (A), the
spring retainer may be damaged.
12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can be
installed.
13. Install the snap ring w i t h the snap ring pliers.
14. Remove the clutch spring compressor set.
(cont'd)
14-349
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
15. Install the disc spring (A) in the 1st/1 st-hold clutch
d r u m (B) in the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the
1 st-hold clutch flat-plate (C), alternately install the
clutch discs (D) (3) and the 1 st-hold clutch wave-plates
(E) (2) in the 1st/1 st-hold clutch d r u m (B), then install
the 1 st-hold clutch plate B (F) with the flat side t o w a r d
the t o p disc.
G
16. Install the disc spring (G) on the 1 st-hold clutch plate B
in the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 1st clutch
wave-plate, alternately install the clutch wave-plates
(H) (5) and the clutch discs (I) (5), then install the clutch
end-plate (J) with the flat side t o w a r d the top disc.
14-350
17. Install the disc spring (A) in the 2nd clutch d r u m (D) in
the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 2nd clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the clutch flat-plates (B)
(4) and the clutch discs (C) (4) in the 2nd clutch d r u m
(D), and alternately install the clutch wave-plates (E)
(3) and the clutch discs (C) (3). Install the clutch
3
18. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch d r u m (B) in
the direction s h o w n . Starting w i t h the 3rd clutch
(3) and the clutch discs (D) (3) in the 3rd clutch d r u m
(B), and alternately install the clutch wave-plates (E)
(2) and the clutch discs (D) (2). Install the clutch
toward the top disc.
t o w a r d the top disc.
2 1 . Install the snap ring w i t h a screwdriver to secure the

clutch end-plate.
22. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air

pressure into the fluid passage.
14-351
Transmission Reassembly
Exploded View
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD is similar.
Bolt Tightening Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N m (1.8 k g f m , 13 Ibfft)
ATF STRAINER
6 x 1.0 m m . One Bolt
6 x 1.0 m m . Seven Bolts
6 x 1.0 mm
11 Bolts
REGULATOR V A L V E BODY
STATOR SHAFT
ACCUMULATOR BODY
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6 x 1.0 m m , Seven Bolts
LUBRICATION
CHECK V A L V E
ACCUMULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
MAIN V A L V E BODY
6 x 1.0 m m ,
One Bolt
SECONDARY
V A L V E BODY
ATF FEED PIPE,

8 x 62 mm
ATF PUMP DRIVEN

GEAR SHAFT
ATF PUMP
DRIVE G E A R
MAIN SEPARATOR
PLATE
SECONDARY
SEPARATOR PLATE
DOWEL PINS,
T w o Pins
6 x 1.0 m m , One Bolt

T O R Q U E CONVERTER HOUSING
ATF P A S S A G E PIPE
14-352
<3
Mainshaft Holder 07GAB-PF50101
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and
installed in the torque converter housing. Clean, and
install the ATF magnet, if necessary.
2. Install the main separator plate and the t w o dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install the
ATF p u m p drive gear (A), the driven gear (B), and the
ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (C). Install the ATF p u m p
driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side
facing d o w n .
5. If the ATF p u m p drive gear and the ATF p u m p driven

gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF p u m p driven gear
shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified torques,
then recheck. Failure to align the ATF p u m p driven
gear shaft correctly will result in a seized ATF p u m p
drive gear or ATF p u m p driven gear shaft.
6. Install the lubrication check valve, the cooler check
valve and the cooler check valve spring in the main
valve body. Install the lubrication check valve in the
direction s h o w n in the exploded view.
7. Install the secondary separator plate and the t w o
dowel pins on the main valve body, and install the
secondary valve body (one bolt).
8. Install the t w o check balls in the secondary valve
body.
9. Install the accumulator separator plate and the t w o
dowel pins on the secondary valve body.
10. Position the detent arm on the accumulator separator
plate, and install the detent arm shaft into the detent
arm through the separator plates to the main valve
body.
3. Install the torque converter check valve spring and the

valve in the torque converter housing.
4. Install the main valve body (seven 6 m m bolts and
three 8 m m bolts). Make sure the ATF p u m p drive
gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating
direction, and the ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (B)
moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction.
11. Install the 8 x 62 m m ATF feed pipe in the main valve

body, and install the accumulator body (11 bolts).
12. Install the regulator separator plate and the t w o dowel
pins on the main valve body.
13. Install the stator shaft w i t h a new O-ring, and install
the regulator valve body (seven bolts).
14. Install the stator shaft stop in the main valve body.
15. Install the ATF strainer with a new O-ring (one bolt).
16. Install the ATF passage pipe (one bolt) in the torque
converter housing.
(cont'd)
14-353
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
17. Install the intermediary shaft (A) into the main valve
body, and install the 26.5 m m washer (B) on the top of
the intermediary shaft.
24. Install the thrust needle bearing (A) on the secondary

shaft roller bearing in the torque converter housing.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
18.4WD: Install the transfer output shaft (C) in the torque

converter housing, and install the thrust shim (D) on
the top of the transfer output shaft.
19. Install the differential assembly (E) in the torque
converter housing.
20. Install the baffle plate (F), and make sure the
differential is clear of the baffle plate.
21. Install the baffle plate (G), and make sure the
intermediary shaft is clear of the baffle plate.
22. Install the selector control shaft and the park lever link
(H).
23. Assemble the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the
secondary shaft.
14-354
25. Turn the shift fork shaft (B) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole of the shift fork.
26. Engage the shift fork (C) w i t h the reverse selector on
the countershaft, and join the mainshaft (D), the
countershaft (E), and the secondary shaft (F), then
install t h e m in the torque converter housing and the
shift fork on the shift fork shaft.
0
27. Secure the shift fork (A) to the shift fork shaft w i t h the
lock bolt and a new lock washer (B), then bend the
lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
29. Align the control lever pin (A) w i t h the manual valve
guide (B).
B
Replace.
30. Hook the detent arm spring (A) to the detent arm (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N-m (1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibfft)
28. Install the park pawl shaft (A), the pawl spring (B), the
park pawl (C), and the park pawl stop (D).
(cont'd)
14-355
3 1 . Install the 8 x 85 m m ATF feed pipe (A), the
8 x 1 5 1 . 5 m m pipes (B), and the 8 x 40 m m pipe (C) in
the accumulator body.
33. Install the t w o dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B) o n
the torque converter housing (C).
32. Install the 8 x 57.5 m m ATF feed pipe (A) and the
10 x 123 m m pipe (B) in the torque converter housing.
34. Place the transmission housing (D) on the torque

converter housing.
35. W r a p a screwdriver tip w i t h tape to prevent damage
to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the reverse
idler gear w i t h the reverse gears by rotating the idler
gear using a screwdriver.
14-356
00
36. Use snap ring pliers to expand the snap ring of the
countershaft bearing. Then install the transmission
housing onto the bearing part-way. Then release snap
ring pliers, and push d o w n on the transmission
housing until it bottoms and snap ring snaps into
place in the transmission housing snap ring groove.
40. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
37. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts

(4WD: 21 bolts, 2WD: 20 bolts) and the bolt (A) along
w i t h the transmission hanger (B), and tighten the
bolts in at least t w o in a criss-cross pattern to 44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft).
A
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
C
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
42. Install the old locknut, and tighten it to seat the lock
washer to 178 N-m (18.2 k g f m , 132 Ibfft), then
remove the old locknut.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
4WD: 21 Bolts
2WD: 20 Bolts
38. Install and tighten the t w o mounting bolts (C) to

39 N-m (4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft). Keep the mounting bolts
free of grease or oil.
39. Install and tighten the special bolt (D) to 64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft).
(cont'd)
14-357
43. Install a new locknut and tighten it to 176 N-m
(18.2 k g f m , 132 Ibfft), then stake the locknut to a
depth (A) of 0.71.3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 in) using a
3.5 m m punch (B).
44. Install the end cover (A), dowel pins (B), and a new
O-ring (C).
F
49 N m
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
26 N m
47. Install a new O-ring (E) on the solenoid wire harness

connector (F).
ORN
48. Route the solenoid wire harness through the

transmission housing, and install the solenoid w i r e
harness connector.
49. Connect the shift solenoid w i r e harness terminals to
the shift solenoid valves:
YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
50. Secure the solenoid wire harness connector w i t h the
bolt on the transmission housing.
45. Install the snap ring cap (D) w i t h a new O-ring (E).
46. A p p l y thread lock sealant to the threads of the sealing
plug (F), and install the sealing plug and a new sealing
washer (G).
14-358
5 1 . Install the solenoid valve cover (A) w i t h the t w o dowel

pins (B) and a new gasket (C), and secure it w i t h the
seven bolts.
52. Place a new gasket (A) on the solenoid valve cover,

then install the 8 x 102.8 m m ATF feed pipe (B) and the
8 x 55.3 m m pipes (C) w i t h the filter end in the
53. Install new O-rings (D) over the ATF feed pipes, and
install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
AandB(E).
end into its m o u n t i n g hole (B).
B
(cont'd)
14-359
55. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 m m ATF joint pipe
(B) between the top (C) of the pipe and the solenoid
valve body mounting surface (D). The height is about
7 m m (0.3 in). If the height is over 7 m m (0.3 in), install
the pipe securely until it stops the accumulator body.
59. With a 6.0 m m w r e n c h , turn the selector control shaft

fully counterclockwise (viewed f r o m the shaft end) to
the P position. Turn the selector control shaft back t w o
click-stopped positions so that it is in the N position.
60. Set the transmission range switch (A) to the N

position. The transmission range switch clicks in the
N position, and the selector control shaft hole (B)
aligns w i t h the N positioning line (C).
56. Install a new gasket (A) on the transmission housing.

Install the 8 x 36 m m ATF pipe (B) w i t h the filter end in
the transmission housing, and install the 8 x 25.5 m m
ATF pipe (D).
B
6 1 . Install the transmission range switch gently over the

selector control shaft (D), and install the bolts loosely.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
57. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
58. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
14-360
00
62. Install a new lock washer (A) over the selector control
shaft (B) by aligning the tab (C) of the lock washer w i t h
the N positioning line (D) on the transmission range
switch (E). Then install the locknut (F).
65. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), a new
lock washer (C), and the locknut (D) on the selector
control shaft (E).
66. Install a new O-ring (A) on the input shaft (mainshaft)

speed sensor (B), and install the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor.
63. Push the locknut against the transmission housing to
seat the transmission range switch into the selector
control shaft, and tighten the locknut (A) to 12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft) while holding the selector control
shaft (B) w i t h a 6 m m wrench (C), then bend the lock
tabs (D) against the locknut.
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
64. Tighten the transmission range switch mounting

bolts (E)to 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft).
67. Install a new O-ring (C) on the output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor (D), and install the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the sensor
washer (E).
NOTE: Make sure y o u install the sensor washer. If y o u
do not, the vehicle may not start.
(cont'd)
14-361
68. Install the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) w i t h a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the
switch w i t h the metal part.
B
Replace,
69. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch w i t h the metal part.
,G
' 6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
A
20 N m
(2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
E
28 N-m
(2.9 k g f m
21 Ibfft)
/
s
6
x 1.0
m
m
O A
i.v
IIIIII
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
Replace.
G
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
A
20 N-m
(2.0 k g f m ,
14 Ibfft)
B
Replace.
70. Install the ATF cooler lines (C) w i t h new sealing

washers (D) and the line bolts (E).
7 1 . Install the connector bracket (F), and secure the ATF
cooler lines w i t h the 6.0 m m bolts (G) on the
72. Install the ATF temperature sensor (H) w i t h a n e w
O-ring (I). Install the connector on the connector
bracket and the harness clamp on the clamp bracket.
14-362
73. Install the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch by the metal part.
74. Install the ATF dipstick guide tube (A) w i t h a new

O-ring (B).
75. Install the ATF dipstick (C) in its guide tube.

76. Install the transmission ground terminal (D).
A/T Differential
4WD
T H R U S T SHIM, 85 mm
Preload Inspection, page 14-372
SPACER
BEARING O U T E R R A C E
CARRIER BEARING
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 14-366
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

CARRIER BEARING
BEARING OUTER R A C E
SPACER
14-364
00
2WD
THRUST SHIM, 85 mm
Preload Inspection, page 14-372
SPACER
CARRIER BEARING
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 14-366
CARRIER BEARING
SPACER
14-365
A/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
2WD
4WD
1. Remove the final driven gear and transfer drive gear
f r o m the differential carrier.
1. Install the driveshaft and the intermediate shaft into

the differential assembly.
2. Install both axles into the differential assembly (A)

and place the axles on V-blocks (B).
2. Secure the driveshaft inboard joint (A) in a bench vise

(B) w i t h soft jaws (C). To prevent damage to the
inboard joint, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the inboard joint and a vise.
D
3. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (C) w i t h a

dial indicator (D).
Standard:
0.05-0.15 mm (0.002 0.006 in)
4. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential assembly.
5. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear on
the differential carrier (see page 14-367).
3. Place the intermediate shaft (D) on a V-block (E), then

hold the intermediate shaft w i t h locking pliers (F).
4. Measure the backlash of the final driven gear (G) w i t h
a dial indicator (H).
Standard:
1.4-2.0 mm (0.0550.079 in)
5. If the backlash is out of the standard, replace the

differential assembly.
6. Remove the driveshaft and the intermediate shaft into
the differential assembly.
14-366
0
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Replacement
4WD
2WD
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever

the carrier is replaced.
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload

whenever the differential carrier is replaced.
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive

gear (B) f r o m the differential carrier (C).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
126 N m
(12.8 k g f m , 92.6 Ibfft)
14 Bolts
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) f r o m the differential

carrier (B).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts has left-hand
threads.
125 N m
(12.75 k g f m , 92.22 Ibfft)
14 Bolts
2. Install the final driven gear on the differential carrier in

the direction s h o w n .
2. Install the final driven gear on the differential carrier in

the direction s h o w n . The letter on the final driven gear
must match the letter on the t o p of the countershaft.
They are a matched set.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a

crisscross pattern in at least t w o steps.
3. Install the bolts through the differential carrier to the

transfer drive gear.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern in at least t w o steps.
14-367
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Attachment, 45 x 55 m m 07MAD-PR90100
NOTE:
The bearing and the outer race should be replaced as a
set.
Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload
whenever the bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) w i t h a commercially
available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C), and
stepped adapter (D).
14-368
2. Install new carrier bearings using the attachment (45 x

55 m m ) and a press.
NOTE:
Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
Use the small end of the attachment (45 x 55 m m ) to
install the bearings.
Press the bearing on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearing and the differential
carrier.
Oil Seal Replacement

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07GAD-PG40100
Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07JAD-PH80101
3. Install a new oil seal flush to the transmission housing

using the driver handle and the oil seal driver
attachment.
1. Remove the oil seal f r o m the transmission housing.
4. Install a new oil seal to the torque converter housing

using the driver handle and the oil seal driver
attachment.
2. Remove the oil seal f r o m the torque converter
housing.
14-369
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Attachment, 83 m m 07HAD-SG00100
2. Install the 85 m m thrust shim (A), the spacer (B), and

the bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing
(D).
NOTE:
Replace the carrier bearing w i t h a new one whenever
the bearing outer race is replaced.
Do not use the shim(s) on the torque converter
housing side.
Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the
outer race.
Coat all parts w i t h ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the spacer (B), and
the 85 m m thrust shim (C) f r o m the transmission
housing (D) by heating the transmission housing to
about 212 F (100 C) w i t h a heat gun (E). Do not heat
the transmission housing more than 212 F (100 C).
14-370
3. Using the driver handle and the attachment (83 m m ) ,

drive the outer race securely into the transmission
housing so there is no clearance between the outer
race, the spacer, the thrust s h i m , and the transmission
housing.
4 . 4 W D : Remove the plate (A), and remove the bearing

outer race (B) and the spacer (C) f r o m the torque
converter housing (D).
7. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the torque

8. Install the plate over the bearing outer race in the

torque converter housing.
5.2WD: Remove the plates (A) (B), and remove the
bearing outer race (C) and the spacer (D) f r o m the
torque converter housing (E).
6. Install the spacer and a new bearing outer race in the

torque converter housing.
14-371
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Attachment, 83 m m 07HAD-SG00100
Preload inspection Tool 070AJ-0020101
4. Install the 85 m m thrust shim (A) in the transmission

housing (B). If you replace the 85 m m thrust shim w i t h
a new one, use the same thickness shim as the old
one.
NOTE: Ifthe transmission housing, the torque converter

housing, the differential carrier, the tapered roller
bearing, the bearing outer race, or the thrust shim were
replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the spacer (B), and
the 85 m m thrust shim (C) f r o m the transmission
housing (D) by heating the transmission housing to
about 212 F (100 C) w i t h a heat gun (E). Do not heat
the transmission housing more than 212 F (100 C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to r o o m
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
5. Install the spacer (C), and the bearing outer race (D) in
the transmission housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the
attachment (83 m m ) so there is no clearance between
the bearing outer race, the spacer, the thrust s h i m ,
and the transmission housing.
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing w h e n the bearing

outer race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
14-372
07749-0010000
07HAD-SG00100
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque

converter housing (B), and install the gasket (C) and
the t w o dowel pins (D) on the torque converter
housing.
10. Measure the starting torque of the differential

assembly w i t h the preload inspection tool, a torque
wrench (A), and a socket (B). Measure the starting
torque at normal room temperature in both
directions.
Standard
New bearings:
3.9-5.1 N m ( 4 0 - 5 2 k g f c m , 3 5 - 4 5 Ibf in)
Reused bearings:
3 . 6 - 4 . 8 N-m ( 3 7 - 4 9 k g f c m , 3 2 - 4 3 Ibf in)

85 m m thrust shim and measure its thickness.
12. Select a new 85 m m thrust shim. To increase the
starting torque, increase thickness of the 85 m m
thrust shim. To decrease the starting torque, decrease
the thickness of the 85 m m thrust shim.
8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the

mounting bolts (4WD: 24 bolts, 2WD: 23 bolts) w i t h
the transmission hanger (F), then tighten the bolts.
Changing the 85 m m thrust shim to the next size will

increase or decrease the starting torque about 0.5
0.6 N-m ( 5 - 6 k g f c m , 4 - 5 Ibf in).
9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to

seat the bearings.
(cont'd)
14-373
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
THRUST SHIM, 85 m m
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Al
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
1.350
1.375
1.400
1.425
1.450
1.475
1.500
1.525
1.550
1.575
1.600
1.625
1.650
1.675
1.700
1.725
1.750
1.775
1.800
1.825
1.850
1.875
1.900
1.925
1.950
1.975
2.000
2.025
2.050
2.075
2.100
2.125
2.150
2.175
2.200
2.225
2.250
2.275
2.300
2.325
2.350
1.250
1.275
1.300
1.325
Thickness
m m (0.0531 in)
m m (0.0541 in)
m m (0.0551 in)
m m (0.0561 in)
m m (0.0571 in)
m m (0.0581 in)
m m (0.0591 in)
m m (0.0600 in)
m m (0.0610 in)
m m (0.0620 in)
m m (0.0630 in)
m m (0.0640 in)
m m (0.0650 in)
m m (0.0659 in)
m m (0.0669 in)
m m (0.0679 in)
m m (0.0689 in)
m m (0.0699 in)
m m (0.0709 in)
m m (0.0719 in)
m m (0.0728 in)
m m (0.0738 in)
m m (0.0748 in)
m m (0.0758 in)
m m (0.0768 in)
m m (0.0778 in)
m m (0.0787 in)
m m (0.0797 in)
m m (0.0807 in)
m m (0.0817 in)
m m (0.0827 in)
m m (0.0837 in)
m m (0.0846 in)
m m (0.0856 in)
m m (0.0866 in)
m m (0.0876 in)
m m (0.0886 in)
m m (0.0896 in)
m m (0.0906 in)
m m (0.0915 in)
m m (0.0925 in)
m m (0.0492 in)
m m (0.0502 in)
m m (0.0512 in)
m m (0.0522 in)
13. Install a new thrust s h i m , then recheck the starting

torque.
14-374
<3

THRUST SHIM, 28.5 mm
Adjust Installation Height page 14-378
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT
SHAFT BEARING
14-375

Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Oil Seal Replacement

. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Attachment, 65 m m 07JAD-SH30100

1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) with a
commercially available puller (B), a bearing separator
(C), and a shaft protector (D). Place a shaft protector
between the transfer output shaft and the puller to
prevent damaging the transfer output shaft.
2. Install a new bearing (A) on the transfer output shaft

w i t h the using the driver handle (40 m m I.D.) and a
press.
14-376
1. Remove the oil seal f r o m the torque converter

housing.
2. Install a new oil seal flush to the torque converter

housing using the driver handle and the attachment
(65 m m ) .
0
Transmission Housing Bearing Replacement
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
3. Drive a new bearing until it bottoms in the

1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) f r o m the

transmission housing (B) by heating the transmission
housing to about 212 F (100 C) with a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the transmission housing more than 2 1 2
F(100 C).
07749-0010000
07749-0010600
2. Install a new bearing in the transmission housing in

the direction s h o w n .
14-377

Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
NOTE: If the transfer output shaft, transfer output shaft
bearing, transmission housing bearing, transmission
housing, or torque converter housing were replaced,
adjust the transfer output shaft installation height w i t h
the 28.5 m m thrust shim.
1. Install the transfer output shaft (A) in the torque
converter housing, and install the 28.5 m m thrust
shim (B) on the top of the shaft. If you replace the
28.5 m m thrust shim w i t h a new one, use the same
thickness shim as the old one.
Standard: 4 6 . 3 1 - 4 6 . 3 5 m m ( 1 . 8 2 3 - 1 . 8 2 5 in)
Transfer O u t p u t Shaft Cutaway V i e w
2. Install a new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the transfer output shaft
installation between the surface (E) of the gasket and
the top (F) of the 28.5 m m thrust shim in at least three
places. Use the average as the actual height.
14-378

28.5 m m thrust s h i m , and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new thrust s h i m , then recheck the
installation height.
THRUST SHIM, 28.5 m m
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
1.82
1.84
1.86
1.88
1.90
1.92
1.94
1.96
1.98
2.00
2.02
2.04
2.06
2.08
2.10
2.12
2.14
2.16
2.18
2.20
2.22
2.24
2.26
2.28
2.30
2.32
2.34
Thickness
m m (0.0717
m m (0.0724
m m (0.0732
m m (0.0740
m m (0.0748
m m (0.0756
m m (0.0764
m m (0.0772
m m (0.0780
m m (0.0787
m m (0.0795
m m (0.0803
m m (0.0811
m m (0.0819
m m (0.0827
m m (0.0835
m m (0.0843
m m (0.0850
m m (0.0858
m m (0.0866
m m (0.0874
m m (0.0882
m m (0.0890
m m (0.0898
m m (0.0906
m m (0.0913
m m (0.0921
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
Transfer Gear Backlash Measurement
Total Starting Torque Measurement

3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)

with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent materials
between the transfer housing and a vise.

Standard: 0 . 0 6 - 0 . 1 7 mm (0.002-0.007 in)
4. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat the

tapered roller bearings.
5. Measure the starting torque at the c o m p a n i o n flange
(C) w i t h a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Standard: 3.20-4.16 N-m (32.6-42.4 kgfcm,28.3
- 3 6 . 8 Ibfin)
6. If the starting torque is out of standard, disassemble
the transfer assembly and repair it.
14-379
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly
Exploded View
TRANSFER SHIM, 80 mm
Selective part
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING

OUTER R A C E
-^TTj^l
/ S H A F T ASSEMBLY
/
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
*Jlk^M
22 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
14-380
BACK-UP RING
TAPERED ROLLER

Flange Holder 07XAB-001A101

w i t h soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
1. Remove the transfer cover (A) f r o m the transfer

housing (B).
07XAB-001A101
7. Install the flange holder on the companion flange,

then loosen the locknut.
8. Remove the flange holder.
2. Remove the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft

assembly (C), 25 m m thrust shim (D), and the tapered
roller bearing (E).
9. Remove the locknut (A), the conical spring washer (B),

the back-up ring (C), the O-ring (D), and the
companion flange (E) f r o m the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) (F).
3. Remove the O-ring (F) f r o m the transfer cover.

4. Drain the transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil) f r o m the
transfer housing.
5. Cut the lock tab on the locknut using a chisel.
(cont'd)
14-381
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly (cont'd)
10. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A)
f r o m the transfer housing (B), then remove the thrust
washer (C) and the transfer spacer (D) f r o m the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing

Replacement
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver A t t a c h m e n t 42 x 47 m m 07746-0010300
Attachment, 40 x 50 m m 07LAD-PW50601
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) f r o m the
transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver handle,
the attachment (42 x 47 m m ) , bearing separator (C)
and a press.
14-382
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid

Gear) Bearing Removal/Installation
2. Install a new tapered roller bearing (A) on the transfer
hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver handle, the
attachment (42 x 47 m m ) , the attachment
(40 x 50 m m ) , and a press.

1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) f r o m the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) w i t h a bearing
separator (C) and a press. Place a shaft protector (D)
between the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) and a
press to prevent damage to the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear).
2. Install the 40 m m thrust shim (A) over the transfer

output shaft (hypoid gear) (B).
3. Install the tapered roller bearing (C) over the transfer

output shaft (hypoid gear) using the driver handle
(40 m m I.D.) and a press.
14-383
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Replacement
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
Tapered Bearing Race Installer A 07MAF-SP0011A
Installer Shaft 07MAF-SP0013A
3. Install a new 52 m m bearing outer race (A) until it

bottoms in the transfer housing (B) using the driver
handle and the attachment (52 x 55 m m ) .
07749-0010000
NOTE: Replace the tapered roller bearing w i t h a new one

whenever the bearing outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 52 m m bearing outer race (A), the 75 m m
outer race (B), and the 58 m m outer race (C) f r o m the
transfer transfer housing (D).
NOTE: Some bearing outer races (52 m m , 58 m m , and
75 m m ) are press-fitted in the transfer housing, and
must be removed by heating the transfer housing.
4. Install a new 75 m m bearing outer race (A) and a new

58 m m bearing outer race (B) in the transfer housing
(C), set the attachment (65 m m ) and the tapered
bearing race installer A over the bearing outer races,
and install the installer shaft through the attachment
(65 m m ) and installer.
07MAF-SP0013A
2. Remove the press-fitted bearing outer race (A) f r o m

the transfer housing (B) by heating the transfer
housing to about 212 F (100 C) w i t h a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the transfer housing more than 212 F
(100 C).
07MAF-SP0011A
07JAD-SH30100
07MAF-SP0013A
14-384

Outer Race Removal/Installation
5. Tighten the installer shaft nut (A) to install the bearing
outer races (B) (C) into the transfer housing (D)
securely.
07MAF-SP0013A

. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
A t t a c h m e n t 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE: Replace the tapered roller bearing w i t h a new one
whenever the bearing outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and the 80 m m
thrust shim (B) f r o m the transfer cover (C). If the
bearing outer race is press-fitted, remove the outer
race by heating the transfer cover to about 212 F
(100 C) w i t h a heat gun (D). Do not heat the transfer
cover more than 212 F (100 C).
07JAD-SH30100
07MAF-SP0011A
2. Install the 80 m m thrust shim (A) and the bearing

outer race (B) in the transfer cover (C).
(cont'd)
14-385
Transfer Assembly
Outer Race Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Transfer Cover Oil Seal

Replacement
3. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the transfer

cover using the driver handle and the attachment
(78 x 80 m m ) so there is no clearance between the
bearing outer race, the thrust s h i m , and the transfer
cover.

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the transfer cover.
2. Install a new oil seal (A) in the transfer cover (B) to a

height (C) of 01 m m (00.04 in) above the transfer
cover surface using the driver handle and the
attachment (65 m m ) .
14-386
Reassembly
. Driver Handle, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Flange Holder 07XAB-001A101
NOTE:
While reassembling the transfer assembly:

- Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact.
- Measure and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
EXAMPLE
A: Existing transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
Numbers + 2
B: Replacement transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
N u m b e r s 1
C: Existing 40 mm thrust shim
thickness = 1.05 m m
X: Replacement 40 m m thrust shim thickness
X = A/100-B/100+C
= 2/100-(-1)/100+1.05
= 0.02+0.01 + 1.05 = 1.08 (mm)
Select No. M 40 m m thrust shim of 1.08 m m (0.043 in)
- Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting

torque.
Coat all parts w i t h transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil)
during reassembly.
Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing
outer race as a set if either part is replaced.
Replace the transfer hypoid drive gear and the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) as a set if either part is
replaced.
1. Select the 40 m m thrust s h i m i f t h e transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) is replaced. Calculate the
thickness of the 40 m m thrust shim using the formula
below, and select the s h i m f r o m the f o l l o w i n g table.
FORMULA: A / 1 0 0 - B / 1 0 0 + C = X
A:
B:
C:
D:
N u m b e r on t h e sxisting transfer o u t p u t shaft

(hypoid gear)
N u m b e r o n t h e replacement transfer o u t p u t
shaft (hypoid gear)
Thickness of t h e existing 40 m m t h r u s t s h i m
Thickness needed for t h e replacement 40 m m
thrust shim
N O T E : The number on the transfer output shaft

(hypoid gear) is s h o w n in 1/100 m m .
THRUST S H I M , 40 m m
Shim
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Thickness
0.72
0.75
0.78
0.81
0.84
0.87
0.90
0.93
0.96
0.99
1.02
1.05
1.08
1.11
1.14
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.028
(0.030
(0.031
(0.032
(0.033
(0.034
(0.035
(0.037
(0.038
(0.039
(0.040
(0.041
(0.043
(0.044
(0.045
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
2. Select the 40 m m thrust s h i m if the tapered roller

bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) is
replaced. Measure the thickness of the replacement
bearing and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 40 m m thrust shim by the
a m o u n t of difference in bearing thickness, and select
the replacement 40 m m thrust s h i m .
(cont'd)
14-387
Transfer A s s e m b l y
Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Install the 40 m m thrust s h i m (A) on the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) (B), then install the tapered
roller bearing (C) using the driver handle (40 m m I.D.)
and a press.
5. Drive the oil seal securely in the transfer housing

using the driver handle and the attachment (65 m m )
07749-0010000
07746-0030100
07JAD-SH30100
Sectional V i e w
4. Place the tapered roller bearing (A) on the bearing

outer race of the companion flange side of the
transfer housing, and install a new oil seal (B).
14-388
6. Install the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A) in the

transfer housing (B). Do not install the transfer spacer
and the thrust washer on the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear).
<sG>
7. Install the companion flange (A), the conical spring
washer (B) in the direction s h o w n , and a new locknut
(C) on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (D). Do
not install the O-ring and the back-up ring.
9. Install the flange holder on the companion flange.

10. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is w i t h i n 1.151.71 N-m
( 1 1 . 7 - 1 7 . 4 k g f c m , 1 0 . 2 - 1 5 . 1 Ibf-in). Do not stake the
locknut in this step.
12. A p p l y Prussian Blue to both sides of the transfer
hypoid drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
13. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), the 25 m m thrust
shim (B), and the transfer drive gear/shaft assembly
(C) in the transfer housing (D).

14. Install the transfer cover (E) and secure the transfer
cover w i t h the bolts. Do not install the O-ring on the
transfer cover.
15. Rotate the companion flange in both directions until
the transfer gears rotate one full turn in both
directions.
(cont'd)
14-389
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
19. Ifthe backlash measurement is out of standard, adjust

the backlash w i t h the 40 m m thrust s h i m , and recheck.
Do not use more than t w o 40 m m thrust shims to
adjust the backlash.
20. Ifthe transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust
the tooth contact w i t h the 25 m m , 40 m m , or 80 m m
thrust shim. Do not use more than t w o shims of each
thrust shim to adjust the tooth contact.
Toe Contact
Use a thinner 40 m m thrust shim to m o v e the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) away f r o m the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this m o v e m e n t
causes the transfer gear backlash to change, move
the transfer hypoid drive gear toward the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) to adjust the transfer
gear backlash as follows:

Standard: 0 . 0 6 - 0 . 1 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0.007 in)
18. Remove the transfer cover, and the transfer hypoid
drive gear/shaft assembly, and check the transfer
hypoid drive gear tooth contact pattern.
C O R R E C T TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
INCORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
T O E CONTACT
- Reduce the thickness of the 25 m m thrust s h i m .

- Increase the thickness of the 80 m m thrust s h i m
by the a m o u n t you reduced the thickness of the
25 m m thrust shim was reduced.
Heel Contact
Use a thicker 40 m m thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) t o w a r d the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this m o v e m e n t
causes the transfer gear backlash to change, move
the transfer hypoid drive gear away f r o m the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) to adjust the
transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Increase the thickness of the 25 m m thrust s h i m .
- Reduce the thickness of the 80 m m thrust shim by
the a m o u n t y o u increased the thickness of the
25 m m thrust shim was reduced.
Flank Contact
HEEL CONTACT
Use a thicker 25 m m thrust shim t o m o v e the

transfer hypoid drive gear away f r o m the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Flank contact must be
adjusted w i t h i n the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. Ifthe backlash exceeds the limits, adjust
as described under Heel Contact.
Face Contact
FLANK CONTACT
F A C E CONTACT
14-390
Use a thinner 25 m m thrust shim to move the

transfer hypoid drive gear t o w a r d the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Face contact must be
adjusted w i t h i n the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. Ifthe backlash exceeds the limits, adjust
as described under Toe Contact.
00
THRUST S H I M , 25 m m
Shim
No.
1.70
1.73
1.76
1.79
1.82
1.85
1.88
1.91
1.94
1.97
2.00
2.03
2.06
2.09
2.12
2.15
2.18
2.21
2.24
Thickness
1.70
1.73
1.76
1.79
1.82
1.85
1.88
1.91
1.94
1.97
2.00
2.03
2.06
2.09
2.12
2.15
2.18
2.21
2.24
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.067
(0.068
(0.069
(0.070
(0.072
(0.073
(0.074
(0.075
(0.076
(0.078
(0.079
(0.080
(0.081
(0.082
(0.083
(0.085
(0.086
(0.087
(0.088
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
2 1 . Remove the transfer cover (A), the transfer hypoid

drive gear/shaft assembly (B), the 25 m m thrust shim
(C), and the tapered roller bearing (D) f r o m the
transfer housing (E) after adjusting the transfer gear
backlash or transfer gear tooth contact.

23. Install the flange holder on the companion flange,

then loosen the locknut.
25. Remove the locknut (A), the conical spring washer (B),
and the companion flange (C) f r o m the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) (D).
26. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) f r o m

the transfer housing.
(cont'd)
14-391
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
27. Install the thrust washer (A) and a new transfer spacer
(B) on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (C) in the
direction s h o w n , and install t h e m in the transfer
housing (D).

3 1 . Install the flange holder on the companion flange.

28. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) w i t h transfer fluid (hypoid gear
oil).
29. Install the companion flange (A). Coat a new O-ring
(B) w i t h transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil), then install the
O-ring, the back-up ring (C), a new conical spring
washer (D), and a new locknut (E) on the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) (F). Install the conical
spring washer in the direction s h o w n .
32. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is w i t h i n 1.151.71 N-m
(11.7 - 1 7 . 4 kgf-cm, 10.2 - 1 5 . 1 Ibf-i n).
Tightening Torque:
108-294 N m
(11.0-30.0 k g f m , 7 9 . 6 - 2 1 7 Ibfft)
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 N m
(11.7-17.4 k g f c m , 10.2-15.1 Ibf in)
NOTE:
Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat
the tapered roller bearings, then measure the
starting torque.
If the starting torque exceeds 1.71 N-m (17.4 k g f c m ,
15.1 I b f in), replace the transfer spacer, and
reassemble the parts. Do not adjust the torque w i t h
the locknut loose.
Ifthe tightening torque exceeds 294 N-m
(30.0 k g f m , 217 Ibfft), replace the transfer spacer,
and reassemble the parts.
14-392
34. Stake the locknut into the transfer output shaft

(hypoid gear) to a depth (A) of 0.7 1.2 m m
( 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 in) using a 3.5 m m punch (B).
35. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), the 25 m m thrust

s h i m (B), and the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).

38. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat the

tapered roller bearings.
39. Measure the starting torque at the companion flange
(C) w i t h a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Standard: 3 . 2 0 - 4 . 1 6 N-m ( 3 2 . 6 - 4 2 . 4 k g f c m , 28.3
- 3 6 . 8 I b f in)
40. Remove the transfer cover f r o m the transfer housing.
4 1 . If the measurement is w i t h i n the standard, go to step
47.
36. Temporarily install the transfer cover (E) w i t h o u t the

O-ring, and secure the cover w i t h the bolts.
(cont'd)
14-393
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
bearing outer race (A) and the 80 m m thrust shim (B)
f r o m the transfer cover (C). If the bearing outer race is
press-fitted, remove the bearing outer race by heating
the transfer cover to about 212 F (100 C) w i t h a heat
gun (D). Do not heat the transfer cover more than
212 F (100 C).
D
43. Measure the thickness of the 80 m m thrust s h i m , and

select a new 80 m m thrust s h i m .
THRUST SHIM, 8 0 m m
Shim
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
w
X
Y
z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Al
AJ
AK
AL
AM
14-394
Thickness
1.52
1.55
1.58
1.61
1.64
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.060
(0.061
(0.062
(0.063
(0.065
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
1.67 m m (0.066 in)

1.70 m m (0.067 in)
1.73 m m (0.068 in)
1.76 m m (0.069 in)
1.79 m m (0.070 in)
1.82 m m (0.072 in)
1.85 m m (0.073 in)
1.88 m m (0.074 in)
1.91
1.94
1.97
2.00
2.03
2.06
2.09
2.12
2.15
2.18
2.21
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.075
(0.076
(0.078
(0.079
(0.080
(0.081
(0.082
(0.083
(0.085
(0.086
(0.087
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
2.24
2.27
2.30
2.33
2.36
2.39
2.42
2.45
2.48
2.51
2.54
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.088
(0.089
(0.091
(0.092
(0.093
(0.094
(0.095
(0.096
(0.098
(0.099
(0.100
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
2.57 m m (0.101 in)

2.60 m m (0.102 in)
2.63 m m (0.104 in)
2.66 m m (0.105 in)
00
44. Install the 80 m m thrust shim (A) and the bearing
outer race (B) in the transfer cover (C). If y o u heated
the transfer cover, let it cool to r o o m temperature
before installing the thrust s h i m .
47. Install a new O-ring (A) on the transfer cover (B), then
install the transfer cover on the transfer housing (C).
45. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the transfer

cover using the driver handle and the attachment (78
x 80 m m ) so there is no clearance between the
bearing outer race, thrust s h i m , and the transfer
cover.
07749-0010000
48. Remove the filler plug (A), then refill the transfer
assembly w i t h transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil). Use a
SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or
GL5 only.
Viscosity:
SAE 90: A b o v e 0 F ( - 1 8 C)
Hypoid Gear Oil Capacity:
0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
07NAD-PX40100
46. After replacing the 80 m m thrust s h i m , recheck, and

make sure that the total staring torque is w i t h i n
specification.
A20 x 1.5 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
49. Install the filler plug w i t h a new sealing washer (B).
14-395
Transaxle
Rear Differential
Special Tools
System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement.
Rear Differential Function Test
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor
Replacement
VTM-4 LOCK Switch Test/Replacement
VTM-4 Control Unit Replacement
VTM-4 Relay Replacement
Rear Differential Mount Replacement
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose
Replacement
Rear Differential Removal
Backlash Inspection
Rear Differential Installation
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-10
15-11
15-12
15-18
15-20
15-35
.15-42
15-43
15-43
15-44
15-44
15-45
15-46
15-47
15-48
15-50
15-51
Rear Differential
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
07AAD-S9VA000
07SAZ-001000A
15-2
Description
Driveshaft Remover
Backprobe Set
Qty
1
2
<3
VTM-4 LOCK INDICATOR
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH

Test, page 15-44
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
Initialization, page 15-9
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
BREATHER BOX and H O S E
VTM-4 INDICATOR
VTM-4 R E L A Y
Test, page 22-96
REAR DIFFERENTIAL A S S E M B L Y
Removal, page 15-48
Function test, page 15-43
Backlash inspection, page 15-50
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Inspection and Replacement, page 15-42
15-3
Rear Differential
VTM-4 Indicator
The VTM-4 indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the 4WD system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
When you use high-powered wireless equipment such as a CB or Ham radio in the vehicle.
W h e n y o u keep spinning the rear wheels while the vehicle is stuck in sand, m u d , snow, etc.
When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 10 volt.
W h e n the VTM-4 indicator comes o n , it stays on until you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

The VTM-4 control unit can memorize up to eight different DTCs. The system displays the DTCs by blinking the VTM-4
indicator. Multiple DTCs are displayed in the order they occurred, beginning w i t h the most recent.
If the same DTC is detected more than once, the most recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, w h e n the
same problem is detected more than once, it is memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs are not cleared
w h e n the battery is disconnected or the VTM-4 control unit is disconnected.
If there is a problem in the central processing unit (CPU) of the VTM-4 control unit, the VTM-4 indicator comes o n , but
no DTC is memorized.
Self-diagnosis
W h e n a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the f o l l o w i n g :
Turns the VTM-4 indicator on.
Memorizes the DTC.
Stops 4WD control and puts the vehicle back in 2WD.
Reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions w h e n the abnormality was detected.
15-4
00
How to Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs)
W h e n the VTM-4 control unit senses an abnormality in
the input or output systems, the VTM-4 indicator in the
gauge control module will usually come o n , and the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), the D indicator, and/or
the ABS indicator may also come o n . There are t w o
methods used to check for DTCs stored in the VTM-4
control unit m e m o r y . The recommended method is to
use the HDS w i t h the latest software connected to the
DLC. The other method is to connect the service check
signal (SCS) connector w i t h the HDS, and count the
number of times the VTM-4 indicator blinks.
HDS Method
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover.

and the VTM-4 control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS t o display the DTC(s)
on the screen. After determining the DTC(s), refer to
the DTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific
instructions.
5. If there are fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and
VSA system DTCs at the same t i m e , troubleshoot the
fuel and emission DTCs first.
6. After recording the DTCs, clear all DTCs.
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 4WD
mode, and check for DTCs. I f t h e DTC returns, refer to
the DTC Troubleshooting. I f t h e DTC does not return,
there was an intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit.
Make sure all connectors and terminals in the circuit
are tight.
(cont'd)
15-5
Rear Differential
Service Check Signal Circuit (SCS) Method
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Shift to P, then turn
off the engine.
2. Release the parking brake pedal.
7. Check the VTM-4 indicator.

NOTE: Codes above 10 are indicated by a series of
long and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short
blinks. A d d the long and short blinks together to
determine the code. After determining the code, refer
to the DTC Troubleshooting.
Long blinks Short blinks

H2)
-4
UW
OFF_
S e e DTC 24

6. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS.
8. Record all the DTC(s), then refer to the DTC

Troubleshooting to determine the meaning of each
DTC.
9. Clear the DTCs f r o m the VTM-4 control unit m e m o r y .
10. I f t h e MIL, the D indicator, the VSA indicator, and the
VTM-4 indicator all come on at the same t i m e ,
troubleshoot the cause of the MIL first, then
troubleshoot the A/T DTCs second, the VSA DTCs
t h i r d , and the VTM-4 DTCs last.
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutess in 4WD
mode, and check for DTCs. I f t h e DTC returns, refer to
the DTC Troubleshooting. I f t h e DTC does not return,
there was an intermittent problem within the circuit.
Make sure all connectors and terminals in the circuit
are tight.
15-6
How to Clear the VTM-4 Control Unit Memory
Service Check Signal Circuit (SCS) Method
There are t w o methods used to clear DTCs f r o m the

VTM-4 control unit memory. The recommended method
is to use the HDS w i t h the appropriate software plugged
into the data link connector (DLC).
The other method is to connect the service check signal
(SCS) connector w i t h the HDS, and manually clear the
memory.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Shift to P, then turn

the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
to the DLC (A).
HDS Method

A
6. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS.

4. Follow the prompts on the HDS screen to clear the
DTC(s).
NOTE: See the HDS user's manual for specific
instructions.
7. The VTM-4 indicator comes on and stays on for 4

seconds. Press and hold the VTM-4 LOCK button
while the VTM-4 indicator is o n .
8. When the VTM-4 indicator goes off, release the VTM-4
LOCK button.
9. The VTM-4 indicator comes on and stays on for 4
seconds. Push the VTM-4 LOCK button while the
VTM-4 indicator is on.
(cont'd)
15-7
Rear Differential
10. W h e n the VTM-4 indicator goes off, release the VTM-4
LOCK button. The VTM-4 indicator will blink twice
quickly to confirm that the DTCs have been cleared
f r o m the VTM-4 control unit memory.
NOTE: If the VTM-4 indicator does not blink twice
quickly, the memory has not been cleared. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), then repeat steps 6
through 10.
IG switch ON (ll)
IGNITION
SWITCH
ON
OFF
0
PARKING BRAKE
OFF
SWITCH
ON
HDS
OFF
CONNECT
ON
VTM-4
OFF
INDICATOR
ON
VTM-4 LOCK
OFF
INDICATOR
0.3 sec
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the VTM-4

Control Unit
1. Remove the left side t r i m panel cover.
2. Remove the left side t r i m panel lid.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter (C). Using the wire insulator as a guide for
the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently
slide the tip into the connector f r o m the wire side until
it touches the end of the wire terminal.
0.3 sec
t
t
VTM-4 LOCK
VTM-4 LOCK
button pushed button pushed |
VTM-4 LOCK
VTM-4 LOCK
button released
button released
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect

07SAZ001000A
4. If you can not get to the wire side of the connector or

the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector
and probe the terminals (B) f r o m the terminal side. Do
not force the probe into the connector.
I NOTICE I
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can
cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.
15-8
00
Initialization of the VTM-4 Control Unit
Manual Initialization
Whenever the VTM-4 control unit is replaced, it must be

initialized to make the 4WD system function. There are
t w o methods used to initialize the VTM-4 control unit.
The recommended m e t h o d is to use the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS) w i t h the appropriate software
plugged into the data link connector (DLC).
The other method is to initialize the VTM-4 control unit
manually.
1. Start the engine (the VTM-4 indicator comes o n , and

the VTM-4 LOCK switch indicator is off).
Initialization with the HDS

to the DLC (A).
2. A p p l y the brakes, and shift to either R, 1, or 2, then

push the VTM-4 LOCK button (the VTM-4 indicator
stays o n , and the VTM-4 LOCK switch indicator is on).
The 4WD system is n o w in lock mode.
3. Shift to P and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (the VTM-4 indicator
and the VTM-4 LOCK indicator both come on for 4
seconds, then go off). The VTM-4 control unit is
initialized.
ON
VTM-4
INDICATOR
VTM-4 LOCK
INDICATOR
4 sec
ON
Engine VTM-4
start
LOCK
button
push

and the VTM-4 control unit. If it d o e s n ' t troubleshoot
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS user's manual for specific
instructions.
OFF
Engine
stop
4 sec
OFF
IG switch
to ON (II)

1. Clear the DTCs f r o m the VTM-4 control unit m e m o r y .
3. Verify that the problem has been repaired; test-drive
the vehicle for several minutes in 4WD mode.
15-9
Rear Differential
Detection Item
Page
DTC*
VTM-4
Indicator
Light
21-2
ON
C A N Communication Error with the V S A (Left-Front Wheel Speed

Sensor)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-20)
22-2
ON
CAN Communication Error with the V S A (Right-Front Wheel Speed

Sensor)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-20)
23-2
ON
CAN Communication Error with the V S A (Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-20)
24-2
ON
CAN Communication Error with the V S A (Right-Rear Wheel Speed

Sensor)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-20)
37-1
ON
Engine Speed Signal Circuit Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-21)
38-1
ON
Engine Speed Signal Circuit Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-21)
41-1
ON
F-CAN Malfunction (Lost Communication with Power Control Module

(PCM)/VSA System)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-23)
41-2
ON
F-CAN Malfunction (Lost Communication with Power Control Module

(PCM)/VSA System)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-23)
42-1
ON
Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-26)
42-2
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-26)
43-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-26)
44-1
ON
VTM-4 Relay Circuit Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-27)
51-1
ON
Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Circuit Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-29)
52-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-29)
53-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-29)
53-2
ON
Left/Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Circuit Malfunction
54-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-29)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-31)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-29)
55-1
ON
Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Circuit Malfunction
56-1
ON
57-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-31)
58-1
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-31)
59-1
ON
Left/Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Power Supply Voltage High
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-33)
76-1
ON
Rear Differential Fluid Overheats
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-34)
77-1
ON
The Functional Abnormalities of Fuel Emission or Automatic

Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-34)
78-1
ON
VTM-4 Control Unit Self-Diagnostic Malfunction
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-35)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-31)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 15-31)
DTCs are indicated by the VTM-4 indicator when the 16P data link connector (DLC) is connected to the HDS.
15-10
00
NOTE: Most problems in the unit are to be diagnosed by identifying noises f r o m the gears or bearings. Care should be
taken during diagnosis not to confuse differential noises with those f r o m other drivetrain components.
Symptom
The VTM-4 indicator does not
go off, but no DTCs are stored in
any system: VTM-4, VSA, or
PGM-FI
The VTM-4 indicator does not
come on
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator does
not come on w h e n the VTM-4
LOCK button is pressed
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator
comes on w h e n the ignition
switch is turned ON (II) and does
not go off
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator does
not come on for about 4 seconds
w h e n the ignition switch is
turned ON (II)
Gear or bearing noises
Rear differential overheats

Rear differential leaks fluid
S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page

15-36).
15-37).
15-39).

15-40).
Fluid level too low.

Incorrect or w o r n out fluid.
Damaged or chipped gears.
Incorrect tire size (rolling
circumference).
Incorrect fluid type.
Fluid level too high.
Clogged breather hose.
W o r n or damaged oil seal.
Damaged sealing washer.
Loose mounting bolts or inadequate
sealing.
Incorrect or w o r n out fluid.
Incorrect tire rolling circumference.
Damaged oil pump.
Rear differential screeches,

whines, moans, or squeaks
Noise during acceleration, or

w h e n accelerating f r o m a full
stop
Incorrect of backlash of hypoid gear.

Damaged or chipped gears.
Incorrect tire size (rolling
circumference).
Troubleshooting DLC circuit (see page
11-226).

w i t h the VTM-4 control unit or
the vehicle
Also check for
Diagnostic Procedure
15-35).
A d d fluid
Drain and fill the differential
Replace the differential carrier
assembly
A d d fluid
Lower to proper level
Clean or replace
Replace the sealing washer
Replace the oil seal
Recheck torque or apply sealant
A d d fluid
Adjust tire pressure or replace
tires
assembly
assembly
15-11
Rear Differential
System Description
VTM-4 System
Outline
This vehicle is equipped w i t h a rear differential system called the variable torque m a n a g e m e n t 4WD (VTM-4)
system. The VTM-4 control unit controls the currents f l o w i n g through electromagnetic coils to engage and disengage
the right and left clutches in the rear differential assembly.
VTM-4 features include
Vehicle acceleration torque control (VATC)
Limited slip differential (LSD)
Lock control
Operation
These functions automatically combine to distribute driving torque between the front and rear wheels w h e n the vehicle
accelerates or w h e n wheels are slipping. W h e n the vehicle speed is about 18 m p h (30 km/h) or below, and the shift lever
is in R, 2, or 1, the system will manually engage the rear differential clutches w h e n the VTM-4 LOCK button is pressed. By
design, in lock mode, the torque is gradually reduced at speeds above 6 m p h (10 km/h) to minimize the load on the 4WD
system. The VTM-4 control unit has a fail-safe function and a self-diagnosis function.
15-12
VTM-4 System (cont'd)

V A T C (Vehicle Acceleration Torque Control)
The torque to be delivered to the rear wheels is calculated based on the acceleration of the vehicle calculated in the
VTM-4 control unit.
Acceleration of vehicle
(calculation from driving torque)
LSD (Limited Slip Differential) Control
The torque to be delivered t o the rear wheels is calculated based on the differences in speed and acceleration between
the front and rear wheels.
Amount of control
N-m (kgfm)
rotation small
rotation large
Rotation difference between

front wheel and rear wheel
LOCK Control
Rear differential clutch lock control is done by pushing the VTM-4 LOCK button manually w h e n the shift lever is in R, 1,
or 2.
100
Amount of control
(%)
Velocity of vehicle
(mph)
(cont'd)
15-13
Rear Differential
Electric Control System
VTM-4 Control Unit Electrical Connections
REAR D I F F E R E N T I A L
VTM-4 C O N T R O L UNIT
VTM-4 R E L A Y
BATTERY
)PWR
RCH <
RIGHT C L U T C H
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COIL
>FSR
RCL <
)IG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and

S T A R T (III)
LCH(
LCL<
B2
TOL<
LEFT CLUTCH
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COIL
DIFFERENTIAL
FLUID
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
TOH<
VSA
MODULATORCONTROL
UNIT
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
WLK
VTM-4 INDICATOR
WL2(
A11
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE
(PCM)
B11
)CANH
> CANL
>NEP
VTM-4 L O C K S W I T C H
c>x>-
LCKSW <
LCKL <
VTM-4 L O C K INDICATOR
>SCS
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
A18
PG<
>PBRK
PARKING B R A K E S W I T C H
15-14
B5
> K-UNE
LG1 <
LG2(
A10
B12
<3
VTM-4 Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The VTM-4 control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for the VTM-4 control system are s h o w n .
Do the VTM-4 inputs and outputs test w i t h the VTM-4 connectors connected.
VTM-4 Control Unit Connector A (22P) Terminal Locations
12 13 14 15 16
10 11
8
18
LU
20
22
Lu
Terminal
number
A1
Wire color
Signal
GRN
IG1
A4
ORN/
GRN
BLK/
YEL
BRN/
WHT
FSR
A6
A8
PBRK
LCKSW
A10
A11
BLK
WHT
LG1
CANH
A12
YEL
NEP
A13
BLK
TOL
A14
PNK
WL1
A15
WHT
TOH
A16
LCKL
A18
YEL/
BLK
LT BLU
A20
BRN
SCS
A22
RED
CANL
K-LINE
Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage
Description
Power supply for VTM-4
control unit
Drives VTM-4 relay
Detects parking brake signal
Detects VTM-4 lock switch
signal
Unit ground
F-CAN communication
signal
Detects engine speed pulse
Detects rear differential fluid

temperature sensor signal
Drives VTM-4 indicator
Power supply for differential
fluid temperature sensor
Drives VTM-4 LOCK
indicator
Communication line VTM-4
control unit to DLC
Detects service check signal
F-CAN communication
signal

With engine running: about 0 V
With parking brake switch on: less than 2.0 V
With parking brake switch off: battery voltage
With VTM-4 lock button pressed: battery
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V to 3.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II): about 8 .0 V
With engine running at 1,000 r p m : about 5.0 V
to 8.0 V
(Depending on ATF temperature)
With VTM-4 indicator on: less than 4.0 V
With VTM-4 indicator off: battery voltage
With
With
With
V
With
With
With
VTM-4 LOCK indicator on: less than 4.0 V

VTM-4 LOCK indicator off: battery voltage
ignition switch ON (II): about 8.0 V to 12.0
SCS circuit shorted: less than 2.0 V
SCS circuit opened: about 5.0 V
ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V to 1.5 V
(cont'd)
15-15
Rear Differential
VTM-4 Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The VTM-4 control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for the VTM-4 control system are s h o w n .
Do the VTM-4 inputs and outputs test w i t h the VTM-4 connectors connected.
VTM-4 Control Unit Connector B (12P) Terminal Locations
Description
Terminal
number
B1
Wire color
Signal
WHT
LCH
B2
RED
LCL
B3
PNK
RCH
B4
BLU
RCL
B5
B7
PG
PWR
B11
BLK
RED/
BLU
PNK
WL2
Drives left clutch

electromagnetic coil
(positive)
Drives left clutch
(negative)
Drives right clutch
(positive)
Drives right clutch
(negative)
Actuator ground
Power supply for VTM-4
actuator
Drives VTM-4 indicator
B12
BLK
LG2
Unit ground
15-16
Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

With VTM-4 lock mode: battery voltage
W i t h ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

With VTM-4 lock mode: battery voltage

With engine running: battery voltage
With VTM-4 indicator o n : less than 4.0 V
With VTM-4 indicator off: battery voltage
W i t h ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
<0
15-17
Rear Differential
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY

No. 1 (BAT) (120 A)
CTXJD
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

crKjy
AUXILIALY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
N12
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and
START (III)
GRN
5 No.2
(20 A)
P10
YEL
GRN
GRN
GRN
VTM-4
RELAY
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
LCKL
LCKSW
6A8
A16
No. 14 (7.5 A) FUSE

(DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
PNK
YEL/BLK
BRN/WHT
YEL
LT BLU
VTM-4
INDICATOR
VTM-4 LOCK \
INDICATOR V
LIGHT

VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER
(In the gauge control module)
15-18
00
R E A R DIFFERENTIAL
RIGHT C L U T C H
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COIL
LEFT CLUTCH
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COIL
BRN
BLK/RED
BLK/WHT
BRN/BLK
GRN
D I F F E R E N T I A L FLUID
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
WHT
BLK
BRN
G504
15-19
Rear Differential
DTC Troubleshooting
21-2: CAN Communication Error with the VSA
(Left-Front Wheel Speed Sensor)
(Right-Front Wheel Speed Sensor)
(Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor)
24- 2: CAN Communication Error with the VSA
(Right-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor)
10. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control

unit36P connector terminals No. 1, No. 14 and VTM-4
control unit connector terminals A 1 1 , A22
individually.
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

CANL
.
(RED)
r
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
v
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general

I 1 | / 1 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 |10|111 12 13
35
36
I . I
CANH (WHT)

indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
6. Check for DTCs in the VSA system w i t h the HDS.
Are any wheel speed sensor DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.B

connector.
15-20


Is DTC 21-2, 22-2, 23-2, and/or 24-2
// / /
/
4
6
8
1
10 11
CANH
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22 (WHT)
CANL RED)
I
Is there continuity ?
the VTM-4 control unit connectors. Ifthe connections
are OK, substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44) and recheck. Ifthe
symptom/indication goes away with the known-good
VTM-4 control unit, replace the original VTM-4 control
unit (see page 15-44).B
NO-Repair open in the wires between VTM-4 control
unit connector terminals A 1 1 , A22 and the VSA
modulator-control unit 36P connector terminals N o . 1 ,
No.14.B
DTC 37-1,38-1: Engine Speed Signal Circuit

Malfunction

connectorterminal A12 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t review the general


// /
4
8
10 11
1
6
20
22
12 13 14 15 16
18
NEP (YEL)
So
4. Test-drive the vehicle.

Is DTC 37-1 and/or 38-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
6. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FI
DTCs
indicated?

NO-Go to step 7.
Condition
Ignition switch to ON (II)
Engine running at
1,000 r p m
Is the voltage
Voltage
Above 8.0 V
5.0-8.0 V
correct?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 11.
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
damage.
(cont'd)
15-21
Rear Differential
// /
1
4
8
10 11
6
18
20
22
12 13 14 15 16
I N E P (YEL)
18. Connect VTM-4 control unit connector terminal A12

and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
// / /
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
20
22
18
NEP (YEL)
(V)
^ " J U M P E R WIRE
Is there voltage?
VTM-4 control unit connector terminal A12 and PCM
connectorterminal A 3 3 . B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11/ 1314|151617|l8 192021
22/ 24 25X 262728
29303132|333435(36373839
4Q
48
49
40 141 j^/l/l44\A \A 1
NEP (YEL)

n
// /
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
NEP (YEL)
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Repair open in the wire between VTM-4 control
unit connector terminal A12 and PCM connector
terminal A 3 3 . B
VTM-4 control unit connector terminal A12 and PCM
connectorterminal A 3 3 . B
15-22

VTM-4 control unit connectors. If the connections are
OK, substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit (see
page 15-44) and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away w i t h the known-good VTM-4 control unit,
replace the original VTM-4 control unit (see page
15-44).
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, review the general


Is DTC 37-1 and/or 38-1
DTC 41-1,41-2: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost

Communication with Power Control Module
(PCM)/VSA System)
indicated?

known-good PCM (see page 11-7) and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h the updated
PCM, troubleshooting is complete. If the
PCM, replace the original PCM control unit (see page
11-250J.B
time.B

3. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system and VSA system
with the HDS.
Are there any DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NO-Go to step 4.
Is DTC 41-1 and lor 41-2
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
time.B
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
damage.
(cont'd)
15-23
Rear Differential
A 48 and VTM-4 control unit connector terminal A 1 1 .

unit 36P connectorterminal No. 14 and VTM-4 control
unit connector terminal A 1 1 .

V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT36P CONNECTOR

9
3 I 4 I 5 6I | 7
l
l10l
13 1415 16 17|18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
29 30 31 32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
I2
1
11
22
/
/
40141
>^
4 4 1 / 1 4 6 j ^ / l 48149
CANH
(WHT)
M | / | 3 [ 4 | / | 6 | / 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12
13 14 15 16

35
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
I
36
CANH (WHT)
V
n
CANH
(WHT)
_n_nL
10 11
22
13
H4|/|/1/|18|19|/|211/|23|/|
// /
SANH (WHT)
n
1
4
6
10 11
8
12 13 14 15 16
20
18
22
4-

YES-Go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 12.
terminal A 4 8 . B
connector.
15-24

unit connector terminal A11 and VSA
modulator-control 36P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No.14.

A 49 and VTM-4 control unit connector terminal A22.

unit 36P connector terminal No.1 and VTM-4 control
unit connector terminal A22.


| 1|2 3 |4 |5 |6 |7
11
22
/
/
8 |9
1101
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
CANL
(RED)
H 1 L/|3|4|/16L/|8|9|10|11| 12 13
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
35 36
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
I
40|41 | / | / | 441/| 461/| 481491
(RED)
n
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22
// /
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22
// /
CANL (RED)
YES-Go to step 15.
terminal A49.H
CANL (RED)
are O K , substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44) and recheck. I f t h e
symptom/indication goes away w i t h the known-good
unit (see page 15-44).H
unit connector terminal A22 and VSA
modulator-control unit 36P connector terminal
No.1.1
15-25
Rear Differential
DTC 42-1,42-2,43-1: Differential Fluid

Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction


connector terminals A13 and A15 to body ground.


_n_
4. Test-drive the vehicle for 5 minutes.

Is DTC 42-1, 42-2, and/or 43-1
7/
_n_ _n_
4
6
8
1
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
TOL (BLK) I
I TOH (WHT)
6b
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
7. Remove the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
wire harness cover, then disconnect the rear
differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
8. Measure the resistance between rear differential fluid
temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
Is there battery
voltage?

VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A13 and A15
and the rear differential fluid temperature sensor.B
NO-Go to step 12.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE

S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
TOH (WHT)
PI
PI
PI
// / /
4
1
6
8
10 11!
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
T O L (BLK)
T O L (BLK) I
I T O H (WHT)
Fluid Temperature
32 F (0 C)
86 F (30 C)
212 F (100 C)
284 F (140 C)
Is the resistance
Resistance
5.82 kQ to 7.26 kQ
1.53 kQ to 1.83 kQ
148 Q to 162 Q
52 Q to 61 Q
correct?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor (see page 15-43).H
15-26
VTM-4 control unit connectorterminal A13 and A15
and the rear differential fluid temperature sensor.B
NO-Go to step 14.
<S0
14. Connect the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 to body ground
w i t h jumper wires.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID T E M P E R A T U R E
J U M P E R WIRE
TOH (WHT)
DTC 44-1: VTM-4 Relay Circuit Malfunction

T O L (BLK)
JUMPER W I R E "


Is DTC 44-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) w i t h the VTM-4
control unit still connected, measure the voltage
between VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A4
and B7 to body ground w i t h the ignition switch to ON
(II), and after the engine starts.
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
TOL(BLKH
I T O H (WHT)
A(22P)
FSR (ORN/GRN)
(0) ()
ft
// / / /
/ / /
1
4
10 11
6
8
22
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
the VTM-4 control unit and rear differential fluid
temperature sensor connectors. If the connections are
OK, substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit (see
page 15-44) and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away w i t h the known-good VTM-4 control unit,
15-44).B
control unit connector terminals A13 and A15 and the
rear differential fluid temperature sensor.B
B(12P)
PWR (RED/BLU)
Condition
B7 (PWR)
Ignition switch to Less than 3.0 V
ON (II)
Engine start
Battery voltage
Is the voltage
A 4 (FSR)
Battery voltage
Less than 1.0 V
correct?
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
15-27
Rear Differential
8. Remove the VTM-4 relay (see page 15-45), then test
the VTM-4 relay (see page 22-96).

connector terminals A 4 and B7 to body g r o u n d .
A(22P)
Is the VTM-4 relay OK?
FSR (ORN/GRN)
YES-Go t o step 9.
n
NO-Replace the VTM-4 relay (see page 15-45).H
// /
4
12 13 14 15 16
6
18
10 11
22
20
10. Measure the voltage between VTM-4 control relay 5P

connector terminals No.1 and No.5 to body ground.
B(12P)
lji2|^|Tr/]
' 7]^M/l1l]l2i
VTM-4 RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
TPWR
(RED/BLU)
GRN
Is there battery
voltage?

VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A 4 or B7 and
the VTM-4 r e l a y . B
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Go t o step 11.
NO-Check for a blown No. 2 (20 A) fuse in the

auxiliary under-hood fuse box or No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuses are
OK, repair open in the wire between the auxiliary
under-hood fuse box or the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box and the VTM-4 relay.H

connector terminals A 4 and B7 to body g r o u n d .
VTM-4 C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
A(22P)
FSR (ORN/GRN)
12. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P) and

connector B(12P).
//
A6
12 13 14 15 16
8
18
10 11
20
22

B(12P)
PWR (RED/BLU)
VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A 4 or B7 and
the VTM-4 relay.H
NO-Go to step 17.
15-28
17. Connect the VTM-4 relay 5P connector terminal No. 2

and No.3 to body ground with j u m p e r wires.
DTC 51-1, 52-1,53-1,53-2,54-1 Left Clutch

Electromagnetic Coil Circuit Malfunction
VTM-4 RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

1
2
ORN/GRN

RED/BLU
JUMPER
WIRE
J U M P E R WIRE

18. Check for continuity betweenVTM-4 control unit

connector terminals A 4 and B7 to body ground.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Is DTC 51-1, 52-1, 53-1, 53-2, and/or 54-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.

time.B
A(22P)
FSR (ORN/GRN)

n
//
1
4
6
10 11
8
12 13 14 15 16
18
22
20
7. Disconnect the left clutch electromagnetic coil 2P

connector.
8. Measure the resistance between left clutch
electromagnetic coil 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
B(12P)
LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL

2P CONNECTOR
JF=)(l.
LCH
(BLK/RED)
LCL
(BLK/WHT)
YES-Go to step 19.

unit connector terminals A4 or B7 and the VTM-4
relay.
Is there 1 Oto 3D ?
VTM-4 control unit and the VTM-4 relay connectors. If
the connections are OK, test-drive the vehicle, and
check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 44-1
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the rear differential assembly.l
indicated?

(see page 15-44) and recheck. If the
NO-The system is OK at this t i m e . B
(cont'd)
15-29
Rear Differential
9. Measure the resistance between left clutch
electromagnetic coil 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and
body ground.

connector terminals B1 and B2 to body ground.
LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL

2P CONNECTOR
LCH
(WHT)
LCL
(RED)
T 9 T
LCH
(BLK/RED)
Is there more than 1 MO or open?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the rear differential assembly.H
connectorterminal B1 and B2 to body ground.
LCH
(WHT)

VTM-4 control unit connector terminals B1 or B2 and
the left clutch electromagnetic coil.H
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Connect a j u m p e r wire between left clutch
No. 2.
L E F T CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL

2P CONNECTOR
LCL
(RED)
LCH
(WHT)
LCL
(RED)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there battery
voltage?

the left clutch electromagnetic coil.H
NO-Go to step 13.
15-30

connector terminals B1 and B2.
LCH
(WHT)
LCL
(RED)
2 3 4 5
11 12J
//
DTC 53-2,55-1,56-1,57-1,58-1: Right Clutch

Electromagnetic Coil Circuit Malfunction

YES-Do the rear differential function test (see page
15-43). If the rear differential is normal, substitute a
known-good VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44) and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
the known-good VTM-4 control unit, replace the
original VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44).H
unit connector terminals B1 or B2 and the left clutch
electromagnetic coil.H
is DTC 53-2, 55-1, 56-1, 57-1and/or 58-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
7. Disconnect the right clutch electromagnetic coil 2P
connector.
8. Measure the resistance between the right clutch
No. 2.
RIGHT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL

2P CONNECTOR
RCL
(GRN)
RCH
(BRN)
Is there 1 Oto 3 O ?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the rear differential assembly.l
(cont'd)
15-31
Rear Differential
9. Measure the resistance between the right clutch
body ground.

connector terminals B3 and B4 to body ground.

2P CONNECTOR
RCH
(PNK)
f l I 2 j 3J4j 5 I / ]
Xi AA/m
RCH
(BRN)
RCL
(BLU)
i a

Is there more than 1 MO or open?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the rear differential a s s e m b l y . B
connectorterminal B3 and B 4 t o body ground.
RCH
(PNK)
2 3 A 5
11 12]
t i4 /
RCL
(BLU)
A dQ

the right clutch electromagnetic c o i l . B
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Connect a j u m p e r wire between right clutch
No.2.

2P CONNECTOR
nr=in
St)
RCL
(GRN)
RCH
(BRN)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there battery
voltage?

the right clutch electromagnetic c o i l . B
NO-Go to step 13.
15-32

connector terminals B3 and B4.
RCH
(PNK)
RCL
(BLU)
2 3 4 5
11112
X //
DTC 59-1: Right/Left Clutch Electromagnetic

Coil Power Supply Voltage High

YES-Do the rear differential function test (see page
15-43). Ifthe rear differential is normal, substitute a
known-good VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44) and
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away with
the known-good VTM-4 control unit, replace the
original VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44).B
unit connector terminals B3 or B4 and the right clutch
electromagnetic c o i l . l
Is DTC 59-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
7. Test the battery (see page 22-93). Charge or replace
the battery if necessary.
9. Check the charging system indicator.
Does the charging system indicator come on, and after
the engine starts, does the indicator go off?
NO-Go to the charging system troubleshooting (see
page 4 - 2 6 ) .
15-33
Rear Differential
DTC 76-1: Rear Differential Fluid Overheats
NOTE:
Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t review the general
When the temperature of the rear differential fluid is
abnormally high, the VTM-4 indicator comes on. This
is not necessarily a problem, but DTC 76-1 will be
stored.
Check the rear differential fluid level (see page 15-42).
If it's low, refill it, then clear the DTC, and recheck.
DTC 77-1: The Functional Abnormalities of

Fuel Emission system or Automatic
Transmission

3. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.

Are any VSA system DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B

NO-Go to step 4.
6. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h).
7. Check for WHEEL SPEED in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are all wheel speed the same?
time.B
NO-Go to step 8.
9. Check for rear brake drag.
Are the rear brakes OK?
(see page 15-44) and recheck. Ifthe s y m p t o m /
indication goes away with the known-good VTM-4
control unit, replace the original VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44).B
NO-Repair the rear brakes.B (see page 19-3)
15-34

Is DTC 77-1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
6. Check for DTCs in the Fuel emission or Automatic
Transmission system with the HDS.
Are any Fuel emission or Automatic Transmission
DTCs indicated?
system
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B

NO-Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit (see
page 15-44) and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away with the known-good VTM-4 control unit,
15-44).B
78-1: VTM-4 Control Unit Self-Diagnostic
Malfunction
The VTM-4 indicator does not go off, but no

DTCs are stored in any system: VTM-4, VSA,
or PGM-FI
1. Check the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.H

Is DTC 78-1
indicated?
2. Do the VTM-4 control unit Initialization (see page

15-9).
YES-Go to step 6.

time.B
6. Test the battery. Charge or replace the battery if

necessary.
Does the VTM-4 indicator come on and stay on?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time.H

8. Check the charging system indicator.
Does the charging system indicator come on, and after
the engine starts, does the indicator go off?
YES-Go to step 9.

connector terminals A1 and A10, and between VTM-4
control unit connector terminals A1 and B12.
A (22P)
NO-Go to the charging system troubleshooting (see

page 4 - 2 6 ) .
// /// /
/ /
4
8
10 11
1
6
22
18
20
12 13 14 15 16
9. Check for installation of any aftermarket CB or Ham

radios which may cause an RF signal interference.
Is there an aftermarket radio
LG1 (BLK)
IG1 (GRN)
installed?
YES-Disconnect the aftermarket radio, and retest.H

the VTM-4 control unit connectors. If the connections
B (12P)
ri|2J T4J5l/3 LG2 (BLK)

TTAAAn i i
3
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 6.
unit connector terminals A1 and driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, or VTM-4 control unit connector
terminals A10 or B12 and body ground.H
(cont'd)
15-35
Rear Differential
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
the gauge control module 32P connector.
connector terminals A 1 4 a n d B11 to body ground.
The VTM-4 indicator does not come on

Does the VTM-4 indicator come on?
A(22P)
_JT_
7/
/ _n_
4
6
8
1
10 11
22
18
20
12 13 14 15 16
WL1 (PNK)

time.B
NO-Go to step 3.
B(12P).
B(12P)
WL2 (PNK)
5. Connect VTM-4 connector terminal A14 and B11

individually to body ground with jumper wires.
A(22P)
n

VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A14 or B11
and gauge control m o d u l e .
PI
WL1 (PNK)
B(12P)
3 l 4 l 5 M
11T2]

JUMPER
WIRE
Does the VTM-4 Indicator come on?

YES-Go to the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-334).H
WL2 (PNK)


NO-Go to step 8.
9. Remove the jumper wires.
15-36
PI
// / /
/
JUMPER
WIRE
NO-Go to step 9.
4
1
6
8
10 11
18
20
12 13 14 15 16
22
10. Connect the gauge control module 32P connector

terminal No.14 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.

JUMPER WIRE
PNK
1 | 2 | / 1 / | 5 |6 /|8|9|10
1l|l2|l3Jl4|/fl6|
|l7|l8|l9|20|2l|22|23|24|25|/27|28|29|30|/32
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator does not come on

when the VTM-4 LOCK button is pressed
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, review the general
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator will only come on w h e n the
engine is running and the shift lever is in R, 1, or 2
before the button is pressed.
1. Check the No. 1 (7.5 A) and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuses in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?

YES-Go to step 2.

YES-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the VTM-4 control unit.H
NO-Go to the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 2 2 - 3 3 4 ) . !
NO-Replace the fuses, and recheck.H

3. Check the VTM-4 LOCK indicator.
Does the VTM-4 LOCK indicator come on, and does it go
off 4 seconds later?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14.
4. Start the engine, and move the shift lever to R, 1, and
2.
Does the VTM-4 LOCK indicator come on when the
VTM-4 LOCK button is pressed?
time.B
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Check for DTCs in the A/T system w i t h the HDS.
Are there any AIT DTCs
indicated?

NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
15-37
Rear Differential
connector terminals A8 and body ground.
15. Connect VTM-4 connector terminal A16 to body

ground w i t h a jumper wire.
L C K S W (BRN/WHT)
i n_
12
7/
/ / /
/ / 4
_n-_
6
10 11
4
8
18
20
13 14 15 16
22
JUMPER
WIRE
LCKL (YEL/BLK)

Is there battery voltage when the VTM-4 LOCK button is

pressed?
NO-Go to step 12.
13. Test the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page 15-44).
Is the VTM-4 LOCK switch OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
LOCK switch and the VTM-4 control unit.B

Does the VTM-4 LOCK indicator come on?
NO-Go to step 17.
19. Disconnect the VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P connector.
20. Connect the VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P connector
terminal No.3 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NO-Replace the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page

15-44).B
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
ii
ir
1 2 |3 | 4 5
J'
JUMPER
WIRE
i,
YEL/BLK
15-38
2 1 . Check for continuity between VTM-4 control unit

connector terminal A 1 6 and body ground.
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator comes on when

the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and does
not go off
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 22.
unit connectorterminal A16 and VTM-4 LOCK switch
5P connector.B

VTM-4 control u n i t replace the original VTM-4 control
connector terminals A16 and body ground.
24. Measure the voltage between VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P

connectorterminal No.2 and body ground.
n
ii
ir
1 2 |3 | 4 5
u
YEL
II
6
// / /
/
4
12 13 14 15 16
18
10 11
8
20
22
I L C K L (YEL/BLK)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the VTM-4 LOCK indicator bulb.B

NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4 LOCK
switch 5P connector terminal No. 2 and the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
VTM-4 control unit connector terminals A16 and the
VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P connector.B
NO-Replace the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page
15-44).B
15-39
Rear Differential
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator does not come on
for about 4 seconds when the ignition switch
is turned ON (11)
8. Connect the VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P connector

terminal No.3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
n
ir
1 2 | 3 |4 5
2. Connect VTM-4 connector terminal A16 to body

ground with a jumper wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
YEL/BLK

// /

10 11
4
6
8
1
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
JUMPER
WIRE
LCKL (YEL/BLK)
// /
1
4
6
8
10 11
12 13 14 15 16
18
20
22
LCKL (YEL/BLK)

the VTM-4 control unit connectors. If the connections
NO-Go to step 5.
15-40
YES-Go to step 11.
unit connector terminals A16 and VTM-4 LOCK switch
5Pconnector.H
12. Measure the voltage between the VTM-4 LOCK switch

5P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
i r i r
1 2
5
3
4
YEL L

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the VTM-4 LOCK indicator b u l b . B

NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4 LOCK
switch 5P connectorterminal No. 2 and the driver's
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement
Inspection
Replacement
1. Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , and turn the ignition

switch to LOCK (0).
1. Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , and turn the ignition

switch to LOCK (0).
2. Use solvent and a brush t o wash any oil and dirt off
the differential fluid inspection oil filler plugs.
2. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer (B).
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer (B),
then check the condition of the fluid, and make sure
the fluid is at the proper level (C).
Fluid Capacity
2.64 L (2.79 U S qt) at fluid change
Recommended fluid: Honda VTM-4 Differential fluid
A
47 N-m
(4.8 k g f m ,
35 Ibfft)
4. The fluid level must reach up to the bottom of the filler

plug hole. If it is below the hole, add the
recommended fluid until it runs out, then reinstall the
filler plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
3. Remove the drain plug (C) and the sealing washer (D),
and drain the fluid.
4. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a new sealing w a s h e r .
5. A d d fluid until it reaches the bottom of the filler plug
hole.
6. Reinstall the filler plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
15-42
3
Rear Differential Function Test
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature

Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Before doing the Differential Function T e s t the

following conditions must be present.
1. Drain the differential fluid. Reinstall the drain plug

with a new sealing washer (see page 15-42).
No DTCs detected.
2. Remove the wire harness cover (A), then disconnect

the differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
(B).
Engine is not running.

The VTM-4 control unit must be initialized.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the VTM-4

control unit. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit
4. Confirm that the temperature of the differential fluid is
between 68 F (20 C ) and 140 F (60 C) with the HDS.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) with the shift
lever in P.
7. Raise the vehicle on the lift so all four wheels are off
the ground.
8. Remove the rear wheels.
10. Select MISCELLANEOUS TEST, then select the LEFT
CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL TEST w i t h the
HDS, and f o l l o w the screen prompts. Ifthe results are
NORMAL, the left clutch is OK, go t o step 9. If the
results are ABNORMAL, replace the rear differential.
11. Select MISCELLANEOUS TEST, then select the RIGHT
CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL TEST w i t h the
HDS, and f o l l o w the screen prompts. Ifthe results are
NORMAL, the right clutch is OK. Ifthe results are
ABNORMAL, replace the rear differential.
C
18 N m
(1.8 k g f m ,
13 Ibfft)
- D
Replace.
3. Remove the rear differential fluid temperature sensor

(C).
4. Install the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
w i t h a new O-ring (D) in the reverse order of removal
5. Refill the differential w i t h the recommended
differential fluid (see page 15-42).
15-43
Rear Differential
VTM-4 Control Unit Replacement
VTM-4 LOCK Switch

Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's center panel (see page 20-123).
2. Disconnect the VTM-4 LOCK switch 5P connector
f r o m the VTM-4 LOCK switch (A), then remove the
VTM-4 LOCK switch f r o m the driver's center panel (B).
NOTE: The VTM-4 control unit must be initialized after

replacement, other wise the VTM-4 system will not
function.
1. Remove the left side t r i m panel.
2. Remove the left side t r i m panel lid.
3. Remove the three bolts (A) f r o m the VTM-4 control
unit(B).

button position according to the table.
\Terminal
1 2
Position\
O
Release
the button
oPush
the button o- -o
-o
-o
o- -@- -o
o -- -o
4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the

VTM-4 LOCK switch bulb or the VTM-4 LOCK switch.
15-44
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
4. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connectors (C).

5. Install the VTM-4 control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
VTM-4 Relay Replacement

1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-121).
2. Remove the harness clip (A), then remove the
auxiliary under-dash relay holder (B).
3. Remove the VTM-4 relay (C) f r o m the auxiliary

under-dash relay holder.
4. Install the VTM-4 relay in the reverse order of
removal.
15-45
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Mount Replacement
15-46
<3
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose Replacement
1. Remove the cargo floor box. (see page 20-95)
2. Remove the rear right side t r i m panel, (see page 20-96)
3. Remove the breather hose clips (A), then disconnect the breather hoses (B).
4. Remove the rear differential breather box clips (C) and the rear differential breather box (D).
5. Install the breather box and the hose in the reverse order of removal.
15-47
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Removal
Exploded View
A: 27 N m (2.8 k g f m , 20 Ibfft)
B: 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 9 Ibfft)
REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS

BRACKET B
ASSEMBLY
O-RING
Replace.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT A REAR DIFFERENTIAL H A R N E S S

BRACKETC
RUBBER INSULATER
FILLER PLUG
47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 Ibfft)
S E T RING
Replace.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL H A R N E S S
BRACKETD
T H R U S T WASHER
HALF SHAFT OUTER S E A L
Replace.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
H A R N E S S BRACKET A
REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS

BRACKETE
REAR DIFFERENTIAL H A R N E S S
BRACKETF
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
15-48
SEALING WASHER
Replace.
DRAIN PLUG
47 N-m (4.8 k g f m , 35 Ibfft)
) WIRE HARNESS COVER

Driveshaft Remover 07AAD-S9VA000
6. Using the driveshaft remover (A), pry out the left rear
driveshaft inboard joint (B) f r o m the differential (C).
NOTE:
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
This is a prying tool, do not strike it w i t h a hammer.
Suspend the left rear driveshaft w i t h an appropriate

size wire or nylon strap.

3. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-42).
4. Remove the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26).
(B) and the rear differential companion flange (C).
Separate the propeller shaft f r o m the rear differential.
NOTE: Suspend the propeller shaft with an
appropriate size wire or nylon strap.
07AAD-S9VA000
7. Place a transmission jack under the rear differential

(A).
8. Disconnect the 6P connector (B) and the 2P connector

(C), then remove the mounting bolts (D) and the
stopper (E).
(cont'd)
15-49
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Removal (cont'd)
Backlash Inspection
9. Lower the rear differential a little on the transmission

jack, then remove the left rear driveshaft (A) f r o m the
rear differential.
INOTICEI
Connecting battery voltage to either the right or left
clutch electromagnet coils for more than 3 minutes will
damage the rear differential.
1. Install the left rear driveshaft.
2. At the left clutch electromagnetic coil side, connect
the left clutch electromagnetic coil 2 P connector (A)
terminal No. 1 to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the terminal No. 2 to the battery negative
terminal.
10. Disconnect the breather tube (B) f r o m the rear

differential.
11. Lower the rear differential on the transmission jack,
then remove the set rings (C) f r o m the rear
differential.
15-50
3. Check the backlash of the companion flange (B) w i t h a

dial indicator (C).
Standard: 1 . 2 3 - 2.38 mm(0.048-0.094 in)
4. If the backlash is not w i t h i n the standard, replace the
rear differential.
Rear Differential Installation

1. Install the new set rings (A) in the set ring groove of
the differential.
4. Raise the rear differential to the mounting level, then

install the mounting bolts (A) and stopper (B).
A
14 x 1.5 m m
P/N 08798-9002
5. Connect the 6P connector (C) and the 2P connector (D).

2. Raise the rear differential a little on the transmission
jack, then connect the breather tube (B) to the rear
differential.
3. Apply 1.52.0 g (0.050.07 oz) of super high temp
urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines of the left
rear driveshaft inboard joint (C), then install the left
rear driveshaft inboard joint to the rear differential.
6. Attach the propeller shaft (A) to the rear differential (B)

by aligning the reference marks (C) you made during the
removal procedure.
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
7 2 N m (7.3kgfm,53Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Install the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-41).

8. Refill the differential with the recommended differential
fluid (see page 15-42).
10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary
(see page 18-5).
15-51
Transaxle
D r i v e l i n e / A x l e
Special Tools
Driveshaft Inspection
Front Driveshaft Removal
Front Driveshaft Disassembly
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Front Driveshaft Installation
Intermediate Shaft Removal
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Intermediate Shaft Installation
Rear Driveshaft Removal
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly.
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly
Rear Driveshaft Installation
Propeller Shaft Inspection
Propeller Shaft Removal
Propeller Shaft Installation
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-4
16-6
16-10
16-18
16-20
16-21
16-23
16-25
16-26
16-29
16-33
16-41
16-43
16-44
16-45
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
071AF-S3VA000
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
07947-4630100
07965-SD90100
07AAD-S9VA000
07AAF-SDAA100
07JAD-PH80101
07LAD-PW50601
07LAF-SM40300
07MAC-SL0A102
07MAC-SL0A202
07XAC-001020A
07XAC-001030A
16-2
Description
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 m m
Driver
Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 m m
Support Base
Driveshaft Remover
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
Support Base Attachment
Ball Joint Remover, 32 m m
Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 m m
Threaded Adapter, 26 x 1.5 m m
(D
Otv
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

FRONT DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-4
Disassembly, page 16-6
16-3
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Inspection
Front Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot (B)
on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
f o u n d , replace the boot and the boot bands.

. Ball Joint Remover, 32 m m 07MAC-SL0A102
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 m m 071AF-S3VA000
3. Pry up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B), then
remove the nut.
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any

damage is f o u n d , replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint (F)
for cracks and damage. If any damage is f o u n d ,
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an
assembly.
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by
hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the
outboard joint as an assembly.
16-4
4. Drain the transmission f l u i d , then reinstall the drain

plug w i t h a new sealing washer (see page 14-209).
5. Remove the brake hose m o u n t i n g bolt (A).
6. Remove the lock pin (A) f r o m the lower arm ball joint,
then remove the castle nut (B). Separate the knuckle
f r o m the lower arm (C) using the 14 m m ball joint
thread protector and the 32 m m ball joint remover
(see page 18-12).
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot w h e n
installing the remover.
Do not force or h a m m e r on the lower a r m , or pry
between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could
damage the ball joint.
7. Pull the knuckle o u t w a r d , and separate the outboard

joint f r o m the front hub using a plastic hammer.
8. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) f r o m the

differential using a prybar. Remove the driveshaft as
an assembly.
NOTE:
Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard joint
may come apart. Pull the inboard joint straight out
to avoid damaging the oil seal.
Be careful not to damage the oil seal w i t h the
prybar.
A
9. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of the

intermediate shaft using a drift and a hammer.
Remove the driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard
joint may come apart.
(cont'd)
16-5
Driveline/Axle
Front Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the set ring (A) f r o m the left driveshaft
inboard joint.
Front Driveshaft Disassembly

Threaded Adapter, 26 x 1.5 m m 07XAC-001030A
Slide Hammer 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
Boot Band Pliers, commercially available
Bearing Puller, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side

1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage the
boot.
If the boot band is a w e l d e d type (A), cut the boot
band.
If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up the
band end (C), and push it into the clip (D).
11. Remove the set ring (A) f r o m the intermediate shaft.
16-6
If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the

boot band using commercially available boot band
pliers (F).
Welded type
4. M a k e m a r k s ( A ) o n t h e r o l l e r s (B) a n d t h e s p i d e r (C) t o
L o w profile t y p e
identify t h e locations o f the rollers o n t h e spider, t h e n

r e m o v e t h e rollers.
NOTE: Do n o t engrave or scribe any marks o n t h e
rolling surface.
2. M a k e m a r k s ( A ) o n e a c h r o l l e r (B) a n d t h e i n b o a r d
j o i n t (C) t o i d e n t i f y t h e l o c a t i o n s o f t h e r o l l e r s t o t h e
g r o o v e s in t h e i n b o a r d joint.
A
NOTE: Do not engrave o r scribe any marks o n t h e
rolling surface.
5. R e m o v e t h e c i r c l i p ( D ) .
6. M a k e m a r k s (E) o n t h e s p i d e r a n d t h e d r i v e s h a f t (F) t o
identify t h e position o f the spider o n t h e shaft.
7. R e m o v e t h e s p i d e r .
N O T E : If n e c e s s a r y , u s e a c o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e
puller.
8. W r a p t h e s p l i n e s o n t h e d r i v e s h a f t w i t h v i n y l t a p e ( A )
to prevent damaging the boot.
A
3. R e m o v e t h e i n b o a r d j o i n t o n a c l e a n s h o p t o w e l ( D ) .
Be c a r e f u l n o t t o d r o p t h e r o l l e r s w h e n s e p a r a t i n g
t h e m f r o m the inboard joint.
9. R e m o v e t h e i n b o a r d b o o t . B e c a r e f u l n o t t o d a m a g e
the boot.
10. R e m o v e t h e v i n y l t a p e .
(cont'd)
16-7
Driveline/Axle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same level
as the outboard joint end (C).
Outboard Joint Side

1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs (B)
using a screwdriver, then release the band. Be careful
not to damage the boot.
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially t o the inboard

joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise w i t h a

shop t o w e l .
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 26 x 1.5 m m
threaded adapter (B) and a commercially available
5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (C).
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the

outboard joint inner race.
7. Remove the driveshaft f r o m the bench vise.
16-8
8. Remove the stop ring (A) f r o m the driveshaft.
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A)

10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
11. Remove the vinyl tape.
Driveline/Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
D O U B L E LOOP BANDS
(Replacement parts only)
Replace.
Use the grease included

in the outboard boot set.
16-10

Boot Band Tool KD-3191 or e q u i v a l e n t commercially
available
Seal Clamp Tool Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent
commercially available
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning

the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end of
the driveshaft.

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side

1. Wrap the splines w i t h vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging the inboard boot.
4. Install a new circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) as s h o w n , and
note these items:
Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the
spider by aligning the marks (C) you made.
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers

f r o m falling off.
(cont'd)
16-11
Driveline/Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease included in
the new inboard boot set.
8. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
inboard joint (C).
Grease quantity
Left Inboard joint: 1 9 0 - 2 1 0 g ( 6 . 7 - 7 . 4 oz)
Right Inboard joint: 2 0 5 - 2 2 5 g ( 7 . 2 - 7 . 9 oz)

in the inboard boot set.
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note

these items:
Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers.
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is pointing
up to prevent it f r o m falling off.
9. Adjust the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure as

s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway between full
compression and full extension. Bleed excess air f r o m
the boots by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver
between the boot and the joint.
Left driveshaft: 5 7 1 . 2 - 5 7 6 . 2 m m (22.49-22.68 in)
A
Right driveshaft: 569.5-574.5 mm (22.42-22.62 in)

A
16-12
10. Install new boot bands.

For the double loop type, go to step 11.
For the l o w profile type, go to step 20.
14. Thread the free end of the band t h r o u g h the nose

section of the commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
11. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard
joint, then install a new double loop band (A) onto the
boot (B).
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
forward rotation of the driveshaft.
15. Using a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot

band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot (C)
on the band meets the edge of the clip.
12. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
13. Mark position (A) on the band 1014 m m (0.40.6 in)
f r o m the clip (B).
16. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the
band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the clip,
then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
(cont'd)
16-13
Driveline/Axle
17. U n w i n d the boot band t o o l , and cut off the excess free
end of the band to leave a 510 m m (0.20.4 in) tail
protruding f r o m the clip.
18. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n using a

hammer.
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere w i t h
anything on the vehicle, and the band does not
move.
20. Install a new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B),
then hook the tab (C) of the band.
21. Close the hook portion of the band using

commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the t a b s ( B ) o f the band.
Clean any grease remaining on the surrounding

surfaces.
22. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and
repeat 20 and 2 1 .
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 for the band on the other

end of the boot.
16-14
3
4. Install the stop ring (A) into the driveshaft groove (B).
Outboard Joint Side

damaging the outboard boot.
5. Pack about 3 5 g (1.2 oz) grease included in the new

outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
outboard joint.
2. Install new ear clamp bands (B) and the outboard
boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot.
NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint, the

grease is already installed.
3. Make sure to check the size of a new stop ring.
NOTICE
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, make sure
y o u install a new stop ring.
Stop Ring Specifications
Overall diameter (A):
Wire diameter (B):
31.2 mm (1.23 in)

2.0 mm (0.08 in)
(cont'd)
16-15
Driveline/Axle
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint.
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) y o u made

w i t h the outboard joint end (B).
INQTICEl
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, the shaft
must be all the w a y into the outboard joint to ensure
the stop ring is properly seated.
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the

driveshaft and the joint, and tap or hit the assembly
onto a hard surface f r o m a height of about 10 c m (4
in).
NOTE: Do not use a hammer, as excessive force may
damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the
threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
9. Pack the outboard joint (A) w i t h the remaining joint

grease included in the new joint boot set.
Total grease quantity
outboard joint: 115135 g (4.14.8 oz)
16-16
<3
outboard joint (C). Bleed any excess air f r o m the boot
by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver between the
boot and the joint.
12. Close the ear portion (A) of the band using a

commercially available seal clamp tool (Kent-Moore
J-35910 or equivalent) (B).
13. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of

the band. If the clearance is not w i t h i n the standard,
close the ear portion of the band tighter.
6.0 mm
(0.24 in) MAX.
11. Inspect the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure

as s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension.
Left driveshaft: 571.2-576.2 mm (22.49-22.68 in)
A
1 . 0 - 4 . 0 mm (0.04-0.16 in)
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 for the band on the other end
of the boot.
16-17
Driveline/Axle
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the mating
surfaces of the joint and the splined section are clean.
3. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove (B) of
the intermediate shaft.
1. A p p l y about 5 g (0.18 oz) of moly 60 paste (P/N

08734-0001) to the contact area (A) of the outboard
joint and the front wheel bearing.
NOTE: The paste helps prevent noise and vibration.
(P/N 08734-0001)
the left driveshaft inboard joint.
4. Apply 2 . 0 - 3 . 0 g (0.070.10 oz) of super high t e m p

urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the w h o l e splined
surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After applying
grease, remove the grease f r o m the splined grooves
at intervals of 23 splines and f r o m the set ring
groove (B) so that air can bleed f r o m the intermediate
shaft.
5. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly w i t h solvent, and dry t h e m
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts w i t h solvent.
16-18
6. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the

differential (B) or the intermediate shaft (C) until the
set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent
damaging the oil seal.
8. Wipe off any grease contamination f r o m the ball joint

tapered section and threads, then install the knuckle
(A) onto the lower arm (B). Be careful not to damage
the ball joint boot (C). Wipe off the grease before
tightening the nut at the ball joint. Torque a new castle
nut (D) to the lower torque specification, then tighten
it only far enough t o align the slot w i t h the ball joint
pin hole.
NOTE:
Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged or
cracked.
Do not align the nut by loosening it.
B
A
7. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B) on
the knuckle.
9. Install the lock pin (E) into the ball joint pin hole as
shown.
10. Install the brake hose m o u n t i n g bolt (A).
(cont'd)
16-19
Driveline/Axle
(cont'd)
11. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
surface of a new spindle nut (A).
A
26 x 1.5 mm
328 N m
(33.5 k g f m , 242 Ibfft)
Replace.
Intermediate Shaft Removal

1. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
plug w i t h a new sealing washer (see page 14-209).
2. Remove the right front driveshaft (see page 16-4).
3. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 37 on page 14-223).
4. Remove the exhaust pipe bracket (A).
12. Install the spindle nut, then tighten it. After tightening,
use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder (B) against
the driveshaft.
13. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake discs and the
wheels, then install the front wheels.
5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and t w o dowel bolts (B).
14. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there is
no interference between the driveshaft and the
surrounding parts.
16. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended
transmission fluid (see page 14-209).
(see page 18-5).
B
6. Remove the intermediate shaft (C) f r o m the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damaging
the oil seal (D), then remove the set ring (E) f r o m the
intermediate shaft.
16-20
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly

Support Base Attachment 07LAF-SM40300
A t t a c h m e n t 42 x 47 m m 07746-0010300
Driver 07749-0010000
Support Base 07965-SD90100
1. Remove the heat shield (A) f r o m the intermediate
shaft (B).
3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the

intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the support base
attachment (C), the support base (D), and a press. Be
careful not to damage the bearing support ring (E) on
the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
PRESS
07965-SD90100
2. Remove the outer seal (A) and the external snap ring
(B) f r o m the intermediate shaft (C).
4. Remove the internal snap ring (A) f r o m the bearing

support (B).
(cont'd)
16-21
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
bearing support (B) using the support base
attachment (C), the support base (D), the driver (E),
the 42 x 47 m m attachment (F), and a press.
07749-0010000
F
07746-0010300
o)
07965-SD90100
16-22
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly

Exploded View
DOWEL B O L T S
Pack the interior

of the outer seal.
(cont'd)
16-23
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07JAD-PH80101
Attachment, 40 x 50 m m 07LAD-PW50601
Support Base Attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Driver 07749-0010000
Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 m m 07947-4630100
Support Base 07965-SD90100
this procedure.
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft bearing

(B) using the 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 m m fork seal driver (C),
and a press.
*3
PRESS I g
1. Clean the disassembled parts w i t h solvent, and dry

t h e m w i t h compressed air.
2. Press a new intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (B) using the driver (C), the oil seal
driver attachment (D), and a press.
PRESS
5. Install the external snap ring (A) into the groove of the
intermediate shaft (B).
A
3. Install the internal snap ring (A) into the groove (B) of
the bearing support.
16-24
<3
6. Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support
(B) using the 40 x 50 m m attachment (C), the support
base attachment (D), the support base (E), and a
press. Press the seal until it is 0 0 . 2 m m (00.008 in)
below the surface of the bearing support end.
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft contacts

the differential thoroughly w i t h solvent, and dry them
the intermediate shaft (C).
D
7. Install the heat shield (A).

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
3. Insert the intermediate shaft into the differential

correctly.
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft carefully to
prevent damaging the oil seal (D).
4. Install the flange bolt (E) and the t w o dowel bolts (F).
(cont'd)
16-25
Driveline/Axle
(cont'd)
Rear Driveshaft Removal
5. Install the exhaust pipe bracket (A).

Driveshaft Remover 07AAD-S9VA000
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 m m 07AAF-SDAA100
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the brake hose, sensor,
and harness.
3. Pry up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B), then
remove the nut.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
6. Install exhaust pipe A (see step 47 on page 14-237).

7. Install the right front driveshaft (see page 16-18).
8. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended
transmission fluid (see page 14-209).
(see page 18-5).
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor (A) and harness

stay |B>.
16-26
5. Remove the lock pin (A) f r o m the upper arm ball joint,
and remove the castle nut (B).
8. Place a transmission jack under lower arm B, and

remove the flange bolt (A).
07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A202
6. Separate the ball joint f r o m the upper arm (C) using

the 12 m m ball joint thread protector and the 28 m m
ball joint remover (see page 18-12).
9. Pull the knuckle outward, and separate the driveshaft

outboard joint f r o m the rear hub using a plastic
hammer.
NOTE:
Do not force or hammer on the upper a r m , or pry
between the upper arm and the knuckle. You could
7. Remove the self-locking nut (B), the washer (C), and
the flange bolt (D), then remove lower arm A.
(cont'd)
16-27
Driveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
10. Using the driveshaft remover (A) pry out the inboard
joint (B) f r o m the rear differential (C).
NOTE: This is a prying tool, do not strike it w i t h a
hammer.
11. Remove the rear driveshaft (A).

NOTE: W h e n removing the outboard joint, continue
supporting both the knuckle and the lower arm w i t h
the transmission jack. Make sure not to over extend
the brake hose.
16-28
12. Remove the set ring (A) f r o m the rear differential.
3
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly
Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 m m 07XAC-001020A
Slide Hammer 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
2. Remove the circlip (A).

B
Inboard Joint Side

boot.
If the boot band is a double loop type (A), lift up the
band end (B), and push it into the clip (C).
Ifthe boot band is a low profile type (D), pinch the
pliers (E).
Double loop type
B
3. Make marks (B) on the bearing retainer (C) and the

inboard joint (D) to identify the locations of the
bearing retainer to the grooves in the inboard joint.
Then remove the inboard joint on a clean shop towel
(E). Be careful not to drop the steel balls w h e n
separating them f r o m the inboard joint.
4. Remove the snap ring (A).
F
Low profile type

A
5. Make marks (B) on the bearing retainer (C), the

bearing race (D), and the driveshaft (E) to identify the
position of the bearing retainer and the bearing race
on the shaft.
6. Remove the bearing race and the steel balls (F).
(cont'd)
16-29
Driveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft (A) with vinyl tape
(B) to prevent damaging the boot.
Outboard Joint Side

boot.
If the boot band is a low profile type (A), pinch the
pliers (B).
If the boot band is an ear clamp type (C), lift up the
three tabs (D) with a screwdriver.
Low profile type
8. Remove the inboard boot (C). Be careful not to

damage the boot.
Ear clamp type
16-30
0
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with a

shop t o w e l .
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 24 x 1.5 m m
threaded adapter (B) and a commercially available
5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (C).
07XAC-001020A
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the

outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same level
as the outboard joint end (C).
7. Remove the driveshaft f r o m the bench vise.

8. Remove the stop ring (A) f r o m the driveshaft.
(cont'd)
16-31
Driveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
9. W r a p the splines on the driveshaft w i t h vinyl tape (A)
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
16-32
<3
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
D O U B L E LOOP BANDS
(Replacement parts only)
Replace.
INBOARD JOINT
EAR CLAMP BAND

Replace.
Use the grease Included

(cont'd)
16-33
Driveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Boot Band Tool KD-3191 or equivalent commercially
available
Seal Clamp Tool Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease included in

the new inboard boot set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 8 5 1 0 5 g (3.03.7 oz)

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side

damaging the inboard boot.
7. Install the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by aligning

the marks (A) y o u made on the inboard joint and the
bearing retainer.
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then

remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. Assemble the steel balls (A), the bearing retainer (B),
and the bearing race (C) by aligning the marks (D) you
made on the bearing retainer and the bearing race.
A
8. Install a new circlip (B) into the inboard joint groove.
4. Install the bearing onto the driveshaft (E) by aligning

the marks you made on the bearing and the
driveshaft. Be careful not to drop the steel balls w h e n
installing the bearing onto the driveshaft.
5. Install the snap ring (F).
16-34
inboard joint (C).
12. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard
joint, then install a new double loop band (A) onto the
boot(B).
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
forward rotation of the driveshaft.
10. Adjust the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure as

s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway between full
compression and full extension. Bleed excess air f r o m
the boots by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver
between the boot and the joint.
13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

14. Mark position (A) on the band 1014 m m (0.40.6 in)
f r o m the clip (B).
Left driveshaft: 611.4-616.4 mm (24.07-24.27 in)

A
11. Install new boot bands:

For the double loop type, go to step 12.
For the low profile type, go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
16-35
Driveline/Axle
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. Unwind the boot band t o o l , and cut off the excess free
end of the band to leave a 510 m m (0.20.4 in) tail
protruding f r o m the clip.
16. Using a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot

band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot (C)
on the band meets the edge of the clip.
17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the
band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the clip,
then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n using a

hammer.
NOTE:
Make sure the band and the clip do not interfere
w i t h anything, and the band does not move.
Clean any grease remaining on the surrounding
surfaces.
A
20. Repeat steps 12 through 19 for the band on the other

end of the boot.
16-36
SJ0
2 1 . Install a new l o w profile band (A) onto the boot (B),
Outboard Joint Side

damaging the outboard boot.

hook the tabs (B) of the band.
2. Install a new ear clamp bands (B) and the outboard

boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot.
3. Make sure to check the size of a new stop ring.
INQTICEl
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, make sure
y o u install a new stop ring.
Stop Ring Specifications
Overall diameter (A):
Wire diameter (B):
28.0 mm (1.10 in)

1.8 mm (0.07 in)
23. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and
repeat steps 21 and 22.
(cont'd)
16-37
Driveline/Axle
4. Install the stop ring (A) into the driveshaft groove (B).
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)

until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint.
5. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) grease included in the new

outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
outboard joint.
NOTE: If y o u are installing a new outboard joint, the
grease is already installed.
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the

driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit the assembly onto
a hard surface f r o m a height of about 10 c m (4 in).
NOTE: Do not use a hammer, as excessive force may
damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the
threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
16-38
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) y o u made

with the outboard joint end (B).
NOTICE
10. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C). Bleed any excess air f r o m the boot
by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver between the
boot and the joint.
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, the shaft

must be all the w a y into the outboard joint to ensure
the stop ring is properly seated.
11. Inspect the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure

as s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension.
Left driveshaft:
611.4-616.4 mm (24.07-24.27 in)
Right driveshaft: 640.4-645.4 mm (25.21 - 2 5 . 4 1 in)
9. Pack the outboard joint (A) w i t h the remaining joint
grease included in the new joint boot set.
Total grease quantity
Outboard joint: 80100 g (2.83.5 oz)

(cont'd)
16-39
Driveline/Axle
12. Close the ear portion (A) of the band using a
commercially available seal clamp tool (Kent- Moore
J-35910 or equivalent) (B).
13. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of

the band. If the clearance is not within the standard,
close the ear portion of the band tighter.
6.0 mm
1 . 0 - 4 . 0 m m (0.04-0.16 in)
16-40
14. Install a new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B),

hook the tabs (B) of the band.
Rear Driveshaft Installation

NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the mating
surfaces of the joint and the splined section are clean.
1. Apply 1 . 5 - 2 . 0 g ( 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 0 7 oz) of super high t e m p
urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the whole splined
surface (A). After applying grease, remove the grease
f r o m the splined grooves at intervals of 23 splines
and f r o m the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed
f r o m the differential.
4. Make sure the inboard joint (A) is installed all the way
into the rear differential (B) and to ensure the stop ring
(C) is properly seated.
5. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, and insert the outboard

joint (B) into the rear hub.
B
2. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove of the
differential.
NOTE: When installing the outboard joint continue

supporting both the knuckle and the lower arm with
the transmission jack. Make sure not to over e
the brake hose.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly w i t h solvent, and dry t h e m
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
(cont'd)
16-41
Driveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft installation (cont'd)
6. L o o s e l y install a n e w f l a n g e bolt (A) onto l o w e r a r m B.
8. W i p e off a n y g r e a s e c o n t a m i n a t i o n f r o m t h e ball joint

t a p e r e d s e c t i o n a n d t h r e a d s , t h e n install t h e u p p e r
a r m (A). B e careful not to d a m a g e t h e ball joint boot
(B). W i p e off the g r e a s e before tightening the c a s t l e
nut at t h e ball joint.
A
14 x 1.5 mm
113 N m
(11.5 k g f m ,
83 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
59-69 Nm
(6.0-7.0 kgfm,
4 3 - 5 1 Ibfft)
7. Install l o w e r a r m A , t h e n l o o s e l y install a n e w f l a n g e
bolt (B) a n d a n e w s e l f - l o c k i n g nut (C) w i t h the w a s h e r
(D).
B
14 x 1.5 m m
93 N m
(9.5 k g f m ,
69 Ibfft)
Replace.
9. T o r q u e t h e c a s t l e nut (C) to t h e l o w e r t o r q u e
s p e c i f i c a t i o n , t h e n tighten it o n l y far e n o u g h to align
the slot w i t h the ball joint pin hole. Install t h e lock pin
(D) into t h e ball joint pin h o l e a s s h o w n .
NOTE:
M a k e s u r e t h e ball j o i n t boot is not d a m a g e d or
C
14 x 1.5 m m
113 N m
(11.5 k g f m ,
83 Ibfft)
Replace.
cracked.
Do not align t h e nut by l o o s e n i n g it.
10. Install the r e a r w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r (A) a n d h a r n e s s
s t a y (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
16-42
Propeller Shaft Inspection

11. Place a floor jack under the lower a r m , and raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
Universal Joint and Boots

12. Tighten the lower arm B flange bolt, the lower arm A
self-locking nut, and the lower arm A mounting bolt to
the specified torque values, then remove the floor
jack.
13. A p p l y a small amount of engine oil to the seating
surface of a new spindle nut (A).
2. Shift the transmission to N.

3. Release the parking brake.
4. Check the center support bearing (A) for excessive
play or noise. If the center support has excessive play
or noise, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
A
24 x 1.5 mm
245 N m
(25.0 k g f m , 181 Ibfft)
14. Install the spindle nut, then tighten it. After tightening,
use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder (B) against
the driveshaft.
15. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
w h e e l , then install the rear wheels.
5. Check the rubber portion of the m o u n t (B) for damage

and deterioration. If the rubber portion is damaged or
deteriorated, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
6. Check the universal joints for excessive play or noise.
If the universal joints have excessive play or noise,
replace the propeller shaft assembly.
16. Turn the rear wheel by hand, and make sure there is
no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
(see page 18-5).
(cont'd)
16-43
Driveline/Axle
Propeller Shaft Inspection (cont'd)
Propeller Shaft Removal
Propeller Shaft Runout
2. Remove the propeller shaft protector.
2. Shift the transmission to N.

4. Install a dial indicator w i t h its needle on the center of
the No. 1 propeller shaft or the No. 2 propeller shaft.
5. Turn the other propeller shaft slowly and check the
runout. Repeat this procedure for the other propeller
shaft.
No. 1 Propeller Shaft Runout
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the No. 1 propeller

shaft (B) and transfer companion flange (C).
No. 2 Propeller Shaft Runout

4. Remove the flange bolts (D).
6. Ifthe runout on either propeller shaft exceeds the

service limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
16-44
Propeller Shaft Installation

5. Remove the center support bearing mounting bolts.
1. If you are installing a new propeller shaft, go to step 2.

If you are reinstalling the original propeller shaft, go
to step 3.
2. Install a new propeller shaft (A) onto the rear
differential (B), by aligning the reference mark (C) on
the new propeller shaft with the factory reference
mark (D) on the companion flange (E). Do not use the
marks you made on the companion f r o m the removal
procedure. If there are no factory marks on the
companion flange, go to step 4.
B
6, Make a reference mark (A) across the No. 2 propeller

shaft (B) and the rear differential companion flange
(C).
3. Reinstall the No. 2 propeller shaft (A) to the rear

differential (B) by aligning the reference marks (C) y o u
made during the removal procedure.
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N m
(7.3 k g f m , 53 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Remove the flange bolts (D).
4. Attach the No. 2 propeller shaft to the rear differential

w i t h new mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
(cont'd)
16-45
Driveline/Axle
Propeller Shaft Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the center support bearing mounting bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N-m (4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
6. Install the No. 1 propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer

(C). Make sure y o u use new mounting bolts.
10x1.25 mm
72 N m (7.3 k g f m , 53 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Install the propeller shaft protector.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m ( 2 . 2 k g f m , 16Ibfft)
8. If you installed a new propeller shaft, test-drive the

vehicle at 55 m p h (88 km/h) and check for noise or
vibration.
If there is no noise or vibration, the repair is
complete.
If there is a noise or vibration, go t o step 9.
9. Remove the mounting bolts f r o m the propeller shaft
at the rear differential companion flange. Note the
current alignment of the propeller shaft t o the rear
differential companion flange.
10. Rotate the propeller shaft 180 degrees f r o m its current
alignment w i t h the rear differential companion flange.
11. Install new mounting bolts and tighten them to the
specified torque.
16-46
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under

license from America Honda Motor Co., Inc. License Agreement AH220 ."
INTRODUCTION
General Inforr
r - How to Use This Manual

T h i s manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s printed at
the top corner of each page c a n also be used a s a quick reference
system.
Specifications
Maintenance
E a c h section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded v i e w index s h o w i n g :
Parts d i s a s s e m b l y s e q u e n c e .
Engine Electrical
Bolt torques and thread sizes.

Page references to descriptions in text.
2. D i s a s s e m b l y / a s s e m b l y procedures and tools.
Engine Mechanical
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
Engine Cooling
Safety Messages
Y o u r safety, and the safety of others, is very important. T o help
you make informed decisions, w e have provided safety
m e s s a g e s , and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. Y o u must use
your own good judgment.
Fuel and Emissions

*Transaxle
Y o u will find important safety information in a variety of forms

including:
^Steering
Safety L a b e l s on the vehicle.

Safety M e s s a g e s preceded by a safety alert symbol ^
and
one of three signal w o r d s , D A N G E R , W A R N I N G , or C A U T I O N .

T h e s e signal w o r d s mean:
ADANGER
AWARNING
A CAUTION
Y o u W I L L be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
Y o u C A N be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
Y o u C A N be H U R T if y o u don't follow
instructions.
Suspension(lncluding
TPMS)
*Brakes(lncluding VSA)
Instructions how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. W e reserve
the right to make c h a n g e s at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
s y s t e m , or transmitted, in any form by any m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables.
A s you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOTICE [ s y m b o l . The purpose of this m e s s a g e is to
help prevent d a m a g e to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition 04/2009
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
*Heating, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
Body Electrical
Audio, Navigation, and
Telematics
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

Service Publication Office
*Restraints
As sections with * include S R S components;

special precautions are required when servicing.
marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 1.
2009-10 Pilot Vol.2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If steering maintenance is required)

Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
Steering
Steering
Special Tools
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check
Power Assist Check
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
* Steering Wheel Removal
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
* Steering Wheel Installation
* Steering Column Removal and Installation
Steering Column Inspection
Steering Lock Replacement
Rack Guide Adjustment
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
17-2
.. .17-4
17-5
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-9
17-10
17-14
17-16
17-17
17-18
17-19
Hydraulic Power Steering Components

Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 .
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101
Fluid Leakage Inspection
Fluid Replacement
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch
Replacement
Pump Outlet Hose/Inlet Line Replacement
Pump Replacement
Pump Overhaul
Steering Gearbox Removal
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Steering Gearbox Installation
17-20
17-21
17-23
17-24
17-26
17-27
17-28
17-29
17-30
17-31
17-33
17-39
17-46
17-62
Steering
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
070AG-SJAA10S
07406-0010001
07406-001000A or 07406-001A101
07746-0030300
07749-0010000
07946-1870100
07965-SA50500
07AAF-SDAA100
07HAG-SF10200 or 07HAG-SF1020A
07JAD-PL9A100
07MAA-SL00100,07916-SA50001, or
07AAA-TL2A100
07MAC-SL0A202
07NAG-SR3090A
07RAK-S040122
07TAF-SZ50100
07VAK-P8A011A
07VAK-P8A012B
07XAG-S0K0200
07YAG-S2X0100
07ZAB-S5A0100
07ZAG-S5A0100
Description
P/S Pressure Gauge
P/S Pressure Gauge
Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 m m
Bearing Driver Attachment, 28 x 30
Bearing Driver Attachment, 36
Sizing Tool, 42
Oil Seal Driver, 65
Locknut Wrench, 40 m m
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool
Hose Joint Adapter
Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment
P/S Joint Adapter (Pump)
P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump)
Seal Ring Guide, 22 x 44
Sleeve Seal Guide, 35.9 x 37
Pulley Holder
Sizing Tool, 36
17-2
17-3
Steering
STEERING W H E E L
POWER STEERING G E A R B O X
Rack Guide Adjustment page 17-17
Tie-rod end Ball Joint Boot Replacement page 17-18
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement page 17-19
17-4
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Steering Wheel Rotational Play

Check
Power Assist Check
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment

tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
2. Measure h o w far you can turn the steering wheel left

and right without moving the front wheels.
If the play is within the limit, the steering gearbox
and the steering linkages are OK.
If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-17). Ifthe play is still excessive after
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering linkage
and steering gearbox (see page 17-6).
Rotational play:
010 mm (0.00.4 in)
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-17).

2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering wheel
f r o m lock to lock several times to w a r m up the fluid.
3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
steering wheel. W i t h the engine idling and the vehicle
on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as shown and read
it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Ifthe scale reads no more than the specification, the
steering gearbox and p u m p are OK.
Ifthe scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-23).
Initial turning load: 29N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
17-5
Steering
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
STEERING COLUMN
Inspect for loose
mounting hardware.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration,
S T E E R I N G JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolt
or faulty movement.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT

Inspect for faulty movement
and damage.
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect for loose mounting hardware.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT BOOT

Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
G E A R B O X MOUNTING CUSHIONS
Inspect for deterioration.
TIE-ROD END LOCKNUT
Check for loose locknut.
17-6
Steering Wheel Removal

SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-19) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21) before
doing repairs or service.
page 22-94).
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove
the driver's airbag f r o m the steering wheel (see page
24-170).
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A).
5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller

(A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel
f r o m the steering column shaft by turning the
pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
Note these items when removing the steering wheel:
Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub
more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable
reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of
j a m nuts five threads up on each puller bolt.
4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B) three turns.
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel bolt and steering wheel f r o m the
steering column.
17-7
Steering
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
A : Screw, 3
B : Screw, 9 C : Screw, 4 D : Screw, 6 E : Screw, 2
COVER
17-8
Steering Wheel Installation

1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the
front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then center
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point straight
up.
3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to the

specified torque. Connect the cable reel subharness
connector (B). Make sure the wire harness is routed
and fastened properly.
A
39 N-m
(4.0 kgf m,
29 Ibfft)
4. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-170).
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling

sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering wheel on to
the steering column shaft, making sure the steering
wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel
and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not
tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft
when installing the steering wheel.

page 22-94), and do these tasks:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off.
Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
properly.
Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
6. After installation, check the steering wheel spoke
angle. Ifthe steering spoke angles to the right and left
are not equal (steering wheel is not centered), correct
the engagement of the wheel/column shaft splines.
17-9
Steering
S t e e r i n g C o l u m n
R e m o v a l
a n dI n s t a l l a t i o n

9. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a

piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
lower slide shaft and joint yoke (D) of the upper shaft
to prevent the lower slide shaft f r o m pulling out.
Removal
1. Adjust the steering column to full tilt up position, and
to the full telescopic in position.
page 22-94).
3. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-170) and the
steering wheel (see page 17-7).
4. Remove the column covers (see page 20-130).
5. Remove the footrest (see page 20-112).
6. Remove the center console t r i m (see page 20-115).
7. Pull back the carpet (A).
10. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column
to the full telescopic out position, then tighten the lock
lever.
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever when removing
the steering column f r o m the frame.
11. Remove the steering joint bolt (A). Disconnect the
steering joint (B) by sliding the steering joint into the
column. Do not disconnect the steering joint f r o m the
column shaft (C).
NOTE:
Ifthe center guide (D) is in place and has not moved,
leave it in place.
Ifthe center guide has come off, discard it.
8. Remove the steering joint cover (B).
17-10
12. Disconnect the wire harness connectors f r o m the combination switch assembly/cable reel (A).
8 x 1.25 mm
16 N m (1.6 k g f m , 12 Ibfft)
13. Remove the combination switch assembly/cable reel f r o m the steering column shaft by removing the three screws
(B).
14. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips f r o m the steering column.
15. Make sure that the lock lever (C) is in the locked position. Remove the steering column (D) by removing the attaching
nuts and bolts, and carefully guide it out of the dashboard. If the lower slide shaft (E) is removed, slip it into the upper
shaft (F) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (G).
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever until the steering column is installed. Ifthe lock lever is released beforehand,
adjust the steering column (see step 6 on page 17-15) after installation.
(cont'd)
17-11
Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint w i t h the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint
bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
Installation
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by
any parts.
Tighten the three screws (A) in the sequence
shown.
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.

3. Cut the wire (A), and slip the lower end of the steering
joint (B) onto the pinion shaft (C).
NOTE:
Pinion shaft with center guide; install the steering
joint by aligning the center guide.
Pinion shaft without center guide; position the
steering column by aligning the gap (D) w i t h the
angle.
17-12
5. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the joint bolt
6. Install the s t e e r i n g joint c o v e r ( A ) .
12. Do the battery t e r m i n a l r e c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e ( s e e

A
T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d c h e c k that

the S R S indicator c o m e s o n for a b o u t 6 s e c o n d s ,
a n d t h e n g o e s off.
M a k e s u r e the h o r n a n d turn s i g n a l s w i t c h e s w o r k
properly.
M a k e s u r e the s t e e r i n g w h e e l s w i t c h e s w o r k
properly.
13. After installation, d o t h e s e c h e c k s :
C h e c k the s t e e r i n g w h e e l s p o k e a n g l e . Ifthe
s t e e r i n g s p o k e a n g l e s to the right a n d left a r e not
e q u a l (steering w h e e l a n d rack a r e not c e n t e r e d ) ,
c o r r e c t the e n g a g e m e n t of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
7. S e t the c a r p e t in p l a c e ( B ) .
8. Install the c e n t e r c o n s o l e trim ( s e e p a g e 20-115).
S e t the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n to the c e n t e r tilt p o s i t i o n ,

a n d to the c e n t e r t e l e s c o p i c p o s i t i o n , t h e n do the
front toe i n s p e c t i o n ( s e e p a g e 18-5).
9. Install the footrest ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 1 2 ) .

10. Install the s t e e r i n g w h e e l ( s e e p a g e 17-9), a n d the
d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e 24-170).
11. Install t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r s ( s e e p a g e 20-130).
17-13
Steering
Inspection
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-10).
2. Do these checks:
Check the steering c o l u m n ball bearing (A) and the steering joint (B) for play and proper movement. If any bearing
is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the sliding capsules (C) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering
column as an assembly.
Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism for movement and damage.
3. Install the steering column (see page 17-10).
17-14
Check of Tilting Force
Check of Telescoping Force
1. S e t the s t e e r i n g w h e e l in the straight a h e a d driving

position, a n d l o o s e n the lock lever fully.
1. S e t the s t e e r i n g w h e e l in the straight a h e a d driving

p o s i t i o n , a n d l o o s e n the lock lever fully.
2. Attach the s p r i n g s c a l e to the h i g h e s t point of the

s t e e r i n g w h e e l , a n d tilt the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n to the
l o w e s t position.
2. Attach the s p r i n g s c a l e (A) to the c e n t e r point of the

steering w h e e l a s s h o w n .
3. Pull t h e s p r i n g s c a l e straight u p , a n d r e a d the f o r c e
3. Pull the s p r i n g s c a l e , a n d read the f o r c e r e q u i r e d to
r e q u i r e d to m o v e the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n .
4. A t t a c h the s p r i n g s c a l e to the l o w e s t point of the
steering wheel.
5. Pull the s p r i n g s c a l e straight d o w n , a n d r e a d the f o r c e
r e q u i r e d to m o v e the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n .
m o v e the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n during t e l e s c o p i n g .
Telescoping force:
Standard: 100 N (10.2 kgf, 22.5 Ibf) max.
4. I f t h e m e a s u r e m e n t is higher t h a n s p e c i f i e d , r e p l a c e
the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n a s a n a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 17-10).
Tilting force (upward/downward):

Standard: 70 N (7.1 kgf, 16 Ibf) max.
6. I f t h e m e a s u r e m e n t is h i g h e r t h a n s p e c i f i e d , or i f t h e
tilt function f e e l s r o u g h , d o the f o l l o w i n g :
L o o s e n the attaching nuts s o t h e y are finger tight.
R e l e a s e the lock lever, a n d tilt a n d t e l e s c o p e the
steering c o l u m n several times.
Tilt the c o l u m n d o w n , t h e n tighten the lock lever.
T o r q u e the u p p e r n u t s , t h e n t o r q u e the l o w e r bolts.
7. T e s t the tilting f o r c e a g a i n . If it is still h i g h e r t h a n the
s p e c i f i c a t i o n , r e p l a c e the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n a s an
a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 17-10).
(cont'd)
17-15
Steering
(cont'd)
Steering Lock Replacement
Check of Lock Lever Force
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-10).
1. Move the lock lever (A) f r o m the loosened position to

the locked position three to five times, then release
the lock lever. Adjust the steering column to the
center tilt position and also to the full telescopic out
position, and hold the steering wheel.
2. Center-punch both of the shear bolts, and drill their

heads off with a 5 m m (3/16 in) drill bit. Be careful not
to damage the switch body w h e n removing the shear
bolts.
3. Remove the shear bolts f r o m the switch body.

4. Install the switch body w i t h o u t the key inserted.
A
2. Using a commercially available push-pull gauge,

push up the lock lever 10 m m (0.39 in) in f r o m its end,
and measure the force required to move the lock
lever.
Lock lever force:
5 0 - 7 0 N (5.1-7.1 kgf, 1 1 - 1 6 Ibf) min.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.

6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation
of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key
turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
3. Ifthe measurement is higher than specified, replace

the steering column as an assembly (see page 17-10).
8. Rewrite the new immobilizer control unit-receiver

(see page 22-455), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
9. Install the steering column (see page 17-10).
17-16
Rack Guide Adjustment

Locknut Wrench, 40 m m 07MAA-SL00100,
07916-SA500Q1, or 07AAA-TL2A100
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N-m

(2.5 k g f m , 18 Ibfft), then loosen it.
155
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m

(0.4 k g f m , 3 Ibfft), then back it off to the specified
angle.
3. Remove the old sealant f r o m the rack guide screw (A),
and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
5699) to the middle of the threads (B). Loosely install
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
Specified return angle:
15 5
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary w i t h a wrench,

and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully seated.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B), and hold
the rack guide screw stationary w i t h a wrench.
Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see page
17-5) and the power assist (see page 17-5).
17-17
Steering
Tie-rod End Bail Joint Boot Replacement
Bearing Driver Attachment, 36 07965-SA50500
1. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint f r o m the knuckle (see
step 18 o n page 17-40).
6. Install the new tie-rod end ball joint boot (A) using the
bearing driver attachment. The boot must not have a
gap at the boot installation sections (B). After
installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section
for grease contamination, and w i p e it if necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end f r o m the rack end.

3. Remove the ball joint boot f r o m the tie-rod end, and
w i p e the old grease off the ball pin.
07965-SA50500
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) w i t h fresh

multipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.

8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see step
37 on page 17-67).
(see page 18-5).
5. Pack the interior of the new tie-rod ball joint boot (B)
and lip (C) w i t h fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items w h e n installing new grease:
Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the
tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to
enter the boot.
17-18
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement

1. R e m o v e the s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x ( s e e p a g e 17-39).
2. Position a 36 m m s o c k e t (A) on the f l a n g e part of the
g e a r b o x h o u s i n g with a w a s h e r (B), a 10 x 105 m m
f l a n g e bolt (C), a n d a 10 m m nut (D) a s s h o w n .
3. Hold the f l a n g e bolt with a w r e n c h , a n d tighten the nut

with a w r e n c h . R e m o v e the g e a r b o x m o u n t
c u s h i o n (E).
4. A p p l y a mild s o a p a n d w a t e r solution to the n e w

g e a r b o x m o u n t c u s h i o n s u r f a c e (A), t h e n p l a c e it on
the g e a r b o x m o u n t i n g c u s h i o n hole.
5. Position a 36 m m s o c k e t o n the f l a n g e part of the

g e a r b o x h o u s i n g with a w a s h e r , a f l a n g e bolt, a n d a
nut a s s h o w n .
6. Install the g e a r b o x m o u n t c u s h i o n by tightening the
nut until the m o u n t c u s h i o n e d g e s (B) c o n t a c t the
gearbox flange surface.
7. Install the s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x ( s e e p a g e 17-62).
17-19

Component Location index
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

Fluid Replacement, page 17-28
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-29
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Removal, page 17-39
Overhaul, page 17-46
17-20

Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom
Procedure(s)
Also check for
Hard steering
Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-23).
Modified suspension
Damaged suspension
Incorrect tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air pressure
Assist (excessively light

steering at high speed)
Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-17).
Front wheel alignment (see

page 18-5)
Shock or vibration when

the steering wheel is
turned to full lock
1. Check the drive belt for slippage (see page 4-30).

2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with T/N 07406- 0010001 (see
page 17-24), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-26).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-17).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-46).
Steering wheel will not

return smoothly
1. Check cylinder lines for deformation (see page 17-29).

2. Check the ball joints for binding.
3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Uneven or rough
steering
1. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to possible leaks in
system (see page 17-28).
2. Check the drive belt (see page 4-30).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-325).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to air entering the inlet side of
the pump.
Steering wheel kicks

back during wide turns
1. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to possible leaks in
the system (see page 17-28).
2. Check the drive belt (see page 4-30).
3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with T/N 07406- 0010001 (see
page 17-24), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-26).
Humming noise from the

power steering system
1. Check when the noise occurs:

If the noise is heard during the first 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in
cold weather, this is normal.
If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle stopped, this
is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on the inlet side of the
pump.
3. Check for particle contamination of fluid and a restricted filter in the reservoir.
4. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
5. Check for automatic transmission torque converter noise.
Power steering rack rattle

or chattering
1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints). Tighten or
replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering column wobbles,
replace the steering column assembly (see page 17-10).
3. Check the power steering pump pulley:
Ifthe pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 33 on page 17-38).
If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-31).
Damaged suspension
Pump pressure
Fluid contamination
- Restriction in the
high-pressure line
- Restriction in the
low-pressure line
(cont'd)
17-21

Symptom
Procedure(s)
Hissing from the power

steering system/foaming
fluid
Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level, and check for
leaks (see page 17-28).
Check the reservoir for leaks.
Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into the suction
side of the system (see page 17-29).
Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Air in the P/S fluid

Fluid contamination
Noise from the power

steering pump
Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to another like

vehicle (pump noise during the first 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in cold
weather is normal).
Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page 17-31).
P/S pump pressure

Air in the P/S fluid
Squeaking from the

power steering pump
Check the drive belt (see page 4-30).
Fluid leaks from the

steering gearbox
Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit. Overhaul the valve body unit
(see page 17-46).
Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal on the pinion
shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox side (see page 17-46).
Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder end seal on the
cylinder side (see page 17-46).
Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt. Overhaul the
valve body unit (see page 17-46).
Fluid leaks from the steering damping valve covers on the valve body unit.
Overhaul the valve housing (see page 17-46).
Fluid contamination

power steering line
Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts). Tighten the
connection, and retest (see page 17-29).
Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line(s). Replace the cylinder line(s) (see
page 17-29).
Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the valve body
unit (flare nuts). Tighten the fitting, and retest. If it still leaks, replace the hose,
the line (see page 17-29), or valve body unit (see page 17-46) as necessary.
Fluid contamination

power steering pump
Fluid leaks from the pump seal. Replace the pump seal (see page 17-33).
Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing. Replace the leaking O-rings
or seals (see page 17-33), and if necessary replace the power steering pump
(see page 17-31).
Fluid contamination

power steering reservoir
Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because fluid level is too high. Drain
the reservoir to the proper level (see page 17-28). Ifthe fluid is foaming, check
for an air leak on the inlet side of the pump.
Fluid leaks from the reservoir. Check the reservoir for cracks, and replace as
necessary.
Fluid contamination

power steering pump
outlet hose
(high-pressure)
Check the fitting for loose bolts. Ifthe bolts are tight, replace the fitting O-ring
(see page 17-33).
Fluid leaks at the swagged joint. Replace the pump outlet hose (see page 17-29).
Fluid contamination

power steering pump
inlet hose (low-pressure)
Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly (see page
17-29). Replace or repair as necessary.
Fluid contamination
17-22
Also check for
Hard Steering
5. Using a spring scale, measure the power assist in

both directions, to the left and to the right.
NOTE:
Compare to a known-good vehicle that is the same
t r i m level.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N

(0.51 kgf, 1.12 Ibf) of each other?
Check for suspension damage.
Check the steering alignment.
NO-Gotostep11.
Check the tire condition and pressure.

1. Check the power assist (see page 17-5).
Is the initial turning load more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)?
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure gauge

valves open (if so equipped), while turning the
steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure 8,924-9,414 kPa (91-96

1,365 psi) or more in both directions?
NO-Power assist is OK at this time. Compare to a

known-good v e h i c l e .
2. Connect the P/S joint adapter (pump), P/S joint

adapter (hose), and P/S pressure gauge T/N 074060010001 (see page 17-24), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101 (see page 17-26) to the pump.
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure f r o m the p u m p at
NO-Faulty steering gearbox. Overhaul the steering

gearbox (see page 17-46).B
7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-17), and retest.
Is the steering OK?
YES-Repair is c o m p l e t e d .
idle.
Is the pressure
kgf/cm ,1,294
1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm , 213 psi) or less?
8. Check the outlet and return hoses and the lines

between the p u m p and the steering gearbox for
clogging and deformation.
4. Measure the p u m p relief pressure at idle.
Is the pressure 8,924-9,414 kPa (91 -96 kgf/cm ,
1,365 psi) or more?
2
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Faulty steering gearbox. Overhaul the steering

gearbox (see page 1 7 - 4 6 ) .
1,294
Are the lines clogged or
deformed?
YES-Repair or replace the lines.H

NO-Faulty valve body unit. Overhaul the steering
gearbox (see page 17-46).H
(cont'd)
17-23

Pump Pressure Test with T/N

07406-0010001
9. Disassemble the p u m p (see page 17-33).
Is the fbw control valve OK?
Hose Joint Adapter 07RAK-S040122

. P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
. P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S Pressure Gauge 07406-0010001
YES-Faulty p u m p assembly. Replace the p u m p

assembly (see page 17-3D.H
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or steering gearbox.
NO-Faulty f l o w control valve. Replace the p u m p

assembly (see page 17-31).H
10. Check the f l o w control valve for smooth movement

and leaks (see step 13 on page 17-35).
11. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page

17-27).
Are any of the line(s)
deformed?
2. Disconnect the p u m p outlet hose (A) f r o m the p u m p

outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering
fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S
joint adapter (pump) on the p u m p outlet (B) with the
P/S joint adapter plate.
YES-Replace the deformed line(s).H

NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack guide
(too tight).
07406-0010001
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 k g f m ,
8.0 Ibfft)
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted too tight?
YES-Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack guide
preload.
NO-Faulty valve body unit. Overhaul the steering
gearbox (see page 17-46).H
07RAK-S040122
07VAK-P8A011A
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N m
(1.1 k g f m ,
8.0 Ibf ft)
07VAK-P8A012B
3. Connect the hose joint adapter to the P/S pressure

gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose to the hose
joint adapter.
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter
(pump).
17-24
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the p u m p

is in good condition, the gauge should read at least
8,924-9,414 kPa (91 - 9 6 k g f / c m , 1 , 2 9 4 - 1 , 3 6 5 psi). A
low reading means the p u m p output is too low for full
assist. Repair or replace the pump.
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).

8. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock to lock several
times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature at
158F(70C).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. I f t h e p u m p is in good condition, the gauge
should read no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm ,
213 psi).
2
I f t h e reading is low, check for:

Clogged or deformed inlet hose.
Clogged power steering reservoir filter.
I f t h e inlet hose and power steering reservoir are OK,
repair (see page 17-33) or replace the p u m p assembly
(see page 17-31).
I f t h e reading is high, check for:
Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
the p u m p and the steering gearbox.
Clogged valve body unit.
10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure
control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
NOTICE I
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than
5 seconds or the p u m p could be damaged by
over-heating.
17-25

Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or T/N 07406-001A101
. Hose Joint Adapter 07RAK-S040122
. P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
. P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S Pressure Gauge 07406-001000A or 07406-001A101
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or steering gearbox.
2. Disconnect the p u m p outlet hose (A) f r o m the p u m p
outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering
fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S
joint adapter (pump) on the p u m p outlet (B) with the
P/S joint adapter plate.
times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature at
158F(70C).
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. Ifthe p u m p is in good condition, the gauge
should read no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm ,
213 psi).
2
If the reading is low, check for:

Clogged or deformed inlet hose.
Clogged power steering reservoir filter.
If the inlet hose and power steering reservoir are OK,
repair (see page 17-33) or replace the p u m p assembly
(see page 17-31).
Ifthe reading is high, check for:
Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
the p u m p and the steering gearbox.
3. Connect the hose joint adapter to the P/S pressure
gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose to the hose
joint adapter.
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter
(pump).
Clogged valve body unit.

9. Let the engine idle, and gradually close the shut-off
valve and immediately read the pressure.
INOTlCEl
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than
5 seconds or the p u m p could be damaged by
over-heating.
10. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. Ifthe p u m p
is in good condition, the gauge should read at least
8,924-9,414 kPa (91 - 9 6 k g f / c m , 1 , 2 9 4 - 1 , 3 6 5 psi). A
low reading means the p u m p output is too low for full
assist. Repair or replace the p u m p .
2
17-26
Fluid Leakage Inspection
H O S E S and LINES
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference, and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting, and leaks.
Check for leaks at the hose and line joints, and at the connections.
17-27

Fluid Replacement
Check t h e r e s e r v o i r (A) at r e g u l a r i n t e r v a l s , a n d a d d t h e
r e c o m m e n d e d f l u i d as necessary. A l w a y s use H o n d a
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other t y p e of p o w e r
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause
increased w e a r , f l u i d leaks, a n d p o o r steering in c o l d
weather.
N O T E : I f t h e f l u i d is c o n t a m i n a t e d , t h e s c r e e n i n t h e
reservoir m a y be partially blocked. Inspect t h e reservoir
s c r e e n f o r a n y d e b r i s . I f t h e r e s e r v o i r s c r e e n is c l o g g e d ,
replace the reservoir, a n d check f o r the source of the
contamination.
1. R e m o v e t h e r e s e r v o i r f r o m its h o l d e r . R a i s e t h e
reservoir, t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e r e t u r n h o s e (A) t o d r a i n
the reservoir. Take care n o t t o spill t h e f l u i d o n t h e
vehicle. W i p e o f f a n y spilled f l u i d at o n c e .
N O T E : I n s p e c t t h e r e s e r v o i r s c r e e n f o r a n y d e b r i s . If
t h e r e s e r v o i r s c r e e n is c l o g g e d , r e p l a c e t h e r e s e r v o i r ,
and check f o r the source of the c o n t a m i n a t i o n .
System capacity:
1.0 L (1.1 U S qt) at disassembly
Reservoir capacity:
0.36 L (0.38 U S qt)
2. C o n n e c t a h o s e (B) o f s u i t a b l e d i a m e t e r t o t h e
d i s c o n n e c t e d return hose, a n d p u t t h e hose e n d in a
suitable container.
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e , l e t it r u n a t i d l e , a n d t u r n t h e s t e e r i n g
w h e e l f r o m lock t o lock several t i m e s . W h e n f l u i d
stops running o u t of the hose, shut off the engine.
Discard the fluid.
NOTE: Stop t h e m o t o r i m m e d i a t e l y once the fluid
stops running out of the hose t o prevent p u m p
damage.
4. R e i n s t a l l t h e r e t u r n h o s e o n t h e r e s e r v o i r .
5. Fill t h e r e s e r v o i r t o t h e u p p e r l e v e l l i n e (C).
6. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e , a n d r u n i t a t i d l e . T u r n t h e s t e e r i n g
f r o m lock t o lock several t i m e s t o bleed air f r o m t h e
system.
7. R e c h e c k t h e f l u i d l e v e l , a n d a d d s o m e if n e c e s s a r y . D o
not fill t h e reservoir b e y o n d t h e u p p e r level line.
8. I f t h e f l u i d is c o n t a m i n a t e d , d a r k , o r d i s c o l o r e d , r e p e a t
t h e p r o c e d u r e as n e c e s s a r y u n t i l t h e s y s t e m is c l e a n .
17-28
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement

Note t h e s e i t e m s d u r i n g installation:
C o n n e c t e a c h h o s e to the c o r r e s p o n d i n g line s e c u r e l y until it c o n t a c t s t h e s t o p o n the line. Install the c l a m p or
a d j u s t a b l e c l a m p at the s p e c i f i e d d i s t a n c e f r o m the h o s e e n d a s s h o w n .
C h e c k all c l a m p s for deterioration or d e f o r m a t i o n ; r e p l a c e the c l a m p s with n e w o n e s if n e c e s s a r y .
A d d the r e c o m m e n d e d p o w e r s t e e r i n g fluid to the s p e c i f i e d level o n the r e s e r v o i r , a n d c h e c k for l e a k s .
A D J U S T A B L E H O S E CLAMP (A)
HOSE CLAMP (B)
(0.100.22 in)
2.55.5 mm
(0.100.22 in)
2.04.0 mm
(0.080.16 in)
PUMP O U T L E T HOSE
17-29

Pump Outlet Hose/Inlet Line Replacement
NOTE: Plug the p u m p outlet hose end and Inlet line end
after disconnecting t h e m .
9. Loosen the 16 m m flare nut (A), and disconnect the

inlet line (B).
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-8).

2. Remove the front wheel on the passenger's side.
3. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
4. Drain the power steering fluid f r o m the reservoir (see
page 17-28).
5. Cover the auto-tensioner, the alternator, and the A/C
compressor w i t h several shop towels to protect t h e m
f r o m spilled power steering fluid.
6. Disconnect the p u m p outlet hose (A) f r o m the p u m p .
NOTE:
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
Do not turn the steering wheel w i t h the p u m p outlet
hose removed.
10. Remove the inlet line clamp bolt (C).

11. Remove the inlet line clamp bolt (A), and disconnect
the power steering pressure switch connector (B).
7. Cover the opening of the p u m p w i t h a piece of tape to

prevent foreign material f r o m entering the pump.
8. Remove the p u m p outlet hose clamp bolt (B).
17-30
Pump Replacement
12. Remove the p u m p outlet hose/inlet line (A) through
the wheelwell opening on the passenger's side.
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle to catch

any spilled fluid.
page 17-28).
4. Remove the drive belt (A) (see page 4-30) f r o m the
p u m p pulley.
13. Install the p u m p outlet hose/inlet line (A) in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Fill the system w i t h power steering fluid, and bleed
air f r o m the system (see page 17-28).
Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
auto-tensioner, the alternator, the A/C compressor,
the drive belt, or the pulley faces. Clean off any fluid
or grease before installation.
Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the
steering wheel f r o m lock to lock several times to
w a r m up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks (see
page 17-27).
Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
(cont'd)
17-31

Pump Replacement (cont'd)
5. Cover the auto-tensioner, the alternator, and the A/C
compressor w i t h several shop towels to protect t h e m
f r o m spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect the
p u m p inlet hose (B) and the p u m p outlet hose (C)
f r o m the p u m p (D), and plug t h e m . Take care not to
spill the fluid on the vehicle. W i p e off any spilled fluid
at once. Do not turn the steering wheel w i t h the p u m p
removed.
6. Remove the p u m p mounting bolts (E).
7. Cover the opening of the p u m p w i t h a piece of tape to
prevent foreign material f r o m entering the pump.
11. Install the drive belt (A).

Note these items during drive belt installation:
Inspect the belt for wear and cracks. Replace the
belt if necessary.
Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on the
pulleys (B).
Do not get power steering fluid or grease o n the
auto-tensioner, alternator, A/C compressor, and
drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
A
8. Transfer the p u m p inlet hose and the p u m p outlet

hose f r o m the original p u m p onto the new p u m p w i t h
a new O-ring (F).
9. Loosely install the p u m p in the p u m p bracket w i t h the
mounting bolts, then tighten the p u m p fittings to the
specified torque.
10. Tighten the p u m p mounting bolts to the specified
torque.

13. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
17-28).
14. Start the engine, and check for leaks.
17-32
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if any of the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
*4.5 mm ROLL I
8 x 1.25 mm
20 N-m
(2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
* O U T E R SIDE PLATE
\
C A M RING
PUMP COVER
5 1 . 0 x 2 . 4 mm
O-RING
Replace.
13.0 x 1.9 mm
O-RING
Replace.
INLET JOINT
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 k g f m , 8.0 Ibfft)
FLOW CONTROL V A L V E
SPRING
P U L L E Y NUT
64 N m
{6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft)
16.7 x 1.8 mm
O-RING
Replace.
FLOW CONTROL V A L V E CAP
49 N-m (5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibf t)
(cont'd)
17-33

Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
. Pulley Holder 07ZAB-S5A0100
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver Attachment, 28 x 30 07946-1870100
4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.
Disassembly
6. Remove the p u m p cover and p u m p cover seal.

7. Remove the outer side plate, the cam ring, the rotor,
the vanes, the side plate, and the O-rings.
5. Loosen the f l o w control valve cap w i t h a hex wrench,

and remove the cap, the O-ring, the spring, and the
f l o w control valve.

page 17-28).
8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the subvalve

f r o m the p u m p housing.
2. Remove the power steering p u m p (see page 17-31).
9. Remove the snap ring, then remove the driveshaft by

tapping the shaft end w i t h a soft face hammer.
3. Hold the power steering p u m p (A) in a vise w i t h soft

jaws (B), then hold the pulley (C) w i t h the pulley
holder (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley.
Be careful not to damage the p u m p housing w i t h the
jaws of a vise.
17-34
10. Remove the p u m p seal f r o m the p u m p housing.
Inspection
11. Check the f l o w control valve for wear, burrs, and other
damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve.
14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the f l o w control valve

(B) as shown. Then submerge the f l o w control valve
in a container of power steering fluid (C), and apply
compressed air in the hose.
If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm , 14.2 psi), replace the p u m p as
an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not available
separately.
If the f l o w control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
12. Inspect the bore of the f l o w control valve on the p u m p

housing for scratches and wear.
13. Slip the f l o w control valve back in the p u m p housing,
and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go
to step 14; if not, replace the p u m p as an assembly.
The f l o w control valve (A) is not available separately.
15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A) and
install a new one (B).
16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View; if any of them are w o r n or damaged,
replace the p u m p as an assembly.
(cont'd)
17-35

Reassembly
17. Align the pin (A) of the subvalve (B) w i t h the oil
passage (C) in the p u m p housing, and push the
subvalve into place, then install the snap ring (D).
19. Position the driveshaft (A) in the p u m p housing, then

press it in w i t h the appropriate size socket (B) as
shown.
20. Install the 40 m m snap ring (C) w i t h its beveled edge

facing out.
18. Install the new p u m p seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the p u m p housing (B) by hand first,
then drive it in using the driver handle and bearing
driver attachment until there is no step at the top of
the p u m p seal, and the seal is fully seated in the p u m p
housing.
2 1 . Coat the new p u m p cover seal (A) w i t h power steering

fluid, and install it into the groove in the p u m p cover
(B).
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the t w o roll pins (D)
w i t h the groove (E) facing up.
17-36
23. Set the cam ring (A) over the t w o roll pins with the
" " mark (B) facing d o w n .
26. Coat the new 15.2 m m O-ring (A) with power steering
fluid, and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
24. Install the rotor (A) to the p u m p cover (B).
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roll pin set holes (D) in the side plate w i t h the roll
pins (E).
28. Coat the new 51.0 m m O-ring (A) with power steering
fluid, and position it in the bottom of the p u m p
housing.
8 x 1.25 mm
20 N m
(2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
25. Set the 10 vanes (C) into the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in
contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
29. Install the p u m p cover assembly (B) in the p u m p

housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque
alternating in t w o or more steps.
(cont'd)
17-37

30. Coat the f l o w control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the p u m p
housing.
3 1 . Coat the new 16.7 m m O-ring (C) w i t h power steering

fluid, and install it on the f l o w control valve cap (D),
then install the cap on the p u m p housing. Tighten it to
32. Coat the new 13.0 m m O-ring (A) w i t h power steering
fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B). Install the inlet
joint on the pump housing.
33. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut
(B). Hold the steering p u m p in a vise w i t h soft jaws. Be
careful not to damage the p u m p housing w i t h the
jaws of the vise.
34. Hold the pulley w i t h the pulley holder, and tighten the
pulley nut to the specified torque.
35. Check that the power steering p u m p turns smoothly
by turning the pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen
the four flange bolts on the cover, then retighten t h e m
in the same manner as in step 29. Retest. Ifthe p u m p
is still hard to t u r n , replace the p u m p .
36. Reinstall the power steering p u m p (see page 17-31).
17-38
Steering Gearbox Removal

Ball Joint Remover, 28 m m 07MAC-SL0A202
2008 V6 Attachment A r m SIL02C000033*
Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C00Q019*
Program 888-424-6857
7. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-170), and the

steering wheel (see page 17-9).
20-121).
10. Remove the center console trim (see page 20-115).
11. Pull back the carpet (A).
Note these items during removal:

Using clean solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt
off the valve body unit, it's lines, and the end of the
steering gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint, or damage to the
cable reel can occur.
Lower the front subframe f r o m the body, and remove
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe.
1. Remove the hood support rod, then use it as shown to
prop the hood in the wide-open position.
12. Remove steering joint cover (B).

13. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a
piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
to prevent the lower slide shaft f r o m pulling out.

3. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-28).

page 22-94).
14. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column
lever.
(cont'd)
17-39

Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
15. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect the
steering joint (B) by sliding the steering joint into the
column.
18. Remove the cotter pin (A) f r o m the tie-rod ball joint,
then remove the nut (B).
07 AAF-SD AA100
16. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped) f r o m the

top of the pinion shaft (B), and discard it. The center
guide is for factory assembly use only.
07MAC-SL0A202
19. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
ball joint thread protector and the ball joint remover
(see page 18-12).
20. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A), and disconnect
the return hose (B).
17. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft.

21. Loosen the 16 m m flare nut (C), and disconnect the
inlet line (D).
17-40
22. Disconnect the stabilizer links (A) f r o m the stabilizer

bar (see page 18-20).
23. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-372).

24. Remove the connector bracket (A) f r o m the front
engine hanger balance bar front a r m .

2008 V6 attachment arm (SIL02C000033).
26. Remove the cowl top side cover (A) f r o m both sides,
then install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256).
With the engine support hanger beam (B) on its side,
insert the hanger beam through the opening, then
rotate it over the damper (C).
T1256
(cont'd)
17-41

27. Lift and support the engine with the engine support
hanger, and the engine hanger balance bar
(VSB02C000019). Attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with spacers (B) and the bolt (10 x 1.25
m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) (D) to the rear cylinder head w i t h a
bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then attach the rear arm (F) to
the attachment arm
34. Remove the inlet line clamp bolts (A).

connector (A) and the harness clamps (B). Remove
the front engine mount stop (C), then remove the front
engine mount bolt (D).

3 1 . Remove the front subframe stiffener (A).
32. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-8).

33.4WD: Remove the propeller shaft and propeller shaft
protectors (see page 16-44).
17-42
36. Remove the rear engine mount bolts, and disconnect

the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector (A).
39. Remove the mounting bolts (A) f r o m the driver's side

of the steering gearbox.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
Replace.
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
37. Remove the rear engine m o u n t (B) f r o m the rear

engine m o u n t base bracket, and move it aside.
38. Remove the ground cable bolt (A) f r o m the
transmission.
40. Remove the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) f r o m the

driver's side of the front subframe.
10 x 1.25 mm
10x1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
17-43

4 1 . Remove the mounting bolts f r o m the passenger's
side of the steering gearbox, then remove the
mounting bracket (A) and cushion (B).
43. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to

the subframe by hanging the belt (A) over the front of
the subframe (B), then secure the belt with its stop (C).
42. Remove the lower transmission m o u n t bolts (A).

44. Raise the jack, and line up the slots in the front
subframe adapter arms w i t h the bolt holes on the jack
base, then securely attach t h e m w i t h four bolts.
45. Support the front subframe securely by raising the
transmission jack.
46. Remove the stiffener mounting bolts (A) f r o m the
subframe front stiffeners (B).
47. Loosen the front subframe mounting bolts (C) on the

subframe front stiffeners so they are about 40 m m (1
9/16 in) f r o m the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
subframe mounting bolts more than necessary.
17-44
48. Remove the stiffeners mounting bolts (A) f r o m the

subframe rear stiffeners (B).
52. Remove the steering gearbox (A) through the

fenderwell opening on the driver's side.
53. Remove the pinion shaft g r o m m e t (A) f r o m the top of

the valve housing.
49. Loosen the front subframe mounting bolts (C) on the
subframe rear stiffeners so they are about 40 m m (1
9/16 in) f r o m the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
subframe mounting bolts more than necessary.
50. Lower the transmission jack slowly until the front
subframe has dropped about 40 m m (1 9/16 in).
51. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) toward the
driver's side until the pinion shaft clears the
fenderwell opening on the body.
54. Remove the return line joint <B) if necessary.
17-45

Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
CYLINDER LINE A
FLARE NUTS
17 N m
(1.7 k g f m ,
12 Ibfft)
SNAP RING
Replace.
SLEEVE SEAL
RINGS
Replace.
MOUNT CUSHION
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
V A L V E OIL S E A L
RING
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
CYLINDER END S E A L
Replace.
LOCKNUT
CYLINDER END
84 N-m
(8.6 k g f m , 62 Ibfft)
RACK GUIDE
SCREW
SPRING
RACK GUIDE
SELF-LOCKING NUT
30 N-m (3.1 k g f m , 2 2 Ibfft)
Replace.
END PLUG
70 N-m (7.1 k g f m , 51 Ibfft)
Replace.
PISTON S E A L RING
Replace.
LOCK NUT
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m ,
33 Ibfft)
17-46
O-RING
Replace.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
TIE-ROD END

Sizing Tool, 42 07HAG-SF10200 or Piston Seal Ring
Sizing Tool 07HAG-SF1020A
. Oil Seal Driver, 65 07JAD-PL9A100
Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 07NAG-SR3090A
Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment
07TAF-SZ50100
. Sleeve Seal Guide, 35.9 x 37 07YAG-S2X0100
. Seal Ring Guide, 22 x 44 07XAG-S0K0200
. Sizing T o o l , 36 07ZAG-S5A0100
Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 m m 07746-0030300
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver Attachment, 28 x 30 07946-1870100
4. Remove the end plug (A) f r o m the gearbox housing,

then remove the self-locking nut (B) f r o m the pinion
shaft end.
Disassembly
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-39).
2. Remove the tie-rod end f r o m the rack end.
3. Drill a 4.0 m m (0.16 in) diameter hole about 2.53.0
m m (0.100.12 in) in depth in the staked points (A) on
the end plug (B) and the gearbox housing (C).
(cont'd)
17-47

Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
6. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and
w o o d e n blocks (B) as s h o w n . Do not clamp the
cylinder part of the gearbox housing in the vise.
8. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering rack

(B) w i t h one wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C)
with another wrench. Be careful not to damage the
rack surface with the wrench.
7. Unbend the lock washers (A).
9. Remove the lock washer (D) and rubber stop (E).

10. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
11. Remove the spring (C), and the rack guide (D) f r o m the
gearbox housing.
17-48
12. Remove the cylinder line A and B f r o m the steering

gearbox.
15. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the end of the steering rack and
the gearbox housing. Drill a 3 . 0 - 4 . 0 m m (0.12-0.16
in) diameter hole about 2.53.0 m m (0.100.12 in) in
depth in the staked point (B) on the cylinder. Do not
allow metal shavings to enter the cylinder side on the
gearbox housing. After removing the cylinder end (C),
remove any burrs at the staked point.
NOTE: Apply vinyl tape (D) to the drill, and do not drill
the depth more than necessary.
13. Drain the fluid f r o m the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
14. Remove the t w o flange bolts, then remove the valve
body unit (A) f r o m the gearbox housing (B). Remove
the O-ring (C).

w o o d e n blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the
cylinder part of the gearbox housing in the vise.
Remove the vinyl tape. Then remove the cylinder end
(C).
(cont'd)
17-49

17. Install a commercially available bearing separator (A)
on the gearbox housing as s h o w n .
21. Turn the cylinder end seal remover attachment so it

fits through the rack guide hole of the gearbox
housing, then position the seal remover on the
backup ring (A). Make sure that the seal remover is
securely positioned on the backup ring.
07TAF-SZ50100
D
Replace.
18. Place an appropriate size deep socket (B) on the

steering rack (C).
19. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox
housing side points upward, then press the cylinder
end seal (D) and steering rack out of the steering
gearbox. Hold the steering rack to keep it f r o m falling
w h e n pressed clear. Be careful not to damage the
inner surface of the cylinder side on the gearbox
housing w i t h the tool.
20. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) off
the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the inside of
the seal ring groove and piston edges w h e n removing
the seal ring.
Replace
17-50
2 2 . Insert a 2 4 " long 3/8" drive e x t e n s i o n (A), on the

c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l r e m o v e r a t t a c h m e n t . Place the
g e a r b o x h o u s i n g in a p r e s s , t h e n r e m o v e the b a c k u p
ring (B) a n d c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l (C) f r o m the g e a r b o x
h o u s i n g by p r e s s i n g o n the 2 4 " long 3/8" drive
extension.
23. A p p l y v i n y l t a p e (A) to the s p l i n e s on t h e pinion shaft.
Note t h e s e i t e m s w h e n p r e s s i n g the b a c k u p ring a n d

cylinder end seal:
K e e p t h e tool straight to a v o i d d a m a g i n g the
c y l i n d e r w a l l . C h e c k the tool a n g l e , a n d c o r r e c t it if
n e c e s s a r y , w h e n r e m o v i n g the b a c k u p ring a n d
cylinder end seal.
U s e a p r e s s to r e m o v e the b a c k u p ring a n d c y l i n d e r
e n d s e a l . Do not try to r e m o v e the b a c k u p ring a n d
c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l by striking the tool; striking the
tool w o u l d break the b a c k u p ring a n d c y l i n d e r e n d
s e a l , a n d t h e b a c k u p ring a n d c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l
w o u l d r e m a i n in t h e g e a r b o x h o u s i n g .
24. S e p a r a t e t h e v a l v e h o u s i n g (A) f r o m the pinion
s h a f t / s l e e v e (B) a n d v a l v e oil s e a l (C).
07TAF-SZ50100
(cont'd)
17-51

25. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step in
the wall, the housing is w o r n , replace it.
27. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) f r o m the
pinion shaft (C).
C
26. Check for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges
of the grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision
matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must
be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
17-52
28. Using a cutter or an equivalent t o o l , cut and remove

the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be careful not to
damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and outer
surface w h e n removing the seal rings.
29. Using a cutter or an equivalent t o o l , cut the valve seal

ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the cutting groove position
(C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and
O-ring. Be careful not to damage the edges of the
pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing
the valve seal ring and O-ring.
Replace.
30. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and roller bearing (B)
out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
an appropriate size socket.
3 1 . Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts in
the solvent.
Reassembly
32. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped portion
of the shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with
power steering fluid.
33. Fit the new O-ring (B) in the groove of the pinion shaft.
Then slide the new valve seal ring (C) over the shaft
and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
34. Remove the vinyl tape, and apply power steering fluid
to the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
35. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the valve

seal ring sizing tool. Set the larger diameter end of the
sizing tool over the valve seal ring, and move the
sizing tool up and d o w n several times to make the
valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
36. Remove the sizing tool, turn it over, slide the smaller
diameter end over the valve seal ring. Move it up and
d o w n several times to make the valve seal ring fit
snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
(cont'd)
17-53

37. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the sleeve
seal guide. Slip t w o new seal rings (A) over the ring
guide f r o m the smaller diameter end, and expand
t h e m . Install only t w o rings at a time f r o m each end of
the pinion shaft sleeve (B).
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin
seal rings w i t h care so as not to damage t h e m . After
installation, make sure you contract the seal rings
using the sizing tool.
4 1 . Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion

shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion shaft by
aligning the locating pin (C) on the pinion shaft with
the cutout (D) in the sleeve. Then install the new snap
ring (E) securely in the pinion shaft groove. Be careful
not to damage the valve seal ring w h e n installing the
sleeve.
There are t w o types of sleeve seal rings; black and

brown. Do not mix the different types of rings as
they are not compatible.
A
42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the valve
housing (B) using a hydraulic press and driver handle.
Install the seal with its grooved side facing the tool.
38. Align the ring guide with each groove in the sleeve,
and slide a sleeve seal ring into each groove. After
installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers
temporarily.
07946-1870100
39. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the

sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the sizing
t o o l , then slowly insert the sleeve into the sizing tool.
43. Press the roller bearing (C) into the valve housing w i t h
a hydraulic press and bearing driver attachment.
40. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to make
sure the seal rings fit snugly in the sleeve. Make sure
the seal rings are not twisted.
17-54
44. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft/sleeve (B), then
coat the vinyl tape w i t h power steering fluid.
C
49. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring
(B) on the ring guide, then slide t h e m d o w n toward
the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the
resin seal rings with care so as not to damage t h e m
After installation, make sure you contract the seal
ring using the sizing tool.
Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
45. Insert the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing

(C). Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings (D).
46. Remove the vinyl tape f r o m the pinion shaft, then
remove any residue f r o m the tape adhesive.
47. Press the new valve oil seal (A) into the valve housing
w i t h a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion
shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
50. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the
piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the
O-ring.
51. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
piston seal ring sizing tool with power steering fluid,
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
48. Coat the seal ring guide with power steering fluid,
then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
9
07HAG-SF1020A or
07HAG-SF10200
52. Move the sizing tool back and forth several times to
make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
(cont'd)
17-55

53. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped portion.
54. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston.
W h e n installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not to
damage the lip of the seal with the edges or teeth of
the steering rack.
55. Remove the vinyl tape f r o m the steering rack, then

remove any adhesive residue.
17-56
56. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack,
then place the backup ring and cylinder end seal (B)
against the piston (C).
57. Apply steering grease to the steering rack teeth, then

insert the steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be
careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder
wall with the rack edges.
58. Insert an appropriate size socket (A) onto the steering

rack as s h o w n .
59. Install the backup ring (B) and cylinder end seal (C)
into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the tool
w i t h a press. Do not push on the tool with excessive
force as it may damage the backup ring and cylinder
end seal.

w o o d e n blocks (B). Do not clamp the cylinder part of
the gearbox housing in the vise.
64. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with
power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end by
screwing it into the cylinder (B). Tighten the cylinder
end to the specified torque.
2.0 mm
60. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.

6 1 . Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) and steering rack with power steering fluid, then
install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack
w i t h its grooved side toward the cylinder.
1.5 mm
04-0.06 in)
84 N m
(8.6 k g f m , 62 Ibfft)
65. Stake the point of the cylinder shown (opposite f r o m

where the stake was removed during disassembly).
62. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. Be

careful not to damage the surface of the seal with the
threads and burrs at the staked position of the
cylinder housing.
(cont'd)
17-57

66. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h steering grease, and
carefully fit it on the valve housing.
70. Apply steering grease to the sliding surface of the rack

guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox housing.
(08C35-B0534L)
67. Apply steering grease to the ball bearing (B) in the

gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit (C)
by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit
installation position (direction of the line
connections).
68. Loosely install the flange bolts (D).
69. Install the cylinder line A and B to the steering
gearbox.
Note these items during reassembly:
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare nuts
by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the
specified torque.
17-58
7 1 . Remove the old sealant f r o m the rack guide screw (B),

then apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
5699) to the middle of the threads. Install the spring
(C), rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
72. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-17). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
w o o d e n blocks (B) as s h o w n . Do not clamp the
cylinder part of the gearbox housing in a vise.
74. Install a new rubber stop (A) and a new lock washer
(B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) w i t h the slots (D) on
the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in
place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack.
77. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of

the rack end joint housing (A).
78. A p p l y a light coat of silicone grease to the boot

grooves (B) on the rack end.
75. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack w i t h

one w r e n c h , and tighten both rack ends with another
wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface
w i t h the w r e n c h .
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the

especially if y o u have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
76. Bend the new lock washer (A) back against the flat
spots on the rack end joint housing.
(cont'd)
17-59

80. Install the new self-locking nut (A) onto the pinion
shaft end, and tighten to the specified torque.
82. Tighten the flange bolts (A) to the specified torque.
70 N m
(7.1 k g f m , 51 Ibfft)
Replace.
8 1 . Remove the old sealant f r o m the threads on the

gearbox housing (B), and apply new sealant (Three
Bond 1215 or Loctite 5699) all the w a y around the
threads on the gearbox housing and the new end plug
(C). Install the end plug onto the gearbox housing, and
tighten it t o the specified torque.
17-60
83. After tightening, use the drift to stake (A) the gearbox
housing shoulder against the end plug (B).
1.0 mm
84. Clean off any grease or contamination f r o m the boot

installation grooves (A) around the gearbox housing.
Install the boots (B) on the rack ends w i t h the tie-rod
clips (C), and fit the boot end in the installation
grooves in the housing properly.
87. Close the ear portion (A) of the boot band (B) w i t h
commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (C).
88. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots
are not deformed or twisted.
85. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (D) of the rack end.
86. Install the new boot bands (A) by aligning the tab (B)
w i t h the hole (C) on the band.
89. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.

90. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-62).
A
Replace.
17-61

Steering Gearbox Installation
Subframe A l i g n m e n t Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
5. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front

subframe and body f r o m the driver's side.
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure that

no power steering fluid is on the mating surface of the
steering gearbox and the front subframe. To prevent
the gearbox m o u n t i n g bolts f r o m loosening after the
installation, remove any power steering fluid f r o m the
m o u n t cushions and bolt holes.
2. Wrap vinyl tape over the splines on the pinion shaft
(A).
6. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) t o w a r d the

passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the
fenderwell opening on the body.
3. Install the pinion shaft g r o m m e t (B) o n the top of the

valve housing.
4. Install the return line joint (C) if removed.
7. Continue m o v i n g the gearbox t o w a r d the passenger's

side until the steering gearbox is in position.
17-62
8. Loosely tighten the left rear subframe mounting bolt

(A); insert the 15.7 m m side of the subframe
alignment pin (070AG-SJAA1 OS) through the
positioning hole (B) on the rear stiffener, through the
positioning hole (C) on the subframe, and into the
positioning hole (D) on the body, then tighten the
right rear subframe m o u n t i n g bolt.
A
14 x 1.5 m m
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
Replace.
070AG-SJAA10S

w i t h the same procedure as the left rear using the
subframe alignment pin.
m o u n t i n g bolts (A) and the stiffener mounting bolts
11. Tighten the rear-driver's side subframe mouting bolt

(A) to the specified torque.
C
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m , 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m ,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
A
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m ,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
117 N-m
(11.9 k g f m ,
86.1 Ibfft)
Replace.
12. Tighten the rear-passenger's side subframe m o u n t i n g

13. Tighten the front subframe m o u n t i n g bolts (C) to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Check all of the front subframe mounting bolts,
and retighten if necessary.
(B).
14. Tighten the front and rear stiffener m o u n t i n g bolts (D)

12 x 1.25 m m
A
14 x 1.5 m m
Replace.
(cont'd)
17-63

Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
15. Loosely tighten new lower transmission m o u n t bolt
(A).
17. Install the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) on the driver's

side of the front subframe, and tighten the bolts and
nut to the specified torque.
16. Lower the transmission jack supporting the front

subframe.
18. Loosely install the new m o u n t i n g bolts (A) on the

driver's side of the steering gearbox.
17-64
19. Position the cutout (A) on the m o u n t i n g cushion (B) as

s h o w n , and install it o n the passenger's side of the
steering gearbox.
23. Install the n e w rear engine m o u n t bolts (A) and the

rear engine m o u n t bolts (B) to the rear engine m o u n t
base bracket.
D
10 x 1.25 mm
39Nm
(4.0 k g f m ,
29 Ibfft)
4 2 N m (4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft) 10 x 1.25 m m

Replace.
4 2 N m (4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
20. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (C) over the

mounting cushion, and loosely install the mounting
bolts (D).
2 1 . Tighten the mounting bolts on both sides of the
steering gearbox to the specified torque alternately in
t w o steps.
24. Connect the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector

(C).
25. Tighten the front engine m o u n t bolt (A), then install
the front engine m o u n t stop (B) w i t h the n e w
mounting nuts (C), and connect the front engine
m o u n t actuator connector (D) and the harness clamps
(E).
22. Install the ground cable bolt (A) t o the transmission.
(cont'd)
17-65

26. Install the inlet line clamp bolts (A), and tighten to the
specified torque.
34. Connect the stabilizer links (A) t o the stabilizer bar.

12x1.25 mm
A
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
27. Install exhaust pipe A (see page 9-8).

28.4WD: Install the propeller shaft and propeller shaft
protectors (see page 16-45).
29. Install the front subframe stiffener (A) w i t h new
m o u n t i n g bolts (B), and tighten t o the specified
torque.
10 x 1.25 m m
59Nm
(6.0 k g f m , 44 Ibfft)
Replace.
30. Install the front splash shield (see page 20-225).

3 1 . Lower the vehicle.
32. Remove the engine support hanger, then install the
cowl t o p side lid on both sides.
33. Tighten the lower transmission m o u n t bolt to the
specified torque.
17-66
35. Connect the return hose (A) securely, and tighten the
adjustable hose clamp (B).
39. Install the front wheels, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel.
16 x 1.5 mm
42Nm
(4.3 k g f m ,
31 Ibfft)

41. Cut the wire (A).
-A
FRONT
36. Connect the inlet line (C), and tighten the 16 mm flare
nut (D) to the specified torque.
37. On both sides, wipe off any grease contamination
from the ball joint tapered section and threads.
Reconnect the tie-rod ball joint (A) to the knuckle.
Install the new nut ( B ) , and tighten it to the specified
torque.
C
Replace.
42. Slip the lower end of the steering joint (B) onto the
pinion shaft (C) taking care to align the gap (D) within
the angle.
B
12 x 1.25 mm
60N-m
(6.1 k g f m ,
44 Ibfft)
Replace.
38. Install a new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown.
(cont'd)
17-67

43. Align the bolt hole (A) o n the steering joint w i t h the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
50. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9), and the
driver's airbag (see page 24-170).
5 1 . Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
Turn the ignition switch t o ON (ll).The SRS indicator
should come on for about 6 seconds, and then go
off.
Make sure the horn and turn signal switches w o r k
properly.
Make sure the steering wheel switches w o r k
properly.
52. Fill the system w i t h power steering fluid (see page
17-28), and bleed the air f r o m the system.
54. Reinstall the support strut t o the proper locations on
the hood.
55. After installation, do these checks.
44. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the joint bolt
45. Install the steering joint cover (A).
Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the

steering wheel f r o m lock to lock several times to
w a r m up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks (see
page 17-27).
Check the steering wheel spoke angle.lf steering
spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered), correct
the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft serrations.
Set the steering c o l u m n t o the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
46. Set the carpet (B).

47. Install the center console t r i m (see page 20-115).
48. Install the footrest (see page 20-112).
49. Install the dashboard driver's lower cover (see page
20-121).
17-68
Suspension
Suspension..
.18-1
TPMS
.18-RR
Suspension
F r o n t a n d R e a r
S u s p e n s i o n
Special Tools
Wheel Alignment
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Wheel Runout Inspection
Wheel Bolt Replacement
Ball Joint Removal
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement
F r o n t
S u s p e n s i o n
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and
Reassembly
R e a r
S u s p e n s i o n
Upper Arm Removal/Installation
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation
Damper Replacement
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation
18-2
...18-3
18-5
18-8
18-9
18-10
18-12
18-13
18-14
18-18
18-20
18-21
18-28
18-32
18-36
18-41
18-42
18-43
.18-45
18-46
18-47
18-48
.18-51
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
070AG-SJAA10S
071AF-S3VA000
07974-SA50700
07AAF-SDAA100
07GAF-SD40330
07MAC-SL0A102
07MAC-SL0A202
18-2
Description
Clip Guide
Ball Joint Remover/Installer
Bail Joint Remover, 28 m m
Qtv
1
1
1
1
1
1
m
Front Suspension
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-28
Disassembly, Inspection, and
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement, page 18-15
Knuckle Replacement, page 18-16
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM
BALL JOINT
Boot Inspection/Replacement, page 18-13
WHEEL BOLT
(cont'd)
18-3

Rear Suspension
DAMPER
Removal, page 18-48
SPRING/BUMP STOP
Removal, page 18-52
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM B
UPPER ARM
BALL JOINT
Boot Inspection/Replacement, page 18-13
LOWER ARM A
TRAILING ARM
18-4
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement, page 18-37
Knuckle Replacement, page 18-39
WHEEL BOLT
Wheel Alignment
T h e s u s p e n s i o n c a n be a d j u s t e d for front c a m b e r , front
t o e , a n d rear toe. H o w e v e r , e a c h of t h e s e a d j u s t m e n t s
a r e related to e a c h other. F o r e x a m p l e , w h e n y o u a d j u s t
6. C h e c k the s u s p e n s i o n ball j o i n t s . ( R a i s e the v e h i c l e o n

a lift, t h e n h o l d a tire w i t h y o u r h a n d s , a n d m o v e it up
a n d d o w n a n d right a n d left to c h e c k for m o v e m e n t . )
c a m b e r , the toe will c h a n g e . T h e r e f o r e , y o u m u s t a d j u s t

t h e front w h e e l a l i g n m e n t w h e n e v e r y o u a d j u s t c a m b e r
o r toe.
Pre-Alignment Checks
F o r p r o p e r i n s p e c t i o n a n d a d j u s t m e n t of the w h e e l
alignment, do these checks:
1. R e l e a s e the parking b r a k e to a v o i d a n incorrect
measurement.
2. M a k e s u r e the s u s p e n s i o n is not m o d i f i e d .
3. M a k e s u r e the fuel tank is full, a n d that the s p a r e tire,
the j a c k , a n d the t o o l s a r e in p l a c e o n the v e h i c l e .
4. C h e c k the tire s i z e a n d tire p r e s s u r e .
Tire size:
Front/Rear:
7. Before d o i n g a l i g n m e n t i n s p e c t i o n s , be s u r e to
r e m o v e all extra w e i g h t from the v e h i c l e , a n d no o n e
P245/65R17
s h o u l d be i n s i d e the v e h i c l e (driver o r p a s s e n g e r s ) .
Tire pressure (at cold):

Front/Rear:
220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm ,32 psi)
2
5. C h e c k the r u n o u t of the w h e e l s a n d tires ( s e e p a g e

18-9).
8. B o u n c e the v e h i c l e up a n d d o w n s e v e r a l t i m e s to
stabilize the s u s p e n s i o n .
9. C h e c k that the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n is s e t at the c e n t e r tilt
a n d t e l e s c o p i c position.
Caster Inspection
U s e c o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e c o m p u t e r i z e d four w h e e l
a l i g n m e n t e q u i p m e n t to m e a s u r e w h e e l a l i g n m e n t
( c a s t e r , c a m b e r , t o e , a n d t u r n i n g a n g l e ) . F o l l o w the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. C h e c k the c a s t e r a n g l e .
Caster angle:
4 11' 3 5 '
Ifthe m e a s u r e m e n t is w i t h i n s p e c i f i c a t i o n s ,
m e a s u r e the c a m b e r a n g l e .
Ifthe m e a s u r e m e n t is not w i t h i n s p e c i f i c a t i o n s ,
c h e c k for bent or d a m a g e d s u s p e n s i o n
components.
(cont'd)
18-5

Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection
Front Camber Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel

alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
1. Check the camber angle.

3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A), and adjust the
camber angle by moving the bottom of the damper
within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play.
Camber angle:
Front: - 0 3 0 ' 4 5 '
Rear:
- 0 30' 4 5 '
If the measurement is within specifications,
measure the toe-in.
If the measurement for the front camber is not
w i t h i n specifications, go to front camber
adjustment.
If the measurement for the rear camber is not within
specifications, check for bent or damaged
suspension components.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified

torque.
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
6. Lower the vehicle to the g r o u n d , and bounce the front
of the vehicle up and d o w n several times to settle the
suspension.
7. Measure the camber angle.
If the measurement is w i t h i n specifications,
measure the toe-in.
If the measurement is not within specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-6
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use c o m m e r c i a l l y available computerized four w h e e l

(caster, c a m b e r , t o e , a n d t u r n i n g angle). F o l l o w t h e
Use c o m m e r c i a l l y available c o m p u t e r i z e d f o u r w h e e l
(caster, c a m b e r , t o e , a n d t u r n i n g angle). F o l l o w t h e
1. S e t t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n t o t h e m i d d l e t i l t a n d
telescopic positions. Center the steering wheel
spokes, and install a steering w h e e l holder tool.
2. C h e c k t h e t o e w i t h t h e w h e e l s p o i n t e d s t r a i g h t a h e a d .
F r o n t toe-in:
1. R e l e a s e t h e p a r k i n g b r a k e t o a v o i d a n i n c o r r e c t
measurement.
2. C h e c k t h e t o e .
Rear toe-in:
0 2 m m (0.0 0 . 1 in)
If a d j u s t m e n t is r e q u i r e d , g o t o s t e p 3.
If a d j u s t m e n t is r e q u i r e d , g o t o s t e p 3.
If n o a d j u s t m e n t is r e q u i r e d , g o t o r e a r t o e
inspection/adjustment.
3. L o o s e n t h e t i e - r o d l o c k n u t s (A) w h i l e h o l d i n g t h e f l a t
s u r f a c e s e c t i o n s (B) o f t h e t i e - r o d e n d w i t h a w r e n c h ,
a n d t u r n b o t h t i e - r o d s (C) u n t i l t h e f r o n t t o e is w i t h i n
specifications.
2 2 mm (0.1 0 . 1 in)
If n o a d j u s t m e n t is r e q u i r e d , g o t o t u r n i n g a n g l e
inspection.
3. H o l d t h e a d j u s t i n g b o l t (A) o n t h e l o w e r a r m B, a n d
l o o s e n t h e s e l f - l o c k i n g n u t (C).
B
A
14 x 1.5 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
4. A f t e r a d j u s t i n g , t i g h t e n t h e t i e - r o d l o c k n u t s t o t h e
s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e . R e p o s i t i o n t h e r a c k - e n d b o o t if it is
twisted or displaced.
5. G o t o r e a r t o e i n s p e c t i o n / a d j u s t m e n t .
Replace.
4. R e p l a c e t h e s e l f - l o c k i n g n u t w i t h a n e w o n e , a n d
l i g h t l y t i g h t e n it.
N O T E : A l w a y s u s e a n e w s e l f - l o c k i n g n u t w h e n e v e r it
has been t i g h t e n e d t o t h e specified t o r q u e .
5. A d j u s t t h e r e a r t o e b y t u r n i n g t h e a d j u s t i n g b o l t u n t i l
t h e t o e is c o r r e c t .
6. W h i l e h o l d i n g t h e a d j u s t i n g b o l t , t i g h t e n t h e
self-locking nut t o the specified torque.
(cont'd)
18-7

Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Turning Angle Inspection
1. R a i s e the v e h i c l e o n a lift ( s e e p a g e 1-8).
U s e c o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e c o m p u t e r i z e d four w h e e l
a l i g n m e n t e q u i p m e n t to m e a s u r e w h e e l a l i g n m e n t
( c a s t e r , c a m b e r , t o e , a n d t u r n i n g a n g l e ) . F o l l o w the
2. R e m o v e the w h e e l s .
1. T u r n t h e w h e e l right a n d left w h i l e a p p l y i n g the brake,

a n d m e a s u r e the t u r n i n g a n g l e of both w h e e l s .
Turning angle:
Inward wheel:
Outward wheel (reference):
3. Install s u i t a b l e flat w a s h e r s (A) a n d the w h e e l nuts.

T i g h t e n the nuts to the s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e to hold the
brake d i s c or the brake d i s c / d r u m s e c u r e l y a g a i n s t the
hub.
Front
38 1 2 ' 2
31 4 4 '
0
Rear
2. I f t h e m e a s u r e m e n t is not within the s p e c i f i c a t i o n s ,

e v e n up both s i d e s of the tie-rod t h r e a d e d s e c t i o n
length w h i l e a d j u s t i n g the front toe. If it is c o r r e c t , but
the turning a n g l e is not w i t h i n the s p e c i f i c a t i o n s ,
c h e c k for bent or d a m a g e d s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s .
127 N-m
(13.0 k g f m , 94.0 Ibfft)
18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection

4. A t t a c h t h e dial g a u g e . P l a c e t h e dial g a u g e a g a i n s t t h e
hub flange.
5. M e a s u r e t h e b e a r i n g e n d p l a y w h i l e m o v i n g t h e brake
d i s c o r the brake d i s c / d r u m i n w a r d a n d o u t w a r d .
Wheel b e a r i n g end play:
Front/Rear: 0 0 . 0 5 mm (0.00.002 in)
6. If the b e a r i n g e n d play m e a s u r e m e n t is m o r e t h a n t h e
s t a n d a r d , r e p l a c e t h e h u b b e a r i n g unit.
1. R a i s e t h e v e h i c l e o n a lift ( s e e p a g e 1-8).
2. C h e c k for bent o r d e f o r m e d w h e e l s .
3. S e t u p the dial g a u g e a s s h o w n , a n d m e a s u r e t h e
axial runout by turning t h e w h e e l .
Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Standard:
Steel wheel: 0 1 . 0 mm (0.00.04 in)
Aluminum wheel: 0 0 . 3 mm (0.00.01 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
(cont'd)
18-9
Front and Rear S u s p e n s i o n

Wheel Runout Inspection (cont'd)
Wheel Bolt Replacement
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position s h o w n , and

measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:

Standard:
Steel wheel: 01.0 mm (0.00.04 in)
Aluminum wheel: 00.3 mm (0.00.01 in)
NOTICE
Do not use a hammer or impact tools (pneumatic or
electric) to remove and install the wheel bolts.
Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel
bolts.
Front
2. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-19).
3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) f r o m the hub (B) using the
ball joint remover (C), and keep the j a w (D) of ball joint
remover vertical against the wheel bolt (see page
18-12).
NOTE:
5. If the wheel runout is not w i t h i n the specification,

check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8), and
make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc or
the brake disc/drum and the inside of the wheel are
clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification (see
page 18-8) but the wheel runout is more than the
service limit, replace the wheel.
18-10
If the angle of the remover against the wheel bolt is

not square, readjust the ball joint remover by
turning the head (E) of the adjusting bolt (F).
Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
4. Insert the new wheel bolt (A) into the hub (B) while
aligning the splined surfaces (C) on the hub hole w i t h
the wheel bolt. Adjust the measurement (D) with the
washers (P/N 94101-14800 or equivalent) (E), then
install a nut (P/N 90304-SHJ-A91 or equivalent) (F)
hand-tight.
NOTE:
Degrease the area around the wheel bolt and the
threaded section of the nut.
Rear
1. Remove the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-37).
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) f r o m the hub (B) using a
hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press
attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
NOTE: Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in

relation to the hub disc surface.
Press
Do not install the nut and washers that have been

used as tools on a vehicle.
D
13-16 mm
(0.51-0.63 in)
7^'
1
Mli!;!! !!!
yiiiiliiilii
3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning
the splined surfaces on the hub hole w i t h the wheel
bolt.
5. Tighten the nut until the wheel bolt is drawn fully into
the hub. Do not exceed the m a x i m u m torque limit.
Make sure there is no gap (G) between the bolt and
the hub.
Limited torque:
127 N m (13.0 k g f m , 94.0 Ibfft) m a x .
6. Install the front brake disc (see page 19-19).

NOTE:
If y o u cannot tighten the wheel nut to the specified
torque w h e n installing the wheel, replace the front
hub bearing unit as an assembly.
NOTE:
Degrease all around the wheel bolt.
Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until the
wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
5. Install the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-37).
NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the
specified torque when installing the wheel, replace
the rear hub bearing unit as an assembly.
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating

surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
18-11

Ball Joint Removal
Ball Joint Thread Protector,
. Ball Joint Remover, 28 m m
. Ball Joint Thread Protector,
12 m m 07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A102
07MAC-SL0A202
14 m m 071AF-S3VA000
INQTICEI
3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball joint
remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making
sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the j a w
spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B).
NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a
suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it
to a brake line or wire harness.
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint.

Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball
joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) or the ball joint thread protector
onto the threads of the ball joint (B).
NOTE: Using a hex nut, make sure the nut is flush w i t h
the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the
threaded end of the ball joint pin.
B
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head

of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow
the j a w (E) to pivot.
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas

shown (A). This will ease the installation of the tool
and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
5. With a w r e n c h , tighten the pressure bolt until the ball

joint pin pops loose f r o m the ball joint connecting
hole. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the
pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the nut
f r o m the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint
out of the ball joint connecting hole. Inspect the ball
joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
07MAC-SL0A102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
18-12
Bail Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement

. Ball Joint Remover/Installer 07GAF-SD40330
. Clip Guide 07974-SA50700
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage,
cracks, and inner boot grease leaks.
8. The front lower arm ball j o i n t : Press the boot w i t h the

ball joint remover/installer (A) until the bottom seats
(B) on the lower ball joint housing all the w a y around.
07GAF-SD40330
NOTE:
Ifthe ball joint boot is damaged w i t h grease leaks,
replace the appropriate part as an assembly.
Ifthe ball joint boot is soft and cracked without
grease leaks, go to step 2. Replace the appropriate
ball joint boot.
2. Disconnect the appropriate ball joint connection, and
remove the component including the ball joint:
The front lower arm (see page 18-18).
The rear upper arm (see page 18-41).
3. The front lower arm ball joint: Remove the boot.
4. The rear upper arm ball joint: Remove the boot clip
and the boot.
5. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease.
Keep the grease off of the boot-to-housing mating
surfaces (B).
6. Pack fresh grease into the base (C). Do not let dirt or
other foreign materials get into the boot.
9. The rear upper arm ball j o i n t : Adjust the ball joint

boot clip guide (A) with the adjusting bolt (B) until its
base is just above the groove around (C) the bottom of
the boot. Then slide the clip (D) over the ball joint boot
clip guide and into position on the boot.
10. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
11. Install all the removed parts.
7. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently

to force out any air, then wipe the grease off the
tapered portion of the ball joint pin (D).
18-13
Front Suspension
Exploded View
1 2 x 1 . 2 5 mm
98.1 N-m
(10.0 k g f m , 72.3 Ibfft)
. DAMPER PINCH BOLT
SPINDLE UNIT
26 x 1.5 m m
328 N-m
(33.5 k g f m , 242 Ibfft)
Replace.
"8
Apply a small amount of engine oil

to the seating surface of the nut.
18-14

Ball Joint Thread Protector,
. Ball Joint Remover, 28 m m
. Ball Joint Thread Protector,
12 m m 07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A102
07MAC-SL0A202
14 m m 071AF-S3VA000
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) f r o m the

damper.
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1 -8).
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel.
B
14 x 1.5 m m
137 N-m
(14.0 k g f m , 101 Ibfft)
A
14 x 1.5 m m
127 N m
(13.0 k g f m , 94.0 Ibfft)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket m o u n t i n g bolts (B),

then remove the caliper assembly (C) f r o m the
knuckle. To prevent damage t o the caliper assembly
or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly f r o m the undercarriage. Do not
twist the brake hose excessively.
5. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
6. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-19).
(cont'd)
18-15
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the flange bolts (A), and remove the hub
bearing unit (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) w i t h
a soft face h a m m e r while drawing the hub bearing
unit o u t w a r d , then remove the splash guard (D).
NOTE:
Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-18).
Knuckle Replacement
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
2. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) f r o m the knuckle
(B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor
connector.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Remove the cotter pin (A) f r o m the tie-rod end ball

joint, then remove the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin
after tightening the new nut, and bend its end as
shown.
8. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
9. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
a m o u n t of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces on the hub bearing unit and the inside of
the brake disc.
Before installing the w h e e l , clean the mating
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A202
4. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint f r o m the knuckle

using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint
remover (see page 18-12).
18-16
then remove the castle nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
s h o w n after tightening the new castle nut.
7. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the flange

nuts (B) f r o m the damper, then remove the knuckle
(C).
NOTE: Use new damper pinch bolts and new
self-locking nuts during reassembly.
A
18 x 1.5 mm
211 N-m
(21.5 k g f m ,
156 Ibfft)
071AF-S3VA000
Replace.
6. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint f r o m the knuckle
NOTE:
Do not force or hammer on the lower a r m , or pry
between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could
(cont'd)
18-17
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit
8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 m m 071AF-S3VA000
First install all of the components, and lightly

tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's w e i g h t
before fully tightening to the specified torque. Do
not place the jack against the ball joint of the lower
arm.
connecting the knuckle.
Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the
threaded section and the tapered portion of the ball
joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, and the
threaded section and the mating surfaces of the
castle nut.
2. Remove the front wheel.
s h o w n after tightening the new castle nut.
Torque the castle nut to the lower torque

specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot w i t h the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
surfaces o n the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
4. Disconnect the lower a r m ball joint f r o m the knuckle

NOTE:
Do not force or h a m m e r on the lower a r m , or pry
between the lower a r m and the knuckle. You could
18-18
5. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolt (A) of the rear side on the

stabilizer bar bushing holder.
NOTE: During installation, install the m o u n t i n g bolt
after tightening the lower a r m m o u n t i n g 14 m m bolts
7. Remove the lower arm stops (A).

NOTE: During installation, align the slot (B) on the
lower arm stop w i t h the lug portion (C) on the front
side lower arm bushing.
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N m (4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
8. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
5i J.'
5 m
162 N m
(16.5 k g f m , 119 ibfft)
Replace.
^ 1 4 x 1.5 mm
93 .
(9.5 k g f m , 69 Ibfft)
Replace.
N
6. Remove the lower arm m o u n t i n g 14 m m and 16 m m

bolts, then remove the lower arm ( B ) .
NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly.

suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque. Do
not place the jack against the ball joint of the lower
arm.
castle nut.
align the slot w i t h the ball joint pin hole. Do not
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
(cont'd)
18-19
Front Suspension
(cont'd)
Bushing Replacement
1. R a i s e t h e v e h i c l e o n a lift ( s e e p a g e 1 -8).
1. R e m o v e t h e s e l f - l o c k i n g nut ( A ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e r e a r
s i d e l o w e r a r m b u s h i n g w i t h b r a c k e t (B).
2. R e m o v e t h e front w h e e l .
3. R e m o v e t h e f l a n g e nuts (A) w h i l e h o l d i n g t h e
r e s p e c t i v e joint pin (B) w i t h a h e x w r e n c h (C), t h e n
r e m o v e t h e stabilizer link (D).
16 x 1.5 m m
Replace.
2. A l i g n t h e a n g l e of t h e l o w e r a r m c e n t e r line (A) a n d
t h e u n d e r e d g e line (B) of t h e b u s h i n g b r a c k e t a s
shown.
A
4. Install t h e stabilizer link o n t h e stabilizer bar (E) a n d
t h e d a m p e r (F) w i t h t h e joint p i n s s e t at t h e c e n t e r of
their r a n g e of m o v e m e n t .
5. Install t h e f l a n g e n u t s , a n d tighten t h e m to t h e
s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e w h i l e h o l d i n g t h e r e s p e c t i v e joint pin
with a hex w r e n c h .
6. C l e a n t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s of t h e brake d i s c a n d t h e
i n s i d e of t h e w h e e l , t h e n install t h e front w h e e l .
(16.5 k g f m , 119 Ibfft)
Replace.
3. Install a n e w s e l f - l o c k i n g nut ( C ) , t h e n tighten t h e nut
to t h e s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e .
18-20

Subframe A l i g n m e n t Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
Front Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016*
: These special tools are available through Honda Tool
and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
1. Note these items during replacement:
Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the
cable reel can occur.
Lower the front subframe f r o m the body, and
replace the front stabilizer bar t h r o u g h the gap
created by lowering the front subframe.
3. Remove the engine cover (see page 4-21).

page 22-94).
7. Remove the driver's airbag and the steering wheel
(see page 17-7).
9. Remove the center console t r i m (see page 20-115).
10. Pull back the carpet (A), then remove the steering joint
cover (B).
2. Remove the support struts f r o m the engine hood.

Move the engine hood to a vertical position, then
reinstall the support strut as s h o w n .
(cont'd)
18-21
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Bar Replacement (cont'd)
11. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column w i t h a
piece of w i r e (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
to prevent the slider shaft f r o m pulling out.
14. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch

connector (A).
15. Remove the cotter pin (A) f r o m the tie-rod end ball
joint, then remove the nut (B).
12. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering c o l u m n
lever.
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin

after tightening the new nut, and bend its end as
shown.
13. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), disconnect the

steering joint (B) by m o v i n g the steering joint t o w a r d
the c o l u m n .
A
Replace.
NOTE:
If the center guide (C) is in place and has not m o v e d ,
leave it in place.
B
12x1.25 mm
60 N-m
(6.1 k g f m ,
44 Ibfft)
Replace.
Ifthe center guide has m o v e d or been removed,

discard it.
A
8 x 1.25 m m
28 N-m
(2.9 k g f m ,
21 Ibfft)
07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A202
16. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint f r o m the knuckle

17. Disconnect both sides of the stabilizer link f r o m the
stabilizer bar (see page 18-20).
18-22
I
18. Remove the power steering p u m p outlet hose
mounting bolt (A).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to 2008 V6
attach the attachment a r m (SIL02C000033).

20. Remove the connector bracket (A) f r o m the front
engine hanger balance bar front a r m .
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
22. Remove the cowl t o p side cover (A) f r o m both sides,

then install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256).
With the engine support hanger beam (B) on its side,
insert the hanger beam through the opening, then
rotate it over the damper (C).
A
AAR-T1256
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
18-23
Front Suspension
23. Lift and support the engine with the engine support
hanger, and the engine hanger balance bar
(VSB02C000019). Attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with spacers (B) and the bolt (10 x 1.25
m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm (D) to the
rear cylinder head w i t h a bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then
attach the rear a r m (F) to the attachment arm.
28.4WD model: Remove the propeller shaft and propeller

shaft protectors (see page 16-44).
connector (A) and the harness clamps (B), remove the
front engine m o u n t stop (C), then remove the front
engine m o u n t bolt (D).
12x1.25 mm
74N-m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
Replace.
VSB02C000019
AAR-T1256
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
'
SIL02C000033

26. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-225).
27. Remove the front subframe stiffener plate (A).
10 x 1.25 m m
59 N m
(6.0 k g f m , 43 Ibfft)
Replace.
18-24
30. R e m o v e t h e rear engine m o u n t bolts (A) a n d
33. R e m o v e t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n l o w e r m o u n t bolts (A).
d i s c o n n e c t t h e r e a r e n g i n e m o u n t actuator c o n n e c t o r
(B).
42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
10x1.25 mm
42 N m
Replace.
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
34. A t t a c h t h e front s u b f r a m e a d a p t e r ( V S B 0 2 C 0 0 0 0 1 6 ) to
a t r a n s m i s s i o n j a c k , t h e n r a i s e u p the j a c k to t h e
s u b f r a m e (A). H a n g t h e belt (B) o v e r t h e front of t h e
s u b f r a m e , t h e n s e c u r e t h e belt by inserting t h e s t o p
(C) a n d t h e n tightening t h e w i n g nut.
31. R e m o v e t h e rear e n g i n e m o u n t f r o m the rear e n g i n e

m o u n t b a s e bracket, a n d m o v e it a s i d e .
3 2 . R e m o v e t h e g r o u n d c a b l e bolt (A) f r o m the
transmission.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
35. R a i s e t h e j a c k a n d line u p t h e s l o t s in t h e front

s u b f r a m e a d a p t e r a r m s w i t h t h e bolt h o l e s o n the j a c k
b a s e , t h e n s e c u r e l y attach t h e n w i t h four bolts.
(cont'd)
18-25
Front Suspension
36. Remove the stiffener mounting bolts (A) on both sides
of the front subframe front bracket (B).
4 1 . Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing holders

(B), then remove the bushings (C).
NOTE: During installation, align the paint marks (D)
on the stabilizer bar (E) w i t h the side of the bushings.
37. Loosen the front side subframe mounting bolts (C)

until there is 30 m m (1 3/16 in) distance between the
bolt seat and the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
m o u n t i n g bolts more than necessary.
38. Remove the stiffener mounting bolts (A) on both sides
of the front subframe rear bracket (B).
E
42. Move the stabilizer bar t o w a r d the passenger's side,

and remove the stabilizer bar.
43. Install the stabilizer bar.
NOTE:
Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
Note the direction of installation for the bushings.
39. Loosen the rear side subframe mounting bolts (C)

until there is 30 m m (1 3/16 in) distance between the
bolt seat and the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
mounting bolts more than necessary.
40. Lower the transmission jack slowly w i t h the front
subframe adapter until the front subframe has
dropped about 30 m m (1 3/16 in).
NOTE: Do not try to lower the front subframe beyond
the loosened subframe m o u n t i n g bolts clearance.
18-26
1
44. Loosely tighten the new left-rear subframe mounting
bolt (A) and the new stiffener m o u n t i n g bolt (B); insert
the subframe alignment pin (070AG-SJAA10S)
through the positioning hole (C) on the front subframe
rear bracket through the positioning hole (D) on the
subframe, and into the positioning hole (E) on the
body, then tighten the subframe m o u n t i n g bolt.
A
14 x 1.5 m m
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
070AG-SJAA10S
45. Loosely tighten the new right-rear subframe

m o u n t i n g bolt using the same procedure as the
left-rear w i t h the subframe alignment pin.
46. Loosely tighten the new subframe mounting bolt (A)
and the stiffener mounting bolts (B) on both sides to
the front subframe front bracket.
47. Tighten the rear-driver's side subframe mounting bolt

(A) t o the specified torque.
C
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m , 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m ,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N m
A
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m ,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
117 N-m
(11.9 k g f m ,
86.1 Ibfft)
Replace.
48. Tighten the rear-passenger's side subframe mounting

49. Tighten the front subframe m o u n t i n g bolts (C) to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Check all of the subframe m o u n t i n g bolts, and
retighten if necessary.
50. Tighten the front and rear stiffener m o u n t i n g bolts (D)
12 x 1.25 mm
A
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-27
Front Suspension
5 1 . Install all of the removed parts in the reverse order of
Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-20).
If the center guide is in place, use it to determine the
steering joint installation angle.
If the center guide is gone, check the steering joint
installation angle (see step 3 on page 17-12).
Check the steering wheel installation (see page
17-9).
W h e n connecting the front and rear engine mount,
first lightly tighten the mounting bolts, supporting
the engine/transmission w i t h a floor jack, then
remove the jack, and tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
surfaces on the brake disc and inside of the wheel.
Damper/Spring Removal and

Installation
Removal
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness (A) and the
brake hose (B) f r o m the damper (C). Do not
disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
8 x 1.25 mm

page 22-94), then turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
and check that the SRS indicator should come on for
about 6 seconds and then go off.
(see page 18-5).
18-28
4. Remove the flange nut (A), w h i l e holding the joint pin

(B) w i t h a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) f r o m the damper (E).
D
5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the flange
nuts (B) f r o m the damper.
NOTE: Do not allow the knuckle to rotate too far
outward. This may allow the driveshaft inboard joint
to come apart.
7. Remove the damper/spring (A).

NOTE:
The left and right damper springs are different.
Mark the springs L and R before you continue.
Be careful not to damage the body.
6. Remove the cowl top side cover (A), then remove the
flange nuts (B) f r o m the top of the damper. Do not let
the damper/spring drop d o w n under its o w n weight.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-29
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
3. Loosely install the new damper pinch bolts (A) and

the new flange nuts (B) to the damper.
1. Install the damper/spring (A) on to the frame. Note the

direction of the damper mounting base as shown.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
4. Connect the stabilizer link (A) to the damper (B), and

loosely install the flange nut (C).
2. Loosely install the new flange nuts (A) to the top of the
damper.
NOTE: Install the cowl top side cover (B) after
tightening the flange nuts to the specified torque.
5. Tighten the flange nut to the specified torque, while

holding the joint pin (D) with the hex wrench (E).
6. Place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
NOTE : Do not place the jack against the ball joint of
the lower arm.
7. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque.
8. Tighten the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts to
18-30
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
(see page 18-5).
18-31
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
DAMPER MOUNTING WASHER
SELF-LOCKING NUT
12 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Replace.
BUMP S T O P S L E E V E
BUMP S T O P
Check for weakness,
oil contamination, and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING

Check for any play or roughness.
UPPER SPRING S E A T
DAMPER SPRING
Check for damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
LOWER SPRING R U B B E R
Check for deterioration and damage.
18-32
0
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a
commercially available strut spring compressor (Branick
MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
Inspection
Disassembly
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check

for smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should
extend smoothly and constantly w h e n compression is
released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
damper should be replaced.
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the

self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft
with a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the damper
spring more than necessary to remove the
self-locking nut.
2. Release the pressure f r o m the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown
in the Exploded View.
1. Reassemble the damper mounting base, the damper

mounting washer, and the self-locking nut.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
(cont'd)
18-33
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the dust cover (B) by
aligning the upper end (C) of the damper spring w i t h
the ledge portion (D) of the dust cover.
5. Align the raised portion (A) of the lower spring rubber

and the hole (B) of the lower spring seat on the
damper unit (C).
NOTE : After reassembling the damper/spring, install
the dust cover (D) into the damper unit as s h o w n .
2. Install the lower spring rubber on the damper spring.

3. Install all the parts except the damper mounting
washer and the self-locking nut onto the damper unit
(A) by referring to the Exploded View.
6. Align the angle of the stud (A) on the damper

mounting base (B) and the damper bracket (C) so the
stamp (D) points t o w a r d the front.
Left
Right
FRONT
4. Compress the damper spring using a strut spring

compressor. Do not compress the spring excessively.
18-34
FRONT
D
7. Install the d a m p e r m o u n t i n g w a s h e r (A) a n d a n e w
self-locking nut (B).
8. Hold t h e d a m p e r shaft (C) u s i n g a h e x w r e n c h (D), a n d

tighten the self-locking nut to the s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e .
9. R e m o v e the d a m p e r / s p r i n g f r o m the strut s p r i n g
compressor.
18-35
Rear Suspension
Exploded View
12 x 1.25 m m
98.1 N-m
(10.0 k g f m , 72.3 Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 m m
98.1 N-m
(10.0 k g f m , 72.3 Ibfft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and damage.
WASHERS
Check for deformation and damage.
PARKING BRAKE S H O E
ASSEMBLY
FLAT S C R E W
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
BACKING PLATE
Check for corrosion, deformation,
and damage.
Replace if rusted.
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Check for faulty
movement and wear.
REAR BRAKE DISC/DRUM

Check for wear, damage, and rust.
SPINDLE NUT
24 x 1.5 m m
245 N-m
(25.0 k g f m , 181 Ibfft)
Replace.
Apply a small amount of

engine oil to the seating surface
of the nut.
18-36

Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
5. Remove the t w o washers (A).

NOTE: During installation, make sure the washers are
installed between the brake caliper bracket and the
knuckle.

2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel.
6.4WD model: Raise the stake (A), then remove the

spindle nut (B).
A
14 x 1.5 mm
127 N m
3. Release the parking brake lever fully.

4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (A),
then remove the caliper assembly (B) f r o m the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly f r o m the undercarriage. Do not
twist the brake hose excessively.
7. Remove the rear brake disc/drum (see page 19-30).
(cont'd)
18-37
Rear Suspension
8.2WD model: Remove the flange bolts (A), and remove
the hub bearing unit (B).
11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of

4WD model: Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
4WD model: Before installing the spindle nut, apply
a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface
on the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake disc/drum.
surfaces on the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
(10.0 k g f m , 72.3 Ibfft)
9.4WD model: Remove the flange bolts (A), and remove

the hub bearing unit (B) by tapping the driveshaft end
(C) w i t h a soft face hammer while drawing the hub
bearing unit outward.
NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
18-38

(see page 18-5).
n
5. Position a floor jack under lower arm B. Raise the floor
jack until the suspension begins to compress.
Knuckle Replacement
NOTE: The illustrations show 4WD model.
07AAF-SD AA100
07MAC-SL0A202
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.

2. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A)
f r o m the knuckle.
12 x 1.25 mm
59-69 Nm
(6.0-7.0 kgfm,
4 3 - 5 1 Ibfft)
B
12x1.25 mm
98.1 N m
(10.0 k g f m ,
72.3 Ibfft)
A
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m ,
16 Ibfft)
3. Remove the flange nuts (B), then remove the backing

plate (C) w i t h the parking brake shoe assembly. To
prevent damage t o the backing plate with the parking
brake shoes assembly and cable, use a short piece of
wire to hang the backing plate f r o m the
undercarriage. Do not twist the parking brake cable
excessively.
then remove the castle nut (C).
shown after tightening the castle nut.
7. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint f r o m the knuckle
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) f r o m the knuckle

(B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor
connector.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
18-39
Rear Suspension
the flange bolt (D), then remove lower a r m A.
NOTE:
10. Remove the flange bolt (A), then remove the

knuckle (B).
NOTE: Use the new flange bolt during reassembly.
During installation, position the paint mark (E) on

lower arm A t o w a r d the outside of the vehicle.
Use a new self-locking nut and the new flange bolt,
during reassembly.
D
14 x 1.5 m m
93 N m
(9.5 k g f m , 69 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
14 x 1.5 m m
113 N m
(11.5 k g f m , 83.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
11. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
B
14
113
(11.5 k g f m , 83.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
9. Remove the flange nuts (A) f r o m the trailing a r m (B).

NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly.
12 x 1.25 mm
118 N m (12 k g f m , 86.8 Ibfft)
Replace.

suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque.
Before connecting the ball j o i n t , degrease the
castle nut.
specification, then tighten it only far enough t o
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
18-40
Upper Arm Removal/Installation

6. Remove the upper arm mounting bolt (A), and

remove the upper arm (B).
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during
reassembly.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

s h o w n after tightening the castle nut.
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N m
(9.5 k g f m , 69 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal,

joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, the threaded
section and the mating surfaces of the castle nut.
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
5. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint f r o m the knuckle

18-41
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
1. Raise the vehicle o n a lift (see page 1 -8).

t
f l a n
b o l t
'
NOTE.
During installation, position the paint mark (E) on
lower arm A t o w a r d outside of the vehicle.
5. Install lower arm A in the reverse order of removal,

suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's weight
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
18-42
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation


3. Remove the muffler (A) f r o m the muffler hangers (B).
(11.5 k g f m , 83.2 Ibfft)

Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) f r o m the bottom of the

damper.
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin
(C) w i t h a hex wrench (D), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (E) f r o m lower arm B.
NOTE: Use the new flange nut during reassembly.

7. Remove the flange bolt (C) f r o m the knuckle.
8. Lower the floor jack gradually.
(cont'd)
18-43
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation (cont'd)
9. Remove the spring (A), and the lower spring seat (C).
NOTE: During installation, align the bottom of the
spring with the stepped part of the lower spring seat
and lower arm B as s h o w n .
10. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and
the adjusting cam plate (C) w i t h the frame.
11. Remove the self-locking nut (D) while holding the

adjusting bolt, then remove the adjusting cam plate,
the adjusting bolt, and lower a r m B.
NOTE: Use a new adjusting bolt and a new selflocking nut during reassembly.
12. Install lower arm B in the reverse order of removal,
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's w e i g h t
before fully tightening t o the specified torque.
Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the
adjusting cam plate w i t h the marked positions on
the frame w h e n tightening the self-locking nut.
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
18-44
D
7. Remove the flange nuts (A) f r o m the trailing arm (B).
NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly.

3. Remove the parking brake cable f r o m the backing
plate (see page 19-45).
4. Remove the parking brake cable nut (A) f r o m the
trailing a r m (B).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m ,
16 Ibfft)
Replace.
5. Disconnect the brake line (A) f r o m the brake hose (B),

then remove the brake hose clip (C).
NOTE:
Plug the end of a hose and joint to prevent spilling
brake fluid.
Use the new brake hose clip during reassembly.
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
6. Remove the wheel sensor harness bolt (D).
(cont'd)
18-45
Rear Suspension
(cont'd)
8. Remove the flange bolts (A) f r o m the trailing a r m ,

then remove the trailing a r m .
NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly.

3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut (C)
while holding the respective joint pin (D) w i t h a hex
wrench (E), then remove the stabilizer link (F).
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N m (10.5 k g f m , 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
9. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal,

Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8).
Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the M A X (upper)
level line, and bleed the brake system (see page
19-9). Check for a leak at the brake hose/line joint,
and retighten it if necessary.
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (G) and

lower arm B w i t h the joint pins set at the center of
their range of movement.
NOTE:
The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). The left
stabilizer link is marked w i t h yellow paint, and the
right stabilizer link is marked w i t h white paint.
Install the end of the stabilizer link w i t h the paint
mark in the upper position.
5. Install a new self-locking nut and the new flange nut,
and tighten them to the specified torque while
holding the respective joint pin w i t h a hex w r e n c h .
6. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum and
the inside of the w h e e l , then install the rear wheel.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking nut
again to the specified torque.
18-46

7. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing holders

(B), then remove the bushings (C) and the stabilizer
bar(D).

3. Remove the spare tire f r o m the vehicle.
4. Remove the spare tire hoist (A) and the tire support
bracket (B).
NOTE: During installation, align the paint marks (E) on

the stabilizer bar w i t h the side of the bushings.
6 x 1.0 m m
8. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of

Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
Refer to the stabilizer link removal/installation to

connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-46).
the wheel.
Do not set the bushings o n the bent or curved part
of the stabilizer bar.
(see page 18-5).
6. Disconnect both sides of the stabilizer link f r o m the

stabilizer bar (see page 18-46).
18-47
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement
Removal
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) and the nut (B) f r o m the
t o p of the damper.

7. Compress the damper unit (C) by hand, and remove it

f r o m the vehicle.

damper.
18-48
1
Inspection
Installation
1. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check

for smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should
extend s m o o t h l y and constantly w h e n compression is
released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
damper should be replaced.
1. Position the damper unit (A) between the body and

lower a r m B.
10x1.25 m m
44 N-m
(4.5 k g f m ,
33 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m ,
33 Ibfft)
2. Loosely install the new flange bolt (C) and the nut (D)
to the t o p of the damper.
2. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
during these tests.
3. Raise the floor jack until the hole in lower arm B aligns
w i t h the hole in the damper, then loosely install the
new flange bolt (A) to the bottom of the damper.
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-49
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
4. Connect the stabilizer link (A) to lower arm B, and
install the new flange nut (C), and tighten the flange
nut to the specified torque, while holding the joint pin
(D) w i t h the hex wrench (E).
5. Raise the rear suspension with the floor jack to load

the suspension w i t h the vehicle's weight.
6. Tighten the flange bolt and the nut on top of the
damper to the specified torque.
7. Tighten the flange bolt on bottom of the damper to
(see page 18-5).
18-50
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
18-51
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
jack until the suspension begins t o compress.
Removal
A
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.

damper.
7. Remove the flange bolt (C) f r o m the knuckle.
10 x 1.25 mm
18-52
8. Lower the floor jack gradually.

9. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B).
D
10. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the body,
and remove the b u m p stop (B), the spring guide (C),
and the spring m o u n t i n g cushion (D) if necessary.
Installation
1. Install the b u m p stop (A), the spring guide (B), and the
spring mounting cushion (C), then tighten the flange
bolt (D) to the specified torque if removed.
2. Install the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (C).
Align the bottom of the spring w i t h the stepped part of
the lower spring seat and lower arm B as s h o w n .
(cont'd)
18-53
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Position the floor jack under lower arm B. Raise the
floor jack until the hole in lower a r m B aligns w i t h the
hole in the damper, then loosely install the new flange
bolt (A) t o the bottom of the damper.
8. Install the muffler (A) to the muffler hangers (B).
A
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
113 N m
(11.5 k g f m , 83.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
4. Loosely install the new flange bolt (C) to the knuckle.

5. Connect the stabilizer link (A) to lower arm B, and
install the new flange nut (C), and tighten the flange
nut to the specified torque, while holding the joint pin
(D) w i t h the hex wrench (E).
10 x 1.25 m m
49 N m
(5.0 k g f m ,
36 Ibfft)
6. Raise the rear suspension w i t h the floor jack to load

the suspension with the vehicle's weight.
7. Tighten the flange bolts t o the specified torque.
18-54

(see page 18-5).
Suspension
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
Initiator Replacement
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
18-56
18-57
18-62
18-64
18-66
18-67
18-74
18-77
18-96
18-101
18-102
18-103
TPMS
T P M S CONTROL UNIT
TIRE P R E S S U R E S E N S O R
18-56
^TPMS

System Indicator Location - Without MID
System Indicator Location - With MID
The system has six indicators.
The system has seven indicators.
The low tire pressure indicator (A)
The low tire pressure indicator (A)
The TPMS indicator (B)
The message indicator (B)
The right-front (RF) tire indicator (C)
The TPMS indicator (C)
The left-front (LF) tire indicator (D)
The right-front (RF) tire indicator (D)
The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (E)
The left-front (LF) tire indicator (E)
The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (F)
The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (F)

The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (G)
(cont'd)
18-57
TPMS
The Low Tire Pressure indicator - Without
MID
If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the
four tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire indicator(s) come o n .
If the control unit detects a problem in the system
during an indication of low tire pressure, it will turn off
the low tire indicator and tire indicator(s), store the
DTC(s), and t u r n on the TPMS indicator.
The Low Tire Pressure Indicator - With MID

If the system detects l o w tire pressure in any of the
four tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire indicator(s) come o n , as well as the
message indicator.
If the control unit detects a problem in the system
during an indication of low tire pressure, it will turn off
the tire indicator(s), store the DTC(s), and turn on the
TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure indicator
after blinking.
The TPMS Indicator - Without MID

If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS
indicator comes on.
If l o w tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, the TPMS indicator comes on.
If the system is OK, the TPMS indicator, the low tire
pressure indicator, and the four tire indicators should
come on w h e n y o u turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and
then go off 2 seconds later. If they don't, there is a
problem w i t h the system.
The TPMS Indicator - With MID

If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS
indicator comes o n , as well as the message indicator,
and the l o w tire pressure indicator comes on after
blinking for about 75 seconds.
If l o w tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, the TPMS indicator comes o n , as well as the
message indicator, and the low tire pressure indicator
comes on after blinking for about 75 seconds.
If the system is OK, the l o w tire pressure indicator
should come on w h e n y o u turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), and then go off 2 seconds later. If they don't, there is
a problem w i t h the system.
18-58
DTC 11,13,15,17 - Without MID

If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the four
tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate
tire indicator(s) come o n , and the control unit sets one or
more of these codes: DTC 1 1 , 1 3 , 1 5 , 1 7 . W h e n the tire
pressure returns to n o r m a l , and TPMS control unit
receives the normal pressure signal f r o m the tire
pressure sensor, control unit turns off the indicators.
DTC 11,13,15,17 - With MID

If the system detects l o w tire pressure in any of the four
tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate
tire indicator(s) w i t h the message indicator come o n ,
and the control unit sets one or more of these codes:
DTC 1 1 , 1 3 , 1 5 , 1 7 . W h e n the tire pressure returns to
normal, and TPMS control unit receives the normal
pressure signal f r o m the tire pressure sensor, control
unit turns off the indicators.
Tire Pressure Changing by Temperature
Problems That Are Not System Faults
Tire pressures increase slightly as the temperature in the

tires rises during driving. Pressures can also increase or
decrease slightly w i t h changes in outside air
temperature.
A temperature change of about 18 F (10 C) changes tire
pressure by about 10 kPa (0.1 k g f / c m , 1 . 5 psi). Ifthe
temperature drops, tire pressure could decrease enough
to turn on the low tire pressure indicator, but later, the
tire temperature could increase enough to turn the
indicator off. To resolve a complaint of such intermittent
indications, confirm and clear the stored DTC(s), and
check the tire pressures.
Then explain to the customer h o w temperature changes
can affect the system.
Tire Sealant
psi
(kgf/cm*, kPa)
38
(2.6,
_ _ _ ^ ^ ^ _ _ _ ^ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
260)
Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can

damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each
wheel. It can prevent the system f r o m detecting the
correct tire pressure, which sets a DTC 11,13,15, or 17
even though the system is normal.
Cold Weather
When the weather is extremely cold , about 40 F
(40 C) or c o l d e r , the output of the lithium battery in
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31,
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal.
Non-TPMS Wheels (Including Spare Tire)
Vehicles equipped w i t h TPMS must use wheels made
for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive
mark; do not use any other type of wheel (see page
18-71).
W h e n a flat tire is replaced w i t h the spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on (DTC 32,34, 36 or 38)
because the system is no longer receiving the signal
f r o m the flat tire's transmitter.
This is not a problem w i t h the spare tire.
(1.6,160)
20
(1.4,
140)
-20
20
40
60
-4
32
68
104
140
(cont'd)
18-59
TPMS
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set
- Without MID
When the system detects a problem, the TPMS control
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does
not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
Ifthe TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the
TPMS indicator comes o n , but no DTCs are set.
The m e m o r y can hold all the DTCs that could possibly
be set. However, w h e n the same DTC is detected more
than once, the most recent one overwrites the
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is
stored.
DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the order
they occurred.
Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and follow the screen prompts.
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set

-With MID
W h e n the system detects a problem, the TPMS control
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does
not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the
TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure indicator
(starts blinking) comes o n , but no DTCs are set.
The m e m o r y can hold all the DTCs that could possibly
be set. However, w h e n the same DTC is detected more
than once, the most recent one overwrites the
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is
stored.
DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the order
they occurred.
Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
m e m o r y ) , and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
18-60
How to Troubleshoot DTCs - Without MID

DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is still
on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
system has set the DTC listed for it.
NOTE: For DTCs 11,13,15, and 17 (tire l o w tire pressure),
the TPMS indicator comes on only i f t h e DTCs are
caused by a system problem rather than l o w tire
pressure.
1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions w h e n the
indicator came o n , and try to reproduce the same
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out i f t h e
customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
since the indicator came o n .
2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-drive
the vehicle . Make sure no indicators come o n .
4. Check for DTCs f r o m other control units that are
connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that
the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) w i t h the
TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clear the
DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
troubleshoot those first.
How to Troubleshoot DTCs - With MID
How to Retrieve DTCs
DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of

the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator and
the low tire pressure indicator (starts blinking) are still
on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
system has set the DTC listed for it.

(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link connector
(DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard.
NOTE: For DTCs 11,13,15, and 17 (tire low tire pressure),

the TPMS indicator comes on and the low tire pressure
indicator blinks only if the DTCs are caused by a system
problem rather than low tire pressure.
1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when the
indicators came on or blinked, and try to reproduce
the same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if
the customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
since the indicator came on.
2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-drive
the vehicle for 3 minutes at 15mph (24km/h) or more.
Make sure no indicators come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other control units that are
connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that
the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the
TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clear the
DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
troubleshoot those first.

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11 -226).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s)
on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the
DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
(cont'd)
18-61
TPMS
General Troubleshooting
Information (cont'd)
Memorizing the Tire Pressure

Sensor ID
How to Clear DTCs
Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor ID
1. W i t h the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS

to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
dash on the driver's side of the dashboard.
W h e n a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor ID

must be memorized by the TPMS control unit.
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct
ID, the vehicle w i t h the new sensor must be at least 10 ft
(3 m) away f r o m any other TPMS pressure sensor not
installed on that vehicle.
Memorizing a Sensor ID Automatically

After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure
sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 m p h (24 km/h) or m o r e , and all the sensor
IDs are memorized automatically.
NOTE:
W h e n replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HDS to
memorize IDs.
After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in all
four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire indicators come o n .
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts o n
the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help m e n u for specific
instructions.
18-62
Memorize the ID with the HDS

T h e H D S c a n m e m o r i z e the ID of a n e w tire p r e s s u r e
s e n s o r o r a p r e v i o u s l y m e m o r i z e d ID.
1. W i t h the ignition s w i t c h in L O C K (0), c o n n e c t the H D S
to the d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) (A) located u n d e r t h e
d r i v e r ' s s i d e of the d a s h b o a r d .
A
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
3. M a k e s u r e the H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h the v e h i c l e
a n d t h e T P M S control unit. If it d o e s n ' t , t r o u b l e s h o o t
the D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
4. M e m o r i z e t h e ID of the tire p r e s s u r e s e n s o r by
following the s c r e e n prompts on the H D S .
NOTE:
S e e t h e H D S Help m e n u for s p e c i f i c i n s t r u c t i o n s .
W h e n r e p l a c i n g t h e T P M S control unit, u s e the H D S
to m e m o r i z e IDs.
After the IDs a r e m e m o r i z e d , r e d u c e the p r e s s u r e in
all four tires to l e s s t h a n the a p p r o p r i a t e
s p e c i f i c a t i o n , a n d c h e c k to s e e that t h e four tire
indicators c o m e on.
5. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).
18-63
TPMS
DTC
11
Detection Item
Right-front Tire Low Air Pressure
13
Left-front Tire Low Air Pressure
15
Right-rear Tire Low Air Pressure
17
Left-rear Tire Low Air Pressure
21
Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor A b n o r m a l l y High Temperature
22
Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature
23
Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor A b n o r m a l l y High Temperature
24
Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor A b n o r m a l l y High Temperature
31
Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage
32
Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure
33
Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage
34
Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure
35
Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage
36
Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure
37
Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage
38
Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure
41
A b n o r m a l Signal Reception Error
45
Initiator Circuit Short Detection
51
Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error
53
Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error
55
Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error
57
Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error
61
Right-front Initiator Circuit Open Detection
63
Left-front Initiator Circuit Open Detection
65
Right-rear Initiator Circuit Open Detection
67
Left-rear Initiator Circuit Open Detection
18-64
Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting (see
18-77)
18-77)
18-77)
18-77)
18-78)
18-78)
18-78)
18-78)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-79)
18-84)
18-85)
18-87)
18-87)
18-87)
18-87)
18-91)
18-91)
18-91)
18-91)
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
DTC
81
Detection Item
TPMS Control Unit Failure
83
No VSP Signal
85
F-CAN Communication Failure
91
Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error
93
Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error
95
Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error
97
Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error
Troubleshooting
18-93)
18-94)
18-95)
18-96)
18-96)
18-96)
18-96)
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
18-65
TPMS
Symptom
HDS does not communicate w i t h the TPMS
control unit or the vehicle
Low tire pressure indicator does not come
o n , and no DTCs are stored (without MID)
Low tire pressure indicator does not come
o n , and no DTCs are stored (with MID)
Low tire pressure indicator does not go off,
and no DTCs are stored (without MID)
and no DTCs are stored (with MID)
TPMS indicator does not come o n , and no
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no
DTCs are stored
18-66
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-226)
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 18-96)
Also check for

Faulty data link
cable
S y s t e m
D e s c r i p t i o n
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector
/ / 4 5 6 7 8 / 10
11
/ / / 15 16 17 / / 20
Terminal
number
Wire color
WHT
BLK
GRN
LF LF SIG. (LF low

frequency signal)
LT GRN
RFLFSIG.(RFIow
frequency signal)
LT BLU
PNK
K-LINE (Data link

connector)
IG1 (Ignition
switch 1)
10
YEL
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
CAN H (F-CAN
communication
signal high)
GND (Ground)
+ B (Battery
positive)
Description
F-CAN
communication
circuit
Ground for the
TPMS control
unit
Detects the signal
f r o m the
left-front initiator
Detects the signal
f r o m the
right-front
initiator
Communications
with the HDS
Power source for
activating the
system
Power source for
the TPMS control
unit
Signal
Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
Less than 0.1 V at ail times
For the first 5 seconds after turning the ignition

switch to ON (II): pulses 4 . 5 - 6 . 5 V
After 40 seconds w i t h ignition switch ON (II): less
than 0.1V
switch ON (II): pulses 4 . 5 - 6 . 5 V
than 0.1V
Ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage (about 12V)

Ignition switch in LOCK (0): less than 0.1 V
Battery voltage (about 12V) at all times
(cont'd)
18-67
TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector (cont'd)
//
n
4
n
5
/I
10
20
15 16 17
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
CAN L (F-CAN
communication
signal low)
LF GND (LF low
frequency
ground)
LR LF SIG. (LR
low frequency
signal)
Detects the signal

f r o m the left-rear
initiator
GRY
RR LF SIG. (RR
l o w frequency
signal)
Detects the signal

f r o m the right-rear
initiator
BRN
LF PWR. (LF low

frequency
power)
Power source for

the initiators
Terminal
number
11
Wire color
15
LT BLU
16
GRN
17
20
18-68
RED
Description
F-CAN
communication
circuit
Ground for the
initiators
Signal
Ignition switch ON (II): pulses

switch ON (II): less than 0.1V
than 0.1V
than 0.1V
switch ON (ll).pulses 0.36.5 V
After 40 seconds w i t h ignition switch ON (II): About
0.3 V
System Structure
Without MID: Whenever the engine is running, the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tire pressure
sensors and the system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator. If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator.
With MID: Whenever the engine is running, the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tire pressure sensors
and the system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure indicator
and the appropriate tire indicator. If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator and the low tire
pressure indicator (starts blinking).
Initiators
Mounted on each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below it.
Control unit
Mounted behind the gauge control module, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals f r o m the
tire pressure sensor to verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals f r o m the
transmitters inside the tire pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators - Without MID
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The l o w tire pressure indicator, the four tire indicators to show which tire
is affected, and the TPMS indicator that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. When t w o or more tire
pressures are low, the low tire pressure indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once
low pressure is detected, the system scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the correct tire indicator.
Without MID
Initiator
(low frequency)
Vehicle
Initiator
(low frequency)
Gauge Control Module
6 Indicators
(LED drive)
Tire Pressure Sensor
(sensor-transmitter)
Communication
via F-CAN

Control Unit
(with radio
frequency antenna)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
(senso r-tra nsm itte r)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
(cont'd)
18-69
TPMS
Indicators - With MID
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low tire pressure indicator (LED indicator), the four tire indicators (on
the multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display)
that comes on only if there's a problem w i t h the system. The message indicator (LED indicator) comes on w h e n there is
one or more indicator(s) in the multi-information display. W h e n t w o or more tire pressures are low, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the system
scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the correct tire indicator.
With MID
Initiator
(low frequency)
Initiator
(low frequency)
Vehicle

Indicators
(LED and multiinformation
display drive)

Communication
via F-CAN
Control Unit
(with radio
I frequency antenna) I
Wheel
(TPMS type)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
18-70
Wheel
(TPMS type)
Wheel
(TPMS type)
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the w h e e l , around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information one time
per 60 seconds to the control unit. W h e n the TPMS control unit receives a tire pressure reading of less than 175 kPa
(1.8 kgf/cm , 25 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s)
indicator. W h e n that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,29 psi), the transmitter sends the tire
pressure reading to the control unit, and the control unit turns the indicators off.
2
Wheels
The TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. There are three different types of wheels
used:
Type 1 (aluminum wheel): The original equipment wheels have a " T P M S " mark (A) on t h e m , and are counterweighted
(B) by adding material opposite the valve stem hole to counterbalance the weight of the tire pressure sensor (C).
Type 2 (aluminum wheel): The original equipment wheels have a " T P M S " mark (A) on t h e m , and are counterweighted
(B) by adding material opposite the valve stem hole to counterbalance the weight of the tire pressure sensor (C).
Type 3 (steel wheel): The original equipment wheels have a " S Z A " mark (A) on t h e m , and a counterweight (B)
balances the weight of the tire pressure sensor (C) by a size difference in the drain hole.
Type 1 (aluminum wheel)

B
(cont'd)
18-71
TPMS
System Communication
When the vehicle is running, a RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted f r o m each tire pressure sensor to
the control unit.
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the initiators send a LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them f r o m sleep mode to normal function mode. W h e n the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0), the sensors switch f r o m normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
Each tire pressure sensor has its o w n ID to prevent j a m m i n g by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
A n ID can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every time the
ignition is turned to ON (II), the control unit asks each initiator to wake up the appropriate tire pressure sensor. The
transmitters in the tire pressure sensors then transmit the sensor IDs, and the control unit receives, and memorizes
t h e m . The control unit then knows which ID belongs to each tire location. This recurring ID confirmation prevents any
confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and the front/rear initiators. Misalignment of the
control unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
18-72
18-73
TPMS
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
\y
^
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.1(120A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.4 (50 A)
<TVf>
G18
GRN -
No. 20 (7.5 A)
<T\D
R3
YEL-
IGNITION SWITCH
No.2(50 A)
WHT
BLU
/jGTN
K> o)
PNK
D2
No. 8 (7.5 A)
<T\D
PNK-
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)

POWER CIRCUIT
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR
30
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
MESSAGE INDICATOR
WHT -
WHT
-RED-
RED -
29
TPMS INDICATOR
LF TIRE INDICATOR
RF TIRE INDICATOR
LR TIRE INDICATOR
RR TIRE INDICATOR
Fir
TPMS INDICATOR
-WV
1
-1
A48
WHT - RED -
(@)
LF TIRE INDICATOR
RF TIRE INDICATOR
LR TIRE INDICATOR
(@)
WHT - REDDATA LINK

CONNECTOR (DLC)
RR TIRE INDICATOR
LT BLU - BLK
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Without MID
- BLK
V
G403
18-74
1
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
10
YEL-
PNK
IG1
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
11
REDCANL
INITIATOR
20
LEFT-FRONT
LF SIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
BRN-
LF PWR.
2
' GRN
LF PWR.
5
LF LF SIG.
LF GND
LT BLU
BRN
RIGHT-FRONT
I
LF SIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
LF PWR.
2
-BRN
LTGRN RF LF SIG.
LF GND
- LT BLU O-WV^-~^
LT BLU
LEFT-REAR
LF SIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
LF PWR.
2
-GRN LR LF SIG.
LT BLU -
LT BLU
RIGHT-REAR
,
1
LF SIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
LF PWR.
2
BRN GRY LTBLU -
LT BLU
LT BLU -
G403
BLK
WW*-4
RR LF SIG.
15
LF GND
7
K-LINE
4
GND
-m-
:12V
O-
:5V
(cont'd)
18-75
TPMS
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

CONNECTOR M (10P)
5 6
7 | /

CONNECTOR R (20P)
_n_
3 4
6
12 13
//
7 8 9 10
16
18
// /
rI
fl
8 | 9 10 11 12 1 3 | 1 4 / 1 6
1 | 2 / / '5
6 ,/
17 18 19 ,20 21 2; 2 23 24
27 28 29 30
32
25
2_<
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
'1/1/
<ani>
f]
i
4 5 I6 7 8
"15'
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
/ 10
16 17 2.Z
20
VWI 1 1 1 F7
4
f l M | 2 j 3 l 4 l 5 | 6 1 7 1 8 1911011)
T I11LXI1314|151617|1819j20l21|
22
2 5 ^ 26 2728
24
2930 31|32|33|34l35l36j 3 7 3 8 3 9
140141j^1^|44 | ^ | 4 6 j ^ | 4 8 l 4 9 |
1
18-76
\9|/|/|12|/|14|/|16/
20
1
~
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11,13,15,17: Tire Low Air Pressure
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit
sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the low tire
pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s). If
the low tire pressure and tire indicators come on
because of a low tire pressure, and the customer
corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, the DTCs will be
stored, but all the indicators turn off.
TPMS
4. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE in the

TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the HDS, and compare it w i t h
the measured actual tire pressure.
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch t o LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 t u r n , then turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and t r y again. If UNDEFINED is still
displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is
shown.

2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire
pressure listed on the doorjamb sticker.
Does the low tire pressure indicator go off ?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for and
repair the cause of air l o s s . H
N O - G o to step 4
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa

(0.4 kgf/cm , 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
2
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections

at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-101),
and r e c h e c k .
NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
mounted. If the mounting is OK, then replace the
appropriate tire pressure sensor (see page 18-103).H
18-77
TPMS
DTC 21,22,23,24: Tire Pressure Sensor
Abnormally High Temperature
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (il).
2. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs y o u retrieved.
NOTE: A n abnormal rise in the internal temperature of
the tires can be caused by:
Excessive braking
Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires only)
Leaving the vehicle running while parked
Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
DTC
21
22
23
24
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

4. Make sure the tires have cooled d o w n .
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one minute?

YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC w i t h
the H D S . B
NO-Go to step 6.
18-78
6. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is s h o w n on the sensor
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
shown.
Is 176 F (80 C) or more indicated?

YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 1 8 - 1 0 3 ) .
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
and recheck.H
DTC 31,33,35,37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low

Battery Voltage
NOTE: This problem occurs w h e n the temperature
around the sensor is 40 F (40 C) or less. Note that
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient
temperature is 4 F (20 C) or more.
DTC 32,34,36,38: Tire Pressure Sensor Signal

Failure
NOTE:
inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
an inverter, battery charger, etc) interfering w i t h the
RF signal f r o m the sensors w h e n turning the ignition
switch is ON (II).
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one minute?
Vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at 15 m p h

(24 km/h) or more for DTC 32, 34,36, or 38 to set.

the H D S . I
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON(II).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the DTC indicated to the tire location to make

sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure
sensor.
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

BATTERY VOLTAGE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
shown.
DTC
31
33
35
37
is LOW
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
indicated?

(see page 1 8 - 1 0 3 ) .
and recheck.B
DTC
32
34
36
38
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure

mounted on the vehicle?
sensor
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 m p h (24 km/h)
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID with
the HDS (see page 18-62).
4. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
18-79
TPMS
Is DTC 85
Indicated?
YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-95).B
and r e c h e c k .
10. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to NORMAL
w i t h the HDS.
switch t o ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
shown.
DTC
32
34
36
38
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

12. Substitute a wheel w i t h a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle.
13. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 m p h (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the ID w i t h the HDS (see page 18-62).
16. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE
w i t h the HDS.
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 t u r n , then t u r n the ignition
shown.
DTC
32
34
36
38
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire?
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the original

wheel (see page 18-103).B
YES-The system is OK at this t i m e . Clear the DTC w i t h
NO-Go to step 17.
the HDS.B
NO-Go to step 11.
18-80
18. Substitute an initiator f r o m a known-good location on

the current vehicle, or f r o m another known-good
vehicle (see page 18-102).
w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: if UNDEFINED is s h o w n on the sensor
shown.
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
32
34
36
38

5 6 7 8 |/110
11 l/1XMl5ll6ll7lXl/[20
LF PWR.
(BRN)
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
32
34
36
38
Is NORMAL
24. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 20P

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 20 and the appropriate
i n i t i a t o r 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.
(XT) LF PWR.
^
(BRN)
RIGHTREAR
indicated within one full turn of the tire?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the appropriate initiator (see page

18-102).
LF PWR. (BRN)
1 1 2 | 3 > LEFT-REAR
NO-Go to step 2 1 .
LF PWR. (BRN)
O M 3 > RIGHT-FRONT
22. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.

LF PWR. (BRN)
DTC
32
34
36
38
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
m">
LEFT-FRONT
NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the appropriate i n i t i a t o r . B
(cont'd)
18-81
TPMS
connectorterminal No. 15 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3.
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
32
34
36
38
T P M S CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

//
1
4 5 6 7 8 / 1 0
1 1 / / / 1 5 16 17
20
//
26. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS

control unit 20P connectorterminal and the
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2.
TPMS Control
Unit 20P
Connector
Terminal
No. 6
No. 5
No. 17
No. 16
DTC
32
34
36
38
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
<2!>
JUL
RF LF SIG.
(LT GRN)
LF LF SIG. (GRN)
^
O)
|
LF GND (LT BLU)
| FL
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT < i [ 7 | 3 >
RIGHT-FRONT ^ | 2 | 3
11
LF GND (LT BLU)
LEFT-REAR
RF LF SIG. (LT GRN)
LF LF SIG. (GRN)
LF GND (LT BLU)
<117|3>
8 1/110
5 6
15 16ll7lXl/l20
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
RR LF SIG. (GRY)
LF GND (LT BLU)

RIGHT-REAR
< i J T | 2>
RR LF SIG.
(GRY)
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
control unit and the appropriate initiator.B
LEFT-REAR
RIGHT-REAR
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the TPMS
18-82

appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector
terminal.
TPMS Control Unit 20P
Connector Terminal
No.6
No.5
No. 17
No. 16
DTC
32
34
36
38

LF LF SIG. (GRN)
RF LF SIG. (LT GRN)

terminal.
TPMS Control Unit20P
Connector Terminal
No.6
No.5
No. 17
No. 16
DTC
32
34
36
38

LF LF SIG. (GRN)
RF LF SIG. (LT GRN)
/ / 4 5156167 8 / 1020
1 7 / /
///
1
11
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
RR LF SIG. (GRY)
11
15 16 17
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
10
20
RR LF SIG. (GRY)

the TPMS control unit and the appropriate i n i t i a t o r . !

TPMS control unit and the appropriate i n i t i a t o r . !
NO-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-101).
18-83
TPMS
DTC 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error
NOTE:
Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
an inverter, battery charger, etc) interfering w i t h the
RF signal f r o m the sensors w h e n turning the ignition
switch is ON (II).
If DTC 3 2 , 3 4 , 3 6 , or 38 is also set, troubleshoot those
DTCs first.
sensor
NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID w i t h
w i t h the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed
indicated?
NO-Go to step 5.
18-84
Is DTC 85
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-95).B
and recheck.B
2. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the TPMS
type w i t h the tire pressure sensor.
Is each wheel a TPMS type with a tire pressure

10. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, and RR TIRE
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL
w i t h the HDS.
shown.
Y E S - T h e system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC w i t h
the H D S . B
and recheck.B
DTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection

9. Check for continuity between body ground and TPMS

control u n i t 2 0 P connectorterminal No. 20.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) again.
Is DTC 45
' 4
1 1 /
//
r-r
5 6 7 *
10
' 1 5 16 17 / / 2 0
LF PWR. (BRN)
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

7. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
the TPMS control unit and the initiators.B
NO-Go to step 10.
/ / 4 5156167178 / 1020
///
//
1
11
LF PWR. (BRN)
10. Plug in one initiator at a t i m e , and check for continuity

between body ground and initiator 3P connector
terminal No. 1.
NOTE: Check the initiators w h e n mounted on the
vehicle.
YES-Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-102).B
and recheck.B
(cont'd)
18-85
TPMS
14. On each individual initiator, check for continuity

between initiator 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3.
n
n
4 5 6 7 8
1
1 1 / / / 15 16 17
//
LF GND
(LT BLU)
10
20
LF PWR. (BRN)
LF PWR.
L F GND
YES-Go to step 12.

18-102).
12. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.

and recheck.B
16. Measure the voltage between body g r o u n d and TPMS
control unit20P connectorterminal No. 15.
4 5 6 7 8
10
11 MXIXh5ll6ll7lXly [20
LF GND
(LT BLU)
LF PWR. (BRN)
T 7 /
'4| | |7
/ / 15 16
5
H A
LFGND
(LT BLU)
_r
8 /|10
20
17^_Z
YES-Repair short in the wire between TPMS control
unit 20P connector terminals No. 15 (LF GND line) and
No. 20 (LF PWR. line).B
Is there battery
YES-Repair short to power in the w i r e between the

TPMS control unit and the initiators.B
voltage?

and recheck.B
18-86
DTC 51, 53,55,57: Tire Pressure Sensor

Registration Error
NOTE: These DTCs will only set during initialization w i t h
the HDS.
2. Check the DTC indicated to the tire location to make
sure the wheel is a TPMS type w i t h the tire pressure
sensor.
DTC
51
53
55
57
sensor
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lnstall a TPMS type w h e e l , and memorize the
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID w i t h

shown.
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
51
53
55
57
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure


w i t h the HDS.
Is NORMAL

the H D S . B
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Substitute a wheel w i t h a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle.
7. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the ID w i t h the HDS (see page 18-62).
(cont'd)
18-87
TPMS
w i t h the HDS.
shown.
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
51
53
55
57

YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the original
wheel (see page 1 8 - 1 0 3 ) .

Initiator location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
51
53
55
57

i n i t i a t o r 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.
DTC
51
53
55
57
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

NO-Go to step 1 1 .
12. Substitute an initiator f r o m a known-good location on
the current vehicle, or f r o m another known-good
vehicle (see page 18-102).
//
1
11
4 5 6 7
15116117
10
\/\/\20
LF PWR.
(BRN)
O)
w i t h the HDS.
RIGHTREAR
LF PWR. (BRN)

shown.
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
32
34
36
38
Is NORMAL

18-102).
NO-Go to step 15.
18-88
LF PWR.
(BRN)
n n " > LEFT-REAR

LF PWR. (BRN)
RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN)
m">
LEFT-FRONT
INITIATOR 3P C O N N E C T O R
control unit and the appropriate i n i t i a t o r . B
19. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n T P M S control unit 2 0 P

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 15 a n d the a p p r o p r i a t e
initiator 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 3.
DTC
Initiator Location
51
53
55
57
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

1
/ 7T4- 5
11
/1
5 16 17
/ 10
/ / 20
20. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n the a p p r o p r i a t e T P M S

control unit 2 0 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l a n d the
a p p r o p r i a t e initiator 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2.
DTC
TPMS Control
Unit 2 0 P
Connector
Terminal.
Initiator Location
51
53
55
57
No.6
No. 5
No. 17
No. 16
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
JL
U=s|=U
RF LF SIG.
(LT GRN)
LF LF SIG. (GRN)
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
LF GND (LT BLU)

J l
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
RF LF SIG. (LT GRN)
LF LF SIG. (GRN)
LF GND (LT BLU)
It
{ijff
10
11
LF GND (LT BLU)
LEFT-REAR
15 16 17
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
{T\2\:
20
RR LF SIG. (GRY)
LF GND (LT BLU)

RIGHT-REAR
RR LF SIG.
(GRY)
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
Is there
continuity?
LEFT-REAR
Y E S - G o to s t e p 20.
IMO-Repair o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the T P M S
control unit a n d the a p p r o p r i a t e i n i t i a t o r . !
RIGHT-REAR
Is there
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the T P M S
control unit a n d the a p p r o p r i a t e i n i t i a t o r . !
(cont'd)
18-89
TPMS
terminal.
TPMS Control Unit20P
Connector Terminal
No. 6
No. 5
No. 17
No. 16
DTC
51
53
55
57

LF LF S I G . (GRN)
RF LF S I G . (LT GRN)
n i - n
/ / 4 5156167178 / 1020
//
///
1
11
LR LF S I G . (GRN)
RR LF SIG. (GRY)
23. Measure the voltage between body g r o u n d and the

terminal.
DTC
TPMS Control Unit 20P

Connector Terminal
No. 6
No. 5
No. 17
No. 16
51
53
55
57

LF LF S I G . (GRN)
/ / 4 5156167178 / 1020
///
//
1
11
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
RR LF SIG. (GRY)

the TPMS control unit and the appropriate initiator.H

TPMS control unit and the appropriate i n i t i a t o r . H
NO-Go to step 22.
NO-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-10D.B
18-90
DTC 61, 63,65,67: Initiator Circuit Open

Detection

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 20 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON
(II) again.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS, and note the indicated
DTC(s).
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
61
63
65
67

Is DTC 61, 63, 65, and/or 67 indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . B
DTC
61
63
65
67
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
RIGHTREAR
LF PWR. (BRN)
<"VI">
LEFT-REAR
LF PWR. (BRN)
m 3 > RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN)
1 1 2 | 3 > LEFT-FRONT
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the appropriate initiator.H
(cont'd)
18-91
TPMS
initiator 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 3.
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
61
63
65
67

4 5 6 7 8 "7io
1
20
/ i e > 16 <//
V7/
11
10. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminal and the
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2.
DTC
TPMS Control
Unit20P
Connector
Terminal
No.6
No.5
No. 17
No. 16
61
63
65
67
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
<2IE>
v
-tbJ=|=brr
RF LF SIG.
(LT GRN)
LF LF SIG. (GRN)
^
Q)
|
LF GND (LT BLU)

LEFT-FRONT <i
[7|'">
GEEE
LF LF S I G . (GRN)
LF GND (LT BLU)

RIGHT-FRONT
<i[71">
10
11 IXM/1l5|l6ll7ly1/]20
L F G N D (LT BLU)
LEFT-REAR
T P M S C O N T R O L UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
Vi^
Wire side of female terminals |
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
RR LF S I G . (GRY)
{ifFR
L F G N D (LTBLU)
RIGHT-REAR
<l|2|3)
RR LF SIG.
(GRY)
LR LF SIG. (GRN)
LEFT-REAR
RIGHT-REAR
18-92
11. Check for the noted DTC(s) in step 4.

Were DTC 61, 63, 65, and 67 indicated at the same time?
and recheck.B
12. Swap a known-good initiator with the initiator
indicated by the DTC (see page 18-102).
DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure

NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition
(see page 22-93).
(ll) again.
DTC
61
63
65
67
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is DTC 81
indicated?

18-101).

ignition switch to ON (II) again.
17. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS, and compare the
indicated DTC with the noted DTC(s) in step 4.
DTC
61
63
65
67
Initiator Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Does the indicated DTC change between the initiators

that were replaced in step 12 ?
18-102).
and recheck.B
18-93
TPMS
DTC 83: No VSP Signal
NOTE: Check for fuel and emission systems DTCs w i t h
the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).

w i t h the HDS.
Is the vehicle's
speed
indicated?

and recheck.B
NO-Go to step 8.

Is DTC 83
indicated?
Is DTC 85
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-95).B
NO-Go to step 6.
18-94
8. Check the speedometer.

Does the speedometer
register
speed?

18-10D.B
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1
and recheck. If the PCM was updated and DTCs are
not indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
was substituted and DTCs are not indicated, replace
the original PCM (see page 11-250).B
DTC 85: F-CAN Communication Failure
NOTE: Check for fuel and emission systems DTCs w i t h

the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.


(II) again.
4. Wait about 5 seconds.
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit

20P connector terminals and the PCM connector A
(49P) terminals according to the table.

CAN L
CAN H
Is DTC 85 indicated?
PCM Connector
A (49P) Terminal
TPMS Control
Unit 20P
Connector
Terminal
No. 11
No. 1
Terminal
Name
No. 49
No. 48

CAN H (WHT)
work?
1 0 0. 4 I 5 j 6 | 7 .
11171/M15116117|71/120
CAN L (RED)

work?
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminals and poor connections

and recheck.B
NO-Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
reconnect all connectors, then check and
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions systems (see
page 11-3).B
11
13 1415 16 17|18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
22
25
29 30 31 32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 41
44
48 49
4 6
P 3
Ki
K'
C A N H (WHT)
C A N L (RED)
PCM CONNECTOR A(49P)

at the TPMS control unit and G403. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page
18-101), and recheck.B
NO-Repair open in the appropriate w i r e between the
TPMS control unit and the P C M . B
18-95
TPMS
DTC 91,93,95,97: Tire Pressure Sensor

Internal Error
Low tire pressure indicator does not come on,

and no DTCs are stored - without MID
NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page

22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those DTCs
first.

(II) again.
4. Wait about 1 minute.
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several

seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).

NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate
wheel is s h o w n .
DTC
91
93
95
97
Is DTC 91, 93, 95, or 97
Tire Location
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Indicated?

(see page 1 8 - 1 0 3 ) .
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-334). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page 22-359),
and recheck.B
3. Lower the pressure in any tire until the low tire
pressure indicator comes o n .
NOTE:
If 5 minutes has passed since the ignition switch
has been turned to ON (II), turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0), and wait 2 minutes, then turn it back
ON (II) again.
Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next tire.
After noting whether the low tire pressure indicator
came o n , make sure it goes off w h e n y o u reinflate
the tire before proceeding to the next tire.
Does the indicator come on when the pressure
below 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm , 25 psi) or less?
2
YES-The system is OK at this t i m e . B

NO-Go to step 4.
18-96
drops
4. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST

w i t h the HDS, and compare it w i t h the actual
measured tire pressure.
shown.
2
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see
page 1 8 - 1 0 3 ) .
7. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit 20P
Low tire pressure indicator does not come on,

and no DTCs are stored - with MID
2. Check the low pressure indicator for several seconds
w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
YES-Go to step 3.
and r e c h e c k .
3. Lower the pressure in each tire until the low tire
pressure indicator comes o n .
NOTE:
If 5 minutes has passed since the ignition switch
has been turned to ON (II), turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0), and wait 2 minutes, then it turn back
ON (II) again.
Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next tire.
After noting whether the low tire pressure indicator

came o n , make sure it goes off w h e n you reinflate
the tire before proceeding to the next tire.
GND (BLK)
Does the indicator come on when the pressure

below 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm , 25 psi) or less?
IG1 (PNK)
*- , , , r
4 | 5 | 6 j 7 8|/|10|
|11|/1/|/|15|16|17|/|/|20
drops

NO-Go to step 4.
Is there battery
voltage?

TPMS control unit and the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
and recheck.B
(cont'd)
18-97
TPMS
4. Check the TIRE PRESSURE In the TPMS DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS, and compare it w i t h the actual
measured tire pressure.
shown.

and no DTCs are stored - without MID
Did the indicator come on and then go off?

and recheck.B
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see
page 18-103).B
18-98

18-101).B
and recheck.B

and no DTCs are stored - with MID
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no

DTCs are stored
NOTE: Ifthe low tire pressure indicator is turned on at

the same t i m e as the TPMS indicator, go to the following
TPMS s y m p t o m troubleshooting f i r s t : TPMS indicator
does not go off, and no DTCs are stored (see page
18-100).

Did the indicator come on, and then blink for about 75
seconds?
YES-Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page
22-6) and go to the indicated gauge DTCs
troubleshooting.!
NO-Go to step 3

4. Check the TPMS indicator w h e n the ignition switch is
turned to ON (II).
Did the indicator come on?

and recheck.B
and r e c h e c k . l i

Did the indicator come on and then blink for about 75

seconds?
18-101).a
and recheck.B
18-99
TPMS
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
are stored
NOTE:
Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page 22-6). If
the multiple DTCs are present, including B1178,
troubleshoot those DTCs first. If only DTC B1178 is
present, continue w i t h the following troubleshooting.
5. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS

control unit 2 0 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 10.
+ B (YEL)
/ / 4 5156167178 / 1020
///
//
1
11
Ifthe TPMS control unit was replaced, the TPMS

indicator will be on until all four sensor ID codes are
learned.

2. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is there battery
voltage?
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Replace the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. If

the fuse blows again, check for a short to body ground
in the w i r e between the TPMS control unit and the No.
20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H

control unit and the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the
IMO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3.

fuse/relay box.

control unit 20P connector terminal No. 8.
Is the fuse blown?

YES-Replace the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. Ifthe
fuse blows again, check for a short to body ground in
the wire between the TPMS control unit and the No. 8
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
1 1
IG1 (PNK)
n
1n
4 5 6 7 8 / 10
15 16 1 7
'20
A/
IMO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 4.

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 11.

control unit and the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the
18-100

9. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
control unit 20P connectorterminal No. 4.
GND (BLK)
1
//
11
15 16 17
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit m o u n t i n g

bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
communication w i t h the initiators and the tire pressure
sensors.
3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A).
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located behind the
gauge control module.
10
20
Is there 0.1 Vor more?

YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G403).B
N O - D o the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-334). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control (see page
18-101), and recheck.B
4. Remove the TPMS control unit (B) f r o m the bracket

(C).
NOTE: To separate the TPMS control unit f r o m the
bracket, release the hook (D) on the TPMS control unit
using a flat-tipped screwdriver (E), and push it up to
remove the control unit f r o m the bracket.
(cont'd)
18-101
TPMS
(cont'd)
Initiator Replacement
5. Install the new TPMS control unit in the reverse order

of removal.
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not

bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
w i t h the TPMS control u n i t and the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly

installed. You will hear a click w h e n the TPMS control
unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
6. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs (see page 18-62). Do not memorize the IDs
automatically.
Front
4. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-224).
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
6. Remove the initiator (B) f r o m the inner side of the

wheel well.
7. Install the new initiator in the reverse order of
removal.
18-102
It
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal
Rear
4. Remove the rear fender cover, (see page 20-227)
NOTICE I
Each TPMS sensor contains a lithium anode battery that
is not removable. The complete TPMS sensor should be
disposed of according to local battery disposal
guidelines or requirements. A n improperly disposed
battery can be harmful to the environment.
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).

2. Remove the wheel w i t h the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core to deflate the tire.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the
bead loose f r o m the wheel w i t h a commercially
available tire changer (A).
INQTICEI
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire pressure
sensor:
Do the outside of the wheel first.
Position the wheel as s h o w n so the valve stem (B) is
90 degrees f r o m the bead breaker (C) as shown.
Do not position the bead breaker of the tire changer
too close to the rim.
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
6. Remove the initiator (B) f r o m the inner side of the

wheel w e l l .
7. Install the new initiator in the reverse order of
removal.
(cont'd)
18-103
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
5. Position the wheel so that the tire machine (A) and the
tire iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C), and will
move away f r o m it w h e n the machine starts. Then
remove the tire f r o m the wheel.
7. Remove and replace the valve stem g r o m m e t (A),

f r o m the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
The valve stem g r o m m e t m i g h t stay in the wheel;
make sure y o u remove it.
Always use a new valve stem g r o m m e t whenever
the tire pressure sensor has been removed f r o m the
wheel, or w h e n replacing the tire.
6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B)
then remove the tire pressure sensor with the valve
stem (C) f r o m the wheel.
f
NOTE: Check the nut and the washer; if they have

deterioration or damage, replace t h e m w i t h new ones
during reassembly.
18-104
Replace.
Installation
NOTE:
Use only wheels that have a " T P M S " or " S Z A " stamp
(A) on the inside of the a l u m i n u m wheels and the
outside of the steel wheels.
This vehicle may be equipped w i t h one of the three
types of wheels.
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the

mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel.
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer (B)
to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut (D)
finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is resting
on the wheel.
B
A
4 N-m
(0.4 k g f m , 3 Ibfft)
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque

while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten
a valve stem nut.
(cont'd)
18-105
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
4. Lube the tire bead sparingly w i t h a paste-type tire
mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so that the
tire machine (A) and the tire iron (B) are next to the
valve stem (C) and will move away f r o m it w h e n the
machine starts. Then install the tire onto the wheel.
5. W i t h a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1

k g f / c m , 4 4 psi) to seat the tire bead to the r i m , then
adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), install the
valve stem cap.
2
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides

of the rim uniformly.
6. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the
wheels on the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.
Torque the wheel nuts to specification.
8. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs (see page 18-62).
18-106
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If brake maintenance is required)

Brakes
Conventional Brake Components
VSA System Components
Brakes
Special Tools
Brake System Inspection and Test
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment
Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
Parking Brake Switch Test
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Front Brake Disc Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Master Cylinder Replacement
Master Cylinder Inspection
Brake Booster Test
Brake Booster Replacement
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement.
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
Parking Brake Inspection
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
Brake Pedal Replacement
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
Brake Hose Replacement
Parking Brake Pedal Replacement
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-5
19-6
19-7
19-9
19-11
19-12
19-12
19-13
19-17
19-19
19-20
19-22
19-23
.... 19-23
19-24
19-25
19-28
19-30
19-32
19-34
19-36
19-39
19-40
19-41
19-42
19-44
19-45

Special Tools
Ref.No.
Description
Brake Caliper Piston Compressor
Tool Number
07AAE-SEPA101
19-2
Qty
1
BRAKE B O O S T E R
Test, page 19-23
BRAKE S Y S T E M INDICATOR
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-12
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-12
BRAKE HOSE and LINE

Brake Hose
M A S T E R CYLINDER
Brake System
Bleeding, page 19-9
BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position
Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
PARKING BRAKE
Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-7
Pedal Replacement, page 19-44
Cable Replacement, page 19-45
FRONT BRAKE
Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-13
Disc Inspection, page 19-17
Disc Replacement, page 19-19
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-20
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-28
Disc Replacement, page 19-30
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-32
19-3

Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component
Master Cylinder
Brake Hoses
Caliper
VSA Modulatorcontrol Unit
Procedure
Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
Reservoir or reservoir g r o m m e t s .
Line joints.
Between master cylinder and booster.
Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or damage.
Piston seal.
Banjo bolt connections.
Bleed screw.
Line joints.
Modulator-control unit.
Also check for

Bulging seal at reservoir tank cap.
This is a sign of fluid
contamination.
Bulging, t w i s t e d , or bent lines.
Seized or sticking caliper pins.
Brake System Test

Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C. A l l o w the engine to w a r m up to normal operating
temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 m m (2 in) piece of masking tape along the b o t t o m of the steering w h e e l , and d r a w a horizontal reference
mark across it.
3. With the transmission in P or N, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure needed t o keep an
A/T-equipped vehicle f r o m creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up to
the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering w h e e l .
5. A p p l y steady pressure t o the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
If the measurement increases 10 m m (3/8 in) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
If the measurement increases more than 10 m m (3/8 in), replace the master cylinder.
19-4

Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after
a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed
correctly.
Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If the pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will cause
vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin location (see
page 19-20).
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more brake
pedal applications during an extended test-drive.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift,
and spin all four wheels by hand.
5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder, then

spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace the master
cylinder (see page 19-22).B
6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin the
wheels to check for brake drag.
wheels?
wheels?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, or
vehicle v i b r a t i o n .
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the brake
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the
brake booster, and then spin the wheels again to
check for brake drag.
wheels?
wheels?
YES-Check the master cylinder reservoir for

contamination in the brake fluid. If y o u find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, disassemble and repair
the caliper on the wheel(s) w i t h brake d r a g . B
NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines. If
all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA modulatorcontrol unit (see page 19-147).B
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-24).B
4. W i t h o u t removing the brake lines, unbolt and
separate the master cylinder f r o m the brake booster,
then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
wheels?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment, and pedal free play (see page 19-6).B
19-5

Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A)
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer
touching the brake pedal.
6. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the

pushrod (B) in or out w i t h pliers until the standard
pedal height f r o m the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust
the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
2. Remove the footrest (see step 3 on page 20-113).

3. Remove the driver's side kick panel (see step 3 o n
page 20-79).
7. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the brake

pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed
(threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) o n the pedal
arm). Turn the switch 45 clockwise t o lock it. The gap
between the brake pedal position switch and the pad
is automatically adjusted to 0.7 m m (0.028 in) by
locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off
w h e n the pedal is released.
4. Remove the driver's center console t r i m (see step 2 on

page 20-115).
5. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout (B) in the
insulator. Measure the pedal height (C) at the center of
the pedal pad (D) to the floor w i t h o u t the insulator.
Standard pedal height
(with carpet removed): 171 mm (6.7 in)
8. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of

removal.
9. Check the brake pedal free play.
19-6

Parking Brake Inspection and
Adjustment
Pedal Free Play
Inspection
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the play

(A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake
pedal by hand. I f t h e brake pedal free play is out of
specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch
(C). I f t h e brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may
result in brake drag.
1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) w i t h 294 N (30 kgf,

66 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
parking brake pedal should be locked w i t h i n the
specified number of clicks.
Pedal locked clicks: 8 to 10
Free play: 1 5 mm (0.00.2 in)
2. Ifthe number of pedal clicks is not as specified, adjust

the parking brake.
NOTE: Minor parking brake pedal adjustments
(1 to 2 clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut (see
parking brake minor adjustment). If a larger
adjustment is required, follow the major adjustment
procedure using the adjuster nut at the parking brake
d r u m (see parking brake major adjustment).
After installing new parking brake shoes and/or new
brake disc/drum, make sure you drive the vehicle for
" b r e a k - i n " (see page 19-39).
(cont'd)
19-7

Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont'd)
Minor Adjustment
Major Adjustment (to be done when

replacing parking brake shoes and after lining
surface break-in)
2. Release the parking brake pedal fully.

3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click.
4. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the
parking brakes drag slightly w h e n the rear wheels are
turned.
5. Release the parking brake pedal fully, and check that

the parking brakes do not drag w h e n the rear wheels
are turned. Readjust if necessary.
6. Make sure the parking brake pedal is w i t h i n the
specified number of clicks (8 to 10 clicks).
19-8
3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A).

Brake System Bleeding
5. Remove the access plug (A).
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only new Honda
DOT 3 Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. Using
a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and
shorten the life of the system.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to
contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately w i t h water.
The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the M A X (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure, and checked after bleeding each
wheel location. A d d fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at
the M A X (upper) level line (B).
B
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster nut (B) w i t h a

flat-tip screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against the
parking brake d r u m . Then back off the adjuster 10
clicks, and install the access plug.
7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake
disc/drum and the inside of the w h e e l , then install the
rear wheels.
8. Do the minor adjustment procedure.
2. Have someone slowly p u m p the brake pedal several
times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front
brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers in the sequence s h o w n .
BLEEDING S E Q U E N C E :
Front Right
Rear Right
Front Left
Rear Left
(cont'd)
19-9

Brake System Bleeding (cont'd)
4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed
screw (B), then loosen the bleed screw to allow air to
escape f r o m the system. Then tighten the bleed screw
securely.
Front
B
8 N m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
Rear
B
8 N m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the M A X (upper)

level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until there
are no air bubbles in the fluid.
19-10

Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
G A U G E C O N T R O L MODULE
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT
V S A MODULATORCONTROL UNIT
(EBD INDICATOR)
BRAKE S Y S T E M INDICATOR
22
ORN
2 1
BRAKE FLUID
( ^ \ ) L E V E L SWITCH
\ o j / C L O S E D : Float down
OPEN: Float up
21
BLK/YEL
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

C L O S E D : Parking brake applied
OPEN: Parking brake released
BLK
G303
19-11

Parking Brake Switch Test
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake

system indicator come on at the same t i m e , check the
VSA system for D T C s first (see page 19-50).
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A)

f r o m the parking brake switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)

w i t h the float in the d o w n position and in the up
position.
NOTE:
If both the ABSA/SA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same t i m e , check the VSA
system for DTCs first (see page 19-50).
Remove the brake fluid completely f r o m the
reservoir. With the float d o w n , there should be
continuity.
Fill the reservoir w i t h brake fluid to the M A X (upper)
level (A). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.
If the parking brake switch and brake fluid level
switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does
not function, do the gauge control module self
diagnostic function (see page 22-334).
2. Check for continuity between the switch terminal (C)

With the parking brake pedal pressed, there should
be continuity.
With the parking brake pedal released, there should
be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the brake fluid
level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334).
3. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector.
19-12
3. Reconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.

Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101
ii CAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard:
1 0 . 6 - 1 1 . 2 mm (0.42-0.44 in)
Inner pad
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake

assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
5. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
the inside of the w h e e l , then install the front wheels.
(cont'd)
19-13

Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid f r o m the master cylinder.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B)
up out of the way. Check the hose and the pin boots
for damage and deterioration.
19-14
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).

7. Remove the pad retainers (A).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in proper positions.
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any

rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc, for runout, thickness,
parallelism (see page 19-17) and check for damage
and cracks.
12. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on

the caliper body (B).
13. Press in the piston w i t h the brake caliper piston

compressor tool so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper d o w n .
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston; brake
fluid might overflow f r o m the master cylinder's
reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any painted surface,
wash it off immediately with water.
14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

08798-9010) to the retainer mating surface of the
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste
off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the
brake disc and the brake pads.
(cont'd)
19-15

Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back
of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by
the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad
shims and the brake pads friction material. Keep
grease and assembly paste off the brake disc and
brake pads. Contaminated brake disc or brake pads
reduce stopping ability.
18. Pivot the caliper down into position, while holding the
brake pads. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N m
(7.3 kgf m,
53 Ibfft)
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
20. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.
16. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install
the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper
inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always
reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to
prevent a temporary loss of braking efficiency.
17. Install the pad springs (A) while holding the brake
pads.
19-16
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
21. Add brake fluid as needed.
22. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks (see
page 19-41).

F r o n t B r a k e
D i s c
I n s p e c t i o n
Runout
1. R a i s e the v e h i c l e o n a lift ( s e e p a g e 1-8).
2 . R e m o v e the front w h e e l s .
7. If the brake d i s c is b e y o n d the s e r v i c e limit, refinish

the brake d i s c w i t h a H o n d a - a p p r o v e d c o m m e r c i a l l y
a v a i l a b l e o n - c a r brake lathe.
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in)
3. R e m o v e the brake p a d s ( s e e p a g e 19-14).
NOTE:
4 . I n s p e c t t h e b r a k e d i s c to w h e e l s u r f a c e for d a m a g e
a n d c r a c k s . C l e a n the b r a k e d i s c t h o r o u g h l y , a n d
r e m o v e all rust.
If the brake d i s c is b e y o n d the s e r v i c e limit for

r e f i n i s h i n g , r e p l a c e it ( s e e p a g e 19-19).
5. Install s u i t a b l e flat w a s h e r s (A) a n d w h e e l nuts ( B ) ,

a n d tighten the w h e e l nuts to t h e s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e to
hold the brake d i s c s e c u r e l y a g a i n s t the h u b .
If the brake d i s c is r e p l a c e d with a n e w o n e , c h e c k

the n e w d i s c for r u n o u t . If the n e w d i s c is out of
s p e c i f i c a t i o n , refinish the d i s c .
8. Install the brake p a d s ( s e e p a g e 19-14).
9 . C l e a n the m a t i n g s u r f a c e s b e t w e e n the brake d i s c a n d
the i n s i d e of the w h e e l , t h e n install t h e front w h e e l s .
14 x 1.5 mm
127 N m
(13.0 k g f m , 94.0 Ibfft)
6. S e t up the dial g a u g e a g a i n s t the brake d i s c a s s h o w n ,
a n d m e a s u r e the r u n o u t at 10 m m (3/8 in) f r o m the
outer e d g e of the brake d i s c .
Brake disc runout:

(cont'd)
19-17

Front Brake Disc Inspection (cont'd)
Thickness and Parallelism
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-14).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 apart and 10 m m
(3/8 in) in f r o m the outer edge of the brake disc.
Replace the brake disc i f t h e smallest measurement is
less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) max.
NOTE: This is the m a x i m u m allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
19-18
5. Ifthe brake disc is beyond the service limit for

parallelism, refinish the brake disc w i t h a Honda approved commercially available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE: I f t h e brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 19-19).
6. Install the brake pads (see page 19-14).
the inside of the w h e e l , then install the front wheels.

Front Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake
pads.
5. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).

3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
B
^
14 x 1.5 mm
137 N m
(14.0 k g f m , 101 Ibfft)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B),

then remove the caliper assembly (C) f r o m the
or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly f r o m the undercarriage. Do not twist
the brake hose excessively.
6. Remove the brake disc (B) f r o m the hub bearing unit.

NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub bearing
unit, thread t w o 8 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) into the brake
disc to push it away f r o m the hub bearing unit. Turn
each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake
disc f r o m binding.
7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the
mating surfaces between the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake disc.
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-17).
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
19-19

Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad d u s t regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved v a c u u m cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If
these caliper pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
w i t h water.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall t h e m in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores w i t h clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if y o u have
silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
19-20

SlMUfl : Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
INNER PAD
SHIM A
WEAR INDICATOR
install inner pad w i t h
its wear indicator u p w a r d .
CALIPER PIN
PIN BOOT
Replace.
CALIPER
BRACKET
BANJO BOLT
34 N-m
(3.5 k g f m ,
25 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N-m
(7.3 k g f m ,
53 Ibfft)
PISTONS
SNAP RINGS
Replace.
19-21
Conventional Brake C o m p o n e n t s
Master Cylinder Replacement
1NOTICEI
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid gets on the p a i n t wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Be careful not to damage or bend the brake lines
during removal and installation.
Plug the end of a hoses and joints t o prevent spilling
brake fluid.
1. Remove the reservoir cap and the brake fluid f r o m the
master cylinder reservoir w i t h a syringe.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A).
G
Replace.
7. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of

Coat the inner bore lip and the outer circumference
of the new rod seal w i t h the Shin- Etsu silicone
grease (P/N 08798-9013).
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 19-6).
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
B
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
3. Disconnect the brake lines (B) f r o m the master

cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with clean rags or shop towels.
4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and
the washers (E).
5. Remove the master cylinder f r o m the brake booster
(F). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines
when removing the master cylinder.
6. Remove the rod seal (G) f r o m the master cylinder.
NOTE: During installation, set a new rod seal onto the
master cylinder w i t h its grooved side (H) toward the
master cylinder.
19-22

Master Cylinder Inspection
Brake Booster Test
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22).
Functional Test
2. Inspect and note these items:
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), press the brake

pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir,
then press the brake pedal hard and hold it for
15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master
cylinder is bypassing internally or the brake system is
leaking. Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page
19-41).
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of

dirt and other foreign particles.
Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
w i t h a new part if necessary.
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate
the brake fluid.
2. Start the engine w i t h the brake pedal pressed. If the

brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not
vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal w i t h the engine running, then
stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not
vary while pressed for 30 seconds.
If the pedal height rises, go to step 6.
If it does not rise, go to step 2.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30 seconds.
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be
low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height
should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on each
consecutive application?
Check for leaks, rust,
and damage.
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-22).
If it rises, the booster is OK.

If it does not, go to step 3.
(cont'd)
19-23

Brake Booster Test (cont'd)
Brake Booster Replacement
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at the

booster. The check valve (B) is built into the hose.
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-372).
NOTE: Ifthe check valve is faulty, replace the brake

booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be

vacuum available.
If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not
working properly. Replace the brake booster
v a c u u m hose and the check valve, and retest.
2. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22).

3. Disconnect the brake lines (A) f r o m the VSA
modulator-control unit (B).
4. Disconnect the brake booster v a c u u m hose (C) f r o m

the brake booster.
5. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B), then
disconnect the yoke f r o m the brake pedal.
If v a c u u m is f o u n d , go to step 5.
5. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), reconnect the
vacuum hose t o the brake booster.
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
vacuum hose between the check valve and the
booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using
normal pressure. W h e n the pedal is first pressed, it
should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise.
I f t h e pedal position does not vary, inspect the seal
between the master cylinder and booster. Ifthe seal
is OK, replace the brake booster.
I f t h e pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
19-24
6. Remove the brake booster m o u n t i n g nuts (C).

Rear Brake Pad Inspection and
Replacement
7. Remove the brake booster (A) f r o m the engine
compartment.

Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101
I NOTICE
Be careful not to damage the brake booster
m o u n t i n g surfaces and the threads of the booster
stud.
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.
NOTE: Use a new brake booster gasket (B) during
reassembly.
A
^
ik CAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health.
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard:
9 . 6 - 1 0 . 2 mm (0.38-0.40 in)
Service limit:
1.6 mm (0.06 in)
8. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of

Install the master cylinder after installing the brake
booster (see page 19-22).
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 19-6).
Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.
disc/drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the
rear wheels.
(cont'd)
19-25

Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid f r o m the master cylinder.
6. Remove the upper and lower pad retainers (A).

NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in their proper positions.

4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B)
up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any

rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).
8. Inspect the brake disc/drum, and check for damage

and cracks (see page 19-28).
08798-9010) to the retainer mating surface of the
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
10. Install the upper and lower pad retainers. Wipe excess
assembly paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly
paste off the brake discs/drum and brake pads.
19-26

11. Install the c o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e b r a k e c a l i p e r piston
c o m p r e s s o r tool (A) o n the c a l i p e r b o d y (B).
14. A p p l y a thin c o a t of M-77 a s s e m b l y p a s t e (P/N

08798-9010) to the p a d s i d e of the s h i m s (A), the b a c k
of the brake p a d s (B), a n d the other a r e a s i n d i c a t e d by
t h e a r r o w s . W i p e e x c e s s a s s e m b l y p a s t e off the p a d
s h i m s a n d brake p a d s friction m a t e r i a l . K e e p g r e a s e
a n d a s s e m b l y p a s t e off the brake d i s c / d r u m a n d the
brake p a d s . C o n t a m i n a t e d brake d i s c / d r u m or b r a k e
p a d s r e d u c e s t o p p i n g ability.
12. P r e s s in t h e piston w i t h the brake c a l i p e r piston

c o m p r e s s o r tool s o the c a l i p e r will fit o v e r the b r a k e
p a d s . M a k e s u r e t h e piston boot is in position to
p r e v e n t d a m a g i n g it w h e n pivoting the c a l i p e r d o w n .
N O T E : B e careful w h e n p r e s s i n g in the p i s t o n ; brake
fluid m i g h t o v e r f l o w f r o m the m a s t e r c y l i n d e r ' s
r e s e r v o i r . If b r a k e fluid g e t s o n a n y p a i n t e d s u r f a c e ,
w a s h it off i m m e d i a t e l y w i t h w a t e r .
13. R e m o v e the b r a k e c a l i p e r piston c o m p r e s s o r tool.
15. Install the brake p a d s a n d p a d s h i m s correctly. Install

t h e brake p a d w i t h t h e w e a r indicator (C) on the
b o t t o m i n s i d e . If y o u a r e r e u s i n g the brake p a d s ,
a l w a y s reinstall the brake p a d s in their original
p o s i t i o n s to p r e v e n t a m o m e n t a r y l o s s of braking
efficiency.
(cont'd)
19-27

Rear Brake Pad Inspection and
16. Pivot the caliper d o w n into position. Install the flange
bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
Rear Brake Disc Inspection

Runout
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum to wheel surface for
damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum
thoroughly, and remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B),
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque t o
hold the brake disc/drum securely against the hub.

rear wheels.
18. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
19. A d d brake fluid as needed.
20. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks (see page
19-41).
14 x 1.5 mm
127 N-m
(13.0 k g f m ,
94.0 Ibfft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum as

s h o w n , and measure the runout at 10 m m (3/8 in)
f r o m the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:
19-28

7. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit,
refinish the brake disc/drum w i t h a Honda - approved
commercially available on-car brake lathe.
Thickness and Parallelism

NOTE:
If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit for

refinishing, replace it (see page 19-30).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum

thickness at eight points, about 45 apart and 10 m m
(3/8 in) in f r o m the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Replace the brake disc/drum if the smallest
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
If the brake disc/drum is replaced w i t h a new one,

check the new disc for runout. If the new disc/drum
is out of specification, refinish the disc/drum.
rear wheels.
Brake disc/drum thickness:

Standard:
10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in)
Max. refinishing limit:
9.0 mm (0.35 in)
Brake disc/drum parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) max
NOTE: This is the m a x i m u m allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
(cont'd)
19-29

Rear Brake Disc Inspection (cont'd)
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
5. I f t h e brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit for

parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum w i t h a Honda
- approved commercially available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc/drum and

brake pads.
NOTE: I f t h e brake disc/drum is beyond the service

limit for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-30).
the inside of the w h e e l , then install the rear wheels.

4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (A),
and remove the caliper assembly (B) f r o m the
or brake hose, use a short piece of w i r e to hang the
caliper assembly f r o m the undercarriage. Do not twist
the brake hose excessively.
NOTE: Make sure the plates (C) are in position on
reassembly, if they are removed (see page 18-36).
19-30

5. Remove the brake disc/drum flathead screws (A).
6. Remove the brake disc/drum (B) f r o m the hub bearing

unit.
NOTE:
Remove the access plug (C), then if necessary, turn
the adjuster nut (D) w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver until
the shoes become loose.
If the brake disc/drum is stuck to the hub bearing
unit, thread t w o 8 x 1.25 m m bolts (E) into the brake
disc/drum to push it away f r o m the hub bearing
unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent
the brake disc/drum f r o m binding.
7. Install the brake disc/drum in the reverse order of
Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surfaces between the hub bearing unit and
the inside of the brake disc/drum.
Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-7).
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-28).
rear wheel.
19-31

Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
^CAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
A v o i d breathing dust particles.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If
these caliper pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
w i t h water.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints w i t h rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the pads.
W h e n reusing brake pads, always reinstall t h e m in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Coat the pistons, the piston seal grooves, and the caliper bores w i t h clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the rear caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you have
silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
19-32

JJCTEASETII
; Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
B A N J O BOLT
34 N m
(3.5 k g f m ,
25 Ibfft)
BRAKE H O S E
8 x 1.0 mm
37 N-m
(3.8 k g f m ,
27 Ibf ft)
BLEED S C R E W
8 N-m
(0.8 k g f m ,
6 Ibfft)
CALIPER PIN
PIN BOOT
Replace.
INNER PAD
SHIM
SEALING
WASHERS
Replace.
PISTON
SNAP RING
Replace.
WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner brake pad
w i t h its wear indicator
downward.
OUTER PAD
SHIM
LOWER PAD
RETAINER
12 x 1.25 mm
88 N-m
(9.0 k g f m ,
65 Ibfft)
CALIPER B R A C K E T
19

Parking Brake Inspection
^CAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake shoe dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous t o y o u r health.
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake disc/drum (see page 19-30).
ANCHOR NUT
12 x 1.25 mm
98.1 N m
(10.0 k g f m , 72.3 Ibfft)
BACKING PLATE
Check for deformation.
U-CLIP
Replace.
WAVE WASHER
PARKING B R A K E L E V E R
Marked left and right.
RETAINER SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
RETAINER
Install securely
on tension pin.
TENSION
PIN
BRAKE S H O E B O S S E S
Check for deep
grooves and rust.
BRAKE S H O E
If brake shoes are
to be reused, mark
and reassemble in
the same position.
LOWER R E T U R N SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
UPPER R E T U R N SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
19-34
A D J U S T E R NUT
Check ratchet teeth
@
4. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking,
glazing, wear, and contamination.
8. Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake

d r u m w i t h inside vernier calipers.
Parking brake drum inside diameter:
Standard:
210.0-210.1 mm (8.27-8.27
in)
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (B).

Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness.
Parking brake lining thickness:
Standard:
3.9 mm (0.15 in)
6. If the parking brake lining thickness is less than the
service limit, replace all the parking brake shoes as a
set (see page 19-36).
7. Check the hub (C) for s m o o t h operation. If it requires
servicing, replace the hub bearing unit (see page
18-36).
9. If the inside diameter of the parking brake d r u m is

more than the service limit, replace the brake
disc/drum.
10. Check the parking brake disc/drum for scoring,
grooves, and cracks.
11. Install the brake disc/drum and the rear brake caliper
(see page 19-30).
12. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page
19-8).
13. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake/drum
and the inside of the w h e e l , then install the rear
wheels.
19-35

Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
^CAUTION
6. Remove the strut (A) and the rod spring (B).
Frequent inhalation of brake shoe dust, regardless of

material c o m p o s i t i o n , could be hazardous to your
health.
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved v a c u u m
cleaner.
Disassembly
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake
disc/drum (see page 19-30).
4. Disconnect and remove the upper return springs (A),
then remove the shoe guide plate (B).
c
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the
respective retainer (B), and turning the pin.
19-36

9. Remove the rearward brake shoe (A) by
disconnecting the parking brake cable (B) f r o m the
parking brake lever (C).
Reassembly
1. Apply Molykote 4 4 M A to the sliding surface of the
pivot pin (A) of the rearward brake shoe (B).
10. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and parking
brake lever (C) f r o m the brake shoe (D).
2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and wave washer
(D) on the pivot pin, and secure w i t h a new U-clip (E).
Install the wave washer w i t h its convex side facing
out.
Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever f r o m coming off the brake shoe.
3. Connect the parking brake cable (A) to the parking
brake lever (B). A p p l y Molykote 4 4 M A to the cable
contact surface (C) on the backing plate.
(cont'd)
19-37

Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 4 4 M A grease to the
shoe ends and strut ends (A), sliding surfaces (B), and
opposite edges of the parking brake shoe (C) as
s h o w n . Wipe off any excess. Keep the grease off the
brake linings.
6. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster nut (C).

NOTE:
Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A
and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then
coat t h e m with rubber grease.
Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the
adjuster nut.
Greasing symbols:
Brake shoe ends and strut ends
v Sliding surface
<=> Opposite edge of the shoe
:
5. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B), and
the retainer (C) on the rearward brake shoe (D). Make
sure the tension pin does not contact the parking
brake lever.
7. Position the brake shoe adjuster assembly (D) on the

parking brake shoes.
8. Hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking brake
shoes.
9. Install the rod spring (A) t o the strut (B) first. Then
install the strut on the parking brake shoes.
19-38

Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
10. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B), and
the retainer (C) on the f o r w a r d brake shoe (D).
A WARNING
Do this operation in a safe area.
NOTE:
Do the brake lining surface break-in w h e n replacing
shoes w i t h new brake linings and/or new rear brake
disc/drum.
Check the number of parking brake lever clicks. Adjust
the parking brake before lining surface break-in (see
page 19-8).
1. Park the vehicle on a f i r m , level surface.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 5 clicks.
11. Install the shoe guide plate (A).
4. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at about 31 m p h

(50 km/h).
5. Stop the vehicle, and release the parking brake for
510 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 t w o more times.
7. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment (see page
19-7).
12. Install the upper return springs (B) as s h o w n .

13. install the brake disc/drum and the rear brake caliper
(see page 19-30).
14. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page
19-8).
15. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake/drum
and the inside of the w h e e l , then install the rear
wheels.
19-39

Brake Pedal Replacement
1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector
(A).
2. Remove the lock pin (B) and the clevis pin (C).
3. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)
and nuts (E).
4. Remove the brake pedal w i t h bracket (F).
5. Remove the brake pedal position switch (G) by
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Adjust the brake pedal and the brake pedal position
switch (see page 19-6).
19-40
Brake Hose and Line Inspection

1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection
Point
A
Component
Front brake caliper
Rear brake caliper
C
D
E
Brake hose
Master cylinder
VSA modulatorcontrol unit
Connected t o
Brake hose
Bleed screw
Brake hose
Bleed screw
Brake line
Brake line
Brake line
(12 m m nut)
Brake line
(10 m m nut)
Specified Torque
Note
34 N-m (3.5 k g f m , 25 Ibf-ft)

8 N-m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibf-ft)
34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibfft)
8 N-m (0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibfft)
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m , 11 Ibfft)
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
Banjo bolt
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m , 11 Ibfft)
Flare nut
Banjo bolt
Flare nut
Flare nut
Flare nut
19-41

Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE:
5. Install the brake hose (A) w i t h the mounting bolt (B).
Before reassembling, check that ail parts are free of

dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones whenever specified to do
so.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Plug the end of a hose and joints to prevent spilling
brake fluid.
Front
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper w i t h the banjo
bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
7. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose (B)
on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C). Do not
twist the brake hose.
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake

hose (B) f r o m the caliper.
8. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system

(see page 19-9).
9. Do the f o l l o w i n g checks:
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
the inside of the w h e e l , then install the front wheel.
4. Remove the brake hose m o u n t i n g bolt (C), then

remove the brake hose.
19-42

Rear
5. Connect the brake hose to the caliper w i t h the banjo

bolt (A) and new sealing washers (B).
NOTE: The illustrations s h o w the rear side brake hose of

the vehicle, the procedure is the same for the front side
brake hose.
1. Remove the rear w h e e l .
- B
6. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose (B)
on the bracket then connect the brake line (C). Do not
twist the brake hose.
A
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake

hose f r o m the caliper.
7. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system

(see page 19-9).
8. Do the f o l l o w i n g checks:
4. Remove the brake hose (B).
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
rear wheel.
19-43

Parking Brake Pedal Replacement
20-121).
2. Remove the driver's side kick panel, (see page 20-79)

4. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A)
f r o m the parking brake switch, and remove the
harness clips.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m ,
16 Ibfft)
5. Remove the parking brake release lever mounting

bolt (B).
6. Remove the parking brake pedal bracket mounting
bolt (C) and nuts (D).
7. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut (E) and the
cable clip (F).
8. Disconnect the parking brake cable f r o m the parking
brake pedal (G), and remove the parking brake pedal
assembly.
19-44
9. Remove the parking brake switch and release lever

assembly.
10. Install the parking brake pedal assembly in the
reverse order of removal, and note there items:
Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
Parking Brake Cable Replacement

Exploded View
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL A S S E M B L Y
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE LEVER
PARKING BRAKE
CABLE A
Check for
faulty m o v e m e n t
A D J U S T I N G NUT
LEFT PARKING BRAKE C A B L E

Check for faulty m o v e m e n t .
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Check for s m o o t h operation
, 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibfft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
RIGHT PARKING B R A K E C A B L E
Check for faulty m o v e m e n t .
(cont'd)
19-45

Parking Brake Cable Replacement (cont'd)
NOTE:
The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead t o stiff operation and
premature cable failure.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut (see
page 19-8).
2. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect the
parking brake cable f r o m the parking brake lever (see
page 19-36).
3.4WD model: Remove the spindle nut (see step 6 on
page 18-37).
4. Remove the hub bearing unit m o u n t i n g bolts (A).
5. Loosen the anchor nuts (B).

6. Pull back the hub bearing unit (C) and backing plate
(D) until the parking brake cable clears the insertion
part of the backing plate.
7. Remove the parking brake cable m o u n t i n g bolts (E)
f r o m the backing plate.
8. Pull the parking brake cable (F), and remove it f r o m
the backing plate.
19-46
9. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
Connect the parking brake cable to the brake lever,
and install the parking brake shoes and brake
disc/drum (see page 19-37).
Apply the parking brake f i r m l y 10 times then adjust
it again.
Brakes
System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
* Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Replacement
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization
VSA Off Switch Test
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Update
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and
Installation
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
19-48
19-50
19-53
19-62
19-63
19-74
19-77
19-139
19-143
19-144
19-144
19-145
19-146
19-147
19-149

HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L
SPEED SENSOR
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
Update, page 19-146
Removal and Installation, page 19-147
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-FRONT W H E E L
SPEED SENSOR
LEFT-FRONT W H E E L
SPEED SENSOR
19-48
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
VSA
STEERING A N G L E S E N S O R
19-49

System Indicator
A B S Indicator
This system has four indicators:
The ABS indicator comes on w h e n the ABS function is

lost. The brakes still w o r k like a conventional system.
ABS indicator (A)

Brake system indicator (B)
Brake System Indicator
VSA indicator (C)
The brake system indicator comes on w h e n the EBD

function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low.
VSA activation indicator (D)
NOTE: If t w o or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake

system indicator comes o n .
V S A Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on w h e n the VSA function is
lost.
V S A Activation Indicator
The VSA activation indicator blinks w h e n the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
comes on and stays on w h e n the VSA is turned OFF by
using the VSA OFF switch, or w h e n the VSA function is
lost.
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for

about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to
ON (II), then goes off.
W h e n the system detects a p r o b l e m , a DTC is set and,
depending upon the failure, the VSA modulator-control
unit determines which indicator(s) are turned on. If the
problem goes away (system returns to normal), the
indicator(s) are controlled in the f o l l o w i n g w a y
depending upon the DTC that is set:
The indicator(s) come on and stay on w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
The indicator(s) automatically go off.
The indicator(s) go off after the vehicle is driven.
19-50
VSA
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
How to Troubleshoot DTCs
The m e m o r y holds all DTCs. However, w h e n the same

DTC is detected more than once, the more recent DTC
is written over the earlier one. Therefore, w h e n the
same problem is detected repeatedly, it is memorized
as a single DTC.
The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause

of the problem is still present, and the ABS and/or VSA
indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not
reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,

not in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore,
the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified
procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into t w o categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA
indicators go off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0).
W h e n the system detects a problem, the VSA
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The p u m p motor operates w h e n the VSA modulatorcontrol unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at
the brake pedal.
1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n the

problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out w h e n the
ABS and/or VSA indicator came o n , such as during
activation, after activation, w h e n the vehicle was
traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the
customer demonstrate the concern.
2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
contact of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated by
the DTC before y o u start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure the
ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
4. Check for DTCs f r o m other systems w h i c h are
connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
ignition switch was turned to ON (II) w i t h the VSA
modulator-control unit connector disconnected. Clear
the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions codes first,
then VSA codes.
Pump Motor
The p u m p motor operates w h e n the VSA modulatorcontrol unit is functioning.
The VSA modulator-control unit checks the p u m p
motor operation one time after completing initial
diagnosis during regular diagnosis w h e n the vehicle is
driven over 10 m p h (15 km/h).
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
reproduce the condition, check for loose connectors or
terminal pins related to the circuit that y o u are
troubleshooting.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are
identical to the procedures used on vehicles w i t h o u t the
VSA system (see page 19-9).
(cont'd)
19-51

System)
NOTE: Make sure the battery is in g o o d condition and
fully charged.
1. If the system indicators stay o n , connect the HDS to
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
How to Retrieve DTCs

1. W i t h the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS t o display the DTC(s)
on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the
DTC troubleshooting. Do the all systems DTC check,
and troubleshoot any powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
Then refer to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting,
and do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
The HDS communication will be stopped w h e n the
vehicle speed is at 31 m p h (50 km/h) or more.
The HDS reads the DTC, the current data, and other
system data.
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that
came w i t h the HDS.
19-52

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't
4. Clear the DTC(s) by f o l l o w i n g the screen prompts on
the HDS.

DTC
11
-13
-14
12
-11
-12
-21
-22
-23
13
-13
-14
14
-11
-12
-21
Detection Item
ABS
Indicator
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit

Malfunction
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise
or Intermittent Interruption
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the
Other Sensor Circuit
Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation
Error
Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More)
Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the
Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON or
OFF*
OFF
VSA
Indicator
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
OFF
1
ON
ON
-22
-23
15
-13
-14
16
-11
-12
-21

(19 mph (30 km/h) or More)
(0 to 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h))
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the
Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
OFF
1
ON
ON
-22
-23
17
-13
-14
18
-11
-12
-21

(0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Power Source
Malfunction
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Electrical Noise or
Intermittent Interruption
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other
Sensor Circuit
Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor Installation Error
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
1
ON
ON
-22
-23

(0to 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h))
ON
ON
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-77)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-77)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-77)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-77)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-81)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
* 1: Brake system indicator turns ON when two or more wheels fail.
(cont'd)
19-53

VSA
Indicator
OFF
Brake
System
Indicator
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
OFF
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-21
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration

Sensor Power Source Voltage Malfunction
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
Yaw Rate Sensor Neutral Position Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-22
Yaw Rate Sensor Stuck
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-23
Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-24
Yaw Rate Sensor Gain Low
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-25
Yaw Rate Sensor Gain High
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-12
Lateral Acceleration Sensor

Malfunction (Open, Short)
Malfunction
Malfunction
Internal Circuit
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Internal Circuit
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Neutral Position
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Stuck
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-24
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit Intermittent

Interruption
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain Low
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-25
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain High
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-11
Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Initial)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-21
Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Neutral Position
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-22
Steering Angle Sensor Stuck Offset Position
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-23
Steering Angle Sensor Counter Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-24
Steering Angle Sensor Exchange Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-26
Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (Main)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
DTC
21
22
23
24
25
-11
-11
-11
-11
-12
-13
-17
-18
26
-13
-21
-22
-23
27
Detection Item
ABS
Indicator
Right-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)

Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
Left-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
Right-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
Left-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing)
Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
(Open, Short)
Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction
* 1: Brake system indicator turns ON when t w o or more wheels fail.
19-54
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-87)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-88)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-88)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-90)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-90)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-92)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-92)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-93)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-90)
VSA
28
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-24
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Circuit

Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Gain Low
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-25
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Gain High
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-01
ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction

(Solenoid Initial Pulse)
(Initial Feedback Signal)
(Feedback Signal)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Speculative)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
(Feedback Signal/Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Initial Pulse)
Malfunction (Solenoid Pulse)
Malfunction (Solenoid Speculative)
Malfunction (Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Feedback Signal)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-12
-22
-23
-02
-11
-21
-22
-23
-24
-01
-21
-22
-23
33
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit

Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Communication Error
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Neutral
Position Malfunction
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Stuck
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
-21
32
ABS
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
-13
31
Detection Item
Brake
System
Indicator
OFF
DTC
-01
-02
-11
-21
-22
-23
-24
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
(cont'd)
19-55

DTC
34
-01
-21
-22
-23
35
-01
-02
-11
-21
-22
-23
-24
36
-01
-21
-22
-23
37
-01
-02
-11
-21
-22
-23
-24
38
-01
-21
-22
-23
19-56
VSA
Indicator
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Detection Item
ABS
Indicator
ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction

(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Feedback Signal)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction (Solenoid Initial Pulse)
Malfunction (Solenoid Pulse)
Malfunction (Solenoid Speculative)
Malfunction (Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Feedback Signal)
(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction
(Solenoid Pulse)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
VSA
Detection Item
DTC
VSA
Indicator
VSA
Activation
indicator
Note
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-96)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-97)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-98)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-97)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-100)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-101)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-101)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-104)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-104)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-104)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-107)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-108)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-109)
-11
Motor Lock
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
ON or
OFF*
OFF
-12
Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction
ON
OFF
ON
ON
-13
Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction
ON
OFF
ON
ON
52
-12
Motor Stuck OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
53
-01
Motor Relay Stuck ON 1
ON
OFF
ON
ON
-12
Motor Relay Stuck ON 2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
-03
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-04
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial)
ON
ON
ON
ON
-21
Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)
ON
ON
ON
ON
-01
Initial VIG FET Stuck OFF (Initial)
ON
ON
ON
ON
-02
Initial VIG FET Stuck ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-11
VIG FET Stuck OFF (Main)
ON
ON
ON
ON
-01
Voltage
Voltage 1
Voltage 2
Voltage 3
Unit Initial IG Low
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unit Power Source Low
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unit IG High Voltage
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
41
-21
ABS
Indicator
Right-front Wheel Lock
ON
42
-21
Left-front Wheel Lock
ON
43
-21
Right-rear Wheel Lock
ON
44
-21
ON
Left-rear Wheel Lock
51
54
56
61
-21
-22
-23
62
-21
64
-11
-12
65
-21
Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit Low

Voltage
Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit High
Voltage
Brake Fluid Level Stuck ON
* 1: Brake system indicator turns ON when t w o or more wheels fail.
(cont'd)
19-57

DTC
66
VSA
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
-21
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-22
Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-21
Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tire

Malfunction
Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter
Tire Malfunction
Left-front and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-rear and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter
Tire Malfunction
Left-front and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Right-rear and Left-rear Different Diameter Tire
Malfunction
Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-17
-18
-19
-22
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-2A
-2B
-2C
-01
-02
-03
-05
-06
-07
19-58
Note
Activation
Indicator
OFF
-16
81
VSA
Indicator
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
OFF
ON
-14
71
ABS
Indicator
Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA Modulatorcontrol Unit) Malfunction

Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck OFF
-11
-12
68
Detection Item
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-111)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-119)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-121)
VSA
DTC
81
-11
-21
-22
-23
-24
-25
-31
-32
-33
-35
-36
-37
-38
-39
-3A
-3C
-3D
-3E
-42
-51
-52
-53
-54
-55
-56
-57
Detection Item
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
Central Processing
Malfunction
ABS
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-125)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-125)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-123)
(cont'd)
19-59

VSA
Indicator
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
PCM Communication Error (A/T Malfunction)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-21
VSA Sensor Neutral Position not Writing
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-01
F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-11
F-CAN Communication with PCM Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-21
F-CAN Communication with Engine Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-22
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-23
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-24
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-25
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-31
F-CAN Communication with Gauge Control

Module Malfunction
F-CAN Communication with EAT Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
F-CAN Communication with VTM-4 Malfunction
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Detection Item
ABS
Indicator
-13

Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
PCM Communication Error (Engine Malfunction)
-14
84
86
DTC
81
-58
-59
-71
-72
-80
83
-41
-51 *
-71
107
-22
108
-21
F-CAN Communication with Yaw Rate-Lateral/

Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
Malfunction
Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction
121
-01
VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction
ON
ON
ON
ON
-02
ON
ON
ON
ON
-11
ON
ON
ON
ON
-21
ON
ON
ON
ON
-24
ON
ON
ON
ON
* 2:4WD.
19-60
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-122)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-125)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-120)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-126)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-126)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-131)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-129)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-132)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-134)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-137)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
VSA
DTC
122
123
124
Detection Item
ABS
Indicator
VSA
Indicator
ON
VSA
Activation
Indicator
ON
-01
ON
Brake
System
Indicator
ON
-21
ON
ON
ON
ON
-22
ON
ON
ON
ON
-23
ON
ON
ON
ON
-01
ON
ON
ON
ON
-02
ON
ON
ON
ON
-11
ON
ON
ON
ON
-21
ON
ON
ON
ON
-24
ON
ON
ON
ON
-01
ON
ON
ON
ON
-21
ON
ON
ON
ON
-22
ON
ON
ON
ON
-23
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-138)
19-61

W h e n the vehicle has one of these s y m p t o m s , check for VSA diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) w i t h the HDS. If there are
no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until y o u find the cause.
Symptom
HDS does not communicate w i t h
the VSA modulator-control unit or
the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not
c o m e on at start-up (bulb check)
VSA activation indicator does not go

off, and no DTCs are stored
1. S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-139).

2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have
known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-147), then retest. If it is OK, the VSA modulator-control
unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. I f t h e VSA
modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
original VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-147).
ABS indicator, brake system

indicator, and VSA indicator do not
come on
1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page

22-334).
unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. I f t h e VSA
modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those
first.
22-334).
3. S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-140).
ABS indicator, brake system

indicator, and VSA indicator do not
go off
19-62

22-334).
unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. I f t h e
VSA modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
Also check for
VSA
System Description
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 36P Connector
25 26 27
//
30
///
9 10 11
34
12
13
35
36
Description
Terminal
number
1
3
4
Wire
color
RED
LT BLU
LT GRN
Terminal
sign
CAN L
K-LINE
RR-GND
GRY
FL-GND
GRY/RED
RL-GND
YEL
SVCC
10
PNK
FR-GND
11
12
BLK
LT GRN
STR-A
FSR+B
F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit
Communication w i t h HDS
Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
Detects left-rear wheel speed sensor
signal
Power source for the steering angle
sensor
Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
Detects steering angle sensor signal
Power source for the fail-safe relay
13
RED
MR+B
Power source for the motor relay
14
18
WHT
BRN
CAN H
RR-f-B
19
ORN
FL+B
F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit
Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
Signal

about 5.0 V
Battery voltage (about 12 V)

at all times
Battery voltage (about 12 V)
at all times
(cont'd)
19-63

Terminal
number
21
Wire
color
YEL/RED
Terminal
sign
RL+B
23
GRN
FR+B
25
26
27
30
GRY
BLU/ORN
PUR
ORN
WEN
STR-Z
STR-B
IG1
34
BRN/YEL
SGND
35
BLK
GND
36
BLK
MR-GND
19-64
Description
Detects left-rear wheel speed sensor
signal
Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
Detects write enable signal
Power source for activating the
system
Ground for the steering angle
sensor
Ground for the VSA modulatorcontrol unit
Ground for the p u m p motor
Signal

battery voltage (about 12 V)
Continuity to g r o u n d
Continuity to g r o u n d
VSA
System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle sensor, the
y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. The VSA
modulator-control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TCS, VSA, HSA, and brake assist w i t h the brake pressure of each wheel
and reduces engine torque.
VSA OFF
SWITCH
BRAKE
FLUID
LEVEL
SWITCH
PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
Indicator drive signal

Buzzer request signal
VSA OFF switch signal

Parking brake switch signal
Brake fluid level switch signal
TPMS indicator signal
Engine torque control request

Control mode signal
Shift control request
Master cylinder pressure signal
Wheel speed signal
YAW RATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
VSA control enable/disable

Throttle open angle signal
Engine revolution signal
Brake pedal position switch signal
Service check signal
Gear position signal
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Yaw rate signal

Lateral/longitudinal acceleration signal
Wheel rotation pulse signal

STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR
VTM-4
CONTROL UNIT*
Steering angle signal
Rear target
transmission
torque
VSA operation signal

Wheel speed signal
Yaw rate signal
Steering angle signal
CONTROL UNIT
Solenoid control
Motor control
<7
Brake pressure
signal
VSA MODULATORCONTROL UNIT
MODULATOR UNIT
Communication via F-CAN

*1:4WD
(cont'd)
19-65

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Features
Anti-lock control
W i t h o u t ABS, w h e n the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the
vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. W i t h ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure m a x i m u m grip force f r o m the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface
COEFFICIENT O F
FRICTION
T A R G E T SLIP RATE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
Main Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel speed sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based
o n the wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each w h e e l , and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve w h e n the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
CONTROL UNIT
19-66
VSA
EBD (Electronic Brake Distribution) Features

The EBD feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in accordance w i t h the rear wheel load
before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel speed sensor signals, the control unit uses the modulator t o control the
rear brakes individually. W h e n the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit
retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator. As the rear wheel speed
increases, and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit increases the rear brake fluid
pressure by m o m e n t a r i l y opening the inlet valve. This w h o l e process is repeated very rapidly. While this is happening,
kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.you may also hear a muted buzzing sound.This is normal.
REAR W H E E L
BRAKE PRESSURE
With EBD under HEAVY LOAD

at REAR W H E E L S
With EBD under LIGHT LOAD

at REAR W H E E L S
FRONT W H E E L BRAKE P R E S S U R E
(cont'd)
19-67

TCS (Traction Control System) Features
W h e n a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning w h e e l , and sends an engine torque control request to the PCM to slow the spinning
wheel and keep traction.
2WD
A N T I - P O W E R of B R A K E F O R C E
DRIVING P O W E R
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAKE FORCE
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE
SLIPPERY ROAD S U R F A C E
4WD
A N T I - P O W E R of B R A K E F O R C E
DRIVING P O W E R
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAKE FORCE
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE
19-68
SLIPPERY ROAD S U R F A C E
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Features

Oversteer control
A p p l i e s t h e brake to t h e front a n d rear o u t s i d e w h e e l s
The brake makes the y a w rate opposite

to the turning direction
Understeer control
A p p l i e s the brake to the rear i n s i d e w h e e l
Controls the engine torque w h e n accelerating
without V S A
The brake increases the yaw rate toward
the turning direction
The throttle control effect;
reduces vehicle speed
increases cornering force

Brake Assist Features
Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake system
pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
If during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
threshold in less than a certain amount of t i m e , the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the t i m e threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Brake Pedal
Effort Reduced
Panic Stop with Brake Assist

Pressure
Panic Stop without Brake Assist
Pressure
Threshold
Normal Stop
Time
Threshold
19-70
Time
VSA
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the VSA NO (normally open) solenoid
valve, the VSA NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the p u m p , and the p u m p motor.
The hydraulic control has three modes of ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Pressure intensifying mode (VSA) is a combination of the TCS, VSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
RESERVOIR
RESERVOIR
IN: I N L E T S O L E N O I D V A L V E ( N O R M A L L Y O P E N )
OUT: O U T L E T SOLENOID V A L V E (NORMALLY C L O S E D )
Mode
Pressure
intensifying
mode
Pressure
retaining
mode
Pressure
reducing
mode
V S A NO
Valve
V S A NC
Valve
open
closed
Inlet
Solenoid
Valve
open
Outlet
Solenoid
Valve
closed
open
closed
closed
closed
open
closed
closed
open
Brake Fluid
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to

the caliper.
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet and
outlet valves.
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet

valve to the reservoir.
The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
t h r o u g h the damping chamber to the
master cylinder*.
closed
open
Pressure
open
closed
Master cylinder fluid is p u m p e d out by
intensifying
p u m p w i t h motor through V S A NC
mode (VSA)
valve to the caliper.
Caliper fluid pressure exceeds master
cylinder pressure.
* : The motor will keep running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control is finished w i t h
the first pressure reducing mode.
(cont'd)
19-71

HSA (Hill Start Assist) Features
Prevents the vehicle f r o m rolling backwards w h e n moving your foot f r o m the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal while
stopped on a hill. The control unit reads the angle of inclination f r o m the Yaw rate lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor, and that all four wheels are stopped, then it calculates the amount of fluid pressure required to keep the vehicle
f r o m rolling backward w h e n the control unit sees the brake pressure decrease as the driver lifts his foot off of the brake
pedal, and moves his foot to the accelerator pedal. The hill start assist also works w h e n the vehicle is stopped on a
downhill slope.
Vehicle Stop
ON
OFF
Accelerator Open Angle

Necessary For Hill Climbing
Caliper Hydraulic Pressure
Time
HSA Activation
(Holding Of Brake Pressure)
19-72
19-73

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
)
No.1 (120 A)
<TVP
No.2(50A)
CTVP
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 4 (7.5 A)
D2
H1
-BLU-
HT
FUSE/RELAY BOX
-ORNiR16
IG1 HOT in O N (II) and S T A R T (III)
No.4 (40 A)
< J \ i >
-LTGRN-
No.6 (30 A)
O~\_0
RED
No.11 (20 A)
_ 0 " \ _ D
-BRN-
iF16
PNK-
(o'o\
LTBLUYAW RATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
B R A K E P E D A L POSITION S W I T C H
Closed: Brake pedal pressed
VSA OFF SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
BRAKE S Y S T E M
INDICATOR
-RED-RED-
A B S INDICATOR
V S A INDICATOR
-LTBLU-
ORN-
RED
WHT-
RED
RED-
BLK
r
G403
G401
- WHT-
-WHT-
-RED-
- RED
VTM-4
C O N T R O L UNIT*
A11
BLK/YEL V S A ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
ORN
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
Closed: L o w fluid
^
w
1
PARKING
i
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed: Parking U L
Pbrake
l n s f i r fapplied
- P a r k i n n (iff )
1K11/r
C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
D A T A LINK
6
WHTREDGRY-
BLK
LT B L U WHT
- P N K < ] +B
BLK
G303
19-74
BLK
G403
VSA
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
C O N T R O L UNIT
30
-ORN-
5V
REGULATOR
IG1
VCC
-LTGRNRED
FSR +B
13
FAIL-SAFE RELAY
PCM
A8
LT B L U A48
PUMP MOTOR RELAY

STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR
2
VCC
-BLKSTR-A
27
-RED-
VCC
-PURA44
BLU/ORN-
STR-B
26
YEL
PRESSURE
SENSOR
VCC
STR-Z
9
-Z-
SVCC
34
VSA1
-BRN/YEL"
SGND
W H T -
WHT-
-RED-
-RED-
-GRY-
-GRY-
CAN H
1
CAN
CONTROLLER
VSA2
CAN L
25
-LTBLU-
WEN
3
K-LINE
-ORNFL+B
6
-GRY-GRN-
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
IG1
FL-GND
23
ELECTRIC
CURRENT
LIMITATION
FR +B
10
-PNK-
[]c[
-YEL/RED-
+B
O-
FR-GND
21
RL+B
GND
O
-GRY/RED
RL-GND
1
BRN
RR +B
4
-LTGRNRR-GND
36
BLK
MR-GND
35
Hr
BLK
GND
G302
lb-
--:12 V
-O-
"V.4WD
:5V
(cont'd)
19-75
V S A System Components
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X CONNECTOR F (34P)
B R A K E PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
r
1
.20
A 3 4
A 22 23
5|6
9 10 11
27 28
/18
24 25 /
7$
14|15 16|17
29
30 31
18 19
|32 33 34
TTT1
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
CONNECTOR R (20P)
_n_
YAW RATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL A C C E L E R A T I O N
S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
3 4
6 7 8 9 10
12 13
16
18
20
// /
V S A O F F SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
M l
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
1P CONNECTOR
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E 32P C O N N E C T O R
^7 5 6 , / | 8 | 9 | 1 0
17 18M9 20 21 22123 24
1T2,
14
2 5
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

5P CONNECTOR
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P C O N N E C T O R
<
11 12 13 14
27 28 29, 30
BRAKE FLUID
L E V E L SWITCH
n>\n
|1 | 2 | 3 l 4 | 5 l
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

I
VTM-4 C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (22P)

(With 4WD)
11 l / l 3| 4 1/1 6 l / l 8|9|10|11| 12 13
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
35 36
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
I
1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
20
22
18
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (49P)
h
1
DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|.
/
/
11 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22 24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 3513637 38 39
|40|41 ^ 1 / 1 4 4 1 / 1 4 6 ^ 4 8 1 4 9 ]
>< ><
19-76
12
14
32
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-13: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfunction
DTC 13-13: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfunction
DTC 15-13: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfunction
8. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e a p p r o p r i a t e V S A
m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r w h e e l s p e e d
s e n s o r +B a n d G N D t e r m i n a l s ( s e e t a b l e ) .
DTC
11-13
No. 23
No. 10
13-13
N o . 19
No.6
15-13
N o . 18
N o . 21
No.4
17-13
DTC 17-13: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor

Circuit Malfunction
V S A Modulator-control Unit 36P

Connector Terminal

FL-GND (GRY)
1. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
RL-GND (GRY/RED)
RR-GND (LT GRN)
FR-GND (PNK)
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
M 1^3l4[yi6[Xi8WoliT
3. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n turn it to

O N (II) a g a i n .
|14M>1>118|19M21M23L>1
J25l26|27|/f|/ 3 0 1 / 1 / V I
R R + B (BRN)
4. C h e c k for D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13
No. 8
indicated?
F L + B (ORN)
F R + B (GRN)
R L + B (YEL/RED)

N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
C h e c k for l o o s e t e r m i n a l s b e t w e e n t h e w h e e l s p e e d
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e
s e n s o r 2 P connector a n d the V S A modulator-control

unit 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r . Refer to intermittent f a i l u r e s
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e 19-51 ) .
5. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).
appropriate w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r a n d the V S A
m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit.H
N O - G o to s t e p 9.
6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit 3 6 P
c o n n e c t o r ( s e e s t e p 4 o n p a g e 19-147).
7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e a p p r o p r i a t e w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r 2 P
connector.
(cont'd)
19-77

D T C
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA

modulator-control u n i t 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l and
the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal.
VSA Modulatorcontrol Unit 36P
Connector
Terminal
DTC
11-13
13-13
15-13
17-13
No.
No.
No.
No.
23
19
18
21
Appropriate
Wheel Speed
Sensor 2P
Connector
Terminal
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

modulator-control u n i t 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l and
the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal.
DTC

Connector
Terminal
11-13
13-13
15-13
17-13
No. 10
No. 6
No.4
No. 8
W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
LEFTFRONT
RIGHT
REAR
,rvNn
RIGHTFRONT
FL+B
(ORN)
RR+B
(BRN)
W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
LEFTREAR
n/\n
JVNTL
<M> <M>
<m>
FR+B
(GRN)
RL+B
(YEL/RED)
<m> <HT>
RIGHT
REAR
LEFTFRONT
rKsn
RR-GND
(LT GRN)
FL-GND I
(GRY)
rfL
(Q)
FL-GND (GRY)
RR-GND (LT GRN)
|1|/|3|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11
12
13
|25|26|27|/|!>|to|^||/Ml34|
35
36
R R + B (BRN)
F L + B (ORN)
Appropriate
Wheel Speed
Sensor 2P
Connector
Terminal
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
LEFTREAR
RIGHTFRONT
JK^K
JVNU
FR-GNDj
(PNK) ( f t )
RL-GND |
(GRY/,
RED)
RL-GND (GRY/RED)
FR-GND (PNK)
111/1 3| 4 | / | 6 | / T 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12 13
|14|/I/I/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/1
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
35
36
F R + B (GRN)
R L + B (YEL/RED)


NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the appropriate
wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.l
19-78
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the appropriate

wheel speed sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.B

appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector individually (see table).
DTC
11-13
13-13
15-13
17-13

Connector Terminal
No. 23
No. 10
No. 19
No.6
No.4
No. 18
No. 21
No. 8

FL-GND (GRY)
RL-GND (GRY/RED)

connector individually (see table).
DTC
11-13
13-13
15-13
17-13

Connector Terminal
No. 10
No. 23
No.6
No. 19
No.4
No. 18
No. 21
No. 8

FL-GND (GRY)
RL-GND (GRY/RED)

Is there
continuity?

the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
modulator-control u n i t . B
NO-Go to step 12.

Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the wire between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
19-79

15. Substitute the appropriate wheel speed sensor with
opposite wheel speed sensor, or w i t h a known-good
wheel speed sensor.
2 1 . Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not

have the latest software (see page 19-146). I f t h e unit
already has the latest software, substitute a
19-147).
22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to

ON (II) again.

ON (II) again.
Is DTC Indicated that is indicated in step 4 still
present?
NO-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see
page19-149).B
19-80
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13
indicated?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 36P connector. I f t h e VSA
modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
19-147), then retest. I f t h e VSA modulator-control unit
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. I f t h e VSA modulatorcontrol unit was substituted, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-147). If any other
DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!

Power Source Malfunction
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 11-14, 13-14, 15-14, and/or 17-14
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not

19-147).
Is DTC 11-14, 13-14, 15-14, and/or 17-14
indicated?

modulator-control unit 36P connector. Ifthe VSA
19-147), then retest. Ifthe VSA modulator-control unit
troubleshooting.B

Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-control
unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-5D.B
19-81

Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
NOTE: These DTCs may be caused by electrical
interference. Check for aftermarket devices installed in
the vehicle w h e n these DTCs are indicated.

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
DTC
12-11
14-11
16-11
18-11
Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK?

NO-Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check the
mounting position (see page 19-149).H

indicated?
Y E S - l f DTC 12-12,14-12,16-12, or 18-12 is indicated at

the same t i m e , do the DTC 12-12,14-12,16-12, or
18- 12 troubleshooting first (see page 19-83). If DTC
12-12,14-12,16-12, or 18-12 is not indicated, go to
step 5.
NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not
indicated, there is an intermittent failure, the system
is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals between
the wheel speed sensor 2P connector and the
VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19- 51 ) .
19-82
6. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is

properly mounted (see page 19-149).

19-147).
Is DTC 12-11, 14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11

Is DTC 12-11, 14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11
indicated?
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 36P connector. If the VSA
19-147), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control unit
troubleshooting.!

Short to the Other Sensor Circuit

DTC 12-12
FL-GND
(GRY)
RR-GND (LT GRN)
FR-GND (PNK)
|1|/13|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11|
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|2
|25|26|27L/l/|30|/L

E=3
VvV\
AAA
12
13
35 36
RL-GND (GRY/RED)
DTC 14-12
FL-GND (GRY)
H8>
RR-GND (LT GRN)
FR-GND (PNK)
|1 I X l 3 | 4 | / l 6 | / | 8|9110TTT1 12 13
Il4l/1^18fo
35 36
125126|27|>1/|3(1^17M
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 13 m p h

(20 km/h) or more, and go a distance of 328 ft (100 m)
or more.
RL-GND (GRY/RED)

DTC 16-12

Is DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12
Indicated?
RR-GND (LT GRN)

FR-GND (PNK)
YES-Go t o step 5.
Me

troubleshooting (see page 19-51 ) .
|/|8|9|lb|l1
13
35 36
|25l26l27L/|/l3(
FL-GND (GRY)
12
RL-GND (GRY/RED)
DTC 18-12

connector (see step 4 on page 19-147).
modulator-control unit 36P connector wheel speed
sensor GND terminals (see table).
DTC
12-12
14-12
16-12
18-12
VSA Modulator-control Unit 3 6 P

Connector Terminal
Appropriate
Terminal
No. 10
No.6
No.4
No. 8
RR-GND (LT GRN)
r^Sh
FR-GND (PNK)
i]i/[3|4M6lX|8[9[lO|li
12
|25[26|27l/l/l3C
35 36
FL-GND (GRY)
13
RL-GND (GRY/RED)
Other Terminals
No.6
No. 10
No. 10
No. 10
No.4
No.4
No.6
No.6
No. 8
No. 8
No. 8
No.4
YES-Repair short in the wires between the

NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
19-83

connector.
have the latest software (see page 19-146). If the unit
19-147).
or more.
Is DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12
Indicated?

troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulatorcontrol unit was substituted, replace the original VSA
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!

Installation Error
Installation Error
Installation Error
Installation Error
(10 km/h) or more.
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA
Are all four values the same?
Check f o r loose terminals between the wheel speed
unit 36P connector. Refer t o intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-5D.H
NO-Go t o step 3.
DTC
12-21
14-21
16-21
18-21

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor Installation OK?

YES-Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor
(see page 19-149).li
mounting position (see page 19-149).H
19-84

Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More)

Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))






1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between

19 m p h (30 km/h) and 31 m p h (50 km/h) for
70 seconds or more.
1. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle between

1 m p h (1 km/h) and 9 m p h (15 km/h).

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time,
NO-Go to step 3.
DTC
12-22
14-22
16-22
18-22

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

(see page 1 9 - 1 4 9 ) .
m o u n t i n g position (see page 1 9 - 1 4 9 ) .

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time,
NO-Go to step 3.
DTC
12-23
14-23
16-23
18-23

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear

(see page 1 9 - 1 4 9 ) .
mounting position (see page 1 9 - 1 4 9 ) .
19-85

DTC 21-11: Right-front Magnetic Encoder
(Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 22-11: Left-front Magnetic Encoder
DTC 23-11: Right-rear Magnetic Encoder
DTC 24-11: Left-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel
Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for

damage, debris, and correct installation.
21-11
22-11
Appropriate
Magnetic
Encoder
Right-front
Left-front
23-11
24-11
Right-rear
Left-rear
DTC
Note
Remove the hub

bearing unit (see
page 18-14).
Remove the hub
bearing unit (see
page 18-36).
Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?

Y E S - R e m o v e the debris f r o m the magnetic encoder,

or replace the hub bearing u n i t : B

or more.
Front: Replace the front hub bearing unit (see page

18-14).
Rear: Replace the rear h u b bearing unit (see page
18-36).

Is DTC 21-11, 22-11, 23-11, and/or 24-11
Indicated?
19-86
NO-Clean off debris f r o m the appropriate magnetic

encoder surface on the hub bearing unit, then go t o
step 1, and recheck. If DTC is still present, replace the
appropriate hub bearing unit.
VSA
DTC 25-12: Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit

DTC 25-13: Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit
Malfunction
DTC 25-21: Yaw Rate Sensor Neutral Position
Malfunction
DTC 25-17: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal

Acceleration Sensor Power Source Voltage
Malfunction
DTC 25-18: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit
Malfunction


3. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
(see page 19-144).
4. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.

(see page 19-144).
ON (II) again.

Is DTC 25-12, 25-13, or 25-21
indicated?
YES-Replace the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor (see page 1 9 - 1 4 4 ) .
time.B
Is DTC 25-17 or 25-18 indicated?

YES-lf DTC 61-01,61-21,61-22, 61-23, and/or 62-21 is
indicated at the same t i m e , check the battery
performance (see page 22-93), and do the alternator
and regulator circuit troubleshooting first (see page
4-28). If DTC 61-01,61-21,61 -22,61 -23, and/or 62-21 is
not indicated at the same t i m e , replace the y a w
19-144).
time.B
19-87

DTC 25-22: Yaw Rate Sensor Stuck
DTC 25-23: Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit


(see page 19-144).

(10 km/h) or more.
Is DTC 25-22
5. Wait 10 seconds or more.
Is DTC 25-23
indicated, there was an intermittent failure, the
system is OK at this time.H
6. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR and
Y A W RATE S in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 0 7s indicated?
NO-Replace the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (see page 19-144).H
7. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the Y A W RATE S in the
VSA DATA LIST w i t h the HDS while driving in corners.
change?

time.B
19-88

ON (II) again.
indicated?
Does the indicated value

(see page 19-144).
indicated?

time.B
DTC 25-24: Yaw Rate Sensor Gain Low

DTC 25-25: Yaw Rate Sensor Gain High
DTC 26-24: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain
Low
DTC 26-25: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain
High
DTC 28-21: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Neutral Position Malfunction
Stuck
Gain Low
Gain High
NOTE: W h e n the vehicle is driven on a lift, and y o u
speed up and slow d o w n repeatedly, this DTC can set.
DTC 26-12: Lateral Acceleration Sensor

Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
Internal Circuit Malfunction
Neutral Position Malfunction
DTC 26-23: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit
Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
Communication Error
Circuit Intermittent Interruption
NOTE: While doing this troubleshooting, avoid
vibrations or shaking the vehicle.

(see page 19-144).
(15 km/h) or more.

(see page 19-144).
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it t o
ON (II) again.
5. Wait 15 seconds or more.

Is DTC 25-24, 25-25, 26-24, 26-25, 28-21, 28-22, 28-24,
or 28-25 indicated?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
time.l
Is DTC 26-12, 26-13, 26-21, 26-23,28-12,

indicated?
28-13, or 28-23
Y E S - R e p l a c e the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
19-89

DTC 26-22: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Stuck
(see page 19-144).
(10 km/h) or more.
Is DTC 26-22
indicated?
DTC 27-11: Steering Angle Sensor DIAG

Signal Error (Initial)
DTC 27-26: Steering Angle Sensor DIAG
Signal Error (Main)
3. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), then turn it t o
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 27-11 or 27-26
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, go t o the

system is OK at this time.H

Check for loose terminals between the steering angle
troubleshooting (see page 19-51).H
6. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR and

Y A W RATE S in the VSA DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is 0 7 s indicated?
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector

(see page 19-143).


7. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the Y A W RATE S in t h e

VSA DATA LIST w i t h the HDS while driving in corners.
Does the indicated value
change?

time.B
19-90
VSA

steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2,
No. 3, No. 4, and No. 5 individually.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector terminal and the steering
angle sensor 5P connector terminal individually (see
table).
Sign
1 2 3 4 5
STR-A (BLK)
STR-D
(BLU/ORN)
SVCC (YEL)
STR-B
(PUR)
SVCC
STR-A
STR-D
STR-B
SGND
V S A Modulatorcontrol Unit 3 6 P
Connector
Terminal
No. 9
No. 11
No. 26
No. 27
No. 34
Steering Angle
Sensor 5 P
Connector
Terminal
No. 5
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 1
S T E E R I N G A N G L E S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
S G N D (BRN/YEL)
STR-A (BLK)
the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulatorcontrol u n i t . B
5
SVCC
(YEL)
STR-D (BLU/ORN)
STR-B (PUR)
NO-Go to step 9.
SVCC
(YEL)
STR-A (BLK)
STR-B (PUR)
3 I f (XI 6 LX| ST9 110111 12
13
35
36
^26l27|/M30|yi/|X|34|
STR-D (BLU/ORN)
S G N D (BRN/YEL)

NO-Repair open in the wire between the steering
angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control u n i t . H
(cont'd)
19-91

10. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor (see
page 19-143).
DTC 27-21: Steering Angle Sensor Stuck

Neutral Position
DTC 27-22: Steering Angle Sensor Stuck

Offset Position

ON (II) again.
2. Turn the steering wheel left and right 90 degrees or

more. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA

Is DTC 27-11 or 27-26
indicated?
NO-Replace the original steering angle sensor (see
page 1 9 - 1 4 3 ) .
19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 27-11 or 27-26
indicated?

troubleshooting.!
19-92
Is there +90 or more, and -90 or less?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .
unit 36P connector. Refer t o intermittent failures
NO-Go to step 3.
(see page 19-143).
VSA
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and

steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2,
No. 3, and No. 4 individually.
DTC 27-23: Steering Angle Sensor Counter

Malfunction
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

1 2
STR-A (BLK)
3 4
5
STR-B
(PUR)
STR-D
(BLU/ORN)

times.
Is DTC 27-23
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.

steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.l
NO-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page

19-143).B

(see page 19-143).
(cont'd)
19-93

10. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4.

5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and between
No. 1 and No. 4 individually.
STEERING A N G L E S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
STR-A (BLK)
1 2 3 4|5
h
1 2 3 4 5
STR-B (PUR)
S T R - A (BLK)
S T R - B (PUR)
SGND
(BRN/YEL)
YES-Repair short in the wires between the steering
angle sensor and the V S A modulator-control u n i t . B
5P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 2, and between
STR-B (PUR)
1 2
3 4
5.
STR-A (BLK)
S V C C (YEL)
angle sensor and the V S A modulator-control u n i t . B
19-94
angle sensor and the V S A modulator-control unit.B
19-143).B
VSA
DTC 27-24: Steering Angle Sensor Exchange

Malfunction
DTC 31-xx*: ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
DTC 32-xx*: ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
2. Turn the steering wheel one turn. Check the

STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there about 288-432 (-288 - -432 )?
time.B
19-143).B
DTC 33-xx*: ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
DTC 34-xx*: ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid
Valve Malfunction
DTC 35-xx*: ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid
Valve Malfunction
DTC 36-xx*: ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid
Valve Malfunction
DTC 37-xx*: ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid Valve
Malfunction
DTC 38-xx*: ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid
Valve Malfunction
*: Any two-character subcode (see table).
Subcode
01
02
Malfunction
Solenoid Initial
Pulse
11
Initial Feedback
Signal
Feedback Signal
21
Solenoid Pulse
22
Solenoid
Speculative
23
Solenoid Stuck
ON
24
Feedback
Signal/Solenoid
Stuck ON
Note (DTC)
31-01,32-01,
33-01,34-01,
35-01,36-01,
37-01,38-01
31-02, 33-02,
35-02, 37-02
31-11,33-11,
35-11,37-11
31-21,32-21,
33-21,34-21,
35-21,36-21,
37-21,38-21
31-22, 32-22,
33-22, 34-22,
35-22, 36-22,
37-22, 38-22
31-23, 32-23,
33-23, 34-23,
35-23, 36-23,
37-23, 38-23
31-24, 33-24,
35-24, 37-24
(cont'd)
19-95

DTC 41-21: Right-front Wheel Lock
DTC 42-21: Left-front Wheel Lock

ON (II) again.
DTC 43-21: Right-rear Wheel Lock
DTC 44-21: Left-rear Wheel Lock
Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx, or

38-xx indicated?
The DTCs may be indicated under these conditions:
The ABS or VSA continues t o operate f o r a long time.

time.B
The vehicle goes into a spin.

Snow, dirt, or debris build-up on the wheel speed
sensor or magnetic encoder.
Misadjusted brake pedal position switch.

19-147).
Contaminated brake fluid.

ON (II) again.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift,

then spin the appropriate wheel by hand.

Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, 37-xx, or
38-xx indicated?
was substituted, g o to step 1.
troubleshooting.B
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the

pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more brake
pedal applications during an extended testdrive..
DTC
41-21
42-21
43-21
44-21
Appropriate Wheel
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
Is there brake drag?

Y E S - R e p a i r the brake drag (see page 19-5).B
NO-Go to step 3.
mounting position (see page 19-149).B
(10 km/h) for 20 seconds or more.
19-96

Is DTC 41-21, 42-21, 43-21, and Ior 44-21
DTC 51-11: Motor Lock

indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
DTC 51-13: Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction


indicated, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Refer to intermittent failure troubleshooting (see
page 19-51 ) .

ON (II) again.
4. Wait 5 seconds.

have the latest software (see page 19-146). Ifthe unit
19-147).
(10 km/h) for 20 seconds or more.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID
Is DTC 51-11 or 51-13

Is DTC 41-21, 42-21, 43-21, and Ior 44-21
5. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in the

VSA FUNCTION TEST five times w i t h the HDS.
indicated?

indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
time.B

troubleshooting.B
(cont'd)
19-97

19-147).
8. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), then t u r n it to ,
ON (II) again.
DTC 51-12: Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it t o
ON (II) again.
9. Wait 5 seconds.
Is DTC 51-12
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID
Is DTC 51-11 or 51-13
indicated?

troubleshooting.
19-98
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose terminals at the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-51 ) .
6. Check the No. 6 (30 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
blown?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 14.
8, Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control

unit 36P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 13 and body g r o u n d .
M R + B (RED)
4> /I / \ y l i f t h a l / I o i l y i o a
1 " 4 1 / 1 / [/ 1 i o | i y [ /
|25!26|27|Xl/l30|yiy|/|34|

15. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control
unit 36P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 13 and body g r o u n d .
12 13
/\
|
M R + B (RED)
35 36
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / 1 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12 13
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
35 36
|25|26|27l/l/|30|/|/L/|34|
the No. 6 (30 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control u n i t . H
NO-lnstall a new No. 6 (30 A) fuse in the auxiliary
connector.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 6 (30 A)
fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and
the VSA modulator-control u n i t . H

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 51-12
indicated?
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see

page19-147).B
NO-The troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . !
(cont'd)
19-99

connector.
DTC 52-12: Motor Stuck OFF


19-147).
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then t u r n it to
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 51-12
indicated?

troubleshooting.

ON (II) again.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID
Is DTC 52-12
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.H
19-147).
ON (II) again.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID
19-100
VSA

Is DTC 52-12
indicated?

troubleshooting.
DTC 53-01: Motor Relay Stuck ON 1

DTC 53-12: Motor Relay Stuck ON 2
ON (II) again.
is DTC 53-01 or 53-12
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-51J.H
(cont'd)
19-101

unit 36P connector terminal No. 36 and body g r o u n d .
|25J26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
12
13
35
36
MR-GND(BLK)

connector.
19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 53-01 or 53-12

YES-Go t o step 8.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).H
indicated?
YES-Check f o r loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit w a s updated, substitute a
was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit w a s updated,
DTCs are indicated, g o t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.B
19-102
DTC 54-03: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON

DTC 54-04: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Initial)

DTC 54-21: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)

FSR+B (LT GRN)

ON (II) again.
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1?
Il4|y0^18|19|/|2l|/|23|/1
35
|25|26|27|/1/]30|/I/L/|34|
13
36

Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21
indicated?
time.B

the No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control u n i t . B
6. Check the No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood

fuse/relay box.
NO-lnstall a n e w No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary

Is the fuse
blown?
connector (see step 4 o n page 19-147).

connector.
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21
indicated?
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see

page19-147).B
NO-The troubleshooting is complete.B
(cont'd)
19-103

have the latest software (see page 19-146). i f t h e unit
19-147).
DTC 56-01: Initial VIG FET Stuck OFF (Initial)

ON (II) again.
16. Check f o r DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21
indicated?
YES-Check f o r loose terminals in the VSA

troubleshooting.
DTC 56-02: Initial VIG FET Stuck ON

DTC 56-11: VIG FET Stuck OFF (Main)

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 56-01, 56-02, or 56-11
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 56-01, 56-02, or 56-11
indicated?

troubleshooting^
19-104
VSA
DTC 61-01: VSA Modulator-control Unit Initial

IG Low Voltage
DTC 61-21: VSA Modulator-control Unit Power
Source Low Voltage 1
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the
engine.
Is DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22, or 61-23 indicated?
Check f o r loose terminals at the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-51 ) .
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA
6. Using a voltmeter, measure and note the voltage
between the battery terminals.
NOTE: If the battery voltage is below 9.5 V, check the
battery (see page 22-93), and troubleshoot the
alternator regulator circuit (see page 4-28).
7. Compare the data list voltage noted in step 5 to the

battery voltage in step 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings
then 3 V?
less

failures troubleshooting (see page 19-51). Ifthe code
resets after clearing, go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 8.
19-147).
engine.
fe DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22, or 61-23 indicated?
troubleshooting.!
19-105

19-147).
DTC 62-21: VSA Modulator-control Unit IG

High Voltage
engine.

Is DTC 62-21
Is DTC 62-21
indicated?
time.B
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA
6. Using a voltmeter, measure and note the voltage
between the battery terminals.
NOTE: If the voltage is above 15.1 V, troubleshoot the
alternator regulator circuit (see page 4-28).
7. Compare the data list voltage noted in step 5 to the
battery voltage in step 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage readings
than 3 V?
less

failures troubleshooting (see page 19-51). If the code
resets after clearing, go to step 8.
19-106

engine.
indicated?

troubleshooting. B
VSA
DTC 64-11: Steering Angle Sensor Power

Circuit Low Voltage
ON (II) again.

19-147).
ON (II) again.

Is DTC 64-11
indicated?
Is DTC 64-11
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
(see page 19-143).

troubleshooting.
2 3 4 5
S V C C (YEL)
Is there
continuity?

the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulatorcontrol u n i t . B
19-107

DTC 64-12: Steering Angle Sensor Power

9. Measure the voltage between steering angle sensor

ON (II) again.
1 2 3 4 5

Is DTC 64-12
S V C C (YEL)
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
(see page 19-143).
19-108

YES-Repair short t o power in the w i r e between the
unit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
DTC 65-21: Brake Fluid Level Stuck ON
NOTE: Bleeding the brake system while the ignition

switch is ON can cause this DTC.

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 64-12
indicated?

1. Check the brake fluid level in the master cylinder

reservoir.
Is the brake fluid level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Do the brake pad inspection: Front (see page
19-13), rear (see page 19-25), check for brake fluid
leaks or replace w o r n brake pads, then go to step 2,
and recheck.
ON (II) again.

troubleshooting.!
Is DTC 65-21
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B
ON (II) again.
8. Check the brake system indicator in the gauge control
module.
Does the indicator come on then go off?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
19-109

9. Check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH in the VSA
Does the HDS indicate the BRAKE FLUID
SWITCH as OFF?
LEVEL
12. Check for continuity between brake fluid level switch

BRAKE FLUID L E V E L SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control module,

then go to step 1, and recheck. If no DTCs are
indicated, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-359).
ORN
10. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P connector,
then check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH in the
VSA DATA LIST.
OFF?
YES-Replace the brake fluid reservoir tank (the brake

fluid level switch is included) (see page 19-22).H
19-110
the gauge control module and the brake fluid level
switch.
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control module,
indicated, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-359).

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 65-21
indicated?

N O - l f the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
troubleshooting.
DTC 66-11: Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA

Modulator-control Unit) Malfunction
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 66-11, 66-14, 66-16, 66-17, 66-18, or 66-19
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
(cont'd)
19-111

19-147).
(II) again.
Is DTC 66-11, 66-14, 66-16, 66-17, 66-18, or 66-19
indicated?
troubleshooting.B
19-112

3. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), then t u r n it to
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 66-12 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
(see page 19-143).
VSA


unit 36P connector terminal No. 9 and steering angle
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5.
5
S V C C (YEL)
1 2
3 4 5
S V C C (YEL)
the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulatorcontrol unit.B
NO-Go to step 9.
S V C C (YEL)
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / 1 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12
|14[/1/I/]18|19|/121|/]23|/1 35
|25|26|27|/T/|30|/|/|/|34|
13
36


NO-Repair open in the wire between the steering
angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control unit.l
5
S V C C (YEL)

unit.B
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
19-113

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 66-12
indicated?

troubleshooting.!
DTC 68-21: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck

OFF
2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal.
Is there 10 MPa or less?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Check for brake drag or a misadjusted brake
pedal position switch. If they are n o r m a l , go t o step
17.
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS w h i l e m o v i n g the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,
when the pedal is released?
and OFF

Check for loose terminals between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector, PCM connector A (49P),
and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector.
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-51 ) .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P
connector.
19-114
VSA
6. Connect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector

11. Remove and check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the

auxiliary under-hood fuse/ relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
J U M P E R WIRE
BRN
LTBLU
ll
12. Check for continuity between brake pedal position

switch 4P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body ground.
3><
BRN

the HDS.
3 ><

Y E S - C h e c k the brake pedal position switch
adjustment (see page 19-6). If it is OK, replace the
brake pedal position s w i t c h .
9. Disconnect the j u m p e r wire.
the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/
relay box and the brake pedal position s w i t c h .
NO-Repair short to body ground in the wire between
brake pedal position switch 4P connectorterminal
No.2 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.8, or
troubleshoot for a short to body g r o u n d in the brake
light c i r c u i t . B
(cont'd)
19-115

13. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position
switch 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
16. Check for continuity between brake pedal position

switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM
BRN
1
3
>
lr-îl
I 23 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |10|.
11
/ 13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21
22 24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 35k56 37 38 39
|40|41
^|44|/;|46
48|49|
I1
BKSW
(LT BLU)
/ >< ><
Is there battery
voltage?
LT BLU
I
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 (20 A)
fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/ relay box and
the brake pedal position s w i t c h . B
14. Short the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1,
the original PCM (see page 11-250).
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and the
brake pedal position s w i t c h .
19-116
VSA

19-147).
(10 km/h) or more.
Is DTC 68-21
Indicated?

troubleshooting.B
DTC 68-22: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck

ON
2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal.
Is there 10 MPa or more?
YES-Check the brake pedal height and the brake
pedal position switch adjustment (see page 19-6). If
the brake pedal height and the brake pedal position
switch adjustment is OK, go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 3.
the HDS while m o v i n g the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,
when the pedal is released?
and OFF

time.B
NO-Go to step 4.
the HDS, and disconnect the brake pedal position
switch 4P connector.
Does the indicator change from ON to OFF?
Y E S - l n s p e c t t h e brake pedal position switch and
adjustment (see page 19-6). Ifthe brake pedal position
switch and adjustment are OK, replace the brake
pedal position switch (see page 19-6).B
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
19-117

9. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position
switch 4P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 and body g r o u n d .

19-147).
ON (II) again.
LTBLU
1
3
>
Is there 0.1 V or more?

PCM and the brake pedal position s w i t c h .
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1,
the original PCM (see page 11-250).
19-118
Is DTC 68-22 Indicated?

troubleshooting.!
VSA
DTC 71-21: Right-front or Left-rear Different

Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-22: Left-front or Right-rear Different
DTC 71-23: Right-front and Right-rear
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-24: Left-front and Left-rear Different
1. Check the tires for proper inflation and the correct

size.
Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26, 71-27,
71-28, 71-29, 71-2A, 71-2B, or 71-2C indicated?
DTC 71-25: Right-front and Left-front Different

YES-Replace tires as needed until all their diameters

match.
DTC 71-26: Right-rear and Left-rear Different


time.B
DTC 71-27: Right-front or Left-rear Different

DTC 71-28: Left-front or Right-rear Different
DTC 71-29: Right-front and Right-rear
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-2A: Left-front and Left-rear Different
DTC 71-2B: Right-front and Left-front Different
DTC 71-2C: Right-rear and Left-rear Different
NOTE: The DTC is indicated w h e n the vehicle has a
different diameter tire(s) compared t o the other tires.
DTC
71-21
71-22
71-23
71-24
71-25
71-26
71-27
71-28
71-29
71-2 A
71-2B
71-2C
Sectional
Right-front or left-rear
Left-front or right-rear
Right-front and right-rear
Left-front and left-rear
Right-front and left-front
Right-rear and left-rear
Right-front or left-rear
Left-front or right-rear
Right-front and right-rear
Left-front and left-rear
Right-front and left-front
Right-rear and left-rear
19-119

DTC 81-xx*: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
*: A n y two-character subcode (Except these
combinations: DTC 81-07,81-11,81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51,
81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56,81-57, 81-58, and
81-59)

19-147).

ON (II) again.

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 81-xx indicated?
YES-lf DTC 81-07, 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, 81-52,
81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, or 81-59 is
indicated at the same t i m e , do the appropriate
troubleshooting first. If DTC 81-07,81-11,81-3D,
81-3E, 81-51, 81-52, 81-53,81-54, 81-55, 81-56,81-57,
81-58, or 81-59 is not indicated. Go to step 5.
time.B
19-120
Is DTC 81-xx indicated?

troubleshooting.
VSA
DTC 81-07: Central Processing Unit (CPU)



ON (II) again.
S V C C (YEL)

Is DTC 81-07
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
(see page 19-143).

unit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
19-121

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 81-07
indicated?

w a s substituted, go to step 1.


troubleshooting.
19-122

Is DTC 81-11, 81-52, 81-54, 81-56, or 81-58
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
VSA

19-147).
Is DTC 81-11, 81-52, 81-54, 81-56, or 81-58 indicated?
troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA modulatorcontrol unit w a s substituted, replace the original VSA
troubleshooting.

Is DTC 81-51, 81-53, 81-55, or 81-57 indicated?
time.B
(cont'd)
19-123

connector terminals (see table).
DTC
81-51
81-53
81-55
81-57

Connector Terminal
No. 23
No. 19
No. 18
No. 21

connector.
19-147).

Is DTC 81-51, 81-53, 81-55, or 81-57
.1 I X | 3 | 4 | X | 6 L X | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12
ll4|/|y1>|l8ll9L/|2l|X|23L>|
13

NO-Go to step 9.
19-124
indicated?

troubleshooting.B
VSA
DTC 81-3D: Central Processing Unit (CPU)

DTC 81-3E: Central Processing Unit (CPU)

8. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times.
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59

4. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times.
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59

19-147).
indicated?

indicated?
YES-Go t o step 6.
time.B

troubleshooting.B
19-125

DTC 83-13: PCM Communication Error
(Engine Malfunction)
DTC 83-14: PCM Communication Error
(A/T Malfunction)

indicated?
Check for loose terminals between PCM connector A
(49P) and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector. Refer t o intermittent failures
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC 83-13 or 83-14
indicated?
19-126

Is DTC 83-13 or 83-14

19-147).
Is DTC 83-13 or 83-14
indicated?

modulator-control u n i t 3 6 P connector. If the VSA
troubleshooting.
VSA
DTC 84-21: VSA Sensor Neutral Position not

Writing
(see page 19-144).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 84-21
indicated?
19-147).
DTC 86-01: F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-01
indicated?
Check for loose terminals between PCM connector A
(49P) and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-51).B
5. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with the
Are you able to retrieve fuel and emissions
DTCs?
systems

(see page 19-144).
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the fuel and emissions systems

DTCs (see page 11-3), then go to step 6.

ON (II) again.
NO-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (see page

11-215).B

Is DTC 84-21
indicated?


7. Short the SCS line with the HDS.

troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe VSA modulatorcontrol unit was substituted, replace the original VSA
troubleshooting.B
(cont'd)
19-127

unit 36P connector terminal and PCM connector A
(49P) terminal (see table).
Sign
CAN L
CAN H
V S A Modulatorcontrol Unit 36P

Connector
Terminal
No. 1
No. 14
PCM Connector A
(49P) Terminal
No. 49
No. 48

CAN L (RED)
CANH
(WHT)
M I / l 3 | 4 H e | / | 8 | 9 | l O | l l | 12
-!14I/Iy1/118|19U121L/)23U1
35
|25|26|27|/|X|30|XU1/|34|
13
36
1 I 2 I 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 |10
1liXll314|l5|l6l 17fT , 2021
22 2 4 > ^ 2 5 2 3 262728
,29J30|31l32l33|34|35|36|37| . ,
|40|41^1^44|>146J^4^
CAN H (WHT)
CAN L (RED)

VSA modulator-control u n i t . B
19-128

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-01
indicated?

troubleshooting.B
VSA
DTC 86-11: F-CAN Communication with

PCM Malfunction

Engine Malfunction

Engine Malfunction
Engine Malfunction

9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol u n i t 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l and PCM
connector A (49P) terminal (see table).

Engine Malfunction
Engine Malfunction
CAN L
CAN H
No. 49
No. 48


EAT Malfunction
PCM Connector
A (49P) Terminal

Connector
Terminal
No. 1
No. 14
Sign
CAN L (RED)
CANH
(WHT)
|1|/|3|4|/|6|/18|9|10|11|
!14|/1/U18|19|/|21|/123|/I
|25|26|27t/|/|30L/VV]34|
12
'
13
35 36
J

(10 km/h) or more.
I1 I

Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 indicated?
Y E S - l f DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do the
DTC 86-01 troubleshooting first (see page 19-127). If
the DTC 86-01 is not indicated, go to step 5.
N O - l f any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals
between PCM connector A (49P) and the VSA
modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-51).!
23 4 I 5 | 6 I 78 I 9 | 1 0 | .
16 1718 19 20121
11 13
25
22 24
26 27 28
29 30 31 32^33 34 3336 37 38 39
|40|41
^ | 4 4 | ^ | 4 6 ^481491
i
/ >< ><
4
CAN H (WHT)
CAN L (RED)

VSA modulator-control u n i t . B
(cont'd)
19-129

(see page 11-7).
(10 km/h) or more.
Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 indicated?

19-147).
(10 km/h) or more.
Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25, and/or
86-41 indicated?
troubleshooting.
19-130

Gauge Control Module Malfunction
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector terminal and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal (see table).
Sign

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-31
indicated?
Y E S - l f DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do the

CANL
CANH

Connector
Terminal
No. 1
No. 14


between the gauge control module 32P connector
and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector.
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-51 ) .
Gauge Control
Module 32P
Connector
Terminal
No. 29
No. 30
H [ / I 3 | 4 j / 1 6 [ / ! 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12 13
A ^ \ A A A ^ \ A ^ \ A ^ \ A
|25|26|27UO^30|XIXIX|34|
35 36
CAN H (WHT)
l | 2 i / L / | 5 | 6 / 1 8 | 9 | 1 0 1l|l2|l3h4L/fl6|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25L/127|28|29|30|/132

ON (II) again.
C A N L (RED)
C A N H (WHT)
Does the gauge indicators come on?

N O - D o the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 2 2 - 3 3 4 ) .
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminals in the gauge control
module 32P connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module, then go to step 1,
and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, replace the
original gauge control module (see page 22-359). If
DTC 86-31 resets, go to step 10.
control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.H
(cont'd)
19-131

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-31
indicated?

w a s substituted, go to step 1.
troubleshooting.

VTM-4 Malfunction
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-51
indicated?
YES-lf DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do the

between the VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P) and
the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector. Refer
to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-5D.B
ON (II) again.
Does the VTM-4 indicator come on and stay on?
YES-Do the VTM-4 troubleshooting (see page 15-4).B
NO-Go to step 6.
19-132
VSA
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector terminal and VTM-4
control unit connector A (22P) terminal (see table).
Sign
VTM-4 Control
Unit Connector A
(22P) Terminal

Connector
Terminal
No. 1
No. 14
CAN L
CAN H
No. 22
No. 11

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 86-51

CAN L (RED)
CANH
(WHT)
|1!X13|4I/161/18|9|10|11|
-|l4l/VV1l8il9L/l2l|X23|/1
|25|26|27|XX30[/1/M34|
12
13
35
36
CAN H (WHT)
1
12 13 14 15 16
10
11
/ / /
22
7
18
9
20
CAN L (RED)
indicated?

troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe VSA modulatorcontrol unit was substituted, replace the original VSA
troubleshooting.B

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VTM-4 control
unit connector A (22P). If necessary, substitute a
known-good VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44),
indicated, replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page
15-44). If DTC 86-51 resets, go to step 10.
control unit and the VSA modulator-control unit.B
19-133

DTC 86-71: F-CAN Communication with Yaw
Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Malfunction
8. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector terminal and the y a w
rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P
connectorterminal (see table).
Sign

Connector
Terminal
CAN L
CAN H
No. 1
No. 14

ON (II) again.
Yaw
Rate-Lateral/
Longitudinal
Acceleration
Sensor 5P
Connector
Terminal
No.4
No.3

Is DTC 86-71
indicated?
YES-lf DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do the

the DTC 86-01 is not indicated, g o t o step 5.
NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, g o t o the
system is OK at this t i m e . Check f o r loose terminals at
the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
5P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector. Refer t o intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 5 D . H

CAN L (RED)
1/1 3 i 4 1 ^ 6 1 / 1 8 1 9
1101111
| 2 5 | 2 6 | 2 7 | / M 3 0 L / | / | / | 3 4 |
12
13
35
36
C A N H (WHT)
C A N H (WHT)
6. Disconnect the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor 5P connector (see page 19-144).
I5
J C A N L (RED)

connector (see step 4 o n page 19-147).
Y A W RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the y a w
rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
VSA modulator-control u n i t . H
19-134
VSA

10. Measure the voltage between y a w rate-lateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
A C C E L E R A T I O N S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R

12. Reconnect the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal
14. Measure the voltage between y a w rate-lateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor 5P connector
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
A C C E L E R A T I O N S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
(4)
[BLK
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 4 (7.5 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the y a w
rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor.B
Is there 0.1 Vor
less?

NO-Repair open in the wire between the y a w ratelateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and body
ground (G403).B
19-135

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cool the VSA
modulator-control unit, and wait 1 hour or more.
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 107-22
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 6.

19-147).
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 107-22
indicated?

troubleshooting is complete. I f t h e VSA modulatorcontrol unit w a s substituted, replace the original VSA
troubleshooting.B
19-136
VSA
DTC 108-21: Steering Angle Sensor

Malfunction
Is DTC 108-21
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
6. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor (see
page 19-143).

19-147).
Is DTC 108-21
indicated?

was substituted, go to s t e p l .
troubleshooting.B

Is DTC 108-21
indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Replace the original steering angle sensor (see
page 19-143).B
19-137

D T C
DTC 121-xx*: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction


19-147).
ON (II) again.
*: A n y two-character subcode (see table).

Sectional
Right-front
and left-rear
DTC
121
122
123
124
-01
-02
-11
-21
-24
-01
-21
-22
-23
-01
-02
-11
-21
-24
-01
-21
-22
-23
Valve
Regulator
Suction
Left-front and
right-rear
Regulator
Suction

ON (II) again.
Is DTC 121-xx 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx
f
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
19-138
Is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx
indicated?

troubleshooting.B
VSA
V S A activation indicator does not go off, and
no DTCs are stored
7, Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P

V S A O F F SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
2. Check the VSA activation indicator for several

seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
pi ,
Does the indicator come on then go off?
lf|_
I 2 L/1 4 j 5
YES-The system is OK at this time.B

NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (see
page 19-145).
5. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-145).
Is the VSA OFF switch OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-145).H
6. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector
(see page 22-359).
YES-Repair short to body ground between the gauge
control module and the VSA OFF switch.B
(see page 22-359), then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is
OK, replace the original gauge control module (see
page 22-359).
19-139

ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and
VSA indicator do not go off
8. Check the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator

and the VSA indicator for several seconds w h e n the
ignition switch is turned t o ON (II).

fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
Does the indicators come on then go off?
blown?
YES-The troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e .
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go t o step 9.
acceleration sensor 5P connector (see page 19-144).
IH/|3|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11|
|14|/1/I/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
NO-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see

page 19-147).B
9. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see
page 22-334).
Is the gauge control module OK?
YES-Go t o step 10.
NO-Substitute a known g o o d gauge control module
(see page 22-359). If it is OK, replace the original
gauge control module (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
12 13
35 36

IG1 (ORN)

the No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the VSA modulator-control unit or the y a w
rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration s e n s o r . B
NO-lnstall a new No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box, then go t o step 6.
I H / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12 13
|14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21|/|23|/|
35 36
|25l26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|
IG1 (ORN)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 13.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 4 (7.5 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the VSA
19-140

16. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector

(see page 22-359).
17. Check for continuity between the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector terminal and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal (see table).
Connector
Terminal
No. 1
No. 14
Sign
I25l26[27|/l/l30l/l/l/l34'
GND (BLK)
CAN L
CANH
Gauge Control
Module 32P
Connector
Terminal
No. 29
No. 30

CAN L (RED)
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G302J.B
| 1 | / | 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 12 13
-^14H/U118|19L/121|/123L^
35 36
|25|26|27UO/130L/W134|
C A N H (WHT)
I
1 | 2 | / L / | 5 | 6 / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1l|l2|l3"|l4|/fl6|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32

CAN L (RED)
CAN H (WHT)
F S R + B (LTGRN)
[1 M 3 1 4 L X | 6 M 8 1 9 1 1 0 | 1 1
1 4 | y 1 y V 1 l 8 l l 9 l X l 211/1231/1

|25l26J27l/]/l30l/l/l/l34[
Is there battery
voltage?

control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.B
fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and
the VSA modulator-control u n i t . B
(cont'd)
19-141

19-147).
ON (II) again.
2 1 . Check the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator
and the VSA indicator for several seconds w h e n the
ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Does the indicators come on then go off?
YES-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
modulator-control unit (see page 19-147).H
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulatorcontrol unit 36P connector. If the VSA modulatorcontrol unit was updated, substitute a known-good
VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-147), then
retest. I f t h e VSA modulator-control unit was
19-142
VSA
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-19) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-21) before doing repairs or service.
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. With the wheels in the straight-ahead position and the steering wheel centered, remove the steering wheel (see page
17-7).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-130) and the cable reel (see page 24-185).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see step 12 on page 17-11).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B) f r o m the combination switch body
assembly (C).
5. Install the combination switch body assembly in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Do not remove the steering angle sensor f r o m the combination switch body.
When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position so that the arrow points straight-up (see
Note that the tightening order is specified for the combination switch mounting screws (see step 1 on page 17-12).
19-143

Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Replacement
VSA Sensor Neutral Position

Memorization
NOTE:
NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this

procedure.
Do not damage or d r o p the sensor as it is sensitive.

Do not use power tools.
2. Remove the driver's center console t r i m (see step 2 on
page 20-115).
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, w i t h the

steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
3. Remove the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration

sensor (A) m o u n t i n g bolts.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m

acceleration sensor 5P connector (B).
5. Install the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor in the reverse order of removal.
(see page 19-144).
19-144

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
5. Select VSA ADJUSTMENT w i t h the HDS, and f o l l o w
the screen prompts.
NOTE: See the HDS Help m e n u for specific
instructions.
VSA
VSA Off Switch Test

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).
2. R e m o v e t h e d r i v e r ' s d a s h b o a r d s i d e l i d (see p a g e
20-121).
6. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n V S A OFF s w i t c h 5P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 4 a n d N o . 5. T h e r e s h o u l d b e
c o n t i n u i t y a t all t i m e s .
3. R e m o v e t h e d r i v e r ' s d a s h b o a r d l o w e r c o v e r (see p a g e
V S A OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
20-121).
4. P u s h o u t t h e V S A OFF s w i t c h (A) f r o m t h e d r i v e r ' s
II
II
2l/1<

7. I n s t a l l t h e V S A OFF s w i t c h i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r o f
removal.
5. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n V S A OFF s w i t c h 5P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 2. T h e r e s h o u l d b e
c o n t i n u i t y w h e n t h e s w i t c h is p r e s s e d , a n d n o
c o n t i n u i t y w h e n t h e s w i t c h is r e l e a s e d .
V S A OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
I p n~ri n_
1 |2|/|4[5
19-145

VSA Modulator-Control Unit Update
HDS pocket tester
GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the

engine.

NOTE:
Use this procedure w h e n you need to update the
VSA modulator-control unit at anytime.
software version.
Before you update the VSA modulator-control unit,
make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged,
and connect a j u m p e r battery (not a battery charger) to
maintain system voltage.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I)
during the update. If there is a problem w i t h the
update, leave the ignition switch to ON (II).
To prevent VSA modulator-control unit damage, do
not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio
system, brakes, A/C, power w i n d o w s , door locks, etc.)
during the update.

and the VSA modulator-control unit, if it doesn't,
troubleshooting the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
4. Select the update m o d e , and f o l l o w the screen
prompts to update the VSA modulator-control unit.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a VSA

modulator-control unit update whenever the VSA
modulator-control unit is substituted or replaced.
5. If the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is

the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM f r o m the DLC. If
the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is not
the latest, f o l l o w the instructions on the screen.
You cannot update a VSA modulator-control unit w i t h

a program it already has. It will only accept a new
program.

High temperature in the engine compartment might

cause the VSA modulator-control unit to become too
hot to run the update. If the engine has been running
before this procedure, open the hood and cool the
engine compartment.
If y o u need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was
flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in
ON (II) w h e n y o u disconnect the HIM f r o m the data link
connector (DLC). This w i l l prevent VSA modulatorcontrol unit damage.
DTCs stored in m e m o r y are cleared w h e n the VSA
modulator-control unit is updated.
19-146
VSA
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
D o not spill brake fluid o n the v e h i c l e ; it m a y d a m a g e t h e paint. If brake fluid g e t s o n t h e paint, w a s h it off i m m e d i a t e l y
with water.
B e careful not to d a m a g e or b e n d the brake lines d u r i n g r e m o v a l a n d installation.
Plug the e n d of a h o s e a n d j o i n t s to p r e v e n t spilling brake fluid.
Removal
2. R e m o v e the air c l e a n e r ( s e e p a g e 11-372).
3. R e m o v e t h e r e s o n a t o r ( s e e p a g e 11-373).
4. D i s c o n n e c t the V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit 3 6 P c o n n e c t o r (A) by p u s h i n g t h e lock (B) a n d pulling d o w n t h e l e v e r (C);
t h e c o n n e c t o r d i s c o n n e c t s itself.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5. D i s c o n n e c t the s i x brake lines f r o m the V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit.
N O T E : B r a k e lines a r e c o n n e c t e d to the m a s t e r c y l i n d e r (D) a n d to the left-rear ( E ) , the right-front (F), the left-front ( G ) ,
a n d t h e right-rear (H) brake s y s t e m s .
6. R e m o v e t h e V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit (I) w i t h the bracket (J) f r o m t h e body.
7. R e m o v e the V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l unit f r o m the bracket.
(cont'd)
19-147

V S A Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit onto the bracket.
2. Install the bracket w i t h the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Pull up the lever of the VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Reinstall the resonator (see page 11-373).
7. Reinstall the air cleaner (see page 11-372).
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization procedure (see page 19-144).
10. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: I f t h e brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into the
normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-9).
19-148
VSA
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement

Front
2. Release the clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the bolts and the wheel speed sensor (C).

4 . Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact w i t h the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
(cont'd)
19-149

Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
2. Release the clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the bolts and the wheel speed sensor (C).

4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.
Ifthe wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the A B S and the V S A indicators go off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the A B S and the V S A indicators do not come on.
19-150
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)

Body
Body
Special T o o l s
20-2
Doors
Front Door
Rear D o o r
Front D o o r Panel R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n .
Front D o o r Outer H a n d l e R e p l a c e m e n t .
Front D o o r Latch R e p l a c e m e n t
Front D o o r Glass a n d Regulator
Replacement
Front D o o r Sash O u t e r T r i m
Replacement
Front D o o r Glass O u t e r W e a t h e r s t r i p
Replacement
Front Door W e a t h e r s t r i p R e p l a c e m e n t .
Front D o o r Side Sill Seal R e p l a c e m e n t .
Rear D o o r Panel R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n . .
Rear D o o r Outer H a n d l e R e p l a c e m e n t .
Rear D o o r Latch R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear D o o r Glass, Q u a r t e r Glass, a n d
Regulator R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear Door Sash Outer T r i m
Replacement
Rear Door Glass O u t e r W e a t h e r s t r i p
Replacement
Rear Door W e a t h e r s t r i p R e p l a c e m e n t .
Rear D o o r Side Sill Seal R e p l a c e m e n t .
Front a n d Rear D o o r Glass A d j u s t m e n t .
Front a n d Rear D o o r Position
Adjustment
Front a n d Rear D o o r Striker
Adjustment
20-3
20-6
20-9
20-13
20-16
20-18
20-19
20-20
20-21
20-23
20-23
20-27
20-29
20-31
20-34
20-34
20-35
20-38
20-38
20-40
T r i m Removal/Installation
Door Areas
* Pillar A r e a s
Cargo Area
Rear Side A r e a
Tailgate A r e a
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
G r a b Handle R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
* Headliner R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
* Carpet R e p l a c e m e n t
20-76
20-78
20-79
20-81
20-95
20-96
20-100
20-102
20-105
20-107
20-112
Consoles
* Center C o n s o l e R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n . .
Center Console Rear T r i m
Center C o n s o l e Rear T r i m V e n t
Replacement
Center Console A r m r e s t
C o n s o l e A r m r e s t Lock R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
Center Console
20-115
20-116
20-117
20-118
20-118
20-119
Dashboard
20-42
20-44
20-45
20-46
20-48
20-50
20-55
20-59
20-61
20-62
20-63
*
*
20-65
Moonroof
Symptom Troubleshooting I n d e x . . . . .
Glass Position A d j u s t m e n t
Glass R e p l a c e m e n t
W i n d Deflector R e p l a c e m e n t
20-74
Interior Trim
Glass
Windshield Replacement
Quarter Glass R e p l a c e m e n t
Hatch Glass/Hatch Glass S u p p o r t S t r u t
Replacement
Hatch Glass D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y .
Hatch Glass A d j u s t m e n t
Rear W i n d o w M o l d i n g R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
Hatch Glass W e a t h e r s t r i p
Replacement
20-70
20-71
20-72
20-72
20-41
Mirrors
Power Mirror Replacement
M i r r o r Holder R e p l a c e m e n t
Rearview Mirror Replacement
Drain Channel R e p l a c e m e n t
Sunshade Replacement
Motor Replacement
* Frame a n d Drain T u b e R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
Drain Channel Slider a n d Cable
C l o s i n g Force a n d O p e n i n g Drag
Check
20-66
20-67
20-68
20-68
20-69
*
*
I n s t r u m e n t Panel R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n .
Driver's D a s h b o a r d L o w e r C o v e r
Center U p p e r Panel
D a s h b o a r d Center Panel
Center Pocket R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
Passenger's D a s h b o a r d T r i m
Passenger's T r a y R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n .
G l o v e Box R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
G l o v e B o x Striker R e p l a c e m e n t
G l o v e Box Lock C y l i n d e r R e p l a c e m e n t .
Passenger's D a s h b o a r d U n d e r c o v e r
Dashboard Vent Removal/Installation..
C o l u m n Cover R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n . . .
C o l u m n Blind Cover
Dashboard Replacement
D a s h b o a r d / S t e e r i n g Hanger B e a m
20-121
20-121
20-122
20-123
20-124
20-125
20-126
20-127
20-127
20-128
20-128
20-129
20-130
20-131
20-132
20-134
Tailgate
Seats
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Front Seat A c t i v e Head Restraint
Inspection
Front Seat R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
Front Seat Recline Cover
Front Seat F r a m e R e p l a c e m e n t
Front Seat Slide M o t o r R e p l a c e m e n t . .
Front Seat Recline M o t o r R e p l a c e m e n t .
Front Seat-back Cover R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
Front Seat C u s h i o n Cover
Replacement
Front Seat U n d e r T r a y R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
S e c o n d R o w Seat
Removal/Installation....
S e c o n d R o w Seat-back Recline Lever
Replacement
S e c o n d R o w Seat-back Recline Cable
Replacement
T h i r d R o w Seat A c c e s s Cable
Replacement
S e c o n d R o w Seat A r m r e s t
Replacement
S e c o n d R o w Seat A r m r e s t Beverage
Holder R e p l a c e m e n t
S e c o n d R o w Seat Cover R e p l a c e m e n t .
S e c o n d R o w Seat Linkage
T h i r d R o w Seat R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n . .
T h i r d R o w Seat
T h i r d R o w Seat Latch R e p l a c e m e n t . . . .
T h i r d R o w Seat-back Recline Lever
Replacement
T h i r d R o w Seat-back Recline Cable
Replacement
T h i r d R o w Seat Cover R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
20-140
20-141
20-142
Fuel Fill Door

20-145
20-148
20-151
20-152
20-153
20-159
20-163
20-163
20-166
20-168
20-169
20-171
20-171
20-172
20-173
20-178
20-181
20-182
20-183
20-185
20-186
20-187
Bumpers
Front B u m p e r R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
Front B u m p e r L o w e r M e s h
Replacement
Front B u m p e r Fog Light Cover
Replacement
Front B u m p e r Skid T r i m R e p l a c e m e n t .
Rear B u m p e r R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
Rear B u m p e r Skid T r i m R e p l a c e m e n t . .
Rear B u m p e r A i r S p o i l e r R e p l a c e m e n t .
Rear B u m p e r S t e p R e p l a c e m e n t
20-195
20-196
20-197
20-197
20-198
20-200
20-200
20-201
Hood
Hood Adjustment
H o o d Seal R e p l a c e m e n t
Tailgate A d j u s t m e n t
20-204
Tailgate S u p p o r t S t r u t R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 20-205
Tailgate W e a t h e r s t r i p R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 20-206
20-202
20-203
Fuel Fill D o o r / A d a p t e r R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 20-208

Fuel Fill D o o r R e p l a c e m e n t
20-209
Exterior Trim
Front B u l k h e a d Cover R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 20-210
Front Grille R e p l a c e m e n t
20-210
C o w l Cover R e p l a c e m e n t
20-211
W i n d s h i e l d Side T r i m R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 20-212
Roof Rail R e p l a c e m e n t
20-213
Roof M o l d i n g R e p l a c e m e n t
20-215
Door Molding Replacement
20-216
Side Sill Panel R e p l a c e m e n t
20-218
Tailgate H i n g e Cover R e p l a c e m e n t
20-219
Tailgate S p o i l e r T r i m R e p l a c e m e n t
20-219
Rear License T r i m R e p l a c e m e n t
20-220
Rear D o o r Protection Tape
Replacement
20-221
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
20-222
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender R e p l a c e m e n t
Splash Shield Replacement
Front Strake R e p l a c e m e n t
Front Fender Fairing R e p l a c e m e n t
Left Front S p l a s h G u a r d R e i n f o r c e m e n t
Replacement
Rear Inner Fender R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear A i r Outlet R e p l a c e m e n t
20-224
20-225
20-226
20-226
20-227
20-227
20-228
Openers
H o o d O p e n e r Cable R e p l a c e m e n t
* Fuel Fill D o o r O p e n e r Cable
Replacement
H o o d Latch R e p l a c e m e n t
H o o d Release H a n d l e R e p l a c e m e n t
Fuel Fill D o o r O p e n e r R e p l a c e m e n t
Tailgate Handle R e p l a c e m e n t
Tailgate Latch R e p l a c e m e n t
Hatch Glass Latch R e p l a c e m e n t
Hatch Glass A c t u a t o r R e p l a c e m e n t
20-229
20-230
20-231
20-232
20-233
20-234
20-234
20-235
20-237
20-238
Frame
Trailer Hitch R e p l a c e m e n t
Spare Tire Hoist R e p l a c e m e n t
Spare Tire Spacer R e p l a c e m e n t
S p a r e Tire S u p p o r t Bracket
Replacement
Subframe Replacement
Frame Repair Chart
20-240
20-241
20-241
20-242
20-243
20-246
Body
Special Tools
Ref.No.
CD
20-2
Tool Number
070AG-SJAA10S
Description
Qty
1
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(cont'd)
20-3
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
PLASTIC C O V E R
20-4
GLASS
R e p l a c e m e n t page 20-18
A d j u s t m e n t , page 20-38
G L A S S RUN CHANNEL
IMMOBILIZER and
SECURITY LABEL
OUTER HANDLE
CENTER LOWER
CHANNEL
LATCH C A B L E
SPACER
LATCH PROTECTOR
OUTER HANDLE
PROTECTER
DOOR CYLINDER
(Driver's)
RETAINER
STRIKER
A d j u s t m e n t page 20-41
LATCH
Replacement
INNER HANDLE
INNER HANDLE C A B L E
INNER HANDLE C A P
20-5
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door
C O U R T E S Y LIGHT
20-6
SPEAKER
(cont'd)
20-7
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door (cont'd)
QUARTER G L A S S
GLASS
Adjustment, page 20-38
G L A S S RUN CHANNEL
QUARTER G L A S S S E A L
C E N T E R LOWER CHANNEL
LATCH PROTECTOR
FRONT LOWER CHANNEL
REGULATOR
CHILD LOCK CAP
LATCH C A B L E
O U T E R HANDLE PROTECTOR
O U T E R HANDLE
O U T E R HANDLE
SPACER
STRIKER
INNER HANDLE C A B L E
LATCH
20-8
INNER HANDLE
INNER HANDLE CAP
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation

. KTC T r i m Tool Set SOJATP2014*
T r i m Pad Remover, Snap-on A 177A or e q u i v a l e n t
Program, 888-424-6857
2. Remove the screw.

Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
avoid damage w h e n removing components.
W h e n prying w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver w r a p p e d w i t h protective
tape, push on the upper lock tab (A) and pivot the
inner handle cap (B) on the bottom tab (C), then
remove the cap and the screws securing the inner
handle (D).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
3. Remove the mirror m o u n t cover (see step 2 on page

20-44).
(cont'd)
20-9
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the d o o r panel (A) w i t h as little bending as
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release
the clips w i t h a commercially available t r i m pad
remover.
-2. Detach the upper clips.
-3. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel u p w a r d .
NOTE: The inner handle cable (B) and the latch
cable (C) are connected to the inner handle (D). Do
not pull the door panel up too far, or these cables
w i l l be damaged.
Fastener Locations
|> : Clip. 9
(Gray)
20-10
5. Remove the inner handle (A) f r o m the door panel:

-1. Hold the door panel (B) away f r o m the door.
-2. Pull on the front of the inner handle to detach the
first clip. Keep pulling until the rest of the clips are
detached, then remove the handle.
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 4
6. Driver's side, disconnect the power w i n d o w switch

connector (A), the power mirror switch connector (B),
the door subharness connector (C). W i t h DPMS:
Disconnect the power mirror connector (D) and the
harness clip (E). Passenger's side, disconnect the
power w i n d o w switch connector (F), the courtesy
light bulb socket (G), and detach the harness clip (H)
f r o m the panel.
7. Remove the door panel (I).

N O T E : If y o u are only removing the door panel, go t o
step 11. If y o u are doing further disassembly, proceed
to step 8.
Driver's door
Passenger's door
(cont'd)
20-11
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Inner handle removal
Armrest removal
8. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

and the latch cable (B) f r o m the inner handle (C), then
remove the handle.
9. If necessary, remove the screws f r o m the back of the

door panel (A) and release the hooks (B), then remove
the armrest (C).
-1. Detach the inner handle cable fasteners (D, E), then
disconnect the inner handle cable f r o m the cable
fasteners.
-2. Detach the latch cable fastener (F), and remove the
latch cable fastener (G) f r o m the inner handle by
pinching its tabs out.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
NOTE: I f t h e cable fasteners are damaged or

stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
G
20-12
Front Door Outer Handle

Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands.
Switch panel removal

10. If necessary, remove the switch panel (A) f r o m the
door panel (B).
- 1 . Detach the clips.
-2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release all of
the hooks (C).
-3. Pull the switch panel rearward to release the front
hook(D).
1. Raise the glass fully.

2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-9).
3. Detach the harness clip (A), then disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (B).
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 2
11. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal,

4. Remove the rear plug cap (C), then remove the plastic
cover (D), as needed.
Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace

t h e m w i t h new ones.
NOTE: I f t h e plastic cover is damaged or t o r n , replace

it.
Replace any damaged cable fasteners w i t h new

ones.
5. Detach the rod fastener ( A ) .
The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable

fastener (B) w i t h the latch in the locked position as
shown.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly,
and the cables are connected securely.
Make sure the w i n d o w and the power door lock
operate properly.
47 m m (1.85 in)
(cont'd)
20-13
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the hole seal (A), then disconnect the outer
handle rod (B) w i t h a clip remover.
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).

Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf ft)
7. Driver's side: Pull both side flanges (A) of the retainer

(B) o u t w a r d , and pull the middle flange portion (C) of
the outer casing cover (D) out, then disconnect the
cylinder cable (E) f r o m the latch.
20-14
9. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle protector

(A) , then remove the protector by releasing the hook
(B) .
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
10. If necessary, remove the door cylinder (A). Cut a slot

in each screwhead of the special screws w i t h a saw,
remove the special screws, then separate the door
cylinder and the outer handle protector (B). If the
retainer (C) is d a m a g e d , release the hooks (D), and
replace it.
12. Remove the rod fastener (A) f r o m the outer handle

(B), then replace it w i t h a new one.
NOTE: If r e m o v e d , the special screws must be

replaced.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Replace.
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and that the cylinder cable and the outer
handle rod are connected securely.
Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks operate
properly.
Make sure the door handle w o r k s properly.
W h e n reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter t o seal out water.
11. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle
f r o m the holes in the door panel. Take care not to
scratch the door.
20-15
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see page 20-13).
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-13).
8. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), then

remove the latch t h r o u g h the hole in the door. Take
care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), the latch
cable (E), or the inner handle cable (F).
Fastener Locations
A
: Screw, 3
: Screw, 1
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod f r o m the outer

handle (see step 6 on page 20-14).
6. Disconnect the cylinder cable f r o m the latch (see step
7 on page 20-14).
7. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and
remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it d o w n w a r d .
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
9. Remove the f o a m seals (A, B) f r o m the latch protector

(C)and the latch (D).
A
8 N-m
(0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
20-16
12. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and that the cylinder cable and the outer
handle rod are connected securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
Before reinstalling the latch protector, clean the
latch and the latch protector surfaces w i t h isopropyl
alcohol where the new f o a m seals will be attached.
After reinstalling the latch protector to the latch,
attach the new f o a m seal to the protector and the
latch.
20-17
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
2. Detach the harness clips (A), and disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove the
plug caps (C).
4. Carefully move the glass (A) until y o u can see the

bolts, then remove t h e m . Carefully pull the glass out
t h r o u g h the w i n d o w slot. Take care not t o drop the
glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
Without DPMS
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the regulator (B).

Fastener Locations
C
: Bolt, 4
(Black)
D :Bolt, 1
(Silver)
3. Pass the cables (D) and the harnesses (E) t h r o u g h the

slits (F) in the plastic cover (G), then remove the
plastic cover.
NOTE: If the plastic cover is damaged or t o r n , replace
it.
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D). Remove
the regulator t h r o u g h the hole in the door.
20-18
Front Door Sash Outer Trim

Replacement
7. A p p l y multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces
of the regulator (A) w h e r e s h o w n .
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.

1. Remove the door sash outer t r i m (A).
-1. Pull back the door weatherstrip (B), then remove the
screw.
-2. Detach the clips fastening the t r i m , then pull the
t r i m up. Take care not to damage the door glass
outer weatherstrip (C).
Fastener Locations
.Screw, 1
!>:Clip,3
8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of

r e m o v a l , and note these items:
Roll the glass up and d o w n to make sure it moves
freely w i t h o u t binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel w h e n the glass is
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-38).
Do the power w i n d o w control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-277).
Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
Test-drive and check for w i n d noise and rattles.
2. Install the t r i m in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure the glass run channel (D) is installed in the door
sash securely.
Make sure the power door locks, the w i n d o w s , and

the power mirror operate properly.
20-19
Doors
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Program, 888-424-6857
3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer

weatherstrip (A) up at each portion w h e r e the inner
m o l d i n g (B) catches the inside edge of the w i n d o w
slot.
NOTE:
If y o u remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it w i t h a new one because it w i l l bend.
Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands.
Take care not to scratch the door.
avoid damage w h e n r e m o v i n g components.
1. Remove the power m i r r o r (see page 20-44).
2. Remove the screw f r o m the rear edge of the door.
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
4. Pull the glass outer weatherstrip (A) away f r o m the

door.
5. Install the new weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal.
20-20
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement

Weatherstrip Removal
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Weatherstrip Installation
1. Wipe the door sash surface (A) w i t h a sponge
dampened in isopropyl alcohol where s h o w n .

Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
6 mm
(0.24 in)
1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker m o u n t i n g

bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A
: Bolt, 1 B > : Clip, 23 C t> : Clip, 16

(Left: Purple)
(White)
(Right: Yellow)
=*
DD>:Clip, 1
(Black)
^
ED> : Clip, 1
(Black)
2. From the B-pillar to the A-pillar, push the upper clips

into place securely.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 15
(White)
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door

weatherstrip (F).
3. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
(cont'd)
20-21
Doors
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd)
3. From the A-piliar to the B-pillar, peel off the adhesive
backing using the tab tape (A). From the B-pillar to the
A-pillar, press the double-sided adhesive tape
portions to make the adhesive stick securely.
4. Push the clips (A), located at the top of the B-pillar,

into place.
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 1 B D>: Clip, 23
(Left: Purple)
(White)
(Right: Yellow)
Dt> : Clip, 1
(Black)
C D> : Clip, 1
(Black)
F^:Bolt, 1
8 x 1.25 m m
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m ,
22 Ibfft)
Apply thread lock.

5. Install all remaining clips (B, C, D), then install the
door weatherstrip (E). Install the door checker
m o u n t i n g bolt (F).
NOTE:
A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock t o the
door checker m o u n t i n g bolt before installation.
20-22
Front Door Side Sill Seal

Replacement
Rear Door Panel

NOTE:

. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent,

1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
D>: Clip, 10
(Orange)

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
W h e n prying with a flat-tip screw driver, w r a p it with
1. Push on the upper lock tab (A) and pivot the inner
handle cap (B) on the bottom tab (C) w i t h a flat-tip
screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, then
remove the cap and the screws securing the inner
handle (D).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of removal,

If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
Push the clips into place securely.
(cont'd)
20-23
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
3. Remove the door panel (A) w i t h as little bending as

possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release
the clips w i t h a commercially available t r i m pad
remover.
-2. Detach the upper clips.
-3. Stating at the rear, pull the d o o r panel u p w a r d .
NOTE: The inner handle cable (B) and the latch
cable (C) are connected t o the inner handle (D). Do
not pull the door panel up too far, or the cables will
be damaged.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 10
(Gray)
20-24
4. Remove the inner handle (A) f r o m the door panel.

-1. Hold the door panel (B) away f r o m the door.
-2. Pull on the front of the inner handle to detach the
first clip. Keep pulling until the rest of the clips are
detached, then remove the handle.
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 4
Inner handle removal

6. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)
and the latch cable (B) f r o m the inner handle (C), then
remove the handle.
-1. Detach the inner handle cable fasteners (D, E), then
disconnect the inner handle cable f r o m the cable
fasteners.
-2. Detach the latch cable fastener (F), and remove the
latch cable fastener (G) f r o m the inner handle by
pinching its tabs out.
NOTE: I f t h e cable fasteners are damaged or
5. Disconnect the door subharness connector (A), then

remove the d o o r panel (B).
E
NOTE: If y o u are only removing the door panel, go to

step 9. If y o u are doing further disassembly, proceed
to step 6.
Armrest removal
7. If necessary, remove the screws f r o m the back of the
door panel (A) and release the hooks (B), then remove
the armrest (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
(cont'd)
20-25
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. If necessary, remove the switch panel (A) f r o m the
door panel (B).
-1. Disconnect the power w i n d o w switch connector
(C).
-2. Remove the screws f r o m back of the door panel.
-3. Detach the clips.
-4. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release all of
the hooks (D).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
> : Clip, 3
9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal,

Ifthe clips are d a m a g e d or stress-whitened, replace
Replace any damaged cable fasteners w i t h new
ones.
The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) w i t h the latch in the locked position as
shown.
and the cables are connected securely.
Make sure the w i n d o w and the power d o o r lock
operate properly.
,
47 m m (1.85 in)
20-26
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement

6. Remove the hole seal (A). Disconnect the outer handle

rod (B) w i t h a clip remover.

3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the power
door lock actuator connector (B).
7. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).

Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
4. Remove the rear plug cap (C), then remove the plastic
cover (D), as needed.
it.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
20-27
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle protector
(A) , then remove the protector by releasing the hook
(B) .
Fastener Location
10. Remove the rod fastener (A) f r o m the outer handle

(B), and replace it w i t h a new one.
B
: Bolt 1
Replace.
11. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Make sure the door locks operate properly.
Make sure the door handle works properly.
9. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle
f r o m the holes in the door panel. Take care not to
scratch the door.
20-28
Rear Door Latch Replacement

N O T E ; Put on gloves to protect your hands.
7. Remove the bolt, then remove the collar (A) f r o m the

rear lower channel (B).
Fastener Location
: Bolt 1
3. Remove the plastic cover as needed (see step 4 on

page 20-27).
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-27).
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod f r o m the outer
handle (see step 6 on page 20-27).
6. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), then
lower it.
A
Fastener Locations
A
: Screw, 3
: Screw, 1
8. Remove the latch (A) out f r o m between the rear lower

channel (B) and the door. Take care not to bend the
latch cable (C) and inner handle cable (D).
(cont'd)
20-29
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the f o a m seals (A, B) f r o m the latch protector
(C) and the latch (D).
11. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle cable
(B) f r o m the latch (C).
10. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector

(A) f r o m the latch (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

note these items:
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
Before reinstalling the latch protector, clean the
latch and the latch protector surfaces w i t h isopropyl
alcohol where the new f o a m seals w i l l be attached.
After reinstalling the latch protector to the latch,
attach the new f o a m seal to the protector and the
latch.
20-30
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement

NOTE; Put o n gloves t o protect your hands.
2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
(A), and detach the harness clips (B). Remove the plug
caps (C).
5. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) f r o m the center

lower channel (D). Pull the door quarter glass seal (E)
away as needed, and remove the screw (F). Pull the
glass run channel (G) away as needed f r o m the center
lower channel.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1
: Bolt 1
F : Screw, 1
3. Pass the cables (D) and the harnesses (E) through the
slits (F) in the plastic cover (G), then remove the
plastic cover.
it.
bolts, then remove t h e m . Carefully lower the glass.
Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
(0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-31
Doors
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
20-32
8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the

w i n d o w slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the
door.
11. A p p l y multipurpose grease t o all the sliding surfaces

of the regulator (A) where s h o w n .
9. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the regulator (B).

Fastener Locations
C : Bolt, 4
D : Bolt, 1
(Black)
(Silver)
12. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of

6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
Roll the glass up and d o w n to make sure it moves

freely w i t h o u t binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel w h e n the glass is
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-38).
Do the power w i n d o w control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-277).
Test-drive, and check for w i n d noise and rattles.
around its outside perimeter t o seal out water.
C
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
10. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
20-33
Doors
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim
Replacement
Rear Door Glass Outer

Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Lower the glass fully.

2. Remove the door sash outer t r i m (A).
- 1 . Remove the screw.
-2. Detach the clips fastening the t r i m , then pull the
t r i m up. Take care not to damage the door glass
outer weatherstrip (B).
KTC T r i m Tool Set SOJATP2014*

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it w i t h a new one because it w i l l bend.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
> : Clip, 3

Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure the glass run channel (C) is installed in
the door sash securely.
20-34
Rear Door Weatherstrip

Replacement
3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer
weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (B) catches the inside edge of the w i n d o w
slot.
Weatherstrip Removal
NOTE:
1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A
: Bolt 1
B O : Clip, 20
C t> : Clip, 16
(Left: Pink)
(White)
(Right: Light blue)
4. Remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (A).
5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal.
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door

weatherstrip (F).
(cont'd)
20-35
Doors
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd)
Weatherstrip Installation
1. Wipe the sash surface (A) w i t h a sponge dampened in
isopropyl alcohol where s h o w n .
6 mm
(0.24 in)
2. From the C-pillar to the B-pillar, push the upper clips

(A) into place securely.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 13
(White)
vvvvvvvvv
20-36
3. From the C-pillar to the B-pillar, peel off the adhesive

backing using the tab tape (A). From the B-pillar to the
C-pillar, press the double-sided adhesive tape
portions to make the adhesive stick securely.
4. Push the clip (A), located at the t o p of the B-pillar, into

place.
Fastener Locations
A t> : Clip, 1
(Black)
B D> : Clip, 20
C O : Clip, 3
(Left: Pink)
(White)
(Right: Light blue)
5. Install all remaining clips (B, C, D), then install the

door weatherstrip (E). Install the door checker
m o u n t i n g bolt (F).
NOTE:
A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the
door checker m o u n t i n g bolt before installation.
D O : Clip, 1
(Black)
F^:Bolt,1
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N m
(3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibfft)
Apply thread lock.
20-37
Doors
Rear Door Side Sill Seal
Replacement
Front and Rear Door Glass

Adjustment
NOTE:
Take care not t o scratch the door.
NOTE: Check the weatherstrip and glass run channel for

damage or deterioration, and replace t h e m if necessary.
1. Place the vehicle on a f i r m , level surface.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 8
(Orange)
Door panel:
- Front door (see page 20-9)
- Rear door (see page 20-23)
Plastic cover:
- Front door (see step 3 on page 20-18)
- Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-31)
glass m o u n t i n g bolts (B), then loosen t h e m .
Front
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of removal,

6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
20-38
Rear
7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on
the sealing area as s h o w n , and note these items:
Use a 12 m m (1/2 in) diameter hose (A).
Adjust the rate of water f l o w as s h o w n (B).
Do not use a nozzle.
Hold the hose about 300 m m (12 in) away f r o m the
door (C).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten

the glass m o u n t i n g bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel
(B) evenly.
8. Install the plastic cover on the door, making sure it is

sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water,
then install the door panel:
Front door (see page 20-9)
Rear d o o r (see page 20-23)
20-39
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: Check for a flush fit w i t h the body, then check for
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body edges
are parallel.
Rear door
1. Place the vehicle on a f i r m , level surface w h e n

adjusting the doors.
2. A d j u s t at the hinges (A):
Pad a floor jack (B) w i t h shop towels (C), then use
the jack t o support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
On the front door: Remove the rear half of the front
inner fender, then remove the f o a m block (see page
20-224). Loosen the hinge m o u n t i n g bolts (D)
slightly, and move the door backward or f o r w a r d ,
up or d o w n as necessary to equalize the gaps.
On t h e rear door: Loosen the hinge m o u n t i n g bolts
(E) slightly, and move the door backward or
f o r w a r d , up or d o w n as necessary t o equalize the
gaps.
Front door
E
8 x 1.25 m m
29 N m (3.0 k g f m , 22 Ibfft)
3. If necessary, replace the door m o u n t i n g bolts w i t h the

adjusting bolts made specifically for door adjustment,
then adjust at the door. Loosen the door m o u n t i n g
bolts (F) slightly, and move the door up or d o w n as
necessary to equalize the gaps. Adjust the door in or
out until it's flush w i t h the body.
NOTE: Refer to the Parts Catalog if y o u need to use an
adjusting bolt.
8 x 1.25 m m
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f m ,
22 Ibfft)
20-40
Front and Rear Door Striker

Adjustment
4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
rear of the doors flush w i t h the body.
Make sure the door latches securely without s l a m m i n g

it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts are
fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or d o w n ,
and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
18 N-m (1.8 k g f m , 13 Ibfft)
5. A p p l y touch-up paint to the hinge m o u n t i n g bolts, and

around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
2. W r a p the striker w i t h a shop t o w e l , then adjust the

striker by tapping it w i t h a plastic h a m m e r (C). Do not
tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against
the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the
door latches properly, tighten the screws, and
recheck.
20-41
Mirrors
POWER MIRROR
MIRROR HOLDER
MIRROR MOUNT C O V E R
POWER MIRROR ACTUATOR

Without automatic dimming mirror
REARVIEW MIRROR
20-42
With automatic dimming mirror
REARVIEW MIRROR
With rearview monitor
REARVIEW MIRROR
20-43
Mirrors
Power Mirror Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not t o scratch the door and related parts.
4. While holding the mirror,squeeze the sides of

connector clip (A), then push out to remove the mirror
(B). Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Lower the door glass fully.

2. Carefully detach the clip, and release the hooks (A),
then pry out the mirror m o u n t cover (B) by hand in the
sequence s h o w n .
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
5. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
3. While holding the mirror, disconnect the connector
(A), then remove the nuts.
Fastener Locations
:Nut,3
8Nm
(0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
20-44
Push the connector clip into place securely.
Mirror Holder Replacement

NOTE: W h e n prying w i t h a flat-tipped screwdriver, w r a p
it w i t h protective tape to prevent damage.
5. For some models: Disconnect the mirror defogger

connectors (A) f r o m the heater pad terminals.
Removal
1. Adjust the mirror fully to the u p w a r d position.
2 . Insert a long, thin flat-tipped screwdriver under the
mirror holder (A). Slide the tip of the screwdriver
between the mirror holder and the actuator (B).
A
Installation
3. Quickly t w i s t the screwdriver to separate the mirror

holder f r o m the mirror actuator.
4. If necessary, insert the screwdriver further under the
mirror holder, and twist it again until the holder is
separated f r o m the actuator.
6. For some models: Reconnect the m i r r o r defogger

connectors.
7. Align the tabs (B) on the mirror holder (C) so they line
up on each side of the actuator tabs (D). Carefully
push on the mirror holder until it locks into place.
8. Check the operation of the actuator.
NOTE: Do not pry up on the mirror holder to separate

the t w o parts, as this can break either the mirror glass
or the actuator.
20-45
Mirrors
Rearview Mirror Replacement
Without Automatic Dimming Mirror

* Available t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
1. Loosen the screw w i t h a TORX T20 bit.

Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
With Automatic Dimming Mirror

1. Disconnect the connector (A).
4 N m (0.4kgfm,3Ibfft)
2. Slide the rearview mirror (A) rearward and off the

m o u n t (B).
2. Slide the mirror harness upper cover (B) f o r w a r d , then
remove the mirror harness cover (C) f r o m the mirror
base (D).
3. Loosen the screw w i t h a TORX T20 bit, then slide the

rearview mirror (A) rearward and off the m o u n t (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
3. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX
screw, and apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock
to it.
note these items:
Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX
screw, and apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread
lock to it.
20-46
With Rearview Monitor

NOTE: Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool
set to avoid damage w h e n removing components.
3. While holding the rearview mirror (A), pull the mirror

harness connector (B) out t h r o u g h the headliner (C),
then remove the rearview mirror f r o m the m o u n t (D).
1. Remove the roof console (see step 2 on page 20-107).

2. Disconnect the connector (A), and slide the mirror
harness upper cover (B) f o r w a r d , then remove the
TORX screw f r o m the mirror base (C).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
D

note these items:
Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX
screw, and apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread
lock to it.
Make sure the connector it plugged in properly.
20-47
Glass
20-48
20-49
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection w h i l e cutting the glass adhesive
w i t h a piano wire.
3. I f t h e old windshield is reinstalled, make alignment

marks (A) across the glass and body w i t h a grease
pencil.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seats.

Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
manufacturer's instructions for details.
Cowl cover (see page 20-211)
Rearview mirror
- W i t h o u t automatic d i m m i n g mirror (see page
20-46)
- W i t h automatic d i m m i n g mirror (see page 20-46)
- W i t h rearview monitor (see page 20-47)
A-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-81)
Roof moldings, both sides (see page 20-215)
Windshield side t r i m s (see page 20-212)
2. Remove the m o l d i n g (A) f r o m the upper edge of the
windshield ( B ) . If necessary, cut the molding w i t h a
utility knife.
20-50
4. Pull d o w n the front portion of the headliner (see page

20-107). Do not bend the headliner excessively, or y o u
may crease or break it.
5. A p p l y protective tape along the edge of the
dashboard and body. Use an awl to punch a hole at an
inside upper corner of the windshield t h r o u g h the
rubber d a m , adhesive, and the windshield upper seal.
Push a piece of piano wire t h r o u g h the hole, and w r a p
each end around a piece of w o o d .
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)

back and forth in a sawing m o t i o n . Hold the piano
wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut t h r o u g h the rubber d a m and adhesive
(C) around the entire windshield.
7. Carefully remove the windshield.

8. Use a putty knife to scrape old adhesive s m o o t h to a
thickness of about 2 m m (0.08 in) on the bonding
surface around the entire windshield opening flange:
Do not scrape d o w n to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere w i t h proper
bonding.
Remove the rubber d a m and fasteners f r o m the
body.
9. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a sponge
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep
oil, grease and water f r o m getting on the clean
surface.
10. If the old windshield is reinstalled, use a putty knife to
scrape old adhesive, the clips, the rubber d a m , and
the dashboard seal f r o m the windshield. Use
isopropyl alcohol to clean the inside face and the edge
of the windshield where n e w adhesive will be applied.
Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water,
oil, and grease.
C u t t i n g positions
(cont'd)
20-51
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
11. Attach the rubber d a m s A , B and the upper clips (C)
w i t h adhesive tape to the inside face of the windshield
(D) as s h o w n :
12. Attach the dashboard seal (A) w i t h adhesive tape t o

the inside surface of the windshield (B) as s h o w n .
Be sure the rubber dams and upper clips line up

w i t h the alignment marks (E).
Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive w i l l be applied.
13. Attach the m o l d i n g (A) w i t h adhesive tape (B) to the

upper edge of the w i n d s h i e l d (C). Be careful not to
touch the windshield w h e r e the adhesive will be
applied.
A
20-52
14. Attach the m o l d i n g upper seal (A) w i t h adhesive tape

to the inside surface of the m o l d i n g (B) as s h o w n .
:Apply primer here.
17. W i t h a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer

around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
dams (B, C) and m o l d i n g (D) as s h o w n , then lightly
w i p e it off w i t h gauze or cheesecloth:
A p p l y glass primer to the m o l d i n g .
Do not apply body primer to the w i n d s h i e l d , and do
not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up.
Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands. If
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away f r o m

primed surfaces.
'//////// ' Apply glass primer here.
15. Set the w i n d s h i e l d in the o p e n i n g , and center it. Make

alignment marks (A) across the windshield and body
w i t h a grease pencil at the four points s h o w n . Make
sure both clips (B) contact w i t h the edge of the body
holes. Be careful not to touch the windshield where
the adhesive will be applied.
16. Remove the w i n d s h i e l d .
(cont'd)
20-53
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
Do not apply body primer to any remaining original
adhesive on the flange.
Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer
sponges.
Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
:
'//////// Apply body primer here.
19. Cut a " V " in the end of the nozzle (A) o n the adhesive
cartridge as s h o w n .
20-54
20. Put the cartridge in a caulking g u n , and run a

continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of
the windshield (B) between the dam (C) and the
molding (D) as s h o w n . A p p l y the adhesive w i t h i n 30
minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a
slightly thicker bead at each corner.
2 mm
(0.08 in)
Overlap
1 mm
,D
Quarter Glass Replacement

2 1 . Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
opening, align it w i t h the alignment marks you made
in step 15, and set it d o w n on the adhesive. Lightly
push on the windshield until its edges are fully seated
on the adhesive all the w a y around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an
hour until the adhesive is dry.
22. Scrape or w i p e the excess adhesive off w i t h a putty
knife or t o w e l . To remove adhesive f r o m a painted
surface or the windshield, w i p e w i t h a soft shop towel
dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
23. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas,
and let the windshield dry, then seal w i t h sealant. Let
the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after windshield
installation. I f t h e vehicle has to be used w i t h i n the
first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
NOTE:
Wear eye protection w h e n removing the glass w i t h
piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.
Do not damage the glass antenna grid lines and
terminals.
C-pillar t r i m (see page 20-86)
D-pillar t r i m (see page 20-89)
Upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m (see page 20-94)
2. Passenger's side: Disconnect the glass antenna
connector (A).
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.

NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the f o l l o w i n g
things for 2 to 3 days:
Slam the doors w i t h all the w i n d o w s rolled up.
Twist the body excessively (such as w h e n going in
and out of driveways at an angle or driving over
r o u g h , uneven roads).
3. I f t h e old quarter glass is reinstalled, make alignment

marks across the glass and body w i t h a grease pencil.
4. A p p l y protective tape along the inside and outside
edges of the body. Make a hole t h r o u g h the adhesive
w i t h an a w l , f r o m inside the vehicle. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and w r a p each end
around a piece of w o o d .
(cont'd)
20-55
Glass
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
5. W i t h a helper o n the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing m o t i o n . Hold the piano
wire as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to
prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
t h r o u g h the adhesive (C) around the entire quarter
glass.
7. If the old quarter glass is reinstalled, make the

alignment marks (A) along the edges of the clips (B)
w i t h a grease pencil as s h o w n .
Cutting positions
8. Use a putty knife to scrape off old adhesive s m o o t h to

a thickness of about 2 m m (0.08 in) on the bonding
surface around the entire quarter glass opening
flange:
Do not scrape d o w n to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint interferes w i t h proper
bonding.
Remove the clips f r o m the body.
6. Carefully remove the quarter glass.
9. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a sponge

oil, grease, and water f r o m getting o n the surface.
10. If the old quarter glass is reinstalled, use a putty knife
to scrape off the old adhesive and any broken clips
f r o m the quarter glass. W i t h isopropyl alcohol clean
the inside face and the edge of the quarter glass
where the new adhesive is applied. Make sure the
bonding surface is kept free of water, o i l , and grease.
20-56
1 1 . Attach the rubber d a m (A) w i t h adhesive tape to the

inside surface of the glass (B) as s h o w n :
Be sure both ends of the rubber d a m line up w i t h
the alignment marks (C).
Be careful not to touch the glass where the adhesive
is applied.
13. W i t h a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the

edge of the glass (A) and along the rubber d a m (B) as
s h o w n , then lightly w i p e it off w i t h gauze or
cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass as a
guide, apply the glass primer to the corner portions
of the quarter glass.
Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed
up.
Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands. If
y o u do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter
glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass
is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away f r o m
primed surfaces.
'///////,: Apply glass primer here.
1 2 . Attach the clips (A) w i t h adhesive tape to the inside

face of the quarter glass (B) as s h o w n :
Be sure the clips line up w i t h the alignment marks
(C) y o u made in step 7.
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where the
adhesive is applied.
(cont'd)
20-57
Glass
Q u a r t e r G l a s s R e p l a c e m e n t
( c o n t ' d )
14. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body

primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
Do not apply body primer to any remaining original
adhesive on the flange.
Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer
sponges.
Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
'////////'Apply body primer here.
15. Cut a " V " in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive
cartridge as s h o w n .
20-58
16. Put the cartridge in a caulking g u n , and run a

continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of
the glass (B) as s h o w n . W i t h the glass primer (C) y o u
applied in step 13 on the quarter glass as a guide,
apply adhesive to the corner portions of the quarter
glass. A p p l y the adhesive w i t h i n 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
2 mm
(0.08 in)
Hatch Glass/Hatch Glass Support

Strut Replacement
17. Hold the quarter glass (A) over the opening, align it,
and set it w i t h suction cups (B) d o w n on the adhesive.
Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the w a y around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for an hour until
the adhesive is dry.
A
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the tailgate.
When prying w i t h a flat-tipped screwdriver, w r a p it
w i t h protective tape to prevent damage.
Do not damage the rear w i n d o w defogger grid lines or
terminals.
Use eye protection w h e n prying the support strut
clips.
1. Remove the tailgate spoiler t r i m f r o m the body (see
page 20-219).
2. Release the tabs (A), then remove the terminal covers
(B) f r o m both sides. Detach the clips (C) and
disconnect the rear w i n d o w defogger connectors (D)
f r o m both sides.

knife or t o w e l . To remove adhesive f r o m a painted
surface or the quarter glass, w i p e w i t h a soft shop
t o w e l dampened w i t h isopropyl alcohol.
19. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
quarter glass, and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, and let the quarter glass dry, then seal w i t h
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used
w i t h i n the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
things for 2 to 3 days:
Slam the doors w i t h all the w i n d o w s rolled up.
Twist the body excessively (such as when going in
and out of driveways at an angle or driving over
rough, uneven roads).
3. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip screwdriver

(A) to pry the support strut clips (B) f r o m each end of
the support strut (C) at the hatch glass and tailgate,
then release the support strut f r o m the pivot bolts (D).
Do not remove the clips f r o m the support strut.
cont'd
20-59
Glass
Hatch Glass/Hatch Glass Support Strut Replacement (cont'd)
4. With an assistant holding the hatch glass, remove the
pivot bolt (A).
6. Remove the hatch glass (A). Take care not to scratch

the tailgate.
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N-m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
5. W i t h an assistant holding the hatch glass, remove the

bolts. Unlock the hatch glass latch.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,4
7. Install the glass and support struts in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the rear w i n d o w defogger connectors
are plugged in properly.
Adjust the position of the glass (see page 20-62).
Check that the hatch glass opens properly and locks
securely.
pivot bolt before installation.
8. Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-63) and
w i n d noise.
20-60
Hatch Glass Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE:
Put o n g l o v e s to protect y o u r h a n d s .
P l a c e the hatch g l a s s on a p a d d e d s u r f a c e to p r e v e n t d a m a g e .
D o not d a m a g e the r e a r w i n d o w d e f o g g e r grid l i n e s o r t e r m i n a l s .
R e m o v e the bolts w i t h a T 3 0 T o r x bit.
REAR WINDOW MOLDING

20-61
Glass
Hatch Glass Adjustment
1. Remove the tailgate lower t r i m panel (see page 20-100).
2. With the help of an assistant remove the hatch glass support struts f r o m both sides (see page 20-59). Hold the hatch
glass w h e n opening and closing it.
3. Slightly loosen each bolt and screw.
4. Adjust the hatch glass (A) alignment in the f o l l o w i n g sequence:
Adjust the hatch glass latch (B) forward and rearward to make the hatch glass fit flush w i t h the tailgate at the
bottom edge. There should be no gap between the hatch glass stops (C) and hatch glass on each side.
Adjust the striker (D) right and left until it's centered in the hatch glass latch.
A
6 x 1.0mm
9.8 N m
20-62
Rear Window Molding

Replacement
5. Tighten each bolt and screw securely.
6. Check that the hatch glass opens properly and locks
securely.
7. Reinstall the support struts securely (see page 20-59).
8. Reinstall the tailgate lower t r i m panel (see page
20-100).
9. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on
the sealing area as s h o w n , and note these items:
Use a 12mm(1/2 in) diameter hose (A).
Adjust the rate of water f l o w as s h o w n (B).
Do not use a nozzle.
NOTE:
Place the hatch glass on a padded surface to prevent
damage.
Do not damage the rear w i n d o w defogger grid lines
and terminals.
1. Remove the hatch glass (see page 20-59).
2. Remove the m o l d i n g (A) f r o m the upper edge of the
hatch glass (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
Hold the hose about 300 m m (12 in) away f r o m the

tailgate (C).
(cont'd)
20-63
Glass
Rear Window Molding Replacement (cont'd)
3. Using a putty knife, scrape off all of the adhesive f r o m
the hatch glass. Clean the upper edge of the hatch
glass w i t h isopropyl alcohol where the new molding
will be installed. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and
water f r o m getting on the surface.
6. Align the edge of the m o l d i n g (A) w i t h the corner edge

of the hatch glass (B), and attach the m o l d i n g .
4. A p p l y primer to the upper edge of the hatch glass (A).

Be careful not to touch the hatch glass where the
primer w i l l be applied.
"//////;: Apply primer here.
7.5 m m \
(0.3 in)
mm
4 m m (0.16 in)

knife or t o w e l . To remove adhesive f r o m the hatch
glass, w i p e w i t h a soft shop towel dampened w i t h
alcohol.
8. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour.
5. A p p l y primer to the entire groove of the molding (A),
and run a bead of urethane adhesive (B) in the groove
of the m o l d i n g .
9. Reinstall the hatch glass.

10. Adjust the hatch glass (see page 20-62).
11. Check for water leaks around the tailgate (see step 9
on page 20-63).
'////////'Apply primer here.
20-64
Hatch Glass Weatherstrip Replacement

NOTE:
5. A p p l y sealant (SUNRISE MEISEI B-33C, or equivalent)

(A) in the groove around the hatch glass weatherstrip
(B) .
1. Remove the tailgate side t r i m f r o m both sides (see

page 20-100).
2. Disconnect the rear w i n d o w defogger connectors
f r o m both sides (see step 2 on page 20-59).
3. Remove the hatch glass weatherstrip (A) by pulling it
out.
Hatch glass side
4. Clean the bonding surface around the hatch glass

opening flange w i t h isopropyl alcohol.
6. Locate the painted alignment mark (C) on the hatch

glass weatherstrip. Align the painted mark w i t h the
alignment notch in the center of the hatch glass
opening, and install the weatherstrip. Make sure it's
seated completely and facing in the direction s h o w n
Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
20-65
Moonroof
GLASS
Position Adjustment page 20-68
Closing Force and
Opening Drag Check, page 20-76
DRAIN CHANNEL S E A L
DRAIN CHANNEL
SUNSHADE
WIND D E F L E C T O R
Replacement page 20
SUNSHADE
REAR SLIDER
REAR S U N S H A D E
B A S E SLIDER
SUNSHADE
REAR S T O P
REAR MIDDLE
DRAIN T U B E
S U N S H A D E HANDLE
DRAIN CHANNEL
SLIDER
FRONT DRAIN T U B E
FRONT DRAIN
VALVE
REAR DRAIN
VALVE
MOTOR PLATE
20-66

Symptom
Water leaks f r o m m o o n r o o f
W i n d noise f r o m moonroof
Motor noise f r o m moonroof
M o o n r o o f glass does not move,

but m o t o r turns
M o o n r o o f glass does not move

and m o t o r does not turn (glass
can be m o v e d w i t h 5 m m
hexagonal wrench)
M o o n r o o f glass does not stop at
proper flush closed position
M o o n r o o f glass moves in a
jerking m o t i o n (moves 40 m m
(1.57 in), stops for 0.4 seconds,
and repeats)
During auto close operation,
m o o n r o o f glass reverses w h e n no
object is trapped
M o o n r o o f glass moves, but there
is no AUTO function
1. Check for a clogged drain tube.

2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel, (see
page 20-68)
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or
drain channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
5. Adjust the moonroof position.
1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the
roof panel.
2. Adjust the m o o n r o o f position.
1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a w o r n gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
4. Check for dirt or debris.
1. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
2. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
1. Check for a run d o w n battery.
2. Check for a blown fuse.
3. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
1. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-375).
2. Check glass position adjustment.
Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-375).
1. Check for dirt and debris in the track.

2. Reset the m o o n r o o f control unit (see page 22-375).
20-67
Moonroof
Glass Position Adjustment
Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even w i t h the glass

weatherstrip (B), t o w i t h i n 0 + 1 / 1 m m (0+0.04/
0.04 in) all the w a y around. If not, make the following
adjustment:
1. Tilt the glass all the w a y up.

2. Slide the sunshade all the w a y back.
3. Turn the slit portions of the m o l d i n g (A) up and
remove the TORX screws f r o m the glass brackets (B)
on both sides w i t h a TORX T25 bit.
Fastener Locations
1. Adjust the glass (A).

- 1 . Turn the slit portions of the molding (B) up.
-2. With a TORX T25 bit, slightly loosen the TORX
screws.
-3. Move the glass up or d o w n .
-4. Tighten all bolts securely.
2. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side.

20-68
Wind Deflector Replacement

4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not damage
the roof panel.
1. Open the glass fully.

2. Disconnect the deflector springs (A) f r o m the
bushings (B) on both sides.
5. Install the glass in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the
glass m o u n t i n g bolts before reinstallation.
Do the glass position adjustment (see page 20-68).
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39). Let
the water run freely f r o m a hose w i t h o u t a nozzle. Do
not use a high-pressure spray.
3. Remove the w i n d deflector (A).

A
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the

m o o n r o o f into the m o o n r o o f frame, and exit through
the drains.
4. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.

20-69
Moonroof
#
Drain Channel Replacement

1. Remove the glass (see page 20-68).
2. Insert a t r i m tool between the glass brackets (A) and
the drain channel. Twist the t r i m tool to unsnap the
pins (B), then gently push the ends of the drain
channel towards the center of the vehicle to
disengage the pins f r o m the glass bracket.
4. Stand the drain channel (A) upright, and pull up the

channel t o remove it f r o m both drain channel sliders
(B).
3. Turn the drain channel (A) up while sliding it f o r w a r d

to release it f r o m the pins (B) o n both drain channel
sliders (C).
5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal.

Reinstall the glass and check the glass position
7. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39). Use
free-flowing water f r o m a hose w i t h o u t a nozzle. Do
20-70
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-70).
5. Remove the sunshade (A).
2. Remove the screws, then remove both sunshade

slider spacers (A).
Fastener Locations
; Screw, 4
Sunshade base slider removal

6. If necessary, remove both front sunshade base sliders
(A) and both rear sunshade base sliders (B).
3. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
m o v e the sunshade f o r w a r d until you can see both
sunshade rear sliders (B). Do not damage the
sunshade or the rear sliders.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
7. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal.

Reinstall the glass and check the glass position
4. Remove the screws, then remove the both rear
sliders.
20-71
Moonroof
Motor Replacement
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement

SRS c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-19)and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21 )before
2. Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands. Disconnect the

connector (A), remove the screws w i t h a T25 TORX
bit, then remove the m o t o r (B). Do not operate the
m o t o r before reinstallation.

Headliner (see page 20-107)
Fastener Locations
M o o n r o o f glass (see page 20-68)
: Screw, 3
With rear entertainment system: Rear controller

and screen (see page 23-172)
2. Disconnect the drain tubes (A).
5 x 0.8 m m
4Nm
(0.4 k g f m ,
3 Ibfft)
. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
m o t o r m o u n t i n g bolts before reinstallation.
Reset the m o o n r o o f control unit (see page 22-375).
Check the m o t o r operation.
3. W i t h an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the

bolts (B, C), then remove the frame.
Fastener Locations
B^:BoIt,2
C ^ : Bolt,6
6 x 1.0 m m
C
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibf ft)
20-72
Front drain tubes
Rear drain tubes
Front door sill t r i m (see step 1 on page 20-79)
Rear side t r i m panel (see page 20-96)
Kick panel (see step 3 on page 20-79)
C-pillar t r i m (see page 20-86)
Glove Box (see page 20-127)
Headliner (see page 20-107)
Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page

20-128).
5. Remove the front drain valve (A) f r o m the body and
tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull
the front drain tube (B) d o w n out of the A-pillar. Leave
the string in the pillar to use w h e n reinstalling the
drain tube.
7. Detach the rear drain tube (A) f r o m the moonroof

frame and pull the rear drain valve (B) out of the body.
Detach the clips holding the drain tube to the body,
and remove the drain tube.
(cont'd)
20-73
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
(cont'd)
8. Install the frame and drain tubes in the reverse order
Before installing the f r a m e , clear the drain tubes
and drain valves using compressed air.
W h e n installing a front drain tube, tie the string that
w a s left in the pillar to the t o p end of the drain tube
and pull it up into the roof.
Drain Channel Slider and Cable

1. Remove the frame (see page 20-72).
2. Remove these parts f r o m the frame:
Sunshade (see page 20-71)
Sunroof motor (see page 20-72)
3. Disconnect and remove the rear middle drain tube
(A).
Make sure the rear drain tubes are routed correctly,

and the retaining clips are installed securely.
A
Check the frame seal.

Clean the surface of the frame.
W h e n connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 m m (0.39 in).
Install the tube clips (A) on the drain tubes (B) as
shown.
Do the glass position adjustment procedure (see
page 20-68).
After all parts are installed, including the headliner,
reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-375).
4. Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands. Release the

hooks (A, B), then remove the sunshade slide stop (C)
f r o m the frame (D).
Upward

20-74
5. If necessary, remove the drain channel slider (A) by

sliding it f o r w a r d .
6. Remove the screw and pivot the glass bracket (A)

d o w n by sliding the link lifter (B) back, then slide the
glass bracket back w i t h the link lifter.
7. Slide the glass bracket (A) along w i t h the inner cable

(B) back, pull the slider portion (C) of the inner cable
out of the slide rail (D), then remove the inner cable.
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
(cont'd)
20-75
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Assembly Replacement (cont'd)
Closing Force and Opening Drag

Check
8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
1. Remove the headliner.
Damaged parts should be replaced.

A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease to the glass bracket (A)
and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by
the arrows.
Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link
lifters are parallel, and in the tilt-up position.
Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and
glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-76).
2. Closing force check:

W i t h a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as s h o w n .
Have an assistant hold the switch to close the glass
while y o u measure the force required to stop it.
Read the force as soon as the glass stops m o v i n g ,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
C l o s i n g f o r c e : 2 0 0 - 2 9 0 N ( 2 0 - 3 0 kgf, 4 4 - 6 6 Ibf)
After reinstalling the motor, reset the m o o n r o o f

control unit (see page 22-375).
3. If the force in not w i t h i n specification, remove the

m o o n r o o f m o t o r (see page 20-72), and check the
f o l l o w i n g items:
Check the gear teeth and the inner cable for
breakage and damage. I f t h e gear teeth are broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is d a m a g e d ,
remove the frame (see page 20-72), and replace the
cable (see page 20-74).
3
Check the m o o n r o o f control unit input test (see

page 22-377). Ifthe m o t o r fails to run or doesn't turn
smoothly, replace it (see page 20-72).
Check the opening drag. Go to step 4.
20-76
4. O p e n i n g d r a g c h e c k : Protect the l e a d i n g e d g e of the

g l a s s w i t h a s h o p t o w e l (A). M e a s u r e t h e effort
r e q u i r e d to o p e n t h e g l a s s u s i n g a s p r i n g s c a l e (B) a s
shown.
5. If t h e l o a d is o v e r 4 0 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), c h e c k :
T h e s i d e c l e a r a n c e a n d g l a s s position a d j u s t m e n t
( s e e p a g e 20-68).
F o r b r o k e n or d a m a g e d s l i d i n g p a r t s . If a n y s l i d i n g
parts are d a m a g e d , replace t h e m .
6. R e s e t t h e m o o n r o o f control unit ( s e e p a g e 22-375)
after r e i n s t a l l i n g the m o o n r o o f m o t o r .
Interior Trim
SUNVISOR
HEADLINER
A-PILLAR TRIM
G R A B HANDLE
FRONT DOOR OPENING S E A L
Removal/Installation, step 4 on page 20-80
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING S E A L
C-PILLAR TRIM
UPPER Q U A R T E R WINDOW TRIM
REAR ROOF TRIM
D-PILLAR TRIM
TAILGATE UPPER TRIM
C A R G O FLOOR LID
TAILGATE LOWER TRIM PANEL
C A R G O FLOOR B O X
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM
REAR DOOR SILL TRIM
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM
KICK PANEL
CARPET
20-78
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas

Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
Front Door Sill Area

NOTE:
3. Remove the driver's side kick panel (A) or the

passenger's side kick panel (B).
- 1 . Pull out the door opening seal (C) as needed f r o m
the kick panel hooks (D) and the door opening
flange.
-2. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips,
then remove it.
Driver's side
Take care not to bend or scratch the t r i m and panels.
Fastener Locations
t>:Clip,2

1. Detach the hooks (A) and the tabs (B) f r o m the kick
panel (C) and the B-pillar lower t r i m (D), and pull the
front door sill t r i m (E) up by hand to detach the clips
(F) , then remove it f r o m the front door opening seal
(G) .
Fastener Locations
FO:Clip,4
I [>; Clip, 4
Passenger's side
Fastener Locations
>:Clip,2
2. If necessary, pull the front side outer t r i m (H) up to

detach the clips (I), then remove the t r i m .
(cont'd)
20-79
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas (cont'd)
4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) f r o m the t r i m
hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange,
then remove the seal.
Rear Door Sill Area

NOTE:
2. Detach the hook (A) and the tab (B) f r o m the B-pillar
lower t r i m (C), and pull the rear door sill t r i m (D) up by
hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it f r o m
the rear door opening seal (H).
Fastener Locations
Et>:Clip,2 F D> : Clip, 1 G t> : Clip, 2 J D> : Clip, 3
5. Install the t r i m in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
3. If necessary, pull the rear side outer t r i m (I) up to

detach the clips (J), then remove the t r i m .
20-80
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar

Areas
4. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) f r o m the t r i m
hooks (B) and around the rear door opening flange,
then remove the seal.

Program, 888-424-6857
A-Pillar Trim
NOTE:
If side airbags and/or side curtain airbags have
deployed, the affected pillar area t r i m and attachment
clips must be replaced. See Component Replacement/
Inspection After Deployment (see page 24-167).
Follow the A-pillar t r i m installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbags to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
note these items:
Take care not to scratch the t r i m and panels.

1. Pull the front door opening seal away f r o m the
A-pillar, as needed (see step 4 on page 20-80)
(cont'd)
20-81
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
2. Remove the A-pillar t r i m (A).
- 1 . Open the cap (B), then remove the bolt.
-2. Pull the upper portion of the A-pillar t r i m back by
hand to detach the clip. Pull the A-pillar t r i m up and
remove it f r o m the dashboard (C).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt 1
> : Clip, 1
B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim

NOTE:
Follow the B-pillar t r i m installation procedure
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
avoid damage w h e n prying components.
The upper clip in the B-pillar t r i m (A) consists of a
g r o m m e t (B) and a pin (C). The g r o m m e t expanded
w i t h the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin are broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced w i t h a new one w h e n the
t r i m is reinstalled.

note these items:
If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
A-Pillar t r i m and all of its clips.
20-82
1. Remove the front door sill t r i m (see step 1 on page

20-79).
4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and the upper

anchor bolt (B).
2. Slide the front seat fully forward.

3. After releasing the upper clips (A), pull back the upper
portion of the B-pillar lower t r i m (B) to release the
lower clip (C).
NOTE: I f t h e side airbag has deployed, the B-pillar
lower t r i m and all of its clips must be replaced.
Fastener Locations
A O : Clip, 2
CD>:Clip, 1
ML
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
(3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
Apply thread lock.
. Hit the surface of the B-Pillar upper t r i m (A) w i t h a

rubber mallet. Hitting the t r i m surface slides the
projections (B) on the pin (C) and pushes it into the
g r o m m e t (D) on the body (E).
NOTE: The clip must be replaced w i t h a new one
w h e n the B-pillar t r i m is reinstalled.
Replace.
(cont'd)
20-83
Interior Trim
Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 o n
page 20-80)
Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 on
page 20-81)
7. Pull back the upper potion of the B-pillar upper t r i m
(A) by hand to release the lower hook (B), then
remove the t r i m .
8. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the

upper B-pillar t r i m and all of its clips.
9. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the upper clip (A) f r o m the removed B-pillar upper
t r i m (B), and discard it. Then check the t r i m , and note
the f o l l o w i n g :
To prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
t r i m and replace it if it has any of the f o l l o w i n g
damage:
- A n y cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper
t r i m and the lower hook (C), or any
stress-whitened areas in the upper part of the
trim
- A n y cracks or deformations in the B-pillar lower
t r i m (D), or any breakage in the part (E) that
overlaps the B-pillar upper t r i m
- A n y cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clip
seating surfaces (F)
If the clips (G) are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace t h e m w i t h n e w ones.
Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock t o the
upper anchor bolts before reinstallation.
Trim Inspection
20-84
10. Before installing the B-pillar upper t r i m (A), whether

replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove the clip
(B).
13. Reinstall the B-pillar upper trim (A).

-1 Insert the lower hook (B) of the trim into the B-pillar
hole (C).
Place the t r i m over the B-pillar (D) and fit clip (E) into
hole (F) in the B-pillar, then lightly push the t r i m into
place.
NOTE:
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
under the clips or t r i m ribs.
Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged and it will not hold
the t r i m properly.
11. Check the overlap between the headliner and B-Pillar

upper t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it (see page
24-167).
12. Carefully reinstall the upper clip (A) to the B-pillar
upper t r i m (B). Make sure that the g r o m m e t (C) is
nearest to the top of the pin (D) as s h o w n .
14. Reinstall all removed parts. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted or kinked. A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid
thread lock to the belt anchor bolts prior to
installation.
^^zzzzzzzzzzz
(cont'd)
20-85
Interior Trim
C-Pillar Trim
NOTE:
Follow the C-pillar t r i m installation procedure
cause injury.
The upper clip in the C-pillar t r i m (A) consists of a
w i t h the pin secures it t o the body panel (D). The
A
20-86

page 20-81)
2. Hit the surface of the C-pillar t r i m (A) w i t h a rubber
mallet. The clip is located in the t o p of the C-pillar
about 3 5 m m forward of the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG"
mark (B). Hitting the t r i m surface breaks the
projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
g r o m m e t (E) on the body (F).
w h e n the C-pillar t r i m is reinstalled.
B
Replace.
3. Release the caps (A) and remove the screws, then

remove the grab handle (B).
Fastener Locations
5. Remove the clips, then remove the duct (A).

Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,2
: Screw, 2
4 . Remove the upper anchor cover (A) and the upper

anchor bolt (B).
6. Release the hooks (A) and the tab (B) f r o m the upper
quarter w i n d o w trim (C), and pull the C-pillar t r i m (D)
up by hand to detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,2
Apply thread
(cont'd)
20-87
Interior Trim
C-pillar t r i m and all of its clips.
8. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the upper clip (A) f r o m the removed C-pillar t r i m (B)
and discard it. Then check the t r i m and note the
following:
To prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m deploying,
C-pillar t r i m and replace it if it has any of the
following damage:
- A n y cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the C-pillar t r i m
seating surfaces (C, D)
If the lower clips (E) are damaged or
Replace the upper clip w i t h a new one.
anchor bolts before reinstallation.
C-pillar trim
20-88
9. Before installing the C-pillar t r i m (A), whether

replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove the new
clip (B).
10. Check the overlap between the headliner and C-pillar

t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it (see page 24-167).
11. Carefully reinstall a new upper clip (A) to the C-pillar
t r i m (B). Make sure that the g r o m m e t (C) is nearest to
the top of the pin (D) as s h o w n .
12. Place the C-pillar t r i m (A) over the C-pillar (B), fit the
upper clip (C), and all of the other clips (D) into hole (E)
in the C-pillar, then lightly push the t r i m into place.
NOTE:
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked under
the clips or trim tabs.
Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too hard,
the clip will be damaged and it will not hold the t r i m
properly.
Fastener Locations
D D> : Clip, 2
D-Pillar Trim
NOTE:
Follow the D-pillartrim installation procedure
cause injury.
Use the appropriate tools f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
The upper clip in the D-pillar t r i m (A) consists of a
w i t h the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
A
13. Reinstall all removed parts. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted or kinked. A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid
thread lock to the seat belt anchor bolt prior to
installation.
(cont'd)
20-89
Interior Trim
Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page 20-206)
Cargo area light (see page 22-256)
W i t h power tailgate: Left tailgate side t r i m (see page
20-100)
3. Release the hooks (A) and the tabs (B) f r o m the both
D-pillar trims (C), and pull the rear roof t r i m (D) d o w n
by hand to detach the clips, then pass the seat belt (E)
through the hole (F) in the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,4
2. W i t h power tailgate: Remove the pivot bracket

m o u n t i n g bolts, then push the power tailgate rod (A)
in the D-pillar t r i m (B).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
4. Pry off the lid (A), then remove the bolt f r o m the
D-pillar t r i m (B).
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
20-90
5. Hit the surface of the D-pillar t r i m (A) w i t h a rubber

mallet. The clip is located in the t o p of the D-pillar
about 15mm behind the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG"
mark (B). Hitting the t r i m surface breaks the
projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
g r o m m e t (E) on the body (F).
w h e n the D-pillar t r i m is reinstalled.
B
6. Remove the D-pillar t r i m (A).

- 1 . Detach the tabs (B) and the hooks (C) f r o m the
upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m (D).
-2. Pull the D-pillar t r i m back by hand to detatch the
clips.
-3. With power tailgate: Disconnect the satellite
speaker connector (E).
Without power tailgate
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 3
With power tailgate

Fastener Locations
0 : Clip, 3
(cont'd)
20-91
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar
7. I f t h e side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
D-pillar t r i m and all of its clips.
8. I f t h e side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the upper clip (A) f r o m the removed D-pillar t r i m (B)
and discard it. Then check the t r i m and note the
following:
D-pillar t r i m and replace it if it has any of the
f o l l o w i n g damage:
areas in the D-pillar t r i m or rear roof t r i m (C)
seating surfaces (D)
I f t h e clips (E) are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
Replace the upper clip w i t h a new one.
D-pillar trim
(cont'd)
Rear roof trim
9. Before installing the D-pillar t r i m (A), whether

replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove the new
clip (B).
10. Check the overlap between the headliner and D-pillar

t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it. (see page 24-169)
20-92
11. Carefully reinstall a new upper clip (A) to the D-pillar

t r i m (B). Make sure that the g r o m m e t (C) is nearest to
the top of the pin (D) as s h o w n .
12. Reinstall the D-pillar t r i m (A).

-1. Place the t r i m over the D-pillar (B), fit the upper clip
(C), and all of the other clips into holes (D) in the
body, then lightly push the t r i m into place.
-2. With power tailgate: Reconnect the D-pillar speaker
connector (E).
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
under the clips or t r i m ribs.
Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not hold
the t r i m properly.
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 3
(cont'd)
20-93
Interior Trim
With power tailgate
Upper Quarter Window Trim
Fastener Locations

> : Clip, 3
NOTE:
Follow the upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m installation

procedure carefully; improper installation could cause
the side curtain airbags to deploy improperly and
possibly cause injury.
Remove the C-pillar t r i m
Remove the D-pillar t r i m
2. Pull the upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m (A) back by hand
to detach the clips, then remove the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 3
13. With power tailgate: Fasten the pivot bracket (A) on

the tailgate.
Fastener Locations
.Bolt, 2
14. Reinstall all of the removed parts.
20-94
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo

Area
upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m and all of its clips.
4. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, check the
t r i m and note the f o l l o w i n g :
upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m (A), and replace it if it
has any of the f o l l o w i n g damage:
areas in the upper quarter w i n d o w trim
seating surfaces (B)

Program, 888-424-6857
Cargo Floor Box

NOTE:
If the clips (C) are damaged or stress-whitened,

replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
1. Pull the tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page

20-206).
Upper quarter window trim
2. Remove the cargo floor lid (A).

A
3. Open the lid (A), then remove the tool set holder (B)
f r o m the cargo floor box (C).
check the overlap between the headliner and upper
quarter w i n d o w t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it. (see
page 24-169)
(cont'd)
20-95
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo
Area (cont'd)
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear

Side Area
4. Remove the clips (A), and pull up the cargo floor box
(B) to detach the clips (C), then remove the cargo floor
box.
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 6
C > : Clip, 4

Program, 888-424-6857
Rear Side Trim Panel

NOTE:
Rear door sill t r i m (see page 20-80)
page 20-81)
Third row seat (see page 20-181)
Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page 20-206)
Cargo floor box (see page 20-95)

note these items:
20-96
2. Remove the clip f r o m the lower portion of the t r i m

panel (A).
Fastener Location
l>:Clip,1
3. Pry out the covers (A), and remove the bolts (B), then
remove the tie d o w n hooks (C) (two places).
5. Open the cargo hook (A). Pry out the cover (B), and
remove the bolt.
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
5 x 0.8mm
6 N-m
(0.6 k g f m ,
4 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screw, then release
the retaining hooks (B). Remove the cargo net hook
(C) f r o m the rear side t r i m panel (D).
6. Pull out the front upper edge of the rear side t r i m

panel (A) by hand t o release the tabs (B) and the hooks
(C) f r o m the C-pillar t r i m (D).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
(cont'd)
20-97
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area (cont'd)
7. Pull out the rear upper edge of the rear side t r i m panel
(A) by hand to release the tabs (B) and the hooks (C)
f r o m the D-pillar t r i m (D).
8. Pull the rear side t r i m panel (A) back by hand to

detach the clips. On the right side, disconnect the rear
accessory power socket connector (B).
Left side
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,6
Right side
Fastener Locations
>:Clip,6
20-98
9. Pull up the rear side t r i m panel (A) up, then remove it.
Armrest Replacement
1. Remove the rear side t r i m panel.
2. Remove the screws and the clips, then remove the

armrest (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
> : Clip, 3

note these items:
Make sure the accessory power socket connector is
plugged in properly.
Push the clips, hooks and tabs into place securely.
3. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal and

i f t h e clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
20-99
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
3. Remove the left tailgate side t r i m (A) and the right

tailgate side t r i m (B).
- 1 . Pull out the top of the side t r i m to detach the clips.
-2. W i t h power tailgate: release the rod (C) f r o m the slit
(D).
-3. Detach the tabs (E) and the hooks (F) f r o m the
tailgate lower t r i m panel (G).
Take care not t o bend or scratch the t r i m and panels.

1. Remove the hatch glass weatherstrip (see page
20-65).
2. Remove the tailgate upper t r i m panel (A).
- 1 . Detach the hooks (B) and the tabs (C) f r o m the left
tailgate side t r i m (D) and right tailgate side t r i m (E).
-2. Pull the tailgate upper t r i m panel back by hand to
detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,5
20-100
Fastener Locations
>:Clip,4
4. Remove the tailgate pull pocket (A).

-1. Carefully pull the edge of the tailgate lower t r i m
panel (B) just beside the tailgate pull pocket by
hand, and push out the inside hooks (C).
-2. Pull d o w n the upper edge of the pocket and release
the lower tabs (D).
-3. With power tailgate: Disconnect the power tailgate
close switch connector (E).
6. Remove the tailgate lower t r i m panel (A).

-1. Detach the clips (B) beside the tailgate latch.
-2. Pull d o w n the panel to detach all of the clips (C).
Fastener Locations
B,C>:Clip,17
7. Install the t r i m and panel in the reverse order of

Make sure the power tailgate close switch
connector is plugged in properly.

t h e m with new ones.
Push the clips, hooks, and tabs into place securely.
5. Pry out the cap (A) and remove the bolt, then remove
the pull strap (B).
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
@=3
20-101
Interior Trim
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the sunvisor or the headliner.
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective
tape through the hole in the front side of the bracket
cover (A), and push in on the hook (B).
3. Pull d o w n the sunvisor (A) to release the pin (B) and

the bracket (C) f r o m the holes in the body, and
disconnect it.
NOTE: If the sunvisor cannot be pulled d o w n , the
hook has not rotated into the bracket cover. Repeat
step 2 to rotate the hook.
2. While pushing in on the hook (A), release the sunvisor

(B) f r o m the holder (C), and rotate the sunvisor
backward about 4 5 .Make sure the hook slides into
the bracket cover as y o u rotate the sunvisor.
20-102
4. Turn the holder (A) 4 5 counterclockwise, and remove

it f r o m the holder g r o m m e t (B) by pulling the holder
down.
6. Jf the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the

sunvisor w i t h a new one.
7. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not deployed, inspect the
sunvisor for damage. A damaged sunvisor may cause
the side curtain airbags to deploy improperly,
possibly causing injury. Replace the sunvisor if it has
any of the f o l l o w i n g damage:
A n y cracks in the sunvisor bracket (A)
A n y cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (B)
A n y bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (C)
A n y cracks in the sunvisor base (D)
A n y cracks in the vanity mirror base (E)
5. Pry out the holder g r o m m e t (A) f r o m the body by

pinching its hooks (B).
8. Ifthe holder g r o m m e t is damaged or stress-whitened,

replace it w i t h a new one.
(cont'd)
20-103
Interior Trim
Sunvisor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
9. Install the holder (A) to the holder g r o m m e t (B) by
turning it 4 5 clockwise. Install t h e m in the body as an
assembly by pushing it until the hooks (C) snap into
place securely.
10. Connect the vanity mirror light connector (A), and

install the sunvisor (B) by inserting the bracket (C) and
the pin (D) of the bracket cover (E) to the hole in the
body.
20-104
11. While holding the bracket cover (A), rotate the

sunvisor (B) forward until the hook (C) snaps into
place. Gently pull d o w n o n the sunvisor t o verify that
it is properly secured in the body. Rotate the sunvisor
into the holder (D).
Grab Handle Removal/Installation

3. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (B),

then remove the grab handle (C).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Lower the grab handle (A), then insert a small flat-tip
screwdriver wrapped in protective tape into the notch.
(cont'd)
20-105
Interior Trim
Grab Handle Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Using a pair pliers, remove the clips (A) by pinching
the hooks.
7. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (B), then install
the caps (C) fully into the clips.

grab handle w i t h a new one.
6. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, inspect
the grab handle for damage. A damaged grab handle
may cause the side curtain airbag to deploy
improperly, possibly causing injury. Replace the grab
handle if it has any of the f o l l o w i n g damage:
A n y cracks or damage in the grab handle (A)
A n y cracks or stress-whitening in the caps (B)
20-106
8. Position the grab handle (A) on the body (B), and push
on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into place
securely.
Headliner Removal/Installation
KTC Trim Too! Set SOJATP2014*
*Available t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
SRS c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-19) and the
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner.
2. Remove the roof console (A).

- 1 . Remove the lenses (B).
-2. Remove the screws (C), then pull out the front
individual map light (D).
-3. Disconnect the front individual map light connector
(E). If equipped, disconnect the moonroof switch
connector (F).
-4. Remove the screws (G). Pull out the front side of the
console, and release the rear hooks (H).
Fastener Locations
C : Screw, 2 G : Screw, 2
0ss>
0rm>
Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other

interior t r i m .
B-pillar lower t r i m , both sides (see page 20-82)
B-pillar upper t r i m , both sides (see page 20-82)
C-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-86)
D-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-89)
Upper quarter w i n d o w t r i m (see page 20-94)
Sunvisors, both sides (see page 20-102)
Grab handles, four places (see page 20-105)
Rear individual map lights (see page 22-256)
W i t h rear entertainment system: Remove the
wireless remote control and display cover and
disconnect the RES connector (see page 23-172).
(cont'd)
20-107
Interior T r i m
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. P r y o u t t h e c o v e r (A) a n d r e m o v e t h e s c r e w s , t h e n
r e m o v e the c o a t h a n g e r ( B ) .
5. W i t h r e a r v i e w m i r r o r : D i s c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r ( A ) .
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
. If n e c e s s a r y , r e m o v e the roof c o n s o l e s c r e w g r o m m e t
(A) by s q u e e z i n g t h e h o o k s ( B ) .
4. R e m o v e the g r o u n d bolt ( A ) .
7. If n e c e s s a r y , r e m o v e t h e m a p light clip b y r e l e a s i n g
t h e h o o k s ( C ) , a n d t h e n p r y i n g o u t t h e clip (D).
20-108
8. Disconnect roof wire harness connector (A) and

detach the harness clips (B) from the driver's side
A-pillar (C).
11. Lower the headliner (A).

-1. Remove the front door opening seals (B), rear door
opening seals (C), and tailgate weatherstrip (D)
from each roof portion.
-2. With moonroof: Release the Velcro fasteners (E)
and front clips (F) by lowering the headliner.
-3. With the help of an assistant detach the rear clips
(G) by pulling the rear portion of the headliner
down.
-4. Detach the magnets (H) by carefully pulling down
on the headliner.
Without moonroof
Fastener Locations
G > : Clip, 2
9. Disconnect the rear washer hose joint (A) and the roof
wire harness connector (B), then detach the harness
clips (C) from the passenger's side A-pillar (D).
With moonroof
Fastener Locations
F O : Clip, 2
G D> : Clip, 2
10. Disconnect the rear window washer tube at the rear

hatch, (see step 3 on page 20-219)
(cont'd)
20-109
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
With moonroof and rear entertainment system
Fastener Locations
FD>:Clip,2
Gt>:Clip,2
Roof wire harness replacement

13. If necessary, remove the cushion tapes (A) fastening
the roof w i r e harness (B), the rear washer hose (C),
and the RES w i r e harness (D) (with rear entertainment
system) to the headliner (E) and detach the harness
clips (F), then remove t h e m f r o m the headliner.
Without moonroof
Fastener Locations
A > : Cushion
F t> : Clip, 10
tape, 15
jry^
12. W i t h the help of an assistant, pull the headliner (A)

along w i t h the roof w i r e harness out t h r o u g h the
tailgate opening. Do not bend the headliner
excessively as this may crease or damage it.
With moonroof
Fastener Locations
A > : Cushion F > : Clip, 17
tape, 16
7v_r
r
20-110
4
F
A{>9
With moonroof and with rear entertainment system

Fastener Locations
A D> ; Cushion
F D> : Clip, 18
14. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,

If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
headliner and affected t r i m pieces (see page
24-167).
To prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m deploying
headliner and all removed t r i m . Replace any pieces
w i t h the f o l l o w i n g damage:
- A n y crease or tears in the headliner (A)
- A n y cracks or breakage in the grab handle (B)
- A n y damage around the grab handle holes (C) or
sunvisor holes in the headliner
- A n y cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (D)
- A n y bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (E)
- A n y cracks in the sunvisor base (F)
- A n y cracks or breakage in the vanity mirror base
(G)
- A n y fasteners (H), clip bases (I), or magnet bases
(J) w h i c h have come off the headliner
W h e n installing the grab handle, push on the
handle against the bracket (K) until the clips (L) snap
into place securely.
Replace the removed cushion tape w i t h new pieces.
Check that both sides of the headliner are securely
attached to the roof.
Make sure the headliner overlaps the t r i m pieces
correctly (see page 24-169).
Be carerful not to crease or damage the headliner
w h e n reinstalling it through the tailgate opening.
Also be careful not to scratch the body.
(cont'd)
20-111
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
Carpet Replacement
Headliner

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
interior t r i m pieces.
page 22-94), then wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning work.
Grab handle
,

Front seats, both sides (see page 20-142)
Second r o w seats, both sides (see page 20-163)
Third r o w seats, both sides (see page 20-181)
Front door sill t r i m , both sides (see step 1 on page
20-79)
Rear door sill t r i m , both sides (see page 20-80)
Kick panels, both sides (see step 3 o n page 20-79)
20-128)
Steering joint cover (see page 17-10)
Sunvisor
20-112
3. D e t a c h t h e h o o k s ( A ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e f o o t r e s t p l a t e
(B).
5. R e m o v e t h e c l i p s f a s t e n i n g b o t h r e a r s i d e t r i m p a n e l s
( A ) . Pull o u t t h e e d g e o f t h e c a r p e t (B) f r o m u n d e r t h e
panels.
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,2
4. R e m o v e t h e n u t w i t h a 6 m m h e x a g o n a l w r e n c h ,
release t h e clip, t h e n r e m o v e t h e f o o t r e s t (A).
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 1 O: Clip, 1
6. R e m o v e t h e c l i p s f a s t e n i n g t h e e d g e o f t h e c a r p e t ( A )
f r o m b o t h f r o n t d o o r sill a r e a s a n d b o t h r e a r d o o r s i l l
a r e a s . Pull o u t t h e e d g e o f t h e c a r p e t f r o m u n d e r t h e
B - p i l l a r l o w e r t r i m (B).
Fastener Locations
D>:Clip,4
(cont'd)
20-113
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
7. Pull out the edges of the carpet (A) f r o m under the
center console (B), driver's/passenger's console t r i m
(C), and console rear t r i m (D).
10. Install the carpet In the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle, or twist the
carpet.
Make sure the floor w i r e harnesses (A) are routed
correctly.
Slip the slits (B) in the carpet over the rear heater
ducts (C) and the third r o w seat heater duct (D).
Slip the carpet under the center console, both
B-pillar lower t r i m s , and both rear side t r i m panels
properly.
Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-94).
A
8. Release the fastener (A) on the front edge of the

carpet (B), then pull back the carpet f r o m under the
dashboard.
9. Remove the carpet.
20-114
Consoles
C e n t e r C o n s o l e
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
3. Remove the coin holder case (A) and the console mat
(B) f r o m the center console (C).

Program, 888-424-6857

NOTE:
C
Take care not to scratch the front seats, the dashboard,

or the console.
Center panel (see page 20-123)
Console rear t r i m (see page 20-116)
2. Gently pull out the center console t r i m (A) to detach
the clips (B, C) and release the holders (D) f r o m the
pins (E), then remove the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
B [>:Clip,7
CD>:Clip,3
4. Remove the screws (A, B) and disconnect the front

console light connector (C), then detach the harness
clip(D).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 4 B
: Screw, 2
5. Disconnect the audio auxiliary jack 5P connector, (see

page 23-134)
(cont'd)
20-115
Consoles
Center Console
Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Center Console Rear Trim

6. Remove the bolts and detach the harness clip (A),

then disconnect the rear console light bulb socket (B)
and console sub harness connector (C).
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
G8H

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the center console and related
parts.
avoid damage w h e n r e m o v i n g components.
1. Starting at the t o p , gently pull out the console rear
t r i m (A) to detach the clips (B), then pull out the t r i m to
detach the remaining clips (C), disconnect the
connector (D), then remove the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
B,Ct>:Clip,11
7.2 Ibfft)
7. Carefully slide the center console (A) backward and

lift it up, then remove it.

note these items:
Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.
8. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the w i r e
harnesses are not pinched.
20-116
Center Console Rear Trim Vent Replacement


*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
3. Remove the screws, then remove the rear console

vent (A) and the rear console vent t r i m (B) f r o m the
center console rear t r i m (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 8
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the console or the t r i m .
1. Remove the center console rear t r i m (see page
20-116).
2. Remove the screw, then remove the center console
upper duct (A).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
4. Install the vent in the reverse order of removal.
20-117
Consoles
Center Console Armrest
Console Armrest Lock Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the console or the armrest.
Take care not to scratch the console or the armrest.


1. Remove the center console rear t r i m , (see page

20-116)
1. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then

remove the armrest inner base (B).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the console armrest

(A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
Fastener Locations
2. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest lock (A)

f r o m the armrest outer base (B).
3. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
3. Install the armrest lock in the reverse order of

removal.
20-118
Center Console Disassembly/Reassembly

Program, 888-424-6857
3. Remove the screws (A) and remove the clips (B, C),
then remove the center console side t r i m (D).
Fastener Locations
A ^ : S c r e w , 12
B > : Clip, 10
C>:Clip,4
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the center console or the t r i m .
Remove the center console (see page 20-115).
Remove the console armrest (see page 20-118).
2. Detach the clips (A, B ) , then remove the center
console panel (C).
Fastener Locations
A D>: Clip, 4
B > : Clip, 12
4. Remove the screws and disconnect the harness clip

(A), then remove the center console rear bracket (B)
f r o m the center console rear box (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 5
(cont'd)
20-119
Consoles
Center Console Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Remove the screws, then remove the center console
front cross bar (A) and center console middle bracket
(B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 6
7. Remove the screws, then disassemble the rail (A), the

shutter (B) and the front console cover (C) f r o m the
center console front box (D). If necessary, detach the
clips, then remove the beverage holder upper cover
(E).
Fastener Locations
: S c r e w , 10 t> : Clip, 6
6. Detach the harness clips (A), and disconnect the front

center console light bulb connector (B), then release
the subharness (C) f r o m the front console (D).
8. Reassemble the center console in the reverse order of

disassembly, and note these items:
Make sure the auxiliary jack connector or the AC
power outlet connector is plugged in properly.
20-120
Dashboard
Instrument Panel
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover


Program, 888-424-6857

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related

parts.

parts.
Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC trim tool set to


1. Tilt the steering c o l u m n d o w n .
1. Adjust the steering column upward.
2. Open the front door, and remove the driver's

dashboard side panel (A).
Driver's center panel (see page 20-123)

Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-121)
3. Remove the instrument panel (A).
- 1 . Release the side hook (B).
-2. Gently pull the panel backward, and remove the
clips (C, D).
- 1 . Pull out the front door opening seal (B), as needed

-2. Gently pry the front edge of the side panel w i t h a
t r i m tools to release the hooks (C), then remove the
side panel.
Fastener Locations
C O : Clip, 9
D O : Clip, 1
4. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Upon installation, position the side hook first, then
attach the clips.
Push the clips and hook into place securely.
(cont'd)
20-121
Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Center Upper Panel

3. Remove the left side of the driver's center panel (see

4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).

- 1 . Remove the screw.
-2. Pull out the b o t t o m of the driver's dashboard lower
cover to release the clips.
-3. Disconnect the switch connectors (B).
VSA OFF switch connector
Parking and back-up switch connector (for some
models)
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
D> : Clip, 12

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
parts.
1. Grasp the middle of the center upper panel (A), and
pull the panel towards the rear of the vehicle to detach
all of the clips f r o m the dashboard (B). Disconnect the
center speaker connector (C) (for some models), then
remove the center upper panel.
Fastener Locations
5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure that the electrical connector and the air
hose to the humidity/in-car temperature sensor are
properly connected.

note these items:
Make sure the center speaker connector is plugged
in properly.
20-122
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/Installation


Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
parts.
2. Remove the passenger's center panel (A).

- 1 . Starting at the t o p , gently pull the passenger's
center panel out to detach the clips (B), then pull the
panel out to detach the remaining clips (C).
-2. Disconnect the front accessory power socket
connector (D).
Fastener Locations
B, C O : Clip, 10
1. Remove the Driver's center panel (A).

- 1 . Shift the shift lever in to the N position.
-2. Starting at the t o p , gently pull the driver's center
panel out to detach the clips (B), then pull the panel
out to detach the remaining clips (C).
-3. Disconnect the hazard warning switch conector (D)
and VTM-4 switch connector (E).
Fastener Locations
B, C O : Clip, 8

note these items:
them w i t h new ones.
Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.
20-123
Dashboard
Center Pocket Removal/Installation
With navigation system

Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 2
C > : Clip, 2
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the center panels (see page 20-123).
2. Remove the center pocket (A).
- 1 . Remove the screws (B) and release the clips (C, D).
-2. Disconnect the center pocket light bulb socket (E)
and seat heater switch connectors (F) (for some
models).
-3. Disconnect the navigation control panel connectors
(G) (with navigation).
Without navigation system

Fastener Locations
B^:Screw,2
Cl>:Clip,3
DD>:Clip,2
3. With navigation system: If necessary, remove the

screws, then separate the center pocket (A) f r o m the
brackets (B) and the navigation switch panel (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 6
4. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of

Make sure the connectors and bulb socket are
20-124
him*
Passenger's Dashboard Trim Removal/Installation

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
parts.
2. Remove the passenger's dashboard trim (A).

- 1 . Remove the hook (B).
-2. Pry out the side edge of the trim to detach the clips,
then remove the passenger's dashboard t r i m .
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 11
1. Open the front door, and remove the passenger's

dashboard side panel (A).
- 1 . Pull out the front door opening seal (B), as needed
-2. Gently pry the front edge of the side panel with a
t r i m tool to release the hooks (C), then remove the
side panel.

note these items:
Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
20-125
Dashboard
Passenger's Tray Removal/Installation
Program, 888-424-6857
3. Remove the screws and detach the clips, then remove

the passenger's tray (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 5
> : Clip, 3
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard t r i m (see page
20-125).
2. Remove the passenger's tray mat (A).
4. Install the tray in the reverse order of removal, and if

the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
20-126
Glove Box Removal/Installation
Glove Box Striker Replacement


NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its

related parts.
NOTE: Take care not t o scratch the dashboard and its

related parts.

page 20-128).
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-127).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the glove box (A).

Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
2. Remove the bolt (A) and the screws (B), disconnect

the glove box light bulb socket (C), then remove the
glove box striker (D).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 1
B : Screw, 3
(0.5 k g f m , 4 Ibfft)
3. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove box
stops (B) on each side f r o m the dashboard by pushing
t h e m in, then remove the glove box.
4 Ibfft)
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the glove box light bulb socket is
connected securely.
4. Install the glove box in the reverse order of removal.
20-127
Dashboard
Glove Box Lock Cylinder
Replacement
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove box.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its

related parts.

2. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box
handle (A) f r o m the glove box (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A).

- 1 . Gently pull d o w n the rear edge to detach the clips.
-2. Pull the undercover away to release the pins (B)
f r o m the holders (C).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 3
3. Remove the glove box lock cylinder (A).

- 1 . Release the hooks (B), then remove the glove box
cylinder cap (C).
-2. Pull one end of the retainer (D) out of the slot w i t h a
hook-shaped t o o l , then remove the lock cylinder.
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the pins of the undercover are installed
securely to the holders.
4. Reinstall the lock cylinder reverse order of removal.
20-128
Dashboard Vent Removal/Installation

Program, 888-424-6857
Instrument Panel Vent

NOTE:
parts.
Center Panel Vent

NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-123).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the passenger's
side center panel vent (A) and the vent t r i m (B).
Fastener Locations
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-121).
: Screw, 3
2. Remove the screws, then remove the instrument

panel vent (A) and the vent t r i m (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
3. Install the center panel vent in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Install the instrument panel vent in the reverse order

of removal.
(cont'd)
20-129
Dashboard
Dashboard Vent
Passenger's Dashboard Trim Vent
Column Cover Removal/Installation

NOTE:
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch or damage the c o l u m n covers.

parts.
Do not pry on the cover surfaces w i t h any tools.

20-125).
2. Turn the steering wheel to a position where the

column cover screws can be seen, then remove the
screws f r o m the front side of the c o l u m n cover (A).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the instrument

panel vent (A) and vent t r i m (B).
1. Adjust the steering c o l u m n so that it is fully tilted

d o w n and fully extended.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the upper column

cover (B).
3. Install the instrument panel vent in the reverse order

of removal.
20-130
Column Blind Cover

4. Remove the three screws (A, B, C), then remove the
lower c o l u m n cover (D).
NOTE:
Fastener Locations
Take care not to scratch the column covers.
A : Screw, 1 B : Screw, 1 C : Screw, 1

Do not pry the cover surface with any tools.
1. Remove the column cover (see page 20-130).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the blind column
cover (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
5. Install the upper and lower c o l u m n cover in the

Push the hooks and tabs into place securely.
Before tightening the screws, make sure the wire
3. Install the column blind cover in the reverse order of
removal, and make sure the wire harness are not
pinched before tightening the screws.
20-131
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14*
Program, 888-424-6857
3. Remove the parking brake lever bracket m o u n t i n g

screws, then lower the lever (A).
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1

NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body, or
other related parts.
Take care not to bend the brackets.
avoid damage when removing components.
beginning work.
2. Remove these items f r o m the dashboard area:
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
4. From the front of the dashboard, detach the harness

clip (A).
Kick panel, both sides (see step 3 on page 20-79)

Center panel (see page 20-123)
Instrument panel (see page 20-121)
Center upper panel (see page 20-122)
Dashboard center pocket (see page 20-124)
Passenger's dashboard t r i m (see page 20-125)
Passenger's tray (see page 20-126)
Glove box (see page 20-127)
Glove box striker (see page 20-127)
20-128)
Center console (see page 20-115)
Gauge control module (see page 22-359)
Audio-HVAC control unit (see page 23-125)
W i t h o u t navigation system: Audio-HVAC display
unit (see page 23-126)
W i t h navigation system: Display unit (see page
23-293)
Sunlight sensor (see page 21-194)
Steering column (see page 17-10)
Front passenger's airbag (see page 24-171)
GPS antenna (see page 23-292)
Remove the TPMS control unit (see page 18-101).
Remove the tweeters (if equipped) (see page
23-129).
20-132
5. Detach the harness clips (A) f r o m the center portion of

the dashboard.
7. With an assistant holding the dashboard (A) up,

detach the dashboard wire harness clips (B) f r o m the
right side of the dashboard duct, then carefully
remove the dashboard through the front door
opening.
6. Remove the bolts securing the dashboard (A).

Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 15
Dashboard duct removal

8. If necessary, f r o m the back of the dashboard (A),
remove the screws, then remove the dashboard duct
(B) f r o m the dashboard.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 7
(0.5 k g f m ,
4 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-133
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd)
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam

Dashboard defroster duct removal
9. If necessary, f r o m the back of the dashboard (A),

remove the screws, then remove the dashboard
defroster duct (B) f r o m the dashboard.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 7

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body, or other
related parts.
Have an assistant help you w h e n removing and
installing the dashboard.
beginning work.
10. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal,

Before tightening the screws, make sure the
dashboard wire harness is not pinched.
Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
Replace the passenger's airbag mounting bolts and
nuts w i t h new ones.
(see page 22-94).
Check for any DTCs that may have been set during
repairs, and clear t h e m .
20-134
Dashboard center panel (see page 20-123)

20-128)
Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-79)
Center console (see page 20-115)
Steering column (see page 17-10)
3. Remove the parking brake lever m o u n t i n g bolt and
screw, then lower the lever (see step 3 on page
20-132).
Driver's side
4 . Disconnect the roof wire harness connector (A) and
detach the harness clips (B).
5. From under the dash, disconnect the driver's door

wire harness connectors (A), the floor wire harness
connector (B), the right engine compartment wire
harness connectors (C), the left engine compartment
wire harness connectors (D), and the parking brake
switch connector (E) from the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box (F), and then release the wire harness
clips (G).
(cont'd)
20-135
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Middle portion
Passenger's side
6. Disconnect the SRS unit connectors A and B f r o m the

SRS unit (see page 24-188). Disconnect the A/C
subharness connectors (C), the floor wire harness
connector (D), the AC inverter connector (E), the GPS
antenna (F), the HandsFreeLink control unit connector
(G), and the USB control unit connector (H), then
detach the harness clips (I).
7. Disconnect the RES connector (A) (with rear

entertainment system) and the roof wire harness (B),
then detach the clips (C) f r o m the passenger's side
A-pillar (D).
8. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's

door wire harness connector (A), the right engine
compartment wire harness connectors (B), the floor
wire harness connectors (C), and if equipped, the
stereo amplifier connectors (D).
20-136
9. Remove the bolts securing the lower portion of the

dashboard hanger beam.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 3
10. Open the passenger's door, and remove the special

bolts (A, B).
-1. Remove the caps (C).
-2. Loosen the special bolts until they disengage f r o m
the threads on the hanger beam side bracket (D).
and engage the inside threads of the adjusting nuts
(E). The thread lock on the special bolts makes the
special bolts and the adjusting nuts turn together.
-3. Continue to loosen the special bolts to turn the
adjusting nuts into the sleeves (F) until the
adjusting nuts engage the stops (G). This creates a
gap (H) between the adjusting nuts and the body.
-4. Loosen the special bolts to disengage t h e m f r o m
the adjusting nuts. Then remove the bolts.
(cont'd)
20-137
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
11. Check that the adjusting nuts (A) are seated in the
space adjusters (B).
13. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it f r o m the

guide pins (B, C).
- 1 . Insert an 8 m m hex wrench in the adjusting nut.

-2. Gently turn the wrench counterclockwise.
-3. If the wrench turns easily, continue turning until the
adjusting nut seats and engages the stop (C).
-4. If the wrench does not t u r n easily, the adjusting nut
is seated.
NOTE: If either adjusting nut w a s not seated,
replace the special bolts.
14. Carefully remove the dashboard t h r o u g h either front

door opening.
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower center
cover opening, or it m a y be damaged. Lay it on its
front or back.
12. Open the driver's door, and remove the caps (A), then
remove the bolts (B, C).
Fastener Locations
B : Bolt, 1
C : Bolt, 2
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
20-138
15. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal,

Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
Special bolt tightening on passenger's side

B
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire

Make sure the adjusting nuts (A) turn easily by hand
in the fixed space adjusters (B). Tighten the
adjusting nuts by hand until they engage the stops
(C) before reinstalling the dashboard.
Before reinstalling the dashboard, screw the special
bolts (D) into the adjusting nuts and check that they
turn together. If they do not turn together, replace
the special bolts.
After setting the dashboard in the body, reinstall all
of the mounting bolts but do not tighten t h e m . First
tighten the driver's side bracket bolts to the
specified torque. Next, loosen the special bolts. As
y o u tighten the bolts, the adjusting nuts screw out
of the sleeves until they contact the body. Continue
tightening the special bolts to the specified torque.
Tighten all remaining m o u n t i n g bolts to the
specified torque.
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
After tightening both side brackets m o u n t i n g bolts,

tighten the center frame m o u n t i n g bolts.
(see page 22-94).
If necessary, adjust the shift cable (see page
14-257).
20-139
Seats
RIGHT S E C O N D ROW S E A T
Disassembly Reassembly, page 20-166
Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-168
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-169
Third Row Access Cable Replacement, page 20-171
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-173
Linkage Disassembly Reassembly, page 20-178
THIRD ROW S E A T S
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-182
Latch Replacement, page 20-183
Seat-back Recline Lever
Seat-back Recline Cable
LEFT S E C O N D ROW S E A T
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-166
Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-168
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-169
Armrest Replacement, page 20-171
Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement, page 20-172
Linkage Disassembly Reassembly, page 20-178
FRONT S E A T (Passenger's)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-141
Frame Replacement, page 20-148
Seat Slide Motor Replacement, page 20-151
Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-152
Seat-back Cover Replacement page 20-153
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-159
Under Tray Replacement, page 20-163
20-140
FRONT S E A T (Driver's)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-141
Frame Replacement, page 20-148
Seat Slide Motor Replacement, page 20-151
Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-152
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-153
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-159
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Inspection

NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always
inspect the active head restraint, even if they appear
reusable, by doing the f o l l o w i n g procedure.
Inspection
1. Manual seat/manual height adjustable seat: Fold the

seat-back f o r w a r d , then recline the seat-back to the
first lock position, and adjust the head restraint to the
highest position.
5. Push the head restraint (A) f o r w a r d , and measure its

free horizontal movement. The head restraint should
move more than 50 m m (2.0 in) w i t h o u t resistance. If
it is less than 50 m m (2.0 in), or the head restraint
doesn't move smoothly, replace the seat-back frame
(see page 20-148).
Above 50 mm (2.0 in)
2. Power seat: W i t h the recline switch, move the

seat-back fully f o r w a r d , and adjust the head restraint
to the highest position.
3. A p p l y masking tape on the top of the head restraint.
4. Make marks (A) on both sides at 285 m m (11.2 in)
upward f r o m the roots of the head restraint frame (B)
along the back of the head restraint (C) surface. Make
a center of these points as a datum point (D).
20-141
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation
Program, 888-424-6857
Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-35) after front
passenger's seat replacement.
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Tilt the steering wheel all the w a y up, and telescope it
all the w a y in.
2. Slide the front seat all the w a y f o r w a r d , and adjust the
seat to its m a x i m u m height. Carefully pry up on the
bottom of the anchor cover (A) to release the tab (B)
using the appropriate t r i m tool f r o m below inside the
recline cover (C). Remove the cover.
20-142
3. Adjust the seat to its m i n i m u m height, then remove

the lower anchor bolt (A).
4. S l i d e t h e s e a t all the w a y f o r w a r d a n d r e m o v e the rear
6. S l i d e t h e s e a t all the w a y back, a n d r e m o v e the front
o u t e r s e a t track e n d c o v e r (A) a n d the rear i n n e r s e a t
o u t e r s e a t track e n d c o v e r (A) a n d the front i n n e r s e a t
track e n d c o v e r (B).
track e n d c o v e r (B).
7. R e m o v e the bolts.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
(cont'd)
20-143
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
beginning work.
9. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the power seat
harness connector (A) and the side airbag connector
(B).
Driver's seat
11. Remove the head restraint.

12. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
13. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly.
seat belt anchor bolts before reinstallation.
Tighten the seat m o u n t i n g bolts to the specified

torque in the sequence s h o w n . Slide the seat (A) all
the w a y back and tighten and , then slide it
forward and tighten and . The driver's seat is
s h o w n ; the passenger's seat is symmetrical.
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten t h e m to
specification w i t h a torque w r e n c h .
(see page 22-94).
Check for any DTCs that m a y have been set during
Fastener Locations
Passenger's seat
10. Disconnect the navigation control unit under the

driver's seat (if equipped) (see page 23-291).
20-144
: Bolt, 4
Front Seat Recline Cover Removal/Installation

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
3. Remove the recline outer cover (A).

- 1 . Put the seat back in the fully upright position.
-2. Remove the recline knob (B), and remove the TORX
screw.
-3. Detach the clip by pulling the outer cover back by
hand.
-4. Release the hooks (C) along upper edge of the outer
cover w i t h a t r i m tool.
Driver's manual height adjustable seat
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
D> : Clip, 2
Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat

covers.
Manual Seat
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-142).
2. Pull back the cap (A) to release the hooks (B). Remove
the TORX screw (C) and the screw (D), then remove
the height adjuster handle (E).
Driver manual height adjustable seat
Fastener Locations
C : Screw, 1 D : Screw, 1
Passenger's manual seat

Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
t> : Clip, 2
(cont'd)
20-145
Seats
Front Seat Recline Cover Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the center cover (A).
Power Seat
- 1 . Remove the TORX screw.

-2. Release the hooks (B).
Fastener Location
2. Remove the TORX screw and release the hooks (A),

then remove the front cover (B).
: Screw, 1
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
5. Install the recline covers in the reverse order of

removal. Push the clips and the hooks into place
securely.
20-146
3. Remove the recline cover (A).

- 1 . Remove the TORX screw, and detach the clip and
the hooks (B).
-2. Pull up the cover, then detach the hooks (C, D).
-3. Disconnect the 12P connector (E) f r o m the power
seat adjustment switch. Driver's side: Disconnect
the 5P connector (F) f r o m the power lumbar support
switch.
-4. Gently pull out the outer cover, and remove it.
4. Remove the center cover (A).

- 1 . Remove the TORX screw.
-2. Pull up the cover, then detach the hooks (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
Driver's seat
Fastener Locations
: S c r e w , 1 t> : Clip, 1
5. Install the recline covers in the reverse order of

removal:
Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
20-147
Seats
Front Seat Frame Replacement
Program, 888-424-6857
Check the operation of the driver's seat position
sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-38):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
Do the front passenger's w e i g h t sensor initialization
(see page 24-36) after front passenger's seat frame
replacement.
NOTE:
A p p l y oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
A p p l y multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of
the seat tracks.
If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat frame
and related parts w i t h new ones (see page 24-167).
20-148

Front seat-back cover (see page 20-153)
Fornt seat cushion cover (see page 20-159)
Front seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
Front seat recline m o t o r (see page 20-152)
Front seat slide motor (see page 20-151)
3. Detach the clip and release the hooks (A), then
remove the outer height cover (B).
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
4. Driver's seat: Detach the clips (A, B), then remove the
inner height cover (C).
8-way power seat
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 1
5. Gently pull out the rear outer foot cover (A) to release
the hook (B) and the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
BD> : Clip, 1
6. Gently pull out the rear portion of the front outer foot
cover (A) to detach the clip and release the hooks (B),
then remove it.
Manual height adjustable seat
Fastener Location
Fastener Location
O : Clip, 1
A D> : Clip, 1
(cont'd)
20-149
Seats
Front Seat Frame Replacement (cont'd)
7. Release the hooks (A), then remove the front inner
foot cover (B).
9. Remove the TORX screws, then remove the rear

recline inner cover (A) and the rear recline outer cover
(B) f r o m the seat frame (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
8. Release the hooks (A) and the clip, then remove the
rear inner foot cover (B).
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
10. Install the seat components on the new seat frame in

the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the ODS unit and motor connectors are
I f t h e clips are damaged, replace t h e m w i t h new
ones.
20-150
Front Seat Slide Motor Replacement

NOTE:
4. Disconnect the slide motor connector (A), then

remove the slide motor (B) f r o m the slide motor
bracket (C) while disconnecting the motor f r o m the
short flex cable (D).
C

Take care not to bend the cable.
Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
Move the seat to the fully forward position before
removing it.
2. Passenger's seat: Remove the front passenger's seat
under tray slide plate (for some models) (see page
20-163).
3. Remove the flex cable (A) and the cable housing (B).
- 1 . Remove the bolts, then remove the cable holder (C).
-2. Release the housing f r o m the hooks (D).
-3. Disconnect the cable f r o m the w o r m gear (E) in the
inner seat track by pulling out the housing.
-4. Disconnect the cable f r o m the slide motor (F).
5. Remove the short flex cable (A) f r o m the w o r m gear

(B) in the outer seat track by pulling it out.
NOTE: Take care not to kink the cable.

Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
(cont'd)
20-151
Seats
Front Seat Slide Motor
Front Seat Recline Motor

Replacement
6. Remove the motor end m o u n t i n g (A) f r o m the slide

motor (B).

1. Remove the seat-back cover, (see page 20-153)
2. Release the push nut (A) f r o m the motor side end of
the connecting rod (B), gently tap on the motor side of
the connecting rod to remove it f r o m the recline
motor and both recline adjusters (C).
7. Install the slide motor in the reverse order of removal,

A p p l y multipurpose grease to the w o r m gear
portions in both seat tracks.
Before installing the slide motor to the slide motor
bracket install the short flex cable to the slide
motor.
Before installing the slide motor bracket to the seat
tracks, make sure both seat tracks are located fully
forward.
Make sure the flex cables are connected properly.
Make sure the slide motor connector is connected
securely.
20-152
3. Remove the rod cover (D).
Front Seat-back Cover

Replacement
4. Disconnect the recline motor connector (A) and
remove the bolt.

Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Location
: Bolt 1

Do the OPDS sensor initialization (see page 24-35) after
front passenger's seat-back cover replacement.
NOTE:
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Replace the w i r e ties y o u removed w i t h new ones.
On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS

sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away f r o m oil.
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
2. Passenger's seat: Remove the front seat under tray
slide plate (for some models) (see page 20-163).
Replace the push nut w i t h a new one. Make sure the

push nut is installed correctly.
A p p l y m e d i u m strength type liquid thread lock to
the m o u n t i n g bolt before reinstallation.
(cont'd)
20-153
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
3. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A) of
the elastic straps f r o m the seat cushion frame springs
(B), then lift away the back cover extension (C).
Driver's seat (8-way power seat)

A D A
Passenger's seat (4-way power seat)

A
4. From under the seat cushion, detach the harness clips

(A) f r o m the seat cushion f r a m e , then disconnect
these connectors:
Driver's seat:
- Side airbag connector (B)
- Recline motor harness connector (C) (8-way
power seat)
- Seat-back heater connector (D) (8-way power
seat/ manual height adjustable seat)
Passenger's seat:
- Side airbag connector (B)
- Recline motor harness connector (C) (4-way
power seat)
20-154
Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat)
5. R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s , a n d r e l e a s e t h e h o o k s (A) by
pulling t h e bottom of the back c o v e r (B) back, t h e n
g e n t l y pull d o w n t h e c o v e r to r e l e a s e t h e h o o k s (C)
from the seat-back frame, a n d remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Passenger's seat (manual seat)

A
6. R e l e a s e t h e hook strips (A), t h e n l o o s e n the u p p e r a n d
s i d e e d g e s of t h e s e a t - b a c k c o v e r (B).
A
(cont'd)
20-155
Seats
7. Remove the clips and release the hook strip (A), then
loosen the lower edge of the seat-back cover (B).
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 2
9. Remove the nuts, then release the side airbag module

f r o m the seat-back frame.
Fastener Locations
:Nut,2
8. Detach the harness clip (A), then pull the side airbag
w i r e harness (B) out t h r o u g h the harness hole (C) in
the seat-back cover (D). The 8-way power seat is
s h o w n ; other types of the seats are similar.
10. Passenger's seat: Turn over the seat-back cover (A).
Release the hooks (B), then remove the ODS unit
cover (C). Disconnect the OPDS sensor connectors (D)
and seat wire harness connector (E).
A
20-156
11. Passenger's seat: Detach the harness clips (A)

fastening the front passenger's seat wire harnesses
(B), then remove t h e m .
13. Pinch the retaining tabs at the bottom of the head

restraint guides (A), and pull the guides up to remove
them.
12. Passenger's seat: Detach the harness clip (A), then

remove the front passenger's seat wire harness (B)
through the hole (C) in the seat frame.
14. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) f r o m the

seat-back frame (B).
(cont'd)
20-157
Seats
15. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way
around, and release the upholstery rings (A), then
remove the seat-back cover (B).

note these items:
To prevent wrinkles w h e n installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, the hooks,
and the hook strips.
Replace all of the upholstery rings (A) fastening the
seat-back cover (B) and pad wire (C) w i t h new ones.
Install them w i t h commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (D).
Use only original Honda replacement seat-back
covers.
Make sure the recline motor harness/lumbar
support motor harness (driver's seat) or the recline
motor harness (power seat), the side airbag
harness, the seat-back heater harness, and the front
passenger's seat wire harness (passenger's seat)
are routed properly.
Before installing the side airbag (E), make sure the
reinforcing cloth (F) is fixed on the seat-back frame
(G) securely.
20-158
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857
SRS component locations (see page 24-19)and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21 (before
NOTE:
5. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the

connector (s) and detach the harness clips, then pull
the harnesses out of the seat.
Driver's seat:
- For some models: Seat cushion heater harness
connector (A) and harness clip (B)
- For some models: Seat heater relay clip (C)
- Seat belt buckle switch connector clip (D)
Passenger's seat:
- For some models: Seat cushion heater harness
connector (A) and harness clip (B)
Driver's seat

1. Driver's seat: Adjust the seat height to the highest

position.
Front seat recline cover (see page 20-145)
Front seat under tray slide plate (for some models)
(see page 20-163)
4. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A) of
the elastic straps f r o m the seat cushion frame springs,
then lift away the back cover extension (B).
Passenger's seat
(cont'd)
20-159
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. With DPMS: Disconnect the DPMS connectors (A),
and remove the TORX screws, then remove the DPMS
unit(B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
8. Remove the TORX screw and detach the clips, then

remove the seat frame outer cover (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
> : Clip, 4
9. Driver's seat: Release the inside hook strip (A).
7. From under the seat cushion, release the hook strips

(A).
20-160
10. Release the hook strips (A) f r o m both sides of the seat
cushion frame.
Manual height adjustable seat/Manual seat
8-way power seat
11. Disconnect the rear height motor connector (A), then

pull the harness out through the seat frame hole (B).
4-way power seat
20-161
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
12. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) f r o m the seat
cushion frame (B).
13. Release the upholstery rings (A) fastening the seat

cushion cover (B) on the seat cushion pad.
14. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
w a y around, and release the upholstery rings (A),
then remove the seat cushion cover (B).

note these items:
To prevent wrinkles w h e n installing a seat cushion
over the pad before securing the clips and hook
strips.
seat-back cover (B) and pad w i r e (C) w i t h new ones.
Install t h e m w i t h commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (D).
20-162
Front Seat Under Tray Replacement
Second Row Seat

For some models

1. Open the under tray (A).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
covers.
The left second row seat is s h o w n , the right side is
similar.
A
2. Gently twist the under tray while pulling it out until

one side comes off of the guide rail.
3. Tilt the removed side of under tray d o w n , then pull the
other side off the guide rail.
1. Raise the seat-back.

2. Remove the clips (A, B), then front foot outer cover (C)
and pull the center cover (D) forward to release the
hooks (E) f r o m the front of the seat tracks.
Front outer cover
Fastener Locations
A O : Clip, 1 B t> : Clip, 1
4. Remove the seat under tray slide plate (A).

- 1 . Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-142).
-2. Remove the bolts.
Fastener Locations
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
(cont'd)
20-163
Seats
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
20-164
6. From the back of the seat tracks, remove the bolts

securing the second r o w seat (A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
9. Install the seat (A) in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
If equipped, make sure the seat heater connector is
Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all the
w a y back and tighten and , then slide it forward
and tighten (Dand .
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them to
specification with a torque wrench.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,4
7. W i t h seat heater: Lift up the seat cushion, then

disconnect the seat-back heater connector (A). The
left second row seat is s h o w n ; the right second row
seat is similar.
(4.8 k g f m , 35 Ibfft)
8. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

second row seat through the rear door opening.
20-165
Seats
Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
KTC Trim Too! Set SOJATP2014*
Program, 888-424-6857
4. From both sides of the seat, release the tabs (A, B),
then remove the pivot bolt cover (C). Remove the
pivot bolt with a TORX T30 bit.
Fastener Location
NOTE:
covers.
The left second r o w seat is s h o w n ; the right second
row seat is similar.
2. Remove the seat belt buckles (A) and seat belt
detachable anchor (B) f r o m the elastic straps (C).
5. Lift the seat cushion (A) up.
3. W i t h seat heater: Disconnect the heater connector (A)

f r o m the seat cushion frame.
20-166
6. Remove the TORX screw and gently pull out the

recline outer cover (A) to detach the clips and to
release the hooks (B), then remove the cover while
releasing the inside edge (C).
8. Remove the wire ties (A).
Fastener Locations
: S c r e w , 1 > : Clip, 3
9. Remove the nuts, then remove the seat cushion (A).

Fastener Locations
:Nut,2
7. Gently pull out the recline inner cover (A) to detach

the clips, and to release the tabs (B), then remove the
cover while releasing the inside edge (C).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 3
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-167
Seats
Second Row Seat
Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Assemble the second r o w seat in the reverse order of
Replace any damaged clips w i t h new ones.
Second Row Seat-back Recline

Lever Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857
With seat heater: Replace the w i r e ties y o u removed

w i t h new ones.
NOTE:
W i t h seat heater: Make sure the seat cushion heater


When prying w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h
1. Remove the second r o w seat-back recline cable (see
page 20-169).
2. Carefully pry out the cover (A) w i t h a flat-tip
screwdriver at the gap while holding the lever fully
open. Release the tabs (B), then remove the cover.
20-168
Second Row Seat-back Recline

Cable Replacement
3. Disconnect the recline cables (A).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
covers.
Take care not to kink the cables.
The left second r o w seat is s h o w n ; the right second
r o w seat is similar.
1. Slide the second r o w seat forward fully.
2. Remove the pivot bolt cover and the pivot bolt (see
4. Install the second row seat-back recline lever in the

reverse order of removal, and make sure the cables
are connected securely.
3. Remove the third row seat access t r i m (see step 2 on

page 20-173) and back cover (see step 4 on page
20-173), then release the hooks (see step 5 on page
20-174) f r o m behind the seat-back, as necessary.
4. Return the second row seat-back, and fold d o w n the
seat-back.
5. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screws securing
the recline lever (B)
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
(cont'd)
20-169
Seats
Second Row Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement (cont'd)
6. R e m o v e the T O R X s c r e w a n d d e t a c h the c l i p , t h e n
r e m o v e the recline i n n e r bracket c o v e r (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
8. D e t a c h the c l i p s (A) a n d d i s c o n n e c t the recline outer

c a b l e (B) a n d t h e recline i n n e r c a b l e (C). R e l e a s e the
c a b l e s f r o m back of the s e a t - b a c k f r a m e h o l d e r s (D).
l>:Clip,1
7. R e m o v e the T O R X s c r e w a n d d e t a c h the c l i p , t h e n
r e m o v e t h e r e c l i n e outer bracket c o v e r (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1 >:Clip,1
9. R e m o v e the s e c o n d r o w s e a t - b a c k r e c l i n e l e v e r ( s e e
p a g e 20-168).
10. Install the s e c o n d r o w s e a t - b a c k r e c l i n e c a b l e s in the
r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l a n d note t h e s e i t e m s :
M a k e s u r e e a c h c a b l e is c o n n e c t e d s e c u r e l y .
P u s h the c l i p s a n d t h e h o o k s into p l a c e s e c u r e l y .
20-170
Third Row Seat Access Cable

Replacement
Second Row Seat Armrest

Replacement
NOTE:
The left second row seat is shown; the right second
row seat is similar.

2. Remove the second row seat-back cover/pad from the
seat-back frame (see page 20-173).
3. Disconnect the third row seat access cables (A) and
detach the clips (B), then remove the cable by
pinching the hooks of the holder (C).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
covers.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
Third row seat access trim (see step 2 on page
20-173)
Second row seat-back cover (see step 4 on page
20-173)
3. From back of the seat-back, remove the bolts and
release the clips.
Fastener Locations
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and

make sure each cable is connected securely.
:Bolt,4
>:Clip,2
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-171
Seats
S e c o n d R o w
S e a t A r m r e s t
( c o n t ' d )
4. Lift the armrest (A) up to release the hooks (B), then

remove it.
S e c o n d R o w S e a t A r m r e s t
B e v e r a g e H o l d e r
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Pry up the beverage holder (A) w i t h an appropriate
t r i m tool to release the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 4
5. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of

removal, and i f t h e clips are damaged or
20-172
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
covers.
Seat-back Cover
4. Fold the seat-back forward fully, insert a t r i m pad

remover between the bottom of the back cover (A)
and the seat frame until it squarely engages one of the
clips (B, C). Gently pry on the clip until it detaches
f r o m the seat frame. Repeat for the other clips, then
remove the back cover.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the back cover or the
clip mounting pads.
Left seat-back
Fastener Locations
B O : Clip, 12 C O : Clip, 2

2. Remove the third row seat access knob (A). Peel off
the label (B) and remove the screw, then remove the
third row seat access t r i m (C) by detaching the clips.
Fastener Locations
: S c r e w , 1 D>:Clip,2

Head restraint
Second r o w seat-back recline lever (see page
20-168)
(cont'd)
20-173
Seats
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
Right seat-back
Fastener Locations
BD>:Clip,9
5. Detach the clips and release all of the hooks (A) f r o m

the back of the seat-back, then pull back the seat-back
cover.
Ct>:Clip,2
Left seat-back
Fastener Locations
>:Clip,4
Right seat-back
Fastener Locations
O: Clip, 3
20-174
6. With seat heater: Release the harness clip (A), then

disconnect the seat heater connector (B).
8. Remove the second r o w seat armrest (see page

20-171).
Left seat-back

them.
Right seat-back
(cont'd)
20-175
Seats
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the w a y
around, and release the upholstery rings (A), then
remove the seat-back cover (B).
Seat Cushion Cover

2. Disassembly the second r o w seat (see page 20-166).
3. Release the rear hook strips (A) f r o m under the seat

cushion (B).
11. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of

over the pad before securing the hooks, the hook
strips, and the clips.
seat-back cover (B) and pad w i r e (C) w i t h new ones.
Install t h e m with commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (D).
Replace the wire ties y o u removed with new ones.
With seat heater: Make sure the seat heater
20-176
4. Release the front hook strips (A) f r o m under the seat

cushion (B).
Right seat cushion
(cont'd)
20-177
Seats
Second Row Seat Cover
Second Row Seat Linkage

7. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order of

To prevent wrinkles w h e n installing a seat cushion
over the pad before securing the hooks, the hook
strips, and the clips.

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:

seat-back cover (B) and pad wire (C) with new ones.
Install t h e m with commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (D).

Replace the wire ties you removed with new ones.
With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater

2. Disassemble the second row seat (see page 20-166).
3. Remove the second row seat-back cover (see page

20-173).
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back frame
(A).
Fastener Locations
20-178
:Bolt,4
5. R e m o v e t h e T O R X s c r e w s , t h e n r e m o v e t h e l e f t i n n e r
bracket c o v e r (A).
Left inner bracket cover

Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Right inner bracket cover
6. R e m o v e t h e T O R X s c r e w , t h e n r e m o v e t h e l e f t o u t e r
b r a c k e t c o v e r ( A ) . T h e l e f t o u t e r b r a c k e t c o v e r is
s h o w n ; t h e r i g h t o u t e r b r a c k e t c o v e r is s i m i l a r .
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
7. D e t a c h t h e w i r e t i e ( A ) , t h e n r e l e a s e t h e s l i d e r c a b l e
(B) f r o m t h e s e a t f r a m e .
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
(cont'd)
20-179
Seats
Second Row Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Remove the clip (A) and disconnect the slider cable
(B), then remove the cable.
. Assemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the

reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Make sure each cable is connected securely.
Replace any damaged clips w i t h new ones.
If necessary, adjust the slider cable (A):
- Remove the clip (B)
- Adjust the inner cable adjuster to obtain a
clearance w i t h i n 0.5 m m (0.02 in) at the outer
recline lever fitting (C) and the inner recline lever
fitting (D). Reinstall the clip on the inner cable
adjuster.
Check the seat slide operation: W h e n operating the
third r o w seat access knob, the inner recline
adjuster is unlocked first, the outer recline adjuster
is unlocked next, then the seat-back is tilted forward
and the seat is allowed to slide f o r w a r d .
20-180
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation

*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
3. Remove the front mounting bolts.

Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
NOTE:
covers.
The left third r o w seat is s h o w n ; the right third r o w
seat is similar.
1. Detach the third r o w seat-belt f r o m the detachable
anchor.
2. Remove the front m o u n t i n g bolt covers (A) f r o m both
front anchor brackets.
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m
(4.8 k g f m , 35 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-181
Seats
Third Row Seat
Third Row Seat

4. On the left third row seat: Release the hooks (A), then
remove the seat belt buckle pocket (B), and tuck the
left third row seat belt buckle (C) and the center third
row seat belt detachable anchor (D) under the seat
cushion.

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
covers.
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-181).
2. From both sides of the seat, turn over the seat cushion
cover (A) and release the hook strips (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
5. Lift the seat cushion up.

6. Remove the rear mounting bolts while holding the
seat cushion.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,4
3. Remove the TORX screws, and release the hook (C),

then remove the pivot bolt cover (D).
7. W i t h the help of an assistant, remove the third row

seat through the tailgate opening.
8. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal.
20-182
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement

4. Remove the pivot bolts securing the seat-back (A) and
seat cushion (B) w i t h the TORX T30 b i t then separate
them.
Fastener Locations
:Bort,2
NOTE:
Take care not to bend the seat-back recline cable.
The left third r o w seat is s h o w n ; the right third r o w
seat is similar.
1. Remove the left third r o w seat or right third row seat
(see page 20-181).
Third r o w seat cushion (see page 20-182)
Third r o w seat back cover (see page 20-187)
Third r o w seat recline lever (see page 20-185)
3. Remove the TORX screws f r o m the recline outer
cover (A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Front bracket cover removal

5. If necessary, remove the front bracket cover (A) by
releasing the hooks (B).
6. Install the seat-back in the reverse order of removal,

and push the hooks into place securely.
(cont'd)
20-183
Seats
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement (cont'd)
8. Install t h e latch in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l , a n d
note t h e s e i t e m s :
M a k e s u r e t h e s e a t - b a c k r e c l i n e c a b l e is c o n n e c t e d
securely.
Make sure the seat unlatches properly and latches
securely.
20-184
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement

4. Disconnect the recline cables (A).

*Available t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Put o n gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to kink the seat-back recline cable.
W h e n prying w i t h a flat-tipped screwdriver, w r a p it
1. Remove the left third r o w seat or the right third r o w
seat (see page 20-181).
2. Remove the seat back cover (see page 20-187).
3. While holding the lever (A) open, carefully pry out the
cover (B) w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver to release the tabs
(C), then remove the cover.
5. Remove the screws, then remove the recline lever (A).

Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
6. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure the recline cable is connected securely.
securely.
20-185
Seats
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement
4. Detach the clip (A), then disconnect the seat-back

recline cable (B).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to kink the cable.
1. Remove the third r o w seat-back recline lever (see
page 20-185).
Third r o w seat back cover (see page 20-187)
Third r o w seat recline outer cover (see page 20-183)
3. Release all of the hooks (A) f r o m behind the seat-back
(B).
B
5. Release the recline cables (A) f r o m back of the

seat-back frame holder (B).
6. Install the third r o w seat-back recline cable in the

Make sure the cable is connected securely.
securely.
20-186
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement

4. Pry out the lid (A) and remove the TORX screw
securing the cargo hook (B), then remove it.

Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the interior t r i m .
avoid damage w h e n removing components
When prying w i t h a flat-tipped screwdriver, w r a p it
Seat-back Cover
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-181).
2. Remove these items.
Seat cushion (see page 20-182)
Head restraint
3. Pry out the lids (A, B) and remove the TORX screws
securing the cargo hook (C, D), then remove t h e m .
Fastener Locations
5. Remove the tether anchor cover (A).
: Screw, 2
(cont'd)
20-187
Seats
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Pry out the recline lever cover (A) f r o m the seat back
cover (B).
7. Insert a t r i m pad remover between the b o t t o m of the

back cover (A) and the seat-back frame until it
squarely engages one of the clips (B, C). Gently pry on
the clip until it detaches f r o m the seat-back frame.
Repeat for the other clips, then remove the back
cover.
NOTE: Take care not t o damage the back cover or the
clip mounting pads.
Fastener Locations
B E>: Clips, 3 CI : Clips, 2
20-188
8. Slide the back cover (A) d o w n to release the

remaining clips (B, C) f r o m the keyholes (D) on the
frame.
Fastener Locations
B 0 : Clips, 3
9. Release all of the hooks (A) f r o m behind the seat-back

(B). Unhook the edge of the seat-back cover (C) f r o m
the hooks (D) of the seat-back frame.
A
C O : Clips, 2
(cont'd)
20-189
Seats
10. Pull the seat-back cover (A) back, and release the
hooks (B).
12. Remove the third r o w seat recline lever (see page

20-185).
13. Release the upholstery rings (A) securing the

them.

20-190
15. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
w a y around, then release all of the upholstery rings
(B). Remove the seat-back cover.
Left third row seat

over the pad before securing the hook and
upholstery rings.
ring pliers (D).
Right third row seat
(cont'd)
20-191
Seats
Seat Cushion Cover
1. Remove both front mounting bolts, (see step 2 on
page 20-181)
2. Release the hook strips (A) from under the seat
cushion (B).
3. From both sides of the seat, turn over the seat cushion
cover (A) and release the hook strips (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
4. Remove the TORX screws, and release the hook (C),

then remove the pivot bolt cover (D).
5. Left third row seat: Release all of the hook strips (A)
and upholstery rings (B) from under the seat cushion
(C).
20-192
6. Right third row seat: Detach the retainers (A) f r o m

both sides of the link (B), and release all of the hook
strips (C) f r o m under the seat cushion (D).
8. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all the
w a y around, release all of the upholstery rings (B),
under the right seat cushion cover, then remove the
seat cushion cover.
Left third row seat
A
Right third row seat
7. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) f r o m the seat

cushion frame (B).
(cont'd)
20-193
Seats
9. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order of
To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing all
the upholstery rings.
ring pliers (D).
20-194
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
3. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to

release it f r o m the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C).
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.

Have an assistant help you w h e n removing and
installing the front bumper.
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
2 . Remove the bolts (A, B), the screws (C, D), and the
clips (E) securing the front bumper (F).
Fastener Locations
A^:Bolt,2
B*-:Bort,2
: Screw, 2
E > : Clip, 9
C*-:Screw,2
4. W i t h the help of an assistant, while pulling the wheel

arch portion away f r o m the side spacer (A), pull the
front bumper to release the bumper f r o m the hooks
(B) on the corner upper beam (C).
(0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-195
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
Front Bumper Lower Mesh

Replacement
5. With the help of an assistant, disconnect the fog light

connectors (A) and front corner parking sensors (B)
(for some models), then remove the front bumper (C).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
2. Release the hooks (A) w i t h a t r i m tool (B), then
remove the lower mesh (C).
6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,

Make sure the fog light connectors (A) and the front
corner parking sensors (B) are plugged in properly
(for some models).
Make sure the front b u m p e r engages the hooks (of
both corner upper beams and side spacers) on each
side securely.
3. Install the mesh in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Push the hooks into place securely.
20-196
Front Bumper Fog Light Cover

Replacement
Front Bumper Skid Trim

Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
NOTE:

1. Pry the hooks (A) up w i t h a t r i m t o o l , then remove the

front b u m p e r fog light cover (B) f r o m the front
bumper (C).

2. Remove ail of the screws. Pry all of the hooks (A) up
w i t h a t r i m tool, then remove the front bumper skid
t r i m (B) f r o m the front bumper (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 5
2. For some models: If necessary, release the hooks (D),

then remove the front fog light cover cap (E).
3. Install the bumper fog light cover in the reverse order
of removal.

push the hooks into place securely.
20-197
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
2. Remove the bolts and the clips securing the rear

bumper (A).
Take care not t o scratch the rear bumper and the body.
Have an assistant help y o u w h e n removing and
installing the rear bumper.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
: Clip, 2
1. From the rear wheel arches on both sides, remove the

screws securing the rear bumper (A) and the rear
fender cover (B).
Fastener Locations
: S c r e w , 12
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to

release it f r o m the hooks (B) o n the side spacers (C).
20-198
4 . W i t h the help of an assistant, while pulling the wheel

arch portion away f r o m the side spacers (A), pull the
rear bumper to release the bumper f r o m the hooks (B)
on the side bracket (C).
Rear bumper absorber removal

6. If necessary, remove the rear bumper absorber (A).
5. W i t h the help of an assistant, pull out on the rear

bumper to release the bumper (A) f r o m the hooks (B)
on the upper brackets (C). Disconnect the rear bumper
subharness connector (D) (for some models).
7. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,

Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks (of
both the side brackets and the side spacers) on each
side securely.
For some models: Make sure the rear bumper
subharness connector is plugged in properly.
20-199
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Skid Trim
Replacement
Rear Bumper Air Spoiler

Replacement
NOTE:

Program, 888-424-6857
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
NOTE:
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-198).
2. Remove all of the screws. Pry all of the hooks (A) up
w i t h a t r i m t o o l , then remove the rear bumper skid
t r i m (B) f r o m the rear bumper (C).

2. Remove the bolts and the clips, and pry the hook (A)
up w i t h a t r i m t o o l , then remove the rear bumper air
spoiler (B) f r o m the rear bumper (C). Take care not to
scratch the rear bumper.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
>:Clip,2
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4

push the hooks into place securely.
3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Push the clips and the hook into place securely.
20-200
Rear Bumper Step Replacement

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Detach the hooks w i t h a t r i m t o o l , then remove the
rear bumper step (A).
Fastener Locations
> : Hook, 17
3. Install the b u m p e r step by pushing on the hook

portions until the hooks snap into place.
20-201
Hood
Hood Adjustment
2. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).
3. Adjust the h o o d alignment in this sequence:

Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes in the hood hinges (B).
Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush w i t h the body at the front and side edges.
4. Adjust the hood latch (D) to obtain the proper height at the f o r w a r d edge, and m o v e the hood latch right or left until
the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
20-202
Hood Seal Replacement

6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes
securely.
7. A p p l y touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
1. Detach the clips w i t h a clip remover, then remove the

hood seal (A). Take care not to scratch the h o o d .
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 9
20-203
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment
5. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. W i t h power tailgate: Do the battery terminal
disconnection procedure (see page 22-94), then wait
at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
NOTE: While adjusting the tailgate, use the
emergency lever to release the tailgate latch.
W i t h o u t power tailgate (see page 20-235)
W i t h power tailgate (see page 20-236)
2. Remove the support strut f r o m each side (see page
20-205).
3. Remove the tailgate hinge cover (see page 20-219).
4. Remove the striker cap (A) f r o m the rear t r i m panel
(B).
A
8x1.25 mm
18 N m
(1.8 k g f m ,
13 Ibfft)
' '
6. Adjust the tailgate (B) alignment in the following

sequence:
Adjust the tailgate right and left, using the
elongated holes in the tailgate hinges (C).
Turn the tailgate edge cushions (D), in or out as
necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush w i t h the
body at the side edges.
Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate
opening by m o v i n g the striker (E), and adjust the
striker right or left until it is centered in the tailgate
latch (F).
20-204
Tailgate Support Strut

Replacement
7. Tighten each bolt securely.
8. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
9. Reinstall the support struts securely.
NOTE:
Use eye protection w h e n prying the support strut

clips.
Have an assistant hold the tailgate up while y o u

replace the support struts.
10. A p p l y touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and

around the hinges, and let the paint dry.

11. A p p l y multipurpose grease to the pivot portion of the

tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows.
1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip screwdriver

(A) to pry the support strut clips (B) f r o m each end of
the support strut (C) at the tailgate and body, then
release the support strut f r o m the pivot bolt ( D ) . Do
not remove the clips f r o m the support strut.

13. W i t h power tailgate: Do the battery terminal
reconnection procedure (see page 22-94).
NOTE: Check for any DTCs that may have been set
during repairs, and clear t h e m .
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-205
Tailgate
Tailgate Support Strut
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
2. Set the clips (A) on the original position, then reattach

the support strut (B) on the pivot bolt (C) by pushing
the support strut onto the pivot.
1. W i t h power tailgate: Remove the left tailgate side t r i m

(see page 20-100).
2. W i t h power tailgate: Remove the pivot bracket
m o u n t i n g bolts, then lay the power tailgate rod (A)
against the D-pillar t r i m (B).
NOTE: Be careful not t o scratch the body or the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
20-206
3. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling it out.
^ Front
4. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the tailgate

weatherstrip. Align the painted mark w i t h the
alignment notch in the center of the tailgate opening,
and install the tailgate weatherstrip all the w a y
around. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
5. W i t h power tailgate; Fasten the pivot bracket (A) on
the tailgate.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
6. W i t h power tailgate: Reinstall the left tailgate side t r i m

(see page 20-100).
Fuel Fill Door

Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the rear inner fender on the left side, (see
page 20-227)
2. Remove the fuel filler cap (A) by turning it
counterclockwise, and remove the screw.
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
3. From inside the wheel house, remove the bolts

securing the fuel filler pipe (A).
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
20-208
4. From inside the wheelhouse, carefully push up the

adapter lip (A) around the fuel filler pipe (B), and
release the hooks (C).
Fuel Fill Door Replacement

6. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (A) f r o m the body
w h i l e turning the fuel fill door/adapter 90clockwise.

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body.
1. While prying the hook (A) up w i t h a t r i m t o o l , slide the
fuel fill door (B) back to release four wedges (C) f r o m
the hooks (D) of the fuel fill door hinge (E), then
remove the fuel fill door.
7. Install the fuel fill door/adapter in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure the adapter lip (A) is fully
seated on the fuel fill pipe (B).
2. Install the door in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Make sure the hooks are installed securely.
Make sure there is no gap between the fuel fill d o o r
and hinge.
20-209
Exterior Trim
Front Bulkhead Cover Replacement
Front Grille Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not t o scratch the front bumper and the

body.
When prying w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h

1. Remove the clips, then remove the air intake duct (A).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and the
body.
Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set t o
2. Remove the bolts and the clips, then remove the front
grille (A).
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
f : Clip, 5
2. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the front

bulkhead cover (C).
Fastener Locations
At>:Clip,2
BO:Clip,5
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

note these items:
20-210
Cowl Cover Replacement

5. Pull the cowl cover (A) forward to release the hooks

(B, C) f r o m the windshield (D) and body.

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the cowl cover and body.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-324).
2. Remove the clips (A) w i t h a t r i m tool f r o m the cowl
cover (B).
Fastener Locations
A t> : Clip, 3
DD> : Hook, 12
6. Remove the cowl cover.

note these items:
3. If necessary, remove the hood rear seal (C) f r o m all of

the hooks (D).
4. If necessary, release the hooks (A) and pins (B), then
remove the hood hinge cover extension (C) f r o m both
sides of the cowl cover (D).
20-211
Exterior Trim
Windshield Side Trim Replacement
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the windshield.
Take care not to bend the side windshield t r i m .
1. Remove the side windshield t r i m (A).
-1. Carefully insert a t r i m tool under the windshield
side t r i m next to the clip (B), then pry the t r i m up to
release the clip.
-2. While pulling the retainer section of the t r i m up w i t h
a t r i m t o o l , push each of the four small hooks (C)
w i t h a small flat-tip screwdriver to release the t r i m
f r o m the retainer (D) on the A-pillar. Do not pry on
the windshield t r i m anywhere except the retainer
section.
-3. Gradually w o r k y o u r w a y up to release the t r i m
f r o m each of the retainers.
n
7 mm (0.28 in)
j 1 mm
20-212
(0.04 in)

note these items:
Make sure the t r i m is installed securely.
Replace any damaged retainer.
Roof Rail Replacement

Retainer Replacement

1. Gradually separate the adhesive tape (A) under the

retainers (B) w h i l e heating t h e m w i t h a heat gun to
about 212248F (100120C).

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Do not overheat the painted surface around the
retainers.
To keep the exterior plastic parts near the A-pillar
f r o m being overheated by a heat g u n , w r a p t h e m
w i t h an a l u m i n u m foil.
For Some Models

NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the covers, the roof rail, and
the body.
1. Use the access hole (A) to pry up on the front cover
(B).Pry up until y o u detach the clips, and release the
rib (D) f r o m the front bracket (C),then remove the front
cover.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
(White)
2. Using isopropyl alcohol on a shop t o w e l , clean the

body bonding surface. After cleaning, keep o i l ,
grease, and water f r o m getting on the surface.
3. Install the retainers (A).
- 1 . Peel the adhesive backing away f r o m the retainers.
-2. Line up the retainers w i t h the alignment marks (B)
on the body, and attach t h e m w i t h adhesive tape
(C).
-3. A p p l y epoxy two-part adhesive (D) around the edge
of the retainers as s h o w n .
(cont'd)
20-213
Exterior Trim
Roof Rail Replacement (cont'd)
2. Use the access hole (A) to pry up on the rear cover (B).
Pry up until y o u detach the clips, and release the rib
(D) f r o m the rear bracket (C),then remove the rear
cover.
Gasket removal
4. If necessary, release the tabs (A) and the pins (B), then
remove the front gasket (C) and the rear gasket (D).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
(White)
Stay removal
3. Remove the nuts w i t h a TORX T30 bit f r o m the front

bracket (A) and the rear bracket (B), then remove the
roof rail (C).
5. If necessary, remove the screws w i t h a TORX T30 bit,

then separate the bar (A) f r o m the front stay (B) and
the rear stay (C).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
:TORX Nut, 4
6. Install the roof rail in the reverse order of removal,

Make sure the rail covers are securely in place by
pulling up on t h e m .
20-214
Roof Molding Replacement

With roof rail

Âvailable t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Locations
B O : Clip, 1
C O : Clip, 1
NOTE:
The steel core in the roof molding cannot be restored
to its original shape once it is bent. Replace the roof
m o l d i n g if the steel core is bent.
1. If equipped, remove the roof rail (see page 20-213).
2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver w r a p p e d w i t h protective
tape and a shop t o w e l on the body, pry up the roof
m o l d i n g (A) to release it f r o m the clips (B, C).
Without roof rail
Fastener Locations
B O : Clip, 3
3. Remove the clips (B, C) f r o m the body, then install it

on the roof m o l d i n g .
C O : Clip, 1
4. Install the roof molding(s) in the reverse order of

Make sure the roof moldings (A) are installed on the
clips (B) securely.
20-215
Exterior Trim
Door Molding Replacement
Program, 888-424-6857
3. From inside the door, detach the clips, then remove

the door molding (A).
Front door
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
> : Clip, 6
Put o n gloves to protect your hands.

Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set t o
Door panel, front door (see page 20-9), rear door
(see page 20-23)
Plastic cover, front door (see step 2 on page 20-18),
rear door (see step 2 on page 20-31)
2. Carefully cut the double-sided adhesive tape (A) along
the edge of the door moldings (B) w i t h a utility knife.
Front door
Rear door
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 4

5. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive tape
f r o m the m o l d i n g and door, then clean the m o l d i n g
and door surfaces w i t h a sponge dampened w i t h
isopropyl alcohol.
20-216
6. Attach double-sided adhesive tape (SUMITOMO 3 M

5666 or equivalent) to the indicated locations (A, B) on
the door m o l d i n g . Fold up the ends of the non-stick
adhesive backing so that it can be pulled up and
removed later.
7. Hold the m o l d i n g (A) up, and fit all the clips (B) into
the holes in the door, then push on the molding until
the clips snap into place.
Front door
Adhesive tape (A): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in)

Width 5 mm(0.2 in)
Adhesive tape (B): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Width 5 mm(0.2 in)
Front door
8. Carefully pull the adhesive backing (C) away, and

push the molding into place securely.
9. Reinstall the plastic cover and door panel.
20-217
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Panel Replacement
Available t h r o u g h the Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to avoid damage w h e n removing components.
1. Open the front door and rear door.
2. Remove the side sill panel (A).
- 1 . Remove the screws (B), and pull the front inner fender (C) back as necessary.
-2. Remove the screw (D) fastening the rear fender cover (E).
-3. Use the t r i m tool to pry out the front clip (F), then release the front of the side sill panel f r o m the body. Remove the
g r o m m e t (G) f r o m the body, then insert the g r o m m e t into the front clip on the side sill panel.
-4. While pulling the front portion of the side sill panel away f r o m the body, slide the panel f o r w a r d , and remove it. The
side clips (H) will stay in the body.
-5. Remove the side clips by turning t h e m 45 .
-6. Remove the front clip f r o m the side sill panel, then replace it w i t h a new one.
Fastener Locations
B,D^:Screw,6
Ft>:Clip,1
H O : C l i p , 13
3. I f t h e clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.

4. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
5. Hold the panel up, and fit the front clip and all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push o n the panel until the
side clips snap into place.
20-218
Tailgate Hinge Cover Replacement
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not t o scratch the tailgate and body.

Program, 888-424-6857
1. Remove the tailgate upper t r i m (see page 20-100).

2. Remove the bolts and the nuts securing the tailgate
spoiler t r i m .
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the tailgate hinge cover and
body.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,4
#:Nut,2

1. If equipped, remove the roof rail (see page 20-213).
2. Release the inside hook (A) f r o m the tailgate hinge (B)
by pulling the rear of the tailgate hinge cover (C) up,
then remove the tailgate hinge cover.
5 x 0 . 8 mm
4 Nm
(0.4 k g f m , 3 Ibfft)
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Turn the collar (A) 90clockwise, and disconnect the

rear w i n d o w washer tube (B).
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
20-219
Exterior Trim
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
(cont'd)
Rear License Trim Replacement
4. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate

spoiler t r i m (A) to detach the clips. Remove the high
m o u n t brake light connector g r o m m e t (B) f r o m the
tailgate, and disconnect the high mount brake light
connector (C), then remove the tailgate spoiler t r i m .
Take care not to scratch the tailgate and body.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 5

Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Remove the tailgate t r i m panel (see page 20-100).
2. From inside the tailgate, remove the nuts securing the
rear license t r i m , and disconnect the back-up light
connector (A), and rearview camera connector (B) (for
some models).
Fastener Locations
:Nut,2
5. Remove the grommets (D) f r o m the tailgate, then

insert the grommets into the clips on the tailgate
spoiler t r i m .
6. Install the spoiler t r i m in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and
the washer tube is connected properly.
20-220
(0.4 k g f m , 3 Ibfft)
Rear Door Protection Tape

Replacement
3. Gently close the tailgate, and pull the rear license t r i m
(A) out to detach the clip (B, C), then remove the t r i m .
Fastener Locations
1. Slowly peel up the old rear door protection tape.

2. Clean the door bonding surface w i t h a sponge
oil, grease, and water f r o m getting on the surface.
3. Peel the adhesive backing f r o m the rear door
protection tape.
4. Align the rear door protection tape (A) w i t h the edge
of the door (B), then press the tape into place.
4. Remove the g r o m m e t s (D) f r o m the tailgate, then

insert the g r o m m e t s into the clips on the rear license
trim.
note these items:
Make sure the back-up light connector and the
rearview camera harness connector (for some
models) are plugged in properly.
5. Remove the application backing (C).

20-221
Exterior Trim
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems/stickers, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front " H " e m b l e m , remove the front grille (see page 20-210). Then remove the retaining screws, and
remove the e m b l e m . Install the new e m b l e m in reverse order of removal.
2. To remove the rear " H " e m b l e m , remove the rear license t r i m (see page 20-220). Then remove the retaining screws,
and remove the e m b l e m and the emblem base. Install the new e m b l e m in the reverse order of removal.
3. A p p l y the emblems/sticker where s h o w n . Clean the body surface w i t h a shop towel dampened w i t h isopropyl alcohol
prior to applying the new emblems.
SCREWS
20-222
REAR " H " E M B L E M
REAR LICENSE TRIM
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
When prying w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B) securing the front inner fender and the side sill panel (C).
-2. From under the front b u m p e r (D), remove the bolt (E) and the clips (F) securing the front b u m p e r and the front inner
fender.
-3. From the wheel arch, remove the screw (G, H) securing the front inner fender on the body.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the screw (I) securing the front bumper.
-5. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (J) securing the front splash shield (K) and front inner fender, and remove the
clips (L) securing the front inner fender on the body.
-6. Pull out the front inner fender.
Fastener Locations
B, G , I
: Screw, 6
H^:Screw,1
E^:Bolt,1
Ft>:Clip,2
J,L[
:Clip,8
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
20-224
Splash Shield Replacement

NOTE:
W h e n prying w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h protective tape to prevent damage.
-1. Remove the clips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and the splash shield.
-2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E) that secure the splash shield and the front bumper skid t r i m .
-3. From under the body, remove the clips (F, G) that secure the splash shield on the front suspension subframe (H).
-4. Pull the splash shield out.
Fastener Locations
B, E > : Clip, 7
F > : Clip, 2
G O : Clip, 2
2. If necessary, release the lock tabs (I), then remove the splash shield cover (J).
3. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
20-225
Fenderwell
Front Strake Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the bolts, then remove the front strake (A)
f r o m the front inner fender (B).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 3
Front Fender Fairing Replacement

NOTE:
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page
20-224).
2. Pull out, and remove the front fender fairing (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.
20-226
3. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of

removal.
Left Front Splash Guard

Reinforcement Replacement
Rear Inner Fender Replacement

NOTE:
Left front inner fender, as needed (see page 20-224)
Left side sill panel (see page 20-218)
Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the left front splash

guard reinforcement (A). Take care not to scratch the
body.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,4

1. Remove the rear inner fender (A).
- 1 . Remove the screws (B) that secure the rear inner
fender and the side sill panel (C) f r o m the front of
the rear wheel arch.
-2. Remove the screws (D) that secure the rear bumper
(E) and the rear inner fender f r o m the rear of the
rear wheel arch.
-3. Remove the bolts (F) and the clip (G) (left side) f r o m
the rear wheel arch.
-4. Pull out the rear inner fender.
Left
Fastener Locations
B,D*-:Screw,7
F^:Bolt,9
GE>:Clip,1
{3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
3. Install the reinforcement in the reverse order of

removal.
(cont'd)
20-227
Fenderwell
Rear Inner Fender Replacement
(cont'd)
Rear Air Outlet Replacement

Right
Fastener Locations
B,D^:Screw,7
F^:Bolt,9
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet
(B). Take care not to scratch the body.
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions

until the hooks snap into place.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
2. Install the rear inner fender in the reverse order of

20-228
Openers
TAILGATE HANDLE
HOOD LATCH
HOOD OPENER C A B L E
20-229
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and its related parts.
Front bulkhead cover (see page 20-210)
Front inner fender, left side as needed (see page 20-224)
Kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-79)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) f r o m the hood latch (B) (see page 20-232).
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the hood release handle (C) (see page 20-233), and disconnect the hood opener cable.
4. Detach the clips, and remove the g r o m m e t (D) w i t h a clip remover f r o m the body, then remove the hood opener cable
f r o m the vehicle. Take care not t o kink the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
20-230
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement

4. While pinching the tabs (A) f r o m inside the vehicle,

remove the g r o m m e t (B) f r o m the body.
A
NOTE:
Kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-79)
Front door sill t r i m , driver's side (see step 1 on page
20-79)
B-pillar lower t r i m , driver's side (see page 20-82)
Second row seat (driver's side) (see page 20-163)
Rear door sill t r i m (see page 20-80)
Third r o w seat (driver's side) (see page 20-181)
Rear side t r i m panel, left side (see page 20-96)
Cargo floor box (see page 20-95)
5. Release the tab (A), then remove the g r o m m e t (B)

f r o m the fuel fill door latch (C).
Fuel fill door opener (see page 20-234)

2. Release the opener cable (A) f r o m the clips (B, C, D, E).
Remove the cushion tape (F).
Fastener Locations
B t> : Clip, 1
C > : Clip, 1
D D> : Clip, 2
E D> : Clip, 1
F D> : Cushion tape, 1
6. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable f r o m the

vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
3. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (see page 20-208).
(cont'd)
20-231
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable
Hood Latch Replacement
7. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of

Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) w i t h the

clips (C, D, E, F) and cushion tape (G) as s h o w n .
2. For some models: Disconnect the hood switch

connector (A), then remove the connector clip f r o m
the body.
Replace any damaged clips, and replace the

cushion tape.
A
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)

f r o m the body.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,3
4. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) f r o m the hood

latch. Take care not to kink the cable.
20-232
Hood Release Handle Replacement

note these items:
Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch as
indicated by the arrows.
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and the hood switch connector (for some
models) is plugged in properly.
Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you
close the hood.
Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 20-202).
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
1. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-79).

2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release
handle (A).
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood

release handle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly.
Make sure the hood opens properly.
20-233
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
1. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-79).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the fuel fill door
opener (A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
Tailgate Handle Replacement

NOTE:
1. Remove the tailgate lower t r i m panel (see page
20-100).
2. Disconnect the tailgate outer handle switch connector
(A), then remove the nuts securing the tailgate
handle.
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 2
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (B) f r o m the

fuel fill door opener. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the fuel fill door opener in the reverse order of
Make sure the fuel fill door opener cable is
connected properly.
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly.
20-234
6 x 1.0mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
T a i l g a t e L a t c h
3 . P u l l o u t t h e t a i l g a t e h a n d l e (A) t o d e t a c h t h e c l i p s , t h e n
remove the tailgate handle f r o m the tailgate.
Fastener Locations
Without Power Tailgate

NOTE:
Put o n g l o v e s t o p r o t e c t y o u r hands.
If t h e t a i l g a t e l a t c h c a n ' t b e u n l o c k e d b y u s i n g t h e
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate
switches, or by u n l o c k i n g the driver's d o o r lock,
r e m o v e t h e m a i n t e n a n c e l i d (A) f r o m t h e t a i l g a t e
l o w e r t r i m p a n e l , t h e n t u r n t h e e m e r g e n c y l e v e r (B)
c l o c k w i s e as s h o w n .
4. R e m o v e t h e g r o m m e t s (B) f r o m t h e t r u n k l i d , t h e n
insert t h e g r o m m e t s into the clips o n the tailgate
handle.
5. I n s t a l l t h e t a i l g a t e h a n d l e i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r o f
If t h e c l i p s a r e d a m a g e d o r s t r e s s - w h i t e n e d , r e p l a c e
t h e m w i t h n e w ones.
M a k e s u r e t h e t a i l g a t e h a n d l e s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r is
p l u g g e d in p r o p e r l y .
Push t h e clips into place securely.
(cont'd)
20-235
Openers
Tailgate Latch Replacement (cont'd)
20-100).
2. Disconnect the actuator connector (A), and remove
the bolts.
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
3. Pull the tailgate latch (A) out, disconnect the latch

switch connector (B), then remove the latch.

note these items:
Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely. Adjust the tailgate (see page 20-204), if
necessary.
20-236
With Power Tailgate

NOTE:
If the tailgate latch can't be unlocked by using the
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate
switches, remove the maintenance lid (A) f r o m the
tailgate lower t r i m panel, then turn the emergency
lever (B) clockwise as s h o w n .
Hatch Glass Latch Replacement

page 22-94), then w a i t at least 3 minutes before
beginning work.
NOTE: If y o u remove the tailgate latch while the
negative battery cable is still connected, the power
tailgate control unit goes into the fail-safe mode.
20-100).
3. Disconnect the tailgate latch connector (A) and the
actuator connector (B).
NOTE:
Tailgate lower t r i m panel (see page 20-100)
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor (see page 22-325)
2. Disconnect the hatch glass latch connector (A), and
detach the connector clip (B) f r o m the tailgate.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
C
: Bolt, 2
: Bolt, 1
@ = 3
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
3. Remove the bolts, then pull the hatch glass latch (C)
out.
4. Remove the bolts (C, D), and pull the tailgate latch (E)
out, then remove it.
note these items:
(see page 22-94).
Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely. Adjust the tailgate (see page 20-204), if
necessary.
I f t h e tailgate is in fail-safe mode, reset the power
tailgate control unit (see page 22-544).
(cont'd)
20-237
Openers
Hatch Glass Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
Hatch Glass Actuator Replacement
4. Disconnect the hatch glass rod (A) f r o m the rod

fastener (B) of the hatch glass latch (C), then remove
the hatch glass latch. Take care not to bend the rod.
NOTE:
NOTE: If the rod fastener is damaged or

stress-whitened, replace it w i t h a new one.

20-100).
2. Disconnect the hatch glass rod (A) f r o m the rod

fastener (B). Disconnect the actuator connector (C)
and connector clip (D) f r o m the tailgate.
NOTE: If the rod fastener is damaged or
stress-whitened, replace it w i t h a new one.

note these items:
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly,
and the rod is attached properly.
Make sure the hatch glass opens properly and locks
securely.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hatch glass
actuator (A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
7.2 Ibfft)
4. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and the hatch glass open rod is connected
securely.
20-238
5. Reconnect the hatch glass rod (A) in the following

sequence.
-1. M o v e the lever (B) of the latch (C) into the " l o c k "
position.
-2. M o v e the lever (D) on the actuator into the " s e t "
position as s h o w n by the arrow.
-3. While holding the lever B in the " l o c k " position,
take up the slack in the rod by pulling it t o w a r d the
actuator as s h o w n .
- 4 . Tighten the rod fastener (E) on the rod.
6. Make sure the hatch glass opens properly and locks

securely.
Frame
Trailer Hitch Replacement
NOTE:
After removing the trailer hitch mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
2. Detach the clip (A), then remove the connector (B).
3. Remove the bolts (C), then remove the trailer hitch (D).
4. Install the trailer hitch in the reverse order of removal.
20-240
Spare Tire Hoist Replacement
Spare Tire Spacer Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire hoist

(A). Take care not to bend the cable (B).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire spacer

(A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 5
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,2
3. Install the hoist in the reverse order of removal.

3. Install the spacer in the reverse order of removal.
20-241
Frame
Spare Tire Support Bracket Replacement
Spare tire hoist (see page 20-241)
Spare tire spacer (see page 20-241)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire support
bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
:Bolt,5
3. Install the spare tire support bracket in the reverse

order of removal.
20-242
Subframe Replacement
S u b f r a m e A l i g n m e n t Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
Front Subframe Torque

After r e m o v i n g the subframe m o u n t i n g bolts and the f r o n t subframe stiffener m o u n t i n g bolts, be sure to replace t h e m
w i t h new ones.
FRONT S U S P E N S I O N
SUBFRAME
10 x 1.25 m m
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
STEERING G E A R B O X
STIFFENER
UPPER INSULATOR
^ Front
LOWER
INSULATOR
S U B F R A M E REAR
BRACKET
SUBFRAME
FRONT B R A C K E T
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
12x1.25mm
117 N m
(11.9 k g f m ,
86.1 Ibfft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 m m
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
S U B F R A M E STIFFENER
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
20-243
Frame
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Front Subframe Alignment
NOTE:
Loosely install new front subframe mounting bolts, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque in the sequence
shown.
After m o u n t i n g the subframe and brackets loosely, align all of the positioning holes in the subframe, the subframe
front bracket, and the body using a alignment pin as a guide, then tighten the bolts.
After reinstalling all removed parts, check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
POSITIONING HOLE
(Body side)
SUBFRAME
POSITIONING HOLE
(Subframe side)
SUBFRAME
REAR B R A C K E T
POSITIONING HOLE
(Bracket side)
ALIGNMENT PIN
POSITIONING HOLE
To body
SUBFRAME
To body
POSITIONING HOLE
SUBFRAME
FRONT BRACKET
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
REAR BRACKET
20-244
Rear Subframe Torque

NOTE:
W h e n installing, align both positioning holes in the subframe w i t h the positioning holes in the body using a
screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
After removing the subframe m o u n t i n g bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
Positioning hole alignment
Replace.
20-245
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in)
0: Inner diameter
20-246
For bumper beam mounting hole 011 (0.43)
b1
For front subframe mounting hole 015 (0.59) front
b2
For front subframe mounting hole 015 (0.59) rear
For engine side mounting hole 013 (0.51)
Front damper center hole 080 (3.15)
Side frame gusset locating hole 028 (1.1)
For propeller shaft mounting hole 012 (0.47)
Rear frame locating hole 028 (1.10)
gl
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) left side front
k1
For rear subframe mounting hole 0
g2
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) right side front
k2
g3
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) right side rear
For rear damper mounting stud bol
g4
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) left side rear
For rear damper mounting hole 012
hi
For trailing arm mounting hole 017 (0.67) outside
Lower arm stopper bracket locating
h2
For trailing arm mounting hole 017 (0.67) center side
Floor frame extension locating hole 025 (0.98)
For spare tire hoist mounting hole (
k/1
g3
(cont'd)
20-247
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in)
For bumper beam mounting hole 011 (0.43)
0: Inner diameter
b1
For front subframe mounting hole 015 (0.59) front
b2
For front subframe mounting hole 015 (0.59) rear
For engine side mounting hole 013 (0.51)
Front damper center hole 080 (3.15)
Side frame gusset locating hole 028 (1.1)

3-011.5 (0.45)
[SECTION:AA]
b1
M14x1.5
BASE LINE
20-248
For propeller shaft mounting hole 012 (0.47)
g1
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) left side front
k1
g2
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) right side front
k2
g3
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) right side rear
For rear damper mounting stud bol
g4
For fuel tank mounting hole 015 (0.59) left side rear
For rear damper mounting hole 012
hi
For trailing arm mounting hole 017 (0.67) outside
Lower arm stopper bracket locating
h2
For trailing arm mounting hole 017 (0.67) center side
Floor frame extension locating hole 025 (0.98)
For spare tire hoist mounting hole i
20-249
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)

Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and
Air Conditioning)
Special T o o l s
A/C C o n d e n s e r R e p l a c e m e n t
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
Refrigerant Recovery
System Evacuation
System Charging
R e f r i g e r a n t Leak Test
A/C S y s t e m N o i s e Check
A/C S y s t e m Test
21-2
Heating/Air Conditioning
21-3
A/C Service T i p s a n d P r e c a u t i o n s
21-6
A / C Refrigerant Oil R e p l a c e m e n t
21-6
Front A/C Line R e p l a c e m e n t
21-7
A/C S y s t e m I n s p e c t i o n
21-8
General T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n 2 1 - 9
21-13
21-14
System Description
21-15
21-22
21-26
Rear M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-62
HVAC C o n t r o l P o w e r , G r o u n d , a n d
C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-63
Radiator a n d A/C C o n d e n s e r Fan L o w
S p e e d Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
21-65
A/C C o n d e n s e r Fan H i g h S p e e d Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-69
A / C C o m p r e s s o r C l u t c h Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-71
Audio-HVAC Display C o m m u n i c a t i o n
Line Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
21-73
Outside Air Temperature Sensor T e s t . . 21-74
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
21-75
Evaporator Temperature Sensor T e s t . . 21-75
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Replacement
21-76
Front P o w e r T r a n s i s t o r Test
21-76
Front A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r Test
21-77
Front A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
21-78
Front M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r Test
21-79
Front M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
21-79
Recirculation Control M o t o r Test
21-80
Recirculation C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
21-80
HVAC C o n t r o l U n i t
21-81
Dust a n d Pollen Filter R e p l a c e m e n t 21-81
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
21-82
Blower Unit Component Replacement. 21-83
Front E x p a n s i o n V a l v e R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 2 1 - 8 4
Front E v a p o r a t o r Core R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 2 1 - 8 4
* Heater Unit/Core R e p l a c e m e n t
21-86
A/C Compressor Replacement
21-88
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check
21-90
A/C C o m p r e s s o r C l u t c h O v e r h a u l
21-91
A/C C o m p r e s s o r Relief V a l v e
Replacement
21-92
21-93
21-94
21-95
21-95
21-96
21-97
21-98
21-100
Climate Control
General Troubleshooting I n f o r m a t i o n .
System Description
Rear M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
Climate Control Unit Power, G r o u n d ,
and C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
N a v i g a t i o n C o m m u n i c a t i o n Line Circuit
Troubleshooting
A u d i o C o m m u n i c a t i o n Line Circuit
Troubleshooting
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor
Test
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement
S u n l i g h t S e n s o r Test
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
Passenger's A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r
Test
Passenger's A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
Climate Control Unit
21-105
21-108
21-115
21-117
21-118
21-130
21-134
21-186
21-187
21-189
21-190
21-192
21-193
21-194
21-194
21-195
21-196
21-196
Rear Air Conditioning
*
*
*
*
*
System Description
Rear A/C Line R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear Heater Line R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear E v a p o r a t o r T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Test
Rear E v a p o r a t o r T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Replacement
Rear P o w e r T r a n s i s t o r Test
Rear A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r Test
Rear A i r M i x C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
Rear M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r Test
Rear M o d e C o n t r o l M o t o r
Replacement
Rear C o n t r o l Panel
21-197
21-198
21-199
21-200
21-201
21-201
21-202
21-203
21-204
21-204
21-205
21-205
*
*
*
*
Rear B l o w e r M o t o r R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear Heater Core R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear HVAC U n i t R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n . .
Rear HVAC U n i t C o m p o n e n t
Replacement
21-206
21-207
21-208
21-211
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
07SAZ-001000A
Description
Backprobe Set
21-2
Qty
2
DB
FRONT EXPANSION V A L V E
(Located in the front evaporator core)
FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE

(Located in the heater unit)
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
A / C CONDENSER
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
A / C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-90
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-91
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-92
(cont'd)
21-3
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test page 22-96
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-96
A/C DIODE B
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-96
A/C DIODE A
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-96
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE/RELAY BOX
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-74
A/C CONDENSER FAN
RADIATOR FAN
21-4
FRONT EVAPORATOR C O R E
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT

FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-79
BLOWER UNIT
Component Replacement, page 21-83
D U S T AND
POLLEN FILTER
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-80
FRONT AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-77
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE S E N S O R
Test, page 21-75
HVAC CONTROL UNIT

FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-76
21-5
A / C Service Tips and Precautions
A WARNING
Compressed air mixed w i t h the R-134a forms a
combustible vapor.
The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury.
Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a
service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems.
^CAUTION
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment.
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil,
w h i c h are not compatible w i t h CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral oil
in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 servicing
equipment; damage to the air conditioning system or
y o u r servicing equipment will result.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove R-134a f r o m the air conditioning system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the w o r k
area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
Additional health and safety information may be
obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Always disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery
whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until just
before you reconnect each line.
A / C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8
P/N 38897-PR7-A01 A H : 120 mL (4 fl-oz)
A d d the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
listed if you replace any of the following parts.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it w i t h other
refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the
container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately.
A/C condenser
(including Dryer
Desiccant)
Front Evaporator
Rear Evaporator
Line or hose
Receiver/Dryer
Desiccant
Leakage repair
A/C compressor
50
40
30
10
mL
mL
mL
mL
(1 2/3 fl-oz)
(1 1/3 fl-oz)
(1 fl-oz)
(1/3 fl-oz)
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
For A/C compressor replacement,
subtract the v o l u m e of oil drained
f r o m the removed A/C compressor
f r o m 125 mL (4 2/9 fl-oz), and drain
the calculated v o l u m e of oil f r o m
the new A/C compressor: 125 mL
(4 2/9 fl-oz) V o l u m e of removed
A/Ccompressor = Volume to drain
f r o m new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Even if no oil is drained
f r o m the removed A/C
compressor, don't drain more
than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) f r o m the
new A/C compressor.
REMOVED
A / C COMPRESSOR
NEW
A / C COMPRESSOR
Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops

of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
W h e n tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
W h e n discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6
A: 125 m L (4 2/9 fl-oz)
m
Front A / C Line Replacement
FRONT SUCTION LINE
A / C CONDENSER
Discharge hose to the A / C compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Discharge hose to the A / C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Front receiver line to the A / C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
A / C pressure sensor to the front receiver line (11 x 1.0 mm): 10.8 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 Ibfft)
Front receiver line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Front suction line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Front suction line to the suction hose ( 6 x 1 . 0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Suction hose to the A / C compressor ( 6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
A / C compressor to the A / C compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm): 22 N-m (2.2 k g f m , 16.2 Ibfft)
A / C compressor to the engine block (10 x 1.25 mm): 45 N-m (4.6 k g f m , 33.2 Ibfft)
21-7
A / C System Inspection
Before troubleshooting any problem w i t h the air
conditioning system, do the f o l l o w i n g :
6. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system o n ,

and allow it to normalize for a f e w minutes.
1. W i t h the ignition switch in the LOCK (0), inspect the

A/C components, pressure lines and hoses for stains
that may indicate a refrigerant or a compressor oil
leak.
7. Check that the A/C operates at each position of the

blower fan switch (except OFF).
8. Check that the compressor clutch (A) is engaged. The
pressure plate should be rotating at the same speed
as the pulley.
2. Check the condenser (A) for material clogging the fins

or for damage to the fins:
Carefully clean any material f r o m the condenser
fins w i t h water and detergent.
Be sure to dry the condenser completely.
9. Check that the A/C condenser fan (B) and radiator fan
(C) operate w h e n the compressor clutch is engaged.
10. Check that the engine idle speed is correctly
maintained w h e n the A/C is switched o n and off w h e n
the compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged.
3. Inspect the drive belt (see page 4-30).

4. Make sure no material is blocking the airflow to the
condenser.
5. Check the dust and pollen filter, and replace it if it is
clogged (see page 21 -81).
21-8

How to Check for DTCs with the HDS
NOTE:
There are three methods used to check for DTCs. The recommended method is to use the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS) w i t h the appropriate software, plugged into the data link connector (DLC), then go to B-CAN system diagnosis
test m o d e A (see page 22-137).
The second method is to run the self-diagnostic function built into the HVAC control unit.
The third method is to use the B-CAN system diagnostic test mode 1 and mode 2 w i t h o u t the HDS (see page 22-141).
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the MICU. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to troubleshooting B-CAN system diagnosis
test mode A (see page 22-137). If no DTCs are indicated, refer to s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
21-9
How to Use the HDS to Check for DTCs
NOTE: This method is only available if the HDS can communication w i t h the MICU. If there is a communication problem
w i t h the HDS, go to B-CAN system diagnostic test mode A (see page 22-137).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the MICU. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit, (see page
11-226)
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u .
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL m e n u .
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION m e n u .
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
21-10
How to Use the HVAC Control Unit Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS
The HVAC control unit has a self-diagnostic function for heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system. To run the
self-diagnostic function, do the f o l l o w i n g :
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then ON (II).
2. Set the FAN speed to OFF w i t h FAN ON/OFF button, the TEMPERATURE CONTROL dial on Max Cool, and select the
VENT mode.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then to ON (II).
4. Press and hold the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button, then within 10 seconds press and release the REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/MIRROR DEFOGGER button five times. Release the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button; the recirculation
indicator blinks t w o times, then the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
The self-diagnostic test could take up to t w o minutes to run.
The blower motor should run at various speeds regardless of what the panel is displaying.
If there is any problem in the system after the self-diagnostic function is finished, the recirculation indicator blinks
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 1 through 9. In the case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator blinks in
order w i t h the lowest number DTC repeatedly.
If no DTCs are f o u n d , the indicator does not blink.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON
T E M P E R A T U R E CONTROL DIAL
Example of DTC Indication Pattern (DTC 3)
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
Recirculation
indicator
comes on
Recirculation
indicator
goes off
3.0 sec
Self-diagnostic begin
Self-diagnostic finished
(cont'd)
21-11
Example of DTC Indication Pattern (DTC 2 and 4)
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
Recirculation
indicator
comes on
Recirculation
indicator
goes off
1.5 sec
<
Self-diagnostic
begin
DTC (Recirculation
Indicator Blinks)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Self-diagnostic
finished
Detection Item
A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-46)

A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-29)
A n open in the front air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-37)
A short in the front air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-38)
A problem in the front air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-41)
A n open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see page 21-43)
A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or motor circuit (see page 21-45)
A n open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35)
A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-36)
A n open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-33)
A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-34)
A n open in the A/C pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-56)
A short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-57)
A n open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-49)
A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-50)
A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-53)
A n open or short in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-27)
A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or m o t o r circuit (see page 21-60)
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor signal error. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI
system and go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. If no DTCs are f o u n d , replace the
HVAC control unit (see page 21-81)
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), t o cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing the repair work, run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
Clear the DTCs

W h e n the problem is repaired, DTCs w i l l automatically clear.
Max Cool Position Function

W h e n the M A X A/C button is pressed, the HVAC control unit will automatically select the recirculation m o d e and turn
the A/C o n .
21-12
HS
Checking the DTCs with the HDS
DTC
U1280
U0155
B1215
B1223
B1227
B1228
B1231
B1232
B1233
B1234
B1235
B1239
B1240
B1241
B1244
B1245
B1246
B2965
B2979
Detection Item or Symptom

Communication bus line error
(BUS-OFF)
HVAC control unit lost communication
w i t h gauge control module
A n open or short in the recirculation
control m o t o r circuit
A problem in the rear blower motor
circuit
A n open in the outside air temperature
sensor circuit
A short in the outside air temperature
sensor circuit
A n open in the evaporator temperature
sensor circuit
A short in the evaporator temperature
sensor circuit
A n open in the front air m i x control
m o t o r circuit
A short in the front air mix control motor
circuit
A problem in the driver's air mix control
linkage, door, or motor circuit
A n open or short in the front mode
control m o t o r circuit
A problem in the front mode control
linkage, doors, or m o t o r circuit
A problem in the front blower motor
circuit
A n open in the rear air mix control motor
circuit
A short in the rear air m i x control motor
circuit
A problem in the rear air mix control
HVAC control unit lost communication
w i t h rear HVAC control panel (Rear
communication failure)
A n open in the A/C pressure sensor
circuit
B2980
A short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit
B2983
A problem in the recirculation control

HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
HVAC
unit
ECU
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
control
HVAC control
unit
HVAC control
unit
HVAC control
unit
HVAC control
unit
DTC type
Loss of
communication
Loss of
communication
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Loss of
communication
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-26)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-27)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-29)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-33)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-34)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-35)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-36)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-37)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-38)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-41)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-43)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-45)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-46)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-49)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-50)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-56)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-57)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-60)
21-13
Symptom
Blower, heater controls,
and A/C do not work
HVAC control power, ground, and communication
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-63)
Also check for

HVAC control unit DTCs (see page 21-9)
Blown fuse No. 36 (10 A) in the under-dash
fuse/ relay box
Poor ground at G403
Poor or loose connections at the terminals
Rear mode control doors

do not change between
ceiling vents (cool) and
floor vents (hot)
Rear mode control motor circuit troubleshooting

(see page 21-62)

Blown fuse No. 36(10 A) in the under-dash
fuse/ relay box
Both fans do not run at low

speed with the A / C on (but
the A/C compressor runs
with the A / C on)
Radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed circuit

troubleshooting (see page 21-65)

Blown fuse No. 7 (30 A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground atG202
The A/C condenser fan

does not run at high speed
(but both fans run at low
speed and the A/C
compressor operates with
the A/C on)


Blown fuse No. 6 (30 A) and No. 15 (7.5 A) in
the under-hood fuse/relay box
Both fans do not run at

high speed with the A/C on
(but both fans run at low
speed and the A/C
compressor operates with
the A/C on)
E C T troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low

voltage (see page 11-182), E C T sensor 2 circuit
high voltage (see page 11-184)
Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)

Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
The A/C compressor clutch

does not engage (but both
fans run with the A / C on)
A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting

(see page 21-71)

Blown fuse No. 20 (7.5 A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the underdash fuse/relay box
Blower motor operation
Blower fan(s) runs slower

than expected in cold
weather
E C T troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low

voltage (see page 11-182), E C T sensor 2 circuit
high voltage (see page 11-184)
NOTE: It is normal for the blower(s) to run slowly
until the engine coolant temperature begins to
rise. If the blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length of time, continue to troubleshoot
the problem.

HDS does not

communicate with the
MICU or the vehicle
Insufficient heating
1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6)

2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3)
3. Check the operation of the air mix control
motor and door
4. Check the coolant temperature
5. Check the blower motor unit for obstructions
6. Check for air leaks around the ducts and vents
7. Check the inlet hose temperature
If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the
hose, a damaged or leaking thermostat, and
a damaged or leaking water pump.
If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the heater
core. Back flush the heater core using
standard commercially available equipment,
or replace the heater core.
21-14
Damaged cylinder head gasket
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat f r o m the passenger compartment by transferring heat f r o m the ambient air t o
the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air w i t h the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat f r o m the ambient air.
The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger compartment.
EXPANSION V A L V E
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
FRONT BLOWER FAN
FRONT EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
FRONT EVAPORATOR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
RELIEF V A L V E
(Relieves pressure at the A / C compressor
when the pressure is too high)
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR

(Triple function)
W h e n the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm ,
455 psi), the PCM turns the
compressor relay off to protect
the A/C compressor.
W h e n the refrigerant is above
1,470 kPa(15.0 kgf/cm , 213 psi)
the A/C pressure sensor
switches the radiator and
A/C condenser fans to high
speed.
2
A / C COMPRESSOR
(Suction and compression)
HIGH P R E S S U R E VAPOR
HIGH P R E S S U R E LIQUID
A / C CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
LOW P R E S S U R E LIQUID
RECEIVER/DRYER
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
LOW P R E S S U R E VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
f o l l o w i n g service items:
Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed for the R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil w i t h any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C
compressor failure.
All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange w i t h R-12 parts.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air conditioning
systems.
Always recover refrigerant R-134a w i t h an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
(cont'd)
21-15
A/C Pressure Sensor
The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
NOTE: The pressures can be monitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List.
S E N S O R UNIT
The response of the A/C pressure sensor is s h o w n in the graph.

2
NOTE: W h e n the refrigerant is below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi) or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm ,455 psi), the PCM turns
the compressor relay off to protect the A/C compressor.
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
-99
0
(-1)
[-14]
196
(2)
[28]
3,138
(32)
[455]
kPa
(kgf/cm )
[psi]
2
A/C PRESSURE
Vcc5V
21-16
Vout
GND
DB
Heating/Air Conditioning Door Positions
HEAT/VENT
DOOR
(HEAT/VENT)
(HEAT)
(cont'd)
21-17
21-18
DD
HVAC Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
HVAC CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
i
1 2
3 4
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16> 17 18 19 2C) 2 1 22 23 24
CONNECTOR A
Cavity
1
Wire
color
BRN/WHT
Terminal
name
M-HEAT(Rr)
Description
Rear mode control motor on the HEAT side
BLK
M-VENT(Rr)
Rear mode control motor on the VENT side
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
LT GRN
RED
PNK
LTBLU
BLU/BLK
BLU
GRN
BLU
Rr DEFRly
S-COM
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
MODE 4
BUS DATA
DISP-SI
12
PUR
DISP-CLK
13
RED/GRN
BLW-V(Rr)
Signal for rear w i n d o w defogger relay

Ground exclusive for sensor
Inputs front mode control motor signal 1
Front-Rear communication
Output Audio-HVAC display A/C
communication data
Output Audio-HVAC display A/C
communication clock
Feed back signal of power transistor drain
voltage
14
GRY
S5V
15
PUR
AMD-P(Rr)
16
YEL
AMD-P(Ft)
17
GRY
MODE 3
18
BLK
MODE 2
19
WHT
MODE1
20
LT GRN
Pd
21
PNK
Tarn
22
BRN
Teva
23
24
WHT
LT GRN
CAN-HI
CAN-LO
Power source for humidity sensor, A/C

pressure, and air mix control motor(front
and rear)
Outputs rear air mix control motor
potentiometer signal
Outputs front air mix control motor
Recirculation control motor position feed
back 3 signal
back 2 signal
back 1 signal
A/C pressure sensor signal
Signal
Drive on HEAT side:
battery voltage
Drive on VENT side:
battery voltage
With ignition switch ON(II): battery

voltage( depending blower motor
speed)
about 5V
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
on
on
on
on
COOL side: about 0.5V

HOT side: about 4.5V
COOL side: about 1.5V
HOT side: about 4.5V
With A/C switch ON: about

1.44.8 V (depending on A/C
pressure)
Inputs outside air temperature sensor

signal
Inputs evaporator temperature sensor
signal
B-CAN communication line
(cont'd)
21-19
HVAC Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
HVAC CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONNECTOR B
Wire
color
RED/BLK
Terminal
name
M-HOT(Ft)
GRN/WHT
M-VENT(Ft)
GRN
M-DEF(Ft)
4
5
BLK
YEL
GND
FRS
BLU/ORN
REC
GRY
M-COOL(Rr)
PNK
M-HOT(Rr)
ORN
M-COOL(Ft)
10
LT BLU
ILL +
Front air mix control motor on the

HOT side
Front mode control motor on the
VENT side
Front mode control motor on the DEF
side
HVAC control unit g r o u n d ( G403)
The recirculation control motor on the
FRESH side
RECIRCULATE side
Rear air mix Control motor on the
COOL side
Rear air mix Control motor on the HOT
side
Front air mix Control m o t o r on the
COOL side
Power source for illumination
11
BLU
BLW-G(Rr)
Outputs power transistor gate voltage
12
13
YEL
RED
ILL
BLW-G(Ft)
Ground for illumination

14
BLU
BLW-V(Ft)
15
YEL
IG2
Feed back of power transistor drain

voltage
IG2 power supply
Cavity
21-20
Description
Signal
Drive on HOT side: battery voltage
Drive on VENT side: battery voltage
Drive on DEF side: battery voltage
Drive on FRESH side: battery voltage
Drive on FRESH side: battery voltage
Drive on COOL side: battery voltage
Drive on HOT side: battery voltage
Drive on COOL side: battery voltage
With lighting switch ON(II): battery
voltage
Fan switch to M A X : about 10 V Fan
switch to M I N : about 2 V
Fan switch to M A X : about 10 V Fan
switch to M I N : about 2 V
Fan switch to OFF: about 8 V
battery voltage
HD
Rear HVAC Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
REAR HVAC CONTROL PANEL 12P CONNECTOR
n-
-fl
/ / /
/ / 9 / 12
Cavity
1
Wire
color
LTBLU
Terminal
name
ILL +
3
5
9
12
YEL
GRN
BLK
YEL
ILLBUS-DATA
GND
IG2
Description
Rear HVAC control unit g r o u n d (G801)
IG2 power supply
Signal
With lighting switch ON:
battery voltage
With ignition switch ON(II):

battery voltage
21-21
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
No. 5 (30 A)
--cr-VjD-
IGNITION SWITCH
20
B-CAN H
~-
B-CAN L
F-CAN L
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2
LTGRN
1
1
19
F-CAN H
21-22
WHT
! !
en
UNDER-DASH
No. 36 {10 A)
CTKJD
FRONT
BLOWER
MOTOR
FRONT POWER
TRANSISTOR
1H
BLU
RED
BLK
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
DRIVING CIRCUIT
A24
r
B-CAN L
MODE
4
MODE
3
LTBLU
PNK
GRN
MODE
2
MODE
1
M-DEF
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
M-VENT
GRY
MODE
3
BLK
WHT
MODE
2
MODE
1
REC
FRS
RECIRCULATION CONTROL
MOTOR
OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(cont'd)
21-23
-PNK
-YEL-
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
V
LTGRN
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
A3
RrDEFRly
DRIVING CIRCUIT
T
B9
B1
A16
Pd
A20
A14
GRY
-GRY-
BLK
GRY
MCOOL
MAMDHOT P
GRY
S5V
FRONT AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
^ 1
S-COM
A/C
PRESSURE
SENSOR
RED
-RED-
21-24
LTGRN
RED
-RED-
-RED-
UB
PNK-
r IG2
REAR
HVAC
CONTROL
PANEL
DASH LIGHTS BLIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER (In the gauge
control module)
A10
5
GRN
T
S-COM
B7
A15
GRY
PUR
S5V
GRY
B8
PNK
AMD- MP
COOL
GND
BUS 777
DATA
GND
B4
RED
BLK
BLK
G403
G801
MHOT
REAR AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM
RED
-RED-
-RED-
21-25
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC U0155: HVAC Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module
NOTE: If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
m o d e A (see page 22-137).
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals

of the gauge control module 32P connector and HVAC
control unit connector A (24P).
24P:
No. 24
No. 23
32P:
No. 19
No. 20
G A U G E CONTROL M O D U L E 32P CONNECTOR
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page 21-9).

1 1 2 1/1/1 5 | 6 1/1 8 | 9 |lo|l1112|13|14|/116|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC U0155
Indicated?
LT G R N
WHT
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose
wires or poor connections on the gauge control
module and HVAC control unit circuit.H
r~@-
1
1 I2 [ 3 |4/ | 6 | 7 | 8
f
9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21 22|23|24
5. Select UNIT INFORMATION in the BODY ELECTRICAL

menu.
6. Select CONNECTED UNITS in the UNIT
INFORMATION menu.
Is the gauge control module
detected?
YES-Substitute a known-good HVAC control unit, and

recheck. I f t h e symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original HVAC control unit (see page
21-8D.H
NO-Go to step 7
8. Disconnect HVAC control unit connector A (24P).
21-26
WHT
LTGRN

YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the HVAC
control unit and the gauge control module.H
BD
DTC B1215 or DTC indicator 8: An Open or
Short in the Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page 21-9) or
HVAC control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.

of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and the
recirculation control motor 7P connector.
24P:
7P:
No.4
No. 17
No. 18
No. 19
No. 7
No.3
No.4
No. 5

Is DTC B1215 or 8 Indicated?

YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor
connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit.
RED T
f
1 | 2 | 3 | /4| 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
WHT
BLK

6. Test the recirculation control motor, (see page 21-80)
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
BLK
J WHT
1 2 3 4 5
YES-Go t o step 7.
GRY
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor (see page

21-80).!
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

7. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P

connector.
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the HVAC
control unit and the recirculation control m o t o r . H
(cont'd)
21-27
10. Check for continuity between body ground and HVAC
control unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 17, No.
18, and No. 19 individually.
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the same
terminals for voltage to body g r o u n d .
H V A C C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (24P)
r ,
1
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13[14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 [10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
| WHT
GRY|
B L K I
JL

Y E S - R e p a i r short to body g r o u n d in the wire(s)
between the HVAC control unit and the recirculation
control m o t o r . !
IMO-Gotostep 11.
11. Check for continuity between HVAC control unit
connector A (24P) terminals as follows.
From terminal
17
18
To terminals
18,19
19
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?

Y E S - R e p a i r the short in the wires.B
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Reconnect HVAC control unit connector A (24P).
21-28
Is there any voltage?

Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the wire(s) between the
HVAC control unit and the recirculation control motor.
This short may also damage the HVAC control unit.
Repair the short to power before replacing the HVAC
control u n i t . H
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
HVAC control unit, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
HVAC control unit (see page 21-81).H
BB
DTC B1223 or DTC indicator 1: A Problem in
the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
7. Connect rear blower motor 2P connectorterminal No.

2 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

HVAC control unit, (see page 21-10)
ORN
4. Check for DTCs.

J U M P E R WIRE
Is DTC B1223 or 1
indicated?
connections on the rear blower motor c i r c u i t . !
6. Check the No. 5 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and the
No.36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s) b l o w
again, check for a short in the No. 5 (RR BLOWER)
(30 A) and No. 36 (10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t !

Does the rear blower motor run at high
speed?
NO-Go to step 24.
11. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector.
(cont'd)
21-29
12. Check for continuity between rear power transistor 4P
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

_ J
1 ?)
3 4

control unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 13 and
HVAC control unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 11
individually.
BLK
i
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
RED/GRN

NO-Check for an open in the w i r e between the rear

power transistor and body ground. I f t h e wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G801 (see page 2 2 - 5 9 ) . !
13. Connect rear power transistor 4P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 4 with a j u m p e r wire.
i
1 2 3 4
r
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
BLU
BLK
CO
h 41

J U M P E R WIRE
ORN
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the HVAC control unit and the rear power
transistor.!
NO-Go to step 19.

speed?
NO-Repair open in the ORN w i r e between the rear
power transistor and the rear blower m o t o r . !
16. Disconnect the j u m p e r w i r e .
17. Disconnect HVAC control unit connectors A (24P) and
B(16P).
21-30
BD
of HVAC control unit connectors A (24P), B (16P) and
the rear power transistor 4P connector.
24P:
No. 13
16P:
No. 11
4P:
No.3
4P:
No. 1

I
f
n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4L / ) 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
[13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

21. Measure the voltage between body ground and HVAC
control unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 13 and
HVAC control unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 11
individually.
\ I 2| 3 1 4 ^ 6 1 7
9 1011 12
13ll4ll5J16|l7|l8ll9l20l2ll22l23|24
RED/GRN

i
r
1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 | 8|
| 9 |10|11|12|13|14|15|/
BLU

n
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
BLU

YES-Go to step 20.
control unit and the rear power t r a n s i s t o r . B

YES-Repair short to power in the w i r e ( s ) . B
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Reconnect HVAC control unit connectors A (24P) and
B(16P).
23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-202).
Is the rear power transistor OK?
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the rear
power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are
g o o d , substitute a known-good HVAC control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
21-81).
NO-Replace the rear power transistor (see page
21-202).B
24. Disconnect the jumper wire.
25. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
(cont'd)
21-31
26. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor 2P
3 1 . Measure the voltage between rear blower motor relay

4P socket terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
REAR BLOWER MOTOR R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
YEL
1
3 4
GRY
Is there battery
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page

21-206).
28. Remove the rear blower motor relay f r o m the
dashboard wire harness, and test it (see page 22-96).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29.
voltage?
YES-Go to step 32.

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the rear
blower motor r e l a y . !
33. Check for continuity between rear blower motor relay
4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO-Replace the rear blower motor r e l a y . !

29. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor relay
PNK
3 4
YES-Repair open in the GRY w i r e between the rear
blower motor relay and the blower m o t o r . !
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 30.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 5 (RR
BLOWER) (30 A) in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box
and the rear blower motor r e l a y . !
21-32
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear

blower motor relay and body g r o u n d . Ifthe wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G801 (see page 2 2 - 5 9 ) . !
BB
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator 5: An Open in the
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit

connector A (24P) terminal No. 4 and outside air
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or 5

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
indicated?
connections on the outside air temperature sensor
circuit.!
RED

6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-75), and test it. (see page 21-74)
Is the outside air temperature sensor
OK?
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 2 1 - 7 5 ) .
connector A (24P) terminal No.21and outside air
temperature sensor 2P connectorterminal No. 2.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

Y E S - C h e c k for loose wires or poor connections at
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
HVAC control unit (see page 21 -81 ) .
control unit and the outside air temperature s e n s o r . l

n
i
r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
PNK
OUTSIDE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

control unit and the outside air temperature s e n s o r . B
21-33
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator 5: A Short in the
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit

connector A (24P) terminals No. 4 and No. 2 1 .
RED

I
1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|1819|20|21|22|23|24
1
PNK
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1228 or 5 indicated?
YES-Go t o step 5
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e . !

21-75), and test it. (see page 21-74)
YES-Repair short in the wires between the HVAC

control unit and the outside air temperature s e n s o r . H
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?

YES-Go to step 7.
page21-75).B
connector A (24P) terminal No. 21 and body ground.
1 | 2 j 3 | 4/ | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1 2 |
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
PNK
the HVAC control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
21-34
NO-Substitute a known-good HVAC control unit, and

recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
21-81).
HB
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit

connector A (24P) terminal No. 22 and evaporator


i
r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 ( 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1231 or 4
BRN
indicated?
connections on the evaporator temperature sensor
circuit.!
6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor, and test
it (see page 21-75).
Is the evaporator temperature sensor
OK?
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor (see

page 2 1 - 7 6 ) .

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.B
(cont'd)
21-35
connector A (24P) terminal No. 4 and evaporator
temperature sensor 2P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.

Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit

l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and then ON (II).

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1232 or 4
indicated?
RED
II
1 i,
'
EVAPORATOR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
2P CONNECTOR
6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor, and test
Is the evaporator temperature sensor
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
HVAC control unit (see page 21-81 ) .
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the HVAC
sensor.B
OK?
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 2 1 - 7 6 ) .
connector A (24P) terminal No. 22 and body g r o u n d .
p
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
BRN
YES-Repair short t o body g r o u n d in the w i r e between
the HVAC control unit and the evaporator
temperature s e n s o r . B
NO-Go t o step 9.
21-36
US
connector A (24P) terminals No. 4 and No. 22.
RED
r
1
f
1 1 2 13 14 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13 14|15 16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

Front Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
BRN
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9) or

4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair short in the wires between the HVAC
sensor.B
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
21-81).B

connections on the front air mix control motor
circuit.B
6. Test the front air mix control motor (see page 21-77).
Is the front air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front air mix control m o t o r (see page
21-78).B
7. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P
connector.
(cont'd)
21-37
of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and the front
air mix control m o t o r 7P connector.
24P:
No. 4
No. 14
No. 16

Front Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
7P:
No. 5
No. 7
No.3


4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1234 or 2
l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
[YEL
GRY
indicated?
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e . B
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; B1245 or 7, and/or
or 6?
YEL
GRY
B2980
Y E S - G o to step 13
NO-Go t o step 6.
I RED
FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR


HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the front
air mix control m o t o r 7P connector. Ifthe connections
are g o o d , substitute a known-good HVAC control unit
and recheck. I f t h e symptom/indication goes away,
21-8D.B

control unit and the front air mix control m o t o r . B
21-38
NO-Replace the front air mix control motor (see page

21-78).B
connector.
BB
control unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 16.

voltage between HVAC control unit connector A (24P)

p
l
11213 1 4
9 I10|11|12I
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
1|2|3|4|/|6|7|8
'
9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1 2 |
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
YEL
YEL

the HVAC control unit and the front air mix control
motor.B
p
1
i
r
I I I /4| 6 | 7 | 8
2
|10|11
YEL
YES-Repair the short in the w i r e s . !

HVAC control unit and the front air mix control motor.
control unit.B
replace the original HVAC control unit, (see page
21-81 )
1
9
12|
|13|14|15|16[17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY

the HVAC control unit.
14. Disconnect these items:
Front air mix control motor
Rear air mix control motor
A/C pressure sensor
rj
i
r
/ 4| 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
1 I2 I 3
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
21-39
terminal for voltage to body g r o u n d .
HVAC C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
p
I
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

18. Reconnect the HVAC control unit connector A (24P)
GRY
p
I
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17 18|19|20|21|22|23 24
GRY

Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the wire. This short may
have also damaged the HVAC control unit. Repair the
short to power before replacing the HVAC control
unit.B
NO-Go to step 17.
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Check for a loose wire or poor connection at
HVAC control unit connector A (24P). Ifthe connection
is g o o d , substitute a known-good HVAC control unit
21-81 ).B
21-40
20. While checking the same terminal f o r voltage to

g r o u n d , reconnect these items individually and note
the voltage reading each time:
A/C pressure sensor

the Front Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit
2 3 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
1
GRY
X
Does the voltage remain at about 5 V?

YES-Substitute a known-good HVAC control unit and
21-81).
NO-Replace the component that caused the voltage
drop.l

4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the front air mix control motor
circuit!
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front air mix control m o t o r (see page
21-78), or repair the front air mix control linkage or
door.H
connector.
8. Disconnect HVAC control unit connector B (16P).
(cont'd)
21-41
9. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e f o l l o w i n g t e r m i n a l s
of H V A C control unit c o n n e c t o r B (16P) a n d the
d r i v e r ' s air m i x control m o t o r 7 P c o n n e c t o r .
16P:
7P:
No.1
No. 9
No.2
No.1
10. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d H V A C

control unit c o n n e c t o r B (16P) t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d
No. 9 i n d i v i d u a l l y .
RED/BLK
-f
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

RED/BLK
ORN
Is there
j ORN
1 2
c
3
RED/BLK
FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

Is there
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e H V A C
control unit a n d t h e front air m i x control m o t o r . H
21-42
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e ( s )
b e t w e e n t h e H V A C control unit a n d t h e front air m i x
control m o t o r . H
N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d H V A C control unit, a n d
r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,
r e p l a c e the original H V A C c o n t r o l unit ( s e e p a g e
21-81).
IB
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator 3: An Open or
Short in the Front Mode Control Motor Circuit

1. C l e a r t h e DTC w i t h t h e
HDS.
2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0), a n d t h e n O N (II).
3. D o t h e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c w i t h t h e H D S (see p a g e 21-9) o r
H V A C c o n t r o l u n i t (see p a g e 21-10).
4. C h e c k f o r D T C s .
Is DTC B1239 or 3
indicated?
9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e f o l l o w i n g t e r m i n a l s
o f H V A C c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r A (24P) a n d t h e f r o n t
m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r 7P c o n n e c t o r .
24P:
No.4
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
7P:
No. 7
No. 6
No.5
No.4
No.3
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

connections on the front mode control motor
circuit.!
PNK
BLU/BLK
RED
BLU
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Il3ll4ll5ll6|l7ll8ll9l20l2ll22l23|24
1 2
6. T e s t t h e f r o n t m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r (see p a g e 21-79).
Is the front mode control motor
LT BLU
OK?
PNK
RED
N O - R e p l a c e t h e f r o n t m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r (see p a g e
21-79KB
7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e f r o n t m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r 7P
connector.
I 1
I2I
BLU
LT BLU
BLU/BLK
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

8. D i s c o n n e c t H V A C c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r A (24P).
Is there
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e H V A C
control unit and the front mode control motor.H
(cont'd)
21-43
control unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 6, No. 7,
terminals for voltage to body ground.

LTBLU
PNK
LTBLU
BLU/BLK
BLU/BLK
BLU
1 | 2 1 3 1 4 f ^ T f r p 1 9 |10111112|"
1|2|3|4
9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
I l 3 | l 4 l l 5 l l 6 l l 7 | l 8 | l 9 l 2 0 | 2 l l 2 2 | 2 3 l 2 4
<

YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the HVAC control unit and the front mode
control motor.H
NO-Go to step 11.
connector A (24P) terminals as follows.
From terminal
6
7
8
To terminals
7,8,9
8,9
9

YES-Repair the short in the wires.H
NO-Go to step 12.
21-44

YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between the
HVAC control unit and the front mode control motor.
control unit.H
HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the front
mode control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good HVAC control unit,
21-8D.H
BB
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
Motor Circuit
16P:
No. 2
No. 3
7P:
No. 1
No. 2
GRN/WHT
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1240 or 3

of HVAC control unit connector B (16P) and the front
mode control motor 7P connector.
2 3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
indicated?
circuit.H
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21 -79).
GRN
GRN
GRN/WHT
c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Is the front mode control motor OK?

FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

NO-Replace the front mode control motor (see page

21-79), or repair the front mode control linkage or
doors.
7. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P
connector.
control unit and the front mode control m o t o r . B
(cont'd)
21-45
D T C

control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 2 and
No. 3 individually.

the Front Blower Motor Circuit

GRN/WHT
GRN
p
_n
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1241 or 1
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

connections on the front blower motor c i r c u i t . H

between the HVAC control unit and the front mode
control m o t o r . H

fuse/relay box,, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
NO-Substitute a known-good HVAC control u n i t and

replace the original HVAC control unit, (see page
21-81 )
Are the fuses OK?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s) blow
again, check for a short in the No. 9 (40 A) and No. 36
(10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t . B
7. Connect front blower motor 2P connector terminal
No. 2 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
emu
GRN
J U M P E R WIRE

Does the front blower motor run at high
speed?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 24.
11. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector.
21-46
BB
12. Check for continuity between front power transistor
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

J
?)

No. 14 individually.
BLK
CO
1-r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

between the HVAC control unit and the front power
transistor.B
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the front

power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202.B
13. Connect front power transistor 4P connector
7^
BLK
NO-Go to step 19.

of HVAC control unit connector B (16P) and the front
power transistor 4P connector.
16P:
No. 13
No. 14
4P:
No.1
No.3
J U M P E R WIRE
3 4

GRN
"f-
- r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 llO|llll2ll3ll4ll5L/
RED
BLU

speed?
RED
BLU
NO-Repair open in the GRN wire between the front

power transistor and the front blower m o t o r . B
r=l
1*1
3 4

control unit and the front power transistor.B
(cont'd)
21-47
2 1 . Measure the voltage between body ground and HVAC
26. Measure the voltage between front blower motor 2P

HVAC C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
hi
-r
11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
RED
I2j
WHT
BLU
(^)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the front blower m o t o r . H
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s).H
NO-Go to step 22.

22. Reconnect HVAC control unit connector B (16P).
23. Test the front power transistor, (see page 21-76)
Is the front power transistor OK?
HVAC control unit connector B (16P) and at the front
and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
21-81 ) .

28. Remove the front blower m o t o r relay f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Replace the front blower motor relay.H
29. Measure the voltage between front blower motor
relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO-Replace the front power transistor (see page

21-76).B
1
2
25. Disconnect the front blower m o t o r 2P connector.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 30.

NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.H
21-48
U9
3 1 . Measure the voltage between front blower motor

Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9) or
YEL
4. Check for DTCs.


connections on the rear air mix control m o t o r
circuit.B
Is there battery
voltage?
6. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-203).
Is the rear air mix control motor OK?

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the front
blower motor relay.B
33. Check for continuity between front blower motor
NO-Replace the rear air mix control m o t o r (see page
21-204).B
7. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P
connector.
BLK
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the W H T wire between the front
blower motor relay and the blower m o t o r . B
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the front
blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202.B
(cont'd)
21-49
of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and the rear
air mix control motor 7P connector.

24P:
7P:
No. 4
No. 14
No. 15
No. 7
No. 5
No.3


RED
i
r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14[15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
I PUR
GRY
PUR|<;
NO-lntermittent failure.B
5. Check for DTCs.
-OH
1
4. Check for DTCs.
1
RED
i
5
GRY
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

Are these DTCs also present; B1234 or 2, and/or

or 6?
NO-Go to step 6.

air mix control m o t o r 7P connector. If the connections
are g o o d , substitute a known-good HVAC control unit
21-81).

control unit and the rear air mix control m o t o r . B
21-50
B2980

21-204).
8. Disconnect the rear air m i x control m o t o r 7P
connector.
DB


p
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4A 6
7 | 89 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
n
I
1
1 I 2 I 3 | 4/ | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
PUR
PUR
Is there
continuity?

the HVAC control unit and the rear air mix control
motor.!
NO-Go to step 11
I
1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

HVAC control unit and the rear air mix control motor.
control u n i t . B
21-81 ) .
HVAC control unit connector A (24P).
Rear air mix control m o t o r
A/C pressure sensor
YES-Repair short in the w i r e ( s ) . l
NO-Go to step 12.

n
I
f
1 I 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
YES-Repair short to body g r o u n d in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
21-51
1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4
/ | 6 | 7 | 8
1
9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1 2 |
18. Reconnect the HVAC control unit connector A (24P).

19. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), and measure the
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
l
GRY
| 2
| 3
| 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8
f
9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1 2 |
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
Is there any
voltage?

unit.B
NO-Go to step 17.
21-52
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Check for a loose w i r e or poor connection at
HVAC control unit connector A (24P). If the connection
21-81).!
IB
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to
Front air mix control m o t o r
A/C pressure sensor
p
i
r
1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
13 i 4 | i 5 | i e > 17 18 19 2C)21 22 23 24
GRY

the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5
connections on the rear air mix control m o t o r
circuit.B

21-81).
NO-Replace the c o m p o n e n t that caused the voltage
drop.B

6. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page 21 -203).
YES-Go to step 7.
21-204), or repair the rear air mix control linkage or
door.B
connector.
(cont'd)
21-53
of HVAC control unit connector B (16P) and the rear
air mix control motor 7P connector.
16P:
No. 8
No. 7
7P:
No. 1
No. 2

No. 8 individually.
GRY
PNK

GRY
.
1
I
3
I _n
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PNK
9 110I11I12I13I14I15L/
c

YES-Go t o step 10.
control unit and the rear air m i x control m o t o r . B
21-54
YES-Repair short to body g r o u n d in the wire(s)

between the HVAC control unit and the rear air mix
control m o t o r . B
21-81 ) . B
UB
DTC B2965: HVAC Control Unit Lost
Communication with Rear HVAC Control
Panel
10. Check for continuity between rear HVAC control panel


1 /I
3 l/l 5
7T
l / l / l 9 1/1/112
BLK
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B2965
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the rear HVAC control panel and
HVAC control unit c i r c u i t . !
6. Disconnect the rear HVAC control panel 12P
connector.
YES-Go to step 11.
HVAC control panel and body ground. I f t h e w i r e is
OK, check for poor ground at G801 (see page 22-59).H
8. Measure the voltage between rear HVAC control

panel 12P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 12 and body
ground.

of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) terminal No.
10 and rear HVAC control panel 12P connector
terminal No. 5.

n
FT
1 / I 3 1/1 5
I/I/|9|/1/112
YEL
1|2|3|4|/|6|7|8
9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
Is there battery
voltage?
GRN
p P
1 / | 3 | / | 5' / I
l / l / l 9 1/1/12
YES-Go to step 9.
HVAC control p a n e l .

YES-Go to step 13.
control unit and the rear HVAC control p a n e l .
(cont'd)
21-55
13. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and HVAC
GRN
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13 14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23 24

A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2979 or 6
indicated?
YES-Go to step5.

connections on the A/C pressure sensor c i r c u i t !
YES-Repair short t o body g r o u n d in the wire between
the HVAC control unit and the rear HVAC control
panel.!
6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
NO-Substitute a known-good rear HVAC control

panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original rear HVAC control panel
(see page 2 1 - 2 0 5 ) .
8. Check for continuity between the f o l l o w i n g terminals

of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and the A/C
pressure sensor 3P connector.
24P:
No.4
No. 14
No. 20
3P:
No.3
No. 1
No.2

RED
i
r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
A / C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go t o step 9.
control unit and the A/C pressure s e n s o r . B
21-56
HI
11. Measure the voltage between HVAC control unit
connector A (24P) terminals No. 4 and No. 14, and
between HVAC control unit connector A (24P)
DTC B2980 or DTC indicator 6: A short in the

A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
RED
l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4/ | 6 | 7 | 8
9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
LTGRN
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs a/so present; B1234 or DTC2, and/ or
B1245
orDTC7?
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Replace the A/C pressure sensor.B

HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the A/C
pressure sensor 3P connector. If the connections are
21-81).

8. Disconnect HVAC control unit connector A(24P).
I
1
I2
| 3 | 4/ | 6 | 7 | 8
1
9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
LTGRN
the HVAC control unit and the A/C pressure sensor.B
NO-Go t o step 10.
(cont'd)
21-57
i
n
.
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 /|6|7|8|9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
LTGRN

connector A (24P) terminals No. 4 and No. 14, and
between HVAC control unit connector A (24P)
RED
I
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
LTGRN
YES-Repair short in the wire(s).B

NO-Go to step 11.
voltage between body ground and HVAC control unit
1 | 2 | 3 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11 12
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
LTGRN
Is there about 5 V?
HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and at the A/C
pressure sensor 3P connector. I f t h e connections are
21-81).B

YES-Repair short t o power in the w i r e between the
HVAC control unit and the A/C pressure sensor. This
short may also damage the HVAC control unit. Repair
the short to power before replacing the HVAC control
unit.B
NO-Go to step 12.
21-58

A/C pressure sensor
BO
n
I
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

21. Reconnect HVAC control unit connector A (24P)
GRY
(I
3 4 /|6|7|8|9|10|11|12|
1 2
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the w i r e . B
NO-Go to step 19.'
I
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
Is there about 5 V?
HVAC control unit connector A (24P). If the connection
21-81).B

YES-Repair short to power in the wire. This short may
unit.B
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
21-59
ground, reconnect these items individually and note
A/C pressure sensor
i
r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
GRY
X

21-81 ) .
drop.B
DTC B2983 or DTC indicator 8: A problem in

the Recirculation Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to
ON (II).
4. Check the DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure; check for loose wires or poor
circuit.B
6. Test the recirculation control motor.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor, or repair
the recirculation control linkage or d o o r . B
connector.
21-60
HQ
of HVAC control unit connector B (16P) and the
recirculation control m o t o r 7P connector.
16P:
7P:
No. 5
No. 6
No. 1
No. 2

No. 6 individually.
YEL
n
YEL
BLU/ORN
,
1
BLU/ORN
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
BLU/ORN
YEL
1
Is there
continuity?
between the HVAC control unit and the recirculation
21-81).B
YES-Go t o step 10.

control unit and the recirculation control m o t o r . B
21-61
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows
again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) fuse
circuit.!

control unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 1 and
No. 2 individually.
BRN/WHT
BLK
I
f
_l
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
3. Measure the voltage between rear mode control

motor 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
\/\/Us\/\
YEL
between the HVAC control unit and the rear mode
NO-Go to step 9.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
mode control m o t o r . !

terminals for voltage to body g r o u n d .
BRN/WHT
BLK
"1 1
1 I 2
I
f
| 3 | 4 / | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24

5. Disconnect the rear m o d e control motor 7P
connector.
6. Test the rear mode control m o t o r (see page 21-204).
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.

HVAC control unit and the rear mode control motor.
control u n i t . !
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page

21-205), or repair the rear mode control linkage or
door.!
NO-Go to step 10.

21-62
HVAC Control Power, Ground, and

Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and the rear
24P:
No. 1
No. 2
7P:
No.5
No. 7
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/

relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. Ifthe fuse blows

circuit.!

BRN/WHT
n
BLK
n
l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4
/ 1 e | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|

connector B (16P) terminal No. 15 and body g r o u n d .
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
n
1
BRN/WHT
BLK
1 ~7~7_
r
6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
YEL

mode control motor 7 P connector. Ifthe connections
are g o o d , substitute a known-good HVAC control unit,
21-81).
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the HVAC
control u n i t . B

control unit and the rear mode control m o t o r . l
(cont'd)
21-63
HVAC Control Power, Ground, and Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
connector B (16P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.
I
i\
_n

of the gauge control module 32P connector and HVAC
control unit connector A (24P).
32P:
No. 19
No. 20
24P:
No. 24
No. 23
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

i | 2 | / | / | 5 | e / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1l|l2h3|l4|/|l6|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
LTGRN
WHT
Is there less than 0.5 V?

YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the HVAC
control unit and body ground. I f t h e wire is OK, check
for poor ground at G403.B
I
[
I 2 | 3 | 4/ | 6 | 7 | 8
9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
WHT

LTGRN

HVAC control unit connectors A (24P), and B (16P). If
the connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
HVAC control unit, and recheck. I f t h e indication goes
away, replace the original HVAC control unit (see
page21-81).B
control unit and the gauge control m o d u l e . !
21-64
Radiator and A / C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE:
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C

compressor is inoperative. Refer to the s y m p t o m
troubleshooting index.
Before doing s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).

1
2

fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
4 3
Are the fuses OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If the fuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No. 7 (30 A) and
the No. 36 (10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t . !
2. Remove the radiator fan relay f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-96).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 8.
22-89).!
8. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals No. 1
and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NO-Replace the radiator fan r e l a y . !

1
2

5. Turn on the A/C.
4 3
JUMPER WIRE
BLU
6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Data List w i t h

the HDS.
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-250),
and retest. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see
page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) . !
Do the A/C condenser
and radiator fans run on low?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
21-65
(cont'd)
16. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 4 to


1 WHT
J 1 | 2
11 A
1
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
9 110
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
>< ><
22 A 24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40 41
/I/I
4 4 | / 4 6 1 / 48 49
J U M P E R WIRE

Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Go to step 36.

Do the A/C condenser
and radiator fans run on low?

PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 4. If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good PCM,
13. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.

NOTE: This step must be done t o protect the
powertrain control module (PCM) f r o m damage.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan

relay and the P C M . B
19. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.

20. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
button and fan control button ON.
21-66
DB
22. Measure the voltage between radiator fan 2P
27. Set the A/C button and fan control button OFF, then
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
SD
29. Remove the fan control relay f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-96).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 30.
BLU
NO-Replace the fan control relay.B

30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
Is there battery
3 1 . Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P

voltage?
YES-Go to step 23.
GRY
NO-Repair open in the wire between the A/C

condenser fan relay and the A/C condenser fan.B
t u r n the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5 4
24. Reconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.

25. Connect radiator fan 2P connectorterminal No. 1 to
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 32.

GRY
J U M P E R WIRE
NO-Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan

and the fan control relay.B
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
33. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
Does the radiator fan run?
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page
10-13).B
(cont'd)
21-67
(cont'd)
socket terminal No. 4 and A/C condenser fan 2P
FAN CONTROL R E L A Y 5P S O C K E T
37. Remove A/C diode A f r o m the relay block.

38. Using the diode setting ( M ) on a DVOM, check for
current f l o w in both directions between A/C diode A

A / C DIODE A
1
2
5 4 3
LTBLU
LTBLU
1
A / C CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
o-
ls there current fbw in only one direction?

YES-Go to step 39.
YES-Go to step 35.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan control
relay and the A/C condenser f a n . B
35. Check for continuity between A/C condenser fan 2P
A / C C O N D E N S E R FAN 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace A/C diode A . B

40. Measure the voltage between A/C diode A 2P socket
A / C DIODE A 2P S O C K E T
Is there battery
YES-Replace the A/C condenser fan motor (see page
10-13)11

page 2 2 - 8 9 ) .
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the A/C

condenser fan and body g r o u n d . If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 (see page 22-30).

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and A/C diode
A.B
21-68
voltage?
A / C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE:
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure i f t h e A/C
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the s y m p t o m
troubleshooting index.
Before doing s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for
powertrain DTCs.
4. Connect A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket terminals

No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
A / C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T
J U M P E R WIRE
1. Check the No. 6 (30 A) fuse and the No. 15 (7.5 A) fuse
in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
4 3
LTBLU
Are the fuses OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. Ifthe fuse(s)

blow again, check for a short in the No. 6 (30 A) and
the No. 15 (7.5 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t !
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
Does the A/C condenser
fan run on high?
YES-Go to step 5.
22-96).
22-89).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the A/C condenser fan relay.B
3. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan relay
A / C CONDENSER FAN R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

7. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan relay
A / C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T
1
2
4
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
22-89).
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
21-69
A / C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
14. Remove A/C diode B f r o m the under-hood fuse/ relay

box.
16. Measure the voltage between A/C diode B 2P socket

A / C DIODE B 2P S O C K E T
1 PUR
Ir-nl:
1|2
/
22
/
11
T
>< ><
,
, \ , , EL
9 110
| 6 | 7
8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
3|4|e
24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41
48149
JUMPER WIRE
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 17.

22-89KB
Does the A/C condenser
fan run on high?

PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 5. I f t h e
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).H
17. Using the diode setting ( M ) on a DVOM, check for

current f l o w in both directions between A/C diode B
A / C DIODE B

condenser fan relay and the P C M . H
Is there current flow in only one direction?

page 2 2 - 8 9 ) .
NO-Replace A/C diode BM
21-70
A / C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE:
It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, hard acceleration, or high/low
pressure.
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans
are also inoperative w i t h the A/C on. Refer to the
s y m p t o m troubleshooting index.
Before doing any s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
About 0.5 V
750-850
1 7 6 - 2 1 2 F ( 8 0 - 1 0 0 C)
ON
1 9 6 - 3 , 1 3 8 kPa ( 2 - 3 2 kgf/cm )
[ 2 8 - 4 5 5 psi]
TP SENSOR
RPM
ECT SENSOR 2
A/C SWITCH
A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR
Are all the values within
specifications?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the
specifications.!
7. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
22-96).
Are the fuses OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck. If the fuse(s)
b l o w again, check for a short in the No. 20 (7.5 A) and
No. 36 (10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t !
Is the relay OK?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the A/C compressor clutch r e l a y . !
8. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch

4. Turn on the A/C.
5. Check the A/C CLUTCH RELAY in the PGM-FI Data List
w i t h the HDS.
Is the A/C CLUTCH RELAY
6. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the

PGM-FI Data List at idle.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R CLUTCH R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1
on?
YES-Go to step 7.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. (see page
22-89).!
(cont'd)
21-71
A / C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Connect A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket
A / C COMPRESSOR C L U T C H RELAY 4P S O C K E T
1
J U M P E R WIRE
2
4
RED

14. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
Does the A/C compressor
clutch
click?
Jl|2
/ 24
/ >< 25 ><26 27 28
29 30 3 1 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
11
YES-Go to step 10.

1
NO-Go to step 19.

12. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
n
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 J101
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
40 41
/l
48|49|
YEL
J U M P E R WIRE

A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H RELAY 4P S O C K E T
YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 13.

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the A/C
compressor clutch r e l a y . !
21-72
Does the A/C compressor
click?

PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are g o o d ,
check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are g o o d ,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) . !
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the A/C
compressor clutch relay and the P C M . !
20. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 1P connector.
Audio-HVAC Display Communication

Line Circuit Troubleshooting
2 1 . Check for continuity between A/C compressor clutch
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and A/C compressor
clutch 1P connector terminal No. 1.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R CLUTCH RELAY 4P S O C K E T
RED

2. Disconnect HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and
audio-HVAC display unit 16P connector.
of HVAC control unit connector A (24P) and
24P:
16P:
No. 11
No. 12
No. 12
No. 11

PUR
irL
RED
BLU
1 2 3 4 X l 6 [ 7 l 8 9 110|11112
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2324
A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H 1P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminal
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - C h e c k the A/C compressor clutch clearance, and

the compressor clutch field coil (see page 21-90).
Repair as n e e d e d .
compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor
clutch.
77] 3
/
_n
1
4 ,/ 6 7 8
' 1 1 12 J1<*/ ' 1 6
PUR
BLU
A U D I O - H V A C DISPLAY UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R
control unit and the audio-HVAC display u n i t . H
(cont'd)
21-73
Audio-HVAC Display Communication
Line Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Test

control unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 11 and
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page

21-9).

BLU
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the

resistance. Then pour w a r m water on the sensor, and
check for a change in resistance.
PUR
11
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 f/\?\
J 1p i p ll0|l'lll'2|.
Il3ll4ll5ll6ll7|l8ll9l20l2ll22l23l24

21-75).
3. Compare the resistance reading between the

terminals No. 1 and No. 2 of the outside air
temperature sensor w i t h the specifications s h o w n in
the graph; the resistance should be w i t h i n the
specifications.
OUTSIDE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
between the HVAC control unit and the audio-HVAC
display u n i t . B
6. Connect audio-HVAC display unit 16P connector
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
p
//
T'
3 4
77
1 1
/
2
r78
1 4 / 1 6
12
11
10
9
8
7
RESISTANCE 6
(kO)
5
4
3
2
1
14
-10
32
0
50
10
68
20
86 104 F
30 40 C
TEMPERATURE
J U M P E R WIRE

8. Press and hold the DEF button and FAN ON/OFF
button.
Is the DEF button LED blinking?
YES-Audio-HVAC display unit is faulty, replace the
audio-HVAC display unit (see page 23-126).H
NO-HVAC control unit is faulty, replace the HVAC
control unit (see page 21 -81 ) .
21-74
4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the outside

air temperature sensor (see page 21-75).
us
Replacement

Test
1. Remove the front grille, (see page 20-210)
1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see

page 21-76)
2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of
the front bumper. Disconnect the 2P connector (C)
from the outside air temperature sensor.

resistance between its terminals.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
3. Pour w a r m water on the sensor, and measure the

resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
40
RESISTANCE
(kO)
32
0
50
68
86F
10
20
30C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-76).
21-75
Replacement
Front Power Transistor Test
1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the evaporator

temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector
clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw and the
evaporator temperature sensor.

page 20-128).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the front power
transistor.
3. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 3 and
No. 4 of the front power transistor. It should be about
1.5 kQ.
Ifthe resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 4.
Ifthe resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the front power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the front blower motor. Front
power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective front blower motor.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR
4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the front power

transistor.
6. Connect HAVC control unit connector B (16P)
terminals No.13 and No.15 with a jumper wire.
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 121314 1 5 /
RED
YEL
JUMPER WIRE
21-76
Front Air Mix Control Motor Test

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
front blower m o t o r runs.
If the front blower m o t o r does not run, replace the

front power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty front blower motor can cause the
front power transistor to fail. If the front power
transistor is replaced, also check the front blower
m o t o r for binding, and replace it if necessary.
If the front blower m o t o r runs, the front power
transistor is OK.
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs. (see page

21-9)
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the front air mix
control motor.
I NOTICE
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the front air
mix control motor will damage it. Follow the
instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the front
air mix control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
front air mix control motor should run, and stop at
Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the
front air mix control motor should run, and stop at
Max Hot. When the front air mix control m o t o r stops
running, disconnect battery power immediately.
FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3. If the front air mix control motor did not run in step 2,
remove it, then check the front air mix control linkage
and door for smooth movement.
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
front air mix control motor, (see page 21-78)
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as
needed.
If the front air mix control m o t o r runs smoothly, go
to step 4.
(cont'd)
21-77
Front Air Mix Control Motor Test
(cont'd)
Front Air Mix Control Motor

Replacement

No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
1. Remove self-tapping screws and the driver" s heater

duct (A).
5. Reconnect the front air m i x control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage
between terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
Max Cool: about 0.5 V
Max Hot: about 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as
specified, replace the front air m i x control motor (see
page 21-78).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the front air m i x

control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the front air mix control motor f r o m the heater
unit.
21-78
D9
Front Mode Control Motor Test
Front Mode Control Motor

Replacement

21-9).
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard trim (see page

20-125) and the glove box (see page 20-127).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the front mode

control motor.
2. Remove the bolt, self-tapping screws, harness clip,

and the passenger's heater duct (A).
I NOTICE
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the front
mode control motor will damage it. Follow the
NOTE: Removing the upper side screw, through the

hole(B).
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the front

mode control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
front mode control motor should run smoothly, and
stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the
front mode control motor should run smoothly, and
stop at Defrost. W h e n the front mode control motor
stops running, disconnect battery power
immediately.
3. Remove the self-tapping screw (A) f r o m the upper

side, then remove the self-tapping screws (B) f r o m the
lower side, then remove the front mode control motor
(C).
3. If the front mode control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the front mode control linkage
and doors for smooth movement.
If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the
front mode control motor (see page 21-79).
If the linkage or doors sticks or binds, r e p a i r t h e m as
needed.
If the front mode control motor runs smoothly, go
to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter w i t h an output of 1 m A or
less at the 20 kO range. With the front mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between terminals No. 3, No. 4, No. 5, and No. 6, and
terminal No. 7 individually. There should be
continuity for a m o m e n t at each terminal as the motor
moves past the switch's terminal.
4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged
w i t h the linkage. After installation, make sure the
motor runs smoothly.
5. If there is no continuity for a m o m e n t at each terminal,

replace the front mode control motor (see page
21-79).
21-79
Recirculation Control Motor Test
Recirculation Control Motor

Replacement

21-9).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the recirculation

control motor.
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the

recirculation control motor (B). Remove the
self-tapping screws and the recirculation control
motor f r o m the heater unit.
INOTICEI
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the
recirculation control motor w i l l damage it. Follow the
2. Connect battery power t o terminal No. 1 of the
recirculation control motor, and ground terminal No.
2; the recirculation control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Fresh. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the recirculation control motor should
run smoothly, and stop at Recirculate. W h e n the
recirculation control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage
and door for s m o o t h movement.
If the linkage and door m o v e smoothly, replace the
recirculation control m o t o r (see page 21-80).
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair t h e m as
needed.
If the recirculation control m o t o r runs smoothly, g o
to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter w i t h an output of 1 m A or
less at the 20 kQ range. W i t h the recirculation control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between terminals No. 3, No. 4 , and No. 5, and
terminal No. 7 individually. There should be
continuity for a m o m e n t at each terminal as the motor
moves past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a m o m e n t at each terminal,
replace the recirculation control motor (see page
21-80).
21-80

Make sure the pin o n the m o t o r is properly engaged
UB
HVAC Control Unit
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
1, Remove the audio unit, (see page 23-125)
1. Open the glove box, and release the glove box stops
on each side, then let the glove box hang d o w n (see
page 20-127).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, bolts, and the

brackets (A).
2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A) f r o m

the blower unit.
3. Remove the self-tapping screws and separate the

audio unit and the HVAC control unit (B).
4. Install the control unit in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, operate the various functions to see
whether it works properly.
3. Remove the filter (A) f r o m the housing (B), and

replace the filter.
A
^ ^ ^ ^
5. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there

are no problems in the system, (see page 21-9)
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure that there is no air leaking out of the blower unit.
21-81
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-127) and
passenger's center console t r i m , (see page 20-115).
2. Remove the wire harness clip (A) and the self-tapping
screw (B), then remove the self-tapping screws (C)
and the passenger's heater duct (D).
4. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box

opening w i t h diagonal cutters in the area s h o w n , and
discard it.
Cut here.
3. Remove the harness clips (A), the bolts, and the glove
box frame (B).
21-82
5. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the front blower

motor. Remove the wire harness clips (B).
Blower Unit Component

Replacement
6. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the recirculation
control motor. Remove the bolts, the self-tapping
screws, the m o u n t i n g nuts, and the blower unit (B).
Note these items w h e n overhauling the blower unit:

The recirculation control motor (A), front blower
motor (B) and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be
replaced w i t h o u t removing the blower unit.
Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly w i t h o u t
binding.
After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure that there is no air leakage.
21-83
Front Expansion Valve
Replacement
Front Evaporator Core

Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant w i t h a

recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-95).

recovery/recycling/charging station, (see page 21-95)
2. Remove the front evaporator core (see page 21-84).
2. Remove the bolts.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the front expansion

valve (A) and O-rings (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5 x 0.8 m m
3.3 N m
(0.3 k g f m ,
2.4 Ibfft)
4. Install the front expansion valve in the reverse order

Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing t h e m . Be sure t o use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) t o avoid leakage.
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the front receiver

line (A) and the front suction line (B) f r o m the front
evaporator core. Remove the O-rings (C).
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on

the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the
paint, wash it off immediately.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Charge the system (see page 21-96).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-82).
21-84
HI
5. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the front power
transistor, then remove the harness clip (B). Remove
the self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover
(C), and the seal (D).
6. Remove the bolts, the inlet and outlet pipes (A), and
expansion valve (B). Carefully pull out the front
evaporator core (C), then remove the plate (D).
7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
If you're installing a new front evaporator core, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
installing t h e m . Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
absorption.
damage the paint; i f t h e refrigerant oil contacts the
21-85
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
5. Remove the mounting nuts f r o m the heater unit. Take

care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or the brake
lines, etc.
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, (see

page 22-94)
2. Disconnect the front receiver line and front suction
line f r o m the front evaporator core (see page 21-84).
3. W h e n the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
f r o m the radiator (see page 10-6).
4. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back.
Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet
heater hose (C) f r o m the heater unit. Note the layout
of the hose.
Engine coolant will run out w h e n the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
8 x 1.25 m m
12.3 N m
(1.3 k g f m , 9.0 Ibfft)
6. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-132).

7. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the front blower
motor. Remove the wire harness clips (B).
21-86
UB
8. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the front mode
control motor, the passenger's air mix control motor
(with climate control), the recirculation control motor,
and the front power transistor. Remove the wire
harness clips (B).
10. Turn over the carpet. Remove the clip (A) and remove
the rear heater duct (B).
11. Remove the mounting nuts and bolts. Slide the

blower-heater unit (A) back, then remove the drain
hose (B) and the blower-heater unit.
9. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the air mix control

motor and the front evaporator temperature sensor.
Remove the w i r e harness clips (B) and the wire
harness (C).
7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
21-87
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
(cont'd)
12. Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's
heater duct (A). Remove the self-tapping screws and
the expansion valve cover (B). Remove the
self-tapping screw and the front heater core cover (C).
Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater pipe
brackets (D), the g r o m m e t s (E), and carefully pull out
the front heater core (F).
A / C Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not install the A/C compressor into a system
unless you are completely sure that the system is free of
contamination. Installing the A/C compressor into a
contaminated system can result in premature A/C
compressor failure.
1. Ifthe A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work
for a f e w minutes, then shut the engine off.
5. Support the front subframe w i t h the engine support.
Remove the bolts and the front subframe stiffener (A).
Then remove the harness clip (B).
NOTE: Install the new front subframe mounting bolt
(C).
13. Install the front heater core, and the front evaporator
core in the reverse order of removal.
14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal,
Do not interchange the inlet and the outlet heater
hoses.
Install the inlet and the outlet hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system w i t h engine coolant (see
page 10-6).
Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Refer to the front evaporator core replacement (see
page 21-84).
NOTE: Part of battery terminal reconnection
procedure.
15. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure, (see
page 22-94)
21-88
14 x 1.5 m m
103.0 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
UJB
. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A).
Remove the bolts and the nut, then disconnect the
suction hose (B) and discharge hose (C) f r o m the A/C
compressor. Remove the O-rings (D). Plug or cap the
lines immediately after disconnecting t h e m t o avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
8. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of

Inspect the A/C lines for any signs of contamination.
If you're installing a new A/C compressor, y o u must
calculate the a m o u n t of refrigerant oil t o be
removed f r o m it (see page 21-6). A n e w A/C
compressor comes w i t h a full charge of oil.
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-134a
DENSO piston type A/C compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never m i x it w i t h
other refrigerant oils.
1.0 m m
N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
7. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C compressor

(A). Be careful not to damage the radiator fins w h e n
r e m o v i n g the compressor.

absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it m a y
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins w h e n
installing the compressor and the A/C condenser
fan shroud.
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m ,
16.2 Ibfft)
21-89
A / C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, or
other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch
set (see page 21-91).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the
pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set w i t h a new one
if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag (see page
21-91).
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and the

pressure plate (B) all the w a y around. Ifthe clearance
is not w i t h i n specified limits, remove the pressure
plate (see page 21-91) and add or remove shims as
needed to increase or decrease clearance.
Clearance:
0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in)
NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses:

0.1 m m , 0.3 m m , and 0.5 m m .
21-90
4. Measure the resistance of the field coil. I f t h e

resistance is not w i t h i n specifications, replace the
field coil (see page 21-91).
Field Coil Resistance:
3.9-4.30 at 68 F (20 C)
un
A / C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore J37872,
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring
(A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley (B).
Be careful not to damage the pulley or the A/C
compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure

plate (A) with a commercially available A/C clutch
holder (B).
B
B
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking

care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs
adjustment, increase or decrease the number and
thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the
pressure plate, and recheck its clearance (see page
21-90).
4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal

(A) and bracket (B). Disconnect the connector (C) from
the field coil, then remove the wire harness clip (D).
Remove the snap ring (E) with snap ring pliers, then
remove the field coil (F). Be careful not to damage the
field coil or the A/C compressor.
NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses:

0.1 m m , 0.3 m m , and 0.5 m m .
B
Replace.
A
(cont'd)
21-91
A / C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
(cont'd)
A / C Compressor Relief Valve

Replacement
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of

1. Recover the refrigerant with a

Install the field coil with the wire side facing d o w n ,

and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in
the A/C compressor.
Clean the pulley and A/C compressor sliding
surfaces with contact cleaner or other
non-petroleum solvent.

3. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter f r o m entering the
system and the A/C compressor oil f r o m running out.
Install new snap rings, note the installation

direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the
groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be
damaged by the pulley.
A
13.2 N m
(1.35 k g f m , 9.7 Ibfft)
4. Clean the mating surfaces.

5. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing
it.
6. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
7. Charge the system (see page 21-96).
21-92
DB
A / C Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling
charging station (see page 21-95).
5. Remove the bolts, nut, and the ATF cooler bracket (A),
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the front receiver

line (A) f r o m the A/C condenser. Remove the O-ring
L o o s e
n the bolts, then remove the A/C condenser
upper mount brackets (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
21-93
A / C Condenser Replacement
(cont'd)
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
7. Remove the A/C condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be

careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser
fins when removing the A/C condenser.
NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible to

prevent the system from absorbing moisture f r o m the
air.
1. Remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-93).
2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the A/C
condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) and the desiccant
(C).
8. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of

If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
2.9 N-m
(0.3 k g f m , 2.1 Ibfft)
3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of


absorption.
Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin

coat of refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings

Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made of

plastic and can be easily stripped.
Be careful not to damage the radiator or the A/C

condenser fins when installing the A/C condenser.
21-94
BD
Refrigerant Recovery
System Evacuation
^CAUTION
ACAUTION


NOTE:
NOTE:
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the

w o r k area before resuming service.


manufacturers.

manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant

recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port (C), as s h o w n , following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
1. W h e n an A/C System has been opened to the

atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. Ifthe system has
been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should
be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for
several hours.
service port (C), as s h o w n , following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system.
2. Measure the a m o u n t of refrigerant oil removed f r o m

the A/C system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure t o put the same a m o u n t of new
refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
charging.
3. Ifthe low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa

(700 m m H g , 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is
probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the
system, and check for leaks (see page 21-97).
21-95
System Charging
ACAUTION
NOTE:
manufacturers.
service port (C), as s h o w n , f o l l o w i n g the equipment
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-95).

3. A d d the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
system that was removed during recovery. Use only
DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system w i t h the specified a m o u n t of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the
A/C compressor will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for y o u r
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
600 to 650 g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.32 to 1.43 lbs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-97).
6. Check the system performance (see page 21-100).
21-96
DO
Refrigerant Leak Test
^CAUTION
Be careful when connecting service equipment.
NOTE:
work area before resuming service.
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
2. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system to

the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
600 to 650 g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.32 to 1.43 lbs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a
refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened
(to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do the
refrigerant recovery.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must
be evacuated.
21-97
A/C System Noise Check
^CAUTION
Be careful when connecting service equipment.
3. Operate the blower at each speed with the engine and

A/C off, and check for unusual noises and excessive
vibration. If noise and/or vibration are present, do the
following checks:
- 1 . Ifthe noise or vibration occurs only in a specific
mode or setting, then check these items:
The A/C systemnoise check will help you determine the

source of abnormal A/C system noise.
Operation of the mode control motor, door, and

linkage
NOTE:
Operation of the air mix control motor(s), door(s),

and linkage

work area before resuming service.
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Identify the conditions when the noise occurs. The
weather, the vehicle speed, the vehicle being in gear
or in neutral, the engine temperature, or other
conditions may be factors in determining the noise
source.
Do an A/C system inspection (see page 21-8), and
correct any problems found prior to diagnosing
abnormal noises.
Abnormal A/C noises can be misleading. For example,
a sound similar to a failed bearing may be caused by
loose fasteners, loose mounting brackets, or a faulty
compressor clutch assembly.
1. Inspect the air inlet grille in the cowl cover for debris.
If debris is present, remove it.
2. Sit inside the vehicle, close the doors and windows,
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start
the engine. Cycle the HVAC system through all blower
speeds and all air distribution modes to determine
where and when the noise occurs.
Operation of the recirculation motors, doors, and

linkage
-2. If there is a squeaking or chirping noise, but no
unusual vibration, replace the blower motor (see
page 21-83).
-3. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-82), and check
for foreign material (leaves or twigs, for example)
on the blower motor and fan. If foreign material is
present, remove it, and recheck for noise. If you
don't find any foreign material, remove the blower
motor (see page 21-83), and check these items:
Check if the fan blades are cracked or broken
Make sure the fan retainer is tight
Inspect the fan alignment on the blower motor
shaft
Replace the blower motor if any problems are
present.
4. Set up the vehicle for the running A/C checks:
Select a quiet area for testing
Apply the parking brake
Shift the vehicle in PARK or in Neutral
Start the engine
Set the temperature control button to Max Cool
Set the mode control button to Vent
Set the fan ON/OFF button to minimum (but not
OFF)
Turn the A/C button ON
Switch the compressor on and off several times to
clearly identify the sound during A/C compressor
operation. Listen to the noise while the A/C
compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged. Probe
the A/C system with a stethoscope to pinpoint the
noise.
NOTE: If the noise does not change when the A/C
compressor clutch engages or disengages, the noise
may be caused by an engine-related component.
Probe the engine area with a stethoscope to pinpoint
the noise.
21-98
nn
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and check the
drive belt for excessive wear, oil contamination,
improper routing, or a faulty belt tensioner (see page
4-30). Correct any problems f o u n d . Start the engine,
run the A/C system, and check i f t h e noise is coming
f r o m the drive belt, the belt tensioner or any of the
pulleys. Repair or replace any faulty components.
6. Listen for noises c o m i n g f r o m the A/C lines, the A/C
hoses, the condenser, the evaporator, the
receiver-drier, or the expansion valve, and check
these items:
Noises caused by A/C components touching other
components or the body. Reroute or insulate the
A/C component(s) as needed, and recheck for noise.
Loose, damaged or excessively w o r n A/C
components or mounting hardware. Repair or
replace the faulty component(s) or hardware, and
recheck for noise.
A moaning noise f r o m the A/C suction line. If there
is a moaning noise, check the system refrigerant
charge (see page 21-96). Ifthe refrigerant charge is
OK, replace the receiver/dryer.
A whistling or hissing noise f r o m the expansion
valve. Evacuate the system for 3 hours (see page
21-95), then recheck. I f t h e noise is still present,
replace the expansion valve (see page 21-84).
7. Check the operation of the A/C compressor clutch:

Make sure compressor clutch engages w i t h o u t
slipping. Ifthe clutch does not engage, troubleshoot
the A/C compressor clutch circuit (see page 21 -71).
Ifthe compressor clutch slips, replace the complete
clutch assembly (see page 21-91).
Make sure the compressor clutch disengages. Ifthe
clutch does not disengage, do the A/C compressor
clutch circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-71). If
the clutch circuit is OK, do the A/C compressor
clutch check (see page 21-90), and see i f t h e clutch
is mechanically j a m m e d . If there are no electrical or
mechanical problems with the compressor clutch,
replace the A/C compressor (see page 21 -88).
Make sure the compressor clutch cycles normally. If
the compressor clutch is cycling rapidly, the A/C
system is probably low on refrigerant due to a leak.
Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-97). Ifthe
refrigerant charge is OK, and there are no leaks,
troubleshoot the A/C compressor clutch circuit.
8. Listen w i t h a stethoscope for noises c o m i n g f r o m the
A/C compressor, and check these items:
The noise changes w h e n the compressor clutch
disengages. Ifthe noise does not change w h e n the
A/C compressor disengages, the noise may be
caused by an engine-related component. Probe the
engine area w i t h a stethoscope to pinpoint the
noise.
The A/C system operating pressures are normal. If
the system pressures are abnormal, troubleshoot
the problem using the pressure test table in the A/C
system test (see page 21-100). Correct the
pressure-related problem(s), and recheck for noise.
The compressor hose connections, mounting
brackets, and fasteners are in good condition. If any
of these components are loose, damaged, or
excessively w o r n , repair or replace the faulty
component(s), and recheck for noise. If these
components are in good condition, and the noise is
still present, replace the A/C compressor (see page
21-88).
21-99
A / C System Test
Performance Test
^CAUTION
5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's

recirculation inlet duct.
6. Test conditions:

A v o i d direct sunlight.
Open front doors.
Set the temperature control switch to Max Cool, the

mode control switch to Vent, and the recirculation
control switch to Recirculate.
The performance test w i l l help determine if the A/C

system is operating w i t h i n specifications.
Open hood.
Turn the A/C switch ON and the fan switch to Max.

NOTE:
Run the engine at 1,500 r p m .

No driver or passengers in vehicle.

manufacturers.
recovery/recycling/charging station to the
high-pressure service port and the low-pressure
service port, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air temperature.
3. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on
right side, then let the glove box hang d o w n (see page
20-127).
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
21-100
7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes

under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature f r o m the thermometer in the center vent,
the intake temperature near the blower unit, and the
discharge (high) and suction (low) pressures on the
A/C gauges.
HB
8. To complete the vent (delivery)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
Mark the vent (delivery) temperature on the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottomline.
Draw a vertical line f r o m the ambient air (intake) temperature mark.
Draw a horizontal line f r o m the vent (delivery) temperature mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The vent temperature and ambient air temperature should intersect in the shaded area. A n y measurements
outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
Ambient Air (Intake) Temperature vs. Vent (Delivery) Temperature
(cont'd)
21-101
A / C System Test (cont'd)
9. To complete the high side (discharge) pressure/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
Mark the high side (discharge) pressure on the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottomline.
Draw a horizontal line f r o m the high side (discharge) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The high side pressure and ambient air temperature should intersect in the shaded area. A n y measurements
Ambient Air (Intake) Temperature vs. High Side (Discharge) Pressure
21-102
IB
10. To complete the low side (suction) pressure/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
Mark the low side (suction) pressure along the vertical line.
Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature along the bottomline.
Draw a horizontal line f r o m the low side (suction) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The low side pressure and ambient air temperature should intersect in the shaded area. A n y measurements
Ambient Air (Intake) Temperature vs. Low Side (Suction) Pressure
AMBIENT AIR (INTAKE) TEMPERATURE
(cont'd)
21-103
A / C System Test (cont'd)
Pressure Test
Test results
Discharge
(high)
pressure
abnormally
high
Discharge
pressure
abnormally
low
Suction (low)
pressure
abnormally
low
Suction
pressure
abnormally
high
Suction and
discharge
pressures
abnormally
high
Suction and
discharge
pressures
abnormally
low
Refrigerant
leaks
Related s y m p t o m s
After stopping A/C compressor,
pressure drops about 196 kPa
(2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi) quickly, and
then falls gradually.
Reduced or no airflow through
A/C condenser.
2
Line to A/C condenser is

excessively hot.
High and low-pressures are
balanced soon after stopping A/C
compressor. Low side is higher
than normal.
Outlet of expansion valve is not
frosted, low-pressure gauge
indicates v a c u u m .
Expansion valve is not frosted,
and low-pressure line is not cold.
Low-pressure gauge indicates
vacuum.
Discharge temperature is low, and
the airflow f r o m vents is
restricted.
Expansion valve is frosted.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and
inlet is w a r m (should be w a r m
during operation).
Low-pressure hose and service
port are cooler than the
temperature around evaporator.
Suction pressure is lowered w h e n
A/C condenser is cooled by water.
High and low-pressures are
equalized as soon as the A/C
compressor is stopped, and both
gauges fluctuate while running.
Reduced airflow t h r o u g h A/C
condenser.
Low-pressure hose and metal

fittings are cooler than
evaporator.
Temperature around expansion
valve is t o o low compared w i t h
that around receiver/dryer.
A/C compressor clutch is dirty.
A/C compressor bolt(s) are dirty.
A/C compressor gasket is wet with
oil.
A/C fitting is dirty.
21-104
Probable cause
Air in system
Clogged condenser or
radiator fins
A/C condenser or
radiator fan not w o r k i n g
properly
Restricted f l o w of
refrigerant in system
Faulty A/C compressor
discharge valve
Faulty A/C compressor
seal
Faulty expansion valve
Moisture in system
Frozen expansion valve

(Moisture in system)
Faulty expansion valve
Frozen evaporator
Clogged expansion valve

Clogged receiver/dryer
Remedy
Recover, evacuate (see page
21-95), and recharge w i t h
specified a m o u n t (see page
21-96).
Clean.
Check voltage and fan r p m .
Check fan direction.
Restricted lines.
Replace the A/C compressor.
Replace.
Recover, evacuate, and
recharge w i t h specified
amount.
Recover, evacuate, and
recharge w i t h specified
amount.
Replace the expansion valve.
Run the fan w i t h A/C compressor
off, then check evaporator
temperature sensor.
Clean or replace.
Replace.
Expansion valve open too

long
Repair or replace.
Excessive refrigerant in
system
Faulty gasket
Faulty high-pressure
valve
Foreign particle stuck in
high-pressure valve
Clogged A/C condenser
or radiator fins
A/C condenser or
radiator fan not working
properly
Clogged or kinked
low-pressure hose parts
Recover, evacuate, and recharge

w i t h specified amount.
Clogged high-pressure
line
Repair or replace.
A/C compressor shaft seal

leaking
Leaking around bolt(s)
Gasket leaking
Leaking O-ring
Clean.
Check voltage and fan r p m .
Check fan direction.
Repair or replace.
Tighten bolt(s) or replace A/C

compressor.
Clean the A/C fitting and replace
the O-ring.
Climate Control
FRONT EXPANSION V A L V E
(Located in the front evaporator core)

Clutch Check, page 21-90
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-91
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-92
(cont'd)
21-105
Climate Control
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
FUSE/RELAY BOX
A/C CONDENSER FAN
21-106
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-74
RADIATOR FAN
BO
HEATER UNIT/CORE

(Without navigation)
BLOWER UNIT
Component Replacement, page 21-83
FRONT MODE
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-79
DRIVER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-77
DUSTAND
POLLEN FILTER
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-80
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

FRONT EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-75
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY
(With navigation)
A u d i o Unit Removal/
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-192
P A S S E N G E R ' S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-195
21-107
Climate Control
NOTE:
There are three methods used to check for DTCs. The recommended method is to use the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS) w i t h the appropriate software, plugged into the data link connector (DLC), then go to B-CAN system diagnostic
test mode A (see page 22-137).
The second method is to run the self-diagnostic function built into the climate control unit.
The third method is to use the B-CAN system diagnostic test mode 1 and mode 2 w i t h o u t the HDS (see page 22-141).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the MICU. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit, (see page
11-226)
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL m e n u .
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to B-CAN system diagnostic test mode A (see
page 22-137). If no DTCs are indicated, refer t o s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
NOTE:
21-108
IB
How to Use the HDS to check for DTCs
NOTE: This method is only available if the HDS can communication w i t h the MICU. If there is a communication problem
w i t h the HDS, go to B-CAN system diagnostic test mode A (see page 22-137).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the MICU. If it d o e s n ' t troubleshoot the DLC circuit, (see page
11-226)
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL m e n u .
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION m e n u .
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
21-109
Climate Control
How to Use the Climate Control Unit Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the f o l l o w i n g :
2. Press and hold the FAN ON/OFF button, then press the REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER button five times w i t h i n 10
seconds. Release the FAN ON/OFF and REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER buttons; then the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
The blower m o t o r should run at various speeds regardless of w h a t the panel is displaying.
If there is any problem in the system, the system flashes "88 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST" or alternately flashes
" 8 8 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST" and one or more of the 14 segments (A through P). Refer to checking for DTCs.
If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
DRIVERS TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
A U T O INDICATOR
WINDSHIELD D E F R O S T INDICATOR
n a e s m /
s.
/
/
//
88
AUTO
L DRIVER J A/C ONOFF
^rsîiii
fflHa
V *
REAR WINDOW D E F O G G E R BUTTON
A U T O BUTTON
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing the repair w o r k , run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
21-110
IH
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. If indicator segments A, B, C, E, G, J , M, N, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST are on at the same t i m e , there may be an open in the c o m m o n ground wire. If no DTCs are
present, the indicator remains blank.
D R I V E R S T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR
C E
A U T O INDICATOR
WINDSHIELD D E F R O S T INDICATOR
B D
V (
mm
L
DTC (Driver's
Temperature Indicator
Segment, A U T O , and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
A and AUTO
B and AUTO
C and AUTO
D a n d AUTO
E a n d AUTO
F a n d AUTO
G a n d AUTO
H and AUTO
J a n d AUTO
K a n d AUTO
L a n d AUTO
M a n d AUTO
N and AUTO
P a n d AUTO
HP
Detection Item
A n open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-142)

A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-143)
An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-144)
A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-145)
An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-146)
A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-147)
An open in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-148)
A short in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21 -150)
A n open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-151)
A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-152)
A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-155)
A n open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-156)
A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-157)
A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-160)
(cont'd)
21-111
Climate Control
DTC (Driver's
Temperature Indicator
Segment, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
AUTO
A
B
C
F
G
H
M
N
P
A and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
B a n d WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
C a n d WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
D and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
Detection Item
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor signal error. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI
system and go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. If no DTCs are f o u n d , replace the
climate control unit, (see page 21-196)
A n open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see page 21-162)
A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or m o t o r circuit (see page 21-164)
A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-165)
A n open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-168)
A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-169)
A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-172)
A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-139)
A n open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-135)
A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-136)
A n open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-175), a short in the humidity sensor
circuit (see page 21-176)
A n open in the A/C pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-180), a short in the A/C pressure
sensor circuit (see page 21-181)
A n open or short in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-137)
A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-184)
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit

The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows y o u w h a t the climate
control unit is receiving f r o m each of the sensors, one at a t i m e , and it can help y o u determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
f r o m FRESH to RECIRC. The air v o l u m e and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control button to the desired test temperature. W h e n selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
" L o " temperature setting will default to M A X COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
" H i " temperature setting will default t o M A X HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
14 t h r o u g h 30C settings w i l l use the automatic climate control logic.
21-112
BB
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps
1 . T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).
2. P r e s s a n d hold both the A U T O a n d R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L b u t t o n s , t h e n start t h e e n g i n e .
3. After t h e e n g i n e s t a r t s , r e l e a s e both buttons. T h e d i s p l a y p a n e l control unit will f l a s h t h e s e n s o r n u m b e r a n d t h e n t h e
v a l u e for that s e n s o r . R e c o r d the v a l u e d i s p l a y e d .
4. T o a d v a n c e to t h e next s e n s o r , p r e s s the R E A R W I N D O W D E F O G G E R
button.
Sensor
Item
Displayed Value
In-car T e m p e r a t u r e
Outside Air Temperature
Radiator Coolant T e m p e r a t u r e
Solar Radiation S e n s o r Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy = 10, S u n n y = 65
C
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Front E v a p o r a t o r Outlet A i r T e m p e r a t u r e
D r i v e r ' s a n d P a s s e n g e r ' s A i r Mix O p e n i n g ( L o w v a l u e i n d i c a t e s c o o l e r air
d i s t r i b u t i o n , h i g h e r v a l u e i n d i c a t e s w a r m e r air distribution)
Front V e n t T e m p e r a t u r e A i r O u t (Fr T A O )
V e h i c l e S p e e d ( V e h i c l e m u s t be d r i v e n to d i s p l a y s p e e d )
A/C P r e s s u r e
R e a r A i r Mix O p e n i n g
R e a r V e n t T e m p e r a t u r e A i r Out (Rr T A O )
R e a r E v a p o r a t o r Outlet A i r T e m p e r a t u r e
Humidity S e n s o r Value
Fog Margin
c
kcal/m -h
2
C
% of o p e n i n g
C
km/h
10kPa
% of o p e n i n g
C
C
%rh
C
NOTE:
If t h e s e n s o r v a l u e d i s p l a y s " E r " t h i s i n d i c a t e s t h e r e is a n o p e n or s h o r t in the circuit or s e n s o r . C h e c k for D T C s
u s i n g the H D S , or refer to c h e c k i n g D T C s by D T C i n d i c a t i o n .
If n e c e s s a r y , c o m p a r e t h e s e n s o r input d i s p l a y to a k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e u n d e r the s a m e test c o n d i t i o n s .
If t h e s e n s o r is out of the n o r m a l r a n g e , refer to t h e s e n s o r test or s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d s e n s o r , a n d r e c h e c k .
5. T o c a n c e l the s e n s o r input d i s p l a y m o d e , p r e s s t h e A U T O button or t u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).
(cont'd)
21-113
Climate Control
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table
C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
32
34
36
37
39
41
43
45
46
48
C
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F
50
52
54
55
57
59
61
63
64
66
C
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
F
68
70
72
73
75
77
79
81
82
84
C
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
F
86
88
90
91
93
95
97
99
100
102
C
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
F
104
106
108
109
111
113
115
117
118
120
C
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
F
122
124
126
127
128
131
133
135
136
139
C
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
F
140
142
144
145
147
149
151
152
154
158
C
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
F
158
160
162
163
165
167
169
170
172
174
C
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
F
176
178
180
181
183
185
187
188
190
192
C
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
F
194
196
198
199
201
203
205
207
208
210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table

Display Reading
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9
B0 thru B9
CO thru C9
DO thru D9
E0 thru E9
F0 thru F9
21-114
C
-1
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
F
-9
-19
-29
39
-49
-59
30 thru
14thru
- 4 thru
- 2 2 thru
- 4 0 thru
- 5 8 thru
16
-2
-20
-38
-58
-74
- 1 thru
-10thru
- 2 0 thru
- 3 0 thru
- 4 0 thru
+ 100 thru
-9
-19
-29
39
-49
+109
Hfl
DTC
U1280
U0155
B1213
B1214
B1215
B1223
B1225
B1226
B1227
B1228
Detection Item or Symptom

Communication bus line error
(BUS-OFF)
Climate control unit lost communication
A n open in the rear evaporator
temperature sensor circuit
A short in the rear evaporator
An open or short in the recirculation
control motor circuit
A problem in the rear blower motor
circuit
An open in the in-car temperature sensor
circuit
A short in the in-car temperature sensor
circuit
An open in the outside air temperature
sensor circuit
A short in the outside air temperature
sensor circuit
B1229
An open in the sunlight sensor circuit
B1230
A short in the sunlight sensor circuit
B1231
B1232
B1233
B1234
B1235
B1236
B1237
B1238
B1239
B1240
B1241
B1244
B1245
B1246
An open in the front evaporator

A short in the front evaporator
A n open in the driver's air mix control
motor circuit
A short in the driver's air mix control
motor circuit
A problem in the driver's air mix control
An open in the passenger's air mix
A short in the passenger's air mix control
motor circuit
A problem in the passenger's air mix
control linkage, door, or motor circuit
A n open or short in the front mode
A problem in the front mode control
linkage, doors, or motor circuit
A problem in the front blower motor
circuit
An open in the rear air mix control motor
circuit
A short in the rear air mix control motor
circuit
A problem in the rear air mix control
ECU
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
DTC type
Loss of
communication
Loss of
communication
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-134)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-135)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-137)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-142)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-143)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-144)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-145)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-146)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-147)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-148)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-150)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-152)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-156)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-157)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-160)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-162)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-164)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-165)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-168)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-169)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-172)
(cont'd)
21-115
Climate Control
DTC
B2965
Detection Item or S y m p t o m
w i t h rear climate control panel (Rear
communication failure)
B2967
A n open in the humidity sensor circuit
B2968
A short in the humidity sensor circuit
B2969
B2979

w i t h gauge control module (WIPSW
message)
A n open in the A/C pressure sensor
circuit
B2980
A short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit
B2983
A problem in the recirculation control

21-116
ECU
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
Climate control
unit
DTC type
Page
Loss of
communication
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-174)
Signal error
Signal error
Loss of
communication
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-175)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-176)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-179)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-180)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-181)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-184)
DB
Symptom
Rear mode control doors do
not change between celling
vents (cool) and floor vents
(hot)
Voice communication does
not work
Audio-HVAC does not
display audio or climate
control information
Blower, heater controls,
and A/C do not work
Rear mode control motor circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-186)
Navigation communication line circuit

Audio communication line circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-190)
Climate control unit power, ground, and
communication circuit troubleshooting (see page
21-187)
Also check for

Climate control unit DTCs (see page 21-108)
Blown fuse No. 36 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Blown fuse No. 36(10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
Poor ground at G403
Blown fuse No. 7 (30 A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the
Poor ground at G202
Climate control unit DTCs (see page 21 -108)
Blown fuse No. 6 (30 A) and No. 15 (7.5 A) in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
Both fans do not run at low

speed with the A/C on (but
the A/C compressor runs
with the A/C on)
Radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed circuit

The A/C condenser fan does

not run at high speed (but
both fans run at low speed
and the A/C compressor
operates with the A/C on)

Both fans do not run at high

speed with the A/C on (but
both fans run at low speed
and the A/C compressor
operates with the A/C on)
The A/C compressor clutch
does not engage (but both
fans run with the A/C on)
ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low

voltage (see page 11-182), ECT sensor 2 circuit high
voltage (see page 11-184)

A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting (see

page 21-71)

Blown fuse No. 20 (7.5 A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the underdash fuse/relay box
Blower fan(s) runs slower

than expected in cold
weather

with the climate control unit
or the vehicle
Insufficient heating
ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low

voltage (see page 11-182), ECT sensor 2 circuit high
voltage (see page 11-184)
NOTE: It is normal for the blower(s) to run slowly
until the engine coolant temperature begins to rise.
If the blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length of time, continue to troubleshoot
the problem.
1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6)

2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3)
3. Check the operation of the air mix control motor
and door (see page 21-77)
4. Check the coolant temperature
5. Check the blower motor unit for obstructions
6. Check for air leaks around the ducts and vents
7. Check the inlet hose temperature
If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the hose, a
damaged or leaking thermostat, and a
damaged or leaking water pump.
If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the heater
core. Back flush the heater core using standard
commercially available equipment, or replace
the heater core.
Damaged cylinder head gasket
21-117
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat f r o m the passenger compartment by transferring heat f r o m the ambient air to
the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air w i t h the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat f r o m the ambient air.
The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger compartment.
EXPANSION V A L V E
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
FRONT BLOWER FAN
FRONT EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
RELIEF V A L V E
(Relieves pressure at the A / C compressor
when the pressure is too high)
A / C PRESSURE SENSOR
(Triple function)
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm ,
455 psi), the PCM turns the
compressor relay off to protect
the A/C compressor.
When the refrigerant is above
1,470kPa (15.0 kgf/cm , 213psi),
the A/C pressure sensor
switches the radiator and
A/C condenser fans to high
speed.
2
A / C COMPRESSOR
(Suction and compression)
HIGH P R E S S U R E VAPOR
HIGH P R E S S U R E LIQUID
A / C CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
LOW P R E S S U R E LIQUID
RECEIVER/DRYER
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
LOW P R E S S U R E VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, w h i c h does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
f o l l o w i n g service items:
Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed for the R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil w i t h any other refrigerant oil w i l l result in A/C
compressor failure.
All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange w i t h R-12 parts.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 t o service the R-134a air conditioning
systems.
Always recover refrigerant R-134a w i t h an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
21-118
HD
Humidity/ln-car temperature Sensor
The humidity sensor consists of two sensors. One sensor is for humidity detection, and the other is for in-car
temperature detection. When the climate control unit receives signals about the in-car condition from the humidity
sensor, and judges that the humidity in the vehicle is very low, the climate control unit reduces the compressor run-time.
Engine power loss is kept to a m i n i m u m , and fuel economy is increased.
COVER
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor Quality

The capacitance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance
change of the humidity sensor changes the output voltage.
5
20
40
60
80
100
HUMIDITY LEVEL (%rh)
(cont'd)
21-119
Climate Control
S y s t e m
D e s c r i p t i o n ( c o n t ' d )
A/C Pressure Sensor

The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
NOTE: The pressures can be monitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List.
11
11
SENSOR UNIT
The response of the A/C pressure sensor is shown in the graph.

2
NOTE: When the refrigerant is below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi) or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm ,455 psi), the PCM turns
the compressor relay off to protect the A/C compressor.
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
-99
0
(-1)
[-14]
196
(2)
[28]
3,138
(32)
[455]
kPa
(kgf/cm )
[psi]
2
A/C PRESSURE
Vcc5V
21-120
Vout
GND
(cont'd)
21-121
Climate Control
Tfr
(DEF)
21-122
1
Dual Air Mix Control System
Driver's side: C O O L
Passenger's side: HOT
Driver's side: HOT

Passenger's side: C O O L
DRIVER'S AIR MIX DOOR
P A S S E N G E R ' S AIR MIX DOOR
(cont'd)
21-123
Climate Control
i-Dual Zone and i-Tri Zone Climate Control System (With navigation system)
The i-Dual zone climate control system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to
the driver's and passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates
information such as date, t i m e , longitude, and latitude f r o m the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of the
sun f r o m the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each side.
The i-Tri zone climate control system is an addition of the automatic controls w i t h the temperature and the vent mode of
the air direction to the rear section to the i-Dual zone climate control system.
FRONT DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL
PASSENGERS
AIR MIX DOOR
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or w h e n driving in areas where the navigation system cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the same as a
vehicle w i t h o u t a navigation system.
21-124
HD
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (36P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
19
//
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
//
16
32 33
J |
_n
18
35 36
CONNECTOR A
Wire color
1
2
LTGRN
BLU
Terminal
name
RrDEFRly
BLW-V(Ft)
RED
BLW-G(Ft)
4
5
BLK
PUR
GND
M-COOL(Ps)
M-HOT(Ps)
LTGRN/
BLK
ORN
M-COOL(Dr)
RED/BLK
M-HOT(Dr)
GRN/WHT
M-VENT(Ft)
10
GRN
M-DEF(Ft)
11
YEL
FRS
12
BLU/ORN
REC
13
GRY
M-COOL(Rr)
14
PNK
M-HOT(Rr)
16
LT BLU
ILL+
Climate control unit ground(G403)

Drives passenger's air mix control
motor on the COOL side
Drives passenger's air mix control
motor on the HOT side
Drives driver's air mix control motor on
the COOL side
Drives driver's air mix control motor on
the HOT side
Front mode control motor on the VENT
side
Front mode control motor on the DEF
side
FRESH side
RECIRCULATE side
Rear air mix control motor on the COOL
side
Rear air mix control motor on the HOT
side
18
19
YEL
YEL
ILL
IG2

IG2 power supply
22
23
RED
RED/GRN
S-COM
BLW-V(Rr)
Ground exclusive for sensor

Feed back signal of power transistor
drain voltage
24
BLU
BLW-G(Rr)
Cavity
Description
Signal for rear w i n d o w deffoger relay
Feed back signal of power transistor
drain voltage
Signal
battery voltage(depending on
blower motor speed)
Fan switch to M A X : about 10 V
Fan switch to M I N : about 2 V
Drive on COOL side: battery
voltage
Drive on HOT side: battery
voltage
voltage
voltage
Drive on VENT side: battery
voltage
Drive on DEF side:battery
voltage
Drive on FRESH side: battery
voltage
Drive on FRESH side: battery
voltage
voltage
voltage
With lighting switch ON : battery
voltage
battery voltage
battery voltage(depending on
blower motor speed)
Fan switch to MAX: about 10 V
Fan switch to MIN: about 2 V
(cont'd)
21-125
Climate Control
CONNECTOR A (contd.)
25
PNK
Tarn
26
BRN
Teva(Ft)
27
28
LTBLU
WHT/BLU
Tr
Teva(Rr)
29
32
PUR
BRN/WHT
Tsun
M-HEAT(Rr)
33
BLK
M-VENT(Rr)
35
36
WHT
LTGRN
CAN-HI
CAN-LO
21-126
Inputs outside air temperature sensor

signal
inputs front evaporator temperature
sensor signal
Inputs in-car sensor signal
Inputs rear evaporator temperature
sensor signal
Inputs sunlight sensor signal
Rear mode control motor on the HEAT
side
Rear mode control motor on the VENT
side
Drive on HEAT side: battery

voltage
Drive onVENT side: battery
voltage
BB
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
p.
_n
8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CONNECTOR B
Cavity
Wire
color
Terminal
name
BLU
DISP-SI
LTBLU
AC-SI
3
4
GRN
GRY
BUS-DATA
S5V
5
6
YEL
LTGRN
Hum
Pd
Description
Outputs Audio unit A/C communication
data *1
Outputs Audio-HVAC unit display A/C
communication data*2
Outputs Navigation unit c o m m u n i c a t i o n
data*1
Power source for humidity sensor, A/C
pressure sensor, and air m i x control motor
(driver's,passenger's,and rear)
Inputs humidity sensor signal
A/C pressure sensor signal
Signal

about 5V
With A/C switch ON:

about 1.44.8 V (depending on
A/C pressure)
A u d i o unit A/C communication data

clock*1
Audio-HVAC display A/C communication
data clock*2
NAVI communication data clock*1
Inputs NAVI communication data*1
Outputs rear air mix control motor
Drive on COOL side: about 0.5V

Drive on HOT side: about 4.5V
PUR
DISP-CLK
10
11
BLU
ORN
PUR
ACCLK
AC SO
AMD-P(Rr)
12
YEL
AMD-P(Dr)
Outputs driver's air m i x control motor


13
ORN
AMD-P(Ps)
Outputs driver's air m i x control motor


14
15
16
17
18
19
20
*1
*2
BLU
MODE
BLU/BLK
MODE
MODE
LTBLU
PNK
MODE
GRY
MODE
MODE
BLK
WHT
MODE
With navigation
Without navigation
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
front mode control motor signal 4

recirculation control motor signal 3
recirculation control m o t o r signal 2
recirculation control motor signal 1
(cont'd)
21-127
Climate Control
Rear Climate Control Panel Inputs and Outputs
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 12P CONNECTOR
1 l / l / l 91/I/I12I
Wire
color
LT BLU
Terminal
name
ILL +
3
5
9
12
YEL
GRN
BLK
YEL
ILLBUS-DATA
GND
IG2
Cavity
21-128
Description
Rear climate control panel ground(G801)
IG2 power supply
Signal
W i t h lighting switch ON :
battery voltage

battery voltage
21-129
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 5 (30 A)
COoO-
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT
21-130
IB
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 36 (10 A)
<r\_>
FRONT
BLOWER
MOTOR
1
WHT
-/CS-
FRONT POWER
TRANSISTOR
Hi M Jh-
GRN -
BLU RED
BLK
1
DRIVING CIRCUIT
B14
PUR
BRN
B15
BLU/
BLK
PNK
B16
B17
LTBLU PNK GRN
GRN/
WHT
MODE MODE MODE MODE M-DEF M-VENT

4
3
2
1
SUNLIGHT
SENSOR
FRONT
\ EVAPORATOR
I TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
GRY
BLK
WHT
B L U /
ORN
YEL
MODE MODE MODE

3
2
1
RECIRCULATION CONTROL
MOTOR
i OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE
' SENSOR
RED
(cont'd)
21-131
Climate Control
PNK-
YEL-
NAVIGATION UNIT
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
X NAVI
J
777
NAVI NAVI
SI
SO CLK
B4
B20
B21
LT BLU
LTGRN
A1
Rr DEF Rly
ORN
B2
BLU
B10
777
DRIVING CIRCUIT
5V
T
A7
A8
B12
B4
A5
A6
B13
B5
A27
B6
GRY
-GRY-
BLK
GRY
MCOOL
MAMDHOT P
S5V
GRN/ ORN
PUR LT
BLK
MCOOL
MHOT
AMDP
GRY
GRY YEL
LT BLU
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM
S-COM
HUMIDITY
SENSOR
\ IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE
'SENSOR
L l
A/C
PRESSURE
SENSOR
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-RED-
21-132
RED
-RED-
LTGRN
S5V
DRIVER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
RED
-GRYGRY
RED
-RED-
RED
-RED-
-RED-
mi
*1: With navigation
*2: Without navigation
-YEL-
-YEL-
YEL
YEL
2
REAR
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
IG2
I
GRY
REAR MODE
CONTROL MOTOR
M-VENT
-BLKREAR BLOWER
MOTOR
REAR POWER
TRANSISTOR
12
M-HEAT
No.14(7.5A) FUSE
(in the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
YEL
IG2
B11
GRY
PUR
S5V
S-COM
A22
Teva-Rr
A28
GRY
PNK
AMD- MP
COOL
WHT/BLU
MHOT
RED
DASH LIGHTS BLIGHTNESS

CONTROLLER (In the gauge
control module)
B3
5
GRN
GND
BUS
DATA
GND
A4
BLK
BLK
G403
G801
REAR
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
REAR AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM
RED
RED
-RED-
-RED-
21-133
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC U0155: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module
mode A. (see page 22-137)
1. Clear the DTC w i t h t h e HDS.
4. Check for DTCs.
9. Check f o r continuity between the f o l l o w i n g terminals

of the gauge control module 32P connector and
climate control unit connector A (36P).
32P:
No. 19
No. 20

p
1 | 2 | / | / | 5 | 6 / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 11|12|13|14|/|16|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
LTGRN
Is DTC U0155
36P:
No. 36
No. 35
WHT
Indicated?
NO-The system is OK at this t i m e . Check f o r loose
wires or poor connections o n the gauge control
module and climate control unit c i r c u i t a l
menu.
INFORMATION m e n u .
detected?
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-196).B
NO-Go to step 7
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (36P).
21-134
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 j 9 |10|11 12|13|14J/|16|/T18|
|19|/I/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
WHT
LTGRN
Y E S - G o t o gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).B
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the gauge control m o d u l e . H
HB
DTC B1213 or DTC indicator N: An Open in the
Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit

connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and rear evaporator

3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-109)
or climate control unit (see page 21-110).

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|l3|l4[/|l6|/il8|
I19I/1/122I23I24I25I26I27I28I291/I/132I33I/135I36
RED
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1213 or N indicated?
connections on the rear evaporator temperature
sensor c i r c u i t !
6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 21-76), and test it (see page 21-75).
RED
REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R

2P CONNECTOR

climate control unit connector A (36P) and at the rear
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. Ifthe
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe
climate control unit (see page 21-196).B

connector A (36P) terminal No. 28 and rear evaporator

control unit and the rear evaporator temperature
sensor.B
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK?

NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature sensor
(see page21-76).B
C U M A T E CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (36P)

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 [ 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|1112h3|l4L/]l6|/i"l8|
119|/l/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29t/Vl32|33|/l35i36
WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU

2P CONNECTOR

sensor.B
21-135
Climate Control
DTC B1214 or DTC indicator P: A Short in the
Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit


n
f]
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 1 2 | l 3 | l 4 | / | l 6 | / f l 8 |
|19|/M22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29L/|/|32|33|/135|36
RED
4. Check for DTCs.
WHT/BLU
-(OH
Is DTC B1214 or P indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor, and
test it (see page 21-201).
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature sensor
(see page 21 -201 ) .
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|11 12|13|14L/|16|/T18|
I19I/V122I23I24I25I26I27I28I29I/L/I32I33I/I35I36
WHT/BLU
the climate control unit and the rear evaporator
temperature sensor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
21-136
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate
sensor.B
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
21-196).B
DB
DTC B1215 or DTC indicator C and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open or Short in
the Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page 21-109)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1215 or C and WINDSHIELD
indicated?
DEFROST

of climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P) and
the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
f
36P:
No. 22
20P:
No. 18
No. 19
No. 20
7P:
No. 7
7P:
No.3
No.4
No.5

lT2l3l4T5|6l7l7l?
h9l/T/^22l23l24|25|^
YES-Go to step 5.
circuit.
RED
12
s
3
RED
|
WHT
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
W i r e side of
female terminals

6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-80).
YES-Go to step 7.
21-80).l
connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connectors A (36P)
and B (20P).
BLK
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the climate
control unit and the recirculation control m o t o r . H
(cont'd)
21-137
Climate Control
climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals
/ 3
T
4 5 6
/ //
8
WHT

between the climate control unit and the recirculation
NO-Go to step 11.
connector B (20P) terminals as follows.
From terminal
18
19
To terminals
19,20
20

Y E S - R e p a i r short in the w i r e ( s ) . !
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Reconnect climate control unit connectors A (36P)
and B (20P).
21-138

Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before replace
the climate control u n i t . !
climate control unit connectors A (36P) and B (20P)
and at the recirculation control motor 7P connector. If
climate control unit, and recheck. If the
climate control unit (see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) . !
DB
DTC B1223 or DTC indicator M: A Problem in
the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
7. Connect rear blower motor 2P connector terminal No.

2 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
1%

ORN
4. Check for DTCs.

J U M P E R WIRE
Is DTC B1223 or M
indicated?
connections on the rear blower motor c i r c u i t . !
6. Check the No. 5 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and the
No.36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
again, check for a short in the No. 5 (RR BLOWER)
(30 A) and No. 36 (10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t . !

speed?
NO-Go to step 24.
11. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector.
(cont'd)
21-139
Climate Control
12. Check for continuity between rear power transistor 4P

climate control unit connector A (36P) terminals

-1
BLK
1
3 4
P
1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/'|18|
|19|/I/122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29L/T/|32|33L/|35|36
BLU
YES-Go to step 13.

power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G801 (see page 22-59).B
13. Connect rear power transistor 4P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

_ J
BLK
1
3 4
J U M P E R WIRE
ORN

between the climate control unit and the rear power
transistor.B
of climate control unit connector A (36P) and the rear
36P:
4P:
No. 23
No. 24
No. 3
No. 1

l"|2|3|4J5|6|7
8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/'|18|
|19|/L/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33L/|35|36
RED/GRN

speed?
BLU
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Repair open in the ORN w i r e between the rear
power transistor and the rear blower m o t o r . B
RED/GRN
16. Disconnect the j u m p e r w i r e .
YES-Go to step 20.

control unit and the rear power transistor.B
21-140
HI
2 1 . Measure the voltage between body ground and
climate control unit connector A (36P) terminals No.
23 and No. 24 individually.
26. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor 2P

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body ground.

GRY
]2
12|13|14L/Il6iy[l8|
1
| 3 | 4*| 5 | 68|9|10|11
|7
h9L/L/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/l35|36
RED/GRN
BLU
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page

21-206).
YES-Repair short to power in the w i r e ( s ) . B
NO-Go to step 22.
28. Remove the rear blower motor relay f r o m the

dashboard wire harness, and test it (see page 22-96).
22. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (36P).

23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-202).
Is the rear power transistor OK?
g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control unit,
21-196).B
Is the relay OK?

YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Replace the rear blower motor r e l a y . B
29. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor relay
4P socket terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P S O C K E T

PNK
11
3
NO-Replace the rear power transistor (see page

21-202).B
2
4

25. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
Is there battery voltage ?

YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 5 (RR
BLOWER) (30 A) in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box
and the rear blower motor r e l a y . B
(cont'd)
21-141
Climate Control
3 1 . Measure the voltage between rear blower motor relay
DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An

Open in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit
REAR B L O W E R MOTOR R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
f l . YEL

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1225 or A and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the in-car temperature sensor
circuit.B
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 32.

blower motor reiay.B
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see

Is the in-car temperature sensor
OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
33. Check for continuity between rear blower motor relay

NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

(see page21-193).B

connector A (36P) terminal No. 27 and humidity/in-car
BLK

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/I/122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
LTBLU
LTBLU
, n , m
|1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
YES-Repair open in the GRY wire between the rear

blower motor relay and the blower m o t o r . B
blower motor relay and body g r o u n d . If the wire is OK
check for poor ground at G801 (see page 22-59).B
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
4P CONNECTOR
f
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the in-car temperature s e n s o r . B
21-142

connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and humidity/in-car
DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B and AUTO: A

Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit

1 2 3 4 5
=0.
8 9 1011 I2ll3|l4[/116L/Tl8|
19I/V122123124 [ 25 [ 26 [27128129LX[^321333 5]36

RED

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1226 or B and AUTO
indicated?
RED
| 1
121 314
4P CONNECTOR
climate control unit connector A (36P) and at the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
climate control unit, and recheck. I f t h e
climate control unit (see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
(see page 21-193).B
, , 12|l3|l4|/|l6|/fl8|
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 ,I 9 |10|11
|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29L/|/132|33|/|35|36
LTBLU
the climate control unit and the in-car temperature
sensor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-143
Climate Control
connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and No. 27.
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: An

Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
3 | 4 J5 1 6 | 7 1 8 | 9 ho|llll2|l3|l4L^16t^18|
|19L/1/^22|23|24|25^
RED
I LT B L U
MSH

4. Check f o r DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or C and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control u n i t
21-196).

connections on the outside air temperature sensor
circuit.!
21-75), and test it (see page 21-74).
Is the outside air temperature sensor
OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
page 2 1 - 7 5 ) .
1
4]5I
12|13|14L/|16I/T18|
1 1*2 3 |
8|9|10|11
|6| 7
|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/l/|32|33|/|35|36
PNK
IW>
PNK
OUTSIDE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go t o step 9.
control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.B
21-144
HD
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A

Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
l " | 2 | 3 | 4 j 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 110|l 112|13|14|/|16|/TI8|

|19I/1/122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/1/132|33|/135|36

RED
4. Check for DTCs.

is DTC B1228 or D and AUTO
indicated?
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.B
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor, and test

Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
page21-75).B
1, I
J
l l 2 | 3 | 4 j 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/I/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/132|33|/|35|36
PNK
the climate control unit and the outside air
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-145
Climate Control
DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An

Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
12|l3|l4|/|l6|/fl8|
|19L/|/122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/1/132|33|/135|36
PNK
RED
1 ? 2 | 3 | 4 ?5 t 6 J 7 8|9|10|11

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1229 or E and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.l
21-196).

connections on the sunlight sensor circuit.H
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
connector A (36P) terminal No. 29 and sunlight sensor
5P connector terminal No. 4.
iDBBDBBDEIBEEIEDEBEBiQlSlilBill
I 1191/IX|22l23|24|25|26|27|28l29|/\/|32|33|/|35|36|
PUR
PUR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the sunlight sensor.B
21-146
1
connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and the sunlight
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2.
DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A

Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit

n 12|13|14|X|16|/T18|
1|2|3|4|5|6|7 fl
8 |9|10|11
Il9l/Vl22|23|24|25|26t27|28i29|yVl32|33|y
l35|36
/

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1230 or F and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
1 2
3 4 5
SUNLIGHT S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
is there
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.B
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.


12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-194).
Is the sunlight sensor
OK?

sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are
21-196).B
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 2 1 - 1 9 4 ) .
i l l 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 h8|9|10|11
|19|/V122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
PUR

the climate control unit and the sunlight s e n s o r . B
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-147
Climate Control
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: An

Open in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit

ll"2|3|4|5|6|7 8|9|10|11 1 2 | l 3 | l 4 | > | l 6 | y | l 8 |
h9i/Vl22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/L/|32|33|/J35|36
RED
PUR

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1231 or G and AUTO
control unit and the sunlight s e n s o r . B
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the front evaporator temperature
sensor circuit.B
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor,
and test it (see page 21-75).
Is the front evaporator temperature sensor
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-194).
YES-Go to step 7.
Is the sunlight sensor OK?

YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
21-196)B
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-194).B
21-148
OK?
NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature sensor

(see page 21-76).B

connector A (36P) terminal No. 26 and front
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector terminal
No. 2.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR A (36P)

connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and front
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector terminal
No. 1.
11*2 | 3 | 4 ? 5 1 6 1 7 f 8 j 9 | l O | ^ 1 2 | l 3 | l 4 | ^ 1 6 L / f l i
I ? 2 | 3 | 4T5 | 6 | 7 \8 | 9 |10|11|12|13|14M16|/Tl8|
|l9|y^22|23J24|25|26|27l28|29|y1yl32|33M35|36
19b^22|23l24l25l26[27|28|29|yVl32|33iy|35|36
RED
BRN
BRN
2P CONNECTOR
RED
2P CONNECTOR
Y E S - C h e c k for loose wires o r poor connections at

climate control unit connector A (36P) and at the front
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. I f t h e
climate control unit (see page 21-196).B

control unit and the front evaporator temperature
sensor.B

sensor.B
21-149
Climate Control
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: A
Short in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit


l l 2 | 3 | 4 J 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/^18|
|19(/V122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/V132|33(/135|36
RED
BRN
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1232 or H and AUTO
Indicated?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e .

6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor,
and test it (see page 21-75).
Is the front evaporator temperature sensor
OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature sensor
(see page21-76).B
8. Check f o r continuity between climate control unit
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/L/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
BRN
the climate control unit and the front evaporator
NO-Go to step 9.
21-150

sensor.B
21-196).B
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An

Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
36P:
No. 22
20P:
No. 4
No. 12
7P:
No. 5
7P:
No. 7
No.3

4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1233 or J and AUTO

of climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P), and
the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
indicated?
connections on the driver's air mix control motor
circuit.!
1 ?2 1 3 14?5 | 6 1 7 fcl | 9 |1011^12|1^31HI/116{/TI8|

19|Xl^22|23|24|25i26|27|28|29[^>^
RED
H8h
DRIVERS AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
|1|2|3T7SW
.
.
Wire side of
'
I GRY female terminals
RED
Y E L

|GRY
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page

21-77).
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?

NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor (see
page21-78).B
7. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
and B (20P).
YEL
and at the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. If the
control unit and the driver's air mix control motor.B
21-151
Climate Control
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A
Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit

climate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 12.

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1234 or K and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; B1237 or N and AUTO,
and/or B1245 or G, and/or B2968 or A and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST, and/or B2980 or B and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.B
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 6.

connector B (20P) terminals No. 4 and No. 12.

21-77).
YES-Go to step 8.
GRY
n-
/ //
8
1 / 3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL

page21-78).B
connector.
9. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).

YES-Repair the short in the wire(s).l
NO-Go to step 12.
DD
voltage between climate control unit connector B
(20P) terminal No. 12 and body ground.

GRY
n
T
8
1
3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/ //
/ //
n
n
8
3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL
JWire side of female terminals

climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before replace
the climate control unit.B
YES-Repair short to body ground in the w i r e . B
NO-Go to step 16.
terminal for voltage to body ground.

21-196).B
the climate control unit connector B(20P).
Driver's air mix control motor
Passenger's air mix control motor
Humidity/in-car temperature sensor
A/C pressure sensor
GRY
r
/ //
8
3 4 5 6
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

YES-Repair short to power in the wire. This short may
have also damaged the climate control unit. Repair
the short to power before replacing the climate
control unit.B
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
21-153
Climate Control
18. Reconnect the climate control unit connector B (20P)
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (If), and measure the
(20P) terminal No. 4 and body g r o u n d .
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage t o

the voltage reading each t i m e :
Driver's air mix control m o t o r
Passenger's air m i x control m o t o r

GRY
1
^ _ _ ^ _
7F /

A/C pressure sensor
%
5 6
1 / 3
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

GRY
7^
//
p-Tj
1 5 6 / 8
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 20.
climate control unit connector B (20P). If the
connection is g o o d , substitute a known-good climate
control unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original climate control unit
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .

YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
21-196).!
NO-Replace the c o m p o n e n t that caused the voltage
drop.B
21-154
DB
DTC B1235 or DTC indicator L and AUTO: A
Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit
36P:
7P:
No. 7
No. 8
No. 1
No. 2

ORN
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1235 or L and AUTO

of climate control unit connector A (36P) and the
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
RED/BLK
indicated?
connections on the driver's air mix control motor
circuit.!
ORN
RED/BLK

21-77).
D R I V E R S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

page 21 -78), or repair the driver's air mix control
linkage or d o o r . B
control unit and the driver's air mix control m o t o r . !

connector.
(cont'd)
21-155
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and
climate control unit connector A (36P) terminals No. 7
and No. 8 individually.
ORN
DTC B1236 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: An

Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
RED/BLK
M , . . 1
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 1 2 | l 3 | l 4 L / l l 6 | / i l 8 |
|19|/I/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1236 or M and AUTO
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
between the climate control unit and the driver's air
mix control m o t o r . H
21-196)1

connections on the passenger's air m i x control motor
circuit.H
6. Test the passenger's air m i x control m o t o r (see page
21-195).
Is the passenger's
air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control m o t o r
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
7. Disconnect the passenger's air m i x control m o t o r 7P
connector.
and B (20P).
21-156
HD
the passenger's air m i x control motor 7P connector.
36P:
No. 22
20P:
No.4
No. 13
7P
No. 5
7P
No. 7
No.3
DTC B1237 or DTC indicator N and AUTO: A

Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit

4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1237 or N and AUTO
1 ?2 | 3 j 4?5 j 6 \ 7 Is | 9 jiolfl 12ll3|l4]xil6L/Tl8l

19b1yl22|23l24|25i^
RED
PASSENGERS
, I RED AIR MIX CONTROL
111213M 5 l / T f l MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
ORivi I
G R Y I Wire side of
^
female terminals
G
4|5|6l/
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
ORN
C U M A T E CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
Is there
continuity?

and at the passenger's air m i x control motor 7P
connector. If the connections are g o o d , substitute a
known-good climate control unit and recheck. If the
control unit and the passenger's air m i x control
motor.B
indicated?
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e . B
Are these DTCs also present; B1234 or K and AUTO,
and/or B1245 or G, and/or B2968 or A and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST, and/or B2980 or B and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
21-195).
Is the passenger's
NO-Replace the passenger's air m i x control motor
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
8. Disconnect the passenger's air m i x control motor 7P
connector.
(cont'd)
21-157
Climate Control


p .
5 6
8
7
17TTT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J
ORN
CO
/ /
/ //
4 5 6
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ORN

the climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.H
NO-Go to step 11.
connector B (20P) terminals No. 4 and No. 13
GRY
r
1
3 4 5 6
8 /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ORN
YES-Repair the short in the wires.H
21-158

climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control u n i t . B
21-196).B
the climate control unit connectors A (36P) and B
(20P).
Rear air m i x control motor
A/C pressure sensor


18. Reconnect the climate control unit connector
connector B (20P).

1 GRY
n-
/ //
3 4 5 6
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

n-
GRY
/ //
8
1
3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the w i r e . H
Is there about 5 V?

1 GRY
n-
/ //
3 4 5 6
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

climate control unit connector B (20P). I f t h e
control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
Wire side of female terminals -

control u n i t . B
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
21-159
Climate Control
ground, reconnect these items individually and note
Rear air m i x control motor

A/C pressure sensor

GRY
DTC B1238 or DTC indicator P and AUTO: A

Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1238 or P and AUTO
//
1
3|4 5
6 / 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the passenger's air m i x control motor
circuit.B
6. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page

21-195).
Is the passenger's

YES-Go to step 7.
21-196).B
drop.B
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor

(see page 21-196), or repair the passenger's air mix
control linkage or d o o r . B
7. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
21-160

passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector.
36P:
7P:
No.6
No. 5
No. 2
No. 1

PUR

PUR
"l

LT G R N / B L K
I I
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14L/|16|/T18|
Il9|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|yl35|36
LT G R N / B L K
T2 I 3 j A \5 1 6 | 7
^8 | 9
110| 1 i l l 2 | 13| 1 4 ^ 1 e l / T l 8 [ '
I 119|y]/l22J23)24|25|26|27|28|29U1y^32|33M
(k
PUR
3
l^[|l 1/f l/l 1

LT G R N / B L K
P A S S E N G E R ' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the passenger's air mix control
motor.B

between the climate control unit and the passenger's
air mix control m o t o r . B
21-196).
21-161
Climate Control
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator A: An Open or
Short in the Front Mode Control Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1239 or A

of climate control unit connectors A (36P) and B (20P),
and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
20P:
No. 14
No. 15
No. 16
No. 17
36P:
No. 22
7P:
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
7P:
No. 7
indicated?
circuit.H
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-79).

1 T 2 j 3 14]s j 6 I 7 [a I 9 I l 0 i ^ 1 2 | l 3 l l 4 l / i l 6 i / f l 8 i
19|/1^22|23|24l25|26i27|28|29|A^32l33M35|36
RED
H)n i W | 5 | 6 | 7 |
PNK
BLU
BLU/BLK
LTBLU
21-79).H
11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
7. Disconnect the front m o d e control motor 7P

connector.
and B (20P).
FRONT MODE
CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
BLU
PNK
BLU/BLK
LTBLU

control unit and the front m o d e control m o t o r . H
21-162
BB
climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No.
14, No. 15, No. 16, and No. 17 individually.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), and check the same
3 4 5 6
/ //
8
l / 3
4 5 6 / 8 / /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19110
BLU
PNK
BLU/BLK
LTBLU

between the climate control unit and the front mode
control m o t o r . l
NO-Go to step 11.
connector B(20P) terminals as follows.
From terminal
14
15
16
To terminals
15,16,17
16,17
17

climate control unit and the front mode control motor.
This short may also damage the climate control unit.
Repair the short to power before replacing the climate
control u n i t . H
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the front
are g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit (see
page21-196)H

Y E S - R e p a i r the short in the w i r e s .
NO-Go to step 12.
21-163
Climate Control
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator B: A Problem in
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
Motor Circuit
36P:
7P:
No. 9
No. 10
No.1
No.2

GRN/WHT
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1240 or B

of climate control unit connector A (36P) and the front
indicated?
GRN
3U
1 U I 3 14T5 16 I 7 f7\9 |loi^12ll3|l4lx|l6L/Tl8|

/
|l9|y^l22|23|24|2S|26|27|28l29|/ l/l32|33M35|36
connections on the mode control motor c i r c u i t . B
|1|2|3Î5|6|7|

6. Test the front mode control motor, (see page 21-79)
21-79), or repair the front mode control linkage or
doors.
7. Disconnect the front m o d e control motor 7P
connector.
21-164
GRN/WHT
GRN
FRONT MODE C O N T R O L MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

control unit and the front mode control m o t o r . H
in
DTC B1241 or DTC indicator C: A Problem in

the Front Blower Motor Circuit
GRN/WHT
GRN
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |10|11 1 2 | l 3 | l 4 L / | l 6 | / j l 8 |
h9|/L/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/l/|32|33|/l35|36

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1241 or C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the front blower motor c i r c u i t . B

fuse/relay box,, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the

between the climate control unit and the front mode
Are the fuses OK?

21-196)1

again, check for a short in the No. 9 (40 A) and No. 36
(10 A) fuse(s) c i r c u i t . B
YES-Go to step 7.
7. Connect front blower motor 2P connector terminal

No. 2 to body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
h i
I2J
GRN
J U M P E R WIRE

speed?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 24.
11. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector.
(cont'd)
21-165
Climate Control
1 2 . C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n front p o w e r t r a n s i s t o r
4P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d body ground.
18. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d

c l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit c o n n e c t o r A (36P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2
a n d No. 3 individually.

BLK
BLU
RED
1|2|3|4|5|6|7
8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16L/T18|
|19|/M22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 3 .
N O - C h e c k for a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n the front
p o w e r t r a n s i s t o r a n d b o d y g r o u n d . If t h e w i r e i s O K ,
c h e c k for p o o r g r o u n d at G 2 0 2 ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) .
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e ( s )
b e t w e e n the c l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit a n d t h e front p o w e r
transistor.B
13. C o n n e c t front p o w e r t r a n s i s t o r 4 P c o n n e c t o r
19. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e f o l l o w i n g t e r m i n a l s
FRONT POWER T R A N S I S T O R 4P CONNECTOR
of c l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit c o n n e c t o r A (36P) a n d t h e front

BLK
f1
3
J U M P E R WIRE
4
GRN
36P:
4P:
No. 2
No. 3
No. 3
No. 1

B L U RED
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/|18|
|19|/1/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
RED
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e G R N w i r e b e t w e e n t h e front
BLU
16. D i s c o n n e c t t h e j u m p e r w i r e .
17. D i s c o n n e c t c l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit c o n n e c t o r A (36P).
3 4
p o w e r t r a n s i s t o r a n d t h e front b l o w e r m o t o r . B
1 5 . T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).
1 1

Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 0 .
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e c l i m a t e
c o n t r o l unit a n d t h e front p o w e r t r a n s i s t o r . B
21-166
BB
26. Measure the voltage between front blower motor 2P


BLU
RED
l2j
WHT
n
n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 1 2 | 1 3 | 1 4 L / | 1 6 L / ' | 1 8 |
|l9|y1/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29L/l/|32|33|/|35|36
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the front blower motor (see page

21- 8 3 ) . l
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s).B

NO-Go to step 22.
23. Test the front power transistor (see page 21-76).
Is the front power transistor OK?

climate control unit connector A (36P) and at the front
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
21-196)B
NO-Go to step 27.

28. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. (see page
22- 96)
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Repiace the front blower motor relay.B
29. Measure the voltage between front blower motor
NO-Replace the front power transistor (see page

21-76).B
1
2
25. Disconnect the front blower motor 2P connector.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 30.

22-89).B
(cont'd)
21-167
Climate Control
DTC B1244 or DTC indicator F: An Open in the
3 1 . Measure the voltage between front blower motor


Is DTC B1244 or F indicated?

connections on the rear air m i x control motor
circuitH
Is there battery
voltage?

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the front
blower motor r e l a y .
33. Check for continuity between front blower motor
BLK
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the W H T wire between the front
blower motor relay and the blower m o t o r . H
NO-Check for an open in the w i r e between the front
blower motor relay and body g r o u n d . If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 (see page 2 2 - 3 0 ) .
21-168
6. Test the rear air m i x control motor (see page 21-203).
NO-Replace the rear air m i x control motor (see page
21-204).B
7. Disconnect the rear air m i x control m o t o r 7P
connector.
and B (20P).
on
of climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P), and
the rear air m i x control motor 7P connector.
36P:
20P:

7P:
No. 22
DTC B1245 or DTC indicator G: A Short in the
No. 7
7P:
No. 4
No. 11

No. 5
No.3
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (36P)
~\2 | 3 | 4?5 | 6 j 118 | 9 110 M12[ 13|14L/11 f\A\
ll9ly^22l23i24|25|26|27|28l29l/Vl32S33|yl35|36
RED
GRY
(Cn
Is DTC B1245 or G indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e . H
5. Check for DTCs.
<r-pR^P i
PUR
4. Check for DTCs.
REAR AIR MIX C O N T R O L

MOTOR 7P C O N N E C T O R

TGRY

and/or B1237 or N and AUTO, and/or B2968 or A and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST, and/or B2980 or B and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
l/l
YES-Go to step 13.
1
3 4|5|6 V
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
PUR

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R B (20P)
YES-Go to step 8.
climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P), and at
the rear air mix control m o t o r 7P connector. If the
climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe

21-204).
8. Disconnect the rear air mix control m o t o r 7P
connector.

control unit and the rear air m i x control m o t o r . B
(cont'd)
21-169
Climate Control


8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PUR
/ //
3 4 5 6
8
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PUR
4
the climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor.H
NO-Go to step 11.
GRY
11/13
4 | 5 | 6 | / *V\A
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
PUR
YES-Repair short in the wire(s).H
NO-Go to step 12.
21-170

climate control unit and the rear air mix control motor.
control u n i t . B
21-196).B
climate control unit connector B (20P).
A/C pressure sensor
BB
15. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t
c o n n e c t o r B (20P) t e r m i n a l N o . 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

, GRY
/ //
3 4 5 6
8
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
18. R e c o n n e c t t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r B (20P).
19. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II), a n d m e a s u r e t h e
(20P) t e r m i n a l N o . 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

. GRY
1
/ //
1
3 4 5 6
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e . B
16. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II), a n d c h e c k t h e s a m e
terminal for voltage to body ground.
n-F
/ //
8
3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Check f o r a loose w i r e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at
c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r B (20P). If t h e
c o n n e c t i o n is g o o d , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d c l i m a t e
c o n t r o l u n i t a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n
(see p a g e 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .

Y E S - R e p a i r short t o p o w e r in the w i r e . This short m a y
have also d a m a g e d the climate control unit. Repair
the short to p o w e r before replacing the climate
control u n i t . l
(cont'd)
21-171
Climate Control
D T C

DTC B1246 or DTC indicator H: A Problem in

the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit

A/C pressure sensor

4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B1246 or H
/ //
3 4 5 6
8
1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit.H
6. Test the rear air mix control m o t o r (see page 21-203).

YES-Go to step 7.

21-196).
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page

21-204), or repair the rear air mix control linkage or
door.B

drop.B
21-172

connector.
HB
air m i x control motor 7P connector.
36P:

climate control unit connector A (36P) terminals
7P:
No. 13
No. 14
No. 2
No. 1

GRY PNK

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16L/T18|
119|/M22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29L/|/|32|33|/|35|36
GRY PNK
"l 1*2 I 3 14T5 I 6 j 7 1 ^ 1 9 |10|1 l 1 ^ 3 | l 4 l / n i 6 L / T l 8 | '
I |l9ly^22|23l24|25[26|27M
GRY
I^|sl^5l/l7|
PNK

between the climate control unit and the rear air m i x
control motor.H
YES-Go t o step 10.
control unit and the rear air m i x control motor.H

and recheck; I f t h e symptom/indication goes away,
21-196).
21-173
Climate Control
DTC B2965: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Rear Climate Control
Panel
10. Check for continuity between rear climate control

panel 12P connector terminal No. 9 and body ground.
REAR CLIMATE C O N T R O L PANEL 12P CONNECTOR

1/ | 3 | / | 5 7T
l / l / l 9 1/1/112
BLK
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B2965
indicated?
YES-Go t o step 5.
connections o n the rear climate control panel and
climate control unit c i r c u i t . H
6. Disconnect the rear climate control panel 12P
connector.
YES-Go t o step 11.
NO-Check for an open in the w i r e between the rear
climate control panel and body g r o u n d . I f t h e wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G801 (see page 22-59).H
8. Measure t h e voltage between rear climate control

panel 12P connector terminal No. 12 and body
ground.

of climate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No.
3 and rear climate control panel 12P connector
terminal No. 5.
REAR CLIMATE C O N T R O L PANEL 12P CONNECTOR

ll/l3|/|5l/l
Iyl>l9l>i7h2
YEL

.GRN
}\/\
ifi5i?i/i?i/er
|11112|13|14|15|16|17[18|19|20
GRN
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 9.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 12P CONNECTOR

climate control p a n e l .
YES-Go t o step 13.
control unit and the rear climate control p a n e l .
21-174
IB
DTC B2967 or DTC indicator A and

WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the
Humidity Sensor Circuit

GRN
ft
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2967 or A and WINDSHIELD
indicated?
between the climate control unit and the rear climate
control p a n e l .
NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control
panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
page21-196)B
DEFROST
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the humidity sensor circuit.B
Is the humidity sensor
OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 3 ) .
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
and B (20P).
(cont'd)
21-175
Climate Control
the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector.
36P:
No. 22
20P:
No. 4
No. 5
4P:
No. 3
4P:
No. 1
No. 2
DTC B2968 or DTC indicator A and

WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A Short in the
Humidity Sensor Circuit
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A
(36P)

[ T 2 l 3 l 4 T 5 | 6 | 7 f 8 | 9 l10ly1\2|W|14l^16|/Tia
|l9LA^22|23|24|25|26l27|28|29|A^32|33M35l36
4. Check for DTCs.

Is DTC B2968 or A and WINDSHIELD
indicated?
DEFROST
RED'
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure.H
5. Check for DTCs.
and/or B1237 or N and AUTO, and/or B1245 or G, and/or
B2980 or B and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (20P)
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 6.
climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P) and at
the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector.
If the connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
climate control unit (see page 21-196).H
control unit and the humidity s e n s o r . B

Is the humidity sensor
OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 3 ) .
8. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
21-176
HB


CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
. YEL
nIn
4|5|6 \ /
ll/|3
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
1|/13
4 I 5 | 6
\ /
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
Is there
continuity?

the climate control unit and the humidity s e n s o r . B
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
GRY
1I/|3
YEL
4|5|6[/
*\AA
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
Is there any
voltage?

climate control unit and the humidity sensor. This
short may also damage the climate control unit.
control u n i t . l
21-196)B
Passenger's air mix control m o t o r

A/C pressure sensor
YES-Repair short in the w i r e ( s ) . H

NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
21-177
Climate Control
-.GRY
nl
n
4|5|6|/
8 | / M
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

18. Reconnect the climate control unit connector B (20P).
GRY
p
nl
|X
4 | 5| 6
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
YES-Repair short to body g r o u n d in the w i r e . H
NO-Go to step 16.

-.GRY
m-
n
r
1I/|3 4 5 | 6 \ /
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
8 l/l/l
Is there any
voltage?
Y E S - R e p a i r short t o p o w e r in the wire. This short may

control u n i t . B
NO-Go to step 17.
21-178
/s#7ereajboi/f5t/?
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
DB
A/C pressure sensor
-.GRY
il
r
4|5|6|/ B l/l/lr
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
DTC B2969: Climate Control Unit Lost

Communication with MICU (WIPSW
message)
to follow the instructions in the B-can system diagnosis
test mode A (see page 22-137).
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B2969
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose
wires or poor connections on the MICU and climate
control unit circuit.H
X

21-196).!
IMO-Replace the component that caused the voltage
drop.H

menu.
INFORMATION menu.
Is the MICU
detected?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

21-196)1
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector T
(34P).
(cont'd)
21-179
Climate Control
of climate control unit connector A (36P) and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector T (34P).
36P:
No. 35
No. 36
34P:
No. 12
No. 29
DTC B2979 or DTC indicator B and

WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the A/C
Pressure Sensor Circuit


4. Check for DTCs.
12 | 3 | 4 J5 | 6 j 7 I 8 | 9 |lO|ll|l2il3|l4L/|l6|Xl8l
19|/^22|23|24|25l26^^^
WHT
Mm
LTGRN
26 27 28
1
02
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)

Is there
DEFROST
YES-Go to step 5.
WHT
LTGRN
Is DTC B2979 or B and WINDSHIELD

indicated?
continuity?
YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-153).B

NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the MICU and
the climate control u n i t . H

connections on the A/C pressure sensor c i r c u i t . H
and B (20P).
the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
36P:
No. 22
36P:
No.4
No. 6
3P:
No. 3
3P:
No. 1
No. 2

1 ? 2 1 3 1 4 T 5 I 6 1 7 ^8 I 9 110|1 ^ 1 2 | 13| 1 4 L / | 1 6 L / T '
19|yjyl22i23|24|25|26l27|28|29|y1yl32|33M35|36
RED
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
3P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
GRY
LTGRN
LTGRN
GRY
^BrJBBI
lEDEEEEEEBEBEEEEi]
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the A/C pressure s e n s o r . B
21-180
BB
9. Reconnect climate control unit connectors A (36P)
and B (20P).
11. Measure the voltage between climate control unit
connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and climate control
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 4 and No. 6
individually.
'l 1*2 j 3 | 4 s j 6 | 7 [ a 1 9 Il0|ll1l2|l3|l4l/|l6l7fi8r
Il9|/1yl22l23|24[25|26^
RED
GRY
DTC B2980 or DTC indicator B and

WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A short in the A/C
Pressure Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2980 or B and WINDSHIELD
indicated?
DEFROST
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e . H
LTGRN
w
5. Check for DTCs.
[11112|13114J15|16|17118|19!20
C U M A T E CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)


and/or B1237 or N and AUTO, and/or B1245 or G, and/or
B2968 or A and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 6.

climate control unit connectors A (36P), B (20P) and at
the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector. Ifthe

4 | 5 | 6 | / 8 l/l/l
1 ^ 3
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
the climate control unit and the A/C pressure
sensor.B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
21-181
Climate Control
GRY
LTGRN
I"
" | 6 | e P
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

13. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).
connector A (36P) terminal No. 22 and climate control
unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 4 and No. 6
individually.
* l J 2 | 3 | 4 T 5 I 6 1 7 1*8 1 9 I l 0 | l l 1 l 2 | l 3 | l 4 l / | 1 6 L / T l 8 r
19|/|/l22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/l/|32|33|/l35|3
YES-Repair short in the wire(s).H
NO-Go t o step 11.
voltage between body ground and climate control
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 6.
LTGRN
bBBOgBKEUSlKi

Is there about 5 V?
'iMs
4 | 5 | 6 | / *V\A
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

YES-Repair short t o power in the wire between the
climate control unit and the A/C pressure sensor. This
short may also damage the climate control unit.
control u n i t . H

climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the A/C
pressure sensor 3P connector. If the connections are
21-196)B
16. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and disconnect
Passenger's air mix control m o t o r
A/C pressure sensor
NO-Go t o step 12.
21-182
UJD
1|/|3
4|5|6|/ 8

2 1 . Reconnect climate control unit connector B (20P)
l/M
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

GRY
frf
r
4 | 5 | 6 | /fl
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
1L/3
8|/L/|
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body g r o u n d in the w i r e . H

NO-Go to step 19.
GRY
pin
r
1[/|3 4 | 5 | 6 | / 8 l/l/l
|11[12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
Is there about 5 V?
(see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .

control u n i t . H
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
21-183
Climate Control
DTC B2983 or DTC indicator D and

WIDSHIELD DEFROST: A problem in the
Recirculation Control Linkage, Door, or Motor
Circuit

A/C pressure sensor
-.GRY
1I/|3
[tl4 | 5 | 6 | f|/ e l/l/l'

:
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then to

ON (II).
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B2983 or D and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure; check for loose wires or poor
circuit!

21-196).
drop.H

6. Test the recirculation control m o t o r (see page 21-80).
YES-Go to step 7.
21-80),or repair the recirculation control linkage or
door.B
connector.
21-184
BB
recirculation control motor 7P connector.
36P:
7P:
No. 11
No. 12
No. 1
No. 2

YEL

YEL
BLU/ORN
I
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|l9|y1/|22[23|24|25|26|27|28|29 y l/|32|33|/|35|36
/
BLU/ORN
1 ]z j 3 | 4T5 I 6 I 7 fa 1 9 lldRl 12il3|l4l/ll6L/Tl

19l/1^22l23|24|25|26|27l28|29|x1^32l33l/l35|36
YEL
BLU/ORN
iii2i3 MWm
<

YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the recirculation control motor.H
between the climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor.H
21-196).
21-185
Climate Control
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows
circuit.!
2. Disconnect the rear m o d e control motor 7P
connector.

n
n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/I/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
BRN/WHT

4. Measure the voltage between rear mode control
REAR MODE C O N T R O L MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

YEL
between the climate control unit and the rear mode
NO-Go to step 9.
Is there battery

voltage?
YES-Go to step 5.
mode control m o t o r . B
P
II
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|11 12|13|14L/Il6|/Tl8|
I19I/I/I22I23I24I25I26I27I28I29I/I/I32I33I/I35I36
BRN/WHT

6, Test the rear mode control motor, (see page 21-204)
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page
21-205), or repair the rear mode control linkage or
door.B

climate control unit and the rear mode control motor.
control unit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
21-186
Climate Control Unit Power, Ground, and

Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
36:
7P:
N o . 32
No. 5
No. 7
No. 33

1 T2 1 3 | 4T5 I 6 1 7 ^8 j 9 11 ojTl] 12| 13l 14|/116L/T18|
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A ) fuse in the under-dash fuse/

relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. I f t h e fuse blows
again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A ) fuse
circuit.H
119l^TXl22123124|25l26|27128J29JXL^132133|^135136
H X i X T s 1X171
fl
f|
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16L/T18|
|19|/M22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
YEL

are g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
page21-196).l
control unit and the rear mode control m o t o r . B
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 (10 A )
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the climate
control u n i t . B
(cont'd)
21-187
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Power, Ground, and Communication Circuit
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/L/122|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36

of the gauge control module 32P connector and
climate control unit connector A (36P).
36P:
No. 35
No. 36
32P:
No. 20
No. 19

*1 I 2 1 / 1 / 1 5 | 6 | / | / | 9 |loll1 |l2|l3|l4LX|l6r
17|l8|l9|20|2l|22|23|24|25|yl27|28|29|30|/|32
LTGRN

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the climate
control unit and body g r o u n d . If the wire is OK, check
for poor ground at G403 (see page 2 2 - 4 2 ) .
WHT
I - 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 12|13|14|/|16|/T18|
|19|/|/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|35|36
WHT
LTGRN
climate control unit connector A (36P). If the
climate control unit (see page 21-196).H
control unit and the gauge control m o d u l e . B
21-188
Navigation Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Operate the climate control system in several modes.
Is the climate control system OK?
7. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and the

climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 2,
YES-Go t o step2.
NO-Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see
page 21-109) or climate control unit, (see page 21-110)
2. Do the Navi system link, (see page 23-222)

Is the A/C or TALK/BACK

LT B L U
BLU
ORN
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19J20
icon red?
(K)
YES-
(8)
A/C icon is red, go to step 3.

If other icon is red, check navigation system error
code (DTCs)
NO-Go t o step 9
4. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (32P).

between the climate control unit and the navigation
unit.B
NO-Go to step 8.

of climate control unit connector B (20P) and
navigation unit connector B (32P).
20P:
32P:
No.2
No. 9
No. 10
No.4
No. 21
No. 20

9. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (32P).
10. Connect the navigation unit connector B (32P)
terminals No. 4, No. 20, and No. 21 w i t h jumper wires.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P)

LTBLU
BLU
1 | 2 |3 4|5|6
[/ 8
ORN
LTBLU
1|2|3|4|5|/|/|/|9|10
AAAMA
Il7|l8|l9|20|2l|/i23|/l25|26|/|/|/|/|/|/
9 ho
ORN
|11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
BLU
J U M P E R WIRE

LTBLU
n
1|2|3|4|5|//|/|9|10
AAAAAA
|17|18|19|20|21|/123|/125|26|/|/1/1/1/1/
ORN I
BLU
YES-Go t o step 7.
control unit and the navigation u n i t . l
(cont'd)
21-189
Climate Control
Navigation Communication Line
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Press and hold the AUTO button, then press and hold
the OFF button.
Audio Communication Line Circuit

Troubleshooting
With navigation
2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P) and
audio unit connector D (20P).
of climate control unit connector B (20P) and audio
unit connector D (20P).
20P:
No. 1
No. 8
20P:
No. 7
No.6

Is the HEAT/VENT indicator solid with the remaining

icons blinking?
YES-Do the Unit check w i t h the navigation system
(see page 23-229).
PUR
-1
2 I 3 4 | 5 | 6 | / 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

and recheck. I f t h e s y m p t o m goes away, replace the
original climate control unit (see page 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) .
I
1
3 4 |5
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20
1 1 / 13 14 15
1 2
//
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (20P)

YES-Go to step 4
control unit and the audio u n i t . B
21-190
in
climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 1
BLU
PUR
n
1 2

2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P) and
audio unit connector D (20P).
of climate control unit connector B (20P) and audio
unit connector D (20P).
ri
4 |5 |6
Without navigation
| / J 9 10
11 12 13(14 15 16 17 18 19 20
20P:
20P:
No. 1
No. 8
No. 12
No. 11

PUR
BLU

between the climate control unit and the audio unit.B
1 2
4 | 5 | 6 | / 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Connect audio unit connector D (20P) terminals No. 6
and No. 7 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
f |5|6l7|8l/L3
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

BLU
PUR
J U M P E R WIRE
PUR
n
n

BLU
n
!
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9
10
11
13 14 15
18 19 20
YES-Go to step 4
control unit and the audio u n i t . B

button.
YES-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit (see
page 23-125).B
NO-Climate control unit is faulty, replace the climate
(cont'd)
21-191
Climate Control
Audio Communication Line Circuit
Humidity/ln-car Temperature
Sensor Test

climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 1
Humidity Sensor Test

BLU
PUR
9 10
2 |3 l4 I5 I 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21-108)
page 21-193).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (Ii). Measure the
voltage between the terminals w i t h the ( + ) probe on
terminal No. 2 and the () probe on terminal No. 3
w i t h the connector connected.
between the climate control unit and the audio unit.B
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Connect audio unit connector D (20P) terminals No. 11
and No. 12 with a j u m p e r wire.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PUR
BLU
J U M P E R WIRE
VOLTAGE
(V)

button.
Y E S - A u d i o unit is faulty, replace the audio unit (see
page 23-125).B
NO-Climate control unit is faulty, replace the climate
21-192
20
40
60
80
HUMIDITY L E V E L (% rh)
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-193).
100
Humidity/ln-car Temperature
Sensor Replacement
in-car Temperature Sensor Test
20-121).

21-108)

page 21-193).
2. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (A)

f r o m the dashboard lower cover. If needed, remove
the self-tapping screws and adapter (B).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4 P

connector.
3. Test the humidity/in-car temperature sensor while
holding it in front of the dashboard center vent.
Measure the resistance with the system set to Max
Cool.
Measure the resistance w i t h the system set to Max
Hot.
4. Compare the resistance reading between terminals
No. 4 and No. 3 of the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor w i t h the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
j
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be

sure to connect the air hose securely.
1 2 3 4
RESISTANCE
(kn)
14
-10
32 50 68 86
0
10 20 30
TEMPERATURE
104 F
40 C

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-193).
21-193
Climate Control
Sunlight Sensor Test
Sunlight Sensor Replacement

21-108)
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) f r o m the dashboard,

then disconnect the 5P connector (B). Be careful not to
damage the sensor and the dashboard.
1. Remove the sunlight sensor f r o m the dashboard (see

page 21-194).
2. Connect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Measure the

voltage between the terminals w i t h the ( + ) probe on
terminal No. 4 and the ( ) probe on terminal No. 2
w i t h the connector connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under the
light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp.
Voltage should be:
3.63.7 V or more w i t h the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
3.33.5 V or less w i t h the sensor in direct sunlight.
P2P
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the sunlight
sensor (see page 21-194).
21-194
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Test


No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kO.
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P

21-108).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the passenger's air
mix control motor.
I NOTICE
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the
passenger's air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.

specified, replace the passenger's air mix control
motor (see page 21-196).
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the

passenger's air mix control motor, and ground
terminal No. 2; the passenger's air mix control motor
should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the passenger's air mix control
motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the
passenger's air mix control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
P A S S E N G E R ' S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
passenger's air mix control motor (see page
21-196).
needed.
If the passenger's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
21-195
Climate Control
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement

.1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-127), and the
passenger's dashboard t r i m (see page 20-125).
1. Remove the audio unit, (see page 23-125)
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the passenger's

air m i x control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the passenger's air mix control motor
f r o m the heater unit.
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, bolts, and the

brackets (A).
A
3. Remove the self-tapping screws and separate the

audio unit and the climate control unit (B).
4. Install the control unit in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, operate the various functions to see
whether it works properly.
21-196
5. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there


REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

(With navigation)
REAR HVAC CONTROL PANEL
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR

T e s t page 21-204
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-203
Test, page 21-202
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR

T e s t page 21-202
REAR HEATER C O R E
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
T e s t page 22-96
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
REAR HVAC UNIT
Component Replacement page 21-211
21-197

System Description
Rear Heater-A/C Door Positions
REAR H E A T / V E N T DOOR
21-198
BD
Rear A / C Line Replacement
REAR S U C T I O N / R E C E I V E R LINES
F r o n t receiver line to the rear receiver line (16 x 1.5 mm): 13.2 N-m (1.4 k g f m , 9.8 Ibfft)
1 Rear suction/receiver lines to the rear evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
F r o n t suction line to the rear suction line (24 x 1.5 mm): 31.9 N-m (3.3 k g f m , 23.5 Ibfft)
R e a r suction/receiver lines to the body (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
R e a r suction/receiver lines to the body (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 ibfft)
R e a r suction/receiver lines to the body (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
21-199

Rear Heater Line Replacement
REAR INLET HEATER H O S E
REAR O U T L E T HEATER LINE
i > Rear inlet/outlet lines to the body (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
(D Rear inlet/outlet lines to the body (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
21-200
IB
Rear Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test
Rear Evaporator Temperature

Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor, (see

page 21-201)


resistance between its terminals.
1. Remove the center console, (see page 20-115)

REAR EVAPORATOR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the rear

evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the
connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw and
the rear evaporator temperature sensor f r o m the rear
HVAC unit.
3. Pour w a r m water on the sensor, and measure the

resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications s h o w n in the graph; the resistance
should be w i t h i n the specifications.
A
40
32
0
50
10
68
20
86 F
30 C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the rear

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-201).
21-201

Rear Power Transistor Test
SRS components are located In this area. Review the
7. Connect climate control unit connector A (36P)

1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-142).

2. Remove the driver's center console t r i m (see page
20-115).
3. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the rear power
transistor.
No. 4 o f the rear power transistor. It should be about
1.5 kQ.
I f t h e resistance is w i t h i n the specifications, go t o
step 7.
I f t h e resistance is not w i t h i n the specifications,
replace the rear power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the rear blower motor. Rear
power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective rear blower motor.
REAR POWER T R A N S I S T O R
1|2|3|4|5|6|7
1
II
8|9|10|11 12|13|14L/|16L/Tl8|
|19|/I/|22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29I/1/|32|33|/|35|36
YEL
BLU
J U M P E R WIRE
8. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), and check that the

rear blower motor runs at high speed.
Ifthe rear blower motor does not r u n , replace the
rear power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty rear blower motor can cause the
rear power transistor to fail. I f t h e rear power
transistor is replaced, also check the rear blower
motor for binding, and replace it if necessary.
I f t h e rear blower motor runs, the rear power
transistor is OK.
5. Reconnect the 4P connector t o the front power

transistor.
21-202
DH
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test
No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kO.

5. Reconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

21-108).
1. Disconnect the 7 P connector f r o m the rear air mix
control motor.
NOTICE
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the rear air
mix control motor will damage it. Follow the

specified, replace the rear air mix control motor (see
page 21-204).
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the rear air

mix control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
rear air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the rear air
mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool.
When the rear air mix control motor stops running,
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3. If the rear air mix control motor did not run in step 2,
remove it, then check the rear air mix control linkage
rear air mix control motor, (see page 21-204)
needed.
If the rear air m i x control motor runs smoothly, go
to step 4.
21-203

Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
Rear Mode Control Motor Test


21-108)
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the rear m o d e
control motor.

2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the rear air mix
control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the rear air mix control motor f r o m the rear HVAC
unit.
I NOTICE!
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the rear
mode control motor will damage it. Follow the
. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the rear
mode control motor, and ground terminals No. 5 and
No. 7; the rear mode control motor should run
smoothly. To avoid damaging the rear mode control
motor, do not reverse power and g r o u n d . Disconnect
terminals No. 5 or No. 7 f r o m g r o u n d ; the rear mode
control motor should stop at Vent (when terminal No.
5 is disconnected) or Heat (when terminal No. 7 is
disconnected). Don't cycle the rear mode control
motor for a long time.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Make sure the pin on the m o t o r is properly engaged
3. I f t h e rear mode control m o t o r did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the rear mode control linkage
I f t h e linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
rear mode control motor, (see page 21-205)
Ifthe linkage or door stick or bind, repair t h e m as
needed.
21-204
Rear Mode Control Motor

Replacement
Rear Control Panel


SRS c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-19)and the

1. Remove the console rear t r i m , (see page 20-116)
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the rear mode

control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the rear
mode control motor f r o m the rear mode control
linkage (D). Remove the self-tapping screws and the
rear mode control m o t o r f r o m the rear HVAC unit.
2. Remove the self-tapping screw f r o m the console rear

t r i m , disconnect the connectors and remove the
upper duct (A).

m o t o r runs smoothly.
(cont'd)
21-205

Rear Control Panel
Rear Blower Motor Replacement
3. Remove the self-tapping screws and the rear control

panel (A).

1. Remove the center console (see page 20-115).
2. With navigation, disconnect the HandsFreeLink
control unit connector and the USB adapter unit
connectors.
3. Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the relay
socket (B).
4. Install the control panel in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether it w o r k s properly.
5. Run the self-diagnostic function t o confirm that there

4. Remove the bolt and ground terminal (C), then

remove the bolts and the bracket (D).
21-206
DD
Rear Heater Core Replacement
5. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the rear blower
motor (B), then remove the wire harness clips (C).
Remove the self-tapping screws and the rear blower
m o t o r f r o m the rear HVAC unit.

1. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
f r o m the radiator (see page 10-6).

3. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (C) f r o m the rear heater core. Note the layout of
the hose.
Engine coolant will run out w h e n the hoses are

immediately.
C
(cont'd)
21-207

Rear Heater Core Replacement
(cont'd)
Rear HVAC Unit

4. Turn over the carpet. Remove the self-tapping screws

and the clamps (A). Carefully pull out the rear heater
core (B) w i t h o u t bending lines.

1. W h e n the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
f r o m the radiator, (see page 10-6)
recovery/recycling/charging station, (see page 21-95)
4. Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the relay
socket (B).
5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system w i t h engine coolant.
5. Remove the bolt and g r o u n d terminal (C), then

remove the bolts and the bracket (D).
21-208
UB
6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (C) f r o m the rear heater core. Note the layout of
the hose.
8. Remove the harness clip (A).
Engine coolant w i l l run out w h e n the hoses are

immediately.
C
9. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the rear mode

control motor, the rear air mix control motor, the rear
evaporator temperature sensor (with climate control),
the rear power transistor, and the rear blower motor,
then remove the harness clips (B) and the connector
clip(C).
7. Turn over the carpet. Remove the bolt, then

disconnect the rear suction/receiver lines (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
A
B
(cont'd)
21-209

Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and rear HVAC unit (A).
Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting
t h e m to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
11. Install the rear heater core, and the rear evaporator
core in the reverse order of removal.
12. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses.
Install the inlet and outlet hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system w i t h engine coolant.
If you're installing a new rear evaporator, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8).
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on
the container, and seal it t o avoid moisture
absorption.
damage the paint; I f t h e refrigerant oil contacts the
21-210
BD
Rear HVAC Unit Component Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-19) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-21) before doing repairs or service.
NOTE: The rear blower motor (A), the rear heater core (B), the rear evaporator sensor (C), the rear power transistor (D),
the rear air mix control motor (E), the rear mode control motor (F), and the rear expansion valve (G) can be replaced
w i t h o u t removing the rear HVAC unit.
1. Remove the self-tapping screw and the rear evaporator sensor. Remove the self-tapping screw and the clamp (H),
then remove the bolts and the rear evaporator lines (I) w i t h the rear expansion valve. If necessary, remove the rear
expansion valve. Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the rear evaporator lines w o n ' t twist.
Leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you loosen the second fitting.
E
(cont'd)
21-211

Rear HVAC Unit Component Replacement (cont'd)
2. If necessary, remove the rear blower motor (see page 21-206), the rear heater core (see page 21-207), the rear power
transistor, the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-204), and the rear mode control m o t o r (see page 21-205).
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, and carefully separate the left housing (J) f r o m the right housing (K). Remove the
rear evaporator core (L) and plate (M).
4. Reassemble the unit in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items;
Replace all O-rings w i t h new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing t h e m . Be
sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Make sure no air is leaking f r o m the left upper housing and the right upper housing fitting and f r o m the upper
housings and the lower housing fitting.
Install the capillary tube (N) directly against the outlet line, and w r a p it w i t h electrical tape (O).
Before reassembly, make sure that the rear air mix control linkage and door move smoothly w i t h o u t binding.
Before reassembly, make sure that the rear mode control linkage and door move smoothly w i t h o u t binding.
After reassembly, make sure the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-203).
After reassembly, make sure the rear mode control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-204).
21-212
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
SRS electrical connectors are identified by y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
Body Electrical
Body Electrical
B-CAN S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s Test M o d e
Special T o o l s
22-2
Relay and Control Unit Locations

Engine C o m p a r t m e n t
Dashboard
Rear
Roof and Console
Door
Seat
22-7
22-8
22-11
22-12
22-13
22-14
22-16
22-20
Fuse/Relay Boxes
C o n n e c t o r t o Fuse/Relay B o x Index
22-73
Power Distribution
Fuse t o C o m p o n e n t s Index
22-78
Ground Distribution
G r o u n d t o C o m p o n e n t s Index
22-87
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

R e m o v a l a n d Installation
22-89
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Removal and Installation
22-90
Battery
Battery Test
Battery T e r m i n a l D i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
Reconnection
Battery R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n
22-139
22-139
Connectors and Harnesses

C o n n e c t o r Index
C o n n e c t o r t o Harness Index
B-CAN S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s T e s t M o d e
22-93
22-94
22-95
22-140
B-CAN S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s T e s t M o d e
1 a n d Test M o d e 2 ( w i t h o u t t h e
HDS)
S l e e p a n d W a k e - u p M o d e Test
C o n t r o l U n i t I n p u t Test
22-141
22-144
22-146
22-148
22-153
Keyless/Power Door
Locks/Security System
System Description
Tripped Sensor History
D o o r Lock A c t u a t o r Test
D o o r Lock K n o b S w i t c h Test
D o o r Key C y l i n d e r S w i t c h Test
S e c u r i t y H o o d S w i t c h Test
T a i l g a t e Release A c t u a t o r
Test/Replacement (Without Power
Tailgate)
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Test/Replacement
T r a n s m i t t e r Test
22-160
22-163
22-166
22-170
22-174
22-175
22-177
22-178
22-185
22-186
22-187
22-188
22-188
22-189
22-189
Horns
Relays
P o w e r Relay Test
22-96
Ignition Switch
*
*
*
*
Key Interlock S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
Key Interlock S o l e n o i d Test
Park Pin S w i t c h Test
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h Test
Ignition Switch Replacement
22-99
22-100
22-101
22-102
22-103
22-103
22-104
Multiplex Integrated Control

System
General Troubleshooting I n f o r m a t i o n .
System Description
Troubleshooting
A
22-105
22-108
22-112
22-121
22-137
Horn Test/Replacement
H o r n S w i t c h Test
22-192
22-193
22-194
22-195
Exterior Lights
System Description
Circuit D i a g r a m - H e a d l i g h t s
Fog Lights
Brake Lights
Back-up Lights
T r a i l e r Lights
M I C U I n p u t Test
C o m b i n a t i o n Light Switch
Test/Replacement
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input
Test/Replacement
Trailer L i g h t i n g C o n t r o l U n i t I n p u t
Test/Replacement
Headlight Adjustment
22-197
22-200
22-202
22-206
22-208
22-209
22-210
22-211
22-220
22-225
22-227
22-229
22-232
Headlight Replacement
Bulb Replacement
Fog Light R e p l a c e m e n t
Fog L i g h t A d j u s t m e n t
Taillight Replacement
License Plate L i g h t R e p l a c e m e n t
H i g h M o u n t Brake L i g h t R e p l a c e m e n t .
Trailer L i g h t i n g C o n n e c t o r
Replacement
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h Test
Automatic Lighting Sensor
Test/Replacement
22-233
22-234
22-236
22-237
22-237
22-238
22-238
22-239
22-239
22-240
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights

Hazard W a r n i n g S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
Side T u r n S i g n a l L i g h t R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
22-241
22-242
22-244
22-246
22-249
22-249
Interior Lights
22-250
22-252
Front I n d i v i d u a l M a p L i g h t
Test/Replacement
22-255
Rear I n d i v i d u a l M a p L i g h t
Test/Replacement
22-256
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement... 22-256
Interior Light Switch
Test/Replacement
22-257
A m b i e n t Light Test/Replacement
22-258
C o n s o l e Box L i g h t R e p l a c e m e n t
22-260
Courtesy Light Replacement
22-260
Glove Box Light Replacement
22-261
V a n i t y M i r r o r L i g h t T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t . 22-261
T a i l g a t e Latch S w i t c h Test
22-262
Entry Lights Control System

I g n i t i o n Key S w i t c h Test
I g n i t i o n Key L i g h t Test
22-263
22-264
22-266
22-270
22-270
HomeLink Remote Control System

Test
HomeLink Unit Replacement
22-271
22-272
22-273
Power Windows
System Description
Resetting t h e P o w e r W i n d o w C o n t r o l
Unit
22-274
22-276
22-277
22-278
22-281
Power W i n d o w Master Switch Input

Test
Front Passenger's P o w e r W i n d o w
S w i t c h I n p u t Test
D r i v e r ' s P o w e r W i n d o w M o t o r Test
M o t o r Test
Rear P o w e r W i n d o w M o t o r Test
Rear P o w e r W i n d o w S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
Power W i n d o w Master Switch
Replacement
Switch Replacement
22-289
22-292
22-294
22-295
22-297
22-298
22-298
22-299
Wipers/Washers
Rear W i n d o w W i p e r S y s t e m
Description
Circuit D i a g r a m - W i n d s h i e l d
Rear W i n d o w
WiperA/Vasher S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
W i p e r M o t o r Test
W a s h e r M o t o r Test
W a s h e r Fluid Level S w i t c h Test
Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement.
Rear W i n d o w W i p e r M o t o r
Replacement
W a s h e r Reservoir R e p l a c e m e n t
W i p e r Blade R e p l a c e m e n t
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment
Washer Tube Replacement
22-300
22-302
22-304
22-306
22-308
22-316
22-321
22-322
22-323
22-323
22-324
22-325
22-326
22-326
22-328
22-330
Gauges
Self-diagnostic Function
G a u g e C o n t r o l M o d u l e I n p u t Test
R e w r i t i n g t h e ODO Data a n d
Transferring the Maintenance
M i n d e r Data t o a N e w G a u g e C o n t r o l
Module
Gauge Control Module Replacement..
Multi-information Switch
Test/Replacement
O u t s i d e A i r T e m p e r a t u r e Indicator
Calibration
22-332
22-334
22-338
22-343
22-355
22-358
22-359
22-360
22-361
Safety Indicator System

C o m p o n e n t Loc at ion Index
22-362
22-363
22-364
Reminder Systems
22-367
22-368
22-370
22-373
22-374
22-375
22-376
22-377
22-379
Accessory Power Sockets

Front A c c e s s o r y P o w e r S o c k e t
Test/Replacement
Console Accessory Power Socket
Test/Replacement
C a r g o A r e a A c c e s s o r y P o w e r Socket
Test/Replacement
22-380
22-381
22-385
22-386
22-387
22-388
22-390
22-391
22-393
22-394
22-395
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror

System Description
Test
22-398
22-400
22-401
22-401
Power Mirrors
Circuit D i a g r a m - W i t h o u t D P M S
F u n c t i o n Test
Test
S w i t c h I n p u t Test
Power Mirror Switch
Test/Replacement
Power Mirror Actuator Test
Power Mirror Actuator R e p l a c e m e n t . . .
22-403
22-404
22-407
22-408
Power Seats
Circuit D i a g r a m - D r i v e r ' s P o w e r S e a t . .
Front Passenger's P o w e r Seat
P o w e r Seat A d j u s t m e n t S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
M o t o r Test
22-428
22-429
22-430
22-431
22-433
F u n c t i o n Test
D e f o g g e r W i r e Repair
22-436
22-438
22-439
22-439
Immobilizer System
System Description
Circuit Diagram
Information
S y s t e m Check
Status Log
I m m o b i l i z e r Key R e g i s t r a t i o n
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input
Test
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Replacement
22-440
22-442
22-443
22-444
22-446
22-448
22-449
22-451
22-453
22-455
22-457
22-461
Hatch Glass Opener

Circuit Diagram
D r i v e r ' s D o o r Hatch Glass O p e n e r
Switch Test/Replacement
Hatch Glass O p e n e r S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
H a t c h Glass Latch S w i t c h Test
Hatch Glass O p e n e r A c t u a t o r Test
22-462
22-465
22-466
22-466
22-467
22-467
22-410
22-412
22-413
22-414
Seat Heaters
Circuit D i a g r a m - Front Seat
22-425
22-426
22-427
22-427
Rear Window Defogger

22-383
Rearview Monitor Mirror

System Description
Rearview Monitor Mirror Input
Test/Replacement
Circuit Diagram
M o t o r Test
22-382
AC Power Outlet
A C Inverter U n i t I n p u t
Test/Replacement
Power Outlet Replacement
22-420
22-422
22-424
Power Lumbar Support
Moonroof
Resetting t h e M o o n r o o f C o n t r o l U n i t . .
M o o n r o o f Control Unit Input Test
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement...
Seat Heater Test
22-415
22-418
Parking and Back-up Sensor

System
System Description
Circuit Diagram
Parking a n d Back-up S e n s o r C o n t r o l
Unit Input Test/Replacement
22-468
22-470
22-471
22-472
22-485
Parking a n d Back-up S e n s o r S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
C o r n e r Parking S e n s o r R e p l a c e m e n t . .
Back-up Sensor Replacement
22-488
22-488
22-489
Driving Position Memory System

(DPMS)
Circuit D i a g r a m - P o w e r Seat
Power Mirror
P o w e r Seat C o n t r o l U n i t I n p u t
Test/Replacement
Power Mirror Control Unit Input
Test/Replacement
Test
D r i v i n g Position M e m o r y S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
P o w e r Seat A d j u s t m e n t S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
D r i v e r ' s P o w e r Seat M o t o r Test
22-490
22-492
22-496
22-498
22-528
22-532
22-535
22-537
22-538
22-539
Power Tailgate
System Description
Resetting t h e P o w e r T a i l g a t e C o n t r o l
Unit....
Control Unit Input Test/Replacement..
P o w e r T a i l g a t e M o t o r Test
P o w e r T a i l g a t e Inside Beeper
Test/Replacement
Driver's Door Power Tailgate Switch
Test/Replacement
Inside T a i l g a t e S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
P o w e r T a i l g a t e Latch/Ratchet S w i t c h
Test
P o w e r T a i l g a t e Closer M o t o r Test
Drive U n i t R e p l a c e m e n t
Pinch S e n s o r R e p l a c e m e n t
Power Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Test/Replacement
P o w e r T a i l g a t e O u t s i d e Beeper
Test/Replacement
22-540
22-542
22-544
22-546
22-548
22-576
22-578
22-578
22-579
22-579
22-580
22-580
22-581
22-581
22-582
22-582
Body Electrical
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool Number
07AAC-000A1A0
07TAZ-001020A
07WAZ-001010A
22-2
Description
Relay Puller
Back Probe Adapter
MPCS (MCIS) Service Connector
(D
Qty
1
2
1
<D

Tips and Precautions
Back Probe Adapter 07TAZ-001020A
Before Troubleshooting
Some connectors have a clip on their side used to

attach t h e m to a m o u n t bracket on the body or on
another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless y o u first release the lock and remove the
connector f r o m its m o u n t bracket (A).
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay

box.
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
INQTICEI
Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
g r o u n d cable has been disconnected, otherwise
y o u w i l l damage the alternator diodes.
Do not attempt to crank the engine w i t h the battery
g r o u n d cable loosely connected or y o u will severely
damage the w i r i n g .
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose
w i r e terminals.
Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their

wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Always reinstall plastic covers.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed w i t h

dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
22-3
Body Electrical
Check for loose retainers (A) and rubber seals (B).
Handling Wires and Harnesses

Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame w i t h
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
The backs of some connectors are packed w i t h

dielectric grease. A d d grease if necessary. If the
grease is contaminated, replace it.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere w i t h any m o v i n g parts.
Keep wire harnesses away f r o m exhaust components
and other hot parts, f r o m sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and f r o m exposed screws and bolts.
Seat g r o m m e t s in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave g r o m m e t s distorted (B).
Insert the connector all the w a y and make sure it is

securely locked.
Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
22-4
Testing and Repairs
Five-step Troubleshooting
Do not use wires or harnesses w i t h broken insulation.

Replace t h e m or repair t h e m by wrapping the break
with electrical tape.
1. Verify The Complaint:
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS w i r i n g .

If there is an open or damage is SRS w i r i n g or
terminals, replace the harness.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under t h e m .
W h e n using electrical test equipment, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
this manual.
If possible, insert the probe of the tester f r o m the wire
side (except waterproof connector).
BODY
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to

verify the client complaint. Note the symptoms. Do
not begin disassembly or testing until y o u have
narrowed d o w n the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic:
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
Determine h o w the circuit is supposed to w o r k by
tracing the current paths f r o m the power feed through
the circuit components to ground. If several circuits
fail at the same t i m e , the fuse or a ground is a likely
cause.
Based on the s y m p t o m s and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The CircuitMake circuit tests to check the diagnosis y o u made in
step 2. Keep in m i n d that a logical, simple procedure
is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the
most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at
points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A.
Once the specific problem is identified, make the

repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem.
If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of
the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems
turn up and the original problem does not recur.
Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
22-5
Body Electrical
Wire Color Codes
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A) located

under the driver's side of the dashboard.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire

colors in the circuit schematics:
WHT
White
YEL
Yellow
BLK
Black
BLU
Blue
GRN
Green
RED
Red
ORN
Orange
PNK
Pink
BRN
Brown
GRY
Gray
PUR
Purple
LTBLU
Light Blue
LT GRN
Light Green
The w i r e insulation has one color or one color w i t h
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.

3. Make sure HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle, if it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
4. Enter BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the desired
SYSTEM MENU.
NOTE: If the DTCs do not pertain to the selected
m e n u , select the All DTC Check icon to view all Body
Electrical DTCs.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note t h e m , and go to the
indicated DTC troubleshooting.
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda

Diagnostic System (HDS)
NOTE: For specific operation, refer to the user's manual
that came w i t h the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
Make sure the HDS is loaded w i t h the latest software.
22-6
BODY
Engine Compartment
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
ACTIVE CONTROL
ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY
, FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
IGNITON COIL RELAY

A / C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1 (Fl MAIN)
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL S Y S T E M (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY
PCM
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
RELAY 1 (FORWARD)
RELAY 2 (BACKWARD)
22-7

Dashboard
View of front side
22-8
View of rear side
CONSOLE ACCESSORY
HATCH GLASS RELAY

" Wire colors: GRY, BRN/BLK,
RED/BLK, and GRY
BODY
FRONT ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET RELAY
rWire colors: BLU, WHT, BLKl
[ a n d PUR
J
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT/
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
HEADLIGHT HIGH
BEAM RELAY
r Wire colors: GRN, WHTl
L BLU, and GRN
J
FOG LIGHT RELAY

Wire colors: BLU, PNK,1
LT BLU, and BLU
I
T Wire colors: BRN, WHT, 1
L BLU/WHT, and LTGRN J
CARGO AREA ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET RELAY
1
Wire colors: GRN, WHT, BLKl
and PUR
IG2 CUT RELAY
r Wire colors: ORN, BLU/WHT, 1
L GRN, and LTGRN
J

or
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
(cont'd)
22-9

Dashboard (cont'd)
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
22-10
A C INVERTER UNIT
(with rear entertainment system

and/or
navigation system)
Rear
22-1

Roof and Console
or
HVAC CONTROL PANEL
22-12
Door
DRIVER'S DOOR
POWER MIRROR
CONTROL UNIT
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

(Built into the power window master switch)
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S DOOR
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

(Has built-in control unit)
22-13

Seat
22-14
BODY
Canada models
S E C O N D ROW S E A T
LEFT SECOND ROW S E A T

HEATER R E L A Y (LOW)
r Wire colors: B L U , PNK, 1
L BLK, BLK, and L T G R N i
RIGHT S E C O N D ROW S E A T
HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH)
r Wire colors: PNK, GRN, 1
L BLK, and GRY
J
LEFT S E C O N D ROW S E A T
HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH)
[ W i r e colors: PNK, GRN, 1
L BLK, and G R Y
J
22-15

Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is
preceded by the letter " C " for connectors " G " for ground terminals or " T " for non-ground terminals.
Location
Harness
Engine
Compartment
Dashboard
A/C w i r e harness
Battery ground cable
Others (Floor, Door,

Tailgate, and Roof)
C351,C461
(-),G1
Cable reel subharness
Console light subharness
C821
Console subharness
C811
Dashboard wire harness

(View of driver's side)

(View of middle side)
C203, C204, C205,

C401, C402, C421,
C422, C701,C751,
C752,S1,S2
G401
C403, C404, C423,
C424, C425, C426,
C451,C452, C453,
C454, C 4 6 1 S 3 S4
G402, G405
C303, C304, C305,
C405, C405, C711,
C761
G403, G404
/

(View of passenger's side)
C753
Driver's door subharness

(Without DPMS)
C753
Driver's door wire harness

(With DPMS)
C751,C752
C753, C754

(Without DPMS)
C751,C752
C753, C754
22-16
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-71)
Connector t o
Harness
Index (see
page 22-20)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-72)
Connector t o
Harness
Index (see
page 22-61)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-61)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-34)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-38)

(With DPMS)
Driver's seat wire harness
Notes
C512
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-42)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-63)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-64)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-63)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-64)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-68)
Harness
Location
ECT sensor subharness
Engine
Compartment
C301
Engine ground cable
T2, G2
Engine m o u n t control
solenoid subharness
C302
Engine w i r e harness
T101,T102,C101,
C102,C111,C112,
0113,0114,0151,
C152,
G101
Dashboard

Tailgate, and Roof)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-30)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-20)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-30)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-22)
Floor wire harness (left

branch)
C206, C207, C208,

C307, C308, C401,
C402
G501
Floor w i r e harness (right

branch)
C306, C403, C404,

C405
Front passenger's door

wire harness
C761
Front passenger's seat

wire harness
C501,C502, C512,
C531,C551,C552,
C561,C562, C771,
C851
G503, G504
C503, C521,C541,
C781,G502, G505
C521
Knock sensorsubharness
C151
Left engine compartment

wire harness
C101
G301,G302, G303
Notes
C201,C202, C203,
C204, C205, C206,
C207, C208
Left rear door subharness
C772
Left rear door wire harness
C771,C772
Left second row seat

heater subharness (With
second row seat heater)
C531
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-44)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-48)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-65)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-69)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-24)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-32)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-66)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-66)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-70)
(cont'd)
22-17

Connector Index (cont'd)
Harness
Location
Engine
Compartment
Dashboard

subharness (Without
rearview camera)

Tailgate, and Roof)
C661
C801,C802
Rear A/C panel wire

harness
Rear A/C wire harness
C451,C452, C453,
C454
C801,C802, C811,
C821,C851
G801
Rear bumper subharness

(With parking and back-up
sensor system)
C563
Rear bumper wire harness

(With power tailgate)
C561,C562, C563
Rear subframe subharness

(4WD)
C553, T15
Rear subframe wire

harness
C551,C552, C553
Rear w i n d o w defogger
subharness
C671
Rear wire harness
C501,C502, C503,
C601,C602, C603
G601,G6G2
C711
RES wire harness (With

rear entertainment system)
Right engine compartment

w i r e harness
C102, C301,C302
G201,G202
C201,C202, C303,
C304, C305, C306,
C307, C308, C351
Right rear door subharness
C782
Right rear door w i r e

harness
C781,C782
Right second row seat

heater subharness (With
second row seat heater)
C541
22-18
Notes
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-53)
Connector t o
Harness
Index (see
page 22-61)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-59)
Connector t o
Harness
Index (see
page 22-46)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-46)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-55)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-55)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-52)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-50)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-56)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-28)
Connector t o
Harness
Index (see
page 22-67)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-67)
Connector to
Harness
index (see
page 22-70)
Harness
Location
Engine
Compartment
Roof w i r e harness (With

moonroof)
C701

Tailgate, and Roof)
G701
Roof wire harness (Without

moonroof)
C701
G701
Shift solenoid wire harness
C152
Starter cable
( + ) , T 1 , T 4 , T5
Dashboard
Tailgate subharness
C651,C652, C661
Tailgate w i r e harness
C601,C602, C603,
C651,C652, C671
Transmission ground
cable
T3, G3
Notes
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-56)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-58)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-26)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-20)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-53)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-52)
Connector to
Harness
Index (see
page 22-20)
22-19

Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
T1
Connector or Terminal
Ref
1
Cavities
T4
T5
2
8
Location
Right side of engine
compartment
Left side of engine compartment
(+ )
Battery
Connects to
Notes
Starter motor
Auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box
Battery positive terminal
Battery Ground Cable

Ref
5
4
Cavities
Location
Ref
9
Cavities
T2
G2
10
Location
compartment
side of engine compartment
(-)
G1
Connects to
Battery negative terminal
Body ground, via battery
ground cable
Notes
Engine Ground Cable

Connects to
Notes
Engine
Body ground, via engine
ground cable
Transmission Ground Cable

T3
G3
22-20
Ref
7
6
Cavities
Location
Connects to
Transmission housing
Body ground, via
transmission ground cable
Notes
TRANSMISSION
GROUND C A B L E
(cont'd)
22-21

Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness
Location
Middle of engine compartment
A/C compressor clutch
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A
valve B
valve C
Alternator
ATF temperature sensor
CKP sensor
CMP sensor
Engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor 1
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
and position sensor
Front A/F sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch
Front secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) (Bank 2, Sensor 2)
Ignition coil No. 1
Ignition coil No. 2
Ignition coil No. 3
Ignition coil No. 4
Ignition coil No. 5
Ignition coil No. 6
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 2
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 6
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
Intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor/Intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor
Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor
PCM connector B
Ref
45
26
Cavities
1
2
27
22
46
28
11
51
37
4
2
3
3
2

17
36
2
5

39
48
38
6
1
4
Exhaust manifold (front bank)

Exhaust manifold (front bank)
4
7
10
44
42
40
2
5
8
49
43
41
33
52
35
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
5
3

23
30
54
49
PCM connector C
55
49
Rear A/F sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)

Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch
Rear secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil pressure switch
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A
(Bankl)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A
(Bank 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B
(Bankl)
12
14
13
6
1
4

compartment
compartment
Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
1
15
3
2

50
16
22-22
(cont'd)
22-23

Engine Wire Harness (cont'd)
Starter solenoid
Throttle position sensor/Throttle
actuator
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch
C101
Ref
34
21
Cavities
1
6
29
18
10
1
32
25
24
C102
53
13
6
9
19
20
56
31
57
24
24
24
12
1
5
T
T102
47
G101
58

compartment
compartment
compartment
Ref
3
56
Cavities
1
1
Location
C111
C112
C113
C114
C151
C152
T101
(Junction connector)
Location
Connects to
Notes

wire harness
wire harness
Knock sensor subharness

Shift solenoid wire harness
Alternator
Body ground, via engine
wire harness
Knock Sensor Subharness

Knock sensor
C151
22-24
Connects to
Engine wire harness
Notes
(cont'd)
22-25

C o n n e c t o r
t o H a r n e s s
I n d e x ( c o n t ' d )
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Shift solenoid valve D
C152
22-26
Ref
3
1
2
4
5
Cavities
1
1
1
1
5
Location
In the transmission
In the transmission
In the transmission
In the transmission
Connects to
Engine wire harness
Notes
(cont'd)
22-27

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Location
Front of engine compartment
compartment
Under left side of dash
Under right side of dash
A/C condenser fan motor
A/C pressure sensor
Ref
22
10
Cavities
Accelerator pedal position (APP)sensor

Cargo area accessory power socket
relay
Engine mount control unit
Fog light relay
Headlight high beam relay
Horn (High)
Horn (Low)
Optional connector (for fog light)
PCM connector A
13
14
56
6
4
4
49
55
54
29
44
32
48
16
4
4
1
1
1
49
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch
11
Radiator fan motor

Rear engine mount actuator
26
12
2
2
Rear window washer motor
39
Right daytime running light

Right fog light
34
37
2
2
Right front corner parking sensor
42
Right front impact sensor
43
Right front initiator
45
Right front parking/turn signal light

Right front side marker light
Right front wheel speed sensor
40
41
36
3
2
2
33
Right headlight (high)
38
Right headlight (low)
Security hood switch
23
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
15
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F
16
(see page 22-76)
17
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G
(see page 22-76)
*1: With security
*2: With parking and back-up sensor system
2
2
2
42

compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Behind right headlight
Behind right side of front
bumper
bumper
bumper
bumper
compartment
34
21
22-28
2
3
Connects to
Notes
LX
LX
*2
*1
(cont'd)
22-29

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (cont'd)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector A
(ELD) (see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector D
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector E
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector F
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector G
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector H
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector J
(see page 22-73)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector K
(see page 22-73)
Washer fluid level switch
Ref
2
Cavities
3
10
20
31
Windshield washer motor
35
C102
47
13
C201
19
23
C202
18
C301
C302
24
28
2
2

C303
C304
C305
C306
C307
C308
C351
G201
51
50
52
53
21
20
1
30
20
4
16
23
18
3
2
G202
46
Location
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
bumper
compartment
compartment

compartment
Connects to
Notes
Engine wire harness

wire harness
wire harness
ECT sensor subharness
Engine mount control
solenoid subharness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
A/C wire harness
Body ground, via right
engine compartment wire
harness
Body ground, via right
engine compartment wire
harness
ECT Sensor Subharness

ECT sensor 2
C301
Ref
25
24
Cavities
2
2
Location
Cavities
2
2
Location
Connects to
Notes

wire harness
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Subharness

Front engine mount actuator
C302
22-30
Ref
27
28
Connects to
wire harness
Notes
(cont'd)
22-31

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Ref
5
9
29
25
23
22
21
24
20
18
28
27
30
1
Cavities
2
4
2
2
6
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
5
10
3
6
17
7
4
22
5
1
23
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
C208
G301
11
12
13
16
15
14
26
24
4
8
18
2
1
G302
19
Leftside of engine compartment
G303
Brake fluid level switch
Hatch glass relay
Left daytime running light
Left fog light
Left front corner parking sensor
Left front impact sensor
Left front initiator
Left front parking/turn signal light
Left front side marker light
Left front wheel speed sensor
Left headlight (high)
Left headlight (low)
Outside air temperature sensor
Rear window wiper motor relay 1
(forward)
Rear window wiper motor relay 2
(backward)
Starter cut relay 2
VSA modulator-control unit
Windshield wiper motor
C101
C201
*1: With parking and back-up sensor system

*2: With power tailgate
22-32
Location
Behind left headlight
Behind left side of front bumper
Behind leftside of front bumper
In the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box
In the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box
Connects to
Notes
LX
*1
Engine wire harness

wire harness
wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Body ground, via left engine
compartment wire harness
*2
(cont'd)
22-33

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)
ACC cut relay
Automatic lighting control unit
Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder
Cable reel connector A
Ref
27
29
37
19
Combination light switch

32
Driver's airbag inflator
21
Front accessory power socket relay
23
Gauge control module
14
Hazard warning switch
22
28
IG2 cut relay
Ignition switch
30
Immobilizer-keyless control unit
25
Left tweeter
8
Optional connector (for left running
48
board light)
Optional connector (for remote engine
10
start (1))
10
start (2))
Parking and back-up sensor control unit
31
Parking and back-up sensor switch
2
Steering angle sensor
33
Steering lock assembly (ignition
26
switch/ignition key light/key interlock
solenoid)
TPMS control unit
13
47
Trailer electric brake connector
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector C
36
(see page 22-76)
34
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector D
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector J
11
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector K
12
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M
9
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector N
6
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P
7
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q
5
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector R
3
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector S
42
(see page 22-76)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector T
35
(see page 22-76)
VSA OFF switch
1
VTM-4 relay
20
Wiper/washer switch
24
*: With parking and back-up sensor system
22-34
Cavities
5
14
2
20
Location
In steering column
12
4
4
32
5
5
5
7
2
2
In steering column
In steering column
In steering column
In steering column
16
6
5
6

In steering column
In steering column
20
4
4

10
14
10
16
20
20
34
5
5
8

In steering column
Connects to
Notes
Cable reel subharness via

cable reel
*
*
4WD
(cont'd)
22-35

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side) (cont'd)
C203
Ref
39
Cavities
24
Location
C204
40
C205
38
C401
C402
C402
C421 (F-CAN junction connector)
C422 (Junction connector)
C701
C701
C751
43
44
44
17
18
4
4
46
18
34
16
22
22
20
28
24
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
C752
45
S1 (Thermal cap)
S2 (Thermal cap)
G401
16
15
41
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
4WD models and 2WD Touring models

2WD except USA Touring models
Without moonroof
With moonroof
22-36
left side
left side
left side
left side
left side
left side
left side
left side
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash

Connects to
wire harness
wire harness
wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Roof wire harness

Roof wire harness
With DPMS
Without DPMS
With DPMS
Without DPMS
Body ground, via dashboard

wire harness
Notes
*1
*2
*3
*4
(cont'd)
22-37

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle side)
Location
Cavities
Ref
6
Middle of dash
42
A/T gear position indicator panel
light/park-pin switch/D3 switch
2
Middle of dash
43
A/T shift lock solenoid
12
Middle of dash
31
AC inverter unit
Middle of dash
24
2
Ambient light (pocket)
24
Middle of dash
7
Audio unit connector A
14
Middle of dash
15
Audio unit connector B
14
Middle of dash
14
Audio unit connector C
20
Middle of dash
6
Audio unit connector D
16
Middle of dash
8
Audio unit connector E
Middle of dash
28
9
Audio unit connector F
16
Middle of dash
16
Audio-HVAC display unit
5
Middle of dash
13
Automatic lighting/sunlight sensor
Middle of dash
36
22
Climate control unit connector A
Middle of dash
20
Climate control unit connector B
5
44
16
Middle of dash
Data link connector
6
Middle of dash
4
Driver's seat heater switch
2
Middle of dash
25
Front accessory power socket
2
Middle of dash
11
Front center speaker
6
Middle of dash
Front passenger's seat heater switch
23
28
Middle of dash
33
HandsFreeLink control unit
24
Middle of dash
22
HVAC control unit connector A
16
Middle of dash
5
HVAC control unit connector B
4
Middle of dash
45
In-car temperature sensor
Middle of dash
27
5
Interface dial
28
Middle of dash
12
Navigation display unit
Middle of dash
6
26
Navigation switch panel
4
Middle of dash
1
start)
4
Middle of dash
17
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
Middle of dash
39
41
SRS unit connector A
14
Middle of dash
32
USB control unit
Middle of dash
5
VTM-4 LOCK switch
3
Middle of dash
5
35
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor
*1: With rear entertainment system and/or navigation system
*2: Without navigation system
*3: With XM radio
*4: With rear entertainment system
*5: With climate control system
*6: With seat heater
*7: With HandsFreeLink system
*8: Without climate control system
*9: With navigation system
22-38
Connects to
Notes
*1
*2
*3
*4
*2
*5
*5
*6
*1
*6
*7
*8
*8
*5
*9
*9
*9
*9
4WD
(cont'd)
22-39

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle side) (cont'd)
C403
C404
C424 (B-CAN junction connector)
C425 (GA-NET junction connector)
C426 (GA-NET junction connector)
C451
C452
C453
C454
C461
S3 (Thermal cap)
S4 (Thermal cap)
G402
Ref
30
34
2
19
21
20
39
38
40
37
29
18
10
28
G405
36

22-40
Cavities
28
6
22
22
12
20
18
14
20
14
24
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Middle of
Location
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
Middle of dash
Connects to
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness

A/C wire harness

wire harness
wire harness
Notes
*1
*2
(cont'd)
22-41

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side)
Front passenger's airbag inflator
Glove box light
Optional connector (for right running
board light)
Right tweeter
Stereo amplifier connector A
Stereo amplifier connector B
C303
Location
Glove box
Ref
1
13
7
Cavities
4
2
2
5
3
2
10
2
24
28
20
Under
Under
Under
Under
C304
C305
12
16
C405
C405
C711
C711
C761
11
11
4
4
8
12
24
24
2
18
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
G403
14
Middle of dash
G404
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
With rear entertainment system and/or navigation system

Without XM radio
With XM radio
With rear entertainment system
Without rear entertainment system
22-42
right side of
right side of
right side of
right side of
right side
right side
right side
right side
right side
of
of
of
of
of
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
dash
Connects to
Notes
*1
*1
wire harness
wire harness
wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
RES wire harness
Front passenger's door wire
harness
wire harness
wire harness
*2
*3
*4
*5
22-43

Floor Wire Harness (Left branch)
Ref
46
45
48
43
42
50
41
18
16
47
40
37
13
9
11
12
10
2
21
28
20
26
24
25
7
Cavities
1
4
2
2
4
3
1
3
2
4
4
2
2
8
32
16
5
1
4
10
4
12
22
12
18
Location
Left B-pillar
Left B-pillar
Under driver's seat
Fuel tank
Fuel tank
Fuel tank
Left C-pillar
Under left side of floor
Left C-pillar
Left B-piilar
Left C-pillar
Left D-pillar
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Left side of cargo area
Rear bumper
C207
C208
C307
18
C308
18
16
34

Driver's door switch
Driver's seat belt tensioner
Driver's side airbag inflator
EVAP canister vent shut valve
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor
Left rear door switch
Left rear initiator
Left side curtain airbag inflator
Left side impact sensor (first)
Left side impact sensor (second)
Left side impact sensor (third)
Navigation service check connector
Navigation unit connector A
Navigation unit connector B
Navigation unit connector C
Navigation unit connector D
Parking brake switch
Trailer IG2 relay
Trailer lighting connector
Trailer lighting relay
Trailer lighting control unit
VTM-4 control unit connector A
VTM-4 control unit connector B
C206
3
C401
51
C402
51
C402
*1: With navigation
*2: Without parking and back-up sensor system
*4: 2WD except USA Touring models
*5: 4WD models and 2WD Touring model
22-44
Connects to
Notes
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
4WD
4WD
wire harness
wire harness
wire harness
wire harness
wire harness
*3
*4
*5
22-45

Floor wire harness (Left branch) (cont'd)
C501
C502
C502
C512
C512
C512
C531
Ref
19
39
39
49
49
49
15
Cavities
23
1
2
18
13
4
4
Location
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under left second row seat
C551
C552
C561
C562
C771
C851
C851
G501
23
22
36
35
44
14
14
1
6
6
2
14
12
18
4
Under rear of floor

Under rear of floor
Left side of rear bumper
Left B-pillar
Left side of center console
G503
17
Left C-pillar
G504
38
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
*8:
Connects to
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Left second row seat heater
subharness
Rear subframe wire harness
Body ground, via floor wire
harness
harness
harness
Notes
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
4WD
*2
*2
*7
*8

With power tailgate
Power seat with DPMS
Power seat without DPMS
Without power seat
With second row seat heater
With seat heater
Without seat heater
Rear Bumper Wire Harness (With power tailgate)

Power tailgate outside beeper
Trailer lighting connector
C561
C562
C563
Ref
27
34
36
35
33
Cavities
2
7
2
14
3
Location
Rear bumper
Rear bumper
Connects to
Notes
Floor wire harness

Floor wire harness
Rear bumper subharness
Rear Bumper Subharness (With parking and back-up sensor system)

Left rear back-up sensor
Left rear corner parking sensor
Right rear back-up sensor
Right rear corner parking sensor
C563
22-46
Ref
31
32
30
29
33
Cavities
6
6
6
6
3
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Location
bumper
bumper
bumper
bumper
bumper
Connects to
Notes
(cont'd)
22-47

Floor Wire Harness (Right branch)
Front passenger's door switch
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Rear safing sensor
Right rear door switch
Right rear initiator
Right side curtain airbag inflator
Right side impact sensor (first)
Right side impact sensor (second)
Right side impact sensor (third)
Right side seat belt tensioner
Right taillight
SRS unit connector B
Subwoofer
XM receiver
C306
Ref
12
18
7
22
23
8
13
6
3
10
1
14
4
5
20
Cavities
1
2
2
1
3
2
4
4
2
4
5
39
2
14
23
Location
Right B-pillar
Under front passenger's seat
Middle of floor
Right C-pillar
Under right side of floor
Right C-pillar
Right B-pillar
Right C-pillar
Right D-pillar
Right B-pillar
Right side of cargo area
Middle of dash
C403
C404
C405
C405
C503
C503
C521
15
16
19
19
2
2
17
28
6
12
24
18
13
18
Middle of dash
Middle of dash
C541
Under right second row seat
C781
G502
11
21
12
Right B-pillar
G505
24
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
With XM radio
With navigation system
Without XM radio
Without rear entertainment system and/or navigation system
22-48
Connects to
Notes
*1
wire harness
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Front passenger's seat wire
harness
heater subharness
Right rear door wire harness
harness
harness
*2
*3
*1
*4
*5
*6
22-49

Rear Wire Harness
Cargo area accessory power socket
Electrical compass unit
Left rear speaker
Lefttaillight
Power tailgate control unit connector A
Power tailgate control unit connector B
Power tailgate control unit connector C
Power tailgate driver unit connector A
Power tailgate driver unit connector B
Power tailgate inside beeper
Right rear speaker
C501
C502
C502
C503
C503
C601
C601
C602
C603
G601
G602
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Ref
7
2
1
10
14
15
16
13
12
11
6
18
17
17
8
8
4
4
5
3
9
19
Cavities
2
6
2
5
5
20
14
2
8
2
2
23
1
2
18
13
6
34
8
12
Location
Rear center of roof
Left D-pillar
Left D-pillar
Left D-pillar
Right D-pillar
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Left D-pillar

Without navigation system
With power tailgate
Without rear entertainment system and/or navigation system
22-50
Connects to
Notes
*2
*1
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*1
Floor wire harness

Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Tailgate wire harness
Body ground, via rear wire
harness
Body ground, via rear wire
harness
*4
*3
*1
*5
*4
*3
*4
*3
(cont'd)
22-51

Tailgate Wire Harness
High mount brake light
C601
C601
C602
C603
C651
C652
C671
Ref
2
4
4
5
3
9
8
7
Cavities
2
6
34
8
12
20
12
2
Location
Behind high mount brake light
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Right side of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Ref
1
Cavities
1
Location
Left side of rear window
Right side of rear window
Middle of tailgate
Connects to
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Rear wire harness
Tailgate Subharness
Tailgate Subharness
Subharness
Notes
*1
*2
1
*2
*1: Without power tailgate

Rear Window Defogger Subharness
Rear window defogger connector A
(+)
Rear window defogger connector B
(-)
C671
22-52
Connects to
Tailgate Wire Harness
Notes
Tailgate Subharness
Right power tailgate pinch sensor
Inside tailgate switch
Power tailgate closer motor
Rearview camera
Hatch glass latch switch
Rear window wiper motor
Hatch glass opener actuator
Tailgate outer handle switch
Power tailgate closer unit/latch and
ratchet switch
Left power tailgate pinch sensor
Tailgate latch switch
Tailgate release actuator
C651
C652
C661
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Ref
10
12
13
11
4
5
2
17
16
Cavities
2
5
2
6
2
5
2
2
6
Location
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
1
15
14
9
8
7
2
2
2
20
12
4
Leftside of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Connects to
Notes
*1
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*3
*3
subharness
*1
*4
With power tailgate

With rearview camera
Without rearview camera
License Plate Lights Subharness (Without rearview camera)

Left license plate light
Right license plate light
Hatch glass opener switch
C661
Ref
18
3
6
7
Cavities
2
2
2
4
Location
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Middle of tailgate
Connects to
Notes
Tailgate subharness
(cont'd)
22-53

TAILGATE SUBHARNESS
I
22-54
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS SUBHARNESS
Rear Subframe Wire Harness

Left clutch electromagnetic coil
Left rear wheel speed sensor
Right rear wheel speed sensor
C551
C552
C553
Ref
9
3
4
1
2
5
Cavities
2
2
2
6
6
6
Location
Rear differential
Under left side of floor
Under right side of floor
Under rear of floor
Under rear of floor
Rear differential
Ref
8
Cavities
2
Location
Rear differential
6
5
7
2
6
Connects to
Floor wire harness

Floor wire harness
Rear subframe subharness
Notes
4WD
4WD
4WD
Rear Subframe Subharness (4WD)

Rear differential fluid temperature
sensor
Right clutch electromagnetic coil
C553
T15
Rear differential
Rear differential
Rear differential
Connects to
Notes

Rear differential housing
REAR S U B F R A M E WIRE H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-55

Roof Wire Harness (With moonroof)
ANC front microphone
ANC rear microphone
Automatic dimming inside mirror
Cargo area light
Driver's vanity mirror light
Front individual map light
HomeLink unit
interior light switch
Moonroof control unit/motor
Navigation microphone
Optional connector (for automatic
dimming inside mirror)
Passenger's vanity mirror light
Rear individual map light (2nd)
Rear individual map light (3rd)
Rearview monitor mirror
C701
G701
Ref
7
11
18
12
14
5
4
6
3
8
15
Cavities
3
2
7
3
2
3
5
12
10
7
6
2
10
13
17
16
1
2
3
3
12
28
Location
Front center of roof
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Left front side of roof
Right front side of roof
Middle of roof
Rear center of roof
Front of roof
Connects to
Notes
*1
*2
*2
*1
*1
Body ground, via roof wire
harness
*1: Without navigation system

RES Wire Harness (With rear entertainment system)
Rear controller and screen connector
C711
22-56
Ref
9
19
Cavities
24
24
Location
Middle of roof
Connects to
Notes
(cont'd)
22-57

Roof Wire Harness (Without moonroof)
ANC front microphone
ANC rear microphone
Cargo area light
Driver's vanity mirror light
Front individual map light
HomeLink unit
Interior light switch
Optional connector (for automatic
dimming inside mirror)
Passenger's vanity mirror light
Rear individual map light (2nd)
Rear individual map light (3rd)
C701
G701
*:
Ref
6
8
9
11
4
3
5
12
Cavities
3
2
3
2
3
5
12
6
2
7
10
13
1
2
3
3
20
Location
Rear center of roof
Rear center of roof
Left front side of roof
Right front side of roof
Middle of roof
Rear center of roof
Front of roof
Connects to
Notes

Body ground, via roof wire
harness
With HomeLink
ROOF WIRE H A R N E S S
10
22-58
Rear A / C Wire Harness

Console accessory power socket A
relay
Console accessory power socket B
relay
Console box light
Rear blower motor
Rear blower motor relay
Rear evaporator temperature sensor
Rear mode control motor
Rear power transistor
C451
C452
C453
C454
C801
C801
C802
C802
C811
C821
C851
C851
G801
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Ref
4
Cavities
4
Location
23
9
25
5
10
11
8
27
1
28
2
17
17
18
18
15
6
24
24
26
2
7
2
4
2
7
4
18
14
20
14
8
28
14
2
10
2
18
4
Rear of center console

Under middle of dash
Connects to
Notes
*1

Console Subharness
Console Subharness
Console Subharness
Console Subharness
Console Subharness
Console Light Subharness
Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
Body ground, via rear A/C
wire harness
*2
*3
*2
*4
*5
*6
*7
With climate control

Without second row seat heater
With seat heater
Without seat heater
(cont'd)
22-59

C O N S O L E LIGHT S U B H A R N E S S
22-60
Rear A / C Panel Wire Harness

Console accessory power socket B
Left second row seat heater switch
Rear HVAC control panel
Rear auxiliary jack assembly
Rear climate control panel
Right second row seat heater switch
C801
C801
C802
C802
* 1 : With second row seat heater
*3: Without rear entertainment system
*4: With second row seat heater
*5: Without second row seat heater
* 6 : With climate control system
*7: Without climate control system
Ref
19
22
21
20
21
16
17
17
18
18
Cavities
2
6
12
14
12
6
28
8
14
2
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Location
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
center console
Ref
12
14
13
15
Cavities
2
5
3
10
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
of
of
of
of
Location
center console
center console
center console
center console
Ref
7
6
Cavities
2
2
Location
Front of center console
Connects to
Notes
*1
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
A/C wire
A/C wire
A/C wire
A/C wire
harness
harness
harness
harness
*7
*2
*6
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Console Subharness
Console accessory power socket A
Front auxiliary jack assembly
Power outlet
C811
Connects to
Notes
Console Light Subharness

Ambient light (console)
C821
Connects to
Notes
(cont'd)
22-61

C O N S O L E LIGHT S U B H A R N E S S
22-62
Driver's Door Wire Harness (With DPMS)

Driver's door lock actuator/knob
switch/key cylinder switch
Driver's power window motor
Left front speaker
Power mirror switch
Power window master switch (door
multiplex control unit)
C751
C752
C753
C754 (junction connector)
Ref
14
Cavities
10
Location
Driver's door
11
10
2
1
6
2
13
37
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
8
9
3
7
24
8
34
12

Driver's door
Driver's door
Ref
13
12
4
6
5
3
Cavities
2
5
10
16
24
34
Connects to
Notes
door
door
door
door
Driver's Door Subharness (With DPMS)

Driver's door courtesy light
Driver's door power tailgate switch
Driving position memory switch
Left power mirror
Power mirror control unit
C753
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Location
door
door
door
door
door
door
Connects to
Notes
D R I V E R S DOOR S U B H A R N E S S
D R I V E R S DOOR WIRE H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-63

Driver's Door Wire Harness (Without DPMS)
Driver's door lock actuator/knob
switch/key cylinder switch
Driver's power window motor
Left front speaker
Left power mirror
Power mirror switch
Power window master switch (door
multiplex control unit)
C751
C752
C753
Location
Driver's door
Ref
12
Cavities
10
9
8
5
3
1
6
2
16
13
37
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
Driver's
6
7
2
4
24
8
6
12

Driver's door
Driver's door
Ref
11
10
Cavities
2
5
Connects to
Notes
door
door
door
door
door
Driver's Door Subharness (Without DPMS)

Driver's door hatch glass opener
switch
C753
Location
Driver's door
Driver's door
Driver's door
DRIVER'S DOOR S U B H A R N E S S
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE H A R N E S S
22-64
Connects to
Notes
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness

Front passenger's door courtesy light
Front passenger's door lock
actuator/knob switch
Front passenger's power window
motor
Front passenger's power window
switch
Right front speaker
Right power mirror
C761
Ref
4
3
Cavities
2
10
Location
37
6
1
7
2
16
18

Connects to
Notes
FRONT P A S S E N G E R ' S
DOOR WIRE H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-65

Left Rear Door Wire Harness
Left rear door speaker
Left rear power window motor
Left rear door lock knob switch/lock
actuator
C771
C772
Ref
5
6
1
Cavities
2
2
10
4
3
12
13
Ref
7
2
3
Cavities
2
14
13
Location
Left rear door
Left rear door
Left rear door
Connects to
Left B-pillar
Left rear door
Notes
Floor wire harness

Left rear door subharness
Left Rear Door Subharness

Left rear door courtesy light
Left rear power window switch
C772
Location
Left rear door
Left rear door
Left rear door
LEFT REAR DOOR

SUBHARNESS
22-66
Connects to
Notes
BODY
Right Rear Door Wire Harness

Right rear door speaker
Right rear door knob switch/lock
actuator
Right rear power window motor
C781
C782
Ref
Cavities
6
3
2
10
Location
Right rear door
Right rear door
5
7
2
12
13
Right rear door

Right B-pillar
Right rear door
Ref
Cavities
4
2
7
2
14
13
Connects to
Notes
Floor wire harness

Right rear door subharness
Right Rear Door Subharness

Right rear door courtesy light
Right rear power window switch
C782
Location
Right rear door
Right rear door
Right rear door
Connects to
Notes
Right rear door wire harness
RIGHT REAR
DOOR S U B H A R N E S S
RIGHT REAR DOOR

WIRE H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-67

Driver's Seat Wire Harness
Driver's power lumbar support switch
Driver's power seat adjustment switch
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat cushion heater
Driver's seat front up-down motor
Driver's seat front up-down
motor/position sensor
Driver's seat heater relay (high)
Driver's seat heater relay (low)
Driver's seat position sensor
Driver's seat rear up-down motor
Driver's seat rear up-down
motor/position sensor
Driver's seat recline motor
Driver's seat recline motor/position
sensor
Driver's seat slide motor
Driver's seat slide motor/position
sensor
Driver's seat-back heater
Power seat control unit connector A
Power seat control unit connector B
C512
C512
C512
*1: With power seat
*3: Power seat with DPMS
*4: Power seat without DPMS
*5: Without power seat
22-68
Location
Left side of driver's seat
Left side of driver's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
Connects to
Notes
*1
1
Ref
7
10
15
4
1
1
Cavities
5
12
2
3
6
6
13
12
2
6
6
4
5
2
6
6
Under driver's seat

Under driver's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
*2
*2
5
5
8
8
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
*4
*3
9
9
6
6
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
*4
*3
3
11
14
8
8
8
2
18
40
18
13
4
Driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
*2
*3
*3
*3
*4
*5
*2
*4
*3
*4
*3
Floor wire harness

Floor wire harness
Floor wire harness
BODY
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness

Front passenger's power seat
adjustment switch
Front passenger's seat recline motor
Front passenger's seat slide motor
Front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch
Front passenger's seat cushion heater
Front passenger's seat heater relay
(high)
Front passenger's seat heater relay
(low)
Inner side front passenger's weight
sensor
ODS unit
Outer side front passenger's weight
sensor
C521
*1: With front passenger's power seat
Ref
10
Cavities
12
1
9
Location
Right side of front passenger's
seat
18
2

18
2
11
Connects to
Notes

Floor wire harness
S E A T WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
22-69

Canada models
Left Second Row Seat Heater Subharness (With second row seat heater)
Left second row seat cushion heater
Left second row seat heater relay
(high)
Left second row seat heater relay (low)
Left second row seat-back heater
C531
Ref
4
7
Cavities
3
4
Location
6
3
5
5
2
4

Connects to
Notes
Floor wire harness
Right Second Row Seat Heater Subharness (With second row seat heater)
Right second row seat cushion heater
Right second row seat heater relay
(high)
Right second row seat heater relay
(low)
Right second row seat-back heater
C541
Ref
2
9
Cavities
3
4
Location
1
10
2
4

22-70
Connects to
Floor wire harness
Notes
A / C Wire Harness
Front blower motor
Front evaporator temperature sensor
Front mode control motor
Front power transistor
Front recirculation control motor
C351
C461
*: With climate control
6
3
5
2
Cavities
7
2
2
7
4
7
7
2
24
Ref
9
4
8
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Under
Location
middle of dash
right side of dash
middle of dash
middle of dash
middle of dash
middle of dash
middle of dash
right side of dash
Connects to
Notes
*
wire harness
A / C WIRE S U B H A R N E S S
(cont'd)
22-71

Cable Reel Subharness
Cavities
Ref
2
20
Cable reel connector
1
12
Audio remote switch
6
5
HFLTVoice control switch
5
2
Horn switch
4
5
Multi-information switch
3
12
Cruise control combination switch
*1: With 6CD type audio unit or navigation system
*2: With HandsFreeLink
Steering
Steering
Steering
Steering
Steering
Steering
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
22-72
Location
wheel
wheel
wheel
wheel
wheel
wheel
Connects to
Notes
*1
*2
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Socket
A (Electrical load detector)
A/C compressor clutch relay
A/C condenser fan relay
PGM-FI subrelay
B
Front blower motor relay
C
D
Diode (for radiator fan)
Diode (for A/C condenser fan)
E
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS)
control relay
F
Fan control relay
G
H
Ignition coil relay
J
K
PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN)
Radiator fan relay
Rear w i n d o w defogger relay
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M O U N T (ACM)
control relay
T1
T101
Ref
24
10
1
5
25
3
16
18
8
9
17
14
Terminal
10
4
Right engine compartment wire harness
20
2
22
23
7
19
21
13
15
6
4
20
5
1
1
4
4
2
4
4
4
5
11
12
3
4
44
4
Connects to
Notes
Not used
4
8
Not used

Starter cable
Alternator
(cont'd)
22-73
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
22-74
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Ref
Terminal
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 1 ( F O R W A R D )
Socket
Rear w i n d o w w i p e r motor relay 2 ( B A C K W A R D )
T5
Connects to
Notes
Starter cable
22-75
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Socket
A
C
D
Connects to
Ref
Terminal
9
10
4
6
4
Not used
42
34
E
F
6
7
G
H (MICU service check connector)
21

J
K
20
12
M
Memory erase signal (MES) connector socket
13
11
10
14
14
P
19
10
Q
R
Starter cut relay 1
17
16
15
20
S
T
16
18
20
34
Power window relay


i
1
i
1
View of front side
22-76
,
r
View of back side
Notes
Rear Fuse/Relay Box

Socket
Trailer IG2 relay
Trailer lighting relay
* : Touring model
Ref
1
2
Terminal
4
4
Connects to
Notes
*
*
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index
Fuse
Number
1
120 A
(MAIN)
50A(IG)
80 A
(OPTION)
3
4
Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Amps
50 A (H/L)
40 A (P/W)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
15A
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
15A
15A
20
21
22
7.5 A
15A
10A
Battery, Power distribution

Not used
Ignition switch (BAT), No. 23 fuse (in the under-dash fuse/relay box) (via starter cut relay 1),
Starter solenoid (via starter cut relay 1,2)
No. 5, No. 6, No. 7, No. 27, No. 28, No. 29, and No. 31 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay
box)
Not used
Not used
No. 18 through No. 21 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
No. 24, No. 25, No. 26, and No. 30 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box), No. 32 and No.
33 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box) (via power w i n d o w relay), Power w i n d o w relay
Not used
A/C condenser fan motor (via A/C condenser fan relay)
Radiator fan motor (via radiator fan relay)
Rear w i n d o w defogger (via rear w i n d o w defogger relay)
Front blower motor (via front blower motor relay)
Fog light relay, Fog lights (via fog light relay)
Front A/F sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1), Front secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2), No. 15 fuse
(in the under-hood fuse/relay box) (via PGM-FI subrelay), PGM-FI subrelay, Rear A/F sensor
(Bank 1, Sensor 1), Rear secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Engine m o u n t control unit (IGSOL) (via active control engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay)
Front passenger's seat recline motor (via front passenger's power seat adjustment switch)
Front passenger's seat slide motor (via front passenger's power seat adjustment switch)
A/C condenser fan relay (via diode)
Headlight high beam relay, Headlights (high beam) (via headlight high beam relay)
A u d i o unit (+B), HFL/navigation/ANC microphone (+B) (Touring)
Ignition coil relay, Ignition coils (via ignition coil relay)
CKP sensor (via PGM-FI main relay 1), CMP sensor (via PGM-FI main relay 1), Electronic
throttle control system (ETCS) control relay (via PGM-FI main relay 1), Injectors (via PGM-FI
main relay 1), MAF sensor (via PGM-FI main relay 1), PCM (IGP) (via PGM-FI main relay 1),
PGM-FI main relay 1, PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (via PGM-FI main relay 1)
A/C compressor clutch (via A/C compressor clutch)
PCM (IG1ETCS) (via electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay)
Cargo area light, Driver's door courtesy light, Driver's vanity mirror light, Front individual
map lights, Front passenger's door courtesy light, HomeLink unit, Ignition key light, Inside
tailgate switch light* , Left rear door courtesy light, Passenger's vanity mirror light, Rear
individual map lights (2nd), Rear individual map lights (3rd), Right rear door courtesy light
Optional connector (left running board light), Optional connector (right running board
light)
Audio-HVAC display unit (+B), Data link connector (DLC), Gauge control module (VBU),
HandsFreeLink control unit (VBU), Immobilizer-keyless control unit (VBU), MICU (VBU),
Power mirror control unit (+B MIRROR)* , Power seat control unit (VBU)* , Power tailgate
control unit (VBU), Power w i n d o w master switch (VBU), Rear controller and screen (+B)* ,
Navigation display unit (+B)
1
23
10A
* 1 : With power tailgate

* 2 : With DPMS
* 3 : With rear entertainment system
22-78
(cont'd)
22-79
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Auxiliary Under-hood fuse/Relay Box
Fuse
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Amps
40 A
20 A
30 A*
40 A
30 A
30 A
15A
20 A
20A
Power tailgate motor (via power tailgate control unit)

VTM-4 control unit (VTM-4+) (via VTM-4 relay)*
No. 1 through No. 4 fuses (in the rear fuse/relay box)
VSA modulator-control unit (+B VSA FSR)
VSA modulator-control unit (+B VSA MTR)
MICU (+B HAZARD)
Closer motor (via power tailgate control unit)
Power seat control unit (VMP2)* , Power seat rear up-down motor (via driver's power seat
adjustment switch)* , Power seat recline motor (via driver's power seat adjustment
switch)*
Power seat control unit (VMP1 )* , Power seat slide motor (via driver's power seat
adjustment switch)* , Power seat front up-down motor (via driver's power seat adjustment
switch)*
High m o u n t brake light (via brake pedal position switch), Left brake light (via brake pedal
position switch), MICU (STOP SW) (via brake pedal position switch), MICU (+B STOP &
HORN), PCM (BKSW) (via brake pedal position switch), Right brake light (via brake pedal
position switch), Trailer electric brake connector (via brake pedal position switch), Trailer
lighting control unit (via brake pedal position switch)*
Console accessory power socket B (via rear console accessory power socket B relay)
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 1 (FORWARD), Rear w i n d o w w i p e r motor relay 2
(BACKWARD), Rear w i n d o w wiper motor (via rear w i n d o w wiper motor relays)
Trailer electric brake connector
AC inverter unit (+B)
Console accessory power socket A (via console accessory power socket A relay)
Trailer lighting connector (via trailer IG2 relay)
Front accessory power socket (via front accessory power socket relay)
Cargo area accessory power socket (via cargo area accessory power socket relay)
Hatch glass opener actuator (via hatch glass relay), Hatch glass relay
Left second row seat heater cushion (via left second r o w seat heater relay (HIGH))* , Left
second row seat heater cushion (via left second row seat heater relay (LOW))* , Right
second row seat heater cushion (via right second r o w seat heater relay (HIGH))* , Right
second row seat heater cushion (via right second row seat heater relay (LOW))*
Not used
4
10
20 A
11
20 A
12
13
15A
10A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
20A
20 A
15A
20 A
15A
15A
20 A
15A
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
22
With DPMS
W i t h o u t DPMS
Touring model
4WD
Canada models
22-80
(cont'd)
22-81
Power Distribution
Fuse
Number
1
2
Amps
7.5 A
15 A
10A
4
5
7.5 A
15A
6
7
10A
7.5 A
9
10
7.5 A
7.5 A
VTM-4 control unit (IG1)* , VTM-4 relay*

Fuel p u m p (via PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)), Immobilizer-keyless control unit (IG1),
PCM0G1)
Alternator, Electrical load detector (ELD), EVAP canister purge valve, PCM (BKSWNC) (via
brake pedal position switch), PCM (VBSOL1)
VSA modulator-control unit (IG1), Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
Front passenger's seat heater cushion (via front passenger's seat heater relay (HIGH)),
Front passenger's seat heater cushion (via front passenger's seat heater relay (LOW)),
Driver's seat heater cushion (via driver's seat heater relay (HIGH)), Driver's seat heater
cushion (via driver's seat heater relay (LOW))
Not used
Automatic lighting control unit (+B), Driver's lumbar support motor (via driver's lumbar
support switch)
Automatic lighting control unit (IG), Parking and back-up control unit (IG), Parking and
back-up control unit (MAIN SW) (via parking and back-up sensor switch), Parking and
back-up sensor switch indicator (via parking and back-up sensor switch), TPMS control unit
(IG1)
ODS unit, Passenger's airbag CUT OFF indicator, SRS unit (VA)
Active control engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay, Automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror (via
MICU) or Automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror/rear v i e w monitor mirror (via MICU), Electrical
compass unit (IG1) (except Touring), Engine mount control unit (IG1), Gauge control
module (IGN), Left back-up light, MICU (IG1 METER), Power mirror control unit (IG1)* ,
Power seat control unit (IG1)* , Power tailgate control unit (IGN1), Right back-up light,
Trailer lighting control unit* , VTM-4 control unit (LCKSW) (via VTM-4 lock switch)* , VTM-4
lock switch indicator*
11
12
13
14
10A
10A
10A
7.5 A
SRS unit (VB)

A u d i o unit light, A u d i o remote switch light (via cable reel), Audio-HVAC display unit light or
Climate control unit light, A m b i e n t light (console), A m b i e n t light (pocket), Auxiliary jack
assembly light, Console box light, Glove box light, Hazard w a r n i n g switch light, M o o n r o o f
switch light, Multi-information switch lights (via cable reel)* , Navigation control panel light
(Touring), Optional connector, Parking and back-up sensor switch light, A m b i e n t light
(roof), Rear controller and screen light* , Rear HVAC control panel light or Rear climate
control panel light, Seat heater switches light, VSA OFF switch light, VTM-4 lock switch
light*
License plate lights, Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left rear side
marker light, Left taillights, Right front parking light, Right front side marker light, Right rear
side marker light, Right taillights, Trailer lighting relay*
Right headlight (low beam)
Left headlight (low beam)
MICU ( + B D R L MAIN)
MICU < + B SMALL LT MAIN)
TPMS control unit (+B)
M I C U ( + B H / L LO MAIN)
PCM (VBSOL2)
PCM (STRLD)
Not used
Not used
Power w i n d o w master switch (+B P/W DR)
4
15
15A
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
22-82
15A
15A
20 A
15A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (cont'd)

Fuse
Number
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Amps
36
10A
20
20
20
20
30
20
20
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
10A

Optional connector
Moonroof control unit/motor (VMP)
MICU (+B DOOR LOCK)
Front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (+B P/W AS)
Stereo amplifier (+B MAIN)* , Stereo amplifier (+B SUB)*
Right rear power w i n d o w switch (+B P/W RR R)
Left rear power w i n d o w switch (+B P/W RR L)
Not used
Audio unit (ACC), Cargo area accessory power socket relay, Console accessory power
socket A relay, Console accessory power socket B relay, Front accessory power socket
relay, HandsFreeLink control unit (ACC) (Touring), HFL/navigation/ANC microphone (ACC)
(Touring), Key interlock solenoid, MICU (ACC), Navigation display unit (ACC)
AC inverter unit (IG2), A/C compressor clutch relay, Automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror or
Automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror/rearview monitor mirror, Audio-HVAC display unit (IG2)
(except Touring), Climate control unit (IG2) or HVAC control unit (IG2), Driver's seat heater
indicators, Driver's seat heater relays (via driver's seat heater switch), Fan control relay (via
diode), Front blower motor relay, Front passenger's seat heater relays (via front
passenger's seat heater switch), Front passenger's seat heater indicators, Left power
mirror actuator (via power mirror switch)* , Left second row seat heater indicator* , Left
second row seat heater relays (via left second r o w seat heater s w i t c h ) * , Optional
connector, Power w i n d o w master switch (IG2), Power mirror control unit (via power mirror
switch)* , Power w i n d o w master switch (UD) (via power mirror switch)* , Radiator fan relay
(via diode), Right second row seat heater indicator* , Right second row seat heater relays
(via right second row seat heater s w i t c h ) * , Rear blower motor relay, Rear climate control
panel (IG2) or rear HVAC control panel (IG2), Rear w i n d o w defogger relay, Rear mode
control motor/Trailer IG2 relay*
7
37
38
7.5 A
30 A
MICU (IG2 DAY LT)

MICU (IG1 WIPER), Rear w i n d o w washer motor (via MICU), Windshield washer motor (via
MICU), Windshield wiper motor (via MICU)
* 1 : W i t h DPMS
* 2 : With rear entertainment system
* 3 : With m o o n r o o f
* 4 : With multi-information display
* 5 : 4WD
*6: Without DPMS
*7: With rear entertainment system and/or navigation system
* 8 : Canada models
* 9 : Touring model
(cont'd)
22-83
Power Distribution
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
u u u u u u u u u u u
I
I I
I 1
I I
I I
I I
1 I
I I
I I
1 1
I I
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
u u u u u u u u u u u
1
22-84
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
I
10 11
1
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder

Fuse
Name
STS
Amps
Wire Color
7.5 A
YEL
LTBLU

Ignition switch (ST)
PCM (STS), Remote engine starter connector (optional)
STS
(cont'd)
22-85
Power Distribution
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
Amps
Fuse
Number
7.5 A *
1
7.5 A *
2
3
20 A *
4
* : Touring model

Not used
Trailer lighting connector (via trailer lighting relay)
"izzr
22-86
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index
Ground
G1
G2
G3
G101
G201
G202
G301
G302
G303
G401
Component or circuit grounded

Battery
Engine m o u n t
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C, CKP sensor, CMP sensor, EGR valve, Ignition coils, PCM (LG1), PCM
(LG2), PCM (PG1), PCM (PG2), PCM (PGMETCS), Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (bank 1), Rocker arm oil
control solenoid A (bank 2), Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (bank 2), Transmission range switch
Shielding between the PCM and the front A/F sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
Shielding between the PCM and the knock sensor
Shielding between the PCM and the rear A/F sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)
Shielding between the PCM and the front secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2)
Shielding between the PCM and the rear secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Security hood switch (with security), Rear w i n d o w washer motor, Right daytime running light, Right front
parking light/turn signal light, Right front side marker light, Right headlight (high beam), Right headlight
(low beam), Washer fluid level switch, Windshield washer motor
A/C condenser fan motor, Electrical load detector (ELD), Engine m o u n t control unit (LG), Engine mount
control unit (PG), Front blower motor relay, Front power transistor, Power steering pressure (PSP) switch,
Radiator fan motor (via fan control module), Right fog light
Left daytime running light, Left fog light, Left front side maker light, Left headlight (high beam), Left
headlight (low beam), Left parking light/turn signal light
VSA modulator-control unit (GND), VSA modulator-control unit (MR-GND)
Brake fluid level switch, Rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 1 (FORWARD), Rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 2
(BACKWARD), Windshield wiper motor
Cruise control main switch (via cable reel), Driver's door hatch glass opener switch light* , Driver's door
power tailgate switch* , Driver's door hatch glass opener switch* , Driver's door lock actuator, Driver's
power w i n d o w motor, Driving position m e m o r y switch light* , Driving position m e m o r y switch* , Gauge
control module (P-GND (BULB)), Gauge control module (P-GND (LED)), Gauge control module (S-GND),
Horn switch (via cable reel and cruise control combination switch), Ignition key switch, Left power mirror
defogger, Left side turn signal light* , MICU service check connector, MICU (S-GND1), M e m o r y erase signal
(MES) connector, MICU (S-GND2), Power w i n d o w master switch (2SG), Power w i n d o w master switch (PG),
Power mirror switch, Power mirror switch light, Power mirror control unit* , Trailer electric brake
connector, VSA OFF switch
2
G402
G403
A u d i o unit (GND), Stereo amplifier (GND MAIN), Stereo amplifier (GND SUB)
AC inverter unit, Automatic lighting control unit (GND1), Automatic lighting control unit (GND2),
Audio-HVAC display unit* , Climate control unit or HVAC control unit, Data link connector (DLC) (2 wires),
Driver's seat heater switch, D3 switch, Front accessory power socket, Front accessory power socket relay,
Front passenger's seat heater switch, Glove box light, HandsFreeLink control unit, Interface dial* ,
Navigation display unit, Park pin switch, Parking and back-up sensor control unit (GND1), Parking and
back-up sensor control unit (GND2), TPMS control unit, Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
Cargo area accessory power socket relay, Front passenger's door lock actuator, Front passenger's power
w i n d o w switch (PG), Front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (SG), Rear controller and screen (With rear
entertainment system), Right power mirror defogger, Right side turn signal light (Touring)*
SRS unit (SRS GND1), SRS unit (SRS GND2)
MICU (P GND)
Driver's seat position sensor, Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat cushion
heater, Front passenger's seat heater relays, Front passenger's power seat adjustment switch (2 wires)* ,
ODS unit, Right rear door lock actuator, Right rear power w i n d o w switch, Right second row seat heater* ,
Right second row seat heater relays*
Driver's power seat adjustment switch (2 wires)* , Driver's lumbar support switch (2 wires) (except LX),
Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Driver's seat heater, Driver's seat heater relays, Fuel p u m p , Left rear door
lock actuator, Left rear power w i n d o w switch, Left second row seat heater* , Left second r o w seat heater
relay, Navigation unit, Power seat control unit (PG2)* , Power seat control unit (PG1)* , Power seat control
unit (SG)* , Power tailgate control unit (SG), Power tailgate outside beeper, Rear deferential (4WD), Trailer
lighting connector, Trailer lighting control unit
2
G404
G405
G501
G502
G503
G504
Trailer lighting relay* , Trailer IG2 relay* , Trailer lighting control unit*
(cont'd)
22-87
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index (cont'd)
Ground
G505
G601
Component or circuit grounded

Right brake light, Right back-up light, Right rear side marker light, Right rear t u r n signal light, Right
taillights
Cargo area accessory power socket, Electrical compass unit* , Hatch glass opener actuator, Hatch glass
opener switch, Hatch glass latch switch, High m o u n t brake light, Left rear side marker light, Left taillights,
Left rear turn signal light, Left brake light, Left back-up light, License plate lights, Power tailgate inside
beeper, Rear w i n d o w defogger, Rear w i n d o w wiper motor, Tailgate latch switch* , Tailgate outer handle
switch* , Tailgate release actuator*
2
G602
G701
Power tailgate control unit (PG1), Power tailgate control unit (PG2)
Automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror or Rear view monitor mirror, Cargo area light, Driver's vanity mirror
light, Front individual map lights, Front passenger's vanity mirror light, HFL/navigation/ANC microphone* ,
HomeLink unit, Interior light switch, Moonroof control unit/motor, M o o n r o o f switch
A m b i e n t light (pocket), A m b i e n t light (console), Console accessory power socket A, Console accessory
G801
power socket A relay, Console accessory power socket B, Console accessory power socket B relay,
Console box light, Left second row seat heater switch* , Rear blower motor relay, Rear climate control
panel or Rear HVAC control panel, Rear power transistor, Right second row seat heater switch*
* 1 : Touring model
* 2 : Except Touring model
* 3 : W i t h DPMS
M : W i t h o u t DPMS
* 5 : Canada models
1
22-88

Installation
Relay Puller Q7AAC-000A1 AO
Removal
page 22-94).
2. Open the cover (A), then remove the bolts (B) to
remove the alternator and battery cable terminals.
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors t o the

under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the
under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
removal.
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
page 22-94).
4. Confirm that all systems w o r k properly.
3. Release the tabs (C), and then remove the bottom

cover (D) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box.
4. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
5. Carefully remove the relays using the relay puller (see
page 22-96) by prying under the base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays,
which could cause the engine to stall or not start.
22-89

Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1 AO
USA models
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
doing repairs or servicing.
Removal
page 22-94).
2. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page
20-121).
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the fuse side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
Installation
7. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the
under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
removal.
removal.
9. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure steps
1 to 4 (see page 22-94).
10. Register the immobilizer system w i t h the HDS (see
page 22-455).
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU w h i c h is
part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this
construction, the imoes must be registered, or the
vehicle will not start.
11. Do the remaining steps of battery terminal
4. Remove the mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash

fuse/relay box away f r o m the body.
5. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
w h i c h could cause the engine t o stall or not start.
22-90
Canada models
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the fuse side of the

under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
NOTE:
SRS c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-19), and
The under-dash fuse/relay box mounting screw is a
one-way screw. Remove the one-way screw w i t h
pliers.
Removal
page 22-94).
2. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page
20-121).
4. Remove the mounting one-way screw (B), and pull

the under-dash fuse/relay box away f r o m the body.
5. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
w h i c h could cause the engine to stall or not start.
(cont'd)
22-91

Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
7. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the
under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
removal.
removal.
9. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure steps
1 to 4 (see page 22-94).
10. Register the immobilizer system w i t h the HDS (see
page 22-455).
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU w h i c h is
part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this
construction, the imoes must be registered, or the
vehicle will not start.
11. Do the remaining steps of battery terminal
22-92
Battery
Battery Test
A WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not f o l l o w the proper
procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and
open flames away f r o m the battery.
Required Test Equipment

Honda electrical System Analyzer (ED-18 Battery tester);
T/N INBED18LLH
Ordering Information
To order the Electrical System Analyzer, go to the Honda
Tool and Equipment catalog on the i N , or call
888-424-6857.
Software Version
3. Here are the five possible battery conditions:

Good-BatteryThe battery has at least 60 percent
of its charge and requires no action.
Good-RechargeThe battery condition appears to
be g o o d , but charging is recommended and then
retest. See your battery charger's instructions to
fully charge the battery, then recheck. Do not
charge the battery using the vehicle's alternator.
Charge and RetestThe battery condition is not
known because its charge is too low. Recharge the
battery, then retest. See y o u r battery's instructions
to fully charge the battery, then recheck. Do not
charge the battery using the vehicle's alternator.
Replace BatteryThe battery condition is poor.
Replace it.
Bad CellThere is a problem w i t h the battery.
Replace it.
Make sure y o u have the latest software in the ED-18. To

check the version on the do this:
Press the POWER button.
Select Reports, then press ENTER.
Select i Version, then press ENTER.
If you do not have the correct version, call the Tools
Hotline at 800-346-6327.
Using the ED-18 Battery Tester

NOTE: For set up, customizations, and other available
features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual.
1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the battery test, then
press ENTER, then f o l l o w the prompts.
NOTE: Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
ampere rating of the battery. I f t h e number is not
entered correctly, the result will not be accurate.
22-93
Battery
Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection
Disconnection
NOTE: Some systems store data in m e m o r y (including
seat position, mirror position, etc) that is lost w h e n the
battery is disconnected. Do the f o l l o w i n g procedures
before disconnecting the battery.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code(s) for the
audio system and/or navigation system (if equipped).
NOTE: For some models, it may be necessary to write
d o w n the audio the presets (AM and FM), because the
audio unit does not retain the presets after the battery
is disconnected.
2. Write d o w n the X M audio presets (if equipped).
4. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable f r o m the
battery.
NOTE: Always disconnect the negative battery cable
f r o m the battery first.
5. Disconnect the positive cable f r o m the battery.
Reconnection
NOTE:
Some systems store data in m e m o r y (including seat
position, mirror position, etc) that is lost w h e n the
battery is disconnected. Do the following procedures
to restore the systems back to normal operation.
Be sure t o close the power tailgate before
reconnecting the battery.
1. Clean the battery terminals.

3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) t o the battery (B) first,
then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the battery.
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the
battery first.
2 . 9 - 5 . 9 N-m
(0.3-0.6 k g f m , 2.1 - 4 . 4 Ibfft)
4. A p p l y multipurpose grease to the terminals to

prevent corrosion.
5. Enter the anti-theft code(s) for the audio system
and/or navigation system (if equipped).
6. Enter the audio presets (if applicable), and enter the
X M audio presets (if equipped).
7. Set the clock (for vehicles w i t h o u t navigation).
22-94
B a t t e r y R e m o v a l
a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n
NOTE: The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection

(see p a g e 22-94) p r o c e d u r e m u s t b e d o n e b e f o r e a n d
after d o i n g this p r o c e d u r e . S o m e s y s t e m s store data in
m e m o r y t h a t is l o s t w h e n t h e b a t t e r y is d i s c o n n e c t e d .
Installation
1. Install t h e battery (A), t h e n install t h e b a t t e r y s e t t i n g
p l a t e (B).
Removal
1. D o t h e b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l d i s c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e (see
p a g e 22-94).
2 . R e m o v e t h e t w o n u t s (A) s e c u r i n g t h e b a t t e r y s e t t i n g
p l a t e , t h e n r e m o v e t h e b a t t e r y s e t t i n g p l a t e (B) a n d
t h e b a t t e r y (C).
2 . T i g h t e n t h e t w o n u t s (C) e q u a l l y u n t i l t h e b a t t e r y is
stable.
NOTE: Do not d e f o r m the battery setting plate by
tightening the nuts t o o much.
3 . D o t h e b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l r e c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e (see
p a g e 22-94).
N O T E : M a k e s u r e t h e b a t t e r y is i n s t a l l e d c o r r e c t l y , a n d
t h e positive t e r m i n a l a n d t h e negative t e r m i n a l are
not reverse-connected.
22-95
Relays
Power Relay Test
Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1 AO
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the
test listed for it.
Relay
A/C compressor clutch relay*
PGM-FI subrelay*
Cargo area accessory power
socket relay*
Console accessory power
socket A relay*
Console accessory power
socket B relay*
Front accessory power socket relay*
Driver's seat heater relay
(HIGH)*
ETCS control relay*
Front blower motor relay*
Fog light relay*
Front passenger's seat heater
relay (HIGH)*
Hatch glass relay*
Headlight high beam relay*
Ignition coil relay*
Left second r o w seat heater
relay (HIGH)*
PGM-FI main relay 1 *
PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP)*
Power w i n d o w relay*
Radiator fan relay*
Rear w i n d o w defogger relay*
Right second row seat heater
relay (HIGH)*
Starter cut relay*
VTM-4 relay*
Trailer lighting relay*
Trailer IG2 relay*
22-96
Test
Normallyopen fourterminal
type A
Test
Relay
FiveA/C condenser relay*
terminal
Active control engine m o u n t (ACM)
type
control relay*
ACC cut relay*
Driver's seat heater relay
(LOW)*
Fan control relay*
Front passenger's seat heater
relay (LOW)*
IG2 cut relay*
Left second r o w seat heater
relay (LOW)*
Rear w i n d o w wiper m o t o r relay 1
(FORWARD)
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 2
(BACKWARD)
Right second row seat heater
relay (LOW)*
*: Carefully remove the relay f r o m fuse/relay
box using the relay puller. Do not use pliers.
Pliers will damage the relay.
07AAC-000A1A0
Normallyopen fourterminal
type B
Normally-open Four-terminal type A
Normally-open Four-terminal type B
C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s .
C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s :
T h e r e s h o u l d be continuity b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 1
a n d No. 2 w h e n battery positive t e r m i n a l is c o n n e c t e d
to t e r m i n a l No. 4, a n d b o d y g r o u n d is c o n n e c t e d to
t e r m i n a l N o . 3.
T h e r e s h o u l d be continuity b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 1
a n d No. 3 w h e n battery p o w e r is c o n n e c t e d to
t e r m i n a l No. 2 , a n d b o d y g r o u n d is c o n n e c t e d to
t e r m i n a l No. 4.
T h e r e s h o u l d be no continuity b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No.
T h e r e s h o u l d be no continuity b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No.
1 a n d No. 3 w h e n p o w e r is d i s c o n n e c t e d .
1 a n d No. 2 w h e n p o w e r is d i s c o n n e c t e d .
Resistance type
Diode type
(cont'd)
22-97
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals:
There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 w h e n battery power is connected to
terminal No. 5, and body g r o u n d is connected to
terminal No. 3.
and No. 4 w h e n power is disconnected.
22-98
Ignition Switch
TRANSMISSION R A N G E SWITCH
T e s t page 14-263
22-99
Ignition Switch
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 35
(10A)
P4
LTGRN
WHT/BLK
-100
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed:
in P position)
BLK
PARK PIN
SWITCH
(Open:
in P position)
BODY
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

doing repair or servicing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). The shift
lever must be in P.

PARK PIN S W I T C H /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.

3. Check i f t h e ignition switch can be turned to LOCK (0).
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)?
P-PIN (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock

assembly (see page 1 7 - 1 6 ) .
4. Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0).
5. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
R (24P).
6. Check for continuity between steering lock assembly
STEERING LOCK A S S E M B L Y CONNECTOR
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between A/T gear position indicator panel light
terminal No. 1 and the M I C U . H
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Reconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector R
(24P).
KEY S O L (BLU)

PANEL LIGHT HARNESS /
PARK PIN SWITCH /
D3 SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
P-PIN (WHT/BLK)
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire

between the key interlock solenoid and the M I C U . I
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the A/T gear position indicator panel light
harness/park pin switch/D3 switch connector (see
page 14-247).
Is there continuity when the shift lever is moved out of P,

and no continuity when in P?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the park pin switch (see page 22-103).B
11. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector F (34P).
(cont'd)
22-101
Ignition Switch
Key Interlock System Circuit
13. Measure the voltage between driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector F (34P) terminal No. 27 and
body g r o u n d .
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F U S E /
RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
1 /
20
3 4
22 23
5|6
24
A258
/!/
9 10 11
27 28 29
14|15 16|l7
18 19
30
31 (32 33 34
Key Interlock Solenoid Test

1. Remove the steering c o l u m n covers (see page
20-130).
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly 6P connector
(A), and then turn the ignition switch to ACC (I).
ATP P (PNK)
Is there about 0 V when the shift lever is in P, and battery

voltage when the shift lever is out of P?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU, and r e c h e c k . B
NO-Repair a open or a short to body ground in the
wire between PCM connectorterminal A16,
transmission range switch, and MICU.B
3. Connect battery voltage to terminal No. 4 of the

steering lock assembly, and g r o u n d terminal No. 3,
then try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0); the
ignition switch should not t u r n .
4. Disconnect the power and g r o u n d f r o m terminals,
then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove
the key; the ignition switch should t u r n and the key
can be removed.
5. If the key interlock solenoid does not w o r k as
specified, replace the steering lock assembly (see
page 17-16).
22-102
Park Pin Switch Test
Ignition Switch Test

SRS component locations (see page 24-19) and
2. Disconnect A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness / park pin switch / D3 switch connector.

page 22-94).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-130).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) f r o m the ignition
switch (B).
B
3. Shift into P, and check for continuity between A/T gear

/ D3 switch connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity
between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity.
5. If the park pin switch tests OK, connect the connector
and install the shift lever assembly (see page 14-248).
If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park pin
ORN
RED
PNK

\ ^
Terminal
Position
RED WHT PNK

\ ^ (ACC) (BAT) (IG1)
ORN
(IG2)
YEL
(ST)
0 (LOCK)
1 (ACC)
II (ON)
III (START)
O
a
o
o
a
O
- O
5. If the continuity does not agree with the table, replace

the ignition switch (see page 22-104).
page 22-94).
22-103
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch Replacement
SRS component locations (see page 24-19) and
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, (see
page 22-94)
20-130).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) f r o m the ignition
switch (B).
4. Remove the t w o screws and the ignition switch.

6. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure, (see
page 22-94)
22-104
Multiplex Integrated Control System

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT

Input Test, page 22-576
(cont'd)
22-105

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT

22-106
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT
22-107

Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first.
Using the HDS (Preferred method)

Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE: There are t w o ways to read B-CAN codes with HDS.
First m e t h o d ; Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137) to check for DTCs.
Second method; Ground the SCS circuit with the HDS, then read the DTCs displayed in the multi-information display
(MID) in the gauge assembly, then go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137).
Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)

1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 1.
2. Check for DTCs.
3. If there are DTCs stored, sort t h e m , and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
- 1 . Battery voltage DTCs
-2. Internal error DTCs
-3. Loss of communication DTCs . NOTE: If the DTC U1280 is stored, troubleshoot DTC U1280 first. Refer to loss of
communication cross reference chart.
-4. Signal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnostic Test M o d e 2 to check all inputs related to the failure (see step 9
on page 22-142).
22-108
BODY
How to display DTCs on the gauge control module

1. Set the B-CAN System Diagnosis test Mode 1 (see page 22-141).
2. While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN units, will be
shown one by one on the multi-information display on the gauge control module w h e n the communication between
the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the SEL/RESET button.
Information display type
DTC detected (the lower four digits are

a decimal number representing the DTC)
$$
No DTCs detected
All DTCs have been displayed
Multi-information display type
DTC SERVICE
DTC
B1152
PA
50
DTC detected (the four digits after the letter

"B" represent the DTC)
Control Unit I.D. Number (the two digits after
the letters "PA" represent the control unit
number)
DTC SERVICE
No DTCs detected
DTC
NO
DTC SERVICE
All DTCs have been displayed
DTC
End
(cont'd)
22-109

3. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number s h o w n on the multi-information display .
Control Unit
MICU
Door multiplex control unit (Power w i n d o w master
switch)
Climate control unit or HVAC control unit
Parking and back-up sensor control unit
Power tailgate control unit
Power seat control unit
Control Unit I.D. Number

10
50
30
96
51
94
72
9A
35
95
How to clear the DTC

1. Enter the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-141).
2. While in Test Model 1, press and hold d o w n the SEL/RESET button for at least 10 seconds to clear the DTCs.
22-110
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart

When an ECU on the CAN circuit is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the B-CAN and F-CAN circuit, the other control units will set
loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating with the other control units on the CAN circuit.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
DTC
type
BUS OFF
ECU
(CPU)
Error
ECU
(EEPROM)
Error
Gauge
control
module
Door
multiplex
control
unit
Immobilizerkeyless
control
unit
U1280
U1280
U1280
U1280
B1901
B1002
B1152
MICU
Transmitting
Control Unit
MICU
Gauge control
module
Door multiplex
control unit
Climate control
unit or HVAC
control unit
Automatic
lighting control
unit
Parking and
back-up sensor
control unit
Power tailgate
control unit
PCM
SRS unit
VSA modulatorcontrol unit
TPMS control
unit
Related Unit
Automatic
Climate
lighting
control
control
unit or
unit
HVAC
control
unit
U1280
U1280
B1902
MICU
Gauge
control
module
TX
U0155
U1281
TX
U0199
U1280
B1802
Parking
and
back-up
sensor
control
unit
U1280
B2601
Power
tailgate
control
unit
U1280
U1280
B2602
B1352
B1792
Parking
and
back-up
sensor
control
unit
U1282
U0155
Power
tailgate
control
unit
Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

ImmobilizerAutomatic
Power
Door
Climate
lighting
seat
multiplex
control
keyless
control
control
unit or
control
control unit
unit
unit
HVAC
unit
control
unit
U1282
U1282
U1282
U1282
U0155
U0155
U0155
U0155
U0155
TX
U0164
B1552
Power
seat
control
unit
U0199
U0199
U0164
U0180
HandsFreeLimk
control unit
U1281
U0155
U0199
TX
TX
U1288
U0230
U0100
U0151
U0122
U0127
TX: Transmitting unit does not set a loss of communication DTC.
22-111

NOTE: Record all DTCs, and sort t h e m by DTC type using the following DTC troubleshooting indexes, then troubleshoot
the DTC(s) in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1036 and B1037 are retrieved,
troubleshoot B1036 first).
Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC
B1002
Description
MICU internal error (EEPROM error)
DTC Type
Internal error
B1036
IG1 power supply circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1037
Rear wiper RISE/RET switch no signal change
Signal error
B1077
Windshield wiper motor (Park) signal error
Signal error
B1079
Daytime running light for USA circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1275
Headlight OFF position circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1276
Signal error
B1277
Combination light switch parking (small) position circuit

malfunction
Headlight switch AUTO position circuit malfunction
B1278
Headlight ON position circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1279
Dimmer switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1280
Turn switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1281
Front wiper MIST position circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1282
Front wiper INT (AUTO) position circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1283
Front wiper LOW position circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1284
Front wiper HIGH position circuit malfunction
Signal error
U0155
MICU lost communication w i t h gauge control module
Loss of communication
U0199
MICU lost communication w i t h door multiplex control

unit
Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF)
U1280
22-112
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-148)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-148)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-308)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-312)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-211)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-212)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-212)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-212)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-212)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-214)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-244)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-314)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-314)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-314)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-314)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-149)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-150)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit

B1901
Description
Immobilizer unit internal error (CPU error)
DTC Type
Internal error
B1902
Immobilizer unit internal error (EEPROM error)
Internal error
U1280
U1282
Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost communication

w i t h MICU
U0155

w i t h door multiplex control unit
DTC
U0199
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-444)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-444)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-445)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-444)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-445)
Door Multiplex Control Unit

DTC
B1125
Description
Driver's power w i n d o w motor A pulse malfunction
DTC Type
Signal error
B1126
Driver's power w i n d o w motor B pulse malfunction
Signal error
B1127
Driver's door lock key cylinder switch malfunction
Signal error
B1128
Driver's door lock switch malfunction
Signal error
B1129
Driver's door lock knob switch malfunction
Signal error
B1130
Front passenger's power w i n d o w motor A pulse

malfunction
Front passenger's power w i n d o w motor B pulse
malfunction
Driver's power w i n d o w position detect circuit
malfunction
Door multiplex control unit lost communication with
front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (UART line
open)
Front passenger's power w i n d o w position detect circuit
malfunction
Door multiplex control unit lost communication w i t h
gauge control module
Door multiplex control unit lost communication with
climate control unit
Signal error
Door multiplex control unit lost communication w i t h

MICU
B1131
B1140
B1142
B1145
U0155
U0164
U1280
U1282
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-281)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-281)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-170)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-171)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-282)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-282)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-284)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-284)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-286)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-286)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-287)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-288)
(cont'd)
22-113

HandsFreeLink Control Unit
DTC
B1775
Description
Microphone input/output shorted to power
DTC Type
Internal error
B1776
Microphone input/output shorted to ground or open
Signal error
B1779
Signal error
B1780
HFL switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK buttons) circuit

open/short
HFL switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK buttons) circuit short
Signal error
B1792
HandsFreeLink internal error
Internal error
U1280
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-327)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-328)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-329)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-331)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-332)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)

DTC
B1152
Description
Gauge control module internal error (EEPROM error)
DTC Type
Internal error
B1175
Signal error
B1176
Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit

malfunction
Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit short
U0029
F-CAN communication line error
U0100
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h PCM
U0122
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h VSA

modulator-control unit
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h the
TPMS control unit (TPMS massage)
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h SRS
unit
Lost communication w i t h A/C
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h auto

light module (AUTOLT frame)
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h power
tailgate control unit
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h MICU

(MICU frame)
Gauge control module lost communication w i t h
PARKSR
U0127
U0151
U0164
U0180
U0230
U1280
U1281
U1288
22-114
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-343)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-343)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-344)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-345)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-346)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-347)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-348)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-349)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-350)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-351)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-352)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-353)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-354)

Description
A n open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor
circuit
A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit
DTC Type
Signal error
Signal error
B1223
A n open or short in the recirculation control motor

circuit
A problem in the rear blower motor circuit
Signal error
B1225
A n open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1226
A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1227
A n open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1228
A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1229
A n open in the sunlight sensor circuit
Signal error
B1230
A short in the sunlight sensor circuit
Signal error
B1231
A n open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1232
A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1233
A n open in the driver's air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1234
A short in the driver's air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1235
Signal error
B1236
A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or

motor
A n open in the passenger's air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1237
A short in the passenger's air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1238
Signal error
B1239
A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage,

door, or motor
A n open or short in the mode control motor circuit
Signal error
B1240
A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor
Signal error
B1241
A problem in the blower motor circuit
Signal error
B1244
An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit
Signal error
B1245
A short in the rear air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1246
Signal error
B2965
A problem in the rear air m i x control linkage, door, or

motor
Rear climate control panel communication failure
B2967
An open in the humidity sensor circuit
Signal error
DTC
B1213
B1214
B1215
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-135)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-137)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-142)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-143)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-144)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-145)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-146)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-147)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-148)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-150)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-152)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-156)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-157)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-160)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-162)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-164)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-165)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-168)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-169)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-174)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-175)
(cont'd
22-115

DTC
B2968
Description
A short in the humidity sensor circuit
DTC Type
Signal error
B2969
B2979
Climate control unit lost communication w i t h MICU

(WIPSW message)
A n open in the pressure sensor circuit
Signal error
B2980
A short in the pressure sensor circuit
Signal error
B2983
A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or

motor
Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge
control module
Signal error
U0155
U1280
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-176)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-179)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-180)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-181)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-184)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-134)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
HVAC Control Unit

DTC Type
Signal error
B1223
Description
A n open or short in the recirculation control motor
circuit
A problem in the rear blower motor circuit
B1227
A n open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1228
A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1231
A n open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1232
A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
Signal error
B1233
A n open in the front air mix control motor circuit
Signal error
B1234
A short in the front air m i x control motor circuit
Signal error
B1235
Signal error
B1239
A problem in the front air mix control linkage, door, or

motor
A n open or short in the mode control motor circuit
B1240
A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor
Signal error
B1241
A problem in the blower motor circuit
Signal error
B1244
A n open in the rear air mix control motor circuit
Signal error
B1245
A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit
Signal error
B1246
Signal error
B2965
A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or

motor
Rear HVAC control panel communication failure
B2979
A n open in the pressure sensor circuit
Signal error
DTC
B1215
22-116
Signal error
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-27)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-29)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-33)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-34)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-35)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-36)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-37)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-38)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-41)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-43)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-45)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-46)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-49)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-50)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-56)
HVAC Control Unit (cont'd)

DTC
B2980
Description
A short in the pressure sensor circuit
DTC Type
Signal error
B2983
A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or

motor
Climate control unit lost communication with gauge
control module
Signal error
U0155
U1280
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-57)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-60)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-26)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
Automatic Lighting Control Unit

DTC
B1552
Description
Automatic lighting control unit EEPROM error
DTC Type
Internal error
B1575
Auto light sensor malfunction
Signal error
U0155
Lost communication w i t h gauge control module
U1280
U1282
Lost communication w i t h MICU
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-216)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-216)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-218)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-219)
(cont'd)
22-117

Power Seat Control Unit
DTC
B1802
Description
Power seat control unit failure
DTC Type
Internal error
B1825
Power seat slide motor pulse error
Signal error
B1826
Power seat front up-down motor pulse error
Signal error
B1827
Power seat rear up-down motor pulse error
Signal error
B1828
Power seat recline motor pulse error
Signal error
B1829
AT-P signal and VSP signal have an illegal combination
Signal error
B1830
Right mirror horizontal sensor open
Signal error
B1832
Left mirror horizontal sensor open
Signal error
B1836
Power seat position sensor circuit short
Signal error
B1837
M e m o r y position delay
Signal error
B1843
UART communication error
Signal error
B1844
Power seat side switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1845
Power seat recline switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1846
Power seat front up-down switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1847
Power seat rear up-down switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
U0155
Power seat control unit lost communication w i t h gauge

control module (VSP/NE frame)
Power seat control unit lost communication w i t h P/W
(DRLockSW frame)
Power seat control unit lost communication w i t h MICU

(MICU frame)
U0199
U1280
U1282
22-118
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-498)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-498)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-501)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-504)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-508)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-511)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-512)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-515)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-518)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-519)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-520)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-521)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-522)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-523)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-524)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-525)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-526)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-527)
Parking and Back-up Sensor Control Unit

DTC
B2601
Description
Parking sensor CPU error
DTC Type
Internal error
B2602
Parking sensor EEPROM error
Internal error
B2625
Left front sensor failure
Signal error
B2628
Right front sensor failure
Signal error
B2629
Left rear sensor failure
Signal error
B2630
Center left rear sensor failure
Signal error
B2631
Center right rear sensor failure
Signal error
B2632
Right rear sensor failure
Signal error
B2633
Front bus failure
Signal error
B2634
Rear bus failure
Signal error
U0155
Parking and back-up sensor control unit lost

communication with gauge control module
Parking and back-up sensor control unit lost

communication w i t h MICU
U1280
U1282
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-472)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-472)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-473)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-474)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-476)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-477)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-479)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-480)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-482)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-482)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-483)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-484)
(cont'd)
22-119

Power Tailgate Control Unit
DTC Type
Internal error
B1375
Description
Power Tailgate Control Unit Internal error (EEPROM
error)
Driver's side PTG switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1376
Tailgate Outer Handle switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1377
Power Tailgate Inner switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1378
Signal error
B1380
Power Tailgate Right Touch/Pinch sensor circuit

malfunction
Power Tailgate Left Touch/Pinch sensor circuit
malfunction
Tailgate Closer Unit Neutral switch circuit malfunction
B1381
Tailgate Closer Unit Release switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1382
Tailgate Closer Unit Full Latch switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1383
Tailgate Closer Unit Ratchet switch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1384
Signal error
B1386
Tailgate Closer Unit Half Latch switch circuit

malfunction
Power tailgate sensor pulse A circuit malfunction
B1387
Power tailgate sensor Pulse B circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1388
Power tailgate drive motor circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1389
Power tailgate motor clutch circuit malfunction
Signal error
B1390
Power tailgate closer m o t o r function error
Signal error
U0155
Power tailgate control unit lost communication w i t h

gauge control module (VSP/NE,AT frame)
Power tailgate control unit lost communication with P/W
(DRLOCKSW, KLDRLOCK frame)
DTC
B1352
B1379
U0199
U1280
U1281
Power tailgate control unit lost communication w i t h

MICU (MICU frame)
22-120
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Page
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-548)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-548)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-549)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-550)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-551)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-552)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-553)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-555)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-557)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-559)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-561)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-563)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-565)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-566)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-569)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-570)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-573)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-574)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-575)
System Description
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (125 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real t i m e " functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates and
relays the information f r o m B-CAN to F-CAN and f r o m F-CAN to B-CAN. This is called the Gateway Function.

B-CAN B-CAN
CAN H CANL
HI
LO
B-CAN (125 kbps)
F-CAN (500 kbps)
PCM
MICU
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT
CLIMATE or HVAC
CONTROL UNIT
SRS UNIT
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
YAW RATELATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
POWER SEAT
CONTROL UNIT
(with DPMS)
i
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
TPMS
CONTROL UNIT
i
PARKING and BACK-UP

SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
(cont'd)
22-121

Gateway Function
The gauge control m o d u l e acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share Information, the gauge control module
translates and relays the information f r o m B-CAN to F-CAN and f r o m F-CAN to B-CAN.
BAT
IGN
CPU (Built in CAN controller)
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN
HI
CANH
B-CAN
LO
B-CAN
CANL
F-CAN
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function

The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the LCD display
on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge control module self diagnostic
function (see page 22-334).
22-122
BODY
Self-diagnostic Function (On-board Diagnosis)

By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic information f r o m the MICU
via a diagnostic line called the K-LINE. The K-LINE is separated communication line f r o m the CAN lines, but it is
connected to most of the CAN related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and
sends B-CAN diagnostic information to the HDS. When doing a function test w i t h the HDS, the HDS sends an output
signal t h r o u g h the K-LINE to the MICU. The MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or c o m m a n d s the function.

B-CAN B-CAN
CANH CANL
HI
LO
F-CAN (500 kbps)
B-CAN (125 kbps)
PCM
MICU
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT
SRS UNIT
CLIMATE or HVAC
CONTROL UNIT
i
i
i -
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
t"
YAW RATELATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
#
i
i
, i _
i
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
POWER SEAT
CONTROL UNIT
(with DPMS)
i
i -
TPMS
CONTROL UNIT
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
i
i
PARKING and BACK-UP

SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
4i
~ii
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
K-LINE
\
DATA LINK
7
\ CONNECTOR 7
HDS
(cont'd)
22-123

Wake-up and Sleep Function
The multiplex integrated control system has " w a k e - u p " and " s l e e p " functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery
w h e n the ignition switch is to LOCK (0).
In the sleep mode, the multiplex integrated control system stops functioning (communication and CPU control) w h e n
it is not necessary for the system to operate.
As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control units in the sleep mode
immediately wake up and begin to function.
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about 40
seconds before the control unit goes f r o m the wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-144).
Fail-safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU have a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed w h e n
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal w h e n there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal f r o m a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to operate
normally.
Hardware Fail-safe Control

Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU enters the hardware fail-safe mode, and
each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-safe Control

When any of the data f r o m the B-CAN circuit cannot be received w i t h i n a specified t i m e , or an unusual combination of
the data is recognized, the MICU enters the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
22-124
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function

The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V , the MICU sends a MICU message and will not
store DTCs.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
Output
Battery voltage (VBU)

MICU (Under 10 V) signal
Entry Lights Control System (Individual Map Lights, Ignition Key Light)
The MICU controls the entry lights based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Output
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Ignition key switch
Tailgate latch switch or full latch switch
Keyless LOCK signal
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Individual map lights

Ignition key light
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on the IG1 and SRS (CDS) data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

CDS signals
Output
Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Key Interlock
The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based on ignition switch ACC (I) position, the transmission range switch (P), and the park-pin
switch inputs.
Input
MICU
Ignition switch ACC (I)

Transmission range switch (P)
Park-pin switch
Output
Key interlock solenoid
Headlight Auto-off Function

The MICU controls the headlight auto-off function based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Ignition key switch
Combination light switch (SMALL)
Combination light switch (ON)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
IG1 meter signal
Output
Headlight (LOW)
Parking lights
Taillghts
Automatic Lighting System

The MICU controls the automatic lighting system based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
Combination light switch (OFF)

Combination light switch (PASSING)
Combination light switch (DIMMER)
Automatic lighting signals
Output
Headlight (LOW)
Parking lights
Taillghts
(cont'd)
22-125

Headlights
The MICU controls the headlights based on inputs from each switch.
Input
MICU
IG1 power supply

Dimmer switch
Passing switch
B-CAN
Output
Headlights (LOW/HIGH)
Front parking lights
Taillights
Combination light switch signals

Taillight relay signal
Headlight HI/LO relay signal
Taillight status signal
Daytime Running Lights

The MICU controls the daytime running lights system based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

IG2 power supply
Combination light switch (PASSING)
Combination light switch (DIMMER)
Parking brake signal
IG1 meter signal
Automatic lighting signal
Output
DRL messages
Back-up Lights
The MICU controls the back-up lights based on ignition switch (IG1) and the transmission range switch (R) inputs.
Input
MICU
Ignition switch (IG1)

Transmission range switch (R)
Output
Back-up lights

The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard warning lights based on inputs from the turn signal switch and the hazard warning switch.
Output
Input
MICU
Turn signal lights (left)

Turn signal lights (right)
IG1 power supply

Turn signal switch (left)
Turn signal switch (right)
B-CAN
Turn signal light signals

Hazard warning switch signal
Turn signal relay signal
Fog Lights
The MICU controls the fog lights based on the IG1, the combination light switch, and the fog light switch inputs.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
22-126
IG1 power supply

Headlight switch (OFF)
Headlight switch (ON)
Fog light switch
Output
Fog light relay
Fog light signal

Fog light relay signal
Courtesy Light
The MICU controls the door courtesy lights based on inputs from the door switches.
Input
MICU

Output
Front passenger's door courtesy light
Left rear door courtesy light
Right rear door courtesy light
Cargo Area Light

The MICU controls the cargo area light based on the hatch glass latch switch and the tailgate latch switch or the full latch switch inputs.
Input
MICU
Tailgate latch switch or Full latch switch

Hatch latch switch
Output
Cargo area light
Windshield Wiper Operation

The MICU controls the windshield wiper motor based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Windshield wiper switch (INT/LO)
Windshield wiper switch (LO/HI)
Windshield wiper switch (MIST)
Windshield wiper intermittent dwell time controller
Windshield washer switch
Windshield wiper motor (AS)
IG1 meter signal
Output
Windshield wiper motor (HI/LO/INT)
Wiper switch signals

Windshield wiper motor (AS) signal
Rear Window Wiper Operation

The MICU controls the rear window wiper motor and washer motor based on the wiper/washer switch inputs and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Transmission range switch R position
Rear window wiper switch
Windshield wiper switch (INT/LO)
Windshield wiper switch (LO/HI)
Rear window washer relay
Rear window washer switch
Rear window wiper motor stop switch
Rear window wiper motor rise/return switch
Driver's door hatch glass opener switch
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK signal
Passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Power tailgate signal
Output
Rear window wiper motor relay (FWD)
Rear window wiper motor relay (RWD)
Wiper switch signals
Washer Operation
The MICU controls the windshield and rear window washer motor based on the IG1, the washer switches and hatch glass latch switch inputs.
Input
MICU
IG1 power supply

Rear window washer switch
Output
Rear window washer motor
(cont'd)
22-127

Power Window Timer (Key-off Operation)
The MICU controls the power window key-off operation based on B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Power window timer signal
Power window relay signal
Power window timer setting signal
Output
Power window timer
Turn signal Operation

The MICU controls the turn signal lights based on the IG1 and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
IG1 power supply
B-CAN
ANSWERBACK signal
Vehicle speed signal
Output
Left turn signal lights
Right turn signal lights
Power Door Locks

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Ignition key switch
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Passenger's key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Output
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Auto Door Lock

Input
MICU
B-CAN
22-128
IG1 power supply

Vehicle speed signal
Engine speed signal
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Output
Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Auto Door Unlock

Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Keyless LOCK signal
Output
Driver's door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Keyless Entry System

Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Ignition key switch
Keyless LOCK signal
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Output
Hatch glass relay
Keyless RELOCK signal
Keyless PANIC Operation

The MICU controls the keyless PANIC operation based on B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
Output
Headlights (LOW)
Parking lights
Taillights
Horns
PANIC signals
(cont'd)
22-129

Security Alarm System
The MICU controls the lighting system and horns based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
IG1 power supply

Ignition key switch
Audio switch
Keyless LOCK signal
Door LOCK signal
Passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Passenger's key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Output
Headlights (LOW)
Parking lights
Taillights
Horns
MICU (SET 1) signal

MICU (SET 2) signal
ALARM (ACTION) signal
Hatch Glass Opener Operation

The MICU controls the hatch glass opener based on the inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN

Rear window wiper motor stop switch
Keyless LOCK signal
Door LOCK signal
Power tailgate signal
Passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Output
Hatch glass relay
Hatch glass relay signal

Hatch glass latch switch signal
Prevention of Key Locked Inside Vehicle

Input
MICU
B-CAN
Ignition key switch

Output
Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN

Output
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock only the driver's door first)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN data.
Input
MICU
B-CAN
22-130

Output
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
HDS Inputs and Commands

Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS can not update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List.
This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer
vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
Input:
System Menu
Gauge
Data List
Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC switch)
Cruise Control Set Switch
Cruise Control Resume Switch
Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada)
Engine Oil Pressure
VSA/TCS Off Switch
Gauge Select/Reset Switch
Parking Brake Switch
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Select/Reset Switch
INFO Previous Switch
INFO Next Switch
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2
VSA/TCS Active Indicator
VSA/TCS Indicator (Warning)
ABS Indicator
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution)
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator
MIL Indicator
Washer Fluid Level Indicator (Canada)
DRL Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Charging System Indicator
CRUISE Main Switch ON Indicator
Maintenance Minder Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Parking Light ON Indicator
Low Fuel Warning Indicator
Security Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Master Warning Indicator
Auto-Light Trouble Lamp
Seat Belt Indicator
Low Tire Pressure Indicator
TPMS Indicator
Power Tailgate Indicator
Door Open Indicator
Maintenance Minder Change Oil Indicator
A/T Indicator
SRS Indicator
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator
Start Relay Indicator
Immobilizer Indicator
Fuel Fill Cap Caution
Speed Indicator (km/h) Command
Speed Indicator (mph) Command
A/T Temperature Indicator
Compass Status
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
A/T Gear Position Switch (R)
A/T Gear Position Switch (P)
Data List Indication

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
deg
V
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
km/h
mile/h
OFF/ON
Sampling/Fail
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-131

Input:
System Menu
Lighting
22-132
Data List
Driver's Door Switch
Hazard Switch
Headlight Switch (OFF)
Headlight Switch (PARKING)
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT)
Headlight Switch (AUTO)
Headlight Switch (High Beam)
Headlight Switch (PASSING)
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT)
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT)
Fog Light Switch
Interior Light Command
Left Turn Signal Command
Right Turn Signal Command
Cargo Light Command
DR Courtesy Light Output
Passenger's Courtesy Light Output
Headlight Command
Headlight High Beam Command
Parking Light Command
Fog Light Command
DRL Command
Autolight Sensor
Autolight Small Command
Autolight Headlight Command
Autolight Warning Command
Sensor Backup Line Command

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
V
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Input:
System Menu
Door Locks
Data List
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Rear Door Switch
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Door LOCK Command
Door UNLOCK Command
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command
Front Passenger's Door Switch
Passenger's Rear Door Switch
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK)

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-133

Input:
System Menu
Keyless
Power Windows
22-134
Data List
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK)
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch
Door LOCK Command
Door UNLOCK Command
Trunk Lid Release Command
Trunk Open Switch
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK)
Trunk Handle Switch
Glass Hatch Switch
Glass Hatch Outside Handle Switch
Glass Hatch Driver's Release Switch
Glass Hatch Command
P/W Main Switch
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Window AUTO)
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Window UP)
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Window DOWN)
P/W Master Sw. (Front Passenger's Window UP)
P/W Master Sw. (Front Passenger's Window DOWN)
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear Window UP)
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear Window DOWN)
P/W Master Sw. (Right Rear Window UP)
P/W Master Sw. (Right Rear Window DOWN)
P/W Master Sw. (Passenger's Window AUTO)
Driver's P/W Motor Pulse A
Driver's P/W Motor Pulse B
Driver's P/W Motor Command
Power Window Timer Output

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Input:
System Menu
Power Seat/Power
Mirror
Data List
Power Mirror UP Switch
Power Mirror MOVE LEFT Switch
Power Mirror DOWN Switch
Power Mirror MOVE RIGHT Switch
Power Mirror LEFT Switch
Power Mirror RIGHT Switch
Slide Switch Backward
Slide Switch Forward
Recline Switch Backward
Recline Switch Forward
Front Up-Down Switch Down
Front Up-Down Switch Up
Rear Up-Down Switch Down
Rear Up-Down Switch Up
Ignition Switch for Power Seat Control
A/T Gear Position Switch (P)
Seat MEMO Switch
Driver 1 Position Switch
Driver 2 Position Switch
Ignition Switch (ETS)
Slide Sensor
Front UP-DOWN Sensor
Recline Sensor
Rear UP-DOWN Sensor
Slide Motor Command
Recline Motor Command
Front Height Motor Command
Rear Height Motor Command
Power Seat Buzzer Command
Driverl Position Indicator
Driver2 Position Indicator
Left Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor
Left Power Mirror Vertical Sensor
Right Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor
Right Power Mirror Vertical Sensor
Left Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command
Left Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command
Right Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command
Right Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command
Memory Switch Position 1 Indicator Command
Memory Switch Position 2 Indicator Command
Memory Switch Illumination Command

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/FWD/RWD
OFF/FWD/RWD
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-135
Multiplex Integrated Control S y s t e m

Input:
System Menu
Wipers
Security
Power Tailgate
22-136
Data List
Rear Wiper Auto Stop Switch
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW)
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH)
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST)
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT)
Rear Wiper Command
Rear Wiper Washer Command
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command
Windshield Washer Motor Command
Rear Wiper Switch
Windshield Washer Switch
Rear Washer Switch
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch
Rear Wiper RISE/RET Switch
Ignition Key Cylinder Switch
Radio Switch
Door LOCK Command
Door UNLOCK Command
Security hood Switch
Headlight Command
Headlight High Beam Command
Parking Light Command
Horn Command
Tailgate Switch
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK)
Power Tailgate Switch
Power Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Power Tailgate Inner Switch
Power Relese Latch Motor Command
A/T Shift Position Switch (P)
Latch Gear Position Switch (Neutral)
Latch Gear Position Switch (Release)
Full Latch Switch
Ratchet Switch
Half Latch Switch
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse A
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse B
Right Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor
Left Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor
Power Tailgate Motor Command
Power Tailgate Clutch Command
Closer Motor Command
Tailgate Switch Close
Power Tailgate Buzzer

OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
OFF/OPEN/CLOSE
OFF/ON
OFF/RELEASE/CLOSE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
BODY
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A

Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see
page 11 -3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first,
then perform this diagnosis if the s y m p t o m is related to
the B-CAN system.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A), then

turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: Always turn the ignition switch within 3 seconds

w h e n prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures
in this section.
1. Compare the s y m p t o m w i t h this list of B-CAN related
systems:
Exterior lights
Turn signals
Entry light control
Interior lights
Safety indicators
Rear w i n d o w defogger
HandsFreeLink
Horns (security and panic)
Chimes (key-in, seat belt, Jights-on and parking
brake)
3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, select UNIT

INFORMATION, and then select CONNECTED UNITS
listed to see if the following control units are
communicating with the HDS.
MICU
Power w i n d o w s
Power w i n d o w / m o o n r o o f timer
Wiper/washer
Security
Keyless entry
Door multiplex control unit
Power door locks
Rear MICU
Climate control or HVAC control
Key interlock
Climate control unit or HAVC control unit
Dash light brightness
Driving position m e m o r y
Parking and back-up sensor system
Power tailgate
Audio unit
Immobilizer
Parking and back-up sensor system
Is the symptom related to the B-CAN
system?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the system
w i t h the s y m p t o m . B
NOTE:
If a unit is communicating w i t h the HDS, DETECT
will be displayed.
If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not
equipped, " N o t Available" will be displayed.
Are all control units communicating
with the HDS?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lf any of the control unit are not communicating,
go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B (see
page 22-139). If all units are not communicating or
only the MICU is communicating, g o t o DTC U1280
(cont'd)
22-137

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (cont'd)
4. S e l e c t the s y s t e m that h a s t h e p r o b l e m f r o m B O D Y
E L E C T R I C A L m e n u , then select DTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?

YES-Go to s t e p 5.
NO-lf the p r o b l e m is related to o n e of the following
i t e m s a n d the s y s t e m that is m a l f u n c t i o n i n g d o e s not
s t o p or turn off, go to B - C A N S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s T e s t
M o d e C ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 1 3 9 ) . If the p r o b l e m is related to
o n e of the following i t e m s a n d the s y s t e m that is
m a l f u n c t i o n i n g d o e s not run or turn o n , go to B - C A N
S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s T e s t M o d e D ( s e e p a g e 22-140).
E x t e r i o r lights
Turn signals
E n t r y light control
Interior lights
H o r n s (security a n d panic)
Power windows
Wiper/washer
Power door locks
If the p r o b l e m is related to o n e of the f o l l o w i n g i t e m s ,
go to the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for that individual
system.
G a u g e control m o d u l e
Safety indicators
C h i m e s ( k e y - i n , s e a t belt a n d lights-on)
R e a r w i n d o w d e f o g g e r (climate or H V A C control)
Security
K e y l e s s entry
C l i m a t e control or H V A C control
K e y interlock
D a s h lights b r i g h t n e s s
Audio system
Navigation
Driving position m e m o r y
HandsFreeLink
P o w e r tailgate
Immobilizer
5. R e c o r d all D T C s , a n d sort t h e m by D T C t y p e .
6. T r o u b l e s h o o t the D T C ( s ) in this o r d e r :
22-138
Battery v o l t a g e D T C s .
Internal e r r o r D T C s .
L o s s of c o m m u n i c a t i o n D T C s . B e g i n
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g w i t h the l o w e s t n u m b e r first
( E x a m p l e : if D T C B 1 0 0 8 a n d B1011 a r e r e t r i e v e d ,
t r o u b l e s h o o t D T C B 1 0 0 8 first). Refer to l o s s of
communication D T C c r o s s reference chart (see
p a g e 22-111).
S i g n a l error D T C s .
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - B - C A N S y Ts rt oe um b l e s h o o t i n g - B - C A N S y s
D i a g n o s i s
T e s t M o d e
B
D i a g n o s i s
T e s t M o d e
C
Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not
communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-137).
1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the
symptom from BODY ELECTRICAL.
2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of
communication DTCs. Refer to loss of communication
DTC cross reference chart.
Are any loss of communication
DTCs
indicated?
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the

B-CAN system does not stop or turn off.
NOTE:
If the component does not turn ON, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-140).
See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list
of input and output devices and the control units that
monitor the input and control the output devices (see
page 22-121).
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu
from the HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
Are any DTCs
NO-Replace the MICU.B

3. Do the power, ground, and communication part of the
input test for the unit not communicating with the
HDS.
Unit not communicating
MICU (see page 22-153)

Gauge control module (see page 22-355)
Automatic lighting control unit (see page
22-227)
Door multiplex control unit (see page 22-289)
Power seat control unit (see page 22-528)
Parking and back-up sensor control unit (see
page 22-485)
Power tailgate control unit (see page 22-576)
HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-326)
Climate control unit* (see page 21-187)
HVAC control unit * (see page 21-63)
*1: With Climate control
*2: Without Climate control
1
indicated?
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A

(see page 22-137).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn OFF the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and
check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In DATA LIST, check the output signal of the
malfunctioning component.
Is the output signal
OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the device
that will not turn OFF.B
5. Check the relay if applicable, then check for a short in
the wire between the relay and the component, the
relay and control unit, or the component and control
unit.
Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the

component that will not turn OFF.H
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire harness.H
(cont'd)
22-139

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode C (cont'd)
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System

Diagnosis Test Mode D
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire

between the switch and the control unit that monitors
the switch.
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the

B-CAN system does not run or come o n .
the switch and wire harness
OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the

switch.
NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire harness.B
NOTE:
If the component does not turn off or stop, go to
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page
22-139).
See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list
of input and output devices and the control units that
monitor the input and control the output devices (see
page 22-121).
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device.
Is the fuse OK?
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck.B
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu
f r o m the HDS.
Are any DTCs indicated ?
Y E S - G o to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-137).H
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
4. Select DATA LIST f r o m the TEST MODE m e n u , and
check output signal for the malfunctioning
component.
Is there an output signal?
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Check the relay and g r o u n d , then check for an open or
a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component.
Are the relay and circuit OK?
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit.B
6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning
component.
Does the output device pass the function test?
NO-Replace the c o m p o n e n t s
22-140
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis

Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the HDS)
7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
output device and body ground on the wire that the
control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
8. Select MISC. TEST f r o m the TEST MODE m e n u , and
do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning
component.
Is there a change in voltage (12 VtoOVorOVto
12 V)?
YES-Replace the c o m p o n e n t . B
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning c o m p o n e n t . B
9. Select DATA LIST f r o m the TEST MODE m e n u , and
make sure the switch signal input for the
malfunctioning system indicates a change w h e n
operated.
Does the switch input indicate ON when the switch is
ON?
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component.B

MPCS (MCIS) Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A
Test Mode 1
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see
page 11 -3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first,
then perform this diagnosis i f t h e HDS is not available.
fuse/relay box and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuses in the
Are the fuses OK?
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown f u s e . B
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and move the
interior light switch to the middle (DOOR) position.
3. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the MICU
service check connector socket (B) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
check for an open or a short in the wire between the
switch and the control unit that monitors it.
Are the switch and the wire harness
OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the

switch.!
NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire h a r n e s s .
4. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the individual map lights.

When the lights flash quickly once, and then go off,
the system is in Test Mode 1.
5. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control
module LCD display while still in Test Mode 1. Push
the SEL/RESET button to display the next code. After
you get to the last code, the display shows END. If no
DTCs are stored, the display will read NO.
Are any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - G o to Step 6.
NO-Go to Step 9.
6. Record all DTCs and sort t h e m .
(cont'd)
22-141

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS) (cont'd)
7. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the
lowest number first; for example, if B1036 and
B1037 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1036 first). Refer
to loss of communication DTC cross reference chart
(see page 22-111).
Signal error DTCs
8. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the
SEL/RESET button for about 10 seconds. You will hear
a beep to confirm the codes have been cleared.
Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for codes.
Test Mode 2
9. Remove the MPCS service connector f r o m the
under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 510 seconds,
then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. W h e n the system
enters Mode 2, the ceiling light will flash t w o times
quickly and then go off.
NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for too
short or too long of a t i m e , or the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0), the system will return to Test
Mode 1.
22-142
10. The following tables list the circuits that can be

checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
OK, the individual map lights will blink once. If the
circuit is faulty, there w i l l be no indication.
Item
Brake pedal position switch (ON)
Tailgate latch switch (without PTG)
Full latch switch (with PTG)
Audio unit (security input)
Windshield wiper HI/LO switch
Windshield wiper INT/LO switch
Windshield wiper MIST switch
Windshield wiper intermittent dwell t i m e
controller
Windshield wiper motor park position (Auto
stop)
Rear w i n d o w wiper switch
Rear w i n d o w washer switch
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor park position (Auto
stop)
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Headlight switch (ON)
Headlight switch (OFF)
Lighting switch
Dimmer switch
Passing switch
Fog light switch
Ignition key switch
Transmission range switch (R)
Rear w i n d o w wiper motor rise/return switch
Do the individual map lights blink, indicating

switch operation?
proper
Y E S - G o t o f u n c t i o n and input test for the s y s t e m

related t o the f a i l u r e . !
NO-Repair the o p e n , short, or replace the faulty
switch.

Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:
Close all doors, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then open and close the driver's door. I f t h e MICU receives no
signals f r o m the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch or full latch switch (Tailgate closed)
Hazard w a r n i n g switch (OFF)
Power tailgate outer handle switch
Power tailgate inside switch
Power tailgate opener switch
2. Confirm the sleep mode:
NOTE: Check any official Honda service website for more service information about parasitic draw at the battery.
Check the parasitic draw at the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should change f r o m about 200
m A to less than 35 m A in less than 50 seconds.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the MICU, and all B-CAN system components wake up. W h e n any switch
in the multiplex integrated control system is turned o n , a message is sent to the related control unit(s) to c o m m a n d
the desired function. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most related to the
problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. In the table , the control unit is followed by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up.
Door switches (door open)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch(LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
Right rear door lock knob switch
Tailgate latch switch or full lutch switch (Tailgate open)
Hatch glass latch switch (hatch glass open)
Security hood switch (hood open)
Audio unit switch
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
Ignition key switch(key inserted)
22-144
22-145

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PNKG20
D1

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

CTXJO
O~\JD
>No.2 1 No.
1o3li^?,
7
5A
, (15 A) C (7.5A)C< - >

RED
No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A) G1
G19
- WHT-
No. 23 (10 A)
COO)
G2
PNK
C2
PCM
No. 35
(10A)
VBU
ACC
LTGRN
l_5
ACC CUT
RELAY
-H-
MICU
Q1 P5
K2
4
YEL
BLU/WHT
IG1
IG1
IG1
R20
P10
WHT
M7
PNK
<7
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (P or N)
- WHT
WHT- LT GRN - -
T "
I
I
I
I
WHT
BRN
WHT LTGRN
YEL
WHT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
4"""
I
I
WHT LTGRN
I
t
I
I
B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
LG
WHT
WHT LTGRN
GAUGE
S-GND
TT
WHT LTGRN
I
I
I
118
'20
19
VBU B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
CONTROL MODULE
WHT
LTGRN
PUR
ACC B-CAN B-CAN

HI
LO
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
S-GND
PNK-
WHT
1
1
1
LTGRN PNK
1
1
1
1
j7
|6
B-CAN B-CAN IG1
HI
LO
PARKING and BACK-UP
SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
GND1
16
BRN
^7
BLK
BLK
G401
G403
BLK
-LL
22-146
G403
BODY
[j]: With climate control system

[2\: Without climate control system
- - : B-CAN line
: Other communication line
IG1 E28
E6
"1
H1
SG
1 No. 7
(10A)
MICU
CHK
Q10
BRN
F20
T34
B-CANB-CAN
HI
LO
,T12
MICU
SERVICE
CHECK
CONNECTOR
H3
PG
PG
PG
MICU
+B
AUTO
LT
;T:A35
LU: A23 B-CAN
- WHTHi
CLIMATE
or HVAC
[jJ:A36
L H : A24 B-CAN CONTROL
UNIT
LT GRN LO
,T29
WHT LTGRN
D18 B-CAN
HI
D8 B-CAN
LO
SG
K-LINE
LT GRN -
07
LTBLU
BLK
BLK
BLK
_CL
_Q_
-Q_
AUDIO
UNIT
YEL
7
K-LINE
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
G401
G501
G401
-WHT
-WHT
1
- -1-
WHT-
WHT- -
- - WHT
-#
LTGRN
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I
1
WHT LT GRN
WHT
LTGRN-
WHT LTGRN
WHT
YEL
WHT LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I 4
13
_i_
VBU IG1 B-CAN B-CAN

HI
LO
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT
GND1
GND2
35
33
VBU B-CAN B-CAN

HI
LO
(Built in the power window master
switch)
SG
32
BLK
WHT
YEL
WHT LT GRN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B11
C6
C14 1 C7
IGN1 B-CANB-CAN
HI
LO
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
VBU
SG
B19
BLK
BLK
BLK
G403
G401
G503
B36
VBU
B34
IGN
B40
B39
B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
POWER SEAT
CONTROL UNIT
SG
B9
G503
22-147

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1002: MICU Internal Error (EEPROM
Error)
DTC B1036: IG1 Power Supply Circuit

Malfunction
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure

to f o l l o w instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-137).

to follow instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to

ON (II).

ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
Is DTC B1002
indicated?
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 22-90J.B
time.B
Is DTC B1036
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections at the
under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (2P). Ifthe
connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-93) and the charging s y s t e m .
5. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
32P connector terminals No. 32 and No. 13.
S-GND (BLK)
1 | 2 L 4 / | 5 | 6 / 1 8 | 9 | 1 0 11 |12|13T14|/Tl6|
l17l18l19l20l21l22l23l24l25l/l27l28l29l30L/132
IGN (YEL)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Faulty MICU. Substitute a known-good

under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-89) and
recheck.B
NO-Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for open in the
BLK wire or a poor connection at G401, or an open in
the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the gauge control module. Ifthe fuse is b l o w n , repair
a short in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay
box and the gauge control module or the power
tailgate control u n i t . B
22-148
DTC U0155: MICU Lost Communication With

BODY

32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20 and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector T (34P)

ON (II).
Is DTC U0155
5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 / 16
I7I18I19I20I21I22I23I24I25IXI27I28I29I30I/I32
1 2
B-CAN HI
(WHT)
B-CAN LO
(LT GRIM)
indicated?
Check for loose or poor c o n n e c t i o n s .
Is DTC U1280
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC U1280 troubleshooting (see page

22-15D.B
NO-Go to step 6.
(34P).
B-CAN HI
(WHT)
8 1 9 |l0Ml2[XI/fl5jl6
22I/M25I26I27I/I29
B-CAN LO ( L T G R N )
Y E S - G o to the gauge control module input test, and
do all power and ground input tests (see page 22-355).
If the tests prove OK, replace the gauge control
module (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e . H
22-149

DTC U0199: MICU Lost Communication With
M o d e A (see page 22-137).
9. Check for continuity between power w i n d o w master

switch 37P connector terminals No. 33 and No. 35 and
POWER WINDOW M A S T E R SWITCH 37P CONNECTOR

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back t o
ON (II).
1 I / I 3 1 4 [ / I 6 I X M 9 |10111
12
25
I3I14IXI6I17XI19I20I21I22I23
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
24
37

Is DTC U0199
indicated?
Is DTC U1280
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o the DTC U1280 troubleshooting (see page

22-151).
NO-Go to step 6.


7. Disconnect the power w i n d o w master switch 37P
connector.
(34P).
Y E S - G o to the power w i n d o w master switch input
test, and do all power and g r o u n d input tests (see
page 22-289). I f t h e tests prove OK, replace the power
w i n d o w master switch (see page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
22-150
DTC U1280: Communication Bus Line Error

(BUS-OFF)
M o d e A (see page 22-137).
ON (II).
Is DTC U1280
Indicated?
Check for loose or poor connections, or w o r n / shorted
wires. If the connections are g o o d , check the battery
condition (see page 22-93) and the charging
system.B
6. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each control

unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC, then
recheck for DTCs after each unit is disconnected.
Control Unit
Door multiplex
control unit
Gauge control
module
Immobilizer-keyless
control unit
Audio unit
Climate control unit *
HVAC control unit *
Power tailgate
control unit
Automatic lighting
control unit
Power seat control
unit *
Parking and back-up
sensor control unit
HandsFreeLink
control unit
2
Connector
37P connector
32P connector
7P connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
D(20P)
A (36P)
A (24P)
C(14P)
14P connector
Connector B (40P)
16P connector
28P connector
* 1 : With climate control system

* 2 : W i t h o u t climate control system
* 3 : With DPMS
Is DTC U1280 indicated with each individual unit
disconnected?
Y E S - L e a v e the connectors disconnected, and go to
step 7.
NO-Go to the input test for the control unit that was
disconnected w h e n DTC U1280 did not reset and
perform all power and ground input tests. If the tests
prove OK, replace that u n i t . B
Power w i n d o w master switch input test (see page
22-289)
Gauge control unit input test (see page 22-355)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit input test (see
page 22-457)
A u d i o unit
Climate control unit input test (see page 21-187)
HVAC control unit input test (see page 21-81)
Power tailgate control unit input test (see page
22-576)
Automatic lighting control unit input test (see page
22-227)
Power seat control unit input test (see page 22-528)
Parking and back-up sensor control unit input test
(see page 22-485)
(cont'd)
22-151

8. Disconnect each control unit connector in the table.
Control Unit
Door multiplex
control unit
Gauge control
module
Immobilizer-keyless
control unit
Audio unit
Climate control unit *
HVAC control unit *
Power tailgate
control unit
Automatic lighting
control unit
Power seat control
unit *
Parking and back-up
sensor control unit
HandsFreeLink
control unit
Connector
37P connector
32P connector
B-CAN HI (WHT)
7P connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
D(20P)
A (36P)
A (24P)
C (14P)
14P connector
B-CAN HI (WHT)
7
V
9 10
12
25 26 27
29
15 16
///
YES-Repair a short in the B-CAN w i r e s . !
NO-Go to step 11.
22-152
9 10
7 2912 / / / / 7
15 16
34
NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 22-90).H
28P connector
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay

box connector T (34P) terminals No. 12 and No. 29.
7
/ /7
YES-Repair a short to g r o u n d in the w i r e ( s ) . B

16P connector

(34P).
Connector B (40P)
* 1 : W i t h climate control system

* 2 : W i t h o u t climate control system
* 3 : W i t h DPMS
22
77 7
/ 7 7 22 / / 25 26 27 7
7 /
/7 / /

7
34
Control Unit Input Test

N O T E : B e f o r e t e s t i n g , t r o u b l e s h o o t the multiplex integrated control unit first, u s i n g B - C A N S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s T e s t M o d e
A ( s e e p a g e 22-137), a n d m a k e s u r e the lighting s y s t e m w o r k s properly.
MICU
2. R e m o v e the d r i v e r ' s d a s h b o a r d l o w e r c o v e r ( s e e p a g e 20-121).
3. D i s c o n n e c t u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x c o n n e c t o r s E , F, K, P, Q, R, a n d T.
N O T E : All c o n n e c t o r v i e w s are s h o w n f r o m the w i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s .
CONNECTOR E (42P)
BLK
(c=zz
/ / / //
2
5 6
27 28
23
///
AA
14 15 16 17
12J13
19 20 21
34 35 36 37 38
22
40 41
'
'
CONNECTOR F (34P)
n
1
20
5 | 6
22 23
24
9 10 11
A*
25
27 28
II
14|15 16)17
AA
30
29
31
132
18 19
33 34
BLK
CONNECTOR P (10P)
CONNECTOR Q (16P)
LTBLU
WHT
A/ /
4
-TIL
l_JT_
/ /
7
2 3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5
10
\
YEL
CONNECTOR T (34P)
7/ // z/ /
WHT
22
7A
1
9 10
2 5 2 6 27
12
15 16
29
34
LTGRN
BLK
4. I n s p e c t the c o n n e c t o r a n d s o c k e t t e r m i n a l s to be s u r e t h e y are all m a k i n g g o o d c o n t a c t .

If the t e r m i n a l s a r e bent, l o o s e , or c o r r o d e d , repair t h e m a s n e c e s s a r y a n d r e c h e c k the s y s t e m .
I f t h e t e r m i n a l s look O K , go to s t e p 5.
(confd)
22-153

Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. W i t h the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
If any test indicates a p r o b l e m , find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity
Wire
Q7
LT
BLU
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
22-154
Test condition
Under all conditions
Immobilizer-keyless control
unit 7P connector
disconnected
Gauge control module 32P

connector disconnected

28P connector
disconnected
Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between
terminal Q7 and the data link
connector 16P connector
terminal No. 7:
Check for continuity to body
ground:
terminal T12 and
immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector terminal No. 4:
terminal T29 and
terminal T12 and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal
No. 20:
terminal T29 and gauge control
module 32P connector terminal
No. 19:
terminal T12 and
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connectorterminal No. 18:
terminal T29 and
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
Possible cause if desired result is

not obtained
A short to g r o u n d in the w i r e
An open in the wire
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
Parking and back-up sensor

control unit 16P connector
disconnected

terminal T12 and parking and
back-up sensor control unit 16P
terminal T29 and parking and
back-up sensor control unit 16P
terminal T12 and automatic
lighting control unit 14P
terminal T29 and automatic
lighting control unit 14P
terminal T12 and door multiplex
terminal No. 35:
terminal T29 and door multiplex
terminal No. 33:
terminal T12 and Power tailgate
control unit connector C 14P
terminal No. 7:
terminal T29 and Power tailgate
control unit connector C 14P
terminal No. 6:
terminal T12 and Power seat
control unit connector B (40P)
terminal No. 40:
terminal T29 and Power seat
control unit connector B (40P)
terminal No. 39:
T12*
WHT
T29*
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
T12*
WHT
T29*
LT
GRN
T12*
WHT
#3
LT
GRN
T29
*1:
*2:
*3:
Automatic lighting control

unit 14P connector
disconnected
Door multiplex control unit

37P connector
disconnected

connector C 14P
disconnected

connector B (40P)
disconnected

not obtained
With parking and back-up sensor system

With Power tailgate
With DPMS
(cont'd)
22-155

Cavity
T12
Wire
WHT
Test condition
Climate control unit
connector A (36P)
disconnected *
1
T29
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
HVAC control unit

connector A (24P)
disconnected *
2
T29
LT
GRN
T12
WHT
T29
LT
GRN
Audio unit connector D

(20P) disconnected

terminal T12 and climate control
unit connector A (36P) terminal
No. 35:
terminal T29 and climate control
unit connector A (36P) terminal
No. 36:
Check for continuity
A23
between terminal T12
and HVAC control unit
connector A (24P)
terminal No. 23:
There should be
continuity.
A24
between terminal T12
and HVAC control unit
connector A (24P)
terminal No. 24:
There should be
continuity.
terminal T12 and audio unit
connector D (20P) terminal No.
18:
terminal T29 and audio unit
connector D (20P) terminal No. 8:
Possible cause if desired result

is not obtained
* 1 : W i t h Climate control system

* 2 : Without Climate control system
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
P5
WHT
Measure the voltage to g r o u n d :

There should be battery
voltage.
P10
YEL
Ignition switch ON (II)
Measure the voltage to ground:

voltage.
K2
PUR
Ignition switch ACC (I)

voltage.
22-156

not obtained
Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the
Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
box
Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A n open in the w i r e
box
box
Faulty acc cut relay
Cavity
Wire
E6
T34
F20
BLK
Test condition

There should be less than 0.2 V.

not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
Poor ground (G501)
(cont'd)
22-157

Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then remove the power w i n d o w master switch (see page 22-298).
8. Disconnect the 37P connector (A) f r o m the power w i n d o w master switch (B).
WHT
1 3
1
4
14
1 6
/ //
10
11
2 6 | 2 7 | 2 8 | 2 9 | 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 2 | 3 3 | 3 4 | 3 5 | 3 6 |
L _ l
Wire side of
female terminals
19 20 21 22 23
17
'
3 7
i - z r T
BLK
9. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are b e n t loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
I f t h e terminals look OK, go to step 10.
22-158
10. Reconnect the connector to the power w i n d o w master switch, and do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
If any test indicates a p r o b l e m , f i n d and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
13
WHT

voltage.
32
BLK


not obtained
box
Poor ground (G401)
1 1 . If multiple failures are f o u n d on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
MICU) (see page 22-90). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
22-159
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System

S E C U R I T Y HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-188
22-160
BODY
.DRIVER'S DOOR
' K E Y CYLINDER SWITCH
D R I V E R S DOOR LOCK A C T U A T O R /
KNOB S W I T C H / K E Y CYLINDER SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-185
Knob Switch Test, page 22-186
Key Cylinder Switch Test, page 22-187
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK
A C T U A T O R / K N O B SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-185
Knob Switch Test, page 22-187
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH

POWER TAILGATE C L O S E R UNIT
(Including F U L L LATCH SWITCH)
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-580
TAILGATE R E L E A S E ACTUATOR
(Without power tailgate)
Actuator Test/Replacement, page 22-188
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH
Latch Switch Test, page 22-262
TAILGATE OUTER
HANDLE SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE
OUTER HANDLE SWITCH
(cont'd)
22-161

RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK

A C T U A T O R / K N O B SWITCH
Actuator T e s t page 22-185
Knob Switch T e s t page 22-187
22-162
System Description
Security Alarm
The security alarm system is armed automatically after
the doors, h o o d , tailgate, and hatch glass are closed and
locked. For the system to a r m , the ignition switch must
be in the LOCK (0) position, the key must be removed
f r o m the ignition switch, and the MICU must receive
signals that the doors, h o o d , tailgate, and hatch glass
are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any
t i m e by unlocking the driver's door w i t h the key or
pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs
that are g r o u n d e d , and have 0 V, are the driver's door
lock knob switch (LOCK position) and the audio unit or
navigation unit (if equipped). In other w o r d s , all of the
other switches are open, and have about 10 to 12 V,
including the key cylinder switches. A beep sounds and
the parking lights flash to confirm the security alarm
system is armed if the LOCK button is pressed a second
t i m e w i t h i n 5 seconds. The security indicator in the
gauge control module begins to flash immediately after
the vehicle is completely closed and locked, and 15
seconds later, the security system arms. Ifthe security
indicator does not flash, the system is not arming.
If one of the keyless/power door lock/security circuit
switches is misadjusted, shorted internally, or there is a
short in the circuit, the security system will not arm. A
switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the alarm to
sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a significant
change in outside air temperature, the vibration of a
passing truck, or someone b u m p i n g into the vehicle
could cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass
breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the
system is armed, the control unit receives a ground
signal f r o m that switch, and the 10 to 12 V reference
drops to 0 V. If the audio unit or navigation unit (if
equipped) is disconnected, the input loses its ground,
and the input voltage goes f r o m 0 V to 10 to 12 V. The
system sounds the alarm w h e n any of these occur:
A door, the tailgate, or the hatch glass is forced open.
A door is unlocked w i t h o u t using the key or the
transmitter.
The hood is opened.
The audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is
disconnected.
The transmitter PANIC button is pressed.
W h e n the system sounds the alarm, the horn sounds
and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can
be stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door
w i t h the key or by pressing any button on the
transmitter.
NOTE: The security system can be customized in the

multi-information display (MID) to suit the customer's
needs. For more information about keyless/security
system options, refer to the Owner's manual.
Keyless Entry System

The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex
integrated control system. The multiplex integrated
control unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK, and PANIC
signals f r o m the immobilizer-keyless control unit
(keyless receiver).
The keyless entry system allows y o u to lock and unlock
the vehicle w i t h the transmitter. W h e n you press the
LOCK button, all doors lock. W h e n you press the
UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks.
The other doors will unlock w h e n you press the button a
second time. The doors will not lock w i t h the transmitter
if a door is not fully closed, or if the key is in the ignition
switch.
W h e n the switch for the individual map lights is in the
center (DOOR) position, it will come on w h e n the
UNLOCK button is pressed. If a door is not opened, the
light will go off and the doors will relock in about 30
seconds. Ifthe doors are locked w i t h the transmitter
w i t h i n 30 seconds, the light will go off immediately.
NOTE: The keyless entry system can be customized in
the multi-information display (MID) to suit the
customer's needs. For more information about
keyless/security system options, refer to the Owner's
manual.
Panic Mode
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract
attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is
pressed and held for 1 second, the horn sounds and the
exterior lights flash for about 30 seconds.
The panic mode can be canceled at anytime by pressing
any button on the transmitter or by turning the ignition
switch to ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the
ignition switch is ON (II).
Key Cylinder Operation

With the key inserted in the driver's door key cylinder,
turn the key a second time within 10 seconds and hold it
to operate the w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f (clockwise to
open, counterclockwise to close). The w i n d o w s and
m o o n r o o f stop moving w h e n the key is released. The
anti-pinch operation is not active w h e n closing the
w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f w i t h the key cylinder.
(cont'd)
22-163

Keyless Operation
By pressing and holding the UNLOCK button of the
keyless transmitter a second t i m e within 10 seconds, the
w i n d o w s and moonroof open. The w i n d o w s and
m o o n r o o f stop moving w h e n the UNLOCK button is
released. The w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f do not close w i t h
the LOCK button.
22-164
22-165

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)

CTXJ>
(+
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

<-O~\JD
H1
BLU-
BAT
D1
WHT
G20
PNK
D2
No. 10(7.5 A)
M6
+B DOOR L O C K
IG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and S T A R T (III)
|
GRY
+B DOOR L O C K
l_
No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A)
cr\jD
G19
G1
WHT-
No. 29 (20 A)
CTNwO
No. 23 (10 A)
G2
+B DOOR
LOCK
IG1
UNLOCK
LOCK
D/L DR
MTR
(UNLOCK)
MICU
D/L MTR
(LOCK)
D/L MTR
(LOCK)
GLASS/H
RLY
D/L MTR
(UNLOCK)
No. 20 (20 A) F U S E
(AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX)
E20
N13
LTGRN
YEL
LTGRN
I-
LTGRN-
tfiffl \$[ ifi

LTGRN
LTGRN
LTGRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR L O C K
ACTUATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR L O C K
ACTUATOR
- YEL-
LEFT REAR
DOOR L O C K
ACTUATOR
' 1
RIGHT R E A R
DOOR L O C K
ACTUATOR
YEL
YEL
RED/BLK-
TAILGATE
RELEASE
ACTUATOR
HATCH G L A S S
! OPENER
ACTUATOR
BLK
YEL-
G601
22-166
G601
R13
TRANSMITTER
BODY
*: With security
- : B - C A N line
IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
JN
(V)
SECURITY
INDICATOR
(LED)*
20
I
1
I
WHT
LTGRN
WHT
!
I
i
i
'
WHT -
B-CAN
LO
B-CAN
HI
LT
4~
AUDIO UNIT
GRN
RED
WHT
A12
L T G R N - - t\
LTGRN
LTGRN
BLK
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
RED
A4
HORN
(Low)
RED
HORN
(High)
G402
(Built in the power

w i n d o w master switch)
T12
Q4
T29
B-CAN
HI
F23
SCTY
B-CAN
LO
HORN+
MICU
DR
DOOR
SW
IG K E Y
SW
AS
DOOR
SW
RR
DOOR
SWL
RR
DOOR
SWR
ATP-P
HOOD
SW
G/H
SW
If
SG
PG P G PG - "
SG
T34
F20
E3
E2
F27
G13
PNK
RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
1 IGNITION
KEY
SWITCH
o (Closed:
Key
inserted)
-~r
G401
LTGRN
LTBLU
GRY
GRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
BLK
G401
YEL
-9r
G401
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR S W I T C H
(Closed:
Door open)
L E F T REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
TRANSMISSION
|\ RANGE SWITCH
]) (Closed:
6 In P position)
HATCH
GLASS
LATCH
SWITCH
(Closed:
Hatch glai
open)
SECURITY
K HOOD
J) S W I T C H
1 (Closed:
Hood open)
2
BLK
BLK
G101
G201
BLK
-LL
-9~
G501
BLU
G601
(cont'd)
22-167

No. 7 (15 A)
FUSE
(AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
YEL
22-168
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL LIGHTS
BLU
BLU
BLU
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL LIGHTS
PNK
PNK
BODY

: B-CAN line
i Other communication line
No. 23 (10 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
No. 26 (20 A)
No. 36 (10 A)
FUSE
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH (UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
BOX)
BOX)
POWER WINDOW
MASTER SWITCH
13
YEL
WHT
M i r i
No. 30 (20 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
WHT
GRN
LTGRN
35
25
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
33
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LIGHT
(LED)
LIGHT
(LED)
LOCK UNLOCK
IG2
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
SILDR SILDR
UL
LOCK
PG
UNLOCK LOCK
UART
DRIVER'S
.
D O O R L O C K L O C K <A
KNOB
SWITCH
U
G401 G401
WHT
PG
BRN
PNK
KEY
<=
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
LOCK
3 _
>
SG
DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
UNLOCK
SILAS
UL
UART
28
29
32
LOCK
C O N T R O L UNIT

SG
111
VMPAS
LO
DRIVER'S
DOOR K E Y
CYLINDER
SWITCH
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
PURUNLOCK
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
BLK
BLK
G401
G404
_0_
-Q_
G404
G404
22-169

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Lock Key Cylinder
Switch Malfunction
to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-137).

door multiplex control unit 37P connector terminals
No. 28 and No. 29.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 37P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key
cylinder switch, and turn the key to the LOCK and
UNLOCK positions 10 times.
1
12
25
I
13 14 7
>
16 17 7 1 9
10 11
/ 9
20 21 22 23
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
I I
LOCK (PNK) I
I I
24
37
I
JUNLOCK(WHT)

Is DTC B1127
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door key cylinder
switch system is OK at this t i m e . H
5. With the driver's door key cylinder switch in the
neutral position, select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER w i t h
the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators
OFF?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
OFF?
YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace

the driver's door lock actuator (see page 2 0 - 1 6 ) .
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the door multiplex control unit 37P
connector.
22-170
YES-Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
wire.B
NO-Replace the power w i n d o w master switch (see
page 22-298).B
connector.
connector.
15. Check for continuity between the door multiplex

control unit 37P connector terminals No. 28 and No.
29.
1
12
25
I
3 4
7>/

9 10 11
13 14~7l6 1 1 ~ 7 19 20 21 22 23
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
. J
i i
LOCK (PNK)
DTC B1128: Driver's Door Lock Switch

Malfunction
24
37
i
UNLOCK (WHT)
2. Lock and unlock the driver's door w i t h the driver's

door lock switch.
Is DTC B1128
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Check for loose or poor c o n n e c t i o n . H
YES-Repair a short between the LOCK and UNLOCK
wires.B
NO-Substitute a known-good power w i n d o w master
switch. I f t h e s y m p t o m goes away, replace the
original power w i n d o w master switch. If not, replace
the driver's door lock actuator (see page 2 0 - 1 6 ) .
4. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral

position, select the DOOR LOCKS f r o m the BODY
ELECTRICAL m e n u , and enter the DATA LIST.
LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK).
OFF?
YES-Go to step 6.
page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
6. Operate the driver's door lock switch in the LOCK and
UNLOCK position, and check the ON/OFF information
of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Are both DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) information
indicators ON at the same time when the door lock
switch is in the LOCK or UNLOCK position?
YES-Replace the power w i n d o w master switch (see
page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
Check for loose or poor c o n n e c t i o n s - ^
22-171

DTC B1129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch
Malfunction
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis

connector.
11. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and door
multiplex control unit 37P connector terminals No. 30
and No. 3 1 .

DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 3 7 P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
i
1 /
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several

times.
12
25
Is DTC B1129
Indicated?
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
I I
l l
I I
5. Select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER f r o m the BODY

ELECTRICAL m e n u , and enter the DATA LIST.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Is the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK)
information indicator ON and the DRIVER'S
DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) information indicator
OFF with the driver's door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, and is the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB
SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator OFF and the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH
(UNLOCK)
information indicator ON with the driver's door lock knob
switch in UNLOCK position?
page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
NO-Go to step 7.
connector.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
OFF?
NO-Go t o step 9.
22-172
"Z_9 10 11
13 14 7 1 6 17~7l9 20 21 22 23
LOCK (BRN)
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door lock knob

switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor c o n n e c t i o n s . !
3 4
24
37
1
I UNLOCK (RED)
(B)(8)
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to g r o u n d in the LOCK or UNLOCK
wire.B
page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
12. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK(0).
connector.
14. Check for continuity between the door multiplex

control unit 37P connector terminals No. 30 and No.
31.
1
12
25
J
i
3 4
/ /
13 14~7l6 17
10 11
19 20 21 22 23
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
I I
I I
LOCK (BRN)
UNLOCK (RED)
24
37
L .

Y E S - R e p a i r a short between the LOCK and UNLOCK
wires.!
N O - C h e c k for open in the driver's door lock switch
(LOCK) w i r e or the driver's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK) w i r e between the door multiplex control
unit and the driver's door lock knob switch. If OK,
replace the driver's door lock actuator (see page
20-16).B

Power Door Locks/Keyless
1. Check for B-CAN DTCs. If any B-CAN DTCs are indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page
22-137) and troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s) first.
2. Ifthe door lock system and the keyless operation do not work, troubleshoot the door locks first.
NOTE: The system does not function w h e n the ignition switch is ON (II).
Symptom
All the doors will not lock or unlock.*
Keyless operation does not w o r k

(LOCK, UNLOCK, PANIC)
Doors w i l l not unlock (or lock) w i t h the
transmitter, but will unlock (lock) w i t h the
door lock switch and the door key cylinder
switch.
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds after
being unlocked w i t h the transmitter even
t h o u g h a door has been opened.
Only driver's door will unlock or door locks
relock immediately after unlocking w i t h the
remote.
The horn does not sound w h e n PANIC
button on the transmitter pressed.
Keyless operation will work even though the
ignition key is in the ignition switch.
Check Items
Poor ground (G401, G404, G501)
Control unit input test (see page 22-178)
Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see page 22-187)
Driver's door lock knob switch test (see page 22-186)
Door lock switch test (check the door lock switch ON/OFF
information w i t h the HDS)
S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-176)
Driver's door lock knob switch test (see page 22-186)

Ignition key switch test (see page 22-270)
*: If only one door is not w o r k i n g properly, check that door's lock actuator circuit first.
22-174
The horn does not sound and/or the
headlights do not flash when the PANIC
button on the transmitter is pressed
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds after

being unlocked with the transmitter even
though a door has been opened
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If

any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137), and
troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s) first.

any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137), and
1. Press the PANIC button.
1. Move the interior light switch to the middle (DOOR)

position.
Do the horns
sound?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Press the horn button.
Do the horns
sound?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the horn switch test (see page 2 2 - 1 9 5 ) .
3. Turn the headlight switch ON.
Do the headlights come on?

3. Watch the front individual map light and the door
indicators on the gauge control module.
Do the front individual map light and door indicators
come on when the door is open, and go off when the
door is closed?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and recheck. If
the s y m p t o m goes away, replace the original MICU.B
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MICU and
each door switch. If the wire is OK, replace the door
switch.!
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Check the lighting circuit.B
4. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-189).
Is the transmitter OK?
YES-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless
control unit and recheck. If there is still a problem,
substitute a known-good MICU and recheck.B
NO-Replace the t r a n s m i t t e r . B
22-175

Keyless operation does not work (LOCK,
UNLOCK, PANIC)
any DTC is indicated, refer to B-CAN system diagnosis
troubleshooting (see page 22-137), and troubleshoot the
indicated DTC(s) first.
Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the

transmitter, but will unlock (or lock) with the
door lock switch and the door key cylinder
switch
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN system
diagnosis troubleshooting (see page 22-137), and

YES-The immobilizer system is OK, go to step 3.
NO-Go to immobilizer s y m p t o m troubleshooting (see
page 22-448).B
4. Test the transmitter (see page 22-189).

2. Remove the ignition key f r o m the ignition switch.
3. Close and lock the doors.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors w i t h the keyless
transmitter.
D o the door lock actuators work normally?

time.B
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit.B
NO-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the transmitter.B
5. Open the driver's door.

Does the key-in reminder chime
sound?
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, or short to ground on

the ignition switch wire. Repair as necessary.B
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-189).
YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay
box and recheck. If there is still a problem, substitute a
known-good immobilizer-keyless control unit and
recheck.B
NO-Replace the transmitter.B
22-176
Tripped Sensor History

The security system stores information on the last
tripped sensor if the security system has been violated.
The information can be retrieved using the HDS.
To retrieve the last tripped sensor data, do this:
1. Select HISTORY DATA f r o m the security system test
mode m e n u .
2. Select CURRENT DATA.
3. Confirm that the VIN matches the vehicle then press
the enter button.
4. Scroll t h r o u g h the data list.
Sensors that were violated will indicate DETECT.
Sensors that were not violated will indicate NONE.
5. inspect the detected circuits for these problems:
Misadjusted or damaged switch.
Loose or corroded connections.
Intermittent short to g r o u n d .
22-177

NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
A (see page 22-137), and make sure the lighting system works properly.
MICU
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-121).
2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, K, M, N, R, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are s h o w n f r o m the w i r e side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR D (2P)
PNK
GRY
LTGRN
BLK
CONNECTOR E (42P)
B L U ORN Y E L L T B L U
BRN
LTGRN
LTGRN YEL
CONNECTOR F (34P)
1
20
//
ri. 4 .
9 10 11
5 | 6
22 23
24
25
,/
V-
BLK
29
132
18 19
33 34
,/
3 4
12 13
/
/
"IT
15 16 17
18 19 20
JL
WHT
1 2
5 6 >v
r1
GRY
GRY
CONNECTOR R (20P)
RED
10
18
CONNECTOR N (14P)
CONNECTOR M (10P)
CONNECTOR K (8P)
12 1 3 M / I 1 6
II
PNK
CONNECTOR G(21P)
GRN
m a
31
RED
JzE;
6 7 8
30
RED
PNK
c 14|15 16|17
A/
27 28
20
V7
//
//7
/
12 13
LTGRN
GRY
CONNECTOR T(34P)
10
22
2 5 26 27
RED/BLK
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
22-178
BLK
NOTE: Before testing, make sure the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
N7
LT
GRN
GRY
E14
LT
GRN
YEL
E20*
BRN
F23
RED
G7
RED
N13
E21

Momentarily connect battery
power to terminal N13(N7)
momentary, and terminal N7
(N13) to body ground:
The driver's door lock actuator
should unlock (lock).
power to terminal E21 (E14) and
terminal E14(E21) to body
ground:
The front passenger's, left rear,
and right rear door lock actuator
should lock (unlock).
power to terminal E20:
The tailgate release actuator
should work.
power to terminal F23:
The horn (high) should sound.
power to terminal G7:
The horn (low) should sound.
Possible cause if desired result is not

obtained
Faulty driver's door lock actuator
Faulty front passenger's door lock

actuator
Faulty left rear door lock actuator
Faulty right rear door lock actuator
Poor ground (G601)

Faulty tailgate release actuator
Poor ground (body ground)

Faulty horn (high)
Poor ground (body ground)
Faulty horn (low)
*: W i t h o u t power tailgate
(cont'd)
22-179

5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connectors.
Cavity
Wire
E6
T34
F20
BLK
G2
PNK
G19
Test condition
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions

There should be battery voltage.
WHT
Under all
conditions

D2
PNK
Ignition switch
ON (II)

M6
GRY
Under all
conditions

R13
RED/
BLK
Under all
conditions
Connect a j u m p e r wire to ground:

The hatch glass opener actuator
should work.
F27
PNK
Transmission
ranges witch in P
position

Transmission
range switch in
any other position
than P
Hood open

G13*
BLK
GRN
Hood closed
R6
E12
RED
BLU
Ignition key
inserted into the
ignition switch
Ignition switch in
LOCK (0) position
and the ignition
key removed f r o m
the ignition switch
Hatch glass open
Hatch glass
closed
22-180

There should be at least 5 V.


obtained
Poor g r o u n d (G401)
Faulty under-hood fuse/relay box
Blown No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box
Faulty ignition switch
Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground (G601)
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box
Faulty hatch glass opener actuator
Faulty hatch glass relay
Faulty or improperly adjusted
transmission range switch
A short to ground in the wire
Faulty security hood switch
Faulty security hood switch
A short to ground in the w i r e
Faulty ignition key switch
Faulty hatch glass latch switch

Cavity
E13*
E36*
E37
E3
E17
E2
Wire
ORN
Test condition
Tailgate outer
handle pulled

Tailgate outer
handle released
Tailgate open

Tailgate closed
Driver's door
open

LT
GRN
Driver's door
closed
Front passenger's
door open

LT
BLU
Front passenger's
door open
Left rear door
open

Left rear door

closed
Right rear door
open

Right rear door

closed

LT
GRN
YEL
GRY

obtained
Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
Poor ground (G601)
Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
Faulty tailgate latch switch
Poor ground (G601)
Faulty driver's door switch
Faulty driver's door switch ground
Faulty front passenger's door switch
ground
Faulty left rear door switch
Faulty left rear door switch ground
Faulty right rear door switch
Faulty right rear door switch ground
An open in the wire
* 1 : With security
* 2 : W i t h o u t power tailgate
(cont'd)
22-181

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the power w i n d o w master switch (see page 22-298).
7. Disconnect the 37P connector f r o m the door multiplex control unit.

WHT
YEL
\
12
25
WHT
t / //
I
13 1 4~7l6
177*19
10 11
20 21
24
26 2 7 2 8 29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 36
I I
A
\i
BRN
PNK WHT BRN
RED
37
BLK
BLK
9. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do this input test at the following connector.
If the input test proves OK, go to step 10.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
27
BRN
Disconnect the front

passenger's power
w i n d o w switch 37P
connector

door multiplex control unit 37P
connectorterminal No. 27 and
front passenger's power
w i n d o w switch 37P connector
terminal No. 29:
22-182

obtained
10. Reconnect the 37P connector to the door multiplex control unit, and do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
32
37
13
BLK
WHT

voltage.
14
YEL
Ignition switch ON
(ID

voltage.
25
WHT

voltage.
28
PNK
Driver's door key

cylinder switch in
LOCK

Driver's door key

cylinder switch in
neutral or UNLOCK
Driver's door key
cylinder switch in
UNLOCK

29
30
31
WHT
BRN
RED
Driver's door key

cylinder switch in
neutral or LOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
LOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
UNLOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
UNLOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
LOCK



obtained
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
Faulty driver's door key cylinder
switch
An open in the wire
switch
A short to g r o u n d in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
switch
An open in the wire
switch
Poor ground (G401)
Faulty driver's door lock knob switch
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)

An open in the wire
(cont'd)
22-183

Front Passenger's Power Window Switch
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (see page 22-299).
12. Disconnect the 37P connector f r o m the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch.
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S POWER WINDOW SWITCH 37P CONNECTOR
GRN
RED
BLK
BLK
13. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making g o o d contact.
If the terminals are b e n t loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, g o t o step 14.
14. Reconnect the 37P connector to the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch, and do these input tests at the following
connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
36
37
25
BLK
GRN
34
RED
Front passenger's
door lock knob
switch in UNLOCK

voltage.
Front passenger's
door lock knob
switch in LOCK


obtained
knob switch
knob switch
15. If multiple failures are f o u n d on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
22-184
BODY
Door Lock Actuator Test

Driver's Door and Left Rear Door
Front Passenger's Door and Right Rear Door
1. Remove the door panel:
1. Remove the door panel:
Driver's door (see page
Left rear d o o r ( s e e p a g e
Front passenger's door (see page 20-9)
20-9)
20-23)
Right rear door (see page 20-23)
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) f r o m the actuator

(B).
N O T E : The illustration shows the driver's door.

(B).
NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's
door.
h-
1 | 2
AY Avr
8 |/]10
5 |6 |7
AA/
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
\
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
Terminal
1
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
\^
4. Ifthe actuator does not operate as specified, replace

it.
Terminal
3
LOCK
UNLOCK
Position
4. Ifthe actuator does not operate as specified, replace

it.
22-185

Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's Door
Front Passenger's Door
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-9).
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-9).

(B).

(B).
1
5
r
2
6 7
-\
8
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.

and No. 5 w h e n the door lock knob switch is in the
LOCK position and no continuity w h e n the switch is
in the UNLOCK position.
UNLOCK position and no continuity w h e n the
switch is in the LOCK position.
Check for continuity between terminals No. 6 and
No. 7 of door lock knob switch. There should be no
continuity in either LOCK or UNLOCK positions.
There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 6 and No. 7 w h e n the door lock knob switch is in
LOCK or UNLOCK positions.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
22-186
/|10

UNLOCK position and no continuity w h e n the switch
is in the LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock
actuator.
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test

Rear Door
1. Remove the left or right rear door panel (see page

20-23).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) f r o m the key

cylinder switch (B).

(B).
NOTE: The illustration shows the right rear door.
L E F T REAR DOOR
I
^
2
RIGHT REAR DOOR
5|6|7
e|s>[/
AA/
e|/|l

[No. 8] and No. 5 [No. 10] w h e n the door lock knob
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity
w h e n the switch is in the LOCK position.
[ ] : Right rear door
4. I f t h e continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.

and No. 5 w h e n the door key cylinder switch is in
UNLOCK position.
No. 8 and No. 5 w h e n the door key cylinder switch is
in the neutral or LOCK position.
and No. 5 w h e n the door key cylinder switch is in
LOCK position.
No. 9 and No. 5 w h e n the door key cylinder switch is
in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
No. 8 and No. 9 w h e n the key is in the neutral
position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator assembly (see page 20-16).
22-187

Security Hood Switch Test
Tailgate Release Actuator Test/Replacement

(Without Power Tailgate)
I.Open the hood.
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-100).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the security

hood switch (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate

release actuator (B).
Terminal side of
male terminals

and No. 2 when the hood latch is opened.
No. 1 and No. 2 when the hood latch is closed.
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the hood
latch assembly (see page 20-232).
22-188
3. Check the actuator by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1. To
prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage
only momentarily.
The actuator should work.
4. Ifthe actuator does not work, replace the tailgate latch
assembly (see page 20-235).
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch

Test/Replacement
20-100).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the tailgate
outer handle switch.
Transmitter Test
NOTE:
Ifthe doors unlock or lock w i t h the transmitter, but the
LED on the transmitter does not come o n , the LED is
faulty; replace the transmitter.
If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors w i t h the
transmitter.
If you unlocked the doors w i t h the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors relock automatically.
The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if

the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
With HDS
1. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10
times to reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If any of the transmitter buttons do not work,
replace the transmitter, then register the new
transmitter p r o g r a m m i n g (see page 22-455).
3. Check for continuity between tailgate outer handle
switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity w h e n the tailgate outer
handle is pulled.
There should be no continuity w h e n the tailgate
outer handle is released.
3. Select the KEYLESS TRANSMITTER f r o m the BODY

ELECTRICAL m e n u , next select INSPECTION, then
enter the KEYLESS CHECK.
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate

outer handle (see page 20-234).
4. Follow the screen prompts to check each button

operation.
If the locks don't work, go to step 2.

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle

w h e n receiving input f r o m the transmitter.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is
not registered to the vehicle. If necessary,
reprogram and register the transmitter (see page
22-455).
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
(cont'd)
22-189

Transmitter Test (cont'd)
5. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter, then register the new transmitter (see
page 22-455).
If there is no water damage, go to step 6.
7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter

assembly and repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be
p r o g r a m m e d to the vehicle for this test.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE W A S RECEIVED is indicated, replace the
keyless transmitter and do the immobilizer system
registration (see page 22-455).
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE W A S
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, the
immobilizer-keyless control unit is faulty, replace it
and do the immobilizer system registration (see
page 22-455).
NOTE: As the keyless transmitter is combined w i t h
the immobilizer transponder, so w h e n the
transponder is registered by the HDS, the keyless
transmitter is also registered automatically.
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) w i t h a new one,

and press lock or unlock button and check the receive
condition on the screen of the HDS.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7.
22-190
Without HDS
I f t h e engine does not start, go to the immobilizer
system troubleshooting (see page 22-454).
If the engine starts, go to step 2.
4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) w i t h a new one,

and try to lock and unlock the doors w i t h the
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button at
least 10 times.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 5.
2. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10

times to reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
I f t h e locks don't work, go to step 3.
3. Open the transmitter, and check for water damage.
If y o u find any water damage, replace the
transmitter and register the new transmitter (see
page 22-455).
If there is no water damage, go to step 4.
5. Reprogram and register the transmitter (see page

22-455), then try to lock and unlock the doors.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, substitute a
known-good transmitter, register it and recheck. If
still not operating, replace the immobilizer-keyless
control unit.
22-191
Horns
HORN (LOW)
Test/Replacement page 22-194
HORN SWITCH
T e s t page 22-195
CABLE REEL
HORN (HIGH)
UNDER-DASH F U S E /
RELAY BOX
22-192
R E L A Y CONTROL M O D U L E
(Built into the MICU)
BODY
Circuit Diagram
FUSE/RELAY BOX
cr\5jj
A)
BRN
IG16
hB STOP & HORN

MICU
BRN
HORN
RELAY
CIRCUIT
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
HORN+
HORN SW
|Q3
F23
G7
GRY
CABLE
REEL
1 2
BLK
1 1
YEL
la
RED
RED
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION
SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN SWITCH,
SET/RESUME
CANCEL SWITCH
9
(u)
VV
HORN
(High)
/H)
\ry
HORN
(Low)
|4
YEL
A HORN
SWITCH
G401
22- 193
Horns
Horn Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) f r o m each horn (B).
3. Test the horn by momentarily connecting battery

power to the terminal (A) and grounding the bracket
(B). The horn should sound.
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
22-194
BODY
Horn Switch Test

NOTE: Check for a blown No.11 (20 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.
1. Turn the steering wheel 180 degrees f r o m the center
position and remove the access panel (A).
6. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P

connector (A) f r o m the cable reel (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
2. Disconnect the horn switch 2P connector (B).

3. Connect horn switch 2P connector terminals No. l a n d
No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
The horns should sound.
If the horns don't sound, go to step 4.
If the horns sound, check or adjust the installation
of the driver's airbag assembly and the horn switch
plate.
4. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the horn switch 2P
connector.
20-130).
7. Connect dashboard wire harness 20P connector

terminals No. 1 and No.2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
The horns should sound.
If the horns s o u n d , go to 10.
If the horns don't sound, go to 8.
8. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire
harness 20P connectorterminal No. l a n d body
ground
If there is battery voltage, go to 9.
If there is no battery voltage, repair an open in the
w i r e , or a faulty MICU; replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
9. Check for continuity between dashboard wire harness
20P connector No. 2 terminal and body ground.
If there is continuity, faulty MICU; replace the
under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
If there is no continuity, repair an open in the w i r e ,
or poor ground (G401).
10. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector
(A) to the cable reel (B).
11. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
24-170).
(cont'd)
22-195
Horns
Horn Switch Test (cont'd)
12. Disconnect the cable reel subharness 20P connector
(A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
n_
3 4
11 12 13
7/
ri
//
16 17
, n
9 10
///
13. Check for continuity between cable reel subharness

20P connector terminals No. 11 and No. 12 and horn
switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
respectively.
If there is no continuity. Repair open in the wires or
faulty cruise control switch.
If there is continuity. Replace the cable reel (see
page 24-185).
22-196
Exterior Lights

Bulb Replacement page 22-234
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
FRONT PARKING LIGHT
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
(with daytime running light)
(cont'd)
22-197
Exterior Lights
TRAILER IG2 RELAY
TRAILER LIGHTING RELAY
TAIL LIGHT/BRAKE LIGHT/

REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT
REAR T U R N SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
(In the taillight)
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

TRAILER LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT

Input Test/Replacement page 22-229
TRAILER LIGHTING CONNECTOR

HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

22-198
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR

(Except Touring model)
BODY
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
IG2 C U T R E L A Y
T e s t page 22-96
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING S E N S O R /
SUNLIGHT S E N S O R
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAM RELAY
T e s t page 22-96
FOG LIGHT RELAY

T e s t page 22-96
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

T e s t page 22-239
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH
22-199
Exterior Lights
System Description
Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights system is composed of the MICU, the left and right daytime running lights, and the DRL
indication o n the multi-information display (MID) (Touring model) or the daytime running lights indicator on the gauge
control m o d u l e (except Touring model). The daytime running lights operate with the ignition switch ON (II), the
headlights off, and the parking brake released.
When the daytime running lights are o n , the MICU turns the left and right daytime running lights control circuit on and
off (duty cycle) w h i c h provides a reduced voltage (about 48 volts) via the No. 12 and No. 13 fuses in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. The DRL comes on w i t h reduced brightness. If there is a problem w i t h the daytime running lights system,
the MICU sends a signal to the gauge control module, and the w o r d "CHECK DRL SYSTEM" shows on the
multi-information display (MID) (Touring model) or the daytime running lights indicator comes on (except Touring
model).
NOTE: The daytime running lights are disabled w h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). To keep the daytime
running lights f r o m coming o n , apply the parking brake switch while the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position.
W h e n y o u then turn the ignition switch back to ON (II), the daytime running lights will not come on until the parking
brake is released.
22-200
22-201
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Headlights
BATTERY
0 -
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
UNDER-HOOD R E L A Y / F U S E B O X
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No.2 (IG) (50 A)
BLU
D1
IGNITION
SWITCH
No. 8
BAT
-PNK
WHT
IG1
No. 10
(7.5 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and S T A R T (III)
No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A )
N o . 4 ( H / L ) (50 A)
COoD-
îwHTÎi
AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT
MICU
No. 7 (10 A)
( A J D
No. 18(20 A)
GRN
crxô-
No. 19 (15 A)
No. 16 (20 A)
CTXJO-
- | A > N O .
CTNJO
15 (10
A)
IPD
IPD
No. 21 (20 A)
GRN
) N o . 17
, ( 1 5 A)
HEADLIGHT
HIGH B E A M
RELAY
WHT
GRN
WHT
RIGHT
2 HEADLIGHT
/T\LOW
A \ \HIGH
W)
\yJ(55W) KjUi(60
!
LEFT
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHT
(60 W)
BLK
BLK
+B DRL-R
BLU
WHT
/TNHIGH
l W/ ((6 0 W )
+B DRL-L
) N o . 12
)(10A)
G17
LEFT
2 HEADLIGHT
ft\LOW
^X/(55W)
) N o . 13
)(10A)
+B
R H/L
LO
+B
LH/L
LO
T8
GRY
) N o . 16
>(15A)
BLK
1
RIGHT
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHT
(60 W)
BLK
BLK
BLK
i
G301
22-202
-9r
G201
G201
_LL
G301
G201
BODY
MICU
No.
19
(15 A)
)No. 15
>(15A)
\
+B S M A L L LT
+B S M A L L LT
+B S M A L L
E19
M3
F3
GRY
GRY
-GRY
-r-
GRY
GRY
GRY
RED
d> <>
f i 4
1
GRY
GRY
GRY
I*
2
RIGHT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
(8 W )
RIGHT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(5W)
BLK
BLK
GRY
LEFT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
LEFT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(5W)
(8 W)
BLK
BLK
LEFT
REAR
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(5W)
LEFT
TAILLIGHTS
(5Wx2)
BLK
i
G201
BLK
G301
BLK
A.
G601
GRY
RED
KfcU
HtU
RIGHT
TAILLIGHTS
LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHTS
RIGHT
REAR
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(5W)
(5Wx2)
(5WX2)
BLK
BLK
BLK
TRAILER
LIGHTING
RELAY
L_
-4
BLK
L \
BLK
i
G601
BLK
-4
BLK
BLK
JL
G505
(cont'd)
22-203
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Headlights (cont'd)
IGNITION
SWITCH
D2
-PNK
No. 8 (7.5 A)
-cr>o3
No. 10 (7.5 A)
No. 7
(10A)
IG1
MICU
' DR
DOOR
SW
DIM PASSING
SW SW
PG
PG
PG
SG
SG 7$T~
T34
H/L SMALL
OFF LIGHT
SW SW
H/L
ON
SW
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
Q10 [T29 iT12
GND
S5
S15
S12
S1 S13
S11
M7
LT GRN WHT
BLK
LTBLU
RED
ORN GRY
LTGRN
LTGRN
-WHT LT GRN
11
E37
F20
E6
LOW
YEL
(3XE),
AUTO I
BRN LT GRN WHT
HIGH I PASSING OFF

DIMER 9
1 DRIVER'S
T\ DOOR
]) SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
(ED)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

H/L
BLK BLK
BLK
SIP
+B
AUTOMATIC
^ LIGHTING
SIO CONTROL P ^
UNIT
B-CAN
HI
SIG
IG1
R
M
AN
L U
BLU/ BLU/ BLU/

WHT RED BLK
GND2
GND1
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
SENSOR
(SUN LIGHT SENSOR)
BLK
BLK
G403
G403
G501 G401
22-204
G401
LT GRN
10
PNK
BODY
* 1 : HIGH B E A M INDICATOR
* 2 : LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
* 3 : DRL INDICATOR
: B-CAN line
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
i
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
1
-LTGRN -
WHT - -
j - -
I
I
20
WHT
I
I
I No. 23 (10 A)
I FUSE
I (UNDER-HOOD
I FUSE/RELAY
I BOX)
I
|33
rS)
u G H T
PG
BLK
BLK
YEL
BLK/YEL
25
35
'
B-CAN
LO
L O C K UNLOCK
SG
WHT
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK S W I T C H
No. 36 (10 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
1 T YT
L T G R N WHT
POWER WINDOW
MASTER SWITCH
No. 26 (20 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
B-CAN
HI
VMPDR
VBU
DOOR M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT
SILDRSILDR
UNUL
LOCK
LOCK
LOCK
RED
30 DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
BRN
PNK
DRIVER'S
DOOR L O C K
9 ACTUATOR
DRIVER'S
6DOOR KEY
CYLINDER
SWITCH
LOCK
IG2
UART
;27
29
WHT
KEY
DRIVER'S
DOOR
UN
LOCK
LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
\o\) (Closed:
Pedal
pressed)
BRN
+
PUR
7
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
POWER
WINDOW
SWITCH
BLK
-9G401
-9r
G401
G401
22-205
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
G20
-BLU
No. 23 (10 A)
) No. 10
, (20 A)
D4
c r \ ^ o
crxx>
G1
D1
WHT
f-O
O-j
PNK -
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and S T A R T (III)
-PNK -WHT
D3
FOG
LIGHT
RELAY
BLU
BLU-
4l
1 3
- L T BLU
FR
FOG
RLY
BLU -
G19
. No. 7
(10 A)
> No. 10 1 No. 8

(7.5 A) C (7.5 A)
VBU
PNK
MICU
PG
TX
PG
PG
SG
SG
E6
2 LEFT
>t F O G
LIGHT
1 (55 W)
2 RIGHT
/ $ \ FOG
\2J
LIGHT
|1 (55 W)
BLK
BLK
BLK
G301
G202
G501
_L
22-206
T34
BLK BLK
_D_
_LL
G401 G401
IG1
BODY
GAUGE CONTROL M O D U L E
FOG LIGHT
) INDICATOR
(LED)
k
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
19
20
MICU
H/L S M A L L
OFF LIGHT
SW SW
FOG
SW
H/L
ON
SW
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
GND
S14
S5
S11
S13
Q10
|T29
I
I
LTGRN
BLK
ORN GRY
10
OFF
/ i
FOG
I
BRN
LTGRN
jy
OFF
C O M B I N A T I O N LIGHT SWITCH
(so)
*rn
I
I
LTGRN WHT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
PNK
LTGRN
WHT
! tLTGRN
l
l
LTGRN
I
l
WHT
H/L
SIP
+B
SIO
AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT
B-CAN
HI
SIG
BLU/WHT
BLU/RED
B-CAN
LO
IG1
BLU/BLK
GND2
11
5
GND1
12
1
BLK
AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING SENSOR
( S U N LIGHT SENSOR)
i
G403
G403
22-207
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
AUXILIALY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 11 (20 A)
F31
BRN-
BRN
BRAKE PEDAL
I POSITION S W I T C H
(Closed: Pedal pressed)
k
F30
MICU
) HORN
CIRCUIT
STOP
SW
F25
K6
LTBLU
G8
LTBLU
E34
LTBLU
TRAILER E L E C T R I C
LIGHTING C O N N E C T O R
LTBLU
GRN
, LEFT BRAKE
' LIGHT (21 W)
/-t~\ HIGH M O U N T
( a ) B R A K E LIGHT
\XS
(5Wx5)
BLK
22-208
RIGHT B R A K E
' LIGHT (21 W)
k
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
G601
G601
G505
<7
TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT
BODY
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
0-
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
H1
BLU
IGNITION SWITCH
/
G20
-WHT
BAT"
IG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
IG1 METER
' No. 10
(7.5 A)
BACK LT-
ATP-R
E15
F9
ORN
ORN
ORN
v 0
AUTOMATIC
DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
REARVIEW
MIRROR
TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT
WHT
LEFT
BACK-UP
LIGHT
(18W)
8
BACK-UP f 5]\
LIGHT
I 9J/
(18 W)
Tg
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed:
In R position)
BLK
BLK
G601
G505
G101
22-209
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Trailer Lights
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
-CT\JO-
N o . 4 ( H / L ) (50 A)
H1
K1
No. 10 (7.5 A)
CTXJO
D2
PNK
D1
G20
- BLU-
MICU
(Individual
inside circuit)
I IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and S T A R T (III)
IG2 H O T in ON (II)
- GRN
ORN
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
C3
" GRN *
Q16
No. 14 (20 A)
<r\j>
PCM [ > L T G R N
YEL
- BLU/WHT
No. 3 (30 A)
IG2 C U T
RELAY
No. 17 (20 A)
No. 36 (10 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
D>-|
YEL
-PUR-
No. 15 (15 A) F U S E
(UNDER-DASH
Y
GRY
LT GRN
REAR
FUSE/
RELAY
BOX
WHT
LT G R N
TRAILER
LIGHTING
RELAY
TRAILER
IG2
RELAY
REAR F U S E /
RELAY BOX
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
-WHT-
>
'
)No.2
)No. 1
(7.5 A) I (7.5 A)
(Not'
MICU
Y Y7
MICU
BLK
BLK
MICU
MICU
PNK
ORN
BLU
LTBLU
GRN
LTGRN
LTBLU
BACK
TURN/
HAZ
STOP
SW
LTBLU
BLU
I.
BACK
LT
R TURN
LT
LTURN
LT
TRAILER LIGHTING C O N T R O L UNIT

REVERSE
GROUND
11
BLK
LTURN/
STOP
GND
RTURN/ BACKUP
STOP
OUT
110
BLK
TRAILER
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
CONNECTOR
BLU
GRN
RED
WHT
BLK
1
GND
22-210
TAIL
LIGHT
L
TURN/
STOP
R
TURN/
STOP
BACK
LT
BRN/WHT
BRN
1
BLK
2
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
T R A I L E R LIGHTING C O N N E C T O R
-1L
G504
TRAILER
PLYOUT
YEL
G503
G504
G503
G401
BODY
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1079: Daytime Running Light for USA
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Before testing, make sure the No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box is OK.
12. Check for continuity between left daytime running

light 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector G (21P) terminal No. 15, and
between right daytime running light 2P connector
terminal No. 2 and under-dash fuse/relay box
connector F (34P) terminal No. 22.
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR G (21P)
1. Turn the headlight switch OFF, and apply the parking

brake.
LEFTDRLB
(BLU)

LEFT DRL B
(BLU)
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II).
Is DTC B1079
Cu*)
LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR

v
s
nln
indicated?
headlight switch OFF.

Hi
W2.
RIGHT DRL B
(WHT)
8. Check the No. 12 (10 A) and No. 13 (10 A) fuses in the

RIGHT D R L B
(WHT)
Are the fuses OK?

NO-Replace the blown fuse and recheck. Ifthe fuse
blows again, repair short in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the appropriate
daytime running l i g h t . !
9. Check the daytime running light bulbs.
Are the daytime running light bulbs OK?
nln y
RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR

NO-Repair open in the wire.H
NO-Replace the faulty bulb (see page 2 2 - 2 3 5 ) .
10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector G
(21P)and F(34P).
11. Disconnect each daytime running light 2P connector.
(cont'd)
22-211
Exterior Lights
13. Check for continuity between each daytime running
light 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2 P CONNECTOR
DTC B1275: Headlight OFF Position Circuit

Malfunction
DTC B1276: Combination Light Switch Parking
(SMALL) Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1277: Headlight AUTO Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1278: Headlight ON Position Circuit
Malfunction
RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2 P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
3. Turn the combination light switch to the PARKING
(SMALL) and the ON (low beam) positions, and then
OFF position.

Y E S - F a u l t y MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
Are DTCs B1275, B1276, B1277, and/or B1278

indicated?
NO-Repair open in the BLK wire or poor ground

(G201-right side, G301-left side).B
Check for loose or poor connections.B
22-212
6. Select LIGHTING f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u ,

and enter the DATA LIST.
7. Check each combination light switch position value
with the DATA LIST menu.
When the combination light switch is turned OFF
Data List
Value
ON
OFF
OFF
Value
OFF
ON
OFF
When the combination light switch is turned ON

(HEADLIGHT)
Data
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
List
(OFF)
(PARKING)
(HEADLIGHT)
Are all data list values
Value
OFF
ON
ON
correct?
14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector S

(20P) and the automatic lighting control unit 14P
connector.
under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (20P)
terminals No. 1, No. 11, and No. 13 individually.
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
H/L OFF
(ORN)
When the combination light switch is turned to

PARKING (SMALL)
Data List
BODY
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
H/L ON
(LTGRN),
SMALL L T S W
(GRY)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box (see page 22-90).B

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Go to step 8.
17. Do the combination light switch test (see page

22-225).
Is the combination light switch OK?
9. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P

connector.
NO-Replace the combination light switch (see page

22-225).

11. Select LIGHTING f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u ,
and enter the DATA LIST.

(20P).

Headlight
Headlight
Headlight
Headlight
Data
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
List
(OFF)
(PARKING)
(AUTO)
(HEADLIGHT)
Are all data list values indicated
Value
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF?
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
22-213
Exterior Lights
box connector S (20P) terminals and the combination
light switch 12P connector terminals as shown:
Combination light
switch 1 2 P connector
9
10
11
12
box connector S ( 2 0 P )
1
11
13
5
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
DTC B1279: Headlight Switch DIMMER

Position Circuit Malfunction
ON (II).
3. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
/
H / L O N S W (LTGRN)
8
4. Change the d i m m e r switch f r o m low beam to high

beam.
9 10 11 12
S M A L L L T S W (GRY)
GND
(BLK)
H/L OFF
S W (ORN)
5. Turn the combination light switch OFF, and then to

the passing position, and wait for at least 6 seconds.
Is DTC B1279
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
H/L OFF
S W (ORN)
1 2
SMALL
LTSW
GND (BLK)
9 10
7. Select LIGHTING f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL system

select m e n u , then enter the DATA LIST.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
When the passing switch is operated
H/L ON S W (LTGRN)

YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e . B
box connector S (20P) terminals as shown:
From terminal
1
13
To terminal
11,12,13,15
11,12,15
Data List
Headlight Switch (High beam)
Value
ON
OFF
When the headlight switch is turned ON, and the

dimmer switch is changed from low beam to high
beam
Data List
Value
OFF
ON
ON
correct?
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Repair a short between the w i r e s . !
box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .

connector.
22-214
12. Select LIGHTING f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL system

select m e n u , then enter the DATA LIST.
Data List
Value
OFF
OFF
OFF
Are all data list values indicated OFF
BODY

light switch 12P connector terminals as shown:
box connector S (20P)
5
11
12
15
Combination light
switch 12P connector
12
10
6
4

DIM S W (LTBLU)
NO-Go to step 14.

(20P).
PASS SW
(RED)
9 10 11 12
H/L ON S W (LTGRN)
GND
(BLK)

terminals No. 1 1 , No. 12, and No. 15 individually.
_n_
8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
H/L/ON
SW
(LT GRN)
GND (BLK)
1
I (LT BLU)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w i r e . B

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
22-225).
22-225).B
(20P).
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
H/L ON
S W (LT GRN)
PASS S W
DIM S W (LT BLU)

box connector S (20P) terminals as shown:
From terminal
12
15
To terminal
1,11,13,15
1,11,13
YES-Repair a short between the w i r e s . B
box (see page 22-90).B
22-215
Exterior Lights
DTC B1552: Automatic Lighting Control Unit
EEPROM Error
DTC B1575: Auto Light Sensor Malfunction

ON (II).

ON (II).
Is DTC B1552
indicated?
YES-Replace the automatic lighting control unit (see

page 22-227).B
time.B

Is DTC B1575
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the automatic lighting control unit
connector 14P.
6. Disconnect the automatic lighting sensor 5P
connector.
7. Check for continuity between automatic lighting
control unit 14P connector terminals as s h o w n .
Automatic lighting unit Automatic lighting
sensor 5P connector
14P connector
1
5
3
6
14
5
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
SIP (BLU/WHT)
1
7
/
/
->
9 10
11 12
14
SIO
(BLU/RED)
SIG (BLU/BLK)
SIP
(BLU/
WHT)
S I G (BLU/BLK)
p
SIO (BLU/RED)
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 8.
22-216
8. Check for continuity between automatic lighting

BODY
10. Reconnect the automatic lighting control unit

connector 14P.
12. Measure the voltage between automatic lighting
c
1 2 3 4
SIP (BLU/WHT)
SIO (BLU/RED)
J
4SH
1 2 3 4
SIP (BLU/WHT)
5
SIG (BLU/BLK)
YES-Repair a short in the w i r e between terminals
No. 1 and No. 3 . B
Is there about 5 V?
NO-Go to step 9.
automatic lighting control unit 14P connector
terminals No.11 and No. 12 individually.
1
7
/
/
YES-Replace the automatic lighting sensor (see page

22-240).
NO-Replace the automatic lighting control unit (see
page 22-227).B
C
3
4 5 6
9 10 X 11 12
14
GND2 (BLK]
GND1 (BLK)
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair an open in the wire or a poor ground
(G403).B
22-217
Exterior Lights
DTC U0155: Lost Communication With Gauge
Control Module
ON (II).

automatic lighting control unit 14P connector
PI n
n
n
n
n
n
n
9 10 11 12 13 1 4 / 1 6
1 2 7 75 6 / 8
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 5 / 2 7 28 29 3 0 / 3 2
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)

Is DTC U0155
indicated?
Is DTC U1280
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC U1280 troubleshooting (see page

22-15DJI
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
1
7
/
/
B-CAN HI
(WHT)
3
i,
9 10
4
11 12
14


module (see page 22-359).H
NO-Go to step 6.

connector 14P.
22-218
DTC U1282: Lost Communication With MICU

t o f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
ON (II).
Is DTC U1282
Indicated?
YES-Replace the automatic lighting control unit (see

page 22-227).B
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for loose or poor connections between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the automatic lighting
control unit.B
Exterior Lights
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A.
(see page 22-137)
Before doing the input tests, check the No. 12, No. 13, No. 15, No. 16, No. 17, No. 18, No. 19, and No. 21 fuse in the
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, M, R, S, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown f r o m the wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR E (42P)
CONNECTOR F (34P)
WHT
WHT
BLK
LTBLU
BRN
CONNECTOR G (21P)
GRN
PNK
BLU
22-220
GRY
BLU
CONNECTOR M(1 OP)

GF
T
3
7
//4
CONNECTOR R (20P)
LTBLU
_n_
6
4
12 13
.n_
9 10
18
16
8
20
/ /
CONNECTOR S (20P)
ORN
LTGRN
BLK
jrii
n
n
n r
5 6
8 9 10
1 2 3
4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
RED
GRY
PUR
LT BLU
CONNECTOR T(34P)
BLU
y 7\ ^ 7
/ /
/
T
22
r
8
9 10
2 5 26 27
7
/
12
29
15 16
//
34
BLK
3. I n s p e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r a n d s o c k e t t e r m i n a l s to be s u r e t h e y a r e all m a k i n g g o o d c o n t a c t .
If t h e t e r m i n a l s a r e b e n t , l o o s e o r c o r r o d e d , r e p a i r t h e m a s n e c e s s a r y a n d r e c h e c k the s y s t e m .
I f t h e t e r m i n a l s look O K , g o to s t e p 4.
Exterior Lights
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
4. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and the cause, then recheck the system.
If the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
G2
PNK
M3
GRY
E19
GRY
F3
GRY
G17
GRY
F4
GRN
T8
BLU

Measure the voltage between terminal
G2 and body g r o u n d :
Connect battery power to terminal M3:
The left front parking light, left side
marker lights, left taillights, and license
plate lights should come on.
Connect battery power to the terminal
E19:
The right front parking light and right
front side marker light should come on.
F3:
The right taillights and right rear side
marker lights should come o n .
G17:
The left headlight (low beam) should
come on.
F4:
The right headlight (low beam) should
come on.
T8 and body ground:

Headlights (high beam) should come on.
R7
LT
BLU

R7 and body g r o u n d :
Fog lights should come on.
G15
BLU
F22
WHT
22-222

G15:
The left daytime running light should
come on.
F22:
The right daytime running light should
come on.

not obtained
under- hood fuse/relay box
Poor ground (G301,G601)
Blown bulb
Poor ground (G201)
Blown bulb
Poor ground (G505)
Blown bulb
Poor ground (G301)
Blown bulb
Blown bulb
Faulty headlight high beam
relay
Poorground(G201,G301)
Blown bulb
Faulty headlight high beam
relay
Faulty fog light relay
Poor ground (G202, G301)
Blown bulb
Faulty fog light relay
Poor ground (G301)
Blown bulb
Poor ground (G201)
Blown bulb
5. Reconnect the connectors, then do these input tests at the following connectors.
I f t h e input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly (see page
22-90).
Cavity
Wire
E6
T34
F20
BLK

G18
GRN
G8
LT
BLU
Brake pedal pressed
Measure the voltage between

terminal G18 and body g r o u n d :
voltage.
voltage.
Test condition
Brake pedal released
E34
LT
BLU
Brake pedal pressed
F9
E37
WHT
YEL
S1
ORN
S5
BLK
Ignition switch ON (II),

transmission range switch in
any other position than R.

terminal E34 and body g r o u n d :
voltage.

terminal E34 and body g r o u n d :
voltage.

transmission range switch in
R position

Driver's door open

Driver's door closed

terminals S1 and S5:

OFF
Combination light switch in
any other position than OFF

not obtained
Blown No. 4 (H/L) (50 A) fuse in
the under- hood fuse/relay box
Faulty brake pedal position
switch
switch
switch
switch
Faulty MICU
ground
Faulty combination light switch
(cont'd)
22-223
Exterior Lights
Cavity
Wire
S11
LT
GRN

(Headlight position) ON
BLK

OFF
S12
RED

lever pulled (Passing)
S5
BLK
Test condition
S5
S13
GRY
S5
BLK

lever released f r o m passing
position
(SMALL position) ON
OFF
S15
LT
BLU
S5
BLK
S14
PUR
S5
BLK

(Dimmer) in high beam
position
(Dimmer) in low beam
position
(Fog light position) ON
OFF
22-224


not obtained
A short t o g r o u n d in the w i r e
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the steering c o l u m n covers (see page 20-130).
2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the combination light switch (B).
(cont'd)
22-225
Exterior Lights
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4. Inspect the connector terminals t o be sure they are all making g o o d contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
if the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according t o the tables.
- If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Light switch:
N
Terminal
Position
\ \
10
OFF
LOW
ID
HIGH
ON
Terminal
Position
2
o
LEFT
Neutral
RIGHT
vj
Fog light switch:

\
Terminal
12
OFF
FRONT
22-226
r\
Pi
Turn signal switch:
Position
r\
OFF
Passing switch
AUTO
Headlight switch
o
o
-:o<
11
12
12
o
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input Test/Replacement

A (see page 22-137).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) f r o m the automatic lighting control unit (B).
PNK
BRN
BLK
BLU/BLK
Wire side female terminals
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they all making good contact.
I f t h e terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
I f t h e terminals are OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
22-227
Exterior Lights
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
If any tests indicate a p r o b l e m , find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
LT
GRN
WHT
BLU
/
WHT
BLU
/
RED
14
BLU
Under ail conditions
/
BLK
LT
GRN

terminal No. 3 and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector T (34P)
terminal No. 29:
fuse/relay box connector T (34P)
terminal No. 12:
terminal No. 5 and automatic
lighting sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 1:
terminal No. 3:
terminal No. 5:
fuse/relay box connector S (20P)
terminal No. 11:

not obtained
5. Reconnect the connectors, then do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.

If all the input tests prove OK, replace the automatic lighting control unit.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
11
12
7
BLK
PNK
BRN
22-228

voltage.

voltage.

not obtained
box
box
BODY
Trailer Lighting Control Unit Input Test/Replacement

2. Remove the left rear side t r i m panel, (see page 20-96)
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the trailer lighting control unit (B).
PNK
LTGRN
ORN
YEL
f1
i==i 3 4 5]
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LTBLU
BLU
WHT
RED
BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
GRN
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and the system.
(cont'd)
22-229
Exterior Lights
Trailer Lighting Control Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
5. W i t h the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests the f o l l o w i n g connector.
Cavity
Wire
YEL
WHT
RED
22-230
Test condition

terminal No. 4 and trailer lighting
connector (7P) terminal No. 5:

not obtained
6. Reconnect the connectors, do these input tests the following connector.

If the input tests prove OK, replace the trailer lighting control unit.
Cavity
Wire
10
BLK
11
BLK
LT
GRN
12
GRN

LT
BLU
Brake pedal pressed



turn signal switch in
RIGHT position
turn signal switch in
LEFT position
transmission range
switch in R position

There should be battery voltage
w h e n the lights are flashing.

transmission range
switch in any position
other than R

PNK
BLU
ORN
Test condition


obtained
Poor ground (G504)
Poor ground (G503)
Blown No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the rear
fuse/relay box
Faulty rear fuse/relay box
Blown No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse in the rear
fuse/relay box
Faulty rear fuse/ relay box
Faulty brake pedal switch
Faulty brake pedal switch
A short to power in the wire
Faulty MICU
Faulty MICU
Faulty MICU
Faulty MICU
A short to power in the wire
22-231
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment
ACAUTION
2. Park the vehicle in front of a w a l l or a screen (A).
Headlights become very hot during use; do not touch

t h e m or any attaching hardware immediately after
they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
The driver or someone w h o weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that y o u can see the center (A)
of the headlights.
3. Turn the low beams o n .

4. Determine i f t h e headlights are aimed properly.
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A).
Adjust the cut line (B) to the lights height.
22-232
BODY
Headlight Replacement
5. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the headlights
to local requirements by turning the vertical adjuster.
NOTE: The R and L adjusters are not applicable for U.
S. models.

2. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the headlight
assembly (B).
3. Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the corner

upper beam (C) and headlight assembly.
4. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
5. After the replacement, adjust the headlights to local
requirements.
22-233
Exterior Lights
Bulb Replacement
Headlight (Low Beam)
Headlight (High beam)
NOTE: Do not touch the glass of the bulb w i t h your

hands. If necessary, clean the glass area w i t h isopropyl
alcohol.

hands. If necessary, clean the glass area w i t h isopropyl
alcohol.
1. Disconnect the 2 P connector (A) f r o m the headlight

bulb socket (B).
1. Disconnect the 2 P connector (A) f r o m the headlight

bulb socket (B).
Headlight (low beam): 55W(H11)
Headlight (high beam):
60 W (HB3)
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 4 5 Counterclockwise to

remove it f r o m the headlight housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 4 5 counterclockwise to

3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
22-234
Daytime Running Light (DRL)
Front Turn Signal Light/ Front Parking Light

hands. If necessary, clean the glass area with isopropyl
alcohol.
1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) f r o m the bulb socket

(B).
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the headlight

bulb socket (B).
Daytime Running Light:
60 W (HB3)
2. Turn the bulb socket 45 Counterclockwise to remove

it f r o m the headlight housing.
Front Turn Signal Light/
Front Parking Light:
28/8 W
(cont'd)
22-235
Exterior Lights
Bulb Replacement (cont'd)
Fog Light Replacement
Front Side Marker Light
1. Remove the front f o g light cover (A).
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the front side

marker light bulb socket (B).
Front Side Marker Light Bulb:
5 W
B
2. Remove the t w o m o u n t i n g screws f r o m the f o g light,

then remove the fog light (B) f r o m the bumper.
3. Disconnect the 2P connectors (C) f r o m the f o g light.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 Counterclockwise to
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) 60 counterclockwise to

remove it f r o m the housing.
5. Install the f o g light in the reverse order of removal.

6. After replacement, adjust the f o g lights to local
requirements.
22-236
Fog Light Adjustment
Taillight Replacement
Before adjusting the fog lights :
Taillight
Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
The driver or someone w h o weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat.

2. Remove the t w o m o u n t i n g bolts f r o m the taillight (A)
and carefully pull off the taillight.
Adjust the fog lights to local requirements by turning the

adjuster (A).
3. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 4 5 counterclockwise to

remove then f r o m taillight.
Brake/ Taillight:
Rear Turn Signal Light/
Taillight:
Rear Side Marker Light:
Back-up Light:
21/ 5 W
21/5 W
5 W
18 W
4. If replacement of the taillight harness is necessary,

remove the g r o m m e t (C) and disconnect the 5 P
connector (D) f r o m the wire harness.
5. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal, and
run water over it to make sure it does not leak.
22-237
Exterior Lights
License Plate Light Replacement
High Mount Brake Light

Replacement
1. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and

disconnect the 2 P connector (A) f r o m the light.
1. Remove the covers (A) and t w o screws f r o m the high

m o u n t brake light.
License Plate Light: 5 W x 2
2. Disconnect the 2 P connector (B) f r o m the high m o u n t

brake light, and remove the washer tube (C).
2. Separate the lens (B) and housing (C), then remove

the bulb.
3. Remove the t w o screws, and separate the high m o u n t

brake light lens (A) and housing (B).
Bulbs: 5 W x 5
3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
22-238
Trailer Lighting Connector

Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Remove the t w o bolts (A), and separate the trailer

lighting connector (B) f r o m the trailer hitch.
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the brake pedal

position switch(B).
2. Remove the t w o bolts (A) and the bracket (B) f r o m the

trailer lighting connector (C).
,C
2. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and No.

2.
There should be continuity w h e n the brake pedal is
pressed.
There should be no continuity w h e n the brake pedal
is released.
4.
There should be no continuity w h e n the brake pedal
is pressed.
There should be continuity w h e n the brake pedal is
released.
4. If necessary, adjust the pedal height (see page 19-6),
or replace the switch.
3. Remove the cover (D) and disconnect the 10P

connector (E) f r o m the trailer lighting connector.
4. Install the lighting connector in the reverse order of
removal.
22-239
Exterior Lights
Automatic Lighting Sensor Test/Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard.
Before testing, do the automatic lighting control unit
input test, and check for continuity between the
automatic lighting sensor and the automatic lighting
control unit.
1. Pry out the automatic lighting sensor (A).

3. Measure the voltage between automatic lighting
sensor 5 P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
Voltage should be:
# 3.63.7 V or more w i t h the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
3.33.5 V or less w i t h the sensor in direct sunlight.
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the automatic
lighting sensor.
22-240

22-241

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

CT\JD
CT\JO"-
BLU-
No. 23 (50 A)
D4
PNK -
G20
D1
G2
- WHT-
PNKIG1 HOT in O N (II)

and S T A R T (III)
D2
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 7 (15 A)
< T V J D
No. 10
(7.5 A)
G6
YEL
MICU
VBU
IG1
+B H A Z A R D
IPD
L TURN LT
22-242
R TURN LT
BODY
*: Touring model
No. 14 (7.5 A) F U S E
(UNDER-DASH F U S E /
RELAY BOX)
MICU
LTBLU
+B HAZARD
YEL
TURN TURN
SWL SWR
L , G H T
>
\
V / (1.12W)
GND
PG
S5
S19
PG
PG
SG
S18
SG
Hr
Q11
HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH
GRN-
T34
RED
F20
BLK
E6
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
L T G R N BRN
12
LEFT
BIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
SWITCH
C O M B I N A T I O N LIGHT S W I T C H
BLK
BLK
BLK
-9r
-9r
-9r
G501
G401
G401
22-243

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1280: Turn Switch Circuit Malfunction

When the turn signal switch is in right position:
Data List
Value
OFF
OFF

ON (!l).
Are both data list values indicated OFF
YES-Go to step 14.
Is DTC B1280
NO-Go to step 11.
indicated?
Check for loose or poor connections-^
4. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.

(20P).
box connector S (20P) terminals No. 18 and No. 19
and body ground.
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X CONNECTOR S (20P)
When the turn signal switch is in left position:

Data List
Value
ON
OFF
When the turn signal switch is in right position:

Data List
Value
OFF
ON
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
LEFT
(LTGRN)
RIGHT
(BRN)
correct?
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 22-90).
Is there
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

connector.
9. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
continuity?

22-225).
22-225).
22-244

(20P).
light switch 12P connector terminals as s h o w n :
5
18
19
Combination light
12
1
2

COMBI GND (BLK)
I
4 5
1
8
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
RIGHT (BRN)
L E F T (LT GRN)
LEFT
(LT GRN)
RIGHT
(BRN)
9 10 11 12

Is there
continuity?

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e . I

MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-121)
2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, M, Q, R, S, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from the wire side of female terminals.
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X CONNECTOR E (42P)
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
n
1
n
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BLU
GRN

BLK
PNK
T
18 19
14|15 16|17
30
31
132
33 34
PNK
2
4.
9 10
BRN
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X CONNECTOR G (21P)
3 4
12 13
/
/
15 16 17
YEL
JL
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
CONNECTOR M (10P)
12 13
//
_n_
9 10
16 17 18
20
PNK
BLU
F=l
7 8
4
r
10
22
12
26 27 28 29
. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
Ifthe terminals look OK, go to step 4.
22-246
LTGRN
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR R (20P)
(EL
IT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
BLK
BLU
_n_
15 16
34
BLK
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
G1
BLU
Connect terminals G6 and G1 w i t h a

j u m p e r wire:
The left front turn signal light should
come o n .
M1
BLU
Connect terminals G6 and M1 w i t h a

j u m p e r wire:
The left turn signal indicator and leftside
turn signal light* should come on.
E40
BLU
Connect terminals G6 and E40 w i t h a

j u m p e r wire:
The left rear turn signal light should
come on.
F1
PNK
Connect terminals G6 and F1 w i t h a

j u m p e r wire:
The right front turn signal light, and right
rear turn signal light should come o n .
M2
PNK
Connect terminals G6 and M2 w i t h a

j u m p e r wire:
The right turn signal indicator and right
side turn signal light* should come on.

not obtained
Poor ground (G301)
Blown bulb
Blown No. 7 (15A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-dash
fuse/relay box
Poor ground (G401)*
Faulty LED
fuse/relay box
Blown bulb
fuse/relay box
Poor g r o u n d (G201, G505)
Blown bulb
fuse/relay box
Poor g r o u n d (G401)*
Faulty LED
fuse/relay box
*: Touring model
(cont'd)
22-247

5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
Cavity
Wire
G2
PNK

G6
YEL

E6
T34
F20
BLK
BLK
BLK

R1
YEL

There should be 0.2 V or less.
There should be 0.2 V or less.
Q11
GRN
Hazard w a r n i n g switch
pressed

S18
BRN
S5
BLK
S19
LT
GRN
Ignition switch ON (II), turn

signal switch in right
position
signal switch in left or
neutral position
signal switch in left
position
signal switch in right or
neutral position

S5
BLK
22-248
Test condition

not obtained
auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box
fuse/relay box
box
Faulty hazard w a r n i n g switch
fuse/relay box
Faulty combination light
switch
switch
switch
switch
BODY
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement
Hazard Warning Switch

Test/Replacement
1. Remove the left center panel (see page 20-123).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector f r o m the hazard w a r n i n g
switch (A).
Touring model
1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-45).
2. Remove the six TORX screws using a TORX T10 bit,
and visor (A) f r o m the mirror (B).
3. Pull out the side turn signal light (C) slightly f r o m the
mirror (B).
3. Remove the t w o m o u n t i n g screws, and then remove
the hazard w a r n i n g switch f r o m behind the panel.
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (D) f r o m the side t u r n

signal light.
5. Install the light in the reversal order of removal.

Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
-@-r-o
oo
oo
5. Remove the cover (A), and then remove the bulb (B).
22-249
Interior Lights
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP MAP LIGHTS
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH
AMBIENT LIGHT (ROOF)
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (2ND)
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S DOOR SWITCH
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (3RD)

RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR C O U R T E S Y LIGHT

HATCH G L A S S
SWITCH
HATCH G L A S S
LATCH SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR

FRONT P A S S E N G E R S DOOR
22-250
POWER TAILGATE C L O S E R UNIT

(Including F U L L LATCH SWITCH)
Latch/Ratchet Switch T e s t page 22-580
Latch Switch T e s t page 22-262
AMBIENT LIGHT (CONSOLE)

C O N S O L E BOX LIGHT
22-251
Interior Lights
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
0-
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 4 (H/L) (50 A)
-cr\j>-
No. 22 (10 A)
cr\jD
G1 8
No. 19 (15 A)
GRN G3
-WHT K4
PNK
INTERIOR
LIGHT
SWITCH
No. 14(7.5 A) F U S E
(UNDER-DASH
AMBIENT
LIGHT
(ROOF)
(LED)
11 INTERIOR L I G H T
SWITCH
2 DRIVER'S
V A N I T Y MIRROR
LIGHTS
(1.1 W x 2 )
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the g a u g e
control module)
MICU
-0_
G701
22-252
2 PASSENGER'S
V A N I T Y MIRROR
LIGHTS
(1.1 W x 2 )
BLK
BLK
G701
G701
BODY

-.
No. 14 (7.5 A)
E16
E12
E36
N2
LTBLU
MICU
OT
Q12
LTBLU
-WHT-
It
ON, X O F F
R10
WHT
WHT-<|)
CARGO
AREA
LIGHT
(8W)
RED-
LTGRN
6/FULL
/ LATCH
6 SWITCH
1 TAILGATE
CLOSER
UNIT
GRN
LTGRN
- TAILGATE
J LATCH
S\\ SWITCH
$y (Closed:
2 Tailgate
open)
BLK
BLU
2 HATCH GLASS
LATCH SWITCH
(Closed:
Hatch glass
open)
2 AMBIENT
LIGHT
(CONSOLE)
YEL (LED)
BLK
YEL
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
POWER
TAILGATE
CONTROL
UNIT
G701
|_G601
| G601
*
G403
G801
(cont'd)
22-253
Interior Lights
MICU
T9
T15
T16
E38
K5
E17
E3
E37
E2
LTGRN
ORN
PNK
WHT
ORN
YEL
LTGRN
LTBLU
GRY
ORN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
COURTESY
LIGHT
(2 CP)
WHT
22-254
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
COURTESY
LIGHT
(2 CP)
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
COURTESY
LIGHT
(2 CP)
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
COURTESY
LIGHT
{2 CP)
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
BODY
Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement

1. Turn the map light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) w i t h a small screwdriver.
Front Individual
Map Light:
3. Remove the t w o mounting screws, then remove the

map lights (B).
4. Disconnect the connectors (C) f r o m the map lights.
8Wx2
With moonroof
Terminal
Position
RIGHT
LEFT
-@-
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
o
o
--
-o
-o
-o
6. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If

the bulb(s) are OK, replace the map light.
Without moonroof
22-255
Interior Lights
Rear Individual Map Light
Test/Replacement
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
1. Turn the light switch OFF.
Rear Individual
Map Light:
Cargo Area Light:
3. Remove the t w o mounting screws.

4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) f r o m the housing (C).
and No. 3 with the left switch ON.
and No. 2 w i t h the right switch ON.
and No. 3 w i t h the left switch OFF.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s)
(D). If the bulbs are OK, replace the light.
22-256
8W
5Wx2
3. Remove the t w o mounting screws.

4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) f r o m the housing (C).
and No. 1 w i t h the switch in the MIDDLE position.
and No. 3 w i t h the switch in the ON position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb (D).
If the bulb is OK, replace the light.
Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the front individual map light (see page
22-255).
2. Disconnect the interior light switch 12P connector (A)

and the m a p light 3P connector (B).
With moonroof
3. Remove the interior light switch (C) f r o m the m a p

light housing.
4. A t the interior light switch 12P connector, check for
continuity between the terminals in each interior light
Terminal
11
Position
12
OFF
1 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6|
|7|8|9|10|11|12
DOOR
ON
-o
-o
-o
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the interior

light switch assembly.
Without moonroof
2
7
9 10 11 12
22-257
Interior Lights
Ambient Light Test/Replacement
Roof
1. Remove the front individual map lights (see page
22-255).
2. Disconnect the interior light switch 12P connector (A)
and the map light 3P connector (B).
With moonroof
22-258
4. At the interior light switch 12P connector, check the

light by connecting battery power t o terminal No. 8
and ground to terminal No. 10. The ambient light
should come o n . If the light does not come o n , replace
the interior light switch assembly.
Pocket (Without navigation)
Console
1. Remove the center pocket (see page 20-124).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the ambient

light (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the ambient

light (B).
3. Remove the ambient light.

4. At the ambient light 2P connector, check the light by
connecting battery power to terminal No. 1 and
g r o u n d to terminal No. 2. The ambient light should
come on. I f t h e light does not come o n , replace the
ambient light.
3. Remove the ambient light.

4. At the ambient light 2P connector, check the light by
connecting battery power to the terminal No. 1 and
ground to terminal No. 2. The ambient light should
come on. If the light does not come o n , replace the
ambient light.
22-259
Interior Lights
Console Box Light Replacement
Courtesy Light Replacement
1. Carefully pry out the console box light out of the

center console.

Courtesy Light: 2 CP
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) 4 5 counterclockwise to

remove it.
Console Box Light: 1.4 W
2. Remove the bulb (B) f r o m the socket.

3. Remove the bulb (B) f r o m the socket.

22-260
Glove Box Light Replacement
Vanity Mirror Light

Test/Replacement
1. Open the grove box, and release the glove box stops
and each side, then let the glove box hang d o w n , (see
page 20-127)
1. Remove the sunvisor (see page 20-102).
2. Carefully pry out the glove box light (A) f r o m its

mounting bracket (B) w i t h the small screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the sunvisor (B).

Vanity Mirror Light: 1.1 W x 2
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 counterclockwise to

remove it.
Glove Box Light: 1.4 W
4. Remove the bulb (D) f r o m the socket.


2.
W i t h the vanity mirror cover (C) open, there should
be continuity.
With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should be
no continuity.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulbs
(D). If the bulbs are OK, replace the vanity mirror light.
22-261
Interior Lights
Tailgate Latch Switch Test
I . O p e n the tailgate.
latch switch (B).

2.
W i t h the tailgate open, there should be continuity.
W i t h the tailgate closed, there should be no
continuity.
5. I f t h e continuity is not as specified, replace the latch
assembly.
22-262

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS

IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-270
IGNITION KEY LIGHT

Test, page 22-270
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (2ND)

FRONT PASSENGERS
DOOR SWITCH
MICU
(Built into the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT

(Including FULL LATCH SWITCH)

JOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Built into the power
window master switch)
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (3RD)
LEFT REAR DOOR

SWITCH
22-263

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY

No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
G20
D1
IGNITION SWITCH
'BAT
O
IGV
No. 23 (10 A)
WHT
I1
VBU
IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
CONTROL
UNIT
INTERIOR LIGHTS SWITCH
BLK
'
I
I
I
I
V
B-CAN
HI
WHT- -
B-CAN
LO
*
I
I
I
WHT
- LTGRN
H LTGRN
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the
power window
master switch)
G701
22-264
RR DOOR SW R r-**
RR DOOR SW L h>
AS DOOR SW h>
DR DOOR SW h>T/G SW H >
SG
R6
SG
T34

*2: Without power taUgate
-. B-CAN line
Q1
IG
KEY
SW
BODY
IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
CONTROL
UNIT
PG PG PG
E6
F20
E36
E3
E17
E2
MICU
RED
BLK BLK BLK
YEL
. IGNITION
' KEY
7|N SWITCH
2M (Closed:
2 Key
inserted)
LTGRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
BLK
LTBLU
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
GRY
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
WHT LTGRN
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
I
I
|
l 35
B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
VBU
G401
G401 G401 G501
POWER WINDOW
33 MASTER SWITCH

SG PG
LTGRN
LTGRN
0
i / FULL
/ LATCH
5 SWITCH
1 CLOSER
UNIT
GRN
*
h
V
1
TAILGATE
LATCH
SWITCH
(Closed:
Tailgate
open)
32
37
31
30
DOOR
BLK BLK
RED BRN LOCK KNOB
U
Y
BLK
UNDRIVER'S '
DOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
L
POWER
TAILGATE
CONTROL
UNIT
G601
G401G401
LOCK
C K
KEY
< = Q )
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
G401
22-265

MICU
2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, R, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown f r o m the w i r e side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR E (42P)
GRY
v
LTGRN
/
*2 3t/
/
23 /
u
BLK
/
5 6 /
27 28 /
LTBLU
9
8
?
AA
12J13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
34 35 36 37 38 /
LTGRN
40 41
YEL
CONNECTOR F (34P)
1
20
5 | 6
//
22 23
24
BLK
A*
25
9 10 11
t
27 28
14|15 16|17
30
31
18 19
32 33 34
CONNECTOR G(21P)
PNK
A/
WHT
3 4
12 13
/
/
ci,,
7 8
15 16 17
6
EJglJEI
CONNECTOR R (20P)
RK>
WHT
CONNECTOR K (8P)
/
/
6 1/ 8
PNK
A/
29
r-n_n_
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13
16 17 18
//
20
WHT
CONNECTOR T(34P)
10
12
25 26 27 28 29
15
34
BLK
22-266
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
Cavity
Wire
E6
T34
BLK
Under all
conditions
F20
BLK
Under all
conditions
G2
PNK
Under all
conditions
G3
WHT
Under all
conditions
R6
RED
Ignition key
inserted into the
ignition switch
E37
YEL
Test condition
Ignition switch in
LOCK (0) position
and the ignition
key removed f r o m
the ignition switch
Driver's door open
Driver's door
closed
E3
LTGRN
Front passenger's
door open
Front passenger's
door closed
E17
LTBLU
Left rear door open
Left rear door

closed

Measure the voltage to
ground:
There should be less than
0.2 V.
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
Possible cause if desired result is n o t

obtained
Poor ground (G401)
Poor ground (G501)


An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
Faulty MICU

An open in the wire

Faulty front passenger's door
switch
switch ground
An open in the wire
switch
Faulty left rear door switch ground

(cont'd)
22-267

Cavity
Wire
E2
GRY
Test condition
Right rear door
open
Right rear door

closed
E36*
LTGRN
Tailgate open
Tailgate closed
R10
K5
WHT
Under all
conditions
K4
PNK
Interior light
switch in the
middle (DOOR)
position
* : W i t h o u t power tailgate
22-268

Measure the voltage t o
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
voltage.
Connect a j u m p e r wire to
ground:
The individual map lights
and ignition key light should
come o n .

obtained
ground

Faulty interior light switch
Faulty map lights
Blown bulb (s)
BODY

6. Disconnect the 37P connector f r o m the power w i n d o w master switch.
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH 37P CONNECTOR
WHT
/ //
i
14
16 17
10 11
19 20 21 22 2 3
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
7T\
BRN
RED
BLK
24
37
BLK
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
8. Reconnect the 37P connector to the power w i n d o w master switch, and do these input tests at the following connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
32
37
BLK
Under all
conditions
13
WHT
Under all
conditions
30
BRN
Driver's door lock

knob switch in
LOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
UNLOCK
31
RED
Driver's door lock

knob switch in
UNLOCK
Driver's door lock
knob switch in
LOCK

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:

obtained
Poor ground (G401)

Poor ground (G401)
Faulty driver's door lock knob
switch
switch
Faulty power w i n d o w master
switch
Poor ground (G401)
switch
switch
Faulty power w i n d o w master
switch
, If multiple failures are f o u n d on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
22-269

Ignition Key Switch Test
Ignition Key Light Test
1. Remove the steering c o l u m n upper and lower covers

(see page 20-130).
1. Remove the steering c o l u m n upper and lower covers

(see page 20-130).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A).
1 2
3 4
5 6

2.
There should be continuity w i t h the key in the
ignition switch.
There should be no continuity w i t h the key
removed.
4. I f t h e continuity is not as specified, replace the
steering lock assembly (see page 17-16).
22-270
3. The LED should come on w h e n power is connected to

terminal No. 6 and ground is connected to terminal
No. 5.
4. I f t h e LED does not come o n , replace the steering lock
assembly (see page 17-16).
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
No. 22 (10 A)
WHT
G3
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
R10
No. 14(7.5 A) F U S E
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
WHT
Y
LTBLU
ROOF CONSOLE
HOMELINK
UNIT
BLK
YEL
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
G701
22-271

T e s t
NOTE:
Explain to the customer that garage door remote
transmitter come in t w o types: fixed code and rolling
code. Each type has its o w n p r o g r a m m i n g m e t h o d ,
and each method is covered in the owner's manual. If
the customer has concerns about the HomeLink unit,
have the customer contact the HomeLink assistance
desk at 800-355-3515.
5. Clear any previously learned codes by pressing and

holding the t w o outside buttons (A) on the HomeLink
unit (B) for about 20 seconds. W h e n the red indicator
(C) on the unit starts blinking, release the buttons.
If the HomeLink will not open the customer's garage,

do the following procedures.
1. Press any of the buttons on the HomeLink unit.
If the red indicator comes o n , go to step 4.
Ifthe red indicator does not come o n , go to step 2.
2. Remove the roof console (see step 2 on page 20-107)
and disconnect the 5P connector f r o m the HomeLink
unit.
3. Measure the voltage between terminals No. 5 ( + ) and
No. 2 () of the HomeLink unit 5P connector. There
should be battery voltage.
If the voltage is not as specified, check for these
problems:
- A blown No. 22 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
- A faulty under-dash fuse/relay box.
- A n open in the wire.
- P o o r g r o u n d (G701).
6. Point the test remote transmitter (A) straight up

exactly 4.0 in (101.6 m m ) away f r o m the HomeLink
unit (B).
I f t h e voltage is as specified, go to step 4.

HOMELINK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
nfT-
1 2
(BLK)
"fin
5
(WHT)
4. Make sure the HomeLink compatible remote

transmitter (test remote) has fresh batteries.
7. Press and hold the test transmitter button and one of

the HomeLink unit buttons (C) at the same time.
8. Wait for about 20 seconds while watching the red
indicator (D) on the HomeLink unit.
Ifthe red indicator starts out blinking slowly and
then blinks faster, the unit is OK. Release the
buttons, then clear the learned code (see step 1). On
the internet, go to w w w . h o m e l i n k . c o m .
Ifthe red indicator does not blink, faulty HomeLink
unit; replace the roof console (see page 22-273).
22-272
HomeLink Unit Replacement

2. Remove the screws and roof console (A), then
disconnect the connectors (B).
22-273
Power Windows
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
22-274
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

22-275
Power Windows
System Description
Auto Reverse Power Window Operation
The system is composed of the door multiplex control unit (built into the power w i n d o w master switch), front
passenger's power w i n d o w switch (with built-in control unit), and power w i n d o w motors.
The power w i n d o w motor incorporates a Hall IC unit (pulser) w h i c h generates pulses during the motor's operation and
sends pulses to the driver's and passenger's power w i n d o w control unit. As soon as the power w i n d o w control unit
detects a change in pulse frequency f r o m the Hall IC unit (pulser), the power w i n d o w control unit makes the power
w i n d o w motor stop and reverse. This prevents pinching your hand or fingers during auto-up operation. The auto
reverse function does not w o r k w h e n the power w i n d o w master switch is held in the closed position.
POWER WINDOW
MASTER SWITCH
MAGNET
HALL IC UNIT
(PULSER)
POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Sensor
s} Qc] p[^3 -rLTLTL

f
Period of
pulses
MAGNET
Position when something

is pinched
Period of
pulses
Threshold value for
judgment of pinching
Key Cylinder Operation

W i t h the key inserted in the driver's door key cylinder, turn the key a second time w i t h i n 10 seconds and hold it to
operate the w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f (clockwise to open, counterclockwise to close). The w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f stop
m o v i n g w h e n the key is released. The auto reverse operation is not active w h e n closing the w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f
w i t h the key cylinder.
Keyless Operation
By pressing and holding the UNLOCK button of the keyless transmitter a second time w i t h i n 10 seconds, the w i n d o w s
and m o o n r o o f open. The w i n d o w s and m o o n r o o f stop m o v i n g w h e n the UNLOCK button is released. The w i n d o w s and
m o o n r o o f do not close w i t h the LOCK button.
22-276
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit

Resetting the power w i n d o w s are required w h e n any of
the following have occurred:
Without the HDS
Power w i n d o w regulator replacement or repair
NOTE:
Power w i n d o w m o t o r replacement or repair
To start the reset procedure, do the driver's power

w i n d o w master switch first (steps 1 to 8), then do the
passenger's power w i n d o w switch (steps 9 to 11) if
equipped.
W i n d o w run channel replacement

Front passenger's power w i n d o w switch replacement
Door glass replacement or repair
Power is removed f r o m the driver's power w i n d o w
master switch or front passenger's power w i n d o w
switch w h i l e the power w i n d o w timer is ON.
NOTE: If the front passenger's power w i n d o w has lost
power w h e n the key off timer is O N , it cannot be
operated f r o m the driver's switch and must be reset
f r o m the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch.
Using the HDS
Do each bullet item in step 4 within 5 seconds of each

other.
Driver's Power Window
2. Move the power w i n d o w all the w a y d o w n by using
the driver's power w i n d o w DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's door.
4. Do the following three times before going to step 5:
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then enter the

vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts.
Push and hold the driver's power w i n d o w DOWN

switch.
3. Select BODY ELECTRICAL f r o m the SYSTEM SELECT

menu.
4. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT m e n u ,
select POWER WINDOWS.
5. From the MODE m e n u , select ADJUSTMENT.
6. From the ADJUSTMENT m e n u , select WINDOW
RESET for driver's side (passenger's side) w i n d o w .
7. Follow the prompts on the screen.
8. Confirm that the power w i n d o w control unit is reset
by using the power w i n d o w AUTO UP and AUTO
DOWN function.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Release the driver's power w i n d o w DOWN switch.
5. Confirm that AUTO UP no longer works. If AUTO UP
still works, go back to step 1.
6. Move the driver's power w i n d o w all the w a y d o w n
using the driver's power w i n d o w DOWN switch.
7. Pull up and hold the driver's power w i n d o w UP switch
until the driver's power w i n d o w is all the w a y up, then
continue to hold the switch for at least 1 second.
by using the driver's power w i n d o w AUTO UP and
AUTO DOWN function. If the power w i n d o w still does
not w o r k in AUTO, repeat the procedure several
times, paying close attention to the 5 second time
limit between steps.
Front Passenger's Power Window (if equipped)
9. Move the front passenger's power w i n d o w all the w a y
d o w n using the front passenger's power w i n d o w
DOWN switch..
10. Pull up and hold the power w i n d o w UP switch until
the front passenger's power w i n d o w is all the w a y up,
then continue to hold the switch for at least 1 second.
by using the front passenger's power w i n d o w AUTO
UP and AUTO DOWN function.
22-277
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram

IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
0-
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

CTNJ3
O~\JD
ill
BLU
D1
IG1
PNK '
BAT
| G 2 j 7 ^ ORN - | J
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
LT GRN
WHT -
PCM
- GRN
Q-
C3
No. 4 (P/W) (40 A)
PNK
K2 ^ * G21
ORN
n
< T V J O
i O - IG2 CUT
RELAY
3
BLU/WHT
P>
No. 23 00 A)
No. 10 (7.5 A)
-crvoo
No. 36 (10 A)
D2
TRANSMISSION
f ^ > RANGE SWITCH
^
(PorN)
+B BACK UP
+B P/W MAIN
No. 26 (20 A)
+B BACK UP
P5
N9
IG2
N11
WHT
WHT
YEL
VMP DR
VBU
IG2
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

DRIVER'S
ON
OFF
(LOCK) (UNLOCK)
DOWN UP AUTO
SG
PG

SIL SIL
DR DR
UL LOCK
MIR ACT
DR HEAT
UP D O W N 0 SVCC PLSA PLSB
31
UNLOCK LOCK
30
DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
BLK BLK
RED
GRN
A>
RED LTBLU BRN
ORN
RED BRN
WHT
KEY
PNK
LEFT POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
PULSER
DRIVER'S
UNDOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
L
LOCK
DRIVER'S
DOOR KEY
CYLINDER
SWITCH
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
BLK
BLK
-LL
G401 G401
22-278
G401
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
G401
BODY
-
POWER WINDOW
RELAY
-NNo. 32 (20 A)
MICU
VBU
No. 33 (20 A)
+BP/W
RR L
+BP/W
RR R
E41
E23
P/W
RLY-
IG1
P/W
RLYR4
N3
ORN/WHT
RED
PUR
LEFT REAR
POWER
WINDOW
SWITCH
RED
RIGHT R E A R
POWER
WINDOW
SWITCH

LEFT
REAR
DOOR M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT
RL R L Y
DN
RL R L Y
UP
36
23
No. 33 (20 A)
FUSE
RR R L Y
DN
ILLUMI
[34
26
LT BLU
GRY
RED
BLU
L E F T REAR
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
I-
LTBLU
4
L E F T REAR P O W E R
WINDOW MOTOR
GRN
RR R L Y
UP
[21
\I7
LT B L U I
RIGHT REAR
G R Y POWER WINDOW BLU
SWITCH
2
RIGHT REAR P O W E R
WINDOW MOTOR
G503
No. 32 (20 A)
FUSE
GRY
-PURRED
I 3
G502
(cont'd)
22-279
Power Windows
: B-CAN line
No. 30^20 A)
M4
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
[7l2
JT29
I
I
WHT LT GRN
I
WHT LTGRN
GRN
: i
I
I
I
WHT
LT GRN
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
25
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
(AUTO)
DOWN UP AUTO B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
HvllR SW MIR SW
MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO
AS COM ASLR UD IND2 IND1 P0S2 POS1 SET
UART
VMP
AS
DOWN UP AUTO
CONTROL UNIT
10
11
17
19
; 27
BRN
PNK LTGRN GRN GRN
UART
I 29
PG
37
UP DOWN SVCC PLSA PLSB SG

12
YEL LTGRN PUR ORN
BLK
PUR
PUR
A >-
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SWITCH
(With DPMS)
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
MOONROOF
CONTROL
UNIT/MOTOR
G404
22-280
26
27
28
WHT PNK GRN BLK
POWER MIRROR
SWITCH
24
BRN
PULSER
BODY
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1125: Driver's Power Window Motor
Pulse A Malfunction
DTC B1126: Driver's Power Window Motor
Pulse B Malfunction
ON (II).
10. Check for continuity between power window master

switch 37P connector terminals No. 3, No. 20, and No.
22 and driver's power window motor 6P connector
terminals No. 5, No. 3, and No. 6.
PLSA ( L T B L U )
S V C C (RED)
T T 7 T 3 | 4 | / | 6 | / | / | 9 10 11
12
13114L/I16117I/1191201211221231
27128129130131132133j 341351361
24
3. Open and close the driver's power window by using

the power window master switch manually.
Does the window motor operate?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Test the driver's power window motor (see page
22-294). If the motor tests OK go to step 4.
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 11.
Are DTCs B1125 and/or B1126 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections-^
5. Select the POWER WINDOWS from the BODY
ELECTRICAL system select menu, and enter the DATA
LIST.
NO-Repair an open in the wire.H

11. Check for continuity between driver's power window
motor 6P connector terminals No. 3, No. 5, and No. 6,
and body ground individually.
D R I V E R S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
6. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the driver's

window motor A-phase and B-phase pulse signal in
the DATA LIST.
Does the information indicator display DETECT while the
window is moving, and display NONE when the window
is stopped?
PLSB (BRN)
S V C C (RED)
fi
PLSA (LT BLU)
YES-Replace the power window master switch (see

page 22-298).
NO-Go to step 7.

8. Disconnect the power window master switch 37P
connector.
9. Disconnect the driver's power window motor 6P
connector.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
22-281
Power Windows
12. Test the driver's power w i n d o w motor (see page
22-294).
Is the motor OK?
page 22-298).B
NO-Replace the driver's power w i n d o w motor (see
page 2 0 - 1 8 ) .
DTC B1130: Front Passenger's Power Window

Motor Pulse A Malfunction
Motor Pulse B Malfunction
ON (II).
3. Open and close the front passenger's power w i n d o w
by using the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch
manually.
Does the window motor
operate?
NO-Test the front passenger's power w i n d o w motor
(see page 22-295). If the motor tests OK, go to step 4.
Are DTCs B1130 and/or B1131
indicated?
5. Select the POWER WINDOWS f r o m the BODY
ELECTRICAL system select m e n u , and enter the DATA
LIST.
6. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the front
passenger's power w i n d o w motor A-phase and
B-phase signal in the DATA LIST.
Does the information indicator display DETECT while the
window is moving, and display NONE when the window
is stopped?
YES-Replace the front passenger's power w i n d o w
switch (see page 22-299).B
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect the front passenger's power w i n d o w
motor 6P connector.
22-282
10. Check for continuity between front passenger's

power window switch 37P connector terminals No.
26, No. 27, and No. 28, and front passenger's power
window motor 6P connector terminals No. 5, No. 6,
and No. 3.
FRONT P A S S E N G E R ' S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
37P CONNECTOR
BODY
12. Test the front passenger's power window motor (see

page 22-295).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the front passenger's power window
NO-Replace the front passenger's power window
motor (see page 22-295).
PLSA (PNK)
rq/l3|4l5i/M/uwi
12
25
24
AAAAAAAAAAA,
37
l26l27|28l29lXMXM34M36l
S V C C (WHT)
PLSB
(GRN)
PLSB (GRN)
GI--Z)
S V C C (WHT)
'
PLSA (PNK)
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S POWER WINDOW MOTOR

6P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
power window motor 6P connector terminals No. 3,
No. 5, and No. 6, and body ground individually.
6P CONNECTOR
S V C C (WHT)
PLSB
(GRN)
NO-Go to step 12.
22-283
Power Windows
DTC B1140: Driver's Power Window Position
Detect Circuit Malfunction
ON (II).
3. Open and close the driver's power w i n d o w by using
the power w i n d o w master switch.
Are DTCs B1125 and B1126 also
Indicated?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e indicated DTC(s) f i r s t . H
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Do resetting the power w i n d o w control unit (see page
22-277).
ON (II).
8. Open and close the driver's power w i n d o w by using
the power w i n d o w master switch.
Is DTC B1140
indicated?

test and do all power and g r o u n d input tests (see page
22-289). If the tests prove OK, replace the power
DTC B1142: Door Multiplex Control Unit Lost

Communication With Front Passenger's
Power Window Switch (UART Line Open)
ON (II).
3. Open and close the driver's and front passenger's
w i n d o w s by operating the power w i n d o w master
switch.
Is DTC B1142
indicated?
time.B
connector.
switch 37P connector and the m o o n r o o f control
unit/motor connector 10P connector (if equipped).
switch 3 7 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 27 and body
ground.
NO-The system is OK at this t i m e . Check the

connectors and terminals for poor or loose
connections.
1|/|3|4 >|6|/X|9|10|11|
12
25
|13|14|/116|17|/|19|20|21|22|23|
|26|27|28 29|30|31|32|33 34|35 36
UART (BRN)
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to ground in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 9.
22-284
24
37
9. Check for continuity between power window master

switch 37P connector terminal No. 27 and front
passenger's power window switch 37P connector
terminal No. 29.
BODY
12. Measure the voltage between power window master

switch 37Pconnectorterminal No. 27 and body
ground.

|1|/|3|4|/|6|/|/|9|10|11
12
25
13114 LX| 16117 LX[ 19120121122[ 23

26 27 28 29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36
,/ | 3 | 4
/ | 9 |10 11
12 |13|14L/|16|17L/|19|20|21|22|23|
25
|26|27|28|29 30|31|32|33|34|35|36|
I I
l !
1
1
UART (BRN)
24
37
24
37
1 1
UART (BRN)
1|/|3|4
\A//\/V/
25
I

24
12
i
[26 27|28|29
i 1
A///M/M
UART (BRN) '
37
'
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S POWER WINDOW SWITCH

37P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.

YES-Go to the front passenger's power window

switch input test, and do all power and ground input
tests (see page 22-292). If the tests prove OK,
substitute a known good front passenger's power
window switch. If the DTC goes away, replace the
original front passenger's power window switch (see
page 22-299). If the DTC is still present, replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-298).B
NO-Repair a short to power in the wire.B
10. If equipped with a moonroof, disconnect the

moonroof control unit 10P connector (see
page 22-377).
22-285
Power Windows
Position Detect Circuit Malfunction
DTC U0155: Door Multiplex Control Unit Lost

Communication With Gauge Control Module



ON (II).

ON (II).

by using the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch.

Are DTCs B1130 and 81131 also
Is DTC U0155
indicated?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the indicated DTC(s) f i r s t !

NO-Go to step 5.
5. Do resetting the power w i n d o w control unit (see page
22-277).
ON (II).
by using the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch.
Is DTC B1145
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the passenger's power w i n d o w switch

input test, and do all power and ground input tests
(see page 22-292). If all the tests prove OK, replace the
passenger's power w i n d o w switch (see page
22-299).
NO-The system is OK at this t i m e . Check the
connectors and terminals for poor or loose
connections.!
22-286

indicated?

do all power, ground and communication input tests
(see page 22-334). If the tests prove OK, replace the
Check for loose or poor connections at the gauge
control module and the related u n i t s . !

Communication With Climate Control Unit
BODY


ON (II).
1|/|3|4|/|6|/|/|9|10|11
13|14|X^16|17|X119|20|21 |22|23|
'26127128129130131132|33|34|35|36

Is DTC U0164
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI
(WHT)
indicated?
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
power w i n d o w master switch and climate control
unit.B
5. From the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u , select UNIT
INFORMATION, and then select CONNECT UNIT to
see if the climate control unit is communicating w i t h
the HDS.
Is the climate control unit
detected?

page 22-298).B
B-CAN HI
1_
//
9 |10 -11 12 13 14
>2C)2A \2i 5 26>27 2\2/
/Z2
16 / 1 1 8
3 3 / 1 3 5 36
I

YES-Replace the climate control unit (see page
21-196).B
NO-Go to step 6.
connector.
8. Disconnect the climate control unit connector A (36P).
22-287
Power Windows
Communication With MICU
ON (II).
Is DTC U1282 Indicated?
Y E S - G o to the MICU input test, and do all power,
ground and communication input tests (see page
22-153). If the tests prove OK, replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
Check for loose or poor connections at under-dash
fuse/relay box connector P (10P) and the related
units.
22-288
BODY
Power Window Master Switch Input Test

WHT
RED
WHT
LTBLU
BRN
BLK
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
(cont'd)
22-289
Power Windows
Power Window Master Switch input Test (cont'd)
4. W i t h the door multiplex control unit 37P connector still disconnected f r o m the power w i n d o w master switch, do these
input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
27
BRN
Disconnect the front

passenger's power w i n d o w
12
24
RED
GRN
Connect terminals No. 25 and

No. 24 (or No. 12), and
terminal No. 12 (or No. 24) and
body g r o u n d w i t h j u m p e r
wires.
23
36
BLU
GRY
21
34
GRY
GRN
26
LT
BLU
Connect terminals No. 25

and No. 36 (or No. 23) w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
Connect No. 13 terminal and
the left rear power w i n d o w
terminal No. 8.
and No. 34 (or No. 21) w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
Connect No. 13 terminal and
the right rear power w i n d o w
terminal No. 8.
22-290

terminal No. 27 and front
passenger's power w i n d o w
switch 37P connectorterminal
No. 29:
Check driver's power w i n d o w
motor operation:
The driver's power w i n d o w
should open (or close).
Check left rear power w i n d o w

motor operation:
The left rear power w i n d o w
Possible cause if desired

result is not obtained
Faulty driver's power

w i n d o w motor
Blown No. 26 (20A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay
box
Faulty left rear power
w i n d o w switch
Faulty left rear power
window motor
Check right rear power

w i n d o w motor operation:
The right rear power w i n d o w
Faulty right rear power
w i n d o w switch
Faulty right rear power
window motor
Check left and right rear power

w i n d o w switch lights:
The left and right rear power
w i n d o w switch lights should
come on.
Faulty LED
Poor g r o u n d (G502, G503)
Faulty left and right rear
power w i n d o w switch
5. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests
at the following connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit is faulty; replace the power window master switch (see
page 22-298).
NOTE: If you replace the power window master switch, reset the power window control unit (see page 22-277).
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
32
37
BLK
13
WHT

ground:
voltage.
14
YEL

ground:
voltage.
25
WHT

ground:
voltage.
RED
20
BRN
Ignition switch ON (II), and

driver's power window
moving up or down

ground:
voltage.
terminals No. 20 and No. 37:
An analog meter should
alternate between 0 V and
about 5 V (a digital voltmeter
should read about 2.5 V while
the window moves).
22
LT
BLU
Ignition switch ON (II), and

driver's power window
moving up or down

ground:
There should be less than 0.2

Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
V.

An analog meter should
alternate between 0 V and
about 5 V (a digital voltmeter
should read about 2.5 V while
the window moves).
Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in

the under-hood fuse/relay
box
Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
A short to ground in the
wire
An open in the wire
box
Faulty IG2 cut relay
Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
wire
An open in the wire
box
Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
wire
An open in the wire
Faulty door multiplex
control unit
wire
control unit
Poor ground (G401)
window motor
An open in the wire
wire
control unit
Poor ground (G401)
window motor
An open in the wire
wire
22-291
Power Windows
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test
1. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and remove the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (see page 22-299).
2. Disconnect the 37P connector (A) f r o m the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (B).
1
12
r
GRN
25
3 4 5 /
'/
/ / / 71
//
i/i/i/i/i/i/i/i/i/g^
I/, 4 / A/, /
WHT
26 27 28 2 9 / /
JL__Jl
26 27 28 29 /
3e
24
37
I
34 /
36
37
BLK
WireGside
female terminals B L K
PNK
R N of
BRN
22-292
4. With the connector still d i s c o n n e c t e d , do these input tests at the following connector.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the c a u s e , then recheck the s y s t e m .
If all the input tests prove O K , go to step 5.
Cavity
Wire
T e s t condition
12
24
BLU
RED
29
BRN
U n d e r all conditions, connect

terminals No. 25 and No. 24 (or
No. 12), and connect terminals
No. 37 and No. 12 (or No. 24)
with j u m p e r w i r e s .
U n d e r all conditions, disconnect
the power w i n d o w master
T e s t : Desired result
Check front p a s s e n g e r ' s power
w i n d o w motor operation:
T h e driver's power w i n d o w
terminal No. 29 and the power
w i n d o w master switch 37P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 27:
T h e r e should be continuity.
Possible c a u s e if desired result

is not obtained
Poor ground (G404)
Faulty front p a s s e n g e r ' s
power w i n d o w motor
5. Reconnect the connector to the front p a s s e n g e r ' s power w i n d o w s w i t c h , turn the ignition switch to O N (II), and do t h e s e
input tests at the following connector.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the c a u s e , then recheck the s y s t e m .
If all the input tests prove O K , replace the front p a s s e n g e r ' s power w i n d o w switch (see page 22-299).
N O T E : With the front p a s s e n g e r ' s power w i n d o w A U T O U P / A U T O D O W N function, reset the power w i n d o w control unit
(see page 22-277).
Cavity
Wire
T e s t condition
37
BLK
U n d e r all conditions
25
GRN
U n d e r all conditions
26
WHT
Ignition switch O N (II)
27
PNK
Ignition switch O N (II), and the

front p a s s e n g e r ' s power
w i n d o w moving up or d o w n .
28
GRN
36
BLK
T e s t : Desired result
M e a s u r e the voltage to ground:
T h e r e should be less than 0.2 V.
T h e r e s h o u l d be battery voltage.

T h e r e s h o u l d be battery voltage.
M e a s u r e the voltage between

A n analog meter should
alternate between 0 V and about
5 V (a digital voltmeter s h o u l d
read about 2.5 V while the
window moves).
Ignition switch O N (II), and the
M e a s u r e the voltage between
front p a s s e n g e r ' s power
A n analog meter should
w i n d o w moving up or d o w n .
alternate between 0 V and about
5 V (a digital voltmeter s h o u l d
read about 2.5 V while the
window moves).
Under all conditions, disconnect Check for continuity to ground:
the front p a s s e n g e r ' s power
T h e r e should be continuity.
w i n d o w motor 6P connector.
Possible c a u s e if desired result

is not obtained
Poor ground (G404)
B l o w n No. 4 (P/W) (40 A) fuse
in the under-hood fuse/relay
box
B l o w n No.30 (20 A) fuse in
box
box
Faulty under-hood fuse/relay
box
A n open in the w i r e s
Poor ground (G404)
p o w e r w i n d o w switch
Poor ground (G404)
Poor ground (G404)
22-293
Power Windows
Driver's Power Window Motor Test
Motor Test
1. Remove the power w i n d o w master switch (see page
22-298).
5. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) f r o m the driver's

power w i n d o w motor (B).
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery

power and ground t o the power w i n d o w master
switch 37P connector (A) according to the table.
Terminal
12
24
UP
DOWN
Direction

driver's power w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 4 respectively. There should be
continuity.
POWER WINDOW
MASTER SWITCH 37P
CONNECTOR
Terminal No. 12
Terminal No. 24
DRIVER'S POWER
WINDOW MOTOR 6P
CONNECTOR
Terminal No. 4
Terminal No. 1

3. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go

to step 4, if the motor runs smoothly, go to step 8.
f ] Z)
D O W N + (GRN)
UP+
(RED)
U P + (RED)
1
12
i DOWN 4- (GRN)
9 10 11
/ //
6
24
13 1 4 ~ 7 l 6 1 7 " 7 1 9 20 21 22 23
25
I
3 4
37
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
I
POWER WINDOW M A S T E R SWITCH 37P CONNECTOR

7. If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wires. If

the wire harness in OK, replace the driver's power
w i n d o w motor (see page 20-18).
22-294
Front Passenger's Power Window

Motor Test
Hall IC unit (Pulser) Test
Motor Test
8. Check for continuity between driver's power w i n d o w

1. Remove the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch

(see page 22-299).

If there is no continuity, check for an open in the
BLK wire or poor ground (G401).
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery

power and ground to the front passenger's power
w i n d o w switch 37P connector (A) according to the
table.

\
Terminal
12
24
UP
DOWN
0
0
Direction
9. Do the power w i n d o w master switch input test at

terminals No. 3, No. 20, and No. 22 (see page 22-289).
3. If the motor does not run or fails t o run smoothly, go

to step 4, i f t h e motor runs smoothly, go to step 8.
(cont'd)
22-295
Power Windows
Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test (cont'd)
5. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) f r o m the front
passenger's power w i n d o w motor (B).

power w i n d o w switch 37P connector terminals No. 12
and No. 24 and front passenger's power w i n d o w
motor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4
respectively. There should be continuity.
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH 3 7 P
CONNECTOR
Terminal No. 12
Terminal No. 24
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR 6 P CONNECTOR
Terminal No. 4
Terminal No. 1

6P CONNECTOR
Cu
D O W N + (RED)
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S POWER WINDOW SWITH

37P CONNECTOR
7. If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wires. If

the wire harness in OK, replace the front passenger's
power w i n d o w motor.
22-296
Hall IC unit (Pulser) Test

8. Do the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch input
test at terminals No. 26, No. 27, No. 28, and No. 36
(see page 22-292).
BODY
Rear Power Window Motor Test

1. Remove the rear door panel (see page 20-23), and
disconnect the rear door wire harness 13P connector
(A) f r o m the rear door subharness.
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the rear power

w i n d o w motor (B).
/ /
/
4
11 12 13
5. Check for continuity between rear power w i n d o w

motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 and the
door wire harness 13P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 7 respectively. There should be continuity.
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
UP+
(BLU)
DOWN+
(RED)
2. At the rear door wire harness 13P connector, test the

power w i n d o w motor in each direction by connecting
battery power and ground according to the table.
When the motor stops running, disconnect one lead
immediately.
UP+
(BLU)
DOWN+
(RED)
1
\
Terminal
1
UP
DOWN
Direction

to step 4.
/ /
/
4
11 12 13
REAR DOOR H A R N E S S 13P CONNECTOR

6. If there is no continuity, repair open in the wires. If the

wire harness is OK, replace the power w i n d o w motor.
22-297
Power Windows
Rear Power Window Switch
Test/Replacement
Power Window Master Switch

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door panel (see page 20-23).
1. Carefully remove the power w i n d o w switch panel (A).
2. Remove the screws and disconnect the connector (A)

f r o m the rear power w i n d o w switch (B), then remove
the switch assembly f r o m the door panel.
2. Disconnect the 37P connector (B) f r o m the power

w i n d o w master switch, and the 13P connector (C)
f r o m the power mirror switch.
3. Remove the three screws and the rear power w i n d o w
switch (A).
3. Remove the four screws and the power w i n d o w

master switch (A).
4. Swap the rear power w i n d o w switch with another

known-good rear power w i n d o w switch and test. If
the original power w i n d o w switch is faulty; replace it.
4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
5. Reset the power w i n d o w control unit (see page

22-277).
22-298
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Replacement

1. C a r e f u l l y r e m o v e t h e f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r
w i n d o w s w i t c h panel (A).
2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 3 7 P c o n n e c t o r (B) f r o m t h e f r o n t
passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w switch.
3. R e m o v e t h e f o u r s c r e w s a n d t h e f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s
p o w e r w i n d o w s w i t c h (A).
4. I n s t a l l t h e s w i t c h i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r o f r e m o v a l .
5. R e s e t t h e p o w e r w i n d o w c o n t r o l u n i t (see p a g e
22-277).
22-299
Wipers/Washers
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR R E L A Y 1 (FORWARD)

T e s t page 22-96
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR R E L A Y 2 (BACKWARD)
Test, page 22-96
WIPER B L A D E S
WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH
MICU
(Built into the underdash fuse/relay box)
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

Test, page 22-322
22-300
WIPER A R M S and LINKAGE

BODY
WINDSHIELD W A S H E R NOZZLES
Adjustment page 22-328
W A S H E R RESERVOIR
WASHER FLUID L E V E L SWITCH

T e s t page 22-323
REAR WINDOW W A S H E R MOTOR
T e s t page 22-323
INDSHIELD W A S H E R MOTOR
T e s t page 22-323

T e s t page 22-322
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

REAR WINDOW W A S H E R NOZZLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER ARM

22-301
Wipers/Washers
Rear Window Wiper System Description
Intermittent operation
Rear w i n d o w wiper switch ON: The wiper operates every 7 seconds after completing t w o sweeps.
Rear w i n d o w wiper switch OFF: The wiper returns to the park position.
Washer/Wiper combined system

Rear w i n d o w wiper switch ON: The wiper operates continuously while the washer switch is O N .
Rear w i n d o w wiper switch OFF: After switching OFF the washer switch, the wiper returns to the park position after
completing t w o sweeps.
Failsafe Function
Lock Function: The rear w i n d o w wiper will not operate if the hatch glass is open.
Emergency Stop Function: If the hatch glass is opened while the rear w i n d o w wiper is operating, it w i l l automatically
stop.
Automatic Park Function: If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) while the rear w i n d o w w i p e r is operating, the wiper
w i l l return to the park position.
Glass Hatch Access Function

If the hatch glass button is pressed and the wiper is O N , the rear wiper will automatically park. After the hatch glass is
closed, the rear wiper will start again.
22-302
22-303
Wipers/Washers
Circuit Diagram - Windshield
BATTERY

No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
(>
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
D1
G20
BLU
-WHTf-o o) PNK-

No. 10 (7.5 A)
CTXJQ...
No. 38 (30 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
IG1
FR WIPER
HI
FR WIPER
LO
F19
F18
FR WIP (AS)
F32
FR WIP INT VR+

S6
GRN BLU
RED
BLU
MICU
FRWIP
INT&LO
SW
FR WIP
HI&LO
-f- SW
S20
ORN RED/BLK
FRWIP FR WASH
MIST SW SW
S16
GRN YEL
COMBI
GND (WIPER)
S4
BLK/WHT
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
BLK
- L L
G303
22-304
BODY
MICU
SG
PG
PG
PG
FR
WASHER
MTR
SG
E6
BLK
BLK
F20
BLK
F33
ORN
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
V
BLU
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
(Closed: Float down)
WINDSHIELD
( M } WASHER
w ' MOTOR
G401
.0.
_Q_
-0_
G401
G501
G201
G201
22-305
Wipers/Washers
Circuit Diagram - Rear Window
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
G20
D1
-WHTK) O f PNK-

BATTERY No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

No. 10 (7.5 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (ill)
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 13 (10 A)
CT\JD
REAR WINDOW
WIPER MOTOR
RELAY 1
REAR WINDOW
WIPER MOTOR
RELAY 2
R12
- YEL/GRN RR WIP RWD
- YEL/BLK S3 RR WIP FWD
RR WIP RS (STP SW)
S2
RR
WIP
SW
S9
GRY
RED
4
RR WIP
MTR
M(NOR)
PUR YEL
(REV)^y
STOP
SWITCH
RISE/
RETURN
SWITCH
REAR WINDOW
WIPER MOTOR
BLK
22-306
RR WIP RS (POS SW)

^
t -S8
RR
WASH
-S
W WHT
GRN/RED
BRN
RR
WIP
MTR 6 I
BLK
-1L
-LL
G303
G601
MICU
6
RR
WIP
RR o
WASH
BLK/WHT
RR
WIP
OFFRR
RR
WASH WASH
~X- COMBI
^ GND
S4
OFF
5
RR
WASH
REAR WINDOW
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
BODY
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX
MICU
T
SG
G/H
DR S W
PG
T34
ORN
BLK
PG
F20
BLK
BLK
F34
RED
G/H
T/G
G/H
SW
PG
SW
T5
E12
HATCH
GLASS
RELAY
BLU
LTBLU
DRIVER'S
DOOR
HATCH
GLASS
OPENER
SWITCH
HATCH GLASS
LATCH SWITCH
(Closed:
Hatch glass
open)
REAR
WINDOW
WASHER
MOTOR
HATCH
GLASS
QW O P E N E R
1 SWITCH
ORN
HATCH GLASS
OPENER
ACTUATOR
2
BLK
BLK
BLK
G401
G401
G401
G501
G201
G601
G601
(Without p o w e r tailgate)
22-307
Wipers/Washers
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1037: Rear Wiper RISE/RET Switch No
Signal Change
10. Measure the voltage between rear w i n d o w wiper

REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR

1
ON (II).
RR WIP RIS/RET (BRN)
3. Turn the rear w i n d o w wiper/washer switch ON.

4. Check the rear w i n d o w wiper operation.
Does the rear window wiper motor
operate?
NO-Go to step 14.
5. Select BODY ELECTRICAL system select m e n u , then
enter the DATA LIST menu.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Rear Wiper
RISE/RET Switch with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated when the motor stopped, and ON
intermittently indicated when the motor runs?
NO-Go to step 7.
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the rear

w i n d o w wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and
G601. If the wire is OK, replace the rear w i n d o w wiper
motor (see page 2 2 - 3 2 5 ) .
(34P).
12. Check for continuity between rear w i n d o w wiper
motor 5P connectorterminal No. 2 and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector T (34P) terminal No. 27.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
8. Disconnect the rear w i n d o w wiper motor 5P

connector.
J RR WIP RIS/RET (GRY)
<5
~~3~ 4
I5

22-308

BODY

(20P).
motor relay 1 5P connectorterminal No. 3 and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (20P) terminal
No. 3.
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR RELAY 1 5P CONNECTOR

RRWIP
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to ground in the w i r e . B
box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
15. Check the No. 13 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary
Is the fuse OK?
RR WIP (YEL/BLK)
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)

NO-Go to step 23.

16. Remove the rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 1 f r o m
the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.
m o t o r relay 1 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4,
and terminals No. 5 and No. 4 individually.
box connector S (20P) terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
RR WIP (YEL/BLK)
+ B R R WIPER
+ B R R WIPER
GND
GND
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
Is there battery
voltage?
NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground
(G303).B
NO-Go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
22-309
Wipers/Washers
2 1 . Disconnect the rear w i n d o w wiper motor 5P
connector.
motor relay 1 5P connector terminal No. 1 and rear
w i n d o w wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 4.
RRWIPMTR (NORM)
Is the rear window wiper motor relay 1 OK?

NO-Faulty rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 1; replace
t.H
25. Remove the rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 2 f r o m
the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.
motor relay 2 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4,
and terminals No. 5 and No. 4 individually.
RR WIP MTR (NORM) (RED)
24. Do the rear w i n d o w wiper m o t o r relay 1 test (see page

22-96).
5
+ B R R WIPER

+ B RR WIPER
L

23. Disconnect the rear w i n d o w wiper motor 5P
connector, then check for continuity between rear
w i n d o w wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 4 and
body ground.
5
RR WIP MTR (NORM) (RED)
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
22-310
GND
J L
GND
Is there battery
voltage?
(G303).B
27. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector R

(20P).
motor relay 2 5P connector terminal No. 3 and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector R (20P) terminal
No. 12.
BODY

motor relay 2 5P connector terminal No. 1 and rear
w i n d o w wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 5.
RR WIP MTR

1
2
5
3
1
RR WIP
RR WIP MTR
(PUR)

12 13
//
9 10
16 17 18
20
RR WIP RWD (YEL/GRN)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR R (20P)


3 1 . Check for continuity between rear w i n d o w wiper
5
RR WIP MTR
(PUR)

box connector R (20P) terminal No. 12 and body
ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR R (20P)
4
12 13
9 10
16 17 18
RR WIP (YEL/GRN)
20
NO-Replace the No. 13 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary

under-hood fuse/relay box and recheck the s y s t e m . B
32. Do the rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 2 test (see page
22-96).
Is the rear window wiper motor relay 2 OK?
NO-Faulty rear w i n d o w wiper motor relay 2; replace
it.B
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to ground in the wire.I

NO-Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
22-311
Wipers/Washers
33. Do the rear w i n d o w wiper motor test (see page
22-322).
Is the rear window wiper motor OK?
DTC B1077: Windshield Wiper Motor (Park)

Signal Error

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .

NO-Faulty rear w i n d o w wiper motor; replace it (see

page 22-325).B
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and the windshield

wiper switch ON.
2. Check the windshield wiper operation.
Does the wiper work?
NO-Go to step 13.
ON (II).
5. Turn the windshield wiper switch O N , and then OFF.
Is DTC B1077
indicated?
7. Select BODY ELECTRICAL system select m e n u , then
enter the DATA LIST m e n u .
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the FR WIPER A S
w i t h the HDS.
Is OFF indicated when the motor is stopped, and ON
intermittently indicated when the motor runs?
Y E S - F a u l t y MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Go to step 9.
22-312

10. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
11. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F
(34P).
12. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
5P connector terminal No. 4 and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector F (34P) terminal No. 32.
\ f
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR

'A
ri
A 22 23
3
5|6
24
A*
25
WIP HI (GRN)
WIPLO
(BLU)
5/
AV
9 10 11
27 28 29
5 /
3
5|6|/|8
WIPER A S (RED)
1
WIP LO (BLU)
[WIPER A S (RED)
20
18. Check for continuity between windshield wiper m o t o r

under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (34P)
terminals No. 18 and No. 19 respectivery.

I
BODY
14|15 16|l7
31
30
II
18 19
132 33 34
WIP HI
(GRN)
mz.


box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .

19. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
NO-Repair an open in the wire.
GND
(BLK)

3

fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

NO-Replace the fuse and recheck the s y s t e m .
15. Do the wiper motor test (see page 22-322).
Does the wiper motor run normally?

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor and

recheck.B

(G30D.B
16. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.

17. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F
(34P).
22-313
Wipers/Washers
DTC B1281: Front Wiper MIST Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1282: Front Wiper INT (AUTO) Position
Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1283: Front Wiper LOW Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1284: Front Wiper HIGH Position Circuit
Malfunction

box connector S (20P) terminals and wiper/washer
switch 8P connector terminals as s h o w n :
4
10
20
16
Wiper/washer switch
8P connector
5
2
4
3

GND (BLK/WHT) c
1 0 i WIP
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0

ON (II).
3. Turn the wiper switch to MIST, INT, LOW, HIGH, and
OFF positions.
Is DTC B1281, B1282, B1283, or B1284
Indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the wiper system is OK at this

time. Check for loose or poor connections.B
YES-Go to step 10.
6. Check each wiper switch position value w i t h the

DATA LIST m e n u .
When the wiper switch is turned OFF
Wiper
Wiper
Wiper
Wiper
switch
switch
switch
switch
Data List
(LOW)
(HIGH)
(MIST)
(INT)
Value
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
correct?
YES-Go t o step 7.
NO-Go t o step 1 1 .
(20P).
22-314
WIP HI/LO S W
(RED/BLK)
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 5.
5. Select WIPER f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u , and

enter the DATA LIST.
WIP
MIST
SW
(GRN)
WIP
INT/LO
SW
(ORN)
GND (BLK/WHT)
INT/LO
SW
(ORN)
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e . l

box connector S (20P) terminals as s h o w n :
To terminal
20
20
From terminal
10
16
BODY

(20P).
terminals No. 10, No. 16, and No. 20 individually.
YES-Repair a short between the w i r e s . !

box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .

12. Disconnect the 8P connector f r o m the wiper switch.
9 10
WIP
INT&LO
S W (ORN)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
WIP MIST
S W (GRN)
13. Check each wiper switch position value with the

DATA LIST m e n u .
WIP HI & LO
SW
(RED/BLK)
When the wiper switch is turned OFF
Wiper
Wiper
Wiper
Wiper
switch
switch
switch
switch
Data List
(LOW)
(HIGH)
(MIST)
(INT)
Value
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
correct?
YES-Replace the wiper/washer switch (see page

22-321 ) .
NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO-Go to step 17.
box connector S (20P) terminal No. 4 and terminals
No. 10, No. 16, and No. 20 r e s p e c t i v e l y .
WIP
INT&LO
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
WIP MIST
S W (GRN)
WIP HI & LO
SW
(RED/BLK)
YES-Repair a short between the wires.H
22-315
Wipers/Washers
MICU Input Test
A (see page 22-137), and check the No. 38 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
1. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-121).
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, R, S, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are s h o w n f r o m the w i r e side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR E (42P)
/
23
^ti
/
/ / /
2
5
27
/ 8
28 / /
t3
A/
12J13
14
1 5 16 17
34
35 36 37 38
'
c3
'
19
2 0 21
4 0 41
22
CONNECTOR F (34P)
5
20
22 23
I6
24
7$
25
TV
1 0 11
27 28
29
RED
ORN
RED
BLK
CONNECTOR R (20P)
12 13
-IV9 10
// /
16
18
20
YEL/GRN
CONNECTOR S (20P)
Y E L Y E L / B L K B L K / W H T GRN/RD-
^>^\ F^=^y^\ O R N
1
_5__6_/
10
11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0
GRN
YEL
RED/BLK
CONNECTOR T(34P)
VV\MMA
22
10
12
25 26 2 7
29
GRY
15 16
l / l / l / N
BLK
If the terminals look OK, g o t o step 4.
22-316
4. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
F18
BLU
Under all
conditions
F19
GRN
Under all
conditions
F32
RED
F33
ORN
Run the
windshield w i p e r
motor by
connecting battery
power to the F18
terminal.
Under all
conditions
F34
RED
Under all
conditions
S6
BLU
Intermittent dwell
t i m e r turned
S4
BLK/
WHT

Connect battery power to
terminal F18:
The windshield wiper motor
should run at l o w speed.
terminal F19:
The windshield wiper motor
should run at high speed.
Check for continuity to
ground:
The needle of the o h m m e t e r
should pulse 1 t i m e per
wiper motor cycle.
NOTE: Use a DVOM.
terminal F33:
The windshield washer
motor should work.
terminal F34:
The rear w i n d o w washer
motor should work.
Measure the resistance
between the terminals S6
and S4:
There resistance should
vary between 0 to 1 kQ.

obtained
Faulty windshield wiper motor
Poor g r o o u n d (G303)
Faulty windshield washer motor
Poor ground (G201)
Faulty rear w i n d o w washer motor
Faulty wiper/washer switch
(cont'd)
22-317
Wipers/Washers
5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests
at the following connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
E6
T34
BLK
Under all
conditions
F20
BLK
Under all
conditions
S10
ORN
Wiper switch (INT

or LO) ON
S4
BLK/
WHT
Wiper switch OFF
S20
RED/
BLK
Wiper switch (LO

or HI) ON
S4
BLK/
WHT
Wiper switch OFF
S16
GRN
S4
BLK/
WHT
Wiper switch
(MIST) ON
Wiper switch OFF
S17
YEL
S4
BLK/
WHT
Washer switch ON
Wiper switch OFF
22-318

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
between terminals S10 and
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:
There should be at least 5 V .
Measure the voltage
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:
Measure the voltage
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:
Measure the voltage
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:

obtained


Faulty MICU

Faulty MICU

Faulty MICU

Faulty MICU
Cavity
Wire
S3
YEL/
BLK
Test condition
Under all
conditions

ground:
voltage.
ground:
The rear w i n d o w wiper
motor should w o r k
(forward).
R12
YEL/
GRN
Under all
conditions

ground:
voltage.
ground:
The rear w i n d o w wiper
motor should w o r k
(backward).
S2
T27
S8
YEL
GRY
GRN/
RED
Rear wiper in park

position
Rear wiper in any

other position than
park position
Rear w i p e r in
rise/return position
or park position
Rear wiper in any
other position than
rise/return position
or park position
Rear w i n d o w
washer switch ON
S4
BLK/
WHT
Rear w i n d o w
washer switch OFF

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
Measure the voltage
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:

obtained
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
box
Faulty rear w i n d o w wiper m o t o r
relay 1 (forward)
relay 1 (forward)
relay 2 (backward)
box
relay 2 (backward)
Poor ground (G303)
relay 1 (forward)
relay 2 (backward)
Poor ground (G601)
Faulty rear w i n d o w wiper motor

Faulty MICU
Poor ground (G601)

Faulty MICU

Faulty MICU
(cont'd)
22-319
Wipers/Washers
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
S9
WHT
Rear w i n d o w
w i p e r switch ON
S4
BLK/
WHT
Rear w i n d o w
w i p e r switch OFF
22-320

Measure the voltage
S4:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
S4:

obtained

Faulty MICU
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement

20-130).
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector
(A) f r o m the wiper/washer switch (B).

Windshield
Terminal
Position
OFF
INT
LO
o-o
HI
Mist ON
Washer ON
Intermittent dwell
timer turned
o
o
oô
Rear Window
Terminal
Position
3. Remove the t w o screws, then slide out the
wiper/washer switch.
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all
making g o o d contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
Washer switch ON,

Wiper switch OFF
OFF
-o
ON
Wiper and Washer
switch QN
6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

22-321
Wipers/Washers
Wiper Motor Test
Windshield
Rear Window
1. Open the h o o d , and remove the wiper arms (see page

22-324).
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower t r i m

panel (see page 20-100).
NOTE: Carefully remove the w i p e r arms so that they

do not touch the h o o d .
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) f r o m the rear w i n d o w

wiper motor (B).
2. Remove the cowl covers (see page 20-211).

3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) f r o m the windshield
wiper motor (B).
4. Test the m o t o r by connecting battery power to the

windshield wiper m o t o r 5P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 3
and g r o u n d to terminal No. 2. The motor should run at
low speed. I f t h e m o t o r does not run or fails to run
s m o o t h l y , replace the m o t o r (see page 22-324).
5. Test the m o t o r by connecting battery power to the
windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 5
and g r o u n d to terminal No. 2. The motor should run at
high speed. If the m o t o r does not run or fails to run
s m o o t h l y , replace the m o t o r (see page 22-324).
6. Connect an analog o h m m e t e r between the
windshield wiper m o t o r 5P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 4, and run the m o t o r at low or high speed.
The o h m m e t e r should indicate continuity and no
continuity alternately. If it does not, replace the motor
(see page 22-324).
22-322
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 4 and g r o u n d t o terminal No. 5 of the
wiper motor. The m o t o r should run. Ifthe m o t o r does
not run or fails to run s m o o t h l y , replace the motor
(see page 22-325).
4. Connect an o h m m e t e r between terminals No. 1 and
No. 3 and between terminals No. 2 and No. 3. There
should be continuity w h e n the w i p e r is in the park
position.
No. 3. There should be no continuity w h e n the wiper
is in the rise/return position.
No. 3. There should be continuity w h e n the w i p e r is in
the rise/return position.
Washer Motor Test
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Open the hood.
1. Remove the front b u m p e r (see page 20-195).
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) f r o m the washer

motors (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the washer fluid

level switch.
WINDSHIELD
REAR WINDOW
J,
A .
3. Remove the washer fluid level switch f r o m the

washer reservoir.
B
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 2 and ground terminal No. 1 of the
washer motor. The motor should run.
If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
If the motor runs s m o o t h l y , but little or no washer
fluid is p u m p e d , check for a disconnected or
blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor
outlet.
NOTE: Fluid may f l o w out of the opening.

2 in each float position.
There should be continuity w h e n the float is d o w n .
There should be no continuity w h e n the float is up.
22-323
Wipers/Washers
W i n d s h i e l d W i p e r M o t o r
Removal
5. S e p a r a t e t h e linkage (A) f r o m t h e link ( B ) .
1. O p e n the h o o d . R e m o v e t h e n u t s (A) a n d t h e
windshield wiper a r m s (B).
2. R e m o v e t h e c o w l c o v e r s ( s e e p a g e 20-211).
3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 5P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e w i p e r
motor.
6. Note t h e p o s i t i o n ( C ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e nut (D) a n d t h e

link f r o m the w i p e r m o t o r ( E ) .
7. R e m o v e t h e t h r e e bolts, a n d s e p a r a t e t h e w i p e r m o t o r
f r o m t h e linkage ( F ) .
Installation
1. B e f o r e installing t h e m o t o r , c o n n e c t t h e 5P c o n n e c t o r
to t h e w i p e r m o t o r , a n d t u r n t h e w i p e r / w a s h e r s w i t c h
O N to ( L O ) or (HI) p o s i t i o n , t h e n O F F to return t h e
m o t o r shaft to t h e park p o s i t i o n .
NOTE:
D o not u s e t h e w i p e r / w a s h e r s w i t c h (iNT) p o s i t i o n
in th i s s t e p .
If n e c e s s a r y , r e p l a c e a n y d a m a g e d c l i p s .
A p p l y m u l t i p u r p o s e g r e a s e to t h e m o v i n g p a r t s .
2. Install t h e w i p e r m o t o r to t h e w i p e r l i n k a g e a s s e m b l y
i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
4. R e m o v e t h e t h r e e bolts (B) a n d t h e w i p e r linkage
a s s e m b l y (C).
22-324
Rear Window Wiper Motor

Replacement
3. Install the link to the wiper motor shaft, then align the
mark (A) of the link and the mark (B) of the wiper
linkage assembly.
1. Remove the m o u n t i n g nut (A) and the wiper a r m (B).
2. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower t r i m

panel (see page 20-100).
4. After installation, adjust the wiper arms (see page
22-328).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) and remove the three

mounting bolts (B), then remove the rear w i n d o w
wiper motor (C).
22-325
Wipers/Washers
Washer Reservoir Replacement
1. Open the hood, and remove the front bumper (see
page 20-195).
Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield
1. Lift the wiper arms f r o m the windshield.
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) f r o m the washer

motors (B) and the washer fluid level switch.
Washer Reservoir Capacity
4.0 L (4.2 U S qt): U S A models
6.5 L (6.9 U S qt): Canada models
2. Press and hold the tab (A) and slide the wiper blade
(B) t o w a r d the tab to release it f r o m the wiper a r m (C).
3. Slide the rubber (A) out f r o m the wiper blade (B).
3. Disconnect the washer tubes.

4. Remove the t w o bolts and clip (A), then remove the
washer reservoir.
4. Install a new rubber to the wiper blade in the reverse

order of removal.
5. Install the wiper blades onto the wiper arms in the
reverse order of removal.
6. Check the wiper operation, if the blades slip, turn the
wiper switch OFF, and reinstall the wiper blades
securely.
5. Install the washer reservoir in the reverse order of

removal. Check the washer motor operation.
22-326
Rear Window
1. Lift t h e w i p e r a r m f r o m t h e rear w i n d o w .
2. T u r n t h e r e a r w i p e r b l a d e ( A ) , r e l e a s e t h e l o c k , a n d
t h e n r e m o v e t h e w i p e r blade f r o m t h e rear w i p e r a r m
(B).
3. R a i s e t h e o l d r u b b e r ( A ) , a n d r e m o v e it f r o m t h e w i p e r
b l a d e (B).
A
4. I n s t a l l t h e n e w r u b b e r a n d t h e w i p e r b l a d e i n t h e
reverse order o f removal.
NOTE: After installation, c o n f i r m that t h e w i p e r a r m
works smoothly.
Wipers/Washers
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment
Windshield
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), then turn the wiper switch O N , and then back OFF.
2. When the w i p e r arms stop at the park position, confirm that they are at the standard position.
a:
b:
Position at about 2.6 in. (67 m m ) f r o m the top of cowl cover (A)
Position at about 2.4 in. (62 m m ) f r o m the top of cowl cover (A)
3. W h e n y o u turn on the washers, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands w i t h i n the spray area. If the spray area
is not w i t h i n the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
c:
d:
e:
Position at about 4.2 in. (107.3 m m ) f r o m the t o p of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield
Position at about 4.2 in. (107.3 m m ) f r o m the t o p of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield
Position at about 9.7 in. (247 m m ) f r o m the windshield center line (C)
22-328
Rear Window
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the wiper switch ON, and then back OFF.
2. When the wiper arm stops at the park position, confirm that it is at the standard position,
a:
Wiper arm (A) fits into the lifter hook (B).
3. When you turn on the washer, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray area
is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
b:
c:
Position at about 0.8 in. (20 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (D) at the upper rear window,
Position at about 1.1 in. (29 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (D) at the upper rear window.
22-329
Wipers/Washers
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the washer tubes.
22-330
With moonroof
Without moonroof
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the washer operation.
22-331
Gauges
22-332
S E L E C T / R E S E T KNOB
INFORMATION DISPLAY or
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (MID)
FUEL GAUGE
22-333
Gauges
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function which consists of the following checks:
The beeper drive circuit check.

The indicator drive circuit check.
The switch input test.
The LCD segments check.
The gauge drive circuit check (Tachometer, Fuel gauge, Speedometer, Engine coolant temperature gauge).
The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line and the
fast-controller area network (F-CAN) communication line between the gauges).
NOTE: Indicators are also controlled via the communication line.
Entering the self-diagnostic function with the HDS

Using the HDS, select Body Electrical, Gauges, then Function Test and do the self-diagnostic function.
Entering the self-diagnostic function (manual method)

Before doing the self-diagnostic function, make sure the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box are OK.
1. Push and hold the SEL/RESET switch button.
2. Turn the combination light switch (zOOz) ON.
4. Within 5 s e c , turn the combination light switch (lOOz) OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. W i t h i n 5 s e c , release the SEL/RESET switch button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedly.
NOTE:
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller operates normally.
While in the self-diagnostic m o d e , the SEL/RESET button is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the Gauge
Drive Circuit Check.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 m p h (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the self-diagnostic mode
ends.
Ignition
Switch
Lighting
Switch
SEL/RESET
Switch
ON (II)
LOCK (0)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
mm
!
5 sec.
22-334
5 sec.
Move to self-diagnostic mode.
Indicator Drive Circuit Check

W h e n entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicators blink:
A/T fluid temperature indicator, A/T gear position indicator, ABS indicator, brake system indicator, charging system
indicator, cruise control indicator, cruise main indicator, door indicator, DRL indicator, ECO indicator, fog light indicator,
high beam indicator, immobilizer indicator, light control indicator* , lights-on indicator, low fuel indicator, low oil
pressure indicator, l o w tire pressure indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), message indicator* , maintenance
required indicator, seat belt reminder indicator, security indicator, side airbag CUTOFF indicator, SRS indicator, starter
system indicator* , TPMS indicator, VSA activation indicator, VSA indicator, VTM-4 indicator, and washer fluid level
indicator* .
* 1 : With multi-information display
* 2 : Without multi-information display
2
Switch Input Check

A t the initial stage of the self-diagnostic function, the beeper sounds intermittently. The beeper sounds continuously
w h e n any of the f o l l o w i n g switch inputs are switched f r o m OFF to ON:
Cruise control M A I N , SET, RESUME, CANCEL switches, multi-information switch (includes SEL/RESET switch, NEXT
switch and PREVIOUS switch), select/reset knob, parking brake switch, and VSA OFF switch.
Beeper Drive Circuit Check

W h e n entering the self-diagnostic m o d e , the front sensor buzzer, the rear sensor buzzer, and the gauge control module
beeper sound for five seconds total.
LCD Segment Check

With information display: W h e n entering the self-diagnostic mode, all the segments blink five times.
W i t h multi-information display: W h e n entering the self-diagnostic m o d e , the w o r d "CHECKING N O W " shows on the
LCD, and blinks five times.
Gauge Drive Circuit Check

W h e n entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the engine coolant
temperature gauge needles sweep f r o m the m i n i m u m position to m a x i m u m position, then return to the m i n i m u m
position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the m i n i m u m position, pushing the SEL/RESET button
starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the m i n i m u m position.
*n
5 sec.
The needles sweep from the

minimum position to the
maximum position, then return
to the minimum position.
If the needles fail to sweep, or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
(cont'd)
22-335
Gauges
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Communication Line Check
With information display
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segments Check.
If all segments come o n , the communication line is OK. If faulty, the w o r d " E r r o r " will be indicated on the odometer
display followed by a number(s).
Error Code List
Error code
Error 1
Error 2
Error 12
Type of communication line(s) error

F-CAN communication
B-CAN communication
F-CAN and B-CAN communication
Example Indication
Normal (all segments come on.):
Faulty (Error 1):
OOOOO&
ooooo
u u u O u
If Error 1 is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the F-CAN and the gauge control
module.
If Error 2 is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the B-CAN and the gauge control
module.
If Error 12 is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module, the
F-CAN, and the B-CAN.
22-336
The Communication Line Check

With multi-information display
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segment Check.
CHECKING
NOW
If the communication line is OK, the w o r d " O K " will be indicated on the multi-information display (MID). If there is a
communication line error, the w o r d "ERROR" will be indicated on the MID.
Indication pattern
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the F-CAN and gauge control module. The B-CAN is OK at this
time. Check for DTCs in the PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found.
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN
ERROR
B-CAN
OK
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the B-CAN and gauge control module. The F-CAN line is OK at
this time.
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN
OK
B-CAN
ERROR
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and F-CAN and B-CAN. Check for
DTCs in the PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs f o u n d .
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN
ERROR
B-CAN
ERROR
Ending the self-diagnostic function

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 m p h (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function ends.
22-337
Gauges
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
BATTERY No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
IGNITION
G20
D1
D2 No. 10(7.5 A)
/ B A T \
WHTf-3
IG1
and
No. 23 (10 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
SWITCH
OjPNK-
H O T in O N ( I I )
S T A R T (III)
MICU
G2
|P5
P10
(with parking and back-up

sensor system)
GAUGE CONTROL
TACHOMETER
MODULE
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL
GAUGE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
P O W E R SUPPLY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
ON/OFF 5V
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
CAN
CAN I
CONTROLLER
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN
B-CAN
LO
HI ,
I
2.6 kQ
19
I 29
I
RED
WHT
WHT
I
I
I
I
I
PCM
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
YAW RATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
SRS UNIT
TPMS CONTROL
UNIT
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR(DLC)
' 20
LTGRN
MICU
AUDIO UNIT
IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the power window master switch)
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT
CLIMATE or HVAC
CONTROL UNIT
PARKING and BACK-UP
SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
POWER SEAT CONTROL
UNIT (with DPMS)
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
BLU
\ LIGHTS
' (LEDx4)
YEL
<7
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
22-338
LT GRN
680 Q
i/W
1
*|SEL/
^j RESET
330 O
r
*
j
,, PREVIOUS
U)
BODY
*: With multi-information display

CAN line
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR LCD (AMBER)
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
(LED)
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
or MULTIINFORMATION
DISPLAY
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR CABARET (WHITE)
10V
STABILIZING
I (LED) CIRCUIT
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR DIAL (WHITE)
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR POINTER (RED)
I (LED)
) (LED)
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL &
DIMMING CIRCUIT
FOR LCD (WHITE)
) (LED)
) (LED)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/

CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
ON/OFF
0 I SELECT/
^| ILLUMI ^ | ILLUMI
RESET
n
H
n
(+)
Q\ KNOB
WASHER
ILLUMI
OUT (LED)
PG
YEL
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
(Closed: Float down)
(Open; Float up)
BLK
AMBIENT LIGHT (ROOF)

AUDIO UNIT LIGHT
CLIMATE or HVAC
CONTROL UNIT LIGHT
(without navigation system)
AMBIENT LIGHT (POCKET)
AMBIENT LIGHT (CONSOLE)
REAR CLIMATE or HVAC
COTROL PANEL
CRUISE COMBINATION
SWITCH LIGHT
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH LIGHT
(with 6CD type audio unit or
navigation system)
MULTI-INFORMATION
SWITCH LIGHT
(Touring model)
NAVI CONTROL PANEL LIGHT
REAR CONTROLLER and
SCREEN LIGHTS
HFL/VOICE CONTROL
SWITCH LIGHT
(with navigation system)
RED
HAZARD SWITCH LIGHT

A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER
SWITCH LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH LIGHT
VSA OFF SWITCH LIGHT
(without headlight washer)
PARKING and
BACK-UP SENSOR
SWITCH LIGHT
(Touring model)
LEFT SECOND
ROW SEAT HEATER
SWITCH LIGHT
RIGHT SECOND
ROW SEAT HEATER
SWITCH LIGHT
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH/
MOONROOF SWITCH LIGHT
(with moonroof)
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH LIGHT
AUXILIARY JUCK
ASSEMBRY LIGHT
(with rear entertaimment
system)
BLK
G201
ILLUMI
OUT (BULB)
J2_
_Q_
G401
G401
(cont'd)
22-339
Gauges
VSA OFF SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION
SWITCH
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT

CRUISE RES SW
V
BLK/YEL
, . BRAKE FLUID
( 11 LEVEL SWITCH
BLK/YEL
V i (Closed:
Float down)
(Open:
Float up)
PARKING
BLK
BRAKE
SWITCH
(Closed:
Pedal depressed)
1
QD
-LL
G401
22-340
G303
BODY
*1: With multi-information display

*2: Without multi-information display
'LIGHT
CONTROL
INDICATOR
(LED)
' WASHER
FLUID LEVEL
INDICATOR
(LED)
'STARTER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(LED)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
DOOR
INDICATOR
(LED)
MAINTENANCE
MINDER
INDICATOR
(LED)
INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
(LED)
VSA
ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
(LED)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(LED)
A/T FLUID
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
TPMS
DRL
INDICATOR j
INDICATOR '
(LED)
(LED)
L_ .
(cont'd)
22-341
Gauges
Y Y
MICU
BLU
PNK
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
CRUISE
CONTROL
INDICATOR
(LED)
CRUISE
MAIN
INDICATOR
(LED)
LIGHTS-ON
INDICATOR
(LED)
ECO
INDICATOR
(LED)
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR
(LED)

TURN
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
RELAY
(SOUNDER)
77T
22-342
LEFT
RIGHT
TURN
TURN
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(LED)
(LED)
TfT
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1152: Gauge Control Module Internal
Error (EEPROM)
DTC B1175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge

Sending Unit) Circuit malfunction



ON (II).

ON (II).

Is DTC B1152
indicated?

22-359).
time.B
Is DTCs B1175
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections-^
4. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-359).
YES-Go to step 5
NO-Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-353).H
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector and the
gauge control module 32P connector, and check for
loose or damaged terminals.
7. Reconnect the connectors, and then turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
(cont'd)
22-343
Gauges
8. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
32P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 and fuel
tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3
individually.
n
5 6
9 10 11 12 13 1 4 / J 6
2 /
17ll8ll9l20l2ll22l23l24l25lXl27l28l29l30lXl32
F U E L UNIT ( L T B L U )
GND ( L T G R N )

1. Clear the DTCs w i t h t h e HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
F U E L UNIT ( L T B L U )
DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge

Sending Unit) Circuit Short
Is DTCs B1176
GND ( L T G R N )


22-359).
NO-Repair the loose connection or open in the LT
BLU or LT GRN wire between the gauge control
module and fuel tank u n i t . H
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is
OK at this time. Check for worn/missing insulation or
an internal short in the w i r e . B
Is DTCs B1176
indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.

11-356).B
22-344

1 1 2 1X1X1 5 j 6 [ / I 8 1 9 |10|11112113114L/|16
17ll8ll9l2Ql2ll22l23|24l25l/l27l28l29l30|/l32
BODY
DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Line Error

NOTE:
Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and
other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to DLC Circuit
Troubleshooting (see page 11-226).
f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
F U E L UNIT (LT BLU)

ON (II).
Y E S - R e p a i r a short in the w i r e between the gauge
control module and the fuel tank u n i t . B
22-359).B
Is DTCs U0029
indicated?
Check for loose or poor connections, or worn/shorted
wires. If the connections are g o o d , check for the
battery condition (see page 22-93) and the charging
system.B
5. Check for DTCs in the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Are any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the indicated PCM DTCs

troubleshooting.B
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the gauge control module input test.
Are all inputs OK?
NO-Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.B
7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module.
ON (II).
10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds, then
turn the engine off.
Is DTC U0029
indicated?
NO-The original gauge control module is faulty;
replace i t . f l
(cont'd)
22-345
Gauges
(see page 11-250).
Is DTC U0029
indicated?

the gauge control module and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then
DTC U0100: Gauge Control Module Lost

Communication With PCM
ON (II).
Is DTCs U0100
indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
line is OK at this time. Check for DTCs in the PCM w i t h
the HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are present, check for loose or
poor connections at the gauge control module and
the PCM. If the connections are g o o d , check the
battery condition and the charging system, then clear
all DTCs.B
5. Check for DTCs in the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Are any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the PCM indicated D T C s

troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).
Are all inputs OK?
NO-Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.H
7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module.
ON (II).
Is DTC U0100
indicated?
YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-250).B

replace it (see page 22-359).H
22-346

Communication With VSA Modulator-Control
Unit
Test M o d e A (see page 22-137).

Is DTC U0122
indicated?
YES-Recheck PCM for DTCs, then recheck the VSA

modulator-control unit for DTCs.H
replace it (see page 22-359).H

ON (II).
Is DTC U0122
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
line is OK at this t i m e . Check for DTCs in the PCM and
the VSA modulator-control unit w i t h the HDS. If
F-CAN DTCs are present, check for a loose VSA
g r o u n d or poor connections at the VSA
modulator-control unit or gauge control module. If
the connections are g o o d , check the battery condition
and the charging system, then clear all DTCs.H
5. Check for DTCs in the PCM or VSA w i t h the HDS.
Are any DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to the PCM or VSA indicated DTCs

troubleshooting.B
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).
Are all inputs OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.H
7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module (see
page 22-359).
ON (II).
22-347
Gauges
Communication With the TPMS Control Unit
(TPMS message)
10. Check f o r continuity between gauge control module

32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminals No. 11 a n d No. 1
respectively.

1|2|/|/|5|6
C A N L (RED)
2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) and then back t o

ON (II).
3. Wait f o r at least 6 seconds.
Is DTC U0127
CANH
(WHT)
I 5 | 6 | 7 8|/|10|
|11|/I/1/|15|16|17|/I/I20
YES-Go t o step 6.
I C A N L (RED)

5. From the system select m e n u , select TPMS.
Does the HDS communicate
with the TPMS control unit?
YES-Go t o step 6.
NO-Go t o TPMS indicator does not go off, and no
DTCs are stored, (see page 18-100)
6. Check for TPMS DTCs w i t h the HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then

recheck.
NO-Go t o step 7.
7. T u r n t h e ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
8. Disconnect the gauge control m o d u l e 32P connector.
9. Disconnect TPMS control unit 20P connector.
22-348
CANH
(WHT)
indicated?
Are any TPMS DTCs
A 8 1 9 |10 11|12|13|14|/116|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/127|28|29|30|/|32

YES-Substitute a k n o w n - g o o d TPMS control unit, a n d
recheck. I f t h e indication goes away, replace the
original TPMS control unit. I f t h e DTC is still present,
replace the gauge control m o d u l e (see page
22-359).B
DTC U0151: Gauge
Control Module Lost

Communication With SRS Unit
BODY
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS

unit connector A (39P) terminals No. 26 and No. 27
individually.
S R S UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)

ON (II).
Is DTC U0151
indicated?
Is there battery

Check for loose or poor connection between the
gauge control module and the SRS u n i t . B
5. From the system select m e n u , select SRS.
Does the HDS communicate
with the SRS unit?
6. Check for a b l o w n No. 9 (7.5 A) or No. 11 (10 A) fuse in
voltage?
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page

24-188).
NO-Open in the harness; replace the faulty SRS
harness.
13. Disconnect negative terminal (see page 22-94), and
wait at least 3 minutes.
Are the fuses OK?

NO-Replace the fuses and reset. If the fuses b l o w
again, check for a short to g r o u n d in the wires
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the SRS
unit, and replace the faulty harness.
page 22-94), and wait at least 3 minutes.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
(cont'd)
22-349
Gauges
32P connector terminals No. 2 9 and No. 30 and SRS
individually.
2 /
[T
9 10 11 12 13 14 / 1 6
17ll8[l9l20|211221231241251^127 [ 2 8 1 2 9 1 3 0 3 2
C A N L (RED)
CANH
(WHT)
DTC U0164: Lost Communication With A/C

2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II).
Is DTC U0164
CANH
(WHT)
CANL
(RED)
4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11
16 17
27 28 29
31
indicated?
37 38 39


gauge control m o d u l e and climate control unit or
HVAC control u n i t . B
5. From the BODY ELECTRICAL system select m e n u ,
select UNIT INFORMATION, and then select
CONNECTED UNITS to see if the climate control unit
or HVAC control unit is c o m m u n i c a t i n g w i t h the HDS.
YES-Substitute a known-good SRS unit, and recheck.

If the indication goes away, replace the original SRS
unit (see page 24-188). If the DTC is still present,
replace the gauge control m o d u l e (see page
Is the climate control unit or HVAC control unit
22-359).
NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the w i r e

between the SRS unit and the gauge control
module.
detected?
YES-Replace the gauge control m o d u l e (see page

22-359).B

7. Disconnect the gauge control module 3 2 P connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (36P) or
22-350

climate control unit connector A (36P) terminals No.36
and No. 35 or HVAC control unit connector A (24P)
terminals No. 24 and No. 23 respectively.
i | 2 | / | / | 5 | e / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 11|12|13|14|/116|
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/127|28|29|30|/132
BODY
DTC U0180: Lost Communication With Auto

Light Module (AUTOLT frame)
ON (II).
B-CAN HI
(WHT)
Is DTCs U0180
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 f 8 | 9 | l 0 | l 1 12|13|14L/|16|/|18|
|l9|yVl22|23|24|25|26|27|28|29|/l/|32|33L/l35|36
B-CAN HI (WHT)

gauge control module and the automatic lighting
control u n i t . B
5. Check for LIGHTING DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is any DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then

recheck.
NO-Go to step 6.
1 I 2 IXL/I 5 | 6 / 1 8 | 9 | 1 0 11|12|13|14|/|16|
Il7|l8|l9|20|2l|22|23|24|25|yl27|28|29|30|yl32
B-CAN HI
(WHT)

connector 14P.
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
l
f
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 / ) 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|11|12|
|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24
B-CAN HI (WHT)
YES-Replace the climate control unit (see page
21-196) or HVAC control u n i t . B
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the wire
between the SRS unit and the gauge control
module.B
(cont'd)
22-351
Gauges
automatic lighting control unit connector 14P
1 I2
5 1 6 1/1 8 | 9 llo|l1112I13I14I/II6
17|l8ll9l20|2ll22l23l24l25l/l27l28l29l30M32
B-CAN LO I
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)
B-CAN LO I
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)
1
7
/
/
3
9
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 14P

Y E S - D o the power and g r o u n d input test for the
automatic lighting control unit (see page 22-240). If
the test results are OK, substitute a known-good
automatic lighting control unit, and recheck. If the
indication goes away, replace the original automatic
lighting control unit. If the DTC is still present, replace
the gauge control module (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
DTC U0230: Lost Communication With Power

Tailgate Control Unit
ON (II).
Is DTC U0230
indicated?
gauge control module and the power tailgate control
unit.l
5. Check for POWER TAILGATE DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then

recheck.B
NO-Go to step 6.
22-352
8. Disconnect the power tailgate control unit connector

C(14P).

32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20 and power
tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 6
and No. 7 respectively.
BODY
U1281: Lost Communication With MICU

(MICU frame)
n
2
5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
16
17ll8ll9l20|2ll22l23l24l25lXl27l28l29l30l/l32
B-CAN LO
IB-CAN HI (WHT)
(LTGRN)
//

ON (II).
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
te DTC U1281
indicated?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
13 14
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)


22-359).
gauge control module and the under-dash fuse/relay
box.B
Y E S - D o the power and g r o u n d input test for the
power tailgate control unit (see page 22-576). If the
test results are OK, substitute a known-good power
tailgate control unit, and recheck. If the indication
goes away, replace the original power tailgate control
unit. If the DTC is still present, replace the gauge
control m o d u l e (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
22-353
Gauges
U1288: Lost Communication With PARKSR
2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II).
Is DTC U1288
indicated?

22-359).
gauge control module and the parking and back-up
sensor control u n i t . B
22-354
Gauge Control Module Input Test

NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function, and make sure the B-CAN communication
lines are OK.
2. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-359), and disconnect the 3 2 P connector (A) f r o m it.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals are OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
22-355
Gauges
Gauge Control Module Input Test (cont'd)
4. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
Cavity
Wire
PNK
10
BLU
RED
YEL
22-356
Test condition
Ignition switch ON
(II), turn signal
switch in RIGHT
Ignition switch ON
(II), turn signal
switch in LEFT
Combination light
switch (SMALL
position) ON
Combination light
switch (SMALL
position) ON

Connect a j u m p e r wire to g r o u n d :
The illuminations of the hazard
switch light and seat heater
switches light should come on
full bright.
The illuminations of the ambient
lights, the audio unit light, and
the climate or HVAC control unit
lights should come on full bright.

is not obtained
Faulty MICU
Faulty MICU
Faulty bulbs
Faulty LEDs
5. Reconnect the 32P connector to the gauge control module, and do these input tests at the following connector.
If the input test proves OK, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace it (see page 22-359).
Cavity
Wire
13
BLK
17
BLK
18
BLK
16
WHT
32
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions

YEL
Ignition switch ON
(ID

BLU
Washer fluid is half

or more in the
washer reservoir
Washer fluid is
e m p t y in the washer
reservoir
Parking brake pedal
pressed
Parking brake pedal
released


Brake fluid is lower

level in the reservoir

Brake fluid is full

level in the reservoir

Ignition switch ON
(ID

The VTM-4 indicator should
come on.
21
BLK
/YEL
22
ORN
14
Test condition
PNK


is not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
Poor ground (G401)
Poor ground (G401)
box
box
Faulty washer fluid level switch
Faulty washer fluid level switch
Poor ground (G201)
Faulty parking brake switch
ground
Poor ground (G303)
Faulty brake fluid level switch
Faulty brake fluid level switch
22-357
Gauges
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring the Maintenance Minder Data to a
New Gauge Control Module
NOTE:
Obtain a new gauge control module before starting
the rewriting process. Only new gauge can be
rewritten.
Rewriting is not possible o n a gauge control module
that will not communicate w i t h the HDS.
3. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), reconnect the

original gauge control module.
4. Completely re-boot the HDS.
5. Clear any stored DTCs.
Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the
vehicle you are w o r k i n g on.
6. Navigate to BODY
ELECTRIC/GAUGES/ADJUSTMENT/
INSTRUMENT PANEL REPLACEMENT.
Once y o u have started this procedure, y o u must

complete it before removing the HDS f r o m the DLC.
7. Select 3. Releasing Locked ODO Value.
Connect a battery j u m p e r box (not a battery charger)

to insure that correct battery voltage will be
maintained.
Check an official Honda service website for more
service information about the odometer.
Rewriting and Transferring

1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect
the HDS.
2. Select GAUGES f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu w i t h the HDS.
3. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO
Rewrite) f r o m the ADJUSTMENT m e n u , and f o l l o w
the instructions on the display to retrieve the ODO
value and the Maintenance Minder Information.
4. Replace the gauge control module.
5. Follow the instructions on the display to write the new
ODO value and Maintenance Minder Data to the new
gauge control module. I f t h e data transfer fails, refer
to the instructions below to release the locked ODO
value.
Releasing locked odometer mileage to the

original gauge control module.
If, after you attempt to transfer mileage to a new gauge
assembly, the odometer display has dashes (
), is
garbled, or shows an incorrect value, the original gauge
control module can be unlocked and restored to its
original state so that it can be used again for additional
attempts to transfer the milage:
1. Confirm that you have the latest HDS version of
software.
2. Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN the
vehicle y o u are w o r k i n g o n .
22-358
8. Follow the prompts and the odometer mileage w i l l be

restored.
9. Start over and make sure the screen prompts are
followed.
Gauge Control Module Replacement

NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, retrieve the ODO data and the maintenance minder information f r o m
the gauge control module w i t h the HDS (see page 22-358).
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-121).
2. Remove the four screws f r o m the gauge control module (A).
3. Disconnect the 32P connector (B) f r o m the gauge control module.

4. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal.
5. Write the ODO data and transfer maintenance minder data to the new gauge control module (see page 22-358).
22-359
Gauges
Multi-information Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
24-170).
2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) f r o m the cable reel.
4. Remove the three screws (A), then remove the

steering wheel t r i m (B), and disconnect connectors
(C) f r o m each switches.
3. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P

If the check is OK, but the system does not operate,
check for the cable reel or audio remote switch.
If the check is not as specified, go to step 4.

6. Remove the switch mounting screws, then remove
the multi-information switch (E) f r o m the steering
wheel t r i m .
No. 5 in each position according to the table.
Position
PREVIOUS ( A )
SEL/RESET
NEXT ( )
Resistance
A b o u t 33 0
About 10430
A b o u t 363 0
8. I f t h e resistance is not as specified or LED does not

turn o n , replace the multi-information switch. I f t h e
switch is OK, but there is a problem w i t h the switch
function, check the cable reel or the audio remote
switch.
22-360
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration

NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 21-74).
Description
The outside temperature sensor is located behind the
left side of the front bumper. The gauge control module
uses measurements f r o m this sensor to display the
outside air temperature.
Because of the location of the sensor, it may be affected
by heat reflection f r o m the road, engine and radiator
heat, or hot exhaust f r o m surrounding traffic.
These conditions can heat soak the outside air
temperature sensor and cause inaccurate readings.
Logic has been written into the gauge control module to
help prevent abnormal or fluctuating outside air
temperature indicator readings.
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Logic

If the engine coolant temperature is 140 F (60 C) or
higher w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the
outside air temperature indicated the last time the key
was turned off will be displayed regardless of the current
temperature measured by the outside air temperature
sensor.
If the engine coolant temperature is 139 F (59 C) or
lower w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the
current temperature measured by the outside air
temperature sensor w i l l be indicated.
Update to the outside air temperature

indicator while driving
If the temperature measured by the outside air
temperature sensor is greater than the temperature on
the outside air temperature indicator, the outside
temperature indicator will increase by 1 F (1 C) per
minute after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 m p h (30
km/h) for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds. It will
continue to increase until the current outside air
temperature is indicated. So, the first change to the
outside air temperature indicator is 1 minute and 30
seconds after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 m p h
(30 km/h). If the vehicle speed drops below 19 mph (30
km/h), the indicator will not update again until the
vehicle speed is increased to 19 m p h (30 km/h) or more
for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds again.
If the outside air temperature is less than 140 F (60 C),
the temperature increases 1 F every 1 second (1 C
every 2 seconds) until the current outside air
temperature is displayed.
If the outside air temperature is less than the indicated
temperature, the temperature will decrease 1 F every 1
second (1 C every 2 seconds) until the current outside
air temperature is indicated regardless of vehicle speed.
Troubleshooting
If the indicator displays "
" for more than
2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature
display mode, check the climate control system or
multiplex integrated control system for DTCs (see
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A) (see page
22-137).
Calibration
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed
temperature can be recalibrated 5 F or 3 C to meet
the customer's expectations. Refer to the owner's
manual for more detailed information.
22-361

SAFETY
INDICATOR
With multiinformation
display
Without multiinformation
display
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S
DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
MICU
Input T e s t page 22-364
HATCH G L A S S
LATCH SWITCH
Test, page 22-467
22-362
POWER TAILGATE C L O S E R UNIT (With power tailgate)

(Including FULL LATCH SWITCH)
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH (Without power tailgate)
BODY
Circuit Diagram
: B-CAN line
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
G20
BLU
No. 23 (10 A)
D1
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT
-WHT
PNK
IG1,
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
D4
G2
32
IG1
VBU
P5
-WHT-
No. 10(7.5 A)
D2
- YEL
P10
INFORMATION DISPLAY
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
POWER SUPPULY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER

AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
MICU
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
B-CAN LO B-CAN HI
19
LTGRN
I
I
13
BLK
WHT
G401
T29
T12
B-CAN LO B-CAN HI
SG
AS
DOOR
SW
DR
DOOR
SW
PG PG PG
RR
DOOR
SWR
RR
DOOR
SWL
T/G
SW
i r T/G
G/H
SW
SW
SG
T34
BLK
E6
BLK
F20
BLK
E37
YEL
E3
LTGRN
1
1 DRIVER'S
j\ DOOR
/ |\
]) SWITCH V ])
(Closed:
Door open)
E17
LTBLU
FRONT
PASSENGER'S ,
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
1
1 LEFT REAR
N DOOR
\) SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
E2
GRY
I 1 RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
E36
LTGRN
LTGRN
1
PN
\\)
2
_Q_
G501
G601
E36
TAILGATE
LATCH
SWITCH
(Closed:
Tailgate
open)
G401
_Q_
G401
BLU
FULL
LATCH
SWITCH
1 CLOSER
UNIT
GRN
HATCH
GLASS
LATCH
SWITCH
(Closed:
hatch glas
open)
BLK
BLK
SI.
E12
POWER
TAILGATE
CONTROL
UNIT
i
G601
22-363

NOTE:
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137).
Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334) to make sure the information display.
Before doing the input tests, check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/reiay box.
MICU
2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR D (2P)
PNK
CONNECTOR E (42P)
GRY
23
LTGRN
BLK
BLU
LTBLU
I/I/|12|13
10
AAAmAAA
20 21
16 17
34 35 36 37 38
LTGRN
40 41
YEL
CONNECTOR F (34P)
/
20
/
A"
1
22 23
5 | 6
/I 8
24
25
9 10 11
27 28
c
/ 29V
14|15 16|17
30
31
II
U
CONNECTOR G (21P)
,/
/
12 13
/
3 4
i
,
8
15 16 17
i
IT
r-j
|18|19|20
CONNECTOR T(34P)
8|9|l0Ml2|/[/Jl5J16
BLK
22-364
18 19
32 33 34
22
Ifthe terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
E6
BLK
F20
BLK
T34
BLK
D2
PNK
G2
PNK
YEL
E37
LTGRN
E3

Driver's door open



open


closed
E17
LTBLU
GRY
E2
E12
E36*
BLU
LTGRN

Left rear door open

Left rear door closed

Right rear door open

Right rear door closed

Hatch glass open

Hatch glass closed

Tailgate open

Tailgate closed


not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G501)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
f-aulty driver's door switch
ground
An open in the wire
switch
switch ground
An open in the wire
switch
ground
An open in the wire
ground
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G601)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G601)
An open in the wire
* 1 : Without power tailgate
(cont'd)
22-365

6. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-359), and disconnect the 32P connector from it.

BLK
WHT
/.n
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 / 27 28 29 3 0 / 32
YEL

If the terminals are bent loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
8. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, and do these input tests at the following connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
13
BLK
16
WHT
32
YEL


not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
9. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.

Ifthe symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it (see page 22-359).
Ifthe symptom is still present, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
22-366
Reminder Systems
DRIVER'S DOOR
SWITCH
22-367
Reminder Systems
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
0(+
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

- C T \ J O -
G20
-cr\x>-
No. 23 (10 A)
D1
IGNITIOJNJSWITCH
[AT
IG1
WHT

PNK-
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
PNK-
D4
D2
No. 10(7.5 A) IG1
P10
c r \ j >
+B
BACK UP
G2
MICU
IG
KEY
SW
SG
E6
BLK
H/L SMALL
OFF LIGHT
SW SW
H/L
ON
SW
DR
DOOR
SW
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
PG PG PG
F20
BLK
PG
T34
BLK
R6
S1
RED
GND
S11 S5
S13
GRY
ORN
BLK
LT GRN
E37
YEL
T29
LTGRN WHT
<*0:-)
(
(ED)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

IGNITION
KEY
) SWITCH
2 (Closed:
Key inserted)
BLK
-0_
G401
22-368
G501
G401
G401
T12
i DRIVER'S
' DOOR
) SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
P5
YEL
WHT-
BODY
: CAN line
YEL
BRAKE
SWITCH
(Closed:
Pedal depressed)
22-369
Reminder Systems
NOTE:
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-137).
Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334) to make sure the beeper and the indicators in the
gauge control module work properly and the F-CAN line are OK.
Before doing the input tests, check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
MICU
2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, R, S, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
C O N N E C T O R D (2P)
s
PNK
C O N N E C T O R E (42P)
BLK
/
23
\
I
"
v6
/
27 28
/
/
/
///
a
2
12|13
14 15 16 17
34 35 36 37 38
'
a '
>
19 20 21
22
40 41
YEL
C O N N E C T O R F (34P)
/
20
/
1
5|6
22 23
/I
24
9 10 11
27 28
25
A/
14|15 16|17
29
31
30
II
18 19
132
33 34
BLK
C O N N E C T O R G (21P)
PNK
,/ /
12
/
13
/
ci
7
15 16 17
18 19|20|
C O N N E C T O R R (20P)
RED
//
3
12 13
//
16
9 10
18
21
JL
C O N N E C T O R S (20P)
BLK
ORN
1
20
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Z7\
LTGRN
GRY
CONNECTOR T(34P)
BLK
10
22
22-370
=?
25 26 27
15
29
Ifthe terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, do these input tests at the following connectors.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
E6
BLK
F20
BLK
T34
BLK
D2
PNK
G2
PNK
E37
* R6
YEL
RED
S1
ORN
S5
BLK
GRY
S5
BLK


Ignition key inserted into the

ignition switch

Ignition key removed from

the ignition switch

Combination light switch OFF


(SMALL position) ON
S11
LTGRN
S5
BLK

There should be battery voltage,
Driver's door open
Combination light switch in

any other position than OFF
S13

(Headlight position) ON

obtained
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G501)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Faulty MICU
An open in the wire

Faulty MICU
An open in the wire

An open in the wire
(cont'd)
22-371
Reminder Systems
6. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-359), and disconnect the 32P connector from it.
G A U G E CONTROL M O D U L E CONNECTOR A (32P)
BLK
WHT
r t
1
5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 1 4 / 1 6
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
27 28 29 30 / 32
YEL
BLK/YEL
Ifthe terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
8. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, do these input tests at the following connector.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
13
BLK
16
WHT
32
YEL
21
BLK/YEL
Parking brake pedal pressed

Parking brake pedal released


obtained
Poor ground (G401)

An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Faulty parking brake switch ground
An open in the wire
9. Ifthe lights-on reminder has a problem, substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box, and recheck the system. Ifthe seat belt reminder
has a problem, check for SRS DTCs and check the seat belt buckle switch. If all the tests prove OK, go to step 10.
10. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
Ifthe symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it (see page 22-359).
Ifthe symptom is still present, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).
22-372
Moonroof
MICU
(Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box)
22-373
Moonroof
Symptom
Water leaks f r o m m o o n r o o f
W i n d noise f r o m m o o n r o o f
Motor noise f r o m m o o n r o o f
M o o n r o o f glass does not move,

but m o t o r turns
M o o n r o o f glass does not move

and m o t o r does not turn (glass
can be m o v e d with 5 m m
hexagonal wrench)
M o o n r o o f glass does not stop at
proper flush closed position
M o o n r o o f glass moves in a
jerking m o t i o n (moves 40 m m
(1.57 in), stops for 0.4 seconds,
and repeats)
During auto close operation,
m o o n r o o f glass reverses w h e n no
object is trapped
M o o n r o o f glass moves, but there
is no AUTO function
22-374
1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel (see
page 20-68).
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or
drain channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the
roof panel.
1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a w o r n gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
4. Check for dirt or debris.
1. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
2. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
1. Check for a run d o w n battery.
2. Check for a blown fuse.
3. Check for a faulty m o o n r o o f switch.
4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
2. Check glass position adjustment.
1. Check for dirt and debris in the track.

Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit

N O T E : Do the m o o n r o o f control unit reset w i t h all the doors and tailgate closed.
Resetting the m o o n r o o f is required w h e n any of the following have occurred.
The m o o n r o o f was moved manually with the battery dead or disconnected.
The m o o n r o o f motor was replaced with a new one.
Any components related to the m o o n r o o f were replaced.
- W i n d deflector
- M o o n r o o f glass
- M o o n r o o f seal
- M o o n r o o f glass bracket
- M o o n r o o f cables, etc.
To reset the m o o n r o o f control unit, do these steps
1. Close all the doors and the tailgate.
3. Press and hold the center of the m o o n r o o f switch (tilt), and turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Release the m o o n r o o f switch and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 an additional four times.
7. Press and hold the m o o n r o o f switch (close) an additional 5 seconds after the m o o n r o o f is fully tilt open.
8. Press and hold the m o o n r o o f (close) switch within 5 seconds, continue holding until the m o o n r o o f moves to the full
slide open position and then back to the full closed position.
NOTE: Do not release the switch during all of step 8. If you do restart f r o m step 7.
9. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the m o o n r o o f AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function.
22-375
Moonroof
Circuit Diagram
: B-CAN line
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
H1

a~\jD
G20
BLU
No. 10 (7.5 A)
- C X J O
PNK -
IG1 HOT in O N (II)

and S T A R T (III)
G1
D1
-WHT
-WHT
IG1
G19
No. 28 (20 A)
-cr>oo-j
MICU
E35
B-CAN
HI
[T12
GRN
WHT
B-CAN
LO
r JT29
LTGRN
i
i
i
i
M O O N R O O F C O N T R O L UNIT/MOTOR
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLOSE <\ ,C
RELAY
V - CIRCUIT 9
OPEN
RELAY
CIRCUIT
MOTOR
HALL S E N S O R
< M >
SVCC
PLSA
PLSB
WHT
VMP
CPU
TILT
GND AUTO OPEN CLOSE
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
C O N T R O L UNIT
No. 14 (7.5 A) F U S E
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
WHT
YEL
BLU
UART
10
RED
LTGRN
LT B L U
PUR
WHT
I
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLOSE
OPEN
o
AUTO
(OPEN)
MOONROOF
SWITCH
LIGHT
(0.84 W)
TILT
AUTO
T
(CLOSE)
v
5
27
V
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
22-376
-LL
G701
G701
33
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
DOOR M U L T I P L E X
C O N T R O L UNIT
BLK
-LL
35
UART
POWER WINDOW
MASTER SWITCH
Moonroof Control Unit Input Test

NOTE:
If the m o o n r o o f works OK manually, but will not w o r k in AUTO, or reverses frequently (obstacle detection), reset the
m o o n r o o f control unit (see page 22-375) before proceeding w i t h the input test.
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-137).
3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) f r o m the m o o n r o o f control unit (B).
BLK
BLU
1
6
/
7
Y E L RED
//
10
GRN
5. With the connector still disconnected, do this input test at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
PUR
Disconnect the
power w i n d o w
master switch 37P
connector
Check for continuity between the moonroof

switch 10P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7 and power
w i n d o w master switch 37P connector terminal
No. 27:
Check for continuity between the m o o n r o o f
switch 10P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7 and body
ground:
Possible cause if
desired result is not
obtained
A short to g r o u n d in the
wire
(cont'd)
22-377
Moonroof
Moonroof Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and do these input tests at the following connector.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
BLK
GRN
RED

m o o n r o o f switch in
AUTO OPEN or AUTO
CLOSE position
m o o n r o o f switch
released
10
WHT
BLU
YEL

ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

OPEN or AUTO OPEN
position
released

ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

CLOSE or AUTO CLOSE
position
released

ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

TILT position

ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

released
Possible cause if desired result is not:

obtained

An open in the wire
Faulty m o o n r o o f switch
Poor ground (G701)
Faulty under-dash fuse relay box
Faulty m o o n r o o f control unit
Poor ground (G701)
An open in the w i r e
Poor ground (G701)
An open in the wire
7. If all the input tests are OK and multiple failures are f o u n d , replace the m o o n r o o f control unit/motor assembly (see
page 20-72). If the problem is related to the key-off operation, go to the MICU input test (see page 22-178).
22-378
BODY
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the front individual map lights (see page
22-255).
2. Disconnect the m o o n r o o f switch 12P connector (A)

and front individual map light 3 P connector (B).
3. Remove the m o o n r o o f switch (C) f r o m the map light

housing (D).
\
Terminal
Position
OPEN
CM -o
CLOSE
TILT
-o
O O
o-
-- o
-o
OPEN+OUTO
CLOSE+AUTO
, | 4
y
jO
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the

illumination bulb (E) or the switch.
22-379

FRONT A C C E S S O R Y POWER
SOCKET RELAY
T e s t page 22-96
.FRONT ACCESSORY
POWER S O C K E T
/ Test/Replacement page 22-382
/
22-380
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY B O X
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY B O X
BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) ( 1 2 0 A) No. 2 (IG) ( 5 0 A)

CTXJO
C T X J O
H1
IGNITION
D1
G20
SWITCH
/ B A T
W H T -
BLU
A C C ;
GRN
PUR
FRONT
G403
FRONT
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
G403
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET A
-9-
-0-
G801
G801
CARGO AREA
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
RELAY
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET B
RELAY
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET A
RELAY
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
RELAY
G801
CARGO AREA
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
CONSOLE
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET B
G801
G601
G404
22-381

Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: If all of the front, console A, console B, and cargo
area accessory power sockets do not work, check the
No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
ACC cut relay first.
1. Remove the dashboard center front panel (see page
20-123).
accessory power socket (B).
5. Check for continuity between front accessory power

socket 2P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
If there is continuity, go t o step 6.
If there is no continuity, check for:
- Poor ground (G403).
- A n open in the w i r e .
6. Remove the socket (A).
Wire side of
female terminals
WHT
7. Remove the housing (A).

making good contact.
I f t h e terminals look OK, go t o step 4.
I f t h e terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
t h e m as necessary and recheck the system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and measure the
voltage between front accessory power socket 2P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 and body g r o u n d . There
If there is battery voltage, go t o step 5.
If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary
- Faulty front accessory power socket relay.
- Poor g r o u n d (G403).
22-382
8. Install the front accessory power socket in the reverse

order of removal.
Console Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement

Console Accessory Power Socket A
NOTE: If all of the front, console A, console B, and cargo
area accessory power sockets do not w o r k , check the
No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
ground (G404, G801).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the console
accessory power socket A (B).
5. Check for continuity between console accessory

power socket A 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. There should be continuity.
if there is continuity, go to step 6.

If the terminals look OK, go to 4.
voltage between console accessory power socket A
2P connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d . There
If there is battery voltage, go t o step 5.
- Faulty console accessory power socket A relay.
8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of

removal.

(cont'd)
22-383

Console Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Console Accessory Power Socket B
20-116).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the rear
accessory power socket B (B).
5. Check for continuity between console accessory

power socket B 2P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 and body
ground. There should be continuity.
WHT
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Inspect the connector terminals t o be sure they are all


voltage between console accessory power socket B
2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d . There
If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
- Faulty accessory power socket B relay.
- P o o r g r o u n d (G801).
22-384
8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of

removal.
Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement

N O T E : If all of t h e front, c o n s o l e A , c o n s o l e B, a n d c a r g o
a r e a a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t s d o not w o r k , c h e c k the
N o . 3 5 (10 A ) f u s e in the u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x a n d
ground (G404, G801).
1. R e m o v e t h e r e a r s i d e trim p a n e l ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 9 6 ) .
2. D i s c o n n e c t the 2P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e c a r g o a r e a
a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t (B).
5. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n c a r g o a r e a a c c e s s o r y
p o w e r s o c k e t 2 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be continuity.
If t h e r e is c o n t i n u i t y , g o to s t e p 6.
If t h e r e is no c o n t i n u i t y , c h e c k for:
- A n o p e n in t h e w i r e .
6. R e m o v e the s o c k e t ( A ) .
WHT
BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
7. R e m o v e t h e h o u s i n g (B).
3. I n s p e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s to be s u r e t h e y a r e all
making good contact.
If t h e t e r m i n a l s a r e b e n t , l o o s e , or c o r r o d e d , r e p a i r
them as n e c e s s a r y and recheck the s y s t e m .
If t h e t e r m i n a l s look O K , go to s t e p 4.
4 . T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to A C C (I), a n d m e a s u r e t h e
voltage between cargo area accessory power socket
2 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d b e battery v o l t a g e .
If t h e r e is battery v o l t a g e , go to s t e p 5.
If t h e r e is no battery v o l t a g e , c h e c k for:
- B l o w n N o . 19 (15 A ) f u s e in the a u x i l i a r y
u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay box.
8. Install the p o w e r s o c k e t in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of

removal.
- Faulty c a r g o a r e a a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t r e l a y .
- A n o p e n in the w i r e .
22-385
AC Power Outlet
AC INVERTER UNIT
22-386
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
H1
- BLU
G20
bAT
D1
-WHT
IG2/
IG2 HOT in O N (II)
?
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 15(20 A)
IG2
CUT
RELAY
3
<r\_x>
BLU/WHT
C3
) No. 36
(10A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
Q16
GRN
YEL
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
A C I N V E R T E R UNIT
POWER
SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
INVERTER
c]
c]
POWER
OUTLET
G403
22-387
AC Power Outlet
AC Inverter Unit Input Test/Replacement
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-94).
2. Remove the passenger's side center console t r i m (see page 20-115).
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the AC inverter unit (B).
22-388
5. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
If ail the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity
Wire
ORN
Under all
conditions
12
BLU
Under all
conditions
Test condition

terminal No. 5 and power
outlet 3P connector terminal
No. 3:
terminal No. 12 and power
outlet 3P connector terminal
No. 1:

not obtained
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
6. Reconnect the connector, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests at following the connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the AC inverter unit, then go to step 7.
Cavity
Wire
BLK
Under all
conditions
GRN
Under all
conditions
YEL
Ignition switch
ON (II)
Test condition

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.

not obtained
Poor ground (G403)

An open in the wire
box
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
7. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-94).
22-389
AC Power Outlet
Power Outlet Replacement
2. Remove the p o w e r outlet (A), and disconnect the 3P
connector (B).
3. Install the power outlet in the reverse order of

removal.
22-390
(cont'd)
22-391

REARVIEW MONITOR MIRROR

(Built into rearview mirror)
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
MICU (Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box)

22-392
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

c r v x > C T V J O
D1
G20
IG
AUTOMATIC
DIMMING
INSIDE
MIRROR
REARVIEW
MONITOR
MIRROR
GND
VCC
GND
: Shielding
CAMERA CAMERA
GND
V
1
BACK
LT
SH
GND
B A C K - U P LIGHTS
NAVIGATION UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
C O N T R O L UNIT
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed:
In R position)
GRY
BLK
WHT
RED
GRN
BLK
BLK
I
!
GRY
3
VCC
GND
CAMERA CAMERA
GND
V
I2
SH
GND
REARVIEW CAMERA
G701
G101
22-393

System Description
The rearview monitor mirror system consists of the

rearview camera and the automatic d i m m i n g inside
mirror w i t h a built-in rearview monitor. W h e n the
transmission range switch is in R position, the rearview
monitor is o n , and the image of the rearview camera
appears. Brightness of the rearview monitor changes
automatically using the front-facing and rear-facing lux
level sensors (A) for the automatic d i m m i n g inside
mirror. There is a case that the brightness gets d i m m e d
gradually w h e n the rearview monitor turns on for a long
time. The rearview monitor turns off, w h e n the
automatic d i m m i n g off switch (B) is pushed, or the
transmission range switch is in other than R position.
22-394
Rearview Monitor Mirror Input Test/Replacement

NOTE: The normal operating temperature range of rearview monitor mirror is -22 F to 176 F (-30 C to 80 C). A l l o w the
inside temperature of the vehicle to stabilize within the normal operating range before testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
2. Check the auto d i m m i n g inside mirror indicator, if the indicator flashing t w o times, and then turns on, there is a
malfunction in the mirror. Replace it.
4. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the roof wire harness (B).
1 2 3
7 8
I n
5 6
12
//
6. Remove the tailgate lower t r i m panel (see page 20-100).
(cont'd)
22-395

Rearview Monitor Mirror Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected while testing terminals 12, 5, and 6. Make sure the connector is
disconnected while testing terminals 3,8, 2 , 1 , and 7.
Ifthe input tests prove OK. Substitute and connect a known-good rearview camera and check the monitor image in
reverse. If the s y m p t o m is gone, the rearview camera is faulty; replace it (see page 23-295). I f t h e s y m p t o m is still
present, the rearview mirror is faulty; replace it.
Cavity
Wire
12
BLK
Under all
conditions
YEL
Ignition switch
ON (II)
ORN
Ignition switch
ON (II) and the
transmission
range switch in R
position
Measure the voltage between the

terminal No. 12 and body ground:
WHT
Disconnect the
rearview camera
6P connector
Check for continuity between the

terminal No. 3 and rearview camera
22-396
RED
GRN
BLK
Test condition
Disconnect the
rearview camera
6P connector
Disconnect the
rearview camera
6P connector
Disconnect the
rearview camera
6P connector

not obtained
Poor ground (G701)


box.
box
6P

6P

6P
6P
GRY
Disconnect the
rearview camera
6P connector

terminal No. 7 and rearview camera 6P
22-397

22-398
22-399

Circuit Diagram
(11 With rearview monitor mirror
QO Without rearview monitor mirror
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No.1 (MAINM120A)
No. ^GWO
>
H1
G20
D1
BLU
WHT
IG1 HOT In ON {II)
and START (III)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
PNK
BLU/WHT
D2
No. 10
(7.5 A)
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
MICU
Q16
E15
F9
ORN
YEL
-ORN-
S:5
D}6
S 3
Si
ORN
8
AUTOMATIC DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
LB 12
d}2
BACK-UP LIGHTS
NAVIGATION UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed:
g In R position)
BLK
G701
22-400
G101
System Description
T e s t
The automatic d i m m i n g inside mirror has a front-facing

lux level sensor (A), rear-facing lux level sensors (B), and
a control unit. The control unit receives signals f r o m
each sensor. Based on the difference between the t w o
lux levels (the light outside the vehicle and the light f r o m
the headlights of the other vehicle, etc.), the control unit
controls the electro-chromic gel to reduce glare. This
d i m m i n g function is canceled w h e n the transmission is
in reverse, o r w h e n the automatic d i m m i n g off switch (C)
is turned OFF.
NOTE: With the rearview monitor mirror, refer to the

input test for the rearview monitor mirror (see page
22-395).
1. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect 6P connector
(B).

3. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and
body g r o u n d .
If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 4.
If there is more than 0.2 V, check for:
body ground.
If there is no voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
- Faulty IG2 cut relay.
(cont'd)
22-401

Test (cont'd)
body ground w i t h the transmission range switch in R
position.
If there is battery voltage, replace the mirror
assembly.
- Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box.
- Faulty transmission range switch.
22-402
Power Mirrors
For additional power mirror diagnosis, refer to the Driving Position Memory System (DPMS)
HVAC CONTROL
UNIT/PANEL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER S W I T C H /

MIRROR D E F O G G E R SWITCH
POWER MIRRORS/POWER MIRROR

DEFOGGERS
Function Test, page 22-407
Actuator T e s t page 22-413
Actuator Replacement page 22-414

FRONT P A S S E N G E R S POWER
WINDOW SWITCH
OWER MIRROR SWITCH

22-403
P o w e r Mirrors
Circuit Diagram - Without DPMS
PCM
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
BATTERY
IGNITION
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
H1
G20
SWITCH
/ B A T
BLU
WHT
fO
IG2
No. 36 (10 A)
OH
HOT
in
ON
ORN
(II)
C3
C T \ _ D
GRN
YEL
No. 4 (P/W) (40 A)
M4
No. 30 (20 A)
G21
CTXJO
ORN -
N9
No. 26 (20 A)
No. 23 (10 A)
COoO
G2
"'
WHT
GRN
BLU/WHT
DOOR
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Built into the
power w i n d o w
master switch)
PASSENGER'S
POWER
WINDOW
SWITCH
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
MICU
B-CAN
B-CAN
HI
LO
I T12
Q16
WHT
I
I
I
I
I
P5
T29
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
WHT
t-{-I
WHT
[1:: A19
[2J:B15
| [2]: A23
[Tj:
B-CAN
HI
I.
REAR W I N D O W
DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
DEFOGGER*
SWITCH
A35
[T|:
[2]:B4
BLK
G403
A36
I
WHT
|
LTGRN
j [2\: A24
B-CAN
LO
C L I M A T E or HVAC
C O N T R O L UNIT
[T]:A4
22-404
l
LT G R N
C O N T R O L UNIT
(Built into the
power w i n d o w
master switch)
BODY
[T|: With climate control s y s t e m

[|]: Without climate control s y s t e m
with mirror defogger
* : With mirror defogger
POWER MIRROR
- -
: B - C A N line
SWITCH
LIGHT/
(LED)
\ LIGHT
' (LED)
BLK -
BLK -
No. 2 6 ( 2 0 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY B O X )
T
WHT
VBU
(Built into the power w i n d o w master switch)
F M I R A C T
DR HEAT
GRN
RED
35
ORN
B-CAN
LO
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
! 33
WHT
LTGRN
RIGHT
1<8>
B-CAN
HI
UART
PG
SG
PUR
!
j
37
BLK
BLK
MIRROR
BLK
PUR
MICU
C L I M A T E or H V A C
CONTROL UNIT
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
) W N | _
LEFT POWER
BRN
ACTUATOR
MIRROR
BLK
|^
A.
_0_
G401
G401
_0_
G401
G401
(cont'd)
22-405
Power Mirrors
Circuit Diagram - Without DPMS (cont'd)
t : With mirror defogger

No. 30 (20 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
C O N T R O L UNIT
(Built into the
power window
master switch)
V
GRN
PUR
VMPAS
FRONT P A S S E N G E R ' S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
UART
MIR A C T MIR A C T
ASUD
A S COM
MIR A C T
A S LR
MIR A C T
A S HEAT
PG
37
LT BLU
ORN
GRY
BLU
1
UP
L
I EFT
DOWN
M
ft
I
L_
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
RIGHT
R
MIRROR A C T U A T O R
RIGHT P O W E R MIRROR
G404
22-406
G404
Function Test
NOTE: The right power mirror actuator is controlled by
the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch. W h e n the
power mirror switch is operated, the power w i n d o w
master switch receives the signals f r o m the power
m i r r o r switch and send t h e m to the front passenger's
power w i n d o w switch. So, if there is a malfunction of the
right power mirror actuator operation, do the door
multiplex control unit (built into the power w i n d o w
master switch) input test (see page 22-289) and front
passenger's power w i n d o w switch input test (see page
22-292). Also, the power mirror defoggers are controlled
by door multiplex control unit and front passenger's
power w i n d o w switch, do the door multiplex control unit
(built into the power w i n d o w master switch) input test
(see page 22-289) and front passenger's power w i n d o w
switch input test (see page 22-292).

terminal No. 2 of the power mirror switch 13P
connector w i t h the ignition switch to ON (II). There
- Blown No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
- A n open in the YEL wire.
5. Check for continuity between the terminal No. 6 and
body ground. There should be continuity.
- A n open in the BLK wire.
Left Power Mirror Function Test

22-298).
2. Disconnect the 13P connector f r o m the power mirror
switch and 37P connector f r o m the power w i n d o w
master switch.
6. Connect the terminals No. 2 and No. 10, and the

terminals No. 5 (or No. 12) and No. 6 with j u m p e r
wires. The left mirror should tilt d o w n (or swing left)
w i t h the ignition switch to ON (II).
If the left mirror does not tilt d o w n (or does not
swing left), check for an open in the GRN (or PUR)
wire between the left mirror and the 13P connector.
Ifthe wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator.
Ifthe mirror neither tilts d o w n nor swings left,
repair the RED wire.
Ifthe mirror works properly, check the mirror
linals
BLK
PNK
PUR
LTGRN
22-407
Power Mirrors
LTBLU
BLK
BLK
*: With mirror defogger
22-408
4. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
PNK
Ignition switch ON (II), power

mirror switch in RIGHT
mirror position
10
LT
GRN

mirror position
11
GRN

mirror position
ORN

connect terminals No. 14 and
No. 1 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e
26
LT
BLU

No. 26 w i t h a j u m p e r wire

ground:
voltage w h e n the power
mirror switch LEFT or DOWN
is pressed.
ground:
mirror switch RIGHT or DOWN
is pressed.
ground:
mirror switch UP or LEFT is
pressed.
Check the left power mirror
defogger operation:
The left power mirror defogger
should w o r k (the inside lower
edge becomes w a r m ) .
Check the power mirror switch
light operation:
The power mirror switch light
should come o n .

not obtained
Faulty power mirror switch
box
box
An open in the wire
box
Faulty left power mirror
defogger
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Faulty LED
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
*: W i t h mirror defogger
5. Reconnect the connector to the power w i n d o w master switch, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input
tests at the following connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit is faulty; replace the power w i n d o w master switch (see
page 22-298).
NOTE: After replacing the power w i n d o w master switch, reset the power w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-277).
Cavity
Wire
32
BLK
37
BLK
14
YEL
Test condition

ground:
V.
ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)


An open in the wire
box
22-409
Power Mirrors
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test
1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (see page 22-299).
2. Disconnect the 37P connector (A) f r o m the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
GRN
BRN
BLK
*: With mirror defogger
If the terminals are b e n t loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
22-410
NOTE: W i t h the front passenger's power w i n d o w AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function, after replacing the switch, reset
the power w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-277).
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
LT
BLU

No. 3 (or No. 4), and
terminals No. 4 (or No. 3) and
No. 37 w i t h j u m p e r wires.
No. 4 (or No. 5), and
terminals No. 5 (or No. 4) and
No. 37 w i t h j u m p e r wires.
No. 1 w i t h a j u m p e r wire
Check the right power mirror

operation:
The right power mirror should
move UP (or DOWN).
4
ORN
4
ORN
GRY
BLU
29
BRN
Under all conditions,

disconnect the power
w i n d o w master switch 37P
connector

operation:
The right power mirror should
swing RIGHT (or LEFT).
defogger operation:
The right power mirror
defogger should w o r k (the
inside lower edge becomes
warm).
the terminal No. 29 and the
power w i n d o w master switch

not obtained
Faulty right power mirror
Poor ground (G404)
Poor ground (G404)
defogger
Poor ground (G404)
*: W i t h mirror defogger
5. Reconnect the connector to the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do
these input tests at the following connectors.
NOTE: W i t h the front passenger's power w i n d o w AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function, after replacing the switch, reset
the power w i n d o w control unit.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the front passenger's power w i n d o w switch.
Cavity
Wire
37
BLK
25
GRN
Test condition

ground:
V.
ground:
voltage.

not obtained
Poor ground (G404)
An open in the wire

box
22-411
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement
22-298).
2. Disconnect the 13P connector f r o m the power mirror
switch (A).

Power Mirror Switch

\
4 5
9 10 11 12 13
Terminal
Position
UP
o -o
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
UP
LEFT
RIGHT
10
11
12
13
o -o
o o
o- -o
DOWN
R
o
-o
r\
o -o
o
o - -o
-o
-o
-o
-o
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws

and replace the power mirror switch.
22-412
Power Mirror Actuator Test

1. Remove the mirror m o u n t cover (see step 2 on page
20-44).
2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) f r o m the power
mirror actuator (B).
Defogger Test
5. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 1
and No. 2 of the 16P connector. There should be about
7Q.
6. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, check for an open
in the wire between the connector and the mirror
holder. If the w i r e is OK, replace the mirror holder (see
page 20-45).
3. Check the actuator operation by connecting power

and ground according to the table.
Terminal
Position
TILT UP
TILT DOWN
L
e
e
SWING L E F T
SWING RIGHT
TILT UP
TILT DOWN
R
SWING L E F T
SWING RIGHT
10
11
4. If the mirror fails to w o r k properly, check for an open

in the wire between the connector and the mirror
holder. If the wire is OK, replace the mirror actuator
(see page 22-414).
22-413
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement
Actuator Replacement
Actuator Harness Replacement
2. Remove the three TORX screws using a tamperproof

T 1 0 T O R X bit.
2. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-44).
3. Remove the connectors (A) and the actuator (B).

NOTE: The illustration shows w i t h o u t side turn signal
light.
3. Remove the power mirror actuator.

4. Remove the gasket (A), t h e m remove the t w o TORX
screws using a tamperproof T10 TORX bit, and
connector (B) f r o m power mirror.
NOTE: The illustration shows w i t h side turn signal
light.
4. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.
5. Remove the cover (C) f r o m the power mirror.

6. Remove the harness (D) f r o m the power mirror.
7. Route the w i r e harness of the new actuator t h r o u g h
the hole in the bracket reverse order of removal.
8. Connect the connectors to the actuator and the side
turn signal light securely.
9. Install the actuator, the housing, and the gasket in the
10. Install the power mirror on the door, and make sure
the actuator, mirror defogger, and side turn signal
light operation.
22-414
Seat Heaters
, FRONT P A S S E N G E R ' S
S E A T CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-422
.DRIVER'S SEATBACK HEATER

Test, page 22-422
S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH) ( 4 P f
Test, page 22-96
-DRIVERS SEAT
CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-422
S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (LOW) (5P?
Test, page 22-96
DRIVER'S S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH) (4P)

Test, page 22-96
-DRIVER'S S E A T HEATER
R E L A Y (LOW) (5P)
Test, page 22-96
(cont'd)
22-415
Seat Heaters
Canada models
. RIGHT S E C O N D ROW
SEAT-BACK HEATER
T e s t page 22-423
. L E F T S E C O N D ROW
SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-423
- L E F T S E C O N D ROW S E A T
CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-423
RIGHT SECOND ROW
Test, page 22-423
RIGHT S E C O N D ROW
S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (LOW) (5P)
Test, page 22-96
RIGHT SECOND ROW
S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH) (4P)
Test, page 22-96
22-416
LEFT S E C O N D ROW
S E A T HEATER RELAY (LOW) (5P)
Test, page 22-96
LEFT S E C O N D ROW
S E A T HEATER R E L A Y (HIGH) (4P)
Test, page 22-96
22-417
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram - Front Seat
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
G20
H1
BLU
- c r v o -
(>
PCM
TH: THERMOSTAT
BR; BREAKER
/ B A T \
WHT-(o
IG2
CTXJO
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
orN)
-OP
D1
No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A) G1
IG2 CUT RELAY

3
LT GRN
BLU/WHT -
Oj
HOT
in
ORN
-GRN-
C3 No. 36 (10 A)
MICU
CT\JD
Q16
O N (II)
G19 No. 5 (15 A)
- WHT-
[ON: 84-102 F (29-39 C))

[OFF: 100-118 F (38-48 C)j
[ON: 77-95 F (25-35 C)J
[OFF: 113-131 F (45-55 C)l
M5
LTBLU YEL
LT BLU
LT BLU
-
BLK
BLK
LTBLU
BLK
BLK
YEL
SEAT
HEATER
RELAY
(HIGH)
SEAT
HEATER
RELAY
(LOW)
DRIVER'S
SEAT
HEATER
RELAY
BOX
G503
BLU
GRY
ORN
No. 14 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER
BLK
G503
22-418
RED
G403
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
YEL
BODY
LTBLU
No. 14 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FRONT PASSENGER' S
2 S E A T HEATER SWITCH
S E A T HEATER
RED
BLK
G502
G403
D A S H LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
22-419
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram - Second Row Seat
Canada models
IG2 C U T R E L A Y
r \
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

No. 1 (MAIN) ( 1 2 0 A ) No. 2 (IG) ( 5 0 A )
H1
G20
BLU
PCM
IGNITION
5 r ~ H 3
> - L T G R N - - ^ R P
i
SWITCH
r \
BLU/WHT
TRANSMISSION
_ > RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY B O X
/ B A T \
D1
W H T - f o
OA
I G 2 H O T in O N
O R N-
C3
GRN -
No. 3 6 ( 1 0 A )
Q16
C O o D
(II)
No. 2 1 ( 1 5 A )
TH: T H E R M O S T A T
BR: B R E A K E R
[ON: 84-102 F(29-39 C)]

[OFF: 100-118 F(38-48 C)]
[ON: 7 7 - 9 5 F (25-35 C)]
[OFF: 113-131 F(45-55 C)]
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
YEL
22-420
BLK
BLK
G503
G801
LEFT SECOND R O W
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
RED
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the g a u g e
control m o d u l e )
BODY
No. 14 (7.5 A)
FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
RIGHT S E C O N D R O W
2 S E A T HEATER SWITCH
BLK
BLK
-LL
G502
G801
RED
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
22-421
Seat Heaters
Seat Heater Test
Driver's Seat
Front Passenger's Seat
1. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-142).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) and 2P connector (B)

f r o m the seat heater.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) f r o m the seat heater.
3P CONNECTOR
Seat Cushion
3P CONNECTOR
Seat-back
3. Check for continuity between seat-back heater 2P
continuity.
Seat Cushion
4. Check for continuity between seat cushion heater 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and terminals
No. 2 and No. 3. There should be continuity.
appropriate seat heater.
22-422

BODY
Second Row Seat (Canada models)
Seat-back
1. Remove the second r o w seat.
3. Check for continuity between seat-back heater 2P

continuity.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) and 2P connector (B)

f r o m the seat heater.
NOTE: All connector views are s h o w n f r o m the wire
side of female terminals.
Left Second Row Seat
Seat Cushion
S E A T CUSHION
HEATER
3P CONNECTOR
S E A T - B A C K HEATER
2P CONNECTOR
Right Second Row Seat
S E A T CUSHION
HEATER
3P CONNECTOR
S E A T - B A C K HEATER
2P CONNECTOR
22-423
Seat Heaters
Front Seat Heater
Second Row Seat Heater (Canada models)

20-116).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the seat heater

switch (A).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the seat heater

switch (A).
1
3 4
5 6
2
4
3. Remove the t w o screws and the switch.

Terminal
1
Position
\
HIGH
ON
LOW
OFF
O
o
o
- e - -o
o- o -
-o
o-
3. Remove the t w o screws and the switch.

o - -o
-o
-o
-o
Terminal
1
Position
\
HIGH
ON
LOW
OFF
5. I f t h e continuity is not as specified, replace the

illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.
22-424
oO
-o
o-
-o
-o
o- - o
o-
o - -o
-o
o
o
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the

illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.

22-425

Circuit Diagram

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
crvx)
No. 2 (OPTION) (80 A )
CTVJO
G1
WHT
G19
) No. 7
(10 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
MICU
Q10
BRN
DRIVER'S POWER
LUMBAR SUPPORT SWITCH
A.
G503
22-426
Motor Test
1. Separate the lumbar support switch cover (A) f r o m

the switch (B).
1. Remove the driver's seat, (see page 20-142)
2 3 4
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) f r o m the driver's seat

wire harness.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) f r o m the switch.


\
Terminal
Position
Forward
Backward
3. Test the m o t o r by applying battery power and ground

to the terminals.
\^
o -o
o--o
o- o -o -o
Terminal
Position
Forward
Backward
0
0

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
check for an open in the wire between the 8P
connector and the lumbar support motor. If the
harness is OK, replace the lumbar support motor (see
page 20-153).
22-427
Power Seats
Driver's Seat without D P M S
For the driver's power seat with DPMS, refer to the Driving Position Memory System (DPMS), page 22-490
Front Passenger's S e a t
22-428
BODY
Circuit Diagram - Driver's Power Seat
BATTERY
(>
> No. 10
,{20 A)
ORN
; No. 9
C(20A)
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLU
DRIVER'S
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
DOWN*
BLK
UPX
PUR
BACKWARD
BLU
PTC
f]
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
X FORT WARD
RED
GRN
PTC
SLIDE MOTOR
DOWN
PNK
UP X BACKWARD
YEL
X FORT WARD
GRN
WHT
BLK
PTC
f]
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR
RECLINE MOTOR
_LL
G503
G503
22-429
Power Seats
Circuit Diagram - Front Passenger's Power Seat
BATTERY
JNO.14
,(20 A)
E10
E9
GRN
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
; N O . 13
,(20 A)
BRN
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
SLIDE
RECLINE
BACKWARD
BLK
FORWARD
RED
gp
22-430
FORWARD
LT BLU
PTC
SLIDE
G502
BACKWARD
id
MOTOR
BLU
BLK
p x c
RECLINE
MOTOR
G502
BODY
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement

Driver's Seat without DPMS
NOTE: Refer to power seat adjustment switch test/replacement (see page 22-538) for driver's seat w i t h DPMS.
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover f r o m the driver's seat (see page 20-145), then
remove the t w o screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).
3
8
9 10 11 12
3. Disconnect the 12P connector f r o m the power seat adjustment switch.

4. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Terminal
1
Position
SLIDE
SWITCH
RECLINE
SWITCH
FRONT
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
REAR
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
10
11
12
\
r\
Forward
r\
Forward
*o
*o
r\
Backward
UP
DOWN
UP
o
o - o
o - o
Backward
vj
f
o- o
-o
o- o
o o
r\
D
*o
DOWN
*: There is continuity without operating a switch.
(cont'd)
22-431
Power Seats
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover f r o m the front passenger's seat (see page
20-145), then remove the t w o screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).
3
8
9 10 11 12
3. Disconnect the 12P connector f r o m the power seat adjustment switch (A).
Terminal
10
11
12
Position
SLIDE
SWITCH
RECLINE
SWITCH
Forward
Backward
Forward
Backward
-o
*: There is continuity without operating a switch.
6. I f t h e continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-432
BODY
Motor Test
Driver's Seat without DPMS
NOTE: For DPMS power seat motor test (see page
22-539).
4. A t the 12P connector of the driver's seat wire harness

side, test the motor by applying battery power and
g r o u n d to the terminals according to the table.
Slide motor:

2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and
the recline cover f r o m the seat (see page 20-145).
\^
Position
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the power seat

adjustment switch (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
1 2
6
3
8
Terminal
\y
11
Forward
Backward
12
Recline motor:
9 10 11 12
\
Terminal
Position
Forward
Backward
Front up-down motor:

\
Terminal
Position
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
Rear up-down motor:

\
Terminal
Position

to step 6.
(cont'd)
22-433
Power Seats
Motor Test (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the 6P or 8P connector f r o m each motor.
SLIDE MOTOR
REAR UP-DOWN
MOTOR
7. Check for continuity between each motor 6P or 8P

connector and the driver's seat wire harness 12P
connector. If there is continuity, replace the
appropriate motor.
Slide motor (see page 20-151)
Recline motor (see page 20-152)
NOTE: The front and rear up-down motors are part of
the seat frame (see page 20-148).
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
Slide motor 6P connector

terminal
No. 5
No. 6
Recline motor 8P
connector terminal
No. 6
No.4
Front up-down motor 6P
connector terminal
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
FRONT UP-DOWN
MOTOR
22-434
1 2
4
6 /
No. 5
No. 6
Rear up-down motor 6P
connectorterminal
RECLINE MOTOR
No. 5
No. 6
Driver's seat wire

harness 12P connector
terminal
No. 7
No. 11
Driver's seat wire
terminal
No. 6
No. 12
Driver's seat wire
terminal
No. 9
No.3
Driver's seat wire
terminal
No. 1
No. 5
6. Disconnect the 5P and 6P connector f r o m each motor.
RECLINE MOTOR

2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and
the recline cover f r o m the seat (see page 20-145).
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) f r o m the power seat
adjustment switch (B).
SLIDE MOTOR
4. At the 12P connector of the front passenger's seat

wire harness side, test the motor by applying battery
power and ground to the terminals according to the
table.
Slide m o t o r :
7. Check for continuity between each motor 5P or 6P

connector and the front passenger's seat wire
harness 12P connector. If there is continuity, replace
the appropriate motor.
Terminal
7
Position
11
Forward
Backward
Terminal
6
12
Forward
Backward
Position
No.5
No.6
Recline motor 5P
connectorterminal
Recline motor:
\
Slide motor 6P connector

terminal
No.3
No. 5

wire harness 12P
connector terminal
No. 11
No. 7
wire harness 12P
connectorterminal
No.6
No. 12
5. I f t h e motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go

to step 6.
22-435

22-436
HVAC CONTROL UNIT/PANEL
1G2 C U T RELAY
T e s t , page 22-96
22-437

Circuit Diagram
[T|: With climate control system
[~2~]: Without climate control system
with mirror defogger
* : With mirror defogger
- - : B-CAN line
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
0 -
G20|
H1
G12|
) No. 8
> (30 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
|D1
/BAT^\
- WHTfo
n
|
PCM
ORN
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
YEL
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
Q16
T12
T29
I
I
RED
LTGRN
WHT
YEL
LTGRN
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WHT
(Tj:
Q)A1
[2} A3
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
B(-)
Rear window defogger/

mirror defogger*
switch and defogger
timer circuit built into
the climate or HVAC
control unit)
[2]:B15
IG2
A(+)
;2]: A23
B-CAN
HI
[ [T]: A36
I [2]: A24
B-CAN
LO
REAR WINDOW
) DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
DEFOGGER SWITCH*
INDICATOR
(LED)
v
CLIMATE or HVAC
CONTROL UNIT
LTGRN
| \Jj. A35
A19
WHT
LT
GRN
35
(Built into power

window master
switch)
"MTR~A~CT D R " H E A T ~
GND
[D
LD
A4
ORN
B4
HEATED
MIRROR
BLK
_0_
G601
22-438
G403
33
B-CAN
B-CAN
HI
LO
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
Function Test
Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE:
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section

must be no longer than 1 inch (25 m m ) .
Before testing, check the No. 8 (30 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box and IG2 cut relay.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger
wires with the tester probes.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)

w i t h fine steel w o o l , then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the rear

w i n d o w defogger switch ON.
2. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal
(A) and body g r o u n d . There should be battery
voltage.
If there is voltage, go to step 3.
- Faulty rear w i n d o w defogger relay (see page
22-96).
- Faulty climate or HVAC control unit.
- A n open in the RED w i r e to the positive terminal.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of

the defogger wire (B) w i t h cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver
conductive paint (commercially available) extending
about 1/8" (3mm) on both sides of the break. A l l o w 25
minutes to dry.
About 2.0 V
About 6 V
About 4.2 V
About 11 V
About 8.5 V
3. Measure the voltage between the negative terminal

(B) and body g r o u n d . There should be less than 0.2 V.
If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 4.
If there is more than 0.2 V, check for:
- Open or high resistance in the wire.
- P o o r ground (G 601).
4. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to each point on
each defogger w i r e , and the negative probe to the
negative terminal.
If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to
that point is OK.
If the voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger
wire.
- If it is more than specified at one of the points,
there is a break in the negative half of the wire.
4. Do the function test to confirm that the wire is

repaired.
5. A p p l y a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
- If it is less than specified at one of the points,

there is a break in the positive half of the wire.
22-439
Immobilizer System
22-440
TRANSPONDER
(Built into the transmitter)
Registration, page 22-455
22-441
Immobilizer System
System Description
The vehicle is equipped w i t h a type V immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless a p r o g r a m m e d ignition key
is used.
The system consists of a keyless transmitter w i t h a built-in transponder, an immobilizer-keyless control unit w i t h a
built-in receiver, a MICU w i t h a built-in imoes unit, the immobilizer indicator, and the PCM.
W h e n the immobilizer key (programmed by the HDS) is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON (II), the
immobilizer-keyless control unit sends power to the transponder. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to
the immobilizer-keyless control unit which then sends a coded signal to the PCM and MICU (imoes unit).
The PCM and MICU (imoes unit) identify this coded signal, then voltage is supplied to the fuel p u m p .
Steering lock assembly
Immobilizer-keyless
control unit
PCM
If the w r o n g key has been used or the code was not received or recognized by the units, the indicator will come on for
about 2 seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). W h e n the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0), the indicator will blink ten times to signal that the unit has reset correctly, then the indicator will go off.
Under normal operation, w h e n the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator will quickly flash once, then
go off after t u r n i n g the ignition switch to ON (II).
22-442
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) 50 A)
crx^c
crxj>
H1
IGNITION SWITCH
: C A N line
'BAT
D1
G20
BLU
) No. 23
> (10 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and S T A R T (III)
D2
GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE
D4
PNK
) No. 2
, ( 1 5 A)
G2
v IMMOBILIZER
) INDICATOR
(LED)
PGM-FI
MAIN R E L A Y 2
(FUELPUMP)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROL

AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
I
IMOCD
(S-NET)
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
MICU (Has built-in imoes unit)
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
F24
Q7
Q8
* R9
Q1
R12
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
T12
i T29
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
CANL
CANH
#-A/W-#
2.6 kO
29
30
KEY
WHT
LTBLU
K-LINE
IMOCD
(S-NET)
VBU
IG1
I M M O B I L I Z E R - K E Y L E S S C O N T R O L UNIT
B-CAN
B-CAN
LG3
HI
LO
J
BLK/YEL
LT B L U
BRN
I
I
WHT
I
I
I
I
1
I
LTGRN
I
I
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LTGRN
WHT
RED
WHT
D A T A LINK
CONNECTOR
A49
IG1
A48
IMOCD
(S-NET)
PCM
PG1
BLK
BLK
PG2
LG2
BLK
BRN/YEL
BRN/YEL
G101
22-443
Immobilizer System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1901: Immobilizer Unit Internal Error
(CPU error)
DTC B1902: Immobilizer Unit Internal Error
(EEPROM error)
DTC U0155: Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit

Lost Communication With Gauge Control
Module

ON (II).

ON (II).

Is DTC U0155

Are DTC B1901 and/or B1902
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y immobilizer-keyless control unit, replace

the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-461 ) .
time.B
22-444
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the gauge control m o d u l e input test, and

do all power, g r o u n d , and c o m m u n i c a t i o n input tests
(see page 22-355). I f t h e tests prove OK, replace the
Check for loose or poor connections at the gauge
control module and the related u n i t s .

Lost Communication With Door Multiplex
Control Unit

Lost Communication With Driver's MICU
ON (II).

ON (II).
3. Wait f o r at least 6 seconds.

Is DTC U0199
indicated?

test, and do all power, g r o u n d , and communication
input tests (see page 22-289). I f t h e tests prove OK,
replace the power w i n d o w master switch (see page
22-298).
Check for loose or poor connections at the power
w i n d o w master switch and the related units.B
Is DTC U1282
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the MICU input test, and do all power,

g r o u n d , and communication input tests (see page
22-153). I f t h e tests prove OK, replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
Check f o r loose or poor connections at under-dash
fuse/relay box connector T (34P) and the related
units.B
22-445
Immobilizer System
Symptom Troubleshooting Information
General Check before Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items and solve any if applicable:
The battery is low; charge the battery fully , then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
The ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then troubleshoot the
immobilizer system.
A key ring, keys or a key case is used; remove the key f r o m it, and troubleshoot the immobilizer system w i t h a key
only.
A n aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using the Immobilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern

The pattern of the immobilizer indicator can help troubleshoot the condition of the immobilizer system. Here are
descriptions of the four possible patterns.
Normal operation
If the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator w i l l quickly flash once, then goes off after turning the
ignition switch to ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator does not come on w h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobilizer code is not identified
If the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator w i l l quickly flash once, then w i l l blink until the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0). W h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the indicator w i l l blink ten times, then go
OFF to s h o w the system has correctly reset.
The state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD (S-NET) line can be checked by doing a SYSTEM CHECK
(see page 22-449) and STATUS LOG CHECK (see page 22-451) w i t h the HDS.
Immobilizer indicator does not come on
If the immobilizer indicator does not come on after turning the ignition switch t o ON (II), there is an open or short in the
F-CAN lines between the PCM and the gauge control module. Watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). If the MIL
stays o n , go to the PGM-FI system troubleshooting (see page 11-3).
Immobilizer indicator does not go off
If the immobilizer indicator does not go off after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-334). If the indicator drive circuit is OK, do the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-449)
and STATUS LOG CHECK (see page 22-451) w i t h the HDS.
22-446
Symptom Troubleshooting Using Malfunctioning Circuit Functions

If a m a l f u n c t i o n o c c u r s in t h e i m m o b i l i z e r circuit, u s e t h e t a b l e to c r o s s - r e f e r e n c e t h e m a l f u n c t i o n criteria to t h e l i n e ( s )
that s h o u l d be c h e c k e d table:
N O T E : T o t e s t t h e m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c i r c u i t s , d o t h e i m m o b i l i z e r - k e y l e s s c o n t r o l unit input t e s t ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 5 7 ) .
Function
Line Error
Immobilizer
Indicator
Engine Start
Key
Registration
Tester
Communication
Keyless Operation
VBU line open

or short
Comes on,
then goes off.
Possible
Impossible
Possible
Impossible
2
(BRN)
IG1 line open

or short
Blinking
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
Possible
3
(LTGRN)
B-CAN (LO) line

open or short
Comes on,
then goes off.
Possible
Impossible
4
(WHT)
B-CAN (HI) line

open or short
Comes on,
then goes off.
Possible
5
(LTBLU)
K-LINE line
open or short
Comes on,
then goes off.
6
(PNK)
IMOCD (S-NET)
line open or short
7
(BRN)
GND (LG3) line

open
Terminal
No.
(Wire color)
Cause of
Malfunction
1
(WHT)
Immobilizer:
Possible
Keyless:
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
Immobilizer:
Impossible
Impossible
Keyless:
Impossible
Possible
Impossible
Impossible
Possible
Blinking
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
Possible
Blinking
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
Impossible
System Check and STATUS LOG

N O T E : T h e H D S c a n b e u s e d to:
C h e c k t h e state of t h e i m m o b i l i z e r key registration a n d I M O C D ( S - N E T ) line by d o i n g a S Y S T E M C H E C K .
C h e c k t h e n u m b e r of t i m e s t h e i m m o b i l i z e r c o n t r o l u n i t - r e c e i v e r d o e s n ' t p e r m i t t h e e n g i n e to r u n b y c h e c k i n g t h e
STATUS LOG.
1. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r , t h e n t u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II) a n d f o l l o w t h e p r o m p t s to t h e M A I N
MENU.
N O T E : If t h e H D S d o e s not c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h t h e v e h i c l e , g o to t h e D L C circuit t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e 1 1 - 2 2 6 ) .
2. A t M A I N M E N U , e n t e r I M M O B I , t h e n s e l e c t I M M O B I L I Z E R
SETUP.
3. D o t h e S Y S T E M C H E C K . If t h e r e is a s y s t e m c h e c k n u m b e r , d o t h e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for t h e item i n d i c a t e d .
4 . C h e c k t h e S T S A T U S L O G u s i n g t h e H D S . T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e line w i t h t h e h i g h e s t c o u n t s first ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 5 1 ) . If all
t h e l i n e s a r e 0 ( z e r o ) , t h e p r o b l e m m a y not b e c a u s e d b y t h e i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m , c h e c k for ignition o r fuel p r o b l e m s .
R e f e r to P G M - F I s y m p t o m
troubleshooting.
N O T E : O n c e r e p a i r e d , c l e a r t h e s t a t u s log b y r e m o v i n g t h e N o , 2 3 (10 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay b o x , o r

d i s c o n n e c t i n g the battery.
22-447
Immobilizer System
1. Troubleshoot the immobilizer system in the order s h o w n :
Symptom
Immobilizer indicator blinks after the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Engine does not start w i t h the p r o g r a m m e d
immobilizer key.
Immobilizer indicator does not c o m e o n .
Immobilizer indicator does not go off.
22-448
Possible cause
Check the MIL indication.
Ifthe MIL comes o n , go to the PGM-FI System MIL circuit
troubleshooting, (see page 11-225)
Ifthe MIL does not come o n , replace the gauge control
module.
System Check
3. Monitor the SYSTEM CHECK in the IMMOBILIZER INFO with the HDS.
4. Ifthe HDS displays the NORMAL N-1, the immobilizer system is OK. at this time, refere to STATUS LOG. Ifthe HDS
displays any other messages, check as follows:
System Check
No.
A-1
Possible
The key is not

registered
A-2
Possible
Communication error
between key and
immobilizer unit
A-3
Possible
No communication
between the key and
immobilizer unit
B-1
Possible
The PCM is not

registered
B-2
Possible
Error of
communication
format in PCM
C-1
Possible
The Imoes unit is not

registered
Status Log.
Indication
System Check
Possible Failures
This key is not registered in the

immobilizer-keyless control unit. Try to register
keys by using the HDS.
No communication between the antenna and the
immobilizer key because of interference from
metal such as key chains/key rings/ other keys.
Low battery voltage.
Intermittent interruption between transponder
and immobilizer-keyless control unit.
The immobilizer key type is incorrect non-Honda
key.
Key failure (transponder failure)
The ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with a
non-immobilizer key.
The immobilizer key type is incorrect non-Honda
key
Key failure (transponder failure)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure.
The PCM was not registered. Try to register the
PCM using the HDS.
No communication between the PCM and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low
battery voltage.
No communication between the
immobilizer-keyless control unit and the PCM
because of interference.
Open in the IG1 line
The PCM was not registered. Try to register the
PCM using the HDS.
battery voltage.
because of interference.
Imoes unit was not registered.
No communication between the imoes unit and
the immobilizer-keyless control unit because of
low battery voltage.
interference.
Try to register the Imoes unit using the HDS.
(cont'd)
22-449
Immobilizer S y s t e m
S y s t e m
C h e c k ( c o n t ' d )
System Check
No.
C-2
D-1
Possible
S-NET line short
D-2
Possible
No communication
between imoes unit
and immobilizer unit
D-3
Possible
No communication
between PCM and
immobilizer-keyless
control unit
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
22-450
System Check
Status Log.
Indication
Possible
Error of
communication
format in Imoes unit
Initial registration of
immobilizer-keyless
control unit is not
completed
Special Mode
Possible Failures
Imoes unit was not registered.
interference.
Try to register the Imoes unit using the HDS.
Harness short f r o m the PCM t o the
immobilizer-keyless control unit. (IMOCD (S-net)
line short)
battery voltage.
immobilizer-keyless unit and the PCM because of
interference.
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
PCM failure
Blown fuse
Harness open f r o m the imoes unit t o the
immobilizer-keyless control unit. (IMOCD
(S-NET) line open)
interference.
Imoes unit failure.
Blown fuse.
Harness open f r o m the PCM to the
immobilizer-keyless control unit.
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of l o w
battery voltage.
immobilizer-keyless unit and the PCM because of
interference.
PCM failure.
The immobilizer-keyless control unit is not
registered. Try to register the immobilizer-keyless
control unit using the HDS.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and to LOCK (0)

w i t h the registered key.
Status Log
If y o u s u s p e c t t h e r e is a i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m p r o b l e m , c h e c k t h e s t a t u s l o g i n t h e H D S .
1. C o n n e c t t h e H D S t o t h e d a t a l i n k c o n n e c t o r .
2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).
3. O n t h e H D S s c r e e n , s e l e c t M A I N M E N U , e n t e r I M M O B I , t h e n s e l e c t I M M O B I L I Z E R S E T U P , s e l e c t S y s t e m C h e c k ,
N u m b e r o f Keys, a n d Status L o g , t h e n select S T A T U S LOG.
4. C h e c k t h e S t a t u s L o g c o u n t . T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e s t a t u s w i t h t h e h i g h e s t c o u n t f i r s t . If n o c o u n t s a r e l i s t e d , t h e
i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m is O K . C o n t i n u e w i t h n o r m a l s y m p t o m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
Status Log No.

A-1
A-2
A-3
Detected Item
KEY CODE M I S M A T C H (Code
f o r m a t n o r m a l , b u t c o d e d a t a is
mismatch)
KEY CODE M I S M A T C H (Code
f o r m a t failure)
KEY CODE M I S M A T C H ( N o k e y
code o r n o n - i m m o b i l i z e r key)
B-1
PCM CODE M I S M A T C H (Code

f o r m a t n o r m a l , b u t c o d e d a t a is
mismatch)
B-2
PCM M I S M A T C H (Code f o r m a t
failure)
C-1
IMOES UNIT M I S M A T C H (Code

f o r m a t n o m a l , b u t d a t a is
mismatch)
Probable Cause
C-2
IMOES U N I T M I S M A T C H (Code
f o r m a t failure)
D-1
I M O C D (S-NET) LINE P R O B L E M
(Short to ground)
T h e key w a s n o t registered
Interference f r o m m e t a l s u c h as key c h a i n s
L o w battery voltage
I g n i t i o n s w i t c h w a s t u r n e d t o O N (II) w i t h a n o t h e r
type of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
I g n i t i o n s w i t c h w a s t u r n e d t o O N (II) w i t h a n o t h e r
type of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
Key failure
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
PCM w a s not registered correctly
Poor o r loose t e r m i n a l connections at the
C o m m u n i c a t i o n line electrical noise
PCM w a s not registered correctly
Poor or loose t e r m i n a l connections at t h e
Imoes unit w a s not registered correctly
The communication w a s not good between
imoes unit and immobilizer unit because of l o w
battery voltage
imoes unit and immobilizer unit by influence o f
s o m e noise
Imoes unit w a s n o tregistered correctly
imoes unit and immobilizer unit because of l o w
battery voltage
imoes unit and immobilizer unit by influence of
some noise
Poor o r loose t e r m i n a l connections at t h e
immobilizer-keyless control unit a n d the PCM
(cont'd)
22-451
Immobilizer System
Status Log (cont'd)
Status Log No.
D-2
D-3
22-452
Detected Item
IMOCD (S-NET) LINE PROBLEM
(No communication)
IMOCD (S-NET) LINE PROBLEM

(Open line or PCM failure)
Probable Cause
Blown fuse
Harness open from imoes unit to immobilizer
unit
imoes unit and immobilizer unit because of low
battery voltage
imoes unit and immobilizer unit by influence of
some noise
Imoes unit failure
Immobilizer unit failure
Open or short in the harness from the PCM to the
Low battery voltage
Poor or loose terminal connections at the
Communication line electrical noise
Immobilizer indicator blinks
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in
General Check before Troubleshooting (see page
22-446).
9. Measure the voltage between immobilizer-keyless

control unit 7P connectorterminal No. 2 and body
ground.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR

2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to ON
(ID.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. From the main m e n u , enter the IMMOBI, select

IMMOBILIZER SETUP, then select System Check,
Number of Keys, and Status Log.
IG1 (BRN)
4. Select the SYSTEM CHECK.

Is the SYSTEM
CHECK
indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the immobilizer system according

to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK (se'e page
22-449).!
Is there battery
YES-Go to step 10.

6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key f r o m
the ignition switch, then close all doors.
7. Operate the keyless transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK
several times in the vehicle.
voltage?
NO-Check for a blown No. 2 (15 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse OK, repair an
open in the BRN wire between the under-dash
fuse-relay box and the immobilizer-keyless control
unit.B
Do the door lock actuators work normally?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check for a poor ground through PCM to G101
and/or an open in the wire between the
immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
terminal No. 7 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal
No. 41 .
(cont'd)
22-453
Immobilizer System
10. Measure the voltage between immobilizer-keyless
control unit 7 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7 and body
ground.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
Engine does not start with the immobilizer

key
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in
General Check before Troubleshooting (see page
22-446).
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
LG3 (BRN)
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the vehicle is OK at this t i m e .

Check status log (see page 22-451) and check the line
as indicated in the table.
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the

immobilizer indicator indication.
Does the indicator quickly flash once and turn off?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit

(see page 22-461 ) .
NO-Check for a poor ground (G101) and/or repair

poor connection or open between the
immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
terminal No. 7 terminal and PCM connector A (49P)
terminal No. 4 1 .
NO-Do the immobilizer-keyless control unit input test

(see page 22-457).H
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter motor run?
NO-Go to Starting System, and check the starter
motor (see page 4-10).B
5. Try to start the engine w i t h the immobilizer key.
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System S y m p t o m
Troubleshooting (see page 11-16).H
6. Wait for a f e w minutes w i t h the engine running.
Does the engine
stop?
Y E S - G o to the PGM-FI System S y m p t o m

Troubleshooting (see page 11-16).B
22-454
Immobilizer Key Registration

Immobilizer indicator does not go off
NOTE:
The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer

keys.
2. Connect the HDS t o the data link connector.

4. Enter the I M M O B I , then select the IMMOBILIZER
SETUP, then select System Check, Number of Keys,
and Status Log.
5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK w i t h the HDS.
fsN-1
OK
indicated?
Y E S - D o the gauge control module self-diagnostic

function test (see page 22-334). If the gauge control
m o d u l e is faulty, replace i t . B
N O - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good immobilizer-keyless
control unit, then register it and recheck. If the
s y m p t o m goes away, replace the original
immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-461 ) .
Programming the immobilizer also programs the

keyless transmitter.
Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can
cause problems w i t h transponder operation.
The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up t o
six immobilizer keys.
Add one new key/Keyless transmitter

1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and the
first password f r o m the iN system.
4. Select IMMOBILI f r o m the IMMOBILIZER SETUP
menu.
5. Select A d d and Delete keys, then A d d 1 key.
6. Do the registration according to the instructions o n
the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by all the registered
key.
8. W h e n prompted by the HDS do the keyless
transmitter p r o g r a m m i n g .
Add and Delete keys/Keyless transmitters.

Then select Delete or Add keys
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and the
first password f r o m the iN system.
4. Select IMMOBI f r o m the IMMOBILIZER SET UP m e n u .
5. Select A d d and Delete keys, or Delete or A d d Multiple
Keys.
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of
HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by all the registered
keys.
8. W h e n prompted by the HDS, do the keyless
transmitter p r o g r a m m i n g .
(cont'd)
22-455
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer Key Registration (cont'd)
All keys are lost
1. P r e p a r e all n e w k e y s a n d h a v e the i m m o b i l i z e r P C M
code.
2. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r .
4. S e l e c t I M M O B I L I f r o m t h e I M M O B I L I Z E R S E T U P
menu.
5. S e l e c t A d d a n d D e l e t e k e y s , t h e n A L L K E Y S L O S T .
6. Do t h e registration a c c o r d i n g to t h e instruction of
HDS screen.
7. C h e c k if t h e e n g i n e c a n b e s t a r t e d by all the r e g i s t e r e d
keys.
8. W h e n p r o m p t e d by t h e H D S , do the k e y l e s s
transmitter programming.
Programming immobilizer-keyless control

unit
1. H a v e all r e g i s t e r e d k e y s a n d t h e P C M c o d e .
2. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e data link c o n n e c t o r .
4. S e l e c t I M M O B I f r o m t h e I M M O B I L I Z E R S E T U P m e n u .
5. S e l e c t R E P L A C E I M M O B I L I Z E R / K E Y L E S S C O N T R O L
UNIT REPLACE.
6. Do the registration a c c o r d i n g to t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s o n
the H D S s c r e e n .
7. C h e c k that the e n g i n e c a n b e s t a r t e d w i t h all
registered keys.
8. W h e n p r o m p t e d by t h e H D S , d o t h e k e y l e s s
transmitter programming.
22-456
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test

1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-130).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
(cont'd)
22-457
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Cavity
Wire
Terminal
name
LTGRN
B-CAN LO
Test condition
Disconnect the
gauge control
modul 32P
connector
Disconnect
under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector T
(34P)
WHT
B-CAN HI
Disconnect the
gauge control
module 32P
connector
Disconnect
under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector T
(34P)
5
LTBLU
K-LINE
Ignition switch
in LOCK (0)
Ignition switch
in LOCK (0)
22-458

between terminal No. 3 and
gauge control module 32P
between No. 3 terminal and
connector T (34P) terminal
No. 29:
the gauge control module
32P connectorterminal No.
20:
connector T (34P) terminal
No. 12:
DLC connector terminal
No. 7.
body ground.
There should be no
continuity.
Possible cause if
obtained
A short to g r o u n d
in the wire
Faulty unit; refer
to DLC
troubleshooting
(see page 11-226)
Cavity
Wire
PNK
Terminal
name
IMOCD
(S-NET)
Test condition
J u m p the SCS
line w i t h the
HDS, disconnect
PCM connector
A (49P), then
turn the ignition
switch to ON(II)
Disconnect the
battery negative
terminal
J u m p the SCS
line w i t h the
HDS, disconnect
PCM connector
A (49P)

ground:
There should be about 5V.
Measure the resistance

body g r o u n d :
There should be more than
50 kQ.
PCM connector A (49P)
terminal No. 46:
Possible cause if
obtained
A short to ground
in the wire
A n open in the
wire
Faulty imoes unit

(built into the
MICU)
Faulty MICU
A n open in the
wire
Faulty imoes unit
(built into the
MICU)
Faulty MICU
A n open in the
wire
(cont'd)
22-459
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the connector to the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and do these input tests at f o l l o w i n g the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-461).
NOTE: After replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, do the immobilizer key registration (see page 22-455).
Cavity
Wire
WHT
22-460
BRN
BRN
Terminal
name
VBU
IG1
LG3
Test condition
Under all
conditions
Measure the voltage

to body g r o u n d :
There should be
battery voltage.
Measure the voltage

to ground:
There should be
battery voltage.
Measure the voltage

to g r o u n d :
There should be less
than 0.2 V.
Ignition switch
ON (II)
Under all
conditions

the under-hood fuse/relay
box
A short to g r o u n d in the
wire
box
A short t o the g r o u n d in the
wire
Faulty PCM
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Replacement

1. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-130).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the

immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
3. Remove the t w o screws and the immobilizer-keyless

control unit.
4. Install the immobilizer-keyless control unit in the
5. After replacement, register the immobilizer-keyless
control unit (see page 22-455), and make sure the
immobilizer system works properly.
6. Program all of the customer's keys/keyless
transmitters (see page 22-455).
22-461
Hatch Glass Opener

22-462
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT

(Has built-in receiver)
Symptom Troubleshooting information, page 22-446
HATCH G L A S S R E L A Y
Test, page 22-96
(cont'd)
22-463
Hatch Glass Opener

DRIVER'S DOOR HATCH G L A S S OPENER SWITCH

22-464
BODY
Circuit Diagram
: B - C A N line
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BOX
No. 1 (MAIN) ( 1 2 0 A) No. 2 (IG) ( 5 0 A)
2 3 (10 A)
SWITCH
/BAT
D1
G20
W H T
BLU
No.

IGNITION
D4
PNK
(TRANSMITTER)
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
^26
V
IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
C O N T R O L UNIT
BOX
REAR WINDOW
WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH
B-CAN
HI
|4
WHT
I
B-CAN
LO
| 3
LTGRN
i
i
I
i
GRY
WHT
I
!T12
RR WIP
S W
B-CAN
HI
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the
power window
master switch)
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
I 33
35
L
HT
LT GRN
^
LTGRN
I
! T29
B-CAN
LO
MICU
- - G/H
GLASS/H
RLY
R13
G/H
T/G S W
RR
WIPRS
T5
S2
S W
G/H
DR S W
E12
T22
E6
T34
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
PNK
(Built in the power

window master switch)
YEL
BLU
BLK
BLK
ORN
LTBLU
4
*- RED/BLK - J
2
T\
D
<!
HATCH
GLASS
OPENER
SWITCH
STOP
SWITCH
REAR
WINDOW
WIPER
MOTOR
J\
U
5
BLK
LIGHT
<
(0.56 W )
DRIVER'S
DOOR
HATCH
GLASS
OPENER
SWITCH
HATCH GLASS
LATCH SWITCH
(Closed:
Hatch glass
open)
BLK
BLK
BLK
G601
G401
G601
HATCH GLASS
I OPENER
ACTUATOR
BLK
_LL
G601
G401
_D_
G401
22-465
Hatch Glass Opener

Driver's Door Hatch Glass Opener
Hatch Glass Opener Switch

Test/Replacement
1 . Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-9).
1. Remove the rear license t r i m (see page 20-220).

door power tailgate switch (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the opener switch.
1 2
3 4
3. Remove the t w o mounting screws, and then remove

the driver's door power tailgate switch (B).
\
Terminal
Position
ON
o - - o
o -
- o
OFF
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb

(A) or the switch.
22-466
3. Remove the t w o m o u n t i n g screws, and then remove

the hatch glass opener switch f r o m behind the panel.
2.
There should be continuity w h e n the opener switch
is pushed.
There should be no continuity w h e n the opener
switch is released.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the opener
switch.
Hatch Glass Latch Switch Test
Hatch Glass Opener Actuator Test
20-100).
2. Disconnect the 2 P connector (A) f r o m the latch switch

(B).

2.
There should be continuity w h e n the hatch glass is

open.
There should be no continuity w h e n the hatch glass
is closed.
20-100).
2. Disconnect the 2 P connector (A) f r o m the hatch glass

opener actuator (B).
3. Check actuator operation by connecting battery

voltage to terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2
momentarily. The actuator should work.
4. If the actuator does not work, replace the hatch glass
opener actuator assembly.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the latch

switch.
22-467
Parking and Back-up Sensor System

22-468
PARKING and BACK-UP

S E N S O R SWITCH
PARKING and BACK-UP

S E N S O R CONTROL UNIT
Input test, page 22-485
22-469

System Description
The parking and back-up sensor system has a total of six sensors in the front and rear bumpers. One corner parking
sensor at each corner of the vehicle, and t w o back-up sensors in the rear bumper. The sensors send out ultrasonic
waves, receive waves reflected by an obstacle, determine the distance, and use the buzzer and information display or
multi-information display (MID) to tell the driver that an obstacle is near.
The parking sensors w o r k a n y t i m e the shifter is out of park, until the vehicle reaches about 10 m p h (16 km/h). They do
not c o m e back o n until slowing d o w n t o about 5 m p h (8 km/h) or less.
The back-up sensors are only activated in reverse, until the vehicle reaches 9 m p h (15 km/h). They w i l l not be activated
again until slowing back d o w n to 5 m p h (8 km/h).
The parking and back-up sensor system is inactive w i t h its switch OFF.
The parking sensor buzzer, back-up sensor buzzer, and display are activated f o r 0.5 seconds w h e n the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II), and the parking and back-up sensor switch is turned f r o m OFF to O N .
The sensors must be free of debris, snow, and ice to w o r k correctly.
A system check is performed each time: The parking and back-up sensor switch is turned ON w i t h the ignition switch
to ON (II).
W h e n a failure occurs, the parking and back-up sensor control unit stores DTCs and the multi-information display
(MID) s h o w s CHECK PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM. W h e n the sensor unit detects that the failure is no longer present, it
clears the DTC and MID w i l l return t o normal.
Corner
The sensor determines between about 2.0 ft (60 cm) t o 1.5 ft (45 cm), 1.5 ft (45 cm) to 1.2 ft (35 c m ) , and 1.2 ft (35 cm) t o
0.66 ft (20 cm) f r o m the obstacle t o activate the w a r n i n g indicators accordingly.
The display and the corner buzzer are used to alert the driver, and the ON/OFF t i m e is varied as s h o w n in the table
b e l o w according to the sensed distance.
If an obstacle is sensed by more than one sensor, the buzzer sounds in sync w i t h the display of the sensor that is
closest to the obstacle.
Sensed distance
A b o u t 0.66 ft (20 cm) to 1.2 ft (35 cm)
A b o u t 1.2 ft (35 cm) to 1.5 ft (45 cm)
A b o u t 1.5 ft (45 cm) t o 2.0 ft (60 cm)
OFF time
0
8 0 + 2 0 ms
24020 ms
ON time
Continuous
80 2 0 m s
80 2 0 m s
Back-up
The sensor determines between about 5.0 ft (150 cm) at wall or 3.6 ft (110 cm) t o 2.0 ft (60 c m ) , 2.0 ft (60 cm) t o 1.5 ft
(45 c m ) , 1.5 ft (45 cm) to 1.2 ft (35 c m ) , and 1.2 ft (35 cm) t o 0.66 ft (20 cm) f r o m the obstacle t o activate the w a r n i n g
indicators accordingly.
The display and the back-up buzzer are used to alert the driver, and the ON/OFF t i m e is varied as s h o w n in the table
below according to the sensed distance.
If an obstacle is sensed by more than one sensor, the buzzer sounds in sync w i t h the display of the sensor that is
closest to the obstacle.
About
About
About
About
wall
Sensed distance
0.66 ft (20 cm) to 1.2 ft (35 cm)
1.2 ft (35 cm) to 1.5 ft (45 cm)
1.5 ft (45 cm) to 2.0 ft (60 cm)
2.0 ft (60 cm)to 3.6 ft (110 c m ) , or 5.0 ft (150 cm) at
22-470
OFF time
0
80 2 0 m s
2 4 0 2 0 ms
5 6 0 2 0 ms
ON time
Continuous
80 2 0 m s
80 2 0 m s
80 2 0 m s
BODY
Circuit Diagram
-: B-CAN line
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)

CT\JD
No. 2 (IG) (50 A) H1
BLU
COVJQ
No. 23 (10 A)
G20
D1
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
- WHT H O
CH
PNK
G2
PNK
_crxx>
O~\JD
)No.8
(7.5 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
D4
No. 10 (7.5 A)
D2
P5
WHT
PNK
No. 14 (7.5 A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
PNK
LTGRN
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROL AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
i LIGHT
M0.56W)
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
INFORMATION DISPLAY or
BLK
RED
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
j 30
[29
GRN
WHT
20
LT GRN
WHT
LTGRN
WHT
B-CAN
LO
B-CAN
HI
V <7
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
G401
MAIN SW
WHT
32
-AAAr
INDICATOR
(0.84 W)
IG1
B-CAN
LO
T29
REAR
SENSOR
BUZZER
FRONT
SENSOR
BUZZER
LTBLU
PARKING and BACK-UP
2 SENSOR SWITCH
5
- 1
YEL
16
B-CAN
HI
P10
! 7
IND
PARKING and BACK-UP SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
GND2
GND1
BOR
| 10
PUR
SOR
E2
11
12
BLK ORN
BOF
SOF
E1
|2
BLU
|3
GRY
RED
le
BOF
u
SOF
LEFT FRONT
CORNER
PARKING
SENSOR
E1
BOF SIDE R
SOF SIDE R
E1 SIDE R
BOR
BLK
i
G403
1
BLK
SOR
E2
LEFT REAR
CORNER
PARKING
SENSOR
BOR
CTR
L
SOR 3
CTR
L
E2
CTR
I
BOR
CTR
L
PNK
4 SOR
CTR
L
E2
CTR
L
5
RED
3
J
BOR 5
CTR
R
LEFT
REAR
BACK-UP
SENSOR
SOR 3
CTR
R
E2
1
CTR
R
PUR
GRN
6
4
2
BOF SIDE R
SOF SIDE R
RIGHT FRONT
CORNER
PARKING
SENSOR
E1 SIDER
PUR
6 BOR
CTR
R
GRN
4 SOR
CTR
R
RED
2 E2
CTR
R
BOR _5
SIDE
R
RIGHT
SOR
REAR
BACK-UP SIDE
SENSOR R
E2
SIDE
R
BRN
GRY
1
BLU
6 BOR
SIDE
R
RIGHT REAR
4 SOR CORNER
SIDE PARKING
R
SENSOR
2_ E2
SIDE
R
G403
22-471

DTC Troubleshooting
DTCB2601: Parking Sensor CPU Error
DTC B2602: Parking Sensor EEPROM Error


2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and than back to

ON (II).

ON (II).
Is DTC B2601
indicated?
Is DTC B2602
indicated?
YES-Replace the parking and back-up sensor control

unit.B

unit.B

time.B

time.B
22-472
DTC B2625: Left Front Sensor Failure

BODY
11. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and left

front corner parking sensor 6P connector terminals
LEFT FRONT CORNER PARKING S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
is DTC B2625 indicated?
BOF
(BLU)
time.B
5. Swap the left front corner parking sensor and the right
front corner parking sensor.
Y E S - R e p a i r the short to ground in the appropriate

wire.B
Is DTC B2625 indicated?

NO-Replace the left front corner parking sensor (see
page 22-488).B

13. Measure the voltage between body ground and left
6P CONNECTOR
9. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left front corner

parking sensor.
10. Disconnect the 16P connector f r o m the parking and
back-up sensor control unit.
BOF
(BLU)

Y E S - R e p a i r the short to power in the appropriate
wire.B
(cont'd)
22-473

DTCB2628: Right Front Sensor Failure
15. Connect the parking and back-up sensor control unit

16P connector terminals No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 to

PARKING AND BACK-UP S E N S O R CONTROL UNIT

16P CONNECTOR
S O F (GRY)
BOF
(BLU)

ON (II).
E1 (RED)
. 1 I
i\
10 11 12 13
//
NOTE: If DTC B2625 is also indicated, do the

Troubleshooting for that DTC first.
16
JUMPER
WIRE
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE
WIRE
Is DTC B2628
indicated?
time.B

16. Check for continuity between body ground and left
5. Swap the right front corner parking sensor and the left
front corner parking sensor.

6P CONNECTOR

Is DTC B2628
indicated?
NO-Replace the right front corner parking sensor (see
page 22-488).B
BOF
(BLU)

9. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the right front
corner parking sensor.
10. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left front corner
parking sensor.
Y E S - F a u l t y parking and back-up sensor control unit,
replace it (see page 22-485).B
NO-Repair the open in the appropriate
22-474
wire.B
11. Check for continuity between right front corner

parking sensor 6P connector terminals No. 2, No. 4,
and No. 6 and left front corner parking sensor 6P
connector terminals No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5
respectively.
RIGHT FRONT CORNER PARKING
BODY

14. Measure the voltage between body g r o u n d and right
SENSOR
SENSOR
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
, ,n
E1 S I D E R I X
(GRN)
2
I
rp
/
6}-
BOF SIDE R
(RED)
ISOF
BOF
E1
SOF
SIDER SIDER SIDER
(RED)
(GRN) (PUR)
SIDER
BOF SIDE R
(RED)
LEFT FRONT CORNER PARKING

SENSOR
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Repair the short to power in the appropriate
YES-Go to step 12.
wire.B
wire.B
12. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and right

NO-Faulty parking and back-up sensor control unit,

SENSOR
E1
SOF
BOF
SIDER SIDER SIDER
(RED)
(GRN) (PUR)
YES-Repair the short to g r o u n d in the appropriate
wire.B
NO-Go to step 13.
22-475

DTC B2629: Left Rear Sensor Failure

rear corner parking sensor 6P connector terminals
LEFT REAR CORNER PARKING S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
Is DTC B2629
BOR
(PUR)
indicated?
time.B

5. Swap the left rear corner parking sensor and the left
rear back-up sensor.
Y E S - R e p a i r the short to g r o u n d in the appropriate
wire.B
Is DTC B2629
indicated?
NO-Replace the left rear corner parking sensor (see
page 22-488).B

6P CONNECTOR

9. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left rear corner
parking sensor.
10. Disconnect the 16P connector f r o m the parking and
back-up sensor control unit.
BOR
(PUR)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - R e p a i r the short to power in the appropriate
wire.B
NO-Go to step 14.
22-476
BODY
DTC B2630: Center Left Rear Sensor Failure
15. Connect parking and back-up sensor control unit 16P

connector terminals No. 10, No. 11, and No. 12 to


16P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
|/110111112|13|/V116

BOR
(PUR)
SOR
(BLK)
E2
(ORN)
JUMPER
WIRE
JUMPER
WIRE
JUMPER
WIRE
Is DTC B2630
indicated?
time.B

6P CONNECTOR
5. Swap the left rear back-up sensor and the left rear
Is DTC B2630
indicated?
NO-Replace the left rear back-up sensor (see page
BOR
(PUR)
22-489).B
9. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left rear corner
parking sensor.
10. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left rear
back-up sensor.
Y E S - F a u l t y parking and back-up sensor control unit,
replace it (see page 2 2 - 4 8 5 ) .
wire.B
(cont'd)
22-477

rear back-up sensor 6P connector terminals No. 2,
L E F T REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R
6 P CONNECTOR
Q
E2
CTRL
(LTGRN)
SOR
BOR
CTRL CTRL
(PNK) ( L T B L U )

No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5 and left rear back-up sensor 6P
connector terminals No. 2, No. 4, and No. 6
respectively.
L E F T REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R 6 P CONNECTOR
E2CTRL
(LTGRN)
fl
^
BOR C T R L
(LTBLU)

(LTGRN)
(1
\2\3
BOR CTR L
(LTBLU)
YES-Repair the short to ground in the appropriate
wire.B
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Faulty parking and back-up sensor control unit,


L E F T REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR
n . n . n
[1|2l3[4l5[6]
E2
CTRL
(LTGRN)
SOR
CTRL
(PNK)
BOR
CTRL
(LTBLU)
Is there battery
voltage?

wire.B
22-478
L E F T REAR CORNER PARKING S E N S O R

6 P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair the open in the appropriate wire.B
DTC B2631: Center Right Rear Sensor Failure

BODY
11. Check for continuity between body ground and right

RIGHT REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR

ON (II).

E2
CTRR
(RED)

Is DTC B2631
BOR
SOR
CTRR CTRR
(GRN) (PUR)
indicated?
time.B
5. Swap the right rear back-up sensor and the left rear
back-up sensor.

wire.B
NO-Go to step 12.

Is DTC B2631
indicated?
NO-Replace the right rear back-up sensor (see page
22-489).B
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and right

RIGHT REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR

9. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the right rear
back-up sensor.
E2
CTRR
(RED)
10. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the left rear

back-up sensor.
BOR
SOR
CTRR CTRR
(GRN) (PUR)
Is there battery
voltage?

wire.B
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
22-479

DTC B2632: Right Rear Sensor Failure
15. Check for continuity between right rear back-up

sensor 6P connector terminals No. 2, No. 4, and No. 6
and left rear back-up sensor 6P connector terminals
No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5 respectively.

RIGHT REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR

ON (II).

E2CTRR
(RED)
E2CTRR
(RED)
rr
^
BOR CTR R
(PUR)
S O R CTR R
(GRN)
ii
n
(1 2 3 4 5 6)

Is DTC B2632
BOR CTR R
(PUR)
indicated?
time.B
LEFT REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR

5. Swap the right rear corner parking sensor and the

right rear back-up sensor.

NO-Repair the open in the appropriate w i r e . B

Is DTC B2632
indicated?
NO-Replace the right rear corner parking sensor (see
page 22-488).B
back-up sensor.
22-480

RIGHT REAR CORNER PARKING S E N S O R
6P CONNECTOR
BODY

15. Check for continuity between right rear corner
parking sensor 6P connector terminals No. 2, No. 4,
and No. 6 and right rear back-up sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5 respectively.
6P CONNECTOR
BOR
E2
SOR
SIDER SIDER SIDER
(BLU) (GRY) (BRN)
E2SIDER
(BLU)
<n>

wire.B
NO-Go to step 12.
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and right
J30R
SIDER
<S2)
BOR S I D E R
(BRN)
BOR SIDE R
(BRN)
n.[/\2\/\4\/\V
RIGHT REAR BACK-UP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR

replace it (see page 2 2 - 4 8 5 ) .
NO-Repair the open in the appropriate w i r e . B

6P CONNECTOR
02
E2
SIDE R
(BLU)
BOR
SOR
SIDER SIDER
(GRY) (BRN)
Is there battery
voltage?

wire.B
NO-Go to step 14.
22-481

DTC B2633: Front Bus Failure
DTC B2634: Rear Bus Failure


2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and than back to

ON (II).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and than back t o

ON (II).
Is DTC B2633
Is DTC B2634
indicated?
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 4 . B
Y E S - G o to step 4.B

time.B

time.B

Are DTCs B2625 and/or B2628
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B

NO-Replace the parking and back-up sensor control
unit.B
22-482
Are DTCs B2629, B2630, B2631, and/or

indicated?
B2632
Y E S - G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B

NO-Replace the parking and back-up sensor control
unit.B
BODY

Control Module
ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5.
CONNECTED UNITS.
detected?

unit.B
NO-Go to step 6.

8. Disconnect the parking and back-up sensor control
unit 16P connector.
parking and back-up sensor control unit 16P
connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7 respectively.
n
n
16
5 6
2
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
27 28 29 3 0 /
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
//
indicated?

Is DTC U0155
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)
4 5
|/1l0lllll2|l3|/l/1l6|
16P CONNECTOR
22-483

ON (II).
Is DTC U1282
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the MICU input test and perform all power,

g r o u n d and communication input tests (see page
22-153). I f t h e tests prove OK, replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-90).B
units.B
22-484
Parking and Back-up Sensor Control Unit Input Test/Replacement

1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-121).
2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) f r o m the parking and back-up sensor control unit (B).
PUR BLK ORN
BLK
BLK
If the terminals look O K , go to step 4.
(cont'd)
22-485

Parking and Back-up Sensor Control Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
BLK
Ignition switch ON
(II) and parking and
back-up sensor
switch ON
The parking and back-up sensor
switch indicator should come on.
BLU
Disconnect the left

front corner parking
sensor 6P connector

terminal No. 2 and left front corner
parking sensor terminal No. 6:
terminal No. 10 and left rear corner
terminal No. 10 and body g r o u n d :
terminal No. H a n d body ground:
10
11
12
22-486
GRY
RED
PUR
BLK
ORN
Disconnect the left

sensor 6P connector
Disconnect the left

sensor 6P connector
Disconnect the left

rear corner parking
sensor 6P connector
Disconnect the left

rear corner parking
sensor 6P connector
Disconnect the left

rear corner parking
sensor 6P connector

is not obtained
Blown No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in
box
Blown bulb
Faulty parking and back-up
sensor switch
5. Reconnect the 16P connector to the parking/back-up sensor control unit, and d o these input tests at the following
connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity
Wire
13
BLK
16
BLK
PNK
GRN

and parking and back-up
sensor switch ON
Test condition

ground:

is not obtained
Poor ground (G403)
V.

ground:
Poor ground (G403)

V.

ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.

Faulty parking and back-up sensor
switch
22-487

Parking and Back-up Sensor Switch
Test/Replacement
Corner Parking Sensor

Replacement

20-121).
1. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-224) or

the rear bumper (see page 20-198).

parking sensor switch (B), then remove the switch
f r o m the switch panel.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) f r o m the corner

parking sensor (B).
n
2 3|4
n
5 | 6
3. Remove the retainer (C) and remove the sensor.

Terminal
Position
ON
OFF
o - - o --o o -- - o
o --- o

illumination bulbs (A) or the switch.
22-488
Back-up Sensor Replacement

2. Disconnect the 6 P connector (A) f r o m the back-up
sensor (B).
3. Remove the retainer (C) and remove the back-up

sensor.
22-489
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS)

MICU
22-490
BODY
DRIVER'S S E A T
RECLINE MOTOR
T e s t page 22-539
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR

T e s t page 22-539
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR

T e s t page 22-539
POWER S E A T
A D J U S T M E N T SWITCH
POWER S E A T CONTROL UNIT

SLIDE MOTOR
T e s t page 22-539
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SWITCH
POWER MIRROR
SWITCH

22-491

Circuit Diagram - Power Seat
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A)

-BLU-
No. 23 (10 A)
D1
G20
D4
IGNITION SWITCH
-WHT-
-PNK-
PNKIG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
AUXILIARY
No. 9 (20 A)
<r\jo
-BLU-
No. 10 (20 A)
-ORN-
GRN
2
YEL
o c
POSITION
T
Z_ Iz l
BUTTON
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SWITCH
! 1
I INDICATOR 1
' (LED)
j INDICATOR 2 ,
' (LED)
\ LIGHTS
' (LEDx3)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3
ORN
PUR
LTGRN
BLK
LTBLU
WHT
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
WHT LTGRN
I
BLK
A
G401
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Built in the power window master switch)
SG
32
BLK
G401
22-492
I
I
I
I
I
111 ] 33
VBU B-CAN B-CAN

HI
LO
BODY
- - : B-CAN line
; Other communication line
No. 10(7.5 A)
CTNoO
- PNK -
IG1
MICU
" H
- PNK -
VBU
B-CAN B-CAN
HI
LO
j T12
T29
I
I
I
I
(TRANSMITTER )
WHT
WHT LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
-WHT-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- f I
I
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN
HI
14
I
I
ORN
A8
VMP1
BLU
YEL
B34
A1
VMP2
PG2
A4
B9
I
I
WHT
LTGRN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-_I
I
I
WHT LTGRN
WHT
B36
i
1
i
1
[ B40
[ B39
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
IG1
VBU
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
PG1
SG
A18
|3
-{---
LT GRN
B-CAN
LO
UART
B26
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
I SWITCH
(Closed:
In P position)
J B38
POWER MIRROR
CONTROL UNIT
BLK
G503
G101
(cont'd)
22-493

Circuit Diagram - Power Seat (cont'd)
GRN
GRN
2
FRONT
UP-DOWN
22-494
SLIDE
DRIVER'S POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
REAR
UP-DOWN
RECLINE
BODY
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT

FHSE
SVCC
B12
SLSE
WHT
YEL
| B13
| B29
-YEL-
YEL
YEL
YEL
I.
REAR
UP-DOWN
POSITION
SENSOR
SLIDE
POSITION
SENSOR
RECLINE
POSITION
SENSOR
3
ORN
SEG
ORN
FRONT
UP-DOWN
POSITION
SENSOR
J B10
GRY
- YEL-
YEL
RESE
RHSE
| B11
B15
ORN
-ORN-
ORN
ORN
-ORN-
22-495

Circuit Diagram - Power Mirror

No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A)
No. 2 (IG) (50 A)
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the
power window
master switch)
No. 23 (10 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
D1
D4
-PNK
W H T r O BAT
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
PNK
ORN
YEL
YEL"
LTBLU
YEL
2
POWER MIRROR SWITCH

UP_
P10
RIGHT
LEFT
WHT
YEL
j T12
, T29
WHT
LTGRN
LTGRN
I
5
BLU/WHT
RIGHT
BLK
BLK
GRN
10
MUL
GND
BLK
BLK
10
RED
LEFT
11
12
MLDR MRDR
MLDL MRDL
UART
13
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
PUR LT GRN
PNK
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the
power window
master switch)
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
+B
IG1
MIRROR
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT
SEN
LSEV
FEED
SG
RSEH
LSEH
PNK
LT BLU
RSEV
| 20
BRN
RED
1 9
GRN
GRY
RED
LTGRN
RED
POWER
SEAT
CONTROL
UNIT
/LEFT
MIRROR
POSITION
SENSOR
TILT
(VERTICAL) \
SWING
(HORIZONTAL)
5
LTGRN
_LL
G401
22-496
_ Q _
G401
4T
TILT
(VERTICAL) \
SWING
(HORIZONTAL)
5
LTGRN
/RIGHT
MIRROR
POSITION
SENSOR
BODY
MICU
WHT
T REAR WINDOW
CLIMATE
.K 1 DEFOGGER/
, POWER MIRROR CONTROL
UNIT
o DEFOGGER
j[ SWITCH
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
i
i
i
I
I
I
I
I
i i
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
WHT
LTGRN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-#
LTGRN-
-ORNLEFT POWER MIRROR
"1
IS
No. 26 (20 A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
1
[35
[33
MIR ACT B-CAN B-CAN
DR HEAT HI
LO
MIRROR ACTUATOR
DOWN J"
LTGRN
A35
- : B-CAN line
LEFT
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
UP
BRN
14
WHT
16
15
WHT
25
VMP
DR

(Built in the power window master switch)
UART
RIGHT
GRN
BRN
G401
MIR ACT MIR ACT MIR ACT

DR UD DR COM DR LR
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT
PUR
MIR ACT MIR ACT MIR ACT

AS UD AS COM AS LR
17
No. 30 (20 A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
18
V
LTBLU
ORN
GRY
BRN
I 29
MIR ACT
AS HEAT
UP
RIGHT
DOWN J
POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
VMP AS
UART
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
LEFT
MIRROR ACTUATOR
RIGHT POWER MIRROR
DLf\
i
G404
22-497

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1802: Power Seat Control Unit Failure
ON (II).
Is DTC B1802
indicated?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B

time.B
DTC B1825: Power Seat Slide Motor Pulse

Error
ON (II).
3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch in all
directions for at least 1 second each.
NOTE: DTC B1825 is stored w h e n the slide switch is
operated more than 1 second after the seat moves to
the most forward or most backward position, even
w h e n the system is OK.
Is DTC B1825
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the slide motor/position
sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the power seat control unit
connector.B
Is DTC B1836 also
indicated?
YES-Go to the DTC B1836 troubleshooting.B

NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs B1826, B1827 and/or B1828 also
indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Go to step 7.
ON (II).
8. Operate the slide switch for 2 seconds, and check the
slide motor operation.
Does the slide motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
10. Disconnect power seat control unit connector B (40P).
11. Disconnect the slide motor/position sensor 6P
connector.
22-498
12. Check for continuity between power seat control unit

connector B (40P) terminals No. 11 and No. 29 and
slide motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 3 respectively.
SLIDE MOTOR/POSITION S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
S L S E (GRY)
BODY
16. Measure the voltage between slide motor/position

sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1 ( + ) and No. 3
(-).
S L S E (GRY)
5 6
S E G (ORN)
S E G (ORN)
Y ^ s LSE (GRY)
n 1n
'1 l / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12
i3|/h5|/|/M/Mr
M22|23|24|^26|^29|/|/|/M34|/l36|/|38|39|40
S E G (ORN)
Is there about 5 V?
POWER S E A T CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (40P)
Is there
YES-Faulty slide motor/position sensor, replace i t . H

NO-lf there is no voltage, replace the power seat
control unit. If there is battery voltage, repair a short in
the w i r e (sensor l i n e ) . !
continuity?
YES-Go to step 13.

13. Check for continuity between body ground and power
seat control unit connector B (40P) terminal No. 11.

S L S E (GRY)
M / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 110111112 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
M22|23|24|/|26|/l/l29|/l/|/I/l34|/l36|/l38|39|40

connector.
20. Check f o r continuity between power seat control unit
S E G (ORN)
S V C C (YEL)
YES-Repair a short t o g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
I S V C C (YEL)
1 I / 1 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | X 9 Hoi 11 [12 1 3 L / | 1 5 | / L / | / ^ L / |
M22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|y1/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
NO-Go to step 14.

S E G (ORN)
14. Reconnect power seat control unit connector B (40P).


(cont'd)
22-499

2 1 . Disconnect the
motor/position
motor/position
motor/position
6P connector f r o m the front up-down

sensor and the rear up-down
sensor, then disconnect the recline
22. Check for continuity between body ground and slide

motor/position sensor 6P connector terminal No. 4.
Pi
5 6
|
Is the fuse OK?

YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck f o r proper
operation.B
28. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (18P).
connector.
(=1
3 4
J
27. Check the No. 10 (20A) fuse in the auxiliary

under-hood fuse box.
S V C C (YEL)

connector A (18P) terminals No. 7 and No. 17 and
J=EL
J2
S L M 4- (GRN)
S L M - (RED)L
NO-Go to step 23.

25. Measure the voltage between power seat control unit
POWER S E A T CONTROL UNIT CONN ECTOR B (40P)
S L M - (RED)
/
////
1 2
4
9 10 11
6 7 8
16 17 18
S V C C (YEL)
1 |/|3|4|5|6|7|/|9|10|11|12 13|/|15|/|/|/|/|/|
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/M/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S E G (ORN)
Is there battery voltage when the slide switch is

operated?
YES-Replace the slide motor/position sensor (see
page 20-151).B
NO-Replace the power seat control unit (see page
22-528).B
22-500
S L M + (GRN)
POWER S E A T C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR A (18P)

3 1 . Check for continuity between body ground and slide

motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals No. 5
n
1
3
J
7
6
SUVI-(REDH~
@
J S L M + (GRN)
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to ground in the w i r e . B
32. Test the slide motor (see page 22-539).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit, (see page
22-528)B
NO-Replace the slide motor/position sensor (see
page 20-15D.B
BODY
DTC B1826: Power Seat Front Up-down Motor

Pulse Error
ON (II).
NOTE: DTC B1826 is stored w h e n the front up-down
switch is operated more than 1 second after the seat
moves to the most up or most d o w n position, even
4. Check for the DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC B1826
indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the front up-down
motor/position sensor is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at the power seat control
unit connectors.B
Is DTC B1836 also
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC B1836 troubleshooting.B

NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs B1825, B1827 and/or B1828 also
indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.
ON (II).
8. Operate the front up-down switch for 2 seconds, and
check the front up-down motor operation.
Does the front up-down motor run smoothly?
NO-Go to step 26.
11. Disconnect the front up-down motor/position sensor
6P connector.
(cont'd)
22-501

front up-down motor/position sensor 6P connector
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/
POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

16. Measure the voltage between front up-down
(+)and No.3(-).
nI
1
SEG (ORN)
3
FHSE (WHT)
4

POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
FHSE (WHT)
XFHSE(WHT)
SEG (ORN)
1 l / l 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
SEG (ORN)
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (40P)
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S - F a u l t y front up-down motor/position sensor,

replace i t . l

control unit (see page 22-528). If there is battery
voltage, repair a short in the w i r e (sensor l i n e ) . !

FHSE (WHT)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to g r o u n d in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 14.
22-502

6P connector.

BODY


POSITION S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
S V C C (YEL)
1
S E G (ORN)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / 1 / | / | '
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/l/l29|/|/|/|/[34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S V C C (YEL)
I S V C C (YEL)
n
n
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 1 / 1 / | / | / | / |
|/l22|23|24|/l26|/|yl29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|yl38|39|40
S E G (ORN)

Is there battery voltage when the front up-down switch is

operated?
YES-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor.B
22-528).B
2 1 . Disconnect the
motor/position
motor/position
motor/position
S E G (ORN)
6P connector f r o m the slide

sensor and the rear up-down
22. Check for continuity between body ground and front

up-down motor/position sensor 6P connector
terminal No. 4.
FRONT UP-DOWN M O T O R /

27. Check the No. 10 (20A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse box.
Is fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck for proper
operation.B
6P connector.
S V C C (YEL)
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
22-503

n
1=1
7
6
F H M + (BLU)
(ft)
2
9 10 11
/
////
4
F=l

ON (II).
I - (PUR) I
DTC B1827: Power Seat Rear Up-down Motor

Pulse Error
16 17 18
F H M + (BLU)
POWER S E A T CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (18P)

NOTE: DTC B1827 is stored w h e n the rear up-down

switch is operated more than 1 second after the seat
moves to the most up or most d o w n position, even
4. Check for the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC B1827
indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the rear up-down

motor/position sensor is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at the power seat control
unit c o n n e c t o r s . !
NO-Repair an open in the
wire.B
3 1 . Check for continuity between body ground and front


Is DTC B1836 also

indicated?
Y E S - G o to the DTC B1836 t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g *

NO-Go to step 6.
FHM-
F H M + (BLU)
Are DTCs B1825, B1826, and/or B1828 also
indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.

ON (II).
8. Operate the rear up-down switch for 2 seconds, and
check the rear up-down m o t o r operation.
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to g r o u n d in the w i r e . H
Does the rear up-down motor run smoothly?
NO-Go to step 32.
32. Test the front up-down m o t o r (see page 22-539).

Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the power seat control
unit.B
NO-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor.B
22-504
NO-Go to step 26.

11. Disconnect the rear u p - d o w n motor/position sensor
6P connector.

rear up-down motor/position sensor 6P connector
REAR UP-DOWN M O T O R /
n I
RHSE (BLU)
S E G (ORN)
BODY

16. Measure the voltage between rear up-down
( + )and N o . 3 ( - ) .
REAR UP-DOWN M O T O R /
RHSE (BLU)
6
n
n I R H S E (BLU)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 i 3 M i 5 M / l /
S E G (ORN)
l/M
M22|23|24|/|26LXl/l29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36M38|39|40
S E G (ORN)
POWER S E A T C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR B (40P)

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty rear up-down motor/position sensor,

replace it.B
YES-Go to step 13.


control unit (see page 22-528). If there is battery
voltage, repair a short in the wire (sensor line).B
POWER S E A T C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR B (40P)

R H S E (BLU)

19. Disconnect the rear up-down motor/position sensor
6P connector.
, r
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 V 9 |10|11|12 1 3 L X | 1 5 L / L X | / | / | / |
|/l22|23|24M26|/|yl29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
22-505

rear up-down motor/position sensor 6P connector

REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/

1
S E G (ORN)
S V C C (YEL)
R=l
'i M s U l s l e M /
9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / | '
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S V C C (YEL)
S E G (ORN)
j S V C C (YEL)
n
ri
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | l 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S E G (ORN)
Is there battery voltage when the rear up-down switch is

operated?

wire.B
sensor.B
6P connector f r o m the slide

sensor and the front up-down
22. Check for continuity between body ground and rear

terminal No. 4.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/
1
3
u'
1=1
S V C C (YEL)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the
wire.B
NO-Go to step 23.

22-506
YES-Replace the rear up-down motor/position

22-528).fl
21. Disconnect the

motor/position
motor/position
motor/position
27. Check the No. 9 (20A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood

fuse box.
Is fuse OK?
YES-Go t o step 28.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck f o r proper
operation.B
29. Disconnect the rear up-down motor/position sensor
6P connector.

connector A (18P) terminals No. 2 and No. 10 and rear
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/
n
1
R H M + (YEL) j
RHM -
BODY
32. Test the rear up-down motor (see page 22-539).

Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit (see page
22-528).B
NO-Replace the rear up-down motor/position
sensor.B
Pi
6
iL
RHM (PNK)
(PNK)I
POWER S E A T CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (18P)

wire.B
3 1 . Check for continuity between body ground and rear

REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/
R H M + (YEL)
R H M - (PNK)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I
22-507
Driving Position M e m o r y S y s t e m (DPMS)

DTC B1828: Power Seat Recline Motor Pulse
Error

recline motor/position sensor 8P connector terminals
RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION S E N S O R 8P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
1 2
4

NOTE: DTC B1828 is stored w h e n the recline switch is
operated more than 1 second after the seat moves to
the most forward or most backward position, even
7 8
S E G (ORN) |
R E S E (PNK)
nF
JRESE(PNK)
1 l/l 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | I | I 3 | / | 1 5 | X 1 / M / ^ ,
l/|22l23l24l/|26|^
I S E G (ORN)

Is DTC B1828

Indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the recline motor/position

sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the power seat control unit
connector.B
YES-Go to step 13.

Is DTC B1836 also
Indicated?

Y E S - G o t o the DTC B1836 t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g *

R E S E (PNK)
NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs B1825, B1826, and/or B1827 also
indicated?
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/]/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
NO-Go to step 7.
ON (II).
8. Operate the recline switch for 2 seconds, and check
the recline motor operation.
Does the recline motor run smoothly?
NO-Go to step 26.
11. Disconnect the recline motor/position sensor 8P
connector.
22-508
YES-Repair a short to g r o u n d in the w i r e . l
NO-Go to step 14.
14. R e c o n n e c t p o w e r s e a t control unit c o n n e c t o r B (40P).

16. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n recline motor/position
s e n s o r 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 8 ( + ) a n d No. 7
BODY
2 0 . C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n p o w e r s e a t control unit

c o n n e c t o r B (40P) t e r m i n a l s No. 15 a n d No. 29 a n d
recline motor/position s e n s o r 8P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s
No. 5 a n d No. 7 r e s p e c t i v e l y .
(-).
1 2
4 5
1
4
/
7 8
2
6
SVCC (YEL)L
S E G (ORN)
SEG(ORN)
R E S E (PNK)
9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/l36|/|38|39|40
I S E G (ORN)
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S - F a u l t y recline motor/position s e n s o r , r e p l a c e
it.B
NO-lf t h e r e is no v o l t a g e , r e p l a c e t h e p o w e r s e a t
c o n t r o l unit ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 5 2 8 ) . If t h e r e is battery
v o l t a g e , r e p a i r a s h o r t in the w i r e ( s e n s o r line).B
18. D i s c o n n e c t p o w e r s e a t control unit c o n n e c t o r B (40P).
19. D i s c o n n e c t the r e c l i n e motor/position s e n s o r 8 P
connector.

Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 1 .
N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in the w i r e . B
2 1 . D i s c o n n e c t the
motor/position
motor/position
motor/position
6P c o n n e c t o r f r o m the s l i d e
s e n s o r , the front u p - d o w n
s e n s o r , a n d the rear u p - d o w n
sensor.
2 2 . C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
recline motor/position s e n s o r 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l
No. 5.
1
4
2
5
F=l
S V C C (YEL)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t to g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
2 3 . R e c o n n e c t p o w e r s e a t control unit c o n n e c t o r B (40P).
(cont'd)
22-509
Driving Position M e m o r y System (DPMS)

D T C



S V C C (YEL)
n
\ | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12|13|/116|/|/|/|/|/|
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S E G (ORN)
1 2
4 5
REM-I- (WHT)
Is there battery voltage when the recline switch is

operated?
YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor (see

page 20-152).B
22-528).
27. Check the No. 9 (20A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse box.
Is fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 28.
-I R E M -
1 2
4
9 10 11
I=I
6 7 8
F=l
///
/
/
(GRN)
6 7 8
16 17 18
REM(GRN)

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 31.

NO-Replace the fuse and recheck for proper

operation.!
1 2
4 5 6

29. Disconnect the recline motor/position sensor 8P
connector.
R E M * (WHT)
7 8
R E M (GRN)
Is there
continuity?

NO-Go to step 32.
22-510
32. Test the recline m o t o r (see page 22-539).

Is the motor OK?
22-528)1
NO-Replace the recline motor/position sensor (see
page 2 0 - 1 5 2 ) .
DTC B1829: A/T P Signal and VSP Signal Have

an Illegal Combination
3. Test drive at 6 m p h (10 km/h) for 10 seconds.
Is DTC B1829
indicated?
Check for loose or poor c o n n e c t i o n s *
5. Check the P indicator of the A/T gear position
indicator and the MIL.
Does the P indicator and MIL come on?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the automatic transmission
system*
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check for the gauge control module DTCs w i t h the
HDS.
Are there any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the gauge control m o d u l e *

NO-Replace the power seat control u n i t *
22-511

DTC B1830: Right Mirror Horizontal Sensor
Open
10. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P)

terminal No. 7 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)
J U M P E R WIRE

J t

ON (II).
10 11
1 3 | l 4 l l 5 | l 6 l l 7 l l 8 | l 9 | 2 0 | / l 2 2 | / 24
/
3. Operate the right power mirror in each direction w i t h

the power mirror switch.
Is DTC B1832
indicated?
time.B
11. Check for continuity between right power mirror

connector (16P) terminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .
RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (16P)

6. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20-9).
7. Disconnect the power mirror control unit 24P
connector.
S E N F E E D (RED)
9 10 11 12 13
8. Disconnect the right power mirror 16P connectors.

connector (13P) terminal No. 6 and body ground.

S E N F E E D (RED)
1
9 10 11 12 13
NO-Go to step 10.
22-512

power mirror connector (16P) terminals No. 4 and No.
3 individually.
R S E V (GRN)
R S E H (BRN)
Is there

R S E V (GRN)
R S E H (BRN)
9 10 11 12 13
9 10 11 12 13
14. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and right

power mirror connector (16P) terminals No. 4 and No.
3 individually.
r -1
1 2 3 4 5 6
BODY
3 4
5 6
//
///
continuity?
YES-Repair a short t o g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
YES-Go t o step 15.

terminals No. 19 and No. 20 t o body g r o u n d w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
15. Check for continuity between power mirror control

unit connector (24P) terminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .

S G (LTGRN)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 l Q | l 0 l l 1 L^H
'13I14I15II6I17II8I19I20IXI22IXI24
J U M P E R WIRE
n
n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11
13 14 15 16 17
18 19 2 0 2 _ 2 2
7
2_
24
J U M P E R WIRE
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w i r e . l
(cont'd)
22-513

terminal No. 6 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
20. Measure the voltage between power mirror control

unit connector (24P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
JUMPER WIRE
SEN FEED (RED)
SG (LTG RN)
p
8
9 10 11
13ll4ll5|l6ll7ll8ll9|20lXl22lXl24

connector (16P) terminal No. 5 and body g r o u n d .
fl
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 z
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 7 . 2 2 / 2 4
7
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty right power m i r r o r position sensor;
replace the power mirror actuator (see page
22-414).a
SG (LTGRN)
1
10 11 12 13

YES-Go to step 18.
18. Reconnect the power m i r r o r control unit connector
(24P).
22-514
NO-Substitute a known-good power mirror control

unit, and recheck. If DTC is gone, the original power
mirror control unit is faulty; replace it (see page
22-532).
DTC B1832: Left Mirror Horizontal Sensor

Open

JUMPER WIRE

ON (II).
BODY
1 2
n
4 5
fl
6 7
8 9 10 11
13 14 15 16 17 18
2_
19 2 0 2 _ 2 2
3. Operate the left power mirror in each direction w i t h

the power mirror switch.
24

Is DTC B1830
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time.B
11. Check for continuity between left power mirror

LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (16P)
S E N F E E D (RED)

7. Disconnect the power mirror control unit 24P
connector.
11
1 2 3 4
5 6
9 10 11 12 13
8. Disconnect the left power mirror 16P connectors.

S E N F E E D (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12 13

YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I
(cont'd)
22-515

power mirror connector (16P) terminals No. 4 and
No. 3 individually.
L S E V (LT BLU)
L S E H (PNK)
9 10 11 12 13

power mirror connector (16P) terminals No. 4 and
No. 3 individually.
LSEV (LTBLU)
/ /
9 10 11 12 13
Is there
L S E H (PNK)
continuity?
YES-Repair a short to g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 13.

terminals No. 4 and No. 5 to body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
15. Check for continuity between power mirror control

unit connector (24P) terminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .
POWER MIRROR C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)

S G (LTGRN)
J U M P E R WIRE
J U M P E R WIRE
fl
1 2
1
2 3
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
24

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w i r e J
22-516
9 1 0 1 1 /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 2 2 2 2
10 11
22

terminal No. 6 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
BODY

unit connector (24P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
JUMPER WIRE
S G (LTGRN)
10 11
S E N F E E D (RED)
13ll4|l5ll6|l7ll8|l9l20|/^22|/l24
7 8 9 10 11 7
13 14 15 16 17' 18 -19 2 0 / 2 2 7 2 4
6 7 8

S G (LTGRN)
5 6
is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty left power mirror position sensor; replace
the power mirror actuator (see page 2 2 - 4 1 4 ) .
unit, and recheck. If DTC is gone, the original power
mirror control unit is faulty; replace it (see page
22-532).

YES-Go t o step 18.
18. Reconnect the power mirror control unit connector
(24P).
22-517

DTC B1836: Power Seat Position Sensor
Circuit Short
9. Check for continuity between body ground (motor

body) and terminal No. 4 of the slide motor/position
sensor, the front up-down motor/position sensor, and
the rear up-down motor/position sensor.
SLIDE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

ON (II).
J '
Pi
6
S V C C (YEL)

direction for at least 1 second each.
Is DTC B1836
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

Check for loose or poor connections at the power sear
control unit c o n n e c t o r s . !
7. Disconnect the 6P connectors f r o m the slide
motor/position sensor, the front up-down
motor/position sensor, and the rear up-down
motor/position sensor, and disconnect the 8P
connector f r o m the recline motor/position sensor.
YES-lf the front or rear up-down motor/position
sensor is faulty, replace the seat frame assembly (see
page 20-148). If the slide motor/position sensor is
faulty, replace the slide motor/position senser (see
page 2 0 - 1 5 1 ) . !
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between recline motor/position
sensor 8P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground
(seat frame).

S V C C (YEL)
F=I
S V C C (YEL)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / h 5 M / | / W f
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
NO-Go to step 9.
22-518
YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor (see

page 20-152).B
22-528).B
DTC B1837: Memory Position Delay
11. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS, and wait for 6 seconds.

t o follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
12. Move the motors shown one at a t i m e , and check the

operation time.
Power mirror actuator (up, d o w n , left, right)
Power seat (slide forward/backward, recline

forward/backward, front u p - d o w n , rear up-down)

ON (II).
Does any motor fail to run smoothly?
3. Move both power mirrors to the full up and full left

positions with the power mirror switch.
YES-Go to the failed motor test:

Power mirror actuator test (see page 22-413).
Power seat motor test (see page 22-539).
4. Move the power seat to the full front up and full rear
up positions, then slide the seat all the w a y back and
completely recline the seat-back backward w i t h the
power seat adjustment switch.
5. Put this seating position into m e m o r y with the driving
position m e m o r y switch.
If the motor is OK, check the engagement of the

motor g e a r . H
N O - G o to the power seat control unit input test (see
page 2 2 - 5 2 8 ) .
6. Using the power seat switches, move the seat away

f r o m the positions just memorized.
7. Recall the m e m o r y positions w i t h the driving position
m e m o r y switch.
8. Wait for 3 minutes.
Are any DTCs
indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.

>Are
any DTCs other than B1837
indicated?

22-519

DTC B1843: UART Communication Error


2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and then back t o
ON (II).
' l | / | 3 | 4 | | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/!22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38i39|40
5

Is DTC B1843
UART (GRY)
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Move the power mirror in each direction with the
power mirror switch.
Does the power mirror move in each direction
smoothly?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Go t o step 10.
7. Disconnect power mirror control unit connector (24P).
connector B (40P) terminal No. 38 and power mirror
control unit connector (24P) terminal No. 13.
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 l / | l 5 | / W M / f
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/l34|/|36|/|38|39|40
UART (GRY)
It
1 j 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 j 7 I 8 j 9 MohlU^
13|l4ll5ll6ll7|l8ll9l20|/ l22lXl24
x
UART (GRY)

YES-Go t o step 9.
22-520
YES-Repair a short in the w i r e . B
unit and recheck. If DTC B1843 is still indicated,
replace the power seat control unit.B

11. Disconnect power mirror control unit connector (24P).
unit connector (24P) terminal No. 11 and No. 22, and
between connector (24P) terminal No. 24 and No. 22
individually.
IG1 (YEL)
BODY
DTC B1844: Power Seat Slide Switch Circuit

Malfunction
ON (II).
3. Operate the slide switch in each direction for at least 1
second.
1 I 2I 3| 4I 5I 6I 7I 8I 9 h o | l l | / 1
"l3ll4ll5ll6ll7ll8ll9|20lXl22lXl24
GND (BLK)
+B MIRROR (WHT)

YES-Replace the power mirror control unit.B
IMO-Do the power mirror control unit input test (see
page 22-532).B

7. Disconnect the power seat adjustment switch 12P
connector.
seat control unit connector B (40P) terminals No. 1,
S L F W (LT GRN)
SCOM
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / 1 / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/l/l29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
S L B W (PUR)
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
22-521

9. Check for continuity between these power seat
control unit connector B (40P) terminals:
No. 1 and No. 7

No. 1 and No. 24

No. 7 and No. 24
SCOM
(GRN)
DTC B1845: Power Seat Recline Switch Circuit

Malfunction
SLFW (LTGRN)
1 l/l 3 1 4 j 5 1 6 | 7 1/F h0hlll2ll3LXll5l/l/L^l/|/T

9
|/122|23|24|/126^
S C O M (GRN)
1 l / l 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 l / l 9 110111112113/1151/1/1//^ ,
|/|22|23|24|/|26M/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/
S L B W (PUR)
,SLFW (LTGRN)
1 l/l 3I4 I 5I 6 I 7 l/l 9 Il0hl|l2ll3|/h5|/|/|/|/|^

|/22|23|24M26|7|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|3^^
S L B W (PUR)

2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and then back t o
ON (II).
3. Operate the recline switch in each direction for at least
1 second.
Is DTC B1845
indicated?
YES-Repair a short in the w i r e . H
NO-Go t o step 10.
10. Test the power seat adjustment switch (see page
22-538).

connector.
Is the switch OK?

22-528).
NO-Replace the power seat adjustment switch (see
page 22-538).H
REFW ( L T B L U )
SCOM
'iMsUlslelrl/
9 |10|11|12 i 3 i / i i 5 i / i / i / i / i / r
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
REBW (WHT)
YES-Repair a short t o ground in the wire.l
NO-Go t o step 9.
22-522

No. 1 and No. 6
No. 1 and No. 23
No. 6 and No. 23
SCOM
(GRN)
_ ^ _ ^ R E F W (LTBLU)
n
1 |/1 3 1 4 j 5 j 6 j 7 l / l 9 110|11|12113L/115L/LXL/L/^T ,
M22l23l24M26l/l/29^
SCOM (GRN)
1 |/| 3 j 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 [ / j 9 | 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 L / 1 1 5 / / / / P T
l/22l23l24L/26l//29l/|/l/l/34l/36l/
REBW (WHT)
iREFWJLT BLU)
1 \/\ ? I f I 5 | 6 | 7 l / l 9 Il0hlll2ll3l/115L/1/1///1
l/22l23l24l/26M/29l//l/7l34l/36L/38l^
REBW (WHT)
BODY
DTC B1846: Power Seat Front Up-Down

Switch Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: if you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
ON (II).
3. Operate the front up-down switch in each direction for
at least 1 second.
Is DTC B1846
indicated?
NO-Go to step 10.
22-538).
Is the switch OK?
22-528).B
page 22-538).B

connector.
FHUP (BLU)
FHDN (RED)
SCOM
(GRN)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10]11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 M / | / | / M
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/l/|29l/M/l/|34|/|36^|38|39|40
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
22-523

DTC B1847: Power Seat Rear Up-Down Switch

Circuit Malfunction
No. 1 and No. 4

No. 1 and No. 5

No. 4 and No. 5
SCOM
(GRN) r W H
FHDN
(RED)

ON (II).
1 |/|3|4|5|6|7|/f9|l0|H|l213|/|15|/|/|/|/|/|
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
SCOM.
3. Operate the rear up-down switch in each direction for

at least 1 second.
FHUP

1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / ^ |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/l34|/|36|/|38|39|40
FHDN
FHUP
(RED)Ejyp<BLU)
Is DTC B1847
indicated?
n
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40

NO-Go to step 10.
22-538).
Is the switch OK?

connector.
SCOM
(GRN)
RHDN
(GRY)

22-528).B
page 2 2 - 5 3 8 ) .
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 [ 7 | / 9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / 1 / | / I / I
|/|22|23|24|/|26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/|34|/|36|/|38|39|40
RHUP (PNK)
NO-Go to step 9.
22-524

No. 1 and No. 3
No. 1 and No. 22
No. 3 and No. 22

Control Module (VSP/NE frame)
P O W E R S E A T C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (40P)
SCOM
(GRN)
BODY
RHDN
] (GRY)

ON (II).
1 [ / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 [ / f 9 | l 0 | l l | l 2 13|/|15|/|/|/|/|/|
|/l22|23|24H26|/|/|29|/|/|/|/l34|/|36|/l38|39|40

S C O M (GRN)
L/l 3 | 4 ] 5 ] 6 I 7 \ / \ 9 110111112113L/115L/L/L//U4
fe DTC U0155
indicated?
JRHUP(PNK)
" | R H D N ( G R Y ) n.
TJ7T3 1 4 1 5 1 6 | 7 l / l
9 110111112113L/115L/1/1/M^
L^22l23l24l/26l//29l/l/l/lyl34l7|36|/38|3^C
R H U P (PNK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

power seat control unit and the gauge control
module.!
CONNECTED UNITS.
YES-Repair a short in the w i r e . l
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 6.

22-538).
detected?

Is the switch OK?

22-528)B
page 2 2 - 5 3 8 ) .
(cont'd)
22-525

connector B (40P) terminals No. 39 and No. 40 and the
gauge control module 32P connector terminals No. 19
DTC U0199: Lost Communication With P/W

(DR Lock SW frame)
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | /
9|10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
| / | 2 2 | 2 3 | 2 4 | / | 2 6 | / | / l 2 9 | / | / l / l / | 3 4 | / | 3 6 | / | 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0
B-CAN L O ( L T G R N )
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back t o

ON (II).
B-CAN HI (WHT)
l | 2 | / t / | 5 | 6 / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 111121131141/1161
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)
B-CAN
HI (WHT)
G A U G E C O N T R O L MODULE 32P CONNECTOR


Is DTC U0199
indicated?
power seat control unit and the door multiplex control
unit.B
22-359).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the power seat control u n i t . B

CONNECTED UNITS.
Is the power window master switch (door
control unit) detected?
multiplex
YES-Replace the power seat control u n i t B

NO-Go to step 6.
connector.
22-526

connector B (40P) terminals No. 39 and No. 40 and the
door multiplex control unit 37P connector terminals
1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 [ / 9 |10|11|12 1 3 | / | 1 5 | / | / | / | / | / |
|/|22|23|24|/l26|/1/l29|/l/l/|/l34|/l36|/|38|39|40
B-CAN LO
(LT BRN)
B-CAN HI
BODY

ON (II).
Is DTC U1282
indicated?
YES-Replace the power seat control u n i t . B

|l3ll4|/l6|l7Ml9l20|2l|22|23|
I26|27|28l29l30l31132|33|34|35|36|
B-CAN LO (LT GRN)
B-CAN HI (WHT)

power seat control unit and the MICU.B
YES-Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the
power w i n d o w master switch (see page 2 2 - 2 9 8 ) .
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e between the door
multiplex control unit and the power seat control
unit.li
22-527

Power Seat Control Unit Input Test/Replacement
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior t r i m .
3. Disconnect the 40P connector (A) and 18P connector (B) f r o m the power seat control unit (C).
LL
/
YEL
BLU
///
/
/
26
9 10 11 12 13
29
WHT
PUR
j Wire side of
' female terminals
PNK
15
34
PNK
ORN
/
/
/ / / / / / // // / /
22 23 24
RED
J J
6 7 l
16 17 18
r l9 120 11 4
CONNECTOR A (18P)
CONNECTOR B (40P)
PUR
BLK
ORN
YEL
36
WHT
Wire side of
female terminals
38 39 40
GRY
LTGRN
WHT
22-528
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
B38
GRY
Disconnect the
power mirror
control unit 24P
connector
A7
RED
Under all
conditions
A17
GRN
A9
WHT
A11
GRN
A6
PUR
A16
BLU
A2
YEL
A10
PNK
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions

between terminal B38 and
power mirror control unit
24P connector terminal
No.13:
Connect terminals A1 and
A7, terminals A 4 and A17:
The seat should slide
backward.
The seat should slide
forward.
The seat should recline
forward.
A 1 1 , terminals A4 and A9:
The seat should recline
backward.
The front of seat should
move d o w n .
The front of seat should
move up.
The rear of seat should
move up.
A10, terminals A4 and A2:
The rear of seat should
move d o w n .

obtained
An open in the w i r e
Faulty slide motor

Faulty recline motor

Faulty front up-down m o t o r

Faulty rear up-down motor

(cont'd)
22-529

Power Seat Control Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the connectors to the power seat control unit, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity
Wire
A4
A18
B9
BLK
Under all
conditions
A1
BLU
Under all
conditions
A8
ORN
Under all
conditions
B34
YEL
Ignition switch ON
(ID
B36
WHT
Under all
conditions
B1
GRN
B7
LTGRN
Slide switch in
FORWARD
position
B1
GRN
B24
PUR
B1
GRN
B6
LTBLU
B1
GRN
B23
WHT
B1
GRN
B5
BLU
B1
GRN
B4
RED
B1
GRN
B22
PNK
B1
GRN
B3
GRY
22-530
Test condition
Slide switch in
BACKWARD
position
Recline switch in
FORWARD
position
Recline switch in
BACKWARD
position
Front u p - d o w n
switch in UP
position
Front up-down
switch in DOWN
position
Rear up-down
switch in UP
position
Rear up-down
switch in DOWN
position

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.
Measure the voltage
between the terminals:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage
0.2 V.

obtained
Poor ground (G503)

box
box
Faulty driver's power seat
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
adjustment switch
Cavity
Wire
B15
YEL
Run the power

seat motors
B10
PNK
Run the recline

motor
B29
ORN
B11
GRY
B29
ORN
B12
WHT
B29
ORN
B13
BLU
B29
ORN
B26
PNK
Test condition
Run the slide

motor
Run the front

up-down motor
Run the rear

up-down motor
Transmission
range switch in P
position
Transmission
range switch in
any other position
than P

Measure the voltage
between to ground:
There should be about 10 V
or more.
Measure the voltage
between terminals B10 and
B29:
There should be about 2.5 V
average.
Measure the voltage
B29:
average.
Measure the voltage
B29:
average.
Measure the voltage
B29:
average.
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:

obtained
Faulty position sensor
Faulty power seat control unit
Faulty recline position sensor

Faulty slide position sensor

Faulty front up-down position

sensor
Faulty rear up-down position
sensor
Poor ground (G101)
22-531

Power Mirror Control Unit Input Test/Replacement
3. Disconnect the 24P connector (A) f r o m the power mirror control unit (B).
GRN
WHT
ire side of female terminals
GRY
22-532
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
13
GRY
Disconnect power
seat control unit B
(40P) connector
14
GRN
Under all
conditions
15
BRN
15
BRN
16
WHT
LTBLU
17
ORN

power seat control unit B
(40P) connectorterminal No.
38:
and No. 24, and terminals
No. 15 and No. 22:
The left mirror should move
up.
Connect terminals No.15
No. 14 and No. 22:
The left mirror should move
down.
No. 16 and No. 22:
The left mirror should swing
left.
No. 15 and No. 22:
The left mirror should swing
right.
No. 24, and terminals No. 17
and No. 22:
The right mirror should
move up.
No. 3 and No. 22:
move d o w n .
No. 18 and No. 22:
swing left.
No. 17 and No. 22:
swing right.
17
ORN
18
GRY
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions

obtained
An open in the wire
Faulty left mirror actuator

An open in the wire
Faulty left mirror actuator

Faulty right mirror actuator

Faulty right mirror actuator

(cont'd)
22-533

Power Mirror Control Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the connector to the power mirror control unit, and do these input tests at the following connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity
Wire
22
BLK
Under all
conditions
11
YEL
Ignition switch ON
(ID
24
WHT
Under all
conditions
RED
PUR
LTGRN
PNK
10
GRN
PNK
LTGRN
Ignition switch ON
(II), and mirror
select switch in
LEFT, then mirror
d o w n switch
pressed
Ignition switch ON
(II), and mirror
select switch in
RIGHT, then mirror
d o w n switch
pressed
Ignition switch ON
(II), and mirror
select switch in
LEFT or RIGHT,
then mirror up
switch pressed
S w i n g the left
mirror f r o m full left
to full right
LTBLU
LTGRN
20
BRN
LTGRN
19
GRN
LTGRN
22-534
Test condition
Move the left

mirror f r o m full up
to full d o w n
Swing the right

mirror f r o m full left
to full right
M o v e the right
mirror f r o m full up
to full d o w n

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
voltage.

obtained
Poor ground (G401)


ground:
voltage.


ground:
voltage.

Measure the voltage

between terminals No. 4 and
No. 6:
to 4.5 V.
Measure the voltage
between terminals No. 5 and
No. 6:
to 4.5 V.
Measure the voltage
between terminals No. 20
and No. 6:
to 4.5 V.
Measure the voltage
between terminals No. 19
and No. 6:
to 4.5 V.
Faulty left mirror position sensor

Faulty left mirror position sensor

Faulty right mirror position sensor

Faulty right mirror position sensor

BODY

2. Remove the power w i n d o w master switch (see page 22-298).
\
12
/
|
A*
6
7>/
9 10 11
13 1 4 ~ 7 l 6 17 " 7 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3
25
I
26 2 ^
30 31 3 2 3
34 35 36
: i__ l
24
Wire side of
female terminals
37
I
LTBLU
LTGRN
PUR
BLK
ORN
(cont'd)
22-535

Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
5. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
GRN
Under all
conditions
YEL
Under all
conditions
26
LTBLU
Under all
conditions

No. 13:
The driving position
m e m o r y switch indicator 2
should come o n .
No. 13:
m e m o r y switch indicator 1
should come o n .
and No. 13:
m e m o r y switch lights
should come o n .

obtained
Faulty driving position m e m o r y
switch
switch
switch
6. Reconnect the connector to the power w i n d o w master switch, and do these input tests at the f o l l o w i n g connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the power w i n d o w master
NOTE: After replacing the power w i n d o w master switch, reset the power w i n d o w control unit.
Test condition
Cavity
Wire
32
BLK
Under all
conditions
13
WHT
Under all
conditions
16
LTGRN
Driver position 2
button pressed
Driver position 2
button released
17
PUR
Driver position 1
button pressed
Driver position 1
button released
19
ORN
Seat SET button

pressed
Seat SET button

released
22-536

ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
voltage.
ground:
0.2 V.
Measure the voltage t o
ground:
There should be about 5 V.
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:
ground:
0.2 V.
ground:

obtained

switch
switch
switch
switch
switch
switch
BODY
Driving Position Memory Switch Test/Replacement

2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) f r o m the driving position m e m o r y switch (B).
1 I2l3l4l5[6l7l8t/[1Q
3. Remove the t w o screws, then remove the switch f r o m the door panel.
Terminal
1
Position
10
\
0
SET
BUTTON
ON
OFF
POSITION 1
BUTTON
o o
ON
POSITION 2
BUTTON
a o
ON
INDICATOR 1
INDICATOR 2
Kt>
v+V
Lights
r\
22-537

Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and the recline cover f r o m the driver's seat (see page 20-145),
then remove the t w o screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).
CO
3
8
9 10 11 12
3. Disconnect the 12P connector f r o m the power seat adjustment switch.

Terminal
10
Position
SLIDE
SWITCH
RECLINE
SWITCH
FRONT
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
REAR
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
12
FORWARD
BACKWARD
-o
FORWARD
BACKWARD
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
-o
o-
22-538
11
-o
BODY
Driver's Power Seat Motor Test

2. Disconnect the 6P and 8P connectors f r o m each
power seat motor.
3. Test each motor by connecting power and ground

according to the table. W h e n the motor stops running,
\ ^
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
1
3
SLIDE MOTOR
1
3
5
Direction
SLIDE
MOTOR
Terminal side of
male terminals
FORWARD
BACKWARD
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
Terminal
Direction
FRONT
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
\ ^
\ ^
Terminal
Direction
REAR
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
W i r e side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
\ ^
Direction
RECLINE
MOTOR
R E C U N E MOTOR
\ ^
6
\ ^
Terminal side of
male terminals
Terminal
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
\ .
Terminal
\ .
FORWARD
BACKWARD

replace the appropriate motor.
Front up-down motor (see page 20-148)
Rear up-down motor (see page 20-148)
NOTE: The front and rear up-down motors are part of
the seat frame.
22-539
Power Tailgate
DRIVER'S DOOR
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH S E N S O R

POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
POWER TAILGATE
INSIDE BEEPER
POWER T A I L G A T E
DRIVE UNIT
Power Tailgate Motor T e s t page 22-578
TAILGATE O U T E R HANDLE SWITCH

POWER TAILGATE O U T S I D E BEEPER

POWER TAILGATE BUTTON

IGNITION K E Y
TRANSMITTER
T e s t page 22-189
Programming, page 22-455
22-540
(Including closer motor and latch/ratchet switch)

Closer Motor Test, page 22-580
22-541
Power Tailgate
System Description
The power tailgate can be opened and closed automatically by operating the driver's d o o r power tailgate switch
(open/close), inside switch (for close), or the keyless transmitter. The power tailgate has t w o safety functions for
safeguarding passengers: obstruction detection and fall-down detection.
Basic Operation
OPEN: The power tailgate can be opened by operating the driver's door power tailgate s w i t c h , or the keyless transmitter
under the f o l l o w i n g conditions:
Tailgate is fully closed (full-latched position is detected.).
Driver's door and Passenger's door lock knob switches are in UNLOCKED position.
The remote unlock button is pressed twice, and then the tailgate button is pressed and held for 2 seconds (unless
customized setting are set t o unlock all doors).
Shift lever is in Park position.
Vehicle speed is less than 1.2 m p h (2km/h).
Closer unit detects the neutral position.
Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 1 1 V .
System is not in fail-safe m o d e .
Side impact is not detected.
Glass hatch must be closed.
CLOSE: The p o w e r tailgate can be closed by operating the driver's door p o w e r tailgate s w i t c h , inside tailgate switch, or
the keyless transmitter under the f o l l o w i n g conditions:
Tailgate is fully open.
Pinch sensor detects no obstruction.
Closer unit detects the neutral position.
Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11 V.
System is not in fail-safe m o d e .
Side impact is not detected.
Glass hatch must be closed.
Obstruction Detection Function

If any obstruction is detected w h i l e the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the tailgate w i l l stop and the reverse
operation is activated. A n obstruction is detected by the tailgate pinch sensor and the pulser in the drive unit. I f t h e
obstruction is detected w h e n the shift lever is in any other position than P, i f t h e vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 m p h (2 km/h),
or if side impact condition occurs, the tailgate stops m o v i n g immediately.
22-542
Fall-down Detection Function

This function prevents the tailgate f r o m suddenly falling d o w n because of an accumulation of snow, or other causes. If
the pulser in the drive unit detects abnormal pulses, the tailgate starts to open. If this operation is activated twice, the
tailgate will close automatically. I f t h e obstruction detection function detects any obstruction several times during this
fall-down detection function, the tailgate stops m o v i n g .
NOTE: Ifthe tailgate falls repeatedly, replace the tailgate support strut (see page 20-205).
A: Auto open action completed
B: Tailgate falling is detected
C: Clutch reconnect w h e n falling is detected
D: Auto open action (power tailgate motor reverse action)
E: Close function activated f r o m fully open position
Power Tailgate Buzzer Beep Pattern

Condition
W h e n the tailgate starts to open automatically
W h e n the tailgate starts to close automatically
W h e n the reverse operation is started after the tailgate
has detected any obstruction
W h e n the reverse operation is started by switch
operation
W h e n the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 m p h (2 km/h) while
the tailgate is opening automatically
W h e n the operating time is over
W h e n the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2mph (2 km/h) while
the tailgate is closing automatically
When the tailgate is not fully-latched, and the following
condition is met: The shift lever is any position other
than P, the brake pedal position switch and parking
brake switch are OFF, and the vehicle speed exceeds
1.2mph (2 km/h).
W h e n the tailgate fall-down detection function is
activated
Beep Pattern
Beeps 1 time
Beeps 1 t i m e
Beeps 3 times
Beeps 3 times
Beeps intermittently until the condition is corrected
Beeps 3 times
Beeps continuously
22-543
Power Tailgate
Resetting the Power Tailgate Control Unit
If the battery terminal is disconnected or No. 23 (10 A)
fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box is removed while
the power tailgate is operating, the power tailgate will
not be able to open or close automatically until it is reset.
To reset the system, fully close the tailgate manually.
Once the battery terminals are reconnected or No. 23
(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box is replaced,
the power tailgate system will automatically reset. Make
sure the power tailgate operates properly.
22-544
22-545
Power Tailgate
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY IGNITIOT^SWITCH
BOX
No. 1 (MAIN) (120 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A) H1
No. 10(7.5 A)
AT
E28
G20
D2
01,
<r\jQ
f
cr\jo
BLU
WHT
PNK
IG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
PNK
G2
P5
MICU
D2
G3
WHT -
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
rz
E38
T29 JT12
I
WHT
LT GRN WHT
I
I
I
INSIDE
I
TAILGATE I
SWITCH
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-LTGRN - - - ^
No. 8
(20 A)
-CTNjO
PNK
No. 1
(40 A)
I
I*
I
I
BRN
AUXILIRY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
WHT
LTGRN
I
LT GRN WHT
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
_i_
MULTI
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
B12
VMP2
A2
VMP1
-3
DOOR
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Built into the
power window
master switch)
C6
C7
B-CAN B-CAN
LO
HI
PTG+
RED
B11
C14
VBU
IGN1
(+B BACK UP)
-N-
PTG- CLU+ CLU- SVCC SENA SENB SEG1 BUZ INDOOR

C13 B14 B15 B18
WHT
A1
1. POWER
/I)TAILGATE
/MOTOR
A2
BLU
B1
GRN
B3
POWER
TAILGATE
CLUTCH
BLK LT GRN YEL LT GRN
B4
B5
B6
RED
BUZ OUTDOOR
ORN
PNK
BLU/BLK
B8
POWER
TAILGATE
POWER
TAILGATE
INSIDE
BEEPER
POWER TAILGATE
SENSOR
7 TRANSMISSION
~ RANGE SWITCH
BEEPER ^ T 6f i Ini?P
P position)
6
DRIVE UNIT
BLK
_Q_
G601
22-546
G503
G101
BRN
-PURPUR
WHT
(t) H,84 W)
GHT
PUR
PUR
V L / (O.l
POWER
TAILGATE
RIGHT
PINCH
SENSOR
POWER
TAILGATE
LEFT
PINCH
SENSOR
LTGRN
BRN
GRY
No. 22 (10 A) FUSE

(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
DOOR
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Built into the
power window
master switch)
BRN
BODY
s\ LIGHT
Vv>(0.56W)
1 POWER
TAILGATE
\) OUTER
HANDLE
SWITCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR
POWER
TAILGATE
SWITCH
YEL
BLU
B5
SCOM
C9
OHSW
C8
GTCL
CARGO
AREA
LIGHTS
WHT
BLK
INSIDE
TAILGATE
SWITCH
RED
RED
G401
B13
TSER
B16
TSEL
B17
SEG2
C5
DRSW
SG PG1 PG2
B19 A 1
A4
CLM+
B9
PUR
CLMB20
YEL
NTL
| C3
WHT
RS
RACT
I
PNK
RED
FULL
|C2
C10
LTGRN
HALF
LTBLU
ORN
SEG3
GRN
V
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
LTGRN
I E36
MICU
LTGRN
BLK
BLK BLK
CLOSER
MOTOR
)i v v
NEUTRAL
SWITCH
RELEASE
SWITCH
RATCHET
SWITCH
UNDERDASH
FUSE/
RELAY
BOX
y
FULL
LATCH
SWITCH
HALF
LATCH
SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT

BLK
22-547
Power Tailgate
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1352: Power Tailgate Control Unit
Internal (EEPROM) Error
DTC B1375: Driver's Side PTG Switch Circuit

Malfunction

NOTE:

If the power tailgate motor does not operate, test the

motor (see page 22-578) first.
3. Remove the No. 23 (10 A) fuse f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
4. Wait for 1 minute, then reinstall the No. 23 (10 A) fuse

to the under-hood fuse/relay box.
5. Close the tailgate manually (not w i t h the power
tailgate switch).
Is DTC B1352

ON (II).
3. Operate the dashboard power tailgate switch for
more than 1 second.
Is DTC B1375
indicated?
Indicated?
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B

NO-lntermittent failure, the power tailgate control
unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections between the power tailgate control unit
and the M I C U .

power tailgate control unit and the driver's door
power tailgate s w i t c h . H
6. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the driver's door
power tailgate switch.
7. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C
(14P).
8. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 5 and body
ground.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
DRSW (BRN)
9 10 11
13 14
NO-Go to step 9.
22-548
9, Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B

(20P).
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and body
ground.
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
//
DTC B1376: Tailgate Outer Handle Switch

Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
If the power tailgate motor does not operate, test the
motor (see page 22-578) first.
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS, and wait for 2 seconds.
S C O M (WHT)
BODY
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0

ON (II).
3. Pull the tailgate outer handle for more than 2 seconds.
Is DTC B1376
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Do the driver's door power tailgate switch test (see
page 22-579).

Check for loose or poor connections at the power
tailgate control unit and at the tailgate outer handle
switch. B
6. Open the power tailgate with the keyless transmitter.
Is the switch OK?

7. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the tailgate outer

handle switch.
NO-Replace the driver's door power tailgate switch

(see page 22-579).B

(14P).
ground.
<,
9 10 11
13 14
OHSW (YEL)
N O - G o to Step 10.
(cont'd)
22-549
Power Tailgate
10. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
DTC B1377: Power Tailgate inner Switch

Circuit Malfunction

ground.



ON (II).
S C O M (WHT)
n
//
3. Open the tailgate w i t h the keyless transmitter.
4. Push the inside tailgate switch for more than

2 seconds.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0

Is DTC B1377
Y E S - R e p a i r a short t o g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
NO-Go t o step 12.
12. Test the tailgate outer handle switch (see page
22-582).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n i t . B
NO-Replace the tailgate outer handle switch (see
page 22-582).B
indicated?
power tailgate control unit and the inside tailgate
switch.
7. Disconnect the 5P connector f r o m the inside tailgate
switch.
(14P).
ground.

9 10 11
OHSW (YEL)
13 14
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to g r o u n d in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 10.
22-550

(20P).
ground.
PI
<-
PI
//
PI
DTC B1378: Power Tailgate Right Pinch

Sensor Circuit Malfunction
2. Close the tailgate w i t h the keyless transmitter or

driver's door power tailgate switch.
S C O M (WHT)
1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless

transmitter.

BODY
PI
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0

ON (II).

YES-Go to step 6.
12. Test the inside tailgate switch (see page 22-579).
Is the switch OK?
NO-Replace the inside tailgate switch (see page
22-579).B

power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate
right pinch sensor.B
7. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the power tailgate
right pinch sensor.
9. Measure the voltage between the harness side of
power tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector
terminals No. 2 ( + ) and No. 1 ().
POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
SEG2
(BRN)
TSER
(LTGRN)

YES-Replace the power tailgate right pinch sensor
(see page 22-581 ).B
(cont'd)
22-551
Power Tailgate
(20P).
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 13 and power
tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No.
2.
n
//
1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless

transmitter.
2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transmitter or
driver's door power tailgate switch.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
T S E R (LTGRN)

DTC B1379: Power Tailgate Left Pinch Sensor

Circuit Malfunction

ON (II).
TSER (LTGRN)
Is DTC B1379
POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
YES-Gotostep13.

tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No.
1.
<-
PI
//

left pinch sensor.
9. Measure the voltage between the harness side of
power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector
terminals No. 2 ( + ) and No. 1 ( ).
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
YES-Go to step 6.
power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate left
pinch sensor.B
indicated?
POWER TAILGATE LEFT PINCH

S E G 2 (BRN)
S E G 2 (BRN)
POWER
TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
q?
SEG?
(BRN)
2
TSEL
(GRY)

NO-Repair open in the w i r e . B
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the power tailgate left pinch sensor (see

page 22-581 ).B
NO-Go to step 10.
22-552

(20P).
tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2.
n
C.
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
T S E L (GRY)

tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
PI
//

closer unit.B

closer unit.
POWER TAILGATE C L O S E R UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
S E G 2 (BRN)
POWER
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
indicated?
PI
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
9. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer

unit 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 5.


ON (II).
6. Open the tailgate w i t h the power tailgate outer

handle.
YES-Go to step 13.
1. Open the tailgate w i t h the tailgate outer handle.
YES-Go to step 6.
POWER
1
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH

Is DTC B1380
T S E L (GRY)
PI
DTC B1380: Tailgate Closer Unit Neutral

PI
2. Close the tailgate manually.

n
BODY
S E G 2 (BRN)
1
u
SEG3
(GRN)
I
2
I
3
6
d
NTL
(WHT)

YES-Faulty neutral switch, replace the power tailgate
latch assembly (see page 20-235).B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
22-553
Power Tailgate
1
2

(20P).
15. Connect battery power to power tailgate control unit
connector B (20P) terminal No. 9 and ground the
terminal No. 20 momentarily. (The motor should run
in the release direction.)
r6
13. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position

using a screwdriver.
NTL(WHT)

CLM+
(PUR)
JUMPER
WIRE
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
YES-Replace the power tailgate latch assembly (see

page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
20
CLM
(YEL)
(14P).
ground.
9 10 11
Is the motor OK?

YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the power
tailgate control unit and the power tailgate closer unit.
If the wire harness are OK, replace the power tailgate
latch assembly (see page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 11.
NTL(WHT)
13 14

NTL (WHT)
9 10 H /
5
7
14
S E G 3 (GRN)

YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l
22-554
17. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the tailgate closer

unit.
CD
SEG3
(GRN)
DTC B1381: Tailgate Closer Unit Release

1. Open the tailgate w i t h the tailgate outer handle
switch.
I
CO
1 2
u
BODY
NTL
(WHT)

ON (II).
Is DTC B1381
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power
tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control u n i t . B
NO-Replace the power tailgate latch assembly (see
page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .

power tailgate control unit and the tailgate closer
unit.l
6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.
closer unit.
3
SEG3
(GRN)
4
RS
(PNK)
YES-Faulty release switch, replace the power tailgate
closer unit (see page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
22-555
Power Tailgate
I
2

(20P).
15. Connect battery power t o power tailgate control unit
connector B (20P) terminal No. 9 and ground terminal
No. 20 momentarily. (The motor should run in the
release direction.)
I
3
13. Turn the tailgate lock latch t o the fully-closed position


R S (PNK)
JUMPER
WIRE
c
1
V3>
CLM+
(PUR)
p
//
n
n
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit (see page

20-235).B
(14P).
ground.
Is the motor OK?

YES-Go t o step 16.
NO-Repair an open in the w i r e between the power
tailgate control unit and the power tailgate closer unit.
If the wire harness is OK, replace the power tailgate
closer unit (see page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
R S (PNK)
n
CLM
(YEL)
9 10 11
13 14

R S (PNK)
1 2 3
5 6 7
8 9I10I11M1314
S E G 3 (GRN)

NO-Go t o step 13.
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.1
NO-Go t o step 17.
22-556
17. Disconnect the 6P connector f r o m the tailgate closer

unit.
BODY
DTC B1382: Tailgate Closer Unit Full Latch

5
SEG3
(GRN)
6
RS
(PNK)

ON (II).
Is DTC B1382
tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control unit.B
page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
closer unit.B
6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.
closer unit.
SEG3
(GRN
6
1
b
FULL
(LTGRN )
YES-Faulty full latch switch, replace the power
tailgate latch assembly (see page 20-235).B
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
22-557
Power Tailgate
unit 6P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground.
I
1

unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 2 and No. 1 1 .
I
>
14. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the

tailgate lock latch f r o m the fully-locked position to
release position.
6
' 1
FULL (LTGRN)
(J(LTGRN)
8 9 1 0 1 1 ~ 7 l 3 14
S E G 3 (GRN)
page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
NO-Go to step 12.

(14P).
ground.
FULL (LTGRN)
<-
9 10 11
13 14
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w i r e between the
power tailgate control unit and the under-dash
fuse/relay box or between the under-dash fuse/relay
box and the power tailgate closer unit. Ifthe wire
harness are OK, replace the MICU (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Go to step 14.
22-558
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n i t l

NO-Go to step 16.

closer unit.
BODY
DTC B1383: Tailgate Closer Unit Ratchet

ON (II).
SEG3
FULL
( G R N ) | ^ ] (LTGRN)

Is DTC B1383
page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
closer u n i t . B
closer unit.
1
r
1 2 3 4 5 6
SEG3
(GRN)
RACT
(ORN)
YES-Faulty ratchet switch, replace the power tailgate
latch assembly (see page 20-235).B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
22-559
Power Tailgate
1 2
5
1
LI
14. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the

tailgate lock latch f r o m the fully-locked position to
release position.
13. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-locked position

RACT (ORN)

c
n
page 20-235).H
1 2
t>
6 7
8 9 10 11
u
13 14
RACT
(ORN)
SEG3
(GRN)

(14P).
ground.
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
13 14
RACT (ORN)
22-560
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit (see page
22-576).B
NO-Go to step 16.

closer unit.
BODY
DTC B1384: Tailgate Closer Unit Half Latch

1
1
u
SEG3
(GRN)

ON (II).
6
i.
RACT
(ORN)

Is DTC B1384
YES-Repair an open in the w i r e between the power
tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control u n i t . !
NO-Replace the power tailgate latch assmbly (see
page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
power tailgate control unit and the tailgate closer
unit.B
closer unit.
1
1
J
G
R
<
N
SEG3
"-(2>
6
i
HALF
(LTBLU)
YES-Faulty half latch switch, replace the power
tailgate latch assembly (see page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
22-561
Power Tailgate
14. Turn the emergency lever of the tailgate and release

the tailgate lock latch f r o m the fully-locked position.
unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 1 and No. 1 1 .
1
1 2
1
1
3
6
1
LI
HALF ( L T B L U )
HALF
(LTBLU)
9 10 11
U
(14P).
ground.
UNIT CONNECTOR C ( U P )
->
9 10 11
13 14
YES-Repair a short to g r o u n d in the wire.l
22-562
n =*\
13 14
U
SEG3 (GRN)

page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
HALF
(LTBLU)
22-576).

closer unit.
i
1
SECS3
(GR N)
V-
NOTE:
If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
I f t h e motor does not operate, check the No. 1 (40A)
fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse/relay box. I f t h e
fuse is OK, do the power tailgate motor test (see page
22-578).
\ 4 5 6
DTC B1386: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse A

Circuit Malfunction
HAL F
(LT EJLU)

2. Close the tailgate automatically w i t h the keyless
transmitter or inside tailgate switch.
ON (II).
Y E S - R e p a i r an open in the w i r e between the power


page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
Is DTC B1386
indicated?
power tailgate control unit and the drive u n i t . B
7. Connect the voltmeter to power tailgate control unit
(cont'd)
22-563
Power Tailgate
8. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control
while the tailgate is opening and closing w i t h the
keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch.
//
10. Disconnect drive unit connector B(8P).

ground.


(20P).

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
U
SENA
(LTGRN)
SEG1
(LTGRN)
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
S E N A (ORN)
Does it alternate between about 0 V and 5 V?

NOTE: Digital voltmeter will read about 2.5 V.

22-576).B
and drive unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 5 and
No. 8 individually.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
n
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
S E N A (ORN)
SEG1 (LTGRN)
1
4
u
1=1
/
/
SEG1 (LTGRN)
3
8
L
DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor A, replace the drive
unit (see page 22-581 ) .
22-564
DTC B1387: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse B

Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:

while the tailgate is opening and closing w i t h the
keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch.

follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
If the m o t o r does not operate, check the No. 1 (40A)
fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe
fuse is OK, do the power tailgate motor test (see page
22-578).
2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless
ON (II).
Is DTC B1387
indicated?

c
PI
PI
11 12 13 14
r*
//
PI
5 16 17 18 9 2 0
u
SENB
(YEL)
PI
(Q\
SEG1
[LTGRN)
Does it alternate between about 0 V and 5 V?

NOTE: Digital voltmeter will read about 2.5 V.
22-576).B
NO-Go to step 9.

power tailgate control unit and the drive u n i t . B
7. Connect the voltmeter to power tailgate control unit B
connector (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18.
(cont'd)
22-565
Power Tailgate
(20P).
10. Disconnect drive unit connector B (8P).
ground.
DTC B1388: Power Tailgate Drive Motor

Circuit Malfunction
L O p e n the tailgate.
ON (II).
PI
PI
PI
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
S E N B (YEL)

Is DTC B1388
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
power tailgate control unit and the drive unit.B
NO-Go to step 12.
7. Disconnect drive unit connector A (2P).

and drive unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 6 and
No. 8 respectively.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
PI
->
PI
//
r1

unit connector A (5P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5 and
body ground individually.
CONNECTOR A (5P)
PI
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
SEG1
(LTGRN)
P T G - (WHT)
P T G + (RED)
SEG1
(LTGRN)
DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor B, replace the drive
unit (see page 2 2 - 5 8 1 ) . !
22-566
NO-Go to step 9.

connector A (5P) terminal No. 5 (or No. 3) and ground
the terminal No. 3 or (No. 5).

CONNECTOR A (5P)
BODY

(20P).
unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2 and
body ground individually.
PTG(WHT)
PTG+
(RED)
C L U + (BLU)
1 |2|3|4|5"7Xl8J9|7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
C L U - (GRN)
10. Check the power tailgate motor operation.

Does the motor run normally?

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Faulty power tailgate motor, replace the drive
IMO-Gotostep13.
13. Connect battery power to the power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 2 and ground to
terminal No. 1. Check for clutch operation.
0-

CLU+
(BLU)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20
C L U (GRN)
Can you hear the clutch
operate?
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Faulty power tailgate clutch, replace the drive
(cont'd)
22-567
Power Tailgate
unit connector A (5P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.

ground.

CONNECTOR A (5P)

VMP1
(BRN)
n
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
I VMP2 (PNK)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Check the No. 1 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for
an open in the wire between the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box and the power tailgate control u n i t . B

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 16.

fuse/relay box and the power tailgate control u n i t . H
tailgate control unit connector A (5P) terminals No. 1
CONNECTOR A (5P)
PG1 (BRN)
PG2 (BLK)
22-576).B
(G602).B
22-568
DTC B1389: Power Tailgate Motor Clutch

Circuit Malfunction
BODY

ground.



ON (II).
//
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
I VMP2(PNK)

Is DTC B1389
indicated?
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n i t . B
power tailgate control unit and the drive unit.B

fuse/relay box and the power tailgate control unit.B

(20P).
tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 1
C L U + (BLU)
1 2 3 4 5
8 |9 \ /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
C L U - (GRN)
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to ground in the wire. If the wire is
OK, replace the drive unit (see page 22-581 ).B
NO-Go to step 10.
22-569
P o w e r Tailgate
DTC B1390: Power Tailgate Closer Motor

Function Error
8. O p e n the tailgate.
N O T E : If y o u a r e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g multiple D T C s , be s u r e
to f o l l o w t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s in B - C A N S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s
T e s t M o d e A ( s e e p a g e 22-137).
1. W i t h the tailgate c l o s e d , pull t h e tailgate o u t e r h a n d l e
a n d w a i t for 10 s e c o n d s .
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n b a c k to
O N (II).
3. C l e a r t h e D T C s w i t h the H D S .
10. D i s c o n n e c t p o w e r tailgate control unit c o n n e c t o r B

(20P).
11. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n p o w e r tailgate c o n t r o l
unit c o n n e c t o r B (20P) t e r m i n a l s No. 9 a n d No. 2 0 a n d
p o w e r tailgate c l o s e r m o t o r 2 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s
No. 2 a n d No. 1 r e s p e c t i v e l y .
POWER TAILGATE C L O S E R MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
4. L i s t e n for t h e s o u n d of the latch r e l e a s i n g .

Is there
9. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 2P c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e p o w e r tailgate
closer motor.
sound?
CLM-(YEL)
F=l
1
2
Wire side of
female terminals
C L M + (PUR)
N O - G o to S t e p 7.
- @ H
5. C h e c k for D T C s w i t h the H D S .
Is DTC B1390
CLM-(YEL)
-FJ
P.
indicated?
11
NO-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .

C h e c k for l o o s e or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n t h e
p o w e r tailgate c o n t r o l unit a n d t h e c l o s e r m o t o r . H
Are DTCs B1380, B1381,
also indicated?
B1382, B1383, and/or
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated D T C s . H

N O - R e p l a c e the p o w e r tailgate control unit ( s e e p a g e
22-576) a n d r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m . H
22-570
JO-
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Is there
B1384
CLM+
(PUR)
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e . H
20
12. Measure voltage between power tailgate control unit

/7
p
PI
PI

16. Reconnect the power tailgate closer motor 2P
connector.

BODY

connector B (20P) terminal No. 20 (or No. 9) and
ground terminal No. 9 (or No. 20) momentarily.

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 2 0
I VMP2 (PNK)
CLU +
(PUR)
n.
1
Is there battery
8 _ _99 _2/0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
voltage?
C L U (YEL)
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Check for No. 8 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is O K , check for
fuse/relay box and power tailgate control u n i t . B
Does the motor run smoothly?
13. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector A

(5P).

22-576).B

unit connector A (5P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO-Goto step 18.

CONNECTOR A (5P)
1 [l 2
3 4 5
PG2 (BLK)
Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 15.

(G602).fl
(cont'd)
22-571
Power Tailgate
D T C
18. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power tailgate

closer unit.

closer unit.

2 1 . Check for continuity between body ground and power



C L M + (PUR)
PI
PI
1 2 3 4
//
C L M + (PUR)
Pi
8 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
1 2 3 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
C L M - (YEL)
CLM (YEL)
Y E S - R e p a i r a short to g r o u n d in the
NO-Go to step 22.

page 2 0 - 2 3 5 ) .
wire.B

ground.
C L U + (BLU)
n
PI
//
1 2 3 4 5
8 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 20
Y E S - R e p a i r short t o g r o u n d in the w i r e . B
NO-Check for No. 8 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box. I f t h e fuse is OK, check for
an open in the w i r e between the auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box and power tailgate control unit.B
22-572

Control Module (VSP/NE, AT frame)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be to
f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
BODY

32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20 and power
tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 6
and No. 7 respectively.

ON (II).


n
2
Is DTC U0155
n
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
16
I7II8I19I20I21I22I23I24I25IXI27I28I29I30M32
indicated?
B-CAN LO
(LTGRN)

CONNECTED UNITS.
//
5 6
B-CAN HI (WHT)
1 2
8 9
3 4
10 11
B-CAN HI
I r, I (WHT)
6 7
13 14
detected?
YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (see

page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
NO-Go to step 6.


(14P).
22-573
Power Tailgate
DTC U0199: Lost Communication With P/W
(DRLOCK SW, KLDRLOCK frame)
NOTE: If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be t o
9. Check for continuity between door power w i n d o w

master switch 37P connector terminals No. 33 and
No. 35 and power tailgate control unit connector C
(14P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 respectively.
2. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0) and then back t o

ON (II).
1/1
1 4
J/1
B-CAN LO
(BLU)
B-CAN HI
(PNK)
B-CAN LO
(BLU)
B-CAN HI
(PNK)
NO-Go t o step 6.
connector.
(14P).
1 2 3 4
8 9 10 11
PI
6 7
13 14

test, and do all power and ground input tests (see
page 22-289). If the tests prove OK, replace the power
22-574
| 1 0 1 1 1
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

Check for loose or poor connections.
Y E S - G o t o the DTC U1280 troubleshooting (see page

22-15D.B
13|l4|/l6ll7|/l9l20|2ll22l23
[/[/I

(MICU frame)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be to
ON (II).
Is DTC U1282
Indicated?
YES-Go to the MICU input test and perform all power,

g r o u n d and communication input tests (see page
22-364). Ifthe tests prove OK, replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 2 2 - 9 0 ) .
units.B
Power Tailgate
Control Unit Input Test/Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test M o d e
2. Remove the left D-pillar t r i m (see page 20-89).
3. Disconnect the 20P, 14P, and 5P connectors (A) f r o m the power tailgate control unit (B).
A
4. Inspect all the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making g o o d contact.
22-576
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
B3
ORN
Under all
conditions
Connect terminal B11 to terminal

B3 w i t h a j u m p e r wire:
The power tailgate outside beeper
should sound.
B4
RED
Under all
conditions
Connect terminal B11 to terminal

B4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire:
The power tailgate inside beeper
should sound.

obtained
Faulty power tailgate outside
beeper
Poor ground (G503)
Faulty power tailgate inside beeper
Poor ground (G601)
Reconnect all connectors to the power tailgate control unit, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
If the test indicates a p r o b l e m , find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If the input test proves OK, replace the power tailgate control unit.
Cavity
Wire
Test condition
A2
BRN
Under all
conditions

B12
PNK
Under all
conditions

B11
YEL
Under all
conditions

C14
WHT
Ignition switch ON
(ID

A1
A4
B19
BLK
BLK
B8
PNK
Under ail
conditions
Under all
conditions
Shift lever in P
position


obtained
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G602)
Poor ground (G503)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G101)
22-577
Power Tailgate
Power Tailgate Motor Test
1. Open the tailgate and remove the left D-pillar t r i m (see
page 20-96).
tailgate motor (B).
Power Tailgate Inside Beeper

Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f o r m the power
tailgate inside beeper (B).
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Disconnect connector B f r o m the power tailgate

control unit.
3. Test the beeper by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2. The
beeper should sound.
4. Close the tailgate manually w i t h o u t latching it.
4. If the beeper does not click, replace it.
5. Engage the power tailgate clutch by connecting

battery power to power tailgate control unit connector
B terminal No. 2 and battery g r o u n d to terminal No. 1.
6. Check the motor operation by connecting battery
power to terminal No. 1 and g r o u n d t o terminal No. 2.
The motor should run (tailgate open).
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch your hands.
7. After opening the tailgate, connect battery power to
terminal No. 2 and ground terminal No. 1. The motor
should run (tailgate closed).
replace the drive unit assembly (see page 22-581).
22-578
BODY
Driver's Door Power Tailgate

Inside Tailgate Switch

Test/Replacement
1. Carefully pry out the inside tailgate switch (A), and

disconnect the 5P connector (B) f r o m switch.

door power tailgate switch (B).
I
I
TZ=T
3. Remove the t w o mounting screws, and then remove

the driver's door power tailgate switch.
Position
ON
OFF
Terminal
Position
1
O-h-O

\
Terminal
CO
1 2 3 4 5
u
U
\ ^
ON
2
- o
o -
OFF
o@-
- o
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb

(A) or the switch.
3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs

(C) or the switch.
22-579
Power Tailgate
Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet
Switch Test
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test

closer unit (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the closer

motor (B).
1 2 3 4 5 6
u
(J

latch position according to the table.
\ ^
Terminal
1
Position
Full latched
Between the fullylatched position to

released position
Released
\ ^
o- - o
o - - o - -o
r\
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate

latch assembly (see page 20-235).
22-580
3. Check motor operation by connecting battery power

to tailgate closer unit 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
ground to terminal No. 1. To prevent damage to the
motor, apply battery voltage only momentarily. The
motor should run.
replace the tailgate latch assembly (see page 20-235).
Drive Unit Replacement
Pinch Sensor Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2P and 8P connectors (A) f r o m the

drive unit (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) f r o m the pinch

sensor.
NOTE: The illustration shows left side pinch sensor,
right side is symmetrical.
3. Carefully remove the bolts and support strut (C) f r o m

the tailgate.
4. Remove the mounting four bolts and drive unit.
3. Remove the clips, screws, and bolts f r o m the pinch

sensor (B).
22-581
Power Tailgate
Power Tailgate Outer Handle
Power Tailgate Outside Beeper

Test/Replacement

harness (B).

tailgate beeper (B), then remove the beeper.
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Check for continuity between the tailgate outer handle

switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity w h e n the tailgate outer
handle switch is pushed.
There should be no continuity w h e n the tailgate
outer handle switch is released.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate
handle (see page 20-234).
22-582
3. Test the beeper by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 and ground t o terminal No. 2 . The
beeper should sound.
4. If the beeper does not s o u n d , replace it.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and

Telematics maintenance is required)
Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and Telematics

Audio, Entertainment, Navigation,
and Telematics
Special T o o l s
23-2
Audio System
23-5
23-7
System Description
23-9
23-40
23-49
Error Codes
23-61
23-63
S o u n d Q u a l i t y Diagnosis
23-121
* Audio Unit Removal/Installation
23-125
A u d i o - H V A C Display U n i t
23-126
Stereo Amplifier Removal/Installation . 23-126
USB Adapter Unit Replacement
23-127
X M Receiver R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
23-127
A c t i v e Noise Cancellation M i c r o p h o n e
23-128
Speaker T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t
23-129
* A u d i o R e m o t e S w i t c h Test
23-132
AM/FM Antenna Amplifier
Replacement
23-133
A M / F M A n t e n n a Repair
23-133
X M Antenna Replacement
23-134
A u x i l i a r y Jack A s s e m b l y R e p l a c e m e n t . 2 3 - 1 3 4
Rear Entertainment System

System Description
Rear C o n t r o l l e r a n d Screen
A u x i l i a r y Jack A s s e m b l y R e p l a c e m e n t .
W i r e l e s s H e a d p h o n e Battery
Replacement
W i r e l e s s R e m o t e C o n t r o l Battery
Replacement
23-136
23-138
23-139
23-144
23-152
23-156
23-172
23-173
23-173
23-174
Navigation System
23-175
General T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n . 2 3 - 1 7 7
System Description
System Diagnostic M o d e
Forced S t a r t i n g o f Display
DVD-ROM Replacement
Navigation Unit Removal/Installation..
GPS A n t e n n a R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
* V o i c e C o n t r o l S w i t c h Test
N a v i g a t i o n Display U n i t
N a v i g a t i o n S w i t c h Panel
Interface Dial R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
HFL-Navigation-ANC Microphone
R e a r v i e w Camera
23-186
23-188
23-191
23-218
23-222
23-244
23-266
23-290
23-290
23-291
23-292
23-292
23-293
23-293
23-294
23-294
23-295
Electrical Compass
System Description
Electrical C o m p a s s U n i t I n p u t Test
Electrical C o m p a s s Z o n e Selection a n d
Calibration
23-296
23-297
23-298
23-300
23-301
23-302
HandsFreeLink System
General T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n .
System Description
HFL S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
* HFL S w i t c h Test
HandsFreeLink C o n t r o l U n i t
23-306
23-307
23-320
23-321
23-322
23-324
23-326
23-327
23-333
23-337
23-337
23-338
Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and Telematics

Special Tools
Ref.No.
<D
Tool Number
07AAZ-SDBA100
07AAZ-SDBA200
07AAZ-SDBA300
07PAZ-0010100
I
23-2
Description
Diagnostic CD
Skip Test CD
Skip Test CD
SCS Service Connector
Qty
1
1
1
1
Audio System
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-93).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM and other vehicle systems. If it d o e s n ' t troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
5. Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) and note t h e m . Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot data,
and download any data f o u n d .
6. Refer to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
(cont'd)
23-3
Audio System
Lever-Locked Connector
Disconnecting
To disconnect the connector, pull the lever (A) while
pushing the lock tab (B) d o w n , then pull the connector
(C).
23-4
Connecting
To connect the connector, push the connector into the
connector sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed i n , the
lever (B) moves to the locked position.
A N C REAR MICROPHONE
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-37
H FL-N A VIG ATION-ANC MICROPHONE (With navigation)

ANC FRONT MICROPHONE (Without navigation)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT (Without navigation)

A M / F M ANTENNA S U B L E A D
AUDIO UNIT (With navigation)

AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation 6CD type)
AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation 1 CD type)
U S B ADAPTER UNIT (With navigation)
AUXILIARY J A C K A S S E M B L Y (With navigation)
AUXILIARY J A C K A S S E M B L Y (Without navigation)
A M / F M ANTENNA
Repair, page 23-133
X M RECEIVER
A M / F M ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
(cont'd)
23-5
Audio System
FRONT CENTER S P E A K E R
(With rear entertainment system
and/or navigation)
RIGHT T W E E T E R
S T E R E O AMPLIFIER
and/or navigation)
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S DOOR S P E A K E R
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH (Except
1CD type)
T e s t page 23-132
RIGHT REAR DOOR S P E A K E R

RIGHT SATELLITE S P E A K E R
and/or navigation)
SUBWOOFER
DRIVER'S DOOR S P E A K E R
LEFT TWEETER
23-6
LEFT SATELLITE S P E A K E R
and/or navigation)

Symptom
Poor A M or FM radio reception or
interference
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page
23-63)
Audio unit power switch will not turn on

(No information display and no sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off

23-66)
23-67)
23-67)
No sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) f r o m

all inputs (display is normal) (with rear
entertainment system and/or navigation)
No sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) f r o m
all inputs (display is normal) (without
navigation and rear entertainment
system)
Auxiliary audio input sound is low or
cannot be heard
A u d i o system sound is weak or distorted
(display is normal)
V o l u m e does not change
Volume does not increase w i t h speed
V o l u m e is too high or too low w h e n
driving at freeway speeds but is normal
w h e n the vehicle is stopped
A u d i o system information does not
display on the audio-HVAC display unit
(without navigation)
Audio unit button illumination does not
work
Audio disc does not load
Audio disc does not eject
A u d i o disc changer does not load all six
discs
Also check for

AM/FM antenna lead and/or
sublead short or open in the
wire
A M / F M antenna open

23-71)
Symptom
23-73)
Symptom
23-75)
Symptom
23-75)
Symptom
23-76)
Symptom
23-77)
Troubleshooting (see page


23-77)
Symptom
23-79)
Symptom
23-80)
Symptom
23-81)
Symptom
23-81)

Disc labels peeling off disc

Tire pressure
(over-inflated), causing
excess vibration, disc
s m u d g e d , dirty, or
scratched
A u d i o disc changer does not move

between discs
A u d i o disc does not play

23-82)
23-82)
A u d i o disc skips

23-83)
Audio remote switch does not w o r k

properly

23-84)
Foreign objects such coins

or paper inserted in the CD
player
Tire pressure
(over-inflated), causing
excess vibration, disc
s m u d g e d , dirty, or
scratched
(cont'd)
23-7
Audio System
Symptom
A u d i o unit button does not w o r k
Security indicator does not w o r k

properly
USB input sound is low or cannot be
heard (with navigation)
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see
23-85)
23-86)
23-86)
23-87)
USB device does not function (with

navigation)

23-89)
Booming sound while driving w i t h audio

unit on or off (with rear entertainment
system and/or navigation)
Booming sound while driving w i t h audio
unit on or off (without navigation and
rear entertainment system)
Error code: X M NO SIGNAL or X M
ANTENNA is displayed
X M radio display is blank and no station
information is displayed
X M radio preset m e m o r y is lost

23-92)
Compatibility of the USB

device (see the owner's
manual)
Compatibility of the USB
device (see the owner's
manual)
Aftermarket speakers or
amplifier

23-107)
Aftermarket speakers or
amplifier
Audio unit disc indicator does not w o r k
Poor or no sound w i t h X M radio (Audio

unit does display X M channels)
23-8
Symptom
23-115)
Symptom
23-116)
Symptom
23-118)
Symptom
23-119)
Also check for

page
page
page
page

System Description
Overview
The audio unit acts as the processor for all audio functions. Select audio functions f r o m the audio unit buttons or the
audio remote switch (on the steering wheel). The center display provides the current audio status. The audio unit also
supports playback function of compressed audio files (MP3/WMA) recorded on CD-R/RW.
The audio unit has a built-in EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read-only m e m o r y ) . This m e m o r y holds the
audio presets (AM/FM radio frequency, sound settings, etc.) even when the battery is disconnected.
A security signal is daisy-chained between the audio and vehicle components for integration into the vehicle's security
system.
The speaker system is composed of the 40 m m tweeters, 17 cm front/rear door speakers, and 20 c m subwoofer. For
some models, a 8 cm center speaker and satellite speakers are added into the dashboard center section and the rear
quarter pillar section. The subwoofer is mounted in an enclosure for improving bass management.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system
The audio system includes an active noise cancellation (ANC) system to cancel some of the vehicle noise. The audio unit
receives the engine speed pulse (NEP) f r o m the PCM and outputs a sine-wave-sound through the audio speakers to
cancel low-frequency noise f r o m the engine. The ANC system also uses t w o microphones to detect and monitor low
frequency noise in the passenger compartment. The microphones feed information back to the audio unit which adjusts
the speaker output to reduce the noise. The ANC also receives input f r o m the door open/close (INTR LT) signal f r o m the
MICU via the B-CAN. A n y t i m e a door is opened, the ANC system temporarily stops working.
LOWFREQUENCY
NOISE IN
PASSENGERS
COMPARTMENT
LOW-FREQUENCY
NOISE FROM ENGINE
CANCELLING LOW-FREQUENCY NOISE

SOUND
WAVE
SOUND
WAVE
SINE-WAVE
SOUND
TIME
TIME
(cont'd)
23-9
Audio System
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)
The audio systems are equipped w i t h speed-sensitive v o l u m e compensation (SVC). The audio unit receives the vehicle
speed pulse (VSP) f r o m the PCM. The system processes the speed input and increases the audio system v o l u m e level as
the vehicle speed increases to compensate for the various interior noises that occur at higher speeds. When the vehicle
slows d o w n , the volume returns to its normal level. The SVC has four settings: SVC Off, Low, M i d and High that can be
adjusted using the audio unit. The SVC comes f r o m the factory w i t h Mid set as the default (see the owner's manual for
m o r e information).
U S B Adapter
The audio unit can play digital music f r o m portable audio players, USB drive, etc. w h e n the device is plugged into the
USB adapter. The audio unit uses the GA-NET to allow you to control the device f r o m the audio unit w h e n searching and
playing the files.
NOTE: Not all players and player functions w o r k w i t h the USB adapter. Please see the owner's manual for more
information.
Telematics Muting Logic
The navigation system allows voice control for the audio system and X M radio. The navigation system uses the GA-Net
bus to communicate the voice control c o m m a n d s to the audio unit. When using the navigation TALK/BACK button, the
audio is muted on all speakers and you hear navigation sound on the front speakers. W h e n using the navigation or route
guidance (RG), the front speakers provides the navigation sound while the rear speakers continue to play the audio. For
more information, see the navigation and HFL sections.
The outline of the muting logic is s h o w n in this table.
Contents
Navigation
TALK/BACK
Buttons
Route guidance
HFL
HFL and Route
guidance or talk
back
23-10
Left front CH
Navigation voice
output
Right front CH
Navigation voice
output
Navigation voice
output
Telephone
sound
Navigation
sound
Navigation voice
output
Telephone
sound
Telephone
sound
Audio output
Right rearCH
Muted
Left rear CH
Muted
Subwoofer CH
Muted
Audio
Audio
Audio
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
System Diagram
W i t h navigation
AM/FM ANTENNA
FRONT/REAR SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
{With rear entertainment

system)
AM/FM
ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
WIRELESS
HEADPHONES
AUDIO
REMOTE
SWITCH
STEREO AMPLIFIER
ANC
R/L
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE
Audio/Video
REAR
CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
AUXILIARY
JACK
ASSEMBLY
ANC
CIRCUIT
GA-NET
Audio/Video
HFLNAVIGATIONANC
MICROPHONE
DVD
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
HFL
mute
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
J
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
DUET
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
Color signal (RGB)
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY UNIT
GA-NET
- G A U G E CONTROL
MODULE (VSS)
M I C U (INTR LT)
#
B-CAN
NAVIGATION UNIT
Outputs:
Audio voice prompts/guidance
Voice control (audio/radio, RES, and
climate on GA-NET bus)
Color signal for display unit
(conf
23-
Audio System
Without navigation
" I
FRONT/REAR
SPEAKERS
AM/FM ANTENNA
SUBWOOFER
AM/FM
ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
AUXILIARY
JACK
ASSEMBLY
(With rear
entertainment
system)
AMPLIFIER
(4ch+1ch)
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE
ANC
CIRCUIT
(Without rear
entertainment
system)
WIRELESS
HEADPHONES
ANC FRONT
MICROPHONE
(1CD type)
(VSS)
. Infrared
interface
AUDIO UNIT
(6CDtype)
PCM
(INTR LT)
-
MICU
Audio/Video
REAR
CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
AUXILIARY
JACK
ASSEMBLY
GA-NET
AUDIO
REMOTE
SWITCH
DVD
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
Audio/Video
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (VSS)
- . MICU (INTR LT)
#
B-CAN
GA-NET
. J
PCM (NEP)
ELECTRICAL
COMPASS
UNIT
XM RECEIVER
UART
l_.
GAAudio
*
W W
AFTERMARKET
ACCESSORIES
(MusicLink, etc.)
GA-NET
DUET

(Displaying the audio, A/C, clock, and
azimuth information)
23-12
UART
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
(6CDtype)
HVAC
CONTROL UNIT
(1CD type)
Glossary
NOTE: All items may not apply to this vehicle. See the owner's manual for more information.
Audio Glossary
Item
Active noise
cancellation
A M (Amplitude
Modulation)
Amplifier
Antenna
ATA (PC Card)
A u d i o remote switch
Auxiliary Jack
Balance
Band
Bass
Byte
Cassette
Compact flash
CD (Compact Disc)
CD (audio disc) changer
CD player
CSF (Cold Start Fix)
screens
Decibels (db)
Distortion
Dolby (noise reduction)
DVD (Digital Versatile
Disc)
Equalizer
Fader
Format
Definition
The active noise cancellation system cancels some of the vehicle noise. This occurs in the
680-2,260 r p m range. Microphones detect the low frequency s o u n d , and the system
outputs a canceling sound f r o m the audio speaker.
The type of transmission used in the standard radio broadcast band f r o m 531 to 1710 kHz.
A device that increases the level of a signal by increasing the current or voltage.
A device used to send or receive electromagnetic waves through the air.
A type of card that has been tested for use in playing W M A , and MP3 music files in the PC
Card slot. Sizes of up to 1 GB have been tested.
The switches on the steering wheel that control the audio system.
Allows the customer to use a portable audio device to input audio recordings.
A control that changes the relative v o l u m e of the left and right channels.
A range of frequencies between t w o definite limits. Bands are assigned by the Federal
Communications Commission for specific uses.
A n adjustment for the low frequency sounds of around 160 Hz and below.
A unit of storage for computer files and memory. A CD holds approximately 700 million
bytes.
Audio or video magnetic tape container having t w o reels. Customer's can insert it for play
back.
A standard for small-size ( 3 x 4 cm), m e m o r y cards used in mobile computers, PDAs,
digital cameras. Compact flash m e m o r y cards are available in size of 32 MB up to 4 GB or
more and can be played in the audio PC slot. Sizes above 1 GB have not been tested.
A 4.5-inch plastic disc containing digital audio recording that is played optically on a laser
equipped player. Never use discs w i t h a paper label. In a hot vehicle, labels can curl up and
j a m the unit.
CD player that can store and play more than one CD. T w o types are available. Some units
accept CDs fed into the changer one at a t i m e , and others accept a magazine (with CDs
stacked in a container).
A component designed to play compact disc recordings using a laser optical pickup. The
signal f r o m a CD player usually requires amplification.
These screens are displayed if the system requires a GPS initialization. The vehicle should
be moved outside into an open area away f r o m buildings/power lines.
A method of measuring sound or radio signal strength received by the audio unit or
antenna.
Inexact reproduction of an audio signal caused by playing music at levels the audio system
cannot handle.
A processing system developed by Dolby Laboratories that reduces the background noise
on recording media. The result is a cleaner playback f r o m the audio system.
A 4.5-inch CD-like format used for storing movies w i t h digital audio and video features. The
DVD-A format is a DVD format designed for DVD audio systems. Some vehicles can play
DVD and DVD-A formats.
A device that changes the relative v o l u m e of individual frequency bands to suit personal
tastes of the listener.
The control that adjusts the relative v o l u m e levels of front and rear speakers in a
four-speaker system.
To prepare a PC Card to receive files this function is done on a PC. Always choose either
FAT or FAT32 as the NTFS format is not accepted by the system. Pick the default sectors for
the format method selected.
(cont'd)
23-13
Audio System
Audio Glossary
Item
FM (Frequency
Modulation)
GA-Net
GB (Gigabyte)
HDD
Hertz (HZ)
Integrated amplifier
Jewel case
LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Memory
M B (Megabyte)
Mic
MP3 music files
Mute
Noise
PC card
PCMCIA
Processor
Radio
Stereo
SD (Secure Digital) card
Shield
Speaker (Loudspeaker)
Speed-sensitive
volume compensation
(SVC)
23-14
Definition
The f o r m of modulation used for radio and television sound transmission in most of the
w o r l d . Less prone to interference than A M . The FM broadcast band covers roughly 87.5
MHzto108MHz.
The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and navigation
components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net, components or the entire audio
and navigation system may appear inoperative.
A unit of m e m o r y or disk storage equal to billion bytes (1000 million bytes).
Abbreviation for hard disc drive. They are sensitive to heat and it is not recommended that
they be used in the PC card slot for playing audio files.
The unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second (cps). One kilohertz (kHz) equals 1,000
cps; one megahertz (MHz) equals 1 million cps.
A component that combines a pre a m p and a power amp into a single unit. A receiver
combines an integrated a m p and a tuner into a single unit.
The hard plastic case that contains a compact disc or DVD. Always use a jewel case to
prevent scratches on the underside of a CD or DVD.
A type of digital display that changes reflectance or transmittance w h e n an electrical field
is applied to it.
Circuitry or devices that hold information in electrical or magnetic f o r m , such as the
A M / F M radio presets.
One million bytes. Written as 1 MB. Megabytes are used as a measure of digital storage
space. For example, a CD can hold 650 MB.
A n abbreviation for microphone. For vehicles with navigation, the microphone accepts
navigation voice c o m m a n d s to control audio and navigation functions.
MP3 is an audio coding format. MP3 is a popular audio compression f o r m a t on the Internet
and computers. CDs and PC Cards w i t h these files can be played on some vehicle's audio
system.
W h e n the navigation gives guidance, the front speakers are muted (no music). When y o u
use the voice control system, all of the speakers are muted.
Unwanted random sounds like buzzing, hiss, pops, static, w h i n e , etc.
The slot used for playing MP3 and W M A music files. The PC Card is usually a combination
of a small flash card in a PCMCIA adaptor that slides into the slot. The ATA, SD, and
compact flash types of cards have been tested up to 1 GB.
A computer standard for the slot that the PC card slides into. Another t e r m for the PC card
slot.
The part of an audio device that performs task/calculations. In the audio unit the processor
handles muting to allow the navi to speak voice c o m m a n d s , and the decoding/playback of
the sound files etc.
A head unit that combines a tuner, a preamplifier, and often a power-amplifier.
A recording of at least t w o channels where y o u can hear sound or music f r o m the left or
right side.
This compact type of m e m o r y card allows for fast data transfer and has built-in security
functions. SD cards have a small write-protection switch on the side.
A metallic foil or braided wire layer surrounding conductors w h i c h are designed to prevent
electrostatic or electromagnetic interference (noise) f r o m external sources such as
buzzing, or popping sounds heard on the speakers.
A device that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy (sound).
The SVC increases the audio v o l u m e to compensate for increased interior noise w h e n the
vehicle drivers at freeway speeds.
Audio Glossary
Item
Subwoofer
Track
Treble
Tuner
Tweeter
USB
Voice coil
Volume control
W M A music file
Woofer
X M radio
X M receiver
Definition
A speaker made to reproduce the lowest audio frequencies, approx 25 Hz to 125 Hz.
A sound recording on a CD, tape, or PC Card.
A n adjustment to control the v o l u m e of the high frequency sounds.
A component (or part of a component) that receives radio signals and selects one
broadcast f r o m many.
A speaker designed to reproduce the higher frequencies (treble) only.
Universal Serial Bus. the USB is used for playing the compressed audio files (MP3, W M A ,
and AAC) on the external device through the audio unit.
A coil of w i r e wrapped around a tube and then attached to the speaker cone or diaphragm.
When an audio signal is applied, the coil becomes an electromagnet and interacts w i t h the
permanent magnet causing the come or diaphragm to vibrate. W e interpret these
vibrations as sound.
Allows y o u to control the loudness of the music.
W i n d o w s Media Audio File. This is an accepted format for music files to be played on either
a CD-R, a CD-RW, or a PC Card.
A speaker that is designed to reproduce low (bass) frequencies only.
Satellite based radio transmission, which also uses a ground based repeater network to
ensure seamless reception. The channels originate f r o m X M ' s broadcast center, in
Washington DC, and uplink to t w o satellites. These satellites transmit the signal across the
entire continental United States.
The external component that receives and processes the X M signals f r o m the X M
satellites, and terrestrial (land) stations. The audio unit communicates to the X M receiver
over the GA-Net bus.
(cont'd)
23-15
Audio System
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
With navigation
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR E (16P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR F (28P)
(with rear entertainment system)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR G (3P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR D (20P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR A (24P)
23-16
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR B (14P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR C (14P)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
/ 3 4 5 6 7/
13 14 15 ie5 17 18 19
/
//
10 11
12
22 23 24
Cavity
A1
A3
A4
Wire Color
YEL
LTBLU
LTGRN*
PNK*
BRN
YEL
BRN
PUR
LTBLU
BLK
LTBLU
PUR
BLU
PNK
YEL
PNK
BLU
RED
GRN
Connect to
Dash lights brightness controller in the gauge control module (ILL)
Data link connector (DLC) (K-LINE)
Rear controller and screen (SCTY3)
Navigation display unit (SCTY2)
A5
A u d i o remote switch ground (REMOTE GND)
A6
Stereo amplifier (RR PRE )
A7
Stereo amplifier (RR PRE+ )
A10
Stereo amplifier (RL P R E - )
A11
Stereo amplifier (RL PRE+ )
A12
Body ground to G402 (GND)
A13
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL+ )
A14
No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ACC)
A15*
PCM (VSS OUT)
A16
A u d i o remote switch (REMOTE)
A17
Stereo amplifier (SWD + B )
A18
Stereo amplifier (FR P R E - )
A19
Stereo amplifier (FR PRE+ )
A22
Stereo amplifier (FL P R E - )
A23
Stereo amplifier (FL PRE+ )
A24
WHT
No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box ( + B )
*1 :With rear entertainment system
* 2 : W i t h o u t rear entertainment system
*3:Not used
1
(cont'd)
23-17
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
- 1
11 12
Cavity
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B8
B11
B12
Wire Color
LT BLU
PNK
BLU
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
RED
GRY/BLK
BLU/BLK
Connect to
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
(SUBW P R E - )
(CTR P R E - )
(CTR PRE + )
(SR L P R E - )
(SR R PRE )
(SUBW PRE+)
(SR L PRE-!-)
(SR R PRE + )
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
1 2
3 4 5 6
13 14
9 10 11
X
Connect to
Wire Color
Cavity
RED
X M receiver, USB adapter unit ( + B)
C1
RED
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (SYS ACC)
C2
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 10 (GA-NET BUS SH)
C3
GRY*
C4
Shield for terminals No. 5, No. 6, No. 13 and No. 14 (AUDIO SH)
WHT
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (AUDIO R + )
C5
RED
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (AUDIO L + )
C6
BLK
X M receiver, USB adapter unit, navigation display unit (GA-NET B U S - f )
C9
WHT
X M receiver, USB adapter unit, navigation display unit (GA-NET BUS)
C10
GRY
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (GND)
C11
BLK
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (AUDIO R - )
C13
GRN
C14
X M receiver, USB adapter unit (AUDIO L - )
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
23-18
11
13 14 15
/ I
8
1
10
19 2 0
Cavity
Connect t o
Wire Color
D1
BRN
Navigation unit (RG GND)
D2
BLU*
Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 11 (RG SH)
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX S GND)
D3
D4
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 3, No. 13 and No. 1 4 ( A U X S H )
D5
LTBLU
Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX GND)
D6
PUR
Climate control unit (CLK)
D7
BLU
Climate control unit (SO)
D8
LTGRN
B-CAN bus communication (B-CAN LO)
HandsFreeLlink control unit (TELM S I G - )
D9
RED
D10
BLU*
Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 19 (TELM SIG SH)
D11
YEL
Navigation unit (RG L-f)
D13
BLK
Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX L)
D14
RED
Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX R)
Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX DET)
D15
PUR
D18
WHT
B-CAN bus communication (B-CAN HI)
D19
GRN
HandsFreeLlink control unit (TELM SIG + )
D20
BLU/GRN
HandsFreeLlink control u n i t HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (HFL MUTE)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (16P)
r
4
9 [10111 1 2
/
1 3 14
15
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect t o
E1
GRN
Stereo amplifier (ANC R - )
E2
BLK
Stereo amplifier (ANC R + )
E4
WHT
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (F M I C + )
E5
WHT
ANC rear microphone (R M I C + )
E9
WHT
Stereo amplifier (ANC F )
E10
RED
Stereo amplifier (ANC F + )
E11
PUR*
Shield for terminal No. 4 (F MIC SH)
E12
GRN*
Shield for terminal No. 5 (R MIC SH)
E13
PUR
PCM (CSSAMA)
E14
LTBLU
PCM (CSSAMC)
E15
YEL
PCM (NEP)
(cont'd)
23-19
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (28P) (with rear entertainment system)
1 2 3 y
15 16
//
9 10 11 12 13 14
i) 2 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
F1
BLK
Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS+)
YEL
F2
Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC)
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 2 and No. 16 (RR NTSC SH)
F3
BRN*
F6
Shield for terminals No. 19 and No. 20 (RR A U X VIDEO SH)
F7
BLK
Auxiliary jack assembly(RR A U X HP L )
F8
BLU*
Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 22, and No. 23 (RR A U X HP R/L SH)
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 10, No. 11, and No. 12 (HP R/L SH)
F9
RED
Rear controller and screen (HP R/L GND)
F10
F11
WHT
Rear controller and screen (HP L)
BLK
Rear controller and screen (HP R)
F12
YEL
F13
Rear controller and screen (SYS ACC)
F14
WHT
Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR B U S - )
BRN*
F15
Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 14 (GA-NET RR BUS SH)
BRN
F16
Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC GND)
GRN
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X VIDEO GND)
F19
RED
F20
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X VIDEO)
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (CONN CHK)
F21
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X HP R)
F22
RED
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X HP R/L GND)
F23
F24
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 25, No. 26, and No. 27 (RR A U X AUDIO SH)
F25
RED
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO GND)
BLK
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO L)
F26
F27
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO R)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR G (3P)
3
Cavity
G1
G2
G3
23-20
Wire Color
Connects to
A M / F M antenna amplifier (RF IN)
Shield for terminal No. 1 (RF SH)
A M / F M antenna amplifier ( A N T + B )
W i t h o u t n a v i g a t i o n 6CD t y p e
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR E (16P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR F (28P)
CONNECTOR B (14P)
(cont'd)
23-21
Audio System
13
/|3|4
5 | 6 | 7 | /
|l4|l5|l6|l7|l8|l9|/4/l22|23
12
24

Cavity
A1
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15*
A16
A17
A18
A19
A22
A23
A24
* : Not used
Wire Color
YEL
LTBLU
LTGRN
BRN
YEL
BRN
PUR
LT BLU
BLK
LTBLU
PUR
BLU
PNK
YEL
PNK
BLU
RED
GRN
WHT
Connect to
Rear controller and screen (SCTY3)
A u d i o remote switch g r o u n d (REMOTE GND)
Stereo amplifier (RR P R E - )
Stereo amplifier (RR PRE+ )
Stereo amplifier (RL P R E - )
Stereo amplifier (RL PRE+ )
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box ( I L L + )
PCM (VSS OUT)
Stereo amplifier (SWD + B )
Stereo amplifier (FR P R E - )
Stereo amplifier (FR PRE + )
Stereo amplifier (FL P R E - )
Stereo amplifier (FL PRE+ )

Cavity
A1
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15*
A16
A18
A19
A22
A23
A24
* : Not used
23-22
Wire Color
YEL
LTBLU
RED
BRN
BLU
RED
BLU
RED
BLK
LTBLU
PUR
BLU
PNK
BRN
RED
RED
BLU
WHT
Connect to
Multiplex intergrated control unit (MICU) (SCTY1)
A u d i o remote switch g r o u n d (REMOTE GND)
Right rear door speaker (RR SP )
Right rear door speaker(RR S P + )
Left rear door speaker (RL SP )
Left rear door speaker (RL SP-r-)
Body g r o u n d to G402 (GND)
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL-h )
PCM (VSS OUT)
Front passenger's door speaker, right front tweeter (FR SP )
Front passenger's door speaker, right front tweeter (FR S P + )
D r i v e r ' s door speaker, left front tweeter (FL SP )
D r i v e r ' s door speaker, left front tweeter (FL S P + )
1 2 3 4 5
8
11 12

Cavity
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B8
B11
B12
Wire Color
LTBLU
PNK
BLU
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
RED
GRY/BLK
BLU/BLK
Connect to
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
amplifier
(SUBW P R E - )
(CTR P R E - )
(CTR PRE+ )
(SR L P R E - )
(SR R P R E - )
(SUBW PRE+)
(SR L PRE + )
(SR R PRE+ )

Cavity
B1
B8
Wire Color
RED
WHT
Connects to
Subwoofer(SUBW-)
Subwoofer(SUBW+)
9 10 11
13 14
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
C1
RED
X M receiver ( + B )
C2
RED
X M receiver (SYS ACC)
BRN*
C3
C4
GRY*
C5
WHT
X M receiver (AUDIO R + )
C6
RED
X M receiver (AUDIO L + )
C9
BLK
X M receiver (GA-NET BUS + )
WHT
C10
X M receiver (GA-NET B U S - )
C11
GRY
X M receiver (GND)
C13
BLK
X M receiver (AUDIO R )
C14
GRN
X M receiver (AUDIO L - )
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
(cont'd)
23-23
Audio System
L_
_J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
D1
BLU
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS R X - )
BRN
D2
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS R X - f )
WHT
D3
D4
BRN*
Shield f o r t e r m i n a l s No. 3, No. 13 and No. 14 (AUX SH)
LTBLU
D5
RED
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUETTX)
D6
D7
BLK
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUET RX)
LTGRN
D8
D11
GRY
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS TX)
ORN
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS T X + )
D12
BLK
D13
RED
D14
D15
PUR
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7 and No. 17 (DUET SH)
D16
D17
WHT
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUET CONT)
WHT
D18
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connect to
Wire Color
GRN
Stereo amplifier (ANC R )
BLK
Stereo amplifier (ANC R + )
E2*
WHT
E4
ANC front microphone (F M I C + )
WHT
E5
WHT
Stereo amplifier (ANC F )
E9*
RED
Stereo amplifier (ANC F + )
E10*
E11
PUR*
E12
GRN*
PCM (CSSAMA)
PUR
E13
PCM (CSSAMC)
E14
LTBLU
YEL
PCM (NEP)
E15
*1 :The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
*2:With rear entertainment system
Cavity
2
23-24
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (28P) ( w i t h rear entertainment system)
6
1 2
3 /
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
y ...
15 1 6 / / 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect t o
F1
Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS+)
BLK
F2
Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC)
YEL
BRN*
F3
F6
BRN*
F7
BLK
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X HP L )
F8
BLU*
F9
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 10, No. 1 1 , and No. 12 (HP R/L SH)
Rear controller and screen (HP R/L GND)
F10
RED
F11
Rear controller and screen (HP L)
WHT
Rear controller and screen (HP R)
F12
BLK
F13
YEL
Rear controller and screen (SYS ACC)
F14
WHT
Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR B U S - )
F15
BRN*
Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC GND)
F16
BRN
F19
GRN
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X VIDEO GND)
F20
RED
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X VIDEO)
F21
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (CONN CHK)
F22
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X HP R)
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X HP R/L GND)
F23
RED
F24
BRN*
F25
RED
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO GND)
BLK
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO L)
F26
F27
WHT
Auxiliary jack assembly (RR A U X AUDIO R)
3
[Q&r
Cavity
G1
G2
G3
W i r e Color
Connects t o
AM/FM antenna amplifier ( A N T + B )
(cont'd)
23-25
Audio System
Without navigation 1CD type
0
3^ AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (16P)
o
o
o
o
o
o
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR A (24P)
23-26
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR G ( 3 P )
3
13
\ / 6
14 15
//
10 11
12
18 1 9 ! / ! / 22 23 24
Cavity
A1
A3
A4
A6
A7
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A18
A19
A22
A23
A24
Wire Color
YEL
LTBLU
RED
BLU
RED
BLU
RED
BLK
LTBLU
PUR
BLU
BRN
RED
RED
BLU
WHT
Connect t o
Multiplex intergrated control unit (MICU) (SCTY1)
Right rear door speaker (RR SP )
Right rear door speaker(RR S P + )
Left rear door speaker (RL SP )
Left rear door speaker (RL S P + )
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL+ )
PCM (VSS OUT)
Front passenger's door speaker, right front tweeter (FR SP )
Front passenger's door speaker, right front tweeter (FR S P + )
D r i v e r ' s door speaker, left front tweeter (FL SP )
D r i v e r ' s door speaker, left front tweeter (FL S P + )
1
8
////
/////
Cavity
B1
B8
Wire Color
RED
WHT
Connects t o
Subwoofer ( S U B W - )
Subwoofer ( S U B W + )
(cont'd)
23-27
Audio System
CO
14
^7 8
2
5 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
D1
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS R X - )
BLU
D2
BRN
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS R X + )
D3
WHT
D4
BRN*
Shield for terminals No. 3, No. 13 and No. 14 (AUX SH)
D5
LTBLU
RED
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUET TX)
D6
D7
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUET RX)
BLK
LTGRN
D8*
D11
GRY
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS TX)
D12
ORN
Electrical compass unit (COMPASS T X + )
D13
BLK
D14
RED
D15
PUR
Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7 and No. 17 (DUET SH)
D16
BRN*
D17
Audio-HVAC display unit (DUET CONT)
WHT
D18*
WHT
*2:Not used
1
23-28
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
E4
WHT
ANC front microphone (F M I C + )
WHT
E5
RED
E6*
Multiplex intergrated control unit (MICU) (CARGO LT)
E11
PUR*
GRN*
E12
E13
PUR
PCM (CSSAMA)
E14
LTBLU
PCM (CSSAMC)
YEL
E15
PCM (NEP)
PNK
E16
Multiplex intergrated control unit (MICU) (INTR LT)
*1:The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
* 2 : N o t used
2

3
Cavity
G1
G2
G3
Wire Color
Connects to
A M / F M antenna amplifier ( A N T + B )
(cont'd)
23-29
Audio System
Audio-HVAC Display Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
It
dtt
/ l / l 3 l 4 l / l 6 l 7 | 8
/\/\w\\2\\Z\\4\/\\Q
Cavity
3
4
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
16
*1:6CD type
*2:1 CD type
23-30
Wire Color
BLK
RED
WHT
YEL
WHT
PUR
BLU
BLK
YEL
LTBLU
Connect to
Audio unit (DUET RX)
A u d i o unit (DUET TX)
A u d i o unit (DUET CONT)
No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (IG2)
No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box ( + B)
Climate control unit* , HVAC control unit* (CLK)
Climate control unit* , HVAC control unit* (SO)
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box ( I L L + )
1
Stereo Amplifier Connector for Inputs and Outputs

CONNECTOR A (24P)
CONNECTOR B (28P)
Audio System
S T E R E O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (24P)
13
9 10 11
12
14 15 1> 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Cavity
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
23-32
Wire Color
BLK
PNK
RED
BRN/WHT
BRN/BLK
BRN
RED
BLU
BLU
BLK
GRY
PUR
BLK
BLK
WHT
RED/WHT
WHT/YEL
RED
BLU
RED
RED
RED
BLU
PUR
Connect to
Body ground to G402 (GND MAIN)
Front center speaker (CTR S P )
Subwoofer ( S U B W - )
Right front tweeter (FR T W - )
Left front tweeter (FL T W - )
Front passenger's door speaker (FR S P )
Driver's door speaker (FL SP )
Left rear door speaker (RL SP)
Right rear door speaker (RR SP)
Right satellite speaker (RR S R S P - )
Left satellite speaker (RL S R S P - )
No. 31 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box ( + B MAIN )
Body ground to G402 (GND SUB)
Front center speaker (CTR S P + )
Subwoofer (SUBW +)
Right front tweeter (FR TW+ )
Left front tweeter (FL TW+)
Front passenger's door speaker (FR SP+)
Driver's door speaker (FL SP+)
Left rear door speaker (RL SP+)
Right rear door speaker (RR SP+)
Right satellite speaker (RR SRSP+)
Left satellite speaker (RL SRSP+)
No. 31 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box ( + B S U B )
S T E R E O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B(28P)
5 6 7 8
10 11
1 2 3
16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24
13 14
27 28
Cavity
B1
B2
B3
B5
B6
B7
B8
B10
B11
B13
B14
B16
B17
B18
B19
B21
B22
B23
B24
B27
B28
Wire Color
YEL
GRY/BLK
BLU/BLK
BLU
RED
GRN
BLU
LTBLU
BRN
RED
BLK
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
PNK
LTBLU
RED
PNK
PUR
YEL
WHT
GRN
Connect to
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
(SWD +B)
(SR L PRE+)
(SR R PRE+)
(CTR PRE+)
(SUBW PRE+)
(FL PRE+)
(FR PRE+)
(RLPRE+)
(RRPRE+)
(ANC F+ )
(ANC R+ )
(SR L PRE )
(SR R PRE )
(CTR P R E - )
(SUBW P R E - )
(FL P R E - )
(FR P R E - )
(RL P R E - )
(RR P R E - )
(ANC F - )
(ANC R - )
(cont'd)
23-33
Audio System
XM Receiver Connectors for Inputs and Outputs
X M RECEIVER
CONNECTOR A (14P)
X M RECEIVER
CONNECTOR B (2P)
[6
..r....
.....|...
<r
X M RECEIVER COIMECTOR A (14P)
1 2
3
X
9 10 11
5 6
13 14
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
RED
A u d i o unit ( + B)
A2
RED
A u d i o unit (SYS ACC)
BRN*
A3
WHT
A5
A u d i o u n i t USB adapter unit* (AUDIO R + )
Audio unit, USB adapter unit* (AUDIO L + )
RED
A6
BLK
A u d i o unit, navigation display unit* , and USB adapter unit* (GA-NET B U S + )
A9
WHT
A u d i o unit, navigation display unit* , and USB adapter unit* (GA-NET BUS)
A10
A u d i o unit (GND)
A11
GRY
A u d i o unit, USB adapter unit* (AUDIO R - )
BLK
A13
GRN
A u d i o unit, USB adapter unit* (AUDIO L - )
A14
*2:With navigation
A1
X M RECEIVER COIMECTOR B (2P)
Cavity
B1
B2
23-34
Wire Color
Connect to
Satellite signal antenna (SAT/TER)
Shield for terminal No. 1 (GND SH)
USB Adapter Unit Connectors for Inputs and Outputs
U S B ADAPTER UNIT
14P CONNECTOR
U S B ADPTER UNIT
5P CONNECTOR
U S B ADAPTER UNIT CONECTOR A (14P)
1 2
3 4
9 10 11
5 6
13 14
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
A1
RED
Audio unit ( + B)
A2
RED
Audio unit (SYS ACC)
A3
BRN*
A4
GRY*
WHT
A5
Audio unit, X M receiver (AUDIO R + )
RED
A6
Audio unit, X M receiver (AUDIO L + )
BLK
A9
Audio unit, X M receiver, and navigation display unit (GA-NET B U S + )
A10
WHT
Audio unit, X M receiver, and navigation display unit (GA-NET BUS)
A11
GRY
A u d i o unit (GND)
A13
BLK
Audio unit, X M receiver (AUDIO R)
A14
GRN
Audio unit, X M receiver (AUDIO L)
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
U S B ADAPTER UNIT CONECTOR B (5P)
o r
in
4321
Cavity
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Wire Color
Connect to
USB adapter (USB VBUS)
USB adapter (USB D A T A - )
USB adapter (USB D A T A + )
USB adapter (USB GND)
Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 (USB SH)
(cont'd)
23-35
Audio System
ANC Front Microphone Connectors for Inputs and Outputs
With navigation
Without navigation
ANC FRONT MICROPHONE

3P CONNECTOR
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR (with navigation)
n
CO
1 2
4 5 6 7
Cavity
Wire Color
BLK
1*
YEL
2
BRN
3
4
WHT
5
BLU/GRN
6
PUR
WHT
7
*: '09 model
Connect to
HandsFreeLink control unit (MIC)
HandsFreeLink control unit ( M I C + )
A u d i o unit (F MIC+)
HandsFreeLink control unit, audio unit (HFL MUTE)
No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box (+B)
ANC FRONT MICROPHONE 3P CONNECTOR (without navigation)
3ZII
Cavity
Wire Color
Connects to
1
PUR*
WHT
Audio unit ( F M I C + )
3
The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
23-36
ANC Rear Microphone Connector for Inputs and Outputs
ANC REAR MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR
12
Cavity
Wire Color
Connects t o
GRN*
WHT
Audio unit (R M I C + )
1
2
(cont'd)
23-37
Audio System
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs
Without navigation
With navigation
ni
)
in
c
JtrzdLJ
AUXILIARY J A C K A S S E M B L Y
5P CONNECTOR
AUXILIARY J A C K A S S E M B L Y 5P CONNECTOR
c,
CM
3 4
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
23-38
Wire Color
PUR
LTBLU
WHT
BLK
RED
Connects to
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
Audio
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
(AUX
(AUX
(AUX
(AUX
(AUX
DET)
GND)
S GND)
L)
R)
23-39
Audio System
Circuit Diagram
With navigation
UNDER-HOOD
23-40
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube

insulating the outside of the wire. The color of
the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray,
may not match the color of the wire listed on the
schematic.
-
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAKER
31
BLU
RED
FL
SP+
FL
SP-
FL
PRE+
FL
PRE-
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
31 3 I
WHT/
BRN/
FL
TW-
FL
TW+
BLK
PNK
CTR
SP+
CTR
SP-
RED
FR
SP+
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
3\
31
BRN
JJ^
JjJjJJ.'
FR
SP-
FR
TW+
FR
TW-
LEFT REAR
DOOR
SPEAKER
RED
RL
SP+
LEFT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
BLU BLU
RL
SRSP+
RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SPEAKER
3 \
3^
RL
SP-
: Shielding
GRY
RL
SRSP-
RED
RR
SP+
RIGHT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
31
BLU RED
RR
SP-
RR
SRSP+
BLK WHT RED
RR
SRSP-
SUBW
+
FL
PRE-
CTR
PRE+
CTR
PRE-*-
CTR
PRE-
CTR
PRE-
FR
PRE+
TELM
SIG+
TELM
SIG-
GRN
RED
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
FR
PRE-
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
GRY/
BLK
RED/
BLK
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
RL
PRE+
RL
PRE+
RL
PRE-
RL
PRE-
SRR
PRE+
SR R
PRE-
BLU/
BLK
RED/
BLK
SRR
PRE+
SR R
PRE-
RR
PRE+
RR
PRE-
SUBW
PRE+
RED
RR
PRE+
SUBW
PRE+
SUBW
PRE-
LT BLU
SUBW
PRE-
TELM
SIG SH
BLU
PUR
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
(cont'd)
23-41
Audio System
USB
ADAPTER
CABLE
USB
j AOAPTER
No. 31 (30 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
BLK
;
USB
SH
B1
B2
USB
VBUS
USB
DATA-
B3
B4
USB
DATA+
WHT
~ ~~
|A9
USB
GND
GA-NET
BUS+
;
;AIO
GA-NET
BUS-
BRN*
j A3
GA -NET
B U S SH
USB ADAPTER UNIT

PUR
PUR
|A12
SYS
ACC
|A24
+B
MAIN
A2
+B
SUB
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
AUDIO
SH
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
AUDIO
SH
IA11
STEREO AMPLIFIER
ANC
ANC
F-
ANC
R+
ANC
R-
SWD
+B
GND
MAIN
GND
SUB
BLK
BLK
RED
GRY
|A13
RED
- J
RED GRY
1
RED
RED
GRY
|c2
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
ANC
R+
ANC
R-
+B
SWD
+B
lC11
SYS
ACC
GND
AUDIO UNIT
B-CAN
HI
B-CAN
LO
WHT
LT GRN
YEL
CSSAMA
CSSAMC
HFL
MUTE
PUR
LTBLU
BLU/
GRN
FMIC
SH
RMIC
SH
LT
BLU '
A AV
PUR
G A U G E CONTROL
MODULE
MICU
A
BLU/
GRN
LTBLU
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
BLU/
GRN
HFL
MUTE
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE (Front)
|~ GND
! l
|
G701
i'09 model)
-42
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE
; The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
Q j : With rear entertainment system
: CAN line
: GA-NET
|~2~|: Without rear entertainment system
: Shielding

schematic.
| ^ > -
RED
- SCTY1
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
BUS SH
BUS+
BUS-
.3
GA-NET
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
ECU BUS
SCTY2
20
17
ECU BUS
.5
. 19
BRN*
WHT
BLK
^1
J
''
GA-NET
E C U BUS
|18
BRN*
GA-NET
SH
*\
WHT
'
BRN*
X M ANTENNA
| A3
A9
I A10
B10
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
BUSSH
BUS-
BUS+
GND SH
X M RECEIVER
SAT/TER
*B26
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
ECU BUS
SH
ECU BUS
ECU BUS
+
NAVIGATION UNIT
AUDIO
AUDIO
AUDIO
AUDIO
L+
L-
R+
R-
RED
GRN
WHT
+B
BLK
XM
SYS
RED
ACC
RED
GND
ANTENNA
RG
RG
RG
LEAD
L+
GND
SH
YEL
BRN
GRY
A A A
WHT
BLK
HtU
BRN*
C3
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
BUSSH
BUS-
BUS+
j
(
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
SGND
SH
GND
DET
SCTY3
A4
|D4
D5
RG
GND
SH
l
i
AUX
D3
L+
AUX
D14
AUDIO UNIT
D13
CTY2
D15
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
RR B U S
RR B U S
RR B U S
SH
|F15
;F1
1
'
; F14
BRN*
r - -
B -K
RE D
WriT
LT E L U
PL
JR
BRN*
I T
i
RED
LT C
RN
BLK
WHT
BRN*
I'3
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
SGND
GND
DET
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
3CTY3
GA-NET
GA-NET
GA-NET
RR B U S
RR B U S
RR B U S
SH
R E A R C O N T R O L L E R and
SCREEN
(cont'd)
23-43
Audio System
Without navigation
UNDER-HOOD F U S E /
RELAY BOX
(6CD type)
23-44

schematic.
[T|: With rear entertainment system
f~2~): Without rear entertainment system
-
No. 14 (7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
: Shielding
No. 23 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)

(6CD type)
T T
HVAC CONTROL UNIT

dCDtype)
AM/FM
ANTENNA
do
ILL+
AM/FM
ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
PUR
BLU
CLK
SO
No. 36(10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
WHT
YEL
+B
IG2

ILL-
DUET
CONT
DUET
TX
DUET
RX
GND
AM/FM
ANTENNA
LEAD
AM/FM
ANTENNA
SUBLEAD
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
BRN*
D7
ANT
+B
AUX
L
D13
DUET
CONT
RF
IN
AUX
R
D14
AUX
S GND
AUX
SH
D3
[ D4
AUX
GND
D5
AUX
DET
DUET
TX
DUET
RX
DUET
SH
COMPASS
RX+
COMPASS
RX-
D2
D1
D15
G403
D16
COMPASS
TX+
D12
COMPASS
TXD11
BRN*
AUX
L
AUX
R
AUX
S GND
AUXILIARY JACK A S S E M B L Y
AUX
GND
AUX
DET
ELECTRICAL C O M P A S S UNIT
Audio System
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
E E E T
BLU
RED
BLU
1
RED
FL
SP+
CSSAMA
LEFT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
RED
BRN
FR
SP+
FR
SP-
RIGHT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
i X
RED
RL
SP+
RL
SP-
RR
SP+
RR
SP-
SUBW
RMIC
SH
FMIC
SH
CSSAMC
SUBW
E5
|E12
GRN*
GRN*
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
23-46
Ii
ANC FRONT
MICROPHONE
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE

schematic.
-
: CAN line
: Shielding
HH: With rear entertainment system

(T]: Without rear entertainment system
DRIVER' S
DOOR
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKER
(6CD type)
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
LEFT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
LEFT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
RIGHT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
RIGHT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
SUBWOOFER
OCDtype)
(cont'd)
23-47
Audio System
* : T h e shielded w i r e s h a v e a heat-shrunk t u b e
insulating the o u t s i d e of the wire. T h e c o l o r of
the insulating tube, typically black o r dark g r a y ,
m a y not m a t c h t h e color of the w i r e listed o n the
schematic.
- : GA-NET
_ : Shielding
(With rear entertainment s y s t e m )

No.31 (30 A) F U S E
(In the u n d e r - d a s h
f u s e / r e l a y box)
PUR
IA12
\
+B
MAIN
\
/
PUR
IA24
+B
SUB
REAR CONTROLLER and S C R E E N
ANC
F+
ANC
FB27
B13
ANC
R+
ANC
RB14
B28
SWD
+B
B1
GND
MAIN
GND
SUB
|A1
BLK
GA -NET
RR B U S S H
GA-NET
RR B U S +
GA-NET
RR B U S -
SCTY3
SCTY2
. 14
|A13
BLK
_
WHT
BLK
i
BRN*
|F15
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
ANC
R-
G A -NET
RR B U S S H
SWD
+B
GA-NET
RR B U S +
XM ANTENNA
XT
XM ANTENNA
LEAD
A10
+B
SYS
ACC
GND
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
GA-NET
BUS SH
GA-NET
BUS+
GA-NET
BUS-
GND
SH
SAT/
TER
XM RECEIVER
(6CDtype)
23-48
How to Obtain the Audio Unit Serial Number
NOTE: This procedure can only be done after the power has been disconnected once and reconnected to the audio unit,
and the audio unit displays CODE w h e n the audio unit is turned on.
2. Make sure the audio system is turned off.
3. Push and hold the preset No. 1 and No. 6 buttons.
4. While holding the buttons, push the VOL PUSH PWR knob to ON.
5. Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function begins.
No. 1 button
No. 6 button
No. 1 button
With navigation
No. 6 button
Without navigation
VOL PUSH PWR knob
6. The display shows an 8 digit serial number.

With navigation
5/N
IE3H561B
Without navigation
8/N IS3H5B1B
7. Use all 8 numbers as the serial number w h e n using the Interactive Network (iN) to retrieve the 5 digit anti-theft code.
8. To end the self-diagnostic function, turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(cont'd)
23-49
Audio System
S e l f - d i a g n o s t i c F u n c t i o n
( c o n t ' d )
How to check the audio system condition

The audio system has a self-diagnostic function to help find problems with the audio system. To run the self-diagnostic
function, do the following:
NOTE:
Not all self-diagnostic functions appear on all models.
There may be other self-diagnostic functions that are for factory use only.
The self diagnostic function does not find every problem w i t h the audio system. Check any official Honda service
website for more information about the audio system.
5. Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function begins.
VOL PUSH PWR knob
23-50
6. W h e n you are in the self-diagnostic mode, pressing a preset button starts the diagnostic mode that is assigned to that
preset button.
NOTE: A n y other diagnostic screens shown are for factory use only.
No. 2 b u t t o n
Audio button, knob, and audio remote switch detection: Allows indivdual manual selection of all audio panel knobs,
buttons, and remote swiches to verify if they are functional. When properly detected, the applied knob button, or
audio remote switch name and/or value will be displayed. To exit this mode, go to step 7. Once you exit this test, y o u
must start again at step 1.
No. 3 b u t t o n
Entire LCD lighting/light-out mode: Turns on/off the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD segment.
No. 4 b u t t o n
Duty indication m o d e (for the illumination dim): Indicates the duty for the Illumination d i m w h e n the dash lights are
on.
No. 5 b u t t o n
Vehicle speed pulse (VSP) indication mode: Indicates the vehicle speed pulse.
FM b u t t o n (Push and hold 5 sec.)
Reception level indication mode: Indicates the reception level (dB). When entering the reception level check m o d e ,
the AM/FM or FM button is used to change the S-METER, OFFSET, MP and USN (A/I).
Canceling t h e Self-diagnostic Function
7. To end the self-diagnostic function, turn the audio unit off or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(cont'd)
23-51
Audio S y s t e m
Display Specifications
NOTE: A n y other diagnostic screens shown are for audio manufacturer's use only.
Entry LCD lighting/lights-outs mode (press No. 3 button)
This diagnostic screen checks for segments that m a y be dead (off) or stuck o n .
All t h e segments in the display must appear. If there are dead segments, replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).
W h e n the display segments are all o n , press the No.3 button. The entire display must turn black. If any segments are
stuck o n , replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).
With navigation
BB22f&\* \3B:BBÂ
DISCSTFOLDER |
Without navigation
ROS NEWS TATP HHQD ST
PfiBI
00
it
SSSSS8BSSSS8SSSW
ffj^D DF-SCAN
BBBSllBBB8B8BBBBB@>
Illumination level (for the gauge illumination) indication (press No. 4 button)
This diagnostic screen checks the gauge illumination input.
W i t h the headlights o n , y o u should see a value between 1 (max low) and 22 (max high).
W h e n y o u d i m and brighten the gauge w i t h the d i m m e r knob, y o u should see this value change accordingly. If it
doesn't, check for B-CAN DTCs.
With navigation
Without navigation
90. 9 4 /
23-52
Vehicle speed pulse indication (press N o . 5 b u t t o n )

T h i s d i a g n o s t i c s c r e e n c h e c k s t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t is r e c e i v i n g t h e V S P i n d i c a t i o n .
W h e n y o u drive t h e vehicle, t h e VSP indicates t h e vehicle speed in k m / h .
With navigation
'/SP
BHZ MM
Without navigation
{'SP
Reception level indication (Push and h o l d 5 sec FM b u t t o n )

This diagnostic screen checks t h e a u d i o units reception level that c a n used in diagnosis check t h e a u d i o reception
quality.
T o check A M o r F M r e c e p t i o n , press a n d h o l d t h e applicable b a n d b u t t o n f o r 5 seconds, t h e n release. T h e reception level
is d i s p l a y e d i n d e c i b e l s ( d b ) . Y o u c a n c h e c k t h e r e c e p t i o n w i t h o r w i t h o u t t h e a m p l i f i e r . P r e s s t h e A . S E L b u t t o n t o t o g g l e
b e t w e e n t u r n i n g t h e a m p l i f i e r o n a n d off. Y o u can change t h e station w i t h t h e tuner button t o check t h e reception level o f
any specific radio station. C o m p a r e this value w i t h a k n o w n - g o o d vehicle t o check t h e audio unit reception.
With navigation
S/M
IS. BUB
Without navigation
a,
ojj
(cont'd)
23-53
A u d i o System
Reception level indication mode
This diagnostic screen checks the audio unit's reception level. This level then can be used in the diagnosis of audio unit
reception quality. The reception level is displayed in decibels (dB).
Preperation:
Park the vehicle outdoors in an appropriate location for g o o d radio reception.
Tune to a powerful local FM radio station then write d o w n the radio station number.
Tune to a powerful local A M radio station then write d o w n the radio station number.
1. Enter the reception level indication mode in the self-diagnostic function. The A M / F M antenna amplifier is on (A-SEL or
TP is not displayed in the audio-HVAC display).
2. Tune to the FM radio station you w r o t e d o w n in Preperation using the TUNING knob, and note the decibel level of that
station w h e n y o u release the button.
FM button
TUNING knob
VOL PUSH PWR knob

With navigation
Without navigation
CLOCK
S/M
23-54
\E,
an
0.
QD3
3. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the S C A N button to turn the A M / F M a n t e n n a a m p l i f i e r off ( A S E L o r T P is n o w d i s p l a y e d in the

a u d i o - H V A C display).
4. T u n e to the F M radio station y o u w r o t e d o w n in P r e p e r a t i o n u s i n g the T U N I N G k n o b , a n d note t h e d e c i b e l level of that
station w h e n y o u r e l e a s e t h e button.
5. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the S C A N button to turn the A M / F M a n t e n n a amplifier b a c k o n ( A - S E L or T P is not d i s p l a y e d in t h e
audio-HVAC display).
6. P r e s s a n d hold t h e A M button for m o r e t h a n 5 s e c o n d s to e n t e r t h e A M r e c e p t i o n m o d e .
7. T u n e to the A M radio station y o u w r o t e d o w n in P r e p e r a t i o n u s i n g the T U N I N G k n o b , a n d note t h e d e c i b e l level of
that station w h e n y o u r e l e a s e t h e button.
8. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e S C A N button to turn t h e a n t e n n a a m p l i f i e r off ( A S E L or T P is n o w d i s p l a y e d in t h e a u d i o - H V A C
display).
9. T u n e to the A M radio station y o u w r o t e d o w n in P r e p e r a t i o n u s i n g the T U N I N G k n o b , a n d note t h e d e c i b e l level of
that station w h e n y o u r e l e a s e t h e button.
10. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K ( 0 ) or a u d i o unit off to exit t h e test m o d e .
11. C o m p a r e y o u r r e s u l t s to a k n o w n - g o o d , ( m a k e s u r e it is the s a m e y e a r a n d trim level) in t h e s a m e location a n d
direction, and under the s a m e environmental conditions.
(cont'd)
23-55
Audio System
Speaker check mode
NOTE:
Not ail self-diagnostic functions appear on all models.
There may be other self-diagnostic functions that ar6 for factory use only.
4. While holding the buttons, push the VOL PUSH PWR knob t o o n .
5. Release the buttons and the speaker check mode begins. A tone should sound f r o m one speaker.
6. Each time you press the SKIP button, the test moves to the next speaker in the order listed in the table.
NOTE: Adjust the v o l u m e level to a comfortable level.
Display Specifications
(SKIP )
(^4
23-56
is pressed:
SKIP) is pressed:
*##^#*##*@#(0)
#a3)#@#*#*#*##@
NOTE: Any other diagnostic screens s h o w n are for the audio manufactures purpose only.
Speaker
Displayed Segments
Remarks
Driver's door speaker
FR-L
All models
Left tweeter
TW-L
All models
Center speaker
CENTER
With rear entertainment system and/or
navigation
FR-R
Front Passenger's door speaker
All models
TW-R
Right tweeter
All models
Right rear door speaker
RR-R
All models
SUBW
Subwoofer
All models

Right satellite speaker
SURR-R
navigation
SURR-L
Left satellite speaker
navigation
Left rear door speaker
RR-L
All models
ALL
All Speakers
Canceling t h e Speaker Check M o d e

7. To end the speaker check m o d e , turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
NOTE: The v o l u m e level remains at the same level w h e n y o u did the speaker test. If y o u turned the v o l u m e up to do
the speaker check mode test, return the v o l u m e to its normal level.
(cont'd)
23-57
Audio System
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) System Check Mode
NOTE:
Not all self-diagnostic functions appear on all models.
There may be other self-diagnostic functions that are for factory use only.
Only perform this test w h e n y o u are guided f r o m a troubleshooting procedure.
This test does not w o r k w i t h aftermarket speakers or amplifiers. All components must be OEM to do this test.
No. 1 button
No. 6 button
V O L PUSH PWR knob
5. Press the No. 1 button, then the active noise cancellation (ANC) system check mode begins.
How to check the active noise cancellation system in this check mode
While in this system check m o d e , press the No. 1 button to move to the next test.
You must remember h o w many times y o u pressed the No. 1 button. The system will not s h o w w h i c h test item you are
doing.
For test items 1 thru 10, the speaker makes a low-frequency h u m (50 Hz) w h e n the system is normal for 5 seconds up
to 1 minute.
W h e n there is a failure in the system, the speaker will not make a low-frequency h u m (50 Hz) or the h u m stops w i t h i n 5
seconds for tests 1 t h r u 10.
The check mode automatically cancels w h e n the time reaches 1 minute after starting each test.
W h e n y o u reach the 11th test item, the test loops ON and OFF doing the 11th test each t i m e t i m e y o u press the No. 1
button. It does not move to a new test.
This check mode ends w h e n y o u start the engine (ignition switch in START (III)), because power to the audio system is
cut off w h e n the ignition switch is in START (III).
This test is not available to do all items at once. If y o u need t o use the 2nd, 7th, or 11th test, start the check mode w i t h
the engine idling. If y o u need to check test item 9th and/or 10th, start the check mode w i t h the engine stopped. Other
test items are available in both conditions.
23-58
Test
Item
No.
Test Item
Button
Operation
Number of
times
Display
ON/OFF
No.1
Button
Pressed
Self-Diagnostic
mode enter
1st
Microphone
input
Turn audio unit

off, press and
hold preset
buttons No. 1 and
No. 6, press the
VOL PUSH PWR
knob to o n .
No. 1
No. 1
1
2
ON
OFF
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
11th
door/
trunk switch
input
Front speaker
output
No. 1
No. 1
3
4
ON
OFF
No. 1
No. 1
5
6
ON
OFF
Rear speaker
output
No. 1
No. 1
7
8
ON
OFF
ANC front
microphone
input
ANC rear
microphone
input
NEP (engine
speed
signal) input
Door/trunk
switch
input
CSSAMA
signal
(VCM 3
cylinder
mode) input
CSSAMC
signal
(VCM 4
cylinder
mode) input
ANC operation
ON/OFF
No. 1
No. 1
9
10
ON
OFF
No. 1
No. 1
11
12
ON
OFF
No. 1
No. 1
13
14
ON
OFF
No. 1
No. 1
15
16
ON
OFF
No. 1
No. 1
17
18
ON
OFF
NEP i n p u t
No. 1
No. 1
No. 1
No. 1
Test Available
Condition
None
speaker output
2nd
Sound from
Speakers
when System is
Normal
19
20
21
22
ON
OFF
None
50 Hz h u m for 1
minute
None
50 Hz h u m for 1
minute
A n y conditions
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
None
50 Hz h u m
minute
A n y conditions
Engine idling
All doors/trunk
closed
for 1
A n y conditions
fori
A n y conditions
for 1
A n y conditions
for 1
Engine idling
for 1
for 1
fori
None
50 Hz h u m f o r i
minute
All doors/trunk
closed
Ignition switch in ON
(10 +
HDS operation*
1
Ignition switch in ON
(II) +
HDS operation*
2
ON
OFF
Engine speed about

None
2,500 r p m in neutral
Engine noise
reduced
*1:On test item 8th, select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION, ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A O N , then press No. 1 button and check test item No. 9.
*2:On test item 9th, select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION, ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID C O N , then press No. 1 button and check test item No. 10.
(cont'd)
23-59
Audio System
Screen indication ON
With navigation
RNC
ON
Without navigation
RNC ON
Screen indication O F F
With navigation
RNC
OFF
Without navigation
RNC OFF
Canceling the ANC System Check Mode

6. The self-diagnostic function ends w h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
23-60
Error Codes
The audio system can display a f e w error codes w h e n some problems are detected w i t h the audio disc player, the audio
disc, the X M radio, or the anti-theft code. This is not a complete list of audio error codes. Refer to s y m p t o m
troubleshooting, or go to any official Honda service website for more service information.
CD Error Codes
Error Code
Displayed
DISC ERROR
HEAT ERROR
Possible Cause
Solution
There is a problem w i t h the disc player. A

c o m m o n problem is paper disc labels
coming off the disc while in the player.
Disc player is hot. This can happen i f t h e
vehicle is parked out in the hot sun all
day.
Try to eject the disc and try another one. If there is

still a p r o b l e m , replace the audio unit (see page
23-125).
Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a while and
try the disc player again. If the error code is still
present, try another disc. If the error code is still
present, replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).
Current track is skipped. The next supported track
or file plays automatically.
Verify that CD file names end in CDA.
Verify that CD-R or CD-RW w i t h compressed
music formats end in MP3 or W M A .
Other file formats like i-Tunes (AAC) or Ogg are
not recognized.
W M A files may have (DRM) copy protection
and cannot be read.
Press the EJECT button and hold it for 5 seconds.
If the CD does not eject, try again. If the CD still
w o n ' t eject, replace the audio unit (see page
23-125).
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not supported.
MECH ERROR
CD label j a m m e d in the mechanism.

CD eject mechanism or motor is
inoperative.
CD spindle motor w o n ' t spin up the
CD.
U S B Error Codes
Error Code
Displayed
Possible Cause
FILE ERROR
The audio unit cannot read the file(s).
MEDIA ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
USB LOADING
Unsupported USB device is connected.

Data is being loaded f r o m the USB
device.
USB NO SONG
There are no files or files that are not

supported on the USB device.
USB NO DATA
USB device is not connected.
Solution
Check the files in the USB device. There is a

possibility that the files have been damaged or are
not supported.
Connect the applicable USB device, (see Owner's
Manual)
possibility that the files have been damaged, or
are not supported.
possibility that the files have been damaged, or
are not supported.
Ifthe code appears w h e n the USB devices is
connected, go to USB device does not function
(see page 23-89).
(cont'd)
23-61
Audio System
Error Codes (cont'd)
Audio Unit Error Codes
Error Code
Displayed
CODE ERROR 1
CODE ERROR E
Solution
Possible Cause
st
Anti-theft code mismatch (1 try).

Anti-theft code mismatch (10 try).
th
Enter the correct anti-theft code.

Remove fuse No. 17 (20A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then reinsert it. You will have 10
more tries to enter the correct anti-theft code.
X M Error Codes
Error Code
Displayed
LOADING
OFF AIR
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CHECK ANTENNA
ANTENNA ERROR
Possible Cause
X M radio is acquiring audio or program
information.
X M channel not in service.
Loss of signal.
X M radio is receiving information update

f r o m the network.
X M antenna error.
No signal f r o m X M .
Solution
Wait until the radio receives the information.
Try another X M channel.
Both terrestrial and satellite antennas have lost
signal. Park the vehicle outside w i t h a clear view
of the southern horizon.
This message disappears once the update
finishes.
Repair open or short in the satellite antenna.
Substitute a known-good X M antenna (see page
23-134), and recheck. If the error is gone, replace
the original X M antenna. If the error is still
present, replace the antenna lead.
Check a known-good vehicle w i t h X M radio. If the
known-good vehicle has the same s y m p t o m s ,
contact X M satellite radio at 800-852-9696.
NOTE: Do these checks w i t h the vehicle parked outside w i t h a clear view of the southern horizon.
23-62
Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference
NOTE:
Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-93).
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by any of these
conditions:
-The radio station is far away.
-A tall building, mountains, or high-voltage power
lines are nearby.
-Aftermarket w i n d o w tint.
-Atmospheric conditions are unfavorable.
2. Do the seek stop test (see page 23-124).
Is the test vehicle within 10 % of the
vehicle?
7. Check the connections f r o m the AM/FM antenna

amplifier to the w i n d o w antenna.
Are there any loose or damaged
connections?
YES-Repair the connections, or substitute a

known-good AM/FM antenna amplifier (see page
23-133)and retest. Ifthe symptom/condition goes
away, replace the original AM/FM antenna
amplifier.!
NO-Go to step 8.
8. With the help of an assistant inside the vehicle, have
the assistant shine a strong flashlight (A) along each
antenna wire (B). Check f r o m the outside of the
vehicle for any breaks or openings in the antenna
wires (the light shines through any breaks or cuts).
NOTE: It is easier to see the breaks if you do this test in
a dark or shaded area.
known-good
YES-Multipath interference or weak station.

Operation is n o r m a l .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check i f t h e radio reception/interference is the same
as the known-good vehicle in several different
locations.
Is the reception/ interference the same as a known-good
vehicle in several different locations?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Muitipath interference or weak station. Operation
is n o r m a l . !
4. Check the reception/interference while the engine is
running, and compare it to the known-good vehicle.
Is there noise (static or whine) only with the engine
running?
YES-Check the antenna and radio grounds. If OK,
check the charging system, fuel injection system (fuel
p u m p ) , HVAC (blower motor), and the ignition
system.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Remove the right D-pillar trim (see page 20-89).
Are there any breaks or cuts in the antenna?

YES-Repair the w i n d o w antenna. Go to AM/FM
antenna repair (see page 23-133), or replace the right
quarter glass (see page 20-55) i f t h e damaged section
is too l o n g . l
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P
connector.
11. Turn on the audio unit.
(cont'd)
23-63
Audio System
12. Measure the voltage between A M / F M antenna
amplifier 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
A M / F M ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
17. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G

(3P) terminal No. 3 and A M / F M antenna amplifier 3P

ANT+B
ANT +B
p-r-
1
IEANT+B
Is there battery

voltage?
NO-Go to step 13.
Y E S - A u d i o unit is faulty, replace the audio unit (see

page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .

14. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-125).
15. Disconnect audio unit connector G (3P).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the audio unit

and the AM/FM antenna amplifier. Also check the
antenna lead/sublead connector.B
20. Disconnect audio unit connector G (3P).
2 1 . Check for continuity between audio unit connector G

ANT+B
RF IN
the audio unit and the A M / F M antenna a m p l i f i e r . !
NO-Go to step 17.
Y E S - A M / F M antenna lead and/or sublead is shorted.
Replace the shielded A M / F M antenna lead and/or
sublead.
NO-Go to step 22.
23-64

(3P) terminal No. 1 and AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P

(3P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

{31
RF IN
RFIN
RFSH
RF IN

Is there
continuity?
NO-AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead is open.
Replace the shielded AM/FM antenna lead and/or
sublead.
Is there
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good AM/FM antenna

amplifier (see page 23-133)and recheck. If the
reception is normal, replace the original A M / F M
antenna amplifier. If the reception is still poor, replace
the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
NO-AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead is shorted.
Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead.H

(3P) terminal No. 2 and AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P
RFSH

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 24.

NO-AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead is open.
Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or s u b l e a d .
23-65
Audio System
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No
information display and no sound)
8. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio

individually.
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
1
13
/143 416517618719
10 11 12
22 23 24
+B (WHT)
A C C (PUR)
2. Push the power switch ON t o see if audio unit turns

ON.
Does the audio unit display operate properly,
audio unit sound
and the
normal?
time.B
Is there battery
NO-Go t o step 3.
YES-Go t o step 9.

fuse/relay box and the No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the
Are the fuses
OK?
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the No. 17

(20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, the
No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ relay box
and the audio unit.B
9. Reconnect the audio unit connector A (24P).
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.B
10. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A

(24P) terminal No.12 and body ground.
5. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-125). Check that

the audio unit connectors are properly connected.
Is the audio unit connected
voltage?
GND (BLK)
properly?
YES-Go t o step 6.
NO-Repair poor connections and reconnect the
connector, and recheck the f u n c t i o n .
13
/143
4 5 6 7
1! 1718 19
10 11
22 23
r~
12
24
6. Disconnect the audio unit connector A (24P).

NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD/DVD player's load
mechanism.
YES-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit (see

page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the wire
between the audio unit connector A (24P) terminal
No. 12 and body ground (G402).H
23-66
Audio unit power switch will not turn off

NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
Check for aftermarket accessories plugged into the
vehicle accessory power sockets.
2. Push the power switch off or turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0) to see if the audio unit turns off.
Does the audio unit turn
OFF?
No sound is heard from speaker(s) from all

inputs (display is normal) (With rear
entertainment system and/or navigation)
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
Make sure the v o l u m e is not set to the MIN level.
Before doing the troubleshooting, do the Audio unit
power switch will not turn on troubleshooting (see
page 23-66).
YES-Operation is n o r m a l .
NO-Go to step 3.
2. On the steering wheel, check the navigation talk

c o m m a n d , and/or the HandsFreeLink talk c o m m a n d
function.

4. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-125). Disconnect
audio unit connector A (24P).
mechanism.
5. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
P
13
/ / | 1 0 11
12
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 / j / 2 2 23 24
14
command
talk command
function
and/ or the HFL talk
set?
YES-Cancel the navigation talk c o m m a n d by pressing

the navigation BACK button, and/or HFL talk
c o m m a n d , press the HFL BACK button, then recheck
the f u n c t i o n . B
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Do the speaker check mode with the self-diagnostic
3 4 5 6 7
Are the navigation
A C C (PUR)
Do all speakers
produce
a tone?
YES-System is OK at this time. Check for poor

connections at the audio unit, speakers and stereo
amplifier.B
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Check the faulty speaker(s) for any physical damage.

Is there any physical
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Check for short to power on the PUR w i r e . B

NO-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit (see
page 23-125).B
damage?
YES-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-129), and

recheck.B
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
23-67
Audio System
6. Remove the speaker(s) that has no sound (see page
23-129), and disconnect its connector.
7. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor
connection.
Reconnect
the speaker
symptom;
is the condition
connector,
still
and recheck
the
14. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (28P)
SWD+B (YEL)
Jt
present?
|/1
1 1
1 I2I 3
5[6
7
8 l/llOlU j / | l 3
27 28
16 17 18 1 9 / 21 22 23 24
YES-Go t o step 8.
l l 4
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is n o r m a l .

8. Test the speaker(s) (see page 23-129).
Is the speaker
OK?
YES-Go t o step 9.
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-129), and

retest.B
10. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A (24P).

stereo amplifier connector A (24P) terminals No. 12
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (24P)
+B MAIN (PUR) ,
l
13
9 10 11
12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+BSUB (PUR)

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.31 (30 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the stereo
amplifier connector A (24P).H
12. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector B (28P).
23-68
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 15.
9. Reconnect the speaker connector.
Is there battery
NO-Repair open in the wire between stereo amplifier

connector B (28P) and audio unit connector A (24P).H
16. Reconnect stereo amplifier connector A (24P).

stereo amplifier connector A (24P) terminals No. 1 and
21. Check for continuity between body ground and stereo

amplifier connector A (24P) according t o the table.
Speaker
Stereo
amplifier
connector
A19( + )
A7(-)
A17( + )
D r i v e r ' s door speaker

Left tweeter
1 GND MAIN (BLK)
3 4
5 16 7 8
A5H
9 10 11
12
14 15 16.17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
GND S U B (BLK)

between stereo amplifier connector A (24P) and body
ground (G402).B
A14(-f)
A2(-)
A18(+)
Front center speaker

Front passenger's
door speaker
Right tweeter
A6H
A16( + )
A4(-)
A20(+)
A8(-)
A23( + )
A11 ( - )
A21 ( + )
A9(-)
A22( + )
A10(~)
A15( + )
A3(-)
Left rear door

speaker
Left satellite
speaker
Right rear door
speaker
Right satellite
speaker
Subwoofer
Wire
color
BLU
RED
WHT/YEL
BRN/BLK
BLK
PNK
RED
BRN
RED/WHT
BRN/WHT
RED
BLU
BLU
GRY
RED
BLU
RED
BLK
WHT
RED

20. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A (24P).
13
9 10 11
12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Is there
continuity?

between the stereo amplifier and the speaker(s).l
NO-Go t o step 22.
(cont'd)
23-69
Audio System
22. Measure the resistance between both pairs of stereo
amplifier connector A (24P) terminals ( + ) and ()
according to the table.
Speaker
Driver's door
speaker
Left tweeter
Front center
speaker
Front
passenger's
door speaker
Right tweeter
Stereo
amplifier
connector
A19(+)
Wire
color
A7H
A17(+)
A B H
A14(+)
A2(-)
A18(+)
A6H
A16(+)
A4H
Left rear door
speaker
Left satellite
speaker
Right rear
door speaker
Right satellite
speaker
Subwoofer
A20(+)
A8(-)
A23(+)
A11 ( - )
A21 ( + )
A9H
A22(+)
A10(~)
A15(+)
A3H
Speaker
resistance
BLU
RED
WHT/YEL
BRN/BLK
BLK
PNK
RED
BRN
About
40
About
3.3 0
About
40
About
40
RED/WHT
BRN/WHT
RED
BLU
BLU
GRY
RED
BLU
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
About
3.3 0
About
40
About
40
About
40
About
40
About
20
24. Check for continuity between audio unit connector A

(24P), connector B (14P) and stereo amplifier
connector B (28P) according to the table.
Audio unit
connector
Stereo
amplifier
connector
B24
B11
B23
B10
B22
IB8
B21
B7
B19
B18
I35
B16
B17
B6
B2
B3
A6
A7
A10
A11
A18
A19
A22
A23
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B8
B11
B12
Wire color
YEL
BRN
PUR
LTBLU
PNK
BLU
RED
GRN
LTBLU
PNK
BLU
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
RED
GRY/BLK
BLU/BLK
4 5 6 7
1 4 / 1 6 17 18 19
10 11
13
22 23 24

I
13
9 10 11
12
12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
-71
5
11 12
//

S T E R E O AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (28P)
Is the resistance
OK?
YES-Go t o step 23.
NO-Repair open or short in the wire(s) between the

stereo amplifier and the speaker(s).B
23. Disconnect audio unit connectors A (24P), and B (14P).
mechanism.
23-70
16 17 18 19
10 11
21 22 23 24
13 14
27 28

Is there
continuity?
NO-Repair open in the wiire(s) between the stereo
amplifier and the speaker(s).B
25. Check for continuity between body ground and stereo

amplifier connector B (28P) according to the table.
Stereo
amplifier
connector
B2
B3
B5
B6
B7
B8
B10
B11
B16
B17
B18
B19
B21
B22
B23
B24
Wire color
NOTE:
GRY/BLK
BLU/BLK
BLU
RED
GRN
BLU
LTBLU
BRN
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
PNK
LTBLU
RED
PNK
PUR
YEL

n
2 3

22- 93).
terminals.
Set the fader and balance positions t o the center.
Make sure the v o l u m e is not set t o the MIN level.
2. Do the speaker check mode w i t h the self-diagnostic
Do all speakers
produce
tone?
Y E S - S y s t e m is OK at this time. Check for poor

connections at the audio unit, speakers and stereo
amplifier.
NO-Go to step 3.
5 6 7 8
16 17 18 19
No sound is heard from speaker(s) from all

inputs (display is normal) (Without navigation
and rear entertainment system)
10 11 / 1 3 14
21 22 23 24
27 28
4. Check the faulty speaker(s) for any physical damage.

Is there any physical
damage?
YES-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-129), and

recheck.B
NO-Go to step 5.
Is there
continuity?

between the audio unit and the stereo a m p l i f i e r . !
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page
23-125), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original audio u n i t . If the s y m p t o m
is still present, substitute a known-good stereo
amplifier (see page 23-126), and recheck. If the
stereo a m p l i f i e r . !
5. Remove the speaker(s) that has no sound (see page

23- 129), and disconnect its connector.
6. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor
connection.
Reconnect
the speaker connector, and recheck
symptom; is the condition still present?
the
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is n o r m a l .
7. Test the speaker(s) (see page 23-129).
Is the speaker
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 8
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-129), and
retest.
8. Reconnect the speaker connector.
(cont'd)
23-71
Audio System
9. Disconnect audio unit connectors A (24P) and B (14P).
NOTE: Eject ail the CDs before removing the audio
unit t o prevent damaging the CD player's load
mechanism.
speaker wires of audio unit connector A (24P) and B
(14P) according t o the table.
Speaker
Driver* s door speaker
Left tweeter
Front passenger's
door speaker
Right tweeter
Left rear door
speaker
Right rear door
speaker
Subwoofer
Audio unit
connector
A23(+)
A22(-)
A23( + )
A22(-)
A19(+)
A18(-)
A19( + )
A18(-)
A11 ( + )
A10(-)
A7( + )
A6(-)
B8(+)
B1 ( - )
Wire
color
BLU
RED
BLU
RED
RED
BRN
RED
BRN
RED
BLU
RED
BLU
WHT
RED
//
10 11
12. Measure the resistance between both pairs of speaker

wires ( + ) and ( ) at the audio unit connector A (24P)
and B (14P) according to the table.
Speaker
Driver's
door speaker
Front
passenger's
door speaker
Left rear
door speaker
Right rear
door speaker
Subwoofer
Audio
unit
connector
A23( + )
A22(-)
A19(+)
A18(-)
Wire
color
Speaker
resistance
BLU
RED
RED
BRN
About
40
About
40
A11 ( + )
A10(-)
A7( + )
A6(-)
B8( + )
BK-)
RED
BLU
RED
BLU
WHT
RED
About
40
About
40
About
20
/ \ 3|4I5 | 6 " | T l X l X l 0 l
1
13
1 1
12
14 \/\\6 [ / [ T 8 [19 \/\/\22123 24

3 4 5 6 7
11. Disconnect the connector(s) f r o m the tweeter.
12
13 [ |14|/^16|/1181191X1X122123124
/


Is the resistance
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 13
Is there
continuity?

between the audio unit and the speaker(s).B
23-72
NO-Repair open or short in the wire(s) between the

audio unit and the speaker(s).B
13. Disconnect the connector(s) f r o m the front speaker(s).

14. Connect the tweeter 2P connector ( + ) and ( ) w i t h a
jumper wire.
Auxiliary audio input sound is low or cannot

be heard
NOTE:
22-93).
TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR

terminals.
Use auxiliary stereo cables w i t h 3.5 m m ends only.
Auxiliary accessories may be played on the audio unit

using the auxiliary input.
JUMPER WIRE
2. Turn on the audio unit and connect an auxiliary

accessory to the auxiliary audio input jack.
15. Check for continuity between both pairs of speaker

wires ( + ) and ( ) for each speaker at the audio unit
connector A (24P) according t o the table.
Speaker
A u d i o unit
connector
A23( + )
A22 ( - )
A19( + )
A18(-)
Left tweeter
Right tweeter
Wire
color
BLU
RED
RED
BRN
1
13
3
14
r
5
/ /
16
18 19
10 11
//
Is the sound normal from the vehicle
12
22 23 24
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page

23-125), and recheck. Ifthe sy m pto m/i n d i cated goes
away, replace the original audio unit.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the audio unit
and the speaker(s).B
speakers?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to no sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) (see
page 23-67).B
4. Turn on the auxiliary audio accessory and make sure
the auxiliary accessory v o l u m e is set to max.
Do you hear the auxiliary audio

Is there
3. Adjust the audio unit v o l u m e and check the audio unit

in all modes ( A M , FM, CD, X M , etc.).
accessory?
YES-Tell the customer they need to adjust the v o l u m e

on their accessory unit to h i g h . H
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Substitute a known-good auxiliary audio accessory
and/or auxiliary stereo cable, and recheck.
Does the auxiliary audio accessory
from the vehicle
speakers?
operate
properly
YES-Original auxiliary audio accessory or the

auxiliary stereo cable is faulty.B
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page 23-134)
and check that the auxiliary jack assembly is properly
connected.
Is the auxiliary jack assembly
connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Reconnectthe connector, and recheck the
function.
8. Disconnect the auxiliary jack assembly 5P connector.
(cont'd)
23-73
Audio System
9. Disconnect audio unit connector D (20P).
10. Check for continuity between body ground and audio
unit connector D (20P) according t o the table.
Audio unit connector
D3
D13
D14
D15
Wire color
WHT
BLK
RED
PUR
12. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D

(20P) and auxiliary jack assembly 5P connector
according t o the table.
Audio unit
connector
D3
D5
D13
D14
D15
1
r
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the audio unit and the auxiliary jack
assembly. Replace the affected shielded harness.H
1 2 3 4 5

(20P) according to the table.
To terminals
D4 (BRN), D13(BLK),D14
(RED)
D13 (BLK), D14 (RED)
D14 (RED)
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Is there
continuity?
YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the audio

unit and the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the
affected shielded h a r n e s s .
NO-Go t o step 12.
23-74
NO-Go to step 11.
D4 (BRN)
D13(BLK)
WHT
LTBLU
BLK
RED
PUR
continuity?
From terminal
D3 (WHT)
Wire color
11 | 1 J 2 | 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 1 1 6 | 1 7 | 1 8 | / ^
Is there
Auxiliary jack
assembly
connector
3
2
4
5
1

Is there
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good auxiliary jack

assembly (see page 23-134), and recheck. I f t h e
auxiliary jack assembly. I f t h e symptom/indication is
still present, replace the audio unit (see page
23-125).B
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio
Audio system sound is weak or distorted

(display is normal)
Volume does not change
NOTE:

22-93).
Check the connectors f o r poor connections or loose

terminals.
Check the connectors f o r poor connection or loose

terminals.

22- 93).
2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each

mode ( A M , FM, X M , USB, and CD).
2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each

mode ( A M , FM, X M , USB, and CD).
Is there sound
from the speakers,
quality normal in each
and is the
sound
mode?
YES-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this

t i m e . Check for loose connections at the audio unit,
the amplifier, and each s p e a k e r . !
NO-Speakers all w o r k normally, but the sound quality
is poor:
NOTE:
Is the sound
normal?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to audio system sound is weak or distorted
(see page 23-75), or no sound is heard f r o m speaker(s)
(see page 23-67).B
3. Operate the v o l u m e knob t o see if the v o l u m e
changes.
If the sound quality is poor only w i t h A M or FM, go

to poor A M or FM radio reception or interference
(see page 23-63).
Does the volume
change?
If the sound quality is poor only w i t h X M radio, go

to poor or no sound w i t h X M radio (Audio unit does
display X M channels) (see page 23-119).

23- 125), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original audio u n i t . B
YES-Operation is normal at this t i m e . B
If the sound quality is poor only w i t h USB, go to

USB input sound is l o w or cannot be heard (see
page 23-87).
23-75
Audio System
Volume does not increase with speed
NOTE:
22- 93).
terminals.
Set the fader and balance positions t o the center.
1. Check the (SVC) mode setting in the audio unit sound
set-up.
Is the (SVC) set to off?
5. Test-drive the vehicle very slowly and have an

assistant measure the voltage at audio unit connector
A(24P) terminal No. 15.
NOTE: Some voltmeters may s h o w an average of
2.5 V, and others may show a constant voltage,
depending on the meter's measurement speed.
13
YES-Change the setting t o at least the M i d setting,

and r e s e t .
14 1 5 15 / 1 8 19
10 11
12
22 23 24
V S S O U T (BLU)
2. Do the self-diagnostic function for the vehicle speed
pulse indication (see page 23-50).
Does the self-diagnostic
when the vehicle is
function indicate a VSP
signal
moving?

Is there a 0-5 Vpulse
or about 2.5 V
average?

23- 125), and retest. I f t h e symptom/indication goes
YES-Substitute a known-good audio unit, and

recheck (see page 23-125). Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original audio unit.B
NO-
NO-Repair open or short in the w i r e between the

audio unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 15 and the
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 30. If no open or
short is f o u n d , substitute a known-good audio unit,
and recheck (see page 23-125). Ifthe
audio unit. Ifthe s y m p t o m does not go away, update
the PCM (see page 11 -249) if it does not have the latest
software or substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-250).B
1 CD type:Go t o step 3.
Except 1 CD type: Check for B-CAN DTCs
(communication BUS Line Error) w i t h the HDS and
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If no
B-CAN DTCs or communication bus line errors are
f o u n d , substitute a known-good audio unit (see
page 23-125), and recheck. I f t h e s y m p t o m goes
away, replace the original audio unit.
NOTE: Eject all the CDs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
mechanism.
23-76
Volume is too high or too low when driving at

freeway speeds but is normal when the
vehicle is stopped
Audio system information does not display

on the audio-HVAC display unit (without
navigation)
NOTE:
NOTE:

22-93).
terminals.

22- 93).
1. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds, and

monitor the v o l u m e level.
Is the volume level too high or too low?

terminals.
2. Check the connections at the audio unit connector D

(20P).
YES-Go t o step 2.
Are the connectors
YES-Go t o step 3.
time.B
2. Change the (SVC) m o d e setting in sound set-up t o

M i d (see the owner's manual).
Is the volume level still too high, or too low?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .

N O - l m p r o p e r (SVC) setting f o r customers sound
taste.B
and terminals connected
properly?
NO-Repair the connection, and r e c h e c k . B

3. Remove the audio-HVAC display unit (see page
23- 126).
4. Check the connections at the audio-HVAC display unit
16P connector.
Are the connectors
and terminals connected
properly?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Repair the connection, and r e c h e c k . B
5. Measure the voltage between audio-HVAC display
/n /
3
r
6
11 12 13 14
8
16

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 6.
fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
audio-HVAC display unit 16P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l
No. 8 . B
(cont'd)
23-77
Audio System
6. Measure the voltage between the audio-HVAC display

(20P) and the audio-HVAC display unit 16P connector
Audio unit
connector
/ / 11412/ 136147 816

//
/
D6
D7
D17
GND (BLK)
Wire color
Audio-HVAC
display unit
connector
4
3
6
RED
BLK
WHT
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YES-Go to step 7.
between the audio-HVAC display unit 16P connector
terminal No. 13 and body ground (G403).H
111121131141151161171181/1/

3|4|/|6
|/L/|11|12|13|14|/|16

8. Disconnect audio unit connector D (20P) and the
Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.

unit and the audio-HVAC display unit. Replace the
23-78

audio-HVAC display unit 16P connector according t o
the table.
Wire color
Audio-HVAC display unit

connector
3
4
6
BLK
RED
WHT
3|4|/|6 7 | 8 |
|/|/|11|12|13|14|/|16

terminals.
2. Turn the combination lighting switch t o the parking
light position.
illuminated?
YES-lntermittent p r o b l e m ; the audio unit is OK at this

time. Check for loose or poor connections at audio
unit connector A (24P).H
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-The re is a short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the audio unit and audio-HVAC display unit.
Repalce the affected shielded h a r n e s s . !
NO-Go t o step 11.
4. Check the illumination of several other buttons not

related to the audio system.
Are the buttons
illuminated?
YES-Go t o step 5.

(20P) according to the table.
D7 (BLK)
D16 (BRN)

22-93).
Are the buttons
continuity?
From terminal
D6 (RED)
NOTE:
3. Check the illumination of the audio unit buttons.
Is there
Audio unit button illumination does not work
To terminals
D7 (BLK), D16(BRN),D17
(WHT)
D16(BRN),D17(WHT)
D17(WHT)
i
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1l|l2ll3ll4ll5ll6|l7ll8]/1/
NO-Troubleshootthe interior lights. Start by checking

the No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open in the wire
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio
unit.l
6. Disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
NOTE: Eject all the CDs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
mechanism.

Is there continuity between
any of the
terminals?
YES-The re is a short in the wire(s) between the audio

unit and audio-HVAC display unit. Replace the
affected shielded h a r n e s s . !
NO-Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display
unit (see page 23-126), and recheck. If the
audio-HVAC display unit. If the s y m p t o m is still
present, substitute a known-good audio unit, and
replace the original audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
(cont'd)
23-79
Audio System
8. Check f o r continuity between audio unit connector A
(24P) terminal No. 1 and the gauge control module
32P connectorterminal No. 2.
1 / | 3 | 4 5 | 6 | 7 ^ /|10|11| 12
13 | 1 4 | / | 1 6 | / | 1 8 | 1 9 | / | / | 2 2 | 2 3 24
I L L - (YEL) n
Audio disc does not load

NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may damage the player mechanism.
Make sure the disc is compatible with the system (see
the owner's manual f o r more information).
_n
\A/\
5 I 6 \ / \ / \ 9 |10|11|l2|l3|l4|/fa
Il7ll8ll9l20l2l|22l23l24|25|26|27l28l29l30l/l32

2. Turn on the audio unit and insert known-good disc t o
see i f t h e s y m p t o m can be duplicated.

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 9.
control module and the audio u n i t . 1
13
/r /
10 11 12
22 23 24
I ILL+ (LT BLU)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Check the connections at audio unit connector A

(24P). If all connections are OK, replace the audio unit
(see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the audio u n i t . B
23-80
load?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Insert another disc.
the disc
load?
YES-The original disc is faulty.B

NO-Go t o step 4.
5. Remove the No. 17 (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and wait f o r 5 minutes, then reinstall
the fuse.
7. Turn on the audio unit, and insert known-good disc t o
see i f t h e s y m p t o m can be duplicated.
Does
the disc
YES-Operation is normal. Ifthe disc loads normally,

but will not play, go t o audio disc does not play (see
page 2 3 - 8 2 ) .
Does
10. With the headlight switch still o n , measure the

voltage between the audio unit connector A (24P)
3 4 i5 6 7
14
16
18 19
Does
the disc
load?
YES-lntermittent failure. Operation is n o r m a l .

NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
Audio disc does not eject
Audio disc changer does not load all six discs
NOTE:
NOTE:

22-93).

22-93).

terminals.



terminals.
2. Turn on the audio unit.
2. Turn on the audio unit and t r y loading six discs into

the audio unit.
Does the system
turn on?
Does the audio unit accept
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Go to audio unit power switch will not turn o n
(see page 2 3 - 6 6 ) .
3. Check to see if the disc ejects correctly w i t h no
binding by pushing the EJECT button.
Does the disc eject
properly?
all six
discs?
YES-lntermittent failure, the audio unit is OK at this

time.B
NO-Go t o step 3.
3. Try loading the disc player w i t h six known-good discs.
Does the audio unit accept
all six
discs?
YES-At least one of the original discs is f a u l t y . H
23-81
Audio System
Audio disc changer does not move between
discs
Special tools required
NOTE:
22-93).
Audio disc does not play

terminals.
Diagnostic CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
NOTE:
22- 93).
terminals.

2. Turn o n the audio unit, and eject all the CDs f r o m the
audio unit.

2. Turn on the audio unit and t r y loading a disc.
3. Insert six discs into the audio unit, and see if the
changer moves between discs.
Does the changer
operate
normally?
YES-lntermittent failure, the disc changer is OK at this

time.B
4. Insert six known-good discs into the audio unit.

operate
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Go t o audio disc does not load (see page
23- 80).B
Does the disc
play?
normally?
YES-At least one of the original discs is faulty.B

NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).B
23-82
load?
3. Insert audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) in

the audio unit.
NO-Go t o step 4.
Does the changer
Does the disc
YES-The original disc is faulty or has an unreadable

format.B
away, replace the original audio unit.B
6. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (T/N 07AAZSDBA300). Play tracks 2 1 1 , and note on which
number track(s) the disc starts skipping. Do the same
test on a known-good vehicle.

Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200
. Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA300
Does the disc skip on same track(s)
Audio disc skips
vehicle under the same
NOTE:

22-93).
NO-Go t o step 7.

terminals.
Over-inflated tires can cause excessive vibration.
as the
7. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (T/N 07AAZSDBA200). Play tracks 7 - 1 1 and tracks 1 3 - 1 5 and
note on which track number(s) where the disc starts
skipping. Do the same test on a known-good vehicle
under the same conditions.
Does the disc skip on same track number(s)
known-good
2. Confirm the vehicle's tires are properly inflated.
known-good
conditions?
as the
vehicle?
3. Check the customer's disc f o r scratches and

fingerprints.
NOTE: The f o l l o w i n g test should be done w i t h the

audio unit bass and treble set to the customer's
listening settings. W h e n comparing to known-good
vehicles, do the comparison on the same model and
t r i m level. Use the customer's audio settings.
4. Test-drive the vehicle to identify w h e n the customer's
disc skips. The audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZSDBA100) can be used i f t h e customer's disc is not
available; use tracks 1012.
Does the disc
skip?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Operation is n o r m a l .
5. Compare the customer's skipping disc that skips to a
known-good vehicle, and test-drive under the same
conditions.
Does the disc skip in the known-good
same
conditions?
vehicle
under
the
YES-The CD player operation is normal, the problem

is w i t h the customer's d i s c i
NO-Go t o step 6.
NOTE: Do the following test w i t h vehicle parked and
the engine running.
23-83
Audio System
Audio remote switch does not work properly
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
7. Reconnect the audio remote switch, and measure the

resistance between audio unit connector A (24P)
terminals No. 5 and No. 16 as specified in the table.
REMOTE GND (BRN)
T- r
3 4 5 6 7
14
16
18 19
//
13
2. Turn on the audio unit and check the audio unit

operation (volume up, v o l u m e d o w n , CH (UP), CH
(DOWN), MODE) using the audio remote switch.
Is the audio unit operation
OK?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Test the audio remote switch (see page 23-132).
Is the audio remote switch
OK?
10 11 12
22 23 24
R E M O T E (PNK)
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH T A B L E

Button held VOL VOL
down
DOWN UP
CH
<+)
(No
button
pressed)
about about about about about about
100 0 357 0 775 0 1.7 kO 3.7 kO 10 kO
Resistance
Is the resistance
CH
(-)
MODE
OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the audio remote switch (see page
NO-Repair short or high resistance in the circuit

between the audio unit and the audio remote switch.
If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel (see page
24-185).B
17-8).B
6. Disconnect audio unit connector A (24P).
mechanism.

individually.
13 /
3 4 5 6 7
14
16
18 19
/ /
//
//
10 11 12
22 23 24
R E M O T E (PNK)

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the cable reel.
23-84

individually.
REMOTE GND (BRN)
13
/143
4
16
/ /
//
//
6 7
18 19
10 11
22 23
12
24
REMOTE (PNK)

Is there
NOTE:
22- 93).
T5
Audio unit button does not work
continuity?
YES-Repair short t o body g r o u n d in the wire(s)

between the audio unit and the cable r e e l . B
NO-Replace the cable reel (see page 2 4 - 1 8 5 ) .

terminals.
In order to troubleshoot the main power switch, go to
Power switch will not turn o n (see page 23-66).
1. Go to the audio button, knob, and remote switch
detection mode in the audio self-diagnostic function
(see page 23-49).
2. Push all of the audio unit buttons and rotate the
v o l u m e dial to the right and left. Check if the
button/dial value is displayed.
Do all the buttons work
properly?
YES-Operation is normal. There is a possibility that

the w r o n g button was p r e s s e d .
23- 125), and recheck. If the symptom/indicated goes
23-85
Audio System
Audio unit disc indicator does not work
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
Discs w i t h labels should not be used in the audio unit.
They may damage the player mechanism.
1. Turn on the audio system.
2. Insert a known-good disc or press the EJECT button.
1$ the DISC
indicator (LED)
indicated?
YES-The audio unit is OK at this time. Check for loose

or poor connections at the audio unit.B
23- 125), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
Security indicator does not work properly

NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
The system will not operate w i t h o u t the 5-digit
security (anti-theft) code.
Before troubleshooting, make sure y o u have the
5-digit security code entered.
2. Turn on the audio unit, and check the audio system in
all modes ( A M , FM, CD, X M , etc.).
Does the audio system
operate
normally?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Troubleshoot the audio system.B
Is the security indicator (LED) light on
(blinking)?
YES-Go to Step 4.
23- 125), and recheck. I f t h e symptom/indication goes
Is the security indicator (LED) light out (not
blinking)?
YES-The audio unit is O'K at this time. Check for loose

or poor connections at audio unit.B
23-125), and recheck. I f t h e symptom/indication goes
23-86
USB input sound is low or cannot be heard

(with navigation)
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
10. Connect the c u s t o m e r ' s USB device t o a known-good

vehicle (same year/trim) that is equipped w i t h a USB
adapter, and check the USB device operation.
Is the USB device
working properly
in the
known-good
vehicle?
NO-USB device is faulty. Also check the USB cable
and USB adapter connector c o n d i t i o n .
Not all players and player functions w o r k with the USB

adapter. Please see the owner's manual for more
information.
11. Return to the customer's vehicle.
12. Disconnect audio unit connector C (14P).
2. Do the speaker check mode w i t h the self-diagnostic

mode (see page 23-56).
13. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P).
Is there sound
from all
speakers?
14. Disconnect X M receiver connector A (14P).

15. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and audio
unit connector C (14P) according t o the table.
NO-Go t o no sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) (see
page 2 3 - 6 7 ) .
4. On the c u s t o m e r ' s vehicle, connect the c u s t o m e r ' s
USB device to the USB adapter.

C5
C6
C13
C14
Wire color
WHT
RED
BLK
GRN

1 2
7. Press the A U X button until USB appears on the audio

display.
8. Check if the USB device can be operated w i t h the
audio unit (Folders or Files UP/DOWN, etc.).
Can you operate
heard?
the USB device,
but there is no
sound
NO-lf the sound is normal, the USB device is OK at
this t i m e . If the USB device cannot be operated, go t o
USB device does not function (see page 2 3 - 8 9 ) .
3 4 5 6
9 10 11
13 14
X

Is there
continuity?
Y E S - T h e r e is a short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the audio unit and the USB adapter unit.
Replace the affected shielded h a r n e s s . !
(cont'd)
23-87
Audio System
16. Check for continuity between audio unit connector C
(14P) according t o the table.
From terminal
C4(GRY)
C5 (WHT)
C6 (RED)
C13(BLK)
To terminals
C5 (WHT), C6(RED),C13
(BLK), C14(GRN)
C6 (RED), C13(BLK),C14
(GRN)
C13(BLK), C14(GRN)
C14(GRN)

(14P) and USB adapter unit connector A (14P)
1 2
3 4 5 6
9 10 11
13 14
X
any of the
WHT
RED
BLK
GRN
1 2
3 4 5 6
13 14
9 10 11
X
terminals?
Y E S - T h e r e is a short in the wires between the audio

unit and the USB adapter unit. Replace the affected
shielded h a r n e s s .
Wire color

U S B adapter
unit connector
A5
A6
A13
A14
Audio unit
connector
C5
C6
C13
C14
U S B ADAPTER UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
1 2
/ /
3 4 5 6
13 14
9 10 11
X

Is there
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good USB adapter unit (see

page 23-127), then reconnect all of the connectors,
replace the original USE3 adapter unit. If the
symptom/indication is still present, replace the audio
unit (see page 23-125).M
unit and the USB adapter unit. Replace the affected
23-88
USB device does not function (with

navigation)
9. Check the USB device operation in the customer's

vehicle.
NOTE:
22-93).
Does the USB device

terminals.
YES-The system is OK at this time. Inspect the

connectors of the USB device, USB cable and USB
adapter for w e a r . H
Check the USB device compatibility.

- Mass-storage class ready digital audio player w i t h
USB 2.0 port
work properly
in the
customer's
vehicle?
- More than 256 MB of RAM
- Supports MP3, W M A , and AAC (encoded w i t h the

i-Tunes) files, DRM files are not supported
11. On the c u s t o m e r ' s vehicle, remove the USB adapter.
Not all players and player functions w o r k w i t h the USB

adapter. Please see the owner's manual for more
information. A l w a y s test the customers USB device in
a known-good vehicle of the same year and trim (if
possible). Technologies change and are updated
frequently which may result in that USB devices may
w o r k in newer vehicles, but not in older vehicles of the
same model.

13. Check for the navigation system hard error codes (see
page 23-184).
Are there any DTCs
systems?
related to the audio, XM or RES
YES-Do the appropriate DTC troubleshooting in the

navigation section, and recheck.B
3. Press the A U X button to select USB mode.
15. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector B (5P).
NOTE: Do not connect the USB device.

Is USB NO DATA displayed
in the audio-HVAC
display?
YES-Go t o step 4.
NO^Go t o step 17 .
5. Connect the c u s t o m e r ' s USB device to a known-good
vehicle (same year/trim) that is equipped w i t h a USB
adapter, and check the USB device operation.
Is the USB device
vehicle?
working properly
in the
known-good
YES-Go t o step 6.
NO-lf the audio-HVAC displays UNSUPORTED or
MEDIA ERROR, the USB device may not be supported
or is defective. Ifthe audio-HVAC displays USB NO
MUSIC, the USB device may have no music files or
the w r o n g type music files are on the device. See the
owner's manual for details on USB device
requirements and approved file t y p e s .
6. On the c u s t o m e r ' s vehicle, connect the c u s t o m e r ' s
USB device t o the USB adapter.
(cont'd)
23-89
Audio System
16. Check for continuity between USB adapter unit
connector B (5P) and the USB adapter 5P connector
19. Measure the voltage between USB adapter unit

USB adapter connector
USB adapter unit

connector
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1
2
3
4
5
I+B (RED)
3 4 5 6
X
9 10 11
13 14
1 2
U S B ADAPTER UNIT CONNECTOR B (5P)
nr
Ln
4 3 2 1
Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 25.

U S B ADAPTER 5P CONNECTOR
_TL
NO-Go t o step 20.

2 1 . Check for continuity between USB adapter unit
connector A (14P) terminal No. 1 and audio unit
connector C (14P) terminal No. 1.
U S B ADAPTER CONNECTOR A (14P)
+B (RED)
1
Is there
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good USB adapter cable,

replace the original USB adapter cable. If the
symptom/indication still present, go t o step 19.
3
X
9 10 11
1 3 14
I +B (RED)
1
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the USB

adapter unit and the USB adapter. Replace the
3
9
10 1 1
13 1 4


18. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P).
Is there
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 22.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the USB adapter
unit and the audio u n i t . H
23-90
23. Check for continuity between the USB adapter unit


" I +B (RED)
3 4 5 6
9 10 11
13 14
1 2

Is there
S Y S A C C (RED)
3 4 5 6
x l
9 10 11
13 14

Is there about 0 V?
continuity?
YES-Repair the short to body g r o u n d in the wire

between the USB Adapter unit and the audio unit.
This w i r e supplies battery voltage to the USB adapter
unit and the X M receiver f r o m the audio unit. If this
w i r e shorts to g r o u n d , it can damage the audio unit. A
short to g r o u n d must be repaired before reconnecting
an audio u n i t . B
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-125), and

recheck.B

NO-Go to step 28.
29. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P) and

audio unit connector C (14P).
24. Reconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P) and B

(5P).


S Y S A C C (RED)
1 2
9 10 11
SYS
3 4 5 6
13 14
A C C (RED)
3 4 5 6
1011
13 14
IXI
9
I S Y S ACC (RED)3
1 2
9 10 11
5 6
13 14

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go to step 26.

NO-Substitute a known-good USB adapter unit (see
page 23-127), and r e c h e c k . B
Is there
continuity?

23-125), reconnect all the connectors, and r e c h e c k . B
unit and the audio u n i t . B
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(cont'd)
23-91
Audio System
32. Disconnect USB adapter unit connector A (14P) and
audio unit connector C (14P).
Booming sound while driving with audio unit

on or off (part 1) (With rear entertainment


22-93).

//
9 10 11
13 14
GND (GRY)
//
3
9 10 11

terminals.
Check for all system's DTCs first w i t h the HDS. If there
are any DTCs stored, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
2. Operate the audio unit, and check the function of the
speakers.
GND (GRY)
NOTE:
13 14

Is a booming
sound or a low-frequency
hum heard
from
speakers?
YES-Go t o step 3.
N O - G o t o no sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) (see
page 23-67).H
3. Turn the audio system off.
Is there
continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good USB adapter unit (see

page 23-127), then reconnect all of the connectors,
replace the original USB adapter unit. If the
unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
unit and the audio u n i t . B
23-92
4. Make sure all doors, hood and the tailgate are closed.
6. Do the active noise cancellation (ANC) self-diagnostic
14. Do the active noise cancellation (ANC) system check

mode self-diagnostic function (see page 23-58).
7. Check the test items on tests 1 thru 8.

NOTE: Move t o the next test item w i t h i n 50 seconds,
or the self-diagnostic test ends.
Do you hear a low-frequency
hum from the speakers
more than 5 seconds
for all the tests?
for
15. Go t o the 8th test by pressing the No. 1 button.

16. Select ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID A ON
w i t h the HDS, and m o v e o n to the 9th test by pressing
the No. 1 button.
YES-Go t o step 8.
NO-Go t o the appropriate step listed.

If all test items failed, go t o step 25.
If the 3rd test failed (front speaker output), go t o
step 39.
If the 4th test failed (Rear speaker output), go to step
44.
If the 5th test failed (ANC front mic input), w i t h
navigation: go t o step 49, w i t h o u t navigation: go t o
step 64.
If the 6th test failed (ANC rear mic input), go to step
75.
Ifthe 7th test failed (NEP (RPM) input), go to step 86.
Ifthe 8th test failed (door/trunk input), go to step 1
on Booming sound while driving w i t h audio unit o n
or off (Part 2) (see step 1 on page 23-105).
9. Connect the HDS t o the DLC (see page 23-3).
speakers
for more than 5
hum sound
heard
from
seconds?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Go t o step 3 on Booming sound while driving
w i t h audio unit on or off (Part 2) (see step 3 on page
23-105).
17. Select ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID C ON
w i t h the HDS, and move on t o the 10th test by
pressing the No. 1 button.
speakers
for more than 5
hum sound heard
from
seconds?
YES-Go t o step 18.

NO-Go t o step 17 on Booming sound while driving
w i t h audio unit on or off (Part 2) (see step 17 on page
23-106).
11. Select PGM-FI SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
12. Select VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the

HDS.
2 1 . Do the active noise cancellation (ANC) self-diagnostic

13. Select SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION, and prepare

to do the function test.

23. Set the parking brake, then hold the engine speed at
2,500 r p m in P, and go to the 11th test by pressing the
No. 1 button.
(cont'd)
23-93
Audio System
24. Press the No. 1 button several times t o turn the ANC
on and off.
speakers
change
hum sound heard
by pressing
from
3 1 . Connect a voltmeter between stereo amplifier

NOTE: Use the voltmeter in AC range.
the No. 1 button?


Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the audio unit, the PCM, and the under dash
fuse box. Then, go t o step 1, and recheck.
ANC R+ (BLK)
16 17 18 19
31/
6 7
16 17 18 19
10 11
21 22 23 2 4
13 14
34. Measure voltage during the 1st test (with OFF

indicated on the display) by pressing the No. 1 button.
NOTE: Measure voltage w i t h i n 50 seconds after y o u
started the 1st test.
Is there about 0.2

28. Prepare t o do the active noise cancellation (ANC)
self-diagnostic function.
29. Measure voltage during the 1st test (with OFF
indicated on the display) by pressing the No. 1 button.
NOTE: Measure voltage w i t h i n 50 seconds after y o u
started the 1st test.
VAC?
YES-Replace the stereo amplifier (see page

23-126).H
NO-Go t o step 30.
23-94
27 28
2 7 28
ANC F- (WHT)
Is there about 0.2
13 14
33. Prepare t o do the active noise cancellation (ANC)

self-diagnostic function.
ANC F+ (RED)
11
/ h o
ANC R- (GRN)
26. Connect a voltmeter between stereo amplifier

21 2 2 23 2 4
VAC?
YES-Replace the stereo amplifier (see page

23-126).
NO-Go t o step 35.
36. Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and stereo
amplifier connector B (28P).
37. Check for continuity between audio unit connector E

(16P) and stereo amplifier connector B (28P)
Audio unit
connector
E1
E2
E9
E10
Stereo amplifier
connector
B28
B14
B27
B13
GRN
BLK
WHT
RED
/ /
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Is there

13 14
27 28

Is there
Wire color
GRN
BLK
WHT
RED
1 2 / 4 5 \ /
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3
5 6 7,8
10 11
16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24

E1
E2
E9
E10
Wire color

unit connector E (16P) according to the table.
continuity?

audio unit connector E (16P) and stereo amplifier
connector B (28P).B
continuity?
NO-Repair open in the wire between audio unit
connector E (16P) and stereo amplifier connector B
(28PJ.B
(cont'd)
23-95
Audio System
4 1 . Check for continuity between audio unit connector E
Audio unit
connector
E9
E10
Stereo amplifier
connector
B27
B13

unit connector E (16P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10
individually.
Wire color
WHT
RED
1 2
4 5
9 1() 11 12 13 14 15
ANCF(WHT)
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ANC F+ (RED)

Is there
continuity?

connector B (28P).H
1 2 3
5 6 7 8
1011 / 1314
27 28
21 22 23 24
16 1718 19


Is there
continuity?
1 2
4 5
9 1() 11 12 13 14 15
YES-Go t o step 42.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between audio unit
(28P).B
ANCF
(WHT)
ANC F+ (RED)

Is there
continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between audio unit

(28P).B
23-96

Audio unit
connector
E1
E2
Stereo amplifier
connector
B28
B14

unit connector E (16P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2
individually.
Wire color
GRN
BLK
A N C R(GRN)
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
P
n
ANC R+ (BLK)
1 2
4 i5 \ /
9 10 11 1213 14 15
1 2 3
5 6 7 8
10 11
16 17 18 19
21 222 3 J 2 4 J /

Is there
continuity?

connector B ( 2 8 P ) . B
NO-Go to step 48.
13 14
27 28


Is there
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 47.

(28P).B
ANC R+ (BLK)
A N C R-
L __. r
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Is there
continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between audio unit

(28P).B
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) . B

(cont'd)
23-97
Audio System
50. Connect a voltmeter between audio unit connector E

(16P) terminal No. 4 and the HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone (front) 7P connector terminal No.4.
FMIC+(WHT)
F M I C + (WHT)
\ 5
2,
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F MIC+ (WHT)
n
5 1 . Turn the ignition switch t o ACCESSORY (I).
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR

52. Make a loud noise in front of the HFL-navigation-ANC

microphone (front) by clapping your hands.
Is there
Does the voltage change

loud noise in front of the
microphone
about 0.5 VAC when making

HFL-navigation-ANC
(front)?

54. Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (front) 7P
connector.
continuity?
YES '09 model: Go t o step 56.

'10 model: Go t o step 57.
NO-There is an open in the w i r e between audio unit
connector E (16P) and the HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone (front) 7P connector. Replace the affected
shielded h a r n e s s . !
56. Check for continuity between HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone (front) 7P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
GND (BLK)

Is there
continuity?
YES-Go to step 63.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the HFLnavigation-ANC microphone and body ground
(G70D.H
23-98

microphone (front) 7P connectorterminal No. 2 and
body ground.
60. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
2 3
8
15 16 17 18 / 2021
3 4 5 6 7
11 12 1314
25 26 27 28
MIC S I G - (BRN)
MIC- (YEL)

Is there

Is there
continuity?
continuity?
YES-Go to step 63.
YES-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit (see

page 23-337).
NO-Go to step 58.
NO-Go t o step 6 1 .

61. Check for continuity between navigation unit

connector C (16P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)

MIC- (YEL)
n
2 3
' /
7 8 / \ / 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 1 8 / 20 21
A/ A
25126
/ /
27 28
7 8
12 13 14 15 16
MIC SIG- (BRN)

Is there
continuity?
YES-There i s an open in the wire(s) between the

HFL-navigation-ANC microphone and the
HandsFreeLink control unit. Replace the affected
NO-Go to step 59.
59. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector.
Is there
continuity?
YES-There is an open in the wire(s) between the

navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit.
Replace the affected shielded h a r n e s s . !
NO-Go to step 62.
(cont'd)
23-99
Audio System
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (8P)

GND (BLK)

F MIC+ (WHT)
1 2
4
5 6 7 8
J L
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
F MIC S H (PUR)

Is there
continuity?
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-291 ) .

NO-Repair open in the wire between navigation unit
connector A (8P) terminal No. 4 and body ground
(G503).B
67. Make a loud noise in front of the ANC front

microphone by clapping your hands.
Does the voltage change
about 0.5 VAC when you
a loud noise in front of the ANC front
microphone?


n
(WHT)
45
//
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 /

Is there
continuity?
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire

between audio unit connector E (16P) and the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (front) 7P
connector. Replace the affected shielded h a r n e s s . !
NO-Replace the HFL-navigation-ANC microphone
(see page 2 3 - 2 9 4 ) .
23-100
NO-Go to step 68.
make
69. Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and the ANC

front microphone 3P connector.


JL
F MIC+ (WHT)
9 1011 12 13 14 15
1 2 ./\ 4 5
9 1011 12 13 14 15
F M I C S H (PUR)
F MIC S H (PUR)
Is there
Is there
continuity?
YES-There is a short in the wire between audio unit

connector E (16P) and the ANC front microphone 3P
NO-Go to step 7 1 .
continuity?
YES-Go to step 73.

NO-There is an open in the wire between audio unit
connector. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
73. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ANC front
microphone 3P connector.
7 1 . Connect ANC front microphone 3P connector

ANC FRONT MICROPHONE 3P CONNECTOR
n i r i i rj
1 / 3
J U M P E R WIRE
(cont'd)
23-101
Audio System
JL

F MIC+ (WHT)
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 / 4 5
9 1() 11 12 13 14 15

Is there
R MIC S H (GRN)
continuity?

between audio unit connector E (16P) and the ANC
front microphone 3P connector. Replace the affected
NO-Replace the ANC front microphone (see page
23-128).
77. Turn the ignition switch t o ACCESSORY (I).

78. Make a loud noise in front of the ANC rear
Does the voltage change about 0.5 VAC when you
a loud noise in front of the ANC rear
microphone?
make
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).H

NO-Go t o step 79.
rear microphone 2P connector.
23-102
8 1 . Connect ANC rear microphone 2P connector


Si
R MIC+ (WHT)
J U M P E R WIRE
MIC S H (GRN)

R MIC+ (WHT)
1 2
//
4 5
I 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Is there
continuity?
YES-There is a short in the w i r e between audio unit

connector E (16P) and the ANC rear microphone 2P
connector. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
R MIC S H (GRN)

Is there
R MIC+ (WHT)
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 83.
1 2
4 5
//
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

connector E (16P) and the ANC rear microphone 2P
83. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the ANC rear

Is there
continuity?

between audio unit connector E (16P) and the ANC
rear microphone 2P connector. Replace the affected
NO-Replace the ANC rear microphone (see page
23-128)JI
(cont'd)
23-103
Audio System

88. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector E

//
4 5
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 5
1 2
9 1() 11 12 13 14 15
NEP (YEL)
NEP (YEL)
Is there
Is there about 5 V?
continuity?
YES-Go t o step 94.

connector E (16P) and PCM connector A (49P).B
94. Remove the jumper wire f r o m PCM connector A
(49P).


9 1 . Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and PCM
connector A (49P).
92. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 33 t o
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 /
NEP (YEL)
Jl|2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1 /A X
9|10|
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23
24
25
26 27 2 8
2 9 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 3 9
|40|41
NEP (YEL)
4 1 / 1 4 6 ^ / 48|49|
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there
continuity?

audio unit connector E (16P) and PCM connector A
(49P).I
NO-Update the PCM (see page 11-249). If it does not
have the latest software or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-250).il
23-104

on or off (part 2) (With rear entertainment

12. Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and PCM

connector A (49P).
2. Do the MICU input test (see page 22-153).

Is the B-CAN
line between
the audio unit and the
MICU
. C S S A M A (PUR)
OK?
4 | 5 | 6 l 7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17|18 19

connector D (20P) and MICU connector T (34P).B
23
29 30
32 33 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
40
M l
20 21
2 4 > < 2 5 > < ^ 2 6 27 28
44
481491
J U M P E R WIRE

(16P) terminals No. 13 to body ground.

1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C S S A M A (PUR)
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C S S A M A (PUR)

7. Select PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is there

HDS.
YES-Go t o step 15.
9. Select ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID A (B1)

ON in the SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION with the
HDS, and measure the voltage.
Is the voltage between
5 V and battery
voltage?
continuity?

15. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m PCM connector A
(49P).

(cont'd)
23-105
Audio System

1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

HDS.
ON in the SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION w i t h the
C S S A M A (PUR)
Is the voltage about 10 V?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).B

Is there
NO-Go to step 24.
continuity?

(49P).B
NO-Update the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not
PCM (see page 11-250).B

connector A (49P).

(16P) terminal No. 14 to body ground.
CSSAMC (LTBLU)
J 1I 2 3 I4|
1 2
4 5
9 K ) 11 12 13 14 15
C S S A M C (LT BLU)
23-106
|6|7|8
11
13 14 15 16 17)18 19
23
24
25
26
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37
I // ><
|40|41
9 |10|
1
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|
J U M P E R WIRE

n
NOTE:
n
1 2
4 5 /
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 /

terminals.

2. Operate the audio unit, and check the function of the
speakers.
continuity?
YES-Go to step 29.

29. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m PCM connector A
(49P).

22-93).
Check for all system's DTCs first w i t h the HDS. If there

are any DTCs stored, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.

Is there

on or off (Without navigation and rear
entertainment system)
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Is a booming
speakers?
sound or a low-frequency
hum heard
from
YES-Go t o step 3.
NO-Go t o no sound is heard f r o m speaker(s) (see
page 23-71 ) .
3. Turn the audio system off.
4. Make sure all doors, hood and the tailgate are closed.

Is there
continuity?

(49P).B
PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .
(cont'd)
23-107
Audio System
7. Check the test Items on tests 1 thru 8.

NOTE: Move t o the next test item within 50 seconds,
or the self-diagnostic test ends.
more than 5 seconds
for all the
for
tests?

16. Select ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID A (B1)
ON w i t h the HDS, and move on t o the 9th test
pressing the No. 1 button.
YES-Go t o step 8.
NO-Go t o the appropriate step listed.
more than 5
If all test items failed, replace the audio unit (see

page 23-125).
YES-Go t o step 17.
Ifthe 3rd test failed (front speaker output), replace

the audio unit (see page 23-125).
If the 4th test failed (Rear speaker output), replace
the audio unit (see page 23-125).
Ifthe 5th test failed (ANC front mic input), go t o step
25.
If the 6th test failed (ANC rear mic input), go t o step
36.
If the 7th test failed (NEP (RPM) input), go to step 47.
for
seconds?
NO-Go t o step 59.

ON w i t h the HDS, and go t o the 10th test by pressing
the No. 1 button.
more than 5
for
seconds?
YES-Go t o step 18.

NO-Go to step 73.
If the 8th test failed (door/trunk input), go to step 66.

2 1 . Do the active noise cancellation (ANC) self-diagnostic


HDS.
13. Select SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION, and prepare

to do the function test.
23. Set the parking brake, then hold the engine speed at
2,500 r p m in P, and go t o the 11th test by pressing the
No. 1 button.
23-108
24. Press the No. 1 button several times to turn the ANC
on and off.
Do you hear a low-frequency hum from the
change when you press the No. 1 button?
speakers

Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the audio unit, the PCM, and the under dash
fuse box. Then, go to step 1, and recheck.
(16P) terminal No. 4 and No. 11.
F MIC+ (WHT)
7/ 7
//
7/ /
11 12 13 14 15
F MIC S H (PUR)

28. Make a loud noise in front of the ANC front
Does the voltage change about 0.5 VAC when you make
a loud noise in front of the ANC front microphone?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) . !
NO-Go to step 29.

front microphone 3P connector.
3 1 . Check for continuity between audio unit connector E
F MIC+ (WHT)
7/ 7
//
1 5
7/ /
11 12 13 14 15
F MIC S H (PUR)
YES-Go to step 32.
32. Connect ANC front microphone 3P connector
A N C FRONT MICROPHONE 3P CONNECTOR
IHIi
SI
J U M P E R WIRE
33. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ANC front

(cont'd)
23-109
Audio System
34. Check f o r continuity between audio unit connector E
F MIC+ (WHT)
y/ 7
//
F M I C S H (PUR)

7/ /
11 12 13 14 15
JTl

R MIC+ (WHT)
7/ /11412 7/ /
i
//
13 14 15
R MIC S H (GRN)
YES-There is a short in the wire between audio unit
38. Turn the ignition switch t o ACCESSORY (I).

39. Make a loud noise in front of the ANC rear
NO-Go t o step 35.

Does the voltage change about 0.5 VAC when you make
a loud noise in front of the ANC rear microphone?

F MIC + (WHT)
It
'/1^1111J2113114|15|^
YES-There is a short t o body ground in the wire
between audio unit connector E(16P) and the ANC
front microphone connector. Replace the affected
NO-Replace the ANC front microphone (see page
23-128).!
23-110
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) . !

NO-Go t o step 40.
4 1 . Disconnect audio unit connector E (16P) and the ANC
rear microphone 2P connector.
4 2 . C o n n e c t A N C rear m i c r o p h o n e 2 P c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
4 5 . C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r E

(16P) t e r m i n a l s No. 5 a n d No. 12.

R MIC+ (WHT)
1 r
4 5
11 12 13 14 15
JUMPER WIRE

R MIC+ (WHT)
It
///
//
///
/
R MIC SH (GRN)
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in the w i r e b e t w e e n a u d i o unit
c o n n e c t o r E (16P) a n d the A N C rear m i c r o p h o n e 2 P
c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e the affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
N O - G o to s t e p 4 6 .
11 12 13 14 15
R MIC SH (GRN)
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 4 .
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n a u d i o unit

(16P) t e r m i n a l No. 5 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

R MIC + (WHT)
y / 711412 1377
/
14 15
_n
//
c o n n e c t o r E (16P) a n d the A N C rear m i c r o p h o n e 2 P

c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
4 4 . R e m o v e the j u m p e r w i r e f r o m t h e A N C rear
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e
b e t w e e n a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r E (16P) a n d t h e A N C
rear m i c r o p h o n e 2P c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e t h e affected
N O - R e p l a c e the A N C rear m i c r o p h o n e ( s e e p a g e
23-128).
(cont'd)
23-111
Audio S y s t e m

49. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector E

7/ / 11
//
///
12 13 14 15
NEP (YEL)
JT
/
Is there
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).
continuity?
YES-Go to step 55.

55. Remove the jumper wire from PCM connector A
(49P).
NO-Go to step 50.



connector A (49P).
J 1 | 2
11
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1 // >< ><
23
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
24
25
2 6 27 2 8
2 9 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 3 7 38 39
|40|41
NEP (YEL)
4 [ / | 4 6 l X 48|49|
JUMPER WIRE
Is there
continuity?

(49P).B
PCM (see page 11-250).H
23-112
58. Do the MICU input test (see page 22-153).

connector A (49P).
Is the B-CAN line between the audio unit and the MICU
OK?
connector D(20P) and MICU connector T ( 3 4 P ) . |
(16P) terminals No. 13 to body g r o u n d .

. C S S A M A (PUR)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |101
11|X 13|14|15|16|17|18|19 20
23
25
26 27 28
29 30 [31 32|33|34|35|36|37^38 39
|40|41^l^44|^46j^48|49
J U M P E R WIRE

St
6 1 . Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-3).

63. Select PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS.
HDS.
ON in the SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION w i t h the
Is the voltage between 5 V and battery
voltage?

connector E (16P) and PCM connector A (49P).H
7 1 . Remove the jumper wire f r o m PCM connector A
(49P).
(cont'd)
23-113
Audio System
S y m p t o m
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g( c o n t ' d )



HDS.
ON in the SOLENOID VALVE ACTIVATION with the
Is the voltage about 10 V?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) . B
NO-Go to step 80.


(49P).B
PCM (see page 11-250).B

connector A (49P).

(16P) terminals No. 14 to body ground.
CSSAMC (LTBLU)
3
4 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 9 | -101
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-n
rt
23
2 9 30
2 6 27 2 8
3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 3 8 3 9
1 4 0 1 4 1 ( ^ 1 / 4 4 1 X 1 4 6 1 ^
11
12 13 14 15
48149
JUMPER WIRE
CSSAMC (LTBLU)
23-114

Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM ANTENNA

is displayed
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
Check X M radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by tall buildings,
mountains, or high-voltage power lines.
1. Check that the X M receiver connectors properly

connected.
Is the connector
YES-Go to step 85.
YES-Go to step 2.

NO-Reconnect the connector. I f t h e error message

does not go away, go to step 2.
85. Remove the jumper wire f r o m PCM connector A

(49P).
connected?
2. Check the connector at the X M antenna and X M

antenna lead.
Is the connector
connected?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reconnect the connector. If the error message
does not go away, go to step 3.
3. Substitute known-good X M antenna (see page

23-134).
Is the error message
gone?
YES-Replace the X M antenna (see page 23-134).l

NO-Go to step 6.
4. Substitute a known-good X M receiver (see page
23-127).

(49P).B
Is the error message

PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .
NO-Replace the X M antenna lead.B
gone?
YES-Replace the X M receiver (see page 23-127).l
23-115
Audio System
XM radio display is blank and no station
information is displayed
NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
6. Measure the voltage between X M receiver connector

A (14P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
1 2
9 10 11
5 6
13 14
GND
(GRY)
2. W i t h navigation, check for the navigation system hard

error codes. Without navigation, go to step 3.
Are there any DTCs related to the audio, XM or RES
systems?
YES-Do the appropriate DTC troubleshooting in the

navigation section, and recheck.B
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 7.
between the X M receiver and the audio unit.B


1 +B (RED)
3
X
9 10 11
X M RECEIVERCONNECTOR A (14P)
S Y S ACC
(RED)
5 6
13 14
X
9 10 11
5 6
13 14

Is there battery
voltage?
YES-Go t o step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the X M receiver
and the audio unit.B
23-116
Is there 10 volts or more
present?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Substitute a known- good X M receiver (see page
23-127), and recheck. If 10 volts or more are present,
replace the original X M receiver.B

11. Check for continuity between body ground and X M

receiver connector A (14P) terminals No.9 and No.10
individually.
S Y S ACC
(RED)
IXI
9
10
11
! 13114
X
10 11
9
GA-NET B U S *
(BLK)
13 14
GA-NET B U S - (WHT)

Is there less than 0.5V?

YES With navigation: substitute a known- good X M
receiver (see page 23-127), and recheck. Ifthe
s y m p t o m goes away, replace the original X M
receiver.B
Without navigation: Go to step 9.
NO-Substitute a known- good audio unit (see page
23-125), and recheck. If 0.5 volts or less are present,
replace the original audio u n i t . B
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the X M receiver and the audio unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.B
12. Check for continuity between X M receiver connector
A (14P) according to the table.
From terminal
A3 (BRN)
A9 (BLK)
10. Disconnect audio unit connector C (14P) and X M

receiver connector A (14P).
To terminals
A9(BLK),A10(WHT)
A10(WHT)
X
9
10 11
13 14

unit and the X M receiver. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
23-117
Audio System
13. Check for continuity between terminals of s h o w n of
audio unit connector C (14P) and X M receiver
connector A (14P).
1 2
3 4 5 6
9 10 11
13 14
X
GA-NET B U S +
(BLK)
GA-NET BUS(WHT)
rffft
XM radio preset memory is lost

NOTE:
22-93).
terminals.
If you can only tune to channel 000, 001,174, and 247,
make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode (see
owners manual), if it is set to channel mode, call X M
Satellite Radio customer support and check the
account activation status.
//
I X
9 10 11
GA-NET BUS+ (BLK)
5 6
13 14
GA-NET B U S - (WHT)

away, replace the original audio unit. If the s y m p t o m
is still present, substitute a known-good X M receiver,
replace the original X M receiver (see page 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) .
2. Turn on the audio unit and set each of the X M radio

channel preset buttons.
Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons set
properly?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) for 1 minute.
5. Test all of the X M radio channel preset buttons for
proper recall operation.
Do the preset buttons recall the set radio
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the X M

receiver and the audio unit. Replace the affected
YES-System is normal at this t i m e . Check

connections at the audio u n i t . B
NO-Go to step 6.
23-118
stations?

A <14P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
] +B (RED)
1 j2
/V
9 10 11
NOTE:
22-93).
5 6
13 14
Check the X M radio reception in an open area. Poor

reception/interference can be caused by nearby tall
buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power lines.
terminals.
X
Is there battery
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio unit

does display XM channels)
voltage?
If y o u can only tune to channel 000, 001,174, and 247,

make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode (see
owners manual), if it is set to channel mode, call X M
Satellite Radio customer support and check the
account activation status.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the X M receiver
and the audio u n i t . B
2. Turn on the audio unit, and select X M radio.

3. Check for an error message o n the display.
Are there any messages

YES-Go to error code list (see page 23-61 ) .
displayed?
NO-Go to step 4.
2
A
/V.9
3
X
10 11
5 6
13 14
GND (GRY)

7. With navigation, disconnect USB adapter unit
connector A (14P). Without navigation, go to step 8.
X

23-125), and recheck. Ifthe s y m p t o m / indication goes
away, replace the audio u n i t . B
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the X M receiver
and the audio u n i t . B
(cont'd)
23-119
Audio System
8. Check for continuity between body ground and X M
receiver connector A (14P) according to the table.
Wire color
WHT
RED
BLK
GRN
XM receiver connector
A5
A6
A13
A14
1 2
9 10 11
5 6
13 14

(14P) and X M receiver connector A (14P) according to
the table.
Audio unit
connector
C5
C6
C13
C14
1 2

between the audio unit and the X M receiver. Replace
the affected shielded harness.B
9. Check for continuity between terminals of audio unit

connector C (14P) according to the table.
To terminals
C5 (WHT), C6(RED),C13
(BLK),C14(GRN)
C6(RED), C13(BLK),C14
(GRN)
C13(BLK), C14(GRN)
C14(GRN)
From terminal
C4 (GRY)
C5 (WHT)
C6 (RED)
C13(BLK)
3 4 5 6
13 14
9 10 11
X

shielded harness.B
23-120
3 4 5 6
9 10 11
13 14
X
1 2
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 10.
WHT
RED
BLK
GRN
Wire color
1 2
XM receiver
connector
A5
A6
A13
A14
9 10 11
5 6
13 14
YES-Substitute a known good X M receiver (see page
23-127), then reconnect all of the connectors, and
replace the original X M receiver. If the
shielded harness.B
Sound Quality Diagnosis

Phase Test
Do this test to confirm proper speaker phasing.
Use the following tests to check sound quality.
NOTE: Before beginning the following tests, write d o w n
the customer's bass, treble, fader and balance settings,
then set them to their center positions for the testing.
Left/Right Channel ID
Do this test to confirm proper channel routing.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
into the audio unit.

2. Play track No. 2 (phase) at a normal, or slightly higher
than normal, v o l u m e level.
3. The voice should sound centered and focused when it
is in-phase.
4. The voice should sound diffused, and have less bass
w h e n it is out of phase.
2. Play track No. 1 (left, both, right channel ID) at a

normal, or slightly higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
Ifthe voice changes f r o m in-phase to out of phase

as indicated by the prompt, the phasing is correct.
Go to electrical noise test.
3. The voice should be audible only f r o m the channel or

channels w h e n indicated.
Ifthe voice always sounds out of phase, phasing is

not correct. Check for:
If the channel ID is correct for each side, g o t o phase

test.
- Crossed speaker wires
If the channel ID is not correct, check for:
- Faulty audio unit
- Faulty amplifier
- Shorted speaker w i r e
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
(cont'd)
23-121
Audio System
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Electrical Noise Test
Individual Speaker Test
Do this test to check for electrical noise being induced

into the audio system.
Do this test to identify a faulty speaker.
NOTE: Electrical noise may be caused by outside

sources that cannot be handled by the audio system.
Make sure y o u remove any cell phones and/or turn off
any aftermarket devices before beginning this test.
2. Play track No. 4 (digital zero) at a normal, or slightly
higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
3. Operate any electrical device that may create
electrical noise in the audio system, including starting
the engine.
4. Play track No. 5 (near digital zero) at a normal, or
slightly higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
the engine.
6. Play track No. 6 (SNR) at a normal, or slightly higher
than normal, v o l u m e level.
the engine.
If no abnormal noise is heard, go to the individual
speaker test.
I f t h e noise is present only during the SNR track,
replace the audio unit (see page 23-125).
I f t h e noise is heard during the digital zero or near
digital zero track, check for
- Poor ground at the audio unit, amplifier, engine,
or battery cable
- Pinched or shorted speaker or amplifier wire
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
- Other faulty components causing excessive
electrical noise (ignition coils, alternator, door
lock actuators, etc.). Disconnect any suspect
components, and then replay the tracks that were
originally noisy. I f t h e noise is gone, check the
component's circuit and the component.
23-122

2. Play track No. 30 (steady 300 Hz tone) at a normal, or
slightly higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound compared to
the other channels. Use the audio unit's fader and
balance settings to help isolate the channel w i t h the
problem.
Ifthe sound quality produced by a specific speaker
is poor, substitute it w i t h a known-good speaker. If
the poor sound quality continues, go to the sound
balance test.
Ifthe sound quality is OK, go to the sound balance
test.
Sound Balance Test
Frequency Sweep
Perform this test to identify a faulty channel or speaker.
Do this test to find rattles or reverberations that may

cause a perception of poor sound quality.

2. Confirm the bass and treble are set to the center
positions.
3. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) at a normal, or slightly
higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
4. A static type sound should be heard through all
speakers.
5. insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
into the audio unit of a known-good vehicle.
6. Set the bass and treble to the center positions.
7. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) at the same level as was
played in step 3.
8. Compare the sounds made by the t w o vehicles.
If the sound does not have as much bass, check the
subwoofer and circuit.
If the sound does not have enough hiss, check the
tweeters and their circuits.

2. Play track No. 13 (sweep f r o m 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound quality or
reverberations caused by specific frequencies. Use
the voice-over to estimate the frequency that causes
the vibration. Use the audio unit's fader and balance
settings to help isolate the channel w i t h the problem.
If vibrations or poor sound quality are heard, go to
step 4.
If no vibrations or poor sound quality are heard, go
to sound j u d g i n g .
4. Choose the appropriate track f r o m No. 14 to 25 (small
range frequency sweep) or 26 to 53 (single
frequencies) to recreate the frequency that caused the
poor sound quality or vibration witnessed in step 3;
this aids in diagnosis of the cause.
NOTE: When y o u get to the track that recreates the
problem, select the repeat function on the audio unit,
this will help you isolate the cause.
5. Replace or insulate the source of the vibration or, if
the speaker is the source of the poor sound quality,
replace it.
(cont'd)
23-123
Audio System
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Sound Judging
Seek Stop Test
Do this test to compare overall sound quality, imaging,

and dynamics between the customer's vehicle and a
known-good vehicle. Only use a vehicle of the same
model and t r i m level for this test.
Do this test to check the performance of the audio unit's

A M and FM reception. Refer to s y m p t o m
troubleshooting: audio sound weak or distorted, or no
sound is heard f r o m speakers (display is normal) (see
page 23-67) before continuing w i t h this test.
1. In the customer's vehicle, set the bass, treble, fader,

and balance settings to the customer's normal
settings that were written d o w n before beginning the
test.
3. Play tracks No. 7 to 12 (sound quality, midland,
dynamics, and imaging demonstration tracks) at a
n o r m a l , or slightly higher than normal, v o l u m e level.
Write d o w n the v o l u m e setting being used.
4. Listen to areas of the track that stand out as being
either very clear or poorer than other areas of the
track.
5. In a known-good vehicle, insert the audio diagnostic
CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) into the audio unit.
6. Play the tracks at the same v o l u m e level and the same
bass, treble, balance, and fader settings as used in
step 3 in the customer's vehicle.
7. Listen to the same area of the track that stood out as
being either very clear or poorer than other areas of
the track.
8. Compare the customer's vehicle's sound quality
results the known-good vehicle's results.
Ifthe sound quality in the customer's vehicle is
comparable to the sound quality in the known-good
vehicle, then the customer's vehicle is operating as
designed.
If the sound quality is not comparable, check these
items in order.
- Loose or improperly installed speakers or other
hardware that may create interference f r o m the
vibrations generated by the speakers
- Poor power or ground to the stereo amplifier
- Damaged speaker(s)
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
NOTE:
W i n d o w tint, aftermarket theft-recovery devices and
other aftermarket devices may affect reception.
Changes in cloud cover and other atmospheric
conditions will affect the ability of the audio unit to
receive radio signals.
1. Park the customer's vehicle in an open area away
f r o m buildings or other obstructions.
2. Park a known-good vehicle (same year, model, and
t r i m level) next to the customer's vehicle, facing the
same direction.
3. Start the engine in the customer's vehicle, and turn on
the radio.
4. Set the FM receiver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Press the Seek + button, and record the first station
that the audio unit locks onto.
6. Press the Seek + button repeatedly, and write d o w n
each station that the audio unit locks onto until the
station recorded in step 5 is reached again.
7. Set the A M receiver to 530 kHz.
8. Press the Seek + button, and record the first station
that the audio unit locks onto.
9. Press the Seek 4- button repeatedly, and write d o w n
each station that the audio unit locks onto until the
station recorded in step 8 is reached again.
11. Start the engine in the known-good vehicle, and then
perform steps 4 thru 10 on the known-good vehicle.
12. Compare the number of stations received in steps 6
and 9 in the customer's vehicle w i t h the number of
stations received in the known-good vehicle.
Ifthe number of stations received is the same, or
within 10 %, the audio unit's tuner performance is
OK. The problem may be atmospheric conditions,
multi-path interference, or other obstructions to the
radio signal.
Ifthe customer's vehicle receives fewer stations by
at least 10 %, go to step 2 of poor A M or FM radio
reception or interference (see page 23-63).
23-124
Audio Unit Removal/Installation

SRS components are located In this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and the
5. Remove the bolts and the stay (A) f r o m the audio unit,
then remove the screws and climate control unit (B).
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
Lay a w o r k s h o p towel under the parts w h e n w o r k i n g
on them to protect the face panel f r o m scratches or
other damage.
Eject all the discs before removing the audio unit to
prevent damaging the CD/DVD player's load
mechanism.
If y o u are replacing the audio unit, write d o w n the
audio presets (if possible), and enter t h e m into the
new audio unit.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft codes for the audio
system and the navigation system (if equipped).
6. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of removal,

2. Remove the dashboard center panel (see page

20-123) and center pocket (see page 20-124).
Make sure all the connectors and the antenna lead

are secure.
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, then pull out the

audio unit (A).
Enter anti-theft codes for the audio system.

Set the clock (on vehicles w i t h o u t navigation).
If necessary, enter the navigation system code.
7. Give the new anti-theft codes to the customer.
4. Disconnect the audio unit connectors and climate

control unit connectors, then remove the audio unit.
NOTE: W h e n y o u disconnect audio unit connector A,
while pushing the tab (B), pull the lever (C) up, and
disconnect the connector.
23-125
Audio System
Audio-HVAC Display Unit
Stereo Amplifier
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard.

20-128)
1. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-125) and the

center upper panel (see page 20-122).
2. Remove the screws and bolts, then pull out the
audio-HVAC display unit (A).
Passenger's side kick panel (see page 20-79)

2. Disconnect the connectors (A).
NOTE: W h e n y o u disconnect stereo amplifier
connector A, while pushing the tab (B), pull the lever
(C) up, and disconnect the connector.
3. Disconnect the connectors (B), and remove the

audio-HVAC display unit.
4. Separate the audio-HVAC display unit (A) and the tray
(B).
A
B
3. Loosen the bolts (D) and remove the bolt (E), then pull
out the stereo amplifier (F).
4. Detach the harness clip (G). Remove the bolts, nut,
and the amplifier stays (H).
5. Install the stereo amplifier in the reverse order of
removal.
5. Install the audio-HVAC display unit in the reverse

order of removal.
23-126
USB Adapter Unit Replacement
XM Receiver Removal/Installation
1. Remove the passenger's side center console t r i m (see

page 20-115).
1. Remove the right rear side t r i m panel (see page

20-96).
2. Loosen the bolts and detach the harness clip (A), then
pull out the stay (B).
2. Disconnect the connectors, then remove the bolt,

screws, and the X M receiver (A).
3. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the bolts

and the USB adapter unit (B).
3. Install the X M receiver in the reverse order of

removal.
4. Call X M satellite radio at 800-852-9696 to register the
n e w X M receiver.
4. Install the USB adapter unit in the reverse order of

removal.
23-127
Audio System
Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Removal/Installation
FRONT
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
Lay a w o r k s h o p t o w e l under the parts w h e n working
on t h e m t o protect the face panel f r o m scratches or
other damage.
2. Remove the screws and the ANC front microphone

(A).
With HomeLink
1. Remove the roof console (see page 20-107).
Without HomeLink
3. Install the microphone in the reverse order of

removal.
23-128
Speaker Test/Replacement
REAR
Door Speaker and Test
1 . Remove the headliner (see page 20-107).
1 . Remove the door panel.
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the

screws, the ANC rear microphone (B), and the cap (C)
f r o m the headliner.
Front: (see page 20-9)

Rear: (see page 20-23)
2. Remove the bolt (A). Then lift the speaker (B) straight
up to release the lower clips (C).
INOTICEI
If y o u pull the speaker out too far f r o m the door, y o u
will damage the lower clips.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (D), and remove the

speaker.
No. 2. There should be about 4 CI.
5. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the door
speaker.
(cont'd)
23-129
Audio System
Speaker Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Center Speaker and Test
3. Remove the tweeter (A) f r o m the speaker grille by

prying at the hook (B).
NOTE:
Take care not scratch the dashboard.
1. Remove the center upper panel (see page 20-122).
2. Remove the screws and the speaker (A).
4. Without navigation and rear entertainment system,

check the capacitor (C) condition. If any problem is
f o u n d , replace the tweeter.

No. 2. There should be about 4 CI.
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the center
speaker.
Tweeter and Test

1. From the notch (A), carefully pry the tweeter grille (B)
out of the dashboard w i t h a small screwdriver. Be
careful not to damage the tweeter grille and the
dashboard.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) f r o m the tweeter.
23-130
5. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t w e e t e r (A)
terminals as s h o w n .
With rear e n t e r t a i n m e n t s y s t e m a n d / o r n a v i g a t i o n :
M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e front d o o r
t w e e t e r 2P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d No. 2.
Satellite Speaker and Test

1. R e m o v e t h e D-pillar trim ( s e e p a g e 20-89).
2. R e m o v e t h e s p e a k e r grille (A) a n d c o n n e c t o r clip (B).
T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 3.3 Q.
W i t h o u t n a v i g a t i o n a n d rear e n t e r t a i n m e n t s y s t e m :
M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t w e e t e r (A)
t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d t h e o u t s i d e t e r m i n a l of t h e
c a p a c i t o r . T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 6 Q.
With rear entertainment system and /or navigation
c
3. R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s a n d t h e satellite s p e a k e r (C).
4. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d
No. 2. T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 4 Q.
Without navigation and rear entertainment system
5. If t h e r e s i s t a n c e is not a s s p e c i f i e d , r e p l a c e t h e
satellite s p e a k e r .
6. If t h e r e s i s t a n c e is not a s s p e c i f i e d , r e p l a c e t h e
tweeter.
(cont'd)
23-131
Audio System
Speaker Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Audio Remote Switch Test
Subwoofer and Test

SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and the
1. Remove the right rear side t r i m panel (see page

20-96).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) then remove the
bolts, nuts and pull out the subwoofer (B).
r
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-7).

2. Remove the audio remote switch (see page 17-8).
1 2
9 10 11 12

No. 8 in each switch position according to the table.
No. 2. There should be about 2 Q.
subwoofer.
Position
No button
pressed
MODE
CH( + )
CH(-)
(VOL. UP)
(VOL.
DOWN)
Resistance
A b o u t 10 kQ
A b o u t 3.7 kQ
A b o u t 1.7 kQ
A b o u t 775 Q
A b o u t 357 Q
A b o u t 100 Q
4. I f t h e resistance is not as specified, replace the audio

remote switch (see page 17-8).
23-132
AM/FM Antenna Amplifier

Replacement
1. Remove the right C-pillar t r i m (see page 20-86).
2. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the A M / F M
antenna amplifier ( B ) .
AM/FM Antenna Repair

NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
must be no longer than one inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
w i t h fine steel w o o l , then clean it w i t h isopropyl
alcohol.
A
3. Remove the bolt and A M / F M antenna amplifier.

4. Install the amplifier in the reverse order of removal.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of

the w i n d o w antenna wire (B) w i t h cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a commercially available rear w i n d o w
defogger repair kit, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break. A l l o w
30 minutes to dry.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.

5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
23-133
Audio System
XM Antenna Replacement
Auxiliary Jack Assembly

Replacement
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-107).
With Navigation (with USB adapter)
2. Remove the nut (A) f r o m the X M antenna (B).

2. Detach the connector (A) f r o m the clip. Disconnect the
5P connector (B), and carefully pull out the auxiliary
jack assembly (C) f r o m the center console box.
3. Disconnect the connector (C) and remove the X M

antenna.
4. Install the X M antenna in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Remove the cover (D) and disconnect the USB

adapter cable connector (E).
4. Install the auxiliary jack assembly in the reverse order
of removal.
23-134
Without Navigation
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A), and carefully pull out
the auxiliary jack assembly (B) f r o m the center
console box.

of removal.

W I R E L E S S REMOTE CONTROL
Battery Replacement page 23-174
s > r > * . - r - r ^ . . . ^ n r r . ,
LTn
ffi
Removal/lnstallat.on, page 23-172
149
AUDIO UNIT (With navigation)

AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation)

A M / F M ANTENNA S U B L E A D
A M / F M ANTENNA LEAD
U S B ADAPTER UNIT (With navigation

A M / F M ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
A M / F M ANTENNA
Repair, page 23-133
23-136
X M RECEIVER
W I R E L E S S HEADPHONE
Battery Replacement, page 23-173
RIGHT TWEETER
FRONT CENTER S P E A K E R
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S DOOR SPEAKER

AUDIO R E M O T E
SWITCH
Test, page 23-132
RIGHT REAR DOOR S P E A K E R

RIGHT SATELLITE SPEAKER

SUBWOOFER
L E F T SATELLITE S P E A K E R
LEFT T W E E T E R
23-137

Symptom
RES disc does not load
RES disc does not eject
RES disc does not play
RES disc skips
Black picture is s h o w n on the display

White picture is shown on the
display/display lock
Display area picture has lines or has
shifted
Display does not go off w h e n screen
is closed
No display appears on the rear
controller indicator
No sound/no display w i t h auxiliary
video unit inputs

W i r e d headphone sound is weak,

distorted, v o l u m e does not change,
or there is no sound
Wireless headphone sound is weak,
sound is distorted, there is static,
v o l u m e does not change, or there is
no sound in all modes
Wireless remote control does not
w o r k (all buttons)
w o r k (source select buttons)
w o r k (rear power button)
Screen backlight does not
dim/remains d i m
A n error code is displayed
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or

DISC DISTINCTION indicator does
not come on/does not go off
Wireless remote control illumination
does not come on
23-138
Also check for

Peeled disc label stuck
player
W r o n g type disc
player
W r o n g type disc
player
W r o n g type disc
player
W r o n g type disc
in
in
in
in

Poor connections or
disconnect device
Low batteries in
accessory device, or
disconnected f r o m power
source
Wireless headphone
batteries (see page 23-173)
Wireless
batteries
Wireless
batteries
Wireless
batteries

remote control
(see page 23-174)
remote control
(see page 23-174)
remote control
(see page 23-174)

Enter the self-diagnostic function w i t h the
wireless remote control (see page 23-152),
then scroll to function 3.
Wireless remote control

batteries (see page 23-174)
System Description
T h e r e a r e n t e r t a i n m e n t s y s t e m is c o m p o s e d o f a s p e c i a l D V D p l a y e r u n i t b u i l t i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t , a r e a r c o n t r o l l e r , a
screen, wireless h e a d p h o n e s , a wireless r e m o t e c o n t r o l , a n d an auxiliary jack a s s e m b l y .
System Components
Audio Unit
Provides rear s y s t e m p o w e r
Provides control f o r t h e rear f u n c t i o n s
A l l o w s t h e rear display t o s h o w i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e rear s y s t e m status
Provides a m e t h o d t o s t o p t h e rear passenger's f r o m h a v i n g c o n t r o l of t h e rear s y s t e m
T h e u n i t is b u i l t i n t o t h e D V D p l a y e r a n d D V D c o n t r o l c i r c u i t
Rear Screen
H a s a f l i p d o w n 9" d i s p l a y
D i s p l a y s i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e LCD
Display does not w o r k w h e n pushed forward, beyond the detent
P r o v i d e s o u t p u t f o r i n f r a r e d (IR) h e a d p h o n e s
Wireless Headphone
H a s a u t o m a t i c ON/OFF c o n t r o l
Has v o l u m e c o n t r o l
W o r k s o n l y in t h e s e c o n d a n d t h i r d r o w seats, n o t o u t s i d e t h e vehicle o r in t h e f r o n t seats
Wireless Remote Control

A l l o w s remote operation of the audio functions.

A l l o w s i n p u t f r o m s t a n d a r d v i d e o g a m e a n d v i d e o e q u i p m e n t u s i n g RCA c o n n e c t o r s
Provides three w i r e d headphone connectors and separate v o l u m e controls
Audio Remote Switch

Allows operation of the audio functions f r o m the steering wheel.
Voice Control Switch
A l l o w s operation of the audio functions t h r o u g h the navigation system.
Navigation Display
Allows operation of the audio functions through the navigation system.
(cont'd)
23-139

Operating Method
NOTE: Refer to the Owner's Manual for full operation details.
A u d i o Unit
1. Turn the rear entertainment system ON.
After the ignition switch is tuned to ON (II), push REAR PWR button (A) to turn the rear system ON.
To turn the rear system OFF, push REAR PWR button, and to turn the w h o l e system OFF, push VOL PUSH PWR
knob.
2. Using the select button.

Front source button (A), indicator light ON: control of front source f r o m audio unit.
Rear source button (B), indicator light O N : control of rear source f r o m audio unit.
The rear source automatically reverts back to front source after 10 seconds if y o u don't do anything.
3. Rear Control Enable/Disable.

By pushing the REAR CTRL OFF button (C), the LED indicator comes ON and the rear seat passengers are not be able
to control the system. The rear display shows rear control OFF (CTRL OFF). Press the button again to allow the rear
seat passengers to control the RES.
23-140
4. Viewing the display.

With navigation: The subdisplay (A) (built into the audio unit) or navigation display (B) indicates the status of the
front and rear systems if the navigation audio button (C) is selected.
W i t h o u t navigation: The audio-HVAC display (D) indicates the status of the front and rear systems.
With navigation
Without navigation
5. Rear speaker automatic OFF Function.

By turning the rear speaker OFF y o u can reduce the interference between the front source and the rear source
(Headphone). The speakers are turned ON/OFF automatically w h e n the front and rear have different sources selected.
W h e n the rear speaker is in the OFF mode, the display indicates the rear speaker off icon.
With navigation
Without navigation
Wireless Remote Control

Wireless remote control switch use and function.
W i t h Rear Power ON and rear control enabled, the rear passengers can control the functions, except v o l u m e , w i t h the
remote.
Rear passengers can control the functions, unless the rear control has been turned off by the front user.
Source selection
Selection (music, station)

play, pause, etc.
(cont'd)
23-141

Rear Controller and Screen Connector for Inputs and Outputs
REAR CONTROLLER AND

S C R E E N 24P CONNECTOR
REAR CONTROLLER AND S C R E E N 24P CONNECTOR
3
1
13 14
5 6 7
16 17 18 19
1
10 11
/ 22 231224
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box (+B)
1
WHT
A u d i o unit (GA-NET RR BUS+)
BLK
3
5
BRN
A u d i o unit (RR NTSC GND)
RED
A u d i o unit (HP R/L GND)
6
Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 18, and No. 19 (HP R/L SH)
7
BRN*
LTGRN
A u d i o unit (SCTY3)
10
11
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL+)
LTBLU
12
YEL
A u d i o unit (SYS ACC)
BRN*
13
14
WHT
A u d i o unit (GA-NET RR B U S - )
16
YEL
A u d i o unit (RR NTSC)
17
BRN*
WHT
18
A u d i o unit (HP L)
BLK
19
A u d i o unit (HP R)
22
Navigation display unit (SCTY2)
RED
23
YEL
Dash lights brightness controller in the gauge control module (ILL-)
24
BLK
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
23-142
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs (For rear entertainment system)
AUXILIARY JACK A S S E M B L Y
14P CONNECTOR
10
11
12
13 14
Cavity
Wire Color
Connect to
1
YEL
2
LTBLU
No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL+)
3
BLU*
4
GRN
A u d i o unit (RR A U X VIDEO GND)
BRN*
5
WHT
6
A u d i o unit (CONN CHK)
RED
7
A u d i o unit (RR A U X HP R/L GND)
8
BRN*
RED
9
A u d i o unit (RR A U X VIDEO)
10
BLK
A u d i o unit (RR A U X AUDIO L)
11
RED
Audio unit (RR A U X AUDIO GND)
WHT
12
Audio unit (RR A U X AUDIO R)
BLK
Audio unit (RR A U X HP L)
13
14
WHT
A u d i o unit (RR A U X HP R)
23-143

Circuit Diagram
W i t h navigation
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION
SWITCH
-Zo
BAT
oL
ACC HOT in ACC
RED
ACC CUT
L - _ < X ^
AM/FM
ANTENNA
BLU/
WHT
c5
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
No. 14(7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
AM/FM
ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
No. 35
(10 A)
No. 31
(30 A)
SCTY1
P5
WHT
AM/FM
ANTENNA
LEAD
I:
Q4
RED
t
REAR
CONTROLLER
and S C R E E N
LTBLU
STEREO
AMPLIFIER
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
UNIT
AM/FM
1/FM
ANTENNA
ITENI
SUBLEAD
BLE>
PUR
A14
A13
ILL+
+B
ACC
ANT
+B
RF
SH
RF
IN
REMOTE
GND
BLK
YEL
I"
No. 14 (7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
YEL
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH
-LL
G402
23-144
Y_.
HFL-VOICE
CONTROL
SWITCH
HFL-VOICE
CONTROL SWITCH
VOL.
. DOWN
y <>
VOL.
UP
I
1
CH ^ j CH
(-)
(+ )
1
|'(A)
.
I
MODE
|' | i'

schematic.
- {Shielding
FL
SP+
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
DRIVER' S
DOOR
SPEAKER
RED
WHT/
YEL
BRN/
BLK
BLK
FL
SP-
FL
TW+
FL
TW-
CTR
SP+
CTR
SP-
FR
SP+
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
LEFT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
LEFT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
BRN
RED/
WHT
BRN/
WHT
RED
FR
SP-
FR
TW+
FR
TW-
RL
SP+
RL
SP-
RL
SRSP
RL
SRSP
RIGHT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
RR
SP+
RR
SP-
RR
PRE+
RR
PRE-
RIGHT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
RR
SRSP
RR
SRSP
SUBW
+
FL
PRE+
FL
PRE+
CTR
PRE+
FL
PRE-
CTR
PRE+
FL
PRE-
RR A U X
HP L
CTR
PRE-
CTR
PRE-
RR AUX
HP R
FR
PRE+
FR
PRE-
FR
PRE+
RR A U X
HP R/L GND
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
RL
PRE+
GRY/
BLK
RED/
BLK
LT
BLU
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
RL
PRE+
RR AUX
HP R/L SH
RR AUX
AUDIO L
RL
PRE-
SRR
PRE+
BLU/
BLK
RL
PRE-
RR AUX
AUDIO R
SRR
PRE+
RR AUX
AUDIO GND
SR R
PRE-
SUBW
PRE+
LT
BLU
RED/
BLK
SR R
PRE-
RR AUX
AUDIO SH
SUBW
PRE-
RR
PRE+
RR
PRE-
RR A U X
VIDEO
SUBW
PRE+
RR AUX
VIDEO GND
SUBW
PRE-
RR A U X
VIDEO SH
CONN
CHK
No. 14 (7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
1
BLU*
LTBLU
1
BRN*
1
13
RR A U X
HP L
14
RR AUX
HP R
i
RR AUX
HP R/L GND
3
RR A U X
HPR/LSH
|i
10
12
RR A U X
AUDIO L
RR A U X
AUDIO R
11
RR AUX
AUDIO GND
RR AUX
AUDIO SH
|
BRN*
1
9
RR AUX
VIDEO
4
RR AUX
VIDEO GND
Is
RR A U X
VIDEO SH
6
CONN
CHK
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS

C O N T R O L L E R S the gauge
control module)
(cont'd)
23-145

No. 31 (30 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
BLK
WHT
BRN*
A9
GA-NET
BUS+
A10
GA-NET
BUS-
| A3
GA-NET
BUS SH
USB ADAPTER UNIT

PUR
PUR
IA24
A12
+B
SYS
ACC
RED
RED
GND
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
RED
GRN
WHT
BLK
AUDIO
SH
+B
SUB
+B
MAIN
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
ANC
R+
ANC
R-
SWD
+B
GND
MAIN
WHT
BLK
GRN
GRY*
F T
YEL
RED
RED
'I
BLK
RED
GND
SUB
BLK
RED G R Y
GRN
WHT
-T-7
BLK
1
RED
la
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
B-CAN
B-CAN
HI
LO
ANC
R+
ANC
R-
SWD
+B
+B
RED
I C2
RED
GRN
WHT
BLK
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
GRY
leu
SYS
ACC
AUDIO UNIT
NEP
[018
JD8
I
I
I
I
WHT
LTGRN
CSSAMA
CSSAMC
PUR
LT BLU
FMIC
SH
RMIC
SH
LT
BLU
AA
PUR
AA
G A U G E CONTROL
MODULE
MICU
L.
LT BLU
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE
G701
('09 model)
146
GRN*
BLK
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE
AUDIO
SH
: CAN line
: GA-NET
: Shielding
: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube

schematic.
SCTY1
GA-NET
BUSSH
GA-NET
BUS+
; 3
BRN*
GA -NET
ECU BUS
SH
GA-NET
BUS-
SCTY2
17
GA-NET
ECU BUS
I 18
BRN*
20
'.
',
; 19
t __
BLK
f ^|
WHT
GA-NET
ECU B U S
_ - - ""'
;
:
BLK
WHT
GA-NET
E C U BUS
GA-NET
ECU B U S
1
XM ANTENNA
GA-NET
BUSSH
GA-NET
BUS+
GA-NET
BUS-
GA-NET
ECU BUS
SH
GND SH
XM RECEIVER
SAT/TER
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
AUDIO
R+
AUDIO
R-
SYS
ACC
+B
NAVIGATION UNIT
XM
ANTENNA
LEAD
GND
RG
L+
RG
GND
C14
RG
SH
IC13
BLU*
V
A A A
BRN*
BLU*
|C3
C10
GA-NET
BUSSH
RR
NTSC
SYS
ACC
RR
NTSC
GND
F3
HP L
HP R
F11
HP R/L
GND
F12
F10
BRN*
No.23(10A)
F U S E (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
No. 14 (7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box}
T Y
+B
GND
ILL+
YEL
SYS
ACC
YEL
RR
NTSC
BRN
|02
GA-NET
BUS+
RR
RR
NTSC
GND
NTSC
SH
BLK
RED
HP L
HP R
HP R/L
GND
GA-NET
RR BUS
SH
HP R/L
SH
BRN*
l WHT
RG
SH
RG
GND
AUDIO UNIT
NTSC
SH
F16
GA-NET
BUS-
C9
I F1
GA-NET
RR B U S
J F14
F9
T
RED
HP R/L
SH
GA-NET
RR BUS
+
SCTY2
LT GRN
SCTY3
GA-NET
RR BUS
SH
BLK
WHT
GA-NET
RR BUS
GA-NET
RR B U S
ILL-

control module)
(cont'd)
23-147

Without navigation
RELAY BOX
23-148

schematic.
-
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAKER
31
31
FL
SP+
FRONT
PASSENGER' S
DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT
CENTER
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
RED
WHT/
YEL
BRN/
BLK
BLK
FL
SP-
FL
TW+
FL
TW-
CTR
SP+
31
BRN
CTR
SP-
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
RED/
WHT
FR
SP-
FR
SP+
31
BRN/
WHT
RED
FR
TW-
RL
SP+
RL
SP-
RL
SRSP
RIGHT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
RIGHT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
LEFT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
LEFT
REAR DOOR
SPEAKER
31
; GA-NET
: Shielding
3V
RL
SRSP
31
RR
SP+
RR
SP-
RR
PRE+
RR
PRE-
SUBWOOFER
31
RR
SRSP
RR
SRSP
SUBW
+
FL
PRE+
FL
PRE+
FL
PRE-
FL
PRE-
CTR
PRE+
CTR
PRE+
FR
PRE-
CTR
PRE-
CTR
PRE-
FR
PRE+
FR
PRE-
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
RL
PRE+
GRY/
BLK
RED/
BLK
LT
BLU
SRL
PRE+
SR L
PRE-
RL
PRE+
AUDIO
R-
AUDIO
L-
SYS
ACC
RL
PRE-
RL
PRE-
AUDIO
SH
SRR
PRE+
SR R
PRE-
BLU/
BLK
RED/
BLK
SRR
PRE+
SR R
PRE-
GA-NET
BUSSH
GA-NET
BUS+
SUBW
PRE-
SUBW
PRE+
LT
BLU
RR
PRE+
RR
PRE-
SUBW
PRE-
SUBW
PRE+
GA-NET
BUS-
~[C3
BRN*
1
P
XM ANTENNA
XM ANTENNA '
LEAD
BRN*
1
SYS
ACC
AUDIO
L+
AUDIO
L-
A3
GA-NET
AUDIO
R+
BUSSH
GA-NET
BUS+
GA-NET
BUS-
GND
SH
SAT/
TER
XM RECEIVER
(cont'd)
23-149

No. 14 (7.5 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
No. 31 (30 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
No. 23 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
LTBLU
WHT
Is
J16
PUR
IA12
+B
MAIN
PUR
Y
I
YEL
ILL+
No. 36 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
+B
IG2
|A24
+B
SUB
DUET
CONT
ILL-
DUET
TX
DUET
RX
GND
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
ANC
R+
ANC
R-
SWD
+B
GND
MAIN
GND
SUB
BLK
BLK
BLK
|A13
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
BRN*
ID16
D7
ANC
F+
ANC
F-
ANC
R+
B-CAN
HI
ANC
R-
DUET
CONT
SWD
+B
B-CAN
LO
CSSAMA
DUET
TX
DUET
RX
DUET
SH
FMIC
SH
CSSAMC
j~Dli
i
I
| E12
LT
GRN
I
I
I
I
I
AA
G A U G E CONTROL
MODULE
MICU
23-150
RMIC
SH
GRN*
I
I
WHT
"5G403
PUR
LT
BLU
LT
BLU
AU
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
ANC FRONT
MICROPHONE
ANC REAR
MICROPHONE

schematic.
: CAN line
: GA-NET
: Shielding
No. 14 (7.5 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
Y
ILL+
RR AUX
HP L
ILL-
RR A U X
HP R
RR AUX
HP R/L
GND
RR AUX
HP R/L
SH
RR AUX
AUDIO L
RR AUX
AUDIO R
RR AUX
AUDIO
SH
RR AUX
AUDIO
GND
BLU*
RR AUX
VIDEO
RR AUX
VIDEO
GND
RR AUX
VIDEO
SH
CONN
CHK
BRN*
YEL
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
BLU*
1
F23
RR AUX
HP L
RR AUX
HPR
SYS
ACC
RR AUX
HP R/L
GND
RR
NTSC
BRN*
1
RR AUX
HP R/L
SH
RR
NTSC
GND
F27
F25
|F24
RR AUX
AUDIO R
RR AUX
AUDIO
GND
RR AUX
AUDIO
SH
RR
NTSC
SH
HP L
HPR
p3~
"F16
No. 23 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
F26
RR AUX
AUDIO L
YEL
T Y
BRN
WHT
BLK
RR AUX
VIDEO
SH
CONN
CHK
GA-NET
RR BUS
+
F1
|F9
RED
RR AUX
VIDEO
GND
GA -NET
RR BUS
SH
HP R/L
SH
F10
BRN*
No. 14(7.5 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
HP R/L
GND
F21
F6
RR AUX
VIDEO
1LL+
GND
ILL-
SYS
ACC
RR
NTSC
RR
NTSC
GND
RR
NTSC
SH
HP L
HPR
HP R/L
GND
F14
BRN*
MICU
BLK
- ;
i
i
HP R/L
SH
SCTY2
SCTY3
GA-NET
RR BUS
SH
WHT
^ - - - -\"
3
+B
GA-NET
RR BUS
GA-NET
RR BUS
14
GA-NET
RR BUS

control module)
23-

The rear entertainment system has a self-diagnostic function that shows on the display. To run the self-diagnostic
function, do the f o l l o w i n g :
How to Enter for Self-diagnostic Function with the Wireless Remote Control
2. To run the self-diagnostic, press the remote control buttons in the following order within 2 seconds of each other: the
DVD/AUX button first, the A M / F M button second, the b u t t o n t h i r d , and then the A M / F M button f o u r t h . The
self-diagnosis begins and the rear display shows the diagnostic m e n u .
NOTE: If y o u take/too long to press any of the buttons, y o u need to cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then back to
ON (II), and start again.

DVD/AUX BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
DVD/
AUX
BUTTON
AM/
FM
AM/
FM
ON
OFF"
Within 2 seconds

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair w o r k , run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
23-152
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Select

Use the wireless, remote control to navigate w i t h i n the self-diagnostic function.
LEFT/RIGHT button: Change the function mode
L E F T BUTTON
\
RIGHT BUTTON
(cont'd)
23-153

Self-diagnostic Function Mode Display
1. CONNECT
The screen will display connection check status for each device while in this self-diagnostic mode.
If the RAM condition for the RR DISP (rear controller and screen) is faulty, the screen displays NG (red color).
If the connection for the H/U (audio unit) is X M (XM receiver), or A U X (auxiliary jack assembly) is faulty, the screen
displays NG (red color).
1.CONNECT
RAM check
Connection OK: Green color
Connection NG: Red color
Function
No.
23-154
Connection check
Connection OK: Green color
Connection NG: Red color
Category
CONNECT
Check i t e m or information
RR DISP
Rear controller and screen RAM check
H/U
Audio unit connection check
AUX
Auxiliary jack assembly connection check
XM
X M receiver connection check
J u d g e display
OK or
GRN
OK or
GRN
OK or
GRN
OK or
GRN
NG w i t h
or RED
NG w i t h
or RED
NG w i t h
or RED
NG w i t h
or RED
2. UNIT CHECK
The screen displays device version, self-diagnostic status, and screen status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
If a connection to a device is NG, the screen displays
.
If there is a change (analog to digital) of signal error for the categories + B VOLT or TEMP, the screen displays Err.
The screen indicates i f t h e screen position is open or closed.
OPEN: Green color

C L O S E or OPEN past the detent: Red color
Function
No.
Category
UNIT CHECK
DISPLAY VER
RAM CHECK
DISP PANEL
+ B VOLT
TEMP.
Normal: Green color

Error: Red color
Check item or information

Rear controller and screen version and soft
release day information
Rear controller and screen RAM check
Screen open or close condition or open past the
detent
+ B voltage
Screen temperature
Judge display
OK or NG
OPEN or NG
* * V or Err
* * h or Err
23-155

RES disc does not load
RES disc does not eject
NOTE:
NOTE:

22-93).

22-93).
Check any official Honda service website for more

service information about the RES.

Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the

anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation
system (if equipped).

anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation
system (if equipped).
After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for

the audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped).
After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for

the audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped).
Discs w i t h labels should not be used in the DVD player

unit (built into the audio unit). They may damage the
player mechanism.

player mechanism.
Make sure the CD or DVD is compatible w i t h the

system (refer to the Owner's Manual for more
information).

2. Try ejecting the disc.
Does the disc
2. Try loading a disc.
YES-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit (built

into the audio unit) is OK at this t i m e . H
Does the disc
load?
YES-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit (built

into the audio unit) is OK at this t i m e . H
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Insert a known-good disc.
Does the disc
load?
YES-The original disc is f a u l t y . H

NO-Go to step 4.
5. Remove the No. 17 (20A) fuse f r o m the under-hood
fuse relay box for 2 minutes.
6. Reinstall the fuse.
8. Enter the audio unit security code.
Does the disc
load?
YES-lntermittent problem. If the problem reoccurs,

replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
23-156
eject?
4. Remove the No. 17 (20A) fuse f r o m the under-hood
fuse relay box for 2 minutes.
5. Reinstall the fuse.
7. Enter the audio unit security code.
8. Try ejecting the disc.
Does the disc
eject?
YES-lntermittent problem. If the problem reoccurs,

replace the audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
RES disc does not play
RES disc skips
NOTE:
NOTE:
Copy protected material on a CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW
disc may skip or not play.

22-93).
CD-R/RWs and DVD-R/RWs will not work in the DVD
player unit (built into the audio unit).
Damaged, corrupted, or contaminated discs may not
always play properly.
player mechanism.
You need to switch the audio unit REAR PWR button
on for the rear display, remote controls, and sound to
operate.
2. Try loading a DVD. If the disc does not load, see RES
does not load troubleshooting.
Does the DVD play (display and
sound)?
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the DVD player unit (built

into the audio unit) is OK at this t i m e . B
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Insert a known-good DVD.
Does the DVD play (display properly and sound normal)?
Y E S - T h e original DVD is faulty or is an unreadable
format.!
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-152),
then select function number 1 for Connect of the rear
entertainment system (see page 23-154).
Is the audio unit connect condition OK?
Check for scratches, smudges, and fingerprints on the

disc.
Check and adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended pressure (refer to the door jamb).
2. Try playing a disc.
Does the disc
skip?
NO-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit (built into
the audio unit) is OK at this t i m e . B
3. Clean the disc, and recheck (see page 23-181).
Does the disc play
properly?
Y E S - T h e original disc was d i r t y . B

NO-Go to step 4.
Does the disc play
properly?
Y E S - T h e original disc is dirty or the w r o n g t y p e . B

NO-Go to step 5.
5. Compare the disc that is skipping in a known-good
vehicle under the same conditions.
Does the known-good vehicle's disc skip under the
same conditions (over the same bumps and on the same
rough roads)?
Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l .
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original audio unit (see page 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
NO-Repair the poor connection in the audio unit

connectors.
5. Substitute a known-good audio unit, then test the
audio unit.
Is the sound normal?
YES-Replace the original audio unit (see page
23-125).
audio unit connectors, and recheck.B
23-157

Black picture is shown on the display (no
image)
6. Measure the voltage between rear controller and

screen 24P connectorterminal No.1 and body g r o u n d .
NOTE:
22-93).
If the navigation system, or X M radio do not function
properly, troubleshoot and resolve those problems
first.
operate.
+B (WHT)
/ /
3
13 14
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then push the rear

power switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
//
16 17 18 19
10 11 12
22 23 24
voltage?
YES-Go to step 7.

2. Check for brightness settings in the display set up
(refer to the owner's manual for more information).
Are the display settings set
Is there battery
Does the screen come ON?
properly?

(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
rear controller and s c r e e n . !
screen 24P connectorterminal No. 12 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Adjust the display setting, and recheck the
function.!
fuse/relay box.

S Y S A C C (YEL)
n
13 14 / | 1 6 17 18 19
Is the fuse OK?
/V
10 11 12
22 23 24
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B
4. Remove the display cover (see page 23-172). Then
check that the rear controller and screen is properly
connected.
Is the rear controller and screen connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnectthe connector, and recheck the
function.!
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Substitute a known-good rear controller and screen
(see page 23-172), and retest.
Does the DVD play (display properly and sound
YES-Replace the original rear controller and
screen.!
23-158
normal)?

ground.
13. Check for continuity between rear controller and

screen 24P connectorterminal No. 12 and audio unit
connector F (28P) terminal No. 13.
S Y S A C C (YEL)
3
13 14
V/
S Y S ACC (YEL),
16 17 18 19
AV
1
3 A *
6 7
13 14
16 17 18 19
10 11 12
22 23 24
10 11 12
22 23 24
S Y S A C C (YEL)
Is there 0 V?
1 2 3
15 16
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
YES-Go to step 14.

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (28P)
12. Disconnect the rear controller and screen 24P
connector and audio unit connector F (28P).
YES-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen (see page 23-172), then retest. Ifthe
rear controller and screen. Ifthe symptom/indication
does not go away, replace the audio unit (see page
23-125).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the rear
controller and screen and the audio u n i t . B
ground.
1 3 1 4 / 1 6 17 18 19
10 11 12
22 23 24
GND (BLK) I

YES-Replace the rear controller and s c r e e n .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the rear
controller and screen 24P connectorterminal No. 24
and body ground (G404).H
23-159

White picture is shown on the display/display
lock
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-93).
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), push the rear
power switch ON o n the audio unit to see if the screen
turns O N .
Is it normal?
Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . !
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Run the rear entertainment system self-diagnostic
(see page 23-152).
Is it normal?
Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . !
NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen (see page 23-172), and recheck. If the
rear controller and screen (see page 2 3 - 1 7 2 ) . !
23-160
Display area picture has lines or has shifted

22-93).
power switch ON t o see if the screen turns ON.
Does the screen have lines or has the image
shifted?
NO-Operation is normal at this t i m e . !
2. Check the screen mode set up (refer to the Owner's
Manual for more information).
Are the settings set
properly?
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good rear controller and

screen (see page 23-172), and recheck. If the
rear controller and screen (see page 2 3 - 1 7 2 ) . !
NO-Adjust the display settings, and recheck the
function.!
Display does not go off when screen is closed

1. With the ignition switch to ON (II) and screen open,
push the rear power switch ON. Then close the screen
by pivoting it up.
Does the screen go off?
NO-Go to step 2.
NOTE:
22-93).
operate.
power switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
2. Check the lock switch.

Does the screen close
No display appears on the rear controller

indicator
securely?
Does the screen come on?
YES-lf the screen securely closes and the screen does

not go off, replace it.B
NO-Relockthe screen, and recheck. If the screen does
not securely lock into position, replace it (see page
23-172J.B

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the operation and display of the screen, the
wireless remote control and the wireless headphone.
Are the operation and display
normal?
YES-Faulty rear indicator.B

NO Screen faulty: Go to the Black picture is shown on
the display troubleshooting (see page 23-158).B
Wireless remote control faulty: Go to the Wireless
remote control does not w o r k (all buttons)
Wireless headphone faulty: Go to the Wireless
headphone sound is weak, distorted, volume does
not change, or there is no sound in all modes
23-161

No sound/no display with auxiliary video unit
inputs

unit connector F (28P) according to the table.
F19
F20
F21
F25
F26
F27
NOTE:
22- 93).
Check that the auxiliary device is properly connected,
and has fresh batteries or power source connected.
Do not connect an RCA type shorting plug w i t h the
auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector, or y o u may
damage the system.
operate.
1. Connect an auxiliary video source, and check the
volume/display operation.
Does the display operate properly and does the audio
sound normal?
Wire color
GRN
RED
WHT
RED
BLK
WHT
15 16
/
/
9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
YES-Operation is normal at this t i m e . !

2. Substitute a known-good auxiliary video u n i t , and

recheck.
Does the auxiliary video unit operate
properly?
YES-Original auxiliary video unit f a u l t y . !

3. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-152),
then select function number 1 for Connect of the rear
entertainment system (see page 23-154).
Is the auxiliary jack assembly connect condition OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
4. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page
23- 173). Check that the auxiliary jack assembly is
properly connected.
Is the auxiliary jack assembly connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the
function.!
6. Disconnect audio unit connector F (28P) and the
auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector.
23-162
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check for continuity between the terminal of audio

From terminal
F6 (BRN)
F19 (GRN)
F21 (WHT)
To terminals
F19 (GRN), F20 (RED)
F20 (RED)
F6 (BRN), F24 (BRN), F8
(BLU)
F25 (RED), F26 (BLK), F27
(WHT)
F26 (BLK), F27 (WHT)
F27 (WHT)
F24 (BRN)
F25 (RED)
F26 (BLK)
9. Check for continuity between the audio unit connector

F (28P) and auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector
Audio unit
connector
Wire color
Auxiliary jack
assembly
connector
4
9
6
11
10
12
F19
F20
F21
F25
F26
F27
GRN
RED
WHT
RED
BLK
WHT

i
2
15 16
7_ 8 _ J M O j I I J 2 13 1 4 _
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
'/
1 |2
15
3 /
r
6
9 10 11 12 13 14
1 6 / / 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
7

affected shielded harness.
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 14P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
7 8 9 10
4 5 6
11 12 13 14
YES-Go to step 10.
N O - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio
10. Connect a commercially available RCA type shorting
plug to each audio input (R and L).
NOTE: Do not connect the RCA type shorting plug
with the auxiliary jack assembly 14P connected, or
y o u may damage the system.
(cont'd)
23-163

of the auxiliary jack assembly.
No. 10 <-> No. 11
No. 12 <-> No. 11
''
1.0X11 12 13 14
Wired headphone sound is weak, distorted,

volume does not change, or there is no sound
NOTE:
22-93).
operate.
Check the headphone battery condition.
1. Substitute a known-good wired headphone set, and
recheck.
Does the symptom go away?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty auxiliary jack a s s e m b l y . B
12. Remove the RCA type shorting plug(s), and check the
same terminals again for continuity.
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack a s s e m b l y . B
23-125), and recheck. I f t h e symptom/indicated goes
away, replace the original audio unit. I f t h e s y m p t o m
is still present, substitute a known-good rear
controller and screen, and recheck. Ifthe
symptom/indicated goes away, replace the original
rear controller and screen (see page 23-172).B
23-164
YES-Original wired headphone set is faulty.B

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Plug the wired headphones into the other ports of the
auxiliary jack assembly to check their condition.
Do all the ports have the same
symptom?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly.B
3. Check that the w i r e d headphone jack is properly
connected.
Is the headphone jack connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnect the wired headphone connector, and
recheck the f u n c t i o n . B
4. Disconnect audio unit connector F (28P) and the
auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector.

F7
F22
F23

From terminal
F7 (BLK)
Wire color
BLK
WHT
RED
F8 (BRN)
F22 (WHT)
To terminals
F8 (BRN), F22 (WHT), F23
(RED)
F22 (WHT), F23 (RED)
F23 (RED)

1 2 3 \ / \ / \ 6 | 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2
15 16
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

NO-Go to step 6.

NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
23-165

7. Check for continuity between audio unit connector F
(28P) and auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector
Wire color
Auxiliary jack
assembly
connector
13
1.4
7
Audio unit
connector
F7
F22
F23
NOTE:
22-93).
You may use known-good headphones f r o m a factory
installed or accessory RES, but it must be a similar
vehicle (for example, do not use Odyssey RES
headphones).
BLK
WHT
RED
AUDIO UlMITCONNECTC>R F (28P)

n
1 2
15
Wireless headphone sound is weak, sound

distorted, there is static, volume does not
change, or there is no sound in all modes
3 i / y 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314
1<) 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27\/_
1 6 2 Z
1. Substitute a known-good wireless headphone, and

recheck.
YES-Replace the batteries (see page 23-173), and
retest. Ifthe symptom/indication does not go away,
replace the original wireless headphones.B
NO-Go to step 2.
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 14P CONNECTOR
1 2
7 8 9 10 X | n
2. Check the lens (A) on the rear edge of the rear screen
for dirt (and clean it) or damage.
5 6
12 13 14
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly.B
affected shielded harness.B
Does the rear screen appear to be in good
condition?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen, and recheck.B
3. Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page
23-125), and recheck.
YES-Replace the original audio unit (see page
23-125).B
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect audio unit connector F (28P) and the rear
controller and screen 24P connector.
23-166

unit connector F (28P) according t o the table.

Wire color
RED
WHT
BLK

F10
F11
F12
From terminal
F9 (BRN)
F10 (RED)
F11 (WHT)
To terminals
F10 (RED), F11 (WHT), F12
(BLK)
F11 (WHT), F12 (BLK)
F12 (BLK)

2 3
15116
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Is there
continuity?

unit, the rear controller, and screen. Replace the
NO-Go t o step 6.
any of the
terminals?

unit and the rear controller and screen. Replace the
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
23-167

7. Check for continuity between the audio unit connector
F (28P) and rear controller and screen 24P connector
Audio unit
connector
F10
F11
F12
Rear controller
and screen
connector
6
18
19
Wireless remote control does not work (all

buttons)
NOTE:
Wire color
Check the wireless remote control battery condition

first.
Make sure that the rear power and rear control are on
(refer to the owner's manual for more information).
If the navigation system, o r X M radio do not function
properly, troubleshoot and resolve those problems
first.
RED
WHT
BLK
AUDIO UlMIT COIMNECTC>R F (28P)
1. Check the wireless remote control operation.

n
3 l / / 6 7 8 9 10 vTl2J13 14
15 1 6 2 _ / 1S) 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 7 ^ /
1 2
/ /
3
13 14
n
5
16 17 18 19
//
normally?
YES-Operation is normal at this time. Low batteries

can cause intermittent problems w i t h the wireless
remote.
NO-Go to step 2.
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN 24P CONNECTOR
Does the wireless remote control operate
2. Substitute a known-good wireless remote control,

and recheck.
Does the wireless remote control operate
10 11 12
22 23 24
YES-Rear controller and screen f a u l t y . !
unit and the rear controller and screen. Replace the
normally?

retest. If the symptom/indication does not go away,
replace the original wireless remote control.B
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the audio unit operation.
Does the audio unit operate
normally?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to the audio unit power switch will not turn on
(No information display and no sound)
4. Check the rear controller display.
Does the display operate
normally?
YES-Replace the rear controller and screen (see page
23-172).B
NO-Go to the No display appears on the rear indicator
troubleshooting (see page 2 3 - 1 6 D J I
23-168
Wireless remote control does not work

(source select buttons)
Wireless remote control does not work (rear

power button)
NOTE:
first.
operate.
NOTE:

Does the source select button
operate?

2. Check the diagnosis menu CONNECT status of the
rear entertainment system self-diagnostic (see page
23-152).
Is the device connect condition OK?
replace the wireless remote c o n t r o l . B

first.
Make sure that the rear power and rear control are on
(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
Does the audio unit indicate REAR
PWR?

replace the wireless remote control.B
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Press the REAR PWR button on the audio unit.
Is the rear power button on?
NO-Replace the batteries (see page 23-174), and
replace the wireless remote c o n t r o l . B
NO-Replace the connection for the device that has a

connection error indicated.B
23-169

Screen backlight does not dim/remains dim
NOTE:
22-93).
Check the dash and gauge d i m m e r operation. If there
is a problem w i t h the dash and gauge dimmer, repair
it before doing this troubleshooting.
2. Turn the combination light switch ON and OFF, then
back ON.

screen 24P connector terminal No. 11 and body
ground. Turn the combination light switch on and off
to see i f t h e voltage changes.
ILL+ (LTBLU)
/
/
1
3
13 14
5 6 7
16 17 18 19
10 11 12
22 23 24
Does the screen backlight dim with the combination light

switch in the ON position?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the backlight settings in the display set up
(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
Are the display settings set properly?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Adjust the display settings, and recheck the
function. B
5. Check that the rear controller and screen and audio
unit are properly connected.
Are the connections
OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the
function.B
23-170
Is there battery voltage with the combination light switch

ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 14 (7.5A)
fuse in the under dash fuse box and the rear controller
and screen.B
8. Turn the headlights O N , and check the illumination of
several other unit/switches not related to the rear
entertainment system.
Are the buttons
illuminated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Troubleshoot the interior lights. Start by checking
the No. 14 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box. If there is OK, go to MICU input test (see page
22-153).B

screen 24P connector terminal No. 11 and No. 23 as
you turn the gauge brightness controller f r o m dim to
bright.
I L L + (LT BLU)
13 14
16 17 18 19
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or DISC

DISTINCTION indicator does not come
on/does not go off
22-93).
1. Check the DVD player operation.
10 11112!
22I23 24
I L L - (YEL)
Does the DVD player operate
normally?

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good disc, and recheck.
Is it normal?
YES-Original disc is faulty.B
Does the voltage change from about 3 V (low) to battery

voltage (max)?
YES-Go to step 10.

23-125), and recheck. If the symptom/indicated goes
away, replace the original audio unit (see page
NO-
23-125).B
If there is 0 V at all times, repair open in the wire

between the gauge and the rear controller and
screen.!
If there is battery voltage at all times, repair short in
the wire between the gauge and the rear controller
and screen.
screen 24P connector terminal No. 24 and body
ground.
3
13 14
16 17 18 19
10 11 12
22 23 24
GND (BLK)

YES-Replace the rear controller and screen (see page
23-172).B
between rear controller and screen 24P connector
No. 24 terminal and body ground (G404).B
23-171
Rear Entertainment S y s t e m
Rear Controller and Screen

Wireless remote control illumination does

not come on
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
cover.

Does the illumination for all the buttons come on (10
seconds)?
1. Remove the wireless remote control.

2. Remove the display cover (A).
YES-Operation is normal at this time.B

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Replace the batteries in the wireless remote control,
and recheck (see page 23-174).
Does the wireless control illumination come on?
YES-The original batteries were faulty.B

NO-Replace the wireless remote control.B
3. Disconnect the connector (A).
4. Pull the edge of the headliner down.

5. Remove the mounting bolts. Pull the rear controller
(B) forward, under the headliner to release the hooks,
then pull the rear controller back and down to
remove.
6. Install the screen in the reverse order of removal, and
make sure the rear controller and screen connector
are plugged in properly.
23-172

Replacement
Wireless Headphone Battery

Replacement
For rear entertainment system
1. Open the battery cover (A), and remove the battery

(B).
1. Remove the console rear t r i m (see page 20-116).

2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A), and remove the
auxiliary jack assembly (B).

of removal.
2. Turn the left earpiece (A) to O N , and confirm that the
indicator (B) comes on after the battery is replaced.
23-173

Wireless Remote Control Battery Replacement
1. Use a small coin to remove the cover (A) f r o m the
remote control.
2. Remove the batteries (B).

3. Install the new batteries as a set. Do not mix old
batteries w i t h the new ones.
4. Confirm that each operation works normally after
replacing the batteries.
23-174
Navigation System
. G P S ANTENNA
PCM
(Vehicle Speed Pulse)
(Related in GA-net)
(With rear entertainment system)
X M RECEIVER
(Related in GA-net)
NAVIGATION UNIT
REARVIEW CAMERA
NAVIGATION S E R V I C E CHECK CONNECTOR
Forced starting of the display, page 23-290
(cont'd)
23-175
Navigation System
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE
L E F T FRONT
TWEETER

RIGHT FRONT
TWEETER
ADAPTER
UNIT (Related
GA-net)
DRIVER* S DOOR
SPEAKER
DOOR S P E A K E R
INTERFACE DIAL
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH
Voice Control Switch T e s t page 23-292
23-176
NAVIGATION SWITCH PANEL


General Operation
The following circumstances may cause vehicle

positioning errors:
Refer to the Navigation System Manual for the

navigation system operating procedures.
Moving the vehicle w i t h the engine stopped and the

vehicle stopped, such as by ferry or t o w truck, or if the
vehicle is spun on a turn table.
Anti-theft Feature
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded theft
protection circuit. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft
security code before:
Tire slippage, changes in tire rolling diameters, and

some driving situations may cause discrepancies in
travel distances. Examples of this include:
- Continuous tire slippage on a slippery surface
Disconnecting the battery.
- Driving w i t h s n o w chains mounted
Disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector.
- A b n o r m a l tire pressure
Removing the No. 23 (10 A) fuse f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
- Incorrect tire size
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit,

and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Enter the 4-digit
anti-theft security code, then select Done.
- Continuous driving on a straight or gently curving

highway
If the code cannot be f o u n d , use the interactive Network

(iN) to look it up. You can v i e w the serial number in one
of the ECU info, diagnostic screens (see page 23-229).
Alternatively, you can find the serial number f r o m the
navigation unit under the driver's seat.
- Frequent lane changes across a wide highway
- Very b u m p y roads
Tolerances in the system and map inaccuracies
sometimes limit how precisely the vehicle's position is
indicated. Examples of this include:
- Driving on roads not shown on the map (map
matching is not possible)
W h e n replacing the navigation unit, be sure to give the

customer the new anti-theft security code.
- Driving on a road that winds in one direction, such

as a loop bridge, an interchange, or a spiral parking
garage
Symptom Diagnosis
- Driving on a road with a series of sharp hair-pin

turns
Certain circumstances and system limitations can result

in occasional vehicle positioning errors. Some
customers may think this indicates a problem w i t h the
navigation system w h e n , in fact, the system is normal.
Keep the f o l l o w i n g items in m i n d w h e n interviewing
customers about s y m p t o m s of the navigation system.
- Driving near a gradual highway exit or transition
Self-lnertial Navigation Limitations

The limitations of the self-inertial portion of the
navigation system (the y a w rate sensor and the vehicle
speed signal) can cause some discrepancies between
the vehicle's actual position and the indicated vehicle's
position (GPS vehicle position).
- Driving on one of t w o close parallel roads

- Making many 90 degree turns
Global Positioning System (GPS) Limitations

The GPS cannot detect the vehicle's position or
elevation during the following instances:
For the first 5 to 10 minutes after reconnecting the
battery (This process can take as long as 45 minutes).
W h e n the satellite signals are blocked by tall
buildings, mountains, tunnels, large trees, inside
parking structures or large trucks.
W h e n the GPS antenna is blocked by metallic w i n d o w
tinting or by an object placed above it in the vehicle.
The GPS antenna requires a clear unobstructed v i e w
of the sky.
W h e n there is no satellite signal output (Signal output
is sometimes stopped for satellite servicing).
W h e n the satellite signals are blocked by the
operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash
entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers,
radar detectors and theft recovery systems) and cell
phones placed near the navigation system.
(cont'd)
23-177
Navigation System
T h e a c c u r a c y o f t h e G P S is r e d u c e d d u r i n g t h e s e
instances:
Symptom Duplication
M e t a l l i c w i n d o w t i n t i n g a b o v e t h e GPS
W h e n t h e s y m p t o m c a n b e d u p l i c a t e d , v e r i f y t h a t i t is
not a characteristic of the system. Review the
n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m m a n u a l a n d c o m p a r e it t o a
k n o w n - g o o d vehicle (with the same software and
database), under the same conditions. Ifthe s y m p t o m
is n o t t h e s a m e , as t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e f o l l o w t h e
self-diagnostic procedures and the appropriate
troubleshooting procedures.
antenna.
W h e n o n l y t h r e e o r less satellite signals are received

(Four satellite signals are r e q u i r e d f o r accurate
positioning).
W h e n d r i v i n g near h i g h t e n s i o n p o w e r lines.
W h e n t h e satellite signals are blocked by t h e
operation of s o m e electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash
e n t e r t a i n m e n t units (radio, CD players/changers,
radar d e t e c t o r s a n d t h e f t r e c o v e r y s y s t e m s ) a n d cell
phones placed near the navigation system.
W h e n t h e satellite c o n t r o l centers are e x p e r i e n c i n g
problems.
Muting Logic
W h e n e v e r t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m is g i v i n g g u i d a n c e , t h e
f r o n t speakers are m u t e d . W h e n t h e voice c o n t r o l
s y s t e m is b e i n g u s e d , all o f t h e s p e a k e r s a r e m u t e d . I f t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k is i n u s e , t h e v o i c e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is
unavailable.
LCD Unit Limitations

N O T E : T h e s c r e e n is n o t t o u c h s e n s i t i v e . U s e t h e
interface dial a n d b u t t o n s t o select items o n the screen.
In c o l d t e m p e r a t u r e s , t h e d i s p l a y m a y s t a y d a r k f o r t h e
f i r s t 2 o r 3 m i n u t e s u n t i l it w a r m s u p .
W h e n t h e d i s p l a y is t o o h o t b e c a u s e o f d i r e c t s u m m e r
s u n l i g h t , it w i l l r e m a i n d a r k u n t i l t h e t e m p e r a t u r e
d r o p s (You m a y see an e r r o r m e s s a g e d i s p l a y e d
stating this fact).
W h e n t h e h u m i d i t y is h i g h a n d t h e i n t e r i o r
t e m p e r a t u r e is l o w , t h e d i s p l a y m a y a p p e a r c l o u d y .
The display w i l l clear u p after s o m e use.
Fingerprints o n t h e screen m a y s o m e t i m e s be
noticeable because o f t h e panel's low-reflection
coating. Clean the screen w i t h a soft, d a m p cloth. You
m a y use a m i l d cleaner i n t e n d e d f o r eye glasses or
c o m p u t e r screens.
23-178
W h e n the s y m p t o m does not reappear or only

reappears i n t e r m i t t e n t l y , ask t h e c u s t o m e r a b o u t t h e
conditions w h e n the s y m p t o m occurred.
- A l w a y s ask t h e c u s t o m e r t o d e m o n s t r a t e t h e
problem.
- Try t o establish possible user error or
misunderstanding of the system.
- T r y t o e s t a b l i s h if o u t s i d e i n t e r f e r e n c e m a y h a v e
been the cause.
- Try to duplicate the s y m p t o m under the same
conditions the customer experienced.
- Vibration, temperature extremes, and moisture
( d e w , h u m i d i t y ) are factors t h a t are difficult t o
duplicate.
- Inspect t h e vehicle f o r after-market electronic
devices (vehicle locators, a m p s , radar detectors,
etc.) t h a t m a y be h i d d e n .
INOTICEI
W h e n troubleshooting navigation system problems,
e n s u r e t h a t t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e is t h e s a m e
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n y e a r a n d m o d e l as t h e v e h i c l e b e i n g
serviced. M i x i n g incompatible navigation DVDs or other
system c o m p o n e n t s can delay the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
process by causing can effects unrelated t o the original
problem.
Service Precautions
If you need to replace the navigation u n i t you can
back-up the navigation data and transfer it to a new
navigation unit. See save users m e m o r y (see page
23-233).
When the battery is disconnected, the internal GPS
clock resets to 0:00. The clock resets to the correct time
after the system finishes GPS initialization.
Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you have
the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the
navigation system, and write d o w n the audio presets.
Also obtain any PGM-FI or transmission DTCs and
freeze frame date (which are lost w h e n the PCM loses
power).
After reconnecting the battery, you have to wait to get
the initial signal f r o m the satellite. It will take f r o m 10
to 45 minutes.
Adjust the setup clock settings (time zone and daylight
savings) in the navigation system.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the
anti-theft codes for the audio system and navigation
system.
System Initialization
Ifthe navigation system loses power (like the battery
was disconnected), the navigation system requires
initialization. Once completed, your system is ready to
use.
The iN may display more than one code for a given serial
number. This is because serial numbers are not unique.
You may have to try more than one 4-digit code.
If no code is s h o w n , or if the code(s) given do not w o r k in
the navigation unit, contact the Automobile Warranty
department. If the code 0000 works, replace the
navigation unit.
When replacing the navigation unit or audio unit, make
sure you give the customer the new anti-theft security
code.
GPS Initialization
NOTE: You must park the vehicle outside w i t h a clear
v i e w of the southern sky.
Depending on the length of time the battery was
disconnected, your system may require GPS
initialization. If it does, the following screen appears:
The navigation system lost power and is acquiring its

location from the GPS satellites. This usually takes
less than 10 minutes.
Start the engine.
Park the vehicle in an open area away from trees,
power lines, and tall buildings.
Remove loose articles, cell phones, or electrical
accessories located near the GPS antenna.
- If this screen is displayed repeatedly when starting
the vehicle, see your dealer.
a
This initialization requires the following:

Entering the 4-digit anti-theft security code to unlock
the system
GPS initialization (may not be needed depending of
the length of time the system was without power)
Map matching to align the GPS to a location on the
map
Entering Security Code

Any time the navigation system loses power, you need
to enter the 4-digit anti-theft code on the the navigation
system display. The 4-digit code is located on a small
card that was given to the customer. Enter the 4-digit
code, then select Done.
Ifthe navigation system anti-theft code is missing, use
the interactive Network (iN) to lock it up. You need the
serial number for the navigation unit to do this.
You can view the serial number by entering the
diagnostic mode. Select Unit Check f r o m the main
menu, then the Navi ECU diagnostic screen. This gives
you the serial number without removing the navigation
unit.
(cont'd)
23-179
Navigation System
If this procedure is not necessary the system proceeds
directly to the Disclaimer screen. During initialization,
the system searches for all available GPS satellites, and
obtains their orbital information. During this procedure
the vehicle should be out in the open with a clear view of
the sky.
If the navigation system finds the satellites properly, this
box clears, and changes to the Disclaimer screen. If
within 10 minutes the system fails to locate a sufficient
number of satellites to locate your position, the
following screen appears.
Obtaining A Navigation DVD

If the Navigation DVD is lost or damaged, or you need a
yearly updated DVD, you have 2 ways to purchase one.
You can either call 888-549-3798, or order on-line at
www.hondanavi.com.
Both methods require a credit card. The DVD for this
model has a white label, and cannot be ordered t h r o u g h
the parts system. The f o l l o w i n g DVDs will not w o r k in
this navigation system:
Earlier and other model navigation DVDs (black,
orange, and turquoise label)
information about DVD colors and software versions.
Something is interfering with the system's ability to

acquire its location. Check the following:
The vehicle must be in an open area with a clear
view of the sky.
Remove sources of GPS interference like metallic
window tint above antenna, or electrical items
near antenna(see owner's manual for details).
Check GPS antenna cable connection.
Restart the engine and repeat the GPS acquire
procedure. If the problem persists, see your dealer.
Map software programs manufactured by other

companies
DVD movies, or DVDs containing audio recordings
Update DVDs are available for purchase usually in the
fall of each year. They may contain the f o l l o w i n g :
Enhanced maps and points of interest (POI) coverage
Fixes for minor software bugs
Additional features
NOTE:
If this screen appears, turn off the engine, then restart

the vehicle and move it to a different location. If the
disclaimer screen appears, the GPS initialization is
complete.
NOTE:
The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes,
but it can take as long as 45 minutes.
If the system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow
the instructions on the screen. If this screen appears
again, go to troubleshooting for the GPS icon is white
or not s h o w n (see page 23-274).
Map matching must be done any time the DVD is

removed or replaced.
Always order navigation DVDs on an as-needed basis.
During a typical model year, each color DVD may
undergo a half a dozen software only version
upgrades to fix minor issues on some or all models
the DVD supports. This is normal. Usually only the
letter at the end of the version number changes, while
the database (maps and POIs) remain unchanged.
Skip to a CSF screen by pushing the MENU and the

INFO buttons at the same t i m e and can move to an
System Links screen.
Never promise your customer future free updates.

There are no free programs for updating the
navigation DVD. Update DVDs are generally available
for purchase each fall. The on-time DVD order site
provides information w h e n an update for a particular
color DVD is available.
Map Matching
Damaged discs are not covered by warranty unless

damaged by the navigation unit.
This part of the initialization matches the GPS

coordinates w i t h a road on the map screen. To do this
part of the procedure, make sure that the navigation
system displays a map, and drive the vehicle on a
mapped road shown on the map screen. Do not enter a
destination at this time. When the name of the current
road you are driving on appears at the bottom of the
screen, the entire procedure is complete. Your system is
n o w ready to use.
23-180
DVD Handling and Cleaning

To avoid damaging or leaving fingerprints on the DVD,
always handle it by the edges and place it in a jewel case
whenever it is outside the navigation unit. Deep
scratches or fingerprints on the back of the DVD can
cause intermittent rebooting or other system errors.
Earliest DVD Version Application for Each

Model
Each navigation system DVD contains a map/POl (point
of interest) database and the navigation system software
for each model that it supports. Inserting an older DVD
can cause problems since it lacks the software to
provide the specific features needed for that model.
Unfortunately, the navigation software does not detect
or w a r n you that the version is outdated, and it may even
appear to operate. Check any official Honda service
website for more information about DVD colors and
software versions.
NOTE: Replacing a DVD just because the version
number is higher is not always warranted. A higher
software version does not necessarily mean it contains
newer software for your model. The DVD contains
software for all models that use the same color DVD, and
a revised number may or may not have software fixes or
upgrades for the model in question.
Smudges and fingerprints can be carefully removed

using a mild cleaner and tissues designed to clean
eyeglasses. To clean a DVD, use a clean soft cloth. Very
gently w i p e across the DVD f r o m the center to the
outside edge, never in a circular m o t i o n .
Typical warning s y m p t o m s that an outdated DVD is

being used include:
The Honda model navigation screen displays a Acura
logo while booting up.
A newly introduced model feature or current
accessory may not display properly, and Extension
displays instead.
NOTE: Extension may be displayed w h e n using Music
Link, but should never be displayed w h e n X M is
selected.
The current street (the street being driven on) does not
appear properly at the bottom of the map screen
display w h e n the vehicle is driven on a main road.
NOTE: If necessary, compare the operation to the
navigation system of the same model and year vehicle
that has a current DVD.
Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the DVD.
(cont'd)
23-181
Navigation System
How to Identify Navigation DVD Versions,
and How to Inspect A DVD for Damage
information about DVD colors and software versions.
To determine the navigation version on a particular
model, start the engine, then locate the navigation unit.
Open the DVD door, and push the eject button to eject
the DVD. Hold the DVD by the edges, and check for these
items:
The DVD label color.
Read the DVD version on the label, and note it on the
repair order. The version number is near the bottom of
the label text (for example, ver: 4.23A). You will need
this version number:
- To verify that the DVD version is appropriate for the
vehicle. Check any official Honda service website for
more service information.
- A n y time y o u call Tech Line regarding a navigation
system issue.
- To answer customer inquires concerning update or
coverage issue.
NOTE: Customers may obtain DVDs f r o m sources
outside the normal ordering process. If y o u
determine this is the case, recommend that your
customers purchase the appropriate DVD f r o m the
Honda Disc Fulfillment Center (see ORDERING A
DVD).
- Check the underside of the DVD for signs of
mishandling. Deep scratches, or random scratches,
light swirl marks, or fingerprints can cause random
lock-ups, reboots, erratic voice response, erratic
positioning errors, and DVD read or format errors.
NOTE: A damaged DVD is not covered under
warranty unless the disc is damaged by the
navigation unit. Damage by the navigation unit
typically appears as circular scratches caused by
something rubbing against the DVD as it spins. The
damage may appear as arcs or complete circles on
the DVD reading surface.
- Verify that the underside of the DVD is silver, and
not a copy w i t h a blue color. Copies will not w o r k
properly and can cause other s y m p t o m s that mimic
hardware problems.
23-182
Incorrectly colored DVDs being put into navigation

vehicles. This causes the system to either display error
messages or it causes system malfunctions that
mimic a hardware problem. This results in the
customer leaving away w i t h a malfunctioning
navigation system.
The DVD version provided to the customer is out-of
date or incompatible w i t h a particular model. This
inconveniences your customer by delaying the repair,
or by causing additional (and unnecessary) returns to
your dealership.
The customer experiences bugs or other issues that
have already been resolved in later versions currently
available at the fulfillment desk.
Ifthe DVD is defective, or has any of the issues
mentioned above, return the vehicle to y o u r customer
and recommend that they order the proper DVD f r o m
the Honda Disc Fulfillment Center (see ORDERING A
DVD).
NOTE: Navigation DVDs do not come w i t h replacement
navigation units. If y o u are replacing a navigation unit
because it is defective (following appropriate service
manual troubleshooting), and the DVD does not eject,
order a DVD. See Obtaining a navigation DVD.
How to Answer Customer Questions About

Navigation Coverage
S o m e c u s t o m e r s m a y a s k q u e s t i o n s r e g a r d i n g a city,
a d d r e s s or POI (point of interest) c o v e r e d by t h e
n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m . It is better to v e r i f y a c o v e r a g e
q u e s t i o n o n a n a c t u a l v e h i c l e t h a n to d i s a p p o i n t y o u r
c u s t o m e r by p r o m i s i n g c o v e r a g e that m a y be
i n c o m p l e t e or m i s s i n g in their a r e a . T h e f o l l o w i n g
s u g g e s t i o n s c a n be u s e d to a n s w e r c o v e r a g e i n q u i r i e s
from your customer.
Is my address covered by the navigation system?

U s i n g a c u r r e n t p r o d u c t i o n v e h i c l e (of t h e s a m e m o d e l ) ,
enter t h e c u s t o m e r ' s a d d r e s s (street first) to s e e if their
a r e a is c o v e r e d . A l w a y s e n t e r t h e s t r e e t first, b e c a u s e
s o m e t i m e s their city m a y be i n c l u d e d in a n e i g h b o r i n g
t o w n s h i p , or u n d e r s o m e larger m e t r o p o l i t a n city n a m e .
If t h e a d d r e s s is s h o w n in a later y e a r v e h i c l e , but not
y o u r c u s t o m e r ' s v e h i c l e , y o u m i g h t w a n t to r e c o m m e n d
that y o u r c u s t o m e r p u r c h a s e a n u p d a t e .
Is my city covered by the navigation system?

F o r g e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s a b o u t w h e t h e r a city is c o v e r e d ,
v i e w the m a p c o v e r a g e link o n the D V D o r d e r site. O n
t h e site, y o u e n t e r a y e a r a n d m o d e l , a n d t h e n click o n
t h e C o v e r a g e link. Y o u t h e n s e l e c t a state or p r o v i n c e ,
a n d t h e cities a r e listed. Of c o u r s e , this d o e s not
g u a r a n t e e that t h e c u s t o m e r ' s r o a d or a d d r e s s is in the
s y s t e m . V e r i f y i n g o n a n a c t u a l p r o d u c t i o n v e h i c l e is
a l w a y s the b e s t g u a r a n t e e that y o u r i n f o r m a t i o n is
accurate.
The gas station on my corner is now a restaurant. Why

is it still incorrect in the navigation system?
F o r P O I - r e l a t e d c u s t o m e r q u e s t i o n s , e x p l a i n that
b u s i n e s s e s a r e c o n s t a n t l y m o v i n g , a n d t h e r e c a n be a
c o n s i d e r a b l e lag in u p d a t i n g t h e m i l l i o n s of P O I s in the
s y s t e m . T h e d a t a b a s e is u p d a t e d a n n u a l l y , a n d the b e s t
w a y to the v e r i f y w h e t h e r the POI is a c c u r a t e is verify t h e
inquiry o n a c u r r e n t p r o d u c t i o n v e h i c l e .
A n s w e r s to t h e s e a n d o t h e r q u e s t i o n s r e g a r d i n g
c o v e r a g e c a n be f o u n d in t h e s e l o c a t i o n s :
How do I find the local address of a business that is part

of a national chain (for example, Starbucks)?
T h e r e a r e t h r e e w a y s to find t h e local a d d r e s s to
businesses:
If y o u k n o w t h e p h o n e n u m b e r of t h e b u s i n e s s , s e l e c t
P h o n e N u m b e r a n d e n t e r t h e 10 digit p h o n e n u m b e r
(area c o d e p l u s s e v e n digit n u m b e r ) .
Select Category, then Restaurant. Enter the keyword
S t a r . T h e resulting list i n c l u d e s all r e s t a u r a n t s that
h a v e t h e letters S t a r a n y w h e r e in t h e n a m e .
Select N a m e and enter Starbucks. For more c o m m o n
b u s i n e s s n a m e s , like M c D o n a l d s , y o u m a y h a v e to
s e a r c h t h r o u g h a list that i n c l u d e s o t h e r b u s i n e s s e s
like M c D o n a l d s W e l d i n g , M c D o n a l d s A u t o m o t i v e , etc.
Precaution on Customer Sneak Previews

Y o u r c u s t o m e r m i g h t r e q u e s t a look (or s n e a k p r e v i e w )
at f e a t u r e s in t h e latest n a v i g a t i o n s o f t w a r e . Y o u s h o u l d
n e v e r p r e v i e w a n a v i g a t i o n D V D in a c u s t o m e r ' s v e h i c l e .
Inserting a n e w e r D V D installs t h e latest s o f t w a r e f r o m
t h e D V D into t h e m e m o r y of t h e c u s t o m e r ' s n a v i g a t i o n
s y s t e m . W h e n t h e original D V D is r e i n s t a l l e d , t h e n e w e r
s o f t w a r e r e m a i n s in m e m o r y a n d is often i n c o m p a t i b l e
w i t h the c u s t o m e r ' s original D V D M a p a n d POI d a t a b a s e ,
or s o f t w a r e .
If y o u r c u s t o m e r w i s h e s to s e e t h e latest n a v i g a t i o n
c o v e r a g e o r s o f t w a r e f e a t u r e s , d e m o n s t r a t e it o n a n
in-stock v e h i c l e that a l r e a d y h a s t h e latest D V D v e r s i o n .
If a n e w e r v e r s i o n is l o a d e d a c c i d e n t a l l y , either by t h e
d e a l e r or t h e c u s t o m e r , t h e o n l y r e m e d y is to e n t e r t h e
navigation diagnostic m o d e ' s Version s c r e e n and do a
f o r c e d d o w n l o a d . C h e c k a n y official H o n d a s e r v i c e
w e b s i t e for m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t w h a t p a t c h e s m a y
n e e d reinstalling.
Why are some features different or missing compared

to my previous Honda vehicle?
Hardware and software continually go through updates
a n d i m p r o v e m e n t s . F e a t u r e s m a y c h a n g e or d i s a p p e a r
o v e r t i m e b a s e d on the navigation s y s t e m development.
In t h e F r e q u e n t l y A s k e d Q u e s t i o n s s e c t i o n of the
navigation s y s t e m manual.
A t t h e o n - l i n e D V D o r d e r site, by clicking o n t h e FAQs
link ( s e e O R D E R I N G A D V D ) .
(cont'd)
23-183
Navigation System
G e n e r a l
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
I n f o r m a t i o n
( c o n t ' d )
5. Select Hard Error (Soft Error is for factory use only).
How to Check Error History

The Error History feature is to record intermittent
navigation issues that occur while the customer is using
the system. Sometimes the customer complaint cannot
be duplicated. The error history may record the
information needed to diagnose the problem. To check
the error history:
NOTE: Soft errors are for factory use only.

Error History
I Return
Hard Error
Soft Error

2. Press and hold the MAP/GUIDE+MENU+CANCEL
buttons for 3 seconds, or connect the SCS service
connector to the navigation service connector located
under the driver's seat
3. W h e n the Select Diagnosis Items menu is displayed,
select Detail Information & Setting.
Select Diagnosis Items
Return
Self- Diagnosis Mode
(Navi will check internal function, connections, etc.

Perform this test with vehicle stopped and engine running.)
Hardware Error History

6. The Hard Error screen displays the f o l l o w i n g
information for each error:
The DTC trouble code for the error.
A brief description of the DCT code.
Detail Information & Setting
(Individual Diagnostic screens to confirm

a specific diagnostic screen.)
The date and time w h e n the error occurred.

NOTE:
To see additional errors, use the interface dial to
select UP or DOWN.
Select Clear to delete the error history. The Save
feature is for factory use only.
4. W h e n the navigation unit has hard codes, the Error

History icon appears y e l l o w w h e n the Self Diagnosis
mode (System links) screen is displayed. When no
hard errors are stored, the icon appears gray. To view
the errors w i t h their DTC codes, select the error
history icon.
System Links
Help
Radio = XM
Display
| Exit Diag [ |
Return
A/C
= Mic
Error
History
Hard Key
Yaw
Sensor ECU Info. DVD
GPS Ant. =
= HFL
Press any icon if you want to see details.
R- C a m e r a
= | Navi ECU
Car Status
Write d o w n the DTCs and error history before

deleting.
7. Use the DTC S y m p t o m Troubeshooting table to
troubleshoot the error.
i Return i
Hard Error
1. [2705] [HFL Diag]
[2007:12:31 -19:15:55 ]
2. [ 2 7 0 7 ] [ M i c D i a g ]
[2007:12:31-19:15:50]
[ 2701 ] [ GPS Diag:Antenna ]
12007:12:31 -19:15:12 ]
Clear
Save
0/0
8. Clear the DTCs.

9. Select Return to exit the error history.
23-184
Software Error History

Software errors are not available. They are for factory
use only.
3. After selecting Clear, then selecting Yes, both Hard

Error history and Soft Error history are cleared at the
same time.
Hard error history clear
How to Clear Error History
Hard Error
1. Do the steps in How to check Error History.
Return I
2. Select Clear in the error menu.

NOTE:
Clear Error History ?
By selecting Clear, all software and hardware errors

stored in history are erased at the same time.
No
Yes
Save is for factory use only.

Write d o w n the DTCs and error history before
deleting.
Uear
bave
j '
"WO
1 ZA II
V~l
Hard error history is displayed

Hard Error
I Return
Soft error history clear (Soft errors are for factory use
only)
1. [27051 [HFL Diag]

[2007:12:31 -19:15:55]
2. [2707 ] [Mic Diag ]
[2007:12:31 -19:15:50]
Return I
Soft Error
[2701][GPSDiag:Antenna ]
12007:12:31 -19:15:12 ]
Clear
Save
0/0
Clear Error History ?
Yes
Ulear
||
baVe
No
j
"WO
ZA ||
NM
Soft error history is displayed (Soft errors are for

factory use only)
Return
Soft Error
1. IAPPLI]
[31000001]
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
(2007:12:31 -19:15:08)
2. [APPLI]
[31000001]
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
(2007:03:01 -10:53:54)
3. [APPLI]
[12004100]
00000001
00000105 ffffff2c 00000000
Clear
Save
4. Press Return to exit.
(2007:12:31 -19:15:12)
o/o
r A T v l
23-185
Navigation System
DTC
Description
Circuit
Failure Detection
1001
FROM system
Info Error
Flash R O M
management
Navigation unit internal

data error
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-244)
L o w or w e a k battery
1101
Media B u s
S e n d Error
Media
condition
monitoring

media error
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-244)
1201
DVD High
Temp
DVD drive
Navigation unit
temperature a b o v e the
upper limit. Failure in
Navigation unit fan
circuit
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-245)
Extremely high
p a s s e n g e r cabin
temperature
1202
DVD L o w
Temp
DVD drive
Navigation unit
temperature below the
lower limit
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-245)
Extremely low
temperature
1301
G P S Antenna
Error
GPS
Antenna
G P S antenna circuit
malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-246)
1302
G P S Receiver
Error
1
GPS
Receiver
G P S A n t e n n a circuit
Malfunction. Navigation
unit internal G P S
receiver malfunction.
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-247)
1303
G P S Receiver
Error
2
GPS
Receiver
Navigaton unit internal

G P S receiver
malfunction.
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-248)
1304
G y r o Error 1
Gyro

gyro malfunction.
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-248)
1305
G y r o Error 2:
ECU
T e m p X X C
Gyro

gyro malfunction.
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-249)
Extremely high or low

temperature
1306
Vehicle S p e e d
Pulse
Vehicle
S p e e d Pulse
V S P circuit malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-249)
C h e c k for F-CAN D T C s
1307
DVD R e a d
Error
DVD
Scratched/Dirty DVD or
navigation unit internal
DVD R O M drive
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-250)
1402
Audio Error 2
CD
Mechanical malfunction
in the audio disc
changer
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-250)
1403
Audio Error 3
Display
Mechanical malfunction
with navigation display
unit
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-251)
1409
Audio Error 9
XM
X M Antenna/Circuit
malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-251)
1501
Aircon Error
Aircon
C o m m u n i c a t i o n error
between cimate control
unit and navigation unit
(open/short)
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-252)
Do this test with the

engine running. Y o u
can set this c o d e if the
ignition switch is in
A C C E S S O R Y (I).
1701
R-Camera
Error
Rearview
Camera
C o m m u n i c a t i o n error
between rearview
c a m e r a and navigation
display unit (open/short)
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-254)
23-186
Page
Also Check
DTC
Description
2601
Display Diag:
Connect
Display
Circuit
G A - N E T B u s circuit
malfunction (open/short)
E C U B u s circuit malfunction
open/short
Failure Detection
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-255)
2602
Display Diag:
ROM
Display
Navigation display unit internal

malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-257)
2603
Display Diag:
RAM
Display
Navigation display unit internal

malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-258)
2605
H/U Diag:
Connect
H/U
G A - N E T B u s circuit malfunction
(open/short)
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-258)
2607
X M Diag
XM
G A - N E T B u s circuit
malfunction (open/short)
X M antenna circuit
malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-259)
2609
V R A M Diag
Navi E C U
VRAM
Navigation unit internal V R A M

malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-261)
L o w or w e a k
battery
2610
D R A M Diag
Navi E C U
DRAM
Navigation unit internal D R A M

malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-261)
L o w or w e a k
battery
2701
G P S Diag:
Antenna
GPS
G P S antenna malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-262)
2702
G P S Diag:
Receiver in
Navi E C U
GPS
G P S antenna malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-262)
2703
Aircon Diag
Aircon
C o m m u n i c a t i o n error between
climate control unit and
navigation unit (open/short)
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-252)
2705
HFL Diag
HFL

internal malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-263)
2706
G y r o Diag:
ECU
T e m p X X C
Gyro

malfunction.
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-263)
2707
Mic Diag
Mic
HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone crcuit malfunction
(open/short)
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-264)
2608
R-Camera
Diag
Rearview
Camera
R e a r v i e w c a m e r a internal
malfunction
DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-254)
Page
Also Check
L o w or weak
battery
C h e c k for
B-CAN D T C s
Do this test
with the
engine
running. Y o u
can set this
code ifthe
ignition
switch is in
ACCESSORY
(I).
Check for
B-CAN D T C s
Extremely high
or low
passenger
cabin
temperature
23-187
Navigation System
Symptom
Also check for
Navigation s y s t e m stays on the G P S

initialization s c r e e n
S y s t e m Initialization (see page

23-179)
N O T E : T o exit this s c r e e n and
enter the diagnostic m o d e , press
and hold the M E N U and INFO
buttons at the s a m e time.
Navigation unit
G P S antenna/cable is d i s c o n n e c t e d ,
d a m a g e d , or defective
T h e w r o n g color DVD is installed
T h e DVD is d a m a g e d or dirty
Harness/fuses/switches
Vehicle position icon constantly leaves

road, m o v e s erratically, or is displayed
v e r y far from actual vehicle position
page 23-268)
S y s t e m a l w a y s c o m e s up in the in-line
diagnostic m o d e
S e e factory Diagnostic s c r e e n
In-Line Diag (see page 23-226)
Navigation s y s t e m d o e s not accept

security c o d e
page 23-282)
W r o n g color DVD
Navigation frequently a s k s for anti-theft

code and/or n e e d s G P S initialization
page 23-287)
G P S icon is white or not s h o w n on the

map screen
page 23-274)
Navigation unit
G P S antenna/cable
P C M ( s p e e d and fuel pulses)
L o s s of voltage or poor ground (G503)

Navigation unit
Navigation unit
Aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s connected to
the s y s t e m
G P S antenna/cable
Navigation unit
G P S antenna/cable
P C M f s p e e d signal)
Navigation unit
Display unit
Vehicle icon w a n d e r s a c r o s s the m a p

w h e n driving (does not follow a
displayed road) or m a p or vehicle ICON
spins
page 23-281)
No picture is displayed
page 23-266)
Picture h a s lines or rolls
page 23-270)
Picture is m i s s i n g a color or tone or is an

odd color
page 23-269)
Navigation unit
the s y s t e m
Display unit
Navigation unit
Display unit
Aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s c o n n e c t e d to
the navigation s y s t e m
Display day/night m o d e d o e s not work or

d o e s not work propely
If y o u u s e the display m o d e
button, the auto day/night
function is disabled until y o u
turn the ignition switch to O N
(ID
page 23-279)
page 23-280)
S y s t e m locks up or freezes constantly
23-188
Display brightness set to High in day

or night m o d e
Display unit
G a u g e control module (CAN)
Navigation unit
Symptom
A l s o check for
Voice guidance cannot be heard, is

broken up, or there is static
page 23-274)
V o l u m e or voice feedback setting (see

o w n e r ' s or navigation s y s t e m manual)
Navigation unit
Audio unit/amplifier
Voice control d o e s not work/respond
page 23-275)
Navigation cannot control H V A C by

voice c o m m a n d
page 23-279)
W r o n g color DVD installed

W r o n g navigation unit (model code)
Navigation cannot control X M radio
page 23-287)
O p e n s or shorts in the G A - N E T bus
Navigation cannot control

audio/disc/rear entertainment
page 23-283)
W r o n g color DVD
O p e n s or shorts in the G A - N E T bus
Interface dial and/or buttons do not work
page 23-272)
Navigation unit
Display unit
Interface dial
T o d a y ' s Destinations button is dim and

not selectable in the Enter destination by
screen (grayed-out)
T h e c u s t o m e r h a s not entered a
group of locations for T o d a y ' s
Destinations. T h i s is normal. T h e
button is only selectable if the
customer is using this function
S e e navigation s y s t e m manual
S o m e set-up and information functions

of the navigation s y s t e m are grayed-out
and do not work
C u s t o m e r did not select O K from

Disclaimer s c r e e n . Refer to
S y s t e m Function Diagram (see
page 23-203)
Previous Destinations button is dim and

not selectable in the Enter destination by
screen (grayed-out)
T h e vehicle m a y be new, or the

c u s t o m e r deleted the destination.
Enter a destination, and allow the
s y s t e m to route to it. After the trip,
the Previous Destinations button
will be selectable
A d d r e s s cannot be found or s y s t e m
gives poor routing
C o m p a r e to a known-good
vehicle with the s a m e software
version
Verify proper operation and
s y s t e m limitations using the
navigation s y s t e m manual
S e e A n s w e r i n g customer
question Navigation coverage
in general troubleshooting
Refer to Database limitation in
the navigation s y s t e m manual
to report database errors
Database limitations (address not in

database)
D a m a g e d or dirty DVD
Rearview c a m e r a image does not c o m e

on or work properly
page 23-284)
Rearview c a m e r a brightness level

setting is too low
Software for the latest up-dates
S c r a t c h e d or d a m a g e d DVD
No backup signal
W r o n g disc installed in navigation unit
Harness
Dirty c a m e r a lens
Navigation unit
Microphone h a r n e s s / s w i t c h e s
(cont'd)
23-189
Navigation System
Symptom
A l s o c h e c k for
T h e m a p will not display the S o u t h e r n

portion of the U . S . or the Northern parts
of C a n a d a
North A m e r i c a n coverage is
different for U S A / C a n a d a
markets. S e e the V e r s i o n
Diagnostic S c r e e n (see page
23-240) for details on coverage
differences
S e e navigation s y s t e m m a n u a l
T h e w r o n g colored DVD or version is
installed
Check the navigation unit model c o d e
(see page 23-240)
Navigation display stays on with ignition

switch in L O C K (0)
page 23-283)
the s y s t e m
DVD read error m e s s a g e s
page 23-278)
Navigation s y s t e m will not go beyond

the disclaimer s c r e e n and d i s p l a y s the
O K button
S e e Interface dial and/or buttons

do not work

S c r a t c h e d or d a m a g e d DVD
Navigation unit
T h e navigation anti-theft code card is lost

or m i s s i n g
S e e anti-theft feature (see page

23-177)
T h e vehicle icon lags behind w h e n the

vehicle turns
S e e self-inertial navigation
limitations (see page 23-177)
the s y s t e m
Characteristic of the s y s t e m . C o m p a r e
to a known-good vehicle.
G P S antenna/cable
Navigation screen is darker than normal

or takes time to brighten w h e n it is cold
S e e L C D unit limitations (see page

23-178)
Characteristic of the s y s t e m . C o m p a r e to
a known-good vehicle.
T h e navigation clock is off by 1 to 3 hours

after replacing the navigation unit
S e e service precautions (see page

23-179)
Perform m a p matching (see page

23-180)
G P S antenna/cable
Check and adjust the clock settings
A n e w navigation DVD is needed
S e e obtaining a navigation DVD

(see page 23-180)
T i m e is not correct (Clock in the radio)
Reset T i m e Adjustment in the

navigation set-up m e n u
T h e w r o n g colored DVD or version is

installed
T h e DVD is scratched or dirty
S e e DVD Handing and Cleaning

(see page 23-181)
Navigation unit
Foreign objects inserted into the
navigation unit
T h e w r o n g DVD w a s installed a n d n o w
the s y s t e m d o e s not function properly
S e e Precaution c u s t o m e r S n e a k
Previews (see page 23-183)
Install the correct version DVD

Check any official Honda service
website for more service information
about the navigation s y s t e m .
A POI cannot be found
S e e How to a n s w e r c u s t o m e r
questions about navigation
coverage (see page 23-183)

Refer to Database limitation in the
navigation s y s t e m m a n u a l to report
database errors
A specific city cannot be found
S e e How to a n s w e r c u s t o m e r
questions about navigation
coverage (see page 23-183)

Refer to Database limitation in the
navigation s y s t e m m a n u a l to report
database errors
A n In Line Diagnosis s c r e e n a p p e a r s
every time vehicle is started
S e e factory diagnostic s c r e e n In
Line Diag (see page 23-222)
T h e A c u r a G l o b e S c r e e n (not the Honda

G l o b e S c r e e n ) a p p e a r s every time the
vehicle is started
S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see
page 23-288)
A l s o s e e the s y m p t o m T h e w r o n g DVD
w a s installed a n d n o w the s y s t e m d o e s
not function properly
C h e c k the navigation unit model code
(see page 23-240)
Navigation unit will not eject or accept

the navigation DVD
S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see
page 23-289)
Foreign objects inserted into the

navigation unit
23-190
Navigation unit
Display unit
Check any official Honda service
website for more service information
about the navigation s y s t e m
D a m a g e d DVD
System Description
Overview
The navigation system is a highly-sophisticated, hybrid locating system that uses satellites and a map database to show
you where you are and to help guide you to a desired destination.
The navigation system receives signals f r o m the global positioning system (GPS), a network of 24 satellites in orbit
around the earth. By receiving signals f r o m several of these satellites, the navigation system can determine the latitude,
longitude, and elevation of the vehicle. In addition, signals f r o m the system's y a w rate sensor and the PCM (vehicle
speed pulse) enable the system to keep track of the vehicle's direction and speed of travel.
This hybrid system has advantages over a system that is either entirely self-contained or one that relies totally on the
GPS. For example, the self-contained portion of the system can keep track of vehicle position even when satellite signals
cannot be received. When the navigation system is o n , the GPS can keep track of the vehicle position even when the
vehicle is transported by ferry.
The navigation system applies all location, direction, and speed information to maps and calculates a route to the
destination entered. As you drive to that destination, the system provides both visual and audio guidance.
This navigation system also has voice recognition that allows voice control of most of the navigation functions. The
Navigation TALK and BACK buttons on the steering wheel activate the voice control. The voice control also allows
control of the audio and climate functions.
The illumination signal (headlights ON) is used by the navigation unit to automatically switch the display between Night
and Day brightness modes. When the instrument panel brightness control is set to full brightness (hold both + and
key at the same time), the navigation system stays in the day mode, even with the headlights on.
The GA-NET II communication bus passes information back and forth between the navigation display unit, the
navigation unit and the RES/audio system. The information passed on this bus is audio and climate control settings
directed by the navigation unit.
The C o m m . Bus connects the HFL and navigation units. This bus supports these functions:
If a POI phone number is available, the navigation control unit sends the phone number (on the Calculate route to
screen) to the HandsFreeLink control unit for dialing.
The navigation system could download the cellular phone book and call phone numbers in the book.
The navigation unit can sense the status of a phone that is paired to the HFL.
(cont'd)
23-191
Navigation System
System Diagram
(With rear entertainment system)
FRONT SPEAKERS
(Navigation voice output)
REARVIEW
CAMERA
REAR CONTROLLER
AND SCREEN
USB ADAPTER
UNIT
STEREO AMPLIFIER
Audio/
Video
GA-NET
RR BUS
GA-NET
bus
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
GA
AUDIO
GA-NET
bus
XM RECEIVER
Noise
detection
HFLNAVIGATION-ANC
MICROPHONE
Voice
recognition
NAVIGATION
SWITCH PANEL
COLOR
SIGNAL
IT
HFL
MUTE
XM ANTENNA
Bluetooth
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT I n APPROVED
BLUETOOTH
ENABLED
CELLPHONE
INTERFACE
DIAL
COMM.
bus
voice
recognition
NAVI
voice
OUT
NAVIGATION UNIT
PC CARD SLOT
(Factory use only)
YAW RATE
SENSOR
UART
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (ILLUMI
cancel signal)
IT
REVERSE
SIGNAL
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCH (Navigation
TALK & Navigation
BACK buttons)
PCM (Vehicle
GPS
ANTENNA
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT ^
- - 4- x ~
J.
.
B-CAN LO
B-CAN HT ~
_
23-192
OTHER
COMMUNICATION
UNITS
Navigation Function
The navigation system is composed of the navigation unit, the PCM (vehicle speed signal), the GPS antenna, the
microphone, the voice control switch, the audio unit, the navigation display unit, and the interface dial.
Function Diagram
MICROPHONE
HANDSFREELINK
C O N T R O L UNIT
Voice
recognition
Detect
cell phone
NAVI V O I C E
CONTROL SWITCH
X M ANTENNA
XM RECEIVER
HFL
SWITCH
AUDIO UNIT
Information
display
Noise
detection
Receive
information
Audio
guidance
1
GPS ANTENNA
Reception of radio
w a v e from satellite
-..
NAVIGATION
D I S P L A Y UNIT
N A V I G A T I O N UNIT
r
GPS RECEIVER
Detection of
vehicle position
G P S tuning
Voice
prompts
P C M (VEHICLE
SPEED PULSE)
Data process
concerning map
and vehicle position
Perception of
vehicle position
Detection of
travel distance
LCD
Y A W RATE SENSOR
Detection of
direction change
Correction of
map matching
Map scroll
c h a n g e of reduced
scale of map
DVD-ROM
Destination
Reverse
signal
' j
Reaview
camera
processing
Interface dial
switch
REARVIEW
CAMERA
GA-Net Bus Configuration

The GA-Net bus passes audio and navigation commands throughout the navigation and RES/audio components. These
c o m m a n d s include navigation audio/XM selections by voice, and X M station and music title names. Because the entire
bus is interconnected between components, an open or short in the GA-Net bus harness may cause any or all of these
functions to become inoperative.
Navigation Unit
Navigation Display Unit
X M Receiver
U S B Adapter Unit
V W V W V V
Audio Unit
Rear Controller and Screen (RES)
(cont'd)
23-193
Navigation System
Vehicle Speed Pulse
The vehicle speed pulse is sent by the PCM. The PCM receives a signal f r o m the countershaft speed sensor, then
processes the signal and transmits it to the speedometer and other systems.
NAVIGATION UNIT
PCM
Sensor power
* AAA
"VW-
DISTANCE
DETECTION
CIRCUIT
Y a w Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor

The y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor (located in the navigation unit) detects the direction change (angular speed) of
the vehicle. The sensor is an oscillation gyro built into the navigation unit.
23-194
Sensor Element Structure

The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block, and the
support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: one to drive the oscillators, one to monitor and maintain the oscillation at
a regular frequency, and t w o to detect angular velocity. The t w o oscillators, which have a 90-degree twist in the center,
are connected at the bottom by the metal block and supported by the support pin. A detection piezoelectric part is
attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of one oscillator, and the
monitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles
The piezoelectric parts have electric/mechanical transfer characteristics. They bend vertically when voltage is applied to
both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectric parts when they are bent by an
external force. The oscillation gyro functions by utilizing this characteristic of the piezoelectric parts and Coriolis force.
(Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the earth's rotation.) In the oscillation gyro, this force moves the
sensor element w h e n angular velocity is applied.
Operation
1 . The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an AC voltage of
6 kHz is applied to the part. The monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is connected to the driving-side
oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric part bends in proportion to the oscillation and outputs voltage (the monitor signal). The
navigation unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left with the oscillators, but no signal
is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right oscillator bending
forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward bend varies according to the
angular velocity of the vehicle.
5. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the y a w rate signal) according to the amount of bend. The amount of
vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Enlarged view of sensor element
Sensor element top view
Oscillation
METAL BLOCK
PART
(cont'd)
23-195
Navigation System
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The global positioning system (GPS) enables the navigation system to determine the current position of the vehicle by
using the signals transmitted f r o m the satellites in orbit around the earth. The satellites transmit the satellite
identification signal, orbit information, transmission time signal, and other information. W h e n the GPS receiver receives
a signal f r o m four or more satellites simultaneously, it calculates the current position of the vehicle based on the
distance to each satellite and the satellite's position in its respective orbit.
Position detection Image with G P S satellite
Precision of G P S
The precision of the GPS varies according to the number of satellites f r o m which signals are received and the view of the
sky. The accuracy is indicated by the color of the GPS icon shown on the display.
GPS
ICON
COLOR
No GPS
icon
NUMBER OF
SATELLITES
None
2 or less
White
GPS icon
Green
GPS icon
4 or more
23-196
CONDITION
Faulty reception
Impossible to detect
vehicle position
Vehicle position detectable
in 2 dimensions
Vehicle position detectable
in 3 dimensions (elevation
displayed)
DESCRIPTION
The GPS can't be utilized due to a faulty GPS receiver,

open in the wire, or other fault or interference.
GPS function is normal. The satellite signals received by
the GPS are too few to detect the vehicle position.
Only the longitude and latitude of the vehicle position can
be detected. (Less precise than detection in three
dimensions)
The longitude, latitude and the altitude of the vehicle
position can be detected. (More precise than detection in
t w o dimensions)
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna amplifies and transmits the signals received f r o m the satellites to the GPS receiver.
GPS Receiver and Clock
The GPS receiver is built into the navigation unit. It calculates the vehicle position by receiving the signal f r o m the GPS
antenna. The current t i m e , vehicle position and signal reception condition is transmitted f r o m the GPS receiver to the
navigation control unit to adjust vehicle position.
Navigation Unit
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position and guides you to the destination. The unit performs map matching
correction, GPS correction, and distance tuning. It also controls the menu functions and the DVD-ROM drive, and
interprets voice commands. With control of all these items, the navigation unit makes the navigation picture signal, then
it transmits the signal to the display panel control unit and audio driving instructions to the audio unit.
Calculation of Vehicle Position
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position (the driving direction and the current position) by receiving the
directional change signals f r o m the y a w rate sensor and the travel distance signals f r o m vehicle speed pulse (VSP)
signal of the PCM.
M a p Matching Tuning
The map matching occurs w h e n you drive the vehicle along a mapped road until the road name appears of the bottom
of the screen. The map data transmitted f r o m the DVD-ROM is checked against the vehicle position data, and the vehicle
position is indicated on the nearest road. Map matching tuning does not occur w h e n the vehicle travels on a road not
shown on the map, or w h e n the vehicle position is far away f r o m a road on the map.
GPS Tuning
The GPS tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position as the GPS's vehicle position. The navigation unit
compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. If there is large difference between the
t w o , the indicated vehicle position is adjusted to the GPS vehicle position.
Distance Tuning
The distance tuning reduces the difference between the travel distance signal f r o m the VSP and the distance data on the
map. The navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data w i t h the GPS vehicle position data. The
navigation unit then decreases the tuning value w h e n the vehicle position is always ahead of the GPS vehicle position,
and it increases the tuning value w h e n the vehicle position is always behind the GPS vehicle position.
Route Guidance
The navigation unit can calculate different routes to a selected destination. You have five options:
Direct Route-Calculate a route that is the most direct.
Easy Route-Calculate a route that minimizes the number of turns needed.
Minimize Freeways-Calculate a route that avoids freeway travel. If that is not possible, keep the amount of freeway
travel to a m i n i m u m .
Minimize Toll Roads-Calculate a route that avoids or minimizes travel on toll roads.
Maximize Freeways-Calculate a route that uses freeways as much as possible.
A u d i o Guidance
The navigation unit transmits audio driving instructions before entering an intersection or passing a junction. The audio
instructions come through the audio unit to the center speaker.
NOTE: The front speakers are muted whenever the navigation system is giving guidance commands, and all of the
speakers are muted w h e n the voice control system is being used.
(cont'd)
23-197
Navigation System
Muting Signal Logic
The audio muting logic is orchestrated by the audio unit. The audio unit determines w h a t audio source has priority t o
use the speakers.
The priority of the audio sources is as follows:
HandsFreeLink has the highest priority, followed by, navigation, and finally the radio/CD-DVD player. The priority is
passed by HandsFreeLink t o the audio unit by dedicated mute wires. The navigation mute signal is passed to the stereo
amplifier.
The navigation unit temporarily disables the voice control buttons, but allows guidance to be heard. In addition, the
audio unit suppresses the output f r o m the audio unit, X M receiver, disc player, or other audio accessories.
When the navigation system sends out a voice route guidance c o m m a n d , the door speakers are muted, and the
navigation voice is heard in the center speaker.
W h e n the navigation voice control system is in use, all of the speakers are m u t e d , and the navigation voice prompts are
heard f r o m the center speaker.
Solar Angle
The climate control unit uses the sun's angle, along with the sunlight sensor, to control the driver/passenger A/C air
flow.
Off Road Tracking (bread-crumbs)
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a mapped (digitized) road.
Clock and Time Zone
The clock set up allows you to set daylight savings t i m e , auto t i m e zone and t i m e adjustment. The clock is set by the
navigation system.
DVD-ROM
The DVD includes:
Map Database
Point of interest (POI) Database
Navigation software
23-198
Control Interface
NAVIGATION/VOICE
CONTROL TALK BUTTON
HFL TALK BUTTON
AUDIO UNIT
NAVIGATION
SWITCH PANEL
HFL BACK BUTTON

NAVIGATION/VOICE
CONTROL BACK BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
Display Unit
The display unit uses a liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is a 8-inch-diagonal, thin film transistor (TFT), strip type w i t h
336,960 picture elements. The color f i l m and fluorescent light are laid out on the back of the liquid crystal f i l m .
A u d i o Unit
The audio unit receives the voice guidance instructions f r o m the navigation unit, and transmits the instructions through
the center speaker even w h e n the audio system is in use.
NOTE: If the navigation v o l u m e and/or voice feedback is turned OFF, this feature is disabled.
Navigation TALK B u t t o n
Activates the voice control system in the navigation unit to accept voice c o m m a n d s .
Navigation BACK B u t t o n
Returns the display to the previous screen (similar function as the CANCEL button).
(cont'd)
23-199
Navigation System
Navigation Switch Panel
The navigation hard buttons and interface dial are used to input commands.
The display mode button switches the display between Day mode, Night mode, and off.
NOTE: When y o u activate this button, the navigation auto d i m m i n g is turned off until you cycle the ignition switch.
The audio button displays the audio system information.
MENU BUTTON
C A N C E L BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
DISPLAY MODE BUTTON (Day/Night)
Microphone (HFL-navigation-ANC)
Receives voice c o m m a n d s and transmits t h e m to the navigation unit or HandsFreeLink control unit. The microphone
unit consist of t w o microphones. One microphone is combined w i t h the ANC front microphone. The microphones
detects each of the driver's voice and passenger's voice separately.
0-
AMPLIFIER
ADC
DSP
DAC
MICROPHONES
AMPLIFIER
AUDIO UNIT
(ANC CIRCUIT)
23-200
NAVIGATION UNIT
Glossary
The following is a glossary of terms pertaining to the Voice Recognition Navigation System.
Item
Active noise
cancellation
(ANC)
Address
Book
B-CAN
Breadcrumbs
(White dots)
CAN
CPU
CSS
Database
DBW
DCA
DTC
Dead
reckoning
Digitized
road
Disclaimer
screen
DVD or
DVD-ROM
ECM
FAQ
F-CAN
GA-NET
GPS
HDS
HFL
HIP
(AcuraLink)
H/U
Initialization
Interface Dial
Jog Dial
Definition
The active noise cancellation system cancels some of the vehicle noise. This occurs in the
1,500-2,400 rpm range. Microphones detect the low frequency sound, and the system outputs a
canceling sound f r o m the audio speaker.
The HFL system can import a copy of the phone book f r o m and approved HFL compatible phone and
display the imported phone book on the navigation screen as the address book. See the Owner's
Manual for more information.
Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a mapped
(digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off in Setup screen 1.
Controller Area Network. This communication network allows processors in the vehicle to
send/receive information. The fuel pulses used by the MID trip computer are received f r o m the PCM
using the F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) bus.
Central Processing Unit. The main device within the navigation unit that coordinates the rest of the
electronic functions.
Countershaft (Output) Speed Sensor. This sensor reads the output shaft speed at the transmission
and provides a speed pulse to the PCM.
This consists of the Map data, and the POI (Points Of Interest) data stored on the DVD.
Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the throttle without the need of a mechanical linkage.
Detailed Coverage Area. Main metropolitan areas in the Lower 48 states, and Canada are mapped to
this level. See the navigation system manual for a list of these areas.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the PGM Tester, or HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot the cause
of these codes.
The use of the speed signal, and y a w rate sensor to position the vehicle on the map even when tall
buildings, or driving in a tunnel obscures the GPS signal
A road that appears on the navigation screen. The road name appears at the bottom of the navigation
screen. Ifthe user drives off road, the navigation system displays Not on a digitized road, and after 1/2
mile, the bread-crumbs appear.
Screen containing cautionary information. It is meant to be read carefully, and acknowledged by the
customer when using the navigation system.
Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program and database resides on this disk. See the Navigation
Owner's Manual for information on h o w to order a replacement or an update DVD.
Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as the ECM.
Frequently Asked Questions. See the navigation system manual for a list of the customer FAQs, and
troubleshooting information.
Fast CAN Bus (see CAN)
The GA-NET allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and navigation components in a
vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-NET, components or the entire audio and navigation system
may appear inoperative.
Global Positioning System. A network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. The navigation
system can simultaneously receive signals f r o m up to 12 satellites to accurately position the vehicle
on the map.
Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC used for diagnosing vehicle problems. This device
can be used to obtain DTC codes for diagnosis of the navigation system and CAN related problems.
HandsFreeLink uses Bluetooth technology as a wireless link between it and an approved Bluetooth
compatible cell phone. See the vehicle Owner's manual or Quick Start Guide for more information.
Honda Information Platform (see AcuraLink)
Head Unit. The audio unit in the dash.
This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the GPS satellite orbital information whenever the
navigation system power has been disconnected. This can take f r o m 10 to 45 minutes.
This control device consists of a rotating knob and the buttons surrounding it. This device allows
control of the navigation, audio, and climate functions displayed on the screen.
See interface dial.
(cont'd)
23-201
Navigation System
Item
LCD
Map
matching
Mic
MID
MW
Navi
Off-road
tracking
Off route
Outlying
areas
Paired
PC Card Slot
PCM
PCMCIA
PIN
POI
Polygon
QWERTY
SCS
connector
Security
code
Tuning
Unverified
streets
USB
Verified
streets
VP
VR
VSP
XM
Yaw sensor
23-202
Definition
Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
The received GPS information allows the navigation system to position the vehicle on the map. Map
matching has occurred if the map screen displays the current street name in the bottom-shaded area.
Abbreviation for the microphone used for receiving voice commands. It is located near the map light
in the ceiling. The ANC circuit may also use it to check its tuning.
Multi-Information Display
Maneuver W i n d o w . While on-route to a destination, this w i n d o w displays information about the next
maneuver.
Abbreviation for the Navigation System.
See bread-crumbs.
This occurs w h e n the user leaves mapped roads. Off road tracking dots (bread-crumbs) are displayed
if the option is enabled in the setup menu. The user can use them to return to a mapped road. The
bottom of the navigation screen displays Not on a digitized road.
These are rural areas that typically have only their main roads mapped. All other roads are shown in
light b r o w n for reference only, since they have not been verified.
Linking your cell phone to the HFL.
The PC Card (PCMCIA, type II) slot is for factory use only. Make sure that the sliding door is closed at
all times, if opened, an error message is displayed on the screen.
Powertrain Control Module. This unit supplies the navigation system speed signal, Also refered to as
PCM.
A computer industry defined term referring to the PC Card slot standard.
Personal Identification Number, a random 4 digit number created by the customer to protect
personal information.
Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools, etc. found under the places option on the main
menu.
Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks, schools, etc. See the Navigation System Manual
Driving to Your Destination for a list of the assigned colors.
Keyboard layout resembling the typewriter keys. The keyboard layout can be changed to an
alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
The service check signal 2-pin connector used to put the navigation system into the diagnostic mode.
Code needed to activate the navigation system. You can get the security code f r o m the iN by entering
the navigation unit serial number. You can find the serial number on the diagnostic screens (unit
check, Navi ECU), or on the underside of the navigation unit.
A continual update of internal navigation system scaling factors. See the individual sensor tuning
discussions under either System Description, or System Diagnosis Mode (see page 23-222) in this
manual.
These streets have not been verified for turn restrictions, one-way, etc. They appear light brown on
the map. You can enter address destinations in these areas, but depending on your Unverified
Routing choice in setup, voice guidance may end at the last verified street closest to your destination.
Universal Serial Bus. the USB is used for playing the compressed audio files (MP3, W M A , and AAC)
on the external device through the audio unit.
These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan coverage areas, and all other inter-town
connection roads. These roads are shown in black or red on the map. (interstates are red)
Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular icon shows the vehicle position on the map.
Voice Recognition. This allows voice control of many of the navigation functions. The hardware
consists of the microphone, voice control switch (TALK/BACK buttons), and the center speaker. See
the overview for more information.
Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming f r o m the PCM (via the CSS) is used to update the
Vehicle position on the map. These pulses do not indicate direction (forward or backward). W h e n in
reverse, the navigation receives a signal and directs the VP to move backwards on the map.
This device receives information f r o m the X M satellites and passes X M audio information to the
audio unit. In addition, traffic information is sent to the navigation unit.
This device is located in the navigation system control unit and senses the side-to-side twisting force
generated w h e n the vehicle turns. See a detailed description of how this sensor works in system
description.
Diagnostic System Diagram

This diagram below shows all of the navigation diagnostic features available for system troubleshooting. The diagram
starts at the center, and works outward in layers.
Access to the diagnostic features begins by starting the vehicle. This is necessary so the system can check the other
systems connected by various busses. After starting the vehicle you can enter the diagnostic mode either by pressing
and holding MENU MAP/GUIDE CANCEL, or by connecting the 2-PIN SCS service connector.
The main menu screen allows 2 checking modes.
Automatic; The automatic diagnostic check starts w h e n you select SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE. The system runs for
several seconds, and reports any issues w i t h Red icons. Rotate the interface dial and select the icon you wish obtain
the problem details.
Manual; The manual diagnostic check is selected f r o m the main menu by selecting DETAIL INFORMATION A N D
SETTING. The traditional diagnostic menu is displayed. This allows you to obtain additional details as instructed in
the troubleshooting procedures.
NOTE: Do not clear or change settings unless specified by either the Service Manual troubleshooting procedures or by
the factory. Otherwise, y o u may accidentally delete customer information, or remove the latest flash software version
installed by the factory.
(cont'd)
23-203
Navigation System
Navigation unit connectors
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR D (5P)
COOLING FAN
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR E (2P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR B (32P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3 4 5
17 18 19 20 21
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR A (8P)
iol/
25 26
23
/
AA
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR B (32P)
3 4 5
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR D (5P)
7 8
12 13 14 15 16
A/
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR C(16P)
I I
E2
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR E (2P)
All connectors s h o w wire side of the female terminals
23-204
4
5 6 7 8
2
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR A (8P)
Navigation display unit connector

28P CONNECTOR
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
- __[
2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 / 26 27 28
Interface dial 5P connector
INTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
(cont'd)
23-205
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (8P)
2 1n
1
4
5 6 7 8
p '
Navigation Unit Connector A (8P)

Terminal
Number
1
Wire
Color
WHT
Terminal
Name
+B (Battery
power
source)
PUR
ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for

accessories
BLK
GND
(Ground)
ORN
BACK LT
(Back light or
reverse
signal)
BLU
VSP (Vehicle
speed pulse)
Ground for
navigation unit
(G503)
Reverse signal
of select lever
f r o m MICU
(Multiplex
Integrated
Control Unit)
Vehicle speed
pulse signal
f r o m PCM
GRY
DIAG+
(Diagnostic
positive)
YEL
DIAG
(Diagnostic
negative)
23-206
Description
Continuous
power source
Service check
signal for
navigation
system
Ground for
service check
signal
Voltage
(about)
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage at
ACCESSORY
(I)
OV
Symptom
If open: Display picture goes out (display
back light still on).
NOTE: System reboots to enter code
screen.
If short to g r o u n d : Blows fuse No. 23
(10 A) in theunder-hood fuse/relay box.
If open: Display picture goes out (display
back light still on).
If short t o g r o u n d : Blows fuse No. 35
(10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
If open: No effect on system.
If short to g r o u n d : No effect on system.
In reverse,
battery
voltage:
Otherwise 0
V
If open: Navigation never sees reverse.

Diagnostic screen Car Status, Back=0.
If short to g r o u n d : Check the backup light
circuit.
0-5 V pulses
average 2.5 V
(Depending
on bus
traffic)
If open: No vehicle speed pulses.

Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP
Navi=0.
If short to g r o u n d : No vehicle speed
pulses.
Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP
Navi=0.
If open: No effect on system.
If short to g r o u n d : System goes into
diagnostic m o d e at ignition switch
ACCESSORY (I) and ON (II).
If open: The system w i l l not go into
diagnostic m o d e w h e n using the SCS
service check connector.
If short t o g r o u n d : No effect on system.
5-6 V
OV
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (32P)
T
1
i2
3 4 5
1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
9 10
23
25 26
Navigation Unit Connector B (32P)

Terminal
Number
1
Wire
Color
WHT
RED
G-SIG (Green
signal)
Green color
signal
BRN*
SIG SH (color
signal shield)
LTBLU
PNK
Shield for
terminals No. 1,
2,17,18,19
Communication
signal for
climate control
unit
Parking light on
signal
AC-SI (Air
conditioner
serial in)
ILL+
(lllumination
positive)
Description
Red color signal
Voltage
(about)
0.7 V AC
average in
RGB color
diagnostic
mode
0.7 V AC
average in
RGB color
diagnostic
mode
OV
Symptom
If open: Red color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
If short to g r o u n d : Red color missing (see
RGB Color diagnostic).
If open: Green color missing (see RGB
Color diagnostic).
If short to g r o u n d : Green color missing
(see RGB Color diagnostic).
If open: No change to display.
If short to ground: No change to display.
HVAC will not respond to navigation
commands.
Lights on:
battery
voltage,
Lights o f f : 0 V
If open:When brightness = A u t o , night

mode for the display is inoperative w h e n
lights on.
If short to ground: Auto, night m o d e for
the display is inoperative w h e n lights o n .
OV
GA-NET ECU Shield for
BUSSH
display bus
(Display bus
terminals No. 10,
shield)
26
If open: No radio muting for navigation.
BLK
10
GA-NET ECU GA-NET display
0-5 V pulses
BUS+
bus+
average 2.5 V If short to ground: No radio muting for
navigation, USB, and X M radio.
(Display bus
(depends on
positive)
bus traffic)
* : T h e shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
9
BRN*
Terminal
Name
R-SIG (Red
signal)
(cont'd)
23-207
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Connector B (32P)
Terminal
Number
17
Wire
Color
YEL
Terminal
Name
B-SIG (Blue
signal)
18
GRN
C-SIG
(Composite
signal)
19
BLK
20
ORN
21
BLU
23
WHT
SIG GND
(Color signal
ground)
AC-SO
(Air
conditioner
serial out)
AC-CLK
(Air
conditioner
clock)
JOG
(Interface dial
Jog)
Description
Blue color signal
Composite video
(vertical/horizontal)
Synchronizing
signal
Ground for color
signal
Voltage
(about)
0.2 V A C
average in
RGB color
diagnosticmode
0.2 V AC
average in
RGB color
diagnosticmode
OV
If open: Blue color missing (see RGB

Color diagnostic).
If short to g r o u n d : Blue color missing
If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
still visible.
If short to g r o u n d : Picture rolls
horizontally, colors still visible.
If short to g r o u n d : No change to display.
commands.
Communication
signal for
climate control
unit
Check signal for
climate control
unit
Interface dial
operation signal
Symptom

commands.
0-5 V pulses
If open: You cannot operate navigation

system
If short to g r o u n d : You cannot operate
navigation system
JOG SH
Shield for
(Interface dial interface dial
J o g shield)
signal
If open: No radio m u t i n g for navigation.
0-5 V pulses
GA-NET ECU GA-NET display
WHT
26
average 2.5 V If short to g r o u n d : Radio muting for
BUSbus(depends on
navigation OK.
(Display bus
bus traffic)
negative)
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the w i r e listed on the schematic.
25
23-208
BRN*
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (16P)
7V AAA/
12
7|8|
13 14 15 16
Navigation U n i t Connector C (16P)

Terminal
Name
RG L+
(Route
guidance
voice left
positive)
Description
Terminal
Number
7
Wire
Color
YEL
YEL
MICSIG+
(HFLmic
signal
positive)
12
PUR
STRG SW
(Navigation
voice control
switches)
Steering switch
output
13
BLU*
Shield for
terminals No. 7,
14
14
BRN
RG SH
(Route
guidance
shield)
RG GND
(Route
guidance
ground)
Left audio signal

of voice
guidance, and
Voice
Recognition (VR)
prompts
Microphone
output signal
positive
Ground for voice

guidance, and
Voice
Recognition (VR)
prompts
Shield for
terminals No. 8,
16
Ground for
microphone
signal
Voltage
(about)
Audio signal
0.004-0.04 V
(AC)
4-5 V
(navigation
TALK button
pressed)
4-5 V
(navigation
TALK button
pressed)
2.5-3 V
(navigation
BACK button
pressed)
OV
OV
Symptom
If open: If voice activated, radio speakers
buzz; if voice off, no effect.
If short to ground: If voice activated,
radio speakers buzz; if voice off, no
effect.
If open: microphone signal s h o w n as red
in diagnostic screens: System Links and
Functional Setup Mic Level.
If short to ground: microphone signal
shown as red in diagnostic screens:
System Links and Functional Setup Mic
Level.
If open: Steering wheel navigation TALK
and navigation BACK buttons do not
work.
If short to ground: Steering wheel
navigation TALK, and navigation BACK
buttons do not work.
If open: No effect on voice output.

If short to ground: No effect on voice
output.
output.

output.
If open: microphone signal s h o w n as red
16
BRN
OV
indiagnostics: System Links and
Functional Setup MicLevel.
recognition.
15
GRY*
MIC SIG SH
(HFL mic
signal shield)
MICSIG(HFLmic
signal
negative)
OV
(cont'd)
23-209
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector D (5P)
12
Navigation Unit Connector D (5P)

Terminal
Number
1
Wire
Color
RED
Terminal Name
Description
HFL C 0 M M 3 (HFL
communication 3)
Communication
signal for HFL
WHT
HFL C 0 M M 4 (HFL
communication 4)
Communication
signal for HFL
BLK
H F L C 0 M M 1 (HFL
communication 1)
Communication
signal for HFL
GRN
HFL C 0 M M 2 (HFL
communication 2)
Communication
signal for HFL
Voltage
(about)
Symptom
Solid red HFL icon in Navi
System Link navigation cannot
send POI phone number to the
HFL unit to place a call (green
phone icon is grayed out)
Solid red HFL icon in Navi
System Link navigation cannot
send POI phone number to the
HFL unit to place a call (green
phone icon is grayed out)
HFL icon in Navi System Link
changes between red and green
navigation cannot send POI
phone number to the HFL unit to
place a call (green phone icon is
grayed out)
HFL icon in Navi System Link
changes between red and green
navigation cannot send POI
phone number to the HFL unit to
place a call (green phone icon is
grayed out)
HFL C O M M SH
Shield for N o . 1 , 2,
(Shield HFL)
3 , 4 terminals
5
23-210
BLU*
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector E (2P)
ii
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Navigation unit connector E (2P)
Terminal
Name
GPS SIG
GPSSHGND
Terminal
Number
Wire
Color
Description
Voltage
(about)
GPS signal
5 V
Shield for GPS

signal
0 V
Symptom
If open: GPS icon on screen is white,
system links screen A N T shows NG.
If short to body ground: Same as open.
If open: GPS icon on screen is white,
system links screen A N T shows NG.
If short to body g r o u n d : No effect on
system.
(cont'd)
23-211
Navigation System
Navigation Display Unit Inputs and Outputs for 28P Connector
8 9 10 11 12 1 3 1 /
1 2 3 4 5 6
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 / 1 2 6 27 28
Navigation Display Unit 28P Connector
Wire
Color
WHT
Terminal
Name
+B (Battery
power
source)
PUR
ACC
(Accessory)
Power source for

accessory
BLK
Data bus+
GA-Net
BRN*
BLK
Shield for
terminals No. 3,
17
Data bus+
GA-Net
RED
GA-NET
BUS+
(GA-NET bus
positive)
GA-NET BUS
SH (GA-NET
bus shield)
GA-NET
ECUBUS+
(Display bus
positive)
SCTY1
(Security)
WHT
R-SIG
(Red signal)
Green color
signal
RED
G-SIG
(Green
signal)
Red color signal
Terminal
Number
Description
Continuous
power source
Security signal
f r o m MICU
Voltage
(about)
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage at
ACCESSORY
(I)
0-5 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on
bus traffic
OV
0-5 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on
bus traffic
0V
0.7 V A C in
RGB color
diagnostic
mode
0.7 V A C in
RGB color
diagnostic
mode
OV
Symptom
If open: Screen completely off (no
backlight visible).
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 23
(10 A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
If open: Display and buttons do not work.
If open: No radio muting for navigation,
if short to g r o u n d : No radio muting for
If short to ground: No radio muting for
If open: The security system sets, but
does not trip w h e n screen is removed.
If short to ground: The security system
sets, but does not trip w h e n screen is
removed.
Colordiagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see
RGB Colordiagnostic).
If open: Green color missing (see RGB
Colordiagnostic).
If short to g r o u n d : Green color missing
Ground for
displayunit
(G403)
*:The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
10
23-212
BLK
GND
(Ground)
Navigation Display Unit 2 8 P Connector

Terminal
Number
11
Wire
Color
GRY*
Terminal
Name
CAMERA SH
(Shield
camera)
12
GRN
13
BLU
CAMERA
GND
(Ground
camera)
CAMERA V
(Video
camera)
15
PNK
16
Description
Shield for
terminals No. 12,
13, 26, 27, 28
Voltage
(about)
0V
Ground for
camera signal
OV
Video signal
f r o m rearview
camera
0.3 V
ILL+
(Illumination
positive)
Parking light on
signal fromdash
and console
lights
Battery
voltage if
lights o n :
otherwise 0 V
ORN
BACK LT(Back light or

reverse
signal)
In reverse,
battery
voltage:
Otherwise
OV
17
WHT
18
BRN*
19
WHT
GA-NET
BUS(GA-NET bus
negative)
GA-NET ECU
BUSSH
(Display bus
shield)
GA-NET ECU
BUS(ECU bus
negative)
SCTY2
(Security)
Reverse signal
of select lever
f r o m MICU
(Multiplex
Integrated
Control Unit)
GA-NET data
bus-
0-5V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on
bus traffic
OV
If open: No change to rearview camera

image.
If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
image.
If short to g r o u n d : No change to rearview
camera image.
If open: W h e n put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight
still operation)
If short to ground: W h e n put into reverse,
the navigation screen goes black
(backlight still operative).
If open: W h e n brightness=Auto, night
mode for the display is inoperative w h e n
lights on.
If short to ground: brightness=Auto,
night mode for the display is inoperative
w h e n lights on.
If open: Navigation never sees reverse.
Diagnostic screen Car Status, Back=0.
If short to ground: Backup camera does
not come on.

If short to ground: Radio muting for
navigation is OK.
Color diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see
RGB Color diagnostic).
If short to ground: No radio muting for
If open: The security system sets, but

does not trip w h e n screen is removed.
If short to ground: The security system
sets, but does not trip w h e n screen is
removed.
20
PNK
Shield for
display bus
terminals No. 5,
19
GA-NET data
bus-
0-5 V pulses
average 2.5 V
depends on
bus traffic
OV
Symptom
Security signal
(cont'd)
23-213
Navigation System
Navigation Display Unit 28P Connector
Terminal
Number
21
Wire
Color
BLK
Terminal
Name
SIG GND
(Ground
signal)
B-SIG
(Blue signal)
22
YEL
23
GRN
C-SIG
(Composite
signal)
24
BRN*
SIG SH
(RGB/C
signal
Shield)
VCC
(VCC supply)
Description
Voltage
(about)
Symptom
Ground for color

signal
OV

Blue color signal
0-1 V A C
Composite video
(vertical/horizontal)
synchronizing
signal
Shield for
terminals No. 8,
9 , 2 1 , 2 2 , 23
0.3V AC
If open: Blue color missing (see RGB

Color diagnostic).
If short to g r o u n d : Blue color missing
If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
still visible.
If short to g r o u n d : Picture rolls
horizontally, colors still visible.
OV
If open: W h e n put into reverse, the

still operation).
If short to g r o u n d : W h e n put into reverse,
OV
Ground for
RC GND
RED
27
image.
rearview camera
(Ground
If short to g r o u n d : No change t o rearview
signal
camera)
camera image.
OV
CAMERA
Control signal
YEL
28
image.
for rearview
ADAPT
If short to g r o u n d : No change t o rearview
camera
(Adaptive
camera image.
camera)
26
23-214
WHT
Power source for

rearview camera
8V

Interface Dial Inputs and Outputs for 5P connector
->
Interface Dial 5P Connector

Terminal
Number
Wire
Color
WHT
Terminal
Name
JOG
BRN*
JOG SH
(Jog shield)
GND
(Ground)
Interface dial
operation signal
Shield for
terminal No.1
Ground for
interface dial
(G403)
Voltage
(about)
0-5 V pulses
Symptom
If open: You can not operate navigation
system.
If short to g r o u n d : You can not operate
navigation system.
OV

system.
If short to ground: You can not operate
navigation system.
ACC
Battery
4
PUR
Power source for
system.
(Accessory)
interface dial
voltage at
ACCESSORY
(I)
3
BLK
Description
(cont'd)
23-215
Navigation System
Rearview Camera Inputs and Outputs for 6P Connector
n_
Terminal
Number
1
Wire
Color
YEL
Terminal
Name
CAMERA
ADAPT
(Adaptive
camera)
CAMERA SH
(Camera
shield)
CAMERA V
(Video
camera)
Description
Voltage
(about)
OV
Symptom

image.
camera image.
OV
If open: No rearview camera image.
Shield for
GRY*
2
terminals N o . 1 ,
camera image.
3 , 4 , 5,6
If open: No rearview camera image.
0.3 V
Video signal for
BLK
3
If short to ground:When put into reverse,
rearview camera
navigation screen goes black (display
backlight still operative).
OV
Ground for
CAMERA
4
GRN
image.
camera signal
GND
(Ground
camera image.
camera)
OV
Ground for
GND
RED
5
image.
rearview camera
(Ground
camera)
camera image.
If open: When put into reverse, the
8V
Power source for
WHT
VCC
6
rearview camera
(VCC supply)
still operation).
If short to g r o u n d : W h e n put into reverse,
23-216
Control signal
for rearview
camera
23-217
Navigation System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
No. 1
(120 A)
<^-Q-|
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 23
BAT
(10 A)
No. 2 (IG)
A C C HOT in A C C
(50 A)
(I) and ON (II)
No. 2 (OP)
ACC CUT RELAY
(80 A)
V
NAVIGATION
No. 17
DISPLAY
(20 A)
UNIT
No. 35
tv.
PCM
foKt
|^
umxi
^ JU_
BLU/
f \
TRANSMISSION
" >
(10A)
RANGE SWITCH
(
No.31
PCM
(30 A)
V S S OUT
E22
PUR
|Q4
E15
UNDER-DASH F U S E /
RELAY BOX
RED
ORN
HFLNAVIGATIONANC
AUDIO
UNIT
DIOUNIT
STEREO
HFL-
AMPLIFIER
MICROPHONE
AUDIO UNIT
ORN
NAVIGATION
INTERFACE DIAL
NAVIGATION-
NAVIGATION
ANC MICROPHONE
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY
UNIT
BACK
LTNAVIGATION UNIT
AUDIO
UNIT
NAVIGATION
SERVICE CHECK
CONNECTOR
AUDIO
REMOTE
6970
10 kO
>
ZZL
SWITCH
2.2Q
SWT
ICH
LIGHT
G503
23-218
BACK
TALK

schematic.
: CAN line
: GA-NET
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE
HFL
+B
ACC
7
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
(ILLUMI cancel)
I
I
B-CAN
H
GPS
ANTENNA
GPS
SIG
PUR
JL
No. 17 (20 A)
FUSE (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
I A36
GND" ]
| 1
AC
CLK
AC
SO
MUTE
BLU/ GRN
i i fj
No. 35 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
Y :L
BLU/
GRN
G701
('09 model)
LT BLU*
14
MIC+
12
MIC-
HFL
MUTE
MICSH

NAVI
COMM1
AC
SI
BIO
MIC-
BLK
B-CAN
L
B9
MIC+
GPS
SH
GND
W HT
I
I
I A35
| 6
NAVI
COMM2
NAVI
COMM3
NAVI
COMM4
NAVI
COMMSH
MIC
SIG+
MIC
SIG-
B2
BLU*
J
GPS ANTENNA
LEAD
BLK
GRN
RED
r-4-.
WHT
BLU*
D2
GPS
SIG
AC
CLK
GPS
SH
GND
AC
SO
HFL
COMM1
AC
SI
HFL
COMM2
HFL
COMM3
D5
HFL
COMM SH
HFL
COMM4
MIC
SIG+
MIC
SIG-
MIC
SIG SH
NAVIGATION UNIT
JOGSH
| B25
No. 35 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
No. 14(7.5 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
No. 35 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
B5
PNK
VI
LTBLU
BRN*
|
ORN
BRN*
PUR
U
ACC
NAVIGATION
SWITCH PANEL
JOG
JOG SH
NAVI
ILL+
Ie
PUR
I^
WHT
LL
BACK
LTNAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
INTERFACE DIAL
RED
No. 23 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
GND
BLK
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
G403
(cont'd)
23-219
Navigation System

No. 17 (20 A)
F U S E (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
No. 35 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
GA-NET
RR BUS
GA-NET
RR B U S
. 3
<r j
* 14
'
23-220
GA-NET
RR B U S
H
SCTY3
| 13
BRN*
-I
10
SCTY2
| 22
RED

schematic.
HI
: With rear entertainment system
IT]
: Without rear entertainment system
- - : GA-NET
: Shielding
FL
PRE+
SWD
+B
FL
PRE-
+B
MAIN
+B
SUB
FL
SP+
FL
SP-
FL
TW+
FL
TW-
GND
MAIN
I A24
GND
SUB
| A,
BLK
PUR
WHT/
YEL
A23
A22
FL
PRE+
A17
FL
PRE-
SWD
+B
_
1
1
i
i
|
REAR
CONTROLLER
and S C R E E N
AUDIOUNIT
LU
|
'
1
SCTY2
A4
No. 31 (30 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
LEFT FRONT
TWEETER
DRIVER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
1
[
G402
!
,
1-
RED
\ \
, i
Pr<
IK
1 L.J
REARVIEW CAMERA
VCC
GND
CAMERA
GND
CAMERA
V
CAMERA
ADAPT
CAMERA
SH
GRY*
BLU
ha
GND
CAMERA
GND
CAMERA CAMERA
V
ADAPT
CAMERA
SH
23-221
Navigation System
System Diagnostic Mode
Start-up procedure and Diagnostic Menu
System Links
There are t w o w a y s to enter the diagnostic mode.
1. Enter this screen by connecting the SCS connector or

by selecting Self Diagnosis Mode f r o m the navigation
screen main m e n u . The message at the bottom of the
screen flashes indicating the diagnostic is running.
Make sure y o u enter the audio anti-theft code.
Method 1: Start the vehicle. W h e n the globe screen

appears, connect the SCS service connector to the
navigation service connector located behind the
navigation unit under the driver's seat. The screen
changes to the SystemLinks screen and automatically
begins running the self diagnostic. See the System Links
section for more information.
NOTE: When finished troubleshooting, make sure to
remove the SCS connector.
| SystemLinks \
Help
Radio = XM
Display
A/C
= Mic
= | IMavi.ECU
Error
History
Hard Key
Yaw
The system cannot complete a full diagnosis unless

the engine is running.
DTC 1501 and/or 2703 can be stored w h e n the
ignition switch is at ACCESSORY (I). With the
ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I), the climate
control unit is turned off and the navigation unit
loses communication and stores DTCs. Therefore,
there is a possibility that the system is normal even
though DTC 1501 and/or 2703 is stored. Check
system links w i t h the engine running, and if it
appears n o r m a l , the system is OK at this time.
Car Status
R- C a m e r a
G P S Ant.
| [ Exit Diag ] [ Return
NOTE:
System Links
Radio

Display =
Make sure the battery is in g o o d condition, then press

and hold the three buttons (MAP/GUIDE, M E N U , and
CANCEL), and keep t h e m pressed for about 3 seconds.
The display screen goes directly to the Select Diagnosis
Items menu s h o w n below.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (runs the automatic diagnosis of
the navigation system)
Detail Information & Setting (allows y o u to manually
diagnose the navigation system)
Return


23-222
G P S Ant.
Exit Diag
| Return
A/C
IMavi.ECU
Mic
Error
History
Hard Key
Yaw
Car Status
R- C a m e r a
Method 2: Start the vehicle, and at the disclaimer screen

use the navigation display hard buttons as described
below:
Help
HFL
2. Rotate the interface dial to select the icon you w a n t to

diagnose. Push in the selector t o seethe details of that
diagnostic function.
3. The System Links function runs automatically and

displays a flashing message at the bottom of the
screen reminding you to have the engine running for
the test. The diagnostic tests the following:
Most of the wires connecting the navigation
components s h o w n in the block diagram.
Each icon color is explained in the table as s h o w n .

Icon
Colors
Green
Red
The results f r o m the various components s h o w n in

the block diagram.
The microphone is tested by listening to the bong
sound produced by the navigation unit f r o m the
speakers w h e n the diagnostic is started. This
requires that the audio system be operating
normally.
When the diagnostic finishes, the icons turn different
colors based on their test status. The color definitions
are s h o w n below and can also be seen by selecting
Help on the System Links screen.
The indication on the screen may not change until you
exit and reenter the Self-Diagnosis mode. In some
cases, y o u may have to restart the engine for the
indication to change. After you repair the affected
component or harness, repeat this diagnostic.
Yellow
White
Gray
Description
The system ran a diagnosis and the
results are OK.
Errors that require replacement of
hardware or harness. Examples are
connection error or m e m o r y diagnosis
errors. Troubleshoot for DTCs.
Errors that doesn't require hardware
replacement, such as an open display
cover, an incorrect navigation DVD,
leaving the vehicle in ACCESSORY (1),
or because of a missing accessory, like
the rearview camera.
The diagnosis is running. The screen
functions are locked out while the
diagnosis runs
The system cannot automatically
check this functon. You have to select
the diagnosis item and manually do
additional testing, like checking the
navigation buttons in the Hard Key
test. When you complete the Hard Key
test and return to the System Links
m e n u , the gray icon turns green.
NOTE: By selecting the HELP icon, y o u can see a

description for each color.
(cont'd)
23-223
Navigation System
System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
Icon Color Information
Icon Color
Icon
Display
Radio
XM
GPS
Ant.
RCamera
A/C
HFL
23-224
GREEN
Result of
Connection under
the Display
diagnosis menu is
OK.
Result of
Connection under
the Radio diagnosis
menu is OK.
Result of
Connection under
the X M diagnosis
menu is OK.
All result of
Antenna and
Receiver in NAVI
ECU is OK.
Result of
Connection under
the R-Camera
diagnosis menu is
OK.
Result of
Connection under
the Aircon
diagnosis menu is
OK while ignition
switch is ON (II).
Result of
Connection under
the HFL diagnosis
menu is OK.
RED
Result of
Connection under
the Display
diagnosis menu is
NG.
Result of
Connection under
the Radio
diagnosis m e n u is
NG.
Result of
Connection under
the X M diagnosis
menu is NG.
All result of
Antenna and
Receiver in NAVI
ECU is NG.
Result of
Connection under
the R-Camera
diagnosis menu is
NG.
Result of
Connection under
the Aircon
diagnosis menu is
NG while ignition
switch is ON (II).
Result of
Connection under
the HFL diagnosis
m e n u is NG.
YELLOW
WHITE
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
Executing (Not
completed)
GRAY
Icon Color
Icon
Mic
ECU
Info.
Hard
Key
GREEN
The microphone
detects the sound
Pi-Pi-Pon at the
system link menu.
Both V-RAM or
D-RAM is OK, and
all Program Flash,
Serial No., Model
is available, and
the DVD lid is
closed.
All buttons are
pressed and are
detected under
Hard key menu.
RED
The microphone
could not detects
the sound
Pi-Pi-Pon at the
system link menu.
Either the V-RAM
or DRAM is NG, or
any of the Program
Flash, Serial
No, Model is
unavailable.
DVD mechanism is
normal and the
proper navigation
DVD is installed.
Yaw
Sensor
Result of the Yaw

Sensor diagnosis
menu is OK.
Car
Status
DVD lid is
opened
WHITE
Executing (Not
completed)
Result of the Yaw

Sensor diagnosis
menu is NG.
GRAY
Executing (Not
completed)
Until changing to
Hard key menu.
All buttons arenot

pressed or pressed
but not detected
under Hard key
m e n u , or exit f r o m
Hard key menu
w i t h o u t the button
not detected.
Error
History
DVD
YELLOW
Hard Error or Soft

Error isdetected
under Error
History menu.
Executing (Not
completed)
Improper
navigation DVD is
installed, or DVD is
not installed, or
can not identify
software version
f r o m the DVD or
internal
mechanism
failure.
Result of the Zero
PointOutput under
the YawSensor
diagnosis menu is
NO CHECK.
Executing (Not
completed)
Hard Error or Soft

Error is not
detected under
Error History
menu.
Executing (Not
completed)
Check these
systems manually.
(cont'd)
23-225
Navigation System
When y o u select the Detail Information & Setting m e n u ,
the main diagnosis menu is displayed.
Factory diagnostic screen In Line Diag

NOTE: If the vehicle left the factory in the factory
diagnostic mode, or i f t h e navigation unit is replaced,
you will see this screen every time y o u turn on the
ignition.
W h e n a navigation control unit is powered up for the

first t i m e at the factory or after a n e w replacement unit,
or sometimes a remanufactured navigation unit is
installed, the factory diagnosis screen (In Line Diag)
appears. Normally the factory does the steps necessary
to verify proper operation and terminate the factory
diagnostic. Until the proper confirmation sequence is
done, the screen appears every time the vehicle is
started.
In Line Diag
Start Diag
H
Navi ECU |
-| GPS Antenna |
^
Display
|
-|_
-]
A/C
Radio
-[
F- CAN J
-] Rear Camera |
XM
Exit Diag
XXXXCorrect PIN


After the display changes to the Diagnostic M e n u , select

the item y o u w a n t to check, and the test begins. To
return to the previous screen, select Return.
Delete
Done
I
I
|
[
BACK
|
KA
Follow the steps below t o prevent the screen f r o m

showing up in the future:
Press and hold the buttons M E N U , MAP/GUIDE, and
CANCEL for about 3 seconds the Select Diagnosis
items screen appears.
Press and hold the MAP/GUIDE button for 5 - 1 0
seconds. A screen w i t h a Complete button appears.
Press complete, then return and then shut the key off
for 5 seconds. Do not disconnect the battery during
this period as the unit is saving the setting to the
SRAM memory. The In Line Diag should not appear
again.
Restart the vehicle, and confirm normal operation by
completing the TQi of the Navigation System Service
Bulletin.
Detailed Information & Settings

These section allows y o u to run a specific diagnostic and
allows additional setting choices for some screens that
are not shown w h e n selecting an icon f r o m the System
Links screen.
23-226
Return

Monitor Check
Unit Check
Functional Setup
Coverge Area
I
I
|
)
| Return I
GPS Information
Yaw Rate
I
I
Car Status
Version
I
I
Monitor Check
RGB Color
Overview of display unit
This screen verifies that the display unit is receiving the

video (R, G, B and Composite sync) signals properly. The
three primary colors should all appear without
distortion. The combination of all three should produce
a central white section. If any of the colors are missing,
missing color signal. If the picture has lines in it or scrolls
horizontally, or vertically, troubleshoot for a possible
Composite sync problem.
The display unit communicates w i t h the navigation

unit over its o w n GA-Net bus. Information sent by the
navigation unit to the display unit includes c o m m a n d s
to control the LCD back light.
The security system protects the navigation display
unit by daisy-chaining the security signal through it,
and then passing the signal t o the audio unit.
The illumination input f r o m the gauge brightness
control provides back lighting for the buttons
surrounding the screen, not the main screen
RGB Color
Return 1
These screens help y o u troubleshoot the display unit.

Select the item y o u w a n t to troubleshoot, and f o l l o w the
diagnostic instructions.
RGB color
Gray Tone
White Raster
Black Raster
Color Pattern
Monitor Adjustment
Gray Tone
Monitor Check
|
1
[
RGB Color
Gray Tone
Black Raster
1 Return
||
Color Pattern
[
White Raster
|
|| Monitor Adjustment |
This screen helps diagnose problems w i t h contrast. You

should be able to see the changes f r o m bar to bar across
the scale. If y o u can't see changes f r o m bar to bar,
substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
23-291), and retest.
Gray T o n e
Return
(cont'd)
23-227
Navigation System
Black Raster
White Raster
This diagnostic screen checks for pixels that may be

stuck o n . The entire display must be black. If pixels are
stuck o n , replace the navigation display unit (see page
23-293).
This diagnostic screen checks for pixels that may be

dead (off). The entire display must be w h i t e . If there are
dead pixels, replace the navigation display unit (see
page 23-293).
Color Pattern
Monitor Adjustment
This is for factory use only. To check the color signal, use
the RGB Color diagnostic f o u n d under the Monitor
Check. The chart below shows the colors being used for
the various screens.
This is for factory use only. The Default button will reset
the display position to factory specifications.
[
Color Pattern
Monitor Adjustrmnt
Return
Return
Settin 1(0,0)
Defaul t(0,0)
Default
23-228
Tuning
Unit Check (Quick Check)
Display
NOTE: Some of the tests and screens that are displayed

under the Unit Check are different f r o m the other
detailed checks.
This diagnostic does additional checks on the

communication bus between the control unit and the
display. In addition, this test checks the internal
electronic functions.
To start the test, select the item you w a n t to check starts.
When the connection is NG, first check for loose

terminals at the navigation unit and the navigation
display unit connections. Next check for an open or
short in the communication line between the
navigation unit and the navigation display unit. Ifthe
line has an open or short, replace the affected shielded
harness.
Display
Radio
GPS
ECU Info.
Rear Camera
PC Card Info.
Ifthe ROM or RAM is NG, replace the navigation

display unit.
Hard Key
Yaw Sensor
The version represents the software version in the

display.
DVD
Aircon
HFL
XM
Return
Display
Return
Select Check Units

1
I
Display
Radio
II
||
Hard Key
Y a w Sensor
]
|
GPS
||
DVD
1
I
E C U Info.
Rear Camera
||
||
Aircon
HFL
XM
PC Card Info.
II
Connection
ROM
RAM
Version
OK
OK
OK
030611
OK
(cont'd)
23-229
Navigation System
Radio
ECU Info.
I f t h e NG is indicated, check for loose audio unit

connector.
This screen looks for problems in the navigation unit.

W h e n you initiate this diagnosis, the navigation unit
may freeze or delay up t o a minute while the diagnosis
runs.
NOTE: Ifthe X M link appears red, but the radio link

appears green in the navigation system link, refer t o
audio system s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
NOTE: Do not try to end this diagnostic by pressing OK

or Memclear before it finishes, otherwise the system
may reboot.
If V-RAM or D-RAM is NG, replace the navigation unit.
DVD lid displays the state of DVD Lid of navigation
unit.
Program Flash: Displays the version of the navigation
software in m e m o r y .
Program on DVD: If displayed, this value represents
the version of the navigation software on the
navigation DVD.
DVD version represents the database version on the
DVD. You can find this information in either the Setup
Screen Version, or in the Diagnostic Screen Version.
GPS
If GPS indicates NG (ANT), then check the entire GPS
antenna wire f r o m the navigation unit to the antenna. If
the wire is crushed or damaged, try a known-good
antenna. I f t h e diagnostic then reads OK, replace the
original GPS antenna. I f t h e diagnostic still reads NG
(ANT), replace the navigation unit. Select information t o
see the GPS satellite details.
Pressing the Information button displays more GPS
signal detail.
Serial No. should be the same as the serial number

f o u n d on the underside of the navigation unit. You
need this number to obtain the security code f r o m the
Interactive Network (iN) system.
The M e m Clrear is for factory use and should not be
used unless instructed by the factory. Selecting this
will clear the customer's settings, personal
information, GPS orbital data, and anything else
stored in m e m o r y .
Selecting this will clear the customer's settings,
personal information, GPS orbital data, and anything
else stored in m e m o r y .
D-RAM check is for factory use only.
Return
GPS
ECU Info.
Antenna
Receiver in Navi E C U
OK
OK
Information
V-RAM
DVD Lid
Program Flash
Program on DVD
DVD Version
Serial No.
Model
| Return
D-RAM
OK
OK
Close
(2007.08. 31 15:31:28)
1.64.00
1.64.0000
4.62
Mem Clear
xxxxxxxxxx
SZAA
| D-RAM ChecJT
23-230
Rear Camera
PC Card info.
If the rearview camera is connected, it will appear as

OK.
When the rearview camera is not connected, or there
is a problem in the circuit, it w i l l appear as NG.
NOTE: Do not insert any card or object into the slot.
Return 1
Rear Camera
Connection
There is no PC Card in the PC slot, and the screen should

display, PC Card is not inserted.
OK
PC Card Info.
J Ugetum,
PC Card is not inserted.
Ifthe factory provides a PC card and instructs you to

insert it the PC Card information screen appears. The
screen displays the Manufacturer, and Product Name as
s h o w n in the following screen.
PC Card information
! Return
Manufacturer
xxxxxx
Product Name
xxxxxxx
Files
(cont'd)
23-231
Navigation System
Hard Key
DVD
This diagnostic tests the interface dial and the buttons

that surround it. For this model, the interface dial and
buttons do not use the GA-Net bus for communications.
This diagnostic tests the navigation DVD reader.
Return I
DVD
1. To complete the test, touch each button on the

vehicle's control panel, m o v e , rotate, and press in the
interface dial to each indicated position. As each
function is tested, the corresponding button on the
display should highlight. To exit, push in and hold the
selector knob.
Error Detail
Version
Maker ID
Navi Platform
20050404
0x01
0x01
2. To exit, push in and hold the selector knob.

NOTE: You cannot use the onscreen return button to exit
this function.
Return I
Hard Key
Keep Pushing to Return.
Aircon
This diagnostic tests the climate bus connection (AC-SI
and AC-SO) between the navigation unit and climate
control unit. Make sure the engine is running for this
test.
W h e n the connection appears NG, go to the Navigation
cannot control HVAC by voice c o m m a n d .
Aircon
Y a w Sensor
Connection
This screen gives a quick test of the y a w sensor

functionality based on the t w o voltages Sensor and
Offset. For more information see the Yaw Rate
Diagnostic.
Yaw Sensor
Zero Point Output
ON
Output Value
x.xxxV
Current Offset
x.xxxV
Temperature in ECU xxC
23-232
Return
Return
OK
HFL
Functional Setup
This checks the 4 wire communication bus between the

HandsFreeLink control unit and the navigation unit.
Select the item y o u w a n t to check.
When the connection appears NG, check the HFL

function and go to appropriate troubleshooting in
HandsFreeLink System.
Demo Mode
Save Users Data

Mic Level
Functional Setup
HFL
Connection
Return 1
OK
Save Users Data
Return
Mic Level
Demo Mode
XM
This checks the GA-NET Bus line to the X M receiver.
W h e n the connection appears NG, check the connection
open/short between the X M receiver and the navigation
display unit.
(cont'd)
23-233
Navigation S y s t e m
Save Users Memory
S e l e c t E X P O R T button to m o v e t h e c u s t o m e r ' s d a t a
W h e n r e p l a c i n g t h e n a v i g a t i o n u n i t this function a l l o w s
the d e a l e r to t r a n s f e r the c u s t o m e r ' s p e r s o n a l data to the
n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit. T h e t r a n s f e r r e d i n f o r m a t i o n
i n c l u d e s their S e t u p s e t t i n g s , a n d p e r s o n a l a d d r e s s e s .
f r o m the original n a v i g a t i o n unit to the P C c a r d . S e l e c t

Y E S o n the E x p o r t U s e r Data C o n f i r m a t i o n s c r e e n . T h e
p r o c e s s t a k e s o n l y a c o u p l e of s e c o n d s . T h e s y s t e m
s t o r e s t w o files o n the c a r d .
T h e d e a l e r i n s e r t s a P C c a r d to t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit, a n d
N O T E : If the E X P O R T button is g r a y e d out, c h e c k t h e P C
t h e n s e l e c t s t h e S a v e U s e r s M e m o r y function. T h e t w o
c a r d ' s e d g e c o n n e c t o r , a n d t h e p i n s i n s i d e the
f u n c t i o n s in t h i s d i a g n o s t i c s c r e e n a r e E X P O R T a n d
n a v i g a t i o n unit (with a flashlight) for d a m a g e .
I M P O R T . E X P O R T s a v e s the c u s t o m e r ' s data to the P C

c a r d , a n d I M P O R T m o v e s the P C c a r d files to the n e w
n a v i g a t i o n unit.
Save Users Memory

EXPORT
Save Users Memory
Return
Return
Export User Data?
IMPORT
Yes
No
After installing the c u s t o m e r ' s o r i g i n a l n a v i g a t i o n
DVD
in the n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit, a l l o w the s y s t e m to boot u p .

Insert t h e P C c a r d in the n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d e n t e r
T h i s function d o e s not start (the E X P O R T a n d I M P O R T
t h e S a v e U s e r s M e m o r y in the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
b u t t o n s a r e g r e y e d out) until y o u i n s e r t a P C c a r d .
diagnostic mode.
B e f o r e starting t h i s f u n c t i o n , s e e t h e P C C a r d F A Q s for
S e l e c t I M P O R T button to m o v e t h e t w o files s t o r e d by
i n f o r m a t i o n r e g a r d i n g P C c a r d s , a n d h o w to u s e t h i s
the E x p o r t p r o c e s s f r o m the P C c a r d to the n e w
function.
n a v i g a t i o n unit. S e l e c t Y E S o n the I m p o r t U s e r Data

C o n f i r m a t i o n s c r e e n . W h e n t h e t r a n s f e r is f i n i s h e d (a f e w
s e c o n d s ) the s y s t e m a u t o m a t i c a l l y r e b o o t . After t h e
s y s t e m r e b o o t s , r e m o v e t h e P C c a r d f r o m t h e P C slot.
N O T E : If the I M P O R T button is g r a y e d out, c h e c k if the
M o d e l a n d the P r o g r a m F l a s h s h o w n o n t h e V e r s i o n
s c r e e n a r e the s a m e for t h e t w o n a v i g a t i o n u n i t s .
Save Users Memory
Return
P
Import User Data?
Yes
23-234
No
Demo Mode
Mic Level
This screen is for factory use only, and should always be

set to OFF. Occasionally the DEMO setting is turned ON
when vehicles are being used at Auto Shows or similar
events. Turning this feature on, allows the navigation
system to automatically follow a route to a destination
when the vehicle is stationary. The Speed Rate changes
the speed of the demo mode.
This diagnostic allows you to independently test the

microphone and the NAVI TALK and BACK buttons.
They are used to activate the voice control system. The
microphone is located near the map light in the roof
console. The microphone can now isolate the driver's
voice even when there is noise or other conversations in
the vehicle. To properly check the microphones, make
sure you are sitting in the driver's seat.
1. Press the navigation TALK button on the steering
wheel, wait unit you hear a beep, and in a normal
voice say "testing". The TALK indicator on the screen
should momentarily turn green, and the text Now
Recording... should appear in yellow. If the talk
indicator shown on the screen does not briefly turn
green when you press the navigation TALK button,
check the wiring from the steering wheel navigation
TALK button to the navigation unit. If there is noMic
Level movement when you speak, then you should
check the wires running from the microphone in the
roof console to the HandsFreeLink control unit and
the navigation unit. If the wires are OK, the
microphone must be faulty; replace the microphone
(see page 23-294) located in the roof console.
2. Press the navigation BACK button on the steering
wheel. This should cause the BACK indicator on the
screen to momentarily turn green. If it does not briefly
turn to green, then check the wiring from the steering
wheel navigation BACK button to the navigation unit.
Demo Mode
Demo
OFF
Speed Rate
150 ms
Return
| ON |
| OFF
NOTE: The mic level should reach the 6th bar.
Mic Level
Return
Mic Level
Steering Switch
<4
BACK
(cont'd)
23-235
Navigation System
Coverage Area
GPS Information
T h i s s c r e e n a l l o w s t h e d e a l e r to s e l e c t the a r e a that
a p p l i e s to their l o c a t i o n . T h e c h o i c e is U S (continental)
or H a w a i i . T h e default is U S . S e l e c t t h e c o v e r a g e a r e a
(the s y s t e m m a y reboot), exit the d i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d
restart t h e v e h i c l e .
T h i s s c r e e n s h o w s t h e c u r r e n t s t a t u s of G P S r e c e p t i o n .
T h e c i r c u l a r d i a g r a m s h o w s the c u r r e n t location of t h e
G P S satellites ( y e l l o w n u m b e r s ) a s t h e y w o u l d a p p e a r in
t h e s k y . T h e outer circle r e p r e s e n t s t h e h o r i z o n (0
degrees elevation). T h e middle a n d inner circles
r e p r e s e n t s 30 a n d 60 d e g r e e s r e s p e c t i v e l y . T h e v e r y
c e n t e r of the d i a g r a m (90 d e g r e e s e l e v a t i o n ) is directly
o v e r h e a d . N e a r b y o b s t r u c t i o n s , like tall b u i l d i n g s will
block satellites in that d i r e c t i o n . T h a t is w h y it is
n e c e s s a r y to be in a n o p e n a r e a to effectively
t r o u b l e s h o o t G P S r e c e p t i o n i s s u e s . T h e satellite
n u m b e r s s h o w n o n the d i a g r a m c o r r e s p o n d to the P R N
n u m b e r in t h e G P S Details s c r e e n . T h e r e a r e a l w a y s at
least 2 4 a c t i v e G P S satellites in orbit. B e c a u s e satellites
fail, a n d h a v e to be r e m o v e d f r o m s e r v i c e , s p a r e s a r e
a l w a y s p a r k e d in orbit, r e a d y to be a c t i v a t e d . T h i s is w h y
t h e P R N (satellite ID n u m b e r ) c a n b e g r e a t e r t h a n 2 4 .
If a c u s t o m e r r e l o c a t e s a v e h i c l e f r o m t h e U S m a i n l a n d
to H a w a i i , o r r e t u r n s f r o m H a w a i i to t h e U S m a i n l a n d ,
y o u n e e d to c h a n g e t h e c o v e r a g e a r e a to d i s p l a y the
correct m a p s .
N O T E : T h i s function o p e r a t e s o n l y w h e n the v e h i c l e is
p h y s i c a l l y l o c a t e d in the c o v e r a g e a r e a y o u s e l e c t .
Coverage Area
US
Return
Hawaii
N O T E : W h e n y o u u s e t h i s s c r e e n for t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ,
park t h e v e h i c l e o u t s i d e , a w a y f r o m b u i l d i n g s , tall t r e e s ,
a n d h i g h - t e n s i o n w i r e s for at least 10 m i n u t e s w i t h t h e
engine running.
T h e N u m b e r of S a t e l l i t e s box s h o w s t h e n u m b e r of
a c q u i r e d satellites ( m a x i m u m of 12). It s h o u l d c o n t a i n
four or m o r e i c o n s . If not, t r o u b l e s h o o t for G P S icon is
w h i t e or not s h o w n ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 7 4 ) .
T h e C u r r e n t Position s h o w s latitude, l o n g i t u d e , a n d
e l e v a t i o n (in feet). If t h e r e a r e l e s s t h a n four s a t e l l i t e s ,
the e l e v a t i o n c a n be g r o s s l y i n a c c u r a t e .
T h e Date/Time field s h o w s the c u r r e n t d a t e , a n d a l s o
GMI time.
Return
GPS Information
Number of Satellites
Current Position
0
Latitude: Nxx xx'xx"

Longitude: Wxxxxx'xx
Elevation: xxx feet
xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx
In U s e
Search
N O T E : P r e s s i n g t h e m a p / g u i d e button d i s p l a y s t h e
satellite n u m b e r o n e a c h c i r c l e .
23-236
T h e table of v a l u e s s h o w n b e l o w define t h e t e r m s at the

top of the c o l u m n s in t h e G P S detail s c r e e n .
GPS Detail
B y p r e s s i n g a n d h o l d i n g the M E N U button for
Description
Problem indication
Active
A c t i v e satellites
( Y e l l o w Dot)
If 3 D o r 2 D is
missing w h e n the
v e h i c l e is p a r k e d
outside, do the
G P S i c o n is w h i t e
or not s h o w n
troubleshooting
(see page 23-274).
Return
PRN
Date:xxxx.xx.xx
Time:xx:xx:xx
T h e satellite ID
number
ST
T h e status: 0 = cannot
v i e w or s e a r c h i n g , 2 =
acquiring
1/2
AZI
A z i m u t h , the a n g l e
( 0 - 3 6 0 ) clockwise
f r o m north
EL
Elevation from the

h o r i z o n (90 d e g is
overhead)
R e c e i v e r sensitivity
10 s e c o n d s , a G P S Detail s c r e e n a p p e a r s . T h i s s c r e e n
d i s p l a y s real t i m e i n c o m i n g satellite positional d a t a
Column
w h e n t h e v e h i c l e is o u t s i d e in the o p e n . T h e i n f o r m a t i o n
s h o w n o n this s c r e e n is for factory u s e .
N O T E : T h e data s h o w n is a n e x a m p l e o n l y .
G P S Detail
HDop:xx.x
VDop:xx.x
:xx
:xx
Speed:x.xMi/h
Direction: x
PRN ST AZI
xx
xx
EL
C/N ACC
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
T h e b o x T S / A S a n d H DopA/ D o p is for factory u s e .
C/N
T h e S p e e d a n d Direction i n f o r m a t i o n is u p d a t e d in
real t i m e w h e n d r i v i n g .
T h e Date/Time Information is t h e s a m e a s in S e t u p
s c r e e n 2 A d j u s t T i m e Zone/Clock.
If the 3 D i c o n is s h o w n a b o v e the y e l l o w d o t s , this
i m p l i e s that at least four satellites a r e a v a i l a b l e for
m a p p o s i t i o n i n g , a n d t h e G P S indicator on t h e m a p
ACC
z\
1/2
or
2/2
V
If a l i o , t h e n , d o t h e
G P S icon is w h i t e
or not s h o w n
troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 23-274).
H e a l t h y s i g n a l is
4 9 - 5 2 , no s i g n a l :
27-33
Satellite a c c u r a c y
S h o w s v i e w of all
satellites in t w o
s c r e e n v i e w s 1/2 or
2/2
s c r e e n will be g r e e n . S e e t h e G l o b a l P o s i t i o n i n g
S y s t e m d e t a i l e d e x p l a n a t i o n in t h e S y s t e m
Description.
If the r o w of data in t h e table b e l o w b e g i n s w i t h a
y e l l o w dot, t h e AZI a n d E L fields c a n be u s e d to locate
e a c h satellite o n the c i r c u l a r G P S d i a g r a m ( s e e prior
screen).
(cont'd)
23-237
Navigation System
Yaw Rate
T h i s d i a g n o s t i c c h e c k s t h e y a w rate s e n s o r in the control
unit. T h i s d e v i c e d e t e c t s w h e n t h e v e h i c l e t u r n s , a n d
r e p o s i t i o n s the v e h i c l e p o s i t i o n i c o n o n t h e m a p s c r e e n .
F o r m o r e detailed i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e the y a w rate s e n s o r
t h e o r y of o p e r a t i o n u n d e r S y s t e m D e s c r i p t i o n ( s e e p a g e
23-194).
S e n s o r i n d i c a t e s t h e v o l t a g e output f r o m the y a w rate
S e n s i t i v i t y s t u d y r e p r e s e n t s t h e s t a t u s of t h e internal
t u n i n g f u n c t i o n . A t initialization, this v a l u e s t a r t s at 6
a n d i n c r e a s e s to # 1 0 a s t h e internal c o r r e c t i o n v a l u e s
become more accurate.
T h e settings C C W Cal Factor, C W Cal Factor, and Set
a r e for factory u s e o n l y . T H I S S H O U L D N E V E R B E
ADJUSTED.
F o r d e t a i l e d a n a l y s i s of the y a w rate s e l e c t t u n i n g .
s e n s o r . It s h o u l d indicate a b o u t 2.500 volts w h e n t h e

v e h i c l e is s t o p p e d .
Yaw Rate
Return
Offset is t h e r e f e r e n c e v o l t a g e or s t a n d a r d w i t h i n t h e
y a w rate s e n s o r . It a l s o s h o u l d indicate a b o u t 2.500
volts w h e n stopped.
A s e n s o r output v o l t a g e L O W E R t h a n the Offset
v o l t a g e i n d i c a t e s that the v e h i c l e is t u r n i n g to t h e
right.
A s e n s o r output v o l t a g e H I G H E R t h a n the Offset
v o l t a g e i n d i c a t e s that the v e h i c l e is t u r n i n g to t h e left.
T h e y a w rate offset, a n d s e n s o r s h o u l d both indicate
a b o u t 2.500 v o l t s w h e n the v e h i c l e is s t o p p e d . If either
r e a d s z e r o , or 5.000 v o l t s , r e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit.
T h e y a w rate offset a n d s e n s o r s h o u l d be w i t h i n
+/0.01 V of e a c h other w h e n the v e h i c l e is s t o p p e d .
T h e s e n s o r v a l u e s h o u l d c h a n g e relative to the offset
a s t h e v e h i c l e t u r n s w h i l e d r i v i n g . If not, r e p l a c e t h e
Example: Car stopped

Normal
Abnormal
Offset
2.526 V
Sensor
2.516-2.536 V
Offset
Sensor
2.526 V
2.623 V
Example: Car turning

Normal
Offset
Sensor
23-238
Abnormal
2.526 V
Offset
2 . 6 7 8 V (left t u r n ) S e n s o r
2 . 4 7 8 V (right
turn)
2.526 V
2.623 V ( n o
change on turns)
Sensor
Offset
x.xxx V
x.xxxV
CCW Factor
x.x%
CW Factor
x.x%
Tuning
Y a w Rate Tuning
Car Status
T h i s d i a g n o s t i c a l l o w s y o u to g r a p h i c a l l y d i s p l a y
p r o b l e m s w i t h the y a w rate s e n s o r .
U s e this s c r e e n to c o n f i r m that the navigation unit is

p r o p e r l y r e c e i v i n g input s i g n a l s . S i g n a l s e q u a l to (0) a r e
O F F , a n d s i g n a l s e q u a l to (1) are O N . If the v a l u e o n t h e
d i s p l a y d o e s not m a t c h t h e actual v e h i c l e s t a t u s , t h e n
c h e c k the w i r e c a r r y i n g the s i g n a l .
T h e A N G - D i s p v a l u e a c c u m u l a t e s a n y differences
b e t w e e n the o f f s e t a n d s e n s o r v o l t a g e s ( s e e Y a w R a t e
d i a g n o s t i c ) . W h e n the s e n s o r f u n c t i o n s n o r m a l l y , t h e
r a n d o m c h a n g e s in t h e s e t w o v o l t a g e s g e n e r a l l y
c a n c e l s o u t s o t h e v a l u e is 0. H o w e v e r if o n e v o l t a g e is
c o n s i s t e n t l y h i g h e r t h a n the o t h e r , t h e n the A N G - D i s p
v a l u e a c c u m u l a t e s the c o n s t a n t c h a n g e .
T h e R e s e t button t e m p o r a r i l y c l e a r s t h e a n g u l a r
accumulation (ANG-Disp), and clears the display dots.
Do not t o u c h t h e C C W , C W , or S e t buttons. T h e s e a r e
u s e d for factory s e t u p o n l y .
VSP-Vehicle S p e e d Pulse from PCM

(Pin 6 of n a v i g a t i o n unit A - c o n n e c t o r )
a) O F F (0) w h e n v e h i c l e is not m o v i n g
b) O N (1) w h e n v e h i c l e is m o v i n g
T h e V S P c o m e s f r o m the P C M a s a d e d i c a t e d s i g n a l .
Internally, the n a v i g a t i o n unit c o m p a r e s the actual V P o n
the m a p a g a i n s t street data to a d j u s t the p u l s e to s p e e d
s c a l i n g factor. A s this s c a l i n g factor b e c o m e s m o r e
T w o tests are explained below. For gross problems with
a c c u r a t e , t h e L e v e l g r a d u a l l y i n c r e a s e s f r o m 0 to 10 ( s e e
the s e n s o r , the s t a t i o n a r y test u s u a l l y c o n f i r m s w h e t h e r
the T i r e C a l i b r a t e d i a g n o s t i c s c r e e n ) .
t h e s e n s o r is defective. F o r y a w rate i s s u e s related to
B A C K - R e v e r s e indication f r o m taillight r e l a y
(Pin 5 of n a v i g a t i o n unit A - c o n n e c t o r )
d r i v i n g , do the r o a d test d e s c r i b e d b e l o w .
1. S t a t i o n a r y test: If the V P icon s p i n s in p l a c e a n d the
A N G - D i s p v a l u e s l o w l y i n c r e a s e s or d e c r e a s e s , the
y a w rate s e n s o r is d e f e c t i v e . R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n
unit.
2. R o a d test: Drive the v e h i c l e o n a v e r y straight r o a d .
E n t e r the d i a g n o s t i c m o d e , s e l e c t Y a w rate, a n d t o u c h
t h e T u n i n g button. W h i l e d r i v i n g d o w n a straight
r o a d , the w h i t e d o t s s h o u l d t r a c e a straight line a c r o s s
the s c r e e n . H o w e v e r , if y o u a r e d r i v i n g o n a straight
r o a d , a n d y o u notice t h e d o t s c o n s t a n t l y d r o p p i n g
d o w n or h e a d i n g up a s y o u d r i v e , the n a v i g a t i o n
unit's y a w s e n s o r is defective. Y o u c a n t o u c h R e s e t to
c l e a r A N G - D i s p , a n d dotted l i n e s .
If either test a b o v e fails, p l e a s e e n t e r Y a w rate s e n s o r
defective for t h e p r o b l e m d e s c r i p t i o n , o n the
N a v i g a t i o n unit return f o r m .
a) O F F (0) w h e n the shift lever is in a n y position other

than reverse
b) O N (1) w h e n the shift lever is in r e v e r s e
T h e B a c k s i g n a l is u s e d by the n a v i g a t i o n unit to a l l o w
t h e m a p s c r e e n to s h o w the V P m o v i n g b a c k w a r d s w h e n
in r e v e r s e . T h i s s i g n a l is n e e d e d b e c a u s e the S p e e d
P u l s e h a s no direction indication.
Return
Car Status
VSP
to)
BACK
[0]
ILL
[0]
N O T E : T h e C C W , C W a n d Set buttons are disabled and

c a n n o t be a c t i v a t e d .
Tuning
0.0%
I Return I
I L L - l l l u m i n a t i o n Indication (Pin 5 of n a v i g a t i o n unit

A-connector)
a) O F F (0) w h e n parking lights, or h e a d l i g h t s a r e off
b) O N (1) w h e n parking lights, or h e a d l i g h t s a r e o n
T h e n a v i g a t i o n u s e s the s i g n a l to d e t e r m i n e w h e t h e r to
ANG-Disp
put the n a v i g a t i o n s c r e e n into the D a y or Night
0*
b r i g h t n e s s m o d e . ( S e t u p s c r e e n 1)
Reset
CCW
CW
Set
(cont'd)
23-239
Navigation System
Version
This screen displays the current version information for
the navigation system software. In addition, this screen
allows the loading of updated software if requested by
the factory, or instructed by a Service Bulletin. Software
may be loaded f r o m a CD or a PC card.

service information about navigation DVDs.
Version
Program Flash
Program Flash: Displays the version of the navi

software in m e m o r y .
Program Disc
Program Disc: If displayed, this value represents the

version of the navigation software on the navigation
DVD.
APL
NOTE: The last t w o letters of the Program Flash or DVD

fields indicate w h i c h DVD is installed in the unit. The
letters KA imply that a United States navigation DVD is
installed. I f t h e letters are KC, then a Canada navigation
DVD is installed.
IPL, APL, DBOOT, and System u C o m , are all for factory
use.
Model: For this model, the field should begin w i t h
SZA.
Download: Do not touch, unless instructed by the
factory or any other official Honda service information
(like a service bulletin).
Downloading the software version off the disc may
cause the navigation software to malfunction because
there could be updates that were applied at the factory
that are not contained on the navigation DVD.
23-240
IPL
DBOOT
Return i
x.xx.xxKA
x.xxx.xxx
X.X.XXX
System uCom
X.XXX.
Model
SZAA
Down Load
There are t w o navigation DVDs produced for this model.

The white navigation DVD labeled United States is for
the US market and contains maps for the contiguous
48 US states, and some southern portions of Canada.
Customers wanting additional northern coverage in
Canada, can purchase a Canada navigation DVD by
contacting the navigation DVD fulfillment desk.
The gray navigation DVD labeled Canada, is for the
Canada market, and contains maps for all of Canada,
plus some of the northern US states. If customers w i t h
this navigation DVD require full US coverage
(including states like Florida and Texas), they may
purchase a United States navigation DVD by
contacting the navigation DVD fulfillment desk.
PC Card FAQs
Question
W h e r e do w e b u y t h e f l a s h m e m o r y or
a d a p t o r s , a n d w h a t d o w e a s k for?
Answer
Y o u n e e d a P C M C I A t y p e II a d a p t o r a n d a f l a s h m e m o r y c h i p . Y o u c a n
p u r c h a s e t h e m at a c o m p u t e r , o r office s u p p l y s t o r e . T h e c a r d is h a v e
the s a m e s i z e a n d s h a p e a s the P C c a r d in the H D S . A d a p t o r s that
a c c e p t multiple flash t y p e s a r e not r e c o m m e n d e d . .
W h a t m e m o r y f l a s h c h i p s will w o r k with
what adaptors?
T h e f l a s h m e m o r y d e v i c e s that h a v e b e e n t e s t e d i n c l u d e C o m p a c t
F l a s h ( C F ) , a n d A T A style (like the c a r d in t h e H D S ) . O t h e r c a r d t y p e s
a n d f l a s h m e m o r y c h i p s m a y w o r k , but h a v e not b e e n t e s t e d .
A m e m o r y c h i p with c a p a c i t y of 6 4 M B to 2 G B will w o r k . T h e t w o files
m o v e d to the P C c a r d d u r i n g e x p o r t a r e l e s s t h a n a M e g a b y t e in s i z e .
Y e s , treat the P C c a r d a s a d e d i c a t e d s p e c i a l tool that y o u c a n u s e a n y
t i m e y o u n e e d to t r a n s f e r the n a v i g a t i o n p e r s o n a l files to a n e w
n a v i g a t i o n unit o n '08 a n d later v e h i c l e s .
W h a t c a p a c i t y c a r d d o 1 n e e d for this
function?
S h o u l d the d e a l e r h a v e a d e d i c a t e d c a r d for
the E x p o r t a n d I m p o r t n a v i g a t i o n f u n c t i o n ?
W h a t d e v i c e c a n 1 u s e to m a i n t a i n t h e c a r d , A n y c o m p u t e r s t o r e s e l l s U S B style P C c a r d r e a d e r s that a c c e p t the

c a r d , a n d a l l o w y o u to p e r f o r m file m a i n t e n a n c e o n y o u r c a r d . M o s t
a n d delete files
lap top s will a l s o a c c e p t the c a r d .
W h a t d e v i c e c a n 1 u s e t o m a i n t a i n the P C
A n y c o m p u t e r s t o r e s e l l s U S B style c a r d r e a d e r s that a c c e p t the P C
c a r d , a n d delete f i l e s ?
c a r d , a n d a l l o w y o u to do file m a i n t e n a n c e o n y o u r P C c a r d . M o s t
laptops a l s o a c c e p t the P C c a r d .
C a n w e m o v e the c u s t o m e r ' s data to the
s a m e v e h i c l e w i t h a different s o f t w a r e
v e r s i o n (like m o v i n g f r o m v e r s i o n 4.41 to
version 4.51)?
Will other files o n the c a r d like i m a g e s or
m u s i c files p r e v e n t the Export/Import
function f r o m w o r k i n g ?
T h e c u s t o m e r ' s files c a n o n l y be t r a n s f e r r e d to a n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit,

if the M o d e l a n d the P r o g r a m F l a s h s h o w n o n the V e r s i o n s c r e e n a r e
the s a m e . F i l e s c a n n o t be t r a n s f e r r e d to the different m o d e l a n d
different v e r s i o n s .
No, the s y s t e m s i m p l y a d d s t w o s m a l l files that a r e r e c o g n i z e d by t h e
n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit w h e n d o i n g the i m p o r t function. H o w e v e r , it t h e
P C c a r d is full, the E x p o r t function w o n ' t w o r k correctly.
Do I h a v e to delete the files o n the P C c a r d

after e a c h t r a n s f e r of the p e r s o n a l d a t a ?
After the t r a n s f e r of p e r s o n a l data to the n e w navigation unit, the files

r e m a i n o n the P C c a r d . S i n c e th i s is confidential i n f o r m a t i o n , H o n d a
r e c o m m e n d s deleting t h e s e files after the t r a n s f e r . P l e a s e note that
e a c h t i m e y o u e x p o r t n a v i g a t i o n files of the s a m e m o d e l a n d v e r s i o n ,
the files a r e o v e r w r i t t e n . O v e r t i m e the P C c a r d a c c u m u l a t e s t w o files
for e a c h v e r s i o n of the 8 or s o H o n d a navigation m o d e l s .
If the m e m o r y c a r d n e e d s f o r m a t t i n g , w h a t
format should I u s e ?
I c a n ' t e n t e r the n a v i g a t i o n d i a g n o s t i c
m o d e to d o the Export/Import f u n c t i o n .
H o w c a n I t r a n s f e r the c u s t o m e r ' s d a t a ?
It is unlikely that the P C c a r d will e v e r n e e d f o r m a t t i n g , h o w e v e r , if it

d o e s , u s e the F A T (file allocation table) file s y s t e m .
S o m e internal n a v i g a t i o n unit E C U failures m a y m a k e it i m p o s s i b l e to
u s e the Export/Import f u n c t i o n .
(cont'd)
23-241
Navigation System
Question
W h y won't the Export or Import functions
w o r k ? W h a t d o 1 c h e c k as p a r t o f
troubleshooting?
23-242
Answer
T h e c a r d m a y n o t b e f u l l y i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e s l o t . E j e c t t h e PC c a r d ,
and inspect for w a r p i n g or damage to the edge connector. Never
u s e e x c e s s i v e f o r c e t o i n s e r t a PC c a r d . T h i s c a n d a m a g e t h e p i n s i n
t h e rear of t h e slot.
T h e PC c a r d m a y n o t c o n t a i n f i l e s t h a t a r e r e c o g n i z e d b y t h e n e w
navigation unit. Navigation data can o n l y be transferred b e t w e e n
navigation units w i t h the same M o d e l code, and w i t h the same navi
Program flash version.
T h e flash m e m o r y chip t y p e m a y n o t be accepted by t h e s y s t e m .
O n l y C o m p a c t Flash a n d A T A c a r d s h a v e b e e n t e s t e d .
The card's PCMCIA adaptor m a y prevent a k n o w n - g o o d card f r o m
being recognized. Avoid multi-slot type PCMCIA adaptors that
accept several different flash m e m o r y types.
T h e c a r d m a y b e f u l l a n d as a r e s u l t t h e f i l e s a r e s t o r e d , b u t w i t h o u t
any data. Export and i m p o r t appear to f u n c t i o n , but m o v e n o t h i n g .
D e l e t e u n u s e d f i l e s f r o m t h e PC c a r d .
T h e r e m a y n o t b e a n y f i l e s o n t h e PC c a r d . I f t h e PC c a r d h a s a w r i t e
p r o t e c t i o n s w i t c h , m a k e s u r e it is t u r n e d o f f b e f o r e u s i n g t h e E x p o r t
function.
A l t h o u g h flash m e m o r y chips are reliable, occasionally t h e y
develop bad sectors or other f o r m a t t i n g errors that prevents t h e m
f r o m a c c e p t i n g f i l e s . T h e PC c a r d s h o u l d b e r e f o r m a t t e d u s i n g t h e
FAT f o r m a t .
T h e PC c a r d m a y h a v e b e e n f o r m a t t e d u s i n g t h e f o r m a t N T F S . O n l y
t h e F A T f o r m a t is a c c e p t e d b y t h e s y s t e m .
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) cards m a y n o t w o r k p r o p e r l y in t h e s y s t e m
a n d can o v e r h e a t or q u i t f u n c t i o n i n g , particularly in a h o t vehicle.
T h e y are n o t r e c o m m e n d e d .
B e f o r e d o i n g t h e I m p o r t f u n c t i o n , e n s u r e t h a t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D is
loaded into the n e w navigation unit and w o r k i n g properly.
Error Message Table

S c r e e n Error M e s s a g e
N a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m is u n a b l e to a c q u i r e a
proper G P S signal.
N a v i g a t i o n unit d o o r is o p e n or No D V D
disc installed. Please check s y s t e m .
Solution
M a k e s u r e t h e r e is n o t h i n g o n the d a s h b o a r d blocking t h e G P S
antenna.
If not, m o v e the v e h i c l e to a n o p e n s p a c e a w a y f r o m tall b u i l d i n g s ,
t r e e s , etc.
A f t e r m a r k e t metallic w i n d o w tinting a n d o t h e r aftermarket d e v i c e s
c a n affect the G P S r e c e p t i o n .
M a k e s u r e t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D is the c o r r e c t c o l o r a n d is not s c r a t c h e d
or d a m a g e d . M a k e s u r e it is installed w i t h the label s i d e up a n d t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit d o o r is s n a p p e d fully c l o s e d .
No D V D d i s c , p l e a s e c h e c k s y s t e m .
D i s p l a y t e m p is too h i g h . S y s t e m will s h u t
d o w n until d i s p l a y c o o l s d o w n .
C h e c k that the n a v i g a t i o n D V D is i n s t a l l e d w i t h the label s i d e u p .

T h i s m e s s a g e a p p e a r s briefly w h e n the d i s p l a y t e m p e r a t u r e is too
h i g h , a n d t h e n t h e d i s p l a y t u r n s off until the t e m p e r a t u r e c o o l s d o w n .
T h e s y s t e m t u r n s back o n w h e n the d i s p l a y c o o l s d o w n .
O u t s i d e t e m p e r a t u r e is l o w , s y s t e m will
take a w h i l e to start u p .
T h e t e m p e r a t u r e is b e l o w 3 0 C a n d the n a v i g a t i o n unit h a s
difficulties r e a d i n g t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D . T h e s y s t e m start up w h e n the
temperate w a r m s up.
C h e c k the n a v i g a t i o n D V D for the c o r r e c t c o l o r a n d s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n .
A l s o c h e c k for d e e p s c r a t c h e s or o t h e r d a m a g e . M a k e s u r e y o u a r e
u s i n g a n official H o n d a n a v i g a t i o n D V D (white in c o l o r ) . T h e s y s t e m
c a n n o t r e a d other m a p p i n g d a t a b a s e s or v i d e o D V D s . C h e c k a n y
official H o n d a s e r v i c e w e b s i t e for m o r e s e r v i c e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t the
navigation s y s t e m .
DVD disc reading error (unformatted),

please consult your dealer.
R o u t e h a s not b e e n c o m p l e t e d . P l e a s e try
a g a i n f r o m a different l o c a t i o n .
R o u t i n g to or f r o m a p l a c e ( n e w a r e a ) that is not in t h e d a t a b a s e . T r y
p l a n n i n g a different route to or f r o m a different location that is c l e a r l y
displayed on the m a p (map matched).
No alternate route f o u n d . O r i g i n a l route

will be g u i d e d .
T h i s d e s t i n a t i o n c a n n o t be f o u n d in
database.
No alternate route m e t h o d w a s f o u n d . T h e original route m e t h o d will

be u s e d .
T h e d e s t i n a t i o n w a s not f o u n d in the d a t a b a s e . T r y a n o t h e r
d e s t i n a t i o n n e a r b y , or s e l e c t the d e s t i n a t i o n with t h e j o g d i a l .
23-243
Navigation System
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
DTC 1001: FROM System Info Error
DTC 1101: Media Bus Send Error
NOTE:
22- 93).
service information about the navigation system.
NOTE:
22- 93).
This code sets w h e n there is an internal problem w i t h

the Flash-ROM.
Before you troubleshoot, make sure to follow the
general troubleshooting information (see page
23- 177).
This code sets w h e n there is an internal error in BUS

sending.
Before y o u troubleshoot, make sure to follow the
23- 177).

ON (II).
1. Clear the hard error code (see page 23-185).
2. Check for the hard error code (see page 23-184).

Is DTC 1001
indicated?

ON (II).
Is DTC 1101
time.B
time.B
23-244
indicated?
DTC 1201: DVD High Temp
DTC 1202: DVD Low Temp
NOTE:
NOTE:

22- 93).

22- 93).

Check any official Honda service website for m o r e

This code sets w h e n the internal temperature of the

ECU rises above 158 F (70 C). The unit is designed to
shut d o w n to protect the navigation unit ECU. This
could be caused by an inoperative ECU fan or i f t h e
vehicle cabin temperature exceeds the m a x i m u m . Do
the troubleshooting w h e n the navigation unit is w i t h i n
the allowable temperature range.
This code sets w h e n the internal temperature of the

navigation unit ECU falls below - 4 F ( - 2 0 C). The
navigation unit is designed to shut d o w n to protect the
ECU. This is usually caused by very cold exterior
temperatures. Do the troubleshooting w h e n the
navigation unit is w i t h i n the allowable temperature
range.
Before y o u troubleshoot, make sure to f o l l o w the

23- 177).
Before y o u troubleshoot, make sure to f o l l o w the

23- 177).
1. Check that the temperature is below 158 F (70 C) in

the vehicle cabin.
1. Check that the temperature is above 4 F ( - 2 0 C) in

the vehicle cabin.

ON (II).

ON (II).
Is DTC 1201
indicated?
Is DTC 1202
indicated?

I f t h e unit repeatedly comes back w i t h the DTC,
replace the navigation unit (see page 23-291 ) .

time.B
23-245
Navigation System
DTC 1301: GPS Antenna Error
7. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit

c o n n e c t o r E (2P) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
NOTE:
C h e c k the v e h i c l e battery c o n d i t i o n first ( s e e p a g e
2 2 - 93).
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR E (2P)
C h e c k a n y official H o n d a s e r v i c e w e b s i t e for m o r e
s e r v i c e information a b o u t t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n t h e r e is p o o r c o n n e c t o r s or l o o s e
t e r m i n a l s at the G P S a n t e n n a c o n n e c t o r or a n o p e n in
G P S antenna wire.
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to f o l l o w t h e
g e n e r a l t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g information ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 177).
M a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e , a w a y f r o m
buildings.
A f t e r m a r k e t e l e c t r o n i c d e v i c e s l o c a t e d n e a r the
n a v i g a t i o n unit or G P S a n t e n n a c a n potentially
interfere w i t h t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .

Is there
continuity?
1. C l e a r t h e h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 5 ) .
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e ( s )
b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a .
R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . T h e n , g o to
s t e p 1, a n d r e c h e c k .
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d back to O N
(II).
3. C h e c k for t h e h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 4 ) .
Is DTC 1301

c o n n e c t o r E (2P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 2.
indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at t h i s
time.B
5. C h e c k for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s at
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r E (2P).
Is the connection
OK?
N O - R e p a i r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s , a n d
recheck.
6. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r E (2P) a n d t h e
G P S antenna connector.
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a . R e p l a c e t h e
affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . T h e n , g o to s t e p 1, a n d
recheck.B
23-246

c o n n e c t o r E (2P) t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1.
DTC 1302: GPS Receiver Error 1

NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
service information about the navigation s y s t e m .
G P S SIG
GPS SIG
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n t h e r e is a n internal G P S r e c e i v e r
problem.
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to follow t h e
2 3 - 177).
M a k e s u r e the v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e , a w a y f r o m
buildings.
A f t e r m a r k e t e l e c t r o n i c d e v i c e s located n e a r the
n a v i g a t i o n unit o r G P S a n t e n n a c a n potentially
interfere w i t h the o p e r a t i o n of the navigation s y s t e m .
G P S ANTENNA CONNECTOR
1. C l e a r the h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-185).
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d b a c k to O N
Is there
continuity?
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a . R e p l a c e t h e
affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . T h e n , go to s t e p 1, a n d
recheck.
10. R e c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r E (2P) a n d the
G P S antenna connector.
11. C l e a r t h e h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 5 ) .
12. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n b a c k to
O N (II).
13. C h e c k for the h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 4 ) .
Is DTC 1301
Is DTC 1302
indicated?
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
5. C h e c k for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e t e r m i n a l s at
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r E (2P).
7. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n back to
O N (II).
indicated?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the G P S A n t e n n a ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 2 ) ,
t h e n retest. If the D T C d o e s not c l e a r , r e p l a c e t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) . !
NO-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
(II).
8. C h e c k for the h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-184).

Is DTC 1302
indicated?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the G P S A n t e n n a ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 2 ) ,
t h e n retest. Ifthe D T C d o e s not c l e a r , r e p l a c e t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ).B
NO-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
23-247
Navigation System
DTC 1303: GPS Receiver Error 2
DTC 1304: Gyro Error 1
NOTE:
22- 93).
This code sets when there is an internal GPS receiver
problem.
Before you troubleshoot make sure to follow the
23- 177).
Make sure the vehicle is parked outside, away from
buildings.
Aftermarket electronic devices located near the
navigation unit or GPS antenna can potentially
interfere with the operation of the navigation system.
NOTE:
22- 93).
This code sets when there is a problem with the
internal YAW rate sensor.
23- 177).
Make sure the vehicle is parked outside, away from
buildings.
Aftermarket electronic devices located near the
navigation unit or GPS antenna can potentially
interfere with the operation of the navigation system.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON

(II).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then back to ON

(II).

time.B
time.B
23-248
DTC 1305: Gyro Error 2 : ECU Temp X X C
DTC 1306: Vehicle Speed Pulse
NOTE:
NOTE:
C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e battery c o n d i t i o n first ( s e e p a g e
2 2 - 93).
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n t h e r e is a p r o b l e m w i t h t h e
internal Y A W rate s e n s o r .
2 2 - 93).
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n t h e r e is a p r o b l e m w i t h the VSP
circuit.
B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to f o l l o w the
2 3 - 177).
2 3 - 177).
M a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e a n d a w a y
from buildings.
Aftermarket electronic d e v i c e s located near the
n a v i g a t i o n unit or GPS a n t e n n a c a n potentially
interfere w i t h t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
D o t h i s t e s t o n l y w h e n t h e v e h i c l e c a b i n t e m p e r a t u r e is
b e t w e e n - 4 F ( - 2 0 C ) a n d 158 F (70 C ) .
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n start the
engine.
3. C h e c k for t h e h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 4 ) .

O N (II).
time.B
Is DTC 1304 Indicated?

Y E S - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s
time.B
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s
4. W i t h the h e l p of a n a s s i s t a n t d r i v e t h e v e h i c l e a n d
w a t c h t h e VSP s i g n a l .
Does the VSP signal change from [0] to[1]as you drive?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
N O - D o t h e s y m p t o m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for v e h i c l e
position icon constantly leaves r o a d , m o v e s
e r r a t i c a l l y o r is v e r y far f r o m a c t u a l p o s i t i o n ( s e e p a g e
23-268).
23-249
Navigation System
DTC 1307: DVD Read Error
DTC 1402: Audio Error 2
NOTE:
NOTE:
2 2 -9 3 ) .

2 2 - 93).
i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n the n a v i g a t i o n D V D is s e v e r e l y
s c r a t c h e d o r dirty, or if t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit's D V D d r i v e
is m a l f u n c t i o n i n g .
T h i s c o d e s e t s w h e n t h e a u d i o unit detects a
m e c h a n i c a l m a l f u n c t i o n in the a u d i o d i s c c h a n g e r .
B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to follow t h e
2 3 - 177).
1. C h e c k t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D .
Is the navigation DVD the correct
the vehicle? Is it scratch
free?
color and version for
message?
Y E S - G o to D V D s c r e e n e r r o r m e s s a g e s ( s e e p a g e
23-243).
3. C l e a r the h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 5 ) .
4. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n back to O N
(II).
Is DTC 1307
indicated?
time.B
23-250
O N (II).
Is DTC 1402
N O - R e p l a c e the navigation DVD (see page 23-290),

a n d retest.
Is there a DVD error
2 3 - 177).
indicated?
Y E S - G o into the S e l f - d i a g n o s t i c F u n c t i o n in the a u d i o

unit, a n d c h e c k C D E r r o r C o d e s ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 6 1 ) . If t h e
e r r o r c o d e s is not i n d i c a t e d , g o to S y m p t o m
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for t h e a u d i o d i s c c h a n g e r . B
NO-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s
time.B
NOTE:
22- 93).
This DTC sets when a mechanical malfunction in the
navigation display is detected.
23- 177).
NOTE:
22- 93).
This DTC sets when an XM antenna malfunction is
detected, or if there is a problem with the XM circuit.
23- 177).

(II).
(II).

the XM antenna, if they are OK, do the diagnosis of
the XM antenna in the audio s y s t e m .

time.B
time.B
23-251
Navigation System
DTC 1501: Aircon System Error
7. C o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) t e r m i n a l s
No. 4 , No. 2 0 , a n d No. 21 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
DTC 2703: Aircon Diag
NOTE:
2 2 -9 3 ) .
s e r v i c e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
C h e c k for B - C A N D T C s a n d r e s o l v e t h e m before
troubleshooting.
T h e s e D T C s set w h e n a c o m m o n error between the
c l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit ( o p e n or
s h o r t ) is d e t e c t e d .
W h e n t h e ignition s w i t c h is in A C C E S S O R Y (I), t h e A/C
unit is t u r n e d off. T h e n a v i g a t i o n l o s e s c o m m u n i c a t i o n
w i t h t h e A/C unit a n d s t o r e s D T C 1501 and/or 2 7 0 3 .
T h e r e f o r e , t h e r e is a possibility that the s y s t e m is
n o r m a l e v e n t h o u g h D T C 1501 and/or 2 7 0 3 is s t o r e d .
C h e c k s y s t e m links ( s e e p a g e 23-222) with t h e e n g i n e
r u n n i n g , a n d if it a p p e a r s O K , t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s
t i m e . If it is N G , d o the f o l l o w i n g t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to follow t h e
2 3 - 177).
1. C l e a r t h e h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-185).
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n back to O N
(II).
3. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s Items m e n u
( s e e p a g e 23-222).
4. C h e c k t h e S y s t e m L i n k s .
Is the Aircon icon red?

time.B
AC SI
(LT BLU)
1
3 4 5
9 10
17 18 19 20 21 /
JUMPER AC SO
WIRE
(ORN)
23 /
25 26
ACCLK
(BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

9. P r e s s a n d hold the A U T O button, t h e n p r e s s a n d h o l d
the O F F button.
Are both HEAT/VENT indicators solid with the remaining

icons blinking?
10. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n d i s c o n n e c t
the j u m p e r w i r e .
11. D i s c o n n e c t c l i m a t e control unit c o n n e c t e r B (20P).
12. C o n n e c t t h e c l i m a t e control unit c o n n e c t o r B (20P)
t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 , N o . 9 , a n d N o . 1 0 to b o d y g r o u n d w i t h
a jumper wire.

AC CLK
(BLU)
AC SI
(LTBLU)
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 15 16 1 7 1 8 1 9
11
13 14 15
1101
18 19 2 0
AC SO
(ORN)
6. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P).
JUMPER WIRE
23-252
JUMPER WIRE

navigation unit connector B (32P) terminals No. 4, No.
20, and No. 21 individually.

navigation unit connector B (32P) terminals No. 4,
AC SI
(LTBLU)
(LT BLU)
1 2 3 4 5
'//\/\
17 18 19 20 21 / 2 3
AC SO |
(ORN)
9 10i/
25I26
AA
AA
1 2 3 4|5 / \ / /
17 18 19 20 2 1 Z 2 3
2 5 2 6
AC CLK
(BLU)
AC SO
(ORN)
AC CLK
(BLU)
9 10
YES-Go to step 14.

navigation unit and the climate control unit.B
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the navigation

unit and the climate control unit.B
NO-Go to step 18.

navigation unit connector B (32P) terminals No. 4,
19. Check for continuity between the terminals of

navigation unit connector B (32P) according to the
table.
From terminal
B4 (LTBLU)
B20 (ORN)
(LT BLU)
n
AC SO
(ORN)
1 2 3 4 5 ' / ' > / ' . / 9 10

17 18 19 20 21
23
25 26 /
To terminals
B20 (ORN), B21 (BLU)

B21(BLU)
/ \ / /
/ /
AC CLK
(BLU)


between the navigation unit and the climate control
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between the

navigation unit and the climate control unit.B
unit.B
NO-Replace the climate control unit (see page
NO-Go to step 16.
21-196).B
23-253
Navigation System
DTC 1701: Rear Camera Error
9. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
DTC 2608: Rear Camera Diag

REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
22-93).
s e r v i c e information a b o u t the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
T h e s e D T C s set w h e n a c o m m u n i c a t i o n error between
the rearview c a m e r a a n d the navigation display (open
or short) is d e t e c t e d .
CAMERA ADAPT
(5) (YEL)
general troubleshooting information.
Wire side of male terminals
(II).
Y E S - R e p l a c e the r e a r v i e w c a m e r a ( s e e p a g e
3. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u .
4. C h e c k the S y s t e m L i n k s .
Is the Rear camera icon
Is there about 5.0 V?
red?
23-295).B
10. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit
2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 8 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
time.B
rearview camera 6P connector.
Are there connections
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 2 3 24
26 2 7 2 8
CAMERA ADAPT
(YEL)
1
OK?
NO-Repair poor connection or loose terminal.B

7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r .
Is there about 5.0 V?

Y E S - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the n a v i g a t i o n
d i s p l a y unit a n d the r e a r v i e w
camera.B
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
23-293).B
23-254
DTC 2601: Display Diag: Connect
8. C o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) t e r m i n a l s
No. 10 a n d No. 2 6 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
NOTE:
2 2 - 93).

GA-NET
E C U BUS+
(BLK)
T h i s D T C s s e t s w h e n a G A - N E T b u s p r o b l e m is
detected ( o p e n or s h o r t ) , or a n internal E C U B U S
circuit p r o b l e m is d e t e c t e d ( o p e n o r s h o r t ) .
1 |2|3|4|5
17 18 19 20 21
troubleshooting.

(II).
All
AAM
AA/
GA-NET
ECU BUS(WHT)
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to follow the

2 3 - 177).
o/
25 26
JUMPER WIRE

9. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit
2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 5 a n d No. 19.
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t the S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u

( s e e p a g e 23-222).
GA-NET E C U BUS+
(BLK)
Is the Display
icon
red?
OK?
N O - R e p a i r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s , a n d
r e c h e c k the s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c m o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 2 2 ) .
7. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) a n d t h e
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
9 10 11 12 13
26 27 28
GA-NET E C U B U S (WHT)

time.B
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P), a u d i o unit
c o n n e c t o r C ( 1 4 P ) , U S B a d a p t e r unit c o n n e c t o r A
(14P), a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (14P).
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 3 24 /

Is there
continuity?
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit.
R e p l a c e the affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . B
10. D i s c o n n e c t the j u m p e r w i r e .
11. D i s c o n n e c t t h e s e units c o n n e c t o r :
A u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P)
U S B a d a p t e r unit c o n n e c t o r A (14P)
R e a r controller a n d s c r e e n 2 4 P c o n n e c t o r (With rear
entertainment system)
X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (14P)
(cont'd)
23-255
Navigation System
12. C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit
2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 5 a n d N o . 19, a n d
b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 17.
Is the Display icon
red?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 7 .
GA-NET B U S +
(BLK)
time.B
GA-NET E C U B U S +
(BLK)
18. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P), a n d t h e n

ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 2 3 24 /
2 6 2 7 28
GA-NET
BUS(WHT)
GA-NET E C U B U S (WHT)
20. Check the S y s t e m Links.

Is there
Is the Display icon
continuity?
N O - T h e r e is a s h o r t circuit in t h e a u d i o unit. R e p l a c e
t h e a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 23-125).B
N O - G o to s t e p 1 3 .
13. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 5
a n d N o . 19 individually.
C5A-NET E C U G US+ (BLK)
i
5
r 10 11
rt
1213/
2 I 3 4
6
8 9
|15 16 17 18 19|20 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 / 2 6 2 7 2 8
~7
GA-NET ECU
CD)
2 2 . R e c o n n e c t a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P).
2 3 . D i s c o n n e c t X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (14P), a n d t h e n
turn t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
. ....
red?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 1 .
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t in t h e w i r e ( s ) . B
19. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d S e l e c t t h e S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s M e n u
(see page 23-222).
Bus-
2 4 . G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d S e l e c t t h e S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s M e n u
(see page 23-222).
25. Check the S y s t e m Links.
Is the Display icon
red?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 6 .
Is there
continuity?
b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit a n d t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d
harness.B
14. R e c o n n e c t all t h e c o n n e c t o r s , t h e n t u r n t h e ignition
s w i t c h to O N (II).
15. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u
(see page 23-222).
23-256
N O - T h e r e is a s h o r t circuit in t h e X M r e c e i v e r .
Replace the X M receiver (see page 23-127).B
DTC 2602: Display Diag: ROM
27. D i s c o n n e c t U S B a d a p t e r unit c o n n e c t o r A (14P), a n d

t h e n turn the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
C h e c k the v e h i c l e battery condition first ( s e e p a g e
Is the Display
icon
red?
YES W i t h rear e n t e r t a i n m e n t s y s t e m , go to step 2 9 .

W i t h o u t rear e n t e r t a i n m e n t s y s t e m , r e p l a c e the
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e 23-293).
N O - T h e r e is a s h o r t circuit in t h e U S B a d a p t e r unit.
R e p l a c e the U S B a d a p t e r unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) .
NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
s e r v i c e information a b o u t t h e navigation s y s t e m .
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a m a l f u n c t i o n is detected in t h e
navigation d i s p l a y .
troubleshooting.
2 3 - 177).
30. D i s c o n n e c t the rear controller a n d s c r e e n 24P

c o n n e c t o r , a n d t h e n turn the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
3 1 . C h e c k the S y s t e m L i n k s .
3. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e Unit
C h e c k in the Detail Information & S e t t i n g ( s e e p a g e
23-222).
Is the Display
icon
red?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the navigation d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
23-293).B
N O - T h e r e is a s h o r t circuit in t h e rear controller a n d
s c r e e n . R e p l a c e the rear controller a n d s c r e e n ( s e e
page 2 3 - 1 7 2 ) . B
(II).
4. C h e c k t h e D i s p l a y test,
/s the ROM
NG?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e navigation d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
23-293).
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
23-257
Navigation System
DTC 2603: Display Diag: RAM
DTC 2605: H/U Diag: Connect
NOTE:
NOTE:

2 2 - 93).
2 2 - 93).
s e r v i c e information a b o u t the navigation s y s t e m .
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a malfunction is detected in t h e
navigation display.
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m ( o p e n o r short) is
detected in t h e G A - N E T B U S .
troubleshooting.
troubleshooting.
B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t m a k e s u r e to follow t h e
2 3 - 177).
2 3 - 177).
1. C l e a r t h e h a r d e r r o r c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-185).
1. C l e a r t h e h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-185).
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n back to O N
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n b a c k to O N

(II).
(H).
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e Unit
C h e c k in t h e Detail Information & Setting ( s e e p a g e
23-222).
4 . C h e c k the D i s p l a y test.
Is the RAM
NG?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the navigation d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
23-293).B
time.B
3. C h e c k for t h e h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-184).

Is Hard Error 2601
Indicated?
Y E S - D o the 2601 t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
N O - G o to s t e p 4 .
4. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u
( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the Radio Icon
red?
time.B
a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P), X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r
A (14P), a n d navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
OK?
NO-Repair poor connections or loose terminals, a n d
recheck the self-diagnosis m o d e (see page 23-222).B
8. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P), X M r e c e i v e r
c o n n e c t o r A (14P), U S B a d a p t e r unit c o n n e c t o r A
(14P), a n d navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
23-258
9. C o n n e c t the a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C (14P) t e r m i n a l s

No. 9 a n d No. 10 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
DTC 2607: XM Diag

NOTE:
5 6
113 14
9 10 11
GA-NET B U S (WHT)
GA-NET BUS+
(BLK)
J U M P E R WIRE

2 2 - 93).
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m (open or s h o r t ) is
d e t e c t e d in the G A - N E T B U S .
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , m a k e s u r e to f o l l o w the
2 3 - 177).
C h e c k for a u d i o related D T C s a n d repair t h e m first.

2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s No. 3 a n d No. 17.
1. C l e a r the h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 23-185).

2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n back O N (II).
3. C h e c k for the h a r d error c o d e ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 4 ) .
Is Hard Error 2601
indicated?
Y E S - D o the 2601 t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
GA-NET BUS+
(BLK)
6 / } 8 9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
2 4
\/ 26 27 28
GA-NET B U S (WHT)
4. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t the SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u

( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the XM icon
red?
Is there
continuity?
time.B
YES-Refer to the a u d i o unit t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the a u d i o unit

and the navigation display unit.H
7. C h e c k for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s at X M
r e c e i v e r unit c o n n e c t o r , satellite s i g n a l a n t e n n a
c o n n e c t o r , a n d navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
Are the connections
OK?
N O - R e p a i r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s . H
8. D i s c o n n e c t X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (14P), the
navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r , U S B a d a p t e r
unit c o n n e c t o r A (14P), a n d a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r C
(14P).
(cont'd)
23-259
Navigation System
9. C o n n e c t t h e X M r e c e i v e r unit c o n n e c t o r A (14P)
t e r m i n a l s No. 9 a n d N o . 10 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
Is DTC 2605
indicated?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e original a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e
23-125).B
N O - R e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
1 2
I X
5 6
13 14
9 10 11
GA-NET B U S (WHT)
GA-NET BUS+
(BLK)
J U M P E R WIRE
Wire side o f female terminals

2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s No. 3 a n d N o . 1 7 .
GA-NET B U S +
(BLK)
n
Is there
3 4
6 /
9 10 11 1 2 1 3 /
15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3 | 2 4 / | 2 6 | 2 7 2 8
GA-NET B U S (WHT)

continuity?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 1 .
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit a n d t h e X M r e c e i v e r . R e p l a c e
t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s .
11. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e
23-125).
14. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n back to
O N (II).
23-260
23-293).B
DTC 2609: VRAM Diag
DTC 2610: DRAM Diag
NOTE:
NOTE:

2 2 - 93).

2 2 - 93).
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m w i t h the navigation unit

internal V R A M is d e t e c t e d .
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m w i t h the navigation unit

internal D R A M is d e t e c t e d .

2 3 - 177).

(H).
2 3 - 177).
(II).
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t the S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s Items m e n u

( s e e p a g e 23-222).
3. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s Items m e n u

( s e e p a g e 23-222).
4. S e l e c t the S y s t e m L i n k s , t h e n s e l e c t the E C U Info.
4. S e l e c t the S y s t e m L i n k s , t h e n s e l e c t t h e E C U Info.
Is V-RAM OK
indicated?
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this
Is DRAM
OK
indicated?
time.B
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this

time.H
N O - R e p l a c e the navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
N O - R e p l a c e the navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
23-261
Navigation System
DTC 2701: GPS Diag: Antenna
DTC 2702: GPS Diag: Receiver in Navi ECU
NOTE:
NOTE:

2 2 - 93).

2 2 - 93).
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m is d e t e c t e d in the G P S
antenna.
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m is d e t e c t e d in the G P S
antenna.
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t m a k e s u r e to follow t h e
2 3 - 177).
2 3 - 177).
M a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e , a w a y f r o m
buildings.
M a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e a n d a w a y
from buildings.
C h e c k for electronic aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s ( p o s s i b l y

h i d d e n ) m o u n t e d n e a r t h e G P S a n t e n n a or the
C h e c k for e l e c t r o n i c aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s ( p o s s i b l y
h i d d e n ) m o u n t e d n e a r t h e G P S a n t e n n a o r the
navigation unit.
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n b a c k to O N

(II).
(II).
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t the SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in t h e S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u
( s e e p a g e 23-222).
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d s e l e c t t h e S e l f D i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s I t e m s m e n u

( s e e p a g e 23-222).
4. S e l e c t the S y s t e m L i n k s , t h e n s e l e c t the G P S A n t .
4. S e l e c t the S y s t e m L i n k s , t h e n s e l e c t t h e G P S A n t .
Is Antenna OK
indicated?
Is Receiver
in Navi ECU OK
indicated?
YES-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
time.B
N O - R e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ).B

6. C h e c k for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s at n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r E (2P).
Is the connection
OK?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the G P S a n t e n n a ( s e e p a g e 23-292).B
NO-Repair poor connection.B
23-262
DTC 2705: HFL Diag
DTC 2706: ECU Temp XX C
NOTE:
NOTE:

2 2 - 93).
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n the navigation unit Y A W s e n s o r ' s

t e m p e r a t u r e is out of its s p e c i f i e d r a n g e .
T h i s D T C s e t s w h e n a p r o b l e m detected in the
c o n n e c t i n g l i n e s (open/short) or in the H F L u n i t .
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t m a k e s u r e to follow the

23-177).
C h e c k for a n y B - C A N D T C s a n d r e p a i r t h e m first.
Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t m a k e s u r e to follow the
2 3 - 177).
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n back to
O N (II).
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d s e l e c t the SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s Items m e n u
( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the HFL icon
Do this test o n l y w h e n the v e h i c l e c a b i n t e m p e r a t u r e is

b e t w e e n - 4 F ( - 2 0 C ) a n d 158 F (70 C ) .
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n back
O N (II).
Is DTC 2706
indicated?
time.B
red?
4. C h e c k the c o o l i n g fan o p e n i n g o n the b a c k of the

time.B
6. C o n n e c t the H D S to the D L C .
Is the cooling fan opening blocked or
covered?
Y E S - C l e a n or c l e a r the fan o p e n i n g , t h e n r e t e s t . B
N O - R e p l a c e the navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ).B

Are any HFL DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - R e f e r to the H F L D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B ( s e e
p a g e 23-307)
N O - R e f e r to the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B ( s e e p a g e 23-326)
23-263
Navigation System
11. D i s c o n n e c t the H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e 7 P
connector.
DTC 2707: MIC Diag

NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
C h e c k for a n y B - C A N D T C s a n d r e p a i r t h e m first.
2 3 - 177).

13. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P connector
t e r m i n a l s No. 6 a n d No. 7 individually.
A C C (PUR)
+B (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(ID.
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d s e l e c t the SelfD i a g n o s i s M o d e in the S e l e c t D i a g n o s i s Items m e n u
( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the Mic icon

Is there battery
red?
voltage?
YES-
'09 m o d e l : G o to s t e p 14.
'10 m o d e l : G o to s t e p 16.
H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r ,
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P connector, and
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r D (5P).
Are the connections
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the No. 17 (20

A ) f u s e in the u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay b o x , the No. 3 5
(10 A ) f u s e in the u n d e r - d a s h fuse/ relay b o x a n d the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone.B
15. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C
m i c r o p h o n e 7 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d b o d y
ground.
OK?
N O - R e p a i r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s . B
Is DTC B1775 or B1776
indicated?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the i n d i c a t e d D T C . B
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND (BLK)
8. S e l e c t the M i c in the S y s t e m L i n k s .
9. S e l e c t the n a v i g a t i o n T A L K button a n d c h e c k the M i c
Level.
Is the microphone
level OK?
YES-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this
Is there
continuity?
time.B
Y E S - R e p l a c e the H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e . B
N O - R e p l a c e the H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e
(see page 23-294).fl
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the g r o u n d w i r e to G701 .
23-264
17. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n
HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone 7P connector terminal No. 2 and body
20. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n H a n d s F r e e L i n k control

unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 8 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
ground.
-r
2 3 4 5 6 | 7
15 16 17 18 /
2 0 21
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
MIC SIG- (BRN)
MIC- (YEL)

Y E S - R e p l a c e the HFL-navigation-ANC
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit ( s e e
microphone
(see page 2 3 - 2 9 4 ) .
p a g e 23-337).
NO-Goto step21.
2 1 . C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l N o . 16 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 14 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
n
MIC- (YEL)
1 2 3
15 16 17 18
//
6 7 8 / V 1 1 1 I 1 2 13 14
20 21
25 26 27 28
7 8
12 13 14 15 16
MIC SIG- (BRN)

Y E S - T h e r e i s a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected
Y E S - T h e r e i s a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit.
R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . B
N O - G o to s t e p 2 2 .
19. D i s c o n n e c t the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P

connector.
(cont'd)
23-265
Navigation System
2 2 . C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n navigation unit
c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l No. 4 a n d body g r o u n d .
No picture is displayed
Diagnostic Test: Navi System Link

GND (BLK)
p
p '
1 2
4
5 6 7 8
NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
C h e c k if the Day/Night button h a s b e e n p r e s s e d a n d
t u r n e d off t h e d i s p l a y , c a u s i n g t h e d i s p l a y to t u r n off
(see o w n e r ' s m a n u a l for m o r e information).
C h e c k the c o n n e c t o r s for poor c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e
terminals.
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .

N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n navigation unit
c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l No. 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d
(G503).B
C h e c k for a n y B - C A N D T C s a n d repair t h e m first.

Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e the
antitheft c o d e for t h e navigation s y s t e m .
M a k e s u r e the c o r r e c t navigation D V D (color a n d
v e r s i o n ) is installed.
Inspect the D V D for dirt or d a m a g e .
1. C h e c k the No. 23 (10 A ) f u s e in the u n d e r - h o o d
fuse/relay box a n d the No. 3 5 (10 A ) f u s e in the
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box, a n d reinstall the f u s e s if
t h e y are O K .
Are the fuses
OK?
N O - R e p l a c e the f u s e , a n d r e c h e c k . B
3. O p e r a t e the r a d i o , a n d listen to the a u d i o .
Can you hear the
audio?
N O - C h e c k the A C C c i r c u i t . B
5. Do the f o r c e d starting of the d i s p l a y ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 290).
Is the diagnosis
displayed?
menu for the picture
diagnosis
Y E S - G o into S e l f - D i a g n o s i s m o d e to c h e c k the
links.B
23-266
6. S h i e l d the d i s p l a y unit f r o m the s u n with y o u r h a n d ,

a n d c h e c k that the d i s p l a y is b a c k lit (only b a c k light is
9. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l No. 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
ON.).
Can you see the back
light?
GND (BLK)
p 1' 2
4
5 6 7 8
7. M a k e s u r e the ignition s w i t c h is t u r n e d to O N (II).

n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d

+ B(WHT)
ACC (PUR)
p
H
1 2 / 4
5 6 7 8
Is there less
than 0.2 V?
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e
p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d retest. I f t h e p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y ,
r e p l a c e the original n a v i g a t i o n u n i t . B
N O - R e p a i r o p e n or high r e s i s t a n c e in the w i r e
b e t w e e n the n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d b o d y g r o u n d
(G503).B

Is there battery
voltage?
N O - l f the + B w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e , repair o p e n
10. M a k e s u r e the ignition s w i t c h is t u r n e d to O N (II).

11. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s No. 1
a n d No. 2 individually.
in the w i r e b e t w e e n the u n d e r - d a s h f u s e relay box

a n d the n a v i g a t i o n unit. If the A C C w i r e d o e s not h a v e
v o l t a g e , r e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x a n d the n a v i g a t i o n u n i t . B
+ B(WHT) ACC (PUR)

n
h -
12
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 /
26 27 28
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - l f the + B w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e , repair o p e n
in the w i r e b e t w e e n the u n d e r - d a s h f u s e relay box
a n d the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r . I f t h e
A C C w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e , repair o p e n in the
w i r e b e t w e e n the u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box a n d the
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r . B
(cont'd)
23-267
Navigation System
12. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n navigation d i s p l a y unit
2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 10 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
Vehicle position icon constantly leaves road,

moves erratically, or is very far from actual
position
NOTE:
GND (BLK)
3
1
5
...
8
I
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 3 24 /
26 27 28
2 2 - 93).
C h e c k that t h e G P S a n t e n n a is p l u g g e d i n .
C h e c k the G P S s i g n a l r e c e p t i o n in a n o p e n a r e a .
M a k e s u r e t h e c o r r e c t n a v i g a t i o n D V D (color a n d
v e r s i o n ) is i n s t a l l e d .
I n s p e c t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D for dirt or d a m a g e .

1. C h e c k t h e G P S i c o n o n the n a v i g a t i o n m a p s c r e e n .

Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e navigation d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e
23-293).B
N O - R e p a i r o p e n or high r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit a n d b o d y g r o u n d (G403) ( s e e
p a g e 22-42).B
Is the GPS icon white?

Y E S - D o the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for G P S i c o n is w h i t e or
not s h o w n ( s e e p a g e 23-274).B
2. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d u s e t h e Y a w R a t e
test ( s e e p a g e 23-238) to c h e c k t h e y a w rate s e n s o r .
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u , a n d u s e t h e C a r S t a t u s
test ( s e e p a g e 23-239) to c h e c k t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d
pulse.
Are the yaw rate sensor and vehicle speed pulse OK?
Y E S - T h e condition m a y be n o r m a l . C h e c k to s e e ifthe
p r o b l e m o c c u r s in t h e s a m e p l a c e in a k n o w n - g o o d
v e h i c l e w i t h t h e s a m e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n . If it d o e s , t h e
p r o b l e m c o u l d be in t h e d a t a b a s e . G o to s t e p 4 .
NO-lf the p r o b l e m is the y a w rate s e n s o r , r e p l a c e t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291). Ifthe p r o b l e m is t h e
v e h i c l e s p e e d p u l s e , c h e c k for a n o p e n in the w i r e
b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e P C M . I f t h e w i r e
is O K , t r o u b l e s h o o t the v e h i c l e s p e e d s i g n a l c i r c u i t . B
4. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d n a v i g a t i o n unit w i t h t h e
s a m e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n , a n d c h e c k to s e e i f t h e
p r o b l e m o c c u r s in the s a m e p l a c e .
Does the problem occur in the same place?

Y E S - T h e p r o b l e m is in the d a t a b a s e . R e p o r t t h e
p r o b l e m a c c o r d i n g to t h e N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m M a n u a l
under Reporting E r r o r s . B
N O - R e p l a c e the original n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e
23- 291).B
23-268
Picture is missing a color or tone or is an odd

color
5. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s of
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) a c c o r d i n g to t h e
table.
NOTE:
B1 ( W H T )
B2 ( R E D ) , B 1 7 ( Y E L ) , B 1 8
(GRN)
B17 ( Y E L ) , B 1 8 ( G R N )
B K W H T ) , B2(RED), B17
(YEL), B18(GRN),B19(BLK)
B2 ( R E D )
B3 (BRN)
A l w a y s c h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r
loose terminals.
C h e c k for aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s that m a y interfere
with the navigation s y s t e m .
I n s p e c t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D for dirt o r d a m a g e .
Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e anti-theft
c o d e for t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
1. G o into t h e Detail Information & S e t t i n g s s e l e c t
M o n i t o r C h e c k , a n d u s e R G B C o l o r test u n d e r Monitor
Check (see page 23-226).
Are all three circles shown (red, green, and blue)?

Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e c o m p a r e t h e i m a g e
to a k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e u n d e r t h e s a m e
conditions.!
9 1 0 /
17 18 19 20 21
C h e c k t h e n a v i g a t i o n s c r e e n s e t t i n g s for b r i g h t n e s s ,
c o n t r a s t black level a n d t h e c o l o r s c r e e n for m a p c o l o r
a n d m e n u color.
For problems with the rearview c a m e r a , do the
r e a r v i e w c a m e r a d o e s not c o m e o n o r w o r k p r o p e r l y
troubleshooting.
To terminals
From terminal
22-93).
23
25 26

n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit.
R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s .
6. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n navigation unit
c o n n e c t o r B (32P) a n d b o d y g r o u n d a c c o r d i n g to t h e
table.
Navigation unit connector
Wire color
B1
B2
B17
WHT
RED
YEL
3. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) a n d t h e
4. C h e c k for l o o s e t e r m i n a l s at n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r
B (32P) a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
Are there loose
terminals?
YES-Repair the t e r m i n a l . !
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n g in t h e w i r e
b e t w e e n t h e navigation unit a n d t h e navigation
d i s p l a y unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d harness.I
(cont'd)
23-269
Navigation System
7. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminals of navigation unit connector B (32P) and the
navigation display unit 28P connector based on the
missing color(s).
Missing
color
Navigation
unit
connector
B17
B2
B1
Blue
Green
Red
Navigation
display unit
connector
22
9
8
Wire
color
YEL
RED
WHT
//
17 18 19 20 21
9 10
23
25 26
/V
//
NOTE:
22-93).
Always check the connectors for poor connections or
loose terminals.
Check for aftermarket accessories that may interfere
w i t h the navigation system.
Make sure the correct navigation DVD (color and
version) is installed.
Inspect the navigation DVD for dirt or damage.
For problems w i t h the rearview camera, do the

rearview camera does not come on or w o r k properly
troubleshooting.
Before troubleshooting, make sure y o u have anti-theft
code for the audio system and the navigation system.
1
3
Diagnostic Test: Monitor Check
Check the navigation screen settings for brightness,

contrast, black level and the color screen for map color
and menu color.
Picture has lines or rolls
9 10 11 12 13 /
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 /
26 27 28
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-291). If
the problem is still unresolved, replace the navigation
display unit (see page 2 3 - 2 9 3 ) .
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the
navigation display unit and the navigation unit. Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
navigation display unit and navigation unit. If a poor
connection or loose terminal is f o u n d , replace the
1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly

hidden) mounted near the navigation display unit or
the navigation unit.
Are there any electronic
accessories?
YES-Disable the accessories, and recheck.B

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Start up the navigation picture.
Is the picture scrolling horizontally (left to right or right to
left)?
YES-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (32P) and the
navigation display unit 28P connector.
23-270
5. C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r B (32P) t e r m i n a l N o . 18 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
7. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n navigation unit

c o n n e c t o r B (32P) t e r m i n a l No.18 a n d n a v i g a t i o n
d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 3 .
5 /
17 18 19 20 2 1 1 / 23
10
25 26
C-SIG (GRN)
I17| j218| j319i J20121

4 | 5 |\/\23
/ M /\/\25
! 9 | )26
1 0 \] // \M/ [/ M / 1 7
C-SIG (GRN)
1 I 2 [ 3 I 4 I 5 j 6 \/\ 8 9 1011 l l 2 l l 3 ] / 7 [
[15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21 2 2 2 3 24 / 26 27J28
' C-SIG (GRN)
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in the w i r e
b e t w e e n the n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d the n a v i g a t i o n
d i s p l a y unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . l
6. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P) a c c o r d i n g to the
table.
From terminal
B18 (GRN)
To terminals
A\AA\ 9
2 3 4 5
17 18 19 20 21 /
23
10
AA A
A
/ 25 26
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d the navigation d i s p l a y unit.
R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . H
8. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d navigation d i s p l a y unit ( s e e
page 23-293), and recheck.
Is the picture OK?
B1 ( W H T ) , B 2 ( R E D ) , B 1 7
(YEL), B19(BLK)
Y E S - C h e c k for l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , t h e n r e p l a c e t h e
original n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 3 ) .

N O - C h e c k for l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , a n d r e c h e c k . If a
p o o r c o n n e c t i o n or l o o s e t e r m i n a l is f o u n d , r e p l a c e
t h e s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . If no poor or l o o s e t e r m i n a l s a r e
f o u n d , substitute a k n o w n - g o o d n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e
p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d r e c h e c k . Ifthe p r o b l e m is g o n e ,
r e p l a c e the original navigation unit ( s e e p a g e
23-291 ) .

N O - T h e r e is a s h o r t in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit.
23-271
Navigation System
Interface dial and/or buttons do not work
4. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n t h e interface dial 5 P
NOTE:
22-93).
C o n f i r m t h e c o r r e c t D V D c o l o r a n d v e r s i o n d i s c is
installed in t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit, a s t h e w r o n g D V D o r
software version can c a u s e a hardware malfunction.
->
4
A C C (PUR)
C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e
terminals.
I n s p e c t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D for dirt o r d a m a g e .
Before troubleshooting, m a k e s u r e y o u have the
anti-theft c o d e for t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d t h e
navigation s y s t e m .
After t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , e n t e r t h e anti-theft c o d e s for
the a u d i o s y s t e m a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m (if
equipped).
1. Start t h e v e h i c l e .
2. U s e t h e interface buttons a n d j o g dial o n t h e
navigation m a p s c r e e n .
Do the buttons and interface dial and/or jog dial work

properly?

N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e u n d e r - d a s h
fuse/relay b o x a n d the interface d i a l . B
5. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n interface dial 5 P
Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e . B
3. G o into t h e Detail Information & S e t t i n g s s e l e c t Unit

C h e c k , a n d u s e H a r d K e y t e s t u n d e r Unit C h e c k ( s e e
page 23-229).
4
GND (BLK)
Does the interface dial and/or joystick work properly?

p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n
g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e original n a v i g a t i o n u n i t . B

N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e interface dial
a n d b o d y g r o u n d ( G 4 0 3 ) ( s e e p a g e 22-42).B
7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e interface dial 5 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r B (32P).
23-272

connector B (32P) terminal No. 23 and interface dial
5P connectorterminal No. 1.

connector B (32P) terminals No. 23 and body g r o u n d .

2 3 4
17 18 19 20 21
1
1 2 3 4 5
17 18 19 20 21
23
9 10
25 26
'A/
/
9 10
25 26
J O G (WHT)
//
23
J O G (WHT)
J O G (WHT)
s?
1 2
3 4
YES-There is a short to body g r o u n d in the wire.

Replace the affected shielded harness.B
YES-Go to step 9.
IMO-There is an open in the wire between the interface
dial and the navigation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
11. Substitute a known-good interface dial (see page

Is the system OK?
YES-Replace the original interface dial (see page

23-294).B
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-291 ).l

p
2 3 4 5
17 18 19 20 21
23
J O G (WHT)
n
9 10
25 26
\/\/\y
\ / ' / \ /
/\
/
/
J O G S H (BRN)
YES-There is a short in the wire. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
23-273
Navigation System
GPS icon is white or not shown on the map
screen
Voice guidance cannot be heard, is broken up,

or there is static
NOTE:
NOTE:

2 2 - 93).
22-93).
W i t h g o o d r e c e p t i o n , t h e icon is n o r m a l l y g r e e n .
C h e c k for a n y C A N D T C s a n d repair t h e m first.
M a k e s u r e t h e G P S a n t e n n a is p l u g g e d in.
C h e c k for a n y aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s or metallic

w i n d o w tinting that m a y be interfering w i t h the G P S
I n s p e c t the n a v i g a t i o n D V D for dirt or d a m a g e .
signal.
C h e c k the n a v i g a t i o n v o l u m e level ( s e e O w n e r ' s

Manual).
M a k e s u r e the v e h i c l e is p a r k e d o u t s i d e a n d a w a y
from buildings.
Refer to G P S Information ( s e e p a g e 23-236) for
real-time satellite r e c e p t i o n d i s p l a y .
1. C h e c k for aftermarket m e t a l l i c w i n d o w tint o n t h e
w i n d s h i e l d a n d e l e c t r o n i c aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s
( p o s s i b l y h i d d e n ) m o u n t e d n e a r the G P S a n t e n n a o r
the n a v i g a t i o n unit.
Is there aftermarket
metallic
window
tint or
electronic
C h e c k the c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e
terminals.
c o d e s for the a u d i o s y s t e m a n d n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
the a u d i o s y s t e m a n d n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
2. P r e s s the d i s p l a y unit S E T - U P button.
accessories?
Y E S - R e m o v e tint o r the a c c e s s o r i e s , a n d r e c h e c k . B
3. C h e c k the v o l u m e a n d v o i c e f e e d b a c k setting for t h e

n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m in s e t - u p .
Is either set to

3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e the Navi
S y s t e m Link d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 23-222) to c h e c k t h e
G P S antenna.
OFF?
Y E S - S e t the v o i c e f e e d b a c k to O N a n d s e l e c t a n
a u d i b l e level for the v o l u m e . B
4. C h e c k the a u d i o s y s t e m o p e r a t i o n .
Is the GPS Ant icon
red?
Y E S - C h e c k for a k i n k e d , c r u s h e d , or d i s c o n n e c t e d
G P S a n t e n n a w i r e . If icon is still r e d , r e p l a c e t h e G P S
a n t e n n a ( s e e p a g e 23-292). If the s y m p t o m is still
p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the h a r n e s s b e t w e e n the navigation
unit a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a .
N O - C h e c k that nothing is blocking the G P S a n t e n n a
located in the d a s h , a n d r e c h e c k . S u b s t i t u t e a
known-good G P S antenna, and recheck.B
If the s y m p t o m is g o n e , r e p l a c e the G P S a n t e n n a .
If the s y m p t o m is still p r e s e n t , substitute a
k n o w n - g o o d navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d
r e c h e c k . If the s y m p t o m is g o n e , r e p l a c e the
original navigation unit.
Can you hear the audio
system?
NO-Troubleshoot audio s y s t e m . B
Are there any Hard Error Codes
stored?
Y E S - R e f e r to t h e H a r d E r r o r C o d e
troubleshooting.B
6. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 125), a n d r e c h e c k .
Is the system
OK?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) . B
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ).B
23-274
Voice control does not work/respond
Diagnostic Test: Mic Level
NOTE:
HFL-navigation- A N C microphone 7P connector

t e r m i n a l s No. 6 a n d No. 7 individually.
22-93).
A C C (PUR)
+B (WHT)
1 2
4 5
CO
CO
C h e c k for a n y C A N D T C s a n d r e p a i r t h e m first.
B e f o r e a s s u m i n g that a v o i c e c o m p l a i n t is h a r d w a r e
r e l a t e d , e n s u r e that t h e v o i c e control s y s t e m is b e i n g
operated correctly.
- M a k e s u r e y o u a r e o n t h e c o r r e c t s c r e e n w h e n trying
to i s s u e a v o i c e c o m m a n d . F o r i n s t a n c e , t h e
c o m m a n d F i n d t h e n e a r e s t Italian R e s t a u r a n t o n l y
w o r k s on Map s c r e e n . (See the Navigation S y s t e m
m a n u a l for a c o m p l e t e list of a l l o w e d v o i c e
YES-
c o m m a n d s for the i n f o r m a t i o n b e i n g d i s p l a y e d ) .
- C l o s e the w i n d o w s a n d s u n r o o f .
- S e t the fan s p e e d to l o w (1 or 2 ) .
- A d j u s t the air f l o w f r o m t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g v e n t s s o
'09 m o d e l : G o to 3.
'10 m o d e l : G o to s t e p 4.
N O - l f the +B w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e , r e p a i r o p e n
that t h e y do not b l o w a g a i n s t the m i c r o p h o n e o n t h e
in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e u n d e r - h o o d fuse/ r e l a y b o x
ceiling.
a n d the HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P
- P a u s e after p r e s s i n g t h e n a v i g a t i o n T A L K button
t h e n g i v e a v o i c e c o m m a n d c l e a r l y in a natural
speaking voice.
- Ifthe s y s t e m cannot recognize your c o m m a n d ,
speak louder.
- If the m i c r o p h o n e p i c k s u p v o i c e s o t h e r t h a n y o u r s ,
t h e s y s t e m m a y not interpret y o u r v o i c e c o m m a n d s
c o n n e c t o r . I f t h e A C C w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e ,
repair o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the u n d e r - d a s h
fuse/relay b o x a n d the
HFL-navigation-ANC
m i c r o p h o n e 7P c o n n e c t o r . B
3. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n
HFL-navigation-ANC
m i c r o p h o n e 7 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d b o d y
ground.
correctly.
- If y o u s p e a k a c o m m a n d w i t h s o m e t h i n g in y o u r
m o u t h , or y o u r v o i c e is too h u s k y , the s y s t e m m a y
misunderstand your command.
C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e
terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND (BLK)
C h e c k for a l o o s e roof c o n s o l e m i c r o p h o n e ; if it's

l o o s e , tighten it.
Before troubleshooting, m a k e s u r e y o u have the
(X)
anti-theft c o d e s for the a u d i o s y s t e m a n d n a v i g a t i o n

s y s t e m (if e q u i p p e d ) .
After t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , e n t e r the anti-theft c o d e s for
the audio s y s t e m .
D e t e r m i n e i f t h e p r o b l e m o n l y h a p p e n s to o n e p e r s o n ,
o r e v e r y o n e w h o u s e s the s y s t e m .
Ifthe s y s t e m only has a problem with one person's
v o i c e , t h i s s h o u l d be c o n s i d e r e d a s y s t e m limitation.
Is there 0.2 V or less?

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n t h e H F L navigation-ANC microphone and body ground
(G70D.B
(cont'd)
23-275
Navigation System
4. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0)
5. Disconnect the HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P
connector.
microphone 7P connectorterminal No. 2 and body
ground.

1 2 3
15 16 17 18 /
7 8
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
20 21
MIC SIG- (BRN)
MIC- (YEL)
page 23-337).B

connector C (16P) terminal No. 16 and body g r o u n d .
YES-Go to step 12.

IMO-Go t o step 7.

unit28P connectorterminal No. 14 and body ground.
/ /
HANDSFREELINK C O N T R O L UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
15 16 17 18
20 21
12 13 14 15 16
MIC- (YEL)
MIC S I G - (BRN)
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
YES-There is an open in the w i r e between the
HandsFreeLink control unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
connector.
23-276
YES-There i s an open in the wire between the
navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit.
Replace the affected shielded harness.B

c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l N o . 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
16. C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 8 a n d
N o . 16 i n d i v i d u a l l y .

GND (BLK)
CM

M I C S I G + (YEL)
^--r
r
/
12 13 14 15 16
MIC SIG- (BRN)

N O - R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l N o . 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d
(G503).l
12. G o into t h e S e l f - D i a g n o s i s M o d e , s e l e c t M i c Icon
M e n u , a n d u s e the Mic Level test under Functional
S e t u p ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 3 3 ) to c h e c k t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e
b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k
c o n t r o l unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
N O - G o to s t e p 1 7 .
c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 8 a n d N o . 16.
navigation Talk a n d Back buttons.
Are the navigation TALK and BACK buttons
operational?

MIC SIG+ (YEL)
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 3 .
N O - C h e c k for a n o p e n o r s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d o n
13. U s e t h e M i c L e v e l d i a g n o s t i c u n d e r F u n c t i o n a l S e t u p
(see p a g e 23-233) to c h e c k t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e
microphone.
Is the microphone
r
7
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 2 . 1
IJ
12 13 14 15 16
MIC SIG- (BRN)
operational?
Y E S - C h e c k t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e v o i c e control s y s t e m
(see t h e N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m M a n u a l ) .
14. D i s c o n n e c t t h e H n a d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit 2 8 P
connector.
15. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r C (16P).
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit.
(cont'd)
23-277
Navigation System
c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l s No. 8 a n d No 16 to No. 1 5 ,
DVD read error messages

Diagnostic Test: Car Status
individually.
M I C S I G + (YEL)
y
NOTE:
2 2 -9 3 ) .
7 8
12 13 14 15 16
I n s p e c t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D for s c r a t c h e s o r d a m a g e
(see page 23-181).
MIC S I G S H
(GRY)
MICSIG(BRN)
n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit.
R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
N O - S u b s t i t u t e k n o w n - g o o d c o m p o n e n t s in t h i s o r d e r
until t h e p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y :
Refer to G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for a list of c o m m o n

DVD s c r e e n error m e s s a g e s a n d the probable c a u s e s
(see page 23-243).
G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e t h e C a r S t a t u s
d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 3 9 ) to c h e c k t h e s t a t u s of t h e
DVD cover.
T h e f o l l o w i n g t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is for t h e e r r o r
m e s s a g e s s h o w n on the error m e s s a g e table (see
page 23-243).
1. C h e c k the n a v i g a t i o n D V D r e a d i n g s u r f a c e for
s c r a t c h e s a n d finger p r i n t s .
H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 )
Are there any scratches or fingerprints on the navigation

DVD reading surface?
Navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 )
Y E S - C l e a n or replace the navigation D V D (see p a g e
HFL-navigation-ANC
m i c r o p h o n e ( s e e p a g e 23-294)
2 3 - 290).B
N O - l f the p r o b l e m o c c u r s o c c a s i o n a l l y w h e n t h e
s y s t e m is c o l d , t h i s is n o r m a l . If t h e p r o b l e m o c c u r s
f r e q u e n t l y w h e n d r i v i n g , r e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit
( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
23-278
Navigation cannot control HVAC by voice

command
Display day/night mode does not work or

does not work propely
NOTE:
NOTE:
22-93).
information a b o u t t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
C h e c k for a n d r e s o l v e all C A N D T C s before
troubleshooting the navigation s y s t e m .
A l w a y s c h e c k the c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r
loose terminals.
c o d e s for the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
Verify that the c o r r e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit is installed for
t h i s m o d e l . G o into the D i a g n o s t i c m o d e a n d u s e
Version (see page 23-240).
1. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to the D L C . C h e c k for B - C A N D T C s in
the data list.
Are there any DTCs in the B-CAN
system?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t a n d r e p a i r all C A N related D T C s ,
a n d t h e n retest.
C h e c k the c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e
terminals.
B e f o r e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e anti-theft
c o d e s for t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d t h e navigation s y s t e m .
the a u d i o s y s t e m a n d the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
M a k e s u r e the c o r r e c t n a v i g a t i o n D V D (color a n d
1. C h e c k for h a r d error c o d e s ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 4 ) .
Are there any hard codes
stored?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the h a r d error c o d e . H
2. A d j u s t the A/C u s i n g v o i c e c o m m a n d s .
Are there any Hard Error Codes
stored?
Y E S - R e f e r to the H a r d E r r o r C o d e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !
5. S u b s t i t u t e a n d a k n o w n - g o o d c l i m a t e control unit ( s e e
p a g e 2 1 - 1 9 6 ) . R e c o n n e c t all c o n n e c t o r s , a n d retest.
Does the symptom go
T u r n the h e a d l i g h t o n t h e c h e c k that the d a s h

b r i g h t n e s s setting is not s e t to h i g h .
away?
Can you control the A/C by voice
command?
N O - D o n a v i g a t i o n c a n n o t control A/C by v o i c e
troubleshooting.B
3. T u r n the h e a d l i g h t s o n , a n d a d j u s t t h e d a s h
b r i g h t n e s s up a n d d o w n , t h e n to t h e m i d d l e r a n g e .
Does the display change to day and night modes
turning the headlights on and off?
when
Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e . H
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e original c l i m a t e control unit ( s e e

page21-196).B
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
(cont'd)
23-279
Navigation System
4. C o v e r t h e s u n l i g h t s e n s o r o n t h e d a s h , t h e n turn the
h e a d l i g h t s o n a n d off.
System locks up or freezes constantly

NOTE:
Does the navigation
display dim and brighten
normally?
Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e . H
N O - C h e c k t h e I L L 4- circuit for a n o p e n o r s h o r t to
g r o u n d b e t w e e n the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y to t h e g a u g e
c o n t r o l m o d u l e . If O K , substitute a k n o w n - g o o d units
in t h i s o r d e r , a n d r e c h e c k the s y s t e m : H
N a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 )
C l i m a t e c o n t r o l unit ( s e e p a g e 21-196)
A u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 23-125)
G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e 22-359)

22-93).
C h e c k t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D for d a m a g e or s c r a t c h e s .
C h e c k the G P S a n d V S P s i g n a l s in t h e G P S
information c h e c k ( s e e p a g e 23-236) a n d c a r s t a t u s
(see page 23-239).
troubleshooting the navigation s y s t e m .
terminals.
Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e t h e
anti-theft c o d e s for t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
Verify that the c o r r e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit is i n s t a l l e d for
2. R e m o v e t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D a n d c h e c k t h e D V D
r e a d i n g s u r f a c e for s c r a t c h e s a n d finger prints.
Are there any scratches
DVD reading
surface?
or fingerprints
on the
navigation
Y E S - C l e a n o r r e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n D V D , a n d
recheck.B
3. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d t h e n b a c k to
O N (II).
Does the system
reboot, lock up, or
freeze?

N O - T h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e . G o into t h e
D i a g n o s t i c m o d e a n d u s e t h e Unit C h e c k d i a g n o s t i c to
c h e c k the n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit
s t a t u s . If the s t a t u s is N G , r e p l a c e t h e affected u n i t s . H
23-280
Vehicle icon wanders across the map when

driving (does not follow a displayed road) or
map vehicle ICON spins
4. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e a n d u s e the C a r S t a t u s
d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 23-239) to c h e c k t h e v e h i c l e
speed pulse (VSP) a n d the B A C K signals.
Are the vehicle speed
OK?
NOTE:
22-93).
T h i s is not the s a m e c o n d i t i o n a s w h e n d r i v i n g
off-road (or o n a fire or l o g g i n g r o a d ) .
pulse
(VSP) and the BACK
signals
Y E S - T h e s y m p t o m m a y b e a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of t h e
s y s t e m . C h e c k to s e e i f t h e s y m p t o m o c c u r s in t h e
s a m e p l a c e in a k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e . If it d o e s , t h e
p r o b l e m c o u l d be in t h e d a t a b a s e . G o to s t e p 5.
NO-
T h i s c o n d i t i o n is c a u s e d by a l o s s of m a p m a t c h i n g
f r o m a b a d s e n s o r input. C h e c k for aftermarket or
other o b j e c t s that c a n block t h e G P S s i g n a l . A l w a y s d o
M a p m a t c h i n g ( s e e p a g e 23-180) before p r o c e e d i n g
w i t h the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
Ifthe p r o b l e m is the v e h i c l e s p e e d p u l s e ( V S P ) ,
t r o u b l e s h o o t the v e h i c l e s p e e d s i g n a l circuit. B L U
w i r e for o p e n or s h o r t . If O K , u p d a t e the P C M ( s e e
p a g e 11-249) if it d o e s not h a v e t h e latest s o f t w a r e
or substitute a k n o w n - g o o d P C M ( s e e p a g e 11-250).

Ifthe B A C K s i g n a l is i n d i c a t e d O N (I) w h e n t h e
v e h i c l e is in a n y shift l e v e r position o t h e r t h a n
r e v e r s e , t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e b a c k - u p light s w i t c h
circuit for a s h o r t to p o w e r or t h e M I C U . H
terminals.
anti-theft c o d e s for the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
5. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d c h e c k to s e e if the p r o b l e m o c c u r s in t h e
s a m e place.
C h e c k for aftermarket m e t a l l i c w i n d o w tinting.
Does

this m o d e l . G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e a n d u s e
V e r s i o n ( s e e p a g e 23-240).
the problem
occur
in the same
place?
Y E S - T h e p r o b l e m is in the d a t a b a s e , a n d s h o u l d be
c o n s i d e r e d a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of t h e s y s t e m . R e p o r t t h e
p r o b l e m a c c o r d i n g to the N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m M a n u a l
u n d e r R e p o r t i n g E r r o r s a n d look for i m p r o v e m e n t s in
future d a t a b a s e s .
C h e c k the n a v i a g t i o n D V D for d a m a g e o r s c r a t c h e s .
N O - R e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
1. C h e c k for h a r d error c o d e s ( s e e p a g e 23-184).

Are there any hard codes
stored?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the h a r d e r r o r c o d e . l
2. C h e c k the G P S icon on the n a v i g a t i o n picture.
Is the GPS icon white or
missing?
Y E S - D o the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for G P S icon is w h i t e or

not s h o w n ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 7 4 ) .
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e t h e Y a w R a t e
d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 23-238) to c h e c k the y a w rate
sensor.
Is the yaw rate sensor
OK?
23-281
Navigation System
Navigation system does not accept security
code
NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
T h e s y s t e m d o e s not o p e r a t e w i t h o u t the 4-digit
s e c u r i t y (anti-theft) c o d e . If t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
d o e s not a c c e p t the c o d e , f o l l o w this p r o c e d u r e . After
y o u try to e n t e r the s e c u r i t y c o d e 10 t i m e s
c o n s e c u t i v e l y , y o u m u s t c y c l e t h e key to try a g a i n .
If the interface dial d o e s not w o r k , go to Interface dial
and/or buttons d o not w o r k .
T h e Navigation S y s t e m Diagnosis and Core Return
F o r m is a v a i l a b l e o n l i n e , u n d e r J o b a i d s , a n d c a n be
printed out for r e c o r d i n g this i n f o r m a t i o n . T h i s
information will help the R e m a n facility d e t e r m i n e
w h a t c a u s e d the failure.
Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e the
anti-theft c o d e s for the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
this m o d e l . G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e a n d u s e
1. G o into the S y s t e m d i a g n o s i s m e n u ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 2 2 2 ) , s e l e c t Unit c h e c k , a n d t h e n E C U info. A brief
d i a g n o s t i c r u n s for 20 s e c o n d s , a n d the serial n u m b e r
is d i s p l a y e d .
displayed?
2. R e m o v e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291).
3. C h e c k the serial n u m b e r o n the label o n t h e u n d e r s i d e
of the navigation unit.
Is the serial number confirmed
navigation unit?
on the underside
of the
23-282
Is a 4-digit code displayed
on the
screen?
N O - C a l l the W a r r a n t y D e p a r t m e n t to obtain the c o d e
(the t e l e p h o n e n u m b e r is in t h e PDI s e r v i c e bulletin).
T h e n go to s t e p 5.
5. C h e c k that the o b t a i n e d c o d e w o r k s to b y p a s s t h e
c o d e s c r e e n in t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
Does the code
work?
Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e . R e t u r n the v e h i c l e
to t h e c u s t o m e r , a n d g i v e t h e m the anti-theft c o d e . H
6. T r y e n t e r i n g four z e r o s (0000) in p l a c e for t h e c o d e .
Do the four zeros
terminals.
Is the serial number
4. U s i n g the serial n u m b e r , look up the n a v i g a t i o n

s e c u r i t y c o d e in the Interactive Network, (click:
S e r v i c e , V e h i c l e I n f o r m a t i o n , Anti-Theft c o d e I n q u i r y ,
a n d t h e n s e l e c t Navigation f r o m the P r o d u c t
d r o p d o w n box). Enter the serial number.
work to bypass
the code
screen?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) ,
a n d e n t e r " S e c u r i t y c o d e is 0 0 0 0 " in t h e p r o b l e m
d e s c r i p t i o n field of t h e c o r e return f o r m . H
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) ,
a n d enter " W o n ' t take s e c u r i t y c o d e " (as proof,
e n c l o s e the sticker that c o n t a i n s t h e S e r i a l n u m b e r
a n d the C o d e ) in the p r o b l e m d e s c r i p t i o n field of the
c o r e return f o r m . B
Navigation display stays on with ignition

switch in LOCK (0)
NOTE:
Navigation cannot control audio system

NOTE:
C h e c k for aftermarket a c c e s s o r i e s that m a y interfere
with the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
terminals.
terminals.
Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , get t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
anti-theft c o d e s .

anti-theft c o d e s for t h e navigation s y s t e m .
After t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , re-enter the anti-theft c o d e , a n d

re-initialize the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
T h e v e h i c l e m a y h a v e b e e n u s e d for a s h o w e v e n t .
C h e c k for a s h o r t j u m p e r h a r n e s s in-line w i t h the
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r C. If a j u m p e r h a r n e s s is
p r e s e n t , r e m o v e it a n d return it to T e c h L i n e .
Verify that the c o r r e c t navigation unit is installed for

t h i s m o d e l . G o into the D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e
1. R e m o v e the key f r o m the ignition.

Does
the navigation
screen
stay
on?
N O - T h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e . B
2. C h e c k for a s h o r t to p o w e r on n a v i g a t i o n unit
c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l No. 2.
2. M a k e s u r e t h e anti-theft c o d e for the a u d i o s y s t e m is
entered.
3. G o into the D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e the Navi
S y s t e m Link d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the Radio
Is there a
icon
red?
short?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t the A C C c i r c u i t . !
Y E S - D o the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for the v o i c e g u i d a n c e

c a n n o t be h e a r d ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 7 4 ) .
4. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d navigation unit ( s e e p a g e
Can the navigation
system
control
audio/disc?

N O - D o the a u d i o s y s t e m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
23-283
Navigation System
Rearview camera image does not come on or
work properly
NOTE:
22-93).
C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e
terminals.
6. D i s c o n n e c t n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d
rearview c a m e r a 6P connector.
7. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y
unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P
c o n n e c t o r a c c o r d i n g to t h e t a b l e .
Navigation
display unit
connector
Rearview
camera
connector
Wire color
11
12
13(BLU)
26
27
28
2
4
3 (BLK)
6
5
1
GRY
GRN
anti-theft c o d e s for t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m .
the navigation s y s t e m .
Verify that t h e c o r r e c t n a v i g a t i o n unit is installed for
this m o d e l . G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e
WHT
RED
YEL

1. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d start t h e
engine.
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23 24
Does the Navigation screen come on and show an image
when the vehicle is started?
26 27 2 8
N O - G o to t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for N o picture is d i s p l a y e d
(see page 2 3 - 2 6 6 ) .
REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR
2. G o into t h e d i a g n o s t i c m e n u a n d u s e t h e Navi S y s t e m
Link test ( s e e p a g e 23-222) to c h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n
b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit a n d t h e r e a r v i e w c a m e r a .
is the R-camera
link on the
Is there
3. C o n f i r m t h e s y s t e m c o n n e c t i o n .
link red on the
screen?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 .
N O - G o to C a r S t a t u s a n d c h e c k t h e B A C K - R e v e r s e
indication s t a t u s ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 3 9 ) . If t h e B A C K
indicator d o e s not d i s p l a y [I] w h e n t h e shift s e l e c t o r is
in R, t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e b a c k u p light c i r c u i t . B
4. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n t h e n a v i g a t i o n
d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e r e a r v i e w c a m e r a
6P connector.
Are the connections
OK?
NO-Reconnectthe c o n n e c t o r s . !
23-284
2 3 4 5 6
screen?
Is the R-camera
_ n
continuity?
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e
navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e
r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e t h e affected
8. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n the navigation d i s p l a y

unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d b o d y g r o u n d a c c o r d i n g to the
table.

connector
Wire color
12
13
26
27
28
GRN
BLU
WHT
RED
YEL
9. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of

n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a c c o r d i n g to
the table.
From terminal
To terminals
11 ( G R Y )
12 ( G R N ) , 13 ( B L U ) , 26
( W H T ) , 2 7 ( R E D ) , 28 ( Y E L )
13 ( B L U ) , 26 ( W H T ) , 27
(RED), 28 (YEL)
26 ( W H T ) , 27 ( R E D ) , 28 ( Y E L )
27 ( R E D ) , 28 ( Y E L )
28 (YEL)
12 ( G R N )
13 ( B L U )
26 ( W H T )
27 ( R E D )

6 \ / \ 8 | 9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28
- l
9 10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28

Is there
continuity?
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in the w i r e ( s )
b e t w e e n the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r
and the rearview c a m e r a 6P connector. Replace the
affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
Is there
continuity?
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the
r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e the affected
(cont'd)
23-285
Navigation System
10. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d m e a s u r e the
v o l t a g e b e t w e e n t h e navigation d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P
c o n n e c t o r a n d b o d y g r o u n d a c c o r d i n g to t h e t a b l e .
Wire color

connector
11
12
13
26
27
28
l
6
GRY
GRN
BLU
WHT
RED
YEL
15 16 17 18 19 2 0 2 1
I
8
9 10 11 1 2 1 3
22 23 24
NO-Replace the rearview c a m e r a (see page

23-295).B
14. P r e s s R e t u r n in t h e u p p e r light c o r n e r of t h e s c r e e n to
return t h e m a i n m e n u , t h e n g o to V e r s i o n ( s e e p a g e
23-240).
15. C h e c k t h e m o d e l c o d e that is d i s p l a y e d .
26 27 28
Is there more than 0.2 V?

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to p o w e r in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n
the n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the
r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r . R e p l a c e t h e affected
NO-Gotostep11.
12. R e c o n n e c t t h e r e a r v i e w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e
23-286
Is the rear view image OK?

Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e original n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e
23-291 ) .
13. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d n a v i g a t i o n unit, a n d c h e c k
the r e a r v i e w c a m e r a i m a g e in r e v e r s e .
is the correct navigation unit model code displayed for

this vehicle?
N O - T h e w r o n g n a v i g a t i o n unit is i n s t a l l e d . R e p l a c e
the n a v i g a t i o n unit w i t h t h e c o r r e c t p a r t . B
16. R e m o v e the n a v i g a t i o n D V D f r o m t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit
( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 0 ) , a n d c h e c k t h e label c o l o r of t h e
DVD.
Is the DVD disc label white (or possibly gray for
Canada)?
Y E S - R e i n s e r t t h e n a v i g a t i o n D V D , a n d g o to s t e p 1.
NO-Replace the navigation D V D with the correct
color. S e e the O b t a i n i n g a N a v i g a t i o n D V D in t h e
G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Information ( s e e p a g e
23-177).B
Navigation cannot control XM radio

NOTE:
NOTE:
2 2 - 93).
M a k e s u r e t h e c o r r e c t navigation D V D (color a n d
T h i s is often c a u s e d by a l o s s of battery p o w e r , a l o w
or poor battery c o n d i t i o n , or a poor g r o u n d .
M a k e s u r e the c o r r e c t navigation D V D (color a n d
1. Start the v e h i c l e .
2. M a k e s u r e the anti-theft c o d e for the a u d i o s y s t e m is
entered.
3. G o into t h e D i a g n o s t i c m o d e , a n d u s e the Navi
S y s t e m Link d i a g n o s t i c ( s e e p a g e 23-222).
Is the XM icon
Navigation frequently asks for anti-theft code

and/or needs GPS initialization
navigation unit c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d
No. 2 individually.
+B(WHT)
red?
Y E S - D o the t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for the v o i c e g u i d a n c e

c a n n o t be h e a r d ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 7 4 ) .
4. Substitute a k n o w n - g o o d navigation unit ( s e e p a g e

2 3 - 291).
Can the navigation
control
XM
radio?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .

N O - D o the a u d i o s y s t e m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . B
N O - G o to s t e p 4
ACC (PUR)
2)
4
8
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - l f the 4 - B w i r e d o e s not h a v e voltage, repair o p e n
in the w i r e b e t w e e n t h e u n d e r - d a s h fuse relay box
a n d the navigation unit. Ifthe A C C w i r e d o e s not h a v e
v o l t a g e , repair o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box a n d the navigation u n i t . B
(cont'd)
23-287
Navigation System
3. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit
GND (BLK)
pV
1 2
5
6 7 8

p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d retest. If t h e p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y ,
r e p l a c e the original n a v i g a t i o n unit.B
N O - R e p a i r o p e n o r high r e s i s t a n c e in the B L K w i r e
b e t w e e n n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r A (8P) a n d b o d y
ground ( G 5 0 3 ) . H
The Acura Globe Screen (not the Honda

Globe Screen) appears every time the vehicle
is started
NOTE:
T h e navigation D V D a n d t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit a r e
c o r r e c t for the v e h i c l e , but e a r l i e r a n d p o s s i b l y later
v e r s i o n s of the navigation s o f t w a r e m a y h a v e b e e n
installed. W h e n this h a p p e n s , t h e s o f t w a r e m a y not b e
r e c o g n i z e d by t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit, a n d c o u l d c a u s e the
navigation unit to revert to a n A c u r a m o d e l profile.
1. R e m o v e the navigation unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291) a n d
verify that the part n u m b e r printed o n the navigation
unit label is t h e c o r r e c t o n e for t h e y e a r / m o d e l v e h i c l e
you are working on.
Is the correct navigation unit installed based on the part

number?
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit w i t h t h e c o r r e c t unit
for t h e y e a r / m o d e l v e h i c l e y o u a r e w o r k i n g o n . B
2. Reinstall the navigation unit.
3. R e m o v e the navigation D V D ( s e e p a g e 23-290).
4. Note t h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n m a r k e d o n t h e n a v i g a t i o n
D V D label a n d verify if it is t h e c o r r e c t v e r s i o n for t h e
v e h i c l e y e a r / m o d e l y o u a r e w o r k i n g o n by c h e c k i n g
a n y official H o n d a s e r v i c e w e b s i t e for m o r e s e r v i c e
information a b o u t the n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m a n d
navigation s o f t w a r e .
Is the software version marked on the navigation DVD

label the correct one for the vehicle year/model you are
working on?
5. O b t a i n the c o r r e c t v e r s i o n D V D ( s e e p a g e 23-180) a n d
install it.
Does the navigation system boot-up with the Honda

Globe Screen?
Y E S - T h e p r o b l e m is r e s o l v e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is
complete.!
N O - T h e s y s t e m still s h o w s a n A c u r a G l o b e S c r e e n .
R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
23-288
Navigation unit will not eject or accept the

navigation DVD
1. C h e c k the No. 23 (10 A) a n d the No. 3 5 (10 A) f u s e s in
the u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
6. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n na viga tio n unit

GND (BLK)
n
n
1 2
N O - R e p l a c e the b l o w n f u s e ( s ) , a n d r e c h e c k . B
6 7 8
3. E j e c t the n a v i g a t i o n D V D f r o m the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e

page 23-290).
Does the navigation DVD eject?
4. R e i n s e r t the n a v i g a t i o n D V D into t h e n a vig atio n unit.
Does the navigation unit accept the navigation DVD?
p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 1 ) , a n d retest. I f t h e p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y ,
r e p l a c e the original n a v i g a t i o n u n i t . B
N O - R e p a i r o p e n or high r e s i s t a n c e in t h e B L K w i r e
Y E S - N o p r o b l e m s at this t i m e , the s y s t e m is n o r m a l .
b e t w e e n na viga tio n unit c o n n e c t o r A (8P) a n d b o d y
Inspect for l o o s e or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s at t e r m i n a l s
ground ( G 5 0 3 ) . B
No. 1, No. 2 a n d No. 4 of n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r A
(8P).B
N O - R e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ).B
n avi gat i on unit c o n n e c t o r A (8P) t e r m i n a l s No. 1 a n d
+B(WHT)
ACC (PUR)
1 2
4
5 6 7 8

NO-lf the + B w i r e d o e s not h a v e v o l t a g e , repair o p e n
in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e relay box
a n d the n a v i g a t i o n unit. Ifthe ACC w i r e d o e s not h a v e
v o l t a g e , repair o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box a n d the n a v i g a t i o n u n i t . B
23-289
Navigation System
Forced Starting of Display
DVD-ROM Replacement
S C S Service Connector 07PAZ-0010100

2. P u s h t h e o p e n button (A) of t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit

l o c a t e d u n d e r the d r i v e r ' s s e a t .
2. R a i s e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t all the w a y u p , t h e n m o v e it all

the w a y forward.
3. C o n n e c t the S C S s e r v i c e c o n n e c t o r (A) to t h e
n a v i g a t i o n s e r v i c e c o n n e c t o r (B) l o c a t e d b e h i n d t h e
3. P r e s s t h e E J E C T button (B) a n d r e m o v e t h e
DVD-ROM.
4. Insert the n e w D V D - R O M w i t h t h e w h i t e label f a c i n g
up.
5. C l o s e t h e front c o v e r . D o not t u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h
to L O C K (0); w a t c h t h e n a v i g a t i o n s c r e e n until the data
is d o w n l o a d e d to t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit.
5. C h e c k that t h e d i a g n o s i s m e n u for t h e picture
d i a g n o s i s s t a r t s u p , a n d t h e n c h a n g e s to t h e s y s t e m
link m e n u .
N O T E : If the d i s p l a y fails to d i s p l a y t h e s y s t e m link
s c r e e n , refer to no picture is d i s p l a y e d ( s e e p a g e
23-266).
23-290
6. D o t h e M a p M a t c h i n g ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 8 0 ) .
7. C h e c k a n y official H o n d a s e r v i c e w e b s i t e for m o r e
N O T E : After s e r v i c i n g , the front c o v e r a n d P C c a r d slot
d o o r m u s t be c l o s e d . If y o u start u p t h e n a v i g a t i o n
s y s t e m w i t h t h e front c o v e r o r P C c a r d slot d o o r o p e n ,
t h e d i s p l a y w i l l indicate a n e r r o r m e s s a g e .
Navigation Unit Removal/Installation

NOTE:
Before y o u r e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit, b a c k - u p the
c u s t o m e r data u s i n g s y s t e m d i a g n o s t i c m o d e s a v e
u s e r s m e m o r y u n d e r the functional s e t up ( s e e p a g e
23-233).
6. M o v e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t all t h e w a y back, a n d r e m o v e

the t w o m o u n t i n g nuts ( A ) , t h e n r e m o v e the
n a v i g a t i o n unit ( B ) .
If t h e n a v i g a t i o n unit is r e p l a c e d or d i s c o n n e c t e d , a
M a p M a t c h i n g m u s t be d o n e ( s e e p a g e 23-180).
2. E j e c t the D V D f r o m t h e original n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e
p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 0 ) . T o a v o i d s c r a t c h i n g o r d a m a g i n g the
D V D , t e m p o r a r i l y p l a c e the D V D in a j e w e l c a s e .
N O T E : If the D V D will not e j e c t , refer to s y m p t o m
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g N a v i g a t i o n unit will not eject or
accept the navigation D V D (see page 23-289).
3. R a i s e t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t all the w a y u p , t h e n m o v e it all
the w a y forward.
5. R e m o v e the c o v e r ( A ) , t h e n turn the c a r p e t o v e r a n d
d i s c o n n e c t the n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r s .
7. R e m o v e the bolts a n d brackets (C).

8. Install the unit in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
9. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n reinstall the
c u s t o m e r ' s original D V D , verifying that t h e D V D is free
of s c r a t c h e s or s m u d g e s .
N O T E : If y o u n e e d to c h a n g e the original D V D to the
n e w D V D , refer to the D V D - R O M r e p l a c e m e n t ( s e e
p a g e 23-290).
10. C h e c k a n y official H o n d a s e r v i c e w e b s i t e for m o r e
s e r v i c e information a b o u t p a t c h e s for the n a v i g a t i o n
s y s t e m . A p p l y a n y p r e s c r i b e d p a t c h e s to the n e w
N O T E : S i m p l y t r a n s f e r r i n g the D V D f r o m the original
n a v i g a t i o n unit to the n e w n a v i g a t i o n unit d o e s not
a s s u r e the c o r r e c t s o f t w a r e for the v e h i c l e will be
l o a d e d into the n e w navigation unit. D o i n g the D V D
transfer without doing software patches m a y c a u s e
the n e w navigation unit to a p p e a r to be
malfunctioning.
11. E n t e r the n e w navigation anti-theft c o d e .
12. Park the v e h i c l e o u t s i d e , a n d do the G P S initialization
( s e e p a g e 23-179).
13. G i v e the n e w navigation anti-theft c o d e to the
customer.
23-291
Navigation System
GPS Antenna Removal/Installation
Voice Control Switch Test
1. R e m o v e t h e s e i t e m s :
S R S c o m p o n e n t s a r e located in this a r e a . R e v i e w the

S R S c o m p o n e n t locations ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 ) , a n d the
p r e c a u t i o n s a n d p r o c e d u r e s ( s e e p a g e 24-21) before
A u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 23-125)
N a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit ( s e e p a g e 23-293)
N a v i g a t i o n s w i t c h p a n e l ( s e e p a g e 23-293)
D r i v e r ' s s i d e c e n t e r c o n s o l e t r i m ( s e e p a g e 20-115)
2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e G P S a n t e n n a c o n n e c t o r (A) a n d
detach the clips (B).
1. R e m o v e t h e s t e e r i n g w h e e l ( s e e p a g e 17-7).
2. R e m o v e t h e H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e 17-8).
3. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 2 a n d
No. 4 in e a c h s w i t c h position a c c o r d i n g to t h e t a b l e .
3. R e m o v e s c r e w s a n d t h e G P S a n t e n n a (C) a n d b r a c k e t
by pulling it up a n d out of t h e d a s h b o a r d .
4. Install the a n t e n n a in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
Voice control switch

Position
Resistance
No buttons p r e s s e d
Navigation T a l k button
pressed
N a v i g a t i o n B a c k button
pressed
A b o u t 10 kO
A b o u t 2.2 kO
About 660 Q
4. I f t h e r e s i s t a n c e is not a s s p e c i f i e d , r e p l a c e t h e
H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e 17-8).
23-292
Navigation Display Unit

Navigation Switch Panel

NOTE:
1. R e m o v e the navigation s w i t c h p a n e l a n d t h e c e n t e r
pocket (A).
T a k e c a r e not to s c r a t c h the d a s h b o a r d .
- 1 . R e m o v e the d a s h b o a r d c e n t e r p a n e l ( s e e p a g e
20-123).
1. R e m o v e the a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 23-125).
- 2 . R e m o v e the s c r e w s , t h e n pull out t h e n a v i g a t i o n
2. R e m o v e the c e n t e r u p p e r p a n e l ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 2 ) .
3. R e m o v e the s c r e w s a n d bolts, t h e n pull out the
s w i t c h p a n e l a n d t h e c e n t e r pocket.
- 3 . D i s c o n n e c t the c o n n e c t o r s a n d r e m o v e t h e
n a v i g a t i o n s w i t c h p a n e l a n d the c e n t e r pocket.
navigation d i s p l a y unit (A).
4. D i s c o n n e c t the c o n n e c t o r s ( B ) , a n d r e m o v e the
n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit.
5. S e p a r a t e t h e n a v i g a t i o n d i s p l a y unit (A) a n d the tray
2. R e m o v e the s c r e w s a n d s t a y s , t h e n s e p a r a t e t h e
navigation s w i t c h p a n e l (A) a n d t h e c e n t e r pocket ( B ) .
B
(B).
A
3. Install the navigation s w i t c h p a n e l in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r
B
of r e m o v a l .
6. Install t h e unit in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l . B e

careful not to d r o p the f o r w a r d bolt b e h i n d t h e
dashboard.
23-293
Navigation System
Interface Dial Removal/Installation
HFL-IMavigation-ANC Microphone
1. R e m o v e the n a v i g a t i o n s w i t c h p a n e l a n d the c e n t e r
pocket (see page 23-293).
2. R e m o v e the s c r e w a n d h a r n e s s c o v e r (A). T h e n
d i s c o n n e c t the interface dial 13P c o n n e c t o r ( B ) .
3. R e m o v e the 4 s c r e w s ( C ) , t h e n r e m o v e the k n o b (D)

a n d t h e dial (E) f r o m t h e interface dial (F) w i t h t w o K T C
trim t o o l s a n d a p p l y i n g e v e n force a s s h o w n .
N O T E : A p p l y p r e s s u r e s l o w l y a n d s t e a d y until t h e
k n o b a n d dial p o p s off.
4. Install t h e dial in r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
N O T E : If t h e h a r d buttons d o not w o r k , but t h e j o g dial
d o e s , r e c h e c k t h e interface dial c o n n e c t o r c o n n e c t i o n .
23-294
NOTE:
#
T
parts.
s c r a t c h t h e d a s h b o a r d a n d related
Rearview Camera Removal/Installation

20-100).
4. Remove the connectors and detach the harness clip

(A) f r o m the rear license t r i m .
2. Disconnect the rearview camera 6 P connector and the
3. Remove the nuts (A) and release the clips (B). Pull the
rear license t r i m (C) away f r o m the tailgate, then
remove the g r o m m e t (D) f r o m the tailgate and
carefully pull the connector t h r o u g h the hole in the
tailgate.
6. Install the rearview camera in the reverse order of

removal,
23-295
Electrical Compass

23-296

Symptom
Azimuth (direction) information is
not shown on the display
Self-test has failed (flashing the CAL
and NW)
Compass shows wrong direction
Do the input test (see page 23-301)
Do the input test (see page 23-301)
Do the compass zone selection and

calibration (see page 23-302)
Also check for

Check that the electrical compass
unit is properly connected.
Reboot the electrical compass
unit.
Do the calibration procedure 1CD
type (see page 23-305) or 6CD type
(see page 23-303). Ifthe input test
is OK, check the zone selection.
Check if the zone setting is correct for
the vehicle geographical location.
23-297
Electrical Compass
System Description
Overview
The electrical compass shows the azimuth (direction) information in the 8-directions (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW,W, NW) to the
audio- HVAC display unit via the audio unit.
AUDIO- HVAC DISPLAY
6CD type
1CD type
RDS NEWS TATP
13530 S T
CLOCK
innj!Lnj!LliJ!Ll
NEWS TATP DISC S T 0
PRESET
Z ' O - O O
O ' O O
m m 49 O
FOLDER A . S E L TRACK RDS D F - S C A N D F - R P T F-RDM ICATl (CHl
fc[* 3 (0.feltf (90 lULi ISLi lULl IJSLl & lULi lULl
MAX A/C ^ . - t e
PLAYUST
DRIVERJ
A / C O N O F F
-saga
UOMPASSJ
IREAR
'1-PASS-
AZIMUTH (direction) INFORMATION
Starting Operation
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (I), the electrical compass unit begin to communicate w i t h the audio
unit. Then turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the self-test mode begins automatically.
The self-test function checks for the current voltage, non-volatile m e m o r y (NVM), and ROM status in the electrical
compass ynit. If the unit detects a malfunction while in the self-test, it indicates a malfunction by flashing compass
information segments (CAL and NW) in the audio-HVAC display unit (see s y m p t o m troubleshooting index).
The electrical compass unit send the azimuth (direction) information to the audio unit. The electrical compass unit
receive the VSP signal f r o m the gauge control module via the audio unit. The azimuth information is fixed w h i l e parked.
Self-Calibration
The electrical compass unit has a self-calibration function. It detects and compensates for magnetic anomalies caused
by bridges, subways and large steel structures. W h e n the vehicle leaves an area w i t h a strong magnetic interference
field (2400 mG or more), the electrical compass unit automatically begins calibrating. If needed, y o u can calibrate the
compass.
Zone Selection
Zone selection is required to compensate for the difference between magnetic North and geographic North. This
deviation is referred to as declination, the compass compensates for declination w h e n y o u select the zone where the
vehicle is located.
23-298
Electrical Compass Unit Connector Inputs and Outputs

ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT
6P CONNECTOR
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
1 2
4 5
Cavity
Wire Color
YEL
BLK
BRN
BLU
ORN
GRY
4
5
6
Connect t o
No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash

fuse/relay box (IG1)
Audio unit (COMPASS RX+)
Audio unit (COMPASS RX )
Audio unit (COMPASS TXH-)
Audio unit (COMPASS TX)
Normal
Battery
voltage
0.2 V or less
4-5 V
4V
4-5 V
4V
If Circuit is
Open
If Circuit is
Shorted
OV
OV
0.2 V or less
4-5 V
4V
4-5 V
4V
0.2 V or less
OV
0V
OV
OV
23-299
Electrical Compass
Circuit Diagram

schematic.
: Shielding
| T ] : With rear entertainment system
[~2~j : Without rear entertainment system
RELAY BOX
SCTY1
ACC
+B
AUDIO UNIT
COMPASS
RX+
COMPASS
RX-
COMPASS
TX+
COMPASS
TX-
DUET
CONT
DUET
TX
DUET
RX
DUET
SH
D7
-"1
WHT
RED
GND
| D16
BRN*
YEL
BLK
BLK
I
3
IG1
COMPASS
RX+
COMPASS
RX-
COMPASS
TX+
COMPASS
TX-
DUET
CONT
ILL+
116
LTBLU
No. 14(7.5 A) F U S E
{In the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
G601
23-300
+B
IG2
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT

GND
DUET
RX
DUET
TX
ILL-
rI
Y
E LL
YE
GND
| 13
BLK
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
G403
G402
Electrical Compass Unit Input Test

1. R e m o v e the h e a d l i n e r ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 0 7 ) .
2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 6 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m the electrical c o m p a s s unit ( B ) .

3. I n s p e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r a n d s o c k e t t e r m i n a l s to be s u r e t h e y a r e all m a k i n g g o o d contact.
If the t e r m i n a l s a r e bent, l o o s e , or c o r r o d e d , r e p a i r t h e m a s n e c e s s a r y , a n d r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m .
If the t e r m i n a l s look O K , go to s t e p 4.
4. R e c o n n e c t the c o n n e c t o r to t h e electrical c o m p a s s unit, turn the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d m a k e t h e s e input t e s t s
at the c o n n e c t o r .
If a n y test i n d i c a t e s a p r o b l e m , find a n d c o r r e c t the c a u s e , t h e n r e c h e c k the s y s t e m .
If all input t e s t s p r o v e O K , the electrical c o m p a s s unit m u s t be faulty; r e p l a c e it.
Cavity
Wire
YEL
Ignition s w i t c h
O N (II)
Test Condition
BLK
U n d e r all
conditions
BRN
U n d e r all
conditions
C h e c k for v o l t a g e to g r o u n d :
T h e r e s h o u l d be battery
voltage.
T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n
0.2 V.
T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 4-5 V.
BLU
U n d e r all
conditions
T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 4 V.
ORN
U n d e r all
conditions
T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 4-5 V.
GRY
U n d e r all
conditions
T h e r e s h o u l d be a b o u t 4 V.

B l o w n No. 10 (7.5 A ) f u s e in t h e
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x
A n o p e n in the w i r e
P o o r g r o u n d (G601)
A n o p e n or high r e s i s t a n c e in the w i r e
Faulty a u d i o unit
A n o p e n in the w i r e
A s h o r t to g r o u n d in the w i r e
L o o s e t e r m i n a l s or a n o p e n in t h e w i r e
A s h o r t to g r o u n d in the w i r e
L o o s e t e r m i n a l s or a n o p e n in the w i r e
A s h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e w i r e
L o o s e t e r m i n a l s or a n o p e n in the w i r e
A s h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e w i r e
23-301
Electrical Compass
Electrical Compass Zone Selection and Calibration
Zone Selection
6CD Type
NOTE:
Y o u s h o u l d d o t h i s p r o c e d u r e a n y t i m e t h e electrical
c o m p a s s unit is r e p l a c e d .
1. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n p r e s s a n d h o l d
the M E N U button (A) until t h e b e e p ( a b o u t 5 s e c o n d s )
to c h a n g e t h e d i s p l a y .
Y o u s h o u l d d o this p r o c e d u r e in a n o p e n a r e a a w a y
from buildings, power lines, a n d other vehicles.
If y o u s e e the C A L indicator (A) a n d f l a s h i n g a z i m u t h
(direction) indicator (B) a p p e a r in t h e d i s p l a y , t h e
s e l f - c a l i b r a t i o n is starting a u t o m a t i c a l l y . If t h e
c o m p a s s s e e m s to be c o n t i n u a l l y s h o w i n g t h e w r o n g
d i r e c t i o n a n d is not s e l f - c a l i b r a t i n g , d o t h e z o n e
selection a n d calibration.
B e f o r e y o u s e l e c t the z o n e a n d c a l i b r a t e the c o m p a s s ,
c h e c k t h e No. 17 (20 A ) a n d N o . 2 3 (10 A ) f u s e s in t h e
u n d e r - h o o d fuse/ relay b o x a n d t h e No. 3 5 (10 A ) a n d
No. 3 6 (10 A ) f u s e s in the u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box.
^ NW
2. Rotate t h e s e l e c t o r k n o b (B) to s e l e c t Z O N E (C) a n d

p r e s s the s e l e c t o r k n o b to e n t e r t h e s e l e c t i o n .
N O T E : If n e c e s s a r y , p r e s s t h e R E T U R N button (D) to
return to t h e p r e v i o u s d i s p l a y . P r e s s i n g the M E N U
button c a n c e l s the c o m p a s s setting m o d e .
23-302
3. T h e d i s p l a y s h o w s t h e c u r r e n t l y s e l e c t e d z o n e
n u m b e r (A) b e t w e e n f r o m 1 to 15. F i n d t h e z o n e for
y o u r a r e a o n t h e z o n e m a p . If t h e c o r r e c t z o n e is not
s h o w n , turn t h e s e l e c t o r k n o b to c y c l e t h e z o n e lists
up o r d o w n .
r*MENU
/Mm,
CDMPRSS
3j7
ZONE
Calibration
5. W h i l e ignition s w i t c h is in O N (II), t h e n p r e s s a n d h o l d
the M E N U button (A) until t h e b e e p (about 5 s e c o n d s )
to c h a n g e t h e d i s p l a y .
\
r"** /<?'3W1 ^
ZONE
6. Rotate t h e s e l e c t o r k n o b (B) to s e l e c t C A L I B R A T I O N
(C) a n d p r e s s t h e s e l e c t o r knob to e n t e r t h e s e l e c t i o n .
4. P r e s s t h e s e l e c t o r knob to d e c i d e t h e s e l e c t e d z o n e .
R e t u r n i n g to t h e n o r m a l d i s p l a y , t h e z o n e s e l e c t i o n
mode ends.
N O T E : If n e c e s s a r y , p r e s s t h e R E T U R N button (D) to
return to t h e p r e v i o u s d i s p l a y . P r e s s i n g t h e M E N U
button c a n c e l s t h e c o m p a s s setting m o d e .
7. T h e d i s p l a y s h o w s P U S H C A L S T A R T (A). P r e s s i n g
the s e l e c t o r k n o b to begin t h e c a l i b r a t i o n , t h e a z i m u t h
d i s p l a y blinks a n d t h e C A L indicator (B) i s s h o w n .
MENU
CQMPRSS
TRRTj
8. D r i v e t h e v e h i c l e s l o w l y in t w o c o m p l e t e c i r c l e s .
W h e n t h e calibration is s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d , t h e
c o m p a s s d i s p l a y s t o p s blinking a n d t h e C A L indicator
g o e s off.
(cont'd)
23-303
Electrical C o m p a s s
E l e c t r i c a lC o m p a s s
Z o n e
S e l e c t i o n a n d
C a l i b r a t i o n( c o n t ' d )
1 CD Type
Zone Selection
NOTE:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then press and hold

the RPT button (A) and SOUND knob (B) for 2 seconds
and changing the display.
You should do this procedure any time the electrical

compass unit is replaced.
You should do this procedure in an open area away
f r o m buildings, power lines, and other vehicles.
If y o u see the CAL indicator (A) and flashing azimuth
(direction) indicator (B) appear in the display, the
self-calibration is starting automatically. I f t h e
compass seems to be continually showing the w r o n g
direction and is not self-calibrating, do the zone
selection and calibration.
Before y o u select the zone and calibrate the compass,
check the No. 17 (20 A) and No. 23 (10 A) fuses in the
under-hood fuse/ relay box and the No. 35 (10 A) and
No. 36 (10 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Press the preset No. 2 button (C) to select ZONE (D),

and enter the selection.
23-304
3. T h e d i s p l a y s h o w s the c u r r e n t l y s e l e c t e d z o n e
n u m b e r (A) b e t w e e n 1 a n d 15. F i n d the z o n e for y o u r
a r e a o n the z o n e m a p . If the c o r r e c t z o n e is not s h o w n ,
p u s h the p r e s e t button No. 1 (lists d o w n ) or No. 2 (lists
up) to s e l e c t the c o r r e c t z o n e .
Calibration
5. W h i l e ignition s w i t c h is in O N (II), p r e s s a n d h o l d t h e
R P T button (A) a n d S O U N D knob (B) for 2 s e c o n d s to
c h a n g e the d i s p l a y .
6. P r e s s the p r e s e t No.1 button (C) to s e l e c t C A L (D) a n d
e n t e r the s e l e c t i o n .
D
4. P r e s s t h e p r e s e t No. 3 button to d e c i d e the s e l e c t e d
z o n e . R e t u r n i n g to the n o r m a l d i s p l a y , the z o n e
7. W h i l e t h e s y s t e m c a l i b r a t e s , the a z i m u t h (direction)
d i s p l a y (A) blinks a n d the C A L indicator (B) is s h o w n .
selection m o d e ends.
A
B
8. D r i v e t h e v e h i c l e s l o w l y in t w o c o m p l e t e c i r c l e s .
W h e n the calibration is s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d , t h e
c o m p a s s d i s p l a y s t o p s blinking a n d t h e C A L indicator
g o e s off.
23-305
HFL V O L U M E
(Using audio unit volume knob)
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (MID)
HFL-NAVIGATION
MICROPHONE
(Built into the roof console)
AUDIO UNIT (AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY)
RIGHT FRONT T W E E T E R
DOOR S P E A K E R
NAVIGATION UNIT
(Under the driver's seat)
23-306
HFL SWITCH
Test, page 23-337
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
Self-diagnostic Function, page 23-317

N O T E : C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e battery c o n d i t i o n first ( s e e p a g e 22-93).
1. M a k e s u r e t h e ignition s w i t c h is in L O C K (0).
2. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) (A) l o c a t e d u n d e r the d r i v e r ' s s i d e of t h e d a s h b o a r d .

4. M a k e s u r e t h e H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h the v e h i c l e a n d the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit. If it d o e s n ' t t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e
D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
5. S e l e c t H F L I N K / T E L in the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L m e n u .
6. S e l e c t D T C s in the HF L I N K / T E L m e n u .
7. C h e c k for D T C s . If a n y D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d , w r i t e d o w n t h e D T C s , t h e n go to t h e indicated D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . If no
D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d , refer to s y m p t o m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NOTE:
After t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , c l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S .
F o r s p e c i f i c o p e r a t i o n s , refer to t h e u s e r ' s m a n u a l that c a m e w i t h the H D S .
(cont'd)
23-307
Introduction
T h e HFL s y s t e m w o r k s only with Honda approved
B l u e t o o t h - e n a b l e d cell p h o n e s w i t h a h a n d s - f r e e
profile. If y o u a r e not s u r e if a particular cell p h o n e is
compatible with the H F L s y s t e m , Honda has a dedicated
Voice Control Tips and Improving Voice

Recognition
'09 model
T o g i v e a v o i c e c o m m a n d to t h e H F L s y s t e m , p r e s s a n d
call c e n t e r at 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 a n d a w e b s i t e h a n d s f r e e l i n k .
r e l e a s e t h e H F L T A L K button. A l w a y s w a i t for the b e e p ,
h o n d a . c o m to a n s w e r y o u r q u e s t i o n s .
t h e n g i v e y o u r c o m m a n d in a c l e a r , natural v o i c e . T h e
H F L m i c r o p h o n e is o n t h e c e i l i n g by t h e m a p lights. If t h e
T h e H F L s y s t e m a l l o w s t h e u s e r to m a k e a n d r e c e i v e
HFL s y s t e m doesn't recognize your voice c o m m a n d ,
h a n d s - f r e e c a l l s . It c a n n o t control t h e p h o n e ' s
y o u ' l l h e a r " P a r d o n . " If y o u r c o m m a n d isn't r e c o g n i z e d
p e r f o r m a n c e (call quality a n d s i g n a l s t r e n g t h ) . F o r m o r e
a s e c o n d t i m e , y o u ' l l h e a r " P l e a s e r e p e a t . " If y o u r
information about performance and performance
c o m m a n d isn't r e c o g n i z e d a third t i m e , t h e H F L s y s t e m
p r o b l e m s , refer to D r o p p e d C a l l s .
s e n d s y o u to its Help m e n u .
Checking Cell Phone Compatibility
T o h e a r a list of a v a i l a b l e o p t i o n s at a n y t i m e , p r e s s t h e
T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t s t e p in t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g H F L i s s u e s
is to identify t h e m o d e l , s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n , a n d w i r e l e s s
c a r r i e r of t h e p h o n e in q u e s t i o n . Not all p h o n e s w i t h the
Bluetooth feature a n d a h a n d s - f r e e profile a r e
H F L T A L K button a n d s a y " H a n d s - f r e e h e l p . "

T h e HFL s y s t e m m a y have problems recognizing s o m e
voices. T o improve voice recognition:
c o m p a t i b l e w i t h the H o n d a H F L s y s t e m .
C l o s e the w i n d o w s a n d t h e m o o n r o o f .
G o to h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a . c o m , a n d c h e c k if t h e
S e t the fan s p e e d to l o w (1 o r 2) o r off.
c u s t o m e r p h o n e is a p p r o v e d to w o r k w i t h t h e H o n d a
A d j u s t t h e airflow f r o m t h e c e n t e r v e n t s d o w n , s o that
HFL system.
it's not b l o w i n g a g a i n s t t h e m i c r o p h o n e o n t h e c e i l i n g .
S p e a k in a c l e a r a n d n a t u r a l v o i c e . If t h e s y s t e m c a n n o t
r e c o g n i z e y o u r c o m m a n d , try s p e a k i n g l o u d e r , in a
NOTE:
T h e lists of a p p r o v e d , a r c h i v e d , a n d c u r r e n t l y testing
phones are constantly changing, so make sure you
v i e w t h e m frequently.
Phones are added as they are approved.
P h o n e s c a n be r e m o v e d f r o m t h e a p p r o v e d list if a
s o f t w a r e b u g is d i s c o v e r e d that m a k e s the p h o n e
i n c o m p a t i b l e . T h e s e p h o n e s c a n be a d d e d b a c k to t h e
a p p r o v e d list if t h e p h o n e m a n u f a c t u r e r c o r r e c t s t h e
bug.
If t h e s o f t w a r e b u g is c o r r e c t e d , a n e w s o f t w a r e
v e r s i o n is c r e a t e d a n d m a y be listed in t h e S u p p o r t e d
F e a t u r e s s e c t i o n of t h e p h o n e .
T h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n s that a r e a p p r o v e d a r e n o w
b e i n g listed in t h e S o f t w a r e V e r s i o n field.
If y o u c a n n o t a c c e s s t h e H o n d a w e b s i t e , call t h e H F L
call c e n t e r at 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 for further a s s i s t a n c e . T h e
call c e n t e r is o p e n M o n d a y t h r u F r i d a y f r o m 6:00 a . m .
to 6:00 p . m . C S T ; S a t u r d a y f r o m 7:00 a . m . to 6:00 p . m .
C S T ; a n d S u n d a y f r o m 8:00 a . m . to 6:00 p . m . C S T .
23-308
deeper tone.
If t h e b a c k g r o u n d n o i s e is too l o u d , y o u m a y n e e d to
speak louder.
If y o u s p e a k w i t h s o m e t h i n g in y o u r m o u t h , o r y o u r
v o i c e is too h i g h , t h e s y s t e m m a y not interpret y o u r
c o m m a n d correctly.
F i n d out if the p r o b l e m is w i t h o n e p e r s o n o r w i t h
e v e r y o n e w h o u s e s t h e s y s t e m . If t h e s y s t e m h a s a
p r o b l e m w i t h o n l y o n e p e r s o n ' s v o i c e , t h i s is a s y s t e m
limitation.
M a n y i s s u e s r e s u l t f r o m the c u s t o m e r not u s i n g t h e
s y s t e m p r o p e r l y . M a k e s u r e t h e c u s t o m e r is u s i n g t h e
H F L b u t t o n s a n d not the n a v i g a t i o n buttons. W h e n t h e
H F L T A L K button is p r e s s e d , t h e c u s t o m e r h e a r s o n e
a u d i b l e t o n e . W h e n t h e H F L B A C K button is p r e s s e d , the
c u s t o m e r h e a r s t w o a u d i b l e t o n e s . M a k e s u r e to p r e s s
t h e H F L B A C K button to exit the H F L m a i n m e n u after
c o m p l e t i n g a call a n d before g i v i n g a n y n a v i g a t i o n
commands.
T h e H F L s y s t e m m a y experience a n u m b e r recognition
i s s u e , s u c h a s w h e n a c u s t o m e r s a y s a s e t of n u m b e r s in
a g r o u p u n r e c o g n i z e d by t h e s y s t e m . T h e H F L s y s t e m
u n d e r s t a n d s p h o n e n u m b e r s in s p e c i f i c b l o c k s of 1 , 3 , 4 ,
7, a n d 10 n u m b e r s . F o r e x a m p l e , t h e s y s t e m
understands:
1234567890
123-456-7890
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0
T h e s y s t e m m a y b e c o m e c o n f u s e d if n u m b e r s a r e s t a t e d
in o t h e r b l o c k s , a s f o l l o w i n g :
1234-567-890
12-34-56-78-90
12345-67890
123-4567-890
'10 m o d e l
T o g i v e a v o i c e c o m m a n d to t h e H F L s y s t e m , p r e s s a n d
r e l e a s e the H F L T A L K button. A l w a y s w a i t for t h e b e e p ,
t h e n g i v e y o u r c o m m a n d in a c l e a r , natural v o i c e . T h e
H F L m i c r o p h o n e is o n t h e c e i l i n g by t h e m a p lights. Ifthe
HFL s y s t e m doesn't recognize your voice c o m m a n d ,
y o u ' l l h e a r " P a r d o n ? P r e s s t h e T A L K button a n d s a y a
c o m m a n d . F o r a list of c o m m a n d s , s a y h a n d s f r e e h e l p . "
If y o u r c o m m a n d isn't r e c o g n i z e d a s e c o n d t i m e , y o u ' l l
hear "Bluetooth handsfreelink main m e n u . Available
calling options are call, dial, redial, a n d transfer.
A v a i l a b l e s e t u p o p t i o n s a r e p h o n e s e t u p , p h o n e book,
and s y s t e m setup. For m o r e detailed help, s a y
h a n d s f r e e h e l p . " If y o u r c o m m a n d isn't r e c o g n i z e d a
third t i m e , t h e H F L s y s t e m s e n d s y o u to its Help m e n u .
T o h e a r a list of a v a i l a b l e o p t i o n s at a n y t i m e , p r e s s the
H F L T A L K button a n d s a y " H a n d s - f r e e h e l p . "
T h e HFL s y s t e m m a y have problems recognizing s o m e
voices. T o improve voice recognition:
C l o s e the w i n d o w s a n d the m o o n r o o f .
S e t the fan s p e e d to l o w (1 or 2) o r off.
A d j u s t t h e ai r f low f r o m the c e n t e r v e n t s d o w n , s o that
it's not b l o w i n g a g a i n s t the m i c r o p h o n e o n the c e i l i n g .
S p e a k in a c l e a r a n d natural v o i c e . Ifthe s y s t e m c a n n o t
r e c o g n i z e y o u r c o m m a n d , try s p e a k i n g l o u d e r , in a
deeper tone.
I f t h e b a c k g r o u n d n o i s e is too l o u d , y o u m a y n e e d to
speak louder.
If y o u s p e a k w i t h s o m e t h i n g in y o u r m o u t h , or y o u r
v o i c e is too h i g h , the s y s t e m m a y not interpret y o u r
c o m m a n d correctly.
F i n d out if the p r o b l e m is w i t h o n e p e r s o n o r w i t h
e v e r y o n e w h o u s e s the s y s t e m . I f t h e s y s t e m h a s a
p r o b l e m w i t h o n l y o n e p e r s o n ' s v o i c e , t h i s is a s y s t e m
limitation.
(cont'd)
23-309
M a n y i s s u e s r e s u l t f r o m t h e c u s t o m e r not u s i n g t h e
s y s t e m p r o p e r l y . M a k e s u r e t h e c u s t o m e r is u s i n g t h e
H F L buttons a n d not t h e n a v i g a t i o n b u t t o n s . W h e n the
H F L T A L K button is p r e s s e d , the c u s t o m e r h e a r s o n e
a u d i b l e t o n e . W h e n t h e H F L B A C K button is p r e s s e d , the
c u s t o m e r h e a r s t w o a u d i b l e t o n e s . M a k e s u r e to p r e s s
t h e H F L B A C K button to exit t h e H F L m a i n m e n u after
c o m p l e t i n g a call a n d before g i v i n g a n y n a v i g a t i o n
commands.
T h e H F L s y s t e m m a y experience a n u m b e r recognition
i s s u e , s u c h a s w h e n a c u s t o m e r s a y s a s e t of n u m b e r s in
a group unrecognized by the s y s t e m . T h e H F L s y s t e m
u n d e r s t a n d s p h o n e n u m b e r s in s p e c i f i c b l o c k s of 1 , 3 , 4 ,
7, a n d 10 n u m b e r s . F o r e x a m p l e , t h e s y s t e m
understands:
1234567890
123-456-7890
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0
T h e s y s t e m m a y b e c o m e c o n f u s e d if n u m b e r s a r e s t a t e d
in other b l o c k s , a s f o l l o w i n g :
1234-567-890
12-34-56-78-90
12345-67890
123-4567-890
23-310
Navigating Through Menus

T o skip a voice prompt, p r e s s a n d release the H F L T A L K
button w h i l e t h e H F L s y s t e m is s p e a k i n g . T h e s y s t e m
b e g i n s listening for y o u r n e x t v o i c e c o m m a n d .
T o go b a c k a s t e p in a v o i c e c o m m a n d s e q u e n c e , p r e s s
a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L B A C K b u t t o n , o r p r e s s the H F L T A L K
button a n d s a y " G o b a c k . " If y o u don't s a y a n y t h i n g
w h i l e t h e H F L s y s t e m is listening for y o u r v o i c e
c o m m a n d , it t i m e s o u t a n d s t o p s v o i c e r e c o g n i t i o n . T h e
next t i m e y o u p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L T A L K b u t t o n ,
the H F L s y s t e m b e g i n s listening f r o m t h e point it t i m e d
out.
If y o u ' v e f i n i s h e d o r w a n t to s t o p a v o i c e c o m m a n d
s e q u e n c e at a n y t i m e , p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the H F L B A C K
button, o r p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L T A L K button, w a i t
for the b e e p , a n d s a y " C a n c e l . " T h e n e x t t i m e y o u p r e s s
a n d release the H F L T A L K button, the H F L s y s t e m begins
f r o m its m a i n m e n u . T o a v o i d k e e p i n g t h e a u d i o s y s t e m
m u t e d , p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L B A C K button w h e n
you are finished.
N O T E : Y o u c a n s a y multiple c o m m a n d s in o n e
s e q u e n c e , like " P h o n e s e t u p - p a i r " after p r e s s i n g the
H F L T A L K button.
Pairing a Cell Phone

'09 m o d e l
Y o u m u s t pair a n a p p r o v e d B l u e t o o t h - c o m p a t i b l e p h o n e
to the H F L s y s t e m before y o u c a n m a k e a n d r e c e i v e
c a l l s . F o r a c u r r e n t list of a p p r o v e d p h o n e s a n d s p e c i f i c
p h o n e p a i r i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s for e a c h p h o n e , s e e C h e c k i n g
C e l l P h o n e C o m p a t i b i l i t y , go to h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a .
c o m , o r call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 .
T h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e w o r k s for m o s t p h o n e s . If y o u
c a n n o t pair a p h o n e to the H F L s y s t e m w i t h this
p r o c e d u r e , refer to the p h o n e ' s o p e r a t i n g m a n u a l , v i s i t
h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a . c o m , o r call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 .
NOTE:
Y o u c a n n o t pair a p h o n e w h i l e the v e h i c l e is m o v i n g .
Y o u r p h o n e m u s t be in D i s c o v e r y M o d e .
A m a x i m u m of s i x B l u e t o o t h - c o m p a t i b l e p h o n e s c a n
be p a i r e d to the s y s t e m .
1. W i t h the p h o n e o n a n d the ignition s w i t c h in

A C C E S S O R Y (I) or O N (II), p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the H F L
T A L K button. After the b e e p , s a y " P h o n e s e t u p . " T h e
H F L r e s p o n d s , " P h o n e s e t u p o p t i o n s a r e s t a t u s , pair,
edit, d e l e t e , a n d l i s t . "
2. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the H F L T A L K button. After the
b e e p , s a y " P a i r . " T h e H F L r e s p o n d s , " T h e pairing
p r o c e s s r e q u i r e s o p e r a t i o n of y o u r m o b i l e p h o n e . F o r
safety, o n l y p e r f o r m t h i s function w h i l e the v e h i c l e is
s t o p p e d . S t a t e a four-digit c o d e for p a i r i n g . Note this
c o d e . It will be r e q u e s t e d by the p h o n e . "
b e e p , s a y the four-digit c o d e y o u w a n t to u s e . T h i s c a n
be a n y four-digit n u m b e r y o u w a n t . For e x a m p l e , s a y
" 1 , 2, 3, 4 . " T h e H F L r e s p o n d s , " 1 , 2, 3, 4. Is t h i s
correct?"
b e e p , s a y " Y e s . " T h e H F L r e s p o n d s , " H F L is n o w
s e a r c h i n g for a Bluetooth p h o n e . M a k e s u r e t h e
p h o n e y o u a r e trying to pair is in D i s c o v e r y m o d e . " If
t h e s e s t e p s d o not w o r k o n the p h o n e y o u a r e p a i r i n g ,
refer to the p h o n e ' s o p e r a t i n g m a n u a l .
5. F o l l o w the p r o m p t s o n y o u r p h o n e to get it into its
D i s c o v e r y m o d e . T h e p h o n e will s e a r c h for the H F L .
W h e n it c o m e s u p , s e l e c t H a n d s F r e e L i n k f r o m the list
of o p t i o n s d i s p l a y e d o n y o u r p h o n e .
6. W h e n a s k e d by the p h o n e , e n t e r the four-digit c o d e
f r o m s t e p 3 into y o u r p h o n e . T h e H F L r e s p o n d s , " A
n e w p h o n e h a s b e e n f o u n d . W h a t w o u l d y o u like to
n a m e this p h o n e ? "
b e e p , s a y the n a m e y o u w a n t to u s e . F o r e x a m p l e , s a y
" T o m ' s phone." The HFL responds, " T o m ' s phone
h a s b e e n s u c c e s s f u l l y p a i r e d . R e t u r n i n g to the m a i n
menu."
(cont'd)
23-311
1. W i t h t h e p h o n e o n a n d t h e ignition s w i t c h in
'10 model
Y o u m u s t pair a n a p p r o v e d B l u e t o o t h - c o m p a t i b l e
phone
to t h e H F L s y s t e m before y o u c a n m a k e a n d r e c e i v e
c a l l s . F o r a c u r r e n t list of a p p r o v e d p h o n e s a n d s p e c i f i c
p h o n e pairing i n s t r u c t i o n s for e a c h p h o n e , s e e C h e c k i n g
C e l l P h o n e C o m p a t i b i l i t y , g o to h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a .
c o m , o r call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 .
T h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e w o r k s for m o s t p h o n e s . If y o u
c a n n o t pair a p h o n e to t h e H F L s y s t e m w i t h this
p r o c e d u r e , refer to t h e p h o n e ' s o p e r a t i n g m a n u a l , v i s i t
h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a . c o m , o r call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 .
NOTE:
Y o u c a n n o t pair a p h o n e w h i l e t h e v e h i c l e is m o v i n g .
Y o u r p h o n e m u s t b e in D i s c o v e r y M o d e .
A m a x i m u m of s i x B l u e t o o t h - c o m p a t i b l e p h o n e s c a n
be p a i r e d to the s y s t e m .
A C C E S S O R Y (I) o r O N (II), p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L
T A L K button. After t h e b e e p , s a y " P h o n e s e t u p . " T h e
H F L r e s p o n d s , " P h o n e s e t u p o p t i o n s a r e p a i r , edit,
d e l e t e , list, s t a t u s , next p h o n e , s e t p a i r i n g c o d e . "
2. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L T A L K button. After t h e
b e e p , s a y " P a i r . " T h e H F L r e s p o n d s , " T h e pairing
p r o c e s s r e q u i r e s o p e r a t i o n of y o u r m o b i l e p h o n e . F o r
safety, o n l y p e r f o r m this function w h i l e t h e v e h i c l e is
s t o p p e d . F o r p r o p e r s y s t e m function a c o m p a t i b l e
bluetooth p h o n e is r e q u i r e d . P l e a s e visit a c u r a .
c o m / h a n d s f r e e l i n k for a list of a p p r o v e d p h o n e s a n d
o t h e r s y s t e m i n f o r m a t i o n . H a n d s f r e e l i n k is w a i t i n g to
pair w i t h a bluetooth p h o n e . F r o m y o u r p h o n e , s e a r c h
for bluetooth d e v i c e s , a n d s e l e c t h a n d s f r e e l i n k . W h e n
p r o m p t e d by y o u r m o b i l e p h o n e e n t e r t h e p a i r i n g
code 0000."
3. W h e n p r o m p t e d by y o u r cell p h o n e , e n t e r t h e pairing
c o d e 0 0 0 0 . Refer to y o u r cell p h o n e u s e r g u i d e for
m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t s e a r c h i n g for a bluetooth
device.
4 . O n c e t h e p h o n e is r e c o g n i z e d b y t h e H F L s y s t e m , it
r e s p o n d s , " H a n d s f r e e l i n k h a s c o n n e c t e d to a n e w
p h o n e . A n a m e is n e e d e d to identify t h i s p h o n e . P r e s s
the T A L K button a n d s a y a n a m e . F o r e x a m p l e , J o h n ' s
phone."
5. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L T A L K button. After t h e
b e e p , s a y t h e n a m e y o u w a n t to u s e . F o r e x a m p l e , s a y
" T o m ' s phone." The HFL responds, " T o m ' s phone
h a s b e e n s u c c e s s f u l l y p a i r e d . R e t u r n i n g to t h e m a i n
menu."
N O T E : If n o p h o n e s h a v e b e e n p a i r e d to t h e s y s t e m ,
u p o n p r e s s i n g t h e T A L K b u t t o n , t h e s y s t e m will a s k if
y o u w a n t to p a i r a p h o n e . P r e s s t h e T a l k button a n d s a y
" Y e s " . T h e s y s t e m will t h e n p r o c e e d to S t e p 2.
23-312
Pairing Troubleshooting
Pairing Checks
M a n y pairing i s s u e s a r e r e s o l v e d by altering the

customer's phone settings.
F o r m o r e information a b o u t p a i r i n g , refer to t h e cell

p h o n e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l , o r go to h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a .
com.
Bluetooth feature s e t t i n g s m u s t be t u r n e d o n . P h o n e
m a n u f a c t u r e r s s e t the default to d i s a b l e Bluetooth
f e a t u r e s to c o n s e r v e battery life. Cell p h o n e s m a y
p r o v i d e p r o c e d u r e s to T e m p o r a r y P o w e r O n B l u e t o o t h ,
or P o w e r O n B l u e t o o t h . T u r n the B l u e t o o t h feature o n ,
pair t h e p h o n e to the v e h i c l e , a n d c o n f i r m t h e p h o n e is
linked. Do th is by t u r n i n g t h e p h o n e off a n d back o n .
M a k e o r r e c e i v e a call to c o n f i r m that the cell p h o n e is
successfully paired.
W h e n t h e p h o n e ' s B l u e t o o t h feature is o n , other
h a n d s f r e e a c c e s s o r i e s s u c h a s e a r p i e c e s or h e a d s e t s
m a y a u t o m a t i c a l l y r e c o n n e c t to the p h o n e w h e n y o u
turn o n t h e a c c e s s o r y o r m o v e it w i t h i n r a n g e of the cell
p h o n e . T h i s r e s u l t s in t h e p h o n e not c o n n e c t i n g to the
H F L s y s t e m w h e n the c u s t o m e r enters the vehicle. Y o u
m u s t unlink the h a n d s - f r e e a c c e s s o r y f r o m the p h o n e
before the H F L s y s t e m c a n r e c o n n e c t .
1. Is the cell p h o n e c o m p a t i b l e w i t h the H F L ?

2. Is the Bluetooth feature t u r n e d o n ?
3. Is the c u s t o m e r u s i n g t h e H F L b u t t o n s , not the
navigation buttons, w h e n pairing?
4. Is the cell p h o n e battery fully c h a r g e d , a n d is t h e r e
g o o d signal strength w h e n pairing?
5. D o a soft r e s e t o n the cell p h o n e .
6. If the c u s t o m e r is trying to pair a Blackberry or P a l m
T r e o d e v i c e , m a k e s u r e t h e c u s t o m e r u s e s t h e shift
key w h e n e n t e r i n g the p a s s c o d e . If the shift key is not
p r e s s e d , t h e c u s t o m e r m a y be e n t e r i n g letters. T h e
H F L d o e s not r e c o g n i z e letters.
Dropped Calls
S o m e p h o n e s h a v e a n A u t o A n s w e r setting that
f u n c t i o n s w i t h a h e a d s e t . T h i s setting m u s t be t u r n e d off
or the H F L s y s t e m c a n n o t a c c e p t a n y i n c o m i n g c a l l s .
W h e n th i s setting is o n , it b l o c k s the H F L s y s t e m f r o m
a n s w e r i n g t h e c a l l , a n d the call g o e s to v o i c e m a i l . T h i s
c a n c a u s e t h e c u s t o m e r to think that t h e cell p h o n e is not
paired properly.
C u s t o m e r s m a y perceive dropped calls as being an HFL

s y s t e m fault, but m o s t d r o p p e d c a l l s a r e f r o m cell p h o n e
a n d cell p h o n e c a r r i e r i s s u e s . T h e H F L s y s t e m d o e s not
directly h a n d l e t h e cell p h o n e s i g n a l . It a l l o w s the cell
p h o n e to t r a n s m i t the cell p h o n e a u d i o o v e r the v e h i c l e ' s
audio s y s t e m .
If the H F L s y s t e m h a s s i x p h o n e s p a i r e d , it will not tell

y o u that it h a s r e a c h e d its m a x i m u m , a n d will not a l l o w
y o u to pair a n e w p h o n e . T o c h e c k h o w m a n y p h o n e s a r e
p a i r e d , p r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the H F L T A L K button. After the
b e e p , s a y " P h o n e s e t u p list/' T h e H F L s y s t e m lists e v e r y
a s s i g n e d p h o n e n a m e p a i r e d w i t h it, t h e n f i n i s h e s by
s a y i n g " T h e entire list h a s b e e n r e a d . " C o u n t the
n u m b e r of p h o n e s listed. If t h e r e a r e s i x , y o u m u s t delete
o n e p h o n e before a d d i n g a n e w o n e .
cell p h o n e settings:
Before t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g for d r o p p e d c a l l s , c o n f i r m the

D i s a b l e A u t o A n s w e r . If A u t o A n s w e r is e n a b l e d ,
i n c o m i n g c a l l s a r e routed to v o i c e m a i l .
Disable A l w a y s Ask/Trust, Authorize Device, or similar
setting. If t h e s e settings a r e e n a b l e d , e a c h t i m e t h e
H F L s y s t e m a t t e m p t s to link to the p h o n e , the p h o n e
will a s k if y o u w a n t to c o n n e c t . If y o u d o not a l l o w the
c o n n e c t i o n , the H F L will not o p e r a t e . T h e p h o n e m u s t
be s e t to N e v e r A s k , A u t h o r i z e D e v i c e , etc. ( b a s e d o n
the p h o n e m a n u f a c t u r e r a n d carrier) for p e r m i s s i o n .
Refer to t h e cell p h o n e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l for m o r e
information.
D i s a b l e Flip O p e n to A n s w e r . If th i s setting is e n a b l e d ,
the p h o n e m u s t r e m a i n o p e n in the v e h i c l e . If it is
c l o s e d , t h e i n c o m i n g c a l l s a r e routed to v o i c e m a i l .
(cont'd)
23-313
Always c o n f i r m w i t h the customer if the number of
dropped calls is higher while using the HFL system as
opposed to using the cell phone only. Customers often
confuse problems w i t h their phone or carrier as a
problem w i t h the HFL system. The HFL system cannot
control or determine:
Cellular connection quality.
Signal strength.
Cellular coverage.
A m b i e n t weather conditions that affect cellular
signals.
W h e n a customer complains about dropped calls, ask
questions about w h e n or where the calls are dropped,
such as:
Do y o u drive the same route on a regular basis?
Does the call drop in the same location?
Where do you keep y o u r cell phone?
Have you compared the number of dropped calls
using the HFL versus making calls f r o m the handset?
Does your phone have an antenna that needs to be
extended?
Many reasons for a dropped call are not related to the

HFL system. Here are some causes for dropped calls:
If the quantity of dropped calls is about the same w h e n
the customer uses the HFL system versus the handset,
the issue is likely due to the cellular phone or carrier.
I f t h e phone is equipped w i t h a retractable antenna, it
needs to be extended to maximize signal strength.
If a customer also notices that the calls tend to drop in
the same areas, the HFL system may be operating
normally, but something about the area diminishes
cellular coverage to a point where the call drops.
Hills or mountains can block or interfere w i t h cellular
signals.
High-rise buildings, bridges, or other large structures
may block or interfere w i t h cellular signals.
Placing the cell phone in a purse, in a metal briefcase,
under the seat, in the glove box, or in the trunk can all
affect signal reception.
There are coverage gaps in the cellular service. W h e n
driving, a call is typically passed f r o m one tower to
another. Ifthe customer drives through an area where
there is a coverage gap between towers, the call
drops.
Electrical storms, heavy rain, or overcast conditions
interfere w i t h signal strength.
The cell phone battery's state of charge can affect
signal reception. A low battery may reduce the
phone's ability to boost the antenna's power and
function properly, especially in low signal strength
areas. Some phone manufacturers trade off signal
transmission and reception strength for battery life.
As the battery weakens, the signal strength may also
weaken. Some cell phones may operate more
effectively than others in low signal strength areas,
especially w i t h a partially charged battery, and
depending on whether or not the retractable antenna
is fully extended (if applicable). On these models,
make sure the antenna is always extended to
maximize signal strength and extend battery life.
23-314
Phone Will Not Automatically Connect to the

HFL
If a c u s t o m e r c o m p l a i n s that their cell p h o n e is not
a u t o m a t i c a l l y c o n n e c t i n g to the H F L s y s t e m w h e n t h e y
enter the v e h i c l e , d o t h i s :
1. M a k e s u r e the B l u e t o o t h f e a t u r e is t u r n e d on in the
cell p h o n e .
2 . M a k e s u r e the cell p h o n e is p r o p e r l y p a i r e d to the H F L
system.
3. Do a soft r e s e t to the cell p h o n e .
4. C h e c k if the p h o n e h a s a n A u t h o r i z e d C o n n e c t i o n or
Trusted option.
5. C h e c k t h e battery a n d s i g n a l s t r e n g t h o n the cell
p h o n e . Pairing a p h o n e r e q u i r e s o p t i m a l s i g n a l
s t r e n g t h a n d a n e a r l y full battery.
Incoming Calls
If a c u s t o m e r c o m p l a i n s that t h e y c a n n o t r e c e i v e
i n c o m i n g c a l l s t h r o u g h t h e H F L s y s t e m , s e e if the call is
routing to the cell p h o n e i n s t e a d of the H F L s y s t e m . A n
e a s y w a y to k n o w if the call is routed to the cell p h o n e is
w h e n t h e c u s t o m e r s a y s , "I c a n ' t h e a r the c a l l e r , but t h e y
can hear me."
1. M a k e s u r e the Bluetooth feature is t u r n e d o n in the
cell p h o n e .
Outgoing Calls
'09 model
If a c u s t o m e r s a y s that t h e y c a n n o t p l a c e a call u s i n g the
H F L s y s t e m , a s k if t h e call w a s initiated t h r o u g h t h e H F L
s y s t e m or the cell p h o n e itself.
If t h e call is p l a c e d by the H F L s y s t e m :
1. M a k e s u r e the Bluetooth feature is t u r n e d o n in the
cell p h o n e .
2. M a k e s u r e the cell p h o n e is p a i r e d to t h e H F L s y s t e m
a n d linked.
3. M a k e s u r e the c u s t o m e r is p r e s s i n g the H F L T A L K
button before e a c h c o m m a n d a n d g o i n g t h r o u g h t h e
calling p r o c e s s c o r r e c t l y .
button a n d not the H F L B A C K button o r t h e n a v i g a t i o n
buttons.
5. C h e c k if the cell p h o n e h a s a n A u t h o r i z e d
C o n n e c t i o n s o r T r u s t e d option.
6. Do a soft r e s e t to the cell p h o n e .
If t h e call is p l a c e d by the cell p h o n e :
T h e call will r e m a i n o n the h a n d s e t until y o u t r a n s f e r it
o v e r to the H F L s y s t e m . T o c o n t i n u e t h e call o n the H F L
s y s t e m , y o u m u s t u s e the T r a n s f e r c o m m a n d by
p r e s s i n g a n d r e l e a s i n g the H F L T A L K button d u r i n g a n
active call a n d s a y i n g " T r a n s f e r . " T h e c u s t o m e r c a n n o w
c o n t i n u e the call u s i n g the H F L s y s t e m .
2 . M a k e s u r e t h e cell p h o n e is p a i r e d to the H F L s y s t e m
and linked.
3. M a k e s u r e the a n s w e r settings in the cell p h o n e a r e
s e t to multi-key o r a n y - k e y a n s w e r . If the p h o n e is s e t
to flip o p e n to a n s w e r , r e c o m m e n d c h a n g i n g t h e
setting to A n y K e y or l e a v i n g the p h o n e flipped o p e n
w h e n u s i n g the H F L s y s t e m .
4. M a k e s u r e the A u t o A n s w e r feature is t u r n e d off in the
cell p h o n e .
5. Do a soft r e s e t to t h e p h o n e .
6. M a k e s u r e t h e battery is fully c h a r g e d a n d t h e r e is
adequate signal strength.
7. A s k t h e c u s t o m e r if t h e y h a v e s e t s p e c i f i c ring t o n e s
or r i n g e r IDs to s p e c i f i c c o n t a c t s . If t h e y h a v e ,
r e c o m m e n d u s i n g o n e s t a n d a r d ring t o n e for all c a l l s .
button a n d not the H F L B A C K button or the n a v i g a t i o n
buttons.
(cont'd)
23-315
'10 model
If a customer says that they cannot place a call using the

HFL system, ask ifthe call was initiated through the HFL
system or the cell phone itself.
Ifthe call is placed by the HFL system:
1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the
cell phone.
2. Make sure the cell phone is paired to the HFL system
and linked.
3. Make sure the customer is pressing the HFL TALK
button before each command and going through the
calling process correctly.
4. Make sure the customer is pressing the HFL TALK
button and not the HFL BACK button or the navigation
buttons.
5. Check if the cell phone has an Authorized
Connections or Trusted option.
6. Do a soft reset to the cell phone.
If the call is placed by the cell phone:
By default, the call will automatically transfer to HFL.
This setting can be changed using the "Auto Transfer"
command under the "System Setup" menu. If it is
preferred to have a call placed by the cell phone remain
on the cell phone, then the Auto Transfer featured
should be set to Disabled. The "Transfer" command can
be used to transfer calls between the HFL and handset.
23-316
Clearing the HFL system

'09 model
NOTE:
This operation clears the HFL system of all
passcode(s), any paired phones, and all names in the
HFL phonebook.
Clearing the HFL system is recommend before selling
the vehicle.
Ifthe system is locked and the pass code is lost or
forgotten, see the symptom troubleshooting.
1. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
beep, say "System clear" and the HFL system
responds, "This process will clear all paired phone,
clear all entries in the phonebook, clear the passcode
and restore all defaults in the system setup. Is this
what you would like to do?"
2. Press and release the HFL Talk button. After the beep,
say "Yes" and the HFL system responds, "Preparing
to clear all paired phone, all phonebook entries, the
passcode. This may take up to 2 minutes to
complete."
3. Press and release the HFL Talk button. After the beep,
say "OK" to proceed, or say "Go back" or "Cancel."
4. If you said "OK", after a short period of time, the HFL
system responds, "System has been cleared.
Returning to the main menu, the Clearing HFL system
procedure is now complete."
'10 model
NOTE:
N O T E : T h i s p r o c e d u r e s h o u l d be u s e d o n l y if H D S is
T h i s o p e r a t i o n c l e a r s the H F L s y s t e m of all
unavailable.
p a s s c o d e ( s ) , a n y p a i r e d p h o n e s , a n d all n a m e s in t h e
HFL phonebook.
C l e a r i n g t h e H F L s y s t e m is r e c o m m e n d before s e l l i n g
the vehicle.
Ifthe s y s t e m is l o c k e d a n d t h e p a s s c o d e is lost or
forgotten, s e e t h e s y m p t o m
troubleshooting.

b e e p , s a y " S y s t e m S e t u p C l e a r " a n d the H F L s y s t e m
r e s p o n d s , " T h i s p r o c e s s will c l e a r all p a i r e d p h o n e s ,
c l e a r all e n t r i e s in the p h o n e b o o k , c l e a r the s e c u r i t y
p a s s c o d e a n d r e s t o r e all defaults in t h e s y s t e m s e t u p .
Is this w h a t y o u w o u l d like to d o ? "
2. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e the H F L T a l k button. After the b e e p ,
s a y " Y e s " a n d the H F L s y s t e m r e s p o n d s , " P r e p a r i n g
to c l e a r t h e s y s t e m , w h i c h m a y take up to 2 m i n u t e s to
c o m p l e t e . T o p r o c e e d , p r e s s t h e talk button, a n d s a y
c o n t i n u e . O t h e r w i s e s a y go b a c k or c a n c e l . "
3. P r e s s a n d r e l e a s e t h e H F L T a l k button. After the b e e p ,
s a y " C o n t i n u e " to p r o c e e d , o r s a y " G o b a c k " or
"Cancel".
T o r u n the s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c f u n c t i o n , d o the f o l l o w i n g :
2. P r e s s a n d hold the H F L B a c k button for m o r e t h a n 5
seconds.
3. W h e n the H a n d s F r e e L i n k s y s t e m e n t e r s the
s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c f u n c t i o n , the f o l l o w i n g will o c c u r .
Ifthe s y s t e m h a s not c o m p l e t e d testing for D T C s ,
the H a n d s F r e e L i n k s y s t e m s a y s " T h e h a n d s free
s y s t e m test is in p r o g r e s s " .
If t h e r e is no D T C , t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k s y s t e m s a y s
" T h e h a n d s free s y s t e m is O K " .
If t h e r e is a n y D T C , t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k s y s t e m s a y s
" T h e h a n d s free s y s t e m n e e d s to be s e r v i c e d " .
N O T E : T h e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c function c a n o n l y be initiated
w h i l e t h e H F L is in its idle state.
4. If y o u s a i d " C o n t i n u e " the H F L r e s p o n d s , " P l e a s e w a i t

until t h e s y s t e m is c l e a r e d . " After a s h o r t p e r i o d of
t i m e (up to t w o m i n u t e s ) the H F L r e s p o n d s , " T h e
system has been cleared."
(cont'd)
23-317
Glossary of Terms
Auto Answer
T h i s cell p h o n e setting f o r c e s i n c o m i n g c a l l s to
a u t o m a t i c a l l y be a n s w e r e d by the h a n d s e t . D i s a b l e this
feature o n t h e p h o n e w h e n u s i n g the H F L s y s t e m , a s it
m a y interfere w i t h the H F L s y s t e m a n s w e r i n g i n c o m i n g
c a l l s . S e t the p h o n e setting to:
HFL Buttons
H F L T A L K button (A): U s e t h i s button o n t h e s t e e r i n g
w h e e l to g i v e c o m m a n d s . P r e s s the button before a
v o i c e c o m m a n d is g i v e n .
H F L B A C K button (B): U s e t h i s button o n t h e s t e e r i n g
w h e e l to e n d a call or return to a p r e v i o u s p r o m p t in
the H F L m e n u . P r e s s i n g t h e button t w i c e o r h o l d i n g it
d o w n r e t u r n s y o u to t h e H F L m a i n m e n u .
- S e n d Only
- Any Key
- Multi-Key
answer
Answer Options
T h e s e cell p h o n e s e t t i n g s a l l o w y o u to s e l e c t h o w y o u
w o u l d like to a n s w e r a n i n c o m i n g call o n the h a n d s e t .
T h e a n s w e r option in t h e p h o n e c a n affect i n b o u n d c a l l s
o n the H F L s y s t e m .
Authorized Connection
T h i s cell p h o n e setting a l l o w s t h e p h o n e to c o n n e c t
a u t o m a t i c a l l y w i t h the H F L s y s t e m w i t h o u t p r o m p t i n g
the c u s t o m e r for p e r m i s s i o n to c o n n e c t . In s o m e
i n s t a n c e s , it c a n affect the ability of the p h o n e to
p r o p e r l y route s o u n d to the H F L s y s t e m .
Bluetooth Power
T h i s cell p h o n e function e n a b l e s o r d i s a b l e s the
Bluetooth a p p l i c a t i o n . W h e n u s i n g a h a n d s - f r e e d e v i c e
s u c h a s H F L , t h e B l u e t o o t h a p p l i c a t i o n n e e d s to b e
enabled.
Discovery Mode
Y o u n e e d to h a v e the cell p h o n e in D i s c o v e r y M o d e to
allow other devices with Bluetooth capabilities (such a s
the H F L s y s t e m ) to find t h e p h o n e d u r i n g the p a i r i n g
process.
Downloaded Ringtones
A c u s t o m e r gets these ringtones from an outside s o u r c e ,
s u c h a s the Internet o r a m o b i l e p h o n e s t o r e .
23-318
Hard Reset
H a r d r e s e t s c l e a r the s a v e d s e t t i n g s in t h e cell p h o n e a n d
r e s t o r e s it to the factory d e f a u l t s . A h a r d r e s e t s h o u l d be
d o n e o n l y a s a last r e s o r t ( s e e t h e cell p h o n e o w n e r ' s
m a n u a l for m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n ) .
Linking
T h i s is w h e n y o u r p a i r e d p h o n e is a c t i v e l y r e a d y to u s e
t h e H F L s y s t e m . Y o u c a n p a i r u p to s i x p h o n e s to the H F L
s y s t e m , but o n l y o n e p h o n e c a n be linked at a t i m e . If
t w o p a i r e d p h o n e s a r e in t h e v e h i c l e , o n l y the p h o n e that
is linked c a n u s e the H F L s y s t e m a n d f u n c t i o n s . T h e
s e c o n d p h o n e m u s t be u s e d a s a n o r m a l h a n d s e t .
Pairing
A d e s c r i p t i o n for linking t w o Bluetooth d e v i c e s together.
In this c a s e , y o u a r e linking a cell p h o n e with the H F L
s y s t e m . After the pairing p r o c e s s is c o m p l e t e , the
d e v i c e s a r e a b l e to r e c o g n i z e e a c h other a n d
c o m m u n i c a t e wirelessly via Bluetooth.
Soft Reset (Cellular phone)

T h i s h e l p s to r e s t o r e t h e b a s i c f u n c t i o n s of the p h o n e . T o
do a soft r e s e t , turn the p h o n e p o w e r off, r e m o v e a n d
reinsert the cell p h o n e battery, t h e n turn the p h o n e back
on.
Software Version
T h i s refers to the s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n l o a d e d in the cell
p h o n e . T h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n that w a s t e s t e d a n d
d e t e r m i n e d to be c o m p a t i b l e w i t h the H F L s y s t e m m a y
be listed o n the H F L w e b s i t e . Not all s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n s
are compatible with the HFL s y s t e m .
Standard Ringtone
T h e s e r i n g t o n e s c o m e factory-in stalled o n the cell
phone.
DTC
Description
DTC t y p e
Page
B1775
M i c r o p h o n e input/output s h o r t e d to p o w e r
S i g n a l error
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 23-327)
B1776
M i c r o p h o n e input/output s h o r t e d to g r o u n d o r o p e n
S i g n a l error
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-328)
B1779
H F L s w i t c h ( H F L T A L K / H F L B A C K buttons) circuit
open/short
Signal error
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 23-329)
B1780
H F L s w i t c h ( H F L T A L K / H F L B A C K buttons) circuit s h o r t
Signal error
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 23-331)
B1792
H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit internal e r r o r
Internal e r r o r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 23-332)
U1280
C o m m u n i c a t i o n b u s line e r r o r ( B U S - O F F )
L o s s of
communication
D T C Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 22-151)
23-320

Symptom
A l s o check for
H F L d o e s not r e s p o n d
Control Unit Input T e s t ( s e e

p a g e 23-338)
C h e c k a n d r e p a i r all C A N related D T C s .
T h e H F L digits d o not go a w a y f r o m
the a u d i o - H V A C d i s p l a y after
p r e s s i n g the H F L B A C K button
( s e e p a g e 23-333)
C h e c k a n d r e p a i r all C A N
related D T C s .
T h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit is
disconnected.
T h e Bluetooth icon in t h e a u d i o H V A C d i s p l a y is not d i s p l a y e d
T h e r e is no H F L - c o m p a t i b l e
p h o n e p a i r e d to t h e v e h i c l e .
Pair a n a p p r o v e d
H F L - c o m p a t i b l e p h o n e to the
vehicle
T h e p h o n e m u s t be o n the H o n d a list of
a p p r o v e d Bluetooth p h o n e s a n d
c o n f i g u r e d c o r r e c t l y . F o r a c u r r e n t list of
a p p r o v e d p h o n e s , go to h a n d s f r e e l i n k .
h o n d a . c o m , or call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 for further
assistance.
C h e c k the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d u s e t h e
Navi S y s t e m Link.
T h e H o n d a a p p r o v e d Bluetooth
p h o n e is h a v i n g p r o b l e m s pairing to
the v e h i c l e
HFL System Troubleshooting

( s e e p a g e 23-326)
T h e p h o n e m u s t be o n the H o n d a list of
assistance.
C h e c k the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d u s e t h e
p h o n e c a n n o t u s e all its f u n c t i o n s

( s e e p a g e 23-326)
T h e p h o n e m u s t be on t h e H o n d a list of
assistance.
C h e c k the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d u s e the
p h o n e d o e s not p l a c e or r e c e i v e c a l l s
u s i n g the H F L s y s t e m

( s e e p a g e 23-326)
T h e p h o n e m u s t be o n t h e H o n d a list of
c o n f i g u r e d correctly. F o r a c u r r e n t list of
assistance.
C h e c k the D i a g n o s t i c M e n u a n d u s e the
T h e c u s t o m e r w a n t s the H F L s y s t e m
reset (all p h o n e s a n d a d d r e s s
information cleared fromthe HFL
system)
Clearing the s y s t e m (see page

23-316)
S e e the O w n e r ' s M a n u a l for

additional information.
T h e H F L s y s t e m is l o c k e d a n d the
p a s s c o d e h a s b e e n lost or forgotten
( s e e p a g e 23-334)
T h e H F L s y s t e m d o e s not r e c o g n i z e
all v o i c e p r o m p t s
( s e e p a g e 23-333)
T h e H F L s y s t e m s p e a k s in F r e n c h
S e e the H F L s e c t i o n in the
Owner's Manual
for C h a n g i n g L a n g u a g e
T h e a d d r e s s book d o e s not t r a n s f e r
f r o m H o n d a a p p r o v e d Bluetooth
p h o n e to H F L s y s t e m
T h e r e is no H F L c o m p a t i b l e
p h o n e p a i r e d to t h e v e h i c l e or
t h e a p p r o v e d p h o n e d o e s not
s u p p o r t t h e function. Pair a n
approved HFL compatible
p h o n e to the v e h i c l e
T h e p h o n e m u s t be o n t h e H o n d a list of
h o n d a . c o m , or call 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6
T h e H F L m e s s a g e s c a n n o t be
h e a r d or a r e w e a k
( s e e p a g e 23-334)
E x c e s s i v e interior n o i s e (open w i n d o w s ,
v e n t s b l o w i n g o n m i c r o p h o n e , etc.).
A l s o s e e V o i c e control tips.
23-321
System Description
HandsFreeLink Control Unit Inputs and Outputs

28P CONNECTOR
HandsFreeLink Control Unit 28P Connector
1
6 7 8
15 16 17 18 / 2 0 21
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
Cavity
Wire Color
BLK
WHT
BLU/GRN
WHT
2
3
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
RED
BLU*
GRN
LT B L U *
BRN
YEL
WHT
PUR
LTGRN
WHT
BLK
GRN
Connect to
B o d y g r o u n d to G 4 0 3 ( G N D )
HFL switch (HFL S T R G S W )
A u d i o unit a n d H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e ( H F L M U T E )
N a v i g a t i o n unit (NAVI C O M M 4)
N a v i g a t i o n unit (NAVI C O M M 3)
S h i e l d for t e r m i n a l s No. 6, No. 7, No. 2 0 , a n d No. 21 (NAVI C O M M S H )
A u d i o unit ( T E L M S I G + )
S h i e l d for t e r m i n a l s No. 13 a n d No. 14 ( M I C S H )
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (MIC+)
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (MIC)
N o . 2 3 (10 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay box (+B)
N o . 3 5 (10 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box ( A C C )
B-CAN (B-CAN LO)
B - C A N ( B - C A N HI)
N a v i g a t i o n unit (NAVI C O M M 1 )
N a v i g a t i o n unit (NAVI C O M M 2 )
25
RED
26
27
BLU*
S h i e l d for t e r m i n a l s No. 11 a n d No. 2 5 ( T E L M S I G S H )
YEL
BRN
N a v i g a t i o n unit ( M I C S I G + )
28
A u d i o unit ( T E L M S I G - )
N a v i g a t i o n unit (MIC
SIG-)
T h e s h i e l d e d w i r e s h a v e a h e a t - s h r u n k t u b e insulating the o u t s i d e of the w i r e . T h e c o l o r of t h e i n s u l a t i n g t u b e ,

typically black o r dark g r a y , m a y not m a t c h the c o l o r of the w i r e listed o n the s c h e m a t i c .
23-322
23-323
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/
RELAY BOX
VOICE
CONTROL
SWITCH
G403
LIGHTS
(LED)
HFL
TALK
23-324
AUDIO
REMOTE
SWITCH

schematic.
: CAN line
: Shielding
NAVIGATION UNIT
HFL
C0MM1
HFL
COMM3
HFL
C0MM2
HFL
COMM4
HFL
COMM SH
MIC
SIG+
MIC
SIG-
SIGMIC
SIG SH
C16
C15
GRY*
BLU*
_Li
NAVI
C0MM1
NAVI
C0MM2
NAVI
C0MM3
NAVI
COMM SH
NAVI
C0MM4
MIC
SIG+
MIC
SIGHANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT
TELM
SIG+
TELM
SIG-
HFL
MUTE
TELM
SIG SH
No. 35 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
BLU*
WHT
BLU*
D9
TELM
SIG+
REMOTE
GND
TELM
SIG-
No. 17(20 A)
F U S E (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
TELM
SIGSH
ACC
HFL
MUTE
AUDIO UNIT
FL
PRE+
GRN
FL
PRE-
FR
PRE+
FR
PRE-
LT B L U *
Is
D20
HFL
MUTE
+B
MIC+
12
BLU/GRN
BLU/GRN
MICSH
BLU/GRN
I A24
D10
HFL-NAVIGATION-ANC MICROPHONE
SWD
+B
GND
No. 31 (30 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
RED
\i7
G402
PUR
A24
FL
PRE+
FL
PRE-
FR
PRE+
FR
PRE-
+B
MAIN
SWD
+B
No. 35 (10 A)
F U S E (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay
box)
No. 17 (20 A)
FUSE (In the
under-hood
fuse/relay
box)
GND
1
G701
)9 model)
+B
SUB
FL
SP+
FL
SP-
FL
TW+
FL
TW-
FR
SP+
FR
SP-
FR
TW+
FR
TW-
GND
MAIN
GND
SUB
| A13
BLK
WHT/
YEL
S i
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SPEAKER
^ 3
RED/
WHT
BRN/
BLK
LEFT
FRONT
TWEETER
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
BRN/
WHT
RIGHT
FRONT
TWEETER
23-325
NOTE:
Before d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , refer to G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e 23-307) to m a k e s u r e t h e p h o n e i s
c o m p a t i b l e a n d c o n f i g u r e d correctly.
Y o u m u s t b e a b l e to d u p l i c a t e t h e c u s t o m e r ' s c o n c e r n to s u c c e s s f u l l y d i a g n o s e t h e p r o b l e m .
A l w a y s u s e the c u s t o m e r ' s p h o n e to s u c c e s s f u l l y d i a g n o s e t h e p r o b l e m .
M a k e s u r e the p h o n e is H o n d a a p p r o v e d a n d c o n f i g u r e d c o r r e c t l y . O n l i n e , g o to h a n d s f r e e l i n k . h o n d a . c o m , o r call t h e
H F L s u p p o r t d e s k at 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 for further a s s i s t a n c e .
1. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e D L C .
3. C h e c k for D T C s .
Are any DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - R e p a i r the indicated D T C s a n d r e c h e c k . B
N O - G o to S t e p 4.
4. T r y to duplicate t h e p r o b l e m o r h a v e t h e c u s t o m e r d u p l i c a t e t h e p r o b l e m .
Can you duplicate
the
problem?
Y E S - G o to S t e p 5.
N O - T h e s y s t e m i s O K at this t i m e . H
5. Pair the p h o n e to a k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e ( s a m e m o d e l , y e a r , a n d t r i m ) , a n d try to duplicate t h e p r o b l e m .
Does the phone have the same problem
on the known-good
vehicle?
YES-Call t h e H F L s u p p o r t d e s k at 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 to m a k e s u r e t h e p h o n e is c o n f i g u r e d c o r r e c t l y a n d h a s t h e c o r r e c t
s o f t w a r e . If the p h o n e is c o n f i g u r e d c o r r e c t l y , it is either a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of the H F L s y s t e m , o r a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of t h e
particular a p p r o v e d p h o n e b e i n g u s e d . E x p l a i n to y o u r c u s t o m e r that this i s a s y s t e m c h a r a c t e r i s t i c . A n o t h e r p h o n e
f r o m t h e a p p r o v e d p h o n e list m a y g i v e m o r e f a v o r a b l e r e s u l t s .
N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit, a n d r e c h e c k . If the p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e the original
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control u n i t . H
23-326
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1775: Microphone Input/Output Shorted
to Power

unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 13 a n d
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P connector
t e r m i n a l No. 3.
to follow the i n s t r u c t i o n s in B - C A N s y s t e m d i a g n o s i s test

1. C l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 0 7 ) .
MIC+ (BRN)
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n b a c k to

1
O N (II).
Is DTC B1775
2 i 3
1 5 16 1 7 18 /
11 1 2 1 3 14
2 0 21
25 26 27 28
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 4 .
MIC+ (BRN)
time.B
1 2

5. D i s c o n n e c t the H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e 7 P
connector.

Is there
continuity?

connector.
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control
g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e the original H a n d s F r e e L i n k
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) , t h e n r e c h e c k . I f t h e s y m p t o m
control u n i t . B
8. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n H a n d s F r e e L i n k control
unit the 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 13 a n d b o d y
ground.
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d the
H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e . R e p l a c e the
affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s .
MIC+ (BRN)
1
11 12 1 3 14
15 16 17 18
20 2 1 "
25 26 27 28

Is there less
than 0.2 V?
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t to p o w e r in the w i r e b e t w e e n the
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d the
H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C m i c r o p h o n e . R e p l a c e the
affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
23-327
DTC B1776: Microphone Input/Output Shorted
to Ground or Open
8. Check for continuity between the terminals s h o w n of

the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector and the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P connector.

MIC+ (BRN)
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page 23-307).

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then back to
ON (II).
15 16 17 18 /
11 12 13 14
20 21
25 26 27 28

Is DTC B1776
MIC- (YEL)
Indicated?

time.B
5. Disconnect the HFL-navigation-ANC microphone 7P

connector.
connector.
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals
No. 13 and No. 14 individually, then between

MICH- (BRN)
MIC IN SH
(LTBLU)
6 7 8
20 21
1 2 3
15 16 17 18
MIC+ (BRN)
MIC- (YEL)
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the
HandsFreeLink control unit and the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone. Replace the
9. Disconnect navigation unit connector C (16P).
11 12 13\ 14
25 2 6 ; 27 28
/ MIC- (YEL)
3
7 8
/ 6
16
17
18
20
21
15
1 2
S)
(S)
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
MIC SIG
- (BRN)
MIC SIGH- (YEL)
YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the
HandsFreeLinks control unit and the
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone. Replace the
NO-Go to step 8.
between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the
navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness.B
NO-Go to step 11.
23-328

c o n n e c t o r C (16P) t e r m i n a l s No. 8 a n d No. 15, t h e n
b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 8 a n d No. 16.
DTC B1779: HFL Switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK

Buttons) Circuit Open/Short
to f o l l o w the i n s t r u c t i o n s in B - C A N s y s t e m d i a g n o s i s test
MIC SIG+ (YEL)
1. C l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 0 7 ) .
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n start the
7 8
v e h i c l e , a n d turn the s t e e r i n g w h e e l b a c k a n d forth

several times.
12 13 14 15 16
MIC SIG S H (GRY)
MIC S I G (BRN)

Is there
12. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s s h o w n of

t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the
n a v i g a t i o n unit c o n n e c t o r C (16P).
1 5 16 17 18
11 12 13 14
2 0 21
25 26 27 28
MIC S I G + (YEL)
MIC
SIG(BRN)
MIC S I G + (YEL)
J J7 i 8
MIC
12 13 14 1 5 1 6 S I G (BRN)

is there
Is the switch
OK?
N O - R e p l a c e the H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e

time.B
5. Do the H F L s w i t c h test ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) .
indicated?
continuity?
Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d the n a v i g a t i o n unit.
Is DTC B1779
continuity?
17-8).H
6. D i s c o n n e c t the H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit 2 8 P
connector.
7. D i s c o n n e c t the H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h 5P
connector.
9. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n H a n d s f r e e l i n k c o n t r o l
unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
H F L S T R G S W (WHT)
1
/ 6
15 16 17 18
7
20 21
//
11 12 13 14
2 5 2 6 27 2 8
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) , t h e n r e c h e c k . Ifthe s y m p t o m
g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e the original H a n d s F r e e L i n k
c o n t r o l unit. Ifthe s y m p t o m d o e s not go a w a y ,
r e p l a c e the n a v i g a t i o n unit ( s e e p a g e 23-291 ) .
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in the w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n the
Is there 0.2 V?
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d the n a v i g a t i o n unit.
R e p l a c e the affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . !
(cont'd)
23-329

11. Disconnect the cable reel connectors (see page

24-185).

13. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink control
1 2
6 7 8
15 16 17 18 / 2 0 21
11|12 13 14
25 26 27 28

HFL STRG SW (WHT)
n
I 3
15 16 17 18
7k
7 8
11 12 13 14
2 5 2 6 27 28
20 21
the HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-voice
control s w i t c h .
NO-Go to step 16.

YES-Repair short to power on the W H T wire between
the HandsFreeLink control unit and the cable reel.H
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

15 16.17 18 /
REMOTE GND (BRN)
CO

unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and HFL-voice
control switch 5 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 3.
16. Check for continuity between HFL-voice control

switch 5P connector terminal No.4 and body g r o u n d .
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
20 21
HFL STRG SW (WHT)

1
3 4

YES-Go t o step 15.
NO-Substitute a known-good cable reel (see page
24-185), and retest. If there is continuity, replace the
original cable reel. If there is still no continuity, repair
open in the WHT wire between the switch, cable reel,
and HandsFreeLink control u n i t . H
23-330

page 23-337).H
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the switch, the
cable reel, and the audio u n i t . B
DTC B1780: HFL Switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK

Buttons) Circuit Short

N O T E : If y o u are t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g multiple D T C s , be s u r e
to follow the i n s t r u c t i o n s in B - C A N s y s t e m d i a g n o s i s test

HFL STRG SW (WHT)
2 3
1. C l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S ( s e e p a g e 23-307).
l/6
15 16 17 18 /
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n start the

v e h i c l e , a n d turn the s t e e r i n g w h e e l back a n d forth
(from lock to lock) s e v e r a l t i m e s .
7 8
11 12 13 14
2 0 21
2 5 26 2 7 2 8
IsDTCBI
780
indicated?
Is there
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in the W H T w i r e
time.B
b e t w e e n the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d c a b l e
reel.B

5. Do the H F L s w i t c h test ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) .
Is the switch
continuity?
N O - R e p l a c e the c a b l e reel ( s e e p a g e 24-185).B
OK?
Y E S - G o to st ep 6.
N O - R e p l a c e the H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e
17-8).B
connector.
7. D i s c o n n e c t the H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h 5P
connector.
HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

HFL STRG SW (WHT)
1
15 16 17 18
8 ;/:/
2 0 21 /
(11J12 13 14
\25 26 27 28

Is there
continuity?
N O - R e p l a c e the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit ( s e e p a g e
23-337).B
9. D i s c o n n e c t the c a b l e reel ( s e e p a g e 24-185).
23-331
DTC B1792: HandsFreeLink Control Unit
Internal Error
6. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink control


22-93).
GND (BLK)
n
1 2 3
15 16 17 18 /
I
6
\
7 8
20 21
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then back to

ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5.

time.B
1 2
3
15 16 17 18
A C C (PUR)
11 12 13 14
7 8
20 21
25 26 27 28
is there battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 6.
(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, the
No. 35 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ relay box
and the HandsFreeLink control u n i t . B
23-332

page 23-337).B
NO-Repair the high resistance in the ground circuit.l
The HFL digits do not go away from the
audio-HVAC display after pressing the HFL
BACK button
The HFL system does not recognize all voice

prompts
NOTE:
1. C o n n e c t the H D S to the D L C ( s e e p a g e 23-307).
Do this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g w i t h t h e c u s t o m e r ' s p h o n e .
2. C l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S .
M a k e s u r e the p h o n e i s a H o n d a a p p r o v e d Bluetooth
phone.
3. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n to O N (II).

Are there any DTCs indicated?
Y E S - R e p a i r the i n d i c a t e d D T C s . B
6. C h e c k the c o n n e c t i o n s o n the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control

unit. I f t h e c o n n e c t i o n s a r e O K , substitute a
k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit ( s e e p a g e
2 3 - 3 3 7 ) , t h e n turn t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d
r e c h e c k t h e MID.
cleared?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the original H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit

(see page 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) .
N O - R e p l a c e the g a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e
22-359).B
1. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e D L C ( s e e p a g e 23-307).
2. C l e a r the D T C s w i t h the H D S .
3. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n to O N (II).
Are the messages
S e e V o i c e control tips a n d i m p r o v i n g v o i c e
recognition to m a k e s u r e the H F L s y s t e m c a n
u n d e r s t a n d t h e c u s t o m e r ( s e e p a g e 23-308).
Are there any DTCs indicated?
Y E S - R e p a i r the indicated D T C s . B
5. Duplicate the c u s t o m e r ' s c o n c e r n .
Can the customer's concern be duplicated?
N O - T h e s y s t e m i s O K at this t i m e . A s k the c u s t o m e r
to refer to the o w n e r ' s m a n u a l a b o u t i m p r o v i n g v o i c e
recognition.!
6. C h e c k i f t h e n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m c a n r e c o g n i z e v o i c e
recognition v o i c e p r o m p t s c o r r e c t l y .
Can the navigation system correctly recognize
prompts?
voice
N O - R e f e r to t h e navigation s y s t e m
troubleshooting.B
7. Pair the c u s t o m e r ' s p h o n e to a k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e
a n d try to duplicate the c o n c e r n .
Can you duplicate the concern?
Y E S - C a l l the H F L s u p p o r t d e s k at 8 8 8 - 5 2 8 - 7 8 7 6 , a n d
inquire if t h e r e a r e a n y k n o w n i s s u e s for the c o n c e r n .
If t h e r e a r e n o k n o w n i s s u e s , e x p l a i n to t h e c u s t o m e r
t h i s is a s y s t e m c h a r a c t e r i s t i c ^
NO-Substitute a known-good HFL-navigation-ANC
m i c r o p h o n e . Ifthe p r o b l e m s still p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a
k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit. Ifthe
p r o b l e m g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e the original
HFL-navigation-ANC microphone (see page
23-294).
23-333
The HFL system is locked and the pass code
has been lost or forgotten
N O T E : T h i s p r o c e d u r e e r a s e s t h e p a s s c o d e function. If
t h e c u s t o m e r w i s h e s to h a v e t h e p a s s c o d e protection,
t h e y n e e d to s e t it u p a g a i n ( s e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l for
more information).
1. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to t h e D L C ( s e e p a g e 23-307).
3. F r o m t h e B o d y E l e c t r i c a l m e n u , t h e n s e l e c t
HandsFreeLink.
4. Select Miscellaneous T e s t s , then select P a s s code
reset.
5. F o l l o w t h e H D S s y s t e m p r o m p t s to r e s e t t h e p a s s
code.
The HFL messages cannot be heard or are

weak
2. C h e c k that t h e a u d i o s y s t e m is o p e r a t i n g n o r m a l l y
a n d t h e s p e a k e r s o u n d l e v e l s f r o m different a u d i o
s o u r c e s ( A M / F M , X M , C D , N a v i g a t i o n , etc.) a r e
normal.
Does the audio system work normally and is the audio
output from the speaker normal when playing various
audio
sources?
N O - R e f e r to t h e a u d i o s y s t e m s y m p t o m
troubleshooting.!
3. P r e s s t h e H F L talk button.
Does the audio system
being played?
mute when HFL messages
are
5. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r D (20P) a n d t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r .
6. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a n d a u d i o
unit c o n n e c t o r D (20P) a s s h o w n .
T E L M SIG + (GRN)
n
1
/\\\
12 13 14
T E L M S I G - (RED)
TELM S I G - ( R E D )
2
11
13 14 15
9 10
TELM
18 19 2 0 S I G +
(GRN)

Is there
continuity?
N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d t h e a u d i o unit.
23-334
7. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d i o
unit c o n n e c t o r D (20P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 9 a n d N o . 19
individually.

TELM S I G - (RED)
Does the MID or the audio-HVAC

display show the HFL
menu and does the MID or audio-HVAC
display
show
HandsFreeLink
when pressing
the HFL talk
button?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11
13 14 15
TELM
SIG +
(GRN)
9. P r e s s t h e H F L talk button.
10

11. D i s c o n n e c t t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P
connector, the HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone 7P
c o n n e c t o r , a n d a u d i o unit c o n n e c t o r D (20P).
[Ll
12. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l

unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 3 a n d a u d i o unit

Is there
c o n n e c t o r D (20P) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 0 .
continuity?
b e t w e e n t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d t h e
a u d i o unit. R e p l a c e t h e affected s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s .

HFL MUTE (BLU/GRN)

1
15 16 17 18
8. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s of a u d i o
11 12 13 14
6 7 8
20 21
25 26 27 28
unit c o n n e c t o r D (20P) a c c o r d i n g to t h e t a b l e .
From terminal
D19 (GRN)
D9 (RED)
To terminals
D9 ( R E D ) , D 1 0 ( B L U )
n
D1CMBLU)
any of the
1 3 14 15
9 10
18 19 20

Is there
(BLU/GRN)
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d t h e a u d i o u n i t . B

between
I45 =6 17
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (20P) HFL MUTE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
131415
18 19 20
Is there continuity
11

n
terminals?
Y E S - T h e r e i s a s h o r t in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e
H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit a n d t h e a u d i o unit.
N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d H a n d s F r e e L i n k control
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) , a n d r e c h e c k . Ifthe s y m p t o m
g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e original H a n d s F r e e L i n k
control unit. Ifthe s y m p t o m d o e s not go a w a y ,
r e p l a c e t h e a u d i o unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 5 ) .
(cont'd)
23-335

unit 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d H F L - v o i c e
control s w i t c h 5 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 3.
H A N D S F R E E L I N K C O N T R O L UNIT 28P C O N N E C T O R
HFL M U T E (BLU/GRN)
n
/ 6 | 7
15 16 17 18
HANDSFREELINK C O N T R O L UNIT 28P C O N N E C T O R

HFL S T R G S W (WHT)
11 12 13 14
25 26 27 28
2021
15 16 17 18 /
11 12 13 14
20 21
25 26 27 28
H F L S T R G S W (WHT)
Y E S - R e p a i r s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n
t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit a n d the a u d i o
unit.B
NO-Substitute a known-good H a n d s F r e e L i n k control

unit ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) , a n d r e c h e c k . If s y m p t o m g o e s
a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e original H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit.
If t h e s y m p t o m d o e s not g o a w a y , s u b s t i t u t e a
know-good HFL-navigation-ANC
microphone (see

Y E S - R e f e r to H F L S w i t c h T e s t ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) . B
N O - R e p a i r o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n t h e
p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 4 ) , a n d retest. If the s y m p t o m g o e s a w a y ,
H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit a n d t h e H F L - v o i c e c o n t r o l
r e p l a c e t h e original H F L - n a v i g a t i o n - A N C
switch.B
microphone.
If t h e s y m p t o m d o e s not go a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e a u d i o
unit ( s e e p a g e 23-125).B
15. D i s c o n n e c t t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit 2 8 P
connector and HFL-voice control switch 5P connector.
23-336
HandsFreeLink Control Unit

HFL Switch Test

S R S c o m p o n e n t s a r e located in this a r e a . R e v i e w the
N O T E : Tell the c u s t o m e r t h e y n e e d to w r i t e d o w n all
S R S c o m p o n e n t l o c a t i o n s ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 ) , a n d the
p h o n e n u m b e r s a s t h e r e is no w a y to t r a n s f e r the
information in the original H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit to
d o i n g r e p a i r s or s e r v i c e .
a n e w H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit.
1. R e m o v e the s t e e r i n g w h e e l ( s e e p a g e 17-7).
2. R e m o v e the H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e 17-8).
3. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t e r m i n a l s No. 3 a n d
N o . 4 in e a c h s w i t c h position a c c o r d i n g to the table.
1. R e m o v e the p a s s e n g e r ' s c e n t e r c o n s o l e t r i m ( s e e
page 20-115).
2. L o o s e n the bolts a n d d e t a c h the h a r n e s s clip ( A ) , t h e n
pull out the s t a y ( B ) .
3. D i s c o n n e c t the c o n n e c t o r ( A ) , t h e n r e m o v e the bolts

a n d the H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit (B).
HFL S w i t c h
Position
Resistance
No b u t t o n s p r e s s e d
H F L T A L K button p r e s s e d
A b o u t 1 kQ
A b o u t 185 0
H F L B A C K button p r e s s e d
About 45 0
4. I f t h e r e s i s t a n c e is not a s s p e c i f i e d , r e p l a c e t h e
H F L - v o i c e control s w i t c h ( s e e p a g e 17-8).
4. Install t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit in t h e r e v e r s e

o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
After r e p l a c i n g the H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit, tell the
customer:
T h e y n e e d to pair their p h o n e s to the s y s t e m .
T h e y n e e d to s e t up their s y s t e m p r e f e r e n c e s .
23-337
1. R e m o v e the p a s s e n g e r ' s c e n t e r c o n s o l e t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 1 5 ) .
2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k control unit ( B ) .
3. I n s p e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r a n d s o c k e t t e r m i n a l s for a g o o d pinfit to be s u r e t h e y a r e all m a k i n g g o o d c o n t a c t .

If the t e r m i n a l s a r e b e n t , l o o s e o r c o r r o d e d , r e p a i r t h e m a s n e c e s s a r y , a n d r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m .
If t h e t e r m i n a l s look O K , g o to s t e p 4.
4. R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r , a n d m a k e t h e s e input t e s t s at t h e c o n n e c t o r .
If a n y t e s t i n d i c a t e s a p r o b l e m , find a n d c o r r e c t the c a u s e , t h e n r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m .
If all t h e input t e s t s p r o v e O K , g o to s t e p 6.
Cavity
Wire
BLK
15
16
Test condition
Possible cause if result is not

obtained
U n d e r all c o n d i t i o n s
M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e to g r o u n d :
T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 0.2 V .
WHT
voltage.
PUR
Ignition s w i t c h A C C (I) o r
O N (II)
voltage.
Poor ground (G403)

A n o p e n o r high r e s i s t a n c e in
the wire
B l o w n No. 2 3 (10 A ) f u s e in
the driver's under-hood
fuse/relay b o x
A n o p e n in t h e w i r e
B l o w n No. 3 5 (10 A ) f u s e in
the d r i v e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h
fuse/relay b o x
5. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n t u r n it b a c k to L O C K (0).
23-338
6. D i s c o n n e c t the 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r a g a i n , a n d d o t h i s input test at the c o n n e c t o r .

If t h e test i n d i c a t e s a p r o b l e m , find a n d c o r r e c t t h e c a u s e , t h e n r e c h e c k t h e s y s t e m .
If the input test p r o v e s O K , t h e H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l unit m u s t be faulty, r e p l a c e it ( s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 3 7 ) .
Cavity
17
Wire
color
LT
GRN
Test condition
WHT
Possible cause if result is not

obtained
C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n
t e r m i n a l No. 17 a n d t h e
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x
c o n n e c t o r T (34P) t e r m i n a l No. 2 9 :
T h e r e s h o u l d be continuity.
C h e c k for continuity to g r o u n d :
T h e r e s h o u l d be no continuity.
C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n
t e r m i n a l N o . 18 a n d t h e
u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r T ( 3 4 P ) t e r m i n a l No. 12:
T h e r e s h o u l d be c o n t i n u i t y .
U n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x
c o n n e c t o r T (34P)
disconnected
C h e c k for c o n t i n u i t y to g r o u n d :
T h e r e s h o u l d be no continuity.
S h o r t to g r o u n d
U n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x
connector T(34P)
disconnected
18
S h o r t to g r o u n d
23-339
Restraints
Restraints
Special Tools
24-2
Seat Belts
* Front Seat Belt Replacement
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement
Inspection
24-3
24-4
24-9
24-13
24-17
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

24-19
Precautions and Procedures
24-21
24-31
SRS Unit Update
24-34
ODS Unit Initialization
24-35
ODS Unit Operation Check
24-37
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
24-38
24-39
24-45
System Description
24-46
Circuit Diagram
24-52
DTC Troubleshooting
24-56
24-164
Component Replacement/Inspection After
Deployment
24-167
Driver's Airbag Replacement
24-170
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement
24-171
Side Airbag Replacement
24-174
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement
24-176
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal
24-181
Cable Reel Replacement
24-185
SRS Unit Replacement
24-188
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement
24-189
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement
24-190
Left Side Impact Sensor (Third) Replacement
24-191
Right Side Impact Sensor (Third) Replacement
24-192
Rear Safing Sensor Replacement
24-193
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement
24-194
ODS Unit Replacement
24-197
Front Impact Sensor Replacement
24-198
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement
24-199
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb
Test/Replacement
24-201
Restraints
Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool N u m b e r
070AZ-SAA0100
070AZ-SNAA100
070AZ-SNAA200
070AZ-SNAA300
07HAZ-SG00500
07SAZ-TB4011A
07TAZ-001020A
I
24-2
Description
SRS Short Canceller
SRS Simulator Lead J
SRS Simulator Lead K
SRS Simulator Lead L
Deployment Tool
SRS Inflator Simulator
Back Probe Adapter
Qty
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
Seat Belts
RIGHT S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T B U C K L E
CENTER THIRD ROW S E A T B E L T
FRONT S H O U L D E R
ANCHOR A D J U S T E R
Replacement step 9 on page 24-5
CENTER S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T
THIRD ROW S E A T B E L T B U C K L E and

CENTER THIRD ROW S E A T B E L T
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
THIRD ROW S E A T B E L T
S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T
THIRD ROW S E A T B E L T
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
L E F T S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T B U C K L E
and CENTER S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
CENTER S E C O N D ROW S E A T B E L T B U C K L E
FRONT S E A T B E L T B U C K L E S
FRONT S E A T B E L T
24-3
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement
S R S c o m p o n e n t s a r e located in t h i s a r e a . R e v i e w t h e
S R S c o m p o n e n t locations ( s e e p a g e 24-19) a n d t h e
NOTE:
C h e c k t h e front s e a t belts for d a m a g e ( s e e p a g e 24-17),
a n d r e p l a c e t h e m if n e c e s s a r y .
If r e p l a c i n g the front s e a t belt after d e p l o y m e n t . Refer
to C o m p o n e n t R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n After
D e p l o y m e n t ( s e e p a g e 24-167) for a c o m p l e t e list of
o t h e r parts that m u s t a l s o be r e p l a c e d .
Front Seat Belt

1. S l i d e t h e front s e a t all t h e w a y f o r w a r d , a n d a d j u s t t h e
s e a t to its m a x i m u m height. Carefully pry u p o n the
b o t t o m of the a n c h o r c o v e r (A) to r e l e a s e the tab (B)
u s i n g t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t r i m tool f r o m b e l o w i n s i d e t h e
recline c o v e r (C). R e m o v e t h e c o v e r .
2. A d j u s t the s e a t to its m i n i m u m height, t h e n r e m o v e

t h e l o w e r a n c h o r bolt (A).
24-4
3. Do t h e battery t e r m i n a l d i s c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e ( s e e
p a g e 2 2 - 9 4 ) , t h e n w a i t at least 3 m i n u t e s before
beginning work.
4. R e m o v e the B-pillar l o w e r t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) .
5. R e m o v e the B-pillar u p p e r t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) .
6. R e m o v e the u p p e r a n c h o r c o v e r (A) a n d r e m o v e t h e
u p p e r a n c h o r bolt ( B ) .
7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r c o n n e c t o r (A).
R e m o v e the retractor m o u n t i n g bolt (B) a n d the
retractor bolt ( C ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e front s e a t belt (D)
a n d retractor ( E ) .
10. Install the s e a t belt in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l ,

a n d note t h e s e i t e m s :
C h e c k that the retractor locking m e c h a n i s m
f u n c t i o n s a s d e s c r i b e d ( s e e p a g e 24-17).
A p p l y m e d i u m s t r e n g t h liquid t h r e a d lock to the
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
u p p e r a n c h o r bolts before r e i n s t a l l a t i o n .
T i g h t e n t h e bolts by h a n d first, t h e n tighten to the
specified torque with a torque w r e n c h .
A s s e m b l e t h e w a s h e r , t h e c o l l a r , a n d the b u s h i n g
o n the u p p e r a n c h o r bolt a s s h o w n .
If the s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r h a s b e e n d e p l o y e d , r e p l a c e
t h e front s e a t belt protector.
B e f o r e installing the a n c h o r bolts, m a k e s u r e t h e r e
a r e no t w i s t s or kinks in the s e a t belt.
M a k e s u r e the s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r c o n n e c t o r is
p l u g g e d in p r o p e r l y .
Do the battery t e r m i n a l r e c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e
(see page 22-94).
C h e c k for a n y D T C s that m a y h a v e b e e n s e t d u r i n g
repairs, and clear them.
Upper anchor bolt installation
7/16-20 UNF 32 N-m

(3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibfft)
BUSHING
UPPER ANCHOR
COLLAR
8. If n e c e s s a r y , r e m o v e the front s e a t belt protector ( F ) .

9. R e m o v e t h e s h o u l d e r a n c h o r a d j u s t e r ( A ) .
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread lock
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
8 x 1.25 mm
23 N m
(2.3 k g f m ,
17 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
24-5
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
Front Seat Belt Buckle
S R S c o m p o n e n t s a r e located In t h i s a r e a . R e v i e w t h e
S R S c o m p o n e n t l o c a t i o n s ( s e e p a g e 24-19) a n d t h e
d o i n g r e p a i r s or s e r v i c e .
4. Lift u p t h e front s e a t , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e s e a t belt

b u c k l e s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r (A) a n d d e t a c h the h a r n e s s
c l i p s ( B ) . T h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t is s h o w n ; t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s
s e a t is s i m i l a r .
Driver's 8-way power seat
N O T E : If r e p l a c i n g t h e front s e a t belt buckle after

d e p l o y m e n t . R e f e r to C o m p o n e n t
R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n After D e p l o y m e n t ( s e e p a g e
24-167) for a c o m p l e t e list of o t h e r parts that m u s t a l s o
be r e p l a c e d .
1. D o t h e battery t e r m i n a l d i s c o n n e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e ( s e e
p a g e 2 2 - 9 4 ) , t h e n w a i t at l e a s t 3 m i n u t e s before
beginning work.
2. R e m o v e t h e front s e a t ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 4 2 ) .
3. R e m o v e the T O R X s c r e w a n d t h e h o o k s ( A ) , t h e n
r e m o v e the center c o v e r (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
Driver's manual height adjustable seat
24-6
Passenger's 4-way p o w e r seat
5. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and detach the

harness clips (B), then remove the seat belt buckle (C).
Driver's seat
Passenger's 4-way p o w e r seat
(cont'd)
24-7
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
7. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:

center anchor bolts before reinstallation.
Assemble the washers and the bushing on the
center anchor bolt as s h o w n .
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to
Make sure the seat belt buckle switch connector is
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
(3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
Apply thread lock.
6. Pull the seat belt buckle switch harness (D) out

through the space between the seat cushion and the
seat adjuster.

(see page 22-94).
Center anchor bolt installation
CENTER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread lock.
W A V E WASHER
WASHER
24-8
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
BUSHING
WASHER
CENTER ANCHOR
SPRING W A S H E R
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement

N O T E : C h e c k the s e c o n d r o w s e a t belts for d a m a g e ( s e e
p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 ) , a n d r e p l a c e t h e m if n e c e s s a r y .
Second Row Seat Belt
5. R e m o v e the retractor m o u n t i n g bolt (A) a n d t h e

retractor bolt ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e the s e c o n d r o w s e a t
belt (C) a n d retractor (D).
A
1. S l i d e the s e c o n d r o w s e a t f o r w a r d fully.
2. R e m o v e the rear s i d e t r i m p a n e l ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 9 6 ) .
3. R e m o v e the l o w e r a n c h o r bolt (A).
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
6. If n e c e s s a r y , r e m o v e the s e c o n d r o w s e a t belt
protector ( E ) .
4. R e m o v e the u p p e r a n c h o r c a p (A) a n d r e m o v e the
u p p e r a n c h o r bolt (B).
(cont'd)
24-9
Seat Belts
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
7. Install t h e s e a t belt in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l ,
C h e c k that t h e retractor locking m e c h a n i s m
functions a s described (see page 24-17).
A p p l y m e d i u m s t r e n g t h liquid t h r e a d lock to t h e
Center Second Row Seat Belt

1. D e t a c h t h e c l i p s , a n d r e m o v e t h e s e a t belt c o v e r ( A ) .
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 4
T i g h t e n the bolts by h a n d first, t h e n tighten to t h e

A s s e m b l e the w a s h e r s , t h e c o l l a r , a n d t h e b u s h i n g
o n t h e u p p e r a n c h o r bolt a s s h o w n .
B e f o r e installing t h e a n c h o r bolts, m a k e s u r e t h e r e
a r e no t w i s t s o r kinks in t h e s e c o n d r o w s e a t belt.

BUSHING
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread lock.
UPPER ANCHOR
COLLAR
TOOTHED
LOCK W A S H E R
2. R e m o v e t h e h e a d l i n e r ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 0 7 ) .
3. R e m o v e t h e u p p e r a n c h o r m o u n t i n g bolts (A) a n d
u p p e r a n c h o r bolt ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e u p p e r a n c h o r
(C).
mm
(3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
24-10
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
4. R e m o v e t h e retractor m o u n t i n g bolt (A) a n d retractor

bolt ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e t h e retractor ( C ) .
Left Second Row Seat Belt Buckle and Center

Second Row Seat Belt Detachable Anchor
N O T E : T a k e c a r e not to t e a r o r d a m a g e t h e s e a t c o v e r s .
1. R e m o v e the left s e c o n d r o w s e a t ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 6 3 ) .
2. R e m o v e the s e a t belt buckle (A) f r o m t h e e l a s t i c strap
(B).
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
6 x 1 . 0 mm
?-8 N m
( 1 0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5. Install t h e c e n t e r s e c o n d r o w s e a t belt a n d retractor in
3. F r o m t h e b a c k of the s e a t , r e m o v e t h e T O R X s c r e w s
(A), t h e n r e m o v e the a n c h o r c o v e r (B).
t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l , a n d note t h e s e i t e m s :
Ifthe c l i p s a r e d a m a g e d or s t r e s s - w h i t e n e d , r e p l a c e
them with n e w ones.
B e f o r e installing t h e u p p e r a n c h o r bolt, m a k e s u r e
t h e r e a r e no t w i s t s or kinks in the s e a t belt.
(cont'd)
24-11
Seat Belts
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4. R e m o v e the c e n t e r a n c h o r bolts (A).
//
//
//_
11
Center Second Row Seat Belt Buckle/Right

Second Row Seat Belt Buckle
NOTE:
T a k e c a r e not to t e a r or d a m a g e t h e s e a t c o v e r s .
# T h e c e n t e r s e a t belt b u c k l e is s h o w n . T h e right s e a t
belt b u c k l e is s i m i l a r .
1. R e m o v e t h e s e c o n d r o w s e a t ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 6 3 ) .
2. F r o m both s i d e s of t h e s e a t , r e l e a s e t h e h o o k s (A, B ) ,
t h e n r e m o v e t h e pivot s c r e w c o v e r ( C ) . R e m o v e t h e
pivot s c r e w w i t h a T O R X T 3 0 bit.
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
(3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
6 x 1.0mm
9.8 N-m
Ibfft)
5. R e m o v e t h e left s e c o n d r o w s e a t belt b u c k l e (A) a n d

c e n t e r s e c o n d r o w s e a t belt d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r (B)
from the elastic straps (C), and r e m o v e t h e m from the
seat cushion.
3. O n the left s e c o n d r o w s e a t : R e m o v e t h e left s e c o n d

r o w s e a t belt b u c k l e a n d t h e c e n t e r s e c o n d r o w s e a t
belt d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r f r o m u n d e r t h e s e a t c u s h i o n .
6. Install t h e b u c k l e a n d t h e d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r in the
r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
24-12
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement

4. Lift the s e a t c u s h i o n (A) up.
N O T E : C h e c k the third r o w s e a t belts for d a m a g e ( s e e

p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 ) , a n d r e p l a c e t h e m if n e c e s s a r y .
Third Row Seat Belt

1. R e m o v e t h e s e i t e m s :
R e a r s i d e t r i m p a n e l ( s e e p a g e 20-96)
D-pillar t r i m ( s e e p a g e 20-89)
2. R e m o v e the u p p e r a n c h o r bolt (A).
5. R e m o v e the c e n t e r a n c h o r bolt (A), a n d r e m o v e the

s e a t belt buckle (B).
32 N-m
(3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibfft)
3. R e m o v e the retractor m o u n t i n g bolt (A) a n d the
retractor bolt ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e the third r o w s e a t belt
(C) a n d retractor (D).
6. Install the buckle in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l a n d

a p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid t h r e a d lock to the
a n c h o r bolts before reinstallation.
(3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
24-13
Seat Belts
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4 . Install t h e s e a t belt in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l ,
a n d note t h e s e items:
C h e c k that t h e retractor locking m e c h a n i s m
A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid t h r e a d lock to t h e
T i g h t e n t h e bolts by h a n d first, t h e n tighten to t h e
Center Third Row Seat Belt

1. R e m o v e t h e h e a d l i n e r ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 0 7 ) .
2. R e m o v e t h e bolts (A) a n d t h e s c r e w ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e
t h e third r o w s e a t belt c o v e r b r a c k e t ( C ) .
Fastener Locations
A^:Bolt,2 B^:Screw,1
A s s e m b l e the w a s h e r s , the collar, and the bushing

o n t h e u p p e r a n c h o r bolt a s s h o w n .
B e f o r e installing t h e a n c h o r bolt, m a k e s u r e t h e r e
a r e no t w i s t s o r kinks in t h e s e a t belt.

BUSHING
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread lock.
24-14
UPPER
ANCHOR
SPRING
WASHER
1.0 mm 9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
C O L L A R
C O L L A R
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
3. R e m o v e t h e c e n t e r u p p e r a n c h o r m o u n t i n g bolt ( A ) ,
then r e m o v e the center upper a n c h o r (B).
4. R e m o v e the retractor m o u n t i n g bolt (A) a n d retractor

bolt ( B ) , t h e n r e m o v e the retractor (C).
Seat Belt Buckle/Center Seat Belt Detachable

Anchor
N O T E : T h e s e a t belt buckle is s h o w n . T h e s e a t belt
d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r is s i m i l a r .
1. Fold d o w n t h e left third r o w s e a t .
2. R e m o v e t h e c a r g o floor box ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 9 5 ) .
3. R e m o v e t h e c e n t e r a n c h o r bolts (A).
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
{3.3 k g f m ,
24 Ibfft)
5. Install t h e s e a t belt in the r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l ,

A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid t h r e a d lock to the
u p p e r a n c h o r bolts before reinstallation.
A s s e m b l e t h e w a s h e r s , the c o l l a r s , a n d the b u s h i n g
o n the u p p e r a n c h o r bolt a s s h o w n .
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N m
(3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibfft)
Apply thread lock.
B e f o r e installing the a n c h o r bolt, m a k e s u r e t h e r e

a r e no t w i s t s or kinks in the s e a t belt.
T i g h t e n the bolts by h a n d first, t h e n tighten to the
s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e with a t o r q u e w r e n c h .

COLLARS
SPRING
WASHER
WASHER
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
UPPER ANCHOR
COLLAR
BUSHING
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
Apply thread lock.
(cont'd)
24-15
Seat Belts
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4. R e l e a s e the h o o k s (A), t h e n r e m o v e the s e a t belt
buckle pocket (B).
Right Seat Belt Buckle/Left Seat Belt

Detachable Anchor
N O T E : T h e s e a t belt buckle is s h o w n . T h e s e a t belt
d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r is s i m i l a r .
1. R e m o v e t h e third r o w s e a t ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 8 1 ) .
2. R e m o v e t h e s c r e w (A) a n d r e l e a s e t h e hook ( B ) , t h e n
r e m o v e the bracket c o v e r ( C ) .
5. R e m o v e the left third r o w s e a t belt buckle (C) a n d

c e n t e r third r o w s e a t belt d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r (D) f r o m
the s e a t c u s h i o n .
6. Install the b u c k l e a n d d e t a c h a b l e a n c h o r in the
r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l . A p p l y m e d i u m strength
liquid t h r e a d lock to the a n c h o r bolts before
reinstallation.
C
3. R e m o v e the c e n t e r a n c h o r bolt ( A ) , t h e n r e m o v e the
s e a t belt buckle ( B ) .
24-16
Inspection
4. Install the buckle in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l , a n d
note t h e s e i t e m s :
A s s e m b l e the w a s h e r s , t h e s p r i n g , the b u s h i n g , t h e
bracket, a n d t h e c o l l a r on the c e n t e r a n c h o r bolt a s
shown.
A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid t h r e a d lock to t h e
c e n t e r a n c h o r bolt before reinstallation.
Center anchor bolt installation

CENTER ANCHOR
BOLT
A p p l y thread lock.
For t h e front s e a t belt retractor w i t h s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r ,

r e v i e w the S R S c o m p o n e n t l o c a t i o n s ( s e e p a g e 24-19)
a n d the p r e c a u t i o n s a n d p r o c e d u r e s ( s e e p a g e 24-21)
before d o i n g r e p a i r s or s e r v i c e .
Retractor
1. Before installing t h e retractor, c h e c k that t h e s e a t belt
SPRING BRACKET
RETURN SPRING
Out of Vehicle
SPRING
WASHER
COLLAR
c a n be pulled out freely.

2. M a k e s u r e that the s e a t belt d o e s not lock w h e n t h e
retractor (A) is l e a n e d s l o w l y u p to 15 f r o m the
m o u n t e d p o s i t i o n . T h e s e a t belt s h o u l d lock w h e n t h e
retractor is l e a n e d o v e r 4 0 f r o m the m o u n t e d
p o s i t i o n . Do not attempt to d i s a s s e m b l e t h e retractor.
Front
WASHER
CENTER ANCHOR
Driver's side: 7
Passenger's side: 9
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
Second row
^ Inside
Front
(cont'd)
24-17
Seat Belts
Inspection (cont'd)
Center Second row
In-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on
anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free m o v e m e n t
on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor
bolts, and check that the washers and other parts are
not damaged or improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.
Inside
Front
Clean w i t h a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap

and water to clean the seat belts.
NOTE: Dirt build up in the loops of the upper anchors
can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Third row
Wipe the inside of the loops w i t h a clean cloth

dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock w h e n pulled out
slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a
sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically
w h e n released.
^ Inside
Front
6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt

retractor locking mechanism automatic locking
retractor (ALR). This function is for securing child
seats.
Center Third row

25
3. Replace the seat belt w i t h a new assembly if there is

any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the
seat belt for any reason.
24-18
-1. Pull the seat belt all the w a y out to engage the ALR.
The seat belt should retract but not extend. This is
normal.
-2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and
allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out
part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend
normally.
7. Replace the seat belt w i t h a new assembly if there is
any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the
seat belt for any reason.
S R S (Supplemental Restraint S y s t e m )
C o m p o n e n t
L o c a t i o n I n d e x
S R S INDICATOR
P A S S E N G E R S AIRBAG
C U T O F F INDICATOR
Bulb Test, page 24-201
Canada
models
USA
models
PASSENGER
AR
I BAG
lOFFl
%
lOFFl
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S AIRBAG
Disposal, page 24-181
DATA LINK
CONNECTER
(DLC)
D R I V E R S AIRBAG
OPDS S E N S O R / F R O N T
SEAT-BACK
FRONT
PASSENGERS
SIDE AIRBAG
FRONT
PASSENGERS
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
S E N S O R (FIRST)
D R I V E R S SIDE
AIRBAG
ODS UNIT
Operation Check, page 24-37
DRIVER'S S E A T
(Manual Seat)
Operation, page 24-38
LEFTSIDE
IMPACT S E N S O R
(FIRST)
DRIVERS SEAT
B E L T TENSIONER
FRONT
PASSENGERS
WEIGHT S E N S O R S
DRIVER'S S E A T
(Power Seat)
Operation, page 24-38
(cont'd)
24-19

RIGHT FRONT IMPACT S E N S O R
LEFT FRONT
IMPACT S E N S O R
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT

S E N S O R (SECOND)
LEFTSIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
S E N S O R (THIRD)
REAR SAFING
SENSOR
24-20
LEFT SIDE IMPACT S E N S O R

(THIRD)
LEFT SIDE IMPACT
Precautions and Procedures

General Precautions
N O T E : S o m e s y s t e m s s t o r e data in m e m o r y that is lost
w h e n the battery is d i s c o n n e c t e d . B e f o r e d i s c o n n e c t i n g
t h e battery, refer to Battery T e r m i n a l D i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
Reconnection (see page 22-94).
P l e a s e r e a d t h e f o l l o w i n g p r e c a u t i o n s carefully before
s e r v i c i n g the a i r b a g s y s t e m . O b s e r v e the i n s t r u c t i o n s
d e s c r i b e d in this m a n u a l , or the a i r b a g s c o u l d
a c c i d e n t a l l y d e p l o y a n d c a u s e d a m a g e or i n j u r i e s .
E x c e p t w h e n d o i n g electrical i n s p e c t i o n s , a l w a y s t u r n
the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), d i s c o n n e c t the
n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n w a i t at least
3 m i n u t e s before starting w o r k .
Steering-Related Precautions
Cable Reel Alignment
M i s a l i g n m e n t of the c a b l e reel c o u l d c a u s e a n o p e n in
the w i r i n g , m a k i n g the S R S s y s t e m , r e m o t e s t e e r i n g
w h e e l c o n t r o l s , or the h o r n i n o p e r a t i v e . C e n t e r t h e
c a b l e reel w h e n e v e r y o u do the f o l l o w i n g ( s e e s t e p 6
on page 24-186).
- Installation of the s t e e r i n g w h e e l
- Installation of the c a b l e reel
- Installation of the s t e e r i n g c o l u m n
- O t h e r s t e e r i n g - r e l a t e d a d j u s t m e n t o r installation
Do not d i s a s s e m b l e t h e c a b l e reel.
N O T E : T h e S R S m e m o r y is not e r a s e d e v e n i f t h e
Do not a p p l y g r e a s e to the c a b l e r e e l .
ignition s w i t c h is t u r n e d to L O C K (0) or the battery
If the c a b l e reel s h o w s a n y s i g n s of d a m a g e , r e p l a c e it
c a b l e s a r e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m the battery.
U s e r e p l a c e m e n t parts w h i c h a r e m a n u f a c t u r e d to the
s a m e s t a n d a r d s a n d quality a s the original p a r t s . Do
not install u s e d S R S p a r t s . U s e o n l y n e w parts w h e n
making S R S repairs.
w i t h a n e w o n e . For e x a m p l e , i f t h e c a b l e reel d o e s not

rotate s m o o t h l y , r e p l a c e it.
C a r e f u l l y i n s p e c t a n y S R S part before y o u install it.

Do not install a n y part that s h o w s s i g n s of being
d r o p p e d or i m p r o p e r l y h a n d l e d , s u c h a s d e n t s , c r a c k s
or deformation.
Before d i s c o n n e c t i n g the S R S unit c o n n e c t o r s , a l w a y s

d i s c o n n e c t the a p p r o p r i a t e S R S parts c o n n e c t o r s .
U s e o n l y a digital m u l t i m e t e r to c h e c k the s y s t e m . If it
is not a H o n d a m u l t i m e t e r , m a k e s u r e its output is
10 m A (0.01 A ) or l e s s w h e n s w i t c h e d to t h e l o w e s t
v a l u e in the o h m m e t e r r a n g e . A t e s t e r w i t h a h i g h e r
output c o u l d c a u s e a c c i d e n t a l d e p l o y m e n t a n d
p o s s i b l e injury.
Do not put o b j e c t s o n the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g .
(cont'd)
24-21

Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
Airbag Handling and Storage
Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during

removal, inspection, or replacement.
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable

parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service,
observe the f o l l o w i n g precautions.
Store the removed airbag w i t h the pad surface up.
Never put anything on the airbag.
For proper disposal of a damaged airbag, refer to

airbag disposal (see page 24-181).
To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away f r o m

any oil, grease, detergent, or water.
Store the removed airbag o n a secure, flat surface

away f r o m any high heat source (exceeding 200 F/
93 C).
Never do electrical tests on the airbags, such as

measuring resistance.
24-22
The side curtain airbag module assembly is a long,

jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag
(B), and brackets (C). W h e n removing or installing the
side curtain airbag inflator assembly, never:
- Drop the airbag assembly.
- Cut, tear, or unwrap the tape strips.
- Handle the flexible bag.
SRS Unit, Front and Side Impact Sensors,

Rear Safing Sensor, Driver's Seat Position
Sensor, and Front Passenger's Weight
Sensors
N O T E : S o m e s y s t e m s s t o r e data in m e m o r y that is lost
w h e n t h e battery is d i s c o n n e c t e d . B e f o r e d i s c o n n e c t i n g
t h e battery, refer to Battery T e r m i n a l D i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e t h e front a i r b a g , t h e s i d e
c u r t a i n a i r b a g s , or t h e s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r d e p l o y e d , go
to C o m p o n e n t R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n after
D e p l o y m e n t ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 6 7 ) . After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e
a i r b a g s did not d e p l o y , i n s p e c t for a n y d a m a g e or a n y
d e f o r m a t i o n o n t h e S R S unit, t h e front i m p a c t s e n s o r s ,
the rear safing s e n s o r , a n d t h e s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r s .
R e p l a c e all d a m a g e d p a r t s .

T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), d i s c o n n e c t the
n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n w a i t at l e a s t 3
m i n u t e s before b e g i n n i n g installation or r e p l a c e m e n t
of the S R S unit o r d i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e c o n n e c t o r s f r o m
the S R S unit.
B e careful not to b u m p or i m p a c t the S R S unit, t h e
front i m p a c t s e n s o r s , the s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r s , or the
rear s a f i n g s e n s o r w h e n t h e ignition s w i t c h is in O N
(II), or for at l e a s t 3 m i n u t e s after t h e ignition s w i t c h is
t u r n e d to L O C K (0).
D u r i n g installation or r e p l a c e m e n t , be careful not to
i m p a c t s e n s o r s , or the rear s a f i n g s e n s o r . T h e a i r b a g s
D o not d i s a s s e m b l e t h e S R S unit, t h e front i m p a c t

s e n s o r s , t h e s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r s , or t h e rear s a f i n g
sensor.
c o u l d a c c i d e n t a l l y d e p l o y a n d c a u s e d a m a g e or injury.
A l w a y s install t h e S R S unit, all i m p a c t s e n s o r s a n d the
b u m p (by i m p a c t w r e n c h , h a m m e r , etc.) the a r e a

a r o u n d the S R S unit, the front i m p a c t s e n s o r s , t h e s i d e
rear s a f i n g s e n s o r s e c u r e l y w i t h n e w T O R X bolts
t o r q u e d to 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft).
Do not spill w a t e r o r oil on the S R S unit o r a n y of t h e
sensors.
(cont'd)
24-23

Wiring Precautions
Precautions for Electrical Inspections
Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by a special

yellow outer covering and the SRS connectors can be
identified by their yellow color. Observe the following
instructions:
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
If there is an open or damage to the SRS wiring,
replace the harness.

Back Probe Adapter 07TAZ-001020A
Make sure the battery is fully charged when doing
electrical test. If the battery is not fully charged, the
results of the tests may not be accurate.
When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe
of the tester into the wire side of the connector (except
waterproof connectors). Do not insert the probe of the
tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do
not tamper with the connector.
Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get

pinched or interfere with other parts.
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. Do not insert

the probe forcibly.
Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and the
grounds are securely fastened for optimum
metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounds can cause
intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose.
Do not use any silicone based cleaners or lubricants
on any SRS connectors or terminals.
Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.
Using improper tools could cause a diagnostic error
due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
24-24
SRS Unit Connectors
Water Proof Connectors for SRS System
W h e n diagnosing or troubleshooting at an SRS unit

connector (A), use the terminal test port below the
terminal you need to check. Gently insert the pin probes
of the tester or j u m p e r w i r e at the terminal test port f r o m
the terminal side.
When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the water

proof connector (A), use the terminal test port above the
terminal you need to check. Gently contact the pin probe
of the tester or j u m p e r w i r e at the terminal test port f r o m
the terminal side.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Do not insert the pin probes of the tester or a j u m p e r

w i r e at the terminal port or the SRS short canceller
terminal port.
Do not insert the pin probe of the tester or a j u m p e r

wire into the terminal port.
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not

insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals.
Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not

insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other
substitutes as they can damage the terminals.
Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement, and cannot be repaired.
(cont'd)
24-25

Lever-Locked Connector
The SRS unit connectors have a lever lock.
S R S Unit Connectors
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the lever (A) while pushing the
lock (B), on the outside of the connector, then pull out the
connector (C).
24-26
Connecting
To reconnect the connector, push in on the connector
sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed i n , the lever (B)
moves to the locked position.
Spring-Loaded Lock Connector
Side Airbag Connector
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded

lock.
Disconnecting
Front Airbag Connectors

Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)

t o w a r d the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the
connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)

t o w a r d the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the
connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press t h e m f i r m l y
together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side
connector clicks.
Connecting
To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press
o n the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction
s h o w n . As the t w o connector halves are pressed
together, the sleeve is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do
not touch the sleeve.
(cont'd)
24-27

Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors
for Diagnosis
Terminal numbers are s h o w n f r o m the w i r e side of the

female terminals. Insert the short canceller(s) into the
cavities on the terminal side of the connector.

SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)
NOTE:
To prevent damage t o the connector cavity, insert a
short canceller straight into the cavity f r o m the
terminal side.
Before installing a short canceller, wash it w i t h
electrical contact cleaner, then dry it w i t h compressed
air.
// 3
////
26 27 28 29
U
\
16
18
3\
t\
10
/
///
36 37 38 39
Do not use a short canceller if it is damaged.

Make sure to remove the short canceller before
reconnection.
Some system store data in m e m o r y that is lost w h e n
the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting the
battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and
Insert short canceller(s) here.

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)
W h e n SRS unit connectors A (39P) and B (39P) are

disconnected, a short circuit is automatically created in
the connector by its o w n function to prevent airbag
deployment. The circuit m a y need to be open
sometimes w h e n diagnosing the system. Insert a short
canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) in the specified cavities
w h e n necessary to keep the circuit open for diagnosis.
Insert short canceller(s) here.
Terminal side of
female terminals
24-28
Seats with Side Airbags
Disconnecting System Connectors
Seats w i t h side airbags have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label on

the seat-back.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Disconnect the

negative cable f r o m the battery, then wait at least 3
minutes before starting work.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the steering w h e e l ,
then disconnect the driver's airbag 4 P connector (B)
f r o m the cable reel.
Clean the seats w i t h a d a m p cloth. Do not soak the

seats w i t h liquid. Do not spray steam on the seats.
Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover. Replace
the seat-back cover if it is damaged.
After a collision where the side airbag was deployed,
replace the side airbag and the seat frame with new
parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be
replaced.
Never put aftermarket accessories on the seats
(covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
Front Passenger's Airbag

3. Remove the passenger's tray (see page 20-126), then
remove the connector clip. Disconnect the front
passenger's airbag 4 P connector (A) f r o m the
dashboard wire harness (B).
(cont'd)
24-29

Side Airbag
Seat Belt Tensioner
4 . D i s c o n n e c t d r i v e r ' s a n d front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g
6. R e m o v e t h e B-pillar l o w e r t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n
2 P c o n n e c t o r s (A) f r o m t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
d i s c o n n e c t both floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r s (A)

f r o m t h e s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r s .
S R S Unit
7. R e m o v e t h e c e n t e r c o n s o l e t r i m f r o m both s i d e s ( s e e
p a g e 2 0 - 1 1 5 ) , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r s A
(39P) a n d B (39P) f r o m t h e S R S unit.
24-30

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
Precautions
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it

to locate the causes of system problems and store this
information in m e m o r y . For easier troubleshooting, this
data can be retrieved with the HDS via the data link
circuit.
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system.

Make sure its output is 10 m A (0.01 A) or less w h e n
switched to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range.
A tester w i t h a higher output could damage the airbag
circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and
possible injury.
W h e n you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the SRS

indicator comes o n . If it goes off after 6 seconds, the
system is normal w i t h no problems detected.
If a problem is detected, the system locates and
defines the p r o b l e m , stores this information in
m e m o r y , and turns on the SRS indicator on. The data
remains in m e m o r y even if the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0) or the battery is disconnected.
The data is stored in m e m o r y as a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC).
SRS DTCs are either latching or resetting depending
upon the malfunction. Latching DTCs cause the SRS
system to light the SRS indicator until the problem is
corrected and the DTCs are cleared. Resetting DTCs
cause the SRS system to light the SRS indicator until
the ignition switch is turned off. If the malfunction
does not occur w h e n the ignition switch is
subsequently turned to ON (II), the SRS system turns
off the SRS indicator, although the DTCs are still
stored until cleared.
Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been

turned to LOCK (0) for less than 3 minutes, be careful
not to b u m p the SRS unit; the airbags could
accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Before removing the dashboard wire harness or floor
w i r e harness, disconnect the driver's airbag
connector, the front passenger's airbag connector,
both side airbag connectors, both side curtain airbag
connectors, and both seat belt tensioner connectors.
Make sure the battery is fully charged. If the battery is
dead or low, electrical measurements may not be
correct.
Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS
unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the
SRS unit terminals or the sensor terminals with a
j u m p e r wire. Use only the backprobe set and the
multimeter to backprobe spring-loaded lock type
connectors correctly.
W h e n you connect the HDS to the data link connector

(DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed DTC in the
HDS " S R S " m e n u .
After reading and recording the DTC, proceed w i t h the
troubleshooting procedure for that code.
(cont'd)
24-31

Reading the DTC
Clear the DTC Memory With the HDS
N O T E : M a k e s u r e the battery is fully c h a r g e d before y o u
N O T E : M a k e s u r e the battery is fully c h a r g e d before y o u
begin.
begin.
1. M a k e s u r e the ignition s w i t c h is in L O C K (0).
2. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) (A).
2. C o n n e c t the H D S to the d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( A ) .
4. Make s u r e the H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s with the vehicle
4. M a k e s u r e the H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h t h e v e h i c l e
a n d t h e S R S unit. If it d o e s not c o m m u n i c a t e ,
a n d the S R S unit. If it d o e s not c o m m u n i c a t e ,
t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
t r o u b l e s h o o t the D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
5. U s e t h e H D S to c h e c k for D T C s .
6. R e a d a n d r e c o r d t h e D T C .
7. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for
10 s e c o n d s .
8. D i s c o n n e c t t h e H D S f r o m t h e D L C .
9. D o t h e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e for the D T C .
24-32
5. S e l e c t S R S f r o m the H D S s y s t e m m e n u , t h e n S R S ,
t h e n D T C s . C h o o s e the C l e a r D T C s i c o n a n d f o l l o w t h e
prompts.
6. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for
10 s e c o n d s .
7. D i s c o n n e c t the H D S f r o m the D L C .
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures

If t h e r e w a s a m a l f u n c t i o n that s e t s a D T C , but it d o e s not
r e c u r , it will be s t o r e d in t h e m e m o r y a s an intermittent
failure, a n d t h e S R S i n d i c a t o r m a y c o m e o n d e p e n d i n g
o n the m a l f u n c t i o n d e t e c t e d .
NOTE:
C h e c k the c o n d i t i o n of the battery ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 9 3 ) ,
a n d the c h a r g i n g s y s t e m ( s e e p a g e 4-28). L o w battery
v o l t a g e m a y c a u s e s o m e intermittent f a i l u r e s .
A faulty c a b l e reel c a n c a u s e intermittent c o n n e c t i o n s
Checking Front Passenger's Weight Sensors

After a Vehicle Collision
1. P o s i t i o n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t to the r e a r m o s t
p o s i t i o n , a d j u s t the s e a t - b a c k to the f o r w a r d m o s t
p o s i t i o n . Do not m o v e it f r o m this p o s i t i o n .
2. D r i v e the v e h i c l e , a c c e l e r a t e to 20 m p h (36 km/h), t h e n
s t o p o n level g r o u n d .
3. M a k e s u r e the ignition s w i t c h is in L O C K (0).
4. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( A ) .
w h i c h will p r o d u c e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g inflator D T C s .

After c h e c k i n g the D T C , t r o u b l e s h o o t a s f o l l o w s :
1. R e a d t h e D T C .
2. C l e a r t h e D T C m e m o r y .
3. S e t the p a r k i n g b r a k e , t h e n start t h e e n g i n e , a n d let it
idle.
4. T h e S R S indicator c o m e s o n for a b o u t 6 s e c o n d s a n d
t h e n g o e s off.
5. S h a k e t h e related w i r e h a r n e s s e s a n d the c o n n e c t o r s .
L o o k for l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d p o o r g r o u n d s .
6. T a k e a t e s t - d r i v e (quick a c c e l e r a t i o n , quick b r a k i n g ,
a n d c o r n e r i n g ) . T u r n t h e s t e e r i n g w h e e l fully left a n d
right, a n d h o l d i n g it at full lock for 5 to 10 s e c o n d s . If
t h e p r o b l e m r e c u r s , the S R S indicator will c o m e o n .
7. If y o u c a n n o t d u p l i c a t e t h e c o n c e r n , a s k the c u s t o m e r
a b o u t the c o n d i t i o n s w h e n it o c c u r r e d , or a s k the
c u s t o m e r to d e m o n s t r a t e the c o n c e r n .
8. If y o u c a n n o t d u p l i c a t e t h e intermittent failure, the
s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
7. F r o m the S R S i n s p e c t i o n m e n u , s e l e c t S e a t W e i g h t
S e n s o r , t h e n M i s c test, t h e n S E A T O U T P U T C H K a n d
f o l l o w the p r o m p t s until the front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t
s e n s o r o p e r a t i o n c h e c k is c o m p l e t e d .
24-33

S R S Unit Update
H o n d a D i a g n o s t i c S y s t e m ( H D S ) tablet t e s t e r
H o n d a Interface M o d u l e (HIM) a n d a n iN w o r k s t a t i o n
with t h e latest H D S s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
H D S Pocket T e s t e r
G N A 6 0 0 a n d a n iN w o r k s t a t i o n w i t h the latest H D S
software version
Available through the Honda Tool a n d Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
A n y o n e of t h e a b o v e u p d a t i n g t o o l s c a n be u s e d .
NOTE:
U s e this p r o c e d u r e a n y t i m e y o u n e e d to u p d a t e the
S R S unit.
M a k e s u r e t h e HDS/iN w o r k s t a t i o n h a s the latest H D S
software version.
B e f o r e y o u u p d a t e t h e S R S unit, m a k e s u r e the battery
in t h e v e h i c l e is fully c h a r g e d .
N e v e r t u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0) or A C C (I)
d u r i n g the u p d a t e . If t h e r e is a p r o b l e m w i t h the
u p d a t e , l e a v e t h e ignition s w i t c h in O N (II).
T o p r e v e n t S R S unit d a m a g e , d o not o p e r a t e a n y t h i n g
electrical ( h e a d l i g h t s , a u d i o s y s t e m , b r a k e s , A/C,
p o w e r w i n d o w s , m o o n r o o f (if e q u i p p e d ) , d o o r l o c k s ,
etc.) d u r i n g t h e u p d a t e .
T o e n s u r e the latest p r o g r a m is i n s t a l l e d , d o a n S R S
unit u p d a t e w h e n e v e r t h e S R S unit is r e p l a c e d .
Y o u c a n n o t u p d a t e a n S R S unit w i t h a p r o g r a m it
a l r e a d y h a s . It will o n l y a c c e p t a n e w p r o g r a m .
If y o u n e e d to d i a g n o s e t h e HIM b e c a u s e t h e H I M ' s red
(#3) light c a m e o n or w a s f l a s h i n g d u r i n g the u p d a t e ,
l e a v e the ignition s w i t c h in O N (II) w h e n y o u
d i s c o n n e c t t h e HIM f r o m t h e data link c o n n e c t o r
( D L C ) . T h i s will p r e v e n t S R S unit d a m a g e .
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), but d o not start t h e

engine.
3. M a k e s u r e t h e H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h t h e v e h i c l e
4. S e l e c t the u p d a t e p r o g r a m , a n d f o l l o w t h e s c r e e n
p r o m p t s to u p d a t e the S R S unit.
5. If t h e s o f t w a r e in t h e S R S unit is t h e latest, d i s c o n n e c t
the HDS/HIM f r o m t h e D L C , a n d g o b a c k to t h e
p r o c e d u r e that y o u w e r e d o i n g . If t h e s o f t w a r e in t h e
S R S unit is not t h e latest, f o l l o w t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s o n
the s c r e e n .
N O T E : If y o u run into a p r o b l e m d u r i n g t h e u p d a t e
p r o c e d u r e ( p r o g r a m m i n g t a k e s o v e r 15 m i n u t e s ,
s t a t u s bar g o e s o v e r 100 %, D o r i m m o b i l i z e r light
f l a s h e s , H D S tablet f r e e z e s , e t c . ) , f o l l o w t h e s e s t e p s to
m i n i m i z e t h e c h a n c e of d a m a g i n g t h e S R S u n i t :
L e a v e t h e ignition s w i t c h in O N (II) p o s i t i o n .
C o n n e c t a j u m p e r battery (do not c o n n e c t a battery
charger).
S h u t d o w n the H D S .
Disconnect the H D S from the D L C .
Reboot the H D S .
R e c o n n e c t the H D S to t h e D L C , a n d try t h e u p d a t e
procedure again.
7. D i s c o n n e c t the H D S f r o m t h e D L C .
24-34
ODS Unit Initialization

NOTE:
4. C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e data link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( A ) .
After O D S unit is r e p l a c e d , d o this p r o c e d u r e to

initialize the O D S unit.
O D S unit initialization will initialize O P D S s e n s o r a n d
front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r .
OPDS Sensor Initialization

After a s e a t - b a c k c o v e r , s e a t - b a c k c u s h i o n / p a d , and/or
O D S unit is r e p l a c e d , d o this p r o c e d u r e to initialize t h e
O P D S s e n s o r w i t h the H D S unit.
NOTE:
A n e w (uninitialized) O D S unit installed w i t h a faulty
O P D S s e n s o r c a n c a u s e D T C 85-71 a n d D T C 8 5 - 7 8 .
Before initializing t h e O D S unit, m a k e s u r e the battery
is fully c h a r g e d .
1. C l e a r t h e D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
2. M a k e s u r e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t is d r y . S e t the
s e a t - b a c k in a n o r m a l p o s i t i o n , a n d m a k e s u r e t h e r e is
n o t h i n g o n the s e a t .

a n d the S R S unit. If it d o e s not, t r o u b l e s h o o t the D L C
circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
7. F r o m the H D S M a i n M e n u , s e l e c t S R S , t h e n S R S , t h e n
C a l i b r a t i o n . In the C a l i b r a t i o n M e n u , s e l e c t O D S
I N I T I A L I Z A T I O N . F o l l o w the s c r e e n p r o m p t s to
initialize the O D S unit.
9. D i s c o n n e c t the H D S f r o m the D L C .
N O T E : I f t h e O D S unit fails to initialize after s e v e r a l
a t t e m p t s , r e p l a c e the O P D S s e n s o r / s e a t - b a c k a n d
retry. I f t h e O D S unit c o n t i n u e s to fail to initialize,
r e p l a c e t h e O D S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 7 ) .
(cont'd)
24-35

ODS Unit Initialization (cont'd)
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Initialization
W h e n y o u r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit, front p a s s e n g e r ' s

w e i g h t s e n s o r s , o r t h e O D S unit, c a l i b r a t e t h e front
p a s s e n g e r ' s weight s e n s o r with the H D S .
W h i l e d o i n g t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r
initialization, o b s e r v e t h e s e p r e c a u t i o n s :
M a k e s u r e all c o m p o n e n t s of t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
seat are correctly installed.
M a k e s u r e n o t h i n g is o n o r u n d e r t h e front
passenger's seat.
M a k e s u r e t h e r e is n o t h i n g in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
s e a t - b a c k pocket.
K e e p the w i n d o w s a n d the moonroof c l o s e d .
D o all c a l i b r a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s , e x c e p t t e s t - d r i v i n g , in
the service bay.
M a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e is o n level g r o u n d .
K e e p the A/C a n d the h e a t e r off.
D o not t o u c h t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t until y o u a r e
p r o m p t e d to o r w h e n y o u h a v e c o m p l e t e d the
calibration.
Do not e x p o s e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t to s u d d e n
temperature changes.
1. P o s i t i o n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t to t h e r e a r m o s t
p o s i t i o n , a n d a d j u s t t h e s e a t - b a c k to the f o r w a r d m o s t
p o s i t i o n . D o not m o v e t h e s e a t f r o m t h i s p o s i t i o n .
24-36
a n d t h e S R S unit. If it d o e s not, t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e D L C
circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
5. D r i v e t h e v e h i c l e , a n d a c c e l e r a t e to 20 m p h (36 km/h),
t h e n s t o p o n level g r o u n d .
6. F r o m t h e M a i n M e n u , s e l e c t S R S , t h e n S R S
Calibration, then select S W S INITIALIZATION, and
f o l l o w t h e p r o m p t s until t h e c a l i b r a t i o n h a s b e e n
completed.
ODS Unit Operation Check

C h e c k the O D S o p e r a t i o n after a n y of t h e s e a c t i o n s :
R e p l a c e m e n t of front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t c o m p o n e n t ( s )
( e x c e p t O D S unit and/or w e i g h t s e n s o r s )
After a v e h i c l e c o l l i s i o n
After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat

Component(s)
1 . C o n n e c t the H D S to t h e data link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( A ) .
S R S unit r e p l a c e m e n t
Pre-Operation Check Set-Up

B e f o r e d o i n g t h e O D S unit o p e r a t i o n c h e c k , m a k e s u r e
the battery is fully c h a r g e d .
M a k e s u r e all the c o m p o n e n t s of the front p a s s e n g e r ' s
seat are correctly installed.
Position the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t to the r e a r m o s t
p o s i t i o n . A d j u s t the s e a t - b a c k to the f o r w a r d m o s t
p o s i t i o n . D o not m o v e t h e s e a t f r o m th is p o s i t i o n .
M a k e s u r e n o t h i n g is o n or u n d e r the front
passenger's seat.
M a k e s u r e t h e r e is nothing in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s
s e a t - b a c k pocket.
K e e p the w i n d o w s a n d the m o o n r o o f c l o s e d .
D o all c a l i b r a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s , e x c e p t t e s t - d r i v i n g , in
the service bay.
M a k e s u r e the v e h i c l e is o n level g r o u n d .
K e e p the A/C a n d the h e a t e r off.
D o not t o u c h the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t d u r i n g t h e
operation check.
Do not e x p o s e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t to s u d d e n
temperature changes.
M a k e s u r e all aftermarket d e v i c e s s u c h a s a m p l i f i e r s ,
f l u o r e s c e n t light, air purifiers, C B , or H A M r a d i o s , etc.

t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11 - 2 2 6 ) .
4. D r i v e the v e h i c l e , a c c e l e r a t e to 20 m p h (36 km/h), t h e n
s t o p o n level g r o u n d .
5. F r o m the H D S M a i n M e n u , s e l e c t S R S , t h e n
I n s p e c t i o n . In the H D S I n s p e c t i o n M e n u , s e l e c t S E A T
O U T P U T C H K a n d f o l l o w t h e p r o m p t s until the O D S
o p e r a t i o n c h e c k is c o m p l e t e .
a r e t u r n e d off.
24-37

Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
C h e c k t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t p o s i t i o n s e n s o r after d r i v e r ' s s e a t
position s e n s o r r e p l a c e m e n t .
1. M a k e s u r e t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t is all the w a y f o r w a r d .
7. U s i n g a p i e c e of t a p e ( A ) , m a r k the location o n t h e
s e a t ' s o u t e r c o v e r (B) w h e r e t h e front riser c o v e r
m e e t s the s e a t riser ( C ) . T h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t p o s i t i o n
sensor should read N E A R .
3. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to t h e d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) (A).
t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e 11-226).
6. F r o m the H D S M a i n M e n u , s e l e c t S R S , t h e n
Parameter Information, then Buckle S w i t c h , Seat
Position S e n s o r .
8. M o v e the s e a t back in s m a l l i n c r e m e n t s (about 5 m m ,

0.2 in) until the d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r r e a d s
N O T N E A R . T h e s e a t s h o u l d be a b o u t 2 5 m m (1 in)
f r o m the front.
N O T E : It t a k e s a f e w s e c o n d s for t h e H D S to d i s p l a y
c h a n g e s , s o w a i t for a b o u t 5 s e c o n d s b e t w e e n e a c h
movement.
If the d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r d a t a d o e s not w o r k
a s d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , c h e c k t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t position
s e n s o r o r the c o v e r plate for d a m a g e , a n d r e p l a c e
parts a s n e e d e d .
9. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), a n d d i s c o n n e c t
the H D S f r o m the D L C .
24-38

DTC
11-1X
Detection i t e m
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
11 -2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
11-4x
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
11-5x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
11-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first
inflator
11-6x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d
inflator
11-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
11-Ax
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
11-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
11-Bx
S h o r t to g r o u n d in the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
12-1x
O p e n in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
12-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
12-4x
O p e n in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
12-5x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
12-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g
first inflator
12-6x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g
s e c o n d inflator
12-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
12-Ax
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
Notes
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-56)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-58)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-60)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-62)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-64)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-65)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-67)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-68)
12-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
12-Bx
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
21-1x
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
21-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-70)
21-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt

tensioner
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-71)
21-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-73)
21-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-74)
(cont'd)
24-39

Detection Item
DTC
Notes
22-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-76)
22-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e o r d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt

tensioner
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-77)
22-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-79)
22-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-80)
31-1x
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
31-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-82)
31 -3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g
inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-83)
31-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-85)
31-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-86)
32-1 x
O p e n in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
32-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-88)
32-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-89)
32-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-91)
32-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-92)
O p e n in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
22-1x
33-1 x
O p e n in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
33-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-94)
33-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e o r d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g
inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-95)
33-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-97)
33-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-98)
34-1 x
O p e n in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
34-2x
I n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-100)
34-3x
S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e or d e c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g
inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-101)
34-8x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-103)
34-9x
S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-104)
41-1x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e left front i m p a c t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-106)
42-1 x
N o s i g n a l f r o m t h e right front i m p a c t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-108)
NOTE:
24-40
T h e " x " at t h e e n d of e a c h D T C d e n o t e s a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r (0 thru 9) or a n a l p h a c h a r a c t e r (A t h r u F)

that y o u will s e e o n t h e H D S d i s p l a y . T h e c h a r a c t e r is u n r e l a t e d to y o u r t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ; it d e s i g n a t e s
t h e S R S unit m a n u f a c t u r e r a n d o t h e r detail u s e d for p r o d u c t a n a l y s i s .
DTC
Detection item
Notes
Internal failure of t h e left front i m p a c t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-110)
Internal failure of t h e right front i m p a c t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-110)
43-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
46-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d )
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-111)
48-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
41-2x
41-8x
41-9x
41-Ax
41-Bx
42-2x
42-8x
42-9x
42-Ax
42-Bx
44-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
45-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d )
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-120)
47-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
43-2x
Internal failure of t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-128)
Internal failure of t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-129)
Internal failure of t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d )
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-129)
Internal failure of t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d )
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-130)
43-8x
43-9x
43-Ax
43-Bx
44-2x
44-8x
44-9x
44-Ax
44-Bx
45-2x
45-8x
45-9x
45-Ax
45-Bx
46-2x
46-8x
46-9x
46-Ax
46-Bx
(cont'd)
24-41

DTC
Detection Item
47-2x
Notes
Internal failure of t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-130)
Internal failure of t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-131)
B2-1x
No signal from the rear safing s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-131)
B2-2x
Internal failure of t h e r e a r s a f i n g s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-134)
Ex-11
Control operation recorded
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-135)
Fx-11
A i r b a g s and/or t e n s i o n e r s d e p l o y m e n t r e c o r d e d
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-135)
51-xx
Internal failure of t h e S R S unit
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-136)
53-FF
S R S unit p r o g r a m m i n g e r r o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-136)
56-21
Lost c o m m u n i c a t i o n with the P C M (PGM-FI s y s t e m )
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-137)
47-8x
47-9x
47-Ax
47-Bx
48-2x
48-8x
48-9x
48-Ax
48-Bx
B2-8x
B2-9x
B2-Ax
B2-Bx
52-xx
53-xx
54-xx
55-xx
57-xx
58-xx
56-31
56-22
U n d e f i n e d d a t a r e c e i v e d f r o m the P C M ( P G M - F I s y s t e m )
56-23
56-32
56-33
56-25
Lost c o m m u n i c a t i o n with the g a u g e control module
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-138)
56-26
Undefined data received from the g a u g e control m o d u l e
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-139)
56-27
NOTE:
24-42
T h e " x " at the e n d of e a c h D T C d e n o t e s a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r (0 t h r u 9) o r a n a l p h a c h a r a c t e r (A t h r u F)

Detection Item
DTC
Notes
61-1x
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt buckle s w i t c h
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-140)
61-2x
S h o r t in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt buckle s w i t c h
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-142)
62-1 x
O p e n in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt buckle s w i t c h
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-142)
62-2x
S h o r t in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt b u c k l e s w i t c h
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-144)
71-1x
O p e n in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-145)
71-2x
S h o r t in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
(see p a g e 2 4 - 1 4 6 )
81-4x
internal failure of t h e O D S unit
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-148)
81-61
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e O D S unit
81-62
I n c o r r e c t data f r o m t h e O D S unit
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-148)
81-71
O D S unit not c a l i b r a t e d
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-151)
81-79
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r s initial c h e c k failure
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-151)
82-1 x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e i n n e r s i d e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-152)
83-2x
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e o u t e r s i d e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-152)
81-63
81-64
81-78
(cont'd)
24-43

Detection Item
DTC
Notes
Internal failure of t h e O D S unit
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-153)
85-61
No s i g n a l f r o m t h e O D S unit
85-62
Incorrect d a t a f r o m t h e O D S unit
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-153)
85-71
O D S unit not initialized
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-156)
O P D S s e n s o r initial c h e c k failure
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-157)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-157)
85-4x
85-63
85-64
85-78
85-79
86-1 x
Faulty O P D S s e a t - b a c k s e n s o r
86-2x
Faulty O P D S s e a t s u p p o r t s e n s o r
92-1 x
S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff indicator
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-158)
92-2x
O p e n or s h o r t to g r o u n d in the p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff indicator
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-159)
A1-1x
F a u l t y p o w e r s u p p l y ( V A line)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-161)
A2-1x
F a u l t y p o w e r s u p p l y ( V B line)
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-162)
A3-1x
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A not p r o p e r l y i n s t a l l e d
DTC Troubleshooting
( s e e p a g e 24-163)
A4-1x
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B not p r o p e r l y i n s t a l l e d
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-163)
NOTE:
24-44
T h e " x " at t h e e n d of e a c h D T C d e n o t e s a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r (0 t h r u 9) o r a n a l p h a c h a r a c t e r (A thru F)


Symptom
A l s o c h e c k for
S R S indicator d o e s not c o m e on
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e 24-164)
C o m m u n i c a t i o n with the
HDS
S R S indicator s t a y s o n , but no D T C s
a r e s t o r e d , or c a n n o t be r e a d
C h a r g i n g s y s t e m for
u n d e r or o v e r c h a r g i n g
C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h the
HDS
S i d e a i r b a g cutoff indicator is f l a s h e s
C h e c k for D T C s . If a n y D T C is i n d i c a t e d , go to
the D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Initialization O D S unit
C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h the
HDS
S i d e a i r b a g cutoff indicator s t a y s on
Communication with the

HDS
S i d e a i r b a g cutoff indicator d o e s not

c o m e on
HDS
P a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff indicator

flashes
HDS

s t a y s o n or c o m e s on s u d d e n l y
Communication with the

HDS

d o e s not c o m e o n
HDS
H D S d o e s not c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h the
S R S unit or the v e h i c l e
T r o u b l e s h o o t the D L C circuit ( s e e p a g e
11-226)
HDS
24-45

System Description
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a supplemental safety device w h i c h , w h e n used w i t h the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and
front passenger in a impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor
and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), side airbags (E), side
curtain airbags (F), seat belt tensioners (G), side impact sensors (first) (H), front impact sensors (I), rear safing sensor (J),
side impact sensors (second) (K), and side impact sensors (third) (L).
Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However,
it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur w h e n collision severity is near threshold for airbag
deployment. In such case, the SRS system will only deploy airbags w h e n the protection provided by the seat belt is
insufficient.
Front Passenger's Weight Sensors
The front passenger's w e i g h t sensors (M) are part of the seat base. The front passenger's w e i g h t sensors detect the
w e i g h t on the seat, and send the information to the ODS unit (N). If the total weight is about 65 lbs (30 kg) or less, the
ODS unit sends a signal to the SRS unit to prevent the passenger's airbag f r o m deploying. W h e n the passenger's airbag
is disabled, the passenger airbag cutoff indicator on the center panel comes on to alert the driver that the front
passenger's airbag will not deploy in a front-end collision.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
The driver's seat position sensor (O) is under the driver's seat. W h e n the driver's seat is moved all the w a y f o r w a r d , the
deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease its force of impact during a front-end collision.
24-46
Rear Safing Sensor

The rear safing sensor is located under the second row seat. The rear safing sensor performs the same basic function as
the safing sensor in the SRS unit. It measures sideways G force, such as the force the vehicle would receive in a side
collision in the rear, and sends that information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses that information, and the information
from the second side impact sensors to determine the side that is impacted and the force. Ifthe threshold is met, the
SRS unit deploys the side airbag, the side curtain airbag and the seat belt tensioner on that side.
Side Airbag Cutoff indicator/ODS Operation

The indicator comes on when the front passenger's seat is occupied by a small adult or child who is leaning into the
deployment path, or when an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the passenger's
side airbag is off and will not deploy; there is no problem with the side airbag. If the passenger sits upright or moves to
another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the indicator should go off. There will be some delay between the
occupant's repositioning and when the indicator will turn on or off.
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator/Front Passenger's Weight Sensor operation

The indicator comes on if the weight on the front passenger's seat is about 65 lbs (30 kg) or less. This indicates the
passenger's front airbag is off and will not deploy. The front airbag is shut off to reduce the chance of airbag-caused
injuries.
SRS Operation
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and analyzes the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuit will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate:
Seat Belt Tensioners
(1) A front impact sensor, side impact sensor or the rear safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to the
microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the tensioners.
(3) The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)
(1) A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the airbag inflator(s).
(3) The triggered inflators that receives signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(s)
(1) A side impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor
does not trigger the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the
deployment path of the side airbag.
(3) The triggered inflators must ignite and deploy the side airbags.
(cont'd)
24-47

Side Curtain Airbag(s)
(1) A side impact sensor or the rear safing sensor must activate and send electrical signals t o the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the side curtain airbag and side airbag inflator(s).
(3) The triggered inflators must ignite and deploy the side curtain airbag and side airbag at the same time.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT

DRIVER'S SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT
SENSORS
OPDS
SENSOR
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
ODS UNIT
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
LEFT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
RIGHT
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
LEFT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(THIRD)
RIGHT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(THIRD)
LEFT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
RIGHT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(SECOND)
RIGHT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(FIRST)
LEFT
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
(FIRST)
DRIVER'S
SIDE
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDE
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
FIRST
INFLATOR
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
FIRST
INFLATOR
REAR
SAFING
SENSOR
CABLE
REEL
SRS UNIT
VBT
POWER
SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
[IMPACT]
FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
MICROPROCESSOR and DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT
TRIGGER CIRCUIT
SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR
MEMORY
CIRCUIT
DATA
LINK
CIRCUIT
DLC WEN
CANH
CAN L
(w^
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
SRS
INDICATOR
LEFTSIDE
CURTAIN
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
L ^ V ^
RIGHT SIDE DRIVER'S
CURTAIN
SEAT BELT
AIRBAG
TENSIONER
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
Self-diagnostic System
A self-diagnostic circuit is built into the SRS unit; w h e n the ignition switch is turned t o ON (II), the SRS indicator comes
on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the indicator does not come o n , or does not g o off after 6 seconds, or comes o n while driving, it indicates an
abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit m e m o r y stores DTCs related to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is
connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read w i t h the HDS w h e n it is connected t o the DLC
(see page 24-31).
NOTE: Before y o u disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery for troubleshooting, review Battery Terminal
Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-94).
24-48
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (39P)
//
16 17 18
26 27 28 29
U
31
9 10
20
/
///
36 37 38 39
I.
Terminal
Number
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire Color
Terminal Name
BRN*
LA1-
LTBLU*
LA1 +
BLU*
YEL*
RA1RA1 +
LA2-
9
10
16
PUR*
GRN*
LT B L U *
LA2+
RA2-
LTGRN*
RED*
RA2 +
CAN L
17
WHT*
CAN H
18
LT B L U *
20
26
27
BLU*
RED*
RED*
K-LINE
PTT
VA
VB
28
BLK*
S R S GND 1
29
BLK*
SRSGND2
31
GRY*
WEN
36
BRN*
LFS
37
RED*
LFS +
38
LT B L U *
RFS
GRN*
39
RFS +
* : W i r e c o l o r s m a y be s u b s t i t u t e d in t h i s t a b l e .
Description
G r o u n d for the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
G r o u n d for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first inflator
G r o u n d for the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
G r o u n d for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g s e c o n d inflator
S e n d s a n d receives c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal from the g a u g e
control m o d u l e
S e n d s and receives communication signal from the gauge
control m o d u l e
S e n d s a n d r e c e i v e s s c a n tool s i g n a l (serial data)
P a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff indicator output line
S R S s y s t e m sub power ( c o m m o n with O D S )
S R S d e d i c a t e d p o w e r ( d e d i c a t e d b o o s t e r circuit)
G r o u n d circuit for the S R S unit ( G 4 0 5 )
G r o u n d circuit for the S R S unit ( G 4 0 5 )
Data link c o n n e c t o r
G r o u n d for the left front i m p a c t s e n s o r
P o w e r s o u r c e for t h e left front i m p a c t s e n s o r
G r o u n d for the right front i m p a c t s e n s o r
P o w e r s o u r c e for the right front i m p a c t s e n s o r
(cont'd)
24-49

SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (39P)
If
12 13 14 15
26 27
19
7 8
21
/ / ///
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
L
Terminal
Number
Wire Color
Terminal Name
1
6
7
GRN*
RED*
GRN*
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
BLU*
WHT*
BLU*
BRN*
BRN*
RED*
ODS
LSALSA+
RSA
RSA+
LCA1LCA1 +
LRP
LRP+
S e n d s a n d r e c e i v e s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s i g n a l w i t h t h e O D S unit
G r o u n d for t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
G r o u n d for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator
G r o u n d for the left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for the left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
G r o u n d for the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
P o w e r s o u r c e for the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
RRP
RRP+
FLBC
FRBC
SS+
RCA1RCA1 +
G r o u n d for t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r

P o w e r s o u r c e for the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
D r i v e r ' s s e a t belt buckle s w i t c h
Front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt b u c k l e s w i t c h
D r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r
G r o u n d for t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
P o w e r s o u r c e for right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g inflator
G r o u n d for t h e rear s a f i n g s e n s o r
P o w e r s o u r c e for the rear s a f i n g s e n s o r
36
LT B L U *
GRN*
YEL*
ORN*
BLU*
RED*
GRY*
BRN/YEL*
LT GRN/
RED*
GRY*
37
PNK*
LBS1 +
38
LTGRN*
RBS1-
G r o u n d for t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first), left s i d e i m p a c t

s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) , left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
39
BRN*
RBS1 +
P o w e r s o u r c e for the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first), left s i d e

i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) , left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
15
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
sssSSS+
LBS1-
* : W i r e c o l o r s m a y b e s u b s t i t u t e d in t h i s t a b l e .
24-50
Description
G r o u n d for t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first), right s i d e i m p a c t

s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) , right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
P o w e r s o u r c e for the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first), right s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) , right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)
24-51

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-HOOD
\ No. 9
, (7.5 A)
) No. 10
-> (7.5 A)
1 No. 11
(10 A)
IT
Y
MICU
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
RIGHT ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
LT BLU
R
ED
RED
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
YEL
32
SIDE
, AIRBAG
S E A T BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
S Y S T E M CHECK
TURNING-ON
CIRCUIT
DRIVE CIRCUIT
FAIL-SAFE CIRCUIT
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER
WHT
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE)
FT
GRN
RED
PASSENGER'S
S E A T WIRE
HARNESS
BLU*
RED
. WHT
1
-
WHT*
RED*
CAN H
CAN L
S R S GND 1
SRSGND2
K-LINE
WEN
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
BLK
12
FRONT
- a tI: : :
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
S E A T WIRE
HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
16P
7
RED
WHT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
SRS
UNIT
RIGHT ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
WIRE H A R N E S S
I
I
I
-I
WHT*
GRY*
ODS
UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
LT B L U *
(FRONT INNER SIDE)
GRY*
(FRONT OUTER SIDE)
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
24-52
* : W i r e colors m a y be substituted
for SRS circuits
*1 : W i t h driver's m e m o r y seat
* 2 : W i t h driver's p o w e r seat
* 3 : W i t h driver's m a n u a l seat
-
: C A N line
-
FRONT
LEFT
: Other c o m m u n i c a t i o n line
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
PASSENGER'S
DRIVER'S
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
AIRBAG
AIRBAG
AIRBAG
FIRST
SECOND
FIRST
SECOND
INFLATOR
INFLATOR
INFLATOR
INFLATOR
RIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
IMPACT
IMPACT
SENSOR
SENSOR
2P
RIGHT ENGINE
LEFT ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
COMPARTMENT
WIRE
j_j B L U *
GRN*
CABLE
REEL
HARNESS
HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
BRN*
RED*
BLU*
RFS-
RFS+
RA1+
RA1-
LTGRN*
LTBLU*
RA2+
RA2-
LTBLU*
BRN*
GRN*
LA1-
LA2+
PUR*
SRS UNIT
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
*1 :
*2 : i
*3:*1:18P
*2:13P
*3:4P
FRONT
DRIVER'S
PASSENGER'S
SEAT WIRE
SEAT WIRE
HARNESS
HARNESS
FRONT
DRIVER'S
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
BUCKLE
SWITCH
(Closed:
unbuckled)
SWITCH
G502
(Closed:
unbuckled)
(cont'd)
24-53

LEFT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR
(THIRD)
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
LEFT SIDE
IMPACT
S E N S O R (FIRST)
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
PNK*
GRY*
LBS1+
LBS1-
LRP+
LRP-
YEL*
RRP+
YEL*
LT G R N *
LT G R N *
RRP-
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
RED*
BRN*
GRN*
*1 :12
*2:12
*3:1
LTBLU*
*1 :18P
*2 :13P
*3:4P
*1 : 1 6
*2:10
*3:2
BLK
r.
DRIVER'S
S E A T WIRE
HARNESS
_Q_
G502
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
24-54
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
S E A T BELT
TENSIONER
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
BRN*
BLU*
LCA1+
LCA1-
* : Wire colors may be substituted

for S R S circuits
*1 : With driver's memory seat
*2 : With driver's power seat
*3 : With driver's manual seat
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST)
RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR
LEFTSIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR
(THIRD)
LEFTSIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (SECOND)
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
BRN*
LTGRN*
LSA+
LSA-
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
BRN/
YEL*
LTGRN/
RED*
REAR
SAFING
SENSOR
DRIVER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR
24-55

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator
5. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from

the cable reel.

Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag
First Inflator
Open in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag
Second Inflator
SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A

SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-21),
General Troubleshooting Information (see page
24-31), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit
software version with the HDS. If the software version
is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see
page 24-34) and retest.
6. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connectors)

and simulator lead J to the cable reel.
7. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
8. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-32).
9. Read the DTC (see page 24-32).
is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.

SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the driver's

airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's
airbag (see page 24-170), then clear the DTC.H
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-1x,11-2x,

11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
24-33). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B
4. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
24-56

12. R e m o v e the c o l u m n c o v e r ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 3 0 ) , t h e n
d i s c o n n e c t the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s 4P connector
(A) f r o m t h e c a b l e r e e l .
2 1 . M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of both
S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
DASHBOARD WIRE H A R N E S S
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at S R S unit
07SAZ-TB4011A
13. C o n n e c t t h e S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r (2 O c o n n e c t o r s )
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d J to t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s .
14. R e c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e to t h e battery.
c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e S R S unit.
Ifthe c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d a s h b o a r d
wire h a r n e s s ; replace the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ,
then clear the D T C . I
16. R e a d t h e D T C ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
Is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x
c o n n e c t o r A (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
Indicated?
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e c a b l e r e e l ;
r e p l a c e t h e c a b l e reel ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 5 ) , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
18. D i s c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
w a i t at l e a s t 3 m i n u t e s .
19. D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) f r o m t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
2 0 . D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m t h e S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . Do not d i s c o n n e c t t h e s i m u l a t o r l e a d
from the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s 4P connector.
24-57

Short to Another Wire or Decreased
Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator
5. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m
the c a b l e r e e l .

Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
. S R S Inflator S i m u l a t o r 0 7 S A Z - T B 4 0 1 1 A
. S R S Simulator Lead J
070AZ-SNAA100
. S R S Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100

NOTE:
B e f o r e d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e , r e v i e w
S R S Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-21),
2 4 - 3 1 ) , a n d Battery T e r m i n a l D i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
B e f o r e r e p l a c i n g the S R S unit, c h e c k the S R S unit
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n with t h e H D S . If t h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
is not the latest, u p d a t e t h e S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e
p a g e 24-34) a n d retest.
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d c h e c k that the
S R S indicator c o m e s o n for a b o u t 6 s e c o n d s a n d t h e n
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-3x or
11-6x
indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
G o t o T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Intermittent F a i l u r e s ( s e e p a g e
2 4 - 3 3 ) . If a n o t h e r D T C is i n d i c a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e
DTC.B
24-58
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead J to t h e c a b l e r e e l .
9. R e a d the D T C ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
Is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first or s e c o n d
inflator; r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 0 ) ,
t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H
11. D i s c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m t h e battery, t h e n
w a i t at least 3 m i n u t e s .
d i s c o n n e c t the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r
(A) f r o m the c a b l e r e e l .
2 2 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of both

S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s . T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n c i r c u i t
or at l e a s t 1 M O .
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
07SAZ-TB4011A
13. C o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r (2 0 c o n n e c t o r s )
14. R e c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e to t h e battery.
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at S R S unit
c o n n e c t o r A (39P) a n d the S R S unit. C h e c k the
c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n the c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e S R S unit.
If the c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).!
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in the d a s h b o a r d w i r e
h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n
c l e a r the D T C . B
indicated?
N O - S h o r t in t h e c a b l e r e e l ; r e p l a c e the c a b l e reel ( s e e
page 24-185), then clear the D T C . B
18. D i s c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
19. D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) f r o m the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
2 0 . D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m the S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . Do not d i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r l e a d
from the d a s h b o a r d wire h a r n e s s 4P connector.
21. Connect the S R S short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100)
( s e e p a g e 24-28) to S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P)
t e r m i n a l s No.3 a n d N o . 4 a n d t e r m i n a l s No.7 a n d N o . 8 .
24-59

DTC 11 -8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
5. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from

the cable reel.
DTC 11-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
. SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A

. SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE:
software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version
goes off.
11-Ax indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC.I
24-60
6. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Cl connectors)

and simulator lead J to the cable reel.
is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Short to power in the driver's airbag first or
second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
24-170), then clear the DTC.B
2 3 . M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of both
S R S simulator leads and body ground. T h e r e should
(A) from the c a b l e r e e l .
be l e s s t h a n 0.2 V .
4P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4011A
13. C o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r (2 O c o n n e c t o r s )
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d J to the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s .
14. R e c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e to the battery.
Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax Indicated?

Is the voltage as specified?

Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit or poor c o n n e c t i o n at S R S unit
c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n the c o n n e c t o r a n d the S R S unit.
If the c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).B
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ;
r e p l a c e the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the c a b l e r e e l ; r e p l a c e the c a b l e
reel ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 5 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . Do not d i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r lead
2 1 . R e c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e to the battery.
2 2 . T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
24-61

Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
5. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m
the cable reel.
DTC 11-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
. S R S Simulator Lead J
070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE:
Before d o i n g t h i s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e , r e v i e w
S R S Precautions a n d Procedures (see page 24-21),
B e f o r e r e p l a c i n g t h e S R S unit, c h e c k t h e S R S unit
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h t h e H D S . If the s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
is not t h e latest, u p d a t e t h e S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d c h e c k that t h e
g o e s off.
11-Bx
indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
G o to T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Intermittent F a i l u r e s ( s e e p a g e
DTC.B
24-62
6. C o n n e c t t h e S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r (2 Q c o n n e c t o r s )
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d J to t h e c a b l e r e e l .
Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 0 .
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g first o r
s e c o n d inflator; r e p l a c e t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
24-170), then clear the D T C . B

2 1 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of
both S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 MQ.
4P CONNECTOR
(A) f r o m the c a b l e r e e l .
Is the resistance
07SAZ-TB4011A
15. C l e a r the D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
as
specified?
Ifthe c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ;
DTC.B
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the c a b l e r e e l ; r e p l a c e the
c a b l e reel ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 5 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
f r o m the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r .
24-63

Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag First
Inflator
5. R e m o v e t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s t r a y ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 6 ) a n d
g l o v e box ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 7 ) , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e front
p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e
dashboard wire harness.

Increased Resistance in the Front Passenger's
Airbag First Inflator
M
DTC 12-4x ("x can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag Second
Inflator
M

Airbag Second Inflator
. S R S Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
07SAZ-TB4011A
NOTE:
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h t h e H D S . If t h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-1 x, 12-2x,
12-4x, or 12-5x
indicated?
Is DTC 12-1x, 12-2x, 12-4x, or 12-5x
indicated?
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front
p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first o r s e c o n d inflator; r e p l a c e t h e
front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 1 ) , t h e n c l e a r
the D T C . B
2 4 - 3 3 ) . If a n o t h e r D T C is i n d i c a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t the
DTC.B
24-64
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
13. D i s c o n n e c t t h e S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m t h e S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . D o not d i s c o n n e c t t h e s i m u l a t o r l e a d
14. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of both

S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS

4P CONNECTOR

Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag
First Inflator
u

Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
S R S Inflator S i m u l a t o r 0 7 S A Z - T B 4 0 1 1 A
. S R S Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
S R S Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Before d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e , r e v i e w
c o n n e c t o r A (39P). C h e c k the c o n n e c t i o n ; if the
c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188J.B
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in the d a s h b o a r d
w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ,
t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B

Before r e p l a c i n g the S R S unit, c h e c k t h e S R S unit
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n with the H D S . If the s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
is not the latest, u p d a t e the S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d c h e c k that t h e
g o e s off.

12-6x indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-65

5. R e m o v e the p a s s e n g e r ' s t r a y ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 6 ) a n d
the glove box (see page 20-127), then disconnect the
front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m the
15. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s of both
S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s . T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit
o r at least 1 M O .
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
07SAZ-TB4011A
6. C o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r (2 Q c o n n e c t o r s )
8. C l e a r t h e D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
indicated?
N O - S h o r t in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g first or
s e c o n d inflator; r e p l a c e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g
(see page 24-171), then clear the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
13. D i s c o n n e c t t h e S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m the S R S
14. C o n n e c t t h e S R S s h o r t c a n c e l l e r s ( 0 7 0 A Z - S A A 0 1 0 0 )
to S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l s No.5 a n d
No.6 and No.9 and No.10 (see page 24-28).
24-66
as
specified?
24-188).
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e
h a r n e s s ; replace the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , then

Short to Power in the Front Passenger's
5. R e m o v e the p a s s e n g e r ' s tray ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 6 ) a n d

the g l o v e box ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 7 ) , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t the
DTC 12-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Power in the Front Passenger's
S R S Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE:
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h the H D S . I f t h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
g o e s off.
12-Ax
indicated?
07SAZ-TB4011A
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead J to the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s .
7. R e c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e to the battery.
9. R e a d the D T C ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
Is DTC 12-8xor
12-Ax
indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at th i s t i m e .
first or s e c o n d inflator; r e p l a c e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
DTC.B
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g

a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 1 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
13. D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m the S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . D o not d i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r lead
(cont'd)
24-67

16. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of both
S R S simulator leads a n d body ground. There should
4P CONNECTOR

Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's
DTC 12-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's
S R S Simulator Lead J
070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE:

If t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ;
replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
g o e s off.

12-Bx indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
DTC.B
24-68
5. R e m o v e t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s t r a y ( s e e p a g e 20-126) a n d
the g l o v e box ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 7 ) , t h e n d i s c o n n e c t the
07SAZ-TB4011A
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
14. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of
both S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d s a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit o r at least 1 M O .
indicated?
as
specified?

c o n n e c t o r A (39P) a n d the S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
If the c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ;
r e p l a c e the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g

first or s e c o n d inflator; r e p l a c e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
24-69

Open in the Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
5. R e m o v e t h e B-pillar l o w e r trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n
d i s c o n n e c t t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A)
f r o m t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r .

Increased Resistance in the Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
. S R S Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
NOTE:
Before r e p l a c i n g t h e S R S unit, c h e c k t h e S R S unit
software version with the H D S . Ifthe software version
1. C l e a r the D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 24-32).

g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC
21
Vindicated?
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead K to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
21-1xor
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
24-33). If a n o t h e r D T C is i n d i c a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e
DTC.B
9. R e a d t h e D T C ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
/$ DTC 21-1x or21-2x
indicated?
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t
belt t e n s i o n e r ; r e p l a c e t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e p a g e
12. D i s c o n n e c t t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r
4P connector (see page 24-30).
to S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 2 a n d
No. 13 ( s e e p a g e 24-28).
14. D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) f r o m t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
24-70
15. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r

B (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 2 a n d N o . 1 3 . T h e r e s h o u l d be
2.0-3.0 O.
S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (39P)

Resistance in the Driver's Seat Belt tensioner
/ / //
2z 2 7
19
12 13 14 15
9 10 11
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
U
. S R S Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100

NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, r e v i e w
G e n e r a l Troubleshooting Information (see p a g e
B e f o r e r e p l a c i n g the S R S unit, c h e c k t h e S R S unit

Is resistance
as
specified?
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit. C h e c k the
c o n n e c t i o n ; if t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e floor w i r e
h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.I
p a g e 2 4 - 3 4 ) a n d retest.
S R S i n d i c a t o r c o m e s o n for a b o u t 6 s e c o n d s a n d t h e n
g o e s off.
21-3x
indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
DTC.B
4. D i s c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m t h e battery, t h e n
(cont'd)
24-71

5. Remove the B-pillar lower t r i m (see page 20-82), then
disconnect the floor w i r e harness 4P connector (A)
f r o m the driver's seat belt tensioner.
15. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector

B (39P) terminals No.12 and No.13. There should be
an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
S R S UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)
u
6
1
12 13 14 15
23 27
J.
7 8
19
9 10 11
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
I
Is the resistance

and simulator lead K to the floor wire harness.
8. Clear the DTC m e m o r y (see page 24-32).
Is DTC 21-3x
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Short in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace
the driver's seat belt (see page 24-4), then clear the
DTC.B
11. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery, then
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) f r o m the SRS
unit (see page 24-30).
13. Connect the SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100)
to SRS unit connector B terminals No.12 and No.13
(see page 24-28).
14. Disconnect the simulator lead f r o m the floor wire
harness.
24-72
as
specified?
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit

connector B (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection; i f t h e connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to another wire in the floor wire harness;
replace the floor wire harness, then clear the D T C . B

Short to Power in the Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
5. R e m o v e the B-pillar l o w e r trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n

d i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A)
f r o m the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r .

NOTE:
R e c o n n e c t i o n ( s e e p a g e 22-94).
Before r e p l a c i n g the S R S unit, c h e c k the S R S unit
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h the H D S . If the s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
g o e s off.
Does
the SRS indicator
stay on, and is DTC
21-8x
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead K to the floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
indicated?

24-33). If a n o t h e r D T C is i n d i c a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t the
DTC.B
Is DTC 21-8x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r ;
r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e p a g e 24-4), t h e n
11. D i s c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e f r o m t h e battery, t h e n
12. D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) f r o m the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
13. D i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r l e a d f r o m the floor w i r e
harness.
(cont'd)
24-73

unit connector B (39P) terminals No.12 and No.13,
individually. There should be less than 0.2 V.

Short to Ground in the Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
. SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
LT
1
12 13 14 15
2 6 27
/ /
6 7 8
/ 19 /
/ / / /
21
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
u

connection; i f t h e connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-Short to power in the floor wire harness; replace
the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
NOTE:
software version w i t h the HDS. Ifthe software version
2. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), and check that the
SRS indicator comes o n for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 21'-9x

indicated?
YES-Go t o step 3.
DTC.B
24-74
5. R e m o v e t h e B-pillar l o w e r trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n
f r o m the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r .
14. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s No. 12 a n d No.
13, individually. T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit o r at
least 1 MQ.
070AZ-SNAA200
07SAZ-TB4011A

Is the resistance
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d K to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
Is DTC 21-9x
as
specified?
c o n n e c t i o n ; if the c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r ;
r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 4 ) , t h e n
clear the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
13. D i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r l e a d f r o m t h e floor w i r e
harness.
24-75

DTC 22-1 x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Tensioner
5. Remove the B-pillar lower t r i m (see page 20-82), then

disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
f r o m the front passenger's seat belt tensioner.

Seat Belt Tensioner
NOTE:
software version w i t h the HDS. If the software version
goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay o n , and is DTC 22-1 x or
22-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC.B

and simulator lead K to the floor wire harness.
Is DTC 22-1 x or 22-2x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Open or increased resistance in the front
passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front
passenger's seat belt (see page 24-4), then clear the
DTC.B
13. Connect the SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100)
to SRS unit connector B (39P) terminals No.14 and
No.15 (see page 24-28).
24-76

2.0-3.0 n .

Resistance in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Tensioner
NOTE:
S R S P r e c a u t i o n s a n d P r o c e d u r e s ( s e e p a g e 24-21),
24-31), a n d Battery T e r m i n a l D i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
R e c o n n e c t i o n (see p a g e 22-94).
Is the resistance as
specified?
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d the S R S unit. C h e c k the
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in the floor w i r e
h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B

s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n with the H D S . If the s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
is not the latest, update the S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 22-3x

indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
G o to T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Intermittent F a i l u r e s (see p a g e
DTC.B
4. D i s c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
(cont'd)
24-77

5. R e m o v e the B-pillar l o w e r t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n
f r o m the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r .
15. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r
a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 M O .
07SAZ-TB4011A

070AZ-SNAA200
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead K to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
Is DTC 22-3x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r ;
r e p l a c e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e p a g e
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
No.15 (see page 24-28).
14. D i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r lead f r o m t h e floor w i r e
harness.
24-78
Is the resistance
as
specified?
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d the S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ;
r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B

Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Tensioner
5. R e m o v e the B-pillar l o w e r t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n

NOTE:
g o e s off.

indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , the s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead K to the floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
Is DTC 22-8x
indicated?
DTC.B
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt
t e n s i o n e r ; r e p l a c e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e
p a g e 2 4 - 4 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B


unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
13. D i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r l e a d f r o m the floor w i r e
harness.
(cont'd)
24-79


Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Tensioner
" U
/ '/ / /
/ /
/ //
1
12 13 14 15
26 27
u
6 7 8
9 10 11
19
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
21
Is the voltage as
specified?

connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NOTE:
goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC.B
24-80
5. R e m o v e the B-pillar l o w e r trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 2 ) , t h e n

14. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s No.14 a n d
N o . 1 5 , individually. T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or
at least 1 M O .
LT
1
/ '/ / /
12 13 14 15
26 27
07SAZ-TB4011A
//
6
19
8
21
/ /
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 3 9

070AZ-SNAA200
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d K to the floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
Is DTC 22-9x
specified?

the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt
t e n s i o n e r ; r e p l a c e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt ( s e e
p a g e 2 4 - 4 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
13. D i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r lead f r o m t h e floor w i r e
harness.
24-81

Open in the Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
5. D i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r (A)

from the driver's side airbag (B).
Increased Resistance in the Driver's Side

Airbag Inflator
S R S Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
NOTE:
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h the H D S . Ifthe s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d L to the floor w i r e h a r n e s s .

g o e s off.

31
Vindicated?
31-1xor
DTC.B
indicated?
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in the d r i v e r ' s s i d e
a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( s e e
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
13. D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . Do not d i s c o n n e c t t h e s i m u l a t o r lead
f r o m t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r .
24-82
14. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the

black SRS simulator lead (A). There should be less
than 1.0 Q.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
as

Resistance in the Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
. SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
specified?

NO-Open or increased resistance in the floor wire
harness; replace the floor wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
NOTE:
goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC.B

(cont'd)
24-83
SRS (Supplemental
Restraint System)
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)
from the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g (B).
1 0 . T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0).

1 1 . D i s c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
1 2 . D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) f r o m the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
1 3 . D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r from the S R S
f r o m the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r .
1 4 . C o n n e c t the S R S s h o r t c a n c e l l e r s ( 0 7 0 A Z - S A A 0 1 0 0 )
to S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s No.6 a n d No.7
( s e e p a g e 24-28).
1 5 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of the
black S R S s i m u l a t o r lead (A). T h e r e s h o u l d be a n
o p e n circuit or at least 1 MO.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead L to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
7. R e c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e to the battery.
9 . R e a d the D T C ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
Is DTC 31-3x Indicated?

N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g
inflator; replace the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
24-174), t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H
Is the resistance as specified?

unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . H
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s ;
r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H
24-84

Short to Power in the Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
5. D i s c o n n e c t t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r (A)
f r o m t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g (B).

. S R S Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
NOTE:
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator
indicated?
stay on, and is DTC
31-8x
DTC.B
a n d s i m u l a t o r l e a d L to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
7. R e c o n n e c t t h e negative c a b l e to t h e battery.
is DTC 31-8x
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 0 .
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator;
replace the driver's side airbag (see page 24-174),
then clear the D T C . B
(cont'd)
24-85

unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
14. R e c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e to t h e battery.
16. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of t h e
black S R S s i m u l a t o r lead (A) a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 0.2 V .
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
DTC 31 -9x ("x can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Ground in the Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
NOTE:
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n w i t h the H D S . Ifthe s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
g o e s off.

indicated?
DTC.B
Is the voltage as
specified?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
24-86

f r o m the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( B ) .
14. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of t h e
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d (A) a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 M O .
FLOOR WIRE H A R N E S S
2P CONNECTOR
Is DTC 31-9x
indicated?
Is the resistance
as
specified?
c o n n e c t i o n ; i f t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g
inflator; r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
2 4 - 1 7 4 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
1 1 . D i s c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
24-87

Open in the Front Passenger's Side Airbag

Inflator
f r o m t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( B ) .

Side Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 32-1 x or

32-2x indicated?
DTC.B
Is DTC 32- 1x or 32-2x
indicated?
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e t h e front
passenger's side airbag (see page 24-174), then clear
the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
13. D i s c o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r f r o m t h e S R S
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . D o not d i s c o n n e c t the s i m u l a t o r l e a d
24-88
14. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s of the
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d ( A ) . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s
t h a n 1.0 0 .
2P CONNECTOR

Resistance in the Front Passenger's Side
Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Is the resistance
as
specified?

c o n n e c t i o n ; i f t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e floor w i r e
DTC.B
g o e s off.

indicated?
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-89

f r o m t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g (B).
15. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s of t h e
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d (A). T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n
o p e n circuit o r at least 1 M O .
2P CONNECTOR
Is DTC 32-3x
Indicated?
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
s i d e a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
airbag (see page 24-174), then clear the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead
14. C o n n e c t t h e S R S s h o r t c a n c e l l e r ( 0 7 0 A Z - S A A 0 1 0 0 ) to
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 8 a n d N o . 9
( s e e p a g e 24-28).
24-90
specified?
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
c o n n e c t i o n ; if t h e c o n n e c t i o n i s O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ;
r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B

Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Side
Airbag Inflator

f r o m t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g ( B ) .

NOTE:
g o e s off.

indicated?
is DTC 32-8x indicated?

DTC.B
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 0 .
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
airbag (see page 24-174), then clear the D T C . B
(cont'd)
24-91


Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Side

Airbag Inflator
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS

13. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS

simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead
from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
16. Measure the voltage between each terminal of the
black SRS simulator lead (A) and body ground. There
should be less than 0.2 V.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR

. SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
NOTE:
goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC.B
Is the voltage as
specified?

24-92

f r o m the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g (B).
14. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of t h e
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 M O .
2P CONNECTOR
Is DTC 32-9x
indicated?
Is the resistance
as
specified?

unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
24-93

Open in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
5. R e m o v e t h e C-pillar trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n
f r o m t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g c o n n e c t o r ( B ) .

Increased Resistance in the Left Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Before r e p l a c i n g t h e S R S unit, c h e c k the S R S unit
software version with the H D S . Ifthe software version
g o e s off.

33-2x indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, t h e s y s t e m i s O K at this t i m e .
24-33). If a n o t h e r D T C i s i n d i c a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e
DTC.B
24-94
07SAZ-TB4011A
indicated?
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e left s i d e
curtain a i r b a g ; r e p l a c e t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g ( s e e

Resistance in the Left Side Curtain airbag
inflator
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .

No.11 ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 2 8 ) .

black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d (A). T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s
t h a n 1.0 O.
NOTE:
2P CONNECTOR
software v e r s i o n with the H D S . Ifthe software v e r s i o n

g o e s off.

indicated?
Is the resistance
as
specified?

Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at the S R S
unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
DTC.B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e floor w i r e
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-95

5. R e m o v e t h e C-pillar t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n

11. D i s c o n n e c t t h e negative c a b l e f r o m t h e battery, t h e n
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . D o not d i s c o n n e c t t h e s i m u l a t o r l e a d
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s No.10 a n d No.11
( s e e p a g e 24-28).
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d ( A ) . T h e r e s h o u l d be a n
2P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4011A
Is DTC 33-3x
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 0 .
specified?
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n
a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e t h e left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g ( s e e
page 24-176), then clear the D T C . H
c o n n e c t i o n ; if t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . H
24-96
Short to Power in the Left Side Curtain Airbag

Inflator
5. R e m o v e the C-pillar t r i m ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n
f r o m the left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g c o n n e c t o r (B).

NOTE:
070AZ-SNAA300
g o e s off.
* \
07SAZ-TB4011A
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead L to the floor w i r e h a r n e s s .

indicated?

DTC.B

Is DTC 33-8x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g
inflator; r e p l a c e the left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
(cont'd)
24-97

16. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of the
black S R S s i m u l a t o r lead (A) a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
2P CONNECTOR

Short to Ground in the Left Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Is the voltage as
specified?
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-Short to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . H

g o e s off.

indicated?
DTC.B
24-98
5. R e m o v e the C-pillar trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n

d i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2P c o n n e c t o r (A)
14. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of the
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit o r at least 1 M O .
2P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
07SAZ-TB4011A
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit o r poor c o n n e c t i o n at S R S unit

unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
Is DTC 33-9x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the left s i d e curtain a i r b a g
inflator; r e p l a c e t h e left s i d e curtain a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
24-99

Open in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
5. R e m o v e t h e C-pillar trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n
f r o m t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g c o n n e c t o r ( B ) .

Increased Resistance in the Right Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
07SAZ-TB4011A
g o e s off.

34-2x indicated?
a n d s i m u l a t o r lead L to t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s .
is DTC 34-1 x or 34-2x indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m i s O K at t h i s t i m e .
DTC.B
24-100
N O - O p e n o r i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in t h e right s i d e
curtain a i r b a g inflator, r e p l a c e t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n
a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 7 6 ) , t h e n c l e a r t h e DTC.B

Resistance in the Right Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .

No.25 (see page 24-28).

15. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n the t e r m i n a l s of t h e
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d (A). T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s
t h a n 1.0 Q.
NOTE:
G e n e r a l Troubleshooting Information (see page
2P CONNECTOR
p a g e 2 4 - 3 4 ) a n d retest.
g o e s off.

indicated?
Is the resistance
as
specified?
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - O p e n or i n c r e a s e d r e s i s t a n c e in the floor w i r e
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , the s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
DTC.B
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-101


unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
s i m u l a t o r l e a d . D o not d i s c o n n e c t t h e s i m u l a t o r lead
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 4 a n d N o . 2 5
(see page 24-28).
black S R S s i m u l a t o r l e a d (A). T h e r e s h o u l d be a n
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4011A
Is DTC 34-3x
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 1 0 .
specifbd?
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e right s i d e c u r t a i n
a i r b a g inflator; r e p l a c e t h e right s i d e curtain a i r b a g
(see page 24-176), then clear the D T C . B
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
24-102

Short to Power in the Right Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator

NOTE:
07SAZ-TB4011A
g o e s off.

indicated?
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.B
Is DTC 34-8x
indicated?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g
inflator; r e p l a c e the right s i d e curtain a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
(cont'd)
24-103

16. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of the
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR

Short to Ground in the Right Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
NOTE:
Is the voltage as
specified?
c o n n e c t i o n ; if the c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-Short to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e

g o e s off.

indicated?
DTC.B
24-104
5. R e m o v e the C-pillar trim ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 8 6 ) , t h e n

f r o m the right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g c o n n e c t o r (B).
14. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n e a c h t e r m i n a l of the

s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 MQ.
2P CONNECTOR

07SAZ-TB4011A
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
Is DTC 34-9x indicated?

N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the right s i d e curtain a i r b a g
inflator; r e p l a c e the right s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g ( s e e p a g e
12. C o n n e c t the S R S s h o r t c a n c e l l e r ( 0 7 0 A Z - S A A 0 1 0 0 ) to
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 4 a n d N o . 2 5
(see page 24-30).
24-105

DTC 41-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No
Signal From the Left Front Impact Sensor
A (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 6 a n d N o . 3 7 . T h e r e s h o u l d be
a n o p e n circuit or at l e a s t 1 M D .


NOTE:
//
////
4 5
6 7 8
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U

9 10
20
/
///
36 37 38 39
L
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n w a i t for 10
seconds.
Is DTC 41-1x
indicated?
specified?
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e left e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s or d a s h b o a r d w i r e
h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B
DTC.B
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 6 a n d
N o . 3 7 , i n d i v i d u a l l y . T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n o p e n circuit o r
at least 1 MQ.

6. C h e c k the c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A
(39P) a n d the S R S unit, b e t w e e n the left e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the left
front i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 8 ) , a n d at
connector C 2 0 4 (see page 22-36).
Are the connections
OK?
N O - R e p a i r t h e p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C ,
a n d retest.
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
8. D i s c o n n e c t the left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s
2 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m the left front i m p a c t s e n s o r .
specified?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s o r
the left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e t h e
faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
24-106
13. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d S R S
unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 6 a n d N o . 3 7 ,
i n d i v i d u a l l y . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 0.2 V.
l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
//
////
6 7 8
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U
20
9 10
/
///
//
36 37 38 39
L
specified?
6 7 8
20
9 10
36 37 38 39
L
Is the resistance
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U
Is the voltage as
3 4
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y left front i m p a c t s e n s o r o r S R S unit;
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s or t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
r e p l a c e the left front i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 8 ) ,

t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . Ifthe p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t ,
r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 24-188).B
N O - O p e n in left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s ,
or o p e n in d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
15. C o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r ( j u m p e r
DTC.B
c o n n e c t o r ) a n d the black l e a d (A) of s i m u l a t o r l e a d L

to the left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P
connector (B).
070AZ-SNAA300
07SAZ-TB4011A
24-107

DTC 42-1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No
Signal From the Right Front Impact Sensor
a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 MQ.


NOTE:
//
////
4 5
6 7 8
9 10
/ ////
/ // /
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U
20
36 37 38 39
L

2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n w a i t for 10
seconds.
Is DTC 42-1 x
indicated?
DTC.B
specified?
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e right e n g i n e
compartment wire h a r n e s s or d a s h b o a r d w i r e
h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e t h e faulty
h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 8 a n d
N o . 3 9 , i n d i v i d u a l l y . T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n o p e n circuit o r
at least 1 MQ.

6. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A
(39P) a n d the S R S unit, b e t w e e n t h e right e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the right
front i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 8 ) , a n d at
connector C304 (see page 22-42).
Are the connections
ll
//
4 5
6 7 8
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U
20
//
/
/ ///
9 10
36 37 38 39
L
OK?
N O - R e p a i r t h e p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C ,
a n d retest.
specified?
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
8. D i s c o n n e c t the right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e right front i m p a c t
sensor.
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s o r
t h e right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e
the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
24-108
13. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d S R S
unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 8 a n d N o . 3 9 ,
i n d i v i d u a l l y . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 0.2 V.
l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
/
/
/ //
26 27 28 29
U
7 8
16 17 18
31
20
9 10
/
///
//
////
36 37 38 39
L
26 27 28 29
U
Is the voltage as
specified?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
wire h a r n e s s or d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ; replace the
faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
15. C o n n e c t the S R S inflator s i m u l a t o r ( j u m p e r
7 8
9 10
16 17 18
20
31
/ /
/
///
36 37 38 39
L
is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y right front i m p a c t s e n s o r or S R S unit;

r e p l a c e t h e right front i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e
2 4 - 1 9 8 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . Ifthe p r o b l e m is still
p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - O p e n in right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s ,
or o p e n in d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
c o n n e c t o r ) a n d the black lead (A) of s i m u l a t o r l e a d L

to t h e right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P
connector (B).
24-109

DTC 41-2x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx ( V can
be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal Failure of the
Left Front Impact Sensor
DTC 42-2x, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, 42-Bx ("x" can

Right Front Impact Sensor
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,

review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
24-21) and General Troubleshooting Information (see
page 24-31).

page 24-31).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10

seconds.

seconds.
1$ DTC41-2X, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, or 41-Bx
indicated?
Is DTC42-2X, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, or 42-Bx
indicated?
YES-Faulty left front impact sensor; replace the left

front impact sensor (see page 24-198), then clear the
DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-188).B
YES-Faulty right front impact sensor; replace the

right front impact sensor (see page 24-198), then clear
the DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace the SRS
IMO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


DTC.B
DTC.B
24-110

Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor
(second)
(third)
seconds.
Is DTC 48-1 x (except 48-11)
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) ,
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e t h e
left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) , t h e n
clear the D T C . B
seconds.
Is DTC 43-11
indicated?
N O - G o to s t e p 1 3 .
seconds.
Is DTC 46-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 6 3 .
DTC.B
17. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) a n d t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30), a n d b e t w e e n
the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e left s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 24-189).
Are the connections
OK?
N O - R e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-111

3 2 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m t h e battery, t h e n
19. D i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
3 3 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) .
the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first).

2 0 . S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
and recheck.
3 4 . S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
2 1 . R e c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e to t h e battery.
3 5 . R e c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e to t h e battery.
2 2 . C l e a r the D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
2 3 . T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n w a i t for 10

seconds.
seconds.
24. R e a d the D T C (see page 24-32).
Is DTC
(third) a n d r e c h e c k .
43-111ndicated?
Is DTC 43-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 5 .
Y E S - G o to s t e p 3 9 .
N O - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the

N O - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e
2 5 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e n e g a t i v e c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n
24-190).
2 9 . C l e a r the D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 3 2 .
N O - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e
24-112

4 1 . D i s c o n n e c t S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P) f r o m t h e S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
(second) and recheck.
Is DTC 43-11
right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) ,
t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) .
t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e
24-190).
4 4 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P
c o n n e c t o r (left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)) t e r m i n a l s
No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit o r at
least 1 MO.
FLOOR WIRE H A R N E S S 4P CONNECTOR
(Left side impact sensor (first))
specified?
N o . 3 a n d No.4. T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at
l e a s t 1 MO.
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 5 .
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 6 .
N O - S h o r t to a n o t h e r w i r e in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s
b e t w e e n the S R S unit a n d the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(first); r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B
wire h a r n e s s , then clear the D T C . B
b e t w e e n the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d the

right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e the floor
(cont'd)
24-113

46. Measure the resistance between body ground and
floor wire harness 4P connector (left side impact
sensor (first)) terminals No.1 and No.2, individually.
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MQ
47. Measure the resistance between body g r o u n d and

floor wire harness 4P connector (left side impact
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
1 2
,
Is the resistance
as
specified?
3 4
o
I1
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go t o step 47.
YES-Go to step 48.
NO-Short to ground in the floor w i r e harness

between the SRS unit and the left side impact sensor
(first); replace the floor wire harness, then clear the
NO-Short to ground in the floor w i r e harness

between the left side impact sensor (first) and the
right side impact sensor (second); replace the floor
wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
DTC.B
24-114
4 8 . D i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) .
4 9 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n
floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r
s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ) t e r m i n a l s No.3
individually. T h e r e s h o u l d be a n
least 1 MQ.
body ground and

(right s i d e i m p a c t
and No.4,
o p e n circuit or at
5 2 . M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d floor
w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r (left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(first)) t e r m i n a l s No.1 a n d N o . 2 , individually. T h e r e

(Right side impact sensor (second))
Is the voltage as
specified?
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 5 3 .
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n
t h e S R S unit a n d the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first);
r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s
b e t w e e n t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d the
right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e the floor w i r e
5 1 . T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
(cont'd)
24-115

5 3 . M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d floor
(first)) t e r m i n a l s No.3 a n d N o . 4 , i n d i v i d u a l l y . T h e r e
54. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d floor

w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r (right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(second)) terminals No.3 a n d No.4, individually. T h e r e


i a
Is the voltage as
specified?
Is the voltage as
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 5 5 .
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n
t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d the right s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e
t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d t h e right
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e
h a r n e s s , then clear the D T C . B
5 7 . Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) t e r m i n a l N o . 3 6 a n d N o . 3 7 .
If
////
/
// // /
1
12 13 14 15
26 27
u
6 7 8
9 10 11
19
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
I
21
J U M P E R WIRE
24-116
58. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P

No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
60. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P

c o n n e c t o r (right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) )
t e r m i n a l s No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n
1.0 0 .
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 4P CONNECTOR

specified?
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n the S R S
unit a n d the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the
floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
5 9 . Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P
No.1 a n d N o . 2 .
specified?
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n the left
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d the right s i d e i m p a c t
s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n
c l e a r the D T C . H
t e r m i n a l s No.3 a n d No.4.
J U M P E R WIRE
J U M P E R WIRE
(cont'd)
24-117

c o n n e c t o r (right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third)) t e r m i n a l s
No.1 a n d No.2. T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 O.
(Right side impact sensor (third))
6 4 . D i s c o n n e c t the negative c a b l e f r o m the battery, t h e n

the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) .
6 6 . S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)
and recheck.
seconds.
Is DTC 43-11 or 46-11

specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit; r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e

24-188).
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n the right
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d the right s i d e i m p a c t
s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n
6 3 . C h e c k the c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) a n d the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) , a n d b e t w e e n
t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the right s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e 24-190).
Are the connections
OK?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 6 4 .
N O - R e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 7 1 .
N O - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the
24-190).
seconds.
Is DTC 43-11 or 46-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 7 8 .
N O - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
24-118

8 6 . M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d floor
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
(first)) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 4 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s
t h a n 0.2 V.
24-190).
8 1 . D i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 2P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) .
t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 4 . T h e r e s h o u l d be a n o p e n
circuit o r at l e a s t 1 M O .
Is the voltage as
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 8 7 .
t h e S R S unit a n d t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first);
r e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
No.3 and No.4.
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 8 3 .

b e t w e e n t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d t h e
right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e
h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B
t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) .
8 4 . R e c o n n e c t the n e g a t i v e c a b l e to t h e battery.
J U M P E R WIRE
8 5 . T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
(cont'd)
24-119

8 9 . M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P
t e r m i n a l s No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n
1.0 O.
1
1
2
c

(first)
DTC 45-1x ( Y can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No
Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
(second)
Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
(third)
T
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit; r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).B
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n the left
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d t h e right s i d e i m p a c t
s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n
clear the D T C . B
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e
left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 1 ) , t h e n
clear the D T C . B
N O - G o to s t e p 4 .
4 . C l e a r the D T C m e m o r y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 0 ) ,
24-120
seconds.
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the

right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) , t h e n
seconds.
Is DTC 44-11
indicated?

19. D i s c o n n e c t the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 24-189).
20. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(first) a n d r e c h e c k .
seconds.
Is DTC 44-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 2 5 .
N O - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the

seconds.
26. D i s c o n n e c t t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m
the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 0 ) .
2 7 . S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
Is DTC 45-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 6 3 .
DTC.B
17. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) a n d the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) , a n d b e t w e e n
the floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P c o n n e c t o r a n d the right s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 24-189).
Are the connections
OK?
seconds.
3 1 . R e a d the D T C ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 2 ) .
Is DTC 44-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 3 2 .
N O - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 0 ) ,
N O - R e p l a c e the floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-121

the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 1 ) .
3 4 . S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(third) a n d r e c h e c k .
c o n n e c t o r (right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first)) t e r m i n a l s
No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n o p e n circuit o r at
least 1 M O .
(Right side impact sensor (first))
3 7 . T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n w a i t for 10
seconds.
3 8 . R e a d t h e D T C ( s e e p a g e 24-32).
Is DTC 44-11
indicated?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 3 9 .
NO-Faulty left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e
left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 1 ) , t h e n
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) ,
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 5 .
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s
b e t w e e n t h e S R S unit a n d t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r
(first); r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.B
N o . 3 a n d N o . 4 . T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n o p e n circuit o r at
least 1 M O .
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 4 6 .
NO-Short to a n o t h e r w i r e in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s
b e t w e e n t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d t h e
left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e
24-122
4 6 . Measure the resistance between body ground and

floor wire harness 4 P connector (right side impact
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO
48. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2 P connector f r o m

the left side impact sensor (third) (see page 24-191).
floor wire harness 4 P connector (left side impact
(Left side impact sensor (second))
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go to step 47.

N O - S h o r t to ground in the floor wire harness
between the SRS unit and the right side impact sensor
(first); replace the floor wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
floor wire harness 4 P connector (right side impact
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go to step 50.

NO-Short to ground in the floor wire harness
between the left side impact sensor (second) and the
left side impact sensor (third); replace the floor wire
harness, then clear the DTC.B
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go to step 48.

N O - S h o r t to ground in the floor wire harness
between the right side impact sensor (first) and the
left side impact sensor (second); replace the floor wire
(cont'd)
24-123

54. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d floor
(second)) terminals No.3 a n d No.4, individually. T h e r e

f.
1
2 3
c

4
o
00
Is the voltage as
Is the voltage as
specified?
specified?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 5 5 .
Y E S - G o to s t e p 5 3 .
t h e S R S unit a n d the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first);
t h e left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d the left s i d e
r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s ,

5 7 . Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 8 a n d N o . 3 9 .
(Y)(Y)
If
/ //
/
/
///
1
12 13 14 15
26 27
Ll
6 7 8
19
21
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
J U M P E R WIRE
Is the voltage as
specified?
t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d t h e left s i d e
i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e
24-124
58. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P
No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 0 .
60. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P
c o n n e c t o r (left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (second)) t e r m i n a l s
No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s than 1.0 Q.
specified?
specifbd?
Y E S - G o to s t e p 5 9 .
Y E S - G o to s t e p 6 1 .
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n t h e S R S
unit a n d t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e
N O - O p e n in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n t h e right
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d the left s i d e i m p a c t
59. Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n floor w i r e h a r n e s s 4 P

No.3 and No.4.
c o n n e c t o r (left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ) t e r m i n a l s
No.3 a n d No.4.
J U M P E R WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
24-125

62. Measure the resistance between floor wire harness 2P
connector (left side impact sensor (third)) terminals
No.1 and No.2. There should be less than 1.0 Q.
(Left side impact sensor (third))

65. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from
the right side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-189).
66. Substitute a known-good right side impact sensor
(first) and recheck.
seconds.
Is DTC 44-11 or 45-11

Is the resistance
as
specified?

24-188).
NO-Open in the floor wire harness between the left
side impact sensor (second) and the left side impact
sensor (third); replace the floor wire harness, then
clear the DTC.B
63. Check the connections between SRS unit connector B
(39P) and the SRS unit (see page 24-30), and between
the floor wire harness 4P connector and the right side
impact sensor (second) (see page 24-190).
Are the connections
OK?
YES-Go to step 64.

NO-Replace the floor wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
indicated?
YES-Go to step 71.

NO-Faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace the
right side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-189), then
clear the DTC.B
72. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from
the left side impact sensor (second) (see page 24-190).
73. Substitute a known-good left side impact sensor
seconds.
Is DTC 44-11 or 45-11
indicated?
YES-Go to step 78.

NO-Faulty left side impact sensor (second); replace
the left side impact sensor (second) (see page 24-190),
then clear the DTC.B
24-126
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
(first)) t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 4 , individually. T h e r e
the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 1 ) .
N o . 3 a n d N o . 4 . T h e r e s h o u l d b e a n o p e n circuit o r at
least 1 MQ.
I:

XX

Y E S - G o to s t e p 8 7 .
NO-Short to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n
the S R S unit a n d t h e right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first);

Y E S - G o to s t e p 8 3 .
N O - S h o r t in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n t h e left
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) a n d t h e left s i d e i m p a c t
s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s , t h e n
clear the D T C . I
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 9 ) .
No.3 and No.4.
c
\
1
D
8 5 . T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II).
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
24-127

No.1 a n d N o . 2 . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 0 .
DTC 43-2x, 43-8x, 43-9x, 43-Ax, 43-Bx ("x" can

Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
N O T E : Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
review S R S Precautions and Procedures (see page
24-21) a n d G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Information ( s e e
page 24-31).
seconds.
Is DTC 43-2x, 43-8x, 43-9x, 43-Ax, or 43-Bx

Is the resistance
as
specified?
24-188).
N O - O p e n in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n t h e right
s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first) a n d t h e left s i d e i m p a c t
c l e a r t h e DTC.B
24-128
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e t h e
c l e a r t h e D T C . If the D T C is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e t h e
S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
DTC.B
4
DTC 44-2x, 44-8x, 44-9x, 44-Ax, 44-Bx ("x" can
Right Side Impact Sensor (first)
DTC 45-2x, 45-8x, 45-9x, 45-Ax, 45-Bx ("x" can

Left Side Impact Sensor (second)
N O T E : Before d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e ,
page 24-31).
p a g e 24-31).

seconds.
seconds.
Is DTC 44-2x, 44-8x, 44-9x, 44-Ax, or 44-Bx
indicated?
Is DTC 45-2x, 45-8x, 45-9x, or 45-Ax, 45-Bx
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (first); r e p l a c e the

c l e a r the D T C . If the D T C is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the
S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
Y E S - F a u l t y left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ; r e p l a c e
the left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s e c o n d ) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 0 ) ,
t h e n c l e a r the D T C . I f t h e D T C is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e
the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 24-188).B


DTC.B
DTC.B
24-129

DTC 46-2x, 46-8x, 46-9x, 46-Ax, 46-Bx ("x" can
DTC 47-2x, 47-8x, 47-9x, 47-Ax, 47-Bx ("x" can

Right Side Impact Sensor (second)

Left Side Impact Sensor (third)

page 24-31).

page 24-31).

seconds.

seconds.
Is DTC46-2x,
46-8x, 46-9x, 46-Ax, or 46-Bx
indicated?
Is DTC 47-2x, 47-8x, 47-9x, 47-Ax, or 47-Bx
indicated?
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (second); replace

the right side impact sensor (second) (see page
24-190), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-188).B
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (third); replace the

left side impact sensor (third) (see page 24-191), then
clear the DTC. Ifthe DTC is still present, replace the
SRS unit (see page 24-188).B

DTC.B

24-130
DTC.B
DTC 48-2x, 48-8x, 48-9x, 48-Ax, 48-Bx ("x" can

Right Side Impact Sensor (third)
N O T E ; Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
review S R S Precautions a n d Procedures (see page
page 24-31).
seconds.
Is DTC 48-2x, 48-8x, 48-9x, 48-Ax, 48-Bx
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third); r e p l a c e
the right s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (third) ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 2 ) ,
t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . If t h e D T C is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e
the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
DTC.B
DTC B2-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No

Signal From the Rear Safing Sensor
NOTE:
is not t h e latest, update t h e S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e
seconds.
Is DTC B2-1x
indicated?
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-131

6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector B
(39P) and the SRS unit (see page 24-30), between the
floor wire harness 2P connector and the rear safing
sensor (see page 24-193), and at floor wire harness 2P
connector.
Are the connections
10. Measure the resistance between body g r o u n d and

SRS unit connector B (39P) terminals No.26 and
No.27, individually. There should be an open circuit or
at least 1 MO.
OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
If
NO-Replace the floor w i r e harness, then clear the
////
/
/ /
1
DTC.B
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector f r o m
rear safing sensor (see page 24-193).
an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
12 13 14 15
26 27
M l
19
7 8
21
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
U
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go to step 11.

U
1
12 13 14 15
26 27
7 8
9 10 11
/ /
////
19
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Short to another w i r e in the floor wire harness;
replace the floor wire harness, then clear the D T C . B
24-132
NO-Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace



15. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper
connector) and the black lead (A) of simulator lead L
to the floor w i r e harness 2P connector (B).
////
/
/ /
6
12 13 14 15
26 27
J
19
7 8
9 10 11
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
070AZ-SNAA300
07SAZ-TB4011A

YES-Go to step 14.
N O - S h o r t t o power in the floor wire harness; replace
the floor w i r e harness, then clear the DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-133

less than 1.0 Q
////
/ / /
//
6 7 8
12 13 14 15
26 27
J I
19
9 10 11
the Rear Safing Sensor

page 24-31).
23 24 25
21
DTC B2-2x, B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax, B2-Bx ("x"

can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal Failure of
36 37 38 39

seconds.
Is DTC B2-2x, B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax, or B2-Bx
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Faulty rear safing sensor or SRS unit; replace the

rear safing sensor (see page 24-193), then clear the
DTC. If the problem is still present, replace the SRS
NO-Open in the floor wire harness; replace the faulty
harness, then clear the DTC.H
24-134
indicated?
YES-Faulty rear safing sensor; replace the rear safing

sensor (see page 24-193), then clear the DTC. If the
DTC is still present, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-188).
DTC.B
DTC Ex-11 ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Control Operation Recorded
NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting p r o c e d u r e , review
S R S P r e c a u t i o n s a n d P r o c e d u r e s ( s e e p a g e 24-21) a n d
24-31).
DTC Fx-11 ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Airbags And/or Tensioners Deployment
Recorded
NOTE:
software v e r s i o n with the H D S . ifthe software v e r s i o n
24-31).
Refer to the D T C s s h o w n :
- D T C F1 - 1 1 : D r i v e r ' s a i r b a g and/or d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt
tensioner deployed.
a i r b a g and/or d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r d e p l o y e d .
indicated?
24-188).!
DTC.B
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r d e p l o y e d .
- D T C F3-11 D r i v e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g , left s i d e c u r t a i n
seconds.
Is DTC Ex-11
- D T C F2-11 F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g and/or front
- D T C F4-11 Front p a s s e n g e r ' s s i d e a i r b a g , right s i d e

c u r t a i n a i r b a g and/or front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt
tensioner deployed.
- D T C F5-11 Both or o n l y o n e s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g a n d
s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r d e p l o y e d .
- D T C F6-11 Left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g o r right s i d e
curtain airbag deployed.
W h e n a n y a i r b a g o r t e n s i o n e r s h a v e d e p l o y e d , go to
C o m p o n e n t R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n After D e p l o y m e n t
(see page 24-167).
24-135

DTC 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx, 57-xx,
58-xx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal
Failure of the SRS Unit
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check the
battery/system voltage and battery cable connections
(see page 22-93). If the voltage is low, repair the
charging system, test and charge, or replace the
battery before troubleshooting the SRS. If the
battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the customer if
the battery ever went dead or if the engine was started
and run with the battery in a low state of charge. A
dead battery may trigger one or more of these DTCs.
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-21) and
24-31).
seconds.
3. Check that the SRS indicator goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go off?

DTC.B
NO-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page
24-188).B
24-136
DTC 53-FF: SRS Unit Programming Error

NOTE:
This DTC is indicated when a SRS unit update is not
completed properly.
while updating the SRS unit. If you turn the ignition
switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) before you complete
the SRS unit update procedure, the SRS unit can be
damaged.
24-31).
1. Do the SRS unit update procedure (see page 24-34).
Is DTC 53-FF
indicated?
YES-Replace the original SRS unit (see page
24-188).B
NO-Update is complete.B
DTC 56-21,56-31: Lost Communication With

the PCM (PGM-FI system)
9. Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A
DTC 56-22,56-23,56-32, 56-33: Undefined

Data Received From the PCM (PGM-FI system)
NOTE:
//
////

p a g e 2 4 - 3 4 ) , a n d retest.
1. C h e c k for a n y F - C A N a n d B - C A N c o m m u n i c a t i o n
D T C s w i t h the H D S .
Are there any communication
DTCs?
Y E S - G o to t h e a p p r o p r i a t e D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
4 5
6 7 8
16 17 18
26 27 28 29 / 3 1
c
U
9 10
20
/
///
36 37 38 39
L
J U M P E R WIRE

10. D i s c o n n e c t P C M c o n n e c t o r A (49P) f r o m t h e P C M .
( s e e p a g e 11-6)
11. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n P C M c o n n e c t o r A (49P)
t e r m i n a l s No. 4 8 a n d No. 4 9 .
seconds.
ri
Is DTC 56-21, 56-31, 56-22, 56-23, 56-32, or 56-33

indicated?
Li
11
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
A 24
X 25 X 2 6 2 7 28
30 31 3 2 33 34 3 5 36 3 7 3 8 39
29 /
22
40 41

G o to T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Intermittent F a i l u r e s (see p a g e
44 ,
46
48 4 9
CANH
(WHT)
CANL
(RED)
DTC.B
5. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d s e e if the
m a l f u n c t i o n indicator l a m p (MIL) c o m e s o n .
Is there
Does the MIL stay on longer than 30
seconds?
Y E S - G o to t h e M I L C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e
11-225).B
continuity?
c o n n e c t o r A (39P) a n d the S R S unit. C h e c k t h e
If t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).
N O - O p e n in the right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s or the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e t h e
faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . H

unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
24-137

DTC 56-25: Lost Communication With the
NOTE:
p a g e 2 4 - 3 4 ) , a n d retest.
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
9. D i s c o n n e c t g a u g e control m o d u l e c o n n e c t o r (32P)
f r o m t h e g a u g e control m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) .
10. Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A
(39P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 6 a n d N o . 1 7 .
D T C s with the HDS.
DTCs?
2. R e l e a s e the parking b r a k e , turn t h e ignition s w i t c h to
O N (II), a n d s e e i f t h e b r a k e s y s t e m light c o m e s o n for
2 s e c o n d s a n d t h e n g o e s off.
Does the brake system light come on?

N O - F a u l t y g a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e . Do t h e g a u g e
control m o d u l e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c function ( s e e p a g e
22-334).
seconds.
Is DTC 56-25
indicated?
NO-lntermittent f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.B
24-138
//
////
26 27 28 29
3 I
10
/ ////
// /
16 17 18
20
36 3 7 38
J U M P E R WIRE
39
11. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n g a u g e control
m o d u l e c o n n e c t o r (32P) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 9 a n d N o . 3 0 .
T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 0 .
DTC 56-26,56-27: Undefined Data Received

From the Gauge control Module
NOTE:
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR (32P)
01
9 10 1lll2|l3ll4|/1l6
17ll8ll9l20l2ll22|23|24|25M27l28l29l30M32
CAN L
(RED)
H S
L(g)J
CAN H
(WHT)
specified?
24-188).B
N O - O p e n b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A (39P)
t e r m i n a l N o . 1 6 a n d g a u g e control m o d u l e c o n n e c t o r
(32P) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 9 , a n d b e t w e e n S R S unit
c o n n e c t o r A (39P) t e r m i n a l No.17 a n d g a u g e control
m o d u l e c o n n e c t o r (32P) t e r m i n a l N o . 3 0 ; r e p l a c e t h e
faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B
24-31).
Before r e p l a c i n g t h e S R S unit, c h e c k the S R S unit
D T C s with the H D S .
DTCs?
seconds.
Is DTC 56-26 or 56-27
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y g a u g e control m o d u l e . Do t h e g a u g e
control m o d u l e self-diagnostic function ( s e e p a g e
2 2 - 3 3 4 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . If the g a u g e control
m o d u l e fails t h e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c , r e p l a c e t h e g a u g e
control m o d u l e , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . If the D T C is still
p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
DTC.B
24-139

Open in the Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
NOTE:
24-31).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10
seconds.
6. Install a jumper wire between SRS unit connector B

(39P) terminal No.19 and body ground.
If
1
////
///
12 13 14 15
26 27
u
6 7 8
19 A 21
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
u
J U M P E R WIRE
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and

unbuckle the driver's seat belt several times.
Is DTC 61-2x
NO-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit

connection between the connector and the SRS unit.
If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-188).B
Is DTC 61-1x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
DTC.B
24-140
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.

10. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P
connector (A) from the driver's seat belt buckle switch
(see page 24-4).
12. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n d r i v e r s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s c o n n e c t o r (2P) t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be m o r e t h a n 10 V.
14. M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e

h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 O.
D R I V E R S S E A T WIRE H A R N E S S
2P CONNECTOR
D R I V E R S S E A T WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
YEL
Is the voltage as
specified?
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s or d r i v e r ' s s e a t
w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r
the D T C . B
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt buckle s w i t c h ; r e p l a c e

the d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt buckle a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 4 ) ,
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s o r d r i v e r ' s s e a t
w i r e h a r n e s s ; c h e c k for a poor g r o u n d at G 5 0 3 . I f t h e
g r o u n d is O K , r e p l a c e the faulty h a r n e s s . B
24-141

Short in the Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
N O T E : Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
p a g e 24-31).

Open in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Buckle Switch
NOTE:
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, r e v i e w
S R S Precautions a n d P r o c e d u r e s (see page 24-21) a n d

24-31).
2. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for 10

seconds.
3. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n b u c k l e a n d
u n b u c k l e t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt s e v e r a l t i m e s .
Is DTC 61-2x
indicated?

p a g e 2 4 - 3 4 ) a n d retest.
seconds.
3. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), t h e n b u c k l e a n d
u n b u c k l e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt s e v e r a l
times.
DTC.B
Is DTC 62-1 x
6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P
c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt b u c k l e

switch.
indicated?
DTC.B
Is DTC 61-2x
indicated?
Y E S - S h o r t to g r o u n d in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s o r
d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e t h e faulty h a r n e s s ,
N O - F a u l t y d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt b u c k l e s w i t c h ; r e p l a c e the
d r i v e r ' s s e a t belt b u c k l e a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 4 ) ,
24-142
6. Install a j u m p e r w i r e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
12. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t
(39P) t e r m i n a l No.21 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
w i r e h a r n e s s c o n n e c t o r (2P) t e r m i n a l No. 2 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be m o r e t h a n 10 V.
If
////
15 / /
26 27
/// /
J
12 13
14
19
21
FRONT P A S S E N G E R ' S S E A T WIRE

H A R N E S S 2P CONNECTOR
9 10 11
2 3 24 2 5
36 37 3 8 39
u
ORN
J U M P E R WIRE

Is the voltage as
Is DTC 62-2x
specified?
indicated?
N O - F a u l t y S R S unit or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at S R S unit
N O - O p e n in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s or front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty
24-188).!
9. R e m o v e the j u m p e r w i r e .
10. D i s c o n n e c t the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 2P
c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt
buckle switch (see page 24-4).
(cont'd)
24-143

14. Measure the resistance between front passenger's

seat wire harness 2P connectorterminal No.1 and
body ground. There should be less than 1.0 O.
Short in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Buckle Switch

HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR

page 24-31).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10
seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and
unbuckle the front passenger' seat belt several times.
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Faulty front passenger's seat belt buckle switch;

replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-4), then clear the DTC.B
NO-Open in the floor w i r e harness or front
passenger's seat wire harness; check for a poor
ground at G502. I f t h e g r o u n d is OK, replace the faulty

Is DTC 62-2x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
DTC.B
6. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness 2P
connector (A) f r o m the front passenger's seat belt
buckle switch (see page 24-4).

Is DTC 62-2x
indicated?
YES-Short to g r o u n d in the floor wire harness or front

passenger's seat wire harness; replace the faulty
NO-Faulty front passenger's seat belt buckle switch;
replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-4), then clear the DTC.B
24-144
be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Open in the Driver's Seat Position Sensor
DTC 71-1x ("x" can

seconds.
8. R e m o v e t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 4 2 ) .
NOTE:
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n with t h e H D S . If t h e s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
9. R e m o v e t h e recline c o v e r ( s e e p a g e 20-145).
10. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P
c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r (A)
( s e e p a g e 24-199).
Power seat
seconds.
Is DTC 71-1x
indicated?
DTC.B
4. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 2 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e d r i v e r ' s s e a t position
sensor (see page 24-199), a n d the ground connection
at G 5 0 2 ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 8 ) .
Are the connections OK?

NO-Repair the poor connections a n d r e t e s t . B
Is DTC 71-1x
indicated?
G o t o T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Intermittent F a i l u r e s ( s e e p a g e
DTC.B
(cont'd)
24-145

11. Install a j u m p e r w i r e between driver's seat wire
harness 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.

Short in the Driver's Seat Position Sensor
NOTE:
DRIVER'S S E A T WIRE H A R N E S S 2P CONNECTOR

J U M P E R WIRE

B (39P) terminal No23 and body ground. There should
be less than 1.0 0 .
////
12 13 14 15
26 27
lr
6
19
7 8
21
//
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
L
Is the resistance
as
specified?
YES-Faulty driver's seat position sensor or SRS unit;

replace the driver's seat position sensor (see page
24-199), then clear the DTC. If the problem is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-Open in the floor wire harness or the driver's seat
wire harness; check for a poor ground at G502. if the
ground is OK, replace the faulty
harness, then clear the DTC.H
24-146

seconds.
Is DTC 71-2x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.H
4. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for 10

seconds.
5. R e m o v e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t a s s e m b l y ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 4 2 ) .
6. R e m o v e the r e c l i n e c o v e r ( s e e p a g e 2 0 - 1 4 5 ) .
7. D i s c o n n e c t the d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 2 P
c o n n e c t o r f r o m the d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r (A)
(see page 24-199).
Power seat

seconds.
Is DTC 71 -2x
indicated?
N O - F a u l t y d r i v e r ' s s e a t p o s i t i o n s e n s o r ; r e p l a c e the
d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 9 ) , t h e n
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
B (39P) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 3 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e
s h o u l d be a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 M O.
Manual seat
Is the resistance
as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r or S R S unit;

r e p l a c e the d r i v e r ' s s e a t position s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e
2 4 - 1 9 9 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . Ifthe p r o b l e m is still
p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d in the floor w i r e h a r n e s s or t h e
d r i v e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty
24-147

DTC 81-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F),
81-63,81-64: Internal the Failure of the ODS
Unit
review S R S Precautions a n d Procedures (see page
p a g e 24-31).
g o e s off.

or 81-64 indicated?.
81-4x,81-63,
DTC.B
DTC 81-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit

DTC 81-62 Incorrect Data From the ODS Unit
NOTE:
g o e s off.
Is DTC 81-61 or 81-62
indicated?
3. D o t h e O D S unit initialization ( s e e p a g e 24-35).

g o e s off.

Does the SRS indicator go off ?

5. R e p l a c e t h e O D S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 7 ) , t h e n c l e a r t h e
DTC.
g o e s off.

N O - R e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
DTC.B
4. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s
s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e O D S unit.
Is the connection OK?

N O - R e p a i r t h e poor c o n n e c t i o n a n d retest. If D T C
81-61 o r 81-62 is still p r e s e n t , g o to s t e p 5.
6. C h e c k t h e N o . 9 (7.5 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

N O - R e p l a c e t h e f u s e , t h e n turn t h e ignition s w i t c h to
O N (II). If t h e f u s e b l o w s a g a i n , c h e c k for a s h o r t in t h e
No. 9 (7.5 A ) f u s e circuit (right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s , floor w i r e h a r n e s s , o r front p a s s e n g e r ' s
seat wire harness).B
24-148
7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s
18P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e O D S unit ( B ) .
11. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s

s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 1 2 a n d
b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 Q.
z
zz
zz_
12
/ 14 z 16 z z
1
Is the resistance
as
specified?
9. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t

w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d be battery v o l t a g e .
N O - O p e n in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s o r front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s , or p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at
t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r
a n d O D S unit. C h e c k the g r o u n d c o n n e c t i o n at G 5 0 2 .
C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n ; i f t h e c o n n e c t i o n is O K , r e p l a c e
t h e faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the DTC.B
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S S E A T WIRE
RED
z
zz
12 z
1
7\
/
14
/
3
z
zz^
16 z z
5
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
4
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - O p e n in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s or front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s or right e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty
(cont'd)
24-149
S R S (Supplemental Restraint S y s t e m )
D T C
1 4 . M e a s u r e the r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r
B (39P) t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d
b e a n o p e n circuit or at least 1 M O .
1 7 . M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r
B (39P) t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t
w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 7 . T h e r e
s h o u l d be l e s s t h a n 1.0 O.

HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
GRN
I
7*\
1
3
5
If
6 7 8 9 10 11
1
12 13 14 15
26 27
J.
/
//
19
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
12
I.
142J6
_L
If
specified?
1
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
( 3 9 P ) t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No.7 (right e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s , floor w i r e h a r n e s s , or
front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ) ; r e p l a c e t h e
faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . I
1 6 . M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
( 3 9 P ) t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d
be l e s s t h a n 0.2V.
If
////
12 13 14 15
26 27
u
6 7 8 9 10 11
19
21
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
U
Is the voltage as
specified?
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in t h e floor w i r e h a r n e s s or front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ; r e p l a c e the faulty
h a r n e s s , then clear the D T C . H
24-150
////
12 13 14 15
26 27
J
7 8
/
///
19
21
9 10 11
23 24 25
36 37 38 39
u

specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y O D S unit or S R S unit; r e p l a c e t h e O D S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 9 7 ) , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . If the
p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e
p a g e 24-188).
N O - O p e n in t h e w i r e h a r n e s s b e t w e e n S R S unit
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) t e r m i n a l No.1 a n d front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l
No.7 (floor w i r e h a r n e s s , or front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t
w i r e h a r n e s s ) ; r e p l a c e t h e faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r
the D T C . I
DTC 81-71,81-78: ODS Unit Not Calibrated

N O T E : B e f o r e d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e ,
p a g e 24-31).
seconds.
Is DTC 81-71 or 81-78
indicated?
DTC.B
4. Do t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r initialization
( s e e p a g e 24-35).
seconds.
seconds.
Is 81-71 or 81-78 DTC
indicated?
Y E S - F a u l t y O D S unit, r e p l a c e t h e O D S unit ( s e e p a g e
2 4 - 1 9 7 ) , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . If the D T C is still p r e s e n t ,
r e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
DTC.B
DTC 81-79: Front Passenger's Weight Sensors

Initial Check Failure
p a g e 24-31).
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 81-79

indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.
4. M a k e s u r e nothing is o n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t .
g o e s off.

YES-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.B
N O - L o o s e n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t m o u n t i n g bolts
(see p a g e 2 0 - 1 4 2 ) , a n d s h a k e t h e s e a t in all d i r e c t i o n s .
T i g h t e n t h e s e a t m o u n t i n g bolts to t h e s p e c i f i e d
t o r q u e , t h e n d o t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e n s o r
initialization ( s e e p a g e 24-35). If t h e p r o b l e m is still
p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s w e i g h t s e a t
s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 24-194), t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C , a n d if
the p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the O D S unit ( s e e
24-151

Signal From the Inner Side Front Passenger's
Weight Sensor

Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's
Weight Sensor

page 24-31).

page 24-31).
1. Check the front passenger's weight sensor

connectors for loose or poor connections.
1. Check the front passenger's weight sensor

connectors for loose or poor connections.

goes off.

goes off.
Is DTC 82-1 x indicated?
Is DTC 83-2x
YES-Replace the inner side front passenger's weight

sensor (see page 24-194), then clear the DTC.B
YES-Replace the outer side front passenger's weight

sensor (see page 24-194), then clear the DTC.B


DTC.B
DTC.B
24-152
indicated?
DTC 85-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F),

85-63,85-64: Internal Failure of the ODS Unit
page 24-31).
goes off.

DTC 85-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit

DTC 85-62: Incorrect Data From the ODS Unit
24-21), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
goes off.
Is DTC 85-61 or 85-62
indicated?
DTC.B
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 3.

DTC.B
3. Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-35).

goes off.

NO-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-197), then
clear the DTC, and retest. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-188).

fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the
No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (right engine compartment
wire harness, floor wire harness, or front passenger's
seat wire harness).B
(cont'd)
24-153

6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s
18P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e O D S unit ( B ) .
10. M e a s u r e t h e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s

s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 12 a n d
b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d b e l e s s t h a n 1.0 O
7 3/ 5/
7 7
VV
12 7 14
/ 16 /
1
BLK

Is the resistance
as
specified?
8. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t
N O - O p e n b e t w e e n front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 12 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d ( G 5 0 2 ) o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n at G 5 0 2 ( s e e p a g e
22-48).
w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y
g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d b e battery v o l t a g e .

RED
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 0 ) .
12
14
16

Is there battery
voltage?
N O - O p e n b e t w e e n t h e N o . 9 (7.5 A ) f u s e in t h e
d r i v e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x a n d t h e front
p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l
No. 1 (right e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s , floor
w i r e h a r n e s s , o r front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ) ;
r e p l a c e t h e faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
24-154

B (39P) t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d
B (39P) t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7. T h e r e s h o u l d
be a n o p e n circuit o r at least 1 MO.
be l e s s t h a n 1.0 O.
FRONT P A S S E N G E R S S E A T WIRE
/ ///
7/ /
12 13 14 15
26 27
If
6
19
8
21
//
GRN
9 10 11
1 / 3
77
23 24 25
12
36 37 38 39
ZZ_
2_14/16Z
J
Is the resistance
as
specified?
N O - S h o r t to g r o u n d b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B
(39P) t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7 (floor w i r e
h a r n e s s , or front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ) ;
777/
12 13 14 15
26 27
J
If
6
7 8
19
21
7/
9 10 11
24 25
736 23
37 38 39

Is the resistance
as
specified?
r e p l a c e the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . B

N O - O p e n b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r B (39P)
t e r m i n a l No. 1 a n d front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e
h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l No. 7 ( f l o o r w i r e
h a r n e s s , or front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t w i r e h a r n e s s ) ;
r e p l a c e the faulty h a r n e s s , t h e n c l e a r t h e D T C . B
(cont'd)
24-155

17. Measure the voltage between SRS unit connector B
(39P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. There should
be 0.2 V.
DTC 85-71,85-78: ODS Unit Not Initialized

page 24-31).
2. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), then wait for 10
seconds.

YES-Go t o step 4.

YES-Go t o step 18.
NO-Short t o power between SRS unit connector B
(39P) terminal No. 1 and front passenger's seat wire
harness 18Pconnectorterminal No. 7 (floor wire
harness, or front passenger's seat w i r e harness);
replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.H

DTC.B
5. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), then w a i t for 10
seconds.
6. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II), then wait for 10
seconds.
18. Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-197).

Is the DTC 85-61 or 85-62 indicated?

YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-lf another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.
If no DTCs are present, the system is OK at this t i m e . !
24-156
YES-Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page

24-197), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-lf another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.
If no DTCs are present, the system is OK at this t i m e . H
DTC 85-79: OPDS Sensor Initial Check Failure

N O T E : B e f o r e d o i n g this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p r o c e d u r e ,

Faulty OPDS Seat-Back Sensor
page 24-31).

Faulty OPDS Seat Support Sensor
2. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (ll), a n d c h e c k that the
g o e s off.

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.B
4. M a k e s u r e nothing is on the front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t .

p a g e 24-31).
indicated?
DTC.B
3. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n at t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t
w i r e h a r n e s s 18P c o n n e c t o r (A) a n d s e n s o r
connectors (B).
g o e s off.

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the s y s t e m is O K at this t i m e .
DTC.B
8. Do t h e O D S unit initialization ( s e e p a g e 24-35).
g o e s off.
Are the connections
OK?
Y E S - T h e s y s t e m is O K . B
N O - R e p a i r the poor c o n n e c t i o n , c l e a r t h e D T C a n d
N O - F a u l t y O D S unit; r e p l a c e the O D S unit ( s e e p a g e
retest. B
2 4 - 1 9 7 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C , a n d retest. Ifthe D T C is

still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the s e a t - b a c k cover/pad w h i c h
equipped O P D S s e n s o r (see page 20-153), then clear
the D T C . B
(cont'd)
24-157

4. Replace the seat-back cover/pad which equipped
OPDS sensor (see page 20-153), and do the ODS unit
initialization (see page 24-35).
indicated?
YES-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-197), then

clear the DTC. If the problem is still present, replace
the SRS unit (see page 24-188).
NO-The system is OKM

Short to Power in the Passenger's Airbag
Cutoff Indicator
NOTE:
seconds.
Is DTC 92-1 x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
DTC.B
5. Disconnect the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 4P
connector.
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS
24-158
10. M e a s u r e the v o l t a g e b e t w e e n S R S unit c o n n e c t o r A

(39P) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 0 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . T h e r e s h o u l d

Open or Short to Ground in the Passenger's
Airbag Cutoff Indicator
NOTE:
S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (39P)
u/ /
3
////
26 27 28 29
J
7 8
16 17 18
31
20
/
/
///
9 10
//
36 37 38 39
L
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the voltage as
specified?
Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit or p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff

seconds.
indicator; r e p l a c e t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff
Is DTC 92-2x
i n d i c a t o r ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 2 0 1 ) , t h e n c l e a r the D T C . If the
p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e
indicated?
page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
N O - S h o r t to p o w e r in the d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ;
DTC.B
DTC.B
5. D i s c o n n e c t the p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g cutoff indicator 4 P
connector.
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
(cont'd)
24-159

A (39P) terminal No.20 and passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator 4P connector terminal No.4. There should be
less than 1.0 O.

A (39P) terminal No.20 and body ground. There
should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.

JZ
ll
/ / 3
////
26 27 28 29
9 10
/ 20
/// /
16 17 18
31
36 37 38 39
L
BLU
1 2
Is the resistance
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR 4P CONNECTOR
specified?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
24-160
as
specified?
YES-Faulty SRS unit or passenger's airbag cutoff

indicator; replace the passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator (see page 24-201), then clear the DTC. If the
problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see
page 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) .
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness;
replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
DTC A1-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Faulty Power Supply (VA line)
NOTE:

8. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) f r o m the SRS
11. Measure the voltage between SRS unit connector A
(39P) terminal No.26 and body g r o u n d . There should
be battery voltage.

seconds.
Is DTCA1-1x
indicated?
// 3
////
/
/// ///
/ / / V 36 37 38 39 L
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
Jl
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
Is the voltage as
specified?

connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
dashboard wire harness, then clear the D T C . B

ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short to
ground in the dashboard wire harness or in the
under-dash fuse/relay box No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse circuit;
replace the dashboard wire harness. If the problem is
still present, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90).B
24-161

Faulty Power Supply (VB line)
NOTE:
software version w i t h the HDS. I f t h e software version

8. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) f r o m the SRS
11. Measure the voltage between SRS unit connector A
(39P) terminal No.27 and body g r o u n d . There should
be battery voltage.
S R S UNIT CONNECTOR A

seconds.
ll
//

Is DTC A2-1x
indicated?
(39P)
3 4 5 6 7 8
16 17 18
31
26 27 28 29
U
/
////
9 10
36 37 38 39
L
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
ON (II). Ifthe fuse blows again, check for a short to
ground in the dashboard w i r e harness or in the
under-dash fuse/relay box No. 11 (10A) fuse circuit;
replace the dashboard w i r e harness. Ifthe problem is
still present, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90).B
24-162
Is the voltage as
specified?

connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. I f t h e connection is OK, replace the SRS
NO-Open in the dashboard w i r e harness; replace the
dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

SRS Unit Connector A Not Properly Installed

SRS Unit Connector B Not Properly Installed
NOTE:
NOTE:


is not the latest, update t h e S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e

seconds.

seconds.
Is DTC A3-1x
indicated?
Is DTC A4-1x
indicated?


DTC.B
DTC.B
4. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e S R S unit
c o n n e c t o r A (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit.
4. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n t h e S R S unit
c o n n e c t o r B (39P) a n d t h e S R S unit.
NO-Repair the poor connection, clear the D T C , a n d

retest.
N O - R e p a i r t h e poor c o n n e c t i o n , c l e a r t h e D T C , a n d
retest.
6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e negative c a b l e from t h e battery, t h e n

unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
unit ( s e e p a g e 24-30).
8. C h e c k for bent o r d a m a g e d t e r m i n a l s o n t h e S R S unit.
8. C h e c k for bent or d a m a g e d t e r m i n a l s o n t h e S R S unit.
Are any terminals bent or damaged?
Are any terminals bent or damaged?
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e S R S unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
NO-Replace the dashboard wire h a r n e s s , then clear
N O - R e p l a c e the dashboard wire h a r n e s s , then clear
the D T C . B
the D T C . B
24-163

SRS indicator does not come on
Before r e p l a c i n g the S R S u n i t c h e c k the S R S unit
s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n with the H D S . Ifthe s o f t w a r e v e r s i o n is
not the l a t e s t update the S R S unit s o f t w a r e ( s e e p a g e
24-34) a n d retest.
1. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for
10 s e c o n d s .
g o e s off.
Does the SRS indicator come
on?

time.B
3. C o n n e c t the H D S to the data link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( s e e
p a g e 24-31).
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are

stored, or cannot be read
c h e c k the battery is sufficiently c h a r g e d ( s e e p a g e
22-93).If the battery v o l t a g e is l o w , S R S indicator s t a y s
on.
1. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d s e e if the
m a l f u n c t i o n indicator l a m p (MIL) s t a y s o n .
Does the MIL stay on longer than 30
Y E S - G o to the M I L Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e
11-225).B
2. C o n n e c t the H D S to the d a t a link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( s e e
p a g e 24-31).
3. M a k e s u r e the H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s with the v e h i c l e
Are any SRS DTCs
5. Do the g a u g e control m o d u l e s e l f d i a g n o s t i c function

( s e e p a g e 22-334).
on?
YES-Faulty S R S unit; r e p l a c e the S R S unit (see p a g e

24-188). B
N O - F a u l t y g a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e ; r e p l a c e the g a u g e
control m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) . B
seconds?
indicated?
Y E S - D o the S R S D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
5. S e l e c t B o d y Electrical s t a t u s w i t h t h e H D S .
6. C h e c k for D T C s in the G a u g e M e n u w i t h the H D S .
Is DTC U0151
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the D T C U0151 t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( s e e p a g e
22-349).B
7. Do the g a u g e control m o d u l e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c function
( s e e p a g e 22-334).
on?
YES-Faulty S R S unit; r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e

24-188).B
N O - F a u l t y g a u g e control m o d u l e ; r e p l a c e the g a u g e
control m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e 22-359).B
24-164
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on

1. M a k e s u r e nothing is o n t h e front p a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t .
Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come on

NOTE:
If t h e S R S indicator a l s o s t a y s o n , go to S R S indicator
2. M a k e s u r e t h e s e a t - b a c k is d r y .
s t a y s o n , but no D T C s a r e s t o r e d ( s e e p a g e 24-31).
3. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to O N (II), a n d s e e if the S R S
indicator c o m e s o n .
Does the SRS indicator come on and stay on?
Y E S - G o to t h e S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g " S R S
indicator s t a y o n , but no D T C s a r e s t o r e d " . B
1. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t for 10
seconds.
4. C o n n e c t t h e H D S to the data link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( s e e
s i d e a i r b a g cutoff indicator c o m e s o n for a b o u t 6

s e c o n d s a n d t h e n g o e s off.
page 24-31).
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?

YES-lntermittent failure, t h e s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
6. S e l e c t B o d y E l e c t r i c a l w i t h t h e H D S .
24-33).B
7. C h e c k for D T C s in t h e G a u g e M e n u w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC U0151
3. C o n n e c t the H D S to the data link c o n n e c t o r ( D L C ) ( s e e
indicated?
Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t D T C U0151 ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 3 4 9 J . B
4. M a k e s u r e the H D S c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h t h e v e h i c l e
8. D o t h e g a u g e control m o d u l e s e l f d i a g n o s t i c function
(see page 22-334).
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator
p a g e 24-31).

5. Do t h e g a u g e control m o d u l e self d i a g n o s t i c function
flash?
Y E S - D o t h e O D S unit initialization ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 3 5 ) . If
t h e p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e t h e s e a t - b a c k
cover/pad w h i c h e q u i p p e d O P D S s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e
2 0 - 1 5 3 ) . If the p r o b l e m is still p r e s e n t , r e p l a c e the S R S
unit ( s e e p a g e 2 4 - 1 8 8 ) . B
N O - F a u l t y g a u g e control m o d u l e ; r e p l a c e t h e g a u g e
( s e e p a g e 22-334).
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?

Y E S - F a u l t y S R S unit; r e p l a c e the S R S unit ( s e e p a g e
24-188).B
N O - F a u l t y g a u g e control m o d u l e ; r e p l a c e t h e g a u g e
control m o d u l e ( s e e p a g e 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) . B
control module (see page 2 2 - 3 5 9 ) . B
24-165

Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stays on
or comes on suddenly
NOTE: Under the following conditions, the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator stays on or comes on suddenly.
When no one is sitting the front passenger's seat, but
there is an object on the seat more than 11 lbs (5 kg).
The seat belt is buckled, but no one is sitting on the
front passenger's seat.
Someone w h o is less than about 65 lbs (30 kg) is
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
1. Check for these items, then recheck the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator.
The front passenger's seat is installed correctly.
Nothing is/was on the front passenger's seat.
Nothing is/was under the front passenger's seat.
Nothing is/was in the front passenger's seat-back
pocket.
Whoever was sitting on the front passenger's seat
was sitting in the proper sitting position.
The front passenger's weight sensors may not
measure the correct weight of the front passenger.
If the passenger is more than 65lbs (30 kg) but is
supporting some of their body weight with their
feet on the floor, or w i t h their hands and arms on an
arm rest, the actual weight of the passenger is not
measured.
Does the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator stay on?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e .
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see
page 24-31).
24-166

and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate,
5. Select the INSPECTION menu on the HDS, then select
AFTER REPLACING FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
COMPONENT(S), and f o l l o w the prompts.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.B
6. Select the INSPECTION menu on the HDS, then select
AFTER A VEHICLE COLLISION, and f o l l o w the
prompts.

24-188). If the problem is still present, replace the ODS
unit (see page 24-197), and then if the problem is still
present, replace the front passenger's weight sensors
(see page 24-194).B
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.B
Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment

NOTE:
Before d o i n g a n y S R S r e p a i r s , c h e c k the D T C s ( s e e
p a g e 2 4 - 3 1 ) , for the l e s s o b v i o u s d e p l o y e d parts (seat
belt t e n s i o n e r s , front i m p a c t s e n s o r s , s i d e a i r b a g
s e n s o r s , etc.)
Do not r e p l a c e t h e O D S unit u n l e s s it is p h y s i c a l l y
d a m a g e d or a s p e c i f i c fault w a s f o u n d d u r i n g D T C
troubleshooting.
After a v e h i c l e c o l l i s i o n , d o the O D S unit o p e r a t i o n
c h e c k ( s e e p a g e 24-37).
After a v e h i c l e c o l l i s i o n , i n s p e c t the front s e a t active
head restrains (see page 20-141).
After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e the s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r s d e p l o y e d ,
replace these items:
S R S unit
S e a t belt t e n s i o n e r s
Front impact s e n s o r s
After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e the front a i r b a g ( s ) d e p l o y e d ,
S R S unit
Deployed airbag(s)
Front i m p a c t s e n s o r s
After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e the s i d e a i r b a g ( s ) d e p l o y e d ,
After a c o l l i s i o n w h e r e a s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g h a s
d e p l o y e d , r e p l a c e the i t e m s for t h e s i d e ( s ) that d e p l o y e d :
S R S unit
D e p l o y e d s i d e curtain a i r b a g ( s )
S e a t belt t e n s i o n e r ( s ) for t h e s i d e ( s ) that d e p l o y e d
S i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s ) (first)
Side impact sensor(s) (second)
S i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s ) (third)
Rear safing s e n s o r
Roof trim
A-pillar trim
B-pillar u p p e r trim
C-pillar trim
U p p e r q u a r t e r w i n d o w trim
D-pillar trim
Front g r a b h a n d l e
Rear grab handle
All related t r i m c l i p s
Sunvisor
After a m o d e r a t e to s e v e r e s i d e or rear c o l l i s i o n , i n s p e c t
for a n y d a m a g e on the s i d e curtain a i r b a g or o t h e r
related c o m p o n e n t s . R e p l a c e the c o m p o n e n t s a s
needed.
A-Pillar Trim
S R S unit
S i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s ) (first)
Side impact sensor(s) (second)
S i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( s ) (third)
R e a r safing s e n s o r
B-pillar l o w e r trim
Front s e a t a s s e m b l y (Impact s i d e )
(cont'd)
24-167
24-168
D-Pillar T r i m
Checking and Adjusting the Headliner/Pillar

Trim Overlap
T o p r e v e n t the s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g f r o m d e p l o y i n g a n d
d a m a g i n g the pillar t r i m , the o v e r l a p b e t w e e n the
h e a d l i n e r a n d pillar trim m u s t be l e s s t h a n 8 m m (0.3 in).
T o c h e c k the o v e r l a p , do t h i s :
1. Install the h e a d l i n e r (A) a n d t h e pillar t r i m ( B ) .
During the repair p r o c e s s , inspect these areas:

I n s p e c t all the S R S w i r e h a r n e s s e s . R e p l a c e , do not
repair, a n y d a m a g e d h a r n e s s e s .
I n s p e c t the c a b l e reel for heat d a m a g e . If t h e r e is a n y
d a m a g e , r e p l a c e the c a b l e reel.
T h i s illustration s h o w s the A - p i l l a r .
2. A p p l y m a s k i n g t a p e to the h e a d l i n e r , m a r k t h e u p p e r
e d g e of e a c h pillar t r i m .
After t h e v e h i c l e is c o m p l e t e l y r e p a i r e d , turn the ignition

s w i t c h to O N (II). Ifthe S R S indicator c o m e s o n for a b o u t
6 s e c o n d s a n d t h e n g o e s off, t h e S R S is O K . Ifthe
i n d i c a t o r d o e s not function p r o p e r l y , u s e the H D S S R S
M e n u M e t h o d to r e a d the D T C s ( s e e p a g e 24-31). If y o u
c a n n o t retrieve a c o d e , d o the S R S S y m p t o m
Troubleshooting.
T h i s illustration s h o w s t h e A - p i l l a r .
(cont'd)
24-169

Component Replacement/Inspection
After Deployment (cont'd)
Driver's Airbag Replacement
3. Remove the pillar t r i m , and measure the headliner

overlap.
Removal
If the overlap is less than 8 m m (0.3 in), remove the

tape, and install the pillar t r i m .
If the overlap is more than 8 m m (0.3 in), go to step
4.

starting work.
2. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the steering w h e e l ,
then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B)
f r o m the cable reel 4P connector.
This illustration shows the A-pillar.

4. Carefully t r i m the headliner w i t h a utility knife,
reducing the overlap to less than 8 m m (0.3 in).
3. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the t w o TORX bolts (A).
B
This illustration shows the A-pillar.

5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar t r i m .
4. Remove the driver's airbag (B).
24-170

Replacement
Installation
Removal
1. Place the driver's airbag (A) in the steering w h e e l , and

secure it with new TORX bolts (B).
NOTE: I f t h e front passenger's airbag has been

deployed, refer to the install for after a collision where
the front passenger's airbag deployed.
starting work.
20-125).
3. Remove the passenger's tray (see page 20-126), then

remove the connector clip. Disconnect the front
passenger's airbag 4 P connector (A) f r o m the
dashboard wire harness (B).
A
2. Connect the driver's airbag 4 P connector (A) to the

cable reel 4 P connector, then install the access panel
(B) on the steering wheel.

page 22-94).
4. Connect the HDS, and clear the DTCs (see page
24-32).
5. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system

operation:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator
should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
properly.
properly.
(cont'd)
24-171

Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and m o u n t i n g bolts
( B ) f r o m the bracket (C).
6. Release the hooks (A) of the hook plate (B) f r o m the

front passenger's airbag housing (C) of the dashboard
panel, then remove the hook plate.
5. Remove the mounting nuts (A) of the hook plate (B)

f r o m the front passenger's airbag (C).
7. Remove the front passenger's airbag (A) f r o m the

front passenger's airbag housing (B) of the dashboard
panel.
24-172
3. Install the hook plate (A) w i t h new mounting nuts (B).
Installation
1. Install the hooks of the front passenger's airbag (A)
into the front passenger's airbag housing (B) of the
dashboard panel.
4. Install the support bracket (A) w i t h new m o u n t i n g

bolts (B) and new m o u n t i n g nuts (C).
A
2. Insert the hooks (A) of the hook plate (B) into the front
passenger's airbag housing (C) of the dashboard
panel.
B
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
24-173

Side Airbag Replacement
5. Connect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A)

to the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (B), then
install the connector clip. Reinstall the passenger's
dashboard t r i m , (see page 20-125)
Removal
starting work.
2. Remove the front seat assembly (see page 20-142).
3. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153).
4. Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the hole
(B) in the reinforcing cloth of the seat-back cover (C),
then remove the side airbag (D).

page 22-94).
24-32).
8. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
24-174
Installation
NOTE:
If the side airbag lid is secured w i t h tape, remove the
tape.
Do not open the lid on the side airbag cover.
Make sure that the seat-back cover/pad is installed
properly. Improper installation may prevent proper
deployment.
Be sure to install the wire harness so that they are not
pinched or interfering w i t h other parts.
1. Install the side airbag harness (A) into the reinforcing
cloth hole (B) of the seat-back cover/pad (C).
2. Place the side airbag (D) into the reinforcing cloth of

the seat-back cover/pad.
3. Install the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153).
4. Install the front seat assembly (see page 20-142), then
connect the floor wire harness 2P connector.
5. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their
full ranges of m o v e m e n t , making sure the harness
wires are not pinched or interfering w i t h other parts.
page 22-94).
24-32).
8. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system
then go off.
24-175

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement
Removal
NOTE:
If replacing the side curtain airbag deployment, refer to Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see
page 24-167) for a complete list of other parts that must also be replaced.
Review the interior t r i m replacement procedure before doing repair or service (see page 20-78).
Removal of the side curtain airbag must be done according to Precaution and Procedures (see page 24-21).
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-94), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.
2. Remove the C-pillar t r i m (see page 20-86).
3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) f r o m the side curtain airbags.
A
Left side shown; right side is similar.
24-176
4. Remove the headliner (see page 20-107).

5. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts (A) f r o m the bracket. Detach the clips (B, C), then remove the side curtain airbag (D).
Fastener Locations
A ^ : Bolt, 17
(Discard)
BD>:Clip,7
.
Ct>:Clip,2
Left side s h o w n ; right side is similar.
(cont'd)
24-177

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
Installation
NOTE:
If replacing the side curtain airbag d e p l o y m e n t refer to Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see
page 24-167) for a complete list of other parts that must also be replaced.
Installation of the side curtain airbag must be done according to the Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-21).
If the airbag is frayed, or has any other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an airbag.
W h e n you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and that it is not caught between the inflator bracket by the
bracket bolts.
Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly. Otherwise the airbag could incorrectly
deploy, and cause damage or injuries.
If there is any damage to the side curtain airbag, do not try to repair it. Replace any damaged side curtain airbag.
24-178
4
1. Place the side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof, and fit its clips (A, B) into the holes in the body. Tighten
the side curtain airbag m o u n t i n g bolts (C) to the specified torque.
Fastener Locations
A O : Clip, 7
BD>: Clip, 2
: Bolt, 17
(Discard)
Left side s h o w n ; right side is similar.
(cont'd)
24-179

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
2. Connect the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) to the side curtain airbags.
Left side shown; right side is similar.
3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-94).

4. Connect the HDS, and clear the DTCs (see page 24-32).
5. After installing the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal. If any clips are stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar t r i m overlap (see page 24-169).
24-180
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal

Deployment Tool 07HAZ-SG00500
Before s c r a p p i n g a n y a i r b a g s , s i d e a i r b a g s , s i d e curtain
a i r b a g s , o r s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r s ( i n c l u d i n g t h o s e in a
w h o l e v e h i c l e to be s c r a p p e d ) , the part(s) m u s t be
d e p l o y e d . If the v e h i c l e is still w i t h i n t h e w a r r a n t y
p e r i o d , t h e H o n d a District Parts a n d S e r v i c e M a n a g e r
m u s t g i v e a p p r o v a l and/or s p e c i a l instruction before
d e p l o y i n g t h e part(s). O n l y after the part(s) h a v e b e e n
d e p l o y e d (as t h e r e s u l t of v e h i c l e c o l l i s i o n , for e x a m p l e ) ,
c a n t h e y be s c r a p p e d . If the parts a p p e a r intact (not
d e p l o y e d ) , treat t h e m w i t h e x t r e m e c a u t i o n . F o l l o w this
procedure.
Driver's Airbag
4. R e m o v e the a c c e s s p a n e l (A) f r o m t h e s t e e r i n g w h e e l
t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (B)
from the cable reel.
Deploying Airbags in the Vehicle

If a n S R S e q u i p p e d v e h i c l e is to be entirely s c r a p p e d , its
a i r b a g s , s i d e a i r b a g s , s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g s , a n d s e a t belt
t e n s i o n e r s s h o u l d be d e p l o y e d w h i l e still in the v e h i c l e .
T h e s e parts s h o u l d not be c o n s i d e r e d a s s a l v a g e a b l e
parts a n d s h o u l d n e v e r be installed in a n o t h e r v e h i c l e .
1. T u r n the ignition s w i t c h to L O C K (0). Do the battery
terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-94),
t h e n w a i t at l e a s t 3 m i n u t e s before starting w o r k .
2. C o n f i r m that e a c h a i r b a g , s i d e a i r b a g , s i d e curtain

5. R e m o v e t h e p a s s e n g e r ' s tray (see p a g e 2 0 - 1 2 6 ) , t h e n
r e m o v e the c o n n e c t o r clip. D i s c o n n e c t the front
p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g 4 P c o n n e c t o r (A) f r o m t h e
a i r b a g , or s e a t belt t e n s i o n e r is s e c u r e l y m o u n t e d .
3. C o n f i r m that t h e d e p l o y m e n t tool is functioning
p r o p e r l y by f o l l o w i n g the c h e c k p r o c e d u r e o n the tool
label.
(cont'd)
24-181

Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd)
Side Airbag
Seat Belt Tensioner
6. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) f r o m the

floor wire harness.
8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)

f r o m the seat belt tensioner. Pull the seat belt out all
the w a y and cut it.
Side Curtain Airbag

7. Disconnect the floor w i r e harness 2P connector (A)
f r o m the side curtain airbag.
24-182
9. Cut off each connector, and strip the ends of the wires.
Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and
clip an alligator clip (A) f r o m the deployment tool to
each pair.
NOTE:
Place the deployment tool at least 30 ft (10 m) away
f r o m the vehicle.
The driver's and front passenger's airbags have
dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike colored
wires together, and clip an alligator clip to each
pair.
10. Connect a 12 V to the tool.

If the green light on the tool comes o n , the igniter
circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
component. Go to Disposal of Damaged
Components.
If the red light on the tool comes o n , the component
is ready to be deployed.
11. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and
tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly
audible and visible: A loud noise and rapid inflation of
the bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the components deploy and the green light on the
tool comes o n , continue w i t h this procedure.
If a component does not deploy, and the green light
comes O N , its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of
Damaged Components.
During deployment, the airbags can become hot
enough to burn y o u . Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbags.
12. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be
reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it
securely. Dispose of the deployed airbag according to
your local regulations.
07HAZ-SG00500
(cont'd)
24-183

Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd)
Deploying Components Out of the Vehicle
Disposal of Damaged Components
If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed f r o m a

scrapped vehicle, or has been f o u n d defective or
damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be
deployed as follows:
1. If installed in a vehicle, f o l l o w the removal procedure

for the driver's airbag (see page 24-170), front
passenger's airbag (see page 24-171), side airbag (see
page 24-174), side curtain airbag (see page 24-176),
and seat belt tensioner (see page 24-4).
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping,
and twisting together the t w o inflator wires.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags
have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the
individual inflators. Twist the like colored wires
together.
3. Package the component in exactly the same
packaging that the new replacement part came in.
1. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning

properly by following the check procedure Deploying
Airbags in the Vehicle on the tool label.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat g r o u n d ,
at least 30 ft(10 m) f r o m any obstacles or people.
3. Follow steps 9 through 12 of the in-vehicle
deployment procedure.
NOTE: The driver's and f r o n t passenger's airbags
have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike colored
wires together, and clip an alligator clip t o each pair.
4. Mark the outside of the box DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT

DEPLOYED, DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED, DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED, or DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER
NOT DEPLOYED so it does not get confused w i t h your
parts stock.
5. Contact your Honda District Parts and Service
Manager for instructions on h o w and where to return
it for disposal.
Deployment Tool Check

1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector
handles on the tool.
2. Then connect the red lead to the positive battery post
and the black lead to the negative battery post.
3. Push the operation switch: The green light should
come o n , indicating that the tool is operating properly
and is ready for use. If the red light stays o n , the tool is
faulty, and another one must be used for the
procedure.
4. Disconnect the tool clips and connectors f r o m the
protector handles and the battery.
24-184
Cable Reel Replacement

Removal
1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight
ahead.
7. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector

(A) f r o m the cable reel 4P connector (B), then
disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P
connector (C) f r o m the cable reel (D).

starting work.
3. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-170).
4. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the cable reel, then
remove the steering wheel bolt (B).
B
8. Release the lock tab (A) under the cable reel connector
w i t h a 90 hook shaped tool (B). Slide the tool below
the cable reel connector just above the lock tab.
Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the cable reel
off the c o l u m n .
5. Confirm that the front wheels point straight ahead,

then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel
puller (see step 5 on page 17-7). Do not tap on the
steering wheel or steering c o l u m n shaft w h e n
removing the steering wheel.
6. Remove the column cover, (see page 20-130)
(cont'd)
24-185

Cable Reel Replacement (cont'd)
Installation
1. Before installing the steering w h e e l , align the front
wheels straight ahead.
2. If not already done, disconnect the negative cable
f r o m the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.
6. If necessary, center the cable reel (New replacement

cable reels come centered.). Do this by first rotating
the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise (about three turns) until the arrow
mark (A) on the cable reel label points straight up.
3. Set the turn signal canceling sleeve (A) so that the

projections (B) are aligned vertically.
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering

c o l u m n shaft. Then connect 20P connector (B) to the
cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to the
dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D).
5. Install the c o l u m n covers (see page 20-130).
24-186
7. Position the t w o tabs (A) of the t u r n signal canceling

sleeve (B) as s h o w n , and install the steering wheel on
t o the steering c o l u m n shaft, making sure the steering
wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel
and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not
tap on the steering wheel or steering c o l u m n shaft
w h e n installing the steering w h e e l .
-ft
8. install and torque a n e w steering wheel bolt (A), then

reconnect the connectors (B).
A
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
Replace.
11. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs (see page 24-31).
12. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system
operation:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator
should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the
steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the
SRS indicator does not come o n .
properly.
properly.
9. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-170).

page 22-94).
24-187

S R S Unit Replacement
Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the SRS unit (A) w i t h new TORX bolts (B) using
a TORX T30 bit.
2. Remove the center console t r i m f r o m both sides (see

page 20-115).
NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against

its bracket before torquing the TORX bolt.
3. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) and connector

B (39P) (see page 24-26). Remove the TORX bolts (C)
using a TORX T30 bit.
B
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
2. Using a TORX T30 bit, install the new TORX bolts (A),
then connect the connectors (B) to the SRS unit; push
t h e m into position until they click (see page 24-26).
A
4. Remove the TORX bolts (A) using a TORX T30 bit,

then pull out the SRS unit (B).
A

page 22-94).
4. Make sure the SRS unit has the latest software. If it
does not have the latest, update the software in the
SRS unit (see page 24-34).
5. Do the front passenger's w e i g h t sensor initialization
(see page 24-35).
6. Do the ODS unit operation check (see page 24-37).
7. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition
switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for
about 6 seconds and then go off.
8. Reinstall all removed parts.
24-188
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement

Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the side impact sensor (first) (A) w i t h a new

TORX bolt (B), then connect the floor w i r e harness 4P
connector (C) to the side impact sensor (first).
2. Remove the front seat assembly (see page 20-142).
3. Remove the B-pillar lower t r i m panel (see page 20-82).

f r o m the side impact sensor (first) (B).
B
Replace.

page 22-94).
24-31).
5. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (C), then
remove the side impact sensor (first).

switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on
for about 6 seconds and then go off.
5. Reinstall ail removed parts.
24-189

Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement
Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the side impact sensor (second) (A) w i t h a n e w

TORX bolt (B), then connect floor wire harness 4P
connector (C) to the side impact sensor (second).
2. Remove the rear side t r i m panel (see page 20-96).

f r o m the side impact sensor (second) (B).

page 22-94).
24-31).
remove the side impact sensor (second).

switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should c o m e on
24-190
Left Side Impact Sensor (Third) Replacement

Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the side impact sensor (third) (A) w i t h a new

TORX bolt (B), then connect the floor wire harness 2P
connector (C) to the side impact sensor (third).
2. Fold both the third row seat.

3. Open the storage box (A), then remove the
maintenance lid (B) by pushing d o w n on access
handle.
Replace.

page 22-94).
3. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs (see page
24-31).
f

f r o m the side impact sensor (third) (B).
A

remove the side impact sensor (third).
24-191

Right Side Impact Sensor (Third) Replacement
Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the side impact sensor (third) (A) w i t h a new

TORX bolt (B), then connect the floor wire harness 2P
connector (C) to the side impact sensor (third).
2. Remove the cargo floor box (see page 20-95).

f r o m the side impact sensor (third) (B).
B

page 22-94).
remove the side impact sensor (third).

24-31).
24-192
Rear Safing Sensor Replacement

Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the rear safing sensor (A) w i t h a new TORX bolt

(B) , then connect the floor w i r e harness 2P connector
(C) to the rear safing sensor.
2. Remove the second r o w seat, both side (see page

20-163).
3. Remove the third row seat, both side (see page
20-181).
4. Pull out the carpet as needed.

f r o m the rear safing sensor (B).
A
Replace.

page 22-94).
24-31).
remove the rear safing sensor.
5. Install all removed parts.
24-193

Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement
Removal
NOTE:
Removal of the front passenger's w e i g h t sensors must
be done according to Precautions and Procedures (see
page 24-21).
The front passenger's w e i g h t sensors are part of the
seat rail and must be replaced as an assembly.
starting work.
2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly (see
page 20-142).
3. Remove the front seat cushion cover/pad (see page
20-159).
4. Remove the bolts (A) f r o m the seat cushion frame (B),
then pull up the front side of the seat cushion frame.
24-194
5. W i t h an assistant holding the seat cushion frame (A),

remove the nuts (B) f r o m the seat frame (C).
6. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness 2P

connectors f r o m the front passenger's weight sensor
2P connectors (A).
With power seat
Installation
NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are
not pinched or interfering w i t h other parts.
1. Install and torque the new front passenger's w e i g h t
sensors (A) w i t h new TORX bolts (B) under the seat
slide/up-down adjuster (C), then install the seat foot
brackets (D) w i t h new nuts (E).
W i t h p o w e r seat
With manual seat
7. Remove the nuts (B) f r o m the seat foot brackets (C),

then using a TORX T27 bit, remove the
tamper-resistant TORX bolts (D) that attach the seat
slide/up-down adjusters (E) to the w e i g h t sensors (F)
2. Reconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness 2P
connectors to the front passenger's w e i g h t sensor 2P
connectors (F).
(cont'd)
24-195

Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
3. W i t h an assistant holding the seat cushion frame (A),
install the seat frame (B) w i t h the mounting nuts (C).
4. Install the seat cushion frame (A) w i t h the m o u n t i n g

bolts (B).
B
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 72 Ibfft)
C
42 N-m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)
5. Reinstall the front seat cushion cover/pad (see page

20-159).
6. Reinstall the front passenger's seat (see page 20-142).
page 22-94).
24-31).
9. Do the front passenger's w e i g h t sensor initialization
(see page 24-35).
switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should c o m e o n
24-196
ODS Unit Replacement

Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Place the ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten

the t w o screws (B), and connect the ODS unit harness
18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the
ODS unit. Reinstall the cover (E).
2. Remove the passenger's seat assembly (see page

20-142).
3. Pull out the seat-back cover (see page 20-153)
4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the ODS unit
18P connector (B) and sensor connectors (C) f r o m the
ODS unit (D).
Replace.

removal (see page 20-153).
3. Install the seat assembly (see page 20-142).
page 22-94).
5. Remove the t w o screws (E) and the ODS unit.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make

sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
24-31).
8. After installing the ODS unit, confirm proper system
then go off.
24-197

Front Impact Sensor Replacement
Removal
Installation

starting work.
1. Install the front impact sensor w i t h a new TORX bolt

(A), then connect the engine compartment wire
harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor
(C).
2. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-224).

3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (A) f r o m the front impact sensor(B).

page 22-94).
remove the front impact sensor.

24-31).
24-198
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement

Removal (Power Seat)
Installation (Power Seat)
NOTE:
NOTE:
Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be

done according to Precautions and Procedures (see
page 24-21).
Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not

Do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do not
connect the battery cable while installing the driver's
seat position sensor.

connect the battery cable while removing the driver's
1. Raise the seat all the w a y up.
2. Remove the driver's seat assembly (see page 20-142).
1. install the driver's seat position sensor w i t h a new nut

(A), then connect the driver's seat wire harness 2P
connector (B) to the driver's seat position sensor (C).
3. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P

connector (A) f r o m the driver's seat position sensor
(B).
2. Reinstall the driver's seat assembly (see page 20-142).

page 22-94).
4. Remove the nut (C), then remove the driver's seat
position sensor.

24-31).
5. Check the operation of the driver's seat position
sensor w i t h the HDS (see page 24-38).
(cont'd)
24-199

Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Removal (Manual Seat)
Installation (Manual Seat)
NOTE:
NOTE:
Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be

done according to Precautions and Procedures (see
page 24-21).
Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not


connect the battery cable w h i l e removing the driver's
1. Raise the seat all the w a y up.
2. Remove the driver's seat assembly (see page 20-142).
3. Disconnect the driver's seat w i r e harness 2P
connector (A) f r o m the driver's seat position sensor
(B).

connect the battery cable while installing the driver's
1. Install the driver's seat position sensor w i t h a new
TORX bolt (A), then connect the seat position sensor
harness 2P connector (B) to the driver's seat position
sensor (C).
A
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

Replace.
2. Reinstall the driver's seat assembly (see page 20-142).
remove the driver's seat position sensor.

page 22-94).
24-31).
5. Check the operation of the driver's seat position
sensor w i t h the HDS (see page 24-38).
24-200
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test/Replacement

1. Remove these items;
With navigation display unit (see page 23-293)
With audio-HVAC display unit (see page 23-126)
2. Remove the screws (A) and the passenger's airbag
cutoff indicator (B) f r o m display unit.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3

terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity,
replace the bulb (C).
4. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.
24-201
" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under

license from America Honda Motor Co., Inc. License Agreement AH220 ."

2009-2010 Honda Pilot Service Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2009-2010 Honda Pilot Service Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

INTRODUCTION

i How to Use This Manual

Each section includes:

Bolt torques and thread sizes.

Fuel and Emissions

Y o u will find important safety information in a variety of forms

Safety Labels on the vehicle.

Y o u C A N be H U R T if you don't follow

how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

As sections with * include S R S components;

2009-10 Pilot Vol.1

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Vehicle Identification Number

500001 - : Canada models

INTERIOR COLOR CODE

Bali Blue Pearl

Chassis and Paint Codes - '10 Model

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

and Canadian Motor Vehicle

INTERIOR COLOR CODE

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Under-hood Emission Control Label

Emission Group Identification

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

ARB: LEV II ULEV LDT2

2WU-TWC, TWC. 2 A / F S E N S O R , 2 H 0 2 S . E GR, SFI

HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS : 2010MY

U5ADE0 im T1ST1NQ OF THIS VEHtCU MUST BE CONDUCTED ON A FOUR-WHEEL OHfVE SPECS

2. Raise the lift a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle gently

4. Position the safety stands under the support points

Wheel Lift Equipment The t o w truck uses t w o pivoting

Sling-type Equipment The t o w truck uses metal cables

2. Remove the detachable t o w i n g hook f r o m the tool kit

Precautions for Variable Torque

To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are

This vehicle is equipped with the Variable Torque

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels

Standards and Service Limits

14.0 m m (0.55 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)

120.95-121.05 m m (4.762-4.766 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)

35.155 m m (1.3841 in)

36.537 m m (1.4385 in)

36.512 m m (1.4375 in)

0.20-0.24 m m (0.008-0.009 in)

5.455 mm (0.2148 in)

0.046 mm (0.0018 in)

0.018-0.056 mm (0.0007-0.0022 in)

0.056 mm (0.0022 in)

0.015-0.046 m m (0.0006-0.0018 in)

0.046 mm (0.0018 in)

0.018-0.047 mm (0.0007-0.0019 in)

0.047 mm (0.0019 in)

Rod/main journal taper

0.019 mm (0.0007 in)

0.45 mm (0.018 in)

0.010 mm (0.0004 in)

Standards and Service Limits

Inner-to-outer rotor clearance